This is a modern-English version of Encyclopaedia Britannica, 11th Edition, "Latin Language" to "Lefebvre, François-Joseph": Volume 16, Slice 3, originally written by Various. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

Transcriber’s note: A few typographical errors have been corrected. They appear in the text like this, and the explanation will appear when the mouse pointer is moved over the marked passage. Sections in Greek will yield a transliteration when the pointer is moved over them, and words using diacritic characters in the Latin Extended Additional block, which may not display in some fonts or browsers, will display an unaccented version.

Links to other EB articles: Links to articles residing in other EB volumes will be made available when the respective volumes are introduced online.
 

THE ENCYCLOPÆDIA BRITANNICA

A DICTIONARY OF ARTS, SCIENCES, LITERATURE AND GENERAL INFORMATION

ELEVENTH EDITION

 

VOLUME XVI SLICE III

Latin Language to Lefebvre, François-Joseph


 

Articles in This Slice

Articles in This Section

LATIN LANGUAGE LAZARITES
LATIN LITERATURE LAZARUS (New Testament)
LATINUS LAZARUS, EMMA
LATITUDE LAZARUS, HENRY
LATIUM LAZARUS, MORITZ
LATONA LAZARUS, ST, ORDER OF
LATOUCHE, HYACINTHE JOSEPH DE LEA, HENRY CHARLES
LA TOUR, MAURICE QUENTIN DE LEAD (South Dakota, U.S.A.)
LA TOUR D’AUVERGNE, THÉOPHILE MALO LEAD (chemical element)
LATREILLE, PIERRE ANDRÉ LEADER, BENJAMIN WILLIAMS
LA TRÉMOILLE LEADHILLITE
LATROBE, CHARLES JOSEPH LEADHILLS
LATTEN LEAD POISONING
LATTICE LEAF PLANT LEADVILLE
LATUDE, JEAN HENRI LEAF
LATUKA LEAF-INSECT
LAUBAN LEAGUE
LAUBE, HEINRICH LEAKE, WILLIAM MARTIN
L’AUBESPINE LEAMINGTON
LAUCHSTÄDT LÉANDRE, CHARLES LUCIEN
LAUD, WILLIAM LEAP-YEAR
LAUD LEAR, EDWARD
LAUDANUM LEASE
LAUDER, SIR THOMAS DICK LEATHER
LAUDER, WILLIAM LEATHER, ARTIFICIAL
LAUDER (burgh of Scotland) LEATHERHEAD
LAUDERDALE, JOHN MAITLAND LEATHES, STANLEY
LAUENBURG LEAVEN
LAUFF, JOSEF LEAVENWORTH
LAUGHTER LEBANON (middle east)
LAUMONT, FRANÇOIS PIERRE GILLET DE LEBANON (Illinois, U.S.A.)
LAUNCESTON (Cornwall, England) LEBANON (Pennsylvania, U.S.A.)
LAUNCESTON (Tasmania) LE BARGY, CHARLES GUSTAVE AUGUSTE
LAUNCH LE BEAU, CHARLES
LAUNDRY LEBEAU, JOSEPH
LA UNION (Salvador) LEBEL, JEAN
LA UNION (Spain) LEBER, JEAN MICHEL CONSTANT
LAURAHÜTTE LEBEUF, JEAN
LAUREATE LE BLANC, NICOLAS
LAUREL LE BLANC
LAURENS, HENRY LEBŒUF, EDMOND
LAURENT, FRANÇOIS LE BON, JOSEPH
LAURENTINA, VIA LEBRIJA
LAURENTIUS, PAUL LE BRUN, CHARLES
LAURIA ROGER DE LEBRUN, CHARLES FRANÇOIS
LAURIA (Italy) LEBRUN, PIERRE ANTOINE
LAURIER, SIR WILFRID LEBRUN, PONCE DENIS ÉCOUCHARD
LAURISTON, JACQUES ALEXANDRE BERNARD LAW LE CARON, HENRI
LAURIUM (Greece) LE CATEAU
LAURIUM (Michigan, U.S.A.) LECCE
LAURUSTINUS LECCO
LAURVIK LECH
LAUSANNE LE CHAMBON
LAUTREC, ODET DE FOIX LE CHAPELIER, ISAAC RENÉ GUY
LAUZUN, ANTONIN NOMPAR DE CAUMONT LECHLER, GOTTHARD VICTOR
LAVA LECKY, WILLIAM EDWARD HARTPOLE
LAVABO LE CLERC, JEAN
LAVAGNA LECOCQ, ALEXANDRE CHARLES
LAVAL, ANDRÉ DE, SEIGNEUR DE LOHÉAC LECOINTE-PUYRAVEAU, MICHEL MATHIEU
LAVAL (France) LE CONTE, JOSEPH
LA VALLIÈRE, LOUISE FRANÇOISE DE LECONTE DE LISLE, CHARLES MARIE RENÉ
LAVATER, JOHANN KASPAR LE COQ, ROBERT
LAVAUR LECOUVREUR, ADRIENNE
LAVEDAN, HENRI LÉON ÉMILE LE CREUSOT
LAVELEYE, ÉMILE LOUIS VICTOR DE LECTERN
LAVENDER LECTION, LECTIONARY
LAVERDY, CLÉMENT CHARLES FRANÇOIS DE LECTISTERNIUM
LAVERNA LECTOR
LAVERY, JOHN LECTOURE
LAVIGERIE, CHARLES MARTIAL ALLEMAND LEDA
LA VILLEMARQUÉ, THÉODORE CLAUDE HENRI LE DAIM, OLIVIER
LAVINIUM LEDBURY
LAVISSE, ERNEST LEDGER
LAVOISIER, ANTOINE LAURENT LEDOCHOWSKI, MIECISLAUS JOHANN
LA VOISIN LEDRU-ROLLIN, ALEXANDRE AUGUSTE
LAW, JOHN LEDYARD, JOHN
LAW, WILLIAM LEE, ANN
LAW LEE, ARTHUR
LAWES, HENRY LEE, FITZHUGH
LAWES, SIR JOHN BENNET LEE, GEORGE ALEXANDER
LAW MERCHANT LEE, HENRY
LAWN LEE, JAMES PRINCE
LAWN-TENNIS LEE, NATHANIEL
LAWRENCE, ST LEE, RICHARD HENRY
LAWRENCE, AMOS (American merchant) LEE, ROBERT EDWARD
LAWRENCE, AMOS ADAMS (son of Amos Lawrence) LEE ROWLAND
LAWRENCE, GEORGE ALFRED LEE, SIDNEY
LAWRENCE, SIR HENRY MONTGOMERY LEE, SOPHIA
LAWRENCE, JOHN LAIRD MAIR LAWRENCE LEE, STEPHEN DILL
LAWRENCE, STRINGER LEE (Massachusetts, U.S.A.)
LAWRENCE, SIR THOMAS LEE (shelter or sediment)
LAWRENCE (Kansas, U.S.A.) LEECH, JOHN
LAWRENCE (Massachusetts, U.S.A.) LEECH (Chaetopod worms)
LAWRENCEBURG LEEDS, THOMAS OSBORNE
LAWSON, CECIL GORDON LEEDS (England)
LAWSON, SIR JOHN LEEK (English town)
LAWSON, SIR WILFRID LEEK (plant)
LAY LEER
LAYA, JEAN LOUIS LEEUWARDEN
LAYAMON LEEUWENHOEK, ANTHONY VAN
LAYARD, SIR AUSTEN HENRY LEEWARD ISLANDS
LAYMEN, HOUSES OF LE FANU, JOSEPH SHERIDAN
LAYNEZ, DIEGO LEFEBVRE, PIERRE FRANÇOIS JOSEPH
LAZAR  

244

244

LATIN LANGUAGE. 1. Earliest Records of its Area.—Latin was the language spoken in Rome and in the plain of Latium in the 6th or 7th century B.C.—the earliest period from which we have any contemporary record of its existence. But it is as yet impossible to determine either, on the one hand, whether the archaic inscription of Praeneste (see below), which is assigned with great probability to that epoch, represents exactly the language then spoken in Rome; or, on the other, over how much larger an area of the Italian peninsula, or even of the lands to the north and west, the same language may at that date have extended. In the 5th century B.C. we find its limits within the peninsula fixed on the north-west and south-west by Etruscan (see Etruria: Language); on the east, south-east, and probably north and north-east, by Safine (Sabine) dialects (of the Marsi, Paeligni, Samnites, Sabini and Picenum, qq.v.); but on the north we have no direct record of Sabine speech, nor of any non-Latinian tongue nearer than Tuder and Asculum or earlier than the 4th century B.C. (see Umbria, Iguvium, Picenum). We know however, both from tradition and from the archaeological data, that the Safine tribes were in the 5th century B.C. migrating, or at least sending off swarms of their younger folk, farther and farther southward into the peninsula. Of the languages they were then displacing we have no explicit record save in the case of Etruscan in Campania, but it may be reasonably inferred from the evidence of place-names and tribal names, combined with that of the Faliscan inscriptions, that before the Safine invasion some idiom, not remote from Latin, was spoken by the pre-Etruscan tribes down the length of the west coast (see Falisci; Volsci; also Rome: History; Liguria; Siculi).

LATIN LANGUAGE. 1. Earliest Records of its Area.—Latin was the language spoken in Rome and the surrounding area of Latium around the 6th or 7th century BCE—the earliest time we have any contemporary record of it. However, it’s still unclear, on one hand, whether the ancient inscription from Praeneste (see below), which is likely from that time, accurately reflects the language spoken in Rome at that point; or, on the other hand, how much further across the Italian peninsula, or even the lands to the north and west, this language may have been spoken at that time. By the 5th century BCE, we know that its limits within the peninsula were defined on the northwest and southwest by Etruscan (see Etruria: Language); on the east, southeast, and probably to the north and northeast, by Safine (Sabine) dialects (of the Marsi, Paeligni, Samnites, Sabini, and Picenum, qq.v.); but to the north, we have no direct evidence of Sabine speech or any non-Latin language closer than Tuder and Asculum, or earlier than the 4th century BCE (see Umbria, Iguvium, Picenum). However, from both tradition and archaeological evidence, we know that the Safine tribes were during the 5th century BCE migrating, or at least sending many of their younger people, further south into the peninsula. Of the languages they were displacing, we have no clear records other than Etruscan in Campania, but it can be reasonably inferred from place-names and tribal names, along with Faliscan inscriptions, that before the Safine invasion some language not far from Latin was spoken by pre-Etruscan tribes along the western coast (see Falisci; Volsci; also Rome: History; Liguria; Siculi).

2. Earliest Roman Inscriptions.—At Rome, at all events, it is clear from the unwavering voice of tradition that Latin was spoken from the beginning of the city. Of the earliest Latin inscriptions found in Rome which were known in 1909, the oldest, the so-called “Forum inscription,” can hardly be referred with confidence to an earlier century than the 5th; the later, the well-known Duenos (= later Latin bonus) inscription, certainly belongs to the 4th; both of these are briefly described below (§§ 40, 41). At this date we have probably the period of the narrowest extension of Latin; non-Latin idioms were spoken in Etruria, Umbria, Picenum and in the Marsian and Volscian hills. But almost directly the area begins to expand again, and after the war with Pyrrhus the Roman arms had planted the language of Rome in her military colonies throughout the peninsula. When we come to the 3rd century B.C. the Latin inscriptions begin to be more numerous, and in them (e.g. the oldest epitaphs of the Scipio family) the language is very little removed from what it was in the time of Plautus.

2. Earliest Roman Inscriptions.—In Rome, it's clear from the consistent historical accounts that Latin was spoken from the city's early days. Of the earliest Latin inscriptions discovered in Rome known by 1909, the oldest, referred to as the “Forum inscription,” can hardly be confidently dated to any earlier than the 5th century; the other, the well-known Duenos (= later Latin bonus) inscription, definitely belongs to the 4th century; both are briefly described below (§§ 40, 41). At this time, Latin was likely spoken in a very limited area; non-Latin languages were used in Etruria, Umbria, Picenum, and the Marsian and Volscian hills. However, soon after, the geographic spread of Latin began to grow again, and following the war with Pyrrhus, Roman forces established the language in their military colonies throughout the peninsula. By the 3rd century B.C., Latin inscriptions become more frequent, and in them (e.g. the oldest epitaphs of the Scipio family), the language is very close to what it was during the time of Plautus.

3. The Italic Group of Languages.—For the characteristics and affinities of the dialects that have just been mentioned, see the article Italy: Ancient Languages and Peoples, and to the separate articles on the tribes. Here it is well to point out that the only one of these languages which is not akin to Latin is Etruscan; on the other hand, the only one very closely resembling Latin is Faliscan, which with it forms what we may call the Latinian dialect of the Italic group of the Indo-European family of languages. Since, however, we have a far more complete knowledge of Latin than of any other member of the Italic group, this is the most convenient place in which to state briefly the very little that can be said as yet to have been ascertained as to the general relations of Italic to its sister groups. Here, as in many kindred questions, the work of Paul Kretschmer of Vienna (Einleitung in die Geschichte der griechischen Sprache, Göttingen, 1896) marked an important epoch in the historical aspects of linguistic study, as the first scientific attempt to interpret critically the different kinds of evidence which the Indo-European languages give us, not in vocabulary merely, but in phonology, morphology, and especially in their mutual borrowings, and to combine it with the non-linguistic data of tradition and archaeology. A certain number of the results so obtained have met with general acceptance and may be briefly treated here. It is, however, extremely dangerous to draw merely from linguistic kinship deductions as to racial identity, or even as to an original contiguity of habitation. Close resemblances in any two languages, especially those in their inner structure (morphology), may be due to identity of race, or to long neighbourhood in the earliest period of their development; but they may also be caused by temporary neighbourhood (for a longer or shorter period), brought about by migrations at a later epoch (or epochs). A particular change in sound or usage may spread over a whole chain of dialects and be in the end exhibited alike by them all, although the time at which it first began was long after their special and distinctive characteristics had become clearly marked. For example, the limitation of the word-accent to the last three syllables of a word in Latin and Oscan (see below)—a phenomenon which has left deep marks on all the Romance languages—demonstrably grew up between the 5th and 2nd centuries B.C.; and it is a permissible conjecture that it started from the influence of the Greek colonies in Italy (especially Cumae and Naples), in whose language the same limitation (although with an accent whose actual character was probably more largely musical) had been established some centuries sooner.

3. The Italic Group of Languages.—For the features and connections of the dialects mentioned earlier, see the article Italy: Ancient Languages and Peoples, as well as the specific articles on the tribes. It's important to note that the only language in this group that isn't related to Latin is Etruscan; on the other hand, the language that closely resembles Latin is Faliscan, which, together with Latin, forms what we can call the Latin dialect of the Italic group within the Indo-European language family. However, since we know much more about Latin than any other language in the Italic group, this is a convenient place to briefly mention the very few things we have learned about the general relationships of Italic to its related groups. Here, as in many similar issues, the work of Paul Kretschmer of Vienna (Einleitung in die Geschichte der griechischen Sprache, Göttingen, 1896) was a significant milestone in the historical study of languages, being the first scientific effort to critically analyze the various kinds of evidence the Indo-European languages provide us with, not just in vocabulary but also in phonology, morphology, and especially in their mutual borrowings, and to combine this with non-linguistic information from tradition and archaeology. Some of the results from this research have been widely accepted and can be briefly discussed here. However, it is very risky to draw conclusions about racial identity or even original geographical connections solely from linguistic similarities. Close resemblances in any two languages, particularly in their inner structure (morphology), might result from shared race or long periods of neighboring development; but they might also arise from temporary proximity (for varying lengths of time) caused by migrations at later periods. A specific change in sound or usage may spread throughout a whole series of dialects and eventually be seen in all of them, even if the change began long after their unique characteristics had become clear. For example, the restriction of word stress to the last three syllables in Latin and Oscan (see below)—a phenomenon that has significantly influenced all Romance languages—clearly developed between the 5th and 2nd centuries BCE; and it is a reasonable guess that this influence stemmed from the Greek colonies in Italy (especially Cumae and Naples), where a similar limitation (though the actual nature of the accent was likely more musical) had already been established centuries earlier.

4. Position of the Italic Group.—The Italic group, then, when compared with the other seven main “families” of Indo-European 245 speech, in respect of their most significant differences, ranges itself thus:

4. Position of the Italic Group.—The Italic group, when compared to the other seven main “families” of Indo-European 245 languages, in terms of their most important differences, is classified as follows:

(i.) Back-palatal and Velar Sounds.—In point of its treatment of the Indo-European back-palatal and velar sounds, it belongs to the western or centum group, the name of which is, of course, taken from Latin; that is to say, like German, Celtic and Greek, it did not sibilate original k and g, which in Indo-Iranian, Armenian, Slavonic and Albanian have been converted into various types of sibilants (Ind.-Eur.* kṃtom = Lat. centum, Gr. (ἑ)-κατόν, Welsh cant, Eng. hund-(red), but Sans. ṡatam, Zend satƏm); but, on the other hand, in company with just the same three western groups, and in contrast to the eastern, the Italic languages labialized the original velars (Ind.-Eur. * qod = Lat. quod, Osc. pod, Gr. ποδ-(απός), Welsh pwy, Eng. what, but Sans. kás, “who?”).

(i.) Back-palatal and Velar Sounds.—In terms of its treatment of the Indo-European back-palatal and velar sounds, it falls into the western or centum group, a name derived from Latin. This means that, like German, Celtic, and Greek, it did not sibilate the original k and g, which in Indo-Iranian, Armenian, Slavonic, and Albanian have transformed into various types of sibilants (Ind.-Eur. *kṃtom = Lat. centum, Gr. (ἑ)-hundred, Welsh cant, Eng. hund-(red), but Sans. ṡatam, Zend satƏm); on the other hand, alongside the same three western groups and in contrast to the eastern languages, the Italic languages labialized the original velars (Ind.-Eur. *qod = Lat. quod, Osc. pod, Gr. foot (of a bed), Welsh pwy, Eng. what, but Sans. kás, “who?”).

(ii.) Indo-European Aspirates.—Like Greek and Sanskrit, but in contrast to all the other groups (even to Zend and Armenian), the Italic group largely preserves a distinction between the Indo-European mediae aspiratae and mediae (e.g. between Ind.-Eur. dh and d, the former when initial becoming initially regularly Lat. f as in Lat. fēc-ī [cf. Umb. feia, “faciat”], beside Gr. ἔ-θηκ-α [cf. Sans. da-dhā-ti, “he places”], the latter simply d as in domus, Gr. δόμος). But the aspiratae, even where thus distinctly treated in Italic, became fricatives, not pure aspirates, a character which they only retained in Greek and Sanskrit.

(ii.) Indo-European Aspirates.—Similar to Greek and Sanskrit, but different from all the other language groups (even Zend and Armenian), the Italic group mostly keeps a clear distinction between the Indo-European mediae aspiratae and mediae (for example, between Ind.-Eur. dh and d, where the first, when it appears at the beginning of a word, regularly becomes Latin f, as in Latin fēc-ī [see Umb. feia, “faciat”], compared to Greek ἔ-θηκ-α [see Sans. da-dhā-ti, “he places”], while the second is simply d, as in domus, Greek structure). However, the aspiratae, even though they are treated distinctly in Italic, turned into fricatives, not pure aspirates, a quality they only maintained in Greek and Sanskrit.

(iii.) Indo-European ŏ.—With Greek and Celtic, Latin preserved the Indo-European ŏ, which in the more northerly groups (Germanic, Balto-Slavonic), and also in Indo-Iranian, and, curiously, in Messapian, was confused with ă. The name for olive-oil, which spread with the use of this commodity from Greek (ἔλαιϝον) to Italic speakers and thence to the north, becoming by regular changes (see below) in Latin first *ólaivom, then *óleivom, and then taken into Gothic and becoming alēv, leaving its parent form to change further (not later than 100 B.C.) in Latin to oleum, is a particularly important example, because (a) of the chronological limits which are implied, however roughly, in the process just described, and (b) of the close association in time of the change of o to a with the earlier stages of the “sound-shifting” (of the Indo-European plosives and aspirates) in German; see Kretschmer, Einleit. p. 116, and the authorities he cites.

(iii.) Indo-European ŏ.—Like Greek and Celtic, Latin kept the Indo-European ŏ, which got mixed up with ă in the more northern groups (Germanic, Balto-Slavonic), as well as in Indo-Iranian, and interestingly, in Messapian. The term for olive oil, which spread along with this commodity from Greek (olive oil) to Italic speakers and then to the north, evolved through regular changes (see below) in Latin first to *ólaivom, then *óleivom, and was adopted into Gothic as alēv, allowing its parent form to continue evolving (by no later than 100 BCE) in Latin to oleum. This is a particularly notable example because (a) it implies chronological limits, even if roughly, in the described process, and (b) of the close timing of the change from o to a alongside the earlier stages of the “sound-shifting” (of the Indo-European plosives and aspirates) in German; see Kretschmer, Einleit. p. 116, and the sources he references.

(iv.) Accentuation.—One marked innovation common to the western groups as compared with what Greek and Sanskrit show to have been an earlier feature of the Indo-European parent speech was the development of a strong expiratory (sometimes called stress) accent upon the first syllable of all words. This appears early in the history of Italic, Celtic, Lettish (probably, and at a still later period) in Germanic, though at a period later than the beginning of the “sound-shifting.” This extinguished the complex system of Indo-European accentuation, which is directly reflected in Sanskrit, and was itself replaced in Latin and Oscan by another system already mentioned, but not in Latin till it had produced marked effects upon the language (e.g. the degradation of the vowels in compounds as in cōnficio from cón-facio, inclūdo from ín-claudo). This curious wave of accentual change (first pointed out by Dieterich, Kuhn’s Zeitschrift, i., and later by Thurneysen, Revue celtique, vi. 312, Rheinisches Museum, xliii. 349) needs and deserves to be more closely investigated from a chronological standpoint. At present it is not clear how far it was a really connected process in all the languages. (See further Kretschmer, op. cit. p. 115, K. Brugmann, Kurze vergleichende Grammatik (1902-1904), p. 57, and their citations, especially Meyer-Lübke, Die Betonung im Gallischen (1901).)

(iv.) Accentuation.—One significant change that was common among the western groups, compared to what Greek and Sanskrit show as earlier features of the Indo-European parent language, was the development of a strong breathing (sometimes called stress) accent on the first syllable of all words. This appeared early in the history of Italic, Celtic, Lettish (probably, and at a later time) in Germanic, though at a period after the beginning of the “sound-shifting.” This eliminated the complex system of Indo-European accentuation, which is directly reflected in Sanskrit, and was later replaced in Latin and Oscan by another system already mentioned, but not in Latin until it had significant effects on the language (e.g. the degradation of the vowels in compounds like cōnficio from cón-facio, inclūdo from ín-claudo). This interesting wave of accentual change (first noted by Dieterich, Kuhn’s Zeitschrift, i., and later by Thurneysen, Revue celtique, vi. 312, Rheinisches Museum, xliii. 349) needs and deserves more careful investigation from a chronological perspective. Currently, it is unclear how connected this process was across all the languages. (See further Kretschmer, op. cit. p. 115, K. Brugmann, Kurze vergleichende Grammatik (1902-1904), p. 57, and their citations, especially Meyer-Lübke, Die Betonung im Gallischen (1901).)

To these larger affinities may be added some important points in which the Italic group shows marked resemblances to other groups.

To these broader connections, we can add some key aspects where the Italic group clearly resembles other groups.

5. Italic and Celtic.—It is now universally admitted that the Celtic languages stand in a much closer relation than any other group to the Italic. It may even be doubted whether there was any real frontier-line at all between the two groups before the Etruscan invasion of Italy (see Etruria: Language; Liguria). The number of morphological innovations on the Indo-European system which the two groups share, and which are almost if not wholly peculiar to them, is particularly striking. Of these the chief are the following.

5. Italic and Celtic.—It's now widely accepted that the Celtic languages are much more closely related to the Italic languages than any other group. It's even questionable whether there was any real boundary between the two groups before the Etruscan invasion of Italy (see Etruria: Language; Liguria). The number of morphological changes in the Indo-European system that the two groups share, which are almost unique to them, is particularly noteworthy. The main ones are as follows.

(i.) Extension of the abstract-noun stems in -ti- (like Greek φάτις with Attic βάσις, &c.) by an -n- suffix, as in Lat. mentio (stem mentiōn-) = Ir. (er-)mitiu (stem miti-n-), contrasted with the same word without the n-suffix in Sans. mati-, Lat. mens, Ind.-Eur. *mṇ-ti-. A similar extension (shared also by Gothic) appears in Lat. iuventū-t-, O. Ir. óitiu (stem oiliūt-) beside the simple -tu- in nouns like senātus.

(i.) The extension of abstract noun stems ending in -ti- (like the Greek φάτις with Attic foundation, etc.) by adding an -n- suffix, as in Latin mentio (stem mentiōn-), equals Irish (er-)mitiu (stem miti-n-), compared to the same word without the n-suffix in Sanskrit mati-, Latin mens, and Indo-European *mṇ-ti-. A similar extension (also found in Gothic) appears in Latin iuventū-t-, Old Irish óitiu (stem oiliūt-) alongside the simple -tu- in nouns like senātus.

(ii.) Superlative formation in -is-ṃmo- as in Lat. aegerrimus for *aegr-isṃmos, Gallic Οὐξισάμη the name of a town meaning “the highest.”

(ii.) Superlative formation in -is-ṃmo- as in Lat. aegerrimus for *aegr-isṃmos, Gallic Οὐξισάμη the name of a town meaning “the highest.”

(iii.) Genitive singular of the o-stems (second declension) in -ī Lat. agri, O. Ir. (Ogam inscriptions) magi, “of a son.”

(iii.) Genitive singular of the o-stems (second declension) in -ī Lat. agri, O. Ir. (Ogam inscriptions) magi, “of a son.”

(iv.) Passive and deponent formation in -r, Lat. sequitur = Ir. sechedar, “he follows.” The originally active meaning of this curious -r suffix was first pointed out by Zimmer (Kuhn’s Zeitschrift, 1888, xxx. 224), who thus explained the use of the accusative pronouns with these “passive” forms in Celtic; Ir. -m-berar, “I am carried,” literally “folk carry me”; Umb. pir ferar, literally ignem feratur, though as pir is a neuter word (= Gr. πῦρ) this example was not so convincing. But within a twelvemonth of the appearance of Zimmer’s article, an Oscan inscription (Conway, Camb. Philol. Society’s Proceedings, 1890, p. 16, and Italic Dialects, p. 113) was discovered containing the phrase ůltiumam (iůvilam) sakrafỉr, “ultimam (imaginem) consecraverint” (or “ultima consecretur”) which demonstrated the nature of the suffix in Italic also. This originally active meaning of the -r form (in the third person singular passive) is the cause of the remarkable fondness for the “impersonal” use of the passive in Latin (e.g., itur in antiquam silvam, instead of eunt), which was naturally extended to all tenses of the passive (ventum est, &c.), so soon as its origin was forgotten. Fuller details of the development will be found in Conway, op. cit. p. 561, and the authorities there cited (very little is added by K. Brugmann, Kurze vergl. Gramm. 1904, p. 596).

(iv.) Passive and deponent formation in -r, Lat. sequitur = Ir. sechedar, “he follows.” The originally active meaning of this interesting -r suffix was first highlighted by Zimmer (Kuhn’s Zeitschrift, 1888, xxx. 224), who explained the use of the accusative pronouns with these “passive” forms in Celtic; Ir. -m-berar, “I am carried,” literally “people carry me”; Umb. pir ferar, literally ignem feratur, though since pir is a neuter word (= Gr. fire), this example wasn't as convincing. However, within a year of Zimmer’s article's publication, an Oscan inscription (Conway, Camb. Philol. Society’s Proceedings, 1890, p. 16, and Italic Dialects, p. 113) was found containing the phrase ůltiumam (iůvilam) sakrafỉr, “ultimam (imaginem) consecraverint” (or “ultima consecretur”) which showed the nature of the suffix in Italic as well. This originally active meaning of the -r form (in the third person singular passive) explains the notable preference for the “impersonal” use of the passive in Latin (e.g., itur in antiquam silvam, instead of eunt), which was naturally extended to all tenses of the passive (ventum est, etc.), as soon as its origin was forgotten. You can find more detailed information about the development in Conway, op. cit. p. 561, and the sources cited there (very little is added by K. Brugmann, Kurze vergl. Gramm. 1904, p. 596).

(v.) Formation of the perfect passive from the -to- past participle, Lat. monitus (est), &c., Ir. léic-the, “he was left,” ro-léiced, “he has been left.” In Latin the participle maintains its distinct adjectival character; in Irish (J. Strachan, Old Irish Paradigms, 1905, p. 50) it has sunk into a purely verbal form, just as the perfect participles in -us in Umbrian have been absorbed into the future perfect in -ust (entelust, “intenderit”; benust, “venerit”) with its impersonal passive or third plural active -us(s)so (probably standing for -ussor) as in benuso, “ventum erit” (or “venerint”).

(v.) Formation of the perfect passive from the -to- past participle, Lat. monitus (est), &c., Ir. léic-the, “he was left,” ro-léiced, “he has been left.” In Latin, the participle keeps its clear adjectival role; in Irish (J. Strachan, Old Irish Paradigms, 1905, p. 50) it has shifted into a purely verbal form, just like the perfect participles in -us in Umbrian have blended into the future perfect in -ust (entelust, “intenderit”; benust, “venerit”) with its impersonal passive or third plural active -us(s)so (probably representing -ussor) as in benuso, “ventum erit” (or “venerint”).

To these must be further added some striking peculiarities in phonology.

To these, we should also add some notable features in phonology.

(vi.) Assimilation of p to a q in a following syllable as in Lat. quinque = Ir. cóic, compared with Sans. pánca, Gr. πέντε, Eng. five, Ind.-Eur. *penqe.

(vi.) Assimilation of p to a q in a following syllable as in Lat. quinque = Ir. cóic, compared with Sans. pánca, Gr. five, Eng. five, Ind.-Eur. *penqe.

(vii.) Finally—and perhaps this parallelism is the most important of all from the historical standpoint—both Italic and Celtic are divided into two sub-families which differ, and differ in the same way, in their treatment of the Ind.-Eur. velar tenuis q. In both halves of each group it was labialized to some extent; in one half of each group it was labialized so far as to become p. This is the great line of cleavage (i.) between Latinian (Lat. quod, quandō, quinque; Falisc. cuando) and Osco-Umbrian, better called Safine (Osc. pod, Umb. panū- [for *pandō], Osc.-Umb. pompe-, “five,” in Osc. půmperias “nonae,” Umb. pumpeḓia-, “fifth day of the month”); and (ii.) between Goidelic (Gaelic) (O. Ir. cóic, “five,” maq, “son”; modern Irish and Scotch Mac as in MacPherson) and Brythonic (Britannic) (Welsh pump, “five,” Ap for map, as in Powel for Ap Howel).

(vii.) Finally—and perhaps this parallel is the most significant of all from a historical perspective—both Italic and Celtic are split into two sub-families that differ, and do so in the same way, regarding the Ind.-Eur. velar tenuis q. In both sections of each group, it was labialized to some degree; in one section of each group, it was labialized enough to become p. This is the major division (i.) between Latinian (Lat. quod, quandō, quinque; Falisc. cuando) and Osco-Umbrian, more accurately called Safine (Osc. pod, Umb. panū- [for *pandō], Osc.-Umb. pompe-, “five,” in Osc. půmperias “nonae,” Umb. pumpeḓia-, “fifth day of the month”); and (ii.) between Goidelic (Gaelic) (O. Ir. cóic, “five,” maq, “son”; modern Irish and Scottish Mac as in MacPherson) and Brythonic (Britannic) (Welsh pump, “five,” Ap for map, as in Powel for Ap Howel).

The same distinction appears elsewhere; Germanic belongs, broadly described, to the q-group, and Greek, broadly described, to the p-group. The ethnological bearing of the distinction within Italy is considered in the articles Sabini and Volsci; but the wider questions which the facts suggest have as yet been only scantily discussed; see the references for the “Sequanian” dialect of Gallic (in the inscription of Coligny, whose language preserves q) in the article Celts: Language.

The same distinction shows up in other places; Germanic generally belongs to the q-group, while Greek generally belongs to the p-group. The ethnological significance of this distinction within Italy is discussed in the articles Sabini and Volsci; however, the broader questions raised by the facts have only been lightly touched upon so far; for more information, see the references for the “Sequanian” dialect of Gaul (in the inscription of Coligny, which uses q) in the article Celts: Language.

From these primitive affinities we must clearly distinguish the numerous words taken into Latin from the Celts of north Italy within the historic period; for these see especially an interesting study by J. Zwicker, De vocabulis et rebus Gallicis sive Transpadanis apud Vergilium (Leipzig dissertation, 1905).

From these basic connections, we need to clearly separate the many words borrowed into Latin from the Celts in northern Italy during the historic period; for these, see especially an interesting study by J. Zwicker, De vocabulis et rebus Gallicis sive Transpadanis apud Vergilium (Leipzig dissertation, 1905).

6. Greek and Italic.—We have seen above (§ 4, i., ii., iii.) certain broad characteristics which the Greek and the Italic groups of language have in common. The old question of the degree of their affinity may be briefly noticed. There are deep-seated differences in morphology, phonology and vocabulary between the two languages—such as (a) the loss of the forms of the ablative in Greek and of the middle voice in Latin; (b) the decay of the fricatives (s, v, ) in Greek and the cavalier treatment of the aspirates in Latin; and (c) the almost total discrepancy of the vocabularies of law and religion in the two languages—which altogether forbid the assumption that the two groups can ever have been completely identical after their first dialectic separation from the parent language. On the other hand, in the first early periods of that dialectic development in the Indo-European family, the precursors of Greek and Italic cannot have been separated by any very wide boundary. To this primitive neighbourhood may be referred such peculiarities as (a) the genitive plural feminine ending in -āsōm (Gr. -άων, later in various dialects -έων, -ῶν, -ᾶν; cf. Osc. egmazum “rerum”; Lat. mensarum, with -r- from -s-), (b) the feminine gender of many nouns of the -o- declension, cf. Gr. ἡ ὁδὸς, Lat. haec fāgus; and some important and ancient syntactical features, especially in the uses of the cases (e.g. (c) the genitive of price) of the (d) infinitive and of the (e) participles passive (though in 246 each case the forms differ widely in the two groups), and perhaps (f) of the dependent moods (though here again the forms have been vigorously reshaped in Italic). These syntactic parallels, which are hardly noticed by Kretschmer in his otherwise careful discussion (Einleit. p. 155 seq.), serve to confirm his general conclusion which has been here adopted; because syntactic peculiarities have a long life and may survive not merely complete revolutions in morphology, but even a complete change in the speaker’s language, e.g. such Celticisms in Irish-English as “What are you after doing?” for “What have you done?” or in Welsh-English as “whatever” for “anyhow.” A few isolated correspondences in vocabulary, as in remus from *ret-s-mo-, with ἐρετμός and in a few plant-names (e.g. πράσον and porrum), cannot disturb the general conclusion, though no doubt they have some historical significance, if it could be determined.

6. Greek and Italic.—We have seen above (§ 4, i., ii., iii.) certain broad characteristics that the Greek and Italic language groups share. The old debate about how closely they’re related can be briefly mentioned. There are significant differences in form, sound, and vocabulary between the two languages—such as (a) the loss of ablative forms in Greek and the middle voice in Latin; (b) the decline of fricatives (s, v, ) in Greek and the casual treatment of aspirates in Latin; and (c) the almost total mismatch of the vocabularies of law and religion in the two languages—which together make it unlikely that the two groups were ever completely identical after their initial separation from the parent language. However, during the early stages of this dialectic development in the Indo-European family, the ancestors of Greek and Italic must not have been separated by a wide divide. This close proximity may explain certain features like (a) the genitive plural feminine ending in -āsōm (Gr. -άων, later in various dialects -έων, -ῶν, -ᾶν; cf. Osc. egmazum “things”; Lat. mensarum, with -r- from -s-), (b) the feminine gender for many nouns in the -o- declension, cf. Gr. the way, Lat. haec fāgus; and some important and ancient syntax features, especially in how cases are used (e.g. (c) the genitive of price) of the (d) infinitive and of the (e) passive participles (though in 246 each case, the forms differ significantly between the two groups), and perhaps (f) of the dependent moods (though here, too, the forms have been significantly changed in Italic). These syntactic parallels, which Kretschmer hardly mentions in his otherwise thorough discussion (Einleit. p. 155 seq.), support the general conclusion that has been adopted here; because syntactic features tend to last a long time and can survive not just complete changes in form, but even a total shift in the speaker’s language, e.g. such Celticisms in Irish-English as “What are you after doing?” instead of “What have you done?” or in Welsh-English as “whatever” for “anyhow.” A few isolated similarities in vocabulary, such as remus from *ret-s-mo-, with rowing and a few plant names (e.g. greenery and porrum), don't disrupt the overall conclusion, although they surely have some historical significance if we could figure it out.

7. Indo-Iranian and Italo-Celtic.—Only a brief reference can here be made to the striking list of resemblances between the Indo-Iranian and Italo-Celtic groups, especially in vocabulary, which Kretschmer has collected (ibid. pp. 126-144). The most striking of these are rēx, O. Ir. rīg-, Sans. rāj-, and the political meaning of the same root in the corresponding verb in both languages (contrast regere with the merely physical meaning of Gr. ὀρέγνυμι); Lat. flāmen (for *flag-men) exactly = Sans. brahman- (neuter), meaning probably “sacrificing,” “worshipping,” and then “priesthood,” “priest,” from the Ind.-Eur. root *bhelgh-, “blaze,” “make to blaze”; rēs, rem exactly = Sans. rās, rām in declension and especially in meaning; and Ārio-, “noble,” in Gallic Ariomanus, &c., = Sans. ārya-, “noble” (whence “Aryan”). So argentum exactly = Sans. rajata-, Zend erezata-; contrast the different (though morphologically kindred) suffix in Gr. ἄργυρος. Some forty-two other Latin or Celtic words (among them crēdere, caesariēs, probus, castus (cf. Osc. kasit, Lat. caret, Sans. šiṣta-), Volcānus, Neptūnus, ensis, erus, pruina, rūs, novācula) have precise Sanskrit or Iranian equivalents, and none so near in any other of the eight groups of languages. Finally the use of an -r suffix in the third plural is common to both Italo-Celtic (see above) and Indo-Iranian. These things clearly point to a fairly close, and probably in part political, intercourse between the two communities of speakers at some early epoch. A shorter, but interesting, list of correspondences in vocabulary with Balto-Slavonic (e.g. the words mentīrī, rōs, ignis have close equivalents in Balto-Slavonic) suggests that at the same period the precursor of this dialect too was a not remote neighbour.

7. Indo-Iranian and Italo-Celtic.—We can only briefly mention the remarkable similarities between the Indo-Iranian and Italo-Celtic groups, particularly in vocabulary, which Kretschmer has documented (ibid. pp. 126-144). The most notable of these include rēx, O. Ir. rīg-, Sans. rāj-, and the political connotation of the same root in the corresponding verb in both languages (compare regere with the merely physical meaning of Gr. ὀρέγνυμι); Lat. flāmen (for *flag-men) is exactly like Sans. brahman- (neuter), likely meaning “sacrificing,” “worshipping,” and later “priesthood,” “priest,” derived from the Ind.-Eur. root *bhelgh-, “blaze,” “make to blaze”; rēs, rem is exactly like Sans. rās, rām in declension and particularly in meaning; and Ārio-, “noble,” in Gallic Ariomanus, etc., is equal to Sans. ārya-, “noble” (from which we get “Aryan”). Thus, argentum is exactly like Sans. rajata-, Zend erezata-; contrast the different (though morphologically related) suffix in Gr. silver. Around forty-two other Latin or Celtic words (including crēdere, caesariēs, probus, castus (cf. Osc. kasit, Lat. caret, Sans. šiṣta-), Volcānus, Neptūnus, ensis, erus, pruina, rūs, novācula) have precise Sanskrit or Iranian equivalents, and none are as closely related in any other of the eight language groups. Finally, the use of an -r suffix in the third plural is common to both Italo-Celtic (see above) and Indo-Iranian. These points strongly suggest a reasonably close, and likely partly political, interaction between the two speaker communities at some early period. A shorter but interesting list of vocabulary correspondences with Balto-Slavonic (for example, the words mentīrī, rōs, ignis have close equivalents in Balto-Slavonic) indicates that at the same time, the ancestor of this dialect was also a nearby neighbor.

8. Date of the Separation of the Italic Group.—The date at which the Italic group of languages began to have (so far as it had at all) a separate development of its own is at present only a matter of conjecture. But the combination of archaeological and linguistic research which has already begun can have no more interesting object than the approximate determination of this date (or group of dates); for it will give us a point of cardinal importance in the early history of Europe. The only consideration which can here be offered as a starting-point for the inquiry is the chronological relation of the Etruscan invasion, which is probably referable to the 12th century B.C. (see Etruria), to the two strata of Indo-European population—the -CO- folk (Falisci, Marruci, Volsci, Hernici and others), to whom the Tuscan invaders owe the names Etrusci and Tusci, and the -NO- folk, who, on the West coast, in the centre and south of Italy, appear at a distinctly later epoch, in some places (as in the Bruttian peninsula, see Bruttii) only at the beginning of our historical record. If the view of Latin as mainly the tongue of the -CO- folk prove to be correct (see Rome: History; Italy: Ancient Languages and Peoples; Sabini; Volsci) we must regard it (a) as the southern or earlier half of the Italic group, firmly rooted in Italy in the 12th century B.C., but (b) by no means yet isolated from contact with the northern or later half; such is at least the suggestion of the striking peculiarities in morphology which it shares with not merely Oscan and Umbrian, but also, as we have seen, with Celtic. The progress in time of this isolation ought before long to be traced with some approach to certainty.

8. Date of the Separation of the Italic Group.—The point in time when the Italic group of languages started to have its own distinct development is currently only a matter of speculation. However, the combination of archaeological and linguistic research that has already begun can have no more intriguing goal than pinning down this date (or set of dates); because it will provide us with a crucial reference point in the early history of Europe. The only aspect that can be presented here as a starting point for the investigation is the chronological relationship of the Etruscan invasion, which likely dates back to the 12th century BCE (see Etruria), to the two layers of Indo-European population—the -CO- people (Falisci, Marruci, Volsci, Hernici, and others), from whom the Tuscan invaders derived the names Etrusci and Tusci, and the -NO- people, who appeared on the West coast, in the center and south of Italy, at a distinctly later period, emerging in some areas (like the Bruttian peninsula, see Bruttii) only at the start of our historical records. If the perspective that Latin mainly represents the language of the -CO- people is accurate (see Rome: History; Italy: Ancient Languages and Peoples; Sabini; Volsci), we must view it (a) as the southern or earlier segment of the Italic group, firmly established in Italy in the 12th century BCE, but (b) not yet completely isolated from interactions with the northern or later segment; such is at least the implication of the striking characteristics in morphology it shares not only with Oscan and Umbrian but also, as we have seen, with Celtic. The timeline of this isolation should soon be able to be traced with some degree of certainty.

The History of Latin

The History of Latin

9. We may now proceed to notice the chief changes that arose in Latin after the (more or less) complete separation of the Italic group whenever it came about. The contrasted features of Oscan and Umbrian, to some of which, for special reasons, occasional reference will be here made, are fully described under Osca Lingua and Iguvium respectively.

9. We can now look at the main changes that occurred in Latin after the (more or less) total separation of the Italic group whenever that happened. The differences between Oscan and Umbrian, some of which will be referred to here for specific reasons, are fully described under Osca Lingua and Iguvium respectively.

It is rarely possible to fix with any precision the date at which a particular change began or was completed, and the most serviceable form for this conspectus of the development will be to present, under the heads of Phonology, Morphology and Syntax, the chief characteristics of Ciceronian Latin which we know to have been developed after Latin became a separate language. Which of these changes, if any, can be assigned to a particular period will be seen as we proceed. But it should be remembered that an enormous increase of exact knowledge has accrued from the scientific methods of research introduced by A. Leskien and K. Brugmann in 1879, and finally established by Brugmann’s great Grundriss in 1886, and that only a brief enumeration can be here attempted. For adequate study reference must be made to the fuller treatises quoted, and especially to the sections bearing on Latin in K. Brugmann’s Kurze vergleichende Grammatik (1902).

It’s rarely possible to pinpoint exactly when a specific change started or finished, and the most useful way to present this overview of development will be to describe, under the categories of Phonology, Morphology, and Syntax, the main features of Ciceronian Latin that we know emerged after Latin became its own language. Which of these changes, if any, can be tied to a particular time period will become clear as we go along. However, it’s important to note that a significant amount of precise knowledge has come from the scientific research methods introduced by A. Leskien and K. Brugmann in 1879, and solidified in Brugmann’s major Grundriss in 1886, and that only a brief summary can be attempted here. For a thorough study, it’s essential to refer to the more comprehensive works cited, particularly the sections on Latin in K. Brugmann’s Kurze vergleichende Grammatik (1902).

I. Phonology

I. Phonology

10. The Latin Accent.—It will be convenient to begin with some account of the most important discovery made since the application of scientific method to the study of Latin, for, though it is not strictly a part of phonology, it is wrapped up with much of the development both of the sounds and, by consequence, of the inflexions. It has long been observed (as we have seen § 4, iv. above) that the restriction of the word-accent in Latin to the last three syllables of the word, and its attachment to a long syllable in the penult, were certainly not its earliest traceable condition; between this, the classical system, and the comparative freedom with which the word-accent was placed in pro-ethnic Indo-European, there had intervened a period of first-syllable accentuation to which were due many of the characteristic contractions of Oscan and Umbrian, and in Latin the degradation of the vowels in such forms as accentus from ad + cantus or praecipitem from prae + caput- (§ 19 below). R. von Planta (Osk.-Umbr. Grammatik, 1893, i. p. 594) pointed out that in Oscan also, by the 3rd century B.C., this first-syllable-accent had probably given way to a system which limited the word-accent in some such way as in classical Latin. But it remained for C. Exon, in a brilliant article (Hermathena (1906), xiv. 117, seq.), to deduce from the more precise stages of the change (which had been gradually noted, see e.g. F. Skutsch in Kroll’s Altertumswissenschaft im letzten Vierteljahrhundert, 1905) their actual effect on the language.

10. The Latin Accent.—It’s useful to start with the most significant discovery made since scientific methods were applied to studying Latin. While it isn't strictly part of phonology, it’s closely linked to the development of sounds and, consequently, inflections. It has long been noted (as discussed in § 4, iv. above) that the restriction of the word accent in Latin to the last three syllables and its connection to a long syllable in the penult were definitely not its earliest form. Between this classical system and the more flexible placement of the word accent in proto-Indo-European, there was a period of first-syllable accentuation, which resulted in many unique contractions in Oscan and Umbrian, and in Latin, the reduction of vowels in forms like accentus from ad + cantus or praecipitem from prae + caput (§ 19 below). R. von Planta (Osk.-Umbr. Grammatik, 1893, i. p. 594) noted that in Oscan, by the 3rd century BCE, this first-syllable accent had likely evolved into a system that restricted the word accent similarly to classical Latin. However, it took C. Exon, in a brilliant article (Hermathena (1906), xiv. 117, seq.), to derive the actual effects of these more precise stages of change (which had been gradually observed, see e.g. F. Skutsch in Kroll’s Altertumswissenschaft im letzten Vierteljahrhundert, 1905) on the language.

11. Accent in Time of Plautus.—The rules which have been established for the position of the accent in the time of Plautus are these:

11. Accent in Time of Plautus.—The rules that were set for where the accent falls during the time of Plautus are as follows:

(i.) The quantity of the final syllable had no effect on accent.

(i.) The length of the final syllable had no impact on the accent.

(ii.) If the penult was long, it bore the accent (amābấmus).

(ii.) If the second to last syllable was long, it carried the accent (amābấmus).

(iii.) If the penult was short, then

(iii.) If the second-to-last syllable was short, then

(a) if the ante-penult was long, it bore the accent (amấbimus);

(a) if the third-to-last syllable was long, it carried the accent (amấbimus);

(b) if the ante-penult was short, then

(b) if the third-to-last syllable was short, then

(i.) if the ante-ante-penult was long, the accent was on the ante-penult (amīcítia); but

(i.) if the third-to-last syllable was long, the accent was on the second-to-last syllable (amīcítia); but

(ii.) if the ante-ante-penult was also short, it bore the accent (cólumine, puéritia).

(ii.) if the third-to-last syllable was also short, it carried the accent (cólumine, puéritia).

Exon’s Laws of Syncope.—With these facts are now linked what may be called Exon’s Laws, viz:—

Exon’s Laws of Syncope.—Now connected with these facts are what can be referred to as Exon’s Laws, namely:—

In pre-Plautine Latin in all words or word-groups of four or more syllables whose chief accent is on one long syllable, a short unaccented medial vowel was syncopated; thus *quínquedecem became *quínqdecem and thence quíndecim (for the -im see § 19), *súps-emere became *súpsmere and that sūmere (on -psm- v. inf.) *súrregere, *surregémus, and the like became surgere, surgémus, and the rest of the paradigm followed; so probably validé bonus became valdé bonus, exterá viam became extrá viam; so *supo-téndo became subtendo (pronounced sup-tendo), *āridére, *avidére (from āridus, avidus) became ārdére, audére. But the influence of cognate forms often interfered; posterí-diē became postrídiē, but in posterórum, posterárum the short syllable was restored by the influence of the trisyllabic cases, pósterus, pósterī, &c., to which the law did not apply. Conversely, the nom. *áridor (more correctly at this period *āridōs), which would not have been contracted, followed the form of ārdórem (from *āridórem), ārdére, &c.

In pre-Plautine Latin, for all words or groups of words with four or more syllables where the main accent is on one long syllable, a short unaccented vowel in the middle was dropped. So, *quínquedecem became *quínqdecem and eventually quíndecim (for the -im see § 19), *súps-emere became *súpsmere and then sūmere (on -psm- v. inf.), *súrregere, *surregémus, and similar forms became surgere, surgémus, and the rest of the paradigm followed. So likely validé bonus became valdé bonus, and exterá viam became extrá viam; thus *supo-téndo became subtendo (pronounced sup-tendo), *āridére, *avidére (from āridus, avidus) became ārdére, audére. However, the influence of related forms often got in the way; posterí-diē became postrídiē, but in posterórum, posterárum the short syllable returned due to the influence of the three-syllable forms pósterus, pósterī, etc., to which the rule did not apply. On the other hand, the nominative *áridor (more correctly at this point *āridōs), which wouldn't have contracted, followed the form of ārdórem (from *āridórem), ārdére, etc.

The same change produced the monosyllabic forms nec, ac, neu, seu, from neque, &c., before consonants, since they had no accent of their own, but were always pronounced in one breath with the following word, neque tántum becoming nec tantum, and the like. So in Plautus (and probably always in spoken Latin) the words nemp(e), ind(e), quipp(e), ill(e), are regularly monosyllables.

The same change led to the monosyllabic forms nec, ac, neu, seu, derived from neque, etc., when used before consonants, since they didn’t have their own accent and were always pronounced in one breath with the following word, like neque tántum becoming nec tantum, and so on. Likewise, in Plautus (and probably always in spoken Latin), the words nemp(e), ind(e), quipp(e), ill(e) are consistently monosyllables.

247

247

12. Syncope of Final Syllables.—It is possible that the frequent but far from universal syncope of final syllables in Latin (especially before -s, as in mēns, which represents both Gr. μένος and Sans. matís = Ind.-Eur. mṇtís, Eng. mind) is due also to this law operating on such combinations as bona mēns and the like, but this has not yet been clearly shown. In any case the effects of any such phonetic change have been very greatly modified by analogical changes. The Oscan and Umbrian syncope of short vowels before final s seems to be an independent change, at all events in its detailed working. The outbreak of the unconscious affection of slurring final syllables may have been contemporaneous.

12. Syncope of Final Syllables.—It’s possible that the common but not universal dropping of final syllables in Latin (especially before -s, like in mēns, which corresponds to both Gr. μένω and Sans. matís = Ind.-Eur. mṇtís, Eng. mind) is also influenced by this rule affecting combinations like bona mēns and similar cases, but this hasn’t been clearly demonstrated yet. In any case, the effects of any such phonetic change have been significantly influenced by analogical changes. The syncope of short vowels before final s in Oscan and Umbrian appears to be an independent change, at least regarding its detailed implementation. The emergence of the unconscious tendency to slur final syllables may have occurred at the same time.

13. In post-Plautine Latin words accented on the ante-antepenult:—

13. In post-Plautine Latin words stressed on the ante-antepenultimate:—

(i.) suffered syncope in the short syllable following the accented syllable (bálineae became bálneae, puéritia became puértia (Horace), cólumine, tégimine, &c., became cúlmine, tégmine, &c., beside the trisyllabic cólumen, tégimen) unless

(i.) experienced a brief loss of consciousness in the short syllable following the stressed syllable (bálineae became bálneae, puéritia became puértia (Horace), cólumine, tégimine, etc., became cúlmine, tégmine, etc., alongside the three-syllable cólumen, tégimen) unless

(ii.) that short vowel was e or i, followed by another vowel (as in párietem, múlierem, Púteoli), when, instead of contraction, the accent shifted to the penult, which at a later stage of the language became lengthened, pariétem giving Ital. paréếte, Fr. paroi, Puteóli giving Ital. Pozzuốli.

(ii.) that short vowel was e or i, followed by another vowel (like in párietem, múlierem, Púteoli), when, instead of contraction, the accent moved to the penultimate syllable, which eventually lengthened in the language, with pariétem evolving into Ital. paréte, Fr. paroi, and Puteóli evolving into Ital. Pozzuoli.

The restriction of the accent to the last three syllables was completed by these changes, which did away with all the cases in which it had stood on the fourth syllable.

The limit of the accent to the last three syllables was finalized by these changes, which eliminated all the instances where it had been on the fourth syllable.

14. The Law of the Brevis Brevians.—Next must be mentioned another great phonetic change, also dependent upon accent, which had come about before the time of Plautus, the law long known to students as the Brevis Brevians, which may be stated as follows (Exon, Hermathena (1903), xii. 491, following Skutsch in, e.g., Vollmöller’s Jahresbericht für romanische Sprachwissenschaft, i. 33): a syllable long by nature or position, and preceded by a short syllable, was itself shortened if the word-accent fell immediately before or immediately after it—that is, on the preceding short syllable or on the next following syllable. The sequence of syllables need not be in the same word, but must be as closely connected in utterance as if it were. Thus mốdō became módŏ, vŏlūptấtēm became vŏlŭ(p)tấtem, quḯd ēst? became quid ĕst? either the s or the t or both being but faintly pronounced.

14. The Law of the Brevis Brevians.—Next, we have to mention another significant phonetic change, also influenced by accent, which occurred before the time of Plautus, known to students as the Brevis Brevians. This can be summarized as follows (Exon, Hermathena (1903), xii. 491, following Skutsch in, e.g., Vollmöller’s Jahresbericht für romanische Sprachwissenschaft, i. 33): a syllable that is naturally long or long due to its position, when preceded by a short syllable, will be shortened itself if the word-accent is placed either just before or just after it—that is, on the preceding short syllable or on the following syllable. The sequence of syllables doesn’t have to be in the same word, but they must be closely connected in pronunciation. So, mốdō became módŏ, vŏlūptấtēm became vŏlŭ(p)tấtem, quḯd ēst? became quid ĕst?, with either the s or the t or both being faintly pronounced.

It is clear that a great number of flexional syllables so shortened would have their quantity immediately restored by the analogy of the same inflexion occurring in words not of this particular shape; thus, for instance, the long vowel of ấmā and the like is due to that in other verbs (pulsā, agitā) not of iambic shape. So ablatives like modö, sonō get back their -ō, while in particles like modo, “only,” quōmodo, “how,” the shortened form remains. Conversely, the shortening of the final -a in the nom. sing. fem. of the a-declension (contrast lūnă with Gr. χωρᾷ) was probably partly due to the influence of common forms like , bonă, mală, which had come under the law.

It’s obvious that many shortened flexional syllables would quickly regain their original length due to the analogy of the same inflection occurring in words that don’t have this specific form. For example, the long vowel in ấmā and similar words comes from verbs like pulsā and agitā that aren't iambic. So, ablatives like modö and sonō restore their -ō, while in particles like modo meaning "only," and quōmodo meaning "how," the shortened form stays. On the other hand, the shortening of the final -a in the nominative singular feminine of the a-declension (compare lūnă with Gr. χώρος) was likely partly influenced by common forms like , bonă, and mală, which were affected by the rule.

15. Effect on Verb Inflexion.—These processes had far-reaching effects on Latin inflexion. The chief of these was the creation of the type of conjugation known as the capio-class. All these verbs were originally inflected like audio, but the accident of their short root-syllable, (in such early forms as *fúgīs, *fugītṹrus, *fugīsếtis, &c., becoming later fúgĭs, fugĭtṹrus, fugĕrếtis) brought great parts of their paradigm under this law, and the rest followed suit; but true forms like fugīre, cupīre, morīri, never altogether died out of the spoken language. St Augustine, for instance, confessed in 387 A.D. (Epist. iii. 5, quoted by Exon, Hermathena (1901), xi. 383,) that he does not know whether cupi or cupiri is the pass. inf. of cupio. Hence we have Ital. fuggīre, morīre, Fr. fuir, mourir. (See further on this conjugation, C. Exon, l.c., and F. Skutsch, Archiv für lat. Lexicographie, xii. 210, two papers which were written independently.)

15. Effect on Verb Inflection.—These processes had significant effects on Latin inflection. The main result was the development of the conjugation type known as the capio-class. All these verbs were originally inflected like audio, but because they had short root syllables (in early forms like *fúgīs, *fugītṹrus, *fugīsếtis, etc., which later became fúgĭs, fugĭtṹrus, fugĕrếtis), large parts of their paradigm fell under this rule, and the rest followed. However, true forms like fugīre, cupīre, morīri never completely disappeared from spoken language. St. Augustine, for example, admitted in 387 A.D. (Epist. iii. 5, quoted by Exon, Hermathena (1901), xi. 383) that he was unsure whether cupi or cupiri was the passive infinitive of cupio. This is why we have Italian fuggìre, morìre, and French fuir, mourir. (See more on this conjugation, C. Exon, l.c., and F. Skutsch, Archiv für lat. Lexicographie, xii. 210, two papers that were written independently.)

16. The question has been raised how far the true phonetic shortening appears in Plautus, produced not by word-accent but by metrical ictus—e.g. whether the reading is to be trusted in such lines as Amph. 761, which gives us dedisse as the first foot (tribrach) of a trochaic line “because the metrical ictus fell on the syllable ded-”—but this remarkable theory cannot be discussed here. See the articles cited and also F. Skutsch, Forschungen zu Latein. Grammatik und Metrik, i. (1892); C. Exon, Hermathena (1903) xii. p. 492, W. M. Lindsay, Captivi (1900), appendix.

16. The question has come up about how much true phonetic shortening appears in Plautus, which isn’t caused by word stress but by metrical ictus—e.g. whether we can trust the reading in lines like Amph. 761, which shows dedisse as the first foot (tribrach) of a trochaic line “because the metrical ictus landed on the syllable ded-”—but we can’t discuss this interesting theory here. Check the articles mentioned and also F. Skutsch, Forschungen zu Latein. Grammatik und Metrik, i. (1892); C. Exon, Hermathena (1903) xii. p. 492, W. M. Lindsay, Captivi (1900), appendix.

In the history of the vowels and diphthongs in Latin we must distinguish the changes which came about independently of accent and those produced by the preponderance of accent in another syllable.

In the history of vowels and diphthongs in Latin, we need to distinguish between the changes that happened on their own and those caused by the influence of stress in another syllable.

17. Vowel Changes independent of Accent.—In the former category the following are those of chief importance:—

17. Vowel Changes independent of Accent.—In the earlier category, the following are the most important:—

(i.) ĭ became ĕ (a) when final, as in ant-e beside Gr. ἀντί, trīste besides trīsti-s, contrasted with e.g., the Greek neuter ἴδρι (the final -e of the infinitive—regere, &c.—is the -ĭ of the locative, just as in the so-called ablatives genere, &c.); (b) before -r- which has arisen from -s-, as in cineris beside cinis, cinisculus; serō beside Gr. ἴ(σ)ημι (Ind.-Eur. *si-sēmi, a reduplicated non-thematic present).

(i.) ĭ became ĕ (a) when it was at the end, like in ant-e compared to Gr. αντι, trīste next to trīsti-s, in contrast to e.g., the Greek neuter expert (the final -e of the infinitive—regere, etc.—is the -ĭ of the locative, just like in the so-called ablatives genere, etc.); (b) before -r- which has come from -s-, as in cineris beside cinis, cinisculus; serō next to Gr. ἴ(σ)ημι (Ind.-Eur. *si-sēmi, a reduplicated non-thematic present).

(ii.) Final ŏ became ĕ; imperative sequere = Gr. ἔπε(σ)ο; Lat. ille may contain the old pronoun *so, “he,” Gr. , Sans. sa (otherwise Skutsch, Glotta, i. Hefte 2-3).

(ii.) The final ŏ became ĕ; the imperative sequere corresponds to Gr. ἔπε(σ)ο; Lat. ille might include the old pronoun *so, meaning “he,” Gr. , Sans. sa (see also Skutsch, Glotta, i. Hefte 2-3).

(iii.) el became ol when followed by any sound save e, i or l, as in volō, volt beside velle; colō beside Gr. τέλλομαι, πολεῖν, Att. τέλος; colōnus for *quelōnus, beside inquilīnus for *en-quēlenus.

(iii.) el became ol when it was followed by any sound except e, i, or l, like in volō, volt next to velle; colō next to Gr. I'm not sure., φighting, Att. end; colōnus for *quelōnus, next to inquilīnus for *en-quēlenus.

(iv.) e became i (i.) before a nasal followed by a palatal or velar consonant (tingo, Gr. τέγγω; in-cipio from *en-capio); (ii.) under certain conditions not yet precisely defined, one of which was i in a following syllable (nihil, nisi, initium). From these forms in- spread and banished en-, the earlier form.

(iv.) e changed to i (i.) before a nasal followed by a palatal or velar consonant (tingo, Gr. τέγγω; in-cipio from *en-capio); (ii.) under certain conditions that haven't been precisely defined yet, one of which was i in a following syllable (nihil, nisi, initium). From these forms, in- spread and replaced en-, the earlier form.

(v.) The “neutral vowel” (“schwa Indo-Germanicum”) which arose in pro-ethnic Indo-European from the reduction of long ā, ē or ō in unaccented syllables (as in the -tós participles of such roots as stā-, dhē-, -, *stƏtós, *dhƏtós, *dƏtós) became a in Latin (status con-ditus [from *con-dhatos], datus), and it is the same sound which is represented by a in most of the forms of (damus, dabō, &c.).

(v.) The “neutral vowel” (“schwa Indo-Germanicum”) that developed in early Indo-European from the shortening of long ā, ē, or ō in unstressed syllables (like in the -tós participles of roots such as stā-, dhē-, -, *stƏtós, *dhƏtós, *dƏtós) became a in Latin (status con-ditus [from *con-dhatos], datus), and it’s the same sound represented by a in most forms of (damus, dabō, etc.).

(vi.) When a long vowel came to stand before another vowel in the same word through loss of or , it was always shortened; thus the - of intransitive verbs like candeō, caleō is for -ēḭō (where the ē is identical with the η in Gr. ἐφάνην, ἐμάνμν) and was thus confused with the causative -eiō (as in moneō, “I make to think,” &c.), where the short e is original. So audīuī became audīī and thence audiī (the form audīvī would have disappeared altogether but for being restored from audīveram, &c.; conversely audieram is formed from audiī). In certain cases the vowels contracted, as in trēs, partēs, &c. with -ēs from eḭes, *amō from amā(ḭ)ō.

(vi.) When a long vowel stood before another vowel in the same word due to the loss of or , it was always shortened; thus the - in intransitive verbs like candeō, caleō is derived from -ēḭō (where the ē is the same as the η in Gr. I appeared, ἐμάνμν) and was confused with the causative -eiō (as in moneō, “I make to think,” etc.), where the short e is original. So audīuī became audīī and then audiī (the form audīvī would have completely disappeared if not for being restored from audīveram, etc.; conversely audieram is formed from audiī). In some cases, the vowels contracted, as in trēs, partēs, etc. with -ēs from eḭes, *amō from amā(ḭ)ō.

18. Of the Diphthongs.

18. Diphthongs.

(vii.) eu became ou in pro-ethnic Italic, Lat. novus: Gr. νέος, Lat. novem, Umb. nuviper (i.e. noviper), “usque ad Changes of the diphthongs independent of accent. noviens”: Gr. (ἐν-)νέα; in unaccented syllables this -ov- sank to -u(v)- as in dếnuō from dế novō, suus (which is rarely anything but an enclitic word), Old Lat. sovos: Gr. ἑ(ϝ)ός.

(vii.) eu became ou in early Italic, Lat. novus: Gr. young, Lat. novem, Umb. nuviper (i.e. noviper), “up to Changes in diphthongs regardless of accent. noviens”: Gr. new; in unstressed syllables this -ov- changed to -u(v)- as in dếnuō from dế novō, suus (which is rarely anything but an enclitic word), Old Lat. sovos: Gr. ἑ(ϝ)ός.

(viii.) ou, whether original or from eu, when in one syllable became -ū-, probably about 200 B.C., as in dūcō, Old Lat. doucō, Goth, tiuhan, Eng. tow, Ind.-Eur. *de.

(viii.) ou, whether original or from eu, when in one syllable became -ū-, probably around 200 BCE, as in dūcō, Old Lat. doucō, Goth, tiuhan, Eng. tow, Ind.-Eur. *de.

(ix.) ei became ī (as in dīcō, Old Lat. deico: Gr. δείκ-νυμι, fīdo: Gr. πείθομαι, Ind.-Eur. *bheidhō) just before the time of Lucilius, who prescribes the spellings puerei (nom. plur.) but puerī (gen. sing.), which indicates that the two forms were pronounced alike in his time, but that the traditional distinction in spelling had been more or less preserved. But after his time, since the sound of ei was merely that of ī, ei is continually used merely to denote a long ī, even where, as in faxeis for faxīs, there never had been any diphthongal sound at all.

(ix.) ei evolved into ī (like in dīcō, Old Lat. deico: Gr. δείκ-νυμι, fīdo: Gr. I am convinced, Ind.-Eur. *bheidhō) just before Lucilius’ time, who recommended the spellings puerei (nominative plural) but puerī (genitive singular), which shows that the two forms were pronounced the same in his time, but the traditional spelling distinction was mostly kept. However, after his time, since the sound of ei was just that of ī, ei was continually used to indicate a long ī, even in cases like faxeis for faxīs, where there had never been any diphthongal sound at all.

(x.) In rustic Latin (Volscian and Sabine) au became ō as in the vulgar terms explōdere, plōstrum. Hence arose interesting doublets of meaning;—lautus (the Roman form), “elegant,” but lōtus, “washed”; haustus, “draught,” but hōstus (Cato), “the season’s yield of fruit.”

(x.) In rural Latin (Volscian and Sabine) au became ō as in the vulgar terms explōdere, plōstrum. This led to interesting pairs of meanings;—lautus (the Roman form), “elegant,” but lōtus, “washed”; haustus, “draught,” but hōstus (Cato), “the season’s yield of fruit.”

(xi.) oi became oe and thence ū some time after Plautus, as in ūnus, Old Lat. oenus: Gr. οἰνή “ace.” In Plautus the forms have nearly all been modernized, save in special cases, e.g. in Trin. i. 1, 2, immoene facinus, “a thankless task,” has not been changed to immune because that meaning had died out of the adjective so that immune facinus would have made nonsense; but at the end of the same line utile has replaced oetile. Similarly in a small group of words the old form was preserved through their frequent use in legal or religious documents where tradition was strictly preserved—poena, foedus (neut.), foedus (adj.), “ill-omened.” So the archaic and poetical moenia, “ramparts,” beside the true classical form mūnia, “duties”; the historic Poeni beside the living and frequently used Pūnicum (bellum)—an example which demonstrates conclusively (pace Sommer) that the variation between ū and oe is not due to any difference in the surrounding sounds.

(xi.) oi became oe and later ū some time after Plautus, as in ūnus, Old Lat. oenus: Gr. οἰνή “ace.” In Plautus, the forms have mostly been modernized, except in special cases, e.g. in Trin. i. 1, 2, immoene facinus, “a thankless task,” hasn’t been changed to immune because that meaning has become outdated for the adjective, making immune facinus nonsensical; but at the end of the same line, utile has taken the place of oetile. Similarly, in a few words, the old form was kept because of their frequent use in legal or religious documents where tradition was strictly upheld—poena, foedus (neut.), foedus (adj.), “ill-omened.” So the archaic and poetic moenia, “ramparts,” stands alongside the true classical form mūnia, “duties”; the historic Poeni next to the living and commonly used Pūnicum (bellum)—an example that shows clearly (pace Sommer) that the difference between ū and oe is not due to any variation in the surrounding sounds.

(xii.) ai became ae and this in rustic and later Latin (2nd or 3rd century A.D.) simple ē, though of an open quality—Gr. αἴθος, αἴθω, Lat. aedēs (originally “the place for the fire”); the country forms of haedus, praetor were edus, pretor (Varro, Ling. Lat. v. 97, Lindsay, Lat. Lang. p. 44).

(xii.) ai became ae, which in rustic and later Latin (2nd or 3rd century CE) simplified to ē, though with a more open sound—Gr. αἴθος, Burn, Lat. aedēs (originally “the place for the fire”); the country forms of haedus, praetor were edus, pretor (Varro, Ling. Lat. v. 97, Lindsay, Lat. Lang. p. 44).

19. Vowels and Diphthongs in unaccented Syllables.—The changes of the short vowels and of the diphthongs in unaccented syllables are too numerous and complex to be set forth here. Some took place under the first-syllable system of accent, some later (§§ 9, 10). Typical examples are pepErci from *péparcai and ónustus from *ónostos (before two consonants); concIno from *cóncano and hospItIs from *hóstipotes, legImus beside Gr. λέγομεν (before one consonant); SicUli from *Siceloi (before a thick l, see § 17, 3); dilIgIt from *dísleget (contrast, however, the preservation of the second e in neglEgIt); occUpat from *opcapat (contrast accipit with i in the following syllable); the varying spelling in monumentum and monimentum, maxumus and maximus, points to an intermediate sound (ü) between u and i (cf. Quint. i. 4. 8, reading optumum and optimum [not opimum] with W. M. Lindsay, Latin Language §§ 14, 16, seq.), which could not be correctly represented in spelling; this difference may, however, be due merely to the effect of differences in the neighbouring sounds, an effect greatly obscured by analogical influences.

19. Vowels and Diphthongs in Unaccented Syllables.—The changes in short vowels and diphthongs in unaccented syllables are too many and complicated to outline here. Some occurred under the first-syllable stress system, while others happened later (§§ 9, 10). Typical examples include pepErci from *péparcai and ónustus from *ónostos (before two consonants); concIno from *cóncano and hospItIs from *hóstipotes, legImus alongside Gr. we say (before one consonant); SicUli from *Siceloi (before a strong l, see § 17, 3); dilIgIt from *dísleget (however, note the preservation of the second e in neglEgIt); occUpat from *opcapat (compare accipit with i in the following syllable); the varying spellings in monumentum and monimentum, maxumus and maximus, suggest an intermediate sound (ü) between u and i (cf. Quint. i. 4. 8, reading optumum and optimum [not opimum] with W. M. Lindsay, Latin Language §§ 14, 16, seq.), which couldn’t be accurately represented in spelling; this difference might, however, just be due to the impact of surrounding sounds, an effect significantly obscured by analogical influences.

Inscriptions of the 4th or 3rd century, B.C. which show original -es and -os in final syllables (e.g. Venerĕs, gen. sing., nāvebos abl. pl.) compared with the usual forms in -is, -us a century later, give us roughly the date of these changes. But final -os, -om, remained after -u- (and v) down to 50 B.C. as in servos.

Inscriptions from the 4th or 3rd century, BCE that show original -es and -os in final syllables (e.g. Venerĕs, gen. sing., nāvebos abl. pl.) compared to the usual forms in -is, -us a century later, give us an approximate date for these changes. However, final -os, -om remained after -u- (and v) until 50 BCE as in servos.

20. Special mention should be made of the change of -- and -ro- to -er- (incertus from *encritos; ager, ācer from *agros, *ācris; the 248 feminine ācris was restored in Latin (though not in North Oscan) by the analogy of other adjectives, like tristis, while the masculine ācer was protected by the parallel masculine forms of the -o- declension, like tener, niger [from *teneros, *nigros]).

20. It's worth noting the change of -- and -ro- to -er- (incertus from *encritos; ager, ācer from *agros, *ācris; the 248 feminine ācris was brought back in Latin (but not in North Oscan) through the analogy of other adjectives, like tristis, while the masculine ācer was protected by the similar masculine forms of the -o- declension, like tener, niger [from *teneros, *nigros]).

21. Long vowels generally remained unchanged, as in compāgo, condōno.

21. Long vowels mostly stayed the same, like in compāgo, condōno.

22. Of the diphthongs, ai and oi both sank to ei, and with original ei further to ī, in unaccented syllables, as in Achivi from Gr. Ἀχαιϝοί, olīivom, earlier *oleivom (borrowed into Gothic and there becoming alēv) from Gr. ἔλαιϝον. This gives us interesting chronological data, since the el- must have changed to ol- (§ 16. 3) before the change of -ai- to -ei-, and that before the change of the accent from the first syllable to the penultimate (§ 9); and the borrowing took place after -ai- had become -ei-, but before -eivom had become -eum, as it regularly did before the time of Plautus.

22. In terms of the diphthongs, ai and oi both shifted to ei, and the original ei further became ī in unstressed syllables, as seen in Achivi from Gr. Achaeans, olīivom, which was earlier *oleivom (borrowed into Gothic and there changing to alēv) from Gr. olive oil. This provides interesting chronological information, since the el- must have switched to ol- (§ 16. 3) before the transition of -ai- to -ei-, and that occurred before the shift of the stress from the first syllable to the penultimate (§ 9); and the borrowing happened after -ai- had turned into -ei-, but before -eivom had changed to -eum, as it typically did before the era of Plautus.

But cases of ai, ae, which arose later than the change to ei, ī, were unaffected by it; thus the nom. plur. of the first declension originally ended in -ās (as in Oscan), but was changed at some period before Plautus to -ae by the influence of the pronominal nom. plur. ending -ae in quae? hae, &c., which was accented in these monosyllables and had therefore been preserved. The history of the -ae of the dative, genitive and locative is hardly yet clear (see Exon, Hermathena (1905), xiii. 555; K. Brugmann, Grundriss, 1st ed. ii. 571, 601).

But cases of ai and ae, which developed after the shift to ei and ī, were not affected by it; therefore, the nominative plural of the first declension originally ended in -ās (as in Oscan), but was changed to -ae at some point before Plautus due to the influence of the pronominal nominative plural ending -ae in quae, hae, etc., which was accented in these monosyllables and thus had been preserved. The development of the -ae in the dative, genitive, and locative is still not entirely clear (see Exon, Hermathena (1905), xiii. 555; K. Brugmann, Grundriss, 1st ed. ii. 571, 601).

The diphthongs au, ou in unaccented syllables sank to -u-, as in inclūdō beside claudō; the form clūdō, taken from the compounds, superseded claudo altogether after Cicero’s time. So cūdō, taken from incūdō, excūdō, banished the older *caudō, “I cut, strike,” with which is probably connected cauda, “the striking member, tail,” and from which comes caussa, “a cutting, decision, legal case,” whose -ss- shows that it is derived from a root ending in a dental (see §25 (b) below and Conway, Verner’s Law in Italy, p. 72).

The diphthongs au and ou in unstressed syllables shifted to -u-, like in inclūdō compared to claudō; the form clūdō, taken from the compounds, completely replaced claudo after Cicero’s time. Similarly, cūdō, derived from incūdō and excūdō, eliminated the older *caudō, meaning “I cut, strike,” which is likely related to cauda, meaning “the striking member, tail,” and is the origin of caussa, meaning “a cutting, decision, legal case,” whose -ss- indicates it comes from a root that ends in a dental (see §25 (b) below and Conway, Verner’s Law in Italy, p. 72).

Consonants.—Passing now to the chief changes of the consonants we may notice the following points:—

Consonants.—Now let's look at the main changes in the consonants. We can highlight the following points:—

23. Consonant i (wrongly written j; there is no g-sound in the letter), conveniently written by phoneticians,

23. Consonant i (incorrectly written as j; there is no g-sound in the letter), conveniently written as by phoneticians,

(i.) was lost between vowels, as in trēs for *treḭes, &c. (§ 17. 6);

(i.) was lost between vowels, as in trēs for *treḭes, etc. (§ 17. 6);

(ii.) in combination: -mḭ- became -ni-, as in veniö, from Ind.-Eur. *Ƨ mḭo, “I come,” Sans. gam-, Eng. come; -nḭ- probably (under certain conditions at least) became -nd-, as in tendō beside Gr. τείνω, fendō = Gr. θείνω, and in the gerundive stem -endus, -undus, probably for -enḭos, -onḭos; cf. the Sanskrit gerundive in -an-īya-s; -gḭ-, -dḭ- became -- as in māior from *mag-ior, pēior from *ped-ior;

(ii.) in combination: -mḭ- became -ni-, as in veniō, from Ind.-Eur. *Ƨ mḭo, “I come,” Sans. gam-, Eng. come; -nḭ- probably (under certain conditions at least) became -nd-, as in tendō alongside Gr. stretch, fendō = Gr. θείνω, and in the gerundive stem -endus, -undus, probably for -enḭos, -onḭos; cf. the Sanskrit gerundive in -an-īya-s; -gḭ-, -dḭ- became -- as in māior from *mag-ior, pēior from *ped-ior;

(iii.) otherwise -- after a consonant became generally syllabic (-iḭ-), as in capiō (trisyllabic) beside Goth. hafya.

(iii.) otherwise -- after a consonant became generally syllabic (-iḭ-), as in capiō (trisyllabic) next to Goth. hafya.

24. Consonant u (formerly represented by English v), conveniently written ,

24. Consonant u (previously represented by English v), easily written as ,

(i.) was lost between similar vowels when the first was accented, as in audīui, which became audiī (§ 17 [6]), but not in amāuī, nor in avārus.

(i.) got confused between similar vowels when the first one was stressed, like in audīui, which turned into audiī (§ 17 [6]), but not in amāuī, nor in avārus.

(ii.) in combination: d became b, as in bonus, bellum, O. Lat. donus, *dellum (though the poets finding this written form in old literary sources treated it as trisyllabic); p-, f-, b-, lost the , as in ap-erio, op-erio beside Lith. -veriu, “I open,” Osc. veru, “gate,” and in the verbal endings -bam, -, from -bh-ām, -bhō (with the root of Lat. fui), and fīo, du-bius, super-bus, vasta-bundus, &c., from the same; -s- between vowels (at least when the second was accented) disappeared (see below § 25 (a), iv.), as in pruīna for prusuīna, cf. Eng. fros-t, Sans, pruṣvā, “hoar-frost.” Contrast Minérva from an earlier *menes-ā, se-, so-, both became so-, as in sorōor(em) beside Sans. svasār-am, Ger. schwes-t-er, Eng. sister, sordēs, beside O. Ger. swart-s, mod. schwarz. -o- in final syllables became -u-, as in cum from quom, parum from parom; but in the declensional forms -u- was commonly restored by the analogy of the other cases, thus (a) seros, serom, serī became (b) *serus, *serum, *seri, but finally (c) serus, serum, seri.

(ii.) in combination: d became b, as in bonus, bellum, Old Latin: donus, *dellum (though poets who found this written form in ancient literary sources treated it as trisyllabic); p-, f-, b-, lost the , as in ap-erio, op-erio next to Lithuanian -veriu, “I open,” Oscan veru, “gate,” and in verbal endings -bam, -, from -bh-ām, -bhō (with the root of Latin fui), and fīo, du-bius, super-bus, vasta-bundus, etc., from the same; -s- between vowels (at least when the second was accented) disappeared (see below § 25 (a), iv.), as in pruīna for prusuīna, cf. English fros-t, Sanskrit pruṣvā, “hoar-frost.” Contrast Minérva from an earlier *menes-ā, se-, so-, both became so-, as in sorōor(em) next to Sanskrit svasār-am, German schwes-t-er, English sister, sordēs, next to Old German swart-s, modern schwarz. -o- in final syllables became -u-, as in cum from quom, parum from parom; but in the declensional forms -u- was commonly restored by analogy with other cases, thus (a) seros, serom, serī became (b) *serus, *serum, *seri, but finally (c) serus, serum, seri.

(iii.) In the 2nd century A.D., Lat. v (i.e. ) had become a voiced labio-dental fricative, like Eng. v; and the voiced labial plosive b had broken down (at least in certain positions) into the same sound; hence they are frequently confused as in spellings like vene for bene, Bictorinus for Victorinus.

(iii.) In the 2nd century CE, Latin v (i.e. ) became a voiced labio-dental fricative, similar to English v; and the voiced labial plosive b had broken down (at least in certain positions) into the same sound; as a result, they are often confused in spellings like vene for bene, Bictorinus for Victorinus.

25. (a) Latin s

25. (a) Latin s

(i.) became r between vowels between 450 and 350 B.C. (for the date see R. S. Conway, Verner’s Law in Italy, pp. 61-64), as āra, beside O. Lat. āsa, generis from *geneses, Gr. γένεος; eram, erō for *esām, *esō, and so in the verbal endings -erām, -erō, -erim. But a considerable number of words came into Latin, partly from neighbouring dialects, with -s- between vowels, after 350 B.C., when the change ceased, and so show -s-, as rosa (probably from S. Oscan for *rodḭa “rose-bush” cf. Gr. ῥόδον), cāseus, “cheese,” miser, a term of abuse, beside Gr. μυσαρός (probably also borrowed from south Italy), and many more, especially the participles in -sus (fūsus), where the -s- was -ss- at the time of the change of -s- to -r- (so in causa, see above). All attempts to explain the retention of the -s- otherwise must be said to have failed (e.g. the theory of accentual difference in Verner’s Law in Italy, or that of dissimilation, given by Brugmann, Kurze vergl. Gram. p. 242).

(i.) became r between vowels from 450 to 350 BCE (for the date see R. S. Conway, Verner’s Law in Italy, pp. 61-64), as in āra, next to O. Lat. āsa, generis from *geneses, Gr. γένεος; eram, erō for *esām, *esō, and so in the verb endings -erām, -erō, -erim. However, quite a few words entered Latin, partly from neighboring dialects, with -s- between vowels, after 350 BCE, when this change stopped, and so they show -s-, like rosa (probably from S. Oscan for *rodḭa “rose-bush,” cf. Gr. rose), cāseus, “cheese,” miser, a derogatory term next to Gr. disgusting (likely also borrowed from southern Italy), and many others, especially the participles in -sus (fūsus), where the -s- was -ss- at the time of the change of -s- to -r- (as in causa, see above). All efforts to explain the retention of -s- in other ways must be regarded as unsuccessful (e.g. the theory of accentual difference in Verner’s Law in Italy, or that of dissimilation, proposed by Brugmann, Kurze vergl. Gram. p. 242).

(ii.) sr became þr (= Eng. thr in throw) in pro-ethnic Italic, and this became initially fr- as in frīgus, Gr. ῥῖγος (Ind.-Eur. *srīgos), but medially -br-, as in funebris, from funus, stem funes-.

(ii.) sr became þr (= Eng. thr in throw) in pro-ethnic Italic, and this initially turned into fr- as in frīgus, Gr. chill (Ind.-Eur. *srīgos), but in the middle it became -br-, as in funebris, from funus, stem funes-.

(iii.) -rs-, ls- became -rr-, -ll-, as in ferre, velle, for *fer-se, *vel-se (cf. es-se).

(iii.) -rs-, ls- became -rr-, -ll-, as in ferre, velle, for *fer-se, *vel-se (cf. es-se).

(iv.) Before m, n, l, and v, -s- vanished, having previously caused the loss of any preceding plosive or -n-, and the preceding vowel, if short, was lengthened as in

(iv.) Before m, n, l, and v, -s- disappeared, which had earlier led to the loss of any preceding plosive or -n-, and if the preceding vowel was short, it was lengthened as in

prīmus from *prismos, Paelig. prismu, “prima,” beside pris-cus.

prīmus from *prismos, Paelig. prismu, “first,” beside pris-cus.

iūmentum from O. Lat. iouxmentum, older *ieugsmentom; cf. Gr. ζεῦγμα, ζύγον, Lat. iugum, iungo.

iūmentum from O. Lat. iouxmentum, older *ieugsmentom; cf. Gr. ζεῦγμα, ζύγον, Lat. iugum, iungo.

lūna from *leucsnā-, Praenest, losna, Zend raoχsna-; cf. Gr. λεῦκος, “white-ness” neut. e.g. λευκός, “white,” Lat. lūceō.

lūna from *leucsnā-, Praenest, losna, Zend raoχsna-; cf. Gr. white, "whiteness" neut. e.g. white, "white," Lat. lūceō.

tēlum from *tēns-lom or *tends-lom, trānāre from *trāns-nāre.

tēlum from *tēns-lom or *tends-lom, trānāre from *trāns-nāre.

sēvirī from *sex-virī, ēvehō from *ex-vehō, and so ē-mittō, ē-līdō, ē-numerō, and from these forms arose the proposition ē instead of ex.

sēvirī from *sex-virī, ēvehō from *ex-vehō, and so ē-mittō, ē-līdō, ē-numerō, and from these forms arose the proposition ē instead of ex.

(v.) Similarly -sd- became -d-, as in īdem from is-dem.

(v.) Similarly -sd- became -d-, as in īdem from is-dem.

(vi.) Before n-, m-, l-, initially s- disappeared, as in nūbo beside Old Church Slavonic snubiti, “to love, pay court to”; mīror beside Sans, smáyatē, “laughs,” Eng. smi-le; lūbricus beside Goth, sliupan, Eng. slip.

(vi.) Before n-, m-, l-, initially s- disappeared, as in nūbo next to Old Church Slavonic snubiti, “to love, pay court to”; mīror next to Sanskrit smáyatē, “laughs,” English smi-le; lūbricus next to Gothic sliupan, English slip.

(b) Latin -ss- arose from an original -t + t-, -d + t-, -dh + t- (except before -r), as in missus, earlier *mit-tos; tōnsus, earlier *tond-tos, but tonstrīx from *tond-trīx. After long vowels this -ss- became a single -s- some time before Cicero (who wrote caussa [see above], divissio, &c., but probably only pronounced them with -s-, since the -ss- came to be written single directly after his time).

(b) Latin -ss- came from an original -t + t-, -d + t-, -dh + t- (except before -r), as in missus, earlier *mit-tos; tōnsus, earlier *tond-tos, but tonstrīx from *tond-trīx. After long vowels, this -ss- became a single -s- sometime before Cicero (who wrote caussa [see above], divissio, &c., but probably only pronounced them with -s-, since the -ss- started being written as a single letter right after his time).

26. Of the Indo-European velars the breathed q was usually preserved in Latin with a labial addition of -- (as in sequor, Gr. ἕπομαι, Goth, saihvan, Eng. see; quod, Gr. ποδ-(απός), Eng. what); but the voiced Ƨ remained (as -gu-) only after -n- (unguo beside Ir. imb, “butter”) and (as g) before r, l, and u (as in gravis, Gr. βαρύς; glans, Gr. βάλανος; legūmen, Gr. λοβός, λεβίνθος). Elsewhere it became v, as in veniō (see § 23, ii.), nūdus from *novedos, Eng. naked. Hence bōs (Sans. gāus, Eng. cow) must be regarded as a farmer’s word borrowed from one of the country dialects (e.g. Sabine); the pure Latin would be *vōs, and its oblique cases, e.g. acc. *vovem, would be inconveniently close in sound to the word for sheep ovem.

26. In the Indo-European velars, the aspirated q was generally kept in Latin with an added -- (like in sequor, Gr. follow, Goth, saihvan, Eng. see; quod, Gr. ποδ-(απός), Eng. what); but the voiced Ƨ stayed (as -gu-) only after -n- (unguo next to Ir. imb, “butter”) and (as g) before r, l, and u (like in gravis, Gr. heavy; glans, Gr. acorn; legūmen, Gr. λοβός, λεβίνθος). In other cases, it became v, as in veniō (see § 23, ii.), nūdus from *novedos, Eng. naked. Therefore, bōs (Sans. gāus, Eng. cow) should be seen as a farmer’s term borrowed from one of the regional dialects (e.g. Sabine); the original Latin would be *vōs, and its oblique cases, e.g. acc. *vovem, would sound too similar to the word for sheep ovem.

27. The treatment of the Indo-European voiced aspirates (bh, dh, ḡh Ƨh) in Latin is one of the most marked characteristics of the language, which separates it from all the other Italic dialects, since the fricative sounds, which represented the Indo-European aspirates in pro-ethnic Italic, remained fricatives medially if they remained at all in that position in Oscan and Umbrian, whereas in Latin they were nearly always changed into voiced explosives. Thus—

27. The way Latin handles the Indo-European voiced aspirates (bh, dh, ḡh Ƨh) is one of the most distinct features of the language, setting it apart from all the other Italic dialects. In pro-ethnic Italic, the fricative sounds that represented the Indo-European aspirates remained fricatives in the middle position, if they existed at all in that spot in Oscan and Umbrian. However, in Latin, they almost always transformed into voiced explosives. Thus—

Ind.-Eur. bh: initially Lat. f- (ferō; Gr. φέρω).

Ind.-Eur. bh: initially Lat. f- (ferō; Gr. φέρω).

medially Lat. -b- (tibi; Umb. tefe; Sans, tubhy-(am), “to thee”; the same suffix in Gr. βίη-φι, &c.).

medially Lat. -b- (tibi; Umb. tefe; Sans, tubhy-(am), “to you”; the same suffix in Gr. βίη-φι, &c.).

Ind.-Eur. dh: initially Lat. f- (fa-c-ere, fē-c-ī; Gr. θετός (instead of *θατός), ἔθη-κα).

Ind.-Eur. dh: originally Latin f- (fa-c-ere, fē-c-ī; Greek adoptive (instead of *θατός), ἔθη-κα).

medially -d- (medius; Osc. mefio-; Gr. μέσσος, μέσος from *μεθιος); except after u (iubēre beside iussus for *ḭudh-tos; Sans. yốdhati, “rouses to battle”); before l (stabulum, but Umb. staflo-, with the suffix of Gr. οτέργηθρον, &c.); before or after r (verbum: Umb. verfale: Eng. word. Lat. glaber [v. inf].: Ger. glatt: Eng. glad).

medially -d- (medius; Osc. mefio-; Gr. middle, average from *drunken); except after u (iubēre beside iussus for *ḭudh-tos; Sans. yốdhati, “rouses to battle”); before l (stabulum, but Umb. staflo-, with the suffix of Gr. οτέργηθρον, &c.); before or after r (verbum: Umb. verfale: Eng. word. Lat. glaber [v. inf].: Ger. glatt: Eng. glad).

Ind.-Eur. ḡh: initially h- (humī: Gr. χαμαί); except before -u- (fundo: Gr. χέ(ϝ)ω, χύτρα).

Ind.-Eur. ḡh: initially h- (humī: Gr. χαμαί); except before -u- (fundo: Gr. χέ(ϝ)ω, pot).

medially -h- (veho: Gr. ἔχω, ὄχος; cf. Eng. wagon); except after -n- (fingere: Osc. feiho-, “wall”: Gr. θιγγάνω: Ind.-Eur. dheiĝh-, dhinĝh-); and before l (fīg(u)lus, from the same root).

medially -h- (veho: Gr. I have, shelter; cf. Eng. wagon); except after -n- (fingere: Osc. feiho-, “wall”: Gr. θιγγάνω: Ind.-Eur. dheiĝh-, dhinĝh-); and before l (fīg(u)lus, from the same root).

Ind.-Eur gṷh: initially f- (formus and furnus, “oven”, Gr. θερμός, θέρμη, cf. Ligurian Bormiō, “a place with hot springs,” Bormanus, “a god of hot springs”; fendō: Gr. θείνω, φόνος, πρόσ-φατος).

Ind.-Eur gṷh: originally f- (formus and furnus, “oven”, Gr. warm, warmth, compare Ligurian Bormiō, “a place with hot springs,” Bormanus, “a god of hot springs”; fendō: Gr. θείνω, φόνος, πρόσφατος).

medially v, -gu- or -g- just as Ind.-Eur. Ƨ (ninguere, nivem beside Gr. νίφα, νείφει; frāgrāre beside Gr. ὀσφραίνομαι [ὀσ- for ods-, cf. Lat. odor], a reduplicated verb from a root Ƨhra-).

medially v, -gu- or -g- just like Indo-European Ƨ (ninguere, nivem next to Greek νίφα, snowing; frāgrāre next to Greek I smell [ὀσ- for ods-, compare Latin odor], a reduplicated verb from a root Ƨhra-).

For the “non-labializing velars” (Hostis, conGius, Glaber) reference must be made to the fuller accounts in the handbooks.

For the “non-labializing velars” (Hostis, conGius, Glaber), you should check the more detailed explanations in the handbooks.

28. Authorities.—This summary account of the chief points in Latin phonology may serve as an introduction to its principles, and give some insight into the phonetic character of the language. For systematic study reference must be made to the standard books, Karl Brugmann, Grundriss der vergleichenden Grammatik der Indo-Germanischen Sprachen (vol. i., Lautlehre, 2nd ed. Strassburg, 1897; Eng. trans. of ed. 1 by Joseph Wright, Strassburg, 1888) and his Kurze vergleichende Grammatik (Strassburg, 1902); these contain still by far the best accounts of Latin; Max Niederman, Précis de phonétique du Latin (Paris, 1906), a very convenient handbook, excellently planned; F. Sommer, Lateinische Laut- und Flexionslehre (Heidelberg, 1902), containing many new conjectures; W. M. Lindsay, The Latin Language (Oxford, 1894), translated into German (with corrections) by Nohl (Leipzig, 1897), a most valuable collection of material, especially from the ancient grammarians, but not always accurate in phonology; F. Stolz, vol. i. of a joint Historische Grammatik d. lat. Sprache by Blase, Landgraf, Stolz and others (Leipzig, 1894); Neue-Wagener, Formenlehre d. lat. Sprache (3 vols., 3rd ed. 249 Leipzig, 1888, foll.); H. J. Roby’s Latin Grammar (from Plautus to Suetonius; London, 7th ed., 1896) contains a masterly collection of material, especially in morphology, which is still of great value. W. G. Hale and C. D. Buck’s Latin Grammar (Boston, 1903), though on a smaller scale, is of very great importance, as it contains the fruit of much independent research on the part of both authors; in the difficult questions of orthography it was, as late as 1907, the only safe guide.

28. Authorities.—This summary of the main points in Latin phonology can act as an introduction to its principles and offer some insight into the phonetic characteristics of the language. For a systematic study, refer to the standard texts: Karl Brugmann, Grundriss der vergleichenden Grammatik der Indo-Germanischen Sprachen (vol. i., Lautlehre, 2nd ed. Strassburg, 1897; English translation of ed. 1 by Joseph Wright, Strassburg, 1888) and his Kurze vergleichende Grammatik (Strassburg, 1902); these still provide the best accounts of Latin. Max Niederman’s Précis de phonétique du Latin (Paris, 1906) is a very convenient handbook, excellently structured; F. Sommer’s Lateinische Laut- und Flexionslehre (Heidelberg, 1902) includes many new theories; W. M. Lindsay’s The Latin Language (Oxford, 1894), translated into German (with corrections) by Nohl (Leipzig, 1897), is a highly valuable collection of material, particularly from ancient grammarians, though not always precise in phonology; F. Stolz’s volume i of a collaborative Historische Grammatik d. lat. Sprache by Blase, Landgraf, Stolz, and others (Leipzig, 1894); Neue-Wagener’s Formenlehre d. lat. Sprache (3 vols., 3rd ed. 249 Leipzig, 1888, etc.); H. J. Roby’s Latin Grammar (from Plautus to Suetonius; London, 7th ed., 1896) contains a masterful collection of material, particularly in morphology, which remains very valuable. W. G. Hale and C. D. Buck’s Latin Grammar (Boston, 1903), although on a smaller scale, is extremely important as it reflects a lot of independent research by both authors; in the challenging area of orthography, it was, as late as 1907, the only reliable guide.

II. Morphology

II. Morphology

In morphology the following are the most characteristic Latin innovations:—

In morphology, the most notable Latin innovations are:—

29. In nouns.

29. In nouns.

(i.) The complete loss of the dual number, save for a survival in the dialect of Praeneste (C.I.L. xiv. 2891, = Conway, Ital. Dial. p. 285, where Q. k. Cestio Q. f. seems to be nom. dual); so C.I.L. xi. 67065, T. C. Vomanio, see W. Schulze, Lat. Eigennamen, p. 117.

(i.) The total disappearance of the dual number, except for a remnant in the Praeneste dialect (C.I.L. xiv. 2891, = Conway, Ital. Dial. p. 285, where Q. k. Cestio Q. f. seems to be nominative dual); see C.I.L. xi. 67065, T. C. Vomanio, refer to W. Schulze, Lat. Eigennamen, p. 117.

(ii.) The introduction of new forms in the gen. sing, of the -o- stems (dominī), of the -ā- stems (mēnsae) and in the nom. plural of the same two declensions; innovations mostly derived from the pronominal declension.

(ii.) The introduction of new forms in the genitive singular for the -o- stems (dominī), of the -ā- stems (mēnsae), and in the nominative plural of the same two declensions; innovations mostly derived from the pronominal declension.

(iii.) The development of an adverbial formation out of what was either an instrumental or a locative of the -o- stems, as in longē. And here may be added the other adverbial developments, in -m (palam, sensim) probably accusative, and -iter, which is simply the accusative of iter, “way,” crystallized, as is shown especially by the fact that though in the end it attached itself particularly to adjectives of the third declension (molliter), it appears also from adjectives of the second declension whose meaning made their combination with iter especially natural, such as longiter, firmiter, largiter (cf. English straightway, longways). The only objections to this derivation which had any real weight (see F. Skutsch, De nominibus no- suffixi ope formatis, 1890, pp. 4-7) have been removed by Exon’s Law (§ 11), which supplies a clear reason why the contracted type constanter arose in and was felt to be proper to Participial adverbs, while firmiter and the like set the type for those formed from adjectives.

(iii.) The creation of an adverbial form from what was either an instrumental or a locative of the -o- stems, like longē. Additionally, we can mention the other adverbial forms in -m (palam, sensim), which probably come from the accusative, and -iter, which is simply the accusative of iter, meaning “way,” solidified. This is particularly evident because, although it mainly attached to adjectives in the third declension (molliter), it also appears with adjectives in the second declension where the meaning naturally paired with iter, such as longiter, firmiter, largiter (cf. English straightway, longways). The only significant objections to this derivation (see F. Skutsch, De nominibus no- suffixi ope formatis, 1890, pp. 4-7) have been addressed by Exon’s Law (§ 11), which provides a clear explanation for the emergence of the contracted form constanter, which was considered appropriate for Participial adverbs, while firmiter and similar forms set the standard for those created from adjectives.

(iv.) The development of the so-called fifth declension by a re-adjustment of the declension of the nouns formed with the suffix --: ia- (which appears, for instance, in all the Greek feminine participles, and in a more abstract sense in words like māteriēs) to match the inflexion of two old root-nouns rēs and diēs, the stems of which were originally rēḭ- (Sans. rās, rāyas, cf. Lat. reor) and diēṷ-.

(iv.) The development of the so-called fifth declension through a re-adjustment of the declension of nouns formed with the suffix --: ia- (which appears, for example, in all Greek feminine participles, and in a more abstract sense in words like māteriēs) to align with the inflection of two ancient root-nouns rēs and diēs, the stems of which were originally rēḭ- (Sanskrit rās, rāyas, cf. Latin reor) and diēṷ-.

(v.) The disuse of the -ti- suffix in an abstract sense. The great number of nouns which Latin inherited formed with this suffix were either (1) marked as abstract by the addition of the further suffix -ōn- (as in natio beside the Gr. γνὴσι-ος, &c.) or else (2) confined to a concrete sense; thus vectis, properly “a carrying, lifting,” came to mean “pole, lever”; ratis, properly a “reckoning, devising,” came to mean “an (improvised) raft” (contrast ratiō); postis, a “placing,” came to mean “post.”

(v.) The loss of the -ti- suffix in an abstract sense. The many nouns that Latin inherited formed with this suffix were either (1) marked as abstract by adding the further suffix -ōn- (like natio next to the Gr. Unrecognized term, etc.) or (2) limited to a concrete meaning; for example, vectis, originally meaning “a carrying, lifting,” came to mean “pole, lever”; ratis, originally meaning “a reckoning, devising,” came to mean “an (improvised) raft” (in contrast to ratiō); postis, meaning “a placing,” came to mean “post.”

(vi.) The confusion of the consonantal stems with stems ending in -ĭ-. This was probably due very largely to the forms assumed through phonetic changes by the gen. sing. and the nom. and acc. plural. Thus at say 300 B.C. the inflexions probably were:

(vi.) The mix-up of consonantal stems with those ending in -ĭ-. This was likely caused mainly by the forms that resulted from phonetic changes in the genitive singular and the nominative and accusative plural. So around 300 BCE, the inflections were probably:

  conson. stem -ĭ- stem
Nom. plur. *rēg-ĕs host-ēs
Acc. plur. rĕg-ēs host-īs

The confusing difference of signification of the long -ēs ending led to a levelling of these and other forms in the two paradigms.

The confusing difference in meaning of the long -ēs ending caused a simplification of these and other forms in the two paradigms.

(vii.) The disuse of the u declension (Gr. ἡδύς, στάχυς) in adjectives; this group in Latin, thanks to its feminine form (Sans. fem. svādvī, “sweet”), was transferred to the i declension (suavis, gravis, levis, dulcis).

(vii.) The decline of the u declension (Gr. sweet, ear of grain) in adjectives; this group in Latin, due to its feminine form (Sans. fem. svādvī, “sweet”), was moved to the i declension (suavis, gravis, levis, dulcis).

30. In verbs.

30. In verbs.

(i.) The disuse of the distinction between the personal endings of primary and secondary tenses, the -t and -nt, for instance, being used for the third person singular and plural respectively in all tenses and moods of the active. This change was completed after the archaic period, since we find in the oldest inscriptions -d regularly used in the third person singular of past tenses, e.g. deded, feced in place of the later dedit, fecit; and since in Oscan the distinction was preserved to the end, both in singular and plural, e.g. faamat (perhaps meaning “auctionatur”), but deded (“dedit”). It is commonly assumed from the evidence of Greek and Sanskrit (Gr. ἕστι, Sans. asti beside Lat. est) that the primary endings in Latin have lost a final -i, partly or wholly by some phonetic change.

(i.) The distinction between the personal endings of primary and secondary tenses has fallen out of use, with -t and -nt being used for the third person singular and plural, respectively, across all tenses and moods in the active voice. This change took place after the archaic period, as the oldest inscriptions regularly show -d used in the third person singular of past tenses, for example, deded and feced instead of the later dedit and fecit; and in Oscan, the distinction was maintained until the end, both in singular and plural, as seen in faamat (possibly meaning “auctionatur”), but deded (“dedit”). It is commonly believed, based on evidence from Greek and Sanskrit (Gr. There is, Sans. asti alongside Lat. est), that the primary endings in Latin lost a final -i, either partially or entirely through some phonetic change.

(ii.) The non-thematic conjugation is almost wholly lost, surviving only in a few forms of very common use, est, “is”; ēst, “eats”; volt, “wills,” &c.

(ii.) The non-thematic conjugation is mostly gone, surviving only in a few very common forms, est, “is”; ēst, “eats”; volt, “wills,” etc.

(iii.) The complete fusion of the aorist and perfect forms, and in the same tense the fusion of active and middle endings; thus tutudī, earlier *tutudai, is a true middle perfect; dīxī is an s aorist with the same ending attached; dīxit is an aorist active; tutudisti is a conflation of perfect and aorist with a middle personal ending.

(iii.) The complete merging of the aorist and perfect forms, and within the same tense, the blending of active and middle endings; thus tutudī, previously *tutudai, is a genuine middle perfect; dīxī is an s aorist with the same ending attached; dīxit is an aorist active; tutudisti is a combination of perfect and aorist with a middle personal ending.

(iv.) The development of perfects in - and -, derived partly from true perfects of roots ending in v or u, e.g. mōvī ruī. For the origin of monuī see Exon, Hermathena (1901), xi. 396 sq.

(iv.) The evolution of perfect tenses in - and - comes partly from actual perfect forms of roots ending in v or u, for example, mōvī and ruī. For the background of monuī, see Exon, Hermathena (1901), xi. 396 sq.

(v.) The complete fusion of conjunctive and optative into a single mood, the subjunctive; regam, &c., are conjunctive forms, whereas rexerim, rexissem are certainly and regerem most probably optative; the origin of amem and the like is still doubtful. Notice, however, that true conjunctive forms were often used as futures, regēs, reget, &c., and also the simple thematic conjunctive in forms like erō, rexerō, &c.

(v.) The complete merging of the conjunctive and optative moods into one, the subjunctive; regam, and so on, are conjunctive forms, while rexerim, rexissem are definitely optative, and regerem is probably optative; the origin of amem and similar forms is still uncertain. However, it's worth noting that true conjunctive forms were often used as future tenses, like regēs, reget, and so on, as well as the simple thematic conjunctive in forms like erō, rexerō, and so on.

(vi.) The development of the future in -bo and imperfect in -bam by compounding some form of the verb, possibly the Present Participle with forms from the root of fuī, *amans-fuo becoming amabō, *amans-fṷām becoming amābam at a very early period of Latin; see F. Skutsch, Atti d. Congresso Storico Intern. (1903), vol. ii. p. 191.

(vi.) The formation of the future tense in -bo and the imperfect tense in -bam by combining some form of the verb, likely the Present Participle with forms from the root of fuī, *amans-fuo evolving into amabō, *amans-fṷām evolving into amābam at a very early stage of Latin; see F. Skutsch, Atti d. Congresso Storico Intern. (1903), vol. ii. p. 191.

(vii.) We have already noticed the rise of the passive in -r (§ 5 (d)). Observe, however, that several middle forms have been pressed into the service, partly because the -r- in them which had come from -s- seemed to give them a passive colour (legere = Gr. λέγε(σ)ο, Attic λέγου). The interesting forms in -minī are a confusion of two distinct inflexions, namely, an old infinitive in -menai, used for the imperative, and the participial -menoi, masculine, -menai, feminine, used with the verb “to be” in place of the ordinary inflexions. Since these forms had all come to have the same shape, through phonetic change, their meanings were fused; the imperative forms being restricted to the plural, and the participial forms being restricted to the second person.

(vii.) We have already noticed the rise of the passive in -r (§ 5 (d)). However, it’s worth noting that several middle forms have been utilized, partly because the -r in them, which originated from -s-, seemed to give them a passive connotation (legere = Gr. λέγε(σ)ο, Attic λέγου). The interesting forms in -minī result from a mix of two different inflections: an old infinitive in -menai that was used for the imperative, and the participial -menoi, masculine, -menai, feminine, used with the verb “to be” instead of the regular inflections. As these forms all ended up looking the same due to phonetic changes, their meanings merged; the imperative forms were limited to the plural, while the participial forms were limited to the second person.

31. Past Participle Passive.—Next should be mentioned the great development in the use of the participle in -tos (factus, fusus, &c.). This participle was taken with sum to form the perfect tenses of the passive, in which, thanks partly to the fusion of perfect and aorist active, a past aorist sense was also evolved. This reacted on the participle itself giving it a prevailingly past colour, but its originally timeless use survives in many places, e.g. in the participle ratus, which has as a rule no past sense, and more definitely still in such passages as Vergil, Georg. i. 206 (vectis), Aen. vi. 22 (ductis), both of which passages demand a present sense. It is to be noticed also that in the earliest Latin, as in Greek and Sanskrit, the passive meaning, though the commonest, is not universal. Many traces of this survive in classical Latin, of which the chief are

31. Past Participle Passive.—Next, we should mention the significant growth in the use of the participle ending in -tos (factus, fusus, etc.). This participle was combined with sum to form the perfect tenses of the passive voice, where, partly due to the merging of perfect and aorist active forms, a past aorist meaning also emerged. This development affected the participle itself, making it primarily have a past implication, but its original timeless usage still exists in many instances, e.g. in the participle ratus, which generally does not carry a past meaning, and even more clearly in passages like Vergil, Georg. i. 206 (vectis), Aen. vi. 22 (ductis), both of which require a present meaning. It's also worth noting that in early Latin, as in Greek and Sanskrit, the passive meaning, while the most common, is not universal. Many remnants of this can be seen in classical Latin, the main ones being

1. The active meaning of deponent participles, in spite of the fact that some of them (e.g. adeptus, ēmēnsus, expertus) have also a passive sense, and

1. The active meaning of deponent participles, even though some of them (e.g. adeptus, emēnsus, expertus) also have a passive meaning, and

2. The familiar use of these participles by the Augustan poets with an accusative attached (galeam indutus, traiectus lora). Here no doubt the use of the Greek middle influenced the Latin poets, but no doubt they thought also that they were reviving an old Latin idiom.

2. The common use of these participles by the Augustan poets with an accusative attached (galeam indutus, traiectus lora). Here, it's likely that the influence of the Greek middle played a role in shaping the Latin poets' choices, but they probably also believed they were bringing back an old Latin expression.

32. Future Participle.—Finally may be mentioned together (a) the development of the future participle active (in -ūrus, never so freely used as the other participles, being rare in the ablative absolute even in Tacitus) from an old infinitive in -ūrum (“scio inimicos meos hoc dicturum,” C. Gracchus (and others) apud Gell. 1. 7, and Priscian ix. 864 (p. 475 Keil), which arose from combining the dative or locative of the verbal noun in -tu with an old infinitive esom “esse” which survives in Oscan, *dictu esom becoming dicturum. This was discovered by J. P. Postgate (Class. Review, v. 301, and Idg. Forschungen iv. 252). (b) From the same infinitival accusative with the post-position -, meaning “to,” “for,” “in” (cf. quandō for *quam-do, and Eng. to, Germ, zu) was formed the so-called gerund agen-dō, “for doing,” “in doing,” which was taken for a Case, and so gave rise to the accusative and genitive in -dum and -. The form in -dō still lives in Italian as an indeclinable present participle. The modal and purposive meanings of - appear in the uses of the gerund.

32. Future Participle.—Lastly, we can mention together (a) the development of the future active participle (in -ūrus, which is never used as freely as the other participles and is rare in the ablative absolute, even in Tacitus) from an old infinitive in -ūrum (“I know my enemies will say this,” C. Gracchus (and others) apud Gell. 1. 7, and Priscian ix. 864 (p. 475 Keil), which came from combining the dative or locative of the verbal noun in -tu with an old infinitive esom “to be,” which still exists in Oscan, *dictu esom becoming dicturum. This was discovered by J. P. Postgate (Class. Review, v. 301, and Idg. Forschungen iv. 252). (b) From the same infinitival accusative with the post-position -, meaning “to,” “for,” “in” (cf. quandō for *quam-do, and English to, German zu), the so-called gerund agen-dō was formed, meaning “for doing,” “in doing,” which was treated as a case, thus leading to the accusative and genitive forms in -dum and -. The form in -dō still exists in Italian as an indeclinable present participle. The modal and purposive meanings of - are reflected in the uses of the gerund.

The authorities giving a fuller account of Latin morphology are the same as those cited in § 28 above, save that the reader must consult the second volume of Brugmann’s Grundriss, which in the English translation (by Conway and Rouse, Strassburg, 1890-1896) is divided into volumes ii, iii. and iv.; and that Niedermann does not deal with morphology.

The authorities providing a more detailed explanation of Latin morphology are the same as those mentioned in § 28 above, except that the reader should refer to the second volume of Brugmann’s Grundriss, which in the English translation (by Conway and Rouse, Strassburg, 1890-1896) is split into volumes ii, iii, and iv.; and that Niedermann does not cover morphology.

III. Syntax

III. Syntax

The chief innovations of syntax developed in Latin may now be briefly noted.

The main innovations in syntax that were developed in Latin can now be briefly mentioned.

33. In nouns.

33. In nouns.

(i.) Latin restricted the various Cases to more sharply defined uses than either Greek or Sanskrit; the free use of the internal accusative in Greek (e.g. ἁβρὸν βαίνειν, τυφλὸς τὰ ὦτα) is strange to Latin, save in poetical imitations of Greek; and so is the freedom of the Sanskrit instrumental, which often covers meanings expressed in Latin by cum, ab, inter.

(i.) Latin assigned the different cases to more clearly defined uses than either Greek or Sanskrit; the unrestricted use of the internal accusative in Greek (e.g. Delicate steps, blind ears) is unusual for Latin, except in poetic imitations of Greek; likewise, the flexibility of the Sanskrit instrumental often conveys meanings in Latin expressed by cum, ab, inter.

(ii.) The syncretism of the so-called ablative case, which combines the uses of (a) the true ablative which ended in -d (O. Lat. praidād); (b) the instrumental sociative (plural forms like dominīs, the ending being that of Sans. çivāiş); and (c) the locative (noct-e, “at night”; itiner-e, “on the road,” with the ending of Greek ἐλπίδ-ι). The so-called absolute construction is mainly derived from the second of these, since it is regularly attached fairly closely to the subject of the clause in which it stands, and when accompanied by a passive participle most commonly denotes an action performed by that subject. But the other two sources cannot be altogether excluded (orto sole, “starting from sunrise”; campo patente, “on, in sight of, the open plain”).

(ii.) The mix of what’s known as the ablative case combines the uses of (a) the true ablative which ended in -d (O. Lat. praidād); (b) the instrumental sociative (plural forms like dominīs, with an ending similar to Sans. çivāiş); and (c) the locative (noct-e, “at night”; itiner-e, “on the road,” sharing an ending with Greek hope). The so-called absolute construction mainly comes from the second of these, as it is usually quite closely linked to the subject of the clause it appears in, and when paired with a passive participle, it most often indicates an action done by that subject. However, the other two sources cannot be completely ruled out (orto sole, “starting from sunrise”; campo patente, “on, in sight of, the open plain”).

34. In verbs.

34. In action words.

(i.) The rich development and fine discrimination of the uses of the subjunctive mood, especially (a) in indirect questions (based on 250 direct deliberative questions and not fully developed by the time of Plautus, who constantly writes such phrases as dic quis es for the Ciceronian dic quis sis); (b) after the relative of essential definition (non is sum qui negem) and the circumstantial cum (“at such a time as that”). The two uses (a) and (b) with (c) the common Purpose and Consequence-clauses spring from the “prospective” or “anticipatory” meaning of the mood. (d) Observe further its use in subordinate oblique clauses (irascitur quod abierim, “he is angry because, as he asserts, I went away”). This and all the uses of the mood in oratio obliqua are derived partly from (a) and (b) and partly from the (e) Unreal Jussive of past time (Non illi argentum redderem? Non redderes, “Ought I not to have returned the money to him?” “You certainly ought not to have,” or, more literally, “You were not to”).

(i.) The rich development and clear distinction in the uses of the subjunctive mood, especially (a) in indirect questions (which are based on 250 direct deliberative questions and were not fully developed by the time of Plautus, who often writes phrases like dic quis es instead of the Ciceronian dic quis sis); (b) after the relative of essential definition (non is sum qui negem) and the circumstantial cum (“at a time like that”). These two uses (a) and (b) along with (c) the common Purpose and Consequence clauses arise from the “prospective” or “anticipatory” meaning of the mood. (d) Additionally, note its use in subordinate oblique clauses (irascitur quod abierim, “he is angry because, as he claims, I left”). This and all uses of the mood in oratio obliqua come partly from (a) and (b) as well as from the (e) Unreal Jussive of past time (Non illi argentum redderem? Non redderes, “Should I not have returned the money to him? You definitely should not have,” or, more literally, “You were not meant to”).

On this interesting chapter of Latin syntax see W. G. Hale’s “Cum-constructions” (Cornell University Studies in Classical Philology, No. 1, 1887-1889), and The Anticipatory Subjunctive (Chicago, 1894).

On this interesting chapter of Latin syntax, check out W. G. Hale’s “Cum-constructions” (Cornell University Studies in Classical Philology, No. 1, 1887-1889), and The Anticipatory Subjunctive (Chicago, 1894).

(ii.) The complex system of oratio obliqua with the sequence of tenses (on the growth of the latter see Conway, Livy II., Appendix ii., Cambridge, 1901).

(ii.) The complicated system of indirect speech along with the sequence of tenses (for more on the development of the latter, see Conway, Livy II., Appendix ii., Cambridge, 1901).

(iii.) The curious construction of the gerundive (ad capiendam urbem), originally a present (and future?) passive participle, but restricted in its use by being linked with the so-called gerund (see § 32, b). The use, but probably not the restriction, appears in Oscan and Umbrian.

(iii.) The interesting formation of the gerundive (ad capiendam urbem), originally a present (and possibly future?) passive participle, but limited in its application by being associated with the so-called gerund (see § 32, b). The usage, though likely not the limitation, can be seen in Oscan and Umbrian.

(iv.) The favourite use of the impersonal passive has already been mentioned (§ 5, iv.).

(iv.) The preferred use of the impersonal passive has already been mentioned (§ 5, iv.).

35. The chief authorities for the study of Latin syntax are: Brugmann’s Kurze vergl. Grammatik, vol. ii. (see § 28); Landgraf’s Historische lat. Syntax (vol. ii. of the joint Hist. Gram., see § 28); Hale and Buck’s Latin Grammar (see § 28); Draeger’s Historische lat. Syntax, 2 vols. (2nd ed., Leipzig, 1878-1881), useful but not always trustworthy; the Latin sections in Delbrück’s Vergleichende Syntax, being the third volume of Brugmann’s Grundriss (§ 28).

35. The main sources for studying Latin syntax are: Brugmann’s Kurze vergl. Grammatik, vol. ii. (see § 28); Landgraf’s Historische lat. Syntax (vol. ii. of the joint Hist. Gram., see § 28); Hale and Buck’s Latin Grammar (see § 28); Draeger’s Historische lat. Syntax, 2 vols. (2nd ed., Leipzig, 1878-1881), helpful but not always reliable; and the Latin sections in Delbrück’s Vergleichende Syntax, which is the third volume of Brugmann’s Grundriss (§ 28).

IV. Importation of Greek Words

IV. Importing Greek Words

36. It is convenient, before proceeding to describe the development of the language in its various epochs, to notice briefly the debt of its vocabulary to Greek, since it affords an indication of the steadily increasing influence of Greek life and literature upon the growth of the younger idiom. Corssen (Lat. Aussprache, ii. 814) pointed out four different stages in the process, and though they are by no means sharply divided in time, they do correspond to different degrees and kinds of intercourse.

36. Before we dive into the development of the language across its various stages, it's helpful to take a quick look at how much its vocabulary owes to Greek. This highlights the growing influence of Greek culture and literature on the evolution of the younger language. Corssen (Lat. Aussprache, ii. 814) identified four distinct stages in this process, and while these stages aren't sharply defined in terms of time, they do reflect different levels and types of interaction.

(a) The first represents the period of the early intercourse of Rome with the Greek states, especially with the colonies in the south of Italy and Sicily. To this stage belong many names of nations, countries and towns, as Siculi, Tarentum, Graeci, Achivi, Poenus; and also names of weights and measures, articles of industry and terms connected with navigation, as mina, talentum, purpura, patina, ancora, aplustre, nausea. Words like amurca, scutula, pessulus, balineum, tarpessita represent familiarity with Greek customs and bear equally the mark of naturalization. To these may be added names of gods or heroes, like Apollo, Pollux and perhaps Hercules. These all became naturalized Latin words and were modified by the phonetic changes which took place in the Latin language after they had come into it (cf. §§ 9-27 supra). (b) The second stage was probably the result of the closer intercourse resulting from the conquest of southern Italy, and the wars in Sicily, and of the contemporary introduction of imitations of Greek literature into Rome, with its numerous references to Greek life and culture. It is marked by the free use of hybrid forms, whether made by the addition of Latin suffixes to Greek stems as ballistārius, hēpatārius, subbasilicānus, sycophantiōsus, cōmissārī or of Greek suffixes to Latin stems as plāgipatidas, pernōnides; or by derivation, as thermopōtāre, supparasītāri; or by composition as ineuschēmē, thyrsigerae, flagritribae, scrophipascī. The character of many of these words shows that the comic poets who coined them must have been able to calculate upon a fair knowledge of colloquial Greek on the part of a considerable portion of their audience. The most remarkable instance of this is supplied by the burlesque lines in Plautus (Pers. 702 seq.), where Sagaristio describes himself as

(a) The first period represents the early interactions between Rome and the Greek states, especially the colonies in southern Italy and Sicily. This stage features many names of nations, regions, and cities, such as Siculi, Tarentum, Graeci, Achivi, Poenus; as well as names of weights and measures, industries, and navigation terms, including mina, talentum, purpura, patina, ancora, aplustre, nausea. Words like amurca, scutula, pessulus, balineum, tarpessita show familiarity with Greek customs and indicate their naturalization into Latin. Additionally, there are names of gods or heroes, such as Apollo, Pollux, and possibly Hercules. All these became recognized Latin words and were altered by the phonetic changes that occurred in the Latin language after they were adopted (cf. §§ 9-27 supra). (b) The second stage likely emerged from the closer exchanges following the conquest of southern Italy and the wars in Sicily, along with the introduction of Greek literature imitations into Rome that included numerous references to Greek life and culture. This stage is characterized by the free use of hybrid forms, whether created by adding Latin suffixes to Greek stems, such as ballistārius, hēpatārius, subbasilicānus, sycophantiōsus, cōmissārī, or Greek suffixes to Latin stems like plāgipatidas, pernōnides; or by derivation, as in thermopōtāre, supparasītāri; or by composition, such as ineuschēmē, thyrsigerae, flagritribae, scrophipascī. The nature of many of these words indicates that the comic poets who created them must have relied on a fair level of colloquial Greek knowledge among a significant portion of their audience. A notable example of this is found in Plautus (Pers. 702 seq.), where Sagaristio describes himself as

Vaniloquidorus, Virginisvendonides,

Vaniloquidorus, Virginisvendonides,

Nugipiloquides, Argentumexterebronides,

Nugipiloquides, Argentumexterebronides,

Tedigniloquides, Nummosexpalponides,

Tedigniloquides, Nummosexpalponides,

Quodsemelarripides, Nunquameripides.

Quodsemelarripides, Nunquameripides.

During this period Greek words are still generally inflected according to the Latin usage.

During this period, Greek words are still typically inflected based on Latin usage.

(c) But with Accius (see below) begins a third stage, in which the Greek inflexion is frequently preserved, e.g. Hectora, Oresten, Cithaeron; and from this time forward the practice wavers. Cicero generally prefers the Latin case-endings, defending, e.g., Piraeeum as against Piraeea (ad Att. vii. 3, 7), but not without some fluctuation, while Varro takes the opposite side, and prefers poëmasin to the Ciceronian poëmatis. By this time also y and z were introduced, and the representation of the Greek aspirates by th, ph, ch, so that words newly borrowed from the Greek could be more faithfully reproduced. This is equally true whatever was the precise nature of the sound which at that period the Greek aspirates had reached in their secular process of change from pure aspirates (as in Eng. ant-hill, &c.) to fricatives (like Eng. th in thin). (See Arnold and Conway, The Restored Pronunciation of Greek and Latin, 4th ed., Cambridge, 1908, p. 21.)

(c) But with Accius (see below) starts a third phase, where the Greek inflection is often kept, e.g. Hectora, Oresten, Cithaeron; and from this point on, the practice becomes inconsistent. Cicero usually favors the Latin case endings, defending Piraeeum against Piraeea (ad Att. vii. 3, 7), but not without some variation, while Varro takes the opposite stance and prefers poëmasin over the Ciceronian poëmatis. By this time, y and z were also added, and Greek aspirates were represented by th, ph, ch, allowing newly borrowed Greek words to be more accurately reflected. This holds true regardless of the exact nature of the sound that the Greek aspirates had reached during their gradual transformation from pure aspirates (as in Eng. ant-hill, etc.) to fricatives (like the Eng. th in thin). (See Arnold and Conway, The Restored Pronunciation of Greek and Latin, 4th ed., Cambridge, 1908, p. 21.)

(d) A fourth stage is marked by the practice of the Augustan poets, who, especially when writing in imitation of Greek originals, freely use the Greek inflexions, such as Arcaděs, Tethŷ, Aegida, Echūs, &c. Horace probably always used the Latin form in his Satires and Epistles, the Greek in his Odes. Later prose writers for the most part followed the example of his Odes. It must be added, however, in regard to these literary borrowings that it is not quite clear whether in this fourth class, and even in the unmodified forms in the preceding class, the words had really any living use in spoken Latin.

(d) The fourth stage is characterized by the work of the Augustan poets, who, especially when imitating Greek originals, frequently use Greek inflections like Arcaděs, Tethŷ, Aegida, Echūs, etc. Horace probably always used the Latin form in his Satires and Epistles, but the Greek form in his Odes. Later prose writers mainly followed the example set by his Odes. However, it's important to note that regarding these literary borrowings, it is unclear whether in this fourth class, and even in the unmodified forms from the previous class, these words had any actual use in spoken Latin.

V. Pronunciation

V. Pronunciation

This appears the proper place for a rapid survey of the pronunciation1 of the Latin language, as spoken in its best days.

This seems like the right time for a quick overview of the pronunciation1 of the Latin language, as it was spoken at its peak.

37. Consonants.—(i.) Back palatal. Breathed plosive c, pronounced always as k (except that in some early inscriptions—probably none much later, if at all later, than 300 B.C.—the character is used also for g) until about the 7th century after Christ. K went out of use at an early period, except in a few old abbreviations for words in which it had stood before a, e.g., kal. for kalendae. Q, always followed by the consonantal u, except in a few old inscriptions, in which it is used for c before the vowel u, e.g. pequnia. X, an abbreviation for cs; xs is, however, sometimes found. Voiced plosive g, pronounced as in English gone, but never as in English gem before about the 6th century after Christ. Aspirate h, the rough breathing as in English.

37. Consonants.—(i.) Back palatal. The voiced plosive c is always pronounced as k (although in some early inscriptions—likely none later than 300 BCE—the character is also used for g) until about the 7th century AD. K fell out of use early on, except in a few old abbreviations for words where it had appeared before a, for example, kal. for kalendae. Q, which is always followed by the consonantal u, except in a few old inscriptions where it's used for c before the vowel u, for instance, pequnia. X is an abbreviation for cs; however, xs can sometimes be found. The voiced plosive g is pronounced like the English gone, but never like the English gem before around the 6th century AD. The aspirate h represents a rough breathing sound, similar to what is used in English.

(ii.) Palatal.—The consonantal i, like the English y; it is only in late inscriptions that we find, in spellings like Zanuario, Giove, any definite indication of a pronunciation like the English j. The precise date of the change is difficult to determine (see Lindsay’s Latin Lang. p. 49), especially as we may, in isolated cases, have before us merely a dialectic variation; see Paeligni.

(ii.) Palatal.—The consonantal i, similar to the English y; it's only in later inscriptions that we see spellings like Zanuario, Giove providing any clear signs of a pronunciation like the English j. Pinpointing the exact time of the change is tricky (see Lindsay’s Latin Lang. p. 49), especially since in some isolated cases, we might just be looking at a dialect variation; see Paeligni.

(iii.) Lingual.r as in English, but probably produced more with the point of the tongue. l similarly more dental than in English. s always breathed (as Eng. ce in ice). z, which is only found in the transcription of Greek words in and after the time of Cicero, as dz or zz.

(iii.) Lingual.r as in English, but probably produced more with the tip of the tongue. l is similarly more dental than in English. s is always pronounced with a breathy sound (like Eng. ce in ice). z, which appears only in the transcription of Greek words from and after the time of Cicero, is represented as dz or zz.

(iv.) Dental.—Breathed, t as in English. Voiced, d as in English; but by the end of the 4th century di before a vowel was pronounced like our j (cf. diurnal and journal). Nasal, n as in English; but also (like the English n) a guttural nasal (ng) before a guttural. Apparently it was very lightly pronounced, and easily fell away before s.

(iv.) Dental. — Breathed, t as in English. Voiced, d as in English; but by the end of the 4th century, di before a vowel was pronounced like our j (see diurnal and journal). Nasal, n as in English; but also (like the English n) a guttural nasal (ng) before a guttural. It seems that it was pronounced very lightly and often dropped before s.

(v.) Labial.—Breathed, p as in English. Voiced, b as in English; but occasionally in inscriptions of the later empire v is written for b, showing that in some cases b had already acquired the fricative sound of the contemporary β (see § 24, iii.). b before a sharp s was pronounced p, e.g. in urbs. Nasal, m as in English, but very slightly pronounced at the end of a word. Spirant, v like the ou in French oui, but later approximating to the w heard in some parts of Germany, Ed. Sievers, Grundzüge d. Phonetik, ed. 4, p. 117, i.e. a labial v, not (like the English v) a labio-dental v.

(v.) Labial.—Breathed, p as in English. Voiced, b as in English; but sometimes in later empire inscriptions, v is used instead of b, indicating that in some situations, b had started to take on the fricative sound of the modern β (see § 24, iii.). b before a sharp s was pronounced p, e.g. in urbs. Nasal, m as in English, but pronounced very lightly at the end of a word. Spirant, v sounded like the ou in French oui, but later evolving to the w heard in some regions of Germany, Ed. Sievers, Grundzüge d. Phonetik, ed. 4, p. 117, i.e. a labial v, not (like the English v) a labio-dental v.

(vi.) Labio-dental.—Breathed fricative, f as in English.

(vi.) Labio-dental.—Voiced fricative, f as in English.

38. Vowels.ā, ū, ī, as the English ah, oo, ee; ō, a sound coming nearer to Eng. aw than to Eng. ō; ē a close Italian ē, nearly as the a of Eng. mate, ée of Fr. passée. The short sound of the vowels was not always identical in quality with the long sound. ă was pronounced as in the French chatte, ŭ nearly as in Eng. pull, ĭ nearly as in pit, ŏ as in dot, ĕ nearly as in pet. The diphthongs were produced by pronouncing in rapid succession the vowels of which they were composed, according to the above scheme. This gives, au somewhat broader than ou in house; eu like ow in the “Yankee” pronunciation of town; ae like the vowel in hat lengthened, with perhaps somewhat more approximation to the i in wine; oe, a diphthongal sound approximating to Eng. oi; ui, as the French oui.

38. Vowels.ā, ū, ī, like the English ah, oo, ee; ō, a sound closer to Eng. aw than to Eng. ō; ē is a close Italian ē, almost like the a in Eng. mate, ée in Fr. passée. The short vowel sounds were not always exactly the same in quality as the long sounds. ă was pronounced like in the French chatte, ŭ is similar to Eng. pull, ĭ like in pit, ŏ as in dot, ĕ was pronounced similarly to pet. The diphthongs were created by quickly saying the vowels they were made up of, following the scheme above. This results in au being somewhat broader than ou in house; eu is like ow in the "Yankee" pronunciation of town; ae sounds like the vowel in hat but longer, perhaps slightly closer to the i in wine; oe produces a sound nearing Eng. oi; ui sounds like the French oui.

To this it should be added that the Classical Association, acting 251 on the advice of a committee of Latin scholars, has recommended for the diphthongs ae and oe the pronunciation of English i (really ai) in wine and oi in boil, sounds which they undoubtedly had in the time of Plautus and probably much later, and which for practical use in teaching have been proved far the best.

To this, it should be noted that the Classical Association, based on recommendations from a committee of Latin experts, has suggested pronouncing the diphthongs ae and oe like the English i (actually like ai in wine and oi in boil), sounds that were definitely used in the time of Plautus and likely well beyond, and which have been shown to be the most effective for teaching purposes. 251

VI. The Language As Recorded

VI. The Language Documented

39. Passing now to a survey of the condition of the language at various epochs and in the different authors, we find the earliest monument of it yet discovered in a donative inscription on a fibula or brooch found in a tomb of the 7th century B.C. at Praeneste. It runs “Manios med fhefhaked Numasioi,” i.e. “Manios made me for Numasios.” The use of f (fh) to denote the sound of Latin f supplied the explanation of the change of the symbol f from its Greek value (= Eng. w) to its Latin value f, and shows the Chalcidian Greek alphabet in process of adaptation to the needs of Latin (see Writing). The reduplicated perfect, its 3rd sing. ending -ed, the dative masculine in -oi (this is one of the only two recorded examples in Latin), the -s- between vowels (§ 25, 1), and the -a- in what was then (see §§ 9, 10) certainly an unaccented syllable and the accusative med, are all interesting marks of antiquity.2

39. Now looking at the state of the language at different times and among various authors, we see the earliest evidence found in a donation inscription on a brooch discovered in a tomb from the 7th century BCE in Praeneste. It reads, “Manios med fhefhaked Numasioi,” i.e. “Manios made me for Numasios.” The use of f (fh) to represent the sound of Latin f explains the shift of the symbol f from its Greek value (= Eng. w) to its Latin value f, and demonstrates the Chalcidian Greek alphabet adapting to the needs of Latin (see Writing). The reduplicated perfect, the 3rd person singular ending -ed, the masculine dative in -oi (this is one of only two recorded examples in Latin), the -s- between vowels (§ 25, 1), and the -a- in what was definitely (see §§ 9, 10) an unstressed syllable and the accusative med, all present interesting signs of antiquity.2

40. The next oldest fragment of continuous Latin is furnished by a vessel dug up in the valley between the Quirinal and the Viminal early in 1880. The vessel is of a dark brown clay, and consists of three small round pots, the sides of which are connected together. All round this vessel runs an inscription, in three clauses, two nearly continuous, the third written below; the writing is from right to left, and is still clearly legible; the characters include one sign not belonging to the later Latin alphabet, namely for R, while the M has five strokes and the Q has the form of a Koppa.

40. The next oldest piece of continuous Latin comes from a vessel found in the valley between the Quirinal and the Viminal in early 1880. The vessel is made of dark brown clay and consists of three small round pots that are connected to each other. Around this vessel, there is an inscription made up of three parts: two nearly continuous and the third one below; the writing is from right to left and is still clearly legible. The characters include a symbol not found in the later Latin alphabet, specifically for R, while the M has five strokes and the Q is shaped like a Koppa.

The inscription is as follows:—

The inscription reads:—

“iovesat deivos qoi med mitat, nei ted endo cosmis virco sied, asted noisi opetoitesiai pacari vois.

iovesat deivos qoi med mitat, nei ted endo cosmis virco sied, asted noisi opetoitesiai pacari vois.

dvenos med feced en manom einom duenoi ne med malo statod.”

dvenos med feced en manom einom duenoi ne med malo statod.”

The general style of the writing and the phonetic peculiarities make it fairly certain that this work must have been produced not later than 300 B.C. Some points in its interpretation are still open to doubt,3 but the probable interpretation is—

The overall style of the writing and the unique phonetic features make it quite clear that this work was likely created no later than 300 BCE Some aspects of its interpretation remain uncertain,3 but the likely interpretation is—

“Deos iurat ille (or iurant illi) qui me mittat (or mittant) ne in te Virgo (i.e. Proserpina) comis sit, nisi quidem optimo (?) Theseae (?) pacari vis. Duenos me fecit contra Manum, Dueno autem ne per me malum stato (= imputetur, imponatur).”

“Gods, I swear, the one who sends me may they not be favorable to you, Virgin (i.e. Proserpina), unless that is what the best (?) Theseus (?) wants. Duenos made me against the hand, but may no evil be blamed on me.”

“He (or they) who dispatch me binds the gods (by his offering) that Proserpine shall not be kind to thee unless thou wilt make terms with (or “for”) Opetos Thesias (?). Duenos made me against Manus, but let no evil fall to Duenos on my account.”

“Whoever sends me binds the gods with their offering, ensuring that Proserpine won’t be kind to you unless you make a deal for Opetos Thesias. Duenos created me against Manus, but I hope no harm comes to Duenos because of me.”

41. Between these two inscriptions lies in point of date the famous stele discovered in the Forum in 1899 (G. Boni, Notiz. d. scavi, May 1899). The upper half had been cut off in order to make way for a new pavement or black stone blocks (known to archaeologists as the niger lapis) on the site of the comitium, just to the north-east of the Forum in front of the Senate House. The inscription was written lengthwise along the (pyramidal) stele from foot to apex, but with the alternate lines in reverse directions, and one line not on the full face of any one of the four sides, but up a roughly-flattened fifth side made by slightly broadening one of the angles. No single sentence is complete and the mutilated fragments have given rise to a whole literature of conjectural “restorations.”

41. Between these two inscriptions, in terms of date, is the famous stele found in the Forum in 1899 (G. Boni, Notiz. d. scavi, May 1899). The upper half was cut off to make room for a new pavement or black stone blocks (known to archaeologists as the niger lapis) at the site of the comitium, just northeast of the Forum in front of the Senate House. The inscription was written along the length of the (pyramidal) stele from base to tip, with alternating lines in reverse directions, and one line not on the full face of any one of the four sides, but up a roughly flattened fifth side created by slightly widening one of the angles. No single sentence is complete, and the damaged fragments have led to a whole body of conjectural "restorations."

R. S. Conway examined it in situ in company with F. Skutsch in 1903 (cf. his article in Vollmöller’s Jahresbericht, vi. 453), and the only words that can be regarded as reasonably certain are regei (regi) on face 2, kalatorem and iouxmenta on face 3, and iouestod (iusto) on face 4.4 The date may be said to be fixed by the variation of the sign for m between and (with for r) and other alphabetic indications which suggest the 5th century B.C. It has been suggested also that the reason for the destruction of the stele and the repavement may have been either (1) the pollution of the comitium by the Gallic invasion of 390 B.C., all traces of which, on their departure, could be best removed by a repaving; or (2) perhaps more probably, the Augustan restorations (Studniczka, Jahresheft d. Österr. Institut, 1903, vi. 129 ff.).

R. S. Conway looked at it in situ alongside F. Skutsch in 1903 (see his article in Vollmöller’s Jahresbericht, vi. 453), and the only words that can be considered fairly certain are regei (regi) on face 2, kalatorem and iouxmenta on face 3, and iouestod (iusto) on face 4.4 The date can be established by the variation of the sign for m between and (with for r) and other alphabetic signs that suggest the 5th century BCE It has also been proposed that the reason for the destruction of the stele and the repaving might have been either (1) the pollution of the comitium due to the Gallic invasion of 390 B.C., where all evidence of it, upon their departure, could be best erased by repaving; or (2) more likely, the Augustan restorations (Studniczka, Jahresheft d. Österr. Institut, 1903, vi. 129 ff.).

(R. S. C.)

42. Of the earlier long inscriptions the most important would be the Columna Rostrata, or column of Gaius Duilius (q.v.), erected to commemorate his victory over the Carthaginians in 260 B.C., but for the extent to which it has suffered from the hands of restorers. The shape of the letters plainly shows that the inscription, as we have it, was cut in the time of the empire. Hence Ritschl and Mommsen pointed out that the language was modified at the same time, and that, although many archaisms have been retained, some were falsely introduced, and others replaced by more modern forms. The most noteworthy features in it are—C always written for G (Ceset = gessit), single for double consonants (clases-classes), d retained in the ablative (e.g., in altod marid), o for u in inflexions (primos, exfociont = exfugiunt), e for i (navebos = navibus, exemet = exemit); of these the first is probably an affected archaism, G having been introduced some time before the assumed date of the inscription. On the other hand, we have praeda where we should have expected praida; no final consonants are dropped; and the forms -es, -eis and -is for the accusative plural are interchanged capriciously. The doubts hence arising preclude the possibility of using it with confidence as evidence for the state of the language in the 3rd century B.C.

42. Among the earlier long inscriptions, the most significant is the Columna Rostrata, or column of Gaius Duilius (q.v.), which was built to celebrate his victory over the Carthaginians in 260 BCE, despite the damage it has undergone due to restorations. The style of the letters clearly indicates that the inscription, as we see it today, was engraved during the imperial era. Therefore, Ritschl and Mommsen noted that the language was updated at that time, and although many archaic elements were kept, some were incorrectly added, and others were replaced with more modern versions. The most notable features include—using C instead of G (Ceset = gessit), using single consonants for doubles (clases-classes), retaining d in the ablative (e.g., in altod marid), using o for u in inflections (primos, exfociont = exfugiunt), and e for i (navebos = navibus, exemet = exemit). Among these, the first is likely a stylistic archaism, as G was introduced before the assumed date of the inscription. Conversely, we see praeda where praida would be expected; no final consonants are omitted; and the endings -es, -eis, and -is for the accusative plural are used interchangeably and inconsistently. These uncertainties prevent us from relying on it as a trustworthy source for understanding the language in the 3rd century BCE

43. Of unquestionable genuineness and the greatest value are the Scipionum Elogia, inscribed on stone coffins, found in the monument of the Scipios outside the Capene gate (C.I.L.1 i. 32). The earliest of the family whose epitaph has been preserved is L. Cornelius Scipio Barbatus (consul 298 B.C.), the latest C. Cornelius Scipio Hispanus (praetor in 139 B.C.); but there are good reasons for believing with Ritschl that the epitaph of the first was not contemporary, but was somewhat later than that of his son (consul 259 B.C.). This last may therefore be taken as the earliest specimen of any length of Latin and it was written at Rome; it runs as follows:—

43. The Scipionum Elogia, inscribed on stone coffins found in the Scipio monument outside the Capene gate, are of undeniable authenticity and immense value (C.I.L.1 i. 32). The earliest recorded member of the family is L. Cornelius Scipio Barbatus (consul 298 BCE), and the most recent is C. Cornelius Scipio Hispanus (praetor in 139 BCE); however, there is strong reason to agree with Ritschl that the epitaph of the first was not contemporary but was created somewhat later than that of his son (consul 259 BCE). Thus, the latter can be considered the earliest example of any length of Latin, and it was written in Rome; it reads as follows:—

honcoino . ploirume . cosentiont . r[omai]

honcoino . ploirume . cosentiont . r[omai]

duonoro . optumo . fuise . uiro [virorum]

duonoro . optumo . fuise . uiro [virorum]

luciom . scipione . filios . barbati

luciom . scipione . filios . barbati

co]nsol . censor . aidilis . hic . fuet a [pud vos]

co]nsol . censor . aidilis . hic . fuet a [pud vos]

he]c . cepit . corsica . aleriaque . urbe[m]

he]c . cepit . corsica . aleriaque . urbe[m]

de]det . tempestatebus . aide . mereto[d votam].

de]det . tempestatebus . aide . mereto[d votam].

The archaisms in this inscription are—(1) the retention of o for u in the inflexion of both nouns and verbs; (2) the diphthongs oi (= later u) and ai (= later ae); (3) -et for -it, hec for hic, and -ebus for -ibus; (4) duon- for bon; and (5) the dropping of a final m in every case except in Luciom, a variation which is a marked characteristic of the language of this period.

The old-fashioned elements in this inscription are—(1) the use of o for u in the endings of both nouns and verbs; (2) the diphthongs oi (which later became u) and ai (which later became ae); (3) -et instead of -it, hec instead of hic, and -ebus instead of -ibus; (4) duon instead of bon; and (5) the omission of a final m in every case except in Luciom, a variation that is a clear feature of the language of this time period.

44. The oldest specimen of the Latin language preserved to us in any literary source is to be found in two fragments of the Carmina Saliaria (Varro, De ling. Lat. vii. 26, 27), and one in Terentianus Scaurus, but they are unfortunately so corrupt as to give us little real information (see B. Maurenbrecher, Carminum Saliarium reliquiae, Leipzig, 1894; G. Hempl, American Philol. Assoc. Transactions, xxxi., 1900, 184). Rather better evidence is supplied in the Carmen Fratrum Arvalium, which was found in 1778 engraved on one of the numerous tablets recording the transactions of the college of the Arval brothers, dug up on the site of their grove by the Tiber, 5 m. from the city of Rome; but this also has been so corrupted in its oral tradition that even its general meaning is by no means clear (C.I.L.1 i. 28; Jordan, Krit. Beiträge, pp. 203-211).

44. The oldest example of the Latin language that we have in any literary source is found in two fragments of the Carmina Saliaria (Varro, De ling. Lat. vii. 26, 27) and one from Terentianus Scaurus. Unfortunately, these fragments are so damaged that they provide little real information (see B. Maurenbrecher, Carminum Saliarium reliquiae, Leipzig, 1894; G. Hempl, American Philol. Assoc. Transactions, xxxi., 1900, 184). Better evidence comes from the Carmen Fratrum Arvalium, which was discovered in 1778 engraved on one of the many tablets that recorded the activities of the Arval brothers' college, found at their grove site by the Tiber, about 5 miles from the city of Rome. However, this text has also been so altered in its oral tradition that even its general meaning is not entirely clear (C.I.L.1 i. 28; Jordan, Krit. Beiträge, pp. 203-211).

45. The text of the Twelve Tables (451-450 B.C.), if preserved in its integrity, would have been invaluable as a record of antique Latin; but it is known to us only in quotations. R. Schoell, whose edition and commentary (Leipzig, 1866) is the most complete, notes the following traces, among others, of an archaic syntax: (1) both the subject and the object of the verb are often left to be understood from the context, e.g. ni it antestamino, igitur, em capito; (2) the imperative is used even for permissions, “si volet, plus dato,” “if he choose, he may give him more”; (3) the subjunctive is apparently never used in conditional, 252 only in final sentences, but the future perfect is common; (4) the connexion between sentences is of the simplest kind, and conjunctions are rare. There are, of course, numerous isolated archaisms of form and meaning, such as calvitur, pacunt, endo, escit. Later and less elaborate editions are contained in Fontes Iuris Romani, by Bruns-Mommsen-Gradenwitz (1892); and P. Girard, Textes de droit romain (1895).

45. The text of the Twelve Tables (451-450 BCE), if fully preserved, would have been an invaluable record of ancient Latin; however, we only know it through quotations. R. Schoell, whose edition and commentary (Leipzig, 1866) is the most comprehensive, points out several features of archaic syntax, including: (1) both the subject and the object of the verb are often implied from the context, e.g. ni it antestamino, igitur, em capito; (2) the imperative is even used for permissions, as in “si volet, plus dato,” meaning “if he wants, he can give him more”; (3) the subjunctive is apparently never used in conditional sentences, only in final statements, while the future perfect is common; (4) the connection between sentences is quite simple, and conjunctions are rare. There are also many isolated archaic forms and meanings, such as calvitur, pacunt, endo, escit. Later and less detailed editions can be found in Fontes Iuris Romani, by Bruns-Mommsen-Gradenwitz (1892); and P. Girard, Textes de droit romain (1895).

46. Turning now to the language of literature we may group the Latin authors as follows:—5

46. Now let's look at the language of literature and categorize the Latin authors like this:—5

I. Ante-Classical (240-80 B.C.).—Naevius (? 269-204), Plautus (254-184), Ennius (239-169), Cato the Elder (234-149), Terentius (? 195-159), Pacuvius (220-132), Accius (170-94), Lucilius (? 168-103).

I. Ante-Classical (240-80 BCE).—Naevius (? 269-204), Plautus (254-184), Ennius (239-169), Cato the Elder (234-149), Terentius (? 195-159), Pacuvius (220-132), Accius (170-94), Lucilius (? 168-103).

II. Classical—Golden Age (80 B.C.-A.D. 14).—Varro (116-28), Cicero (106-44), Lucretius (99-55), Caesar (102-44), Catullus (87-? 47), Sallust (86-34), Virgil (70-19), Horace (65-8), Propertius (? 50- ?), Tibullus (? 54-? 18), Ovid (43 B.C.-A.D. 18), Livy (59 B.C.-A.D. 18).

II. Classical—Golden Age (80 BCE-AD 14).—Varro (116-28), Cicero (106-44), Lucretius (99-55), Caesar (102-44), Catullus (87-? 47), Sallust (86-34), Virgil (70-19), Horace (65-8), Propertius (? 50- ?), Tibullus (? 54-? 18), Ovid (43 BCE-CE 18), Livy (59 BCE-CE 18).

III. Classical—Silver Age (A.D. 14-180).—Velleius (? 19 B.C.-? A.D. 31), M. Seneca (d. c. A.D. 30), Persius (34-62), Petronius (d. 66), Lucan (39-65), L. Seneca (d. A.D. 65), Plinius major (23-A.D. 79), Martial (40-101), Quintilian (42-118), Pliny the Younger (61-? 113), Tacitus (? 60-? 118), Juvenal (? 47-? 138), Suetonius (75-160), Fronto (c. 90-170).

III. Classical—Silver Age (CE 14-180).—Velleius (? 19 BCE-? CE 31), M. Seneca (d. c. CE 30), Persius (34-62), Petronius (d. 66), Lucan (39-65), L. Seneca (d. CE 65), Pliny the Elder (23-CE 79), Martial (40-101), Quintilian (42-118), Pliny the Younger (61-? 113), Tacitus (? 60-? 118), Juvenal (? 47-? 138), Suetonius (75-160), Fronto (c. 90-170).

47. Naevius and Plautus.—In Naevius we find archaisms proportionally much more numerous than in Plautus, especially in the retention of the original length of vowels, and early forms of inflexion, such as the genitive in -as and the ablative in -d. The number of archaic words preserved is perhaps due to the fact that so large a proportion of his fragments have been preserved only by the grammarians, who cited them for the express purpose of explaining these.

47. Naevius and Plautus.—In Naevius, we see that there are many more archaic features compared to Plautus, especially in keeping the original length of vowels and early forms of inflection, like the genitive in -as and the ablative in -d. The number of archaic words that have been preserved may be because a significant portion of his fragments has only survived through grammarians, who quoted them specifically to explain these terms.

Of the language of Plautus important features have already been mentioned (§§ 10-16); for its more general characteristics see Plautus.

Of the language of Plautus, key features have already been discussed (§§ 10-16); for its broader characteristics, see Plautus.

48. Ennius.—The language of Ennius deserves especial study because of the immense influence which he exerted in fixing the literary style. He first established the rule that in hexameter verse all vowels followed by two consonants (except in the case of a mute and a liquid), or a double consonant, must be treated as lengthened by position. The number of varying quantities is also much diminished, and the elision of final -m becomes the rule, though not without exceptions. On the other hand he very commonly retains the original length of verbal terminations (essēt, faciēt) and of nominatives in or and a, and elides final s before an initial consonant. In declension he never uses -ae as the genitive, but -ai or -as; the older and shorter form of the gen. plur. is -um in common; obsolete forms of pronouns are used, as mis, olli, sum (= eum), sas, sos, sapsa; and in verbal inflexion there are old forms like morīmur (§ 15), fūimus (§ 17, vi.), potestur (cf. § 5, iv.). Some experiments in the way of tmesis (saxo cere comminuit-brum) and apocope (divum domus altisonum cael, replet te laetificum gau) were happily regarded as failures, and never came into real use. His syntax is simple and straightforward, with the occasional pleonasms of a rude style, and conjunctions are comparatively rare. From this time forward the literary language of Rome parted company with the popular dialect. Even to the classical writers Latin was in a certain sense a dead language. Its vocabulary was not identical with that of ordinary life. Now and again a writer would lend new vigour to his style by phrases and constructions drawn from homely speech. But on the whole, and in ever-increasing measure, the language of literature was the language of the schools, adapted to foreign models. The genuine current of Italian speech is almost lost to view with Plautus and Terence, and reappears clearly only in the semi-barbarous products of the early Romance literature.

48. Ennius.—The language of Ennius deserves special attention because of the huge impact he had on shaping literary style. He was the first to establish the rule that in hexameter verse, all vowels followed by two consonants (except in the case of a mute and a liquid), or a double consonant, must be considered lengthened by position. The number of variable quantities is also significantly reduced, and the elision of final -m becomes standard, though with some exceptions. On the other hand, he frequently maintains the original length of verbal endings (essēt, faciēt) and of nominatives in or and a, and he elides final s before an initial consonant. In declension, he never uses -ae as the genitive, but rather -ai or -as; the older and shorter form of the genitive plural is -um in common use; outdated forms of pronouns are utilized, such as mis, olli, sum (= eum), sas, sos, sapsa; and in verbal inflection, there are older forms like morīmur (§ 15), fūimus (§ 17, vi.), potestur (cf. § 5, iv.). Some attempts at tmesis (saxo cere comminuit-brum) and apocope (divum domus altisonum cael, replet te laetificum gau) were rightly seen as unsuccessful and never became widely used. His syntax is simple and direct, with occasional redundancies of a rough style, and conjunctions are relatively rare. From this point onward, the literary language of Rome diverged from the popular dialect. Even for classical writers, Latin was, in a way, a dead language. Its vocabulary was not the same as that of everyday life. Occasionally, a writer would invigorate their style with phrases and structures drawn from everyday speech. But overall, and increasingly so, the language of literature became the language of schools, adapted from foreign models. The genuine flow of Italian speech is nearly obscured with Plautus and Terence, and it only becomes clear again in the semi-barbaric products of early Romance literature.

49. Pacuvius, Accius and Lucilius.—Pacuvius is noteworthy especially for his attempt to introduce a free use of compounds after the fashion of the Greek, which were felt in the classical times to be unsuited to the genius of the Latin language, Quintilian censures severely his line—

49. Pacuvius, Accius and Lucilius.—Pacuvius stands out particularly for his effort to incorporate a flexible use of compounds similar to the Greeks, which were considered inappropriate for the essence of the Latin language during classical times. Quintilian harshly criticizes his line—

Nerei repandirostrum incurvicervicum pecus.

Nerei repandirostrum incurvicervicum pecus.

Accius, though probably the greatest of the Roman tragedians, is only preserved in comparatively unimportant fragments. We know that he paid much attention to grammar and orthography; and his language is much more finished than that of Ennius. It shows no marked archaisms of form, unless the infinitive in -ier is to be accounted as such.

Accius, while likely the greatest of the Roman tragedians, is only preserved in relatively minor fragments. We know he paid a lot of attention to grammar and spelling, and his language is much more polished than that of Ennius. It doesn't show significant outdated forms, unless you consider the infinitive ending in -ier to be one.

Lucilius furnishes a specimen of the language of the period, free from the restraints of tragic diction and the imitation of Greek originals. Unfortunately the greater part of his fragments are preserved only by a grammarian whose text is exceptionally corrupt; but they leave no doubt as to the justice of the criticism passed by Horace on his careless and “muddy” diction. The urbanitas which is with one accord conceded to him by ancient critics seems to indicate that his style was free from the taint of provincial Latinity, and it may be regarded as reproducing the language of educated circles in ordinary life; the numerous Graecisms and Greek quotations with which it abounds show the familiarity of his readers with the Greek language and literature. Varro ascribes to him the gracile genus dicendi, the distinguishing features of which were venustas and subtilitas. Hence it appears that his numerous archaisms were regarded as in no way inconsistent with grace and precision of diction. But it may be remembered that Varro was himself something of an archaizer, and also that the grammarians’ quotations may bring this aspect too much into prominence. Lucilius shares with the comic poets the use of many plebeian expressions, the love for diminutives, abstract terms and words of abuse; but occasionally he borrows from the more elevated style of Ennius forms like simitu (= simul), noenu (= non), facul (= facile), and the genitive in -āī, and he ridicules the contemporary tragedians for their zetematia, their high-flown diction and sesquipedalia verba, which make the characters talk “not like men but like portents, flying winged snakes.” In his ninth book he discusses questions of grammar, and gives some interesting facts as to the tendencies of the language. For instance, when he ridicules a praetor urbanus for calling himself pretor, we see already the intrusion of the rustic degradation of ae into e, which afterwards became universal. He shows a great command of technical language, and (partly owing to the nature of the fragments) ἅπαξ λεγόμενα are very numerous.

Lucilius provides an example of the language from his time, free from the limits of tragic diction and the imitation of Greek originals. Unfortunately, most of his fragments are preserved by a grammarian whose text is particularly flawed; however, they confirm Horace's criticism of his careless and “muddy” language. The urbanitas that ancient critics unanimously attribute to him suggests that his style was not tainted by provincial Latin, reflecting the language of educated circles in everyday life. The many Graecisms and Greek quotes throughout his work indicate that his readers were familiar with Greek language and literature. Varro credits him with the gracile genus dicendi, characterized by venustas and subtilitas. Thus, it seems that his numerous archaisms were seen as compatible with grace and precision in diction. However, it’s worth noting that Varro himself leaned towards antiquated language, and the grammarians’ quotes might overemphasize this aspect. Lucilius shares with comic poets the use of many common expressions, a fondness for diminutives, abstract terms, and insults; but he sometimes adopts the more elevated style of Ennius with forms like simitu (= simul), noenu (= non), facul (= facile), and the genitive in -āī. He ridicules contemporary tragedians for their zetematia, their grandiose language and sesquipedalia verba, which make characters speak “not like humans but like strange beings, flying winged snakes.” In his ninth book, he discusses grammar issues and offers interesting insights into language trends. For example, when he mocks a praetor urbanus for calling himself pretor, we already see the rural shift from ae to e, which later became widespread. He demonstrates a strong command of technical language, and due to the nature of the fragments, Once said are quite numerous.

50. Cato.—The treatise of Cato the elder, De re rustica, would have afforded invaluable material, but it has unfortunately come down to us in a text greatly modernized, which is more of interest from the point of view of literature than of language. We find in it, however, instances of the accusative with uti, of the old imperative praefamino and of the fut. sub. servassis, prohibessis and such interesting subjunctive constructions as dato bubus bibant omnibus, “give all the oxen (water) to drink.”

50. Cato.—The work of Cato the Elder, De re rustica, would have offered incredibly valuable insights, but it has unfortunately come down to us in a text that’s been heavily modernized, making it more interesting from a literary perspective than from a linguistic one. However, it still includes examples of the accusative with uti, the old imperative praefamino, and the future subjunctive forms servassis, prohibessis, as well as interesting subjunctive constructions like dato bubus bibant omnibus, which means “give all the oxen (water) to drink.”

51. Growth of Latin Prose.—It is unfortunately impossible to trace the growth of Latin prose diction through its several stages with the same clearness as in the case of poetry. The fragments of the earlier Latin prose writers are too scanty for us to be able to say with certainty when and how a formed prose style was created. But the impulse to it was undoubtedly given in the habitual practice of oratory. The earliest orators, like Cato, were distinguished for strong common sense, biting wit and vigorous language, rather than for any graces of style; and probably personal auctoritas was of far more account than rhetoric both in the law courts and in the assemblies of the people. The first public speaker, according to Cicero, who aimed at a polished style and elaborate periods was M. Aemilius Lepidus Porcina, in the middle of the 2nd century B.C.6 On his model the Gracchi and Carbo fashioned themselves, and, if we may judge from the fragments of the orations of C. Gracchus which are preserved, there were few traces of archaism remaining. A more perfect example of the urbanitas at which good speakers aimed was supplied by a famous speech of C. Fannius against C. Gracchus, 253 which Cicero considered the best oration of the time. No small part of the urbanitas consisted in a correct urban pronunciation; and the standard of this was found in the language of the women of the upper classes, such as Laelia and Cornelia.

51. Growth of Latin Prose.—Unfortunately, it's difficult to track the development of Latin prose through its different stages as clearly as we can with poetry. The writings of the early Latin prose authors are too limited for us to determine when and how a structured prose style came about. However, it's clear that the regular practice of oratory played a significant role in this development. The earliest orators, like Cato, were known for their strong common sense, sharp wit, and powerful language, rather than any stylistic elegance; likely, personal auctoritas was more important than rhetoric in both the courts and public assemblies. According to Cicero, the first public speaker to pursue a refined style and intricate sentences was M. Aemilius Lepidus Porcina in the mid-2nd century BCE6 The Gracchi brothers and Carbo modeled themselves after him, and based on the surviving fragments of C. Gracchus's speeches, few signs of archaism were left. A more exemplary illustration of the urbanitas that skilled speakers aspired to was provided by a famous speech by C. Fannius against C. Gracchus, 253 which Cicero regarded as the best speech of that period. A significant aspect of urbanitas was having a proper urban pronunciation, which was influenced by the language of upper-class women like Laelia and Cornelia.

In the earliest continuous prose work which remains to us the four books De Rhetorica ad Herennium, we find the language already almost indistinguishable from that of Cicero. There has been much discussion as to the authorship of this work, now commonly, without very convincing reasons, ascribed to Q. Cornificius; but, among the numerous arguments which prove that it cannot have been the work of Cicero, none has been adduced of any importance drawn from the character of the language. It is worth while noticing that not only is the style in itself perfectly finished, but the treatment of the subject of style, elocutio (iv. 12. 17), shows the pains which had already been given to the question. The writer lays down three chief requisites—(1) elegantia, (2) compositio and (3) dignitas. Under the first come Latinitas, a due avoidance of solecisms and barbarisms, and explanatio, clearness, the employment of familiar and appropriate expressions. The second demands a proper arrangement; hiatus, alliteration, rhyme, the repetition or displacement of words, and too long sentences are all to be eschewed. Dignity depends upon the selection of language and of sentiments.

In the earliest continuous prose work that still exists today, the four books of De Rhetorica ad Herennium, the language is already nearly indistinguishable from Cicero’s. There has been a lot of debate about who wrote this work, which is now often attributed to Q. Cornificius without very convincing reasons; however, among the many arguments showing that it can’t have been Cicero's work, none significantly relates to the language itself. It's important to note that not only is the style itself perfectly polished, but the way the writer deals with the topic of style, elocutio (iv. 12. 17), indicates the care that had already been put into the matter. The author identifies three main requirements: (1) elegantia, (2) compositio, and (3) dignitas. Under the first, we find Latinitas, which means avoiding solecisms and barbarisms, and explanatio, referring to clarity and the use of familiar and appropriate expressions. The second requirement stresses proper arrangement, warning against hiatus, alliteration, rhyme, the repetition or dislocation of words, and overly long sentences. Dignity relies on the choice of language and sentiments.

52. Characteristics of Latin Prose.—Hence we see that by the time of Cicero Latin prose was fully developed. We may, therefore, pause here to notice the characteristic qualities of the language at its most perfect stage. The Latin critics were themselves fully conscious of the broad distinction in character between their own language and the Greek. Seneca dwells upon the stately and dignified movement of the Latin period, and uses for Cicero the happy epithet of gradarius. He allows to the Greeks gratia, but claims potentia for his own countrymen. Quintilian (xii. 10. 27 seq.) concedes to Greek more euphony and variety both of vocalization and of accent; he admits that Latin words are harsher in sound, and often less happily adapted to the expression of varying shades of meaning. But he too claims “power” as the distinguishing mark of his own language. Feeble thought may be carried off by the exquisite harmony and subtleness of Greek diction; his countrymen must aim at fulness and weight of ideas if they are not to be beaten off the field. The Greek authors are like lightly moving skiffs; the Romans spread wider sails and are wafted by stronger breezes; hence the deeper waters suit them. It is not that the Latin language fails to respond to the calls made upon it. Lucretius and Cicero concur, it is true, in complaints of the poverty of their native language; but this was only because they had had no predecessors in the task of adapting it to philosophic utterance; and the long life of Latin technical terms like qualitas, species, genus, ratio, shows how well the need was met when it arose. H. A. J. Munro has said admirably of this very period:—

52. Characteristics of Latin Prose.—By the time of Cicero, Latin prose had fully evolved. We can pause here to highlight the key qualities of the language at its most refined stage. The Latin critics were keenly aware of the significant differences between their own language and Greek. Seneca emphasizes the formal and dignified rhythm of Latin prose and refers to Cicero as gradarius. He attributes gratia to the Greeks but claims potentia for his own people. Quintilian (xii. 10. 27 seq.) acknowledges that Greek has more melody and variety in both pronunciation and accent; he admits that Latin words sound rougher and are often less suited to express subtle nuances. However, he also asserts “power” as the defining feature of his language. Weak thoughts may be concealed by the beautiful harmony and delicacy of Greek writing; his fellow Romans must aim for substance and weight of ideas if they are to stand their ground. Greek authors are like lightly gliding boats; the Romans have larger sails and catch stronger winds, making them more suited to deeper waters. It’s not that the Latin language cannot meet the demands placed on it. Lucretius and Cicero both complain about the limitations of their native tongue, but this was mainly because they had no predecessors in adapting it for philosophical expression. The enduring presence of Latin terms like qualitas, species, genus, and ratio demonstrates how well the need was addressed when it arose. H. A. J. Munro has excellently remarked about this very period:—

“The living Latin for all the higher forms of composition, both prose and verse, was a far nobler language than the living Greek. During the long period of Grecian pre-eminence and literary glory, from Homer to Demosthenes, all the manifold forms of poetry and prose which were invented one after the other were brought to such exquisite perfection that their beauty of form and grace of language were never afterwards rivalled by Latin or any other people. But hardly had Demosthenes and Aristotle ceased to live when that Attic which had been gradually formed into such a noble instrument of thought in the hands of Aristophanes, Euripides, Plato and the orators, and had superseded for general use all the other dialects, became at the same time the language of the civilized world and was stricken with a mortal decay.... Epicurus, who was born in the same year as Menander, writes a harsh jargon that does not deserve to be called a style; and others of whose writings anything is left entire or in fragments, historians and philosophers alike, Polybius, Chrysippus, Philodemus, are little if any better. When Cicero deigns to translate any of their sentences, see what grace and life he instils into their clumsily expressed thoughts, how satisfying to the ear and taste are the periods of Livy when he is putting into Latin the heavy and uncouth clauses of Polybius! This may explain what Cicero means when at one time he gives to Greek the preference over Latin, at another to Latin over Greek; in reading Sophocles or Plato he could acknowledge their unrivalled excellence; in translating Panaetius or Philodemus he would feel his own immeasurable superiority.”

“The living Latin for all the higher forms of writing, both prose and poetry, was a much nobler language than the living Greek. During the long time of Greek dominance and literary greatness, from Homer to Demosthenes, all the various forms of poetry and prose that were created one after the other reached such incredible perfection that their beauty of form and elegance of language were never matched again by Latin or any other culture. But hardly had Demosthenes and Aristotle passed away when that Attic, which had been gradually developed into such a fine tool for thought by Aristophanes, Euripides, Plato, and the orators, and had replaced all other dialects for general use, became at the same time the language of the civilized world and started to decline.... Epicurus, who was born in the same year as Menander, writes a rough jargon that doesn't deserve to be called a style; and others whose writings are left whole or in fragments, historians and philosophers alike, Polybius, Chrysippus, Philodemus, are little if any better. When Cicero takes the time to translate any of their sentences, notice the grace and vitality he injects into their awkwardly expressed ideas, how pleasing to the ear and palate are Livy's sentences when he's translating the heavy and clumsy phrases of Polybius! This may clarify what Cicero means when at one moment he favors Greek over Latin, then at another favors Latin over Greek; in reading Sophocles or Plato he could acknowledge their unmatched excellence; in translating Panaetius or Philodemus he would feel his own immense superiority.”

The greater number of long syllables, combined with the paucity of diphthongs and the consequent monotony of vocalization, and the uniformity of the accent, lent a weight and dignity of movement to the language which well suited the national gravitas. The precision of grammatical rules and the entire absence of dialectic forms from the written literature contributed to maintain the character of unity which marked the Roman republic as compared with the multiplicity of Greek states. It was remarked by Francis Bacon that artistic and imaginative nations indulge freely in verbal compounds, practical nations in simple concrete terms. In this respect, too, Latin contrasts with Greek. The attempts made by some of the earlier poets to indulge in novel compounds was felt to be out of harmony with the genius of the language. Composition, though necessarily employed, was kept within narrow limits, and the words thus produced have a sharply defined meaning, wholly unlike the poetical vagueness of some of the Greek compounds. The vocabulary of the language, though receiving accessions from time to time in accordance with practical needs, was rarely enriched by the products of a spontaneous creativeness. In literature the taste of the educated town circles gave the law; and these, trained in the study of the Greek masters of style, required something which should reproduce for them the harmony of the Greek period. Happily the orators who gave form to Latin prose were able to meet the demand without departing from the spirit of their own language.7

The greater number of long syllables, combined with the lack of diphthongs and the resulting monotony of vocal sounds, and the consistency of the accent, added a weight and dignity to the language that suited the national gravitas. The precision of grammatical rules and the complete absence of dialect forms in written literature helped maintain the sense of unity that characterized the Roman republic compared to the diversity of Greek states. Francis Bacon noted that artistic and imaginative nations freely use compound words, while practical nations prefer simple, concrete terms. In this way, Latin differs from Greek. The attempts by some early poets to create new compound words were seen as not aligning with the language's natural style. While composition was necessarily used, it was kept within narrow boundaries, producing words with clear meanings, unlike the poetic vagueness found in some Greek compounds. The vocabulary of the language, although occasionally updated according to practical needs, was rarely enriched by spontaneous creativity. In literature, the tastes of educated urban circles set the standard; these individuals, trained in Greek literary style, sought something that would replicate the harmony of the Greek period. Fortunately, the orators who shaped Latin prose could meet this need without straying from the spirit of their language.7

53. Cicero and Caesar.—To Cicero especially the Romans owed the realization of what was possible to their language in the way of artistic finish of style. He represents a protest at one and the same time against the inroads of the plebeius sermo, vulgarized by the constant influx of non-Italian provincials into Rome, and the “jargon of spurious and partial culture” in vogue among the Roman pupils of the Asiatic rhetoricians. His essential service was to have caught the tone and style of the true Roman urbanitas, and to have fixed it in extensive and widely read speeches and treatises as the final model of classical prose. The influence of Caesar was wholly in the same direction. His cardinal principle was that every new-fangled and affected expression, from whatever quarter it might come, should be avoided by the writer, as rocks by the mariner. His own style for straightforward simplicity and purity has never been surpassed; and it is not without full reason that Cicero and Caesar are regarded as the models of classical prose. But, while they fixed the type of the best Latin, they did not and could not alter its essential character. In subtlety, in suggestiveness, in many-sided grace and versatility, it remained far inferior to the Greek. But for dignity and force, for cadence and rhythm, for clearness and precision, the best Latin prose remains unrivalled.

53. Cicero and Caesar.—The Romans especially owe Cicero for showcasing what was possible in their language through artistic style. He served as a counter to the influence of the plebeius sermo, which had become vulgarized by the constant arrival of non-Italian provincials in Rome, as well as the “jargon of superficial and partial education” popular among Roman students of the Asiatic rhetoricians. His key contribution was capturing the tone and style of true Roman urbanitas, establishing it in his extensive and widely read speeches and writings as the definitive model of classical prose. Caesar’s influence aligned entirely with this direction. His main principle was to avoid any trendy or affected expressions, no matter their origin, just as sailors steer clear of rocks. His own style, known for its straightforward simplicity and clarity, has never been surpassed; thus, it’s no surprise that Cicero and Caesar are viewed as the benchmarks of classical prose. However, while they defined the standard for the best Latin, they couldn’t change its fundamental nature. In terms of subtlety, depth, multifaceted grace, and versatility, it still fell short compared to Greek. Yet, for dignity and strength, rhythm and flow, as well as clarity and precision, the finest Latin prose remains unmatched.

It is needless to dwell upon the grammar or vocabulary of Cicero. His language is universally taken as the normal type of Latin; and, as hitherto the history of the language has been traced by marking differences from his usage, so the same method may be followed for what remains.

It’s unnecessary to focus on Cicero's grammar or vocabulary. His language is widely recognized as the standard type of Latin, and just as the history of the language has previously been outlined by noting differences from his style, the same approach can be applied to what is left.

54. Varro, “the most learned of the ancients,” a friend and contemporary of Cicero, seems to have rejected the periodic rhythmical style of Cicero, and to have fallen back upon a more archaic structure. Mommsen says of one passage “the clauses of the sentence are arranged on the thread of the relative like dead thrushes on a string.” But, in spite (some would say, because) of his old-fashioned tendencies, his language shows great vigour and spirit. In his Menippean satires he intentionally made free use of plebeian expressions, while rising at times to a real grace and showing often fresh humour. His treatise De Re Rustica, in the form of a dialogue, is the most agreeable of his works, and where the nature of his subject allows it there is 254 much vivacity and dramatic picturesqueness, although the precepts are necessarily given in a terse and abrupt form. His sentences are as a rule co-ordinated, with but few connecting links; his diction contains many antiquated or unique words.

54. Varro, “the most knowledgeable of the ancients,” a friend and contemporary of Cicero, seems to have turned away from Cicero's rhythmic style and instead adopted a more archaic structure. Mommsen comments on one passage saying, “the clauses of the sentence are arranged on the thread of the relative like dead thrushes on a string.” However, despite (some might say because of) his old-fashioned tendencies, his language is full of energy and spirit. In his Menippean satires, he deliberately used common expressions while occasionally achieving real elegance and often demonstrating fresh humor. His treatise De Re Rustica, written as a dialogue, is his most enjoyable work, and where the topic allows, there is 254 a lot of liveliness and dramatic vividness, although the instructions are given in a concise and abrupt manner. Generally, his sentences are coordinated, with very few connecting links; his word choice includes many outdated or unique words.

55. Sallust.—In Sallust, a younger contemporary of Cicero, we have the earliest complete specimen of historical narrative. It is probably due to his subject-matter, at least in part, that his style is marked by frequent archaisms; but something must be ascribed to intentional imitation of the earlier chroniclers, which led him to be called priscorum Catonisque verborum ineruditissimus fur. His archaisms consist partly of words and phrases used in a sense for which we have only early authorities, e.g. cum animo habere, &c., animos tollere, bene factum, consultor, prosapia, dolus, venenum, obsequela, inquies, sallere, occipere, collibeo, and the like, where we may notice especially the fondness for frequentatives, which he shares with the early comedy; partly in inflections which were growing obsolete, such as senati, solui, comperior (dep.), neglegisset, vis (acc. pl.) nequitur. In syntax his constructions are for the most part those of the contemporary writers.

55. Sallust.—In Sallust, a younger contemporary of Cicero, we have the earliest complete example of historical narrative. His subject matter likely contributes to his style being marked by frequent old-fashioned expressions; however, part of it can be attributed to his intentional imitation of earlier chroniclers, which earned him the title priscorum Catonisque verborum ineruditissimus fur. His old-fashioned expressions include certain words and phrases used in a way for which we only have early sources, such as cum animo habere, &c., animos tollere, bene factum, consultor, prosapia, dolus, venenum, obsequela, inquies, sallere, occipere, collibeo, and similar terms, where we can especially notice his enjoyment of frequentative forms, which he shares with early comedy; partly in inflections that were becoming outdated, such as senati, solui, comperior (dep.), neglegisset, vis (acc. pl.) nequitur. In syntax, his structures mostly align with those of contemporary writers.

56. Lucretius is largely archaic in his style. We find im for eum, endo for in, illae, ullae, unae and aliae as genitives, alid for aliud, rabies as a genitive by the side of genitives in -ai, ablatives in -i like colli, orbi, parti, nominatives in s for r, like colos, vapos, humos. In verbs there are scatit, fulgit, quaesit, confluxet = confluxisset, recesse = recessisse, induiacere for inicere; simple forms like fligere, lacere, cedere, stinguere for the more usual compounds, the infinitive passive in -ier, and archaic forms from esse like siet, escit, fuat. Sometimes he indulges in tmesis which reminds us of Ennius: inque pediri, disque supata, ordia prima. But this archaic tinge is adopted only for poetical purposes, and as a proof of his devotion to the earlier masters of his art; it does not affect the general substance of his style, which is of the freshest and most vigorous stamp. But the purity of his idiom is not gained by any slavish adherence to a recognized vocabulary: he coins words freely; Munro has noted more than a hundred ἅπαξ λεγόμενα, or words which he alone among good writers uses. Many of these are formed on familiar models, such as compounds and frequentatives; others are directly borrowed from the Greek apparently with a view to sweetness of rhythm (ii. 412, v. 334, 505); others again (forty or more in number) are compounds of a kind which the classical language refused to adopt, such as silvifragus, terriloquus, perterricrepus. He represents not so much a stage in the history of the language as a protest against the tendencies fashionable in his own time. But his influence was deep upon Virgil, and through him upon all subsequent Latin literature.

56. Lucretius has a style that feels quite old-fashioned. We see im for eum, endo for in, illae, ullae, unae, and aliae as genitives, alid for aliud, rabies used as a genitive next to genitives ending in -ai, and ablatives ending in -i like colli, orbi, parti, with nominatives in s instead of r, like colos, vapos, humos. In verbs, there are forms like scatit, fulgit, quaesit, confluxet which means confluxisset, recesse which means recessisse, and induiacere for inicere; he uses simple forms like fligere, lacere, cedere, stinguere instead of the more common compounds, the infinitive passive in -ier, and archaic forms from esse like siet, escit, fuat. Occasionally, he uses tmesis, which reminds us of Ennius: inque pediri, disque supata, ordia prima. However, this old-fashioned touch is used only for poetic purposes and as a tribute to the earlier masters of his art; it doesn’t change the overall freshness and strength of his style. But the purity of his language isn’t achieved through a rigid adherence to a standard vocabulary: he creates words freely; Munro has noted over a hundred once said, or words that he alone uses among esteemed writers. Many of these are based on familiar patterns, such as compounds and frequentatives; others are borrowed from Greek, likely to enhance musicality (ii. 412, v. 334, 505); still others (forty or more) are types of compounds that classical language didn’t adopt, like silvifragus, terriloquus, perterricrepus. He represents not just a point in the history of the language but also a challenge to the trends popular in his time. Nevertheless, his influence was significant on Virgil, and through him, on all later Latin literature.

57. Catullus gives us the type of the language of the cultivated circles, lifted into poetry by the simple directness with which it is used to express emotion. In his heroic and elegiac poems he did not escape the influence of the Alexandrian school, and his genius is ill suited for long-continued flights; but in his lyrical poems his language is altogether perfect. As Macaulay says: “No Latin writer is so Greek. The simplicity, the pathos, the perfect grace, which I find in the great Athenian models are all in Catullus, and in him alone of the Romans.” The language of these poems comes nearest perhaps to that of Cicero’s more intimate letters. It is full of colloquial idioms and familiar language, of the diminutives of affection or of playfulness. Greek words are rare, especially in the lyrics, and those which are employed are only such as had come to be current coin. Archaisms are but sparingly introduced; but for metrical reasons he has four instances of the inf. pass., in -ier, and several contracted forms; we find also alis and alid, uni (gen.), and the antiquated tetuli and recepso. There are traces of the popular language in the shortened imperatives cavĕ and manĕ, in the analytic perfect paratam habes, and in the use of unus approaching that of the indefinite article.

57. Catullus shows us the language of educated circles, elevated to poetry by its straightforward way of expressing emotion. In his heroic and elegiac works, he was influenced by the Alexandrian school, and his talent isn't really suited for extended narratives; however, his lyrical poems feature perfectly crafted language. As Macaulay states: “No Latin writer is as Greek. The simplicity, the emotion, the perfect elegance that I find in the great Athenian models are all present in Catullus, and in him alone among the Romans.” The language in these poems is perhaps closest to Cicero’s more personal letters. It's filled with everyday idioms and casual language, as well as affectionate or playful diminutives. Greek words are rare, especially in the lyrics, and those that are used are only ones that became common. Archaisms are introduced sparingly; however, for metrical reasons, he has four instances of the infinitive passive in -ier, along with several contracted forms. We also see alis and alid, uni (genitive), and the old-fashioned tetuli and recepso. There are signs of popular language in the shortened commands cavĕ and manĕ, in the analytic perfect paratam habes, and in the use of unus when it approaches the meaning of the indefinite article.

58. Horace.—The poets of the Augustan age mark the opening of a new chapter in the history of the Latin language. The influence of Horace was less than that of his friend and contemporary Virgil; for Horace worked in a field of his own, and, although Statius imitated his lyrics, and Persius and Juvenal, especially the former, his satires, on the whole there are few traces of any deep marks left by him on the language of later writers. In his Satires and Epistles the diction is that of the contemporary urbanitas, differing hardly at all from that of Cicero in his epistles and dialogues. The occasional archaisms, such as the syncope in erepsemus, evasse, surrexe, the infinitives in -ier, and the genitives deum, divum, may be explained as still conversationally allowable, though ceasing to be current in literature; and a similar explanation may account for plebeian terms, e.g. balatro, blatero, giarrio, mutto, vappa, caldus, soldus, surpite, for the numerous diminutives, and for such pronouns, adverbs, conjunctions and turns of expression as were common in prose, but not found, or found but rarely, in elevated poetry. Greek words are used sparingly, not with the licence which he censures in Lucilius, and in his hexameters are framed according to Latin rules. In the Odes, on the other hand, the language is much more precisely limited. There are practically no archaisms (spargier in Carm. iv. 11. 8 is a doubtful exception), or plebeian expressions; Greek inflections are employed, but not with the licence of Catullus; there are no datives in ĭ or sĭn like Tethyĭ or Dryasin; Greek constructions are fairly numerous, e.g. the genitive with verbs like regnare, abstinere, desinere, and with adjectives, as integer vitae, the so-called Greek accusative, the dative with verbs of contest, like luctari, decertare, the transitive use of many intransitive verbs in the past participle, as regnatus, triumphatus; and finally there is a “prolative” use of the infinitive after verbs and adjectives, where prose would have employed other constructions, which, though not limited to Horace, is more common with him than with other poets. Compounds are very sparingly employed, and apparently only when sanctioned by authority. His own innovations in vocabulary are not numerous. About eighty ἅπαξ λεγόμενα have been noted. Like Virgil, he shows his exquisite skill in the use of language rather in the selection from already existing stores, than in the creation of new resources: tantum series iuncturaque pollet. But both his diction and his syntax left much less marked traces upon succeeding writers than did those of either Virgil or Ovid.

58. Horace.—The poets of the Augustan age represent a new chapter in the history of the Latin language. Horace's influence was not as significant as that of his friend and contemporary Virgil; Horace operated in a unique space, and while Statius copied his lyrics and Persius and Juvenal, particularly the former, borrowed from his satires, overall, there are few lasting impacts from him on the language of later writers. In his Satires and Epistles, the language reflects the contemporary urbanitas, hardly differing from Cicero's style in his letters and dialogues. The occasional old-fashioned terms, such as the syncope in erepsemus, evasse, surrexe, the infinitives ending in -ier, and the genitives deum, divum, can be seen as still acceptable in conversation, even if they were fading from literature; a similar reasoning can apply to common terms, like balatro, blatero, giarrio, mutto, vappa, caldus, soldus, surpite, the many diminutives, and the pronouns, adverbs, conjunctions, and expressions commonly used in prose but rarely found in elevated poetry. Greek words are used sparingly, without the freedom he criticizes in Lucilius, and his hexameters are structured according to Latin rules. In the Odes, however, the language is much more precisely defined. There are practically no old-fashioned terms (spargier in Carm. iv. 11. 8 is a questionable exception) or common expressions; Greek inflections are used, but not as freely as in Catullus; there are no datives in ĭ or sĭn like Tethyĭ or Dryasin; Greek constructions are fairly common, such as the genitive with verbs like regnare, abstinere, desinere, and with adjectives, like integer vitae, the so-called Greek accusative, the dative with contest verbs like luctari, decertare, and the transitive use of many intransitive verbs in the past participle, like regnatus, triumphatus; finally, there is a “prolative” use of the infinitive after verbs and adjectives where prose would have used different constructions, which, while not exclusive to Horace, is more frequent with him than with other poets. Compounds are used very sparingly, seemingly only when justified by established authority. His own vocabulary innovations are limited. About eighty once said have been noted. Like Virgil, he demonstrates his remarkable skill in language more through selection from existing resources than through creating new ones: tantum series iuncturaque pollet. However, both his diction and syntax left much less distinct marks on later writers than those of either Virgil or Ovid.

59. Virgil.—In Virgil the Latin language reached its full maturity. What Cicero was to the period, Virgil was to the hexameter; indeed the changes that he wrought were still more marked, inasmuch as the language of verse admits of greater subtlety and finish than even the most artistic prose. For the straightforward idiomatic simplicity of Lucretius and Catullus he substituted a most exact and felicitous diction, rich with the suggestion of the most varied sources of inspiration. Sometimes it is a phrase of Homer’s “conveyed” literally with happy boldness, sometimes it is a line of Ennius, or again some artistic Sophoclean combination. Virgil was equally familiar with the great Greek models of style and with the earlier Latin poets. This learning, guided by an unerring sense of fitness and harmony, enabled him to give to his diction a music which recalls at once the fullest tones of the Greek lyre and the lofty strains of the most genuinely national song. His love of antiquarianism in language has often been noticed, but it never passes into pedantry. His vocabulary and constructions are often such as would have conveyed to his contemporaries a grateful flavour of the past, but they would never have been unintelligible. Forms like iusso, olle or admittier can have delayed no one.

59. Virgil.—In Virgil, the Latin language reached its peak. Just as Cicero was significant for his time, Virgil was for the hexameter; in fact, the changes he made were even more pronounced, since poetic language allows for greater nuance and refinement than even the most skillful prose. He replaced the straightforward and idiomatic simplicity of Lucretius and Catullus with an extremely precise and elegant vocabulary, enriched by diverse sources of inspiration. Sometimes, he literally borrowed a phrase from Homer with bold creativity, sometimes he used a line from Ennius, or even an artistic blend from Sophocles. Virgil was well-versed in both the great Greek style models and earlier Latin poets. This knowledge, combined with a keen sense of what worked well together, allowed him to infuse his writing with a musicality that evokes the full tones of the Greek lyre and the elevated melodies of truly national songs. His appreciation for historical language is often noted, but it never veers into pretentiousness. His choice of words and structure often provided his contemporaries with a pleasant taste of the past, yet they were always understandable. Forms like iusso, olle, or admittier wouldn’t have confused anyone.

In the details of syntax it is difficult to notice any peculiarly Virgilian points, for the reason that his language, like that of Cicero, became the canon, departures from which were accounted irregularities. But we may notice as favourite constructions a free use of oblique cases in the place of the more definite construction with prepositions usual in prose, e.g. it clamor caelo, flet noctem, rivis currentia vina, bacchatam iugis Naxon, and many similar phrases; the employment of some substantives as adjectives, like venator canis, and vice versa, as plurimus volitans; a proleptic use of adjectives, as tristia torquebit; idioms involving ille, atque, deinde, haud, quin, vix, and the frequent occurrence of passive verbs in their earlier reflexive sense, as induor, velor, pascor.

In the specifics of syntax, it's hard to spot any uniquely Virgilian features because his language, like Cicero's, was established as the standard, with deviations seen as irregularities. However, we can note some favorite constructions, such as the frequent use of oblique cases instead of the more straightforward constructions with prepositions common in prose, for example, it clamor caelo, flet noctem, rivis currentia vina, bacchatam iugis Naxon, and many similar phrases. He also uses some nouns as adjectives, like venator canis, and vice versa, as in plurimus volitans; there’s a proleptic use of adjectives, as in tristia torquebit; idiomatic expressions containing ille, atque, deinde, haud, quin, vix, and the common use of passive verbs in their earlier reflexive sense, such as induor, velor, pascor.

255

255

60. Livy.—In the singularly varied and beautiful style of Livy we find Latin prose in rich maturity. To a training in the rhetorical schools, and perhaps professional experience as a teacher of rhetoric, he added a thorough familiarity with contemporary poetry and with the Greek language; and these attainments have all deeply coloured his language. It is probable that the variety of style naturally suggested by the wide range of his subject matter was increased by a half-unconscious adoption of the phrases and constructions of the different authorities whom he followed in different parts of his work; and the industry of German critics has gone far to demonstrate a conclusion likely enough in itself. Hence perhaps comes the fairly long list of archaisms, especially in formulae (cf. Kühnast, Liv. Synt. pp. 14-18). These are, however, purely isolated phenomena, which do not affect the general tone. It is different with the poetical constructions and Graecisms, which appear on every page. Of the latter we find numerous instances in the use of the cases, e.g. in genitives like via praedae omissae, oppidum Antiochiae, aequum campi; in datives like quibusdam volentibus erat; in accusatives like iurare calumniam, certare multam; an especially frequent use of transitive verbs absolutely; and the constant omission of the reflexive pronoun as the subject of an infinitive in reported speech. To the same source must be assigned the very frequent pregnant construction with prepositions, an attraction of relatives, and the great extension of the employment of relative adverbs of place instead of relative pronouns, e.g. quo = in quem. Among his poetical characteristics we may place the extensive list of words which are found for the first time in his works and in those of Virgil or Ovid, and perhaps his common use of concrete words for collective, e.g. eques for equitatus, of abstract terms such as remigium, servitia, robora, and of frequentative verbs, to say nothing of poetical phrases like haec ubi dicta dedit, adversum montium, &c. Indications of the extended use of the subjunctive, which he shares with contemporary writers, especially poets, are found in the construction of ante quam, post quam with this mood, even when there is no underlying notion of anticipation, of donec, and of cum meaning “whenever.” On the other hand, forsitan and quamvis, as in the poets, are used with the indicative in forgetfulness of their original force. Among his individual peculiarities may be noticed the large number of verbal nouns in -tus (for which Cicero prefers forms in -tio) and in -tor, and the extensive use of the past passive participle to replace an abstract substantive, e.g. ex dictatorio imperio concusso. In the arrangement of words Livy is much more free than any previous prose writer, aiming, like the poets, at the most effective order. His periods are constructed with less regularity than those of Cicero, but they gain at least as much in variety and energy as they lose in uniformity of rhythm and artistic finish. His style cannot be more fitly described than in the language of Quintilian, who speaks of his mira iucunditas and lactea ubertas.

60. Livy.—In the uniquely varied and beautiful style of Livy, we see Latin prose at its rich maturity. Alongside his training in rhetorical schools and maybe some professional experience as a rhetoric teacher, he developed a deep familiarity with contemporary poetry and the Greek language; these skills greatly influenced his language. It’s likely that the variety of style naturally suggested by the broad range of his topics was further enhanced by an unconscious adoption of phrases and structures from the different sources he followed in various sections of his work; German critics have substantially shown that this conclusion is quite likely. This might explain the relatively long list of archaisms, particularly in phrases (see Kühnast, Liv. Synt. pp. 14-18). However, these are simply isolated instances and don’t affect the overall tone. In contrast, the poetic constructions and Graecisms are present on nearly every page. Numerous examples can be found in the use of cases, such as in genitives like via praedae omissae, oppidum Antiochiae, aequum campi; in datives like quibusdam volentibus erat; in accusatives like iurare calumniam, certare multam; a notably frequent use of transitive verbs in absolute constructions; and the consistent omission of the reflexive pronoun as the subject of an infinitive in reported speech. The very frequent elliptical construction with prepositions, attraction of relatives, and the significant increase in the use of relative adverbs of place in place of relative pronouns, e.g. quo = in quem, should also be attributed to the same source. Among his poetic features, we can include the extensive list of words that appear for the first time in his works and in those of Virgil or Ovid, along with his common use of concrete words for collective terms, e.g. eques for equitatus, abstract terms like remigium, servitia, robora, and frequentative verbs, not to mention poetic phrases like haec ubi dicta dedit, adversum montium, etc. Signs of the broader use of the subjunctive, which he shares with contemporary writers, especially poets, can be seen in the construction of ante quam, post quam with this mood, even in the absence of a sense of anticipation, and in donec and cum meaning “whenever.” On the other hand, forsitan and quamvis, like in the poets, are used with the indicative, forgetting their original meaning. Among his individual quirks, we note the large number of verbal nouns in -tus (which Cicero prefers to form as -tio) and in -tor, along with the extensive use of the past passive participle to substitute an abstract noun, e.g. ex dictatorio imperio concusso. In terms of word arrangement, Livy is much freer than any previous prose writer, aiming, like poets, for the most effective order. His sentences are constructed with less regularity than those of Cicero, but they gain at least as much in variety and energy as they lose in uniformity of rhythm and artistic polish. His style can best be described using Quintilian's words, who speaks of his mira iucunditas and lactea ubertas.

61. Propertius.—The language of Propertius is too distinctly his own to call for detailed examination here. It cannot be taken as a specimen of the great current of the Latin language; it is rather a tributary springing from a source apart, tinging to some slight extent the stream into which it pours itself, but soon ceasing to affect it in any perceptible fashion. “His obscurity, his indirectness and his incoherence” (to adopt the words of J. P. Postgate) were too much out of harmony with the Latin taste for him to be regarded as in any sense representative; sometimes he seems to be hardly writing Latin at all. Partly from his own strikingly independent genius, partly from his profound and not always judicious study of the Alexandrian writers, his poems abound in phrases and constructions which are without a parallel in Latin poetry. His archaisms and Graecisms, both in diction and in syntax, are very numerous; but frequently there is a freedom in the use of cases and prepositions which can only be due to bold and independent innovations. His style well deserves a careful study for its own sake (cf. J. P. Postgate’s Introduction, pp. lvii.-cxxv.); but it is of comparatively little significance in the history of the language.

61. Propertius.—The language of Propertius is so distinctively his own that it doesn’t warrant a detailed examination here. It shouldn’t be seen as representative of the mainstream Latin language; rather, it's like a tributary that springs from a separate source, slightly coloring the stream into which it flows but quickly losing its impact. “His obscurity, his indirectness, and his incoherence” (to quote J. P. Postgate) were too discordant with the Latin taste for him to be viewed as representative in any way; at times, it seems like he’s not really writing Latin at all. Due in part to his strikingly independent genius and his deep, not always wise, study of Alexandrian writers, his poems feature phrases and constructions that have no parallels in Latin poetry. His archaisms and Graecisms, both in vocabulary and syntax, are abundant; yet often, there’s a freedom in the use of cases and prepositions that stems from bold and independent innovations. His style deserves careful study for its own merit (cf. J. P. Postgate’s Introduction, pp. lvii.-cxxv.); however, it holds comparatively little significance in the history of the language.

62. Ovid.—The brief and few poems of Tibullus supply only what is given much more fully in the works of Ovid. In these we have the language recognized as that best fitted for poetry by the fashionable circles in the later years of Augustus. The style of Ovid bears many traces of the imitation of Virgil, Horace and Propertius, but it is not less deeply affected by the rhetoric of the schools. His never-failing fertility of fancy and command of diction often lead him into a diffuseness which mars the effect of his best works; according to Quintilian it was only in his (lost) tragedy of Medea that he showed what real excellence he might have reached if he had chosen to control his natural powers. His influence on later poets was largely for evil; if he taught them smoothness of versification and polish of language, he also co-operated powerfully with the practice of recitation to lead them to aim at rhetorical point and striking turns of expression, instead of a firm grasp of a subject as a whole, and due subordination of the several parts to the general impression. Ovid’s own influence on language was not great; he took the diction of poetry as he found it, formed by the labours of his predecessors; the conflict between the archaistic and the Graecizing schools was already settled in favour of the latter; and all that he did was to accept the generally accepted models as supplying the material in moulding which his luxuriant fancy could have free play. He has no deviations from classical syntax but those which were coming into fashion in his time (e.g. forsitan and quamvis with the indic., the dative of the agent with passive verbs, the ablative for the accusative of time, the infinitive after adjectives like certus, aptus, &c.), and but few peculiarities in his vocabulary. It is only in the letters from the Pontus that laxities of construction are detected, which show that the purity of his Latin was impaired by his residence away from Rome, and perhaps by increasing carelessness of composition.

62. Ovid.—The short and few poems of Tibullus provide only what is covered in much greater detail in the works of Ovid. In these, we find the language recognized as the best suited for poetry by the elite circles in the later years of Augustus. Ovid's style shows many signs of imitating Virgil, Horace, and Propertius, but is also significantly influenced by the rhetoric of the schools. His endless creativity and command of language often lead to a wordiness that detracts from the impact of his best works; according to Quintilian, it was only in his (lost) tragedy, Medea, that he demonstrated the true excellence he could have achieved if he had chosen to control his inherent talents. His influence on later poets was largely negative; while he imparted smoothness in verse and polished language, he also reinforced the trend of recitation, prompting poets to focus on rhetorical flair and striking turns of phrase instead of maintaining a solid understanding of their subject matter and properly organizing its various parts to create a cohesive impression. Ovid's own impact on language was limited; he adopted the poetic diction as he found it, shaped by the efforts of those before him; the debate between the archaistic and Graecizing schools had already been resolved in favor of the latter, and all he did was use the commonly accepted models as a basis for his abundant imagination. He made no deviations from classical syntax except for those that were becoming fashionable in his time (e.g., forsitan and quamvis with the indicative, the dative of the agent with passive verbs, the ablative for the accusative of time, the infinitive after adjectives like certus, aptus, etc.), and has only a few peculiarities in his vocabulary. It is mainly in the letters from the Pontus that we find loose constructions, indicating that the purity of his Latin suffered from his time away from Rome and possibly from a growing carelessness in his writing.

63. The Latin of Daily Life.—While the leading writers of the Ciceronian and Augustan eras enable us to trace the gradual development of the Latin language to its utmost finish as an instrument of literary expression, there are some less important authors who supply valuable evidence of the character of the sermo plebeius. Among them may be placed the authors of the Bellum Africanum and the Bellum Hispaniense appended to Caesar’s Commentaries. These are not only far inferior to the exquisite urbanitas of Caesar’s own writings; they are much rougher in style even than the less polished Bellum Alexandrinum and De Bello Gallico Liber VIII., which are now with justice ascribed to Hirtius. There is sufficient difference between the two to justify us in assuming two different authors; but both freely employ words and constructions which are at once antiquated and vulgar. The writer of the Bellum Alexandrinum uses a larger number of diminutives within his short treatise than Caesar in nearly ten times the space; postquam and ubi are used with the pluperfect subjunctive; there are numerous forms unknown to the best Latin, like tristimonia, exporrigere, cruciabiliter and convulnero; potior is followed by the accusative, a simple relative by the subjunctive. There is also a very common use of the pluperfect for the imperfect, which seems a mark of this plebeius sermo (Nipperdey, Quaest. Caes. pp. 13-30).

63. The Latin of Daily Life.—While the main writers from the Ciceronian and Augustan periods let us trace the gradual evolution of the Latin language into a highly refined tool for literary expression, there are some lesser-known authors who provide valuable insights into the character of the sermo plebeius. Among these are the writers of the Bellum Africanum and the Bellum Hispaniense attached to Caesar’s Commentaries. These works not only fall far short of Caesar’s own polished urbanitas, but their style is also much coarser than that of the less refined Bellum Alexandrinum and De Bello Gallico Liber VIII., which are now rightly attributed to Hirtius. There’s enough difference between the two to support the idea that they were written by different authors; however, both make extensive use of words and phrases that are both outdated and crude. The writer of the Bellum Alexandrinum includes more diminutives in his brief treatise than Caesar does in almost ten times the length; postquam and ubi are used with the pluperfect subjunctive; there are many forms that are unfamiliar to the best Latin, such as tristimonia, exporrigere, cruciabiliter, and convulnero; potior takes the accusative, and simple relatives are followed by the subjunctive. Additionally, there’s a very common use of the pluperfect for the imperfect, which seems to be a characteristic of this plebeius sermo (Nipperdey, Quaest. Caes. pp. 13-30).

Another example of what we may call the Latin of business life is supplied by Vitruvius. Besides the obscurity of many of his technical expressions, there is a roughness and looseness in his language, far removed from a literary style; he shares the incorrect use of the pluperfect, and uses plebeian forms like calefaciuntur, faciliter, expertiones and such careless phrases as rogavit Archimedem uti in se sumeret sibi de eo cogitationem. At a somewhat later stage we have, not merely plebeian, but also provincial Latin represented in the Satyricon of Petronius. The narrative and the poems which are introduced into it are written in a style distinguished only by the ordinary peculiarities of silver Latinity; but in the numerous conversations the distinctions of language appropriate to the various speakers are accurately preserved; and we have in the talk of the slaves and provincials a perfect storehouse of words and constructions of the greatest linguistic value. Among the unclassical forms and constructions may be noticed masculines like fatus, vinus, balneus, fericulus and lactem (for lac), striga for strix, gaudimonium and tristimonium, sanguen, manducare, nutricare, molestare, nesapius (sapius = Fr. sage), rostrum (= os), ipsimus (= master), scordalias, baro, and numerous diminutives like camella, audaculus, potiuncula, 256 savunculum, offla, peduclus, corcillum, with constructions such as maledicere and persuadere with the accusative, and adiutare with the dative, and the deponent forms pudeatur and ridetur. Of especial interest for the Romance languages are astrum (désastre), berbex (brébis), botellus (boyau), improperare, muttus, naufragare.

Another example of what we might call the Latin of business life comes from Vitruvius. In addition to the complexity of many of his technical terms, his language has a roughness and looseness that’s far from literary style; he improperly uses the pluperfect, and employs common forms like calefaciuntur, faciliter, expertiones, and careless phrases like rogavit Archimedem uti in se sumeret sibi de eo cogitationem. A little later, we see not just common Latin but also regional Latin represented in the Satyricon of Petronius. The narrative and the poems included in it are written in a style marked only by the usual features of silver Latinity; however, in the many conversations, the specific nuances of language suited to different speakers are well preserved, giving us a rich collection of valuable words and structures in the speech of slaves and provincials. Among the non-classical forms and constructions are masculine words like fatus, vinus, balneus, fericulus, and lactem (for lac), striga for strix, gaudimonium and tristimonium, sanguen, manducare, nutricare, molestare, nesapius (sapius = Fr. sage), rostrum (= os), ipsimus (= master), scordalias, baro, and various diminutives like camella, audaculus, potiuncula, savunculum, offla, peduclus, corcillum, along with constructions like maledicere and persuadere with the accusative, and adiutare with the dative, as well as deponent forms pudeatur and ridetur. Of particular interest for the Romance languages are astrum (désastre), berbex (brébis), botellus (boyau), improperare, muttus, naufragare.

Suetonius (Aug. c. 87) gives an interesting selection of plebeian words employed in conversation by Augustus, who for the rest was something of a purist in his written utterances: ponit assidue et pro stulto baceolum, et pro pullo pulleiaceum, et pro cerrito vacerrosum, et vapide se habere pro male, et betizare pro languere, quod vulgo lachanizare dicitur.

Suetonius (Aug. c. 87) shares some interesting common words that Augustus used in conversation, although he was generally quite formal in his writing: ponit assidue et pro stulto baceolum, et pro pullo pulleiaceum, et pro cerrito vacerrosum, et vapide se habere pro male, et betizare pro languere, quod vulgo lachanizare dicitur.

The inscriptions, especially those of Pompeii, supply abundant evidence of the corruptions both of forms and of pronunciation common among the vulgar. It is not easy always to determine whether a mutilated form is evidence of a letter omitted in pronunciation, or only in writing; but it is clear that the ordinary man habitually dropped final m, s, and t, omitted n before s, and pronounced ĭ like ĕ. There are already signs of the decay of ae to e, which later on became almost universal. The additions to our vocabulary are slight and unimportant (cf. Corpus Inscr. Lat. iv., with Zangemeister’s Indices).

The inscriptions, especially those from Pompeii, provide plenty of proof of the mispronunciations and informal language common among everyday people. It's not always easy to figure out if a misspelled word is due to a letter being dropped in speech or just in writing; however, it's clear that the average person often dropped final m, s, and t, skipped n before s, and pronounced ĭ like ĕ. There are already signs showing the decline of ae to e, which later became nearly universal. The additions to our vocabulary are minimal and not very significant (cf. Corpus Inscr. Lat. iv., with Zangemeister’s Indices).

64. To turn to the language of literature. In the dark days of Tiberius and the two succeeding emperors a paralysis seemed to have come upon prose and poetry alike. With the one exception of oratory, literature had long been the utterance of a narrow circle, not the expression of the energies of national life; and now, while all free speech in the popular assemblies was silenced, the nobles were living under a suspicious despotism, which, whatever the advantage which it brought to the poorer classes and to the provincials, was to them a reign of terror. It is no wonder that the fifty years after the accession of Tiberius are a blank as regards all higher literature. Velleius Paterculus, Valerius Maximus, Celsus and Phaedrus give specimens of the Latin of the time, but the style of no one of these, classical for the most part in vocabulary, but occasionally approaching the later usages in syntax, calls for special analysis. The elder Seneca in his collection of suasoriae and controversiae supplies examples of the barren quibblings by which the young Romans were trained in the rhetorical schools. A course of instruction, which may have been of service when its end was efficiency in active public life, though even then not without its serious drawbacks, as is shown by Cicero in his treatise De Oratore, became seriously injurious when its object was merely idle display. Prose came to be overloaded with ornament, and borrowed too often the language, though not the genius, of poetry; while poetry in its turn, partly owing to the fashion of recitation, became a string of rhetorical points.

64. Let's talk about the language of literature. During the dark times of Tiberius and the two emperors that followed, both prose and poetry seemed to come to a standstill. Aside from oratory, literature had long been the voice of a small group, not a reflection of the energy of national life; and now, with free speech in public assemblies silenced, the nobility lived under a watchful despotism that, while it may have benefited the poorer classes and provinces, felt like a reign of terror for them. It’s not surprising that the fifty years after Tiberius’s rise to power are considered a blank when it comes to higher literature. Velleius Paterculus, Valerius Maximus, Celsus, and Phaedrus represent the Latin of that time, but none of their styles, mostly classical in vocabulary but occasionally hinting at later syntax, warrant special analysis. The elder Seneca, in his collection of suasoriae and controversiae, showcases the pointless quibbling that young Romans faced in rhetorical schools. This type of education may have been useful for those looking to succeed in public life, although it had its serious downsides, as Cicero points out in his work De Oratore, but it became harmful when the goal was just for show. Prose became overly embellished and borrowed too frequently from poetry's language, though not its spirit; meanwhile, poetry itself, partly due to the trend of recitation, turned into a mere series of rhetorical points.

65. Seneca, Persius and Lucan.—In the writers of Nero’s age there are already plain indications of the evil effects of the rhetorical schools upon language as well as literature. The leading man of letters was undoubtedly Seneca the younger, “the Ovid of prose”; and his style set the model which it became the fashion to imitate. But it could not commend itself to the judgment of sound critics like Quintilian, who held firmly to the great masters of an earlier time. He admits its brilliance, and the fertility of its pointed reflections, but charges the author justly with want of self-restraint, jerkiness, frequent repetitions and tawdry tricks of rhetoric. Seneca was the worst of models, and pleased by his very faults. In his tragedies the rhetorical elaboration of the style only serves to bring into prominence the frigidity and frequent bad taste of the matter. But his diction is on the whole fairly classical; he is, in the words of Muretus, vetusti sermonis diligentior quam quidam inepte fastidiosi suspicantur. In Persius there is a constant straining after rhetorical effect, which fills his verses with harsh and obscure expressions. The careful choice of diction by which his master Horace makes every word tell is exaggerated into an endeavour to gain force and freshness by the most contorted phrases. The sin of allusiveness is fostered by the fashion of the day for epigram, till his lines are barely intelligible after repeated reading. Conington happily suggested that this style was assumed only for satiric purposes, and pointed out that when not writing satire Persius was as simple and unaffected as Horace himself. This view, while it relieves Persius of much of the censure which has been directed against his want of judgment, makes him all the more typical a representative of this stage of silver Latinity. In his contemporary Lucan we have another example of the faults of a style especially attractive to the young, handled by a youth of brilliant but ill-disciplined powers. The Pharsalia abounds in spirited rhetoric, in striking epigram, in high sounding declamation; but there are no flights of sustained imagination, no ripe wisdom, no self-control in avoiding the exaggerated or the repulsive, no mature philosophy of life or human destiny. Of all the Latin poets he is the least Virgilian. It has been said of him that he corrupted the style of poetry, not less than Seneca that of prose.

65. Seneca, Persius and Lucan.—In the writers of Nero’s era, there are clear signs of the negative impact of rhetorical schools on both language and literature. The most prominent literary figure was definitely Seneca the Younger, “the Ovid of prose,” and his style became the one everyone wanted to imitate. However, it didn't earn praise from discerning critics like Quintilian, who remained loyal to the great masters of earlier times. He acknowledged its brilliance and the richness of its sharp reflections but rightly criticized the author for a lack of self-control, choppiness, frequent repetitions, and cheap rhetorical tricks. Seneca served as a poor role model, even being admired for his faults. In his tragedies, the overly ornate style only highlights the coldness and frequent bad taste of the content. Nevertheless, his language is generally quite classical; he is, in the words of Muretus, vetusti sermonis diligentior quam quidam inepte fastidiosi suspicantur. In Persius, there’s a constant effort to achieve rhetorical effect, which fills his verses with harsh and obscure phrases. The careful selection of words that his mentor Horace uses to ensure every word matters is exaggerated into a struggle for strength and freshness through convoluted expressions. The trend for epigrams encourages allusiveness, making his lines almost unintelligible after multiple readings. Conington rightly suggested that this style was adopted solely for satiric purposes and noted that when not writing satire, Persius was as straightforward and unaffected as Horace himself. This perspective, while sparing Persius much of the criticism aimed at his lack of judgment, also makes him an even more typical representative of this phase of silver Latinity. In his contemporary, Lucan, we find another example of the flaws of a style particularly appealing to the youth, executed by a young man with brilliant but untrained abilities. The Pharsalia is full of spirited rhetoric, striking epigrams, and grandiloquent declamations; however, it lacks sustained imaginative flights, mature wisdom, self-control in avoiding the exaggerated or the distasteful, and any developed philosophy of life or human fate. Out of all the Latin poets, he is the least Virgilian. It has been said that he corrupted the style of poetry just as much as Seneca did with prose.

66. Pliny, Quintilian, Frontinus.—In the elder Pliny the same tendencies are seen occasionally breaking out in the midst of the prosaic and inartistic form in which he gives out the stores of his cumbrous erudition. Wherever he attempts a loftier tone than that of the mere compiler, he falls into the tricks of Seneca. The nature of his encyclopaedic subject matter naturally makes his vocabulary very extensive; but in syntax and general tone of language he does not differ materially from contemporary writers. Quintilian is of interest especially for the sound judgment which led him to a true appreciation of the writers of Rome’s golden age. He set himself strenuously to resist the tawdry rhetoric fashionable in his own time, and to hold up before his pupils purer and loftier models. His own criticisms are marked by excellent taste, and often by great happiness of expression, which is pointed without being unduly epigrammatic. But his own style did not escape, as indeed it hardly could, the influences of his time; and in many small points his language falls short of classical purity. There is more approach to the simplicity of the best models in Frontinus, who furnishes a striking proof that it was rather the corruption of literary taste than any serious change in the language of ordinary cultivated men to which the prevalent style was due. Writing on practical matters—the art of war and the water-supply of Rome—he goes straight to the point without rhetorical flourishes; and the ornaments of style which he occasionally introduces serve to embellish but not to distort his thought.

66. Pliny, Quintilian, Frontinus.—In the elder Pliny, the same tendencies sometimes emerge amidst the dry and unartistic way he presents his extensive knowledge. Whenever he tries to adopt a more elevated style than that of a simple compiler, he falls into the techniques of Seneca. The nature of his all-encompassing topics naturally leads to a very broad vocabulary; however, in terms of syntax and the overall tone of his language, he doesn’t differ much from contemporary writers. Quintilian is particularly interesting for his keen judgment that allowed him to genuinely appreciate the writers of Rome’s golden age. He worked hard to resist the flashy rhetoric that was popular in his time and aimed to present purer and more elevated examples to his students. His critiques are characterized by excellent taste and often express ideas well, being sharp without being overly epigrammatic. However, his style was not immune, as it was hard for it to be, to the influences of his era; and in many minor aspects, his language lacks classical purity. Frontinus comes closer to the simplicity of the best models, providing a clear example that the overall style was more about a decline in literary taste than a significant change in the language of educated people. Writing about practical matters—the art of war and the water supply of Rome—he gets straight to the point without rhetorical embellishments; and the stylistic elements he occasionally adds enhance rather than obscure his ideas.

67. The Flavian Age.—The epic poets of the Flavian age present a striking contrast to the writers of the Claudian period. As a strained originality was the cardinal fault of the one school, so a tame and slavish following of authority is the mark of the other. The general correctness of this period may perhaps be ascribed (with Merivale) partly to the political conditions, partly to the establishment of professional schools. Teachers like Quintilian must have done much to repress extravagance of thought and language; but they could not kindle the spark of genius. Valerius Flaccus, Silius Italicus and Papinius Statius are all correct in diction and in rhythm, and abound in learning; but their inspiration is drawn from books and not from nature or the heart; details are elaborated to the injury of the impression of the whole; every line is laboured, and overcharged with epigrammatic rhetoric. Statius shows by far the greatest natural ability and freshness; but he attempts to fill a broad canvas with drawing and colouring suited only to a miniature. Juvenal exemplifies the tendencies of the language of his time, as moulded by a singularly powerful mind. A careful study of the earlier poets, especially Virgil and Lucan, has kept his language up to a high standard of purity. His style is eminently rhetorical; but it is rhetoric of real power. The concise brevity by which it is marked seems to have been the result of a deliberate attempt to mould his natural diffuseness into the form recognized as most appropriate for satire. In his verses we notice a few metrical peculiarities which represent the pronunciation of his age, especially the shortening of the final -o in verbs, but as a rule they conform to the Virgilian standard. In Martial the tendency of this period to witty epigram finds its most perfect embodiment, combined with finished versification.

67. The Flavian Age.—The epic poets of the Flavian age stand in stark contrast to the writers of the Claudian period. While the first group suffered from an overly strained originality, the second is marked by a tame and slavish adherence to authority. The general correctness of this period can perhaps be attributed (as Merivale suggested) partly to the political climate and partly to the establishment of professional schools. Educators like Quintilian likely did much to suppress wild ideas and extravagant language; however, they couldn't ignite the spark of true genius. Valerius Flaccus, Silius Italicus, and Papinius Statius all demonstrate correctness in language and rhythm, filled with knowledge; however, their inspiration comes from books instead of nature or emotion. They elaborate on details to the detriment of the overall impression; every line feels labored and overly packed with flashy rhetoric. Statius shows a significant amount of natural talent and freshness, yet he tries to fill a large canvas with intricate details suited only for a small piece. Juvenal exemplifies the linguistic trends of his time, shaped by a uniquely powerful mind. A thorough study of earlier poets, especially Virgil and Lucan, has kept his language at a high standard of purity. His style is highly rhetorical, but it's powerful rhetoric. The concise brevity that defines his work appears to be a conscious effort to shape his naturally sprawling style into what was deemed most suitable for satire. In his verses, we notice a few metrical quirks that reflect the pronunciation of his time, especially the shortening of the final -o in verbs, but generally, his work aligns with the Virgilian standard. In Martial, the period's inclination toward witty epigrams finds its most perfect expression, combined with polished verse.

68. Pliny the Younger and Tacitus.—The typical prose-writers of this time are Pliny the younger and Tacitus. Some features of the style of Tacitus are peculiar to himself; but on the whole the following statement represents the tendencies shared in greater or less degree by all the writers of this period. The gains lie mainly in the direction of a more varied and occasionally 257 more effective syntax; its most striking defect is a lack of harmony in the periods, of arrangements in words, of variety in particles arising from the loose connexion of sentences. The vocabulary is extended, but there are losses as well as gains. Quintilian’s remarks are fully borne out by the evidence of extant authorities: on the one hand, quid quod nihil iam proprium placet, dum parum creditur disertum, quod et alius dixisset (viii. prooem. 24); a corruptissimo quoque poetarum figuras seu translationes mutuamur; tum demum ingeniosi scilicet, si ad intelligendos nos opus sit ingenio (ib. 25); sordet omne quod natura dictavit (ib. 26); on the other hand, nunc utique, cum haec exercitatio procul a veritate seiuncta laboret incredibili verborum fastidio, ac sibi magnam partem sermonis absciderit (viii. 3, 23), multa cotidie ab antiquis ficta moriuntur (ib. 6, 32). A writer like Suetonius therefore did good service in introducing into his writings terms and phrases borrowed, not from the rhetoricians, but from the usage of daily life.

68. Pliny the Younger and Tacitus.—The typical prose writers of this time are Pliny the Younger and Tacitus. Some aspects of Tacitus’s style are unique to him; however, overall, the following statement reflects the tendencies shared to varying degrees by all writers of this period. The improvements mainly consist of a more diverse and sometimes more effective syntax; the most noticeable flaw is a lack of harmony in the sentence structure, word arrangement, and variety in conjunctions due to the loose connection of sentences. The vocabulary is broader, but there are losses alongside the gains. Quintilian’s observations are fully supported by the evidence from surviving sources: on one hand, quid quod nihil iam proprium placet, dum parum creditur disertum, quod et alius dixisset (viii. prooem. 24); a corruptissimo quoque poetarum figuras seu translationes mutuamur; tum demum ingeniosi scilicet, si ad intelligendos nos opus sit ingenio (ib. 25); sordet omne quod natura dictavit (ib. 26); on the other hand, nunc utique, cum haec exercitatio procul a veritate seiuncta laboret incredibili verborum fastidio, ac sibi magnam partem sermonis absciderit (viii. 3, 23), multa cotidie ab antiquis ficta moriuntur (ib. 6, 32). A writer like Suetonius therefore contributed positively by incorporating terms and phrases from everyday language, rather than just from the rhetoric.

69. In the vocabulary of Tacitus there are to be noted:—

69. In Tacitus's vocabulary, we should note:—

1. Words borrowed (consciously or unconsciously) from the classical poets, especially Virgil, occurring for the most part also in contemporary prose. Of these Dräger gives a list of ninety-five (Syntax und Stil des Tacitus, p. 96).

1. Words taken (knowingly or unknowingly) from the classical poets, especially Virgil, that mostly also appear in modern prose. Dräger provides a list of ninety-five of these (Syntax und Stil des Tacitus, p. 96).

2. Words occurring only, or for the first time, in Tacitus. These are for the most part new formations or compounds from stems already in use, especially verbal substantives in -tor and -sor, -tus and -sus, -tura and -mentum, with new frequentatives.

2. Words that appear only, or for the first time, in Tacitus. These are mostly new words or compounds created from existing stems, especially verbal nouns ending in -tor and -sor, -tus and -sus, -tura and -mentum, along with new frequentative forms.

3. Words used with a meaning (a) not found in earlier prose, but sometimes borrowed from the poets, e.g. componere, “to bury”; scriptura, “a writing”; ferratus “armed with a sword”; (b) peculiar to later writers, e.g. numerosus, “numerous”; famosus, “famous”; decollare, “to behead”; imputare, “to take credit for,” &c.; (c) restricted to Tacitus himself, e.g. dispergere = divolgare.

3. Words used with a meaning (a) not found in earlier prose, but sometimes borrowed from the poets, e.g. componere, “to bury”; scriptura, “a writing”; ferratus “armed with a sword”; (b) unique to later writers, e.g. numerosus, “numerous”; famosus, “famous”; decollare, “to behead”; imputare, “to take credit for,” &c.; (c) restricted to Tacitus himself, e.g. dispergere = divolgare.

Generally speaking, Tacitus likes to use a simple verb instead of a compound one, after the fashion of the poets, employs a pluperfect for a perfect, and (like Livy and sometimes Caesar) aims at vividness and variety by retaining the present and perfect subjunctive in indirect speech even after historical tenses. Collective words are followed by a plural far more commonly than in Cicero. The ellipse of a verb is more frequent. The use of the cases approximates to that of the poets, and is even more free. The accusative of limitation is common in Tacitus, though never found in Quintilian. Compound verbs are frequently followed by the accusative where the dative might have been expected; and the Virgilian construction of an accusative with middle and passive verbs is not unusual. The dative of purpose and the dative with a substantive in place of a genitive are more common with Tacitus than with any writer. The ablative of separation is used without a preposition, even with names of countries and with common nouns; the ablative of place is employed similarly without a preposition; the ablative of time has sometimes the force of duration; the instrumental ablative is employed even of persons. A large extension is given to the use of the quantitative genitive after neuter adjectives and pronouns, and even adverbs, and to the genitive with active participles; and the genitive of relation after adjectives is (probably by a Graecism) very freely employed. In regard to prepositions, there are special uses of citra, erga, iuxta and tenus to be noted, and a frequent tendency to interchange the use of a preposition with that of a simple case in corresponding clauses. In subordinate sentences quod is used for “the fact that,” and sometimes approaches the later use of “that”; the infinitive follows many verbs and adjectives that do not admit of this construction in classical prose; the accusative and infinitive are used after negative expressions of doubt, and even in modal and hypothetical clauses.

Generally speaking, Tacitus prefers to use a simple verb instead of a compound one. Following the style of poets, he uses a pluperfect in place of a perfect. He, like Livy and sometimes Caesar, aims for vividness and variety by retaining the present and perfect subjunctive in indirect speech even after historical tenses. Collective nouns are usually followed by a plural form more often than in Cicero's work. The omission of a verb occurs more frequently. The use of cases is similar to that of poets and is even more flexible. The accusative of limitation is common in Tacitus, although it is never found in Quintilian. Compound verbs are often followed by the accusative when the dative might have been expected. The Virgilian construction of an accusative with middle and passive verbs is also not unusual. The dative of purpose and the dative with a noun instead of a genitive are more common with Tacitus than with any other writer. The ablative of separation is used without a preposition, even with names of countries and common nouns. The ablative of place is similarly used without a preposition; the ablative of time sometimes expresses duration; and the instrumental ablative is also used for people. There is a significant extension in the use of the quantitative genitive after neuter adjectives, pronouns, and even adverbs, as well as the genitive with active participles. The genitive of relation after adjectives is used very freely (likely due to Greek influence). In terms of prepositions, there are notable specific uses of citra, erga, iuxta, and tenus, along with a frequent tendency to swap the use of a preposition with that of a simple case in corresponding clauses. In subordinate sentences, quod is used for “the fact that” and sometimes approaches the later use of “that.” The infinitive follows many verbs and adjectives that do not allow this construction in classical prose, and the accusative and infinitive are used after negative expressions of doubt, even in modal and hypothetical clauses.

Like Livy, the writers of this time freely employ the subjunctive of repeated action with a relative, and extend its use to relative conjunctions, which he does not. In clauses of comparison and proportion there is frequently an ellipse of a verb (with nihil aliud quam, ut, tanquam); tanquam, quasi and velut are used to imply not comparison but alleged reason; quin and quominus are interchanged at pleasure. Quamquam and quamvis are commonly followed by the subjunctive, even when denoting facts. The free use of the genitive and dative of the gerundive to denote purpose is common in Tacitus, the former being almost limited to him. Livy’s practice in the use of participles is extended even beyond the limits to which he restricts it. It has been calculated that where Caesar uses five participial clauses, Livy has sixteen, Tacitus twenty-four.

Like Livy, the writers of this period often use the subjunctive for actions that happen repeatedly with a relative, and they also extend its use to relative conjunctions, something Livy does not do. In comparison and proportion clauses, it’s common to leave out a verb (with nihil aliud quam, ut, tanquam); tanquam, quasi, and velut are used to suggest reasons rather than comparisons; quin and quominus can be switched freely. Quamquam and quamvis are usually followed by the subjunctive, even when indicating facts. The use of the genitive and dative of the gerundive to express purpose is common in Tacitus, with the genitive being almost exclusive to him. Livy’s approach to participles extends even beyond the limits he sets. It has been noted that where Caesar uses five participial clauses, Livy uses sixteen, and Tacitus uses twenty-four.

In his compressed brevity Tacitus may be said to be individual; but in the poetical colouring of his diction, in the rhetorical cast of his sentences, and in his love for picturesqueness and variety he is a true representative of his time.

In his concise style, Tacitus stands out as unique; however, in the poetic flair of his language, the rhetorical structure of his sentences, and his appreciation for vividness and diversity, he truly embodies his era.

70. Suetonius.—The language of Suetonius is of interest as giving a specimen of silver Latinity almost entirely free from personal idiosyncrasies; his expressions are regular and straightforward, clear and business-like; and, while in grammar he does not attain to classical purity, he is comparatively free from rhetorical affectations.

70. Suetonius.—The language of Suetonius is notable as an example of silver Latin that's mostly free from personal quirks; his phrases are consistent and straightforward, clear and practical; and, although his grammar doesn't reach classical perfection, he is relatively free from rhetorical pretentiousness.

71. The African Latinity.—A new era commences with the accession of Hadrian (117). As the preceding half century had been marked by the influence of Spanish Latinity (the Senecas, Lucan, Martial, Quintilian), so in this the African style was paramount. This is the period of affected archaisms and pedantic learning, combined at times with a reckless love of innovation and experiment, resulting in the creation of a large number of new formations and in the adoption of much of the plebeian dialect. Fronto and Apuleius mark a strong reaction against the culture of the preceding century, and for evil far more than for good the chain of literary tradition was broken. The language which had been unduly refined and elaborated now relapsed into a tasteless and confused patch-work, without either harmony or brilliance of colouring. In the case of the former the subject matter is no set-off against the inferiority of the style. He deliberately attempts to go back to the obsolete diction of writers like Cato and Ennius. We find compounds like altipendulus, nudiustertianus, tolutiloquentia, diminutives such as matercella, anulla, passercula, studiolum, forms like congarrire, disconcinnus, pedetemptius, desiderantissimus (passive), conticinium; gaudeo, oboedio and perfungor are used with an accusative, modestus with a genitive. On the other hand he actually attempts to revive the form asa for ara. In Apuleius the archaic element is only one element in the queer mixture which constitutes his style, and it probably was not intended to give the tone to the whole. Poetical and prosaic phrases, Graecisms, solecisms, jingling assonances, quotations and coinages apparently on the spur of the moment, all appear in this wonderful medley. There are found such extraordinary genitives as sitire beatitudinis, cenae pignerarer, incoram omnium, foras corporis, sometimes heaped one upon another as fluxos vestium Arsacidas et frugum pauperes Ityraeos et odorum divites Arabas. Diminutives are coined with reckless freedom, e.g. diutule, longule, mundule amicta el altiuscule sub ipsas papillas succinctula. He confesses himself that he is writing in a language not familiar to him: In urbe Latia advena studiorum Quiritium indigenam sermonem aerumnabili labore, nullo magistro praeeunte, aggressus excolui; and the general impression of his style fully bears out his confession. Melanchthon is hardly too severe when he says that Apuleius brays like his own ass. The language of Aulus Gellius is much superior in purity; but still it abounds in rare and archaic words, e.g. edulcare, recentari, aeruscator, and in meaningless frequentatives like solitavisse. He has some admirable remarks on the pedantry of those who delighted in obsolete expressions (xi. 7) such as apluda, flocus and bovinator; but his practice falls far short of his theory.

71. The African Latinity.—A new era begins with the rise of Hadrian (117). While the previous fifty years were characterized by Spanish Latinity (the Senecas, Lucan, Martial, Quintilian), this period saw the dominance of the African style. This era is marked by pretentious archaisms and pedantic learning, sometimes mixed with a reckless enthusiasm for innovation and experimentation, leading to many new formations and the use of a lot of common dialect. Fronto and Apuleius represent a strong reaction against the culture of the previous century, and unfortunately, for the most part, this disrupted the literary tradition. The language that had become overly refined and intricate now deteriorated into a tasteless and chaotic patchwork, lacking both harmony and brilliance. In Fronto’s case, the subject matter does not compensate for the inferiority of the style. He deliberately tries to revert to the outdated language of writers like Cato and Ennius. We see compounds like altipendulus, nudiustertianus, tolutiloquentia, diminutives such as matercella, anulla, passercula, studiolum, forms like congarrire, disconcinnus, pedetemptius, desiderantissimus (passive), and conticinium; gaudeo, oboedio, and perfungor are used with an accusative, while modestus is used with a genitive. On the other hand, he even tries to revive the form asa for ara. In Apuleius, the archaic element is just one part of the strange blend that makes up his style, and it probably wasn’t meant to set the tone for everything. Poetic and prosaic phrases, Greek influences, grammatical errors, catchy sounds, spontaneous quotations, and neologisms all appear in this remarkable mix. We find peculiar genitives like sitire beatitudinis, cenae pignerarer, incoram omnium, foras corporis, sometimes stacked on top of each other like fluxos vestium Arsacidas et frugum pauperes Ityraeos et odorum divites Arabas. Diminutives are created with reckless freedom, e.g. diutule, longule, mundule amicta el altiuscule sub ipsas papillas succinctula. He admits that he is writing in a language that is not familiar to him: In urbe Latia advena studiorum Quiritium indigenam sermonem aerumnabili labore, nullo magistro praeeunte, aggressus excolui; and his style fully supports his confession. Melanchthon is hardly too harsh when he says that Apuleius brays like his own donkey. The language of Aulus Gellius is much cleaner, but it still has its share of rare and archaic words, e.g. edulcare, recentari, aeruscator, and in meaningless frequentatives like solitavisse. He makes some excellent points about the pedantry of those who reveled in outdated expressions (xi. 7) like apluda, flocus, and bovinator; but his practice falls far short of his theory.

72. The Lawyers.—The style of the eminent lawyers of this period, foremost among whom is Gaius, deserves especial notice as showing well one of the characteristic excellences of the Latin language. It is for the most part dry and unadorned, and in syntax departs occasionally from classical usages, but it is clear, terse and exact. Technical terms may cause difficulty to the ordinary reader, but their meaning is always precisely defined; new compounds are employed whenever the subject requires them, but the capacities of the language rise to the demands made upon it; and the conceptions of jurisprudence have never been more adequately expressed than by the great Romanist jurists.

72. The Lawyers.—The writing style of the prominent lawyers of this time, especially Gaius, is worth noting because it highlights one of the distinctive strengths of the Latin language. It's mostly straightforward and unembellished, and while it sometimes strays from classical structure, it's clear, concise, and precise. Technical terms might be challenging for the average reader, but their meanings are always defined clearly; new terms are created as needed, and the language effectively meets the challenges it faces. The ideas in jurisprudence have never been articulated more effectively than by the great Roman jurists.

(A. S. W.; R. S. C.)

For the subsequent history of the language see Romance Languages.

For the later history of the language, see Romance Languages.


1 The grounds for this pronunciation will be found best stated in Postgate, How to pronounce Latin (1907), Arnold and Conway, The Restored Pronunciation of Greek and Latin (4th ed., Cambridge, 1908); and in the grammars enumerated in § 28 above, especially the preface to vol. i. of Roby’s Grammar. The chief points about c may be briefly given as a specimen of the kind of evidence. (1) In some words the letter following c varies in a manner which makes it impossible to believe that the pronunciation of the c depended upon this, e.g. decumus and decimus, dīc from Plaut. dīce; (2) if c was pronounced before e and i otherwise than before a, o and u, it is hard to see why k should not have been retained for the latter use; (3) no ancient writer gives any hint of a varying pronunciation of c; (4) a Greek κ is always transliterated by c, and c by κ; (5) Latin words containing c borrowed by Gothic and early High German are always spelt with k; (6) the varying pronunciations of ce, ci in the Romance languages are inexplicable except as derived independently from an original ke, ki.

1 The reasons for this pronunciation are best explained in Postgate, How to pronounce Latin (1907), Arnold and Conway, The Restored Pronunciation of Greek and Latin (4th ed., Cambridge, 1908); and in the grammars listed in § 28 above, especially the preface to vol. i. of Roby’s Grammar. The main points about c can be briefly summarized as an example of the type of evidence. (1) In some words, the letter following c varies in a way that makes it hard to believe the pronunciation of c depended on this, e.g. decumus and decimus, dīc from Plaut. dīce; (2) if c was pronounced differently before e and i than before a, o, and u, it’s difficult to understand why k wouldn’t have been kept for the latter cases; (3) no ancient writer suggests there was a changing pronunciation of c; (4) a Greek κ is always represented by c, and c by κ; (5) Latin words with c that were borrowed by Gothic and early High German are always spelled with k; (6) the different pronunciations of ce, ci in the Romance languages are unexplainable unless viewed as independently derived from an original ke, ki.

2 The inscription was first published by Helbig and Dümmler in Mittheilungen des deutschen archaol. Inst. Rom. ii. 40; since in C.I.L. xiv. 4123 and Conway, Italic Dial. 280, where other references will be found.

2 The inscription was first published by Helbig and Dümmler in Mittheilungen des deutschen archaol. Inst. Rom. ii. 40; it's also found in C.I.L. xiv. 4123 and Conway, Italic Dial. 280, where you'll find other references.

3 This inscription was first published by Dressel, Annali dell’ Inst. Archeol. Romano (1880), p. 158, and since then by a multitude of commentators. The view of the inscription as a curse, translating a Greek cursing-formula, which has been generally adopted, was first put forward by R. S. Conway in the American Journal of Philology, x. (1889), 453; see further his commentary Italic Dialects, p. 329, and since then G. Hempl, Trans. Amer. Philol. Assoc. xxxiii. (1902), 150, whose interpretation of iouesat = iurat and Opetoi Tesiai has been here adopted, and who gives other references.

3 This inscription was first published by Dressel, Annali dell’ Inst. Archeol. Romano (1880), p. 158, and since then by many commentators. The interpretation of the inscription as a curse, translating a Greek cursing formula, which is widely accepted, was first proposed by R. S. Conway in the American Journal of Philology, x. (1889), 453; for more, see his commentary Italic Dialects, p. 329. Additionally, G. Hempl in Trans. Amer. Philol. Assoc. xxxiii. (1902), 150, supports the interpretation of iouesat = iurat and Opetoi Tesiai, providing further references.

4 The most important writings upon it are those of Domenico Comparetti, Iscriz. arcaica del Foro Romano (Florence-Rome, 1900); Hülsen, Berl. philolog. Wochenschrift (1899), No. 40; and Thurneysen, Rheinisches Museum (Neue Folge), iii. 2. Prof. G. Tropea gives a Cronaca della discussione in a series of very useful articles in the Rivista di storia antica (Messina, 1900 and 1901). Skutsch’s article already cited puts the trustworthy results in an exceedingly brief compass.

4 The most significant writings on this subject are by Domenico Comparetti, Iscriz. arcaica del Foro Romano (Florence-Rome, 1900); Hülsen, Berl. philolog. Wochenschrift (1899), No. 40; and Thurneysen, Rheinisches Museum (Neue Folge), iii. 2. Prof. G. Tropea provides a Cronaca della discussione in a series of very helpful articles in the Rivista di storia antica (Messina, 1900 and 1901). Skutsch’s article previously mentioned presents the reliable findings in an extremely concise manner.

5 For further information see special articles on these authors, and Latin Literature.

5 For more information, check out the special articles on these authors, and Latin Literature.

6 Cicero also refers to certain scripta dulcissima of the son of Scipio Africanus Maior, which must have possessed some merits of style.

6 Cicero also mentions certain scripta dulcissima by the son of Scipio Africanus Maior, which must have had some stylistic qualities.

7 The study of the rhythm of the Clausulae, i.e. of the last dozen (or half-dozen) syllables of a period in different Latin authors, has been remarkably developed in the last three years, and is of the highest importance for the criticism of Latin prose. It is only possible to refer to Th. Zielinski’s Das Clauselgesetz in Cicero’s Reden (St. Petersburg, 1904), reviewed by A. C. Clark in Classical Review, 1905, p. 164, and to F. Skutsch’s important comments in Vollmöller’s Jahresberichten über die Fortschritte der romanischen Philologie (1905) and Glotta (i. 1908, esp. p. 413), also to A. C. Clark’s Fontes Prosae Numerosae (Oxford, 1909), The Cursus in Mediaeval and Vulgar Latin (ibid. 1910), and article Cicero.

7 The study of the rhythm of the Clausulae, meaning the last dozen (or half-dozen) syllables of a sentence in various Latin authors, has significantly advanced in the past three years and is extremely important for the analysis of Latin prose. It's worth mentioning Th. Zielinski’s Das Clauselgesetz in Cicero’s Reden (St. Petersburg, 1904), reviewed by A. C. Clark in Classical Review, 1905, p. 164, as well as F. Skutsch’s important contributions in Vollmöller’s Jahresberichten über die Fortschritte der romanischen Philologie (1905) and Glotta (i. 1908, especially p. 413), along with A. C. Clark’s Fontes Prosae Numerosae (Oxford, 1909), The Cursus in Mediaeval and Vulgar Latin (ibid. 1910), and article Cicero.

LATIN LITERATURE. The germs of an indigenous literature had existed at an early period in Rome and in the country districts of Italy, and they have an importance as indicating natural wants in the Italian race, which were ultimately satisfied by regular literary forms. The art of writing was first employed in the service of the state and of religion for books of ritual, treaties with other states, the laws of the Twelve Tables and the like. An approach to literature was made in the Annales Maximi, records of private families, funeral orations and inscriptions on busts and tombs such as those of the Scipios in 258 the Appian Way. In the satisfaction they afforded to the commemorative and patriotic instincts they anticipated an office afterwards performed by the national epics and the works of regular historians. A still nearer approach to literature was probably made in oratory, as we learn from Cicero that the famous speech delivered by Appius Claudius Caecus against concluding peace with Pyrrhus (280 B.C.) was extant in his time. Appius also published a collection of moral maxims and reflections in verse. No other name associated with any form of literature belonging to the pre-literary age has been preserved by tradition.

LATIN LITERATURE. The roots of a native literature existed early on in Rome and the rural areas of Italy, highlighting the natural needs of the Italian people that were eventually met by established literary forms. Writing was initially used for state and religious purposes, such as ritual books, treaties with other states, and the laws of the Twelve Tables. A step towards literature emerged in the Annales Maximi, which included records of private families, funeral speeches, and inscriptions on busts and tombs like those of the Scipios on the 258 Appian Way. These works satisfied commemorative and patriotic feelings, foreshadowing the roles later taken on by national epics and formal historical accounts. A closer approach to literature likely occurred in oratory, as noted by Cicero, who mentioned the renowned speech by Appius Claudius Caecus against peace with Pyrrhus (280 BCE) was known in his time. Appius also published a collection of moral sayings and reflections in verse. No other names tied to literary forms from the pre-literary era have been preserved through tradition.

But it was rather in the chants and litanies of the ancient religion, such as those of the Salii and the Fratres Arvales, and the dirges for the dead (neniae), and in certain extemporaneous effusions, that some germs of a native poetry might have been detected; and finally in the use of Saturnian verse, a metre of pure native origin, which by its rapid and lively movement gave expression to the vivacity and quick apprehension of the Italian race. This metre was employed in ritual hymns, which seem to have assumed definite shapes out of the exclamations of a primitive priesthood engaged in a rude ceremonial dance. It was also used by a class of bards or itinerant soothsayers known by the name of vates, of whom the most famous was one Marcius, and in the “Fescennine verses,” as sung at harvest-homes and weddings, which gave expression to the coarse gaiety of the people and to their strong tendency to personal raillery and satiric comment. The metre was also employed in commemorative poems, accompanied with music, which were sung at funeral banquets in celebration of the exploits and virtues of distinguished men. These had their origin in the same impulse which ultimately found its full gratification in Roman history, Roman epic poetry, and that form of Roman oratory known as laudationes, and in some of the Odes of Horace. The latest and probably the most important of these rude and inchoate forms was that of dramatic saturae (medleys), put together without any regular plot and consisting apparently of contests of wit and satiric invective, and perhaps of comments on current events, accompanied with music (Livy vii. 2). These have a real bearing on the subsequent development of Latin literature. They prepared the mind of the people for the reception of regular comedy. They may have contributed to the formation of the style of comedy which appears at the very outset much more mature than that of serious poetry, tragic or epic. They gave the name and some of the characteristics to that special literary product of the Roman soil, the satura, addressed to readers, not to spectators, which ultimately was developed into pure poetic satire in Lucilius, Horace, Persius and Juvenal, into the prose and verse miscellany of Varro, and into something approaching the prose novel in Petronius.

But it was mainly in the chants and prayers of the ancient religion, like those of the Salii and the Fratres Arvales, and in the funeral songs (neniae), as well as in some spontaneous expressions, that we might find the beginnings of native poetry. Finally, the use of Saturnian verse, a meter of purely local origin, captured the lively spirit and quick understanding of the Italian people with its fast and energetic rhythm. This meter was used in ritual hymns, which appeared to take shape from the shouts of a primitive group of priests performing a rough ceremonial dance. It was also used by a group of bards or traveling prophets called vates, the most famous of whom was Marcius. They employed it in the “Fescennine verses,” sung during harvest celebrations and weddings, which expressed the people's rough joy and their strong inclination towards teasing and sarcastic commentary. This meter was also featured in commemorative poems set to music, sung at funeral feasts to celebrate the achievements and virtues of notable individuals. These had their roots in the same drive that eventually led to Roman history, Roman epic poetry, and the form of Roman oratory called laudationes, and in some of Horace's Odes. The last and probably the most significant of these raw and early forms was the dramatic saturae (medleys), crafted without any fixed plot and seemingly consisting of displays of wit, satirical insults, and perhaps commentary on current events, accompanied by music (Livy vii. 2). These had a significant impact on the later development of Latin literature. They prepared the people's minds for the acceptance of structured comedy. They may have helped shape the style of comedy that appeared at the very beginning, much more advanced than that of serious poetry, whether tragic or epic. They contributed to naming and defining the characteristics of that unique literary form of Roman origin, the satura, aimed at readers rather than audiences, which ultimately evolved into pure poetic satire in Lucilius, Horace, Persius, and Juvenal, into the prose and verse mix of Varro, and into something resembling the prose novel in Petronius.

First Period: from 240 to about 80 B.C.

First Period: from 240 to about 80 BCE

The historical event which brought about the greatest change in the intellectual condition of the Romans, and thereby exercised a decisive influence on the whole course of human culture, was the capture of Tarentum in 272. After Livius Andronicus. the capture many Greek slaves were brought to Rome, and among them the young Livius Andronicus (c. 284-204), who was employed in teaching Greek in the family of his master, a member of the Livian gens. From that time to learn Greek became a regular part of the education of a Roman noble. The capture of Tarentum was followed by the complete Romanizing of all southern Italy. Soon after came the first Punic war, the principal scene of which was Sicily, where, from common hostility to the Carthaginian, Greek and Roman were brought into friendly relations, and the Roman armies must have become familiar with the spectacles and performances of the Greek theatre. In the year after the war (240), when the armies had returned and the people were at leisure to enjoy the fruits of victory, Livius Andronicus substituted at one of the public festivals a regular drama, translated or adapted from the Greek, for the musical medleys (saturae) hitherto in use. From this time dramatic performances became a regular accompaniment of the public games, and came more and more to encroach on the older kinds of amusement, such as the chariot races. The dramatic work of Livius was mainly of educative value. The same may be said of his translation of the Odyssey, which was still used as a school-book in the days of Horace, and the religious hymn which he was called upon to compose in 207 had no high literary pretensions. He was, however, the first to familiarize the Romans with the forms of the Greek drama and the Greek epic, and thus to determine the main lines which Latin literature followed for more than a century afterwards.

The historical event that caused the most significant shift in the intellectual environment of the Romans, and ultimately influenced the entire trajectory of human culture, was the capture of Tarentum in 272. After the capture, many Greek slaves were brought to Rome, including the young Livius Andronicus (c. 284-204), who taught Greek in the household of his master, a member of the Livian family. From that point on, learning Greek became a standard part of a Roman noble's education. The capture of Tarentum was followed by the complete Romanization of all of southern Italy. Soon after came the First Punic War, primarily centered in Sicily, where the shared hostility towards the Carthaginians brought Greeks and Romans into friendly interactions, allowing Roman armies to become accustomed to the spectacles and performances of Greek theatre. In the year after the war (240), when the armies had returned and people were ready to enjoy the rewards of victory, Livius Andronicus introduced a formal play, translated or adapted from the Greek, at one of the public festivals, replacing the musical medleys (saturae) that had been in use. From that time on, dramatic performances became a regular part of the public games and increasingly overshadowed older forms of entertainment, like chariot races. Livius's dramatic works primarily had educational value. The same could be said of his translation of the Odyssey, which was still used as a textbook in Horace's time, and the religious hymn he was asked to compose in 207 had no significant literary ambitions. However, he was the first to introduce the Romans to the structures of Greek drama and epic, thus defining the main directions that Latin literature followed for over a century afterward.

His immediate successor, Cn. Naevius (d. c. 200 B.C.), was not, like Livius, a Greek, but either a Roman citizen or, more probably, a Campanian who enjoyed the limited citizenship of a Latin and who had served in the Roman army in the Naevius. first Punic war. His first appearance as a dramatic author was in 235. He adapted both tragedies and comedies from the Greek, but the bent of his genius, the tastes of his audience, and the condition of the language developed through the active intercourse and business of life, gave a greater impulse to comedy than to tragedy. Naevius tried to use the theatre, as it had been used by the writers of the Old Comedy of Athens, for the purposes of political warfare, and thus seems to have anticipated by a century the part played by Lucilius. But his attacks upon the Roman aristocracy, especially the Metelli, were resented by their objects; and Naevius, after being imprisoned, had to retire in his old age into banishment. He was not only the first in point of time, and according to ancient testimony one of the first in point of merit, among the comic poets of Rome, and in spirit, though not in form, the earliest of the line of Roman satirists, but he was also the oldest of the national poets. Besides celebrating the success of M. Claudius Marcellus in 222 over the Gauls in a play called Clastidium, he gave the first specimen of the fabula praetexta in his Alimonium Romuli et Remi, based on the most national of all Roman traditions. Still more important service was rendered by him in his long Saturnian poem on the first Punic war, in which he not only told the story of contemporary events but gave shape to the legend of the settlement of Aeneas in Latium,—the theme ultimately adopted for the great national epic of Rome.

His immediate successor, Cn. Naevius (d. c. 200 BCE), was not, like Livius, a Greek, but either a Roman citizen or, more likely, a Campanian who held the limited citizenship of a Latin and had served in the Roman army during the Naevius. first Punic war. He made his debut as a dramatic author in 235. He adapted both tragedies and comedies from the Greek, but the nature of his talent, the preferences of his audience, and the evolution of the language shaped by active communication and everyday life gave a bigger push to comedy than to tragedy. Naevius attempted to use the theater, similar to how the writers of the Old Comedy of Athens did, for political purposes, and thus he seemed to have foreshadowed by a century the role played by Lucilius. However, his criticism of the Roman aristocracy, especially the Metelli, was not taken well by them, and after being imprisoned, Naevius had to go into exile in his old age. He was not only the first in chronological order and, according to ancient sources, one of the earliest in quality among the comic poets of Rome, and in spirit, even if not in form, the first of the Roman satirists, but he was also the oldest of the national poets. In addition to celebrating M. Claudius Marcellus' victory in 222 over the Gauls in a play called Clastidium, he presented the first example of the fabula praetexta in his Alimonium Romuli et Remi, which was based on the most quintessential of all Roman traditions. An even more significant contribution came from his lengthy Saturnian poem about the first Punic war, in which he not only narrated the events of his time but also shaped the legend of Aeneas’ settlement in Latium — a theme later adapted for Rome's great national epic.

His younger contemporary T. Maccius Plautus (c. 254-184) was the greatest comic dramatist of Rome. He lived and wrote only to amuse his contemporaries, and thus, although more popular in his lifetime and more fortunate than Plautus. any of the older authors in the ultimate survival of a large number of his works, he is less than any of the great writers of Rome in sympathy with either the serious or the caustic spirit in Latin literature. Yet he is the one extant witness to the humour and vivacity of the Italian temperament at a stage between its early rudeness and rigidity and its subsequent degeneracy.

His younger contemporary T. Maccius Plautus (c. 254-184) was the greatest comic playwright in Rome. He lived and wrote solely to entertain his audience, and as a result, although he was more popular during his lifetime and luckier than Plautus. any of the older writers in having a large number of his works survive, he has less connection with the serious or biting spirit found in Latin literature compared to the great writers of Rome. Still, he remains the only existing representation of the humor and liveliness of the Italian character at a time between its early clumsiness and strictness and its later decline.

Thus far Latin literature, of which the predominant characteristics are dignity, gravity and fervour of feeling, seemed likely to become a mere vehicle of amusement adapted to all classes of the people in their holiday mood. But a new spirit, which henceforth became predominant, appeared in the time of Plautus. Latin literature ceased to be in close sympathy with the popular spirit, either politically or as a form of amusement, but became the expression of the ideas, sentiment and culture of the aristocratic Ennius. governing class. It was by Q. Ennius (239-169) of Rudiae in Messapia, that a new direction was given to Latin literature. Deriving from his birthplace the culture, literary and philosophical, of Magna Graecia, and having gained the friendship of the greatest of the Romans living in that great age, he was of all the early writers most fitted to be the medium of conciliation between the serious genius of ancient Greece and the serious genius of Rome. Alone among the older writers he was endowed with the gifts of a poetical imagination and animated with enthusiasm for a great ideal.

So far, Latin literature, known for its dignity, seriousness, and passionate feeling, seemed poised to become just a source of entertainment for all social classes during their leisure time. However, a new spirit emerged during the time of Plautus that changed everything. Latin literature started to drift away from the popular sentiments of the people, both politically and as a form of entertainment, and began to reflect the ideas, emotions, and culture of the aristocratic ruling class. This shift was primarily brought about by Q. Ennius (239-169) from Rudiae in Messapia, who introduced a new direction for Latin literature. With his background in the culture, literature, and philosophy of Magna Graecia, and having formed friendships with the greatest Romans of that remarkable era, he was the most suitable among early writers to bridge the serious genius of ancient Greece with that of Rome. Unlike other earlier writers, he possessed a poetic imagination and was filled with enthusiasm for a significant ideal.

First among his special services to Latin literature was the fresh impulse which he gave to tragedy. He turned the eyes of his contemporaries from the commonplace social humours of later Greek life to the contemplation of the heroic age. But he did not thereby denationalize the Roman drama. He animated the heroes of early Greece with the martial spirit of Roman 259 soldiers and the ideal magnanimity and sagacity of Roman senators, and imparted weight and dignity to the language and verse in which their sentiments and thoughts were expressed. Although Rome wanted creative force to add a great series of tragic dramas to the literature of the world, yet the spirit of elevation and moral authority breathed into tragedy by Ennius passed into the ethical and didactic writings and the oratory of a later time.

First among his special contributions to Latin literature was the new energy he brought to tragedy. He shifted the focus of his contemporaries away from the ordinary social themes of later Greek life to the exploration of the heroic age. However, he didn't strip the Roman drama of its identity. He infused the heroes of early Greece with the fighting spirit of Roman soldiers and the noble idealism and wisdom of Roman senators, giving weight and dignity to the language and verse that conveyed their feelings and thoughts. Even though Rome lacked the creative power to produce a significant series of tragic dramas for world literature, the elevated spirit and moral authority that Ennius introduced into tragedy later influenced the ethical and didactic writings and oratory of subsequent times.

Another work was the Saturae, written in various metres, but chiefly in the trochaic tetrameter. He thus became the inventor of a new form of literature; and, if in his hands the satura was rude and indeterminate in its scope, it became a vehicle by which to address a reading public on matters of the day, or on the materials of his wide reading, in a style not far removed from the language of common life. His greatest work, which made the Romans regard him as the father of their literature, was his epic poem, in eighteen books, the Annales, in which the record of the whole career of Rome was unrolled with idealizing enthusiasm and realistic detail. The idea which inspired Ennius was ultimately realized in both the national epic of Virgil and the national history of Livy. And the metrical vehicle which he conceived as the only one adequate to his great theme was a rude experiment, which was ultimately developed into the stately Virgilian hexameter. Even as a grammarian he performed an important service to the literary language of Rome, by fixing its prosody and arresting the tendency to decay in its final syllables. Although of his writings only fragments remain, these fragments are enough, along with what we know of him from ancient testimony, to justify us in regarding him as the most important among the makers of Latin literature before the age of Cicero.

Another work was the Saturae, written in various meters, but mainly in trochic tetrameter. He thus became the inventor of a new type of literature; and while his version of satura was rough and unclear in its purpose, it became a way to connect with a reading audience about current events or the topics from his extensive reading, in a style close to everyday language. His greatest work, which led the Romans to see him as the father of their literature, was his epic poem, in eighteen books, the Annales, where he passionately and realistically chronicled the entire history of Rome. The idea that inspired Ennius was ultimately realized in both Virgil's national epic and Livy's national history. The metrical form he created, which he believed was the only one suitable for his grand theme, started as a rough experiment that eventually evolved into the elegant Virgilian hexameter. Even in his role as a grammarian, he made an important contribution to the literary language of Rome by establishing its prosody and halting the decline in its final syllables. Although only fragments of his writings remain, these fragments, along with what we know from ancient sources, justify considering him the most significant figure in Latin literature before the time of Cicero.

There is still one other name belonging partly to this, partly to the next generation, to be added to those of the men of original force of mind and character who created Latin literature, that of M. Porcius Cato the Censor (234-149), Cato. the younger contemporary of Ennius, whom he brought to Rome. More than Naevius and Plautus he represented the pure native element in that literature, the mind and character of Latium, the plebeian pugnacity, which was one of the great forces in the Roman state. His lack of imagination and his narrow patriotism made him the natural leader of the reaction against the new Hellenic culture. He strove to make literature ancillary to politics and to objects of practical utility, and thus started prose literature on the chief lines that it afterwards followed. Through his industry and vigorous understanding he gave a great impulse to the creation of Roman oratory, history and systematic didactic writing. He was one of the first to publish his speeches and thus to bring them into the domain of literature. Cicero, who speaks of 150 of these speeches as extant in his day, praises them for their acuteness, their wit, their conciseness. He speaks with emphasis of the impressiveness of Cato’s eulogy and the satiric bitterness of his invective.

There’s one more name that fits partly with this generation and partly with the next, which should be added to the list of those who originally shaped Latin literature: M. Porcius Cato the Censor (234-149), a contemporary of Ennius, whom he brought to Rome. More than Naevius and Plautus, he truly represented the native spirit of that literature, embodying the mindset and character of Latium, and the fighting spirit of the common people, which was a major force in the Roman state. His lack of imagination and his narrow patriotism positioned him as a natural leader against the rising influence of Hellenic culture. He aimed to make literature serve politics and practical goals, setting the groundwork for prose literature as it developed later on. Through his hard work and sharp understanding, he significantly advanced Roman oratory, history, and systematic didactic writing. He was among the first to publish his speeches, bringing them into the realm of literature. Cicero, who mentions 150 of these speeches still existing in his time, praises them for their insight, wit, and brevity. He highlights the impact of Cato’s eulogy and the biting sarcasm of his critiques.

Cato was the first historical writer of Rome to use his native tongue. His Origines, the work of his old age, was written with that thoroughly Roman conception of history which regarded actions and events solely as they affected the continuous and progressive life of a state. Cato felt that the record of Roman glory could not be isolated from the story of the other Italian communities, which, after fighting against Rome for their own independence, shared with her the task of conquering the world. To the wider national sympathies which stimulated the researches of the old censor into the legendary history of the Italian towns we owe some of the most truly national parts of Virgil’s Aeneid.

Cato was the first historical writer in Rome to use his native language. His Origines, completed in his later years, was written with a distinctly Roman view of history that focused on how actions and events impacted the ongoing and developing life of the state. Cato believed that the record of Roman greatness couldn't be separated from the histories of other Italian communities, which, after fighting for their own independence, took part in the task of conquering the world alongside Rome. The broader national interests that inspired the old censor to explore the legendary history of the Italian towns contributed to some of the most genuinely national sections of Virgil’s Aeneid.

In Naevius, Plautus, Ennius and Cato are represented the contending forces which strove for ascendancy in determining what was to be the character of the new literature. The work, begun by them, was carried on by younger contemporaries and successors; by Statius Caecilius (c. 220-168), an Insubrian Gaul, in comedy; in tragedy by M. Pacuvius (c. 220-132), the nephew of Ennius, called by Cicero the greatest of Roman tragedians; and, in the following generation, by L. Accius (c. 170-86), who was more usually placed in this position. The impulse given to oratory by Cato, Ser. Sulpicius Galba and others, and along with it the development of prose composition, went on with increased momentum till the age of Cicero. But the interval between the death of Ennius (169) and the beginning of Cicero’s career, while one of progressive advance in the appreciation of literary form and style, was much less distinguished by original force than the time immediately before and after the end of the second Punic war. The one complete survival of the generation after the death of Ennius, the comedy of P. Terentius Terence. Afer or Terence (c. 185-159), exemplifies the gain in literary accomplishment and the loss in literary freedom. Terence has nothing Roman or Italian except his pure and idiomatic Latinity. His Athenian elegance affords the strongest contrast to the Italian rudeness of Cato’s De Re Rustica. By looking at them together we understand how much the comedy of Terence was able to do to refine and humanize the manners of Rome, but at the same time what a solvent it was of the discipline and ideas of the old republic. What makes Terence an important witness of the culture of his time is that he wrote from the centre of the Scipionic circle, in which what was most humane and liberal in Roman statesmanship was combined with the appreciation of what was most vital in the Greek thought and literature of the time. The comedies of Terence may therefore be held to give some indication of the tastes of Scipio, Laelius and their friends in their youth. The influence of Panaetius and Polybius was more adapted to their maturity, when they led the state in war, statesmanship and oratory, and when the humaner teaching of Stoicism began to enlarge the sympathies of Roman jurists. But in the last years during which this circle kept together a new spirit appeared in Roman politics and a new power in Roman literature,—the revolutionary spirit evoked by the Gracchi in opposition to the long-continued ascendancy of the senate, and the new power of Roman satire, which was exercised impartially and unsparingly against both the excesses of the revolutionary spirit and the arrogance and incompetence of the extreme party among the nobles. Roman satire, though in form a legitimate development of the indigenous dramatic satura through the written satura of Ennius and Pacuvius, is really a birth of this time, and its author was the youngest of those admitted into the intimacy of the Scipionic Lucilius. circle, C. Lucilius of Suessa Aurunca (c. 180-103). Among the writers before the age of Cicero he alone deserves to be named with Naevius, Plautus Ennius and Cato as a great originative force in literature. For about thirty years the most important event in Roman literature was the production of the satires of Lucilius, in which the politics, morals, society and letters of the time were criticized with the utmost freedom and pungency, and his own personality was brought immediately and familiarly before his contemporaries. The years that intervened between his death and the beginning of the Ciceronian age are singularly barren in works of original value. But in one direction there was some novelty. The tragic writers had occasionally taken their subjects from Roman life (fabulae praetextae), and in comedy we find the corresponding togatae of Lucius Afranius and others, in which comedy, while assuming a Roman dress, did not assume the virtue of a Roman matron.

In Naevius, Plautus, Ennius, and Cato are depicted as the competing forces that fought for dominance in shaping the character of new literature. Their initial efforts were continued by younger contemporaries and successors; in comedy by Statius Caecilius (c. 220-168), an Insubrian Gaul, and in tragedy by M. Pacuvius (c. 220-132), the nephew of Ennius, whom Cicero called the greatest of Roman tragedians; and in the following generation by L. Accius (c. 170-86), who was more commonly recognized in this role. The momentum for oratory, driven by Cato, Ser. Sulpicius Galba, and others, along with the growth of prose composition, continued to build until the era of Cicero. However, the period between the death of Ennius (169) and the start of Cicero’s career, while marked by progress in understanding literary form and style, was not as distinguished by original creativity as the times immediately before and after the end of the second Punic war. The one complete remnant from the generation after Ennius' death, the comedy of P. Terentius Afer or Terence (c. 185-159), illustrates the improvement in literary achievement and the decline in literary freedom. Terence has no Roman or Italian influence aside from his pure and idiomatic Latinity. His Athenian elegance starkly contrasts with the Italian roughness found in Cato’s De Re Rustica. By examining them together, we see how much Terence’s comedy refined and humanized Roman manners, yet at the same time how it undermined the discipline and ideas of the old republic. Terence serves as a significant observer of the culture of his time because he wrote from the heart of the Scipionic circle, where the most humane and liberal aspects of Roman leadership merged with an appreciation for the most vital elements of Greek thought and literature at the time. Therefore, Terence’s comedies reflect the tastes of Scipio, Laelius, and their peers in their youth. The influence of Panaetius and Polybius was better suited to their maturity, as they guided the state in war, statesmanship, and oratory, and as the more humane teachings of Stoicism began to broaden the perspectives of Roman jurists. But in the final years when this circle remained united, a new spirit emerged in Roman politics and a new force in Roman literature—the revolutionary spirit incited by the Gracchi in opposition to the prolonged dominance of the senate, and the fresh power of Roman satire, which critically and rigorously addressed both the excesses of revolutionary fervor and the arrogance and incompetence of the extreme faction among the nobility. Roman satire, despite being a legitimate evolution of the native dramatic satura through the written satura of Ennius and Pacuvius, truly originated during this period, with its creator being the youngest member welcomed into the Scipionic circle, Gaius Lucilius of Suessa Aurunca (c. 180-103). Among the writers before Cicero’s era, he alone merits mention alongside Naevius, Plautus, Ennius, and Cato as a significant creative force in literature. For about thirty years, the most notable event in Roman literature was the creation of Lucilius' satires, which critiqued the politics, morals, society, and literature of the time with great freedom and sharpness, showcasing his personality intimately and directly to his contemporaries. The years between his death and the start of the Ciceronian age were particularly devoid of original valuable works. However, there was some novelty in one area. Tragic writers occasionally drew from Roman life (fabulae praetextae), and in comedy, we see the corresponding togatae of Lucius Afranius and others, where comedy, while taking on a Roman dress, did not embody the virtues of a Roman matron.

The general results of the last fifty years of the first period (130 to 80) may be thus summed up. In poetry we have the satires of Lucilius, the tragedies of Accius and of a few successors among the Roman aristocracy, who General results from 130 to 80. thus exemplified the affinity of the Roman stage to Roman oratory; various annalistic poems intended to serve as continuations of the great poem of Ennius; minor poems of an epigrammatic and erotic character, unimportant anticipations of the Alexandrian tendency operative in the following period; works of criticism in trochaic tetrameters by Porcius Licinus and others, forming part of the critical and grammatical movement which almost from the first accompanied the creative movement in Latin literature, and which may be 260 regarded as rude precursors of the didactic epistles that Horace devoted to literary criticism.

The overall outcomes of the last fifty years of the first period (130 to 80) can be summed up like this. In poetry, we have the satires of Lucilius, the tragedies of Accius, and a few successors among the Roman aristocracy, who General results from 130 to 80. showcased the connection between the Roman stage and Roman oratory; various annalistic poems meant to continue the great poem of Ennius; minor poems with epigrammatic and erotic themes, which were unimportant early examples of the Alexandrian influence that would emerge in the next period; and works of criticism in trochaic tetrameters by Porcius Licinus and others, which were part of the critical and grammatical movement that almost from the start accompanied the creative movement in Latin literature, and can be seen as rough forerunners of the didactic epistles that Horace dedicated to literary criticism. 260

The only extant prose work which may be assigned to the end of this period is the treatise on rhetoric known by the title Ad Herennium (c. 84) a work indicative of the attention bestowed on prose style and rhetorical studies during the last century of the republic, and which may be regarded as a precursor of the oratorical treatises of Cicero and of the work of Quintilian. But the great literary product of this period was oratory, developed indeed with the aid of these rhetorical studies, but Oratory. itself the immediate outcome of the imperial interests, the legal conflicts, and the political passions of that time of agitation. The speakers and writers of a later age looked back on Scipio and Laelius, the Gracchi and their contemporaries, L. Crassus and M. Antonius, as masters of their art.

The only existing prose work from the end of this period is the treatise on rhetoric called Ad Herennium (c. 84), which reflects the focus on prose style and rhetorical studies during the last century of the republic. It can be seen as a forerunner to the oratorical works of Cicero and Quintilian. However, the main literary achievement of this period was oratory, which developed with the help of these rhetorical studies but was directly influenced by the imperial interests, legal disputes, and political passions of that turbulent time. Later speakers and writers looked back at Scipio and Laelius, the Gracchi and their peers, L. Crassus and M. Antonius, as the masters of their craft.

In history, regarded as a great branch of prose literature, it is not probable that much was accomplished, although, with the advance of oratory and grammatical studies, there must have been not only greater fluency of History. composition but the beginning of a richer and more ornate style. Yet Cicero denies to Rome the existence, before his own time, of any adequate historical literature. Nevertheless it was by the work of a number of Roman chroniclers during this period that the materials of early Roman history were systematized, and the record of the state, as it was finally given to the world in the artistic work of Livy, was extracted from the early annals, state documents and private memorials, combined into a coherent unity, and supplemented by invention and reflection. Amongst these chroniclers may be mentioned L. Calpurnius Piso Frugi (consul 133, censor 108), C. Sempronius Tuditanus (consul 129), Cn. Gellius, C. Fannius (consul 122), L. Coelius Antipater, who wrote a narrative of the second Punic war about 120, and Sempronius Asellio, who wrote a history of his own times, have a better claim to be considered historians. There were also special works on antiquities and contemporary memoirs, and autobiographies such as those of M. Aemilius Scaurus, the elder, Q. Lutatius Catulus (consul 102 B.C.), and P. Rutilius Rufus, which formed the sources of future historians. (See further Annales; and Rome: History, Ancient, § “Authorities.”)

In history, seen as a significant part of prose literature, it’s unlikely that much was achieved. However, with the progress in oratory and grammar studies, there would have been not only smoother writing but also the start of a more elaborate style. Still, Cicero claims that before his time, Rome lacked any proper historical literature. Yet, it was through the efforts of several Roman chroniclers during this period that the elements of early Roman history were organized. The account of the state, which was eventually presented to the world in Livy's artistic work, was drawn from early records, state documents, and personal memoirs, brought together into a cohesive narrative, and enhanced by creativity and thought. Among these chroniclers are L. Calpurnius Piso Frugi (consul 133, censor 108), C. Sempronius Tuditanus (consul 129), Cn. Gellius, C. Fannius (consul 122), L. Coelius Antipater, who wrote a narrative of the Second Punic War around 120, and Sempronius Asellio, who documented the history of his times and is more rightly considered a historian. There were also specific works on antiquities and contemporary memoirs, as well as autobiographies by M. Aemilius Scaurus the elder, Q. Lutatius Catulus (consul 102 BCE), and P. Rutilius Rufus, which served as resources for future historians. (See further Annales; and Rome: History, Ancient, § “Authorities.”)

Although the artistic product of the first period of Latin literature which has reached us in a complete shape is limited to the comedies of Plautus and Terence, the influence of the lost literature in determining the spirit, form Summary of the period. and style of the eras of more perfect accomplishment which followed is unmistakable. While humour and vivacity characterize the earlier, and urbanity of tone the later development of comedy, the tendency of serious literature had been in the main practical, ethical, commemorative and satirical. The higher poetical imagination had appeared only in Ennius, and had been called forth in him by sympathy with the grandeur of the national life and the great personal qualities of its representative men. Some of the chief motives of the later poetry, e.g. the pleasures and sorrows of private life, had as yet found scarcely any expression in Latin literature. The fittest metrical vehicle for epic, didactic, and satiric poetry had been discovered, but its movement was as yet rude and inharmonious. The idiom of ordinary life and social intercourse and the more fervid and elevated diction of oratorical prose had made great progress, but the language of imagination and poetical feeling was, if vivid and impressive in isolated expressions, still incapable of being wrought into consecutive passages of artistic composition. The influences of Greek literature to which Latin literature owed its birth had not as yet spread beyond Rome and Latium. The Sabellian races of central and eastern Italy and the Italo-Celtic and Venetian races of the north, in whom the poetic susceptibility of Italy was most manifest two generations later, were not, until after the Social war, sufficiently in sympathy with Rome, and were probably not as yet sufficiently educated to induce them to contribute their share to the national literature. Hence the end of the Social war, and of the Civil war, which arose out of it, is most clearly a determining factor in Roman literature, and may most appropriately be taken as marking the end of one period and the beginning of another.

Although the complete artistic works from the early period of Latin literature that have survived are limited to the comedies of Plautus and Terence, the impact of the lost literature on shaping the spirit, form, and style of the later, more refined periods is clear. The earlier comedies are characterized by humor and energy, while the later ones show a more polished tone. The serious literature of the time mainly focused on practical, ethical, commemorative, and satirical themes. The only notable higher poetic imagination came from Ennius, who was inspired by the grandeur of national life and the remarkable qualities of its leading figures. Key themes of later poetry, like the joys and hardships of personal life, had hardly been expressed in Latin literature at this point. The most appropriate poetic forms for epic, didactic, and satirical works had been found, but their rhythm was still rough and unrefined. The language of everyday life and social conversation, along with the more expressive and elevated style of oratory, had made significant strides, but the language of imagination and poetic sentiment, while strong and striking in isolated phrases, was still not developed enough to create cohesive artistic pieces. The influences of Greek literature that gave rise to Latin literature had not yet reached beyond Rome and Latium. The Sabellian tribes in central and eastern Italy and the Italo-Celtic and Venetian tribes in the north, who would later display Italy's poetic sensitivity much more vividly, did not share enough sympathy with Rome until after the Social war, and were likely not educated enough at that time to contribute to the national literature. Therefore, the end of the Social war, along with the Civil war that followed, clearly marks a significant turning point in Roman literature, aptly signifying the close of one era and the start of another.

Second Period: from 80 to 42 B.C.

Second Period: from 80 to 42 BCE

The last age of the republic coincides with the first half of the Golden age of Roman literature. It is generally known as the Ciceronian age from the name of its greatest literary representative, whose activity as a speaker and writer was unremitting during nearly the whole period. It is the age of purest excellence in prose, and of a new birth of poetry, characterized rather by great original force and artistic promise than by perfect accomplishment. The five chief representatives of this age who still hold their rank among the great classical writers are Cicero, Caesar and Sallust in prose, Lucretius and Catullus in verse. The works of other prose writers, Varro and Cornelius Nepos, have been partially preserved; but these writers have no claim to rank with those already mentioned as creators and masters of literary style. Although literature had not as yet become a trade or profession, an educated reading public already existed, and books and intellectual intercourse filled a large part of the leisure of men actively engaged in affairs. Even oratory was intended quite as much for readers as for the audiences to which it was immediately addressed; and some of the greatest speeches which have come down from that great age of orators were never delivered at all, but were published as manifestoes after the event with the view of influencing educated opinion, and as works of art with the view of giving pleasure to educated taste.

The final era of the republic overlaps with the first half of the Golden Age of Roman literature. It is commonly called the Ciceronian age, named after its most prominent literary figure, whose work as a presenter and writer was relentless throughout most of this time. This period represents the highest level of excellence in prose and a rebirth of poetry, marked more by great original creativity and artistic potential than by flawless execution. The five main figures of this age who remain respected as great classical writers are Cicero, Caesar, and Sallust in prose, and Lucretius and Catullus in poetry. The works of other prose writers like Varro and Cornelius Nepos are partially preserved; however, these authors are not considered on par with those mentioned as innovators and masters of literary style. Although literature hadn't yet become a profession, there was already an educated reading public, and books and intellectual discussions occupied much of the free time of those actively involved in public life. Even oratory was aimed at both readers and the audiences it was originally delivered to; some of the greatest speeches from that remarkable era of orators were never actually given but were published as manifestos after the fact, intended to shape educated opinions and to serve as artistic works that appeal to refined tastes.

Thus the speeches of M. Tullius Cicero (106-43) belong to the domain of literature quite as much as to that of forensic or political oratory. And, although Demosthenes is a master of style unrivalled even by Cicero, the literary Cicero. interest of most of Cicero’s speeches is stronger than that of the great mass of Greek oratory. It is urged with justice that the greater part of Cicero’s Defence of Archias was irrelevant to the issue and would not have been listened to by a Greek court of justice or a modern jury. But it was fortunate for the interests of literature that a court of educated Romans could be influenced by the considerations there submitted to them. In this way a question of the most temporary interest, concerning an individual of no particular eminence or importance, has produced one of the most impressive vindications of literature ever spoken or written. Oratory at Rome assumed a new type from being cultivated as an art which endeavoured to produce persuasion not so much by intellectual conviction, as by appeal to general human sympathies. In oratory, as in every other intellectual province, the Greeks had a truer sense of the limits and conditions of their art. But command over form is only one element in the making of an orator or poet. The largeness and dignity of the matter with which he has to deal are at least as important. The Roman oratory of the law courts had to deal not with petty questions of disputed property, of fraud, or violence, but with great imperial questions, with matters affecting the well-being of large provinces and the honour and safety of the republic; and no man ever lived who, in these respects, was better fitted than Cicero to be the representative of the type of oratory demanded by the condition of the later republic. To his great artistic accomplishment, perfected by practice and elaborate study, to the power of his patriotic, his moral, and personal sympathies, and his passionate emotional nature, must be added his vivid imagination and the rich and copious stream of his language, in which he had no rival among Roman writers or speakers. It has been said that Roman poetry has produced few, if any, great types of character. But the Verres, Catiline, Antony of Cicero are living and permanent types. The story told in the Pro Cluentio may be true or false, but the picture of provincial crime which it presents is vividly dramatic. Had we only known Cicero in his speeches we should have ranked him with Demosthenes as one who had realized the highest literary ideal. We should think of him also as the creator and master of Latin style—and, moreover, not only as a great orator but as a just and appreciative critic of oratory. But to his services to Roman oratory we have to add his services not indeed 261 to philosophy but to the literature of philosophy. Though not a philosopher he is an admirable interpreter of those branches of philosophy which are fitted for practical application, and he presents us with the results of Greek reflection vivified by his own human sympathies and his large experience of men. In giving a model of the style in which human interest can best be imparted to abstract discussions, he used his great oratorical gift and art to persuade the world to accept the most hopeful opinions on human destiny and the principles of conduct most conducive to elevation and integrity of character.

Thus, the speeches of M. Tullius Cicero (106-43) are as much a part of literature as they are of legal or political rhetoric. While Demosthenes is an unparalleled master of style, Cicero's speeches often hold greater literary interest than most Greek oratory. It's fairly argued that much of Cicero’s Defence of Archias was irrelevant to the case and that a Greek court or a modern jury wouldn't have entertained it. However, it was fortunate for literature that an educated Roman court could be swayed by the points made. In this way, a matter of little lasting interest, concerning an individual of no significant stature, resulted in one of the most powerful defenses of literature ever delivered or written. Roman oratory evolved into a new form, focused on persuading not through pure logic but by appealing to universal human feelings. In oratory, as in other intellectual fields, the Greeks had a clearer understanding of the boundaries and conditions of their craft. However, mastery of form is just one aspect of being a great orator or poet. The significance and dignity of the subject matter matter just as much. Roman courtroom oratory dealt not with trivial disputes over property, fraud, or violence, but with major imperial issues affecting large provinces and the honor and safety of the republic; no one was better suited than Cicero to represent the type of oratory that the later republic required. Alongside his impressive artistic skill, honed through practice and meticulous study, his powerful patriotic, moral, and personal sympathies, as well as his passionate emotional nature, one must consider his vivid imagination and the rich, flowing nature of his language, in which he had no rival among Roman writers or speakers. It's been said that Roman poetry has produced few, if any, significant character archetypes. Yet Cicero's Verres, Catiline, and Antony are living and enduring types. The narrative in the Pro Cluentio may be true or false, but the depiction of provincial crime it provides is strikingly dramatic. Had we known Cicero solely through his speeches, we would consider him alongside Demosthenes as someone who epitomized the highest literary ideal. We would regard him not just as a great orator but also as a fair and insightful critic of oratory. Additionally, while his contributions to Roman oratory are noteworthy, we must also recognize his impact, not directly in philosophy, but in the literature of philosophy. Although he wasn't a philosopher himself, he beautifully interprets those areas of philosophy applicable to real life, offering us the outcomes of Greek thought infused with his own empathy and extensive life experience. By providing a model for how to convey human interest in abstract discussions, he used his exceptional oratorical skills to persuade the world to embrace the most optimistic views on human fate and the moral principles that best promote character integrity and elevation.

The Letters of Cicero are thoroughly natural—colloquia absentium amicorum, to use his own phrase. Cicero’s letters to Atticus, and to the friends with whom he was completely at his ease, are the most sincere and immediate expression of the thought and feeling of the moment. They let us into the secret of his most serious thoughts and cares, and they give a natural outlet to his vivacity of observation, his wit and humour, his kindliness of nature. It shows how flexible an instrument Latin prose had become in his hand, when it could do justice at once to the ample and vehement volume of his oratory, to the calmer and more rhythmical movement of his philosophical meditation, and to the natural interchange of thought and feeling in the everyday intercourse of life.

The Letters of Cicero feel completely genuine—colloquia absentium amicorum, as he puts it. Cicero’s letters to Atticus and to friends he was totally comfortable with are the most honest and immediate reflection of his thoughts and feelings in the moment. They reveal his most serious worries and thoughts, while also providing a natural outlet for his keen observations, wit, humor, and kindness. They illustrate how adaptable Latin prose had become in his hands, capable of capturing the full force of his oratory, the calmer and more rhythmic flow of his philosophical thoughts, and the natural exchange of ideas and emotions in everyday life.

Among the many rival orators of the age the most eminent were Quintus Hortensius Ortalus and C. Julius Caesar. The former was the leading representative of the Asiatic or florid style of oratory, and, like other members of Caesar. the aristocracy, such as C. Memmius and L. Manlius Torquatus, and like Q. Catulus in the preceding generation, was a kind of dilettante poet and a precursor of the poetry of pleasure, which attained such prominence in the elegiac poets of the Augustan age. Of C. Julius Caesar (102-44) as an orator we can judge only by his reputation and by the testimony of his great rival and adversary Cicero; but we are able to appreciate the special praise of perfect taste in the use of language attributed to him.1 In his Commentaries, by laying aside the ornaments of oratory, he created the most admirable style of prose narrative, the style which presents interesting events in their sequence of time and dependence on the will of the actor, rapidly and vividly, with scarcely any colouring of personal or moral feeling, any oratorical passion, any pictorial illustration. While he shows the persuasive art of an orator by presenting the subjugation of Gaul and his own action in the Civil War in the light most favourable to his claim to rule the Roman world, he is entirely free from the Roman fashion of self-laudation or disparagement of an adversary. The character of the man reveals itself especially in a perfect simplicity of style, the result of the clearest intelligence and the strongest sense of personal dignity. He avoids not only every unusual but every superfluous word; and, although no writing can be more free from rhetorical colouring, yet there may from time to time be detected a glow of sympathy, like the glow of generous passion in Thucydides, the more effective from the reserve with which it betrays itself whenever he is called on to record any act of personal heroism or of devotion to military duty.

Among the many competing speakers of the time, the most notable were Quintus Hortensius Ortalus and G. Julius Caesar. Hortensius was the main figure representing the Asiatic or florid style of speaking and, like other aristocrats such as G. Memmius and L. Manlius Torquatus, and Q. Catulus from the previous generation, he was somewhat of a hobbyist poet and a forerunner of the poetry of pleasure that later became significant among the elegiac poets of the Augustan age. We can only gauge G. Julius Caesar (102-44) as an orator through his reputation and the accounts of his great rival Cicero; however, we can appreciate the particular praise given to him for his impeccable taste in language. In his Commentaries, he set aside the embellishments of oratory and created a stunning style of prose narrative that presents engaging events in their chronological order and their reliance on the actions of the characters, quickly and vividly, with little to no emotional or moral embellishment, no oratorical fervor, and no picturesque illustrations. While he demonstrates the persuasive skill of an orator by portraying the conquest of Gaul and his own role in the Civil War in the most favorable light for his claim to control the Roman world, he completely avoids the Roman tendency to brag about oneself or belittle an opponent. His character shines through in a perfect simplicity of style, which stems from clear intelligence and deep personal dignity. He avoids not only any uncommon but also any unnecessary words; and, although his writing is devoid of rhetorical embellishment, there can occasionally be a detectable warmth of empathy, much like the generous passion found in Thucydides, made more effective by the restraint with which it appears whenever he records any act of personal heroism or commitment to military duty.

In the simplicity of his style, the directness of his narrative, the entire absence of any didactic tendency, Caesar presents a marked contrast to another prose writer of that age—the historian C. Sallustius Crispus or Sallust (c. 87-36). Sallust. Like Varro, he survived Cicero by some years, but the tone and spirit in which his works are written assign him to the republican era. He was the first of the purely artistic historians, as distinct from the annalists and the writers of personal memoirs. He imitated the Greek historians in taking particular actions—the Jugurthan War and the Catilinarian Conspiracy—as the subjects of artistic treatment. He wrote also a continuous work, Historiae, treating of the events of the twelve years following the death of Sulla, of which only fragments are preserved. His two extant works are more valuable as artistic studies of the rival parties in the state and of personal character than as trustworthy narratives of facts. His style aims at effectiveness by pregnant expression, sententiousness, archaism. He produces the impression of caring more for the manner of saying a thing than for its truth. Yet he has great value as a painter of historical portraits, some of them those of his contemporaries, and as an author who had been a political partisan and had taken some part in making history before undertaking to write it; and he gives us, from the popular side, the views of a contemporary on the politics of the time. Of the other historians, or rather annalists, who belong to this period, such as Q. Claudius Quadrigarius, Q. Valerius Antias, and C. Licinius Macer, the father of Calvus, we have only fragments remaining.

In the simplicity of his style and the directness of his narrative, Caesar stands in stark contrast to another writer of that time—the historian C. Sallustius Crispus or Sallust (c. 87-36). Sallust. Like Varro, he outlived Cicero by several years, but the tone and spirit of his works place him in the republican era. He was the first purely artistic historian, separate from the annalists and personal memoir writers. He followed the Greek historians by focusing on specific events—the Jugurthan War and the Catilinarian Conspiracy—as subjects for artistic exploration. He also wrote a continuous work, Historiae, covering the events of the twelve years after Sulla's death, though only fragments of it survive. His two remaining works are more useful as artistic studies of the rival political factions and personal character rather than reliable accounts of facts. His style aims for impact through concise expression, moralizing, and archaism. It gives the impression that he values the way of presenting information more than its accuracy. However, he is valuable as a creator of historical portraits, some of which depict his contemporaries, and as an author who had been politically active and involved in shaping history before deciding to write about it. He provides us, from a popular perspective, the views of a contemporary on the politics of the time. Of the other historians, or rather annalists, from this period, like Q. Claudius Quadrigarius, Q. Valerius Antias, and C. Licinius Macer, the father of Calvus, we have only fragments left.

The period was also remarkable for the production of works which we should class as technical or scientific rather than literary. The activity of one of these writers was so great that he is entitled to a separate mention. This Varro. was M. Terentius Varro, the most learned not only of the Romans but of the Greeks, as he has been called. The list of Varro’s writings includes over seventy treatises and more than six hundred books dealing with topics of every conceivable kind. His Menippeae Saturae, miscellanies in prose and verse, of which unfortunately only fragments are left, was a work of singular literary interest.

The period was also remarkable for producing works that we would classify as technical or scientific rather than literary. The output of one of these writers was so significant that he deserves individual recognition. This Varro. was M. Terentius Varro, known as the most learned not only among the Romans but also among the Greeks. Varro's writings include over seventy treatises and more than six hundred books covering a wide range of topics. His Menippeae Saturae, a collection of essays and poems, of which unfortunately only fragments remain, was a work of unique literary interest.

Since the Annals of Ennius no great and original poem had appeared. The powerful poetical force which for half a century continued to be the strongest force in literature, and which created masterpieces of art and genius, first Lucretius. revealed itself in the latter part of the Ciceronian age. The conditions which enabled the poetic genius of Italy to come to maturity in the person of T. Lucretius Carus (96-55) were entire seclusion from public life and absorption in the ideal pleasures of contemplation and artistic production. This isolation from the familiar ways of his contemporaries, while it was, according to tradition and the internal evidence of his poem, destructive to his spirit’s health, resulted in a work of genius, unique in character, which still stands forth as the greatest philosophical poem in any language. In the form of his poem he followed a Greek original; and the stuff out of which the texture of his philosophical argument is framed was derived from Greek science; but all that is of deep human and poetical meaning in the poem is his own. While we recognize in the De Rerum Natura some of the most powerful poetry in any language and feel that few poets have penetrated with such passionate sincerity and courage into the secret of nature and some of the deeper truths of human life, we must acknowledge that, as compared with the great didactic poem of Virgil, it is crude and unformed in artistic design, and often rough and unequal in artistic execution. Yet, apart altogether from its independent value, by his speculative power and enthusiasm, by his revelation of the life and spectacle of nature, by the fresh creativeness of his diction and the elevated movement of his rhythm, Lucretius exercised a more powerful influence than any other on the art of his more perfect successors.

Since the Annals of Ennius, no major and original poem has emerged. The strong poetic force that was the dominant force in literature for half a century, creating masterpieces of art and genius, first showed itself in the latter part of the Ciceronian age. The circumstances that allowed the poetic genius of Italy to fully develop in T. Lucretius Carus (96-55) were complete separation from public life and a deep engagement with the ideal pleasures of contemplation and artistic creation. This isolation from the common practices of his era, while traditionally seen as harmful to his mental well-being, resulted in a unique work of genius that remains the greatest philosophical poem in any language. Although he modeled the form of his poem after a Greek original and drew the substance of his philosophical argument from Greek science, everything that holds deep human and poetic significance in the poem is distinctly his own. While we recognize that the De Rerum Natura contains some of the most powerful poetry in any language and acknowledge that few poets have so passionately and courageously explored the secrets of nature and deeper truths of human life, we must admit that, compared to Virgil's great didactic poem, it appears crude and less refined in artistic structure, often rough and inconsistent in execution. Yet, regardless of its independent value, through his imaginative power and zeal, his vivid portrayal of the life and beauty of nature, the fresh creativity of his language, and the elevated flow of his rhythm, Lucretius had a more significant impact on the art of his more accomplished successors than anyone else.

While the imaginative and emotional side of Roman poetry was so powerfully represented by Lucretius, attention was directed to its artistic side by a younger generation, who moulded themselves in a great degree on Catullus. Alexandrian models. Such were Valerius Cato also a distinguished literary critic, and C. Licinius Calvus, an eminent orator. Of this small group of poets one only has survived, fortunately the man of most genius among them, the bosom-friend of Calvus, C. Valerius Catullus (84-54). He too was a new force in Roman literature. He was a provincial by birth, although early brought into intimate relations with members of the great Roman families. The subjects of his best art are taken immediately from his own life—his loves, his friendships, his travels, his animosities, personal and political. His most original contribution to the substance of Roman literature was that he first shaped into poetry the experience of his own heart, as it had been shaped by Alcaeus and Sappho in the early days of Greek poetry. No poet has surpassed him in the power of vitally reproducing the pleasure and pain of the passing hour, not recalled by idealizing reflection as in Horace, nor overlaid with mythological ornament as in Propertius, but in all the keenness 262 of immediate impression. He also introduced into Roman literature that personal as distinct from political or social satire which appears later in the Epodes of Horace and the Epigrams of Martial. He anticipated Ovid in recalling the stories of Greek mythology to a second poetical life. His greatest contribution to poetic art consisted in the perfection which he attained in the phalaecian, the pure iambic, and the scazon metres, and in the ease and grace with which he used the language of familiar intercourse, as distinct from that of the creative imagination, of the rostra, and of the schools, to give at once a lifelike and an artistic expression to his feelings. He has the interest of being the last poet of the free republic. In his life and in his art he was the precursor of those poets who used their genius as the interpreter and minister of pleasure; but he rises above them in the spirit of personal independence, in his affection for his friends, in his keen enjoyment of natural and simple pleasures, and in his power of giving vital expression to these feelings.

While the imaginative and emotional side of Roman poetry was powerfully represented by Lucretius, a younger generation focused on its artistic side, largely influenced by Catullus. Alexandrian models. This included Valerius Cato, a notable literary critic, and C. Licinius Calvus, a prominent orator. Of this small group of poets, only one has survived: the most talented among them, Calvus's close friend, C. Valerius Catullus (84-54). He was also a new force in Roman literature. Born in the provinces, he quickly became close with members of the great Roman families. The subjects of his best works come directly from his own life—his loves, friendships, travels, and personal and political conflicts. His most original contribution to Roman literature was that he was the first to turn the experiences of his heart into poetry, similar to how Alcaeus and Sappho had done in early Greek poetry. No poet has surpassed him in capturing the pleasure and pain of the moment as it truly was, without idealizing it like Horace, or adding mythical decorations like Propertius, but instead conveying the rawness of immediate experience. He also brought a personal element into Roman literature, distinct from political or social satire, which later appeared in the Epodes of Horace and the Epigrams of Martial. He anticipated Ovid by reviving Greek mythology in a new poetic form. His greatest contribution to poetic art lay in the mastery he achieved in the phalaecian, pure iambic, and scazon meters, along with the ease and elegance with which he employed everyday language, separate from that of creative imagination, the rostra, and academic settings, to give a lifelike and artistic expression to his emotions. He stands out as the last poet of the free republic. In both his life and art, he paved the way for poets who used their talent to create pleasure; however, he transcended them through his personal independence, love for his friends, enjoyment of natural and simple pleasures, and ability to express these feelings powerfully.

Third Period: Augustan Age, 42 B.C. to A.D. 17.

Third Period: Augustan Age, 42 B.C. to A.D. 17.

The poetic impulse and culture communicated to Roman literature in the last years of the republic passed on without any break of continuity into the literature of the succeeding age. One or two of the circle of Catullus Influence of imperial institutions. survived into that age; but an entirely new spirit came over the literature of the new period, and it is by new men, educated indeed under the same literary influences, but living in an altered world and belonging originally to a different order in the state, that the new spirit was expressed. The literature of the later republic reflects the sympathies and prejudices of an aristocratic class, sharing in the conduct of national affairs and living on terms of equality with one another; that of the Augustan age, first in its early serious enthusiasm, and then in the licence and levity of its later development, represents the hopes and aspirations with which the new monarchy was ushered into the world, and the pursuit of pleasure and amusement, which becomes the chief interest of a class cut off from the higher energies of practical life, and moving in the refining and enervating atmosphere of an imperial court. The great inspiring influence of the new literature was the enthusiasm produced first by the hope and afterwards by the fulfilment of the restoration of peace, order, national glory, under the rule of Augustus. All that the age longed for seemed to be embodied in a man who had both in his own person and by inheritance the natural spell which sways the imagination of the world. The sentiment of hero-worship was at all times strong in the Romans, and no one was ever the object of more sincere as well as simulated hero-worship than Augustus. It was not, however, by his equals in station that the first feeling was likely to be entertained. The earliest to give expression to it was Virgil; but the spell was soon acknowledged by the colder and more worldly-wise Horace. The disgust aroused by the anti-national policy of Antony, and the danger to the empire which was averted by the result of the battle of Actium, combined with the confidence inspired by the new ruler to reconcile the great families as well as the great body of the people to the new order of things.

The poetic drive and culture present in Roman literature during the final years of the republic smoothly transitioned into the literature of the following era. A few members from Catullus's group carried on into that period; however, a completely new spirit emerged in the literature of this new age, expressed by individuals who, while educated under the same literary influences, lived in a changed world and belonged to a different social class. The literature from the later republic reflects the views and biases of an aristocratic class that was involved in national affairs and enjoyed equal standing among its members. In contrast, the literature of the Augustan age, initially characterized by genuine enthusiasm and later by indulgence and lightheartedness, showcases the hopes and dreams that accompanied the establishment of the new monarchy, as well as the pursuit of pleasure and entertainment that became the main focus of a class distanced from the vital energies of practical life, existing in the sophisticated and weakening environment of an imperial court. The main driving force behind this new literature was the enthusiasm generated first by the hopes and later by the achievements of restoring peace, order, and national pride under Augustus's reign. Everything that the era desired seemed to be personified in a man who had, both through his achievements and his heritage, the natural charm that captivates the world's imagination. The sentiment of idolizing heroes was always strong among the Romans, and no one received as much genuine or feigned admiration as Augustus. Yet, this initial sentiment was unlikely to come from his social equals. The first to articulate it was Virgil, but even the more reserved and pragmatic Horace soon acknowledged this appeal. The discontent caused by Antony's anti-national policies, along with the threats to the empire that were averted by the outcome of the Battle of Actium, combined with the confidence instilled by the new ruler, helped reconcile both the powerful families and the general populace to the new order.

While the establishment of the empire produced a revival of national and imperial feeling, it suppressed all independent political thought and action. Hence the two great forms of prose literature which drew their nourishment from the struggles of political life, oratory and contemporary history, were arrested in their development. The main course of literature was thus for a time diverted into poetry. That poetry in its most elevated form aimed at being the organ of the new empire and of realizing the national ideals of life and character under its auspices; and in carrying out this aim it sought to recall the great memories of the past. It became also the organ of the pleasures and interests of private life, the chief motives of which were the love of nature and the passion of love. It sought also to make the art and poetry of Greece live a new artistic life. Satire, debarred from comment on political action, turned to social and individual life, and combined with the newly-developed taste for ethical analysis and reflection introduced by Cicero. One great work had still to be done in prose—a retrospect of the past history of the state from an idealizing and romanticizing point of view. For that work the Augustan age, as the end of one great cycle of events and the beginning of another, was eminently suited, and a writer who, by his gifts of imagination and sympathy, was perhaps better fitted than any other man of antiquity for the task, and who through the whole of this period lived a life of literary leisure, was found to do justice to the subject.

While the establishment of the empire sparked a revival of national and imperial pride, it stifled any independent political thought and action. As a result, the two major forms of prose literature that thrived on the struggles of political life—rhetoric and contemporary history—stalled in their development. For a while, the main focus of literature shifted towards poetry. This poetry, in its highest form, aimed to be the voice of the new empire and to embody the national ideals of life and character under its influence; in doing so, it sought to evoke the great memories of the past. It also became the expression of the joys and interests of private life, driven primarily by a love of nature and romantic passion. Additionally, it aimed to breathe new artistic life into the art and poetry of Greece. Satire, restricted from commenting on political acts, turned its attention to social and personal life, merging with the newly-emerged taste for ethical analysis and reflection introduced by Cicero. One significant work still needed to be done in prose—a retrospective look at the state’s past history from an idealizing and romantic perspective. The Augustan age, marking the end of one major cycle of events and the beginning of another, was perfectly suited for this task, and a writer who, with his gifts of imagination and empathy, was possibly the best fit for the job, and who lived a life of literary leisure throughout this period, was found to adequately address the subject.

Although the age did not afford free scope and stimulus to individual energy and enterprise, it furnished more material and social advantages for the peaceful cultivation of letters. The new influence of patronage, which in other times has chilled the genial current of literature, become, in the person of Maecenas, the medium through which literature and the imperial policy were brought into union. Poetry thus acquired the tone of the world, kept in close connexion with the chief source of national life, while it was cultivated to the highest pitch of artistic perfection under the most favourable conditions of leisure and freedom from the distractions and anxieties of life.

Although the era didn’t provide much freedom or encouragement for individual energy and initiative, it offered more material and social benefits for the peaceful development of literature. The new role of patronage, which in earlier times stifled the vibrant flow of literature, became, through Maecenas, the link that connected literature with imperial policy. As a result, poetry took on a worldly tone, closely connected with the primary source of national life, while it was refined to the highest level of artistic perfection under optimal conditions of leisure and free from the distractions and worries of everyday life.

The earliest in the order of time of the poets who adorn this age—P. Vergilius Maro or Virgil (70-19)—is also the greatest in genius, the most richly cultivated, and the most perfect in art. He is the idealizing poet of the hopes Virgil. and aspirations and of the purer and happier life of which the age seemed to contain the promise. He elevates the present by associating it with the past and future of the world, and sanctifies it by seeing in it the fulfilment of a divine purpose. Virgil is the true representative poet of Rome and Italy, of national glory and of the beauty of nature, the artist in whom all the efforts of the past were made perfect, and the unapproachable standard of excellence to future times. While more richly endowed with sensibility to all native influences, he was more deeply imbued than any of his contemporaries with the poetry, the thought and the learning of Greece. The earliest efforts of his art (the Eclogues) reproduce the cadences, the diction and the pastoral fancies of Theocritus; but even in these imitative poems of his youth Virgil shows a perfect mastery of his materials. The Latin hexameter, which in Ennius and Lucretius was the organ of the more dignified and majestic emotions, became in his hands the most perfect measure in which the softer and more luxurious sentiment of nature has been expressed. The sentiment of Italian scenery and the love which the Italian peasant has for the familiar sights and sounds of his home found a voice which never can pass away.

The earliest poet of this era—P. Vergilius Maro, known as Virgil (70-19)—is also the greatest in talent, the most well-rounded, and the most refined in artistry. He embodies the hopes and dreams, as well as the purer and happier life that this age seemed to promise. He uplifts the present by linking it to the past and future of the world, giving it significance by recognizing it as part of a divine plan. Virgil is the true poet of Rome and Italy, representing national pride and the beauty of nature, the artist who perfected all previous efforts, setting an unmatched standard for excellence in the future. While he had a richer sensitivity to local influences, he was also profoundly influenced by Greek poetry, thought, and learning, more so than any of his contemporaries. His early works (the Eclogues) reflect the rhythms, wording, and pastoral themes of Theocritus; yet even in these youthful imitative poems, Virgil demonstrates perfect control over his art. The Latin hexameter, which in Ennius and Lucretius conveyed more serious and grand emotions, became in his hands the ideal form for expressing the softer, more luxurious feelings of nature. The essence of Italian landscapes and the deep affection that Italian peasants have for the familiar sights and sounds of their home found a voice that will never fade away.

In the Georgics we are struck by the great advance in the originality and self-dependence of the artist, in the mature perfection of his workmanship, in the deepening and strengthening of all his sympathies and convictions. His genius still works under forms prescribed by Greek art, and under the disadvantage of having a practical and utilitarian aim imposed on it. But he has ever in form so far surpassed his originals that he alone has gained for the pure didactic poem a place among the highest forms of serious poetry, while he has so transmuted his material that, without violation of truth, he has made the whole poem alive with poetic feeling. The homeliest details of the farmer’s work are transfigured through the poet’s love of nature; through his religious feeling and his pious sympathy with the sanctities of human affection; through his patriotic sympathy with the national greatness; and through the rich allusiveness of his art to everything in poetry and legend which can illustrate and glorify his theme.

In the Georgics, we notice the significant progress in the artist's originality and independence, the mature perfection of his craft, and the deepening and strengthening of all his feelings and beliefs. His talent still operates within the forms set by Greek art, and faces the challenge of having a practical and utilitarian purpose imposed on it. However, he has far exceeded his originals in form, earning the pure didactic poem a place among the highest forms of serious poetry. He has transformed his material so that, without sacrificing truth, the entire poem is infused with poetic emotion. The simplest details of the farmer’s work are elevated through the poet’s love of nature, his sense of spirituality and deep empathy for the sacred aspects of human relationships, his patriotic pride in national greatness, and the rich references in his art to everything in poetry and legend that can illuminate and glorify his subject.

In the Eclogues and Georgics Virgil is the idealizing poet of the old simple and hardy life of Italy, as the imagination could conceive of it in an altered world. In the Aeneid he is the idealizing poet of national glory, as manifested in the person of Augustus. The epic of national life, vividly conceived but rudely executed by Ennius, was perfected in the years that followed the decisive victory at Actium. To do justice to his idea Virgil enters into rivalry with a greater poet than those whom he had equalled or surpassed in his previous works. And, 263 though he cannot unroll before us the page of heroic action with the power and majesty of Homer, yet by the sympathy with which he realizes the idea of Rome, and by the power with which he has used the details of tradition, of local scenes, of religious usage, to embody it, he has built up in the form of an epic poem the most enduring and the most artistically constructed monument of national grandeur.

In the Eclogues and Georgics, Virgil captures the idealized vision of Italy's old, simple, and resilient lifestyle as imagined in a changed world. In the Aeneid, he represents the idealized vision of national glory as embodied by Augustus. The epic of national life, vividly imagined but roughly crafted by Ennius, was refined in the years following the decisive victory at Actium. To truly honor his vision, Virgil competes with a greater poet than those he had previously matched or surpassed in his earlier works. And, 263 while he may not unfold the narrative of heroic deeds with the power and grandeur of Homer, his deep empathy for the concept of Rome, along with the skillful use of traditional details, local settings, and religious customs to express it, has created in the form of an epic poem the most lasting and artistically crafted tribute to national greatness.

The second great poet of the time—Q. Horatius Flaccus or Horace (68-8) is both the realist and the idealist of his age. If we want to know the actual lives, manners and ways of thinking of the Romans of the generation succeeding Horace. the overthrow of the republic it is in the Satires and partially in the Epistles of Horace that we shall find them. If we ask what that time provided to stir the fancy and move the mood of imaginative reflection, it is in the lyrical poems of Horace that we shall find the most varied and trustworthy answer. His literary activity extends over about thirty years and naturally divides itself into three periods, each marked by a distinct character. The first—extending from about 40 to 29—is that of the Epodes and Satires. In the former he imitates the Greek poet Archilochus, but takes his subjects from the men, women and incidents of the day. Personality is the essence of his Epodes; in the Satires it is used merely as illustrative of general tendencies. In the Satires we find realistic pictures of social life, and the conduct and opinions of the world submitted to the standard of good feeling and common sense. The style of the Epodes is pointed and epigrammatic, that of the Satires natural and familiar. The hexameter no longer, as in Lucilius, moves awkwardly as if in fetters, but, like the language of Terence, of Catullus in his lighter pieces, of Cicero in his letters to Atticus, adapts itself to the everyday intercourse of life. The next period is the meridian of his genius, the time of his greatest lyrical inspiration, which he himself associates with the peace and leisure secured to him by his Sabine farm. The life of pleasure which he had lived in his youth comes back to him, not as it was in its actual distractions and disappointments, but in the idealizing light of meditative retrospect. He had not only become reconciled to the new order of things, but was moved by his intimate friendship with Maecenas to aid in raising the world to sympathy with the imperial rule through the medium of his lyrical inspiration, as Virgil had through the glory of his epic art. With the completion of the three books of Odes he cast aside for a time the office of the vates, and resumed that of the critical spectator of human life, but in the spirit of a moralist rather than a satirist. He feels the increasing languor of the time as well as the languor of advancing years, and seeks to encourage younger men to take up the rôle of lyrical poetry, while he devotes himself to the contemplation of the true art of living. Self-culture rather than the fulfilment of public or social duty, as in the moral teaching of Cicero, is the aim of his teaching; and in this we recognize the influence of the empire in throwing the individual back on himself. As Cicero tones down his oratory in his moral treatises, so Horace tones down the fervour of his lyrical utterances in his Epistles, and thus produces a style combining the ease of the best epistolary style with the grace and concentration of poetry—the style, as it has been called, of “idealized common sense,” that of the urbanus and cultivated man of the world who is also in his hours of inspiration a genuine poet. In the last ten years of his life Horace resumed his lyrical function for a time, under pressure of the imperial command, and produced some of the most exquisite and mature products of his art. But his chief activity is devoted to criticism. He first vindicates the claims of his own age to literary pre-eminence, and then seeks to stimulate the younger writers of the day to what he regarded as the manlier forms of poetry, and especially to the tragic drama, which seemed for a short time to give promise of an artistic revival.

The second great poet of the time—Q. Horatius Flaccus, or Horace (68-8)—is both a realist and an idealist of his era. If we want to understand the actual lives, customs, and mindsets of the Romans from the generation after the fall of the republic, we can find them in Horace's Satires and, to some extent, in his Epistles. If we're looking for what inspired creativity and stirred the emotions of the time, we’ll find the most varied and reliable answers in Horace's lyrical poems. His literary work spans about thirty years and is naturally divided into three periods, each characterized by its own traits. The first period, from around 40 to 29, includes the Epodes and Satires. In the Epodes, he mimics the Greek poet Archilochus, drawing his subjects from the people, events, and scenes of his day. The essence of his Epodes is personal expression, while in the Satires, personal stories serve merely to illustrate broader trends. The Satires provide realistic portrayals of social life, evaluating the behavior and beliefs of society against the standards of good taste and common sense. The style of the Epodes is sharp and epigrammatic, while that of the Satires is natural and conversational. The hexameter, which once moved clumsily in Lucilius' work, now flows smoothly, similar to the language used by Terence, Catullus in his lighter pieces, and Cicero in his letters to Atticus, fitting seamlessly into daily communication. The next period marks the peak of his talent and the height of his lyrical inspiration, which he associates with the peace and leisure he enjoys at his Sabine farm. The pleasures of his youth return to him, not as they were with their distractions and disappointments, but idealized through reflective memory. He not only embraces the new world order but is also inspired by his close friendship with Maecenas to elevate public sentiment towards the imperial rule through his lyrical inspiration, just as Virgil did with the glory of his epic work. Upon completing the three books of Odes, he temporarily set aside the role of a prophetic poet, returning to a critical observer of human life but with a moralist's perspective rather than that of a satirist. He feels the growing weariness of his time as well as his advancing years, seeking to encourage younger poets to take up lyrical poetry while he focuses on understanding the true art of living. His teachings aim for self-improvement rather than fulfilling public or societal duties, reflecting Cicero's moral philosophy, though emphasizing personal growth. Just as Cicero moderates his rhetoric in his moral essays, Horace softens the intensity of his lyrical expressions in his Epistles, creating a style that blends the simplicity of informal letters with the elegance and focus of poetry—what has been described as “idealized common sense,” representing the educated urbanite who is also, in moments of inspiration, a true poet. In the last decade of his life, Horace briefly returned to lyricism under imperial pressure, producing some of his finest and most mature works. However, most of his efforts were dedicated to literary criticism. He first defends the literary importance of his own time, then seeks to inspire younger writers to explore what he viewed as the more noble forms of poetry, especially tragic drama, which appeared to offer a glimmer of artistic revival.

But the poetry of the latter half of the Augustan age destined to survive did not follow the lines either of lyrical or of dramatic art marked out by Horace. The latest form of poetry adopted from Greece and destined to gain and permanently to hold the ear of the world was the elegy. From the time of Mimnermus this form seems to have presented itself as the most natural vehicle for the poetry of pleasure in an age of luxury, refinement and incipient decay. Its facile flow and rhythm seem to adapt it to the expression and illustration of personal feeling. It goes to the mind of the reader through a medium of sentiment rather than of continuous thought or imaginative illustration. The greatest masters of this kind of poetry are the elegiac poets of the Augustan age—Tibullus, Propertius and Ovid.

But the poetry that survived from the latter half of the Augustan age didn’t follow the lyrical or dramatic styles set by Horace. The latest form of poetry borrowed from Greece, which ended up resonating with people and lasting, was the elegy. Since the time of Mimnermus, this form has seemed to be the most natural way to express poetry about pleasure in an age marked by luxury, refinement, and early signs of decline. Its smooth flow and rhythm make it suitable for expressing and illustrating personal feelings. It reaches the reader's mind through sentiment rather than through continuous thought or imaginative depiction. The greatest masters of this type of poetry are the elegiac poets of the Augustan age—Tibullus, Propertius, and Ovid.

Of the ill-fated C. Cornelius Gallus, their predecessor, we have but a single pentameter remaining. Of the three Tibullus (c. 54-19) is the most refined and tender. As the poet of love he gives utterance to the pensive melancholy Tibullus] rather than to the pleasures associated with it. In his sympathy with the life and beliefs of the country people he shows an affinity both to the idyllic spirit and to the piety of Virgil. There is something, too, in his fastidious refinement and in his shrinking from the rough contact of life that reminds us of the English poet Gray.

Of the unfortunate C. Cornelius Gallus, their predecessor, we have only one line of his writing left. Among the three, Tibullus (c. 54-19) is the most elegant and sensitive. As a love poet, he expresses a thoughtful sadness rather than the joys that come with love. His connection to the lives and beliefs of rural people reflects both an idyllic spirit and a reverence similar to that of Virgil. There's also something about his delicate refinement and his aversion to the harsher realities of life that brings to mind the English poet Gray.

A poet of more strength and more powerful imagination, but of less refinement in his life and less exquisite taste in his art, is Sextus Propertius (c. 50-c. 15). His youth was a more stormy one than that of Tibullus, and was Propertius. passed, not like his, among the “healthy woods” of his country estate, but amid all the licence of the capital. His passion for Cynthia, the theme of his most finished poetry, is second only in interest to that of Catullus for Lesbia; and Cynthia in her fascination and caprices seems a more real and intelligible personage than the idealized object first of the idolatry and afterwards of the malediction of Catullus. Propertius is a less accomplished artist and a less equably pleasing writer than either Tibullus or Ovid, but he shows more power of dealing gravely with a great or tragic situation than either of them, and his diction and rhythm give frequent proof of a concentrated force of conception and a corresponding movement of imaginative feeling which remind us of Lucretius.

A poet with greater strength and a more powerful imagination, but less refinement in his life and less exquisite taste in his art, is Sextus Propertius (c. 50-c. 15). His youth was more tumultuous than that of Tibullus, spent not among the "healthy woods" of his country estate like Tibullus, but amidst the chaos of the capital. His passion for Cynthia, the focus of his most polished poetry, is only second in fascination to Catullus's love for Lesbia; Cynthia, with her allure and whims, appears more real and relatable than the idealized figure that Catullus both idolizes and curses. Propertius may not be as skilled an artist or as consistently pleasing a writer as Tibullus or Ovid, but he demonstrates a greater ability to handle serious or tragic situations than either of them. His choice of words and rhythm often showcase a concentrated strength of thought and a corresponding emotional intensity that remind us of Lucretius.

The most facile and brilliant of the elegiac poets and the least serious in tone and spirit is P. Ovidius Naso or Ovid (43 B.C.-A.D. 18). As an amatory poet he is the poet of pleasure and intrigue rather than of tender sentiment or Ovid. absorbing passion. Though he treated his subject in relation to himself with more levity and irony than real feeling, yet by his sparkling wit and fancy he created a literature of sentiment and adventure adapted to amuse the idle and luxurious society of which the elder Julia was the centre. His power of continuous narrative is best seen in the Metamorphoses, written in hexameters to which he has imparted a rapidity and precision of movement more suited to romantic and picturesque narrative than the weighty self-restrained verse of Virgil. In his Fasti he treats a subject of national interest; it is not, however, through the strength of Roman sentiment but through the power of vividly conceiving and narrating stories of strong human interest that the poem lives. In his latest works—the Tristia and Ex Ponto—he imparts the interest of personal confessions to the record of a unique experience. Latin poetry is more rich in the expression of personal feeling than of dramatic realism. In Ovid we have both. We know him in the intense liveliness of his feeling and the human weakness of his nature more intimately than any other writer of antiquity, except perhaps Cicero. As Virgil marks the point of maturest excellence in poetic diction and rhythm, Ovid marks that of the greatest facility.

The most skilled and brilliant of the elegiac poets, and the least serious in tone and spirit, is P. Ovidius Naso or Ovid (43 B.C.-CE 18). As a love poet, he focuses on pleasure and intrigue rather than tender feelings or deep passion. Although he approached his subjects with more lightheartedness and irony than genuine emotion, his sparkling wit and imagination created a style of literature filled with sentiment and adventure that entertained the idle and luxurious society of which the elder Julia was at the center. His ability for continuous storytelling is best showcased in the Metamorphoses, written in hexameters that he crafted with a quickness and clarity more suited for romantic and picturesque tales than the heavy, measured verse of Virgil. In his Fasti, he addresses a topic of national importance; however, the poem thrives not on the strength of Roman sentiment but on the vivid storytelling of compelling human experiences. In his later works—the Tristia and Ex Ponto—he adds personal confessions to the account of a unique experience. Latin poetry is richer in expressing personal feelings than in dramatic realism. In Ovid, we find both. We know him through the intense liveliness of his emotions and the human flaws in his nature more intimately than any other writer from antiquity, except perhaps Cicero. While Virgil represents the peak of poetic diction and rhythm, Ovid represents the height of ease and fluidity in poetry.

The Augustan age was one of those great eras in the world like the era succeeding the Persian War in Greece, the Elizabethan age in England, and the beginning of the 19th century in Europe, in which what seems a new spring Livy. of national and individual life calls out an idealizing retrospect of the past. As the present seems full of new life, the past seems rich in glory and the future in hope. The past of Rome had always a peculiar fascination for Roman writers. Virgil in a supreme degree, and Horace, Propertius and Ovid in a less degree, had expressed in their poetry the romance of the past. But it was in the great historical work of T. Livius or Livy (59 B.C.-A.D. 17) that the record of the national life received its 264 most systematic exposition. Its execution was the work of a life prolonged through the languor and dissolution following so soon upon the promise of the new era, during which time the past became glorified by contrast with the disheartening aspect of the present. The value of the work consists not in any power of critical investigation or weighing of historical evidence but in the intense sympathy of the writer with the national ideal, and the vivid imagination with which under the influence of this sympathy he gives life to the events and personages, the wars and political struggles, of times remote from his own. He makes us feel more than any one the majesty of the Roman state, of its great magistracies, and of the august council by which its policy was guided. And, while he makes the words senatus populusque Romanus full of significance for all times, no one realizes with more enthusiasm all that is implied in the words imperium Romanum, and the great military qualities of head and heart by which that empire was acquired and maintained. The vast scale on which the work was conceived and the thoroughness of artistic execution with which the details are finished are characteristically Roman. The prose style of Rome, as a vehicle for the continuous narration of events coloured by a rich and picturesque imagination and instinct with dignified emotion, attained its perfection in Livy.

The Augustan age was one of those remarkable periods in history, similar to the time after the Persian War in Greece, the Elizabethan era in England, and the early 19th century in Europe. During these times, what feels like a new beginning for both nations and individuals prompts a nostalgic look back at the past. As the present seems vibrant with new energy, the past appears filled with glory and the future brims with hope. Roman writers have always been particularly captivated by Rome's history. Virgil, to a remarkable degree, along with Horace, Propertius, and Ovid to a lesser extent, portrayed the romance of the past in their poetry. However, it was in the monumental historical writings of T. Livius, or Livy (59 B.C.-A.D. 17), that the account of national life received its most thorough exploration. This work was shaped over a lifetime, during a time when the promise of a new era quickly faded into lethargy and decline, making the past shine even brighter in contrast to the discouraging present. The value of Livy's work lies not in critical analysis or the examination of historical evidence, but in the deep empathy he had for the national ideal and the vivid imagination that brought to life the events, characters, wars, and political conflicts from far earlier times. He makes us truly feel the greatness of the Roman state, its powerful magistrates, and the esteemed council that guided its policies. While he imbues the phrase senatus populusque Romanus with meaning for all ages, no one appreciates more enthusiastically the implications of imperium Romanum and the exceptional military skills and spirit through which that empire was established and sustained. The ambitious scope of his work and the detailed artistic execution are distinctly Roman. Livy's prose style, serving as a medium for the continuous recounting of events infused with rich imagination and dignified emotion, reached its pinnacle in his writings.

Fourth Period: The Silver Age, from A.D. 17 to about 130.

Fourth Period: The Silver Age, from CE 17 to around 130.

For more than a century after the death of Augustus Roman literature continues to flow in the old channels. Though drawing from the provinces, Rome remains the centre of the literary movement. The characteristics of the great Characteristics of post-Augustan age. writers are essentially national, not provincial nor cosmopolitan. In prose the old forms—oratory, history, the epistle, treatises or dialogues on ethical and literary questions—continue to be cultivated. Scientific and practical subjects, such as natural history, architecture, medicine, agriculture, are treated in more elaborate literary style. The old Roman satura is developed into something like the modern prose novel. In the various provinces of poetry, while there is little novelty or inspiration, there is abundance of industry and ambitious effort. The national love of works of large compass shows itself in the production of long epic poems, both of the historic and of the imitative Alexandrian type. The imitative and rhetorical tastes of Rome showed themselves in the composition of exotic tragedies, as remote in spirit and character from Greek as from Roman life, of which the only extant specimens are those attributed to the younger Seneca. The composition of didactic, lyrical and elegiac poetry also was the accomplishment and pastime of an educated dilettante class, the only extant specimens of any interest being some of the Silvae of Statius. The only voice with which the poet of this age can express himself with force and sincerity is that of satire and satiric epigram. We find now only imitative echoes of the old music created by Virgil and others, as in Statius, or powerful declamation, as in Lucan and Juvenal. There is a deterioration in the diction as well as in the music of poetry. The elaborate literary culture of the Augustan age has done something to impair the native force of the Latin idiom. The language of literature, in the most elaborate kind of prose as well as poetry, loses all ring of popular speech. The old oratorical tastes and aptitudes find their outlet in public recitations and the practice of declamation. Forced and distorted expression, exaggerated emphasis, point and antithesis, an affected prettiness, are studied with the view of gaining the applause of audiences who thronged the lecture and recitation rooms in search of temporary excitement. Education is more widely diffused, but is less thorough, less leisurely in its method, derived less than before from the purer sources of culture. The precocious immaturity of Lucan’s career affords a marked contrast to the long preparation of Virgil and Horace for their high office. Although there are some works of this so-called Silver Age of considerable and one at least of supreme interest, from the insight they afford into the experience of a century of organized despotism and its effect on the spiritual life of the ancient world, it cannot be doubted that the steady literary decline which characterized the last centuries of paganism was beginning before the death of Ovid and Livy.

For over a hundred years after Augustus's death, Roman literature continued to follow traditional paths. Although it drew influence from the provinces, Rome remained the center of the literary movement. The defining features of the great Characteristics of the post-Augustan era. writers were primarily national, not provincial or cosmopolitan. In prose, the old forms—like oratory, history, letters, and discussions on ethical and literary topics—continued to thrive. Scientific and practical subjects, such as natural history, architecture, medicine, and agriculture, were presented in a more sophisticated literary style. The traditional Roman satura evolved into something akin to the modern prose novel. In various areas of poetry, even though novelty or inspiration was scarce, there was a wealth of effort and ambition. The national appreciation for extensive works was evident in the production of long epic poems, both historical and modeled after the Alexandrian style. Roman tastes for imitation and rhetoric resulted in the creation of exotic tragedies, which were distanced in spirit and character from both Greek and Roman life, with the only surviving examples attributed to the younger Seneca. Writing didactic, lyrical, and elegiac poetry also became a hobby for an educated hobbyist class, with the only notable remnants being some of the Silvae by Statius. The only way the poets of this era could express themselves with strength and sincerity was through satire and satirical epigrams. Now, we only find imitative echoes of the old melodies created by Virgil and others, like in Statius, or powerful declarations, as seen in Lucan and Juvenal. There was a decline in both the diction and the musicality of poetry. The intricate literary culture of the Augustan age somewhat diminished the natural power of the Latin language. The language of literature, whether in elaborate prose or poetry, lost the resonance of popular speech. The old talents for oratory were now showcased in public readings and declamation practice. Forced and awkward expressions, exaggerated emphasis, points and contrasts, and affected prettiness were studied to gain the applause of audiences drawn to lectures and recitations for temporary excitement. Education became more widespread but less thorough and leisurely in approach, drawn less than before from the purer sources of culture. The premature career of Lucan stands in stark contrast to the long preparation that Virgil and Horace underwent for their esteemed roles. While some works from this so-called Silver Age are of significant and, at least one, supreme interest, offering insights into the experience of a century marked by organized despotism and its effect on the spiritual life of the ancient world, it's undeniable that the steady literary decline that marked the last centuries of paganism began before the deaths of Ovid and Livy.

The influences which had inspired republican and Augustan literature were the artistic impulse derived from a familiarity with the great works of Greek genius, becoming more intimate with every new generation, the spell of Rome over the imagination of the kindred Italian races, the charm of Italy, and the vivid sensibility of the Italian temperament. These influences were certainly much less operative in the first century of the empire. The imitative impulse, which had much of the character of a creative impulse, and had resulted in the appropriation of the forms of poetry suited to the Roman and Italian character and of the metres suited to the genius of the Latin language, no longer stimulated to artistic effort. The great sources of Greek poetry were no longer regarded, as they were by Lucretius and Virgil, as sacred, untasted springs, to be approached in a spirit of enthusiasm tempered with reverence. We have the testimony of two men of shrewd common sense and masculine understanding—Martial and Juvenal—to the stale and lifeless character of the art of the Silver Age, which sought to reproduce in the form of epics, tragedies and elegies the bright fancies of the Greek mythology.

The influences that inspired republican and Augustan literature included the artistic drive that came from a growing familiarity with the great works of Greek genius, becoming more ingrained with each generation, the allure of Rome over the imagination of related Italian races, the beauty of Italy, and the intense sensibility of the Italian temperament. These influences were definitely much less significant in the first century of the empire. The imitative drive, which had a lot of creative spirit, and had led to the adoption of poetic forms that matched the Roman and Italian character, as well as meters that suited the traits of the Latin language, no longer encouraged artistic effort. The major sources of Greek poetry were no longer seen, as they were by Lucretius and Virgil, as sacred, untainted springs to be approached with enthusiasm and reverence. We have the insight of two perceptive and sensible men—Martial and Juvenal—regarding the stale and lifeless nature of the art of the Silver Age, which tried to recreate the vibrant imaginations of Greek mythology in the forms of epics, tragedies, and elegies.

The idea of Rome, owing to the antagonism between the policy of the government and the sympathies of the class by which literature was favoured and cultivated, could no longer be an inspiring motive, as it had been in the literature of the republic and of the Augustan age. The spirit of Rome appears only as animating the protest of Lucan, the satire of Persius and Juvenal, the sombre picture which Tacitus paints of the annals of the empire. Oratory is no longer an independent voice appealing to sentiments of Roman dignity, but the weapon of the “informers” (delatores), wielded for their own advancement and the destruction of that class which, even in their degeneracy, retained most sympathy with the national traditions. Roman history was no longer a record of national glory, stimulating the patriotism and flattering the pride of all Roman citizens, but a personal eulogy or a personal invective, according as servility to a present or hatred of a recent ruler was the motive which animated it.

The concept of Rome, because of the conflict between the government's policies and the feelings of the class that supported and fostered literature, no longer served as an inspiring force, as it had during the republic and the Augustan era. The essence of Rome can be seen only in the protests of Lucan, the satire of Persius and Juvenal, and the bleak portrayal that Tacitus provides in his accounts of the empire. Oratory has lost its status as an independent voice that appeals to the sentiments of Roman dignity; instead, it has become a tool for the “informers” (delatores), used for their own gain and to undermine the class that, even in their decline, held the most connection to national traditions. Roman history shifted from being a record of national glory that ignited patriotism and boosted the pride of Roman citizens, to a personal tribute or a personal attack, driven by either flattery for a current leader or resentment toward a recent one.

The charm of Italian scenes still remained the same, but the fresh and inspiring feeling cf nature gave place to the mere sensuous gratification derived from the luxurious and artificial beauty of the country villa. The idealizing poetry of passion, which found a genuine voice in Catullus and the elegiac poets, could not prolong itself through the exhausting licence of successive generations. The vigorous vitality which gives interest to the personality of Catullus, Propertius and Ovid no longer characterizes their successors. The pathos of natural affection is occasionally recognized in Statius and more rarely in Martial, but it has not the depth of tenderness found in Lucretius and Virgil. The wealth and luxury of successive generations, the monotonous routine of life, the separation of the educated class from the higher work of the world, have produced their enervating and paralysing effect on the mainsprings of poetic and imaginative feeling.

The charm of Italian landscapes remained unchanged, but the fresh and inspiring sense of nature was replaced by the simple sensual pleasure derived from the lavish and artificial beauty of the country villa. The idealistic poetry of passion, which found a true voice in Catullus and the elegiac poets, couldn't sustain itself through the excessive indulgence of later generations. The vibrant energy that makes the personalities of Catullus, Propertius, and Ovid interesting is no longer present in their successors. The emotional depth of natural affection is occasionally seen in Statius and, more rarely, in Martial, but it lacks the tenderness found in Lucretius and Virgil. The wealth and luxury of later generations, the monotonous routine of life, and the separation of educated people from meaningful work have had a weakening and paralyzing effect on the core of poetic and imaginative feeling.

New elements, however, appear in the literature of this period. As the result of the severance from the active interests of life, a new interest is awakened in the inner life of the individual. The immorality of Roman society not New literary elements. only affords abundant material to the satirist, but deepens the consciousness of moral evil in purer and more thoughtful minds. To these causes we attribute the pathological observation of Seneca and Tacitus, the new sense of purity in Persius called out by contrast with the impurity around him, the glowing if somewhat sensational exaggeration of Juvenal, the vivid characterization of Martial. The literature of no time presents so powerfully the contrast between moral good and evil. In this respect it is truly representative of the life of the age. Another new element is the influence of a new race. In the two preceding periods the rapid diffusion of literary culture following the Social War and the first Civil War was seen to awaken into new life the elements of original genius in Italy and Cisalpine Gaul. In the first century of the empire a similar 265 result was produced by the diffusion of that culture in the Latinized districts of Spain. The fervid temperament of a fresh and vigorous race, which received the Latin discipline just as Latium had two or three centuries previously received the Greek discipline, revealed itself in the writings of the Senecas, Lucan, Quintilian, Martial and others, who in their own time added literary distinction to the Spanish towns from which they came. The new extraneous element introduced into Roman literature draws into greater prominence the characteristics of the last great representatives of the genuine Roman and Italian spirit—the historian Tacitus and the satirist Juvenal.

New elements, however, emerge in the literature of this period. Due to the disconnect from the active interests of life, there's a newfound fascination with the inner lives of individuals. The immorality of Roman society not only provides plenty of material for the satirist but also heightens the awareness of moral evil in more pure and reflective minds. We can credit these factors for the intense observations of Seneca and Tacitus, the emerging sense of purity in Persius brought out by the contrast with the surrounding corruption, the intense yet somewhat sensational exaggerations of Juvenal, and the lively characterizations by Martial. The literature from this era powerfully illustrates the contrast between moral good and evil, making it truly representative of the life of the age. Another new component is the influence of a new race. In the two previous periods, the rapid spread of literary culture after the Social War and the first Civil War sparked a revival of original genius in Italy and Cisalpine Gaul. In the first century of the empire, a similar outcome occurred due to the spread of that culture in the Latinized regions of Spain. The passionate temperament of this fresh and vigorous race, which embraced Latin just as Latium had previously embraced Greek, is evident in the works of Seneca, Lucan, Quintilian, Martial, and others, who contributed literary distinction to the Spanish towns they came from. The new outside element brought into Roman literature highlights the traits of the last great representatives of the true Roman and Italian spirit—the historian Tacitus and the satirist Juvenal.

On the whole this century shows, in form, language and substance, the signs of literary decay. But it is still capable of producing men of original force; it still maintains the traditions of a happier time; it is still alive to the value of literary culture, and endeavours by minute attention to style to produce new effects. Though it was not one of the great eras in the annals of literature, yet the century which produced Martial, Juvenal and Tacitus cannot be pronounced barren in literary originality, nor that which produced Seneca and Quintilian devoid of culture and literary taste.

Overall, this century shows signs of a decline in form, language, and substance in literature. However, it can still produce individuals of original talent; it still holds on to the traditions of a better time; it still appreciates the importance of literary culture, and strives for new impacts through careful attention to style. While it may not be one of the great periods in the history of literature, the century that gave us Martial, Juvenal, and Tacitus cannot be considered lacking in literary originality, nor can the one that produced Seneca and Quintilian be seen as lacking in culture and literary appreciation.

This fourth period is itself subdivided into three divisions: (1) from the accession of Tiberius to the death of Nero, 68—the most important part of it being the Neronian age, 54 to 68; (2) the Flavian era, from the death of Nero to the death of Domitian, 96; (3) the reigns of Nerva and Trajan and part of the reign of Hadrian.

This fourth period is split into three parts: (1) from the rise of Tiberius to Nero's death in 68—the key part being the Neronian age, from 54 to 68; (2) the Flavian period, from Nero's death to Domitian's death in 96; (3) the reigns of Nerva and Trajan, and part of Hadrian's rule.

1. For a generation after the death of Augustus no new original literary force appeared. The later poetry of the Augustan age had ended in trifling dilettantism, for the continuance of which the atmosphere of the court Period from Tiberius to Nero. was no longer favourable. The class by which literature was encouraged had become both enervated and terrorized. The most remarkable poetical product of the time is the long-neglected astrological poem of Manilius which was written at the beginning of Tiberius’s reign. Its vigour and originality have had scanty justice done to them owing to the difficulty of the subject-matter and the style, and the corruptions which still disfigure its text. Very different has been the fate of the Fables of Phaedrus. This slight work of a Macedonian freedman, destitute of national significance and representative in its morality only of the spirit of cosmopolitan individualism, owes its vogue to its easy Latinity and popular subject-matter. Of the prose writers C. Velleius Paterculus, the historian, and Valerius Maximus, the collector of anecdotes, are the most important. A. Cornelius Celsus composed a series of technical handbooks, one of which, upon medicine, has survived. Its purity of style and the fact that it was long a standard work entitle it to a mention here. The traditional culture was still, however, maintained, and the age was rich in grammarians and rhetoricians. The new profession of the delator must have given a stimulus to oratory. A high ideal of culture, literary as well as practical, was realized in Germanicus, which seems to have been transmitted to his daughter Agrippina, whose patronage of Seneca had important results in the next generation. The reign of Claudius was a time in which antiquarian learning, grammatical studies, and jurisprudence were cultivated, but no important additions were made to literature. A fresh impulse was given to letters on the accession of Nero, and this was partly due to the theatrical and artistic tastes of the young emperor. Four writers of the Neronian age still possess considerable interest,—L. Annaeus Seneca, M. Annaeus Lucanus, A. Persius Flaccus and Petronius Arbiter. The first three represent the spirit of their age by exhibiting the power of the Stoic philosophy as a moral, political and religious force; the last is the most cynical exponent of the depravity of the time. Seneca (c. 5 B.C.-A.D. 65) is less than Persius a pure Stoic, and more of a moralist and pathological observer of man’s inner life. He makes the commonplaces of a cosmopolitan philosophy interesting by his abundant illustration drawn from the private and social life of his contemporaries. He has knowledge of the world, the suppleness of a courtier, Spanish vivacity, and the ingenium amoenum attributed to him by Tacitus, the fruit of which is sometimes seen in the “honeyed phrases” mentioned by Petronius—pure aspirations combined with inconsistency of purpose—the inconsistency of one who tries to make the best of two worlds, the ideal inner life and the successful real life in the atmosphere of a most corrupt court. The Pharsalia of Lucan (39-65), with Cato as its hero, is essentially a Stoic manifesto of the opposition. It is written with the force and fervour of extreme youth and with the literary ambition of a race as yet new to the discipline of intellectual culture, and is characterized by rhetorical rather than poetical imagination. The six short Satires of Persius (34-62) are the purest product of Stoicism—a Stoicism that had found in a contemporary, Thrasea, a more rational and practical hero than Cato. But no important writer of antiquity has less literary charm than Persius. In avoiding the literary conceits and fopperies which he satirizes he has recourse to the most unnatural contortions of expression. Of hardly greater length are the seven eclogues of T. Calpurnius Siculus, written at the beginning of the reign of Nero, which are not without grace and facility of diction. Of the works of the time that which from a human point of view is perhaps the most detestable in ancient literature has the most genuine literary quality, the fragment of a prose novel—the Satyricon—of Petronius (d. 66). It is most sincere in its representation, least artificial in diction, most penetrating in its satire, most just in its criticism of art and style.

1. For a generation after Augustus's death, no new original literary talent emerged. The later poetry of the Augustan age had dwindled into trivial amateurism, and the court atmosphere was no longer supportive of it. The class that once supported literature had become both weak and fearful. The most notable poetic work from this time is the long-overlooked astrological poem by Manilius, written at the beginning of Tiberius's reign. Its energy and originality have not been given proper recognition due to the complexity of the subject and style, as well as the corruptions that still mar its text. The Fables by Phaedrus, on the other hand, have fared quite differently. This small work by a freedman from Macedonia, lacking national significance and only reflecting the spirit of cosmopolitan individualism, has gained popularity because of its straightforward Latin and relatable subject matter. Among prose writers, C. Velleius Paterculus, the historian, and Valerius Maximus, the collector of anecdotes, are the most significant. A. Cornelius Celsus compiled a series of technical manuals, one of which, on medicine, has survived. Its clarity of style and long-standing status as a standard reference earn it a mention here. Nonetheless, traditional culture was still upheld, and the era was abundant in grammarians and rhetoricians. The emerging profession of the delator must have spurred interest in oratory. A high standard of culture, both literary and practical, was embodied by Germanicus, seemingly passed down to his daughter Agrippina, whose support of Seneca led to important consequences in the following generation. The reign of Claudius saw a focus on antiquarian studies, grammar, and law, but no major contributions were made to literature. A renewed energy in literature arrived with Nero's rise, partly due to the young emperor's theatrical and artistic interests. Four writers from the Neronian period maintain significant interest: L. Annaeus Seneca, M. Annaeus Lucanus, A. Persius Flaccus, and Petronius Arbiter. The first three embody the spirit of their time, showcasing the impact of Stoic philosophy as a moral, political, and religious force; the last offers a cynical portrayal of the era's corruption. Seneca (c. 5 BCE-AD 65) is less of a pure Stoic than Persius, leaning more towards being a moralist and an observer of human nature. He makes the clichés of a cosmopolitan philosophy engaging through rich illustrations drawn from the private and social lives of his contemporaries. He possesses worldly wisdom, the adaptability of a courtier, Spanish zest, and the ingenium amoenum attributed to him by Tacitus, resulting in what Petronius described as “honeyed phrases”—pure aspirations mingled with a lack of consistent purpose—reflecting the inconsistency of someone trying to navigate between an ideal inner life and a successful external life in a deeply corrupt court. Lucan's Pharsalia (39-65), featuring Cato as its protagonist, serves as a Stoic manifesto of opposition. It's written with youthful intensity and the literary ambition of a generation still new to intellectual discipline, characterized more by rhetorical flair than poetic imagination. The six brief Satires by Persius (34-62) are the purest expression of Stoicism—a Stoicism that found a more rational and practical hero in his contemporary Thrasea rather than Cato. Yet, no significant ancient writer is less charming than Persius. In his effort to critique literary pretensions and affectations, he resorts to awkward and unnatural expressions. Similarly brief are the seven eclogues of T. Calpurnius Siculus, written at the start of Nero's reign, which possess a degree of grace and fluency. Of the works from this time, perhaps the most detestable from a human perspective is the one with the most genuine literary quality: the fragment of a prose novel—the Satyricon—by Petronius (d. 66). It is sincere in its portrayal, least contrived in language, most incisive in satire, and fair in its assessment of both art and style.

2. A greater sobriety of tone was introduced both into life and literature with the accession of Vespasian. The time was, however, characterized rather by good sense and industry than by original genius. Under Vespasian Age of Domitian. C. Plinius Secundus, or Pliny the elder (compiler of the Natural History, an encyclopaedic treatise, 23-79), is the most important prose writer, and C. Valerius Flaccus Setinus Balbus, author of the Argonautica (d. c. 90), the most important among the writers of poetry. The reign of Domitian, although it silenced the more independent spirits of the time, Tacitus and Juvenal, witnessed more important contributions to Roman literature than any age since the Augustan,—among them the Institutes of Quintilian, the Punic War of Silius Italicus, the epics and the Silvae of Statius, and the Epigrams of Martial. M. Fabius Quintilianus, or Quintilian (c. 35-95), is brought forward by Juvenal as a unique instance of a thoroughly successful man of letters, of one not belonging by birth to the rich or official class, who had risen to wealth and honours through literature. He was well adapted to his time by his good sense and sobriety of judgment. His criticism is just and true rather than subtle or ingenious, and has thus stood the test of the judgment of after-times. The poem of Ti. Catius Silius Italicus (25-101) is a proof of the industry and literary ambition of members of the rich official class. Of the epic poets of the Silver Age P. Papinius Statius (c. 45-96) shows the greatest technical skill and the richest pictorial fancy in the execution of detail; but his epics have no true inspiring motive, and, although the recitation of the Thebaid could attract and charm an audience in the days of Juvenal, it really belongs to the class of poems so unsparingly condemned both by him and Martial. In the Silvae, though many of them have little root in the deeper feelings of human nature, we find occasionally more than in any poetry after the Augustan age something of the purer charm and pathos of life. But it is not in the Silvae, nor in the epics and tragedies of the time, nor in the cultivated criticism of Quintilian that the age of Domitian lives for us. It is in the Epigrams of M. Valerius Martialis or Martial (c. 41-104) that we have a true image of the average sensual frivolous life of Rome at the end of the 1st century, seen through a medium of wit and humour, but undistorted by the exaggeration which moral indignation and the love of effect add to the representation of Juvenal. Martial represents his age in his Epigrams, as Horace does his in his Satires and Odes, with more variety and incisive force in his sketches, though with much less poetic charm and serious meaning. We know the daily life, the familiar personages, the outward aspect of Rome in the age of Domitian 266 better than at any other period of Roman history, and this knowledge we owe to Martial.

2. A more serious tone was introduced into both life and literature with the rise of Vespasian. However, this period was marked more by good sense and hard work than by original talent. Under Vespasian Domitian's reign. C. Plinius Secundus, or Pliny the Elder (compiler of the Natural History, an encyclopedic work, 23-79), is the most significant prose writer, and C. Valerius Flaccus Setinus Balbus, author of the Argonautica (d. c. 90), is the most notable poet. The reign of Domitian, while it stifled the more independent thinkers of the time, such as Tacitus and Juvenal, produced more significant contributions to Roman literature than any period since the Augustan era—among these are Quintilian's Institutes, Silius Italicus's Punic War, the epics and Silvae of Statius, and Martial's Epigrams. M. Fabius Quintilianus, or Quintilian (c. 35-95), is highlighted by Juvenal as a rare example of a thoroughly successful writer who, not born into wealth or an official class, achieved prosperity and respect through literature. He was well-suited to his time, known for his good sense and sober judgment. His criticism is fair and accurate rather than intricate or clever, allowing it to endure the test of later evaluation. The poem by Ti. Catius Silius Italicus (25-101) demonstrates the ambition and effort of wealthy officials in the literary scene. Among the epic poets of the Silver Age, P. Papinius Statius (c. 45-96) displays the highest level of technical skill and vivid imagination in detail, but his epics lack a genuine inspiring purpose. While the recitation of the Thebaid could captivate an audience in Juvenal's time, it truly belongs to the category of works criticized by both him and Martial. In the Silvae, although many lack deep emotional resonance, there are instances of a purer charm and pathos that surpass any poetry after the Augustan age. Yet, the real essence of the Domitian era doesn’t reside in the Silvae, the epics and tragedies of the time, or Quintilian's refined criticism. It is in the Epigrams of M. Valerius Martialis, or Martial (c. 41-104), that we find an accurate portrayal of the typical sensual and carefree life of Rome at the end of the 1st century, depicted with wit and humor, but without the distortions of moral outrage that color Juvenal's representations. Martial reflects his era in his Epigrams, just as Horace does in his Satires and Odes, offering more variety and sharpness in his sketches, albeit with less poetic charm and serious depth. We understand the daily life, the familiar characters, and the visible landscape of Rome during Domitian's reign 266 better than in any other time in Roman history, a knowledge that we owe to Martial.

3. But it was under Nerva and Trajan that the greatest and most truly representative works of the empire were written. The Annals and Histories of Cornelius Tacitus (54-119), with the supplementary Life of Agricola and the Period of Nerva, Trajan and Hadrian. Germania, and the Satires of D. Iunius Iuvenalis or Juvenal (c. 47-130), sum up for posterity the moral experience of the Roman world from the accession of Tiberius to the death of Domitian. The generous scorn and pathos of the historian acting on extraordinary gifts of imaginative insight and characterization, and the fierce indignation of the satirist finding its vent in exaggerating realism, doubtless to some extent warped their impressions; nevertheless their works are the last voices expressive of the freedom and manly virtue of the ancient world. In them alone among the writers of the empire the spirit of the Roman republic seems to revive. The Letters of C. Plinius Caecilius Secundus or Pliny the Younger (61-c. 115), though they do not contradict the representation of Tacitus and Juvenal regarded as an exposure of the political degradation and moral corruption of prominent individuals and classes, do much to modify the pervadingly tragic and sombre character of their representation.

3. But it was during the time of Nerva and Trajan that the most significant and truly representative works of the empire were produced. The Annals and Histories by Cornelius Tacitus (54-119), along with the supplementary Life of Agricola and the The era of Nerva, Trajan, and Hadrian. Germania, and the Satires by D. Iunius Iuvenalis or Juvenal (c. 47-130), encapsulate the moral experiences of the Roman world from the rise of Tiberius to the fall of Domitian. The thoughtful contempt and emotional depth of Tacitus, combined with his exceptional imaginative insight and character portrayal, alongside the passionate outrage of Juvenal, expressed through exaggerated realism, may have distorted their perspectives to some extent; however, their works are the last expressions of the freedom and strong virtues of the ancient world. In their writings, the spirit of the Roman Republic seems to come alive once again. The Letters of C. Plinius Caecilius Secundus or Pliny the Younger (61-c. 115), while not contradicting the views of Tacitus and Juvenal regarding the political decay and moral corruption of certain individuals and classes, significantly soften the predominantly tragic and bleak tone of their accounts.

With the death of Juvenal, the most important part of whose activity falls in the reign of Trajan, Latin literature as an original and national expression of the experience, character, and sentiment of the Roman state and empire, and as one of the great literatures of the world, may be considered closed.

With the death of Juvenal, whose most significant work took place during Trajan's rule, Latin literature—an original and national reflection of the experiences, character, and sentiments of the Roman state and empire, and one of the great literatures of the world—can be viewed as having come to an end.

Later Writers.

Later Authors.

What remains to describe is little but death and decay. Poetry died first; the paucity of writings in verse is matched by their insignificance. For two centuries after Juvenal there are no names but those of Q. Serenus Sammonicus, with his pharmacopoeia in verse (c. 225), and M. Aurelius Olympius Nemesianus, who wrote a few feeble eclogues and (283) a dull piece on the training of dogs for the chase. Towards the middle of the 4th century we have Decimus Magnus Ausonius, a professor of Bordeaux and afterwards consul (379), whose style is as little like that of classical poetry as is his prosody. His Mosella, a detailed description of the river Moselle, is the least unattractive of his works. A little better is his contemporary, Rufius Festus Avienus, who made some free translations of astronomical and geographical poems in Greek. A generation later, in what might be called the expiring effort of Latin poetry, appeared two writers of much greater merit. The first is Claudius Claudianus (c. 400), a native of Alexandria and the court poet of the emperor Honorius and his minister Stilicho. Claudian Claudian. may be properly styled the last of the poets of Rome. He breathes the old national spirit, and his mastery of classical idiom and versification is for his age extraordinary. Something of the same may be seen in Rutilius Namatianus, a Gaul by birth, who wrote in 416 a description of his voyage from the capital to his native land, which contains the most glowing eulogy of Rome ever penned by an ancient hand. Of the Christian “poets” only Aurelius Prudentius Clemens (c. 348-410) need be mentioned. He was well read in the ancient literature; but the task of embodying the Christian spirit in the classical form was one far beyond his powers.

What’s left to talk about is mostly death and decay. Poetry was the first to die; the scarcity of verse writing is matched only by its lack of importance. For two centuries after Juvenal, there are no notable names except for Q. Serenus Sammonicus, known for his pharmacopoeia in verse (circa 225), and M. Aurelius Olympius Nemesianus, who wrote a few weak eclogues and a dull piece about training dogs for hunting (283). Around the middle of the 4th century, we find Decimus Magnus Ausonius, a professor from Bordeaux who later became consul (379), whose style and rhythm are as far from classical poetry as can be. His Mosella, a detailed description of the Moselle River, is the least unappealing of his works. A bit better is his contemporary, Rufius Festus Avienus, who made some loose translations of Greek poems on astronomy and geography. A generation later, in what might be seen as the last gasp of Latin poetry, two writers of far greater talent emerged. The first is Claudius Claudianus (circa 400), who was born in Alexandria and served as the court poet for Emperor Honorius and his minister Stilicho. Claudian can rightly be called the last of the Roman poets. He captures the old national spirit, and his command of classical language and verse is remarkable for his time. Something similar can be found in Rutilius Namatianus, a Gaul by birth, who wrote in 416 a description of his journey from the capital to his homeland, which includes the most glowing praise of Rome ever written by an ancient hand. Of the Christian “poets,” only Aurelius Prudentius Clemens (circa 348-410) is worth mentioning. He was well-versed in ancient literature; however, his ability to express the Christian spirit in classical form was far beyond his capabilities.

The vitality of the prose literature was not much greater though its complete extinction was from the nature of the case impossible. The most important writer in the age succeeding Juvenal was the biographer C. Suetonius Tranquillus Suetonius. (c. 75-160), whose work is more valuable for its matter than its manner. His style is simple and direct, but has hardly any other merit. A little later the rise of M. Cornelius Fronto (c. 100-175), a native of Cirta, marks the beginning of an African influence. Fronto, a distinguished orator and intimate friend of the emperor M. Aurelius, broke away from the traditional Latin of the Silver and Golden ages, and took as his models the pre-classical authors. The reaction was short-lived; but the same affectation of antiquity is seen in the writings of Apuleius, also an African, who lived a little later than Fronto and was a man of much greater natural parts. In his Metamorphoses, Apuleius. which were based upon a Greek original, he takes the wonderful story of the adventures of Lucius of Madaura, and interweaves the famous legend of Cupid and Psyche. His bizarre and mystical style has a strange fascination for the reader; but there is nothing Roman or Italian about it. Two epitomists of previous histories may be mentioned: Justinus (of uncertain date) who abridged the history of Pompeius Trogus, an Augustan writer; and P. Annius Florus, who wrote in the reign of Hadrian a rhetorical sketch based upon Livy. The Historia Augusta, which includes the lives of the emperors from Hadrian to Numerianus (117-284), is the work of six writers, four of whom wrote under Diocletian and two under Constantine. It is a collection of personal memoirs of little historical importance, and marked by puerility and poverty of style. Ammianus Marcellinus (c. 330-400) had a higher conception of the historian’s function. His narrative of the years 353-378 (all that now remains) is honest and straightforward, but his diction is awkward and obscure. The last pagan prose writer who need be mentioned is Q. Aurelius Symmachus (c. 350-410), the author of some speeches and a collection of letters. All the art of his ornate and courtly periods cannot disguise the fact that there was nothing now for paganism to say.

The energy of prose literature wasn't much higher, though its total disappearance was naturally impossible. The most significant writer in the period after Juvenal was the biographer C. Suetonius Tranquillus Suetonius. (c. 75-160), whose work is more valuable for its content than its style. His writing is simple and direct, but lacks any other notable qualities. A bit later, the emergence of M. Cornelius Fronto (c. 100-175), a native of Cirta, signifies the start of African influence. Fronto, a prominent orator and close friend of Emperor M. Aurelius, moved away from the traditional Latin of the Silver and Golden ages, looking to pre-classical authors as his examples. This reaction was short-lived, but a similar pretension to antiquity appears in the works of Apuleius, another African who came after Fronto and had much greater natural talent. In his Metamorphoses, Apuleius. which were based on a Greek original, he tells the amazing story of the adventures of Lucius of Madaura and weaves in the famous legend of Cupid and Psyche. His strange and mystical style captivates the reader, but there is nothing Roman or Italian about it. Two summarizers of earlier histories can be noted: Justinus (of uncertain date), who condensed the history of Pompeius Trogus, an Augustan writer, and P. Annius Florus, who wrote a rhetorical sketch based on Livy during Hadrian's reign. The Historia Augusta, which covers the lives of emperors from Hadrian to Numerianus (117-284), was produced by six writers, four of whom worked under Diocletian and two under Constantine. It is a compilation of personal memoirs with little historical significance and is characterized by childishness and a lack of style. Ammianus Marcellinus (c. 330-400) had a more elevated view of the historian’s role. His account of the years 353-378 (the only parts that remain) is honest and direct, but his language is awkward and unclear. The final pagan prose writer worth mentioning is Q. Aurelius Symmachus (c. 350-410), the author of several speeches and a collection of letters. Despite the artistry of his elaborate and formal writing, it can't hide the fact that there was nothing left for paganism to express.

It is in Christian writers alone that we find the vigour of life. The earliest work of Christian apologetics is the Octavius or Minucius Felix, a contemporary of Fronto. It is written in pure Latin and is strongly tinged by classical Christian writers. influences. Quite different is the work of “the fierce Tertullian,” Q. Septimius Florens Tertullianus (c. 150-230), a native of Carthage, the most vigorous of the Latin champions of the new faith. His style shows the African revolt of which we have already spoken, and in its medley of archaisms, Graecisms and Hebraisms reveals the strength of the disintegrating forces at work upon the Latin language. A more commanding figure is that of Aurelius Augustinus or St Augustine (354-430), bishop of Hippo, who for comprehensiveness and dialectical power stands out in the same way as Hieronymus or St Jerome (c. 331 or 340-420), a native of Stridon in Dalmatia, does for many-sided learning and scholarship.

It is only in Christian writers that we find the true energy of life. The earliest work of Christian apologetics is the Octavius by Minucius Felix, a contemporary of Fronto. It's written in clear Latin and has strong classical influences. In contrast, there’s the work of “the fierce Tertullian,” Q. Septimius Florens Tertullianus (c. 150-230), who was from Carthage and one of the strongest defenders of the new faith in Latin. His style reflects the African rebellion we’ve mentioned before, and its mix of archaic, Greek, and Hebrew elements shows the powerful disintegration affecting the Latin language. A more prominent figure is Aurelius Augustinus or St Augustine (354-430), bishop of Hippo, who stands out for his comprehensive and dialectical strength, similar to how Hieronymus or St Jerome (c. 331 or 340-420), from Stridon in Dalmatia, is recognized for his extensive learning and scholarship.

The decline of literature proper was attended by an increased output of grammatical and critical studies. From the time of L. Aelius Stilo Praeconinus, who was the teacher of Varro and Cicero, much interest had been taken in Grammarians. literary and linguistic problems at Rome. Varro under the republic, and M. Verrius Flaccus in the Augustan age, had busied themselves with lexicography and etymology. The grammarian M. Valerius Probus (c. A.D. 60) was the first critical editor of Latin texts. In the next century we have Velius Longus’s treatise De Orthographia, and then a much more important work, the Noctes Atticae of Aulus Gellius, and (c. 200) a treatise in verse by Terentianus, an African, upon Latin pronunciation, prosody and metre. Somewhat later are the commentators on Terence and Horace, Helenius Acro and Pomponius Porphyrio. The tradition was continued in the 4th century by Nonius Marcellus and C. Marius Victorinus, both Africans; Aelius Donatus, the grammarian and commentator on Terence and Virgil, Flavius Sosipater Charisius and Diomedes, and Servius, the author of a valuable commentary on Virgil. Ambrosius Macrobius Theodosius (c. 400) wrote a treatise on Cicero’s Somnium Scipionis and seven books of miscellanies (Saturnalia); and Martianus Capella (c. 430), a native of Africa, published a compendium of the seven liberal arts, written in a mixture of prose and verse, with some literary pretensions. The last grammarian who need be named is the most widely known of all, the celebrated Priscianus, who published his text-book at Constantinople probably in the middle of the 5th century.

The decline of proper literature was accompanied by a rise in grammatical and critical studies. Starting with L. Aelius Stilo Praeconinus, who taught Varro and Cicero, there was a growing interest in Grammar experts. literary and linguistic issues in Rome. Varro during the Republic and M. Verrius Flaccus in the Augustan era focused on lexicography and etymology. The grammarian M. Valerius Probus (around A.D. 60) was the first to critically edit Latin texts. In the next century, there’s Velius Longus’s work De Orthographia, followed by a much more significant piece, Aulus Gellius's Noctes Atticae, and (around 200) a verse treatise by Terentianus, an African, on Latin pronunciation, prosody, and meter. A bit later came the commentators on Terence and Horace, Helenius Acro and Pomponius Porphyrio. The tradition continued in the 4th century with Nonius Marcellus and C. Marius Victorinus, both from Africa; Aelius Donatus, the grammarian and commentator on Terence and Virgil; Flavius Sosipater Charisius and Diomedes, along with Servius, who wrote a valuable commentary on Virgil. Ambrosius Macrobius Theodosius (around 400) wrote a treatise on Cicero’s Somnium Scipionis and seven books of miscellanies (Saturnalia); and Martianus Capella (around 430), originally from Africa, published a summary of the seven liberal arts, mixing prose and verse with some literary flair. The last grammarian worth mentioning is the most famous of all, the renowned Priscianus, who published his textbook in Constantinople, likely around the middle of the 5th century.

In jurisprudence, which may be regarded as one of the outlying regions of literature, Roman genius had had some of its greatest triumphs, and, if we take account of the “codes,” was active to the end. The most distinguished of the early jurists (whose Jurists. 267 works are lost) were Q. Mucius Scaevola, who died in 82 B.C., and following him Ser. Sulpicius Rufus, who died in 43 B.C. In the Augustan age M. Antistius Labeo and C. Ateius Capito headed two opposing schools in jurisprudence, Labeo being an advocate of method and reform, and Capito being a conservative and empiricist. The strife, which reflects the controversy between the “analogists” and the “anomalists” in philology, continued long after their death. Salvius Julianus was entrusted by Hadrian with the task of reducing into shape the immense mass of law which had grown up in the edicts of successive praetors—thus taking the first step towards a code. Sex. Pomponius, a contemporary, wrote an important legal manual of which fragments are preserved. The most celebrated handbook, however, is the Institutiones of Gaius, who lived under Antonius Pius—a model of what such treatises should be. The most eminent of all the Roman jurists was Aemilius Papinianus, the intimate friend of Septimius Severus; of his works only fragments remain. Other considerable writers were the prolific Domitius Ulpianus (c. 215) and Julius Paulus, his contemporary. The last juristical writer of note was Herennius Modestinus (c. 240). But though the line of great lawyers had ceased, the effects of their work remained and are clearly visible long after in the “codes”—the code of Theodosius (438) and the still more famous code of Justinian (529 and 533), with which is associated the name of Tribonianus.

In law, which can be seen as one of the more remote aspects of literature, Roman creativity achieved some of its greatest successes, and, considering the “codes,” remained influential until the end. The most notable of the early legal scholars (whose Legal experts. 267 works are lost) were Q. Mucius Scaevola, who died in 82 B.C., followed by Ser. Sulpicius Rufus, who died in 43 B.C. During the Augustan era, M. Antistius Labeo and C. Ateius Capito led two opposing schools of thought in law, with Labeo advocating for method and reform, while Capito took a conservative and empirical approach. This conflict, which mirrors the debate between the "analogists" and "anomalists" in linguistics, continued long after their deaths. Salvius Julianus was assigned by Hadrian to organize the vast body of law that had developed from the edicts of successive praetors—marking the first step towards a legal code. Sex. Pomponius, a contemporary, authored an important legal manual, of which some fragments remain. However, the most famous handbook is Gaius's Institutiones, written during the time of Antonius Pius—a model for such works. The most distinguished of all Roman jurists was Aemilius Papinianus, a close friend of Septimius Severus; only fragments of his works have survived. Other significant writers included the prolific Domitius Ulpianus (c. 215) and his contemporary Julius Paulus. The last noteworthy legal scholar was Herennius Modestinus (c. 240). Although the era of great legal scholars ended, the impact of their contributions persisted, clearly evident later in the “codes”—the code of Theodosius (438) and the even more renowned code of Justinian (529 and 533), associated with the name of Tribonianus.

Bibliography.—The most full and satisfactory modern account of Latin literature is M. Schanz’s Geschichte der römischen Litteratur. The best in English is the translation by C. C. Warr of W. S. Teuffel and L. Schwabe’s History of Roman Literature. J. W. Mackail’s short History of Latin Literature is full of excellent literary and aesthetic criticisms on the writers. C. Lamarre’s Histoire de la littérature latine (1901, with specimens) only deals with the writers of the republic. W. Y. Sellar’s Roman Poets of the Republic and Poets of the Augustan Age, and R. Y. Tyrrell’s Lectures on Latin Poetry, will also be found of service. A concise account of the various Latin writers and their works, together with bibliographies, is given in J. E. B. Mayor’s Bibliographical Clue to Latin Literature (1879), which is based on a German work by E. Hübner. See also the separate bibliographies to the articles on individual writers.

References.—The most comprehensive and satisfying modern account of Latin literature is M. Schanz’s Geschichte der römischen Litteratur. The best English version is C. C. Warr’s translation of W. S. Teuffel and L. Schwabe’s History of Roman Literature. J. W. Mackail’s short History of Latin Literature is packed with excellent literary and aesthetic critiques of the authors. C. Lamarre’s Histoire de la littérature latine (1901, with examples) focuses only on the writers from the republic. W. Y. Sellar’s Roman Poets of the Republic and Poets of the Augustan Age, and R. Y. Tyrrell’s Lectures on Latin Poetry, will also be helpful. A concise overview of various Latin authors and their works, along with bibliographies, can be found in J. E. B. Mayor’s Bibliographical Clue to Latin Literature (1879), which is based on a German work by E. Hübner. Also, check the separate bibliographies for articles on individual authors.

(W. Y. S.; J. P. P.)

1 Latine loqui elegantissime.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Speak Latin elegantly.

LATINUS, in Roman legend, king of the aborigines in Latium, and eponymous hero of the Latin race. In Hesiod (Theogony, 1013) he is the son of Odysseus and Circe, and ruler of the Tyrsenians; in Virgil, the son of Faunus and the nymph Marica, a national genealogy being substituted for the Hesiodic, which probably originated from a Greek source. Latinus was a shadowy personality, invented to explain the origin of Rome and its relations with Latium, and only obtained importance in later times through his legendary connexion with Aeneas and the foundation of Rome. According to Virgil (Aeneid, vii.-xii.), Aeneas, on landing at the mouth of the Tiber, was welcomed by Latinus, the peaceful ruler whose seat of government was Laurentum, and ultimately married his daughter Lavinia.

LATINUS, in Roman legend, was the king of the aborigines in Latium and the namesake hero of the Latin people. In Hesiod's Theogony (1013), he's described as the son of Odysseus and Circe, ruling over the Tyrsenians; whereas in Virgil's version, he's the son of Faunus and the nymph Marica, replacing the genealogy from Hesiod with a national one that likely came from a Greek source. Latinus was somewhat of a vague figure, created to explain Rome's origins and its ties with Latium, gaining significance later through his legendary connection to Aeneas and the founding of Rome. According to Virgil in the Aeneid (vii.-xii.), when Aeneas arrived at the mouth of the Tiber, he was welcomed by Latinus, the peaceful king whose government was based in Laurentum, and he eventually married Latinus's daughter, Lavinia.

Other accounts of Latinus, differing considerably in detail, are to be found in the fragments of Cato’s Origines (in Servius’s commentary on Virgil) and in Dionysius of Halicarnassus; see further authorities in the article by J. A. Hild, in Daremberg and Saglio, Dictionnaire des antiquités.

Other accounts of Latinus, which vary quite a bit in detail, can be found in the fragments of Cato’s Origines (in Servius’s commentary on Virgil) and in Dionysius of Halicarnassus; for more references, see the article by J. A. Hild in Daremberg and Saglio, Dictionnaire des antiquités.

LATITUDE (Lat. latitudo, latus, broad), a word meaning breadth or width, hence, figuratively, freedom from restriction, but more generally used in the geographical and astronomical sense here treated. The latitude of a point on the earth’s surface is its angular distance from the equator, measured on the curved surface of the earth. The direct measure of this distance being impracticable, it has to be determined by astronomical observations. As thus determined it is the angle between the direction of the plumb-line at the place and the plane of the equator. This is identical with the angle between the horizontal planes at the place and at the equator, and also with the elevation of the celestial pole above the horizon (see Astronomy). Latitude thus determined by the plumb-line is termed astronomical. The geocentric latitude of a place is the angle which the line from the earth’s centre to the place makes with the plane of the equator. Geographical latitude, which is used in mapping, is based on the supposition that the earth is an elliptic spheroid of known compression, and is the angle which the normal to this spheroid makes with the equator. It differs from the astronomical latitude only in being corrected for local deviation of the plumb-line.

LATITUDE (Lat. latitudo, latus, broad), a term that denotes breadth or width, and is often used to refer to freedom from restrictions, but is more commonly applied in geographical and astronomical contexts as discussed here. The latitude of a location on the Earth's surface is the angular distance from the equator, measured along the curved surface of the Earth. Since directly measuring this distance is not feasible, it is determined through astronomical observations. It represents the angle between the direction of the plumb line at that location and the plane of the equator. This angle is the same as the angle between the horizontal planes at that location and at the equator, and also corresponds to the altitude of the celestial pole above the horizon (see Astronomy). Latitude determined by the plumb line is referred to as astronomical. The geocentric latitude of a location is the angle formed by the line from the Earth's center to the location in relation to the plane of the equator. Geographical latitude, which is used in maps, is based on the idea that the Earth is an elliptic spheroid with a known level of compression, and it is the angle the normal to this spheroid makes with the equator. It varies from the astronomical latitude only by accounting for local deviations of the plumb line.

The latitude of a celestial object is the angle which the line drawn from some fixed point of reference to the object makes with the plane of the ecliptic.

The latitude of a celestial object is the angle formed between the line drawn from a fixed reference point to the object and the plane of the ecliptic.

Variability of Terrestrial Latitudes.—The latitude of a point on the earth’s surface, as above defined, is measured from the equator. The latter is defined by the condition that its plane makes a right angle with the earth’s axis of rotation. It follows that if the points in which this axis intersects the earth’s surface, i.e. the poles of the earth, change their positions on the earth’s surface, the position of the equator will also change, and therefore the latitudes of places will change also. About the end of the 19th century research showed that there actually was a very minute but measurable periodic change of this kind. The north and south poles, instead of being fixed points on the earth’s surface, wander round within a circle about 50 ft. in diameter. The result is a variability of terrestrial latitudes generally.

Variability of Terrestrial Latitudes.—The latitude of a point on the earth’s surface, as defined above, is measured from the equator. The equator is defined by the fact that its plane forms a right angle with the earth’s axis of rotation. This means that if the points where this axis intersects the earth’s surface, namely the poles, shift their positions, the position of the equator will also shift, and as a result, the latitudes of various locations will change as well. Around the end of the 19th century, research revealed that there is actually a very slight but measurable periodic change of this nature. The north and south poles, rather than being fixed points on the earth's surface, move around in a circle that's about 50 ft. in diameter. This leads to a general variability of terrestrial latitudes.

To show the cause of this motion, let BQ represent a section of an oblate spheroid through its shortest axis, PP. We may consider this spheroid to be that of the earth, the ellipticity being greatly exaggerated. If set in rotation around its axis of figure PP, it will continue to rotate around that axis for an indefinite time. But if, instead of rotating around PP, it rotates around some other axis, RR, making a small angle, POR, with the axis of figure PP; then it has been known since the time of Euler that the axis of rotation RR, if referred to the spheroid regarded as fixed, will gradually rotate round the axis of figure PP in a period defined in the following way:—If we put C = the moment of momentum of the spheroid around the axis of figure, and A = the corresponding moment around an axis passing through the equator EQ, then, calling one day the period of rotation of the spheroid, the axis RR will make a revolution around PP in a number of days represented by the fraction C/(C − A). In the case of the earth, this ratio is 1/0.0032813 or 305. It follows that the period in question is 305 days.

To explain the cause of this motion, let BQ represent a section of an oblate spheroid along its shortest axis, PP. We can think of this spheroid as being similar to the earth, with the ellipticity greatly exaggerated. If it spins around its figure axis PP, it will keep rotating around that axis indefinitely. However, if it rotates around a different axis, RR, making a small angle, POR, with the figure axis PP, it's known since Euler's time that the rotation axis RR, when seen from the fixed spheroid, will slowly rotate around the figure axis PP in a period defined as follows: If we let C represent the moment of momentum of the spheroid around the figure axis, and A represent the corresponding moment around an axis through the equator EQ, then, considering one day as the spheroid's rotation period, the axis RR will complete a revolution around PP in a number of days given by the fraction C/(C − A). For the earth, this ratio is 1/0.0032813 or 305. Therefore, the period in question is 305 days.

Up to 1890 the most careful observations and researches failed to establish the periodicity of such a rotation, though there was strong evidence of a variation of latitude. Then S. C. Chandler, from an elaborate discussion of a great number of observations, showed that there was really a variation of the latitude of the points of observation; but, instead of the period being 305 days, it was about 428 days. At first sight this period seemed to be inconsistent with dynamical theory. But a defect was soon found in the latter, the correction of which reconciled the divergence. In deriving a period of 305 days the earth is regarded as an absolutely rigid body, and no account is taken either of its elasticity or of the mobility of the ocean. A study of the figure will show that the centrifugal force round the axis RR will act on the equatorial protuberance of the rotating earth so as to make it tend in the direction of the arrows. A slight deformation of the earth will thus result; and the axis of figure of the distorted spheroid will no longer be PP, but a line P′P′ between PP and RR. As the latter moves round, P′P′ will continually follow it through the incessant change of figure produced by the change in the direction of the centrifugal force. Now the rate of motion of RR is determined by the actual figure at the moment. It is therefore less than the motion in an absolutely rigid spheroid in the proportion RP′ : RP. It is found that, even though the earth were no more elastic than steel, its yielding combined with the mobility of the ocean would make this ratio about 2 : 3, resulting in an increase of the period by one-half, making it about 457 days. Thus this small flexibility is even 268 greater than that necessary to the reconciliation of observation with theory, and the earth is shown to be more rigid than steel—a conclusion long since announced by Kelvin for other reasons.

Up until 1890, the most thorough observations and studies couldn't determine the periodicity of such a rotation, although there was strong evidence of changes in latitude. Then S. C. Chandler, through a detailed analysis of numerous observations, demonstrated that there was indeed a variation in the latitude of the observation points; however, instead of a 305-day period, it was about 428 days. At first, this period seemed to conflict with dynamic theory. But a flaw was soon identified in the latter, and correcting it resolved the discrepancy. When deriving a period of 305 days, the Earth is treated as if it were a completely rigid body, ignoring both its elasticity and the movement of the oceans. An examination of the figure will reveal that the centrifugal force around the axis RR will act on the equatorial bulge of the spinning Earth, causing it to move in the direction of the arrows. This slight deformation of the Earth will result in the figure's axis of the distorted spheroid no longer being PP, but a line P′P′ that lies between PP and RR. As RR rotates, P′P′ will continuously follow it through the ongoing changes in shape caused by the shift in the direction of the centrifugal force. The speed of motion of RR is determined by the current figure at that moment, making it less than the motion of a perfectly rigid spheroid in the ratio of RP′ to RP. It has been found that even if the Earth were as rigid as steel, its flexibility, combined with the movement of the oceans, would make this ratio about 2:3, leading to a 50% increase in the period, bringing it to about 457 days. Thus, this slight flexibility is actually greater than what is needed to align observations with theory, demonstrating that the Earth is more rigid than steel—a conclusion that Kelvin had long ago reached for other reasons.

Chandler afterwards made an important addition to the subject by showing that the motion was represented by the superposition of two harmonic terms, the first having a period of about 430 days, the other of one year. The result of this superposition is a seven-year period, which makes 6 periods of the 428-day term (428d × 6 = 2568d = 7 years, nearly), and 7 periods of the annual term. Near one phase of this combined period the two component motions nearly annul each other, so that the variation is then small, while at the opposite phase, 3 to 4 years later, the two motions are in the same direction and the range of variation is at its maximum. The coefficient of the 428-day term seems to be between 0.12″ and 0.16″; that of the annual term between 0.06″ and 0.11″. Recent observations give smaller values of both than those made between 1890 and 1900, and there is no reason to suppose either to be constant.

Chandler later added something significant to the topic by demonstrating that the motion could be represented as the combination of two harmonic terms, one with a period of about 430 days and the other with a period of one year. This combination results in a seven-year cycle, which consists of 6 cycles of the 428-day term (428d × 6 = 2568d = nearly 7 years) and 7 cycles of the annual term. Close to one phase of this combined period, the two component motions almost cancel each other out, resulting in minimal variation, while at the opposite phase, 3 to 4 years later, the two motions align, leading to maximum variation. The coefficient for the 428-day term appears to be between 0.12″ and 0.16″, while that for the annual term ranges from 0.06″ to 0.11″. Recent observations indicate lower values for both compared to those recorded between 1890 and 1900, and there’s no reason to believe either is constant.

The present state of the theory may be summed up as follows:—

The current state of the theory can be summarized as follows:—

1. The fourteen-month term is an immediate result of the fact that the axes of rotation and figure of the earth do not strictly coincide, but make with each other a small angle of which the mean value is about 0.15″. If the earth remained invariable, without any motion of matter on its surface, the result of this non-coincidence would be the revolution of the one pole round the other in a circle of radius 0.15″, or about 15 ft., in a period of about 429 days. This revolution is called the Eulerian motion, after the mathematician who discovered it. But owing to meteorological causes the motion in question is subject to annual changes. These changes arise from two causes—the one statical, the other dynamical.

1. The fourteen-month period is a direct result of the fact that the Earth's rotation axis and its shape don't perfectly align, creating a small angle with an average value of about 0.15″. If the Earth were completely unchanging, with no movement of materials on its surface, the result of this misalignment would be that one pole would revolve around the other in a circular path with a radius of 0.15″, or about 15 ft., taking roughly 429 days to complete. This movement is known as the Eulerian motion, named after the mathematician who identified it. However, due to weather-related factors, this motion undergoes annual fluctuations. These changes stem from two main causes—one being static, and the other dynamic.

2. The statical causes are deposits of snow or ice slowly changing the position of the pole of figure of the earth. For example, a deposit of snow in Siberia would bring the equator of figure of the earth a little nearer to Siberia and throw the pole a little way from it, while a deposit on the American continent would have the opposite effect. Owing to the approximate symmetry of the American and Asiatic continents it does not seem likely that the inequality of snowfall would produce an appreciable effect.

2. The static causes are deposits of snow or ice that slowly shift the position of the Earth's figure pole. For instance, a snow accumulation in Siberia would bring the Earth's equatorial figure a bit closer to Siberia and push the pole slightly away from it, while a deposit on the American continent would have the opposite effect. Due to the rough symmetry of the American and Asian continents, it doesn’t seem likely that the uneven snowfall would create a significant impact.

3. The dynamical causes are atmospheric and oceanic currents. Were these currents invariable their only effect would be that the Eulerian motion would not take place exactly round the mean pole of figure, but round a point slightly separated from it. But, as a matter of fact, they are subject to an annual variation. Hence the motion of the pole of rotation is also subject to a similar variation. The annual term in the latitude is thus accounted for.

3. The dynamic causes are atmospheric and ocean currents. If these currents were constant, the only effect would be that the Eulerian motion wouldn't occur exactly around the average pole of figure, but around a point slightly off from it. However, in reality, they do experience annual variation. As a result, the movement of the rotation pole also experiences a similar variation. This explains the annual change in latitude.

Besides Chandler, Albrecht of Berlin has investigated the motion of the pole P. The methods of the two astronomers are in some points different. Chandler has constructed empirical formulae representing the motion, with the results already given, while Albrecht has determined the motion of the pole from observation simply, without trying to represent it either by a formula or by theory. It is noteworthy that the difference between Albrecht’s numerical results and Chandler’s formulae is generally less than 0.05″.

Besides Chandler, Albrecht of Berlin has studied the movement of the pole P. The methods of the two astronomers differ in some ways. Chandler has created empirical formulas to represent the motion, based on the results already provided, while Albrecht has calculated the movement of the pole from observations alone, without attempting to represent it with either a formula or a theory. It's interesting to note that the difference between Albrecht’s numerical results and Chandler’s formulas is usually less than 0.05″.

When the fluctuation in the position of the pole was fully confirmed, its importance in astronomy and geodesy led the International Geodetic Association to establish a series of stations round the globe, as nearly as possible on the same parallel of latitude, for the purpose of observing the fluctuation with a greater degree of precision than could be attained by the miscellaneous observations before available. The same stars were to be observed from month to month at each station with zenith-telescopes of similar approved construction. This secures a double observation of each component of the polar motion, from which most of the systematic errors are eliminated. The principal stations are: Carloforte, Italy; Mizusawa, Japan; Gaithersburg, Maryland; and Ukiah, California, all nearly on the same parallel of latitude, 39° 8′.

When the changes in the position of the pole were fully confirmed, its significance in astronomy and geodesy prompted the International Geodetic Association to set up a network of stations around the world, as close as possible to the same latitude, to observe these fluctuations with greater precision than the varied observations that were previously available. The same stars were to be observed monthly at each station using zenith telescopes of a similar approved design. This allows for a double observation of each aspect of the polar motion, which helps eliminate most of the systematic errors. The main stations are: Carloforte, Italy; Mizusawa, Japan; Gaithersburg, Maryland; and Ukiah, California, all located near the same latitude of 39° 8′.

The fluctuations derived from this international work during the last seven years deviate but slightly from Chandler’s formulae though they show a markedly smaller value of the annual term. In consequence, the change in the amplitude of the fluctuation through the seven-year period is not so well marked as before 1900.

The variations from this international effort over the past seven years are only slightly different from Chandler’s formulas, but they show a significantly lower value for the annual term. As a result, the change in the amplitude of the fluctuation over the seven-year period is not as pronounced as it was before 1900.

Chandler’s investigations are found in a series of papers published in the Astronomical Journal, vols. xi. to xv. and xviii. Newcomb’s explanation of the lengthening of the Eulerian period is found in the Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society for March 1892. Later volumes of the Astronomical Journal contain discussions of the causes which may produce the annual fluctuation. An elaborate mathematical discussion of the theory is by Vito Volterra: “Sulla teoria dei movimenti del Polo terrestre” in the Astronomische Nachrichten, vol. 138; also, more fully in his memoir “Sur la théorie des variations des latitudes,” Acta Mathematica, vol. xxii. The results of the international observations are discussed from time to time by Albrecht in the publications of the International Geodetic Association, and in the Astronomische Nachrichten (see also Earth, Figure of).

Chandler’s research can be found in a series of articles published in the Astronomical Journal, volumes xi to xv and xviii. Newcomb’s explanation of the lengthening of the Eulerian period appears in the Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society from March 1892. Later editions of the Astronomical Journal include discussions about the causes of the annual fluctuations. An in-depth mathematical discussion of the theory by Vito Volterra can be found in “Sulla teoria dei movimenti del Polo terrestre” in the Astronomische Nachrichten, volume 138; it is also presented in more detail in his paper “Sur la théorie des variations des latitudes,” published in Acta Mathematica, volume xxii. The outcomes of international observations are periodically discussed by Albrecht in the publications of the International Geodetic Association and in the Astronomische Nachrichten (see also Earth, Figure of).

(S. N.)

LATIUM,1 in ancient geography, the name given to the portion of central Italy which was bounded on the N.W. by Etruria, on the S.W. by the Tyrrhenian Sea, on the S.E. by Campania, on the E. by Samnium and on the N.E. by the mountainous district inhabited by the Sabini, Aequi and Marsi. The name was, however, applied very differently at different times. Latium originally means the land of the Latini, and in this sense, which alone is in use historically, it was a tract of limited extent; but after the overthrow of the Latin confederacy, when the neighbouring tribes of the Rutuli, Hernici, Volsci and Aurunci, as well as the Latini properly so called, were reduced to the condition of subjects and citizens of Rome, the name of Latium was extended to comprise them all. It thus denoted the whole country from the Tiber to the mouth of the Savo, and just included the Mons Massicus, though the boundary was not very precisely fixed (see below). The change thus introduced, though already manifest in the composition of the Latin league (see below) was not formally established till the reign of Augustus, who formed of this larger Latium and Campania taken together the first region of Italy; but it is already recognized by Strabo (v. 3. 2. p. 228), as well as by Pliny, who terms the additional territory thus incorporated Latium Adjectum, while he designates the original Latium, extending from the Tiber to Circeii, as Latium Antiquum.

LATIUM,1 in ancient geography, refers to the area in central Italy that was bordered to the northwest by Etruria, to the southwest by the Tyrrhenian Sea, to the southeast by Campania, to the east by Samnium, and to the northeast by the mountainous regions inhabited by the Sabini, Aequi, and Marsi. However, the name was used differently at various times. Latium originally meant the land of the Latini, and in this historical context, it referred to a relatively small area. But after the fall of the Latin confederacy, when the neighboring tribes of the Rutuli, Hernici, Volsci, and Aurunci, along with the Latini, became subjects and citizens of Rome, the name Latium was expanded to include them all. It thus referred to the entire territory from the Tiber to the mouth of the Savo and just included the Mons Massicus, although the exact boundary was not clearly defined (see below). This change, while already evident in the makeup of the Latin league (see below), was not formally recognized until the reign of Augustus, who combined this larger Latium and Campania to create the first region of Italy; it was already acknowledged by Strabo (v. 3. 2. p. 228) and by Pliny, who referred to the newly added territory as Latium Adjectum, while he called the original Latium, stretching from the Tiber to Circeii, Latium Antiquum.

1. Latium Antiquum consisted principally of an extensive plain, now known as the Campagna di Roma, bounded towards the interior by the Apennines, which rise very abruptly from the plains to a height of between 4000 and 5000 ft. Several of the Latin cities, including Tibur and Praeneste, were situated on the terrace-like underfalls of these mountains,2 while Cora, Norba and Setia were placed in like manner on the slopes of the Volscian mountains (Monti Lepini), a rugged and lofty limestone range, which runs parallel to the main mass of the Apennines, being separated from them, however, by the valley of the Trerus (Sacco), and forms a continuous barrier from there to Terracina. No volcanic eruptions are known to have taken place in these mountains within the historic period, though Livy sometimes speaks of it “raining stones in the Alban hills” (i. 31, xxxv. 9—on the latter occasion it even did so on the Aventine). It is asserted, too, that some of the earliest tombs of the necropolis of Alba Longa (q.v.) were found beneath a stratum of peperino. Earthquakes (not of a violent character within recent centuries, though the ruin of the Colosseum is probably to be ascribed to this cause) are not unknown even at the present day in Rome and in the Alban Hills, and a seismograph has been established at Rocca di Papa. The surface is by no means a uniform plain, but is a broad undulating tract, furrowed throughout by numerous depressions, with precipitous banks, serving as water-courses, though rarely traversed by any considerable stream. As the general level of the plain rises gradually, though almost imperceptibly, to the foot of the Apennines, these channels by degrees assume the character of ravines of a formidable description.

1. Ancient Latium mainly consisted of a large plain, now called the Campagna di Roma, which is bordered to the interior by the Apennines. These mountains rise sharply from the plains to heights of about 4,000 to 5,000 feet. Several Latin cities, such as Tibur and Praeneste, were located on the terrace-like slopes of these mountains, while Cora, Norba, and Setia were similarly positioned on the slopes of the Volscian mountains (Monti Lepini), which is a rough and high limestone range running parallel to the main body of the Apennines. They are separated from the Apennines by the valley of the Trerus (Sacco) and create a continuous barrier extending to Terracina. There are no known volcanic eruptions in these mountains during historical times, though Livy sometimes mentions it “raining stones in the Alban hills” (i. 31, xxxv. 9—on one occasion, this even happened on the Aventine). It is also claimed that some of the earliest tombs in the necropolis of Alba Longa (q.v.) were discovered beneath a layer of peperino. Earthquakes (not particularly severe in recent centuries, although the destruction of the Colosseum is likely linked to such events) still occur today in Rome and the Alban Hills, and a seismograph has been set up at Rocca di Papa. The surface is not just a flat plain but a wide, undulating area marked by many depressions with steep banks acting as watercourses, though rarely by any significant stream. As the general level of the plain gradually rises, almost imperceptibly, toward the Apennines, these channels increasingly become the steep ravines of a dramatic nature.

269

269

Four main periods may be distinguished in the geological history of Rome and the surrounding district. The hills on the right bank of the Tiber culminating in Monte Mario (455 ft.) belong to the first of these, being of the Pliocene formation; they Geology. consist of a lower bluish-grey clay and an upper group of yellow sands and gravels. This clay since Roman times has supplied the material for brick-making, and the valleys which now separate the different summits (Janiculum, Vatican, Monte Mario) are in considerable measure artificial. On the left bank this clay has been reached at a lower level, at the foot of the Pincian Hill, while in the Campagna it has been found to extend below the later volcanic formations. The latter may be divided into two groups, corresponding to the second and third periods. In the second period volcanic activity occurred at the bottom of the Pliocene sea, and the tufa, which extends over the whole Campagna to a thickness of 300 ft. or more, was formed. At the same time, hot springs, containing abundant carbonate of lime in solution, produced deposits of travertine at various points. In the third, after the Campagna, by a great general uplift, had become a land surface, volcanic energy found an outlet in comparatively few large craters, which emitted streams of hard lava as well as fragmentary materials, the latter forming sperone (lapis Gabinus) and peperino (lapis Albanus), while upon one of the former, which runs from the Alban Hills to within 2 m. of Rome, the Via Appia was carried. The two main areas near Rome are formed by the group of craters on the north (Bracciano, Bolsena, &c.) and the Alban Hills on the south, the latter consisting of one great crater with a base about 12 m. in diameter, in the centre of which a smaller crater was later on built up (the basin is now known as the Campo di Annibale) with several lateral vents (the Lake of Albano, the Lake of Nemi, &c.). The Alban Mount (Monte Cavo) is almost the highest point on the rim of the inner crater, while Mount Algidus and Tusculum are on the outer ring wall of the larger (earlier) crater.

Four main periods can be identified in the geological history of Rome and the surrounding area. The hills on the right bank of the Tiber, culminating in Monte Mario (455 ft.), belong to the first period, being of the Pliocene formation; they Earth Science. consist of a lower bluish-grey clay and an upper layer of yellow sands and gravels. Since Roman times, this clay has been used for brick-making, and the valleys that now separate the different peaks (Janiculum, Vatican, Monte Mario) are largely artificial. On the left bank, this clay is found at a lower level, at the base of the Pincian Hill, while in the Campagna, it has been discovered extending beneath the later volcanic formations. These later formations can be divided into two groups, corresponding to the second and third periods. In the second period, volcanic activity occurred at the bottom of the Pliocene sea, leading to the creation of tufa, which covers the entire Campagna to a thickness of 300 ft. or more. At the same time, hot springs rich in dissolved carbonate of lime deposited travertine at various sites. In the third period, after the Campagna had been uplifted significantly and became land, volcanic activity found its expression in relatively few large craters that released streams of hard lava and fragmentary materials. The latter created sperone (lapis Gabinus) and peperino (lapis Albanus), while one of the craters, which stretches from the Alban Hills to within 2 miles of Rome, served as the route for the Via Appia. The two main areas near Rome are made up of the group of craters to the north (Bracciano, Bolsena, etc.) and the Alban Hills to the south. The latter is composed of one large crater with a base about 12 miles in diameter, in the center of which a smaller crater was formed later (the basin is now known as the Campo di Annibale) along with several lateral vents (such as the Lake of Albano, the Lake of Nemi, etc.). Alban Mount (Monte Cavo) is almost the highest point on the edge of the inner crater, while Mount Algidus and Tusculum are located on the outer rim of the larger (earlier) crater.

The fourth period is that in which the various subaërial agencies of abrasion, and especially the streams which drain the mountain chain of the Apennines, have produced the present features of the Campagna, a plain furrowed by gullies and ravines. The communities which inhabited the detached hills and projecting ridges which later on formed the city of Rome were in a specially favourable position. These hills (especially the Palatine, the site of the original settlement) with their naturally steep sides, partly surrounded at the base by marshes and situated not far from the confluence of the Anio with the Tiber, possessed natural advantages not shared by the other primitive settlements of the district; and their proximity to one another rendered it easy to bring them into a larger whole. The volcanic materials available in Rome and its neighbourhood were especially useful in building. The tufa, sperone and peperino were easy to quarry, and could be employed by those who possessed comparatively elementary tools, while travertine, which came into use later, was an excellent building stone, and the lava (selce) served for paving stones and as material for concrete. The strength of the renowned Roman concrete is largely due to the use of pozzolana (see Puteoli), which also is found in plenty in the Campagna.

The fourth period is when various sub-aerial processes of erosion, especially the streams draining the Apennine mountain chain, shaped the current features of the Campagna, a plain marked by gullies and ravines. The communities living on the isolated hills and ridges that eventually formed the city of Rome were in a particularly advantageous position. These hills (especially the Palatine, the site of the original settlement), with their naturally steep sides, were partly surrounded by marshes at the base and located not far from where the Anio meets the Tiber, offering natural benefits not found in other early settlements in the area; and their close proximity to each other made it easy to integrate them into a larger community. The volcanic materials available in Rome and its surroundings were especially useful for construction. Tufa, sperone, and peperino were easy to quarry and could be used by those with fairly basic tools, while travertine, which came into use later, was an excellent building stone. The lava (selce) served as paving stones and as a material for concrete. The strength of the famous Roman concrete is largely due to the inclusion of pozzolana (see Puteoli), which is also abundantly found in the Campagna.

Between the volcanic tract of the Campagna and the sea there is a broad strip of sandy plain, evidently formed merely by the accumulation of sand from the sea, and constituting a barren tract, still covered almost entirely with wood as it was in ancient times, except for the almost uninterrupted line of villas along the ancient coast-line, which is now marked by a line of sand-hills, some ½ m. or more inland (see Lavinium, Tiber). This long belt of sandy shore extends without a break for a distance of above 30 m. from the mouth of the Tiber to the promontory of Antium (Porto d’Anzio); a low rocky headland, projecting out into the sea, and forming the only considerable angle in this line of coast. Thence again a low sandy shore of similar character, but with extensive shore lagoons which served in Roman times and serve still for fish-breeding, extends for about 24 m. to the foot of the Monte Circeo (Circeius Mons, q.v.). The region of the Pomptine Marshes (q.v.) occupies almost the whole tract between the sandy belt on the seashore and the Volscian mountains, extending from the southern foot of the Alban Hills below Velletri to the sea near Terracina.

Between the volcanic area of the Campagna and the sea, there's a wide strip of sandy plain, clearly formed by sand accumulation from the sea, making it a barren area that is still mostly covered with woods like it was in ancient times, apart from the nearly continuous line of villas along the old coastline, which is now marked by a series of sand dunes about ½ mile or more inland (see Lavinium, Tiber). This long stretch of sandy shore runs uninterrupted for over 30 miles from the mouth of the Tiber to the promontory of Antium (Porto d’Anzio); a low rocky point that juts out into the sea, creating the only significant bend in this coastline. After that, a similarly low sandy shore continues, but with large coastal lagoons that served as fish-breeding areas in Roman times and still do today, extending about 24 miles to the base of Monte Circeo (Circeius Mons, q.v.). The Pomptine Marshes (q.v.) cover almost the entire area between the sandy coastal strip and the Volscian mountains, stretching from the southern slopes of the Alban Hills beneath Velletri to the sea near Terracina.

The district sloping down from Velletri to the dead level of the Pontine (Pomptine) Marshes has not, like the western and northern slopes of the Alban Hills, drainage towards the Tiber. The subsoil too is differently formed: the surface consists Drainage. of very absorbent materials, then comes a stratum of less permeable tufa or peperino (sometimes clay is present), and below that again more permeable materials. In ancient, and probably pre-Roman, times this district was drained by an elaborate system of cuniculi, small drainage tunnels, about 5 ft. high and 2 ft. wide, which ran, not at the bottom of the valleys, where there were sometimes streams already, and where, in any case, erosion would have broken through their roofs, but along their slopes, through the less permeable tufa, their object being to drain the hills on each side of the valleys. They had probably much to do with the relative healthiness of this district in early times. Some of them have been observed to be earlier in date than the Via Appia (312 B.C.). They were studied in detail by R. de la Blanchère. When they fell into desuetude, malaria gained the upper hand, the lack of drainage providing breeding-places for the malarial mosquito. Remains of similar drainage channels exist in many parts of the Campagna Romana and of southern Etruria at points where the natural drainage was not sufficient, and especially in cultivated or inhabited hills (though it was not necessary here, as in the neighbourhood of Velletri, to create a drainage system, as streams and rivers were already present as natural collectors) and streams very frequently pass through them at the present day. The drainage channels which were dug for the various crater lakes in the neighbourhood of Rome are also interesting in this regard. That of the Alban Lake is the most famous; but all the other crater lakes are similarly provided. As the drainage by cuniculi removed the moisture in the subsoil, so the drainage of the lakes by emissaria, outlet channels at a low level, prevented the permeable strata below the tufa from becoming impregnated with moisture which they would otherwise have derived from the lakes of the Alban Hills. The slopes below Velletri, on the other hand, derive much of their moisture from the space between the inner and outer ring of the Alban volcano, which it was impossible to drain: and this in turn receives much moisture from the basin of the extinct inner crater.3

The area sloping down from Velletri to the flatlands of the Pontine Marshes doesn’t drain toward the Tiber like the western and northern slopes of the Alban Hills. The subsoil is also different: the surface is made up of very absorbent materials, followed by a layer of less permeable tufa or peperino (with some clay sometimes), and beneath that, more permeable materials. In ancient, likely pre-Roman times, this area was drained by a complex system of cuniculi, small drainage tunnels about 5 feet high and 2 feet wide, which ran along the slopes rather than at the bottom of the valleys, where there were sometimes streams already, and erosion would have broken through the roofs. Their purpose was to drain the hills on either side of the valleys. They likely contributed significantly to the relative healthiness of this area in earlier times. Some of them are thought to be older than the Via Appia (312 B.C.). They were thoroughly studied by R. de la Blanchère. When they fell out of use, malaria took over, as the lack of drainage created breeding grounds for the malarial mosquito. Remnants of similar drainage channels can be found in many parts of the Campagna Romana and southern Etruria where natural drainage was insufficient, especially in cultivated or inhabited hills (though unlike the area around Velletri, where a drainage system was necessary, streams and rivers were already present to collect water) and streams often flow through them today. The drainage channels created for the different crater lakes near Rome are also notable in this context. The Alban Lake is the most famous, but all of the crater lakes have similar systems. Just as the drainage through cuniculi removed moisture from the subsoil, the lakes’ drainage through emissaria, outlet channels at a low level, prevented the permeable layers beneath the tufa from becoming saturated with moisture that they would have otherwise drawn from the lakes of the Alban Hills. However, the slopes below Velletri receive much of their moisture from the area between the inner and outer rings of the Alban volcano, which couldn't be drained; this area itself gets a lot of moisture from the basin of the extinct inner crater.

Numerous isolated palaeolithic objects of the Mousterian type have been found in the neighbourhood of Rome in the quaternary gravels of the Tiber and Anio; but no certain traces of the neolithic period have come to light, as the many Pre-historic remains. flint implements found sporadically round Rome probably belong to the period which succeeded neolithic (called by Italian archaeologists the eneolithic period) inasmuch as both stone and metal (not, however, bronze, but copper) were in use.4 At Sgurgola, in the valley of the Sacco, a skeleton was found in a rock-cut tomb of this period which still bears traces of painting with cinnabar. A similar rock-cut tomb was found at Mandela, in the Anio valley. Both are outside the limits of the Campagna in the narrower sense; but similar tombs were found (though less accurately observed) in travertine quarries between Rome and Tivoli. Objects of the Bronze age too have only been found sporadically. The earliest cemeteries and hut foundations of the Alban Hills belong to the Iron age, and cemeteries and objects of a similar character have been found in Rome itself and in southern Etruria, especially the characteristic hut-urns. The objects found in these cemeteries show close affinity with those found in the terremare of Emilia, these last being of earlier date, and hence Pigorini and Helbig consider that the Latini were close descendants of the inhabitants of the terremare. On the other hand, the ossuaries of the Villanova type, while they occur as far south as Veii and Caere, have never so far been found on the left bank of the Tiber, in Latium proper (see L. Pigorini in Rendiconti dei Lincei, ser. v. vol. xvi., 1907, p. 676, and xviii., 1909). We thus have at the beginning of the Iron age two distinct currents of civilization in central Italy, the Latin and that of Villanova. As to the dates to which these are to be attributed, there is not as yet complete accord, e.g. some archaeologists assign to the 11th, others (and with far better reasons) to the 8th century B.C., the earliest tombs of the Alban necropolis and the coeval tombs of the necropolis recently discovered in the Forum at Rome. In this last necropolis cremation seems slightly to precede inhumation in date.

Numerous isolated Paleolithic objects of the Mousterian type have been discovered near Rome in the Quaternary gravels of the Tiber and Anio. However, there haven't been any definite traces of the Neolithic period found, as the many Prehistoric remains. flint tools found sporadically around Rome likely belong to the period that followed the Neolithic (referred to by Italian archaeologists as the Eneolithic period) since both stone and metal (though not bronze, only copper) were in use. 4 At Sgurgola, in the Sacco Valley, a skeleton was discovered in a rock-cut tomb from this period that still shows traces of painting with cinnabar. A similar rock-cut tomb was found at Mandela, in the Anio Valley. Both are outside the traditional boundaries of the Campagna; however, similar tombs (though less thoroughly documented) were found in travertine quarries between Rome and Tivoli. Objects from the Bronze Age have also only been found sporadically. The earliest cemeteries and hut foundations in the Alban Hills date back to the Iron Age, and similar cemeteries and artifacts have been located in Rome itself and in southern Etruria, particularly the distinctive hut-urns. The items discovered in these cemeteries show a close similarity to those found in the terremare of Emilia, which are earlier in date, leading Pigorini and Helbig to believe that the Latini were direct descendants of the inhabitants of the terremare. On the other hand, the ossuaries of the Villanova type, while they have been found as far south as Veii and Caere, have yet to be discovered on the left bank of the Tiber, in Latium proper (see L. Pigorini in Rendiconti dei Lincei, ser. v. vol. xvi., 1907, p. 676, and xviii., 1909). Thus, at the beginning of the Iron Age, there are two distinct currents of civilization in central Italy: the Latin and that of Villanova. As for the dates assigned to these, there is still no complete consensus; for instance, some archaeologists date the earliest tombs of the Alban necropolis to the 11th century, while others (with much better justification) assign them to the 8th century BCE, along with the contemporaneous tombs of the necropolis recently uncovered in the Forum in Rome. In this last necropolis, cremation appears to slightly precede inhumation.

For the prehistoric period see Bullettino di paleontologia Italiana, passim, B. Modestov, Introduction à l’histoire romaine (Paris, 1907), and T. E. Peet, The Stone and Bronze Ages in Italy (Oxford, 1909).

For the prehistoric period, see Bullettino di paleontologia Italiana, passim, B. Modestov, Introduction à l’histoire romaine (Paris, 1907), and T. E. Peet, The Stone and Bronze Ages in Italy (Oxford, 1909).

It is uncertain to what extent reliance can be placed upon the traditional accounts of the gradual spread of the supremacy of Rome in Latium, and the question cannot be discussed here.5 The list of the thirty communities belonging Latin League. to the Latin league, given by Dionysius of Halicarnassus 270 (v. 61), is, however, of great importance. It is considered by Th. Mommsen (Roman History, i. 448) that it dates from about the year 370 B.C., to which period belong the closing of the confederacy, no fresh communities being afterwards admitted to it, and the consequent fixing of the boundaries of Latium. The list is as follows: Ardeates, Aricini, Bovillani,6 Bubentani, Cabani, Carventani, Circeiates, Coriolani, Corbintes, Corni (probably Corani), Fortinei (?), Gabini, Laurentini, Lavinates, Labicani, Lanuvini, Nomentani, Norbani, Praenestini, Pedani, Querquetulani, Satricani, Scaptini, Setini, Tellenii, Tiburtini, Tolerini, Tusculani, Veliterni.

It’s unclear how much we can trust the traditional stories about the gradual rise of Rome's dominance in Latium, and we can't explore that here.5 However, the list of the thirty communities that were part of the Latin League, provided by Dionysius of Halicarnassus 270 (v. 61), is very important. Th. Mommsen (Roman History, i. 448) believes that it dates back to around 370 BCE, a time when the confederacy was closing, with no new communities being accepted afterward, which established the boundaries of Latium. The list includes: Ardeates, Aricini, Bovillani,6 Bubentani, Cabani, Carventani, Circeiates, Coriolani, Corbintes, Corni (likely Corani), Fortinei (?), Gabini, Laurentini, Lavinates, Labicani, Lanuvini, Nomentani, Norbani, Praenestini, Pedani, Querquetulani, Satricani, Scaptini, Setini, Tellenii, Tiburtini, Tolerini, Tusculani, Veliterni.

These communities may be briefly described according to their geographical arrangement. Laurentum and Lavinium, names so conspicuous in the legendary history of Aeneas, were situated in the sandy strip near the sea-coast—the former only 8 m. S.E. of Ostia, which was from the first merely the port of Rome, and never figured as an independent city. Farther S.E. again lay Ardea, the ancient capital of the Rutuli, and some distance beyond that Antium, situated on the sea-coast, which does not occur in the list of Dionysius, and is, in the early annals of Rome, called a Volscian town—even their chief city. On the southern underfalls of the Alban mountains, commanding the plain at the foot, stood Lanuvium and Velitrae; Aricia rose on a neighbouring hill, and Corioli was probably situated on the lower slopes. The village of the Cabani (probably identical with the Cabenses) is possibly to be sought on the site of the modern Rocca di Papa, N. of Monte Cavo. The more important city of Tusculum occupied one of the northern summits of the same group; while opposite to it, in a commanding situation on a lofty offshoot of the Apennines, rose Praeneste, now Palestrina. Bola and Pedum were probably in the same neighbourhood, Labici on an outlying summit (Monte Compatri) of the Alban Hills below Tusculum, and Corbio (probably at Rocca Priora) on a rocky summit east of the same city. Tibur (Tivoli) occupied a height commanding the outlet of the river Anio. Corniculum, farther west, stood on the summit of one of three conical hills that rise abruptly out of the plain at the distance of a few miles from Monte Gennaro, the nearest of the Apennines, and which were thence known as the Montes Corniculani. Nomentum was a few miles farther north, between the Apennines and the Tiber, and close to the Sabine frontier. The boundary between the two nations was indeed in this part very fluctuating. Nearly in the centre of the plain of the Campagna stood Gabii; Bovillae was also in the plain, but close to the Appian Way, where it begins to ascend the Alban Hills. Several other cities—Tellenae, Scaptia and Querquetulum—mentioned in the list of Dionysius were probably situated in the Campagna, but the site cannot be determined. Satricum, on the other hand, was certainly south of the Alban Hills, between Velitrae and Antium; while Cora, Norba and Setia (all of which retain their ancient names with little modification) crowned the rocky heights which form advanced posts from the Volscian mountains towards the Pontine Marshes. Carventum possibly occupied the site of Rocca Massima N. of Cori, and Tolerium was very likely at Valmontone in the valley of the Sacco (anc. Trerus or Tolerus). The cities of the Bubentani and Fortinei are quite unknown.

These communities can be described based on their location. Laurentum and Lavinium, notable in the legendary history of Aeneas, were located in the sandy area near the coast—the former just 8 miles southeast of Ostia, which was originally just the port of Rome and never operated as an independent city. Further southeast was Ardea, the ancient capital of the Rutuli, and beyond that lay Antium, which was on the coast and isn’t mentioned in Dionysius’ list. In the early history of Rome, it was referred to as a Volscian town, even their main city. On the southern slopes of the Alban mountains, overlooking the plain below, were Lanuvium and Velitrae; Aricia stood on a nearby hill, and Corioli was likely located on the lower slopes. The village of the Cabani (probably the same as the Cabenses) is likely located at what is now Rocca di Papa, north of Monte Cavo. The more significant city of Tusculum was on one of the northern peaks of the same mountain range; while directly across from it, in a prominent position on a high ridge of the Apennines, stood Praeneste, now known as Palestrina. Bola and Pedum were probably in the same area, Labici on a distant peak (Monte Compatri) of the Alban Hills below Tusculum, and Corbio (likely at Rocca Priora) on a rocky peak to the east of the same city. Tibur (Tivoli) was positioned on a height overlooking the exit of the river Anio. Corniculum, further west, was located on the peak of one of three conical hills that rise sharply from the plain a few miles from Monte Gennaro, the closest of the Apennines, and which were known as the Montes Corniculani. Nomentum was a few miles farther north, situated between the Apennines and the Tiber, near the Sabine border. The boundary between the two nations tended to shift in this area. Right in the center of the Campagna plain was Gabii; Bovillae was also in the plain, but near the Appian Way, where it starts to climb the Alban Hills. Several other cities—Tellenae, Scaptia, and Querquetulum—mentioned in Dionysius’ list were likely located in the Campagna, but their exact locations are uncertain. Satricum, on the other hand, was definitely south of the Alban Hills, between Velitrae and Antium; while Cora, Norba, and Setia (all of which have retained their ancient names with little change) perched on the rocky heights that serve as advanced points from the Volscian mountains towards the Pontine Marshes. Carventum was possibly at the site of Rocca Massima north of Cori, and Tolerium was likely situated at Valmontone in the Sacco valley (ancient Trerus or Tolerus). The cities of the Bubentani and Fortinei are completely unknown.

A considerable number of the Latin cities had before 370 B.C. either been utterly destroyed or reduced to subjection by Rome, and had thus lost their independent existence. Such were Antemnae and Caenina, both of them situated within a few miles of Rome to the N., the conquest of which was ascribed to Romulus; Fidenae, about 5 m. N. of the city, and close to the Tiber; and Crustumerium, in the hilly tract farther north towards the Sabine frontier. Suessa Pometia also, on the borders of the Pontine Marshes, to which it was said to have given name, was a city of importance, the destruction of which was ascribed to Tarquinius Superbus. In any case it had disappeared before 370 B.C., as it does not occur in the list of the Latin league attributable to that date. It is probably to be sought between Velletri and Cisterna. But by far the most important of these extinct cities was Alba, on the lake to which it gave its name, which was, according to universally received tradition, the parent of Rome, as well as of numerous other cities within the limits of Latium, including Gabii, Fidenae, Collatia, Nomentum and other well-known towns. Whether or not this tradition deserves to rank as historical, it appears certain that at a still earlier period there existed a confederacy of thirty towns, of which Alba was the supreme head. A list of those who were wont to participate in the sacrifices on the Alban Mount is given us by Pliny (N.H. iii. 5. 69) under the name of populi albenses, which includes only six or at most eight of those found in the list of Dionysius;7 and these for the most part among the more obscure and least known of the names given by him. Many of the rest are unknown; while the more powerful cities of Aricia, Lanuvium and Tusculum, though situated immediately on the Alban Hills, are not included, and appear to have maintained a wholly independent position. This earlier league was doubtless broken up by the fall of Alba; it was probably the increasing power of the Volsci and Aequi that led to the formation of the later league, including all the more powerful cities of Latium, as well as to the alliance concluded by them with the Romans in the consulship of Spurius Cassius (493 B.C.). Other cities of the Latin league had already (according to the traditional dates) received Latin colonies—Velitrae (494 B.C.), Norba (492), Ardea (442), Labici (418), Circei (393), Satricum (385), Setia (382).

A significant number of the Latin cities had by 370 BCE either been completely destroyed or brought under control by Rome, losing their independence in the process. Such cities included Antemnae and Caenina, both located just a few miles north of Rome, whose conquests were credited to Romulus; Fidenae, about 5 miles north of the city and near the Tiber; and Crustumerium, which was in the hilly area further north toward the Sabine border. Suessa Pometia, situated on the edge of the Pontine Marshes, which was said to have given its name to the area, was also an important city that was said to have been destroyed by Tarquinius Superbus. In any case, it had vanished by 370 BCE, as it does not appear in the list of the Latin league from that time. It was likely located between Velletri and Cisterna. However, the most significant of these lost cities was Alba, located on the lake that bears its name, which, according to widely accepted tradition, was the founder of Rome and many other cities in Latium, including Gabii, Fidenae, Collatia, Nomentum, and other well-known towns. Whether this tradition is historically valid or not, it seems certain that there was a confederation of thirty towns in an even earlier period, with Alba as the supreme leader. Pliny provides a list of those who used to join in the sacrifices on the Alban Mount under the name populi albenses, which only includes six or at most eight of those listed by Dionysius;7 and these are mostly among the more obscure and lesser-known names he provided. Many of the others are unknown; meanwhile, the more powerful cities of Aricia, Lanuvium, and Tusculum, which were located right on the Alban Hills, are not included and seem to have remained entirely independent. This earlier league was likely dissolved with the fall of Alba; it was probably the growing strength of the Volsci and Aequi that led to the establishment of the later league, encompassing all the more powerful cities in Latium, as well as the alliance they formed with the Romans during the consulship of Spurius Cassius (493 BCE). Other cities of the Latin league had already (according to traditional dates) received Latin colonies—Velitrae (494 B.C.), Norba (492), Ardea (442), Labici (418), Circei (393), Satricum (385), Setia (382).

The cities of the Latin league continued to hold general meetings or assemblies from time to time at the grove of the Aqua Ferentina, a sanctuary at the foot of the Alban Hills, perhaps in a valley below Marino, while they had also a common place of worship on the summit of the Alban Mount (Monte Cavo), where stood the celebrated temple of Jupiter Latiaris. The participation in the annual sacrifices at this sanctuary was regarded as typical of a Latin city (hence the name “prisci Latini” given to the participating peoples); and they continued to be celebrated long after the Latins had lost their independence and been incorporated in the Roman state.8

The cities of the Latin League continued to hold general meetings or assemblies periodically at the grove of the Aqua Ferentina, a sanctuary located at the base of the Alban Hills, possibly in a valley below Marino. They also had a shared place of worship at the top of Alban Mount (Monte Cavo), where the famous temple of Jupiter Latiaris stood. Taking part in the annual sacrifices at this sanctuary was seen as a hallmark of a Latin city (thus the name “prisci Latini” given to the participating peoples); and these sacrifices continued long after the Latins lost their independence and were incorporated into the Roman state.8

We are on firmer ground in dealing with the spread of the supremacy of Rome in Latium when we take account of the foundation of new colonies and of the formation of new tribes, processes which as a rule go together. The Roman supremacy. information that we have as to the districts in which the sixteen earliest clans (tribus rusticae)9 were settled shows us that, except along the Tiber, Rome’s dominion extended hardly more than 5 m. beyond the city gates (Mommsen, History of Rome, i. 58). Thus, towards the N. and E. we find the towns of Antemnae, Fidenae, Caenina and Gabii;10 on the S.E., towards Alba, the boundary of Roman territory was at the Fossae Cluiliae, 5 m. from Rome, where Coriolanus encamped (Livy ii. 39), and, on the S., towards Laurentum at the 6th mile, where sacrifice to Terminus was made (Ovid, Fasti, ii. 681): the Ambarvalia too were celebrated even in Strabo’s day (v. 3. 3. p. 230) at a place called Φῆστοι between the 5th and 6th mile. The identification (cf. Hülsen in Pauly-Wissowa, Realencyclopädie, vi. 2223) of this locality with the grove of the Arval brothers at the 5th mile of the Via Portuensis, to the W. of Rome, and of the Ambarvalia with the festival celebrated by this brotherhood in May of each year, is now generally accepted. But Roman sway must either from the first, or very soon, have extended to Ostia, the port of Rome at the mouth of the Tiber: and it was as the emporium of Latium that Rome acquired her first importance.11

We have a clearer understanding of the expansion of Roman dominance in Latium when we consider the establishment of new colonies and the formation of new tribes, which usually happen together. The information we have about the areas where the sixteen earliest clans (tribus rusticae)9 were settled shows that, aside from the Tiber, Rome’s control stretched hardly more than 5 miles beyond the city gates (Mommsen, History of Rome, i. 58). To the north and east, we find the towns of Antemnae, Fidenae, Caenina, and Gabii;10 to the southeast, towards Alba, the edge of Roman territory was at the Fossae Cluiliae, 5 miles from Rome, where Coriolanus camped (Livy ii. 39). To the south, towards Laurentum, it reached the 6th mile, where a sacrifice to Terminus was performed (Ovid, Fasti, ii. 681): the Ambarvalia were also celebrated even in Strabo’s time (v. 3. 3. p. 230) at a location called Φῆστοι between the 5th and 6th mile. The identification (cf. Hülsen in Pauly-Wissowa, Realencyclopädie, vi. 2223) of this area with the grove of the Arval brothers at the 5th mile of the Via Portuensis, west of Rome, and the Ambarvalia with the festival held by this brotherhood every May is now widely accepted. However, Roman influence must have extended to Ostia, the port of Rome at the mouth of the Tiber, either from the beginning or very quickly: it was as the hub of Latium that Rome gained its initial significance.11

271

271

The boundary of the Ager Romanus antiquus towards the north-west is similarly fixed by the festival of the Robigalia at the 5th milestone of the Via Clodia. Within this area fall the districts inhabited by the earliest tribes, The primitive tribes. so far as these are known to us. The tribus Romilia was settled on the right bank of the Tiber near the sanctuary of the Arvales, the Galeria perhaps a little farther west on the lower course of the stream now known as Galera, and the Fabia perhaps on the Cremera towards Veii. We know that the pagus Lemonius was on the Via Latina, and that the tribus Pupinia dwelt between Tusculum and the city, while the territory of the Papiria possibly lay nearer Tusculum, as it was to this tribe that the Roman citizens in Tusculum belonged in later days. It is possible that the Camilia was situated in the direction of Tibur, inasmuch as this town was afterwards enrolled in this tribe. The tribus Claudia, probably the last of the 16 older tribus rusticae, was according to tradition founded in 504 B.C. Its territory lay beyond the Anio, between Fidenae and Ficulea (Liv. ii. 16; Dion. Hal. v. 40). The locality of the pagi round which the other tribes were grouped is not known to us.

The boundary of the Ager Romanus antiquus to the northwest is similarly defined by the Robigalia festival at the 5th milestone of the Via Clodia. This area includes the regions settled by the earliest tribes, The indigenous tribes. as far as we know. The tribus Romilia was located on the right bank of the Tiber near the Arvales sanctuary, the Galeria perhaps a bit farther west along the stream now called Galera, and the Fabia possibly near the Cremera towards Veii. We know that the pagus Lemonius was on the Via Latina, and that the tribus Pupinia lived between Tusculum and the city, while the territory of the Papiria likely lay closer to Tusculum, as this was the tribe to which Roman citizens in Tusculum belonged in later times. It’s possible that the Camilia was located in the direction of Tibur, as this town was later added to this tribe. The tribus Claudia, likely the last of the 16 older tribus rusticae, was traditionally founded in 504 BCE Its territory lay beyond the Anio, between Fidenae and Ficulea (Liv. ii. 16; Dion. Hal. v. 40). We don’t know the exact locations of the pagi around which the other tribes were organized.

With the earliest extensions of the Roman territory coincided the first beginnings of the Roman road system. The road to Ostia may have existed from the first: but after the Latin communities on the lower Anio had fallen under the dominion Road system. of Rome, we may well believe that the first portion of the Via Salaria, leading to Antemnae, Fidenae (the fall of which is placed by tradition in 428 B.C.) and Crustumerium, came into existence. The formation (according to the traditional dating in 495 or 471 B.C.) of the tribus Clustumina (the only one of the earlier twenty-one tribes which bears a local name) is both a consequence of an extension of territory and of the establishment of the assembly of the plebs by tribes, for which an inequality of the total number of divisions was desirable (Mommsen, History of Rome, i. 360). The correlative of the Via Salaria was the Via Campana, so called because it led past the grove of the Arvales along the right bank of the Tiber to the Campus Salinarum Romanarum,12 the salt marshes, from which the Via Salaria took its name, inasmuch as it was the route by which Sabine traders came from the interior to fetch the salt. To this period would also belong the Via Ficulensis, leading to Ficulea, and afterwards prolonged to Nomentum, and the Via Collatina, which led to Collatia. Gabii became Roman in fairly early times, though at what period is uncertain, and with its subjugation must have originated the Via Gabina, afterwards prolonged to Praeneste. The Via Latina too must be of very early origin; and tradition places the foundation of the Latin colony at Signia (to which it led) as early as 495 B.C. Not long after the capture of Fidenae, the main outpost of Veii, the chief city itself fell (396 B.C.) and a road (still traceable) was probably made thither. There was also probably a road to Caere in early times, inasmuch as we hear of the flight of the Vestals thither in 389 B.C. The origin of the rest of the roads is no doubt to be connected with the gradual establishment of the Latin league. We find that while the later (long distance) roads bear as a rule the name of their constructor, all the short distance roads on the left bank of the Tiber bear the names of towns which belonged to the league—Nomentum, Tibur, Praeneste, Labici, Ardea, Laurentum—while Ficulea and Collatia do not appear. The Via Pedana, leading to Pedum, is known to us only from an inscription (Bull. Soc. Antiquaires de France, 1905, p. 177) discovered in Tunisia in 1905, and may be of much later origin; it was a branch of the Via Praenestina.

With the earliest expansions of Roman territory came the initial development of the Roman road system. The road to Ostia might have been in place from the beginning, but after the Latin communities along the lower Anio came under Rome’s control, we can reasonably believe that the first section of the Via Salaria, heading towards Antemnae, Fidenae (the fall of which tradition dates to 428 B.C.) and Crustumerium, came into being. The establishment (according to traditional dates of 495 or 471 B.C.) of the tribus Clustumina (the only one of the earlier twenty-one tribes that has a local name) resulted from an expansion of territory and the formation of the plebeian assembly by tribes, which required an uneven number of divisions (Mommsen, History of Rome, i. 360). The counterpart of the Via Salaria was the Via Campana, named for its route past the grove of the Arvales along the right bank of the Tiber to the Campus Salinarum Romanarum, the salt marshes that gave the Via Salaria its name because it was the route Sabine traders used to transport salt from the interior. During this period, the Via Ficulensis, leading to Ficulea and later extended to Nomentum, and the Via Collatina, which led to Collatia, also emerged. Gabii became part of Rome in relatively early times, though the exact period is unclear, and its conquest likely led to the creation of the Via Gabina, later extended to Praeneste. The Via Latina must also date back to very early times; tradition places the founding of the Latin colony at Signia (which it connected) as early as 495 B.C. Not long after the capture of Fidenae, the main outpost of Veii, the city itself fell (396 B.C.), and a road (still traceable) was probably built to it. There was likely a road to Caere in early times, as we hear of the flight of the Vestals there in 389 B.C. The origins of the other roads are undoubtedly tied to the slow establishment of the Latin league. We note that while the later (long-distance) roads are generally named after their builders, all the short-distance roads on the left bank of the Tiber are named after towns that were part of the league—Nomentum, Tibur, Praeneste, Labici, Ardea, Laurentum—while Ficulea and Collatia are absent. The Via Pedana, leading to Pedum, is known to us only from an inscription (Bull. Soc. Antiquaires de France, 1905, p. 177) discovered in Tunisia in 1905, and may be of much later origin; it was a branch of the Via Praenestina.

There must too have been a road, along the line of the later Via Appia, to Bovillae, Aricia, Lanuvium and Velitrae, going thence to Cora, Norba and Setia along the foot of the Volscian Mountains; while nameless roads, which can still be traced, led direct from Rome to Satricum and to Lavinium.

There must have also been a road, following the route of the later Via Appia, to Bovillae, Aricia, Lanuvium, and Velitrae, which then continued to Cora, Norba, and Setia along the base of the Volscian Mountains; while unnamed roads, which can still be seen, went straight from Rome to Satricum and to Lavinium.

We can trace the advance of the Roman supremacy with greater ease after 387 B.C., inasmuch as from this year (adopting the traditional dating for what it is worth) until 299 B.C. every accession of territory is marked by the foundation of a group of new tribes; the limit of 35 in all was reached in the latter year. In 387, after the departure of the Gauls, southern Etruria was conquered, and four new tribes were formed: Arnensis (probably derived from Aro, mod. Arrone—though the ancient name does not occur in literature—the stream which forms the outlet to the lake of Bracciano, anc. Lacus Sabatinus),13 Sabatina (called after this lake), Stellatina (named from the Campus Stellatinus, near Capena; cf. Festus p. 343 Müll.) and Tromentina (which, Festus tells us, was so called from the Campus Tromentus, the situation of which we do not know). Four years later were founded the Latin colonies of Sutrium and Nepet. In 358 B.C. Roman preponderance in the Pomptine territory was shown by the formation of the tribus Pomptina and Publilia, while in 338 and 329 respectively Antium and Tarracina became colonies of Roman citizens, the former having been founded as a Latin colony in 494 B.C.

We can easily track the rise of Roman power starting from 387 BCE, because from this year (using the traditional dating method, for what it’s worth) until 299 BCE, each expansion of territory coincided with the establishment of a new set of tribes; the total reached 35 in that last year. In 387, after the Gauls left, southern Etruria was conquered, and four new tribes were created: Arnensis (likely named after Aro, modern Arrone—though the old name doesn’t appear in literature—the stream that flows into Lake Bracciano, ancient Lacus Sabatinus), Sabatina (named after this lake), Stellatina (named from the Campus Stellatinus, near Capena; see Festus p. 343 Müll.), and Tromentina (which, according to Festus, was named after the Campus Tromentus, the location of which we don’t know). Four years later, the Latin colonies of Sutrium and Nepet were established. In 358 BCE, Roman dominance in the Pomptine area was evident with the creation of the tribus Pomptina and Publilia, while in 338 and 329, Antium and Tarracina became colonies of Roman citizens, the former having been founded as a Latin colony in 494 BCE

After the dissolution of the Latin league which followed upon the defeat of the united forces of the Samnites and of those Latin and Volscian cities which had revolted against Rome, two new tribes, Maecia and Scaptia,14 were created in 332 B.C. in connexion with the distribution of the newly acquired lands (Mommsen, History, i. 462). A further advance in the same direction ending in the capture of Privernum in 329 B.C. is marked by the establishment in 318 B.C. of the tribus Oufentina (from the river Ufens which runs below Setia, mod. Sezze, and Privernum, mod. Piperno, and the tribus Falerna (in the Ager Falernus), while the foundation of the colonies of Cales (334) and Fregellae (328) secured the newly won south Volscian and Campanian territories and led no doubt to a prolongation of the Via Latina. The moment had now come for the pushing forward of another line of communication, which had no doubt reached Tarracina in 329 B.C. but was now definitely constructed (munita) as a permanent military highway as far as Capua in 312 B.C. by Appius Claudius, after whom it was named. To him no doubt is due the direct line of road through the Pontine Marshes from Velitrae to Terracina. Its construction may fairly be taken to mark the period at which the roads of which we have spoken, hitherto probably mere tracks, began to be transformed into real highways. In the same year (312) the colony of Interamna Lirenas was founded, while Luceria, Suessa (Aurunca) and Saticula had been established a year or two previously. Sora followed nine years later. In 299 B.C. further successes led to the establishment of two new tribes—the Teretina in the upper valley of the Trerus (Sacco) and the Aniensis, in the upper valley of the Anio—while to about the same time we must attribute the construction of two new military roads, both secured by fortresses. The southern road, the Via Valeria led to Carsioli and Alba Fucens (founded as Latin colonies respectively in 298 and 303 B.C.), and the northern (afterwards the Via Flaminia15) to Narnia (founded as a Latin colony in 299 B.C.). There is little doubt that the formation of the tribus Quirina (deriving its name possibly from the town of Cures) and the tribus Velina (from the river Velinus, which forms the well-known waterfalls near Terni) is to be connected with the construction of the latter high road, though its date is not certainly known. The further history of Roman supremacy in Italy will be found in the article Rome: History. We notice, however, that the continual warfare in which the Roman state was engaged led to the decadence of the free population of Latium, and that the extension of the empire of Rome was fatal to the prosperity of the territory which immediately surrounded the city.16

After the breakup of the Latin League, which happened after the defeat of the united forces of the Samnites along with the Latin and Volscian cities that revolted against Rome, two new tribes, Maecia and Scaptia, were created in 332 B.C. related to the distribution of the newly acquired lands (Mommsen, History, i. 462). A further advance in the same direction, which resulted in the capture of Privernum in 329 BCE, led to the establishment of the tribus Oufentina in 318 BCE (named after the river Ufens that flows near Setia, modern Sezze, and Privernum, modern Piperno), and the tribus Falerna (in the Ager Falernus). The founding of the colonies of Cales (334) and Fregellae (328) secured the newly acquired southern Volscian and Campanian territories and likely resulted in an extension of the Via Latina. The time had come to push forward another route of communication, which had likely reached Tarracina in 329 BCE but was now definitely constructed as a permanent military highway all the way to Capua in 312 BCE by Appius Claudius, after whom it was named. He was also responsible for creating the direct road through the Pontine Marshes from Velitrae to Terracina. Its construction can be considered a turning point when the roads we’ve discussed, which were probably just tracks until then, started to become real highways. In the same year (312), the colony of Interamna Lirenas was founded, while Luceria, Suessa (Aurunca), and Saticula had been established a year or two earlier. Sora followed nine years later. In 299 BCE, further successes led to the formation of two new tribes—the Teretina in the upper valley of the Trerus (Sacco) and the Aniensis in the upper valley of the Anio—at around the same time we must also consider the construction of two new military roads, both secured by fortresses. The southern road, the Via Valeria, led to Carsioli and Alba Fucens (founded as Latin colonies in 298 and 303 BCE), and the northern road (later known as the Via Flaminia) led to Narnia (founded as a Latin colony in 299 BCE). It's clear that the formation of the tribus Quirina (possibly named after the town of Cures) and the tribus Velina (named after the river Velinus, known for its waterfalls near Terni) is connected to the construction of the latter highway, although its exact date isn’t known. The further history of Roman dominance in Italy can be found in the article Rome: History. However, we note that the ongoing wars in which the Roman state was engaged led to the decline of the free population of Latium, and that the expansion of Rome's empire was detrimental to the prosperity of the areas surrounding the city.16

What had previously, it seems, been a well-peopled region, with peasant proprietors, kept healthy by careful drainage, became in the 4th and 3rd centuries B.C. a district consisting in large measure of huge estates (latifundia) Causes of depopulation. owned by the Roman aristocracy, cultivated by gangs of slaves. This led to the disappearance of the agricultural population, to a decline in public safety, and to the spread of malaria in many parts; indeed, it is quite possible that it was not introduced into Latium before the 4th century B.C. The evil increased in the later period of the Republic, and many of the old towns of Latium sank into a very decayed condition; with this the continual competition of the provinces as sources of food-supply no doubt had a good deal to do. Cicero 272 speaks of Gabii, Labici and Bovillae as places that had fallen into abject poverty, while Horace refers to Gabii and Fidenae as mere “deserted villages,” and Strabo as “once fortified towns, but now villages, belonging to private individuals.” Many of the smaller places mentioned in the list of Dionysius, or the early wars of the Romans, had altogether ceased to exist, but the statement of Pliny that fifty-three communities (populi) had thus perished within the boundaries of Old Latium is perhaps exaggerated. By the end of the Republic a good many parts of Latium were infected, and Rome itself was highly malarious in the warm months (see W. H. S. Jones in Annals of Archaeology and Anthropology, ii. 97, Liverpool, 1909). The emperors Claudius, Nerva and Trajan turned their attention to the district, and under their example and exhortation the Roman aristocracy erected numerous villas within its boundaries, and used them at least for summer residences. During the 2nd century the Campagna seems to have entered on a new era of prosperity. The system of roads radiating in all directions from Rome (see Italy: History, § B) belonged to a much earlier period; but they were connected by a network of crossroads (now mostly abandoned, while the main lines are still almost all in use) leading to the very numerous villas with which the Campagna was strewn (even in districts which till recently were devastated by malaria), and which seem in large measure to belong to this period. Some of these are of enormous extent, e.g. the villa of the Quintilii on the Via Appia, that known as Setta Bassi on the Via Latina, and that of Hadrian near Tibur, the largest of all.

What had once been a densely populated area, with small landowners thriving thanks to careful drainage, turned in the 4th and 3rd centuries BCE into a region mostly made up of large estates (latifundia) Reasons for depopulation. owned by the Roman elite and farmed by groups of slaves. This resulted in the loss of the agricultural population, a rise in public safety issues, and the spread of malaria in many areas; in fact, it's likely that malaria wasn't introduced to Latium until the 4th century BCE The situation worsened during the later years of the Republic, and many of the ancient towns in Latium fell into significant decline; the ongoing competition from provinces supplying food surely contributed to this. Cicero 272 describes Gabii, Labici, and Bovillae as places that had fallen into dire poverty, while Horace calls Gabii and Fidenae mere “deserted villages,” and Strabo refers to them as “once fortified towns, but now villages, belonging to private individuals.” Many of the smaller towns listed by Dionysius or from the early Roman wars had completely disappeared, though Pliny’s claim that fifty-three communities (populi) had perished within the boundaries of Old Latium may be an exaggeration. By the end of the Republic, many areas of Latium were affected, and Rome itself was highly malarial in the warm months (see W. H. S. Jones in Annals of Archaeology and Anthropology, ii. 97, Liverpool, 1909). Emperors Claudius, Nerva, and Trajan focused on the area, and with their encouragement, the Roman aristocracy built numerous villas in the region, often using them as summer homes. During the 2nd century, the Campagna seems to have entered a new phase of prosperity. The road system radiating out from Rome (see Italy: History, § B) dates back to a much earlier time; however, they were connected by a network of now mostly abandoned cross roads leading to the many villas scattered throughout the Campagna (even in areas that were recently plagued by malaria), which largely seem to originate from this period. Some of these are vast, such as the villa of the Quintilii on the Via Appia, Setta Bassi on the Via Latina, and Hadrian's villa near Tibur, the largest of them all.

When the land tax was introduced into Italy in 292, the first region of Augustus obtained the name of provincia Campania. Later on the name Latium entirely disappeared, and the name Campania extended as far as Veii and the Via Aurelia, whence the medieval and modern name Campagna di Roma. The donation made by Constantine to various churches of Rome of numerous estates belonging to the patrimonium Caesaris in the neighbourhood of Rome was of great historical importance, as being the origin of the territorial dominion of the papacy. His example was followed by others, so that the church property in the Campagna soon became considerable; and, owing to the immunities and privileges which it enjoyed, a certain revival of prosperity ensued. The invasions of the barbarian hordes did great harm, but the formation of centres (domuscultae) in the 8th and 9th centuries was a fact of great importance: the inhabitants, indeed, formed the medieval militia of the papacy. Smaller centres (the colonia—often formed in the remains of an ancient villa—the curtis or curia, the castrum, the casale) grew up later. We may note that, owing to the growth of the temporal power of the popes, there was never a dux Romae dependent on the exarchate of Ravenna, similar to those established by Narses in the other districts of Italy.

When the land tax was introduced in Italy in 292, the first region of Augustus became known as provincia Campania. Over time, the name Latium completely faded away, and the name Campania extended as far as Veii and the Via Aurelia, which led to the medieval and modern name Campagna di Roma. The donation by Constantine of numerous estates belonging to the patrimonium Caesaris to various churches in Rome was historically significant, marking the beginning of the papacy's territorial control. Others followed his lead, making church property in the Campagna quite substantial; and due to the immunities and privileges it held, there was a certain revival of prosperity. The invasions by barbarian hordes caused significant damage, but the establishment of centres (domuscultae) in the 8th and 9th centuries was very important: the local population became the medieval militia of the papacy. Smaller centres (the colonia—often formed from the remnants of an ancient villa—the curtis or curia, the castrum, the casale) emerged later. It's worth noting that as the temporal power of the popes grew, there was never a dux Romae under the exarchate of Ravenna, unlike those established by Narses in other parts of Italy.

The papal influence was also retained by means of the suburban bishoprics, which took their rise as early as the 4th and 5th centuries. The rise of the democratic commune of Rome17 about 1143 and of the various trade corporations Under the commune. which we already find in the early 11th century led to struggles with the papacy; the commune of Rome made various attempts to exercise supremacy in the Campagna and levied various taxes from the 12th century until the 15th. The commune also tried to restrict the power of the barons, who, in the 13th century especially, though we find them feudatories of the holy see from the 10th century onwards, threatened to become masters of the whole territory, which is still dotted over with the baronial castles and lofty solitary towers of the rival families of Rome—Orsini, Colonna, Savelli, Conti, Caetani—who ruthlessly destroyed the remains of earlier edifices to obtain materials for their own, and whose castles, often placed upon the high roads, thus following a strategic line to a stronghold in the country, did not contribute to the undisturbed security of traffic upon them, but rather led to their abandonment. On a list of the inhabited centres of the Campagna of the 14th century with the amount of salt (which was a monopoly of the commune of Rome) consumed by each, Tomassetti bases an estimate of the population: this was about equal to that of our own times, but differently distributed, some of the smaller centres having disappeared at the expense of the towns. Several of the popes, as Sixtus IV. and Julius III., made unsuccessful attempts to improve the condition of the Campagna, the former making a serious attempt to revive agriculture as against pasture, while in the latter part of the 16th century a line of watch-towers was erected along the coast. In the Renaissance, it is true, falls the erection of many fine villas in the neighbourhood of Rome—not only in the hills round the Campagna, but even in certain places in the lower ground, e.g. those of Julius II. at La Magliana and of Cardinal Trivulzio at Salone,—and these continued to be frequented until the end of the 18th century, when the French Revolution dealt a fatal blow to the prosperity of the Roman nobility. The 17th and 18th centuries, however, mark the worst period of depopulation in the more malarious parts of the Campagna, which seems to have begun in the 15th century, though we hear of malaria throughout the middle ages. The most healthy portions of the territory are in the north and east, embracing the slopes of the Apennines which are watered by the Teverone and Sacco; and the most pestilential is the stretch between the Monti Lepini and the sea. The Pontine Marshes (q.v.) included in the latter division, were drained, according to the plan of Bolognini, by Pius VI., who restored the ancient Via Appia to Modern conditions] traffic; but though they have returned to pasture and cultivation, their insalubrity is still notorious. The soil in many parts is very fertile and springs are plentiful and abundant: the water is in some cases sulphureous or ferruginous. In summer, indeed, the vast expanse is little better than an arid steppe; but in the winter it furnishes abundant pasture to flocks of sheep from the Apennines and herds of silver-grey oxen and shaggy black horses, and sheep passing in the summer to the mountain pastures. A certain amount of horse-breeding is done, and the government has, as elsewhere in Italy, a certain number of stallions. Efforts have been made since 1882 to cure the waterlogged condition of the marshy grounds. The methods employed have been three—(i.) the cutting of drainage channels and clearing the marshes by pumping, the method principally employed; (ii.) the system of warping, i.e. directing a river so that it may deposit its sedimentary matter in the lower-lying parts, thus levelling them up and consolidating them, and then leading the water away again by drainage; (iii.) the planting of firs and eucalyptus trees, e.g. at Tre Fontane and elsewhere. These efforts have not been without success, though it cannot be affirmed that the malarial Campagna is anything like healthy yet. The regulation of the rivers, more especially of the Tiber, is probably the most efficient method for coping with the problem. Since 1884 the Italian Government have been systematically enclosing, pumping dry and generally draining the marshes of the Agro Romano, that is, the tracts around Ostia; the Isola Sacra, at the mouth of the Tiber; and Maccarese. Of the whole of the Campagna less than one-tenth comes annually under the plough. In its picturesque desolation, contrasting so strongly with its prosperity in Roman times, immediately surrounding a city of over half a million inhabitants, and with lofty mountains in view from all parts of it, it is one of the most interesting districts in the world, and has a peculiar and indefinable charm. The modern province of Rome (forming the compartimento of Lazio) includes also considerable mountain districts, extending as far N.W. as the Lake of Bolsena, and being divided on the N.E. from Umbria by the Tiber, while on the E. it includes a considerable part of the Sabine mountains and Apennines. The ancient district of the Hernicans, of which Alatri is regarded as the centre, is known as the Ciociaria, from a kind of sandals (cioce) worn by the peasants. On the S.E. too a considerable proportion of the group of the Lepini belongs to the province. The land is for the most part let by the proprietors to mercanti di Campagna, who employ a subordinate class of factors (fattori) to manage their affairs on the spot.

The papal influence was also maintained through the suburban bishoprics, which began to emerge in the 4th and 5th centuries. The rise of the democratic commune of Rome around 1143 and the various trade associations, which we already see in the early 11th century, led to conflicts with the papacy. The commune of Rome made several attempts to assert control in the Campagna and imposed various taxes from the 12th century until the 15th. The commune also tried to limit the power of the barons, who, especially in the 13th century, although they had been feudal lords of the holy see since the 10th century, threatened to take over the entire territory. This area is still dotted with the baronial castles and tall solitary towers of rival Roman families like the Orsini, Colonna, Savelli, Conti, and Caetani, who ruthlessly destroyed remnants of earlier structures to gather materials for their own and whose castles, often located along main roads, did not ensure safe passage but instead contributed to their abandonment. In a list of the inhabited centers in the Campagna from the 14th century, detailing the amount of salt (a monopoly of the commune of Rome) consumed by each, Tomassetti estimates that the population was similar to today, though differently distributed, with some smaller centers disappearing as towns grew. Several popes, like Sixtus IV and Julius III, made unsuccessful attempts to improve the condition of the Campagna—the former making a serious effort to revive agriculture instead of pasture, while in the latter part of the 16th century, a series of watchtowers were built along the coast. During the Renaissance, many beautiful villas were constructed around Rome—not only in the hills surrounding the Campagna but also in some lower areas, like those of Julius II at La Magliana and Cardinal Trivulzio at Salone—and these continued to be popular until the late 18th century when the French Revolution struck a fatal blow to the wealth of the Roman nobility. However, the 17th and 18th centuries marked the worst period of depopulation in the more malarious areas of the Campagna, which appears to have begun in the 15th century, although malaria was reported throughout the Middle Ages. The healthiest parts of the region are in the north and east, covering the slopes of the Apennines watered by the Teverone and Sacco; the most unhealthy area is between the Monti Lepini and the sea. The Pontine Marshes, included in this area, were drained following Bolognini's plan by Pius VI, who restored the ancient Via Appia for traffic. Although they have returned to pasture and cultivation, their unsanitary conditions remain well-known. The soil in many areas is very fertile, and springs are plentiful: in some cases, the water is either sulfurous or ferruginous. In summer, the vast expanse resembles a barren steppe; however, in winter, it provides ample grazing for flocks of sheep from the Apennines and herds of silver-grey oxen and shaggy black horses, with sheep moving to the mountain pastures in summer. Some horse-breeding takes place, and the government maintains a number of stallions, as it does in other parts of Italy. Since 1882, efforts have been made to address the waterlogged condition of the marshy areas. Three methods have been primarily used: (i.) the cutting of drainage channels and pumping to clear the marshes, which is the main method employed; (ii.) the system of warping, which involves redirecting a river to deposit its sediment in lower-lying areas to level and consolidate them, followed by draining the water; and (iii.) planting firs and eucalyptus trees, such as at Tre Fontane and other locations. These efforts have seen some success, although it cannot be claimed that the malarial Campagna is entirely healthy yet. Regulating the rivers, especially the Tiber, is likely the most effective way to tackle the issue. Since 1884, the Italian Government has systematically enclosed, pumped dry, and drained the marshes of the Agro Romano, specifically around Ostia, the Isola Sacra at the mouth of the Tiber, and Maccarese. Less than one-tenth of the entire Campagna is annually cultivated. In its picturesque desolation, contrasting sharply with its prosperity in Roman times and set against a backdrop of mountains visible from all parts, it is one of the most intriguing areas in the world, possessing a unique and indefinable charm. The modern province of Rome (forming the compartimento of Lazio) also includes significant mountain regions, extending as far northwest as Lake Bolsena, and is separated to the northeast from Umbria by the Tiber. On the east, it encompasses a substantial portion of the Sabine Mountains and Apennines. The ancient district of the Hernicans, with Alatri seen as the center, is referred to as Ciociaria, named after a type of sandals (cioce) worn by the peasants. To the southeast, a considerable part of the Lepini mountain range also belongs to the province. The land is mostly leased by the owners to mercanti di Campagna, who hire a subordinate group of factors (fattori) to manage their operations on-site.

273

273

The recent discovery that the malaria which has hitherto rendered parts of the Campagna almost uninhabitable during the summer is propagated by the mosquito (Anopheles claviger) marks a new epoch; the most diverse theories Malaria. as to its origin had hitherto been propounded, but it is now possible to combat it on a definite plan, by draining the marshes, protecting the houses by fine mosquito-proof wire netting (for Anopheles is not active by day), improving the water supply, &c., while for those who have fever, quinine (now sold cheaply by the state) is a great specific. A great improvement is already apparent; and a law carried in 1903 for the Bonifica dell’ Agro Romano compels the proprietors within a radius of some 6 m. of Rome to cultivate their lands in a more productive way than has often hitherto been the case, exemption from taxes for ten years and loans at 2-1/2% from the government being granted to those who carry on improvements, and those who refuse being expropriated compulsorily. The government further resolved to open roads and schools and provide twelve additional doctors. Much is done in contending against malaria by the Italian Red Cross Society. In 1900 31% of the inhabitants of the Agro Romano had been fever-stricken; since then the figure has rapidly decreased (5.1% in 1905).

The recent discovery that the malaria which has previously made parts of the Campagna nearly unlivable during the summer is spread by the mosquito (Anopheles claviger) marks a new era; many different theories about its origin have been suggested, but now it’s possible to tackle it with a clear plan by draining the swamps, protecting homes with fine mosquito-proof mesh (since Anopheles is not active during the day), improving the water supply, and so on. For those suffering from fever, quinine (now available at low cost from the government) is a great treatment. A noticeable improvement is already evident, and a law passed in 1903 for the Bonifica dell’ Agro Romano mandates property owners within about 6 miles of Rome to cultivate their land more productively than has often been the case, with ten years of tax exemption and loans at 2.5% from the government offered to those who make improvements, while those who refuse will be forcibly expropriated. The government also decided to open new roads and schools and provide twelve additional doctors. The Italian Red Cross Society is doing a lot to fight malaria. In 1900, 31% of the residents of the Agro Romano had suffered from fever; since then, this number has dropped significantly (to 5.1% in 1905).

The wheat crop in 1906 in the Agro Romano was 8,108,500 bushels, the Indian corn 3,314,000 bushels, the wine 12,100,000 gallons and the olive oil 1,980,000 gallons,—these last two from the hill districts. The wine production Produce. had declined by one-half from the previous year, exportation having fallen off in the whole country. 1907, however, was a year of great overproduction all over Italy. The wine of the Alban hills is famous in modern as in ancient times, but will not as a rule bear exportation. The forests of the Alban hills and near the coast produce much charcoal and light timber, while the Sabine and Volscian hills have been largely deforested and are now bare limestone rocks. Much of the labour in the winter and spring is furnished by peasants who come down from the Volscian and Hernican mountains, and from Abruzzi, and occupy sometimes caves, but more often the straw or wicker huts which are so characteristic a feature of the Campagna. The fixed population of the Campagna in the narrower sense (as distinct from the hills) is less than 1000. Emigration to America, especially from the Volscian and Hernican towns, is now considerable.

The wheat crop in 1906 in the Agro Romano was 8,108,500 bushels, Indian corn was 3,314,000 bushels, wine was 12,100,000 gallons, and olive oil was 1,980,000 gallons—these last two coming from the hill districts. The wine production Create. had dropped by half compared to the previous year, as exports declined throughout the country. However, 1907 was a year of significant overproduction across Italy. The wine from the Alban hills is famous both now and in ancient times, but generally isn't suitable for export. The forests of the Alban hills and those near the coast produce a lot of charcoal and light timber, while the Sabine and Volscian hills have been heavily deforested and are now just bare limestone rocks. During the winter and spring, much of the labor is provided by peasants who come down from the Volscian and Hernican mountains and from Abruzzi, often occupying caves, but more frequently the straw or wicker huts that are a characteristic feature of the Campagna. The permanent population of the Campagna in the stricter sense (as opposed to the hills) is less than 1,000. Emigration to America, especially from the Volscian and Hernican towns, is now quite significant.

2. Latium Novum Or Adjectum, as it is termed by Pliny, comprised the territories occupied in earlier times by the Volsci and Hernici. It was for the most part a rugged and mountainous country, extending at the back of Latium proper, from the frontier of the Sabines to the sea-coast between Terracina and Sinuessa. But it was not separated from the adjacent territories by any natural frontier or physical boundaries, and it is only by the enumeration of the towns in Pliny according to the division of Italy by Augustus that we can determine its limits. It included the Hernican cities of Anagnia, Ferentinum, Alatrium and Verulae—a group of mountain strongholds on the north side of the valley of the Trerus (Sacco); together with the Volscian cities on the south of the same valley, and in that of the Liris, the whole of which, with the exception of its extreme upper end, was included in the Volscian territory. Here were situated Signia, Frusino, Fabrateria, Fregellae, Sora, Arpinum, Atina, Aquinum, Casinum and Interamna; Anxur (Terracina) was the only seaport that properly belonged to the Volscians, the coast from thence to the mouth of the Liris being included in the territory of the Aurunci, or Ausones as they were termed by Greek writers, who possessed the maritime towns of Fundi, Formiae, Caieta and Minturnae, together with Suessa in the interior, which had replaced their more ancient capital of Aurunca. Sinuessa, on the sea-coast between the Liris (Garigliano) and the Vulturnus, at the foot of the Monte Massico, was the last town in Latium according to the official use of the term and was sometimes assigned to Campania, while Suessa was more assigned to Latium. On the other hand, as Nissen points out (Italische Landeskunde, ii. 554), the Pons Campanus, by which the Via Appia crossed the Savo some 9 m. S.E. of Sinuessa, indicates by its name the position of the old Campanian frontier. In the interior the boundary fell between Casinum and Teanum Sidicinum, at about the 100th milestone of the Via Latina—a fact which led later to the jurisdiction of the Roman courts being extended on every side to the 100th mile from the city, and to this being the limit beyond which banishment from Rome was considered to begin.

2. Latium Novum or Addendum, as Pliny called it, included the areas once inhabited by the Volsci and Hernici. It was mostly rough and mountainous land, stretching behind Latium proper, from the Sabine border to the coastline between Terracina and Sinuessa. However, there wasn't any natural barrier separating it from neighboring regions, and we can only define its boundaries by looking at the towns listed by Pliny according to Augustus's division of Italy. It featured the Hernican cities of Anagnia, Ferentinum, Alatrium, and Verulae—a cluster of mountain strongholds on the northern side of the Trerus (Sacco) valley; along with the Volscian cities on the southern side of that valley and in the Liris region, most of which, except for its far upper end, was part of the Volscian territory. Towns like Signia, Frusino, Fabrateria, Fregellae, Sora, Arpinum, Atina, Aquinum, Casinum, and Interamna were located here; Anxur (Terracina) was the only proper seaport belonging to the Volscians, while the coast from there to the mouth of the Liris was part of the territory of the Aurunci, also known as Ausones by Greek writers. They occupied coastal towns like Fundi, Formiae, Caieta, and Minturnae, along with Suessa in the inland, which had taken the place of their earlier capital, Aurunca. Sinuessa, located on the coast between the Liris (Garigliano) and the Vulturnus, at the base of Monte Massico, was the last town in Latium as officially defined, and sometimes it was classified under Campania, while Suessa was often considered part of Latium. On the other hand, as Nissen points out (Italische Landeskunde, ii. 554), the Pons Campanus, where the Via Appia crossed the Savo about 9 miles southeast of Sinuessa, suggests the location of the old Campanian border. Inland, the boundary lay between Casinum and Teanum Sidicinum, around the 100th milestone of the Via Latina—a detail that later resulted in Roman courts extending their jurisdiction to 100 miles from the city, marking the limit beyond which banishment from Rome was seen to commence.

Though the Apennines comprised within the boundaries of Latium do not rise to a height approaching that of the loftiest summits of the central range, they attain to a considerable altitude, and form steep and rugged mountain masses from 4000 to 5000 ft. high. They are traversed by three principal valleys: (1) that of the Anio, now called Teverone, which descends from above Subiaco to Tivoli, where it enters the plain of the Campagna; (2) that of the Trerus (Sacco), which has its source below Palestrina (Praeneste), and flows through a comparatively broad valley that separates the main mass of the Apennines from the Volscian mountains or Monti Lepini, till it joins the Liris below Ceprano; (3) that of the Liris (Garigliano), which enters the confines of New Latium about 20 m. from its source, flows past the town of Sora, and has a very tortuous course from thence to the sea at Minturnae; its lower valley is for the most part of considerable width, and forms a fertile tract of considerable extent, bordered on both sides by hills covered with vines, olives and fruit trees, and thickly studded with towns and villages.

Although the Apennines within the boundaries of Latium don't reach the heights of the tallest peaks in the central range, they do rise to a significant altitude, forming steep and rugged mountain masses that are between 4,000 and 5,000 feet high. There are three main valleys running through them: (1) the Anio Valley, now known as Teverone, which flows from above Subiaco to Tivoli, where it meets the plain of the Campagna; (2) the Trerus Valley (Sacco), which starts below Palestrina (Praeneste) and travels through a relatively wide valley that separates the main part of the Apennines from the Volscian mountains or Monti Lepini until it connects with the Liris below Ceprano; (3) the Liris Valley (Garigliano), which enters New Latium about 20 miles from its source, flows past the town of Sora, and takes a very winding route to the sea at Minturnae. Its lower valley is mostly wide and creates a large fertile area, bordered on both sides by hills filled with vines, olives, and fruit trees, and dotted with towns and villages.

It may be observed that, long after the Latins had ceased to exist as a separate people we meet in Roman writers with the phrase of nomen Latinum, used not in an ethnical but a purely political sense, to designate the inhabitants of all those cities on which the Romans had conferred “Latin rights” (jus Latinum)—an inferior form of the Roman franchise, which had been granted in the first instance to certain cities of the Latins, when they became subjects of Rome, and was afterwards bestowed upon many other cities of Italy, especially the so-called Latin colonies. At a later period the same privileges were extended to places in other countries also—as for instance to most of the cities in Sicily and Spain. All persons enjoying these rights were termed in legal phraseology Latini or Latinae conditionis.

It can be noted that, long after the Latins had disappeared as a distinct group, Roman writers used the term nomen Latinum in a political, rather than ethnic, sense to refer to the residents of all the cities granted "Latin rights" (jus Latinum). This was a lesser form of the Roman franchise initially given to certain Latin cities when they became subjects of Rome, and it was later awarded to many other cities in Italy, especially the so-called Latin colonies. Eventually, the same privileges were also extended to places in other countries, such as most cities in Sicily and Spain. People who held these rights were legally referred to as Latini or Latinae conditionis.

Authorities.—For the topography of Latium, and the local history of its more important cities, the reader may consult Sir W. Gell’s Topography of Rome and its Vicinity (2nd ed., 1 vol., London, 1846); A. Nibby, Analisi storico-topografico-antiquaria della carta dei dintorni di Roma (3 vols., 2nd ed., 1848); J. Westphal, Die römische Kampagne (Berlin, 1829); A. Bormann, Alt-lateinische Chorographie und Städte-Geschichte (Halle, 1852); M. Zoeller, Latium und Rom (Leipzig, 1878); R. Burn’s Rome and the Campagna (London, 1871); H. Dessau, Corp. Inscr. Lat. v. xiv. (Berlin, 1887) (Latium); Th. Mommsen, Corp. Inscr. Lat. vol. x. pp. 498-675 (Berlin, 1883); G. Tomassetti, “Della Campagna Romana nel medio evo,” published in the Archivio della Società Romana di Storia Patria (Rome, 1874-1907), and separately (a work dealing with the medieval history and topography of the Campagna in great detail, containing also valuable notices of the classical period); by the same author, La Campagna romana (Rome, 1910 foll.); R. A. Lanciani, “I Comentari di Frontino intorno agli acquedotti,” Memorie dei Lincei (Rome, 1880), serie iii. vol. v. p. 215 sqq. (and separately), also many articles, and Wanderings in the Roman Campagna (London, 1909); E. Abbate, Guida della provincia di Roma (Rome, 1894, 2 vols.); H. Nissen, Italische Landeskunde, ii. (Berlin, 1902), 557 sqq.; T. Ashby, “The Classical Topography of the Roman Campagna,” in Papers of the British School at Rome, i. iii.-v. (London, 1902 foll.).

Authorities.—For the geography of Latium and the local history of its key cities, readers can refer to Sir W. Gell’s Topography of Rome and its Vicinity (2nd ed., 1 vol., London, 1846); A. Nibby, Analisi storico-topografico-antiquaria della carta dei dintorni di Roma (3 vols., 2nd ed., 1848); J. Westphal, Die römische Kampagne (Berlin, 1829); A. Bormann, Alt-lateinische Chorographie und Städte-Geschichte (Halle, 1852); M. Zoeller, Latium und Rom (Leipzig, 1878); R. Burn’s Rome and the Campagna (London, 1871); H. Dessau, Corp. Inscr. Lat. v. xiv. (Berlin, 1887) (Latium); Th. Mommsen, Corp. Inscr. Lat. vol. x. pp. 498-675 (Berlin, 1883); G. Tomassetti, “Della Campagna Romana nel medio evo,” published in the Archivio della Società Romana di Storia Patria (Rome, 1874-1907), and separately (a detailed work on the medieval history and geography of the Campagna, also including valuable insights into the classical period); by the same author, La Campagna romana (Rome, 1910 foll.); R. A. Lanciani, “I Comentari di Frontino intorno agli acquedotti,” Memorie dei Lincei (Rome, 1880), serie iii. vol. v. p. 215 sqq. (and separately), along with many articles, and Wanderings in the Roman Campagna (London, 1909); E. Abbate, Guida della provincia di Roma (Rome, 1894, 2 vols.); H. Nissen, Italische Landeskunde, ii. (Berlin, 1902), 557 sqq.; T. Ashby, “The Classical Topography of the Roman Campagna,” in Papers of the British School at Rome, i. iii.-v. (London, 1902 foll.).

(T. As.)

1 Latium, from the same root as lătus, side; later, brick; πλατύς, flat; Sans. prath: not connected with lātus, wide.

1 Latium, from the same root as lătus, side; later, brick; wide, flat; Sans. prath: not related to lātus, wide.

2 In the time of Augustus the boundary of Latium extended as far E. as Treba (Trevi), 12 m. S.E. of Sublaqueum (Subiaco).

2 During Augustus's reign, the boundary of Latium reached east to Treba (Trevi), 12 miles southeast of Sublaqueum (Subiaco).

3 See R. de la Blanchère in Daremberg and Saglio, Dictionnaire des antiquités, s.vv. Cuniculus, Emissarium, and the same author’s Chapitre d’histoire pontine (Paris, 1889).

3 See R. de la Blanchère in Daremberg and Saglio, Dictionnaire des antiquités, s.vv. Cuniculus, Emissarium, and the same author’s Chapitre d’histoire pontine (Paris, 1889).

4 See G. A. Colini in Bullettino di paletnologia Italiana, xxxi. (1905).

4 See G. A. Colini in Bullettino di paleontology Italiana, xxxi. (1905).

5 The most important results will be found stated at the outset of the articles Rome: History (the chief being that the Plebeians of Rome probably consisted of Latins and the Patricians of Sabines), Liguria, Siculi and Aricia. For the Etruscan dominion in the Latin plain see Etruria. Special mention may here be made of one or two points of importance. The legends represent the Latins of the historical period as a fusion of different races, Ligures, Veneti and Siculi among them; the story of the alliance of the Trojan settler Aeneas with the daughter of Latinus, king of the aborigines, and the consequent enmity of the Rutulian prince Turnus, well known to readers of Virgil, is thoroughly typical of the reflection of these distant ethnical phenomena in the surviving traditions. In view of the historical significance of the NO- ethnicon (see Sabini) it is important to observe that the original form of the ethnic adjective no doubt appears in the title of Juppiter Latiaris (not Latinus); and that Virgil’s description of the descent of the noble Drances at Latinus’s court (Aen. xi. 340)—genus huic materna superbum Nobilitas dabat, incertum de patre ferebat—indicates a very different system of family ties from the famous patria potestas and agnation of the Patrician and Sabine clans.

5 The most important findings are stated at the beginning of the articles Rome: History (the main point being that the Plebeians of Rome likely included Latins and the Patricians of Sabines), Liguria, Siculi, and Aricia. For the Etruscan rule in the Latin plain, see Etruria. It’s worth highlighting a couple of important points. The legends depict the Latins during historical times as a mix of different races, including Ligures, Veneti, and Siculi; the story of the Trojan settler Aeneas forming an alliance with Latinus's daughter, the king of the natives, and the resulting conflict with Rutulian prince Turnus, familiar to readers of Virgil, is a classic example of how these distant ethnic events are reflected in surviving traditions. Given the historical significance of the NO- ethnicon (see Sabini), it's crucial to note that the original version of the ethnic adjective likely appears in the title Juppiter Latiaris (not Latinus); and Virgil’s portrayal of the noble Drances at Latinus’s court (Aen. xi. 340)—genus huic materna superbum Nobilitas dabat, incertum de patre ferebat—suggests a very different system of family relationships compared to the well-known patria potestas and agnation of the Patrician and Sabine clans.

(R. S. C.)

6 The MSS. read βοϊλλανῶν or βοϊλανῶν: the Latin translation has Bolanorum. It is difficult to say which is to be preferred. The list gives only twenty-nine names, and Mommsen proposes to insert Signini.

6 The manuscripts read βοϊλλανῶν or βοϊλανῶν: the Latin translation has Bolanorum. It's hard to determine which version is better. The list only includes twenty-nine names, and Mommsen suggests adding Signini.

7 Albani, Aesolani (probably E. of Tibur), Accienses, Abolani, Bubetani, Bolani, Cusuetani (Carventani?), Coriolani, Fidenates, Foreti (Fortinei?), Hortenses (near Corbio), Latinienses (near Rome itself), Longani, Manates, Macrales, Munienses (Castrimoenienses?), Numinienses, Olliculani, Octulani, Pedani, Poletaurini, Querquetulani, Sicani, Sisolenses, Tolerienses, Tutienses (not, one would think, connected with the small stream called Tutia at the 6th mile of the Via Salaria; Liv. xxvi. 11), Vimitellari, Velienses, Venetulani, Vitellenses (not far from Corbio).

7 Albani, Aesolani (likely east of Tibur), Accienses, Abolani, Bubetani, Bolani, Cusuetani (Carventani?), Coriolani, Fidenates, Foreti (Fortinei?), Hortenses (near Corbio), Latinienses (close to Rome), Longani, Manates, Macrales, Munienses (Castrimoenienses?), Numinienses, Olliculani, Octulani, Pedani, Poletaurini, Querquetulani, Sicani, Sisolenses, Tolerienses, Tutienses (not, as one might think, related to the small stream named Tutia at the 6th mile of the Via Salaria; Liv. xxvi. 11), Vimitellari, Velienses, Venetulani, Vitellenses (not far from Corbio).

8 To an earlier stage of the Latin league, perhaps to about 430 B.C. (Mommsen, op. cit. 445 n. 2) belongs the dedication of the grove of Diana by a dictator Latinus, in the name of the people of Tusculum, Aricia, Lanuvium, Laurentum, Cora, Tibur, Suessa Pometia and Ardea.

8 This refers to an earlier phase of the Latin League, possibly around 430 BCE (Mommsen, op. cit. 445 n. 2), which includes the dedication of the grove of Diana by a dictator named Latinus, on behalf of the people of Tusculum, Aricia, Lanuvium, Laurentum, Cora, Tibur, Suessa Pometia, and Ardea.

9 Of the gentes from which these tribes took their names, six entirely disappeared in later days, while the other ten can be traced as patrician—a proof that the patricians were not noble families in origin (Mommsen, Römische Forschungen, i. 106). For the tribes see W. Kubitschek, De Romanarum tribuum origine (Vienna, 1882).

9 Out of the gentes that these tribes were named after, six completely vanished over time, while the other ten can be traced back as patrician—showing that the patricians weren't originally noble families (Mommsen, Römische Forschungen, i. 106). For more on the tribes, see W. Kubitschek, De Romanarum tribuum origine (Vienna, 1882).

10 We have various traces of the early antagonism to Gabii, e.g. the opposition between ager Romanus and ager Gabinus in the augural law.

10 We have several signs of the early hostility towards Gabii, e.g. the conflict between ager Romanus and ager Gabinus in the augural law.

11 For the early extension of Roman territory towards the sea, cf. Festus, p. 213, Müll., s.v. “Pectuscum:” Pectuscum Palati dicta est ea regio urbis, quam Romulus obversam posuit, ea parte, in qua plurimum erat agri Romani ad mare versus et qua mollissime adibatur Urbo, cum Etruscorum agrum a Romano Tiberis discluderet, ceterae vicinae civitates colles aliquos haberent oppositos.

11 For the early expansion of Roman territory towards the sea, see Festus, p. 213, Müll., s.v. “Pectuscum:” Pectuscum is the name for that part of the city which Romulus positioned facing the sea, where there was a lot of Roman land leading towards the sea and where access to the city was easiest, as it separated the Etruscan land from the Roman territory by the Tiber River, while other nearby cities had some hills facing it.

12 The ancient name is known from an inscription discovered in 1888.

12 The old name was found in an inscription discovered in 1888.

13 So Kubitschek in Pauly-Wissowa, Realencyclopädie, ii. 1204.

13 So Kubitschek in Pauly-Wissowa, Realencyclopädie, ii. 1204.

14 Festus tells us (p. 136 Müll.) that the Maecia derived its name “a quodam castro.” Scaptia was the only member of the Latin league that gave its name to a tribe.

14 Festus tells us (p. 136 Müll.) that the Maecia got its name “from a certain fort.” Scaptia was the only member of the Latin league that named a tribe.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See Flaminia, Via and Valeria, Via.

16 L. Caetani indeed (Nineteenth Century and After, 1908) attributes the economic decadence of the Roman Campagna to the existence of free trade throughout the Roman empire.

16 L. Caetani actually (Nineteenth Century and After, 1908) connects the economic decline of the Roman Campagna to the presence of free trade across the Roman Empire.

17 The commune of Rome as such seems to have been in existence in 999 at least.

17 The community of Rome appears to have existed since at least 999.

LATONA (Lat. form of Gr. Λητώ, Leto), daughter of Coeus and Phoebe, mother of Apollo and Artemis. The chief seats of her legend are Delos and Delphi, and the generally accepted tradition is a union of the legends of these two places. Leto, pregnant by Zeus, seeks for a place of refuge to be delivered. After long wandering she reaches the barren isle of Delos, which, according to Pindar (Frag. 87, 88), was a wandering rock borne about by the waves till it was fixed to the bottom of the sea for the birth of Apollo and Artemis. In the oldest forms of the legend Hera is not mentioned; but afterwards the wanderings of Leto are ascribed to the jealousy of that goddess, enraged at her amour with Zeus. The foundation of Delphi follows immediately on the birth of the god; and on the sacred way between Tempe and Delphi the giant Tityus offers violence to Leto, and is immediately slain by the arrows of Apollo and Artemis (Odyssey, xi. 576-581; Apollodorus i. 4). Such are the main facts of the Leto legend in its common literary form, which is due especially to the two Homeric hymns to Apollo. But Leto is a real goddess, not a mere mythological figure. The honour paid to her in Delphi and Delos might be explained as part of the cult of her son Apollo; but temples to her existed in Argos, in Mantineia and in Xanthus in Lycia; her sacred grove was on the coast of Crete. In Lycia graves are frequently placed under her protection, and she is also known as a goddess of fertility and as κουροτρόφος. It is to be observed that she appears far more conspicuously in the Apolline myths than in those which grew round the great centres of Artemis worship, the reason being that the idea of Apollo and Artemis as twins is one of later growth on Greek soil. Lycia, one of the chief seats of the cult of Apollo, where most frequent traces are found of the worship of Leto as the great goddess, was probably the earlier home of her religion.

LATONA (Latin form of Greek Λητώ, Leto), daughter of Coeus and Phoebe, and mother of Apollo and Artemis. The main locations of her story are Delos and Delphi, and it's generally accepted that the legends of these two places merged. Leto, pregnant by Zeus, looks for a place to give birth. After a long journey, she arrives at the desolate island of Delos, which, according to Pindar (Frag. 87, 88), was a floating rock until it was anchored to the sea floor for the birth of Apollo and Artemis. In the earliest versions of the legend, Hera isn't mentioned; later, however, Leto's wanderings are attributed to the jealousy of that goddess, furious over her affair with Zeus. The founding of Delphi comes right after the birth of the god; on the sacred path between Tempe and Delphi, the giant Tityus tries to assault Leto, only to be instantly killed by the arrows of Apollo and Artemis (Odyssey, xi. 576-581; Apollodorus i. 4). These are the key facts of the Leto legend in its typical literary form, shaped especially by the two Homeric hymns to Apollo. However, Leto is a genuine goddess, not just a mythological character. The reverence given to her in Delphi and Delos could be seen as part of her son Apollo's cult, but temples dedicated to her also existed in Argos, Mantineia, and Xanthus in Lycia; her sacred grove was located on the coast of Crete. In Lycia, graves are often placed under her protection, and she is recognized as a goddess of fertility and as kurotrophos. It's worth noting that she features much more prominently in the myths surrounding Apollo than in those linked to the major centers of Artemis worship, because the concept of Apollo and Artemis as twins developed later in Greek culture. Lycia, a key area for the worship of Apollo, where traces of Leto's worship as a great goddess are most prevalent, was likely the original center of her faith.

274

274

In Greek art Leto usually appears carrying her children in her arms, pursued by the dragon sent by the jealous Hera, which is slain by the infant Apollo; in vase paintings especially she is often represented with Apollo and Artemis. The statue of Leto in the Letoön at Argos was the work of Praxiteles.

In Greek art, Leto is typically shown holding her children in her arms, being chased by the dragon sent by the jealous Hera, which is killed by the baby Apollo. In vase paintings, she is often depicted with Apollo and Artemis. The statue of Leto at the Letoön in Argos was created by Praxiteles.

LATOUCHE, HYACINTHE JOSEPH ALEXANDRE THABAUD DE [known as Henri] (1785-1851), French poet and novelist, was born at La Châtre (Indre) on the 2nd of February 1785. Among his works may be distinguished his comedies: Projets de sagesse (1811), and, in collaboration with Émile Deschamps, Selmours de Florian (1818), which ran for a hundred nights; also La Reine d’Espagne (1831), which proved too indecent for the public taste; a novel, Fragoletta: Naples et Paris en 1799 (1829), which attained a success of notoriety; La Vallée aux coups (1833), a volume of prose essays and verse; and two volumes of poems, Les Adieux (1843) and Les Agrestes (1844). Latouche’s chief claim to remembrance is that he revealed to the world the genius of André Chénier, then only known to a limited few. The remains of the poet’s work had passed from the hands of Daunou to Latouche, who had sufficient critical insight instantly to recognize their value. In editing the first selection of Chénier’s poems (1819) he made some trifling emendations, but did not, as Béranger afterwards asserted, make radical and unnecessary changes. Latouche was guilty of more than one literary fraud. He caused a licentious story of his own to be attributed to the duchesse de Duras, the irreproachable author of Ourika. He made many enemies by malicious attacks on his contemporaries. The Constitutionnel was suppressed in 1817 by the government for an obscure political allusion in an article by Latouche. He then undertook the management of the Mercure du XIXe siècle, and began a bitter warfare against the monarchy. After 1830 he edited the Figaro, and spared neither the liberal politicians nor the romanticists who triumphed under the monarchy of July. In his turn he was violently attacked by Gustave Planche in the Revue des deux mondes for November 1831. But it must be remembered to the credit of Latouche that he did much to encourage George Sand at the beginning of her career. The last twenty years of his life were spent in retirement at Aulnay, where he died on the 9th of March 1851.

LATOUCHE, HYACINTHE JOSEPH ALEXANDRE THABAUD DE [known as Henri] (1785-1851), was a French poet and novelist born in La Châtre (Indre) on February 2, 1785. His notable works include comedies like: Projets de sagesse (1811) and, along with Émile Deschamps, Selmours de Florian (1818), which was performed for a hundred nights; also La Reine d’Espagne (1831), which was considered too indecent for public taste; a novel, Fragoletta: Naples et Paris en 1799 (1829), which gained infamy; La Vallée aux coups (1833), a collection of prose essays and poems; and two volumes of poetry, Les Adieux (1843) and Les Agrestes (1844). Latouche is mainly remembered for introducing the genius of André Chénier to the world, who was then only known to a select few. The remains of the poet's work had passed from Daunou to Latouche, who had enough critical insight to recognize their worth. In editing the first selection of Chénier's poems (1819), he made some minor edits, but contrary to Béranger's later claims, he did not make radical and unnecessary changes. Latouche was involved in more than one literary deception. He falsely attributed a scandalous story of his own to the duchesse de Duras, the respectable author of Ourika. He made many enemies through malicious attacks on his contemporaries. The Constitutionnel was shut down in 1817 by the government due to an obscure political reference in an article he wrote. He then took over the management of the Mercure du XIXe siècle and began a fierce battle against the monarchy. After 1830, he edited the Figaro and did not hold back on criticizing both the liberal politicians and the romanticists who thrived during the July Monarchy. In retaliation, he was harshly criticized by Gustave Planche in the Revue des deux mondes in November 1831. However, it should be noted that Latouche played a significant role in supporting George Sand at the start of her career. The last twenty years of his life were spent in seclusion at Aulnay, where he passed away on March 9, 1851.

Sainte-Beuve, in the Causeries du lundi, vol. 3, gives a not too sympathetic portrait of Latouche. See also George Sand in the Siècle for the 18th, 19th and 20th of July 1851.

Sainte-Beuve, in the Causeries du lundi, vol. 3, provides a somewhat unflattering depiction of Latouche. Also, check out George Sand in the Siècle for the 18th, 19th, and 20th of July 1851.

LA TOUR, MAURICE QUENTIN DE (1704-1788), French pastellist, was born at St Quentin on the 5th of September 1704. After leaving Picardy for Paris in 1727 he entered the studio of Spoède—an upright man, but a poor master, rector of the academy of St Luke, who still continued, in the teeth of the Royal Academy, the traditions of the old gild of the master painters of Paris. This possibly contributed to the adoption by La Tour of a line of work foreign to that imposed by an academical training; for pastels, though occasionally used, were not a principal and distinct branch of work until 1720, when Rosalba Carriera brought them into fashion with the Parisian world. In 1737 La Tour exhibited the first of that splendid series of a hundred and fifty portraits which formed the glory of the Salon for the succeeding thirty-seven years. In 1746 he was received into the academy; and in 1751, the following year to that in which he received the title of painter to the king, he was promoted by that body to the grade of councillor. His work had the rare merit of satisfying at once both the taste of his fashionable models and the judgment of his brother artists. His art, consummate of its kind, achieved the task of flattering his sitters, whilst hiding that flattery behind the just and striking likeness which, says Pierre Jean Mariette, he hardly ever missed. His portraits of Rousseau, of Voltaire, of Louis XV., of his queen, of the dauphin and dauphiness, are at once documents and masterpieces unsurpassed except by his life-size portrait of Madame de Pompadour, which, exhibited at the Salon of 1755, became the chief ornament of the cabinet of pastels in the Louvre. The museum of St Quentin also possesses a magnificent collection of works which at his death were in his own hands. La Tour retired to St Quentin at the age of 80, and there he died on the 18th of February 1788. The riches amassed during his long life were freely bestowed by him in great part before his death; he founded prizes at the school of fine arts in Paris and for the town of Amiens, and endowed St Quentin with a great number of useful and charitable institutions. He never married, but lived on terms of warm affection with his brother (who survived him, and left to the town the drawings now in the museum); and his relations to Mlle Marie Fel (1713-1789), the celebrated singer, were distinguished by a strength and depth of feeling not common to the loves of the 18th century.

LA TOUR, MAURICE QUENTIN DE (1704-1788), a French pastellist, was born in St Quentin on September 5, 1704. After moving from Picardy to Paris in 1727, he joined the studio of Spoède—an honest man, but not a great teacher, who was the rector of the Academy of St Luke. He continued the traditions of the old guild of master painters in Paris, which was contrary to the Royal Academy. This might have influenced La Tour to pursue a style of work that differed from what was expected in academic training; pastels, although occasionally used, weren’t a main art form until 1720, when Rosalba Carriera made them popular in Paris. In 1737, La Tour showcased the first piece of his impressive series of one hundred and fifty portraits that became the highlight of the Salon for the next thirty-seven years. In 1746, he was accepted into the academy, and in 1751, the year after he was named painter to the king, he was elevated to the rank of councillor by the academy. His work had the unique ability to satisfy both the tastes of his fashionable sitters and the critique of his fellow artists. His art, exceptional in its own right, successfully flattered those he painted while skillfully concealing that flattery behind a true and striking likeness, which, according to Pierre Jean Mariette, he rarely missed. His portraits of Rousseau, Voltaire, Louis XV, his queen, and the dauphin and dauphiness are both historical documents and masterpieces, surpassed only by his life-size portrait of Madame de Pompadour, which was exhibited at the Salon of 1755 and became the highlight of the pastel collection in the Louvre. The museum in St Quentin also has a remarkable collection of works that he owned at the time of his death. La Tour retired to St Quentin at the age of 80, where he passed away on February 18, 1788. Much of the wealth he accumulated throughout his long life was generously given away before his death; he established prizes at the school of fine arts in Paris and for the town of Amiens, and contributed many useful and charitable institutions to St Quentin. He never married but shared a close bond with his brother (who outlived him and donated the drawings now in the museum); his relationship with Mlle Marie Fel (1713-1789), the famous singer, was marked by a depth of emotion rarely seen in 18th-century romances.

See, in addition to the general works on French art, C. Desmeze, M. Q. de La Tour, peintre du roi (1854); Champfleury, Les Peintres de Laon et de St Quentin (1855); and “La Tour” in the Collection des artistes célèbres (1886); E. and J. de Goncourt, La Tour (1867); Guiffrey and M. Tourneux, Correspondance inédite de M. G. de la Tour (1885); Tourneux, La Tour, biographie critique (1904); and Patoux, L’Œuvre de M. Quentin de la Tour au musée de St Quentin (St Quentin, 1882).

See, in addition to the general works on French art, C. Desmeze, M. Q. de La Tour, peintre du roi (1854); Champfleury, Les Peintres de Laon et de St Quentin (1855); and “La Tour” in the Collection des artistes célèbres (1886); E. and J. de Goncourt, La Tour (1867); Guiffrey and M. Tourneux, Correspondance inédite de M. G. de la Tour (1885); Tourneux, La Tour, biographie critique (1904); and Patoux, L’Œuvre de M. Quentin de la Tour au musée de St Quentin (St Quentin, 1882).

LA TOUR D’AUVERGNE, THÉOPHILE MALO (1743-1800), French soldier, was born at Carhaix in Brittany on the 23rd of December 1743, the son of an advocate named Corret. His desire for a military career being strongly marked, he was enabled, by the not uncommon device of producing a certificate of nobility signed by his friends, first to be nominally enlisted in the Maison du Roi, and soon afterwards to receive a commission in the line, under the name of Corret de Kerbaufret. Four years after joining, in 1771, he assumed by leave of the duke of Bouillon the surname of La Tour d’Auvergne, being in fact descended from an illegitimate half-brother of the great Turenne. Many years of routine service with his regiment were broken only by his participation as a volunteer in the duc de Crillon’s Franco-Spanish expedition to Minorca in 1781. This led to an offer of promotion into the Spanish army, but he refused to change his allegiance. In 1784 he was promoted captain, and in 1791 he received the cross of St Louis. In the early part of the Revolution his patriotism was still more conspicuously displayed in his resolute opposition to the proposals of many of his brother officers in the Angoumois regiment to emigrate rather than to swear to the constitution. In 1792 his lifelong interest in numismatics and questions of language was shown by a work which he published on the Bretons. At this time he was serving under Montesquiou in the Alps, and although there was only outpost fighting he distinguished himself by his courage and audacity, qualities which were displayed in more serious fighting in the Pyrenees the next year. He declined well-earned promotion to colonel, and, being broken in health and compelled, owing to the loss of his teeth, to live on milk, he left the army in 1795. On his return by sea to Brittany he was captured by the English and held prisoner for two years. When released, he settled at Passy and published Origines gauloises, but in 1797, on the appeal of an old friend whose son had been taken as a conscript, he volunteered as the youth’s substitute, and served on the Rhine (1797) and in Switzerland (1798-1799) as a captain. In recognition of his singular bravery and modesty Carnot obtained a decree from the first consul naming La Tour d’Auvergne “first grenadier of France” (27th of April 1800). This led him to volunteer again, and he was killed in action at Oberhausen, near Donauwörth, on the 27th of June 1800.

LA TOUR D'AUVERGNE, THÉOPHILE MALO (1743-1800), a French soldier, was born in Carhaix, Brittany, on December 23, 1743, the son of a lawyer named Corret. He had a strong desire to pursue a military career and used the common tactic of presenting a certificate of nobility signed by friends to be initially recruited into the Maison du Roi, and shortly after to get a commission in the line, under the name Corret de Kerbaufret. Four years later, in 1771, he was allowed by the Duke of Bouillon to adopt the surname La Tour d’Auvergne, being a descendant of an illegitimate half-brother of the famous Turenne. He spent many years in routine service with his regiment, only interrupted by his participation as a volunteer in the Duke de Crillon’s Franco-Spanish expedition to Minorca in 1781. This led to an offer of promotion in the Spanish army, but he declined to switch his allegiance. In 1784, he was promoted to captain, and in 1791 he received the cross of St. Louis. During the early days of the Revolution, he demonstrated his patriotism by firmly opposing many of his fellow officers in the Angoumois regiment who wanted to emigrate instead of swearing to the constitution. In 1792, he published a work on the Bretons, showcasing his lifelong interest in numismatics and language. At this time, he served under Montesquiou in the Alps, and even though there was only minor skirmishing, he distinguished himself with his bravery and boldness, which were even more apparent during serious combat in the Pyrenees the following year. He declined a well-deserved promotion to colonel and, due to health issues including the loss of his teeth, was forced to live on milk, leading him to leave the army in 1795. On his return to Brittany by sea, he was captured by the English and held as a prisoner for two years. Upon his release, he settled in Passy and published Origines gauloises, but in 1797, at the request of an old friend whose son was conscripted, he volunteered as a substitute for the young man and served on the Rhine (1797) and in Switzerland (1798-1799) as a captain. In recognition of his remarkable bravery and humility, Carnot secured a decree from the first consul naming La Tour d’Auvergne “first grenadier of France” (April 27, 1800). This motivated him to volunteer again, and he was killed in action at Oberhausen, near Donauwörth, on June 27, 1800.

La Tour d’Auvergne’s almost legendary courage had captivated the imagination of the French soldier, and his memory was not suffered to die. It was customary for the French troops and their allies of the Rhine Confederation under Napoleon to march at attention when passing his burial-place on the battlefield. His heart was long carried by the grenadier company of his regiment, the 46th; after being in the possession of Garibaldi for many years, it was finally deposited in the keeping of the city of Paris in 1883. But the most striking tribute to his memory is paid to-day as it was by order of the first consul in 1800. “His name is to be kept on the pay list and roll of his company. It will be called at all parades and a non-commissioned officer will reply, Mort au champ d’honneur.” This custom, with little variation, is still observed in the 46th regiment on all occasions when the colour is taken on parade.

La Tour d’Auvergne’s almost legendary courage had captivated the imagination of the French soldier, and his memory was not allowed to fade. It was customary for the French troops and their allies from the Rhine Confederation under Napoleon to march at attention when passing his burial place on the battlefield. His heart was long carried by the grenadier company of his regiment, the 46th; after being with Garibaldi for many years, it was finally entrusted to the city of Paris in 1883. But the most impressive tribute to his memory is paid today just as it was at the request of the first consul in 1800. “His name is to be kept on the pay list and roll of his company. It will be called at all parades, and a non-commissioned officer will respond, Mort au champ d’honneur.” This custom, with little change, is still observed in the 46th regiment on all occasions when the colors are paraded.

275

275

LATREILLE, PIERRE ANDRÉ (1762-1833), French naturalist, was born in humble circumstances at Brives-la-Gaillarde (Corrèze), on the 20th of November 1762. In 1778 he entered the collège Lemoine at Paris, and on his admission to priestly orders in 1786 he retired to Brives, where he devoted all the leisure which the discharge of his professional duties allowed to the study of entomology. In 1788 he returned to Paris and found means of making himself known to the leading naturalists there. His “Mémoire sur les mutilles découvertes en France,” contributed to the Proceedings of the Society of Natural History in Paris, procured for him admission to that body. At the Revolution he was compelled to quit Paris, and as a priest of conservative sympathies suffered considerable hardship, being imprisoned for some time at Bordeaux. His Précis des caractères génériques des insectes, disposés dans un ordre naturel, appeared at Brives in 1796. In 1798 he became a corresponding member of the Institute, and at the same time was entrusted with the task of arranging the entomological collection at the recently organized Muséum d’Histoire Naturelle (Jardin des Plantes); in 1814 he succeeded G. A. Olivier as member of the Académie des Sciences, and in 1821 he was made a chevalier of the Legion of Honour. For some time he acted as professor of zoology in the veterinary school at Alfort near Paris, and in 1830, when the chair of zoology of invertebrates at the Muséum was divided after the death of Lamarck, Latreille was appointed professor of zoology of crustaceans, arachnids and insects, the chair of molluscs, worms and zoophytes being assigned to H. M. D. de Blainville. “On me donne du pain quand je n’ai plus de dents,” said Latreille, who was then in his sixty-eighth year. He died in Paris on the 6th of February 1833.

LATREILLE, PIERRE ANDRÉ (1762-1833), French naturalist, was born into a modest family in Brives-la-Gaillarde (Corrèze) on November 20, 1762. In 1778, he joined Collège Lemoine in Paris, and after being ordained as a priest in 1786, he returned to Brives, where he dedicated his free time from professional duties to studying entomology. In 1788, he went back to Paris and found ways to connect with the leading naturalists there. His paper “Mémoire sur les mutilles découvertes en France,” published in the Proceedings of the Society of Natural History in Paris, earned him a place in that society. During the Revolution, he had to leave Paris, and as a priest with conservative views, he faced significant hardships, including a period of imprisonment in Bordeaux. His Précis des caractères génériques des insectes, disposés dans un ordre naturel was published in Brives in 1796. By 1798, he became a corresponding member of the Institute and was tasked with organizing the entomological collection at the newly established Muséum d’Histoire Naturelle (Jardin des Plantes). In 1814, he succeeded G. A. Olivier as a member of the Académie des Sciences, and in 1821, he was made a chevalier of the Legion of Honour. For a time, he served as a professor of zoology at the veterinary school in Alfort near Paris, and in 1830, when the chair of invertebrate zoology at the Muséum was split after Lamarck's death, Latreille was appointed professor of zoology of crustaceans, arachnids, and insects, while the chair of molluscs, worms, and zoophytes went to H. M. D. de Blainville. “I am given bread when I have no more teeth,” said Latreille, who was then 68 years old. He died in Paris on February 6, 1833.

In addition to the works already mentioned, the numerous works of Latreille include: Histoire naturelle générale et particulière des crustacés et insectes (14 vols., 1802-1805), forming part of C. N. S. Sonnini’s edition of Buffon; Genera crustaceorum et insectorum, secundum ordinem naturalem in familias disposita (4 vols., 1806-1807); Considérations générales sur l’ordre naturel des animaux composant les classes des crustacés, des arachnides, et des insectes (1810); Familles naturelles du règne animal, exposées succinctement et dans un ordre analytique (1825); Cours d’entomologie (of which only the first volume appeared, 1831); the whole of the section “Crustacés, Arachnides, Insectes,” in G. Cuvier’s Règne animal; besides many papers in the Annales du Muséum, the Encyclopédie méthodique, the Dictionnaire classique d’histoire naturelle and elsewhere.

In addition to the works already mentioned, Latreille’s numerous publications include: Histoire naturelle générale et particulière des crustacés et insectes (14 vols., 1802-1805), which is part of C. N. S. Sonnini’s edition of Buffon; Genera crustaceorum et insectorum, secundum ordinem naturalem in familias disposita (4 vols., 1806-1807); Considérations générales sur l’ordre naturel des animaux composant les classes des crustacés, des arachnides, et des insectes (1810); Familles naturelles du règne animal, exposées succinctement et dans un ordre analytique (1825); Cours d’entomologie (only the first volume was published, 1831); the entire section “Crustacés, Arachnides, Insectes” in G. Cuvier’s Règne animal; as well as many papers in the Annales du Muséum, the Encyclopédie méthodique, the Dictionnaire classique d’histoire naturelle, and more.

LA TRÉMOILLE, an old French family which derives its name from a village (the modern La Trimouille) in the department of Vienne. The family has been known since the middle of the 11th century, and since the 14th century its members have been conspicuous in French history. Guy, sire de la Trémoille, standard-bearer of France, was taken prisoner at the battle of Nicopolis (1396), and Georges, the favourite of King Charles VII., was captured at Agincourt (1415). Louis (2), called the chevalier sans reproche, defeated and captured the duke of Orleans at the battle of Saint Aubin-du-Cormier (1488), distinguished himself in the wars in Italy, and was killed at Pavia (1525). In 1521 François (2) acquired a claim on the kingdom of Naples by his marriage with Anne de Laval, daughter of Charlotte of Aragon. Louis (3) became duke of Thouars in 1563, and his son Claude turned Protestant, was created a peer of France in 1595, and married a daughter of William the Silent in 1598. To this family belonged the lines of the counts of Joigny, the marquises of Royan and counts of Olonne, and the marquises and dukes of Noirmoutier.

LA TRÉMOILLE is an old French family that takes its name from a village (now called La Trimouille) in the Vienne department. The family has been recognized since the mid-11th century, and since the 14th century, its members have played prominent roles in French history. Guy, sire de la Trémoille, who was the standard-bearer of France, was captured at the battle of Nicopolis in 1396, and Georges, who was the favorite of King Charles VII, was taken prisoner at Agincourt in 1415. Louis (2), known as the chevalier sans reproche, defeated and captured the duke of Orleans at the battle of Saint Aubin-du-Cormier in 1488, made a name for himself in the wars in Italy, and was killed at Pavia in 1525. In 1521, François (2) gained a claim to the kingdom of Naples by marrying Anne de Laval, the daughter of Charlotte of Aragon. Louis (3) became duke of Thouars in 1563, and his son Claude converted to Protestantism, was made a peer of France in 1595, and married the daughter of William the Silent in 1598. This family included the lines of the counts of Joigny, the marquises of Royan and counts of Olonne, as well as the marquises and dukes of Noirmoutier.

LATROBE, CHARLES JOSEPH (1801-1875), Australian governor, was born in London on the 20th of March 1801. The Latrobes were of Huguenot extraction, and belonged to the Moravian community, of which the father and grandfather of C. J. Latrobe were ministers. His father, Christian Ignatius Latrobe (1758-1836), a musician of some note, did good service in the direction of popularizing classical music in England by his Selection of Sacred Music from the Works of the most Eminent Composers of Germany and Italy (6 vols., 1806-1825). C. J. Latrobe was an excellent mountaineer, and made some important ascents in Switzerland in 1824-1826. In 1832 he went to America with Count Albert Pourtales, and in 1834 crossed the prairies from New Orleans to Mexico with Washington Irving. In 1837 he was invested with a government commission in the West Indies, and two years later was made superintendent of the Port Philip district of New South Wales. When Port Philip was erected into a separate colony as Victoria in 1851, Latrobe became lieutenant-governor. The discovery of gold in that year attracted enormous numbers of immigrants annually. Latrobe discharged the difficult duties of government at this critical period with tact and success. He retired in 1854, became C.B. in 1858 and died in London on the 2nd of December 1875. Beside some volumes of travel he published a volume of poems, The Solace of Song (1837).

LATROBE, CHARLES JOSEPH (1801-1875), Australian governor, was born in London on March 20, 1801. The Latrobes were of Huguenot descent and were part of the Moravian community, where C. J. Latrobe's father and grandfather served as ministers. His father, Christian Ignatius Latrobe (1758-1836), a well-known musician, contributed significantly to popularizing classical music in England with his Selection of Sacred Music from the Works of the most Eminent Composers of Germany and Italy (6 vols., 1806-1825). C. J. Latrobe was an excellent mountaineer, making notable climbs in Switzerland between 1824 and 1826. In 1832, he traveled to America with Count Albert Pourtales, and in 1834, he crossed the prairies from New Orleans to Mexico with Washington Irving. In 1837, he received a government commission in the West Indies, and two years later, he was appointed superintendent of the Port Philip district of New South Wales. When Port Philip became a separate colony, named Victoria, in 1851, Latrobe became its lieutenant-governor. The discovery of gold that year brought in huge waves of immigrants every year. Latrobe managed the challenging responsibilities of government during this critical time with skill and success. He retired in 1854, became C.B. in 1858, and passed away in London on December 2, 1875. In addition to several volumes of travel writing, he published a collection of poems, The Solace of Song (1837).

See Brief Notices of the Latrobe Family (1864), a privately printed translation of an article revised by members of the family in the Moravian Brüderbote (November 1864).

See Brief Notices of the Latrobe Family (1864), a privately printed translation of an article updated by family members in the Moravian Brüderbote (November 1864).

LATTEN (from O. Fr. laton, mod. Fr. laiton, possibly connected with Span. lata, Ital. latta, a lath), a mixed metal like brass, composed of copper and zinc, generally made in thin sheets, and used especially for monumental brasses and effigies. A fine example is in the screen of Henry VII.’s tomb in Westminster Abbey. There are three forms of latten, “black latten,” unpolished and rolled, “shaven latten,” of extreme thinness, and “roll latten,” of the thickness either of black or shaven latten, but with both sides polished.

LATTEN (from O. Fr. laton, mod. Fr. laiton, possibly related to Span. lata, Ital. latta, a lath), a mixed metal similar to brass, made of copper and zinc, usually produced in thin sheets, and primarily used for monumental brasses and effigies. A notable example can be found in the screen of Henry VII's tomb in Westminster Abbey. There are three types of latten: “black latten,” which is unpolished and rolled; “shaven latten,” which is extremely thin; and “roll latten,” which is the same thickness as either black or shaven latten, but with both sides polished.

LATTICE LEAF PLANT, in botany, the common name for Ouvirandra fenestralis, an aquatic monocotyledonous plant belonging to the small natural order Aponogetonaceae and a native of Madagascar. It has a singular appearance from the structure of the leaves, which are oblong in shape, from 6 to 18 in. long and from 2 to 4 in. broad; they spread horizontally beneath the surface of the water, and are reduced to little more than a lattice-like network of veins. The tuberculate roots are edible. The plant is grown in cultivation as a stove-aquatic.

Lattice leaf plant, in botany, the common name for Ouvirandra fenestralis, an aquatic monocot plant belonging to the small natural order Aponogetonaceae and native to Madagascar. It has a unique look due to the structure of the leaves, which are oblong, ranging from 6 to 18 in. long and 2 to 4 in. wide; they spread horizontally below the water's surface and are reduced to little more than a lattice-like network of veins. The tuberculate roots are edible. The plant is cultivated as a stove-aquatic.

LATUDE, JEAN HENRI, often called Danry or Masers de Latude (1725-1805), prisoner of the Bastille, was born at Montagnac in Gascony on the 23rd of March 1725. He received a military education and went to Paris in 1748 to study mathematics. He led a dissipated life and endeavoured to curry favour with the marquise de Pompadour by secretly sending her a box of poison and then informing her of the supposed plot against her life. The ruse was discovered, and Mme de Pompadour, not appreciating the humour of the situation, had Latude put in the Bastille on the 1st of May 1749. He was later transferred to Vincennes, whence he escaped in 1750. Retaken and reimprisoned in the Bastille, he made a second brief escape in 1756. He was transferred to Vincennes in 1764, and the next year made a third escape and was a third time recaptured. He was put in a madhouse by Malesherbes in 1775, and discharged in 1777 on condition that he should retire to his native town. He remained in Paris and was again imprisoned. A certain Mme Legros became interested in him through chance reading of one of his memoirs, and, by a vigorous agitation in his behalf, secured his definite release in 1784. He exploited his long captivity with considerable ability, posing as a brave officer, a son of the marquis de la Tude, and a victim of Pompadour’s intrigues. He was extolled and pensioned during the Revolution, and in 1793 the convention compelled the heirs of Mme de Pompadour to pay him 60,000 francs damages. He died in obscurity at Paris on the 1st of January 1805.

LATUDE, JEAN HENRI, often known as Danry or Masers de Latude (1725-1805), a prisoner of the Bastille, was born in Montagnac, Gascony on March 23, 1725. He received military training and moved to Paris in 1748 to study mathematics. He lived a reckless lifestyle and tried to win favor with the marquise de Pompadour by secretly sending her a box of poison and then alerting her about an alleged plot against her life. The trick was uncovered, and Madame de Pompadour, not finding the situation amusing, had Latude imprisoned in the Bastille on May 1, 1749. He was later moved to Vincennes, from where he escaped in 1750. Recaptured and reimprisoned in the Bastille, he made another short escape in 1756. He was moved to Vincennes again in 1764, and the following year made a third escape, only to be recaptured once more. In 1775, Malesherbes had him placed in a mental asylum, and he was released in 1777 on the condition that he return to his hometown. He stayed in Paris and was imprisoned again. A woman named Mme Legros took an interest in him after randomly reading one of his memoirs, and through her persistent efforts, she secured his release in 1784. He capitalized on his long imprisonment skillfully, presenting himself as a brave officer, the son of the marquis de la Tude, and a victim of Pompadour’s schemes. He was praised and received a pension during the Revolution, and in 1793, the convention forced the heirs of Madame de Pompadour to pay him 60,000 francs in damages. He died in obscurity in Paris on January 1, 1805.

The principal work of Latude is the account of his imprisonment, written in collaboration with an advocate named Thiéry, and entitled Le Despotisme dévoilé, ou Mémoires de Henri Masers de la Tude, détenu pendant trente-cinq ans dans les diverses prisons d’état (Amsterdam, 1787, ed. Paris, 1889). An Eng. trans. of a portion was published in 1787. The work is full of lies and misrepresentations, but had great vogue at the time of the French Revolution. Latude also wrote essays on all sorts of subjects.

The main work of Latude is the account of his imprisonment, written in collaboration with a lawyer named Thiéry, titled Le Despotisme dévoilé, ou Mémoires de Henri Masers de la Tude, détenu pendant trente-cinq ans dans les diverses prisons d’état (Amsterdam, 1787, ed. Paris, 1889). An English translation of a portion was released in 1787. The work is full of lies and misrepresentations, but it became very popular during the time of the French Revolution. Latude also wrote essays on a variety of topics.

See J. F. Barrière, Mémoires de Linguet et de Latude (1884); G. Bertin, Notice in edition of the Mémoires (1889); F. Funck-Brentano, “Latude,” in the Revue des deux mondes (1st October 1889).

See J. F. Barrière, Mémoires de Linguet et de Latude (1884); G. Bertin, Notice in edition of the Mémoires (1889); F. Funck-Brentano, “Latude,” in the Revue des deux mondes (October 1, 1889).

LATUKA, a tribe of negroid stock inhabiting the mountainous country E. of Gondokoro on the upper Nile. They have received a tinge of Hamitic blood from the Galla people, and have high 276 foreheads, large eyes, straight noses and thick but not pouting lips. They are believed by Sir H. H. Johnston to be the original and purest type of the great Masai people, and are assimilated to the Nilotic negro races in customs. Like their neighbours the Bari and Shilluk tribes, they despise clothing, though the important chiefs have adopted Arab attire. Their country is fertile, and they cultivate tobacco, durra and other crops. Their villages are numerous, and some are of considerable size. Tarangole, for instance, on the Khor Kohs, has upwards of three thousand huts, and sheds for many thousands of cattle. The Latuka are industrious and especially noted for skill as smiths. Emin Pasha stated that the lion was so little dreaded by the Latuka that on one being caught in a leopard trap they hastily set it free.

LATUKA, a tribe of African descent living in the mountainous area east of Gondokoro on the upper Nile. They have some Hamitic heritage from the Galla people, and they have prominent foreheads, large eyes, straight noses, and thick but not pouting lips. Sir H. H. Johnston believes they are the original and purest type of the great Masai people and share customs with the Nilotic black races. Like their neighbors, the Bari and Shilluk tribes, they look down on clothing, although important chiefs have taken to wearing Arab garments. Their land is fertile, and they grow tobacco, durra, and other crops. Their villages are numerous, with some being quite large. For example, Tarangole, located on the Khor Kohs, has over three thousand huts and sheds for many thousands of cattle. The Latuka are hard-working and particularly known for their skills as blacksmiths. Emin Pasha noted that the Latuka feared lions so little that when one was caught in a leopard trap, they quickly set it free.

LAUBAN, a town of Germany in the Prussian province of Silesia, is situated in a picturesque valley, at the junction of the lines of railway from Görlitz and Sorau, 16 m. E. of the former. Pop. (1905) 14,624. Lauban has a Roman Catholic and two Evangelical churches, a town hall, dating from 1541, a conventual house of the order of St Magdalene, dating from the 14th century, a municipal library and museum, two hospitals, an orphanage and several schools. Its industrial establishments comprise tobacco, yarn, thread, linen and woollen cloth manufactories, bleaching and dyeing works, breweries and oil and flour mills.

LAUBAN, is a town in Germany located in the Prussian province of Silesia, nestled in a beautiful valley at the crossroads of the railway lines from Görlitz and Sorau, 16 miles east of the former. The population in 1905 was 14,624. Lauban features a Roman Catholic church and two Evangelical churches, a town hall that dates back to 1541, a convent of the order of St Magdalene from the 14th century, a municipal library and museum, two hospitals, an orphanage, and several schools. Its industries include tobacco production, yarn and thread manufacturing, linen and wool fabric mills, as well as bleaching and dyeing facilities, breweries, and oil and flour mills.

Lauban was founded in the 10th and fortified in the 13th century; in 1427 and 1431 it was devastated by the Hussites, and in 1640 by the Swedes. In 1761 it was the headquarters of Frederick the Great, and in 1813 it was the last Saxon town that made its submission to Prussia.

Lauban was established in the 10th century and fortified in the 13th century; it suffered devastation from the Hussites in 1427 and 1431, and again in 1640 by the Swedes. In 1761, it served as the headquarters for Frederick the Great, and in 1813, it was the last Saxon town to surrender to Prussia.

See Berkel, Geschichte der Stadt Lauban (Lauban, 1896).

See Berkel, History of the City of Lauban (Lauban, 1896).

LAUBE, HEINRICH (1806-1884), German dramatist, novelist and theatre-director, was born at Sprottau in Silesia on the 18th of September 1806. He studied theology at Halle and Breslau (1826-1829), and settled in Leipzig in 1832. Here he at once came into prominence with his political essays, collected under the title Das neue Jahrhundert, in two parts—Polen (1833) and Politische Briefe (1833)—and with the novel Das junge Europa, in three parts—Die Poeten, Die Krieger, Die Bürger—(1833-1837). These writings, in which, after the fashion of Heinrich Heine and Ludwig Börne, he severely criticized the political régime in Germany, together with the part he played in the literary movement known as Das junge Deutschland, led to his being subjected to police surveillance and his works confiscated. On his return, in 1834, from a journey to Italy, undertaken in the company of Karl Gutzkow, Laube was expelled from Saxony and imprisoned for nine months in Berlin. In 1836 he married the widow of Professor Hänel of Leipzig; almost immediately afterwards he suffered a year’s imprisonment for his revolutionary sympathies. In 1839 he again settled in Leipzig and began a literary activity as a playwright. Chief among his earlier productions are the tragedies Monaldeschi (1845) and Struensee (1847); the comedies Rokoko, oder die alten Herren (1846); Gottsched und Gellert (1847); and Die Karlsschüler (1847), of which the youthful Schiller is the hero. In 1848 Laube was elected to the national assembly at Frankfort-on-Main for the district of Elbogen, but resigned in the spring of 1849, when he was appointed artistic director of the Hofburg theatre in Vienna. This office he held until 1867, and in this period fall his finest dramatic productions, notably the tragedies Graf Essex (1856) and Montrose (1859), and his historical romance Der deutsche Krieg (1865-1866, 9 vols.), which graphically pictures a period in the Thirty Years’ War. In 1869 he became director of the Leipzig Stadttheater, but returned to Vienna in 1870, where in 1872 he was placed at the head of the new Stadttheater; with the exception of a short interval he managed this theatre with brilliant success until his retirement from public life in 1880. He has left a valuable record of his work in Vienna and Leipzig in the three volumes Das Burgtheater (1868), Das norddeutsche Theater (1872) and Das Wiener Stadttheater (1875). His pen was still active after his retirement, and in the five years preceding his death, which took place at Vienna on the 1st of August 1884, he wrote the romances and novels Die Böhminger (1880), Louison (1881), Der Schatten-Wilhelm (1883), and published an interesting volume of reminiscences, Erinnerungen, 1841-1881 (1882). Laube’s dramas are not remarkable for originality or for poetical beauty; their real and great merit lies in their stage-craft. As a theatre-manager he has had no equal in Germany, and his services in this capacity have assured him a more lasting name in German literary history than his writings.

LAUBE, HEINRICH (1806-1884), German playwright, novelist, and theater director, was born in Sprottau, Silesia, on September 18, 1806. He studied theology at Halle and Breslau (1826-1829) and settled in Leipzig in 1832. He quickly gained recognition for his political essays collected under the title Das neue Jahrhundert, in two parts—Polen (1833) and Politische Briefe (1833)—as well as for his novel Das junge Europa, in three parts—Die Poeten, Die Krieger, Die Bürger—(1833-1837). In these writings, he harshly criticized the political situation in Germany, similar to Heinrich Heine and Ludwig Börne, which, along with his involvement in the literary movement known as Das junge Deutschland, resulted in police surveillance and the confiscation of his works. After returning from a trip to Italy with Karl Gutzkow in 1834, Laube was expelled from Saxony and imprisoned for nine months in Berlin. In 1836, he married the widow of Professor Hänel from Leipzig; shortly after, he was imprisoned for a year due to his revolutionary sympathies. In 1839, he moved back to Leipzig and began his career as a playwright. His early works include the tragedies Monaldeschi (1845) and Struensee (1847); the comedies Rokoko, oder die alten Herren (1846); Gottsched und Gellert (1847); and Die Karlsschüler (1847), featuring the young Schiller as the hero. In 1848, Laube was elected to the national assembly in Frankfurt-on-Main for the Elbogen district, but he resigned in spring 1849 to become the artistic director of the Hofburg theater in Vienna. He held this position until 1867, during which he produced many of his best dramatic works, notably the tragedies Graf Essex (1856) and Montrose (1859), as well as his historical romance Der deutsche Krieg (1865-1866, 9 vols.), which vividly depicts a period in the Thirty Years’ War. In 1869 he became the director of the Leipzig Stadttheater but returned to Vienna in 1870, where in 1872 he became the head of the new Stadttheater; apart from a brief hiatus, he successfully managed this theater until his retirement in 1880. He documented his work in Vienna and Leipzig in three volumes: Das Burgtheater (1868), Das norddeutsche Theater (1872), and Das Wiener Stadttheater (1875). Even after retiring, he remained active, writing the romances and novels Die Böhminger (1880), Louison (1881), Der Schatten-Wilhelm (1883), and publishing an interesting collection of memoirs, Erinnerungen, 1841-1881 (1882), in the five years leading up to his death in Vienna on August 1, 1884. Laube’s plays may lack originality and poetic beauty, but their true strength lies in their stagecraft. As a theater manager, he was unparalleled in Germany, and his contributions in this role have ensured him a more enduring place in German literary history than his writings.

His Gesammelte Schriften (excluding his dramas) were published in 16 vols. (1879-1882); his Dramatische Werke, in 13 vols. (1845-1875); a popular edition of the latter in 12 vols. (1880-1892). An edition of Laube’s Ausgewählte Werke in 10 vols. appeared in 1906 with an introduction by H. H. Houben. See also J. Proelss, Das junge Deutschland (1892); and H. Bulthaupt, Dramaturgie des Schauspiels (vol. iii., 6th ed., 1901).

His Collected Writings (excluding his plays) were published in 16 volumes (1879-1882); his Dramatic Works were published in 13 volumes (1845-1875); a popular edition of the latter came out in 12 volumes (1880-1892). An edition of Laube’s Selected Works in 10 volumes was released in 1906, with an introduction by H. H. Houben. See also J. Proelss, Young Germany (1892); and H. Bulthaupt, Drama Theory (vol. iii., 6th ed., 1901).

L’AUBESPINE, a French family which sprang from Claude de l’Aubespine, a lawyer of Orleans and bailiff of the abbey of St Euverte in the beginning of the 16th century, and rapidly acquired distinction in offices connected with the law. Sebastien de l’Aubespine (d. 1582), abbot of Bassefontaine, bishop of Vannes and afterwards of Limoges, fulfilled important diplomatic missions in Germany, Hungary, England, the Low Countries and Switzerland under Francis I. and his successors. Claude (c. 1500-1567), baron of Châteauneuf-sur-Cher, Sebastien’s brother, was a secretary of finance; he had charge of negotiations with England in 1555 and 1559, and was several times commissioned to treat with the Huguenots in the king’s name. His son Guillaume was a councillor of state and ambassador to England. Charles de l’Aubespine (1580-1653) was ambassador to Germany, the Low Countries, Venice and England, besides twice holding the office of keeper of the seals of France, from 1630 to 1633, and from 1650 to 1651. The family fell into poor circumstances and became extinct in the 19th century.

L'Aubespine, is a French family that originated from Claude de l’Aubespine, a lawyer from Orleans and bailiff of the abbey of St Euverte in the early 16th century. They quickly gained prominence in legal positions. Sebastien de l’Aubespine (d. 1582), who was the abbot of Bassefontaine and bishop first of Vannes and then of Limoges, undertook significant diplomatic missions in Germany, Hungary, England, the Low Countries, and Switzerland under Francis I and his successors. Claude (c. 1500-1567), the baron of Châteauneuf-sur-Cher and Sebastien’s brother, served as a secretary of finance; he managed negotiations with England in 1555 and 1559, and was frequently tasked with discussions with the Huguenots on behalf of the king. His son Guillaume was a state councillor and ambassador to England. Charles de l’Aubespine (1580-1653) served as ambassador to Germany, the Low Countries, Venice, and England, and held the position of keeper of the seals of France twice, from 1630 to 1633 and from 1650 to 1651. The family eventually fell on hard times and became extinct in the 19th century.

(M. P.*)

LAUCHSTÄDT, a town of Germany in the province of Prussian Saxony, on the Laucha, 6 m. N.W. of Merseburg by the railway to Schafstädt. Pop. (1905) 2034. It contains an Evangelical church, a theatre, a hydropathic establishment and several educational institutions, among which is an agricultural school affiliated to the university of Halle. Its industries include malting, vinegar-making and brewing. Lauchstädt was a popular watering-place in the 18th century, the dukes of Saxe-Merseburg often making it their summer residence. From 1789 to 1811 the Weimar court theatrical company gave performances here of the plays of Schiller and Goethe, an attraction which greatly contributed to the well-being of the town.

LAUCHSTÄDT, is a town in Germany, located in the province of Prussian Saxony, on the Laucha River, 6 miles northwest of Merseburg, accessible by train to Schafstädt. Its population was 2,034 in 1905. The town features an Evangelical church, a theater, a hydrotherapy center, and several educational institutions, including an agricultural school affiliated with the University of Halle. Local industries include malting, vinegar production, and brewing. Lauchstädt was a popular spa destination in the 18th century, often chosen as a summer residence by the dukes of Saxe-Merseburg. From 1789 to 1811, the Weimar court theatrical company performed plays by Schiller and Goethe here, which greatly contributed to the town's prosperity.

See Maak, Das Goethetheater in Lauchstädt (Lauchstädt, 1905); and Nasemann, Bad Lauchstädt (Halle, 1885).

See Maak, Das Goethetheater in Lauchstädt (Lauchstädt, 1905); and Nasemann, Bad Lauchstädt (Halle, 1885).

LAUD, WILLIAM (1573-1645), English archbishop, only son of William Laud, a clothier, was born at Reading on the 7th of October 1573. He was educated at Reading free school, matriculated at St John’s college, Oxford, in 1589, gained a scholarship in 1590, a fellowship in 1593, and graduated B.A. in 1594, proceeding to D.D. in 1608. In 1601 he took orders, in 1603 becoming chaplain to Charles Blount, earl of Devonshire. Laud early took up a position of antagonism to the Calvinistic party in the church, and in 1604 was reproved by the authorities for maintaining in his thesis for the degree of B.D. “that there could be no true church without bishops,” and again in 1606 for advocating “popish” opinions in a sermon at St Mary’s. If high-church doctrines, however, met with opposition at Oxford, they were relished elsewhere, and Laud obtained rapid advancement. In 1607 he was made vicar of Stanford in Northamptonshire, and in 1608 he became chaplain to Bishop Neile, who in 1610 presented him to the living of Cuxton, when he resigned his fellowship. In 1611, in spite of the influence of Archbishop Abbot and Lord Chancellor Ellesmere, Laud was made president of St John’s, and in 1614 obtained in addition the prebend of Buckden, in 1615 the archdeaconry of Huntingdon, and in 1616 the deanery of Gloucester. Here he repaired the fabric and changed the position of the communion table, a matter which aroused great religious controversy, from the centre of the choir to the east end, by a characteristic tactless exercise of power offending the bishop, who henceforth refused to enter the 277 cathedral. In 1617 he went with the king to Scotland, and aroused hostility by wearing the surplice. In 1621 he became bishop of St David’s, when he resigned the presidentship of St John’s.

LAUD, WILLIAM (1573-1645), was an English archbishop and the only son of William Laud, a cloth merchant. He was born in Reading on October 7, 1573. He attended Reading free school, enrolled at St John’s College, Oxford, in 1589, received a scholarship in 1590, a fellowship in 1593, and graduated with a B.A. in 1594, later earning a D.D. in 1608. In 1601, he was ordained, and by 1603, he became chaplain to Charles Blount, the Earl of Devonshire. Laud quickly positioned himself in opposition to the Calvinistic faction within the church. In 1604, he was reprimanded by the authorities for claiming in his thesis for the B.D. degree that “there could be no true church without bishops,” and again in 1606 for promoting “popish” views during a sermon at St Mary’s. Although high-church beliefs were met with resistance at Oxford, they were well-received elsewhere, leading to Laud's swift advancement. In 1607, he was appointed vicar of Stanford in Northamptonshire, and in 1608, he became chaplain to Bishop Neile, who presented him with the living of Cuxton in 1610, prompting him to resign his fellowship. In 1611, despite the influence of Archbishop Abbot and Lord Chancellor Ellesmere, Laud was appointed president of St John’s, and in 1614, he also obtained the prebend of Buckden, followed by the archdeaconry of Huntingdon in 1615, and the deanery of Gloucester in 1616. At Gloucester, he renovated the church and moved the communion table from the center of the choir to the east end, which sparked significant religious controversy and upset the bishop, who subsequently refused to enter the 277 cathedral. In 1617, he accompanied the king to Scotland, where he faced backlash for wearing the surplice. In 1621, he became the bishop of St David’s, resigning from the presidency of St John’s.

In April 1622 Laud, by the king’s orders, took part in a controversy with Percy, a Jesuit, known as Fisher, the aim of which was to prevent the conversion of the countess of Buckingham, the favourite’s mother, to Romanism, and his opinions expressed on that occasion show considerable breadth and comprehension. While refusing to acknowledge the Roman Church as the true church, he allowed it to be a true church and a branch of the Catholic body, at the same time emphasizing the perils of knowingly associating with error; and with regard to the English Church he denied that the acceptance of all its articles was necessary. The foundation of belief was the Bible, not any one branch of the Catholic church arrogating to itself infallibility, and when dispute on matters of faith arose, “a lawful and free council, determining according to Scripture, is the best judge on earth.” A close and somewhat strange intimacy, considering the difference in the characters and ideals of the two men, between Laud and Buckingham now began, and proved the chief instrument of Laud’s advancement. The opportunity came with the old king’s death in 1625, for James, with all his pedantry, was too wise and cautious to embark in Laud’s rash undertakings, and had already shown a prudent moderation, after setting up bishops in Scotland, in going no further in opposition to the religious feelings of the people. On the accession of Charles, Laud’s ambitious activities were allowed free scope. A list of the clergy was immediately prepared by him for the king, in which each name was labelled with an O or a P, distinguishing the Orthodox to be promoted from the Puritans to be suppressed. Laud defended Richard Montague, who had aroused the wrath of the parliament by his pamphlet against Calvinism. His influence soon extended into the domain of the state. He supported the king’s prerogative throughout the conflict with the parliament, preached in favour of it before Charles’s second parliament in 1626, and assisted in Buckingham’s defence. In 1626 he was nominated bishop of Bath and Wells, and in July 1628 bishop of London. On the 12th of April 1629 he was made chancellor of Oxford University.

In April 1622, Laud, following the king’s orders, got involved in a debate with a Jesuit named Percy, also known as Fisher. The goal was to prevent the conversion of the Countess of Buckingham, the favorite’s mother, to Roman Catholicism. His opinions during this time showed significant depth and understanding. While he refused to recognize the Roman Church as the true church, he acknowledged it as a true church and a part of the Catholic Church, while also stressing the risks of knowingly associating with error. Regarding the English Church, he argued that acceptance of all its articles was not essential. The cornerstone of belief was the Bible, not any single branch of the Catholic Church claiming infallibility, and when disputes over matters of faith arose, “a lawful and free council, determining according to Scripture, is the best judge on earth.” A close and somewhat unusual relationship began between Laud and Buckingham, given their different personalities and ideals, and this connection became key to Laud’s rise. The opportunity for advancement came with the death of the old king in 1625; James, despite his pedantry, was too wise and cautious to support Laud's reckless ventures, having already shown a careful moderation after establishing bishops in Scotland by not going further against the religious sentiments of the people. When Charles ascended the throne, Laud’s ambitious efforts were given free rein. He quickly prepared a list of the clergy for the king, labeling each name with an O or a P to differentiate between the Orthodox individuals to be promoted and the Puritans to be suppressed. Laud defended Richard Montague, who angered Parliament with his pamphlet against Calvinism. His influence soon expanded into state affairs. He backed the king’s authority during the conflict with Parliament, preached in support of it before Charles’s second Parliament in 1626, and aided in Buckingham’s defense. In 1626, he was appointed bishop of Bath and Wells, and in July 1628, he became bishop of London. On April 12, 1629, he was made chancellor of Oxford University.

In the patronage of learning and in the exercise of authority over the morals and education of youth Laud was in his proper sphere, many valuable reforms at Oxford being due to his activity, including the codification of the statutes, the statute by which public examinations were rendered obligatory for university degrees, and the ordinance for the election of proctors, the revival of the college system, of moral and religious discipline and order, and of academic dress. He founded or endowed various professorships, including those of Hebrew and Arabic, and the office of public orator, encouraged English and foreign scholars, such as Voss, Selden and Jeremy Taylor, founded the university printing press, procuring in 1633 the royal patent for Oxford, and obtained for the Bodleian library over 1300 MSS., adding a new wing to the building to contain his gifts. His rule at Oxford was marked by a great increase in the number of students. In his own college he erected the new buildings, and was its second founder. Of his chancellorship he himself wrote a history, and the Laudian tradition long remained the great standard of order and good government in the university. Elsewhere he showed his liberality and his zeal for reform. He was an active visitor of Eton and Winchester, and endowed the grammar school at Reading, where he was himself educated. In London he procured funds for the restoration of the dilapidated cathedral of St Paul’s.

In promoting education and exercising authority over the morals and education of young people, Laud was in his element. Many significant reforms at Oxford were due to his efforts, including the organization of the statutes, the law that made public exams mandatory for university degrees, and the rules for electing proctors. He revived the college system, moral and religious discipline, and academic dress. He founded or funded various professorships, including those for Hebrew and Arabic, and established the role of public orator. He supported both English and foreign scholars, such as Voss, Selden, and Jeremy Taylor, and founded the university printing press, obtaining a royal patent for Oxford in 1633. He also acquired over 1300 manuscripts for the Bodleian Library, adding a new wing to house his donations. His leadership at Oxford led to a significant increase in the student population. At his own college, he built new buildings and is considered its second founder. He wrote a history of his time as chancellor, and the Laudian tradition became a lasting standard of order and good governance at the university. He also demonstrated his generosity and commitment to reform in other areas. He actively visited Eton and Winchester and funded the grammar school at Reading, where he was educated. In London, he secured funds for restoring the damaged St Paul’s Cathedral.

He was far less great as a ruler in the state, showing as a judge a tyrannical spirit both in the star chamber and high-commission court, threatening Felton, the assassin of Buckingham, with the rack, and showing special activity in procuring a cruel sentence in the former court against Alexander Leighton in June 1630 and against Henry Sherfield in 1634. His power was greatly increased after his return from Scotland, whither he had accompanied the king, by his promotion to the archbishopric of Canterbury in August 1633. “As for the state indeed,” he wrote to Wentworth on this occasion, “I am for Thorough.” In 1636 the privy council decided in his favour his claim of jurisdiction as visitor over both universities. Soon afterwards he was placed on the commission of the treasury and on the committee of the privy council for foreign affairs. He was all-powerful both in church and state. He proceeded to impose by authority the religious ceremonies and usages to which he attached so much importance. His vicar-general, Sir Nathaniel Brent, went through the dioceses of his province, noting every dilapidation and every irregularity. The pulpit was no longer to be the chief feature in the church, but the communion table. The Puritan lecturers were suppressed. He showed great hostility to the Puritan sabbath and supported the reissue of the Book of Sports, especially odious to that party, and severely reprimanded Chief Justice Richardson for his interference with the Somerset wakes. He insisted on the use of the prayer-book among the English soldiers in the service of Holland, and forced strict conformity on the church of the merchant adventurers at Delft, endeavouring even to reach the colonists in New England. He tried to compel the Dutch and French refugees in England to unite with the Church of England, advising double taxation and other forms of persecution. In 1634 the justices of the peace were ordered to enter houses to search for persons holding conventicles and bring them before the commissioners. He took pleasure in displaying his power over the great, and in punishing them in the spiritual courts for moral offences. In 1637 he took part in the sentence of the star chamber on Prynne, Bastwick and Burton, and in the same year in the prosecution of Bishop Williams. He urged Strafford in Ireland to carry out the same reforms and severities.

He was far less effective as a ruler, displaying a tyrannical attitude as a judge in both the Star Chamber and the High Commission Court, threatening Felton, the assassin of Buckingham, with torture, and actively seeking a cruel sentence in the former court against Alexander Leighton in June 1630 and against Henry Sherfield in 1634. His power significantly grew after returning from Scotland, where he had accompanied the king, with his promotion to the archbishopric of Canterbury in August 1633. “As for the state indeed,” he wrote to Wentworth on this occasion, “I am for Thorough.” In 1636, the Privy Council ruled in his favor regarding his claim of jurisdiction as visitor over both universities. Soon after, he was appointed to the Treasury Commission and the Privy Council committee for foreign affairs. He had immense power in both church and state. He began to enforce the religious ceremonies and practices that he valued highly. His vicar-general, Sir Nathaniel Brent, traveled through the dioceses of his province, recording every neglect and every irregularity. The pulpit was no longer to be the main focus in the church; instead, it was the communion table. Puritan lecturers were silenced. He showed strong opposition to the Puritan Sabbath and supported the reissue of the Book of Sports, which was especially detested by that group, and he harshly rebuked Chief Justice Richardson for interfering with the Somerset wakes. He insisted on using the prayer book among English soldiers serving in Holland and forced strict adherence to it in the church of the merchant adventurers at Delft, even trying to influence the colonists in New England. He sought to pressure Dutch and French refugees in England to join the Church of England, recommending double taxation and other forms of persecution. In 1634, justices of the peace were ordered to enter homes to search for people holding conventicles and bring them before the commissioners. He enjoyed showcasing his power over the elite and punishing them in the spiritual courts for moral offenses. In 1637, he participated in the Star Chamber's sentencing of Prynne, Bastwick, and Burton, and that same year in the prosecution of Bishop Williams. He urged Strafford in Ireland to implement the same reforms and harsh measures.

He was now to extend his ecclesiastical system to Scotland, where during his visits the appearance of the churches had greatly displeased him. The new prayer-book and canons were drawn up by the Scottish bishops with his assistance and enforced in the country, and, though not officially connected with the work, he was rightly regarded as its real author. The attack not only on the national religion, but on the national independence of Scotland, proved to be the point at which the system, already strained, broke and collapsed. Laud continued to support Strafford’s and the king’s arbitrary measures to the last, and spoke in favour of the vigorous continuation of the war on Strafford’s side in the memorable meeting of the committee of eight on the 5th of May 1640, and for the employment of any means for carrying it on. “Tried all ways,” so ran the notes of his speech, “and refused all ways. By the law of God and man you should have subsistence and lawful to take it.” Though at first opposed to the sitting of convocation, after the dissolution of parliament, as an independent body, on account of the opposition it would arouse, he yet caused to be passed in it the new canons which both enforced his ecclesiastical system and assisted the king’s divine right, resistance to his power entailing “damnation.” Laud’s infatuated policy could go no further, and the etcetera oath, according to which whole classes of men were to be forced to swear perpetual allegiance to the “government of this church by archbishops, bishops, deans and archdeacons, &c.,” was long remembered and derided. His power now quickly abandoned him. He was attacked and reviled as the chief author of the troubles on all sides. In October he was ordered by Charles to suspend the etcetera oath. The same month, when the high commission court was sacked by the mob, he was unable to persuade the star chamber to punish the offenders. On the 18th of December he was impeached by the Long Parliament, and on the 1st of March imprisoned in the tower. On the 12th of May, at Strafford’s request, the archbishop appeared at the window of his cell to give him his blessing on his way to execution, and fainted as he passed by. For some time he was left unnoticed in confinement. On the 31st of May 1643, however, Prynne received orders from the parliament to search his papers, and published a mutilated edition of his diary. The articles of impeachment were sent up to the Lords in October, the trial beginning on the 12th of March 1644, but the attempt 278 to bring his conduct under a charge of high treason proving hopeless, an attainder was substituted and sent up to the Lords on the 22nd of November. In these proceedings there was no semblance of respect for law or justice, the Lords yielding (4th of January 1645) to the menaces of the Commons, who arrogated to themselves the right to declare any crimes they pleased high treason. Laud now tendered the king’s pardon, which had been granted to him in April 1643. This was rejected, and it was with some difficulty that his petition to be executed with the axe, instead of undergoing the ordinary brutal punishment for high treason, was granted. He suffered death on the 10th of January on Tower Hill, asserting his innocence of any offence known to the law, repudiating the charge of “popery,” and declaring that he had always lived in the Protestant Church of England. He was buried in the chancel of All Hallows, Barking, whence his body was removed on the 24th of July 1663 to the chapel of St John’s College, Oxford.

He was now set to expand his church system to Scotland, where during his visits the state of the churches had greatly upset him. The new prayer book and canons were created by the Scottish bishops with his help and enforced in the country, and although he wasn't officially linked to the work, he was rightly seen as its true author. The attack not only on the national religion but also on the national independence of Scotland proved to be the breaking point for a system already under strain. Laud continued to back Strafford's and the king's arbitrary actions until the very end, advocating for the strong continuation of the war alongside Strafford in the significant committee of eight meeting on May 5, 1640, and for the use of any means necessary to carry it out. "Tried all ways," his speech notes stated, "and refused all ways. By the law of God and man you should have sustenance and it is lawful to take it." Although initially opposed to the convocation sitting separately after the parliament's dissolution due to the opposition it might provoke, he still ensured the passing of new canons that both enforced his church system and supported the king’s divine right, with resistance to his power leading to "damnation." Laud's misguided policy had reached its limit, and the etcetera oath, which required entire groups of people to pledge perpetual loyalty to the "government of this church by archbishops, bishops, deans, and archdeacons, etc.," was long remembered and laughed at. His power swiftly slipped away. He was attacked and blamed as the main cause of the turmoil from all directions. In October, Charles ordered him to suspend the etcetera oath. That same month, when a mob ransacked the high commission court, he couldn't convince the star chamber to punish the offenders. On December 18, he was impeached by the Long Parliament, and on March 1, he was imprisoned in the tower. On May 12, at Strafford's request, the archbishop appeared at his cell window to bless him on his way to execution, but fainted as he passed by. For a while, he was left unnoticed in confinement. However, on May 31, 1643, Prynne was ordered by parliament to search his papers and published a censored version of his diary. The articles of impeachment were sent up to the Lords in October, and the trial started on March 12, 1644, but the attempt to charge him with high treason was unsuccessful, and an attainder was instead proposed and sent up to the Lords on November 22. In these proceedings, there was no semblance of respect for law or justice, with the Lords yielding to the threats of the Commons, who claimed the authority to declare any crimes they chose as high treason. Laud then offered the king’s pardon that had been granted to him in April 1643, but this was rejected. With some difficulty, his request to be executed by axe rather than face the usual brutal punishment for high treason was approved. He was executed on January 10 at Tower Hill, asserting his innocence of any legal offense, denying the accusation of "popery," and declaring that he had always lived within the Protestant Church of England. He was buried in the chancel of All Hallows, Barking, and his body was moved on July 24, 1663, to the chapel of St John’s College, Oxford.

Laud never married. He is described by Fuller as “low of stature, little in bulk, cheerful in countenance (wherein gravity and quickness were all compounded), of a sharp and piercing eye, clear judgment and (abating the influence of age) firm memory.” His personality, on account of the sharp religious antagonisms with which his name is inevitably associated, has rarely been judged with impartiality. His severities were the result of a narrow mind and not of a vindictive spirit, and their number has certainly been exaggerated. His career was distinguished by uprightness, by piety, by a devotion to duty, by courage and consistency. In particular it is clear that the charge of partiality for Rome is unfounded. At the same time the circumstances of the period, the fact that various schemes of union with Rome were abroad, that the missions of Panzani and later of Conn were gathering into the Church of Rome numbers of members of the Church of England who, like Laud himself, were dissatisfied with the Puritan bias which then characterized it, the incident mentioned by Laud himself of his being twice offered the cardinalate, the movement carried on at the court in favour of Romanism, and the fact that Laud’s changes in ritual, however clearly defined and restricted in his own intention, all tended towards Roman practice, fully warranted the suspicions and fears of his contemporaries. Laud’s complete neglect of the national sentiment, in his belief that the exercise of mere power was sufficient to suppress it, is a principal proof of his total lack of true statesmanship. The hostility to “innovations in religion,” it is generally allowed, was a far stronger incentive to the rebellion against the arbitrary power of the crown, than even the violation of constitutional liberties; and to Laud, therefore, more than to Strafford, to Buckingham, or even perhaps to Charles himself, is especially due the responsibility for the catastrophe. He held fast to the great idea of the catholicity of the English Church, to that conception of it which regards it as a branch of the whole Christian church, and emphasizes its historical continuity and identity from the time of the apostles, but here again his policy was at fault; for his despotic administration not only excited and exaggerated the tendencies to separatism and independentism which finally prevailed, but excluded large bodies of faithful churchmen from communion with their church and from their country. The emigration to Massachusetts in 1629, which continued in a stream till 1640, was not composed of separatists but of episcopalians. Thus what Laud grasped with one hand he destroyed with the other.

Laud never got married. Fuller describes him as “short in stature, small in build, cheerful in expression (a mix of seriousness and liveliness), with a sharp, piercing gaze, clear judgment, and (discounting the effects of age) a strong memory.” His personality, due to the intense religious conflicts associated with his name, has often been judged unfairly. His strictness came from a narrow mindset rather than a vindictive nature, and the extent of it has likely been exaggerated. His career was marked by integrity, piety, dedication to duty, courage, and consistency. It’s particularly clear that the accusation of favoritism towards Rome is unfounded. At the same time, the context of the era, the various proposals for unity with Rome, the missions of Panzani and later Conn drawing members of the Church of England—who were dissatisfied with the Puritan leanings of the time—into the Roman Church, along with Laud’s own account of being offered the cardinalate twice, the pro-Roman movement at court, and the fact that Laud’s changes in ritual, though clearly defined and restricted in his own view, leaned towards Roman practices, fully justified the suspicions and fears of his contemporaries. Laud’s complete disregard for national sentiment, believing that pure authority was enough to suppress it, is a key indication of his lack of true statesmanship. It’s widely accepted that the opposition to “innovations in religion” was a stronger motivation for the rebellion against the crown’s arbitrary power than even the infringement of constitutional liberties; thus, Laud bears a significant share of the responsibility for the ensuing disaster, even more than Strafford, Buckingham, or possibly Charles himself. He clung to the crucial idea of the English Church’s catholicity, viewing it as a part of the entire Christian church and emphasizing its historical continuity and identity since the apostles, but yet again, his policy faltered; for his authoritarian governance not only intensified and distorted the tendencies toward separatism and independence that ultimately prevailed but also alienated large groups of loyal church members from their church and their country. The emigration to Massachusetts beginning in 1629, which continued steadily until 1640, was not made up of separatists but of episcopalians. So, what Laud grasped with one hand, he effectively undermined with the other.

Passing to the more indirect influence of Laud on his times, we can observe a narrowness of mind and aim which separates him from a man of such high imagination and idealism as Strafford, however closely identified their policies may have been for the moment. The chief feature of Laud’s administration is attention to countless details, to the most trivial of which he attached excessive importance, and which are uninspired by any great underlying principle. His view was always essentially material. The one element in the church which to him was all essential was its visibility. This was the source of his intense dislike of the Puritan and Nonconformist conception of the church, which afforded no tangible or definite form. Hence the necessity for outward conformity, and the importance attached to ritual and ceremony, unity in which must be established at all costs, in contrast to dogma and doctrine, in which he showed himself lenient and large-minded, winning over Hales by friendly discussion, and encouraging the publication of Chillingworth’s Religion of Protestants. He was not a bigot, but a martinet. The external form was with him the essential feature of religion, preceding the spiritual conception, and in Laud’s opinion being the real foundation of it. In his last words on the scaffold he alludes to the dangers and slanders he had endured labouring to keep an uniformity in the external service of God; and Bacon’s conception of a spiritual union founded on variety and liberty was one completely beyond his comprehension.

Shifting to the more indirect influence of Laud on his era, we can see a narrow-mindedness and focus that set him apart from someone as imaginative and idealistic as Strafford, even though their policies may have aligned at times. The main aspect of Laud's administration was his fixation on countless details, to which he gave undue significance, lacking any inspiring overarching principle. His perspective was always fundamentally material. The only aspect of the church that was crucial for him was its visibility. This led to his strong aversion to the Puritan and Nonconformist view of the church, which did not provide a tangible or definite form. Thus, he emphasized the need for outward conformity and the importance of ritual and ceremony, which he believed should be unified at all costs, in contrast to dogma and doctrine, where he was more tolerant and open-minded, managing to win over Hales through friendly discussions and supporting the publication of Chillingworth’s Religion of Protestants. He wasn’t a bigot, but rather a strict enforcer. For him, the external form was the essential aspect of religion, taking precedence over spiritual understanding, which he viewed as the true foundation. In his final words on the scaffold, he referred to the dangers and slanders he faced while striving to maintain uniformity in the external worship of God; Bacon’s idea of a spiritual union based on variety and freedom was completely beyond his grasp.

This narrow materialism was the true cause of his fatal influence both in church and state. In his own character it produced the somewhat blunted moral sense which led to the few incidents in his career which need moral defence, his performance of the marriage ceremony between his first patron Lord Devonshire and the latter’s mistress, the divorced wife of Lord Rich, an act completely at variance with his principles; his strange intimacy with Buckingham; his love of power and place. Indistinguishable from his personal ambition was his passion for the aggrandisement of the church and its predominance in the state. He was greatly delighted at the foolish appointment of Bishop Juxon as lord treasurer in 1636. “No churchman had it,” he cries exultingly, “since Henry VII.’s time, ... and now if the church will not hold up themselves under God, I can do no more.” Spiritual influence, in Laud’s opinion, was not enough for the church. The church as the guide of the nation in duty and godliness, even extending its activity into state affairs as a mediator and a moderator, was not sufficient. Its power must be material and visible, embodied in great places of secular administration and enthroned in high offices of state. Thus the church, descending into the political arena, became identified with the doctrines of one political party in the state—doctrines odious to the majority of the nation—and at the same time became associated with acts of violence and injustice, losing at once its influence and its reputation. Equally disastrous to the state was the identification of the king’s administration with one party in the church, and that with the party in an immense minority not only in the nation but even among the clergy themselves.

This narrow materialism was the real reason for his dangerous influence in both the church and politics. In his character, it led to a somewhat blunted moral sense, causing the few incidents in his career that required moral justification, such as officiating the marriage between his first patron, Lord Devonshire, and the latter’s mistress, the divorced wife of Lord Rich—an action completely against his principles; his odd closeness with Buckingham; and his love of power and position. His personal ambition was inseparable from his desire for the church's expansion and dominance in government. He was thrilled by the foolish appointment of Bishop Juxon as lord treasurer in 1636. “No churchman held it,” he exclaimed joyfully, “since Henry VII’s time... and now if the church does not uphold itself under God, I can't do any more.” In Laud’s view, spiritual influence alone was insufficient for the church. It needed to be a guide for the nation in duty and righteousness, even extending its role into governmental matters as a mediator and moderator. Its power had to be tangible and evident, represented in significant positions of secular administration and seated in high state offices. Thus, as the church entered the political arena, it became tied to the beliefs of one political party—beliefs detested by the majority of the nation—and simultaneously became connected to acts of violence and injustice, losing its influence and reputation in the process. Equally harmful to the state was the alignment of the king’s administration with one faction in the church, particularly one that represented a vast minority not only within the nation but even among the clergy themselves.

Bibliography.—All Laud’s works are to be found in the Library of Anglo-Catholic Theology (7 vols.), including his sermons (of no great merit), letters, history of the chancellorship, history of his troubles and trial, and his remarkable diary, the MSS. of the last two works being the property of St John’s College. Various modern opinions of Laud’s career can be studied in T. Longueville’s Life of Laud, by a Romish Recusant (1894); Congregational Union Jubilee Lectures, vol. i. (1882); J. B. Mozley’s Essay on Laud; Archbishop Laud, by A. C. Benson (1887); Wm. Laud, by W. H. Hutton (1895); Archbishop Laud Commemoration, ed. by W. F. Collins (lectures, bibliography, catalogue of exhibits, 1895); Hook’s Lives of the Archbishops of Canterbury; and H. Bell, Archbishop Laud and Priestly Government (1907).

References.—All of Laud’s works can be found in the Library of Anglo-Catholic Theology (7 vols.), which includes his sermons (not particularly noteworthy), letters, history of his chancellorship, account of his troubles and trial, and his remarkable diary, with the manuscripts of the last two works being owned by St John’s College. Various modern opinions on Laud’s career can be explored in T. Longueville’s Life of Laud, by a Romish Recusant (1894); Congregational Union Jubilee Lectures, vol. i. (1882); J. B. Mozley’s Essay on Laud; Archbishop Laud, by A. C. Benson (1887); Wm. Laud, by W. H. Hutton (1895); Archbishop Laud Commemoration, edited by W. F. Collins (lectures, bibliography, catalogue of exhibits, 1895); Hook’s Lives of the Archbishops of Canterbury; and H. Bell, Archbishop Laud and Priestly Government (1907).

(P. C. Y.)

LAUD (Lat. laus), a term meaning praise, now rarely found in this sense except in poetry or hymns. Lauds is the name for the second of the offices of the canonical hours in the Roman breviary, so called from the three laudes or psalms of praise, cxlviii.-cl. which form part of the service (see Breviary and Hours, Canonical).

LAUD (Lat. laus), a word that means praise, is now rarely used in this way except in poetry or hymns. Lauds is the name for the second of the offices of the canonical hours in the Roman breviary, named after the three laudes or psalms of praise, cxlviii.-cl. that are part of the service (see Breviary and Hours, Canonical).

LAUDANUM, originally the name given by Paracelsus to a famous medical preparation of his own composed of gold, pearls, &c. (Opera, 1658, i. 492/2), but containing opium as its chief ingredient. The term is now only used for the alcoholic tincture of opium (q.v.). The name was either invented by Paracelsus from Lat. laudare to praise, or was a corrupted form of “ladanum” (Gr. λήδανον, from Pers. ladan), a resinous juice or gum obtained from various kinds of the Cistus shrub, formerly used medicinally in external applications and as a stomachic, but now only in perfumery and in making fumigating pastilles, &c.

LAUDANUM, originally referred to a well-known medical preparation created by Paracelsus, made from gold, pearls, and other ingredients (Opera, 1658, i. 492/2), but primarily containing opium as its main component. Today, the term specifically refers to the alcoholic tincture of opium (q.v.). The name was either coined by Paracelsus from the Latin laudare, meaning to praise, or it may be a corrupted version of “ladanum” (Gr. λήδανον, from Pers. ladan), a resinous substance obtained from several types of the Cistus shrub, which was once used for medicinal purposes externally and as a digestive aid, but is now primarily used in perfumes and for making fumigating pastilles, etc.

LAUDER, SIR THOMAS DICK, Bart. (1784-1848), Scottish author, only son of Sir Andrew Lauder, 6th baronet, was born at Edinburgh in 1784. He succeeded to the baronetcy in 1820. His first contribution to Blackwood’s Magazine in 1817, entitled 279 “Simon Roy, Gardener at Dunphail,” was by some ascribed to Sir Walter Scott. His paper (1818) on “The Parallel Roads of Glenroy,” printed in vol. ix. of the Transactions of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, first drew attention to the phenomenon in question. In 1825 and 1827 he published two romances, Lochandhu and the Wolf of Badenoch. He became a frequent contributor to Blackwood and also to Tait’s Magazine, and in 1830 he published An Account of the Great Floods of August 1829 in the Province of Moray and adjoining Districts. Subsequent works were Highland Rambles, with Long Tales to Shorten the Way (2 vols. 8vo, 1837), Legendary Tales of the Highlands (3 vols, 12mo, 1841), Tour round the Coasts of Scotland (1842) and Memorial of the Royal Progress in Scotland (1843). Vol. i. of a Miscellany of Natural History, published in 1833, was also partly prepared by Lauder. He was a Liberal, and took an active interest in politics; he held the office of secretary to the Board of Scottish Manufactures. He died on the 29th of May 1848. An unfinished series of papers, written for Tait’s Magazine shortly before his death, was published under the title Scottish Rivers, with a preface by John Brown, M.D., in 1874.

LAUDER, SIR THOMAS DICK, Bart. (1784-1848), Scottish author and the only son of Sir Andrew Lauder, 6th baronet, was born in Edinburgh in 1784. He inherited the baronetcy in 1820. His first contribution to Blackwood’s Magazine in 1817, titled 279 “Simon Roy, Gardener at Dunphail,” was mistakenly attributed to Sir Walter Scott by some. His paper (1818) on “The Parallel Roads of Glenroy,” published in vol. ix. of the Transactions of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, was the first to highlight the phenomenon in question. In 1825 and 1827, he published two novels, Lochandhu and The Wolf of Badenoch. He became a regular contributor to Blackwood and also to Tait’s Magazine, and in 1830 he published An Account of the Great Floods of August 1829 in the Province of Moray and adjoining Districts. His later works included Highland Rambles, with Long Tales to Shorten the Way (2 vols. 8vo, 1837), Legendary Tales of the Highlands (3 vols, 12mo, 1841), Tour round the Coasts of Scotland (1842), and Memorial of the Royal Progress in Scotland (1843). Volume 1 of a Miscellany of Natural History, published in 1833, was also partially prepared by Lauder. He was a Liberal and actively engaged in politics, serving as secretary to the Board of Scottish Manufactures. He passed away on May 29, 1848. An unfinished series of papers he wrote for Tait’s Magazine shortly before his death was published under the title Scottish Rivers, with a preface by John Brown, M.D., in 1874.

LAUDER, WILLIAM (d. 1771), Scottish literary forger, was born in the latter part of the 17th century, and was educated at Edinburgh university, where he graduated in 1695. He applied unsuccessfully for the post of professor of humanity there, in succession to Adam Watt, whose assistant he had been for a time, and also for the keepership of the university library. He was a good scholar, and in 1739, published Poetarum Scotorum Musae Sacrae, a collection of poems by various writers, mostly paraphrased from the Bible. In 1742 Lauder came to London. In 1747 he wrote an article for the Gentleman’s Magazine to prove that Milton’s Paradise Lost was largely a plagiarism from the Adamus Exul (1601) of Hugo Grotius, the Sarcotis (1654) of J. Masen (Masenius, 1606-1681), and the Poemata Sacra (1633) of Andrew Ramsay (1574-1659). Lauder expounded his case in a series of articles, and in a book (1753) increased the list of plundered authors to nearly a hundred. But his success was short-lived. Several scholars, who had independently studied the alleged sources of Milton’s inspiration, proved conclusively that Lauder had not only garbled most of his quotations, but had even inserted amongst them extracts from a Latin rendering of Paradise Lost. This led to his exposure, and he was obliged to write a complete confession at the dictation of his former friend Samuel Johnson. After several vain endeavours to clear his character he emigrated to Barbadoes, where he died in 1771.

LAUDER, WILLIAM (d. 1771), Scottish literary forger, was born in the late 17th century and educated at Edinburgh University, graduating in 1695. He unsuccessfully applied for the position of professor of humanity there, following Adam Watt, under whom he had previously worked as an assistant, and also for the job of university librarian. He was a solid scholar, and in 1739, he published Poetarum Scotorum Musae Sacrae, a collection of poems by various authors, mostly adapted from the Bible. In 1742, Lauder moved to London. In 1747, he wrote an article for the Gentleman’s Magazine to argue that Milton’s Paradise Lost was largely a copy of the Adamus Exul (1601) by Hugo Grotius, the Sarcotis (1654) by J. Masen (Masenius, 1606-1681), and the Poemata Sacra (1633) by Andrew Ramsay (1574-1659). Lauder laid out his argument in a series of articles, and in a book (1753) expanded the list of supposedly borrowed authors to nearly a hundred. However, his success was short-lived. Several scholars, who had looked into the supposed sources of Milton's inspiration independently, proved that Lauder had not only misquoted most of his references but had also inserted excerpts from a Latin version of Paradise Lost. This revelation led to his downfall, and he was forced to write a complete confession at the direction of his former friend Samuel Johnson. After several unsuccessful attempts to redeem his reputation, he emigrated to Barbados, where he died in 1771.

LAUDER, a royal and police burgh of Berwickshire, Scotland. Pop. (1901) 719. It is situated on the Leader, 29 m. S.E. of Edinburgh by the North British railway’s branch line from Fountainhall, of which it is the terminus. The burgh is said to date from the reign of William the Lion (1165-1214); its charter was granted in 1502. In 1482 James III. with his court and army rested here on the way to raise the siege of Berwick. While the nobles were in the church considering grievances, Robert Cochrane, recently created earl of Mar, one of the king’s favourites, whose “removal” was at the very moment under discussion, demanded admittance. Archibald Douglas, earl of Angus, opened the door and seized Mar, who was forthwith dragged to Lauder Bridge and there, along with six other obnoxious favourites, hanged in sight of his royal master. It was in connexion with this exploit that Angus acquired the nickname of “Bell-the-cat.” The public buildings include a town-hall and a library. The parish church was built in 1673 by the earl of Lauderdale, in exchange for the older edifice, the site of which was required for the enlargement of Thirlestane castle, which, originally a fortress, was then remodelled for a residence. The town is a favourite with anglers.

LAUDER, is a royal and police burgh in Berwickshire, Scotland. Population (1901) was 719. It’s located on the Leader, 29 miles southeast of Edinburgh by the North British railway’s branch line from Fountainhall, which is its terminus. The burgh is believed to have originated during the reign of William the Lion (1165-1214), and its charter was granted in 1502. In 1482, James III, along with his court and army, stopped here on his way to lift the siege of Berwick. While the nobles were in the church discussing grievances, Robert Cochrane, recently made Earl of Mar and one of the king’s favorites, asked to enter. Archibald Douglas, Earl of Angus, opened the door and seized Mar, who was quickly taken to Lauder Bridge and hanged there, along with six other disliked favorites, in front of the king. It was during this event that Angus earned the nickname “Bell-the-cat.” The town features public buildings such as a town hall and a library. The parish church was built in 1673 by the Earl of Lauderdale, replacing an older building whose site was needed for expanding Thirlestane Castle, which was originally a fortress and had been remodeled for use as a residence. The town is popular with anglers.

LAUDERDALE, JOHN MAITLAND, Duke of (1616-1682), eldest surviving son of John Maitland, 2nd Lord Maitland of Thirlestane (d. 1645), who was created earl of Lauderdale in 1624, and of Lady Isabel Seton, daughter of Alexander, earl of Dunfermline, and great-grandson of Sir Richard Maitland (q.v.), the poet, a member of an ancient family of Berwickshire, was born on the 24th of May 1616, at Lethington. He began public life as a zealous adherent of the Presbyterian cause, took the covenant, sat as an elder in the assembly at St Andrews in July 1643, and was sent to England as a commissioner for the covenant in August, and to attend the Westminster assembly in November. In February 1644 he was a member of the committee of both kingdoms, and on the 20th of November was one of the commissioners appointed to treat with the king at Uxbridge, when he made efforts to persuade Charles to agree to the establishment of Presbyterianism. In 1645 he advised Charles to reject the proposals of the Independents, and in 1647 approved of the king’s surrender to the Scots. At this period Lauderdale veered round completely to the king’s cause, had several interviews with him, and engaged in various projects for his restoration, offering the aid of the Scots, on the condition of Charles’s consent to the establishment of Presbyterianism, and on the 26th of December he obtained from Charles at Carisbrooke “the engagement” by which Presbyterianism was to be established for three years, schismatics were to be suppressed, and the acts of the Scottish parliament ratified, the king in addition promising to admit the Scottish nobles into public employment in England and to reside frequently in Scotland. Returning to Scotland, in the spring of 1648, Lauderdale joined the party of Hamilton in alliance with the English royalists. Their defeat at Preston postponed the arrival of the prince of Wales, but Lauderdale had an interview with the prince in the Downs in August, and from this period obtained supreme influence over the future king. He persuaded him later to accept the invitation to Scotland from the Argyll faction, accompanied him thither in 1650 and in the expedition into England, and was taken prisoner at Worcester in 1651, remaining in confinement till March 1660. He joined Charles in May 1660 at Breda, and, in spite of the opposition of Clarendon and Monk, was appointed secretary of state. From this time onwards he kept his hold upon the king, was lodged at Whitehall, was “never from the king’s ear nor council,”1 and maintained his position against his numerous adversaries by a crafty dexterity in dealing with men, a fearless unscrupulousness, and a robust strength of will, which overcame all opposition. Though a man of considerable learning and intellectual attainment, his character was exceptionally and grossly licentious, and his base and ignoble career was henceforward unrelieved by a single redeeming feature. He abandoned Argyll to his fate, permitted, if he did not assist in, the restoration of episcopacy in Scotland, and after triumphing over all his opponents in Scotland drew into his own hands the whole administration of that kingdom, and proceeded to impose upon it the absolute supremacy of the crown in church and state, restoring the nomination of the lords of the articles to the king and initiating severe measures against the Covenanters. In 1669 he was able to boast with truth that “the king is now master here in all causes and over all persons.”

LAUDERDALE, JOHN MAITLAND, Duke (1616-1682), the eldest surviving son of John Maitland, 2nd Lord Maitland of Thirlestane (d. 1645), who became the earl of Lauderdale in 1624, and Lady Isabel Seton, daughter of Alexander, earl of Dunfermline, and great-grandson of Sir Richard Maitland (q.v.), the poet, was born on May 24, 1616, at Lethington. He started his public life as a passionate supporter of the Presbyterian cause, took the covenant, served as an elder in the assembly at St Andrews in July 1643, and was sent to England as a commissioner for the covenant in August, attending the Westminster assembly in November. In February 1644, he was a member of the committee of both kingdoms, and on November 20, he was one of the commissioners tasked with negotiating with the king at Uxbridge, where he tried to convince Charles to agree to establish Presbyterianism. In 1645, he advised Charles to turn down the proposals of the Independents, and in 1647, he supported the king’s decision to surrender to the Scots. During this time, Lauderdale completely shifted his allegiance to the king’s cause, had several meetings with him, and engaged in various plans for his restoration, offering Scottish support on the condition that Charles would agree to establish Presbyterianism. On December 26, he secured from Charles at Carisbrooke “the engagement” which stipulated that Presbyterianism would be established for three years, schismatics would be suppressed, and the acts of the Scottish parliament would be ratified, with the king also promising to include Scottish nobles in public roles in England and to frequently reside in Scotland. Returning to Scotland in the spring of 1648, Lauderdale joined the Hamilton faction allied with the English royalists. Their defeat at Preston delayed the arrival of the prince of Wales, but Lauderdale met with the prince in the Downs in August, gaining significant influence over the future king. He later convinced him to accept the invitation to Scotland from the Argyll faction, accompanied him there in 1650, and during the campaign into England, he was captured at Worcester in 1651, remaining imprisoned until March 1660. He joined Charles in May 1660 at Breda, and despite opposition from Clarendon and Monk, he was appointed secretary of state. From this point on, he maintained his influence with the king, resided at Whitehall, was “never far from the king’s ear or council,”1 and defended his position against numerous opponents with a cunning skill in dealing with people, a bold unscrupulousness, and a strong will, which overcame all challenges. Although a man of significant learning and intellect, his character was notably and grossly immoral, and his unsavory and disreputable career had no redeeming qualities. He abandoned Argyll to his fate, allowed, if he didn't actively support, the restoration of episcopacy in Scotland, and after defeating all his opposition in Scotland, took over the entire administration of that kingdom, enforcing the absolute supremacy of the crown in both church and state. He restored the king’s power to nominate the lords of the articles and initiated strict measures against the Covenanters. In 1669, he could truthfully proclaim that “the king is now master here in all causes and over all persons.”

His own power was now at its height, and his position as the favourite of Charles, controlled by no considerations of patriotism or statesmanship, and completely independent of the English parliament, recalled the worst scandals and abuses of the Stuart administration before the Civil War. He was a member of the cabal ministry, but took little part in English affairs, and was not entrusted with the first secret treaty of Dover, but gave personal support to Charles in his degrading demands for pensions from Louis XIV. On the 2nd of May 1672 he was created duke of Lauderdale and earl of March, and on the 3rd of June knight of the garter. In 1673, on the resignation of James in consequence of the Test Act, he was appointed a commissioner for the admiralty. In October he visited Scotland to suppress the dissenters and obtain money for the Dutch War, and the intrigues organized by Shaftesbury against his power in his absence, and the attacks made upon him in the House of Commons in January 1674 and April 1675, were alike rendered futile by the steady support of Charles and James. On the 25th of June 1674 he was created earl of Guilford and Baron Petersham in the peerage of England. His ferocious measures having failed to suppress the conventicles in Scotland, he summoned to his 280 aid in 1677 a band of Highlanders, who were sent into the western country. In consequence, a large party of Scottish nobles came to London, made common cause with the English country faction, and compelled Charles to order the disbandment of the marauders. In May 1678 another demand by the Commons for Lauderdale’s removal was thrown out by court influence by one vote. He maintained his triumphs almost to the end. In Scotland, which he visited immediately after this victory in parliament, he overbore all opposition to the king’s demands for money. Another address for his removal from the Commons in England was suppressed by the dissolution of parliament on the 26th of May 1679, and a renewed attack upon him, by the Scottish party and Shaftesbury’s faction combined, also failed. On the 22nd of June 1679 the last attempt of the unfortunate Covenanters was suppressed at Bothwell Brig. In 1680, however, failing health obliged Lauderdale to resign the place and power for which he had so long successfully struggled. His vote given for the execution of Lord Stafford on the 29th of November is said also to have incurred the displeasure of James. In 1682 he was stripped of all his offices, and he died in August. Lauderdale married (1) Lady Anne Home, daughter of the 1st earl of Home, by whom he had one daughter; and (2) Lady Elizabeth Murray, daughter of the 1st earl of Dysart and widow of Sir Lionel Tollemache. He left no male issue, consequently his dukedom and his English titles became extinct, but he was succeeded in the earldom by his brother Charles (see below).

His power was at its peak, and his status as Charles's favorite, influenced by no sense of patriotism or government responsibility, and completely free from the English parliament, reminded everyone of the worst scandals and abuses of the Stuart rule before the Civil War. He was part of the cabal ministry but didn’t get involved much in English affairs and wasn't given the initial secret treaty of Dover. However, he personally supported Charles in his humiliating demands for pensions from Louis XIV. On May 2, 1672, he became the duke of Lauderdale and earl of March, and on June 3, he was made a knight of the garter. In 1673, after James resigned due to the Test Act, he was appointed a commissioner for the admiralty. In October, he traveled to Scotland to put down dissenters and raise funds for the Dutch War, and the plots organized by Shaftesbury against him during his absence, as well as the criticism he faced in the House of Commons in January 1674 and April 1675, were both rendered ineffective thanks to the consistent support from Charles and James. On June 25, 1674, he was made earl of Guilford and Baron Petersham in the English peerage. His harsh tactics failed to suppress the conventicles in Scotland, so in 1677, he called for a group of Highlanders to assist him in the western country. As a result, a large number of Scottish nobles came to London, allied with the English country faction, and forced Charles to disband the raiders. In May 1678, another push by the Commons to remove Lauderdale was blocked by court influence by just one vote. He continued to hold onto his victories almost until the end. In Scotland, where he traveled right after his parliamentary win, he overwhelmed all opposition to the king's demands for money. Another request for his removal from the Commons in England was quashed by the dissolution of parliament on May 26, 1679, and a renewed effort against him from the Scottish faction and Shaftesbury's group also failed. On June 22, 1679, the final attempt by the unfortunate Covenanters was crushed at Bothwell Brig. However, in 1680, failing health forced Lauderdale to resign from the position and power he had fought so hard for. His vote for the execution of Lord Stafford on November 29 also reportedly displeased James. In 1682, he lost all his offices and died in August. Lauderdale married (1) Lady Anne Home, the daughter of the 1st earl of Home, with whom he had one daughter; and (2) Lady Elizabeth Murray, daughter of the 1st earl of Dysart and widow of Sir Lionel Tollemache. He left no male heirs, so his dukedom and English titles became extinct, but his brother Charles succeeded him in the earldom (see below).

See Lauderdale Papers Add. MSS. in Brit. Mus., 30 vols., a small selection of which, entitled The Lauderdale Papers, were edited by Osmond Airy for the Camden Society in 1884-1885; Hamilton Papers published by the same society; “Lauderdale Correspondence with Archbishop Sharp,” Scottish Hist. Soc. Publications, vol. 15 (1893); Burnet’s Lives of the Hamiltons and History of his Own Time; R. Baillie’s Letters; S. R. Gardiner’s Hist. of the Civil War and of the Commonwealth; Clarendon’s Hist. of the Rebellion; and the Quarterly Review, clvii. 407. Several speeches of Lauderdal are extant.

See Lauderdale Papers Add. MSS. in Brit. Mus., 30 vols., a small selection of which, titled The Lauderdale Papers, was edited by Osmond Airy for the Camden Society in 1884-1885; Hamilton Papers published by the same society; “Lauderdale Correspondence with Archbishop Sharp,” Scottish Hist. Soc. Publications, vol. 15 (1893); Burnet’s Lives of the Hamiltons and History of his Own Time; R. Baillie’s Letters; S. R. Gardiner’s Hist. of the Civil War and of the Commonwealth; Clarendon’s Hist. of the Rebellion; and the Quarterly Review, clvii. 407. Several speeches of Lauderdale are still available.

(P. C. Y.)

Earls of Lauderdale.

Earls of Lauderdale.

Charles Maitland, 3rd earl of Lauderdale (d. 1691), became an ordinary lord of session as Lord Halton in 1669, afterwards assisting his brother, the duke, in the management of public business in Scotland. His eldest son, Richard (1653-1695), became the 4th earl. As Lord Maitland he was lord-justice-general from 1681 to 1684; he was an adherent of James II. and after fighting at the battle of the Boyne he was an exile in France until his death. This earl made a verse translation of Virgil (published 1737). He left no sons, and his brother John (c. 1655-1710) became the 5th earl. John, a supporter of William III. and of the union of England and Scotland, was succeeded by his son Charles (c. 1688-1744), who was the grandfather of James, the 8th earl.

Charles Maitland, 3rd Earl of Lauderdale (d. 1691), became an ordinary lord of session as Lord Halton in 1669, later assisting his brother, the duke, in managing public affairs in Scotland. His eldest son, Richard (1653-1695), became the 4th earl. As Lord Maitland, he served as lord-justice-general from 1681 to 1684; he was a supporter of James II. After fighting at the Battle of the Boyne, he was exiled in France until his death. This earl created a verse translation of Virgil (published 1737). He had no sons, so his brother John (c. 1655-1710) became the 5th earl. John, a supporter of William III and of the union of England and Scotland, was succeeded by his son Charles (c. 1688-1744), who was the grandfather of James, the 8th earl.

James Maitland, 8th earl of Lauderdale (1759-1839), was a member of parliament from 1780 until August 1789 when he succeeded his father in the earldom. In the House of Commons he took an active part in debate, and in the House of Lords, where he was a representative peer for Scotland, he was prominent as an opponent of the policy of Pitt and the English government with regard to France, a country he had visited in 1792. In 1806 he was made a peer of the United Kingdom as Baron Lauderdale of Thirlestane and for a short time he was keeper of the great seal of Scotland. By this time the earl, who had helped to found the Society of the Friends of the People in 1792, had somewhat modified his political views; this process was continued, and after acting as the leader of the Whigs in Scotland, Lauderdale became a Tory and voted against the Reform Bill of 1832. He died on the 13th of September 1839. He wrote an Inquiry into the Nature and Origin of Public Wealth (1804 and 1819), a work which has been translated into French and Italian and which produced a controversy between the author and Lord Brougham; The Depreciation of the Paper-currency of Great Britain Proved (1812); and other writings of a similar nature. He was succeeded by his sons James (1784-1860) and Anthony (1785-1863) as 9th and 10th earls. Anthony, a naval officer, died unmarried in March 1863, when his barony of the United Kingdom became extinct, but his Scottish earldom devolved upon a cousin, Thomas Maitland (1803-1878), a grandson of the 7th earl, who became 11th earl of Lauderdale. Thomas, who was an admiral of the fleet, died without sons, and the title passed to Charles Barclay-Maitland (1822-1884), a descendant of the 6th earl. When Charles died unmarried, another of the 6th earl’s descendants, Frederick Henry Maitland (b. 1840), became 13th earl of Lauderdale.

James Maitland, the 8th Earl of Lauderdale (1759-1839), was a Member of Parliament from 1780 until August 1789 when he inherited the earldom from his father. In the House of Commons, he actively participated in debates, and in the House of Lords, where he was a representative peer for Scotland, he was known as an opponent of Pitt's policies and the English government's stance on France, a country he visited in 1792. In 1806, he was made a peer of the United Kingdom as Baron Lauderdale of Thirlestane and briefly served as keeper of the Great Seal of Scotland. By this time, he had modified some of his political views, having helped found the Society of the Friends of the People in 1792; this change continued, and after serving as the leader of the Whigs in Scotland, Lauderdale became a Tory and voted against the Reform Bill of 1832. He passed away on September 13, 1839. He authored an Inquiry into the Nature and Origin of Public Wealth (1804 and 1819), which has been translated into French and Italian and led to a controversy with Lord Brougham; The Depreciation of the Paper-currency of Great Britain Proved (1812); and other similar writings. He was succeeded by his sons James (1784-1860) and Anthony (1785-1863) as the 9th and 10th earls. Anthony, a naval officer, died single in March 1863, ending his barony of the United Kingdom, but his Scottish earldom went to a cousin, Thomas Maitland (1803-1878), a grandson of the 7th earl, who became the 11th Earl of Lauderdale. Thomas, who was an admiral of the fleet, died without sons, and the title passed to Charles Barclay-Maitland (1822-1884), a descendant of the 6th earl. When Charles died single, another of the 6th earl’s descendants, Frederick Henry Maitland (b. 1840), became the 13th Earl of Lauderdale.

The earls of Lauderdale are hereditary standard bearers for Scotland.

The earls of Lauderdale are the hereditary standard bearers for Scotland.


1 Pepys’s Diary, 2nd of March 1664.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Pepys's Diary, March 2, 1664.

LAUENBURG, a duchy of Germany, formerly belonging with Holstein to Denmark, but from 1865 to Prussia, and now included in the Prussian province of Schleswig-Holstein. It lies on the right bank of the Elbe, is bounded by the territories of Hamburg, Lübeck, Mecklenburg-Strelitz and the province of Hanover, and comprises an area of 453 sq. m. The surface is a slightly undulating plain. The soil, chiefly alluvial, though in some places arenaceous, is generally fertile and well cultivated, but a great portion is covered with forests, interspersed with lakes. By means of the Stecknitz canal, the Elbe, the principal river, is connected with the Trave. The chief agricultural products are timber, fruit, grain, hemp, flax and vegetables. Cattle-breeding affords employment for many of the inhabitants. The railroad from Hamburg to Berlin traverses the country. The capital is Ratzeburg, and there are two other towns, Mölln and Lauenburg.

LAUENBURG, is a duchy in Germany that used to belong to Denmark along with Holstein, but from 1865 it became part of Prussia, and is now part of the Prussian province of Schleswig-Holstein. It is located on the right bank of the Elbe River and is bordered by Hamburg, Lübeck, Mecklenburg-Strelitz, and the province of Hanover, covering an area of 453 square miles. The landscape is mostly a gently rolling plain. The soil is mainly alluvial, though sandy in some areas, and is generally fertile and well-farmed, although a large portion is covered by forests and dotted with lakes. The Stecknitz canal connects the Elbe, the main river, with the Trave. The main agricultural products include timber, fruit, grains, hemp, flax, and vegetables. Dairy farming provides jobs for many residents. The railway from Hamburg to Berlin runs through the region. The capital is Ratzeburg, and there are two other towns, Mölln and Lauenburg.

The earliest inhabitants of Lauenburg were a Slav tribe, the Polabes, who were gradually replaced by colonists from Saxony. About the middle of the 12th century the country was subdued by the duke of Saxony, Henry the Lion, who founded a bishopric at Ratzeburg, and after Henry’s fall in 1180 it formed part of the smaller duchy of Saxony, which was governed by Duke Bernhard. In 1203 it was conquered by Waldemar II., king of Denmark, but in 1227 it reverted to Albert, a son of its former duke. When Albert died in 1260 Saxony was divided. Lauenburg, or Saxe-Lauenburg, as it is generally called, became a separate duchy ruled by his son John, and had its own lines of dukes for over 400 years, one of them, Magnus I. (d. 1543), being responsible for the introduction of the reformed teaching into the land. The reigning family, however, became extinct when Duke Julius Francis died in September 1689, and there were at least eight claimants for his duchy, chief among them being John George III., elector of Saxony, and George William, duke of Brunswick-Lüneburg-Celle, the ancestors of both these princes having made treaties of mutual succession with former dukes of Saxe-Lauenburg. Both entered the country, but George William proved himself the stronger and occupied Ratzeburg; having paid a substantial sum of money to the elector, he was recognized by the inhabitants as their duke. When he died three years later Lauenburg passed to his nephew, George Louis, elector of Hanover, afterwards king of Great Britain as George I., whose rights were recognized by the emperor Charles VI. in 1728. In 1803 the duchy was occupied by the French, and in 1810 it was incorporated with France. It reverted to Hanover after the battle of Leipzig in 1813, and in 1816 was ceded to Prussia, the greater part of it being at once transferred by her to Denmark in exchange for Swedish Pomerania. In 1848, when Prussia made war on Denmark, Lauenburg was occupied at her own request by some Hanoverian troops, and was then administered for three years under the authority of the German confederation, being restored to Denmark in 1851. Definitely incorporated with this country in 1853, it experienced another change of fortune after the short war of 1864 between Denmark on the one side and Prussia and Austria on the other, as by the peace of Vienna (30th of October 1864) it was ceded with Schleswig and Holstein to the two German powers. By the convention of Gastein (14th of August 1865) Austria surrendered her claim to Prussia in return for the payment of nearly £300,000 and in September 1865 King William I. took formal possession of the duchy. Lauenburg entered the North German confederation in 1866 and the new German empire in 1870. It retained its constitution and its special privileges until the 1st of July 1876, when it was incorporated with the kingdom of Prussia. In 1890 Prince Bismarck received the title of duke of Lauenburg.

The earliest inhabitants of Lauenburg were a Slav tribe, the Polabes, who were gradually replaced by settlers from Saxony. Around the middle of the 12th century, the region was conquered by the Duke of Saxony, Henry the Lion, who established a bishopric at Ratzeburg. After Henry’s downfall in 1180, it became part of the smaller duchy of Saxony, governed by Duke Bernhard. In 1203, it was taken over by Waldemar II, the King of Denmark, but in 1227 it returned to Albert, a son of the former duke. When Albert died in 1260, Saxony was divided. Lauenburg, or Saxe-Lauenburg as it's commonly called, became a separate duchy ruled by his son John, maintaining its own lines of dukes for over 400 years. One of these dukes, Magnus I (d. 1543), was responsible for introducing reformed teaching into the region. However, the ruling family became extinct when Duke Julius Francis died in September 1689, leading to at least eight claimants for his duchy, including John George III, elector of Saxony, and George William, duke of Brunswick-Lüneburg-Celle. The ancestors of both princes had made mutual succession treaties with previous dukes of Saxe-Lauenburg. Both laid claim to the territory, but George William proved to be the stronger contender and occupied Ratzeburg; after paying a significant amount to the elector, he was accepted by the locals as their duke. When he died three years later, Lauenburg passed to his nephew, George Louis, elector of Hanover, who later became King of Great Britain as George I, with his rights recognized by Emperor Charles VI in 1728. In 1803, the duchy was taken over by the French, and by 1810 it was incorporated into France. It reverted to Hanover after the Battle of Leipzig in 1813 and in 1816 was ceded to Prussia, most of it immediately being transferred by Prussia to Denmark in exchange for Swedish Pomerania. In 1848, during Prussia's war against Denmark, Lauenburg was occupied at its own request by some Hanoverian troops and then administered for three years under the authority of the German Confederation, being restored to Denmark in 1851. It was fully incorporated into Denmark in 1853 but went through another change after the brief war in 1864 between Denmark, and Prussia and Austria, leading to it being ceded along with Schleswig and Holstein to the two German powers under the peace treaty of Vienna (October 30, 1864). By the convention of Gastein (August 14, 1865), Austria relinquished her claim to Prussia in exchange for nearly £300,000, and in September 1865, King William I officially took possession of the duchy. Lauenburg joined the North German Confederation in 1866 and the new German Empire in 1870. It kept its constitution and special privileges until July 1, 1876, when it was merged into the Kingdom of Prussia. In 1890, Prince Bismarck was granted the title of Duke of Lauenburg.

See P. von Kobbe, Geschichte und Landesbeschreibung des Herzogtums Lauenburg (Altona, 1836-1837); Duve, Mitteilungen zur Kunde der Staatsgeschichte Lauenburgs (Ratzeburg, 1852-1857), and the Archiv des Vereins für die Geschichte des Herzogtums Lauenburg (Ratzeburg, 1884 seq.).

See P. von Kobbe, History and Description of the Duchy of Lauenburg (Altona, 1836-1837); Duve, Contributions to the Study of the State History of Lauenburg (Ratzeburg, 1852-1857), and the Archive of the Association for the History of the Duchy of Lauenburg (Ratzeburg, 1884 onwards).

LAUFF, JOSEF (1855-  ), German poet and dramatist, was born at Cologne on the 16th of November 1855, the son of a jurist. He was educated at Münster in Westphalia, and entering the army served as a lieutenant of artillery at Thorn and subsequently at Cologne, where he attained the rank of captain in 1890. In 1898 he was summoned by the German emperor, 281 William II., to Wiesbaden, being at the same time promoted to major’s rank, in order that he might devote his great dramatic talents to the royal theatre. His literary career began with the epic poems Jan van Calker, ein Malerlied vom Niederrhein (1887, 3rd ed., 1892) and Der Helfensteiner, ein Sang aus dem Bauernkriege (3rd ed., 1896). These were followed by Die Overstolzin (5th ed., 1900), Herodias (2nd ed., 1898) and the Geislerin (4th ed., 1902). He also wrote the novels Die Hexe (6th ed., 1900), Regina coeli (a story of the fall of the Dutch Republic) (7th ed., 1904), Die Hauptmannsfrau (8th ed., 1903) and Marie Verwahnen (1903). But he is best known as a dramatist. Beginning with the tragedy Ignez de Castro (1894), he proceeded to dramatize the great monarchs of his country, and, in a Hohenzollern tetralogy, issued Der Burggraf (1897, 6th ed. 1900) and Der Eisenzahn (1900), to be followed by Der grosse Kurfürst (The Great Elector) and Friedrich der Grosse (Frederick the Great).

LAUFF, JOSEF (1855-  ), was a German poet and playwright, born in Cologne on November 16, 1855, the son of a lawyer. He was educated in Münster, Westphalia, and after joining the army, he served as a lieutenant of artillery in Thorn and later in Cologne, where he became a captain in 1890. In 1898, he was called to Wiesbaden by the German Emperor, 281 William II., and was promoted to the rank of major to use his impressive dramatic talents at the royal theater. His literary career started with the epic poems Jan van Calker, ein Malerlied vom Niederrhein (1887, 3rd ed., 1892) and Der Helfensteiner, ein Sang aus dem Bauernkriege (3rd ed., 1896). This was followed by works like Die Overstolzin (5th ed., 1900), Herodias (2nd ed., 1898), and Geislerin (4th ed., 1902). He also wrote the novels Die Hexe (6th ed., 1900), Regina coeli (a story about the fall of the Dutch Republic) (7th ed., 1904), Die Hauptmannsfrau (8th ed., 1903), and Marie Verwahnen (1903). However, he is most renowned as a playwright. Starting with the tragedy Ignez de Castro (1894), he went on to dramatize the significant monarchs of his country, producing a Hohenzollern tetralogy that included Der Burggraf (1897, 6th ed. 1900) and Der Eisenzahn (1900), followed by Der grosse Kurfürst (The Great Elector) and Friedrich der Grosse (Frederick the Great).

See A. Schroeter, Josef Lauff, Ein litterarisches Zeitbild (1899), and B. Sturm, Josef Lauff (1903).

See A. Schroeter, Josef Lauff, A Literary Snapshot (1899), and B. Sturm, Josef Lauff (1903).

LAUGHTER, the visible and audible expression of mirth, pleasure or the sense of the ridiculous by movements of the facial muscles and inarticulate sounds (see Comedy, Play and Humour). The O. Eng. hleahtor is formed from hleahhan, to laugh, a common Teutonic word; cf. Ger. lachen, Goth. hlahjan, Icel. hlaeja, &c. These are in origin echoic or imitative words, to be referred to a Teut. base hlah-, Indo-Eur. kark-, to make a noise; Skeat (Etym. Dict., 1898) connects ultimately Gr. κλώσσειν, to cluck like a hen, κράζειν, to croak, &c. A gentle and inaudible form of laughter expressed by a movement of the lips and by the eyes is a “smile.” This is a comparatively late word in English, and is due to Scandinavian influence; cf. Swed. smila; it is ultimately connected with Lat. mirari, to wonder, and probably with Gr. μεῖδος.

LAUGHTER, the visible and audible expression of joy, pleasure, or something funny, shown through facial movements and sound (see Comedy, Play, and Humour). The Old English hleahtor comes from hleahhan, which means to laugh, a common word in Germanic languages; compare with Ger. lachen, Goth. hlahjan, Icel. hlaeja, etc. These words originally mimic sounds, linked to a Germanic root hlah-, and an Indo-European root kark-, meaning to make noise; Skeat (Etym. Dict., 1898) ultimately connects them to the Greek κλώσσειν, which means to cluck like a hen, κραυγή, to croak, etc. A soft and silent type of laughter expressed by the movement of the lips and the eyes is known as a “smile.” This word is relatively modern in English, influenced by Scandinavian; see Swed. smila; it ultimately connects to Lat. mirari, to wonder, and likely to Gr. μεῖδος.

LAUMONT, FRANÇOIS PIERRE NICHOLAS GILLET DE (1747-1834), French mineralogist, was born in Paris on the 28th of May 1747. He was educated at a military school, and served in the army from 1772-1784, when he was appointed inspector of mines. His attention in his leisure time was wholly given to mineralogy, and he assisted in organizing the new École des Mines in Paris. He was author of numerous mineralogical papers in the Journal and Annales des Mines. The mineral laumontite was named after him by Haüy. He died in Paris on the 1st of June 1834.

LAUMONT, FRANÇOIS PIERRE NICHOLAS GILLET DE (1747-1834), a French mineralogist, was born in Paris on May 28, 1747. He was educated at a military school and served in the army from 1772 to 1784, when he was appointed as an inspector of mines. In his free time, he focused entirely on mineralogy and helped organize the new École des Mines in Paris. He authored numerous mineralogical papers in the Journal and Annales des Mines. The mineral laumontite was named after him by Haüy. He died in Paris on June 1, 1834.

LAUNCESTON, a market town and municipal borough in the Launceston parliamentary division of Cornwall, England, 35½ m. N.W. of Plymouth, on branches of the Great Western and the London & South-Western railways. Pop. (1901) 4053. It lies in a hilly district by and above the river Kensey, an affluent of the Tamar, the houses standing picturesquely on the southern slope of the narrow valley, with the keep of the ancient castle crowning the summit. On the northern slope lies the parish of St Stephen. The castle, the ruins of which are in part of Norman date, was the seat of the earls of Cornwall, and was frequently besieged during the civil wars of the 17th century. In 1656 George Fox the Quaker was imprisoned in the north-east tower for disturbing the peace at St Ives by distributing tracts. Fragments of the old town walls and the south gateway, of the Decorated period, are standing. The church of St Mary Magdalen, built of granite, and richly ornamented without, was erected early in the 16th century, but possesses a detached tower dated 1380. A fine Norman doorway, now appearing as the entrance to a hotel, is preserved from an Augustinian priory founded in the reign of Henry I. The parish church of St Stephen is Early English, and later, with a Perpendicular tower. The trade of Launceston is chiefly agricultural, but there are tanneries and iron foundries. The borough is under a mayor, 4 aldermen and 12 councillors. Area, 2189 acres.

LAUNCESTON, is a market town and municipal borough in the Launceston parliamentary division of Cornwall, England, located 35½ miles northwest of Plymouth, connected by branches of the Great Western and the London & South-Western railways. Population (1901) was 4,053. It sits in a hilly area by and above the River Kensey, a tributary of the Tamar, with houses situated attractively on the southern slope of a narrow valley, topped by the ruins of an ancient castle. The parish of St Stephen is on the northern slope. The castle, which has some Norman ruins, was the residence of the earls of Cornwall and was often besieged during the civil wars of the 17th century. In 1656, George Fox, a Quaker, was imprisoned in the northeast tower for disturbing the peace at St Ives by handing out pamphlets. Remnants of the old town walls and the south gateway, dating from the Decorated period, still stand. The church of St Mary Magdalen, built of granite and richly adorned on the outside, was constructed in the early 16th century but features a detached tower from 1380. A beautiful Norman doorway, now the entrance to a hotel, has been preserved from an Augustinian priory that was established during the reign of Henry I. The parish church of St Stephen is in the Early English style, with a later Perpendicular tower. Launceston's economy is primarily agricultural, but it also has tanneries and iron foundries. The borough is governed by a mayor, four aldermen, and twelve councillors. Area: 2,189 acres.

A silver penny of Æthelred II. witnesses to the fact that the privilege of coining money was exercised by Launceston (Dunheved, Lanscaveton, Lanstone) more than half a century before the Norman conquest. At the time of the Domesday survey the canons of St Stephen held Launceston, and the count of Mortain held Dunheved. The number of families settled on the former is not given, but attention is called to the market which had been removed thence by the count to the neighbouring castle of Dunheved, which had two mills, one villein and thirteen bordars. A spot more favoured by nature could not have been chosen either for settlement or for defence than the rich lands near the confluence of the Kensey and Tamar, out of which there rises abruptly the gigantic mound upon which the castle is built. It is not known when the canons settled here nor whether the count’s castle, then newly erected, replaced some earlier fortification. Reginald, earl of Cornwall (1140-1175), granted to the canons rights of jurisdiction in all their lands and exemption from suit of court in the shire and hundred courts. Richard (1225-1272), king of the Romans, constituted Dunheved a free borough, and granted to the burgesses freedom from pontage, stallage and suillage, liberty to elect their own reeves, exemption from all pleas outside the borough except pleas of the crown, and a site for a gild-hall. The farm of the borough was fixed at 100s. payable to the earl, 65s. to the prior and 100s. 10d. to the lepers of St Leonard’s. In 1205 the market which had been held on Sunday was changed to Thursday. An inquisition held in 1383 discloses two markets, a merchant gild, pillory and tumbrel. In 1555 Dunheved, otherwise Launceston, received a charter of incorporation, the common council to consist of a mayor, 8 aldermen and a recorder. By its provisions the borough was governed until 1835. The parliamentary franchise which had been conferred in 1294 was confined to the corporation and a number of free burgesses. In 1832 Launceston was shorn of one of its members, and in 1885 merged in the county. Separated from it by a small bridge over the Kensey lies the hamlet of Newport which, from 1547 until 1832, also returned two members. These were swept away when the Reform Bill became law. Launceston was the assize town until Earl Richard, having built a palace at Restormel, removed the assize to Lostwithiel. In 1386 Launceston regained the privilege by royal charter. From 1715 until 1837, eleven years only excepted, the assize was held alternately here and at Bodmin. Since that time Bodmin has enjoyed the distinction. Launceston has never had a staple industry. The manufacture of serge was considerable early in the 19th century. Its market on Saturdays is well attended, and an ancient fair on the Feast of St Thomas is among those which survive.

A silver penny from Æthelred II shows that Launceston (Dunheved, Lanscaveton, Lanstone) had the privilege to mint money more than fifty years before the Norman conquest. At the time of the Domesday survey, the canons of St Stephen owned Launceston, while the count of Mortain owned Dunheved. The number of families living in the former isn’t specified, but it’s noted that the count moved the market from there to the nearby castle of Dunheved, which had two mills, one villein, and thirteen bordars. It’s hard to find a better spot for settlement or defense than the fertile lands where the Kensey and Tamar rivers meet, topped by the large mound on which the castle stands. It’s unclear when the canons arrived or if the count’s newly built castle replaced an earlier fortification. Reginald, earl of Cornwall (1140-1175), granted the canons jurisdiction rights over all their lands and exempted them from court appearances in the shire and hundred courts. Richard (1225-1272), king of the Romans, made Dunheved a free borough, giving the burgesses exemptions from pontage, stallage, and suillage, the right to elect their own reeves, and exemption from all legal actions outside the borough except for crown cases, along with a site for a guild hall. The borough’s rent was set at 100s. to the earl, 65s. to the prior, and 100s. 10d. to the lepers of St Leonard’s. In 1205, the market that was held on Sunday was moved to Thursday. An inquiry in 1383 revealed two markets, a merchant guild, a pillory, and a tumbrel. In 1555, Dunheved, also known as Launceston, received a charter of incorporation, with the common council consisting of a mayor, 8 aldermen, and a recorder. This governance continued until 1835. The parliamentary franchise granted in 1294 was limited to the corporation and a number of free burgesses. In 1832, Launceston lost one of its members, and in 1885 it merged with the county. Just across a small bridge over the Kensey lies the hamlet of Newport, which also returned two members from 1547 until 1832, but those were eliminated with the Reform Bill. Launceston was the assize town until Earl Richard moved it to Lostwithiel after building a palace at Restormel. In 1386, Launceston regained this privilege by royal charter. From 1715 to 1837, except for eleven years, the assize was held alternately here and at Bodmin, and since then, Bodmin has held that honor. Launceston has never had a staple industry. The production of serge was significant in the early 19th century. Its Saturday market is well attended, and an ancient fair on the Feast of St Thomas is among the traditions that continue.

See A. F. Robbins, Launceston Past and Present.

See A. F. Robbins, Launceston Past and Present.

LAUNCESTON, the second city of Tasmania, in the county of Cornwall, on the river Tamar, 40 m. from the N. coast of the island, and 133 m. by rail N. by W. of Hobart. The city lies amid surroundings of great natural beauty in a valley enclosed by lofty hills. Cora Linn, about 6 m. distant, a deep gorge of the North Esk river, the Punch Bowl and Cataract Gorge, over which the South Esk falls in a magnificent cascade, joining the North Esk to form the Tamar, are spots famed throughout the Australian commonwealth for their romantic beauty. The city is the commercial capital of northern Tasmania, the river Tamar being navigable up to the town for vessels of 4000 tons. The larger ships lie in midstream and discharge into lighters, while vessels of 2000 tons can berth alongside the wharves on to which the railway runs. Launceston is a well-planned, pleasant town, lighted by electricity, with numerous parks and squares and many fine buildings. The post office, the custom house, the post office savings bank and the Launceston bank form an attractive group; the town hall is used exclusively for civic purposes, public meetings and social functions being held in an elegant building called the Albert hall. There are also a good art gallery, a theatre and a number of fine churches, one of which, the Anglican church of St John, dates from 1824. The city, which attained that rank in 1889, has two attractive suburbs, Invermay and Trevallyn; it has a racecourse at Mowbray 2 m. distant, and is the centre and port of an important fruit-growing district. Pop. of the city proper (1901) 18,022, of the city and suburbs 21,180.

LAUNCESTON, is the second city of Tasmania, located in the county of Cornwall, on the river Tamar, 40 miles from the northern coast of the island and 133 miles by rail northwest of Hobart. The city is surrounded by stunning natural beauty in a valley bordered by tall hills. Cora Linn, about 6 miles away, features a deep gorge of the North Esk River, while the Punch Bowl and Cataract Gorge showcase the spectacular cascade where the South Esk River flows, merging with the North Esk to create the Tamar. These locations are renowned throughout Australia for their romantic scenery. Launceston serves as the commercial capital of northern Tasmania, with the river Tamar being navigable up to the town for vessels up to 4,000 tons. Larger ships anchor in midstream and transfer their cargo to smaller boats, while vessels of 2,000 tons can dock directly at the wharves connected by the railway. Launceston is a well-organized, pleasant town illuminated by electricity, featuring numerous parks, squares, and many impressive buildings. The post office, customs house, post office savings bank, and Launceston bank create an appealing group; the town hall is reserved for civic functions, while public meetings and social events take place in the elegant Albert Hall. There is also a notable art gallery, a theater, and several beautiful churches, including the Anglican Church of St. John, which dates back to 1824. The city, which gained this status in 1889, has two charming suburbs, Invermay and Trevallyn; it boasts a racecourse at Mowbray, 2 miles away, and serves as the center and port of an important fruit-growing area. The population of Launceston proper in 1901 was 18,022, while the total for the city and suburbs was 21,180.

LAUNCH. (1) A verb meaning originally to hurl, discharge a missile or other object, also to rush or shoot out suddenly 282 or rapidly. It is particularly used of the setting afloat a vessel from the stocks on which she has been built. The word is an adaptation of O. Fr. lancher, lancier, to hurl, throw, Lat. lanceare, from lancea, a lance or spear. (2) The name of a particular type of boat, usually applied to one of the largest size of ships’ boats, or to a large boat moved by electricity, steam or other power. The word is an adaptation of the Span. lancha, pinnace, which is usually connected with lanchara, the Portuguese name, common in 16th and 17th century histories, for a fast-moving small vessel. This word is of Malay origin and is derived from lanchār, quick, speedy.

LAUNCH. (1) A verb meaning originally to throw, discharge a missile or other object, also to rush or shoot out suddenly or quickly. It is especially used for the process of setting a vessel afloat from the stocks on which it has been built. The word comes from O. Fr. lancher, lancier, meaning to hurl or throw, and Latin lanceare, from lancea, meaning lance or spear. (2) The name of a specific type of boat, typically referring to one of the largest types of ships’ boats, or to a large boat powered by electricity, steam, or other means. The word comes from the Spanish lancha, meaning pinnace, which is usually linked to lanchara, the Portuguese name commonly used in 16th and 17th century literature for a fast small vessel. This word has Malay roots and is derived from lanchār, meaning quick or speedy.

LAUNDRY, a place or establishment where soiled linen, &c., is washed. The word is a contraction of an earlier form lavendry, from Lat. lavanda, things to be washed, lavare, to wash. “Launder,” a similar contraction of lavender, was one (of either sex) who washes linen; from its use as a verb came the form “launderer,” employed as both masculine and feminine in America, and the feminine form “laundress,” which is also applied to a female caretaker of chambers in the Inns of Court, London.

LAUNDRY, a place or establishment where dirty linens, etc., are washed. The word is a shortened version of an earlier form lavendry, from Latin lavanda, meaning things to be washed, and lavare, which means to wash. “Launder,” a similar shortening of lavender, refers to someone (regardless of gender) who washes linen; from this verb form came the term “launderer,” used for both males and females in America, and the feminine term “laundress,” which is also used for a female caretaker of rooms in the Inns of Court, London.

Laundry-work has become an important industry, organized on a scale which requires elaborate mechanical plant very different from the simple appliances that once sufficed for domestic needs. For the actual cleansing of the articles, instead of being rubbed by the hand or trodden by the foot of the washerwoman, or stirred and beaten with a “dolly” in the wash-tub, they are very commonly treated in rotary washing machines driven by power. These machines consist of an outer casing containing an inner horizontal cylindrical cage, in which the clothes are placed. By the rotation of this cage, which is reversed by automatic gearing every few turns, they are rubbed and tumbled on each other in the soap and water which is contained in the outer casing and enters the inner cylinder through perforations. The outer casing is provided with inlet valves for hot and cold water, and with discharge valves; and often also arrangements are made for the admission of steam under pressure, so that the contents can be boiled. Thus the operations of washing, boiling, rinsing and blueing (this last being the addition of a blue colouring matter to mask the yellow tint and thus give the linen the appearance of whiteness) can be performed without removing the articles from the machine. For drying, the old methods of wringing by hand, or by machines in which the clothes were squeezed between rollers of wood or india-rubber, have been largely superseded by “hydro-extractors” or “centrifugals.” In these the wet garments are placed in a perforated cage or basket, supported on vertical bearings, which is rotated at a high speed (1000 to 1500 times a minute) and in a short time as much as 85% of the moisture may thus be removed. The drying is often completed in an apartment through which dry air is forced by fans. In the process of finishing linen the old-fashioned laundress made use of the mangle, about the only piece of mechanism at her disposal. In the box-mangle the articles were pressed on a flat surface by rollers which were weighted with a box full of stones, moved to and fro by a rack and pinion. In a later and less cumbrous form of the machine they were passed between wooden rollers or “bowls” held close together by weighted levers. An important advance was marked by the introduction of machines which not only smooth and press the linen like the mangle, but also give it the glazed finish obtained by hot ironing. Machines of this kind are essentially the same as the calenders used in paper and textile manufacture. They are made in a great variety of forms, to enable them to deal with articles of different shapes, but they may be described generally as consisting either of a polished metal roller, heated by steam or gas, which works against a blanketted or felted surface in the form of another roller or a flat table, or, as in the Decoudun type, of a felted metal roller rotating against a heated concave bed of polished metal. In cases where hand-ironing is resorted to, time is economized by the employment of irons which are continuously heated by gas or electricity.

Laundry has become a significant industry, organized on a scale that requires sophisticated machinery, vastly different from the simple tools that used to be enough for home needs. Instead of being scrubbed by hand, stepped on by the washerwoman, or agitated with a “dolly” in the wash-tub, items are usually cleaned in rotary washing machines powered by electricity. These machines have an outer casing with a horizontal cylindrical basket inside where the clothes are placed. The basket rotates, reversing direction every few turns through automatic gears, causing the clothes to rub and tumble against each other in the soap and water held in the outer casing, which enters the inner cylinder through perforations. The outer casing includes valves for hot and cold water and discharge valves, and often has provisions for admitting pressurized steam to boil the contents. This allows for washing, boiling, rinsing, and blueing (the addition of a blue dye to counteract the yellow tint and give the linen a whiter appearance) to be done without removing the items from the machine. For drying, traditional methods of hand-wringing or using machines that squeezed clothes between wooden or rubber rollers have mostly been replaced by “hydro-extractors” or “centrifuges.” In these, wet garments are placed in a perforated basket, which is rotated at high speeds (1000 to 1500 RPM), removing up to 85% of moisture in a short time. Drying is often finished in a chamber where dry air is blown through by fans. In finishing linen, the old-fashioned laundress relied on the mangle, the only significant piece of equipment she had. In a box-mangle, items were pressed on a flat surface by rollers weighted down with a box of stones and moved back and forth by a rack and pinion. A later, more compact version allowed clothes to pass between wooden rollers or “bowls” held close together by weighted levers. A major advancement came with the introduction of machines that not only smooth and press linen like the mangle but also provide a glazed finish similar to hot ironing. These machines are essentially the same as calenders used in paper and textile production. They come in various designs to accommodate different shapes of items but generally consist of a heated polished metal roller that works against a felted surface, either another roller or a flat table, or, in the Decoudun type, a felted metal roller rotating against a heated, polished concave bed. When hand-ironing is used, time is saved by using irons that are continuously heated by gas or electricity.

LA UNION, a seaport and the capital of the department of La Union, Salvador, 144 m. E.S.E. of San Salvador. Pop. (1905) about 4000. La Union is situated at the foot of a lofty volcano, variously known as Conchagua, Pinos and Meanguera, and on a broad indentation in the western shore of Fonseca Bay. Its harbour, the best in the republic, is secure in all weathers and affords good anchorage to large ships. La Union is the port of shipment for the exports of San Miguel and other centres of production in eastern Salvador.

LA UNION, is a seaport and the capital of the La Union department in El Salvador, located 144 miles east-southeast of San Salvador. The population in 1905 was about 4,000. La Union is positioned at the base of a tall volcano, known by different names including Conchagua, Pinos, and Meanguera, and it sits on a wide indentation along the western shore of Fonseca Bay. Its harbor, which is the best in the country, is sheltered from all weather conditions and provides good anchorage for large ships. La Union serves as the shipping port for the exports of San Miguel and other production centers in eastern El Salvador.

LA UNION, a town of eastern Spain in the province of Murcia, 5 m. by rail E. of Cartagena and close to the Mediterranean Sea. Pop. (1900) 30,275, of whom little more than half inhabit the town itself. The rest are scattered among the numerous metal works and mines of iron, manganese, calamine, sulphur and lead, which are included within the municipal boundaries. La Union is quite a modern town, having sprung up in the second half of the 19th century. It has good modern municipal buildings, schools, hospital, town hall and large factories.

LA UNION, is a town in eastern Spain located in the province of Murcia, 5 miles by rail east of Cartagena and near the Mediterranean Sea. The population in 1900 was 30,275, with just over half living in the town itself. The rest are spread out among various metalworks and mines for iron, manganese, calamine, sulfur, and lead within the municipal boundaries. La Union is a relatively modern town that developed in the second half of the 19th century. It has modern municipal buildings, schools, a hospital, a town hall, and large factories.

LAURAHÜTTE, a village of Germany, in the Prussian province of Silesia, 5 m. S.E. of Beuthen, on the railway Tarnowitz-Emanuelsegen. It has an Evangelical and a Roman Catholic church, but is especially noteworthy for its huge iron works, which employ about 6000 hands. Pop. (1900) 13,571.

LAURAHÜTTE, is a village in Germany, located in the Prussian province of Silesia, 5 miles southeast of Beuthen, along the Tarnowitz-Emanuelsegen railway. It has both an Evangelical and a Roman Catholic church, but is particularly notable for its large iron works, which employ around 6,000 people. Population (1900) 13,571.

LAUREATE (Lat. laureatus, from laurea, the laurel tree). The laurel, in ancient Greece, was sacred to Apollo, and as such was used to form a crown or wreath of honour for poets and heroes; and this usage has been widespread. The word “laureate” or “laureated” thus came in English to signify eminent, or associated with glory, literary or military. “Laureate letters” in old times meant the despatches announcing a victory; and the epithet was given, even officially (e.g. to John Skelton) by universities, to distinguished poets. The name of “bacca-laureate” for the university degree of bachelor shows a confusion with a supposed etymology from Lat. bacca lauri (the laurel berry), which though incorrect (see Bachelor) involves the same idea. From the more general use of the term “poet laureate” arose its restriction in England to the office of the poet attached to the royal household, first held by Ben Jonson, for whom the position was, in its essentials, created by Charles I. in 1617. (Jonson’s appointment does not seem to have been formally made as poet-laureate, but his position was equivalent to that). The office was really a development of the practice of earlier times, when minstrels and versifiers were part of the retinue of the King; it is recorded that Richard Cœur de Lion had a versificator regis (Gulielmus Peregrinus), and Henry III. had a versificator (Master Henry); in the 15th century John Kay, also a “versifier,” described himself as Edward IV.’s “humble poet laureate.” Moreover, the crown had shown its patronage in various ways; Chaucer had been given a pension and a perquisite of wine by Edward III., and Spenser a pension by Queen Elizabeth. W. Hamilton classes Chaucer, Gower, Kay, Andrew Bernard, Skelton, Robert Whittington, Richard Edwards, Spenser and Samuel Daniel, as “volunteer Laureates.” Sir William Davenant succeeded Jonson in 1638, and the title of poet laureate was conferred by letters patent on Dryden in 1670, two years after Davenant’s death, coupled with a pension of £300 and a butt of Canary wine. The post then became a regular institution, though the emoluments varied, Dryden’s successors being T. Shadwell (who originated annual birthday and New Year odes), Nahum Tate, Nicholas Rowe, Laurence Eusden, Colley Cibber, William Whitehead, Thomas Warton, H. J. Pye, Southey, Wordsworth, Tennyson and, four years after Tennyson’s death, Alfred Austin. The office took on a new lustre from the personal distinction of Southey, Wordsworth and Tennyson; it had fallen into contempt before Southey, and on Tennyson’s death there was a considerable feeling that no possible successor was acceptable (William Morris and Swinburne being hardly court poets). Eventually, however, the undesirability of breaking with tradition for temporary reasons, and thus severing the one official link between literature and the state, prevailed over the protests against following Tennyson by any one of inferior genius. It may be noted that abolition was similarly advocated when Warton and Wordsworth died.

LAUREATE (Lat. laureatus, from laurea, the laurel tree). In ancient Greece, the laurel was sacred to Apollo and was used to create crowns or wreaths to honor poets and heroes; this practice has been widespread. The term “laureate” or “laureated” in English came to mean someone distinguished or associated with glory, whether in literature or military endeavors. “Laureate letters” in the past referred to messages announcing victories, and the title was officially given (e.g., to John Skelton) by universities to notable poets. The term “bacca-laureate” for the university degree of bachelor reflects a mix-up with a supposed origin from Lat. bacca lauri (the laurel berry), which, although incorrect (see Bachelor), conveys a similar idea. The more general use of “poet laureate” became specific in England to the role of the poet connected to the royal household, first held by Ben Jonson, for whom this position was essentially created by Charles I in 1617. (Jonson's appointment doesn’t seem to have been formally labeled as poet-laureate, but his role was comparable). This office developed from earlier traditions when minstrels and poets were part of the King’s entourage; it’s recorded that Richard Cœur de Lion had a versificator regis (Gulielmus Peregrinus), and Henry III. had a versificator (Master Henry); in the 15th century, John Kay, also a “versifier,” referred to himself as Edward IV.’s “humble poet laureate.” Furthermore, the crown expressed its support in various ways; Chaucer received a pension and a wine allotment from Edward III., and Spenser was granted a pension by Queen Elizabeth. W. Hamilton categorized Chaucer, Gower, Kay, Andrew Bernard, Skelton, Robert Whittington, Richard Edwards, Spenser, and Samuel Daniel as “volunteer Laureates.” Sir William Davenant took over from Jonson in 1638, and the title of poet laureate was officially given to Dryden in 1670, two years after Davenant’s death, along with a pension of £300 and a butt of Canary wine. The post then became a standard institution, although the pay varied, with Dryden’s successors including T. Shadwell (who started the tradition of annual birthday and New Year odes), Nahum Tate, Nicholas Rowe, Laurence Eusden, Colley Cibber, William Whitehead, Thomas Warton, H. J. Pye, Southey, Wordsworth, Tennyson, and, four years after Tennyson’s death, Alfred Austin. The office gained new prestige thanks to the personal achievements of Southey, Wordsworth, and Tennyson; it had fallen into disrespect before Southey, and after Tennyson died, there was significant sentiment that no suitable successor would be accepted (William Morris and Swinburne were hardly considered court poets). Eventually, however, the reluctance to stray from tradition for temporary reasons, and thus break the sole official connection between literature and the state, overcame objections to appointing someone of lesser talent than Tennyson. It’s noteworthy that calls for abolition also arose when Warton and Wordsworth passed away.

The poet laureate, being a court official, was considered 283 responsible for producing formal and appropriate verses on birthdays and state occasions; but his activity in this respect has varied, according to circumstances, and the custom ceased to be obligatory after Pye’s death. Wordsworth stipulated, before accepting the honour, that no formal effusions from him should be considered a necessity; but Tennyson was generally happy in his numerous poems of this class. The emoluments of the post have varied; Ben Jonson first received a pension of 100 marks, and later an annual “terse of Canary wine.” To Pye an allowance of £27 was made instead of the wine. Tennyson drew £72 a year from the lord chamberlain’s department, and £27 from the lord steward’s in lieu of the “butt of sack.”

The poet laureate, as a court official, was seen as responsible for creating formal and fitting verses for birthdays and state events; however, his role in this regard has changed over time, and the obligation ended after Pye’s death. Wordsworth insisted that, before accepting the honor, he shouldn’t be required to produce formal works; meanwhile, Tennyson was generally pleased to create many poems of this kind. The salary for the position has changed; Ben Jonson initially received a pension of 100 marks and later an annual “barrel of Canary wine.” Pye received an allowance of £27 instead of the wine. Tennyson earned £72 a year from the lord chamberlain’s office and £27 from the lord steward’s in place of the “cask of sack.”

See Walter Hamilton’s Poets Laureate of England (1879), and his contributions to Notes and Queries (Feb. 4, 1893).

See Walter Hamilton’s Poets Laureate of England (1879), and his contributions to Notes and Queries (Feb. 4, 1893).

LAUREL. At least four shrubs or small trees are called by this name in Great Britain, viz. the common or cherry laurel (Prunus Laurocerasus), the Portugal laurel (P. lusitanica), the bay or sweet laurel (Laurus nobilis) and the spurge laurel (Daphne Laureola). The first two belong to the rose family (Rosaceae), to the section Cerasus (to which also belongs the cherry) of the genus Prunus.

LAUREL. In Great Britain, at least four shrubs or small trees are called by this name: the common or cherry laurel (Prunus Laurocerasus), the Portugal laurel (P. lusitanica), the bay or sweet laurel (Laurus nobilis), and the spurge laurel (Daphne Laureola). The first two are part of the rose family (Rosaceae), under the section Cerasus, which also includes the cherry, of the genus Prunus.

The common laurel is a native of the woody and sub-alpine regions of the Caucasus, of the mountains of northern Persia, of north-western Asia Minor and of the Crimea. It was received into Europe in 1576, and flowered for the first time in 1583. Ray in 1688 relates that it was first brought from Trebizonde to Constantinople, thence to Italy, France, Germany and England. Parkinson in his Paradisus records it as growing in a garden at Highgate in 1629; and in Johnson’s edition of Gerard’s Herbal (1633) it is recorded that the plant “is now got into many of our choice English gardens, where it is well respected for the beauty of the leaues and their lasting or continuall greennesse” (see Loudon’s Arboretum, ii. 717). The leaves of this plant are rather large, broadly lance-shaped and of a leathery consistence, the margin being somewhat serrated. They are remarkable for their poisonous properties, giving off the odour of bitter almonds when bruised; the vapour thus issuing is sufficient to kill small insects by the prussic acid which it contains. The leaves when cut up finely and distilled yield oil of bitter almonds and hydrocyanic (prussic) acid. Sweetmeats, custards, cream, &c., are often flavoured with laurel-leaf water, as it imparts the same flavour as bitter almonds; but it should be used sparingly, as it is a dangerous poison, having several times proved fatal. The first case occurred in 1731, which induced a careful investigation to be made of its nature; Schrader in 1802 discovered it to contain hydrocyanic acid. The effects of the distilled laurel-leaf water on living vegetables is to destroy them like ordinary prussic acid; while a few drops act on animals as a powerful poison. It was introduced into the British pharmacopoeia in 1839, but is generally superseded by the use of prussic acid. The aqua laurocerasi, or cherry laurel water, is now standardized to contain 0.1% of hydrocyanic acid. It must not be given in doses larger than 2 drachms. It contains benzole hydrate, which is antiseptic, and is therefore suitable for hypodermic injection; but the drug is of inconsistent strength, owing to the volatility of prussic acid.

The common laurel is native to the wooded and sub-alpine areas of the Caucasus, the mountains of northern Persia, north-western Asia Minor, and the Crimea. It was introduced to Europe in 1576 and bloomed for the first time in 1583. Ray in 1688 noted that it was first brought from Trebizond to Constantinople, and then to Italy, France, Germany, and England. Parkinson in his Paradisus mentions it growing in a garden at Highgate in 1629; and in Johnson’s edition of Gerard’s Herbal (1633), it states that the plant “is now got into many of our choice English gardens, where it is well respected for the beauty of the leaves and their lasting or continual greenness” (see Loudon’s Arboretum, ii. 717). The leaves of this plant are quite large, broadly lance-shaped, and have a leathery texture, with slightly serrated edges. They are notable for their poisonous properties, emitting the smell of bitter almonds when crushed; the vapor released is enough to kill small insects due to the prussic acid it contains. When the leaves are finely chopped and distilled, they produce oil of bitter almonds and hydrocyanic (prussic) acid. Sweets, custards, cream, etc., are often flavored with laurel-leaf water, as it gives the same taste as bitter almonds; however, it should be used carefully, as it is a dangerous poison that has proven fatal multiple times. The first instance was in 1731, which led to a thorough investigation of its properties; Schrader in 1802 discovered that it contains hydrocyanic acid. The effect of distilled laurel-leaf water on living plants is to kill them just like regular prussic acid; whereas a few drops can be a strong poison to animals. It was added to the British pharmacopoeia in 1839, but is generally replaced by prussic acid. The aqua laurocerasi, or cherry laurel water, is now standardized to contain 0.1% hydrocyanic acid. It should not be administered in doses larger than 2 drachms. It contains benzole hydrate, which is antiseptic, making it suitable for hypodermic injection; however, the potency of the drug can be inconsistent due to the volatility of prussic acid.

The following varieties of the common laurel are in cultivation: the Caucasian (Prunus Laurocerasus, var. caucasica), which is hardier and bears very rich dark-green glossy foliage; the Versailles laurel (var. latifolia), which has larger leaves; the Colchican (var. colchica), which is a dwarf-spreading bush with narrow sharply serrated pale-green leaves. There is also the variety rotundifolia with short broad leaves, the Grecian with narrow leaves and the Alexandrian with very small leaves.

The following kinds of common laurel are cultivated: the Caucasian (Prunus Laurocerasus, var. caucasica), which is hardier and has rich dark green glossy leaves; the Versailles laurel (var. latifolia), which has larger leaves; the Colchican (var. colchica), which is a low-spreading bush with narrow, sharply serrated pale green leaves. There's also the variety rotundifolia with short, broad leaves, the Grecian with narrow leaves, and the Alexandrian with very small leaves.

The Portugal laurel is a native of Portugal and Madeira. It was introduced into England about the year 1648, when it was cultivated in the Oxford Botanic Gardens. During the first half of the 18th century this plant, the common laurel and the holly were almost the only hardy evergreen shrubs procurable in British nurseries. They are all three tender about Paris, and consequently much less seen in the neighbourhood of that city than in England, where they stand the ordinary winters but not very severe ones. There is a variety (myrtifolia) of compact habit with smaller narrow leaves, also a variegated variety.

The Portugal laurel is originally from Portugal and Madeira. It was brought to England around 1648, when it was grown in the Oxford Botanic Gardens. In the first half of the 18th century, this plant, along with common laurel and holly, was almost the only hardy evergreen shrubs available in British nurseries. All three are sensitive in the Paris area and, as a result, are much less common near that city than in England, where they can survive typical winters but not extremely harsh ones. There is a variety (myrtifolia) with a compact shape and smaller narrow leaves, as well as a variegated variety.

The evergreen glossy foliage of the common and Portugal laurels render them well adapted for shrubberies, while the racemes of white flowers are not devoid of beauty. The former often ripens its insipid drupes, but the Portugal rarely does so. It appears to be less able to accommodate itself to the English climate, as the wood does not usually “ripen” so satisfactorily. Hence it is rather more liable to be cut by the frost. It is grown in the open air in the southern United States.

The shiny green leaves of common and Portugal laurels make them great choices for gardens, and their clusters of white flowers are quite lovely. The common laurel often produces bland berries, but the Portugal laurel rarely does. It seems less capable of adapting to the English climate, as its wood doesn't usually mature properly. As a result, it's more susceptible to frost damage. It is cultivated outdoors in the southern United States.

The bay or sweet laurel (Laurus nobilis) belongs to the family Lauraceae, which contains sassafras, benzoin, camphor and other trees remarkable for their aromatic properties. It is a large evergreen shrub, sometimes reaching the height of 60 ft., but rarely assuming a truly tree-like character. The leaves are smaller than those of the preceding laurels, possessing an aromatic and slightly bitter flavour, and are quite devoid of the poisonous properties of the cherry laurel. The small yellowish-green flowers are produced in axillary clusters, are male or female, and consist of a simple 4-leaved perianth which encloses nine stamens in the male, the anthers of which dehisce by valves which lift upwards as in the common barberry, and carry glandular processes at the base of the filament. The fruit consists of a succulent berry surrounded by the persistent base of the perianth. The bay laurel is a native of Italy, Greece and North Africa, and is abundantly grown in the British Isles as an evergreen shrub, as it stands most winters. The date of its introduction is unknown, but must have been previous to 1562, as it is mentioned in Turner’s Herbal published in that year. A full description also occurs in Gerard’s Herball (1597, p. 1222). It was used for strewing the floors of houses of distinguished persons in the reign of Elizabeth. Several varieties have been cultivated, differing in the character of their foliage, as the undulata or wave-leafed, salicifolia or willow-leafed, the variegated, the broad-leafed and the curled; there is also the double-flowered variety. The bay laurel was carried to North America by the early colonists.

The bay or sweet laurel (Laurus nobilis) is part of the Lauraceae family, which includes sassafras, benzoin, camphor, and other trees known for their aromatic qualities. It’s a large evergreen shrub that can grow up to 60 ft tall, though it rarely takes on a true tree form. The leaves are smaller than those of other laurels, have an aromatic and slightly bitter taste, and lack the toxic properties of cherry laurel. The small yellowish-green flowers grow in clusters, either male or female, and have a simple 4-leaved perianth that contains nine stamens in the male flowers. The anthers open with valves that lift upward, similar to common barberry, and have glandular processes at the base of the filament. The fruit is a juicy berry surrounded by the persistent base of the perianth. The bay laurel is native to Italy, Greece, and North Africa, and it’s widely cultivated in the British Isles as an evergreen shrub, as it withstands most winters. Its introduction date is unknown, but it must have been before 1562, as it is mentioned in Turner’s Herbal published that year. A complete description is also found in Gerard’s Herball (1597, p. 1222). It was used to cover the floors of the homes of distinguished individuals during Elizabeth's reign. Several varieties have been cultivated that differ in foliage character, such as undulata (wave-leafed), salicifolia (willow-leafed), variegated, broad-leafed, and curled; there’s also a double-flowered variety. The bay laurel was brought to North America by early colonists.

This laurel is generally held to be the Daphne of the ancients, though Lindley, following Gerard (Herball, 1597, p. 761), asserted that the Greek Daphne was Ruscus racemosus. Among the Greeks the laurel was sacred to Apollo, especially in connexion with Tempe, in whose laurel groves the god himself obtained purification from the blood of the Python. This legend was dramatically represented at the Pythian festival once in eight years, a boy fleeing from Delphi to Tempe, and after a time being led back with song, crowned and adorned with laurel. Similar δαφνηφορίαι were known elsewhere in Greece. Apollo, himself purified, was the author of purification and atonement to other penitents, and the laurel was the symbol of this power, which came to be generally associated with his person and sanctuaries. The relation of Apollo to the laurel was expressed in the legend of Daphne (q.v.). The victors in the Pythian games were crowned with the laurels of Apollo, and thus the laurel became the symbol of triumph in Rome as well as in Greece. As Apollo was the god of poets, the Laurea Apollinaris naturally belonged to poetic merit (see Laureate). The various prerogatives of the laurel among the ancients are collected by Pliny (Hist. Nat. xv. 30). It was a sign of truce, like the olive branch; letters announcing victory and the arms of the victorious soldiery were garnished with it; it was thought that lightning could not strike it, and the emperor Tiberius always wore a laurel wreath during thunderstorms. From its association with the divine power of purification and protection, it was often set before the door of Greek houses, and among the Romans it was the guardian of the gates of the Caesars (Ovid, Met. i. 562 sq.). The laurel worn by Augustus and his successors had a miraculous history: the laurel grove at the imperial villa by the ninth milestone on the Flaminian way sprang from a shoot sent from heaven to Livia Drusilla (Sueton. Galba, i.). Like the olive, the laurel was forbidden to profane use. It was employed in divination; the crackling of its leaves in the sacred flame was a good omen (Tibull. ii. 5. 81), 284 and their silence unlucky (Propert. ii. 21); and the leaves when chewed excited a prophetic afflatus (δαφνηφάγοι, cf. Tibull. ii. 5. 63). There is a poem enumerating the ancient virtues of the laurel by J. Passeratius (1594).

This laurel is generally recognized as the Daphne of the ancients, though Lindley, following Gerard (Herball, 1597, p. 761), claimed that the Greek Daphne was actually Ruscus racemosus. For the Greeks, the laurel was sacred to Apollo, especially in connection with Tempe, where the god himself was purified from the blood of the Python in its laurel groves. This legend was dramatically reenacted at the Pythian festival held every eight years, featuring a boy who fled from Delphi to Tempe and was later brought back with songs, crowned and adorned with laurel. Similar laurel wreaths were celebrated elsewhere in Greece. Apollo, once purified, became the source of purification and atonement for others, and the laurel symbolized this power, which became widely associated with him and his temples. The relationship between Apollo and the laurel was illustrated in the legend of Daphne (q.v.). The victors in the Pythian games were crowned with Apollo's laurels, and as a result, the laurel became a symbol of victory in both Rome and Greece. Since Apollo was the god of poets, the Laurea Apollinaris naturally represented poetic achievement (see Laureate). Pliny (Hist. Nat. xv. 30) compiled the various privileges of the laurel among the ancients. It served as a sign of truce, similar to the olive branch; letters announcing victories and the insignia of triumphant soldiers were adorned with it; people believed that lightning couldn't strike it, and Emperor Tiberius always wore a laurel wreath during thunderstorms. Due to its connection to divine purification and protection, it was often placed at the entrance of Greek homes, and among the Romans, it guarded the gates of the Caesars (Ovid, Met. i. 562 sq.). The laurel worn by Augustus and his successors had a miraculous origin: the laurel grove at the imperial villa by the ninth milestone on the Flaminian way sprang from a shoot sent from heaven to Livia Drusilla (Sueton. Galba, i.). Like the olive, the laurel was restricted from everyday use. It was used in divination; the crackling of its leaves in a sacred flame was considered a good omen (Tibull. ii. 5. 81), while their silence was seen as unlucky (Propert. ii. 21); chewing the leaves generated a prophetic inspiration (laurel eaters, cf. Tibull. ii. 5. 63). There is a poem by J. Passeratius (1594) that lists the ancient virtues of the laurel.

The last of the plants mentioned above under the name of laurel is the so-called spurge laurel (Daphne Laureola). This and one other species (D. Mezereum), the mezereon, are the sole representatives of the family Thymelaeaceae in Great Britain. The spurge laurel is a small evergreen shrub, with alternate somewhat lanceolate leaves with entire margins. The green flowers are produced in early spring, and form drooping clusters at the base of the leaves. The calyx is four-cleft, and carries eight stamens in two circles of four each within the tube. The pistil forms a berry, green at first, but finally black. The mezereon differs in blossoming before the leaves are produced, while the flowers are lilac instead of green. The bark furnishes the drug Cortex Mezerei, for which that of the spurge laurel is often substituted. Both are powerfully acrid, but the latter is less so than the bark of mezereon. It is now only used as an ingredient of the liquor sarsae compositus concentratus. Of other species in cultivation there are D. Fortunei from China, which has lilac flowers; D. pontica, a native of Asia Minor; D. alpina, from the Italian Alps; D. collina, south European; and D. Cneorum, the garland flower or trailing daphne, the handsomest of the hardy species.

The last plant mentioned earlier as laurel is the spurge laurel (Daphne Laureola). This and one other species (D. Mezereum), the mezereon, are the only members of the Thymelaeaceae family found in Great Britain. The spurge laurel is a small evergreen shrub with alternate, lance-shaped leaves that have smooth edges. The green flowers bloom in early spring, forming drooping clusters at the base of the leaves. The calyx is divided into four parts and has eight stamens arranged in two circles of four within the tube. The pistil develops into a berry that starts green but eventually turns black. The mezereon blooms before its leaves appear, featuring lilac flowers instead of green ones. The bark is used to produce the drug Cortex Mezerei, which is often substituted with that of the spurge laurel. Both are highly acrid, though the spurge laurel is less so than mezereon bark. Today, it is primarily used as an ingredient in liquor sarsae compositus concentratus. Other cultivated species include D. Fortunei from China, which has lilac flowers; D. pontica, native to Asia Minor; D. alpina, from the Italian Alps; D. collina, from southern Europe; and D. Cneorum, also known as the garland flower or trailing daphne, which is the most attractive of the hardy species.

See Hemsley’s Handbook of Hardy Trees, &c.

See Hemsley’s Handbook of Hardy Trees, etc.

LAURENS, HENRY (1724-1792), American statesman, was born in Charleston, South Carolina, on the 24th of February 1724, of Huguenot ancestry. When sixteen he became a clerk in a counting-house in London, and later engaged in commercial pursuits with great success at Charleston until 1771, when he retired from active business. He spent the next three years travelling in Europe and superintending the education of his sons in England. In spite of his strong attachment to England, and although he had defended the Stamp Act, in 1774, in the hope of averting war, he united with thirty-seven other Americans in a petition to parliament against the passing of the Boston Port Bill. Becoming convinced that a peaceful settlement was impracticable, he returned to Charleston at the close of 1774, and there allied himself with the conservative element of the Whig party. He was soon made president of the South Carolina council of safety, and in 1776 vice-president of the state; in the same year he was sent as a delegate from South Carolina to the general continental congress at Philadelphia, of which body he was president from November 1777 until December 1778. In August 1780 he started on a mission to negotiate on behalf of congress a loan of ten million dollars in Holland; but he was captured on the 3rd of September off the Banks of Newfoundland by the British frigate “Vestal,” taken to London and closely imprisoned in the Tower. His papers were found to contain a sketch of a treaty between the United States and Holland projected by William Lee, in the service of Congress, and Jan de Neufville, acting on behalf of Mynheer Van Berckel, pensionary of Amsterdam, and this discovery eventually led to war between Great Britain and the United Provinces. During his imprisonment his health became greatly impaired. On the 31st of December 1781 he was released on parole, and he was finally exchanged for Cornwallis. In June 1782 he was appointed one of the American commissioners for negotiating peace with Great Britain, but he did not reach Paris until the 28th of November 1782, only two days before the preliminaries of peace were signed by himself, John Adams, Franklin and Jay. On the day of signing, however, he procured the insertion of a clause prohibiting the British from “carrying away any negroes or other property of American inhabitants”; and this subsequently led to considerable friction between the British and American governments. On account of failing health he did not remain for the signing of the definitive treaty, but returned to Charleston, where he died on the 8th of December 1792.

LAURENS, HENRY (1724-1792), American statesman, was born in Charleston, South Carolina, on February 24, 1724, to Huguenot ancestry. At sixteen, he started working as a clerk in a counting house in London, and later had great success in business back in Charleston until 1771, when he stepped back from active work. He spent the next three years traveling across Europe and overseeing his sons' education in England. Despite his strong ties to England and having defended the Stamp Act in 1774 to try to prevent war, he joined thirty-seven other Americans in a petition to parliament against the Boston Port Bill. Realizing that a peaceful resolution was unlikely, he returned to Charleston at the end of 1774 and allied himself with the conservative side of the Whig party. He quickly became president of the South Carolina council of safety and in 1776 was elected vice president of the state. That same year, he was sent as a delegate from South Carolina to the Continental Congress in Philadelphia, where he served as president from November 1777 until December 1778. In August 1780, he began a mission to negotiate a ten million dollar loan for Congress in Holland; however, he was captured on September 3 off the coast of Newfoundland by the British frigate “Vestal,” taken to London, and closely imprisoned in the Tower. His documents revealed a draft treaty between the United States and Holland proposed by William Lee, who was working for Congress, and Jan de Neufville, acting on behalf of Mynheer Van Berckel, the pensionary of Amsterdam, which ultimately contributed to war between Great Britain and the United Provinces. His health seriously deteriorated during his imprisonment. On December 31, 1781, he was released on parole and was eventually exchanged for Cornwallis. In June 1782, he was appointed one of the American commissioners to negotiate peace with Great Britain, but he didn't arrive in Paris until November 28, 1782, just two days before he, John Adams, Franklin, and Jay signed the preliminary peace agreements. On that day, he made sure to include a clause preventing the British from “carrying away any negroes or other property of American inhabitants,” which later caused significant tension between the British and American governments. Due to declining health, he did not stay for the signing of the final treaty and returned to Charleston, where he passed away on December 8, 1792.

His son, John Laurens (1754-1782), American revolutionary officer, was born at Charleston, South Carolina, on the 28th of October 1754. He was educated in England, and on his return to America in 1777, in the height of the revolutionary struggle, he joined Washington’s staff. He soon gained his commander’s confidence, which he reciprocated with the most devoted attachment, and was entrusted with the delicate duties of a confidential secretary, which he performed with much tact and skill. He was present in all Washington’s battles, from Brandywine to Yorktown, and his gallantry on every occasion has gained him the title of “the Bayard of the Revolution.” Laurens displayed bravery even to rashness in the storming of the Chew mansion at Germantown; at Monmouth, where he saved Washington’s life, and was himself severely wounded; and at Coosahatchie, where, with a handful of men, he defended a pass against a large English force under General Augustine Prevost, and was again wounded. He fought a duel against General Charles Lee, and wounded him, on account of that officer’s disrespectful conduct towards Washington. Laurens distinguished himself further at Savannah, and at the siege of Charleston in 1780. After the capture of Charleston by the English, he rejoined Washington, and was selected by him as a special envoy to appeal to the king of France for supplies for the relief of the American armies, which had been brought by prolonged service and scanty pay to the verge of dissolution. The more active co-operation of the French fleets with the land forces in Virginia, which was one result of his mission, brought about the disaster of Cornwallis at Yorktown. Laurens lost no time in rejoining the army, and at Yorktown was at the head of an American storming party which captured an advanced redoubt. Laurens was designated with the vicomte de Noailles to arrange the terms of the surrender, which virtually ended the war, although desultory skirmishing, especially in the South, attended the months of delay before peace was formally concluded. In one of these trifling affairs on the 27th of August 1782, on the Combahee river, Laurens exposed himself needlessly and was killed. Washington lamented deeply the death of Laurens, saying of him, “He had not a fault that I could discover, unless it were intrepidity bordering upon rashness.”

His son, John Laurens (1754-1782), an American revolutionary officer, was born in Charleston, South Carolina, on October 28, 1754. He was educated in England, and when he returned to America in 1777, during the height of the revolutionary struggle, he joined Washington’s staff. He quickly earned his commander’s trust, which was reciprocated with deep loyalty, and was given the sensitive role of a confidential secretary, which he handled with great tact and skill. He participated in all of Washington’s battles, from Brandywine to Yorktown, and his bravery in every situation earned him the nickname “the Bayard of the Revolution.” Laurens exhibited bravery even bordering on recklessness during the attack on the Chew mansion at Germantown; at Monmouth, where he saved Washington’s life and was himself badly wounded; and at Coosahatchie, where he defended a pass with a small group of men against a large British force led by General Augustine Prevost, and was wounded again. He fought a duel with General Charles Lee, injuring him due to that officer’s disrespectful behavior towards Washington. Laurens further distinguished himself at Savannah and during the siege of Charleston in 1780. After the British captured Charleston, he rejoined Washington and was chosen by him as a special envoy to appeal to the king of France for supplies to support the American armies, which had been pushed to the brink of collapse due to prolonged service and inadequate pay. The more active collaboration of the French fleets with the land forces in Virginia, which stemmed from his mission, led to Cornwallis’s defeat at Yorktown. Laurens didn’t waste any time rejoining the army, and at Yorktown, he led an American storming party that captured an advanced redoubt. Laurens was paired with the vicomte de Noailles to negotiate the terms of surrender, which effectively ended the war, although sporadic skirmishes, particularly in the South, continued for months before peace was officially reached. In one of these minor confrontations on August 27, 1782, at the Combahee River, Laurens unnecessarily put himself at risk and was killed. Washington was deeply saddened by Laurens's death, saying, “He had no fault that I could find, except for bravery that bordered on recklessness.”

The most valuable of Henry Laurens’s papers and pamphlets including the important “Narrative of the Capture of Henry Laurens, of his Confinement in the Tower of London, &c., 1780, 1781, 1782,” in vol. i. (Charleston, 1857) of the Society’s Collections, have been published by the South Carolina Historical Society. John Laurens’s military correspondence, with a brief memoir by W. G. Simms, was privately printed by the Bradford Club, New York, in 1867.

The most valuable papers and pamphlets of Henry Laurens, including the important "Narrative of the Capture of Henry Laurens, of his Confinement in the Tower of London, etc., 1780, 1781, 1782," are published in vol. i. (Charleston, 1857) of the Society’s Collections by the South Carolina Historical Society. John Laurens’s military correspondence, with a brief memoir by W. G. Simms, was privately printed by the Bradford Club in New York in 1867.

LAURENT, FRANÇOIS (1810-1887), Belgian historian and jurisconsult, was born at Luxemburg on the 8th of July 1810. He held a high appointment in the ministry of justice for some time before he became professor of civil law in the university of Ghent in 1836. His advocacy of liberal and anti-clerical principles both from his chair and in the press made him bitter enemies, but he retained his position until his death on the 11th of February 1887. He treated the relations of church and state in L’Église et l’état (Brussels, 3 vols., 1858-1862; new and revised edition, 1865), and the same subject occupied a large proportion of the eighteen volumes of his chief historical work, Études sur l’histoire de l’humanité (Ghent and Brussels, 1855-1870), which aroused considerable interest beyond the boundaries of Belgium. His fame as a lawyer rests on his authoritative exposition of the Code Napoléon in his Principes de droit civil (Brussels, 33 vols., 1869-1878), and his Droit civil international (Brussels, 8 vols., 1880-1881). He was charged in 1879 by the minister of justice with the preparation of a report on the proposed revision of the civil code. Besides his anti-clerical pamphlets his minor writings include much discussion of social questions, of the organization of savings banks, asylums, &c., and he founded the Société Callier for the encouragement of thrift among the working classes. With Gustave Callier, whose funeral in 1863 was made the occasion of a display of clerical intolerance, Laurent had much in common, and the efforts of the society were directed to the continuation of Callier’s philanthropic schemes.

LAURENT, FRANÇOIS (1810-1887), Belgian historian and lawyer, was born in Luxembourg on July 8, 1810. He held a senior position in the Ministry of Justice for a while before becoming a professor of civil law at the University of Ghent in 1836. His support for liberal and anti-clerical ideas, both in his lectures and in the press, earned him fierce opponents, but he maintained his role until his death on February 11, 1887. He explored the relationship between church and state in L’Église et l’état (Brussels, 3 vols., 1858-1862; new and revised edition, 1865), and this topic took up a significant part of the eighteen volumes of his main historical work, Études sur l’histoire de l’humanité (Ghent and Brussels, 1855-1870), which gained considerable attention beyond Belgium. His reputation as a lawyer is based on his authoritative analysis of the Code Napoléon in his Principes de droit civil (Brussels, 33 vols., 1869-1878) and his Droit civil international (Brussels, 8 vols., 1880-1881). In 1879, he was tasked by the Minister of Justice with preparing a report on the proposed revision of the civil code. Besides his anti-clerical pamphlets, his shorter writings cover a lot of social issues, including the organization of savings banks, asylums, etc., and he established the Société Callier to promote savings among the working class. He had much in common with Gustave Callier, whose funeral in 1863 became a showcase for clerical intolerance, and the society’s efforts aimed to continue Callier’s philanthropic initiatives.

For a complete list of his works, see G. Koninck, Bibliographie nationale (Brussels, vol. ii., 1892).

For a complete list of his works, check out G. Koninck, Bibliographie nationale (Brussels, vol. ii., 1892).

285

285

LAURENTINA, VIA, an ancient road of Italy, leading southwards from Rome. The question of the nomenclature of the group of roads between the Via Ardeatina and the Via Ostiensis is somewhat difficult, and much depends on the view taken as to the site of Laurentum. It seems probable, however, that the Via Laurentina proper is that which led out of the Porta Ardeatina of the Aurelian wall and went direct to Tor Paterno, while the road branching from the Via Ostiensis at the third mile, and leading past Decimo to Lavinium (Pratica), which crosses the other road at right angles not far from its destination (the Laurentina there running S.W. and that to Lavinium S.E.) may for convenience be called Lavinatis, though this name does not occur in ancient times. On this latter road, beyond Decimo, two milestones, one of Tiberius, the other of Maxentius, each bearing the number 11, have been found; and farther on, at Capocotta, traces of ancient buildings, and an important sepulchral inscription of a Jewish ruler of a synagogue have come to light. That the Via Laurentina was near the Via Ardeatina is clear from the fact that the same contractor was responsible for both roads. Laurentum was also accessible by a branch from the Via Ostiensis at the eighth mile (at Malafede) leading past Castel Porziano, the royal hunting-lodge, which is identical with the ancient Ager Solonius (in which, Festus tells us, was situated the Pomonal or sacred grove of Pomona) and which later belonged to Marius.

LAURENTINA, VIA, an old road in Italy that runs south from Rome. The naming of the group of roads between the Via Ardeatina and the Via Ostiensis is a bit tricky, and it largely depends on where you think Laurentum was located. However, it seems likely that the main Via Laurentina is the one that started from the Porta Ardeatina of the Aurelian wall and went straight to Tor Paterno. There's also a road that branches off from the Via Ostiensis at the third mile, leading past Decimo to Lavinium (Pratica), which crosses the other road at a right angle not far from its end (with the Laurentina running southwest and the road to Lavinium running southeast). For convenience, we can call this road Lavinatis, even though that name isn’t found in ancient texts. On this second road, beyond Decimo, two milestones have been discovered—one from Tiberius and the other from Maxentius—each marked with the number 11. Further along, at Capocotta, remnants of ancient buildings and an important grave inscription from a Jewish synagogue leader have been uncovered. It’s evident that the Via Laurentina was close to the Via Ardeatina since the same contractor built both roads. Laurentum was also reachable via a branch from the Via Ostiensis at the eighth mile (at Malafede), which ran past Castel Porziano, the royal hunting lodge. This location is the same as the ancient Ager Solonius (where, as Festus tells us, there was the sacred grove of Pomona) and later became property of Marius.

See R. Lanciani in articles quoted under Lavinium.

See R. Lanciani in the articles referenced under Lavinium.

(T. As.)

LAURENTIUS, PAUL (1554-1624), Lutheran divine, was born on the 30th of March 1554 at Ober Wierau, where his father, of the same names, was pastor. From a school at Zwickau he entered (1573) the university of Leipzig, graduating in 1577. In 1578 he became rector of the Martin school at Halberstadt; in 1583 he was appointed town’s preacher at Plauen-im-Vogtland, and in 1586 superintendent at Oelnitz. On the 20th of October 1595 he took his doctorate in theology at Jena, his thesis on the Symbolum Athanasii (1597), gaining him similar honours at Wittenberg and Leipzig. He was promoted (1605) to be pastor and superintendent at Dresden, and transferred (1616) to the superintendence at Meissen, where he died on the 24th of February 1624. His works consist chiefly of commentaries and expository discourses on prophetic books of the Old Testament, parts of the Psalter, the Lord’s Prayer and the history of the Passion. In two orations he compared Luther to Elijah. Besides theological works he was the author of a Spicilegium Gnomonologicum (1612).

LAURENTIUS, PAUL (1554-1624), Lutheran theologian, was born on March 30, 1554, in Ober Wierau, where his father, who shared his name, was a pastor. After attending a school in Zwickau, he entered the University of Leipzig in 1573, graduating in 1577. In 1578, he became the rector of the Martin school in Halberstadt; in 1583, he was appointed town preacher in Plauen-im-Vogtland, and in 1586, he became superintendent in Oelnitz. On October 20, 1595, he earned his doctorate in theology at Jena, with his thesis on the Symbolum Athanasii (1597), which also brought him similar honors at Wittenberg and Leipzig. He was promoted in 1605 to pastor and superintendent in Dresden and transferred in 1616 to the superintendence in Meissen, where he died on February 24, 1624. His works mainly include commentaries and expository discourses on the prophetic books of the Old Testament, parts of the Psalter, the Lord’s Prayer, and the history of the Passion. In two speeches, he compared Luther to Elijah. Besides theological works, he authored a Spicilegium Gnomonologicum (1612).

The main authority is C. Schlegel, the historian of the Dresden superintendents (1698), summarized by H. W. Rotermund, in the additions (1810) to Jöcher, Gelehrten-Lexicon (1750).

The primary source is C. Schlegel, the historian of the Dresden superintendents (1698), summarized by H. W. Rotermund in the additions (1810) to Jöcher, Gelehrten-Lexicon (1750).

(A. Go.*)

LAURIA (Luria or Loria) ROGER DE (d. 1305), admiral of Aragon and Sicily, was the most prominent figure in the naval war which arose directly from the Sicilian Vespers. Nothing is really known of his life before he was named admiral in 1283. His father was a supporter of the Hohenstaufen, and his mother came to Spain with Costanza, the daughter of Manfred of Beneventum, when she married Peter, the eldest son and heir of James the Conqueror of Aragon. According to one account Bella of Lauria, the admiral’s mother, had been the foster mother of Costanza. Roger, who accompanied his mother, was bred at the court of Aragon and endowed with lands in the newly conquered kingdom of Valencia. When the misrule of Charles of Anjou’s French followers had produced the famous revolt known as the Sicilian Vespers in 1282, Roger de Lauria accompanied King Peter III. of Aragon on the expedition which under the cover of an attack on the Moorish kingdom of Tunis was designed to be an attempt to obtain possession of all or at least part of the Hohenstaufen dominions in Naples and Sicily which the king claimed by right of his wife as the heiress of Manfred. In 1283, when the island had put itself under the protection of Peter III. and had crowned him king, he gave the command of his fleet to Roger de Lauria. The commission speaks of him in the most laudatory terms, but makes no reference to previous military services.

LAURIA (Luria or Loria) ROGER D (d. 1305), admiral of Aragon and Sicily, was the most notable figure in the naval conflict that arose directly from the Sicilian Vespers. Little is known about his life before he became admiral in 1283. His father supported the Hohenstaufen dynasty, and his mother moved to Spain with Costanza, the daughter of Manfred of Beneventum, when she married Peter, the eldest son and heir of James the Conqueror of Aragon. According to one account, Bella of Lauria, the admiral’s mother, had been Costanza's foster mother. Roger, who traveled with his mother, was raised at the court of Aragon and given land in the newly conquered kingdom of Valencia. When the mismanagement of Charles of Anjou’s French followers sparked the famous revolt known as the Sicilian Vespers in 1282, Roger de Lauria joined King Peter III of Aragon on an expedition that was intended to be a cover for an attack on the Moorish kingdom of Tunis, aimed at reclaiming all or part of the Hohenstaufen territories in Naples and Sicily, which the king claimed through his wife as the heiress of Manfred. In 1283, after the island had placed itself under Peter III’s protection and crowned him king, he entrusted the command of his fleet to Roger de Lauria. The commission describes him in very flattering terms but does not refer to any previous military accomplishments.

From this time forward till the peace of Calatabellota in 1303, Roger de Lauria was the ever victorious leader of fleets in the service of Aragon, both in the waters of southern Italy and on the coast of Catalonia. In the year of his appointment he defeated a French naval force in the service of Charles of Anjou, off Malta. The main object before him was to repel the efforts of the Angevine party to reconquer Sicily and then to carry the war into their dominions in Naples. Although Roger de Lauria did incidental fighting on shore, he was as much a naval officer as any modern admiral, and his victories were won by good manœuvring and by discipline. The Catalan squadron, on which the Sicilian was moulded, was in a state of high and intelligent efficiency. Its chiefs relied not on merely boarding, and the use of the sword, as the French forces of Charles of Anjou did, but on the use of the ram, and of the powerful cross-bows used by the Catalans either by hand or, in case of the larger ones, mounted on the bulwarks, with great skill. The conflict was in fact the equivalent on the water of the battles between the English bowmen and the disorderly chivalry of France in the Hundred Years’ War. In 1284 Roger defeated the Angevine fleet in the Bay of Naples, taking prisoner the heir to the kingdom, Charles of Salerno, who remained a prisoner in the hands of the Aragonese in Sicily, and later in Spain, for years. In 1285 he fought on the coast of Catalonia one of the most brilliant campaigns in all naval history. The French king Philippe le Hardi had invaded Catalonia with a large army to which the pope gave the character of crusaders, in order to support his cousin of Anjou in his conflict with the Aragonese. The king, Peter III., had offended his nobles by his vigorous exercise of the royal authority, and received little support from them, but the outrages perpetrated by the French invaders raised the towns and country against them. The invaders advanced slowly, taking the obstinately defended towns one by one, and relying on the co-operation of a large number of allies, who were stationed in squadrons along the coast, and who brought stores and provisions from Narbonne and Aigues Mortes. They relied in fact wholly on their fleet for their existence. A successful blow struck at that would force them to retreat. King Peter was compelled to risk Sicily for a time, and he recalled Roger de Lauria from Palermo to the coast of Catalonia. The admiral reached Barcelona on the 24th of August, and was informed of the disposition of the French. He saw that if he could break the centre of their line of squadrons, stretched as it was so far that its general superiority of numbers was lost in the attempt to occupy the whole of the coast, he could then dispose of the extremities in detail. On the night of the 9th of September he fell on the central squadron of the French fleet near the Hormigas. The Catalan and Sicilian squadrons doubled on the end of the enemies’ line, and by a vigorous employment of the ram, as well as by the destructive shower of bolts from the cross-bows, which cleared the decks of the French, gained a complete victory. The defeat of the enemy was followed, as usually in medieval naval wars, by a wholesale massacre. Roger then made for Rosas, and tempted out the French squadron stationed there by approaching under French colours. In the open it was beaten in its turn. The result was the capture of the town, and of the stores collected there by King Philippe for the support of his army. Within a short time he was forced to retreat amid sufferings from hunger, and the incessant attacks of the Catalan mountaineers, by which his army was nearly annihilated. This campaign, which was followed up by destructive attacks on the French coast, saved Catalonia from the invaders, and completely ruined the French naval power for the time being. No medieval admiral of any nation displayed an equal combination of intellect and energy, and none of modern times has surpassed it. The work had been so effectually done on the coast of Catalonia that Roger de Lauria was able to return to Sicily, and resume his command in the struggle of Aragonese and Angevine to gain, or to hold, the possession of Naples.

From this point until the peace of Calatabellota in 1303, Roger de Lauria was the consistently victorious commander of fleets serving Aragon, operating in the waters of southern Italy and off the coast of Catalonia. In the year he was appointed, he defeated a French naval force under Charles of Anjou near Malta. His main goal was to thwart the Angevine efforts to reclaim Sicily and then to extend the war into their territories in Naples. Although Roger de Lauria engaged in some land battles, he was as much a naval commander as any modern admiral, winning victories through skilled maneuvers and discipline. The Catalan squadron, which the Sicilian force was modeled after, was highly efficient and intelligently organized. Its leaders relied not just on boarding and sword fighting, as the French forces did, but on using rams and powerful crossbows handled skillfully by the Catalans, either by hand or mounted on the sides of ships. The naval battles were essentially the maritime equivalent of the skirmishes between English archers and the disorganized knights of France during the Hundred Years’ War. In 1284, Roger defeated the Angevine fleet in the Bay of Naples, capturing the heir to the throne, Charles of Salerno, who remained a captive of the Aragonese in Sicily and later in Spain for many years. In 1285, he led one of the most brilliant naval campaigns in history along the coast of Catalonia. The French king, Philippe le Hardi, had invaded Catalonia with a large army that was given the status of crusaders by the pope to support his cousin from Anjou in the fight against the Aragonese. King Peter III had upset his nobles with his strong royal authority and received limited support from them, but the atrocities committed by the French invaders rallied the towns and countryside against them. The invaders moved slowly, capturing stubbornly defended towns one by one and relying on numerous allies stationed along the coast, who brought supplies from Narbonne and Aigues Mortes. They were essentially dependent on their fleet for survival; a solid blow to it would force them to withdraw. King Peter was forced to put Sicily at risk temporarily and recalled Roger de Lauria from Palermo to the Catalonian coast. The admiral arrived in Barcelona on August 24th and learned about the French forces’ positions. He realized that if he could break through the center of their line of ships, which was spread out so thinly that its numerical superiority was lost in trying to cover the entire coast, he could handle the flanks individually. On the night of September 9th, he attacked the central squadron of the French fleet near the Hormigas. The Catalan and Sicilian squadrons attacked the end of the enemy line, and through aggressive use of rams, along with a devastating barrage of bolts from the crossbows that cleared the French decks, they achieved a complete victory. The enemy's defeat was followed, as was typical in medieval naval battles, by widespread slaughter. Roger then headed towards Rosas and lured out the French squadron there by approaching under French colors. In open waters, it was subsequently defeated. This resulted in the capture of the town and the supplies gathered by King Philippe for his army. Soon after, he had to retreat, suffering from hunger and the constant attacks of the Catalan mountain fighters, which almost annihilated his army. This campaign, which was followed by destructive assaults on the French coast, saved Catalonia from the invaders and significantly weakened the French naval power at the time. No medieval admiral of any nation showed a comparable mix of intelligence and energy, and none in modern times has exceeded it. The work done along the coast of Catalonia was so thoroughly accomplished that Roger de Lauria was able to return to Sicily and resume his command in the ongoing struggle between Aragonese and Angevine forces for control of Naples.

He maintained his reputation and was uniformly successful in his battles at sea, but they were not always fought for the defence of Sicily. The death of Peter III. in 1286 and of his 286 eldest son Alphonso in the following year caused a division among the members of the house of Aragon. The new king, James, would have given up Sicily to the Angevine line with which he made peace and alliance, but his younger brother Fadrique accepted the crown offered him by the Sicilians, and fought for his own hand against both the Angevines and his senior. King James tried to force him to submission without success. Roger de Lauria adhered for a time to Fadrique, but his arrogant temper made him an intolerable supporter, and he appears, moreover, to have thought that he was bound to obey the king of Aragon. His large estates in Valencia gave him a strong reason for not offending that sovereign. He therefore left Fadrique, who confiscated his estates in Sicily and put one of his nephews to death as a traitor. For this Roger de Lauria took a ferocious revenge in two successive victories at sea over the Sicilians. When the war, which had become a ravening of wild beasts, was at last ended by the peace of Calatabellota, Roger de Lauria retired to Valencia, where he died on the 2nd of January 1305, and was buried, by his express orders, in the church of Santas Creus, a now deserted monastery of the Cistercians, at the feet of his old master Peter III. In his ferocity, and his combination of loyalty to his feudal lord with utter want of scruple to all other men, Roger belonged to his age. As a captain he was far above his contemporaries and his successors for many generations.

He kept his reputation intact and consistently succeeded in his sea battles, but not all of them were fought to defend Sicily. The death of Peter III in 1286 and that of his eldest son Alphonso the following year caused a split among the members of the house of Aragon. The new king, James, was considering giving up Sicily to the Angevins, with whom he made peace and formed an alliance, but his younger brother Fadrique accepted the crown offered to him by the Sicilians and fought for his own interests against both the Angevins and his older brother. King James tried to force him into submission but failed. Roger de Lauria supported Fadrique for a while, but his arrogant attitude made him an unbearable ally, and he seemed to believe he owed his loyalty to the king of Aragon. His large estates in Valencia gave him a strong incentive not to offend that king. So, he left Fadrique, who confiscated his lands in Sicily and executed one of his nephews as a traitor. In retaliation, Roger de Lauria took brutal revenge with two consecutive victories at sea against the Sicilians. When the war, which had turned into a savage conflict, finally ended with the peace of Calatabellota, Roger de Lauria returned to Valencia, where he died on January 2, 1305, and was buried, according to his own wishes, in the church of Santas Creus, a now-deserted monastery of the Cistercians, at the feet of his former master Peter III. In his brutality, and his combination of loyalty to his feudal lord with a complete lack of scruples toward everyone else, Roger was a product of his time. As a captain, he was far superior to his contemporaries and his successors for many generations.

Signor Amari’s Guerra del Vespro Siciliano gives a general picture of these wars, but the portrait of Roger de Lauria must be sought in the Chronicle of the Catalan Ramon de Muntaner who knew him and was formed in his school. There is a very fair and well “documented” account of the masterly campaign of 1285 in Charles de la Roncière’s Histoire de la marine française, i. 189-217.

Signor Amari’s Guerra del Vespro Siciliano provides an overview of these wars, but to find a detailed picture of Roger de Lauria, you need to look at the Chronicle by the Catalan Ramon de Muntaner, who knew him and was influenced by his teachings. There is a thorough and well-researched account of the brilliant campaign of 1285 in Charles de la Roncière’s Histoire de la marine française, i. 189-217.

(D. H.)

LAURIA, or Loria, a city of Basilicata, Italy, in the province of Potenza, situated near the borders of Calabria, 7½ m. by road S. of Lagonegro. Pop. (1901) 10,470. It is a walled town on the steep side of a hill with another portion in the plain below, 1821 ft. above sea-level. The castle was the birthplace of Ruggiero di Loria, the great Italian admiral of the 13th century. It was destroyed by the French under Masséna in 1806.

LAURIA, or Loria, is a city in Basilicata, Italy, within the province of Potenza, located near the borders of Calabria, 7.5 miles south by road from Lagonegro. The population in 1901 was 10,470. It’s a walled town on the steep side of a hill, with another part on the plain below, sitting 1,821 feet above sea level. The castle here was the birthplace of Ruggiero di Loria, the renowned Italian admiral from the 13th century. It was destroyed by the French forces under Masséna in 1806.

LAURIER, SIR WILFRID (1841-  ), Canadian statesman, was born on the 20th of November 1841, at St Lin in the province of Quebec. The child of French Roman Catholic parents, he attended the elementary school of his native parish and for eight or nine months was a pupil of the Protestant elementary school at New Glasgow in order to learn English; his association with the Presbyterian family with whom he lived during this period had a permanent influence on his mind. At twelve years of age he entered L’Assomption college, and was there for seven years. The college, like all the secondary schools in Quebec then available for Roman Catholics, was under direct ecclesiastical control. On leaving it he entered a law office at Montreal and took the law course at McGill University. At graduation he delivered the valedictory address for his class. This, like so many of his later utterances, closed with an appeal for sympathy and union between the French and English races as the secret of the future of Canada. He began to practise law in Montreal, but owing to ill-health soon removed to Athabaska, where he opened a law office and undertook also to edit Le Défricheur, a newspaper then on the eve of collapse. At Athabaska, the seat of one of the superior courts of Quebec, the population of the district was fairly divided between French- and English-speaking people, and Laurier’s career was undoubtedly influenced by his constant association with English-speaking people and his intimate acquaintance with their views and aspirations.

LAURIER, SIR WILFRID (1841-  ), Canadian statesman, was born on November 20, 1841, in St Lin, Quebec. The child of French Roman Catholic parents, he attended the elementary school in his home parish and spent eight or nine months at a Protestant elementary school in New Glasgow to learn English. His time living with a Presbyterian family during this period had a lasting impact on him. At twelve, he entered L’Assomption College, where he stayed for seven years. The college, like all secondary schools available for Roman Catholics in Quebec at the time, was under direct church control. After graduating, he joined a law office in Montreal and attended McGill University for law. At graduation, he gave the valedictory speech for his class, which, like many of his later statements, ended with a call for empathy and unity between the French and English communities as key to Canada's future. He started practicing law in Montreal but, due to health issues, moved to Athabaska, where he opened a law office and also took on the role of editor for Le Défricheur, a newspaper facing imminent failure. In Athabaska, the seat of one of Quebec's superior courts, the population was fairly split between French and English speakers, and Laurier's career was undoubtedly shaped by his ongoing interaction with English speakers and his deep understanding of their perspectives and goals.

While at Montreal he had joined the Institut Canadien, a literary and scientific society which, owing to its liberal discussions and the fact that certain books upon its shelves were on the Index expurgatorius, was finally condemned by the Roman Catholic authorities. Le Défricheur was an organ of extreme French sentiment, opposed to confederation, and also under ecclesiastical censure. One of its few surviving copies contains an article by Laurier opposing confederation as a scheme designed in the interest of the English colonies in North America, and certain to prove the tomb of the French race and the ruin of Lower Canada. The Liberals of Quebec under the leadership of Sir Antoine Dorion were hostile to confederation, or at least to the terms of union agreed upon at the Quebec conference, and Laurier in editorials and speeches maintained the position of Dorion and his allies. He was elected to the Quebec legislature in 1871, and his first speech in the provincial assembly excited great interest, on account of its literary qualities and the attractive manner and logical method of the speaker. He was not less successful in the Dominion House of Commons, to which he was elected in 1874. During his first two years in the federal parliament his chief speeches were made in defence of Riel and the French halfbreeds who were concerned in the Red River rebellion, and on fiscal questions. Sir John Macdonald, then in opposition, had committed his party to a protectionist policy, and Laurier, notwithstanding that the Liberal party stood for a low tariff, avowed himself to be “a moderate protectionist.” He declared that if he were in Great Britain he would be a free trader, but that free trade or protection must be applied according to the necessities of a country, and that which protection necessarily involved taxation it was the price a young and vigorous nation must pay for its development. But the Liberal government, to which Laurier was admitted as minister of inland revenue in 1877, made only a slight increase in duties, raising the general tariff from 15% to 17½%; and against the political judgment of Alexander Mackenzie, Sir Richard Cartwright, George Brown, Laurier and other of the more influential leaders of the party, it adhered to a low tariff platform. In the bye-election which followed Laurier’s admission to the cabinet he was defeated—the only personal defeat he ever sustained; but a few weeks later he was returned for Quebec East, a constituency which he held thenceforth by enormous majorities. In 1878 his party went out of office and Sir John Macdonald entered upon a long term of power, with protection as the chief feature of his policy, to which was afterwards added the construction of the Canadian Pacific railway.

While in Montreal, he joined the Institut Canadien, a literary and scientific society that was eventually condemned by the Roman Catholic authorities due to its liberal discussions and the presence of certain books on the Index expurgatorius. Le Défricheur was a publication with strong French nationalist sentiments, opposing confederation and also facing ecclesiastical censure. One of its few remaining copies includes an article by Laurier criticizing confederation as a scheme benefiting the English colonies in North America, which he believed would lead to the decline of the French population and the downfall of Lower Canada. The Quebec Liberals, led by Sir Antoine Dorion, were against confederation, or at least the union terms proposed at the Quebec conference, and Laurier supported Dorion and his allies in his editorials and speeches. He was elected to the Quebec legislature in 1871, and his first speech in the provincial assembly garnered significant interest due to its literary style and the appealing delivery and logical approach of the speaker. He was equally successful in the Dominion House of Commons, to which he was elected in 1874. During his first two years in federal parliament, his main speeches focused on defending Riel and the French halfbreeds involved in the Red River rebellion, as well as fiscal issues. Sir John Macdonald, then in opposition, had committed his party to a protectionist policy, and Laurier, despite the Liberal party’s support for a low tariff, identified himself as “a moderate protectionist.” He stated that if he were in Great Britain, he would advocate for free trade, but that either free trade or protection should be applied based on the country’s needs, with the understanding that protection, which invariably involved taxation, was a cost a young and thriving nation had to bear for its growth. However, the Liberal government, which welcomed Laurier as the minister of inland revenue in 1877, only slightly increased duties, raising the general tariff from 15% to 17½%. Against the political judgment of Alexander Mackenzie, Sir Richard Cartwright, George Brown, Laurier, and other prominent party leaders, the government maintained a low tariff platform. In the bye-election following Laurier’s cabinet appointment, he suffered his only personal defeat; however, just a few weeks later, he was elected again for Quebec East, a seat he held with large majorities thereafter. In 1878, his party was ousted from power, and Sir John Macdonald began a lengthy term, with protection being a key aspect of his policy, which was later complemented by the construction of the Canadian Pacific railway.

After the defeat of the Mackenzie government, Laurier sat in Parliament as the leader of the Quebec Liberals and first lieutenant to the Hon. Edward Blake, who succeeded Mackenzie in the leadership of the party. He was associated with Blake in his sustained opposition to high tariff, and to the Conservative plan for the construction of the Canadian Pacific railway, and was a conspicuous figure in the long struggle between Sir John Macdonald and the leaders of the Liberal party to settle the territorial limits of the province of Ontario and the legislative rights of the provinces under the constitution. He was forced also to maintain a long conflict with the ultramontane element of the Roman Catholic church in Quebec, which for many years had a close working alliance with the Conservative politicians of the province and even employed spiritual coercion in order to detach votes from the Liberal party. Notwithstanding that Quebec was almost solidly Roman Catholic the Rouges sternly resisted clerical pressure; they appealed to the courts and had certain elections voided on the ground of undue clerical influence, and at length persuaded the pope to send out a delegate to Canada, through whose inquiry into the circumstances the abuses were checked and the zeal of the ultramontanes restrained.

After the Mackenzie government was defeated, Laurier served in Parliament as the leader of the Quebec Liberals and the first lieutenant to the Hon. Edward Blake, who took over the party leadership from Mackenzie. He worked alongside Blake in their ongoing opposition to high tariffs and the Conservative plan for building the Canadian Pacific Railway. Laurier was a prominent figure in the prolonged conflict between Sir John Macdonald and the Liberal party leaders over the territorial boundaries of Ontario and the legislative rights of the provinces under the constitution. He also had to contend with a lengthy struggle against the ultramontane faction of the Roman Catholic Church in Quebec, which had long maintained a close partnership with Conservative politicians and even used spiritual pressure to sway votes away from the Liberal party. Despite Quebec being almost entirely Roman Catholic, the Rouges firmly resisted clerical influence; they appealed to the courts and succeeded in having certain elections annulled due to improper clerical influence, ultimately convincing the pope to send a delegate to Canada, whose investigation into these issues curbed the abuses and moderated the ultramontane fervor.

In 1887, upon the resignation of Blake on the ground of ill-health, Laurier became leader of the Liberal party, although he and many of the more influential men in the party doubted the wisdom of the proceeding. He was the first French Canadian to lead a federal party in Canada since confederation. Apart from the natural fear that he would arouse prejudice in the English-speaking provinces, the second Riel rebellion was then still fresh in the public mind, and the fierce nationalist agitation which Riel’s execution had excited in Quebec had hardly subsided. Laurier could hardly have come to the leadership at a more inopportune moment, and probably he would not have accepted the office at all if he had not believed that Blake could be persuaded to resume the leadership when his health was restored. But from the first he won great popularity even in the English-speaking provinces, and showed unusual capacity for leadership. His party was beaten in the first general election 287 held after he became leader (1891), but even with its policy of unrestricted reciprocity with the United States, and with Sir John Macdonald still at the head of the Conservative party, it was beaten by only a small majority. Five years later, with unrestricted reciprocity relegated to the background, and with a platform which demanded tariff revision so adjusted as not to endanger established interests, and which opposed the federal measure designed to restore in Manitoba the separate or Roman Catholic schools which the provincial government had abolished, Laurier carried the country, and in July 1896 he was called by Lord Aberdeen, then governor-general, to form a government.

In 1887, after Blake resigned due to health issues, Laurier became the leader of the Liberal party, even though he and many key figures in the party were uncertain about the decision. He was the first French Canadian to lead a federal party in Canada since confederation. Besides the natural concern that he might provoke bias in the English-speaking provinces, the memory of the second Riel rebellion was still fresh, and the intense nationalist fervor ignited by Riel’s execution in Quebec had hardly faded. Laurier took on the leadership at a particularly challenging time, and he likely wouldn't have accepted the role if he hadn't thought he could convince Blake to return once he recovered. Nevertheless, from the outset, he gained significant popularity even among English speakers and demonstrated exceptional leadership skills. His party lost in the first general election after he became leader (1891), but even with its policy of unrestricted reciprocity with the United States and Sir John Macdonald still leading the Conservative party, it lost by only a narrow margin. Five years later, as unrestricted reciprocity became less of a priority, Laurier campaigned on a platform that called for tariff revisions that wouldn’t threaten established interests and opposed the federal initiative aimed at restoring the separate Roman Catholic schools in Manitoba that the provincial government had eliminated. Laurier won nationwide support, and in July 1896, Lord Aberdeen, then governor-general, asked him to form a government.

He was the first French-Canadian to occupy the office of premier; and his personal supremacy was shown by his long continuance in power. During the years from 1896 to 1910, he came to hold a position within the British Empire which was in its way unique, and in this period he had seen Canadian prosperity advance progressively by leaps and bounds. The chief features of his administration were the fiscal preference of 3313% in favour of goods imported into Canada from Great Britain, the despatch of Canadian contingents to South Africa during the Boer war, the contract with the Grand Trunk railway for the construction of a second transcontinental road from ocean to ocean, the assumption by Canada of the imperial fortresses at Halifax and Esquimault, the appointment of a federal railway commission with power to regulate freight charges, express rates and telephone rates, and the relations between competing companies, the reduction of the postal rate to Great Britain from 5 cents to 2 cents and of the domestic rate from 3 cents to 2 cents, a substantial contribution to the Pacific cable, a practical and courageous policy of settlement and development in the Western territories, the division of the North-West territories into the provinces of Alberta and Saskatchewan and the enactment of the legislation necessary to give them provincial status, and finally (1910), a tariff arrangement with the United States, which, if not all that Canada might claim in the way of reciprocity, showed how entirely the course of events had changed the balance of commercial interests in North America.

He was the first French-Canadian to become premier, and his dominance was evident in how long he stayed in power. From 1896 to 1910, he held a unique position within the British Empire, and during that time, he witnessed significant economic growth in Canada. The main aspects of his administration included a 3313% tax preference for goods imported from Great Britain, sending Canadian troops to South Africa during the Boer War, a contract with the Grand Trunk Railway to build a second transcontinental railway, Canada taking over the imperial forts at Halifax and Esquimalt, the establishment of a federal railway commission to regulate freight, express, and telephone rates, lowering the postal rate to Great Britain from 5 cents to 2 cents and the domestic rate from 3 cents to 2 cents, a significant investment in the Pacific cable, a proactive approach to settlement and development in the Western territories, splitting the North-West Territories into the provinces of Alberta and Saskatchewan and passing the laws needed for them to have provincial status, and finally, in 1910, making a tariff deal with the United States that, while not fully reciprocating Canada’s demands, reflected how dramatically commercial interests had shifted in North America.

Laurier made his first visit to Great Britain on the occasion of Queen Victoria’s diamond jubilee (1897), when he received the grand cross of the Bath; he then secured the denunciation of the Belgian and German treaties and thus obtained for the colonies the right to make preferential trade arrangements with the mother country. His personality made a powerful impression in Great Britain and also in France, which he visited before his return to Canada. His strong facial resemblance both to Lord Beaconsfield and to Sir John Macdonald marked him out in the public eye, and he captured attention by his charm of manner, fine command of scholarly English and genuine eloquence. Some of his speeches in Great Britain, coming as they did from a French-Canadian, and revealing delicate appreciation of British sentiment and thorough comprehension of the genius of British institutions, excited great interest and enthusiasm, while one or two impassioned speeches in the Canadian parliament during the Boer war profoundly influenced opinion in Canada and had a pronounced effect throughout the empire.

Laurier made his first visit to Great Britain for Queen Victoria’s diamond jubilee in 1897, where he was awarded the grand cross of the Bath. He then pushed for the rejection of the Belgian and German treaties, allowing the colonies to establish preferential trade agreements with the mother country. His personality left a strong impression in Great Britain and also in France, which he visited before returning to Canada. His striking resemblance to both Lord Beaconsfield and Sir John Macdonald set him apart publicly, and he drew attention with his charming demeanor, excellent command of English, and genuine eloquence. Some of his speeches in Great Britain, especially as a French-Canadian who showed a delicate understanding of British sentiments and a deep grasp of British institutions, generated significant interest and enthusiasm. Additionally, a couple of his passionate speeches in the Canadian parliament during the Boer War had a profound impact on public opinion in Canada and resonated throughout the empire.

A skilful party-leader, Laurier kept from the first not only the affection of his political friends but the respect of his opponents; while enforcing the orderly conduct of public business, he was careful as first minister to maintain the dignity of parliament. In office he proved more of an opportunist than his career in opposition would have indicated, but his political courage and personal integrity remained beyond suspicion. His jealousy for the political autonomy of Canada was noticeable in his attitude at the Colonial conference held at the time of King Edward’s coronation, and marked all his diplomatic dealings with the mother country. But he strove for sympathetic relations between Canadian and imperial authorities, and favoured general legislative and fiscal co-operation between the two countries. He strove also for good relations between the two races in Canada, and between Canada and the United States. Although he was classed in Canada as a Liberal, his tendencies would in England have been considered strongly conservative; an individualist rather than a collectivist, he opposed the intrusion of the state into the sphere of private enterprise, and showed no sympathy with the movement for state operation of railways, telegraphs and telephones, or with any kindred proposal looking to the extension of the obligations of the central government.

A skilled party leader, Laurier not only secured the loyalty of his political allies from the start but also earned the respect of his opponents. While ensuring that public affairs were conducted smoothly, he was careful as the prime minister to uphold the dignity of parliament. In office, he showed himself to be more of an opportunist than his time in opposition might have suggested, but his political bravery and personal integrity were never in doubt. His commitment to Canada’s political independence was evident during the Colonial conference at King Edward’s coronation and marked all his diplomatic interactions with Britain. However, he sought to foster positive relations between Canadian and imperial authorities and supported general legislative and fiscal collaboration between the two countries. He also aimed for good relationships between the two racial groups in Canada, as well as between Canada and the United States. Although categorized as a Liberal in Canada, his inclinations would have been seen as strongly conservative in England; being an individualist rather than a collectivist, he opposed government interference in private business and showed no support for the movement advocating government-run railways, telegraphs, and telephones, or any similar proposals aimed at expanding the responsibilities of the central government.

Bibliography.—J. S. Willison, Sir Wilfrid Laurier and the Liberal Party; a Political History (Toronto, 1903); L. O. David, Laurier et son temps (Montreal, 1905); see also Henri Moreau, Sir Wilfrid Laurier, Premier Ministre du Canada (Paris, 1902); and the collection of Laurier’s speeches from 1871 to 1890, compiled by Ulric Barthe (Quebec, 1890).

References.—J. S. Willison, Sir Wilfrid Laurier and the Liberal Party: A Political History (Toronto, 1903); L. O. David, Laurier et son temps (Montreal, 1905); see also Henri Moreau, Sir Wilfrid Laurier, Premier Ministre du Canada (Paris, 1902); and the collection of Laurier’s speeches from 1871 to 1890, compiled by Ulric Barthe (Quebec, 1890).

(J. S. W.)

LAURISTON, JACQUES ALEXANDRE BERNARD LAW, Marquis de (1768-1828), French soldier and diplomatist, was the son of Jacques François Law de Lauriston (1724-1785), a general officer in the French army, and was born at Pondicherry on the 1st of February 1768. He obtained his first commission about 1786, served with the artillery and on the staff in the earlier Revolutionary campaigns, and became brigadier of artillery in 1795. Resigning in 1796, he was brought back into the service in 1800 as aide-de-camp to Napoleon, with whom as a cadet Lauriston had been on friendly terms. In the years immediately preceding the first empire Lauriston was successively director of the Le Fère artillery school and special envoy to Denmark, and he was selected to convey to England the ratification of the peace of Amiens (1802). In 1805, having risen to the rank of general of division, he took part in the war against Austria. He occupied Venice and Ragusa in 1806, was made governor-general of Venice in 1807, took part in the Erfurt negotiations of 1808, was made a count, served with the emperor in Spain in 1808-1809 and held commands under the viceroy Eugène Beauharnais in the Italian campaign and the advance to Vienna in the same year. At the battle of Wagram he commanded the guard artillery in the famous “artillery preparation” which decided the battle. In 1811 he was made ambassador to Russia; in 1812 he held a command in the Grande Armée and won distinction by his firmness in covering the retreat from Moscow. He commanded the V. army corps at Lützen and Bautzen and the V. and XI. in the autumn campaign, falling into the hands of the enemy in the disastrous retreat from Leipzig. He was held a prisoner of war until the fall of the empire, and then joined Louis XVIII., to whom he remained faithful in the Hundred Days. His reward was a seat in the house of peers and a command in the royal guard. In 1817 he was created marquis and in 1823 marshal of France. During the Spanish War he commanded the corps which besieged and took Pamplona. He died at Paris on the 12th of June 1828.

LAURISTON, JACQUES ALEXANDRE BERNARD LAW, Marquis (1768-1828), was a French soldier and diplomat. He was the son of Jacques François Law de Lauriston (1724-1785), a general in the French army, and was born in Pondicherry on February 1, 1768. He got his first commission around 1786 and served with the artillery and on the staff during the early Revolutionary campaigns, becoming a brigadier of artillery in 1795. After resigning in 1796, he was reactivated in 1800 as aide-de-camp to Napoleon, with whom he had been on friendly terms as a cadet. In the years leading up to the first empire, Lauriston served as director of the Le Fère artillery school and special envoy to Denmark, and he was chosen to deliver the ratification of the peace of Amiens to England in 1802. By 1805, he had risen to the rank of general of division and participated in the war against Austria. He captured Venice and Ragusa in 1806, became governor-general of Venice in 1807, took part in the Erfurt negotiations in 1808, was made a count, and served with the emperor in Spain from 1808-1809. He held commands under viceroy Eugène Beauharnais during the Italian campaign and the advance to Vienna that same year. At the Battle of Wagram, he commanded the guard artillery in the notable "artillery preparation" that determined the outcome of the battle. In 1811, he was appointed ambassador to Russia; in 1812, he commanded in the Grande Armée and gained recognition for his resolve during the retreat from Moscow. He commanded the V. army corps at Lützen and Bautzen and the V. and XI. during the autumn campaign, ultimately being captured during the disastrous retreat from Leipzig. He was a prisoner of war until the empire fell, after which he aligned himself with Louis XVIII, whom he remained loyal to during the Hundred Days. His reward was a seat in the house of peers and a command in the royal guard. In 1817, he was made a marquis and in 1823, a marshal of France. During the Spanish War, he commanded the force that besieged and captured Pamplona. He passed away in Paris on June 12, 1828.

LAURIUM (Λαύριον, mod. Ergastiri), a mining town in Attica, Greece, famous for the silver mines which were one of the chief sources of revenue of the Athenian state, and were employed for coinage. After the battle of Marathon, Themistocles persuaded the Athenians to devote the revenue derived from the mines to shipbuilding, and thus laid the foundation of the Athenian naval power, and made possible the victory of Salamis. The mines, which were the property of the state, were usually farmed out for a certain fixed sum and a percentage on the working; slave labour was exclusively employed. Towards the end of the 5th century the output was diminished, partly owing to the Spartan occupation of Decelea. But the mines continued to be worked, though Strabo records that in his time the tailings were being worked over, and Pausanias speaks of the mines as a thing of the past. The ancient workings, consisting of shafts and galleries for excavating the ore, and pans and other arrangements for extracting the metal, may still be seen. The mines are still worked at the present day by French and Greek companies, but mainly for lead, manganese and cadmium. The population of the modern town was 10,007 in 1907.

LAURIUM (Lavrion, mod. Workshops), a mining town in Attica, Greece, known for its silver mines, which were a major source of revenue for the Athenian state and were used for coinage. After the Battle of Marathon, Themistocles convinced the Athenians to use the income from the mines to build ships, laying the groundwork for Athenian naval power and enabling the victory at Salamis. The mines, owned by the state, were usually leased for a fixed amount plus a percentage of the output, relying entirely on slave labor. By the end of the 5th century, production had decreased, partly due to the Spartan occupation of Decelea. However, the mines continued to be worked, although Strabo notes that in his time, they were mainly processing tailings, and Pausanias referred to the mines as a remnant of the past. The ancient workings, including shafts and tunnels for digging ore, along with pans and other methods for extracting metal, can still be seen today. The mines are still operational now by French and Greek companies, but they primarily focus on lead, manganese, and cadmium. The population of the modern town was 10,007 in 1907.

See E. Ardaillon, “Les Mines du Laurion dans l’antiquité,” No. lxxvii. of the Bibliothèque des écoles françaises d’Athènes et de Rome.

See E. Ardaillon, “The Mines of Laurion in Antiquity,” No. lxxvii. of the Library of French Schools of Athens and Rome.

LAURIUM, a village of Houghton county, Michigan, U.S.A., near the centre of Keweenaw peninsula, the northern extremity of the state. Pop. (1890) 1159; (1900) 5643, of whom 2286 were foreign-born; (1904) 7653; (1910) 8537. It is served by 288 the Mineral Range and the Mohawk and Copper Range railways. It is in one of the most productive copper districts in the United States, and copper mining is its chief industry. Immediately W. of Laurium is the famous Calumet and Hecla mine. The village was formerly named Calumet, and was incorporated under that name in 1889, but in 1895 its name was changed by the legislature to Laurium, in allusion to the mineral wealth of Laurium in Greece. The name Calumet is now applied to the post office in the village of Red Jacket (incorporated 1875; pop. 1900, 4668; 1904, 3784; 1910, 4211), W. of the Calumet and Hecla mine; and Laurium, the mining property and Red Jacket are all in the township of Calumet (pop. 1904, state census, 28,587).

LAURIUM, is a village in Houghton County, Michigan, U.S.A., located near the center of the Keweenaw Peninsula, the northern tip of the state. Population (1890) was 1,159; (1900) 5,643, with 2,286 of those being foreign-born; (1904) 7,653; (1910) 8,537. It is served by 288, the Mineral Range, and the Mohawk and Copper Range railways. This area is one of the most productive copper districts in the United States, with copper mining being its main industry. Directly west of Laurium is the famous Calumet and Hecla mine. The village was originally named Calumet and was incorporated under that name in 1889, but in 1895, the legislature changed its name to Laurium, referencing the mineral wealth of Laurium in Greece. The name Calumet now refers to the post office in the village of Red Jacket (incorporated in 1875; pop. 1900, 4,668; 1904, 3,784; 1910, 4,211), located west of the Calumet and Hecla mine; both Laurium and Red Jacket, along with the mining property, are in the township of Calumet (pop. 1904, state census, 28,587).

LAURUSTINUS, in botany, the popular name of a common hardy evergreen garden shrub known botanically as Viburnum Tinus, with rather dark-green ovate leaves in pairs and flat-topped clusters (or corymbs) of white flowers, which are rose-coloured before expansion, and appear very early in the year. It is a native of the Mediterranean region, and was in cultivation in Britain at the end of the 16th century. Viburnum belongs to the natural order Caprifoliaceae and includes the common wayfaring tree (V. Lantana) and the guelder rose (V. Opulus).

LAURUSTINUS, in botany, is the common name for a hardy evergreen garden shrub known scientifically as Viburnum Tinus. It features dark-green, oval leaves that grow in pairs and has flat-topped clusters (or corymbs) of white flowers, which start off rose-colored before opening and appear quite early in the year. This plant is native to the Mediterranean region and was cultivated in Britain by the late 16th century. Viburnum is part of the Caprifoliaceae family and includes the common wayfaring tree (V. Lantana) and the guelder rose (V. Opulus).

LAURVIK, Larvik or Laurvig, a seaport of Norway, in Jarlsberg and Laurvik amt (county), at the head of a short fjord near the mouth of the Laagen river, 98 m. S.S.W. of Christiania by the Skien railway. Pop. (1900) 10,664. It has various industries, including saw and planing mills, shipbuilding, glassworks and factories for wood-pulp, barrels and potato flour; and an active trade in exporting timber, ice, wood-pulp and granite, chiefly to Great Britain, and in importing from the same country coal and salt. The port has a depth of 18 to 24 ft. beside the quays. Four miles south is Fredriksvaern, formerly a station of the Norwegian fleet and the seat of a naval academy. Laurviks Bad is a favourite spa, with mineral and sulphur springs and mud-baths.

LAURVIK, Larvik or Laurvig, a seaport in Norway, located in Jarlsberg and Laurvik amt (county), at the head of a short fjord near the mouth of the Laagen River, 98 miles S.S.W. of Oslo by the Skien railway. Population (1900) 10,664. It has various industries, including saw and planing mills, shipbuilding, glassworks, and factories for wood-pulp, barrels, and potato flour, along with a lively trade exporting timber, ice, wood-pulp, and granite, mainly to Great Britain, while importing coal and salt from the same country. The port has a depth of 18 to 24 feet along the quays. Four miles south is Fredriksvaern, which was once a station for the Norwegian fleet and the home of a naval academy. Laurviks Bad is a popular spa, featuring mineral and sulfur springs and mud baths.

LAUSANNE, the capital of the Swiss canton of Vaud. It is the junction of the railway lines from Geneva, from Brieg and the Simplon, from Fribourg and Bern, and from Vallorbe (for Paris). A funicular railway connects the upper town with the central railway station and with Ouchy, the port of Lausanne on the lake of Geneva. Lausanne takes its name from the Flon stream flowing through it, which was formerly called Laus (water). The older or upper portion of the town is built on the crest and slopes of five hillocks and in the hollows between them, all forming part of the Jorat range. It has a picturesque appearance from the surface of the lake, above which the cathedral rises some 500 ft., while from the town there is a fine view across the lake towards the mountains of Savoy and of the Valais. The quaint characteristics of the hilly site of the old town have largely been destroyed by modern improvements, which began in 1836 and were not quite completed in 1910. The Grand Pont, designed by the cantonal engineer, Adrien Pichard (1790-1841), was built 1839-1844, while the Barre tunnel was pierced 1851-1855 and the bridge of Chauderon was built in 1905. The valleys and lower portions of the town were gradually filled up so as to form a series of squares, of which those of Riponne and of St François are the finest, the latter now being the real centre of the town. The railways were built between 1856 and 1862, while the opening of the Simplon tunnel (1906) greatly increased the commercial importance of Lausanne, which is now on the great international highway from Paris to Milan. From 1896 onwards a well-planned set of tramways within the town was constructed. The town is still rapidly extending, especially towards the south and west. Since the days of Gibbon (resident here for three periods, 1753-1758, 1763-1764 and 1783-1793), whose praises of the town have been often repeated, Lausanne has become a favourite place of residence for foreigners (including many English), who are especially attracted by the excellent establishments for secondary and higher education. Hence in 1900 there were 9501 foreign residents (of whom 628 were British subjects) out of a total population of 46,732 inhabitants; in 1905 it was reckoned that these numbers had risen respectively to 10,625, 818 and 53,577. In 1709 it is said that the inhabitants numbered but 7432 and 9965 in 1803, while the numbers were 20,515 in 1860 and 33,340 in 1888. Of the population in 1900 the great majority was French-speaking (only 6627 German-speaking and 3146 Italian-speaking) and Protestant (9364 Romanists and 473 Jews).

LAUSANNE, is the capital of the Swiss canton of Vaud. It’s the crossroads for the railway lines from Geneva, Brieg and the Simplon, Fribourg and Bern, and Vallorbe (to Paris). A funicular railway connects the upper town with the central railway station and Ouchy, the port of Lausanne on Lake Geneva. Lausanne gets its name from the Flon stream that runs through it, which was previously known as Laus (meaning water). The older or upper part of the town is located on the peaks and slopes of five small hills and in the valleys between them, all part of the Jorat range. It has a picturesque view from the surface of the lake, where the cathedral rises about 500 feet, while from the town, there’s a stunning view across the lake towards the mountains of Savoy and Valais. Many of the charming features of the old town’s hilly landscape have been largely erased by modern developments, which started in 1836 and weren’t fully completed until 1910. The Grand Pont, designed by cantonal engineer Adrien Pichard (1790-1841), was built from 1839 to 1844, while the Barre tunnel was constructed between 1851 and 1855, and the Chauderon bridge was built in 1905. The valleys and lower parts of the town were gradually filled in to create a series of squares, with Riponne and St François being the finest; the latter is now the real center of town. The railways were constructed between 1856 and 1862, and the opening of the Simplon tunnel (1906) significantly boosted Lausanne’s commercial importance, as it’s now along the major international highway from Paris to Milan. Beginning in 1896, a well-planned network of trams was built within the town. The town is still rapidly expanding, especially to the south and west. Since the time of Gibbon (who lived here during three periods from 1753 to 1758, 1763 to 1764, and 1783 to 1793), whose praises of the town have often been echoed, Lausanne has become a popular residence for foreigners (including many English), who are particularly drawn by the excellent institutions for secondary and higher education. Consequently, in 1900, there were 9,501 foreign residents (of whom 628 were British subjects) out of a total population of 46,732; by 1905, these numbers were estimated to have increased to 10,625, 818, and 53,577 respectively. In 1709, it’s said that the population was only 7,432, and 9,965 in 1803, while the numbers were 20,515 in 1860 and 33,340 in 1888. Of the population in 1900, the vast majority spoke French (only 6,627 spoke German and 3,146 spoke Italian) and were Protestant (9,364 were Roman Catholics and 473 were Jews).

The principal building is the cathedral church (now Protestant) of Notre Dame, which with the castle occupies the highest position. It is the finest medieval ecclesiastical building in Switzerland. Earlier buildings were more or less completely destroyed by fire, but the present edifice was consecrated in 1275 by Pope Gregory X. in the presence of the emperor Rudolf of Habsburg. It was sacked after the Bernese conquest (1536) and the introduction of Protestantism, but many ancient tapestries and other precious objects are still preserved in the Historical Museum at Bern. The church was well restored at great cost from 1873 onwards, as it is the great pride of the citizens. Close by is the castle, built in the early 15th century by the bishops, later the residence of the Bernese bailiffs and now the seat of the various branches of the administration of the canton of Vaud. Near both is the splendid Palais de Rumine (on the Place de la Riponne), opened in 1906 and now housing the university as well as the cantonal library, the cantonal picture gallery (or Musée Arlaud, founded 1841) and the cantonal collections of archaeology, natural history, &c. The university was raised to that rank in 1890, but, as an academy, dates from 1537. Among its former teachers may be mentioned Theodore Beza, Conrad Gesner, J. P. de Crousaz, Charles Monnard, Alexandre Vinet, Eugène Rambert, Juste Olivier and several members of the Secretan family. On the Montbenon heights to the south-west of the cathedral group is the federal palace of justice, the seat (since 1886) of the federal court of justice, which, erected by the federal constitution of 29th May 1874, was fixed at Lausanne by a federal resolution of 26th June 1874. The house, La Grotte, which Gibbon inhabited 1783-1793, and on the terrace of which he completed (1787) his famous history, was demolished in 1896 to make room for the new post office that stands on the Place St François. The asylum for the blind was mainly founded (1845) by the generosity of W. Haldimand, an Englishman of Swiss descent. The first book printed in Lausanne was the missal of the cathedral church (1493), while the Gazette de Lausanne (founded 1798) took that name in 1804. Lausanne has been the birthplace of many distinguished men, such as Benjamin Constant, the Secretans, Vinet and Rambert. It is the seat of many benevolent, scientific and literary societies and establishments.

The main building is the cathedral church (now Protestant) of Notre Dame, which, along with the castle, sits at the highest point. It's the most impressive medieval church in Switzerland. Previous structures were almost entirely destroyed by fire, but the current building was consecrated in 1275 by Pope Gregory X in the presence of Emperor Rudolf of Habsburg. It was looted after the Bernese conquest in 1536 and the rise of Protestantism, but many ancient tapestries and other valuable items are still kept in the Historical Museum in Bern. The church was extensively restored at significant cost starting in 1873, as it's a source of great pride for the citizens. Nearby is the castle, built in the early 15th century by the bishops; it later served as the residence for the Bernese bailiffs and is now home to various branches of the administration of the canton of Vaud. Close to both is the beautiful Palais de Rumine (on the Place de la Riponne), which opened in 1906 and now houses the university as well as the cantonal library, the cantonal picture gallery (or Musée Arlaud, founded in 1841), and the cantonal collections of archaeology, natural history, etc. The university was granted its status in 1890, but as an academy, it dates back to 1537. Notable former teachers include Theodore Beza, Conrad Gesner, J. P. de Crousaz, Charles Monnard, Alexandre Vinet, Eugène Rambert, Juste Olivier, and several members of the Secretan family. On the Montbenon heights to the southwest of the cathedral is the federal palace of justice, home to the federal court of justice since 1886. This was established by the federal constitution of May 29, 1874, and fixed at Lausanne by a federal resolution on June 26, 1874. The house, La Grotte, where Gibbon lived from 1783 to 1793, and where he completed his famous history in 1787, was torn down in 1896 to make way for the new post office that now stands on Place St François. The asylum for the blind was mainly established in 1845 thanks to the generosity of W. Haldimand, an Englishman of Swiss descent. The first book printed in Lausanne was the missal of the cathedral church in 1493, while the Gazette de Lausanne (founded in 1798) adopted that name in 1804. Lausanne has been the birthplace of many notable figures, including Benjamin Constant, the Secretans, Vinet, and Rambert. It hosts many charitable, scientific, and literary societies and institutions.

The original town (mentioned in the Antonine Itinerary) was on the shore of the lake, near Vidy, south-west of the present city. It was burnt in the 4th century by the Alamanni. Some of the inhabitants took refuge in the hills above and there founded a new town, which acquired more importance when Bishop Marius about 590 chose it as his see city (perhaps transferring it from Avenches). Here rose the cathedral church, the bishop’s palace, &c. Across the Flon was a Burgundian settlement, later known as the Bourg, while to the west was a third colony around the church of St Laurent. These three elements joined together to form the present city. The bishops obtained little by little great temporal powers (the diocese extended to the left bank of the Aar) and riches, becoming in 1125 princes of the empire, while their chapter was recruited only from the noblest families. But in 1368 the bishop was forced to recognize various liberties and customs that had been gradually won by the citizens, the Plaid Général of that year showing that there was already some kind of municipal government, save for the cité, which was not united with the ville inférieure or the other four quartiers (Bourg, St Laurent, La Palud and Le Pont) in 1481. In 1525 the city made an alliance with Bern and Fribourg. But in 1536 the territory of the bishop (as well as the Savoyard barony of Vaud) was forcibly conquered by the Bernese, who at once introduced Protestantism. The Bernese occupation lasted till 1798, though in 1723 an attempt was made to put an end to it by Major Davel, who lost his life in consequence. In 1798 Lausanne became a simple prefecture of the canton Léman 289 of the Helvetic republic. But in 1803, on the creation of the canton of Vaud by the Act of Mediation, it became its capital. The bishop of Lausanne resided after 1663 at Fribourg, while from 1821 onwards he added “and of Geneva” to his title.

The original town (mentioned in the Antonine Itinerary) was located on the shore of the lake, near Vidy, to the southwest of the present city. It was burned down in the 4th century by the Alamanni. Some of the residents sought refuge in the nearby hills and founded a new town there, which gained more significance when Bishop Marius chose it as his see city around 590 (possibly moving it from Avenches). This is where the cathedral, the bishop’s palace, etc., were built. Across the Flon was a Burgundian settlement, later known as the Bourg, and to the west was a third colony around the church of St Laurent. These three components eventually came together to form the modern city. The bishops gradually gained significant temporal power (the diocese reached the left bank of the Aar) and wealth, becoming princes of the empire in 1125, with their chapter composed only of the noblest families. However, in 1368, the bishop was compelled to acknowledge various rights and customs that citizens had steadily acquired, as shown in the Plaid Général of that year, indicating there was already some form of municipal government, except for the cité, which was not unified with the ville inférieure or the other four quartiers (Bourg, St Laurent, La Palud, and Le Pont) in 1481. In 1525, the city formed an alliance with Bern and Fribourg. But in 1536, the territory of the bishop (alongside the Savoyard barony of Vaud) was forcibly taken over by the Bernese, who immediately introduced Protestantism. The Bernese occupation continued until 1798, although an attempt was made to end it in 1723 by Major Davel, who lost his life as a result. In 1798, Lausanne became a simple prefecture of the Léman canton of the Helvetic Republic. However, in 1803, with the formation of the canton of Vaud through the Act of Mediation, it became its capital. After 1663, the bishop of Lausanne resided in Fribourg, and from 1821 onward, he added “and of Geneva” to his title.

Besides the general works dealing with the canton of Vaud (q.v.), the following books refer specially to Lausanne: A. Bernus, L’Imprimerie à Lausanne et à Morges jusqu’à la fin du 16ième siècle (Lausanne, 1904); M. Besson, Récherches sur les origines des évêchés de Genève, Lausanne, Sion (Fribourg, 1906); A. Bonnard, “Lausanne au 18ième siècle,” in the work entitled Chez nos aïeux (Lausanne, 1902); E. Dupraz, La Cathédrale de Lausanne ... étude historique (Lausanne, 1906); E. Gibbon, Autobiography and Letters (3 vols., 1896); F. Gingins and F. Forel, Documents concernant l’ancien évêché de Lausanne, 2 parts (Lausanne, 1846-1847); J. H. Lewis and F. Gribble, Lausanne (1909); E. van Muyden and others, Lausanne à travers les âges (Lausanne, 1906); Meredith Read, Historic Studies in Vaud, Berne and Savoy (2 vols., 1897); M. Schmitt, Mémoires hist. sur le diocèse de Lausanne (2 vols., Fribourg, 1859); J. Stammler (afterwards bishop of Lausanne), Le Trésor de la cathédrale de Lausanne (Lausanne, 1902; trans. of a German book of 1894).

Besides the general works dealing with the canton of Vaud (q.v.), the following books specifically refer to Lausanne: A. Bernus, L’Imprimerie à Lausanne et à Morges jusqu’à la fin du 16__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ siècle (Lausanne, 1904); M. Besson, Récherches sur les origines des évêchés de Genève, Lausanne, Sion (Fribourg, 1906); A. Bonnard, “Lausanne au 18__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ siècle,” in the work titled Chez nos aïeux (Lausanne, 1902); E. Dupraz, La Cathédrale de Lausanne ... étude historique (Lausanne, 1906); E. Gibbon, Autobiography and Letters (3 vols., 1896); F. Gingins and F. Forel, Documents concernant l’ancien évêché de Lausanne, 2 parts (Lausanne, 1846-1847); J. H. Lewis and F. Gribble, Lausanne (1909); E. van Muyden and others, Lausanne à travers les âges (Lausanne, 1906); Meredith Read, Historic Studies in Vaud, Berne and Savoy (2 vols., 1897); M. Schmitt, Mémoires hist. sur le diocèse de Lausanne (2 vols., Fribourg, 1859); J. Stammler (later bishop of Lausanne), Le Trésor de la cathédrale de Lausanne (Lausanne, 1902; translation of a German book from 1894).

(W. A. B. C.)

LAUTREC, ODET DE FOIX, Vicomte de (1488-1528), French soldier. The branch of the viscounts of Lautrec originated with Pierre, the grandson of Archambaud de Grailly, captal de Buch, who came into possession of the county of Foix in 1401. Odet de Foix and his two brothers, the seigneur de Lescun and the seigneur de l’Esparre or Asparros, served Francis I. as captains; and the influence of their sister, Françoise de Châteaubriant, who became the king’ mistress, gained them high offices. In 1515 Lautrec took part in the campaign of Marignano. In 1516 he received the government of the Milanese, and by his severity made the French domination insupportable. In 1521 he succeeded in defending the duchy against the Spanish army, but in 1522 he was completely defeated at the battle of the Bicocca, and was forced to evacuate the Milanese. The mutiny of his Swiss troops had compelled him, against his wish, to engage in the battle. Created marshal of France, he received again, in 1527, the command of the army of Italy, occupied the Milanese, and was then sent to undertake the conquest of the kingdom of Naples. The defection of Andrea Doria and the plague which broke out in the French camp brought on a fresh disaster. Lautrec himself caught the infection, and died on the 15th of August 1528. He had the reputation of a gallant and able soldier, but this reputation scarcely seems to be justified by the facts; though he was always badly used by fortune.

LAUTREC, ODET DE FOIX, Vicomte (1488-1528), French soldier. The Lautrec branch of viscounts started with Pierre, the grandson of Archambaud de Grailly, captal de Buch, who took control of the county of Foix in 1401. Odet de Foix and his two brothers, the seigneur de Lescun and the seigneur de l’Esparre or Asparros, served Francis I as captains; their sister, Françoise de Châteaubriant, who became the king’s mistress, helped them secure important positions. In 1515, Lautrec participated in the campaign at Marignano. In 1516, he was given governance of the Milanese, where his harshness made French rule unbearable. In 1521, he successfully defended the duchy against the Spanish army, but in 1522, he was thoroughly defeated at the battle of the Bicocca and had to evacuate the Milanese. The mutiny of his Swiss troops forced him, against his will, to engage in that battle. Appointed Marshal of France, he was given command of the Italian army again in 1527, occupied the Milanese, and was then tasked with conquering the kingdom of Naples. A defection from Andrea Doria and a plague outbreak in the French camp led to another disaster. Lautrec himself contracted the disease and died on August 15, 1528. He was known as a brave and skilled soldier, but this reputation seems largely unearned, even though he was often unfortunate in his endeavors.

There is abundant MS. correspondence in the Bibliothèque Nationale, Paris. See the Works of Brantôme (Coll. Société d’Histoire de France, vol. iii., 1867); Memoirs of Martin du Bellay (Coll. Michaud and Poujoulat, vol. v., 1838).

There is a wealth of manuscript correspondence in the Bibliothèque Nationale, Paris. See the Works of Brantôme (Coll. Société d’Histoire de France, vol. iii., 1867); Memoirs of Martin du Bellay (Coll. Michaud and Poujoulat, vol. v., 1838).

LAUZUN, ANTONIN NOMPAR DE CAUMONT, Marquis de Puyguilhem, Duc de (1632-1723), French courtier and soldier, was the son of Gabriel, comte de Lauzun, and his wife Charlotte, daughter of the duc de La Force. He was brought up with the children of his kinsman, the maréchal de Gramont, of whom the comte de Guiche became the lover of Henrietta of England, duchess of Orleans, while Catherine Charlotte, afterwards princess of Monaco, was the object of the one passion of Lauzun’s life. He entered the army, and served under Turenne, also his kinsman, and in 1655 succeeded his father as commander of the cent gentilshommes de la maison du roi. Puyguilhem (or Péguilin, as contemporaries simplified his name) rapidly rose in Louis XIV.’s favour, became colonel of the royal regiment of dragoons, and was gazetted maréchal de camp. He and Mme de Monaco belonged to the coterie of the young duchess of Orleans. His rough wit and skill in practical jokes pleased Louis XIV., but his jealousy and violence were the causes of his undoing. He prevented a meeting between Louis XIV. and Mme de Monaco, and it was jealousy in this matter, rather than hostility to Louise de la Vallière, which led him to promote Mme de Montespan’s intrigues with the king. He asked this lady to secure for him the post of grand-master of the artillery, and on Louis’s refusal to give him the appointment he turned his back on the king, broke his sword, and swore that never again would he serve a monarch who had broken his word. The result was a short sojourn in the Bastille, but he soon returned to his functions of court buffoon. Meanwhile, the duchess of Montpensier (La Grande Mademoiselle) had fallen in love with the little man, whose ugliness seems to have exercised a certain fascination over many women. He naturally encouraged one of the greatest heiresses in Europe, and the wedding was fixed for the 20th of December 1670, when on the 18th Louis sent for his cousin and forbade the marriage. Mme de Montespan had never forgiven his fury when she failed to procure the grand-mastership of the artillery, and now, with Louvois, secured his arrest. He was removed in November 1671 from the Bastille to Pignerol, where excessive precautions were taken to ensure his safety. He was eventually allowed free intercourse with Fouquet, but before that time he managed to find a way through the chimney into Fouquet’s room, and on another occasion succeeded in reaching the courtyard in safety. Another fellow-prisoner, from communication with whom he was supposed to be rigorously excluded, was Eustache Dauger (see Iron Mask).

LAUZUN, ANTONIN NOMPAR DE CAUMONT, Marquis de Puyguilhem, Duke of (1632-1723), was a French courtier and soldier, the son of Gabriel, comte de Lauzun, and his wife Charlotte, daughter of the duc de La Force. He grew up with the children of his relative, the maréchal de Gramont, whose comte de Guiche became the lover of Henrietta of England, duchess of Orleans, while Catherine Charlotte, who later became the princess of Monaco, was the only person Lauzun ever truly loved. He joined the army and served under Turenne, another of his relatives, and in 1655 he took over as commander of the cent gentilshommes de la maison du roi after his father. Puyguilhem (or Péguilin, as contemporaries shortened his name) quickly gained favor with Louis XIV., became a colonel of the royal regiment of dragoons, and was named maréchal de camp. He and Mme de Monaco were part of the circle around the young duchess of Orleans. His biting humor and talent for pranks amused Louis XIV., but his jealousy and temper ultimately led to his downfall. He blocked a meeting between Louis XIV. and Mme de Monaco, and his jealousy over this situation, rather than any animosity towards Louise de la Vallière, prompted him to support Mme de Montespan’s schemes with the king. He asked this woman to help him secure the position of grand-master of the artillery, and when Louis refused to appoint him, he turned against the king, broke his sword, and vowed never to serve a ruler who had betrayed his word. This resulted in a brief stay in the Bastille, but he soon returned to his role as the court jester. Meanwhile, the duchess of Montpensier (La Grande Mademoiselle) had fallen for the short man, whose unattractiveness seemed to have a strange appeal for many women. He naturally encouraged one of the wealthiest heiresses in Europe, and their wedding was set for December 20, 1670, but on the 18th, Louis summoned his cousin and forbade the marriage. Mme de Montespan had never forgiven him for his anger when she failed to secure the grand-master position, and now, with Louvois, she orchestrated his arrest. In November 1671, he was moved from the Bastille to Pignerol, where they took extreme measures to ensure his safety. He was eventually allowed to interact freely with Fouquet, but before that, he managed to sneak through the chimney into Fouquet’s room and, on another occasion, successfully reached the courtyard. Another fellow prisoner, from whom he was supposedly barred from communicating, was Eustache Dauger (see Iron Mask).

It was now intimated to Mademoiselle that Lauzun’s restoration to liberty depended on her immediate settlement of the principality of Dombes, the county of Eu and the duchy of Aumale—three properties assigned by her to Lauzun—on the little duc de Maine, eldest son of Louis XIV. and Mme de Montespan. She gave way, but Lauzun, even after ten years of imprisonment, refused to sign the documents, when he was brought to Bourbon for the purpose. A short term of imprisonment at Chalon-sur-Sâone made him change his mind, but when he was set free Louis XIV. was still set against the marriage, which is supposed to have taken place secretly (see Montpensier). Married or not, Lauzun was openly courting Fouquet’s daughter, whom he had seen at Pignerol. He was to be restored to his place at court, and to marry Mlle Fouquet, who, however, became Mme d’Uzès in 1683. In 1685 Lauzun went to England to seek his fortune under James II., whom he had served as duke of York in Flanders. He rapidly gained great influence at the English court. In 1688 he was again in England, and arranged the flight of Mary of Modena and the infant prince, whom he accompanied to Calais, where he received strict instructions from Louis to bring them “on any pretext” to Vincennes. In the late autumn of 1689 he was put in command of the expedition fitted out at Brest for service in Ireland, and he sailed in the following year. Lauzun was honest, a quality not too common in James II.’s officials in Ireland, but had no experience of the field, and he blindly followed Richard Talbot, earl of Tyrconnel. After the battle of the Boyne they fled to Limerick, and thence to the west, leaving Patrick Sarsfield to show a brave front. In September they sailed for France, and on their arrival at Versailles Lauzun found that his failure had destroyed any prospect of a return of Louis XIV.’s favour. Mademoiselle died in 1693, and two years later Lauzun married Geneviève de Durfort, a child of fourteen, daughter of the maréchal de Lorges. Mary of Modena, through whose interest Lauzun secured his dukedom, retained her faith in him, and it was he who in 1715, more than a quarter of a century after the flight from Whitehall, brought her the news of the disaster of Sheriffmuir. Lauzun died on the 19th of November 1723. The duchy fell to his nephew, Armand de Gontaut, comte de Biron.

It was now revealed to Mademoiselle that Lauzun’s freedom depended on her quickly settling the principality of Dombes, the county of Eu, and the duchy of Aumale—three properties she had given to Lauzun—on the little duc de Maine, the eldest son of Louis XIV and Mme de Montespan. She agreed, but Lauzun, even after ten years in prison, refused to sign the papers when he was brought to Bourbon to do so. A short imprisonment at Chalon-sur-Sâone changed his mind, but when he was released, Louis XIV was still opposed to the marriage, which is said to have taken place secretly (see Montpensier). Whether married or not, Lauzun was openly pursuing Fouquet’s daughter, whom he had met at Pignerol. He was set to be restored to his position at court and to marry Mlle Fouquet, who, however, became Mme d’Uzès in 1683. In 1685, Lauzun went to England to seek his fortune under James II, whom he had served as duke of York in Flanders. He quickly gained significant influence at the English court. In 1688, he was back in England, organizing the escape of Mary of Modena and the infant prince, whom he accompanied to Calais, where he received strict orders from Louis to bring them “by any means” to Vincennes. In late autumn of 1689, he was put in charge of the expedition launched from Brest for service in Ireland, and he sailed the following year. Lauzun was honest, a trait not too common among James II’s officials in Ireland, but he lacked field experience and blindly followed Richard Talbot, earl of Tyrconnel. After the battle of the Boyne, they fled to Limerick, and then to the west, leaving Patrick Sarsfield to maintain a brave front. In September, they sailed for France, and upon arriving at Versailles, Lauzun found that his failure had ruined any chance of regaining Louis XIV’s favor. Mademoiselle died in 1693, and two years later, Lauzun married Geneviève de Durfort, a fourteen-year-old daughter of the maréchal de Lorges. Mary of Modena, whose support helped Lauzun secure his dukedom, continued to believe in him, and it was he who in 1715, over a quarter of a century after the flight from Whitehall, brought her news of the disaster at Sheriffmuir. Lauzun died on November 19, 1723. The duchy passed to his nephew, Armand de Gontaut, comte de Biron.

See the letters of Mme de Sévigné, the memoirs of Saint-Simon, who was Lauzun’s wife’s brother-in-law; also J. Lair, Nicolas Fouquet, vol. ii. (1890); Martin Hailes, Mary of Modena (1905), and M. F. Sandars, Lauzun, Courtier and Adventurer (1908).

See the letters of Mme de Sévigné, the memoirs of Saint-Simon, who was Lauzun’s wife’s brother-in-law; also J. Lair, Nicolas Fouquet, vol. ii. (1890); Martin Hailes, Mary of Modena (1905), and M. F. Sandars, Lauzun, Courtier and Adventurer (1908).

LAVA, an Italian word (from Lat. lavare, to wash) applied to the liquid products of volcanic activity. Streams of rain-water, formed by condensation of exhaled steam often mingled with volcanic ashes so as to produce mud, are known as lava d’acqua, whilst the streams of molten matter are called lava di fuoco. The term lava is applied by geologists to all matter of volcanic origin, which is, or has been, in a molten state. The magma, or molten lava in the interior of the earth, may be regarded as a mutual solution of various mineral silicates, charged with highly-heated vapour, sometimes to the extent of super-saturation. According to the proportion of silica, the lava is distinguished as “acid” or “basic.” The basic lavas are 290 usually darker and denser than lavas of acid type, and when fused they tend to flow to great distances, and may thus form far-spreading sheets, whilst the acid lavas, being more viscous, rapidly consolidate after extrusion. The lava is emitted from the volcanic vent at a high temperature, but on exposure to the air it rapidly consolidates superficially, forming a crust which in many cases is soon broken up by the continued flow of the subjacent liquid lava, so that the surface becomes rugged with clinkers. J. D. Dana introduced the term “aa” for this rough kind of lava-stream, whilst he applied the term “pahoehoe” to those flows which have a smooth surface, or are simply wrinkled and ropy; these terms being used in this sense in Hawaii, in relation to the local lavas. The different kinds of lava are more fully described in the article Volcano.

LAVA, an Italian word (from Lat. lavare, meaning to wash) refers to the liquid products of volcanic activity. Streams of rainwater, formed by the condensation of steam mixed with volcanic ash to create mud, are called lava d’acqua, while the streams of molten material are referred to as lava di fuoco. Geologists use the term lava to describe all volcanic materials that are or have been in a molten state. The magma, or molten lava inside the earth, can be seen as a mixture of various mineral silicates, infused with extremely hot vapor, sometimes to the point of super-saturation. Depending on the amount of silica, lava is classified as “acid” or “basic.” Basic lavas are usually darker and denser than acid lavas, and when melted, they can flow great distances, forming wide sheets. In contrast, acid lavas are more viscous and solidify quickly after being expelled. Lava is released from the volcanic vent at a high temperature, but as it meets air, it rapidly hardens on the surface, creating a crust that is often broken up by the ongoing flow of the molten lava underneath, making the surface rough with clinkers. J. D. Dana coined the term “aa” for this rough type of lava flow, while he called the smoother, wrinkled, and ropy flows “pahoehoe”; these terms are used in Hawaii to describe the local lavas. The various types of lava are detailed further in the article Volcano.

LAVABO (Lat. “I will wash”; the Fr. equivalent is lavoir), in ecclesiastical usage, the term for the washing of the priests’ hands, at the celebration of the Mass, at the offertory. The words of Psalm xxvi. 6, Lavabo inter innocentes manus meas, are said during the rite. The word is also used for the basin employed in the ritual washing, and also for the lavatories, generally erected in the cloisters of monasteries. Those at Gloucester, Norwich and Lincoln are best known. A very curious example at Fontenay, surrounding a pillar, is given by Viollet-le-Duc. In general the lavabo is a sort of trough; in some places it has an almery for towels, &c.

LAVABO (Latin for “I will wash”; the French equivalent is lavoir), in church use, refers to the washing of the priests' hands during the Mass at the offertory. The words from Psalm xxvi. 6, Lavabo inter innocentes manus meas, are recited during this ritual. The term is also used for the basin used in the ceremonial washing, and for the washbasins typically found in the cloisters of monasteries. The ones at Gloucester, Norwich, and Lincoln are the most well-known. A particularly interesting example at Fontenay, which surrounds a pillar, is described by Viollet-le-Duc. Generally, the lavabo is a type of trough; in some locations, it includes a cabinet for towels, etc.

LAVAGNA, a seaport of Liguria, Italy, in the province of Genoa, from which it is 25½ m. S.E. by rail. Pop. (1901) 7005. It has a small shipbuilding trade, and exports great quantities of slate (lavagna, taking its name from the town). It also has a large cotton-mill. It was the seat of the Fieschi family, independent counts, who, at the end of the 12th century, were obliged to recognize the supremacy of Genoa. Sinibaldo Fieschi became Pope Innocent IV. (1243-1254), and Hadrian V. (1276) was also a Fieschi.

LAVAGNA, is a seaport in Liguria, Italy, located 25½ miles southeast of Genoa by rail. Its population was 7,005 in 1901. The town has a small shipbuilding industry and exports large quantities of slate (the name “lavagna” comes from this town). It also features a significant cotton mill. Historically, it was the home of the Fieschi family, independent counts who had to acknowledge Genoa's dominance by the end of the 12th century. Sinibaldo Fieschi became Pope Innocent IV (1243-1254), and Hadrian V (1276) was also a Fieschi.

LAVAL, ANDRÉ DE, SEIGNEUR DE LOHÉAC (c. 1408-1485), French soldier. In 1423 he served in the French army against England, and in 1428 was taken prisoner by John Talbot, 1st earl of Shrewsbury, after the capitulation of Laval, which he was defending. After paying his ransom he was present with Joan of Arc at the siege of Orleans, at the battle of Patay, and at the coronation of Charles VII. He was made admiral of France in 1437 and marshal in 1439. He served Charles VII. faithfully in all his wars, even against the dauphin (1456), and when the latter became king as Louis XI., Laval was dismissed from the marshal’s office. After the War of the Public Weal he was restored to favour, and recovered the marshal’s bâton, the king also granting him the offices of lieutenant-general to the government of Paris and governor of Picardy, and conferring upon him the collar of the order of St Michael. In 1472 Laval was successful in resisting the attacks of Charles the Bold, duke of Burgundy, on Beauvais.

ANDRÉ DE LAVAL, LORD OF LOHÉAC (c. 1408-1485), French soldier. In 1423, he fought in the French army against England, and in 1428, he was captured by John Talbot, 1st earl of Shrewsbury, after Laval surrendered while defending the city. After paying for his release, he joined Joan of Arc at the siege of Orleans, during the battle of Patay, and at the coronation of Charles VII. He became admiral of France in 1437 and marshal in 1439. He served Charles VII loyally in all his campaigns, including against the dauphin in 1456. When the dauphin became king as Louis XI, Laval was removed from his position as marshal. After the War of the Public Weal, he was reinstated and regained his marshal's bâton, with the king also granting him the roles of lieutenant-general of the government of Paris and governor of Picardy, along with the collar of the order of St. Michael. In 1472, Laval successfully defended Beauvais against attacks from Charles the Bold, duke of Burgundy.

LAVAL, a town of north-western France, capital of the department of Mayenne, on the Mayenne river, 188 m. W.S.W. of Paris by rail. Pop. (1906) 24,874. On the right bank of the river stands the old feudal city, with its ancient castle and its irregularly built houses whose slate roofs and pointed gables peep from the groves of trees which clothe the hill. On the left bank the regularly built new town extends far into the plain. The river, here 80 yds. broad, is crossed by the handsome railway viaduct, a beautiful stone bridge called Pont Neuf, and the Pont Vieux with three pointed arches, built in the 16th century. There is communication by steamer as far as Angers. Laval may justly claim to be one of the loveliest of French towns. Its most curious and interesting monument is the sombre old castle of the counts (now a prison) with a donjon of the 12th century, the roof of which presents a fine example of the timberwork superseded afterwards by stone machicolation. The “new castle,” dating partly from the Renaissance, serves as court-house. Laval possesses several churches of different periods: in that of the Trinity, which serves as the cathedral, the transept and nave are of the 12th century while the choir is of the 16th; St Vénérand (15th century) has good stained glass; Notre-Dame des Cordeliers, which dates from the end of the 14th century or the beginning of the 15th, has some fine marble altars. Half-a-mile below the Pont Vieux is the beautiful 12th-century church of Avenières, with an ornamental spire of 1534. The finest remaining relic of the ancient fortifications is the Beucheresse gate near the cathedral. The narrow streets around the castle are bordered by many old houses of the 15th and 16th century, chief among which is that known as the “Maison du Grand Veneur.” There are an art-museum, a museum of natural history and archaeology and a library. The town is embellished by fine promenades, at the entrance of one of which, facing the mairie, stands the statue of the celebrated surgeon Ambroise Paré (1517-1590). Laval is the seat of a prefect, a bishopric created in 1855, and a court of assizes, and has tribunals of first instance and of commerce, a chamber of commerce, a board of trade-arbitrators, training colleges, an ecclesiastical seminary and a lycée for boys. The principal industry of the town is the cloth manufacture, introduced from Flanders in the 14th century. The production of fabrics of linen, of cotton or of mixtures of both, occupies some 10,000 hands in the town and suburbs. Among the numerous other industries are metal-founding, flour-milling, tanning, dyeing, the making of boots and shoes, and the sawing of the marble quarried in the vicinity. There is trade in grain.

Laval, is a town in north-western France, the capital of the Mayenne department, located 188 km W.S.W. of Paris by train. Population (1906) was 24,874. On the right bank of the river lies the historic feudal city, complete with its ancient castle and irregularly built houses, whose slate roofs and pointed gables peek out from the trees that cover the hill. The new town, more regularly built, stretches far into the plain on the left bank. The river, about 80 yards wide here, is crossed by an elegant railway viaduct, a beautiful stone bridge known as Pont Neuf, and the Pont Vieux, featuring three pointed arches built in the 16th century. There’s steamer service available as far as Angers. Laval rightfully claims to be one of the most charming towns in France. Its most intriguing monument is the dark old castle of the counts (now a prison), which includes a 12th-century keep, showcasing a great example of timberwork that was later replaced by stone machicolation. The “new castle,” partly from the Renaissance, functions as the courthouse. Laval has several churches from different eras: the Trinity church, which is the cathedral, has a transept and nave from the 12th century while its choir dates to the 16th; St Vénérand (15th century) features beautiful stained glass; and Notre-Dame des Cordeliers, from the late 14th or early 15th century, boasts some stunning marble altars. Half a mile downstream from the Pont Vieux is the lovely 12th-century church of Avenières, topped with an ornamental spire from 1534. The best-preserved part of the ancient fortifications is the Beucheresse gate near the cathedral. The narrow streets surrounding the castle are lined with many old houses from the 15th and 16th centuries, the most notable being known as the “Maison du Grand Veneur.” The town is home to an art museum, a museum of natural history and archaeology, and a library. Laval is enhanced by lovely promenades, one of which, facing the town hall, features a statue of the famous surgeon Ambroise Paré (1517-1590). Laval serves as the seat of a prefect, a bishopric established in 1855, and a court of assizes, along with having first-instance and commercial tribunals, a chamber of commerce, a board for trade arbitration, training colleges, an ecclesiastical seminary, and a boys’ lycée. The town's main industry is cloth manufacturing, which was introduced from Flanders in the 14th century. The production of linen, cotton, and blends employs around 10,000 people in the town and its suburbs. Other industries include metal founding, flour milling, tanning, dyeing, making boots and shoes, and sawing marble quarried nearby. There is also trade in grain.

Laval is not known to have existed before the 9th century. It was taken by John Talbot, earl of Shrewsbury, in 1428, changed hands several times during the wars of the League, and played an important part at the end of the 18th century in the war of La Vendée.

Laval isn't known to have existed before the 9th century. It was captured by John Talbot, Earl of Shrewsbury, in 1428, changed hands several times during the wars of the League, and played a significant role at the end of the 18th century in the war of La Vendée.

Seigneurs and Counts of Laval. The castle of Laval was founded at the beginning of the 11th century by a lord of the name of Guy, and remained in the possession of his male descendants until the 13th century. In 1218 the lordship passed to the house of Montmorency by the marriage of Emma, daughter of Guy VI. of Laval, to Mathieu de Montmorency, the hero of the battle of Bouvines. Of this union was born Guy VII. seigneur of Laval, the ancestor of the second house of Laval. Anne of Laval (d. 1466), the heiress of the second family, married John de Montfort, who took the name of Guy (XIII.) of Laval. At Charles VII.’s coronation (1429) Guy XIV., who was afterwards son-in-law of John V., duke of Brittany, and father-in-law of King René of Anjou, was created count of Laval, and the countship remained in the possession of Guy’s male descendants until 1547. After the Montforts, the countship of Laval passed by inheritance to the families of Rieux and Sainte Maure, to the Colignys, and finally to the La Trémoilles, who held it until the Revolution.

Lords and Counts of Laval. The castle of Laval was founded in the early 11th century by a lord named Guy and stayed in the hands of his male descendants until the 13th century. In 1218, the lordship went to the Montmorency family through the marriage of Emma, daughter of Guy VI of Laval, to Mathieu de Montmorency, the hero of the battle of Bouvines. Their union produced Guy VII, seigneur of Laval, who became the ancestor of the second house of Laval. Anne of Laval (d. 1466), the heiress of the second family, married John de Montfort, who adopted the name Guy (XIII) of Laval. At Charles VII’s coronation (1429), Guy XIV, who later became the son-in-law of John V, duke of Brittany, and father-in-law of King René of Anjou, was made count of Laval, and the countship remained with Guy’s male descendants until 1547. After the Montforts, the countship of Laval was inherited by the families of Rieux and Sainte Maure, then the Colignys, and finally the La Trémoilles, who held it until the Revolution.

See Bertrand de Broussillon, La Maison de Laval (3 vols., 1895-1900).

See Bertrand de Broussillon, La Maison de Laval (3 vols., 1895-1900).

LA VALLIÈRE, LOUISE FRANÇOISE DE (1644-1710), mistress of Louis XIV., was born at Tours on the 6th of August 1644, the daughter of an officer, Laurent de la Baume le Blanc, who took the name of La Vallière from a small property near Amboise. Laurent de la Vallière died in 1651; his widow, who soon married again, joined the court of Gaston d’Orléans at Blois. Louise was brought up with the younger princesses, the step-sisters of La Grande Mademoiselle. After Gaston’s death his widow moved with her daughters to the palace of the Luxembourg in Paris, and with them went Louise, who was now a girl of sixteen. Through the influence of a distant kinswoman, Mme de Choisy, she was named maid of honour to Henrietta of England, who was about her own age and had just married Philip of Orleans, the king’s brother. Henrietta joined the court at Fontainebleau, and was soon on the friendliest terms with her brother-in-law, so friendly indeed that there was some scandal, to avoid which it was determined that Louis should pay marked attentions elsewhere. The person selected was Madame’s maid of honour, Louise. She had been only two months in Fontainebleau before she became the king’s mistress. The affair, begun on Louis’s part as a blind, immediately developed into real passion on both sides. It was Louis’s first serious attachment, and Louise was an innocent, religious-minded girl, who brought 291 neither coquetry nor self-interest to their relation, which was sedulously concealed. Nicolas Fouquet’s curiosity in the matter was one of the causes of his disgrace. In February 1662 there was a storm when Louise refused to tell her lover the relations between Madame (Henrietta) and the comte de Guiche. She fled to an obscure convent at Chaillot, where Louis rapidly followed her. Her enemies, chief of whom was Olympe Mancini, comtesse de Soissons, Mazarin’s niece, sought her downfall by bringing her liaison to the ears of Queen Maria Theresa. She was presently removed from the service of Madame, and established in a small building in the Palais Royal, where in December 1663 she gave birth to a son Charles, who was given in charge to two faithful servants of Colbert. Concealment was practically abandoned after her return to court, and within a week of Anne of Austria’s death in January 1666, La Vallière appeared at mass side by side with Maria Theresa. But her favour was already waning. She had given birth to a second child in January 1665, but both children were dead before the autumn of 1666. A daughter born at Vincennes in October 1666, who received the name of Marie Anne and was known as Mlle de Blois, was publicly recognized by Louis as his daughter in letters-patent making the mother a duchess in May 1667 and conferring on her the estate of Vaujours. In October of that year she bore a son, but by this time her place in Louis’s affections was definitely usurped by Athénaïs de Montespan (q.v.), who had long been plotting against her. She was compelled to remain at court as the king’s official mistress, and even to share Mme de Montespan’s apartments at the Tuileries. She made an attempt at escape in 1671, when she fled to the convent of Ste Marie de Chaillot, only to be compelled to return. In 1674 she was finally permitted to enter the Carmelite convent in the Rue d’Enfer. She took the final vows a year later, when Bossuet pronounced the allocution.

LA VALLIÈRE, LOUISE FRANÇOISE DE (1644-1710), mistress of Louis XIV, was born in Tours on August 6, 1644, as the daughter of an officer, Laurent de la Baume le Blanc, who adopted the name La Vallière from a small estate near Amboise. Laurent de la Vallière passed away in 1651; his widow, who remarried soon after, moved to the court of Gaston d’Orléans in Blois. Louise grew up alongside the younger princesses, the step-sisters of La Grande Mademoiselle. After Gaston's death, his widow relocated with her daughters to the Luxembourg Palace in Paris, and Louise, now sixteen, went with them. Thanks to the influence of a distant relative, Mme de Choisy, she became a maid of honor to Henrietta of England, who was around her age and had just married Philip of Orleans, the king's brother. Henrietta entered the court at Fontainebleau and quickly became very close to her brother-in-law, so much so that it raised some eyebrows, prompting a decision for Louis to focus his attention elsewhere. The chosen target was Madame's maid of honor, Louise. Within just two months at Fontainebleau, she became the king's mistress. What started as a cover-up turned into genuine passion for both of them. This was Louis's first serious romantic involvement, and Louise was an innocent, devout girl who brought neither flirtation nor selfish ambition to their relationship, which they carefully kept under wraps. Nicolas Fouquet’s curiosity about their affair contributed to his downfall. In February 1662, a crisis erupted when Louise refused to disclose what she knew about Madame (Henrietta) and the comte de Guiche. She fled to a secluded convent in Chaillot, where Louis quickly followed her. Her enemies, notably Olympe Mancini, Comtesse de Soissons and Mazarin’s niece, tried to ruin her by exposing her affair to Queen Maria Theresa. Louise was soon removed from service with Madame and settled into a small place in the Palais Royal, where she gave birth to a son named Charles in December 1663, who was entrusted to two loyal servants of Colbert. After her return to court, she largely ceased to hide her situation, and within a week of Anne of Austria’s death in January 1666, La Vallière appeared at mass alongside Maria Theresa. However, her influence was already declining. She had given birth to a second child in January 1665, but both children had died by the autumn of 1666. A daughter born in Vincennes in October 1666, named Marie Anne and known as Mlle de Blois, was publicly acknowledged by Louis as his daughter in letters-patent, making her mother a duchess in May 1667 and granting her the estate of Vaujours. In October of that same year, she had another son, but by then, Athénaïs de Montespan (q.v.), who had long schemed against her, had firmly taken her place in Louis's affections. Louise was forced to remain at court as the king's official mistress and even to share Mme de Montespan’s quarters at the Tuileries. In 1671, she tried to escape by running to the convent of Ste Marie de Chaillot, but had to return. In 1674, she was finally allowed to enter the Carmelite convent on Rue d’Enfer. She took her final vows a year later when Bossuet delivered the allocution.

Her daughter married Armand de Bourbon, prince of Conti, in 1680. The count of Vermandois, her youngest born, died on his first campaign at Courtrai in 1683.

Her daughter married Armand de Bourbon, prince of Conti, in 1680. The count of Vermandois, her youngest child, died during his first campaign at Courtrai in 1683.

La Vallière’s Réflexions sur la miséricorde de Dieu, written after her retreat, were printed by Lequeux in 1767, and in 1860 Réflexions, lettres et sermons, by M. P. Clement (2 vols.). Some apocryphal Mémoires appeared in 1829, and the Lettres de Mme la duchesse de la Vallière (1767) are a corrupt version of her correspondence with the maréchal de Bellefonds. Of modern works on the subject see Arsène Houssaye, Mlle de la Vallière et Mme de Montespan (1860); Jules Lair, Louise de la Vallière (3rd ed., 1902, Eng. trans., 1908); and C. Bonnet, Documents inédits sur Mme de la Vallière (1904).

La Vallière’s Reflections on the Mercy of God, written after her retreat, was published by Lequeux in 1767, and in 1860 Reflections, Letters, and Sermons was published by M. P. Clement (2 vols.). Some apocryphal Memoirs appeared in 1829, and the Letters of Madame the Duchess of la Vallière (1767) are an altered version of her correspondence with Marshal de Bellefonds. For modern works on the topic, see Arsène Houssaye, Mlle de la Vallière and Mme de Montespan (1860); Jules Lair, Louise de la Vallière (3rd ed., 1902, Eng. trans., 1908); and C. Bonnet, Unpublished Documents on Mme de la Vallière (1904).

LAVATER, JOHANN KASPAR (1741-1801), German poet and physiognomist, was born at Zürich on the 15th of November 1741. He was educated at the gymnasium of his native town, where J. J. Bodmer and J. J. Breitinger were among his teachers. When barely one-and-twenty he greatly distinguished himself by denouncing, in conjunction with his friend, the painter H. Fuseli, an iniquitous magistrate, who was compelled to make restitution of his ill-gotten gains. In 1769 Lavater took orders, and officiated till his death as deacon or pastor in various churches in his native city. His oratorical fervour and genuine depth of conviction gave him great personal influence; he was extensively consulted as a casuist, and was welcomed with demonstrative enthusiasm in his numerous journeys through Germany. His mystical writings were also widely popular. Scarcely a trace of this influence has remained, and Lavater’s name would be forgotten but for his work on physiognomy, Physiognomische Fragmente zur Beförderung der Menschenkenntnis und Menschenliebe (1775-1778). The fame even of this book, which found enthusiastic admirers in France and England, as well as in Germany, rests to a great extent upon the handsome style of publication and the accompanying illustrations. It left, however, the study of physiognomy (q.v.), as desultory and unscientific as it found it. As a poet, Lavater published Christliche Lieder (1776-1780) and two epics, Jesus Messias (1780) and Joseph von Arimathia (1794), in the style of Klopstock. More important and characteristic of the religious temperament of Lavater’s age are his introspective Aussichten in die Ewigkeit (4 vols., 1768-1778); Geheimes Tagebuch von einem Beobachter seiner selbst (2 vols., 1772-1773) and Pontius Pilatus, oder der Mensch in allen Gestalten (4 vols., 1782-1785). From 1774 on, Goethe was intimately acquainted with Lavater, but at a later period he became estranged from him, somewhat abruptly accusing him of superstition and hypocrisy. Lavater had a mystic’s indifference to historical Christianity, and, although esteemed by himself and others a champion of orthodoxy, was in fact only an antagonist of rationalism. During the later years of his life his influence waned, and he incurred ridicule by some exhibitions of vanity. He redeemed himself by his patriotic conduct during the French occupation of Switzerland, which brought about his tragical death. On the taking of Zürich by the French in 1799, Lavater, while endeavouring to appease the soldiery, was shot through the body by an infuriated grenadier; he died after long sufferings borne with great fortitude, on the 2nd of January 1801.

LAVATER, JOHANN KASPAR (1741-1801), a German poet and physiognomist, was born in Zürich on November 15, 1741. He was educated at the gymnasium in his hometown, where J. J. Bodmer and J. J. Breitinger were among his teachers. At just 21, he gained notable attention for denouncing an unethical magistrate, alongside his friend, the painter H. Fuseli, which led to the magistrate returning his ill-gotten gains. In 1769, Lavater was ordained and served as a deacon or pastor in various churches in Zürich until his death. His passionate speaking style and deep convictions gave him considerable personal influence; he was often consulted on moral dilemmas and received enthusiastic receptions during his travels throughout Germany. His mystical writings were also quite popular. Little of this influence remains today, and Lavater would likely be forgotten if not for his work on physiognomy, Physiognomische Fragmente zur Beförderung der Menschenkenntnis und Menschenliebe (1775-1778). The book gained fame not just for its content but also for its attractive presentation and illustrations, although it left the study of physiognomy (q.v.) as inconsistent and unscientific as it had found it. As a poet, Lavater published Christliche Lieder (1776-1780) and two epics, Jesus Messias (1780) and Joseph von Arimathia (1794), in the style of Klopstock. More significant and reflective of the religious spirit of Lavater’s time are his introspective works: Aussichten in die Ewigkeit (4 vols., 1768-1778); Geheimes Tagebuch von einem Beobachter seiner selbst (2 vols., 1772-1773); and Pontius Pilatus, oder der Mensch in allen Gestalten (4 vols., 1782-1785). From 1774 onward, Goethe was closely acquainted with Lavater, but later distanced himself, abruptly accusing him of superstition and hypocrisy. Lavater showed a mystic’s indifference to historical Christianity, and although he considered himself a defender of orthodoxy, he was primarily an opponent of rationalism. In his later years, his influence diminished, and he faced ridicule for some displays of vanity. He redeemed himself through his patriotic actions during the French occupation of Switzerland, which ultimately led to his tragic death. When the French captured Zürich in 1799, Lavater, while trying to calm the soldiers, was shot by an enraged grenadier. He died after enduring long suffering with great courage on January 2, 1801.

Lavater himself published two collections of his writings, Vermischte Schriften (2 vols., 1774-1781), and Kleinere prosaische Schriften (3 vols., 1784-1785). His Nachgelassene Schriften were edited by G. Gessner (5 vols., 1801-1802); Sämtliche Werke (but only poems) (6 vols., 1836-1838); Ausgewählte Schriften (8 vols., 1841-1844). See G. Gessner, Lavaters Lebensbeschreibung (3 vols., 1802-1803); U. Hegner, Beiträge zur Kenntnis Lavaters (1836); F. W. Bodemann, Lavater nach seinem Leben, Lehren und Wirken (1856; 2nd ed., 1877); F. Muncker, J. K. Lavater (1883); H. Waser, J. K. Lavater nach Hegners Aufzeichnungen (1894); J. K. Lavater, Denkschrift zum 100. Todestag (1902).

Lavater published two collections of his writings, Vermischte Schriften (2 vols., 1774-1781) and Kleinere prosaische Schriften (3 vols., 1784-1785). His Nachgelassene Schriften were edited by G. Gessner (5 vols., 1801-1802); Sämtliche Werke (only poems) (6 vols., 1836-1838); Ausgewählte Schriften (8 vols., 1841-1844). See G. Gessner, Lavaters Lebensbeschreibung (3 vols., 1802-1803); U. Hegner, Beiträge zur Kenntnis Lavaters (1836); F. W. Bodemann, Lavater nach seinem Leben, Lehren und Wirken (1856; 2nd ed., 1877); F. Muncker, J. K. Lavater (1883); H. Waser, J. K. Lavater nach Hegners Aufzeichnungen (1894); J. K. Lavater, Denkschrift zum 100. Todestag (1902).

LAVAUR, a town of south-western France, capital of an arrondissement in the department of Tarn, 37 m. S.E. of Montauban by rail. Pop. (1906), town 4069; commune 6388. Lavaur stands on the left bank of the Agout, which is here crossed by a railway-bridge and a fine stone bridge of the late 18th century. From 1317 till the Revolution Lavaur was the seat of a bishopric, and there is a cathedral dating from the 13th, 14th and 15th centuries, with an octagonal bell-tower; a second smaller square tower contains a jaquemart (a statue which strikes the hours with a hammer) of the 16th century. In the bishop’s garden is the statue of Emmanuel Augustin, marquis de Las Cases, one of the companions of Napoleon at St Helena. The town carries on distilling and flour-milling and the manufacture of brushes, plaster and wooden shoes. There are a subprefecture and tribunal of first instance. Lavaur was taken in 1211 by Simon de Montfort during the wars of the Albigenses, and several times during the religious wars of the 16th century.

LAVAUR, is a town in southwestern France, the capital of an arrondissement in the Tarn department, located 37 miles southeast of Montauban by train. Population (1906): town 4,069; commune 6,388. Lavaur is situated on the left bank of the Agout River, which is crossed here by both a railway bridge and a beautiful stone bridge from the late 18th century. From 1317 until the Revolution, Lavaur was home to a bishopric, and it has a cathedral that dates back to the 13th, 14th, and 15th centuries, featuring an octagonal bell tower; a smaller square tower houses a jaquemart (a statue that strikes the hours with a hammer) from the 16th century. In the bishop’s garden stands a statue of Emmanuel Augustin, Marquis de Las Cases, who was one of Napoleon's companions on St. Helena. The town is involved in distilling, flour milling, and manufacturing brushes, plaster, and wooden shoes. There is a subprefecture and a court of first instance. Lavaur was captured in 1211 by Simon de Montfort during the Albigensian Wars and faced several conflicts during the religious wars of the 16th century.

LAVEDAN, HENRI LÉON ÉMILE (1859-  ), French dramatist and man of letters, was born at Orleans, the son of Hubert Léon Lavedan, a well-known Catholic and liberal journalist. He contributed to various Parisian papers a series of witty tales and dialogues of Parisian life, many of which were collected in volume form. In 1891 he produced at the Théâtre Français Une Famille, followed at the Vaudeville in 1894 by Le Prince d’Aurec, a satire on the nobility, afterwards re-named Les Descendants. Later brilliant and witty pieces were Les Deux noblesses (1897), Catherine (1897), Le Nouveau jeu (1898), Le Vieux marcheur (1899), Le Marquis de Priola (1902), and Varennes (1904), written in collaboration with G. Lenôtre. He had a great success with Le Duel (Comédie Française, 1905), a powerful psychological study of the relations of two brothers. Lavedan was admitted to the French Academy in 1898.

LAVEDAN, HENRI LÉON ÉMILE (1859-  ), a French playwright and writer, was born in Orleans, the son of Hubert Léon Lavedan, a well-known Catholic and liberal journalist. He wrote a series of clever stories and dialogues about Parisian life for various Parisian newspapers, many of which were later published in book form. In 1891, he debuted at the Théâtre Français with Une Famille, followed by Le Prince d’Aurec in 1894 at the Vaudeville, a satire on the nobility that was later renamed Les Descendants. His later notable works included Les Deux noblesses (1897), Catherine (1897), Le Nouveau jeu (1898), Le Vieux marcheur (1899), Le Marquis de Priola (1902), and Varennes (1904), which he co-wrote with G. Lenôtre. He achieved great success with Le Duel (Comédie Française, 1905), a powerful psychological exploration of the relationship between two brothers. Lavedan was inducted into the French Academy in 1898.

LAVELEYE, ÉMILE LOUIS VICTOR DE (1822-1892), Belgian economist, was born at Bruges on the 5th of April 1822, and educated there and at the Collège Stanislas in Paris, a celebrated establishment in the hands of the Oratorians. He continued his studies at the Catholic university of Louvain and afterwards at Ghent, where he came under the influence of François Huet, the philosopher and Christian Socialist. In 1844 he won a prize with an essay on the language and literature of Provence. In 1847 he published L’Histoire des rois francs, and in 1861 a French version of the Nibelungen, but though he never lost his interest in literature and history, his most important work was in the domain of economics. He was one of a group of young lawyers, doctors and critics, all old pupils of Huet, who met once a week to discuss social and economic questions, and was thus led to 292 publish his views on these subjects. In 1859 some articles by him in the Revue des deux mondes laid the foundation of his reputation as an economist. In 1864 he was elected to the chair of political economy at the state university of Liége. Here he wrote his most important works: La Russie et l’Autriche depuis Sadowa (1870), Essai sur les formes de gouvernement dans les sociétés modernes (1872), Des Causes actuelles de guerre en Europe et de l’arbitrage and De la propriété et de ses formes primitives (1874), dedicated to the memory of John Stuart Mill and François Huet. He died at Doyon, near Liége, on the 3rd of January 1892. Laveleye’s name is particularly connected with bimetallism and primitive property, and he took a special interest in the revival and preservation of small nationalities. But his activity included the whole realm of political science, political economy, monetary questions, international law, foreign and Belgian politics, questions of education, religion and morality, travel and literature. He had the art of popularizing even the most technical subjects, owing to the clearness of his view and his firm grasp of the matter in hand. He was especially attracted to England, where he thought he saw many of his ideals of social, political and religious progress realized. He was a frequent contributor to the English newspapers and leading reviews. The most widely circulated of his works was a pamphlet on Le Parti clérical en Belgique, of which 2,000,000 copies were circulated in ten languages.

LAVELEYE, ÉMILE LOUIS VICTOR DE (1822-1892), a Belgian economist, was born in Bruges on April 5, 1822, and educated there and at Collège Stanislas in Paris, a well-known institution run by the Oratorians. He continued his studies at the Catholic University of Louvain and later at Ghent, where he was influenced by François Huet, the philosopher and Christian Socialist. In 1844, he won a prize for an essay on the language and literature of Provence. In 1847, he published L’Histoire des rois francs, and in 1861, a French version of the Nibelungen. Although he never lost interest in literature and history, his most significant contributions were in economics. He was part of a group of young lawyers, doctors, and critics—all former students of Huet—who met weekly to discuss social and economic issues, which inspired him to 292 publish his thoughts on these topics. In 1859, some of his articles in the Revue des deux mondes established his reputation as an economist. In 1864, he was appointed to the chair of political economy at the State University of Liège. There, he produced his most notable works: La Russie et l’Autriche depuis Sadowa (1870), Essai sur les formes de gouvernement dans les sociétés modernes (1872), Des Causes actuelles de guerre en Europe et de l’arbitrage, and De la propriété et de ses formes primitives (1874), dedicated to the memory of John Stuart Mill and François Huet. He passed away in Doyon, near Liège, on January 3, 1892. Laveleye is particularly recognized for his work on bimetallism and primitive property, and he had a strong interest in the revival and preservation of small nationalities. His work spanned a wide range of topics in political science, political economy, monetary issues, international law, both foreign and Belgian politics, education, religion, morality, travel, and literature. He had a talent for making even the most technical subjects accessible due to his clarity of thought and solid understanding of the issues at hand. He was particularly drawn to England, where he felt many of his ideals about social, political, and religious progress were realized. He frequently contributed to English newspapers and leading journals. The most widely read of his works was a pamphlet on Le Parti clérical en Belgique, with 2,000,000 copies distributed in ten languages.

LAVENDER, botanically Lavandula, a genus of the natural order Labiatae distinguished by an ovate tubular calyx, a two-lipped corolla, of which the upper lip has two and the lower three lobes, and four stamens bent downwards.

LAVENDER, scientifically known as Lavandula, is a genus in the Labiatae family, characterized by an oval tubular calyx, a two-lipped corolla where the upper lip has two lobes and the lower lip has three lobes, along with four stamens that are bent downwards.

The plant to which the name of lavender is commonly applied, Lavandula vera, is a native of the mountainous districts of the countries bordering on the western half of the Mediterranean, extending from the eastern coast of Spain to Calabria and northern Africa, growing in some places at a height of 4500 ft. above the sea-level, and preferring stony declivities in open sunny situations. It is cultivated in the open air as far north as Norway and Livonia. Lavender forms an evergreen under-shrub about 2 ft. high, with greyish-green hoary linear leaves, rolled under at the edges when young; the branches are erect and give a bushy appearance to the plant. The flowers are borne on a terminal spike at the summit of a long naked stalk, the spike being composed of 6-10 dense clusters in the axils of small, brownish, rhomboidal, tapering, opposite bracts, the clusters being more widely separated towards the base of the spike. The calyx is tubular, contracted towards the mouth, marked with 13 ribs and 5-toothed, the posterior tooth being the largest. The corolla is of a pale violet colour, but darker on its inner surface, tubular, two-lipped, the upper lip with two and the lower with three lobes. Both corolla and calyx are covered with stellate hairs, amongst which are imbedded shining oil glands to which the fragrance of the plant is due. The leaves and flowers of lavender are said to have been used by the ancients to perfume their baths; hence the Med. Lat. name Lavandula or Lavendula is supposed to have been derived from lavare, to wash. This derivation is considered doubtful and a connexion has been suggested with Lat. livere, to be of a bluish, pale or livid colour.

The plant commonly known as lavender, Lavandula vera, is native to the mountainous areas of countries that border the western Mediterranean, stretching from the eastern coast of Spain to Calabria and northern Africa. It can be found growing at elevations of up to 4500 ft. above sea level and prefers rocky slopes in bright, sunny locations. Lavender is grown outdoors as far north as Norway and Livonia. It develops into an evergreen shrub about 2 ft. tall, with grayish-green leaves that are rolled under at the edges when they are young. The branches are upright, giving the plant a bushy look. The flowers grow on a spike at the top of a long bare stalk, made up of 6-10 dense clusters in the axils of small, brownish, rhomboidal, tapering bracts, which are opposite each other, with the clusters spaced more widely apart towards the base of the spike. The calyx is tubular and narrows at the opening, featuring 13 ribs and 5 teeth, with the back tooth being the largest. The corolla is pale violet, darker on the inside, tubular, and two-lipped, with the upper lip having two lobes and the lower lip three lobes. Both the corolla and calyx are covered with star-shaped hairs, among which shiny oil glands are embedded, providing the plant's fragrance. It is said that the leaves and flowers of lavender were used by ancient people to scent their baths; therefore, the Medieval Latin name Lavandula or Lavendula is thought to come from lavare, meaning to wash. This origin is considered uncertain, and a connection has been suggested to the Latin livere, which means to be bluish, pale, or livid.

Although L. Stoechas was well known to the ancients, no allusion unquestionably referring to L. vera has been found in the writings of classical authors, the earliest mention of the latter plant being in the 12th century by the abbess Hildegard, who lived near Bingen on the Rhine. Under the name of llafant or llafantly it was known to the Welsh physicians as a medicine in the 13th century. The dried flowers have long been used in England, the United States and other countries for perfuming linen, and the characteristic cry of “Lavender! sweet lavender!” was still to be heard in London streets at the beginning of the 20th century. In England lavender is cultivated chiefly for the distillation of its essential oil, of which it yields on an average 1½% when freed from the stalks, but in the south of Europe the flowers form an object of trade, being exported to the Barbary states, Turkey and America.

Although L. Stoechas was well known to ancient people, there is no clear reference to L. vera in the writings of classical authors. The first mention of this plant was by the abbess Hildegard in the 12th century, who lived near Bingen on the Rhine. The Welsh physicians knew it as llafant or llafantly and used it medicinally in the 13th century. Dried flowers have long been used in England, the United States, and other countries to scent linen, and the distinctive call of “Lavender! sweet lavender!” could still be heard in the streets of London at the beginning of the 20th century. In England, lavender is mainly grown for its essential oil, which yields about 1½% when the stalks are removed, but in southern Europe, the flowers are a traded commodity, being exported to the Barbary states, Turkey, and America.

In Great Britain lavender is grown in the parishes of Mitcham, Carshalton and Beddington in Surrey, and in Hertfordshire in the parish of Hitchin. The most suitable soil seems to be a sandy loam with a calcareous substratum, and the most favourable position a sunny slope in localities elevated above the level of fogs, where the plant is not in danger of early frost and is freely exposed to air and light. At Hitchin lavender is said to have been grown as early as 1568, but as a commercial speculation its cultivation dates back only to 1823. The plants at present in cultivation do not produce seed, and the propagation is always made by slips or by dividing the roots. The latter plan has only been followed since 1860, when a large number of lavender plants were killed by a severe frost. Since that date the plants have been subject to the attack of a fungus, in consequence of which the price of the oil has been considerably enhanced.

In Great Britain, lavender is grown in the areas of Mitcham, Carshalton, and Beddington in Surrey, as well as in Hertfordshire in the Hitchin area. The best type of soil appears to be sandy loam with a chalky base, and the ideal location is a sunny slope in places that are above the level of fog, where the plants are safe from early frost and get plenty of air and light. Lavender in Hitchin is said to have been cultivated as early as 1568, but it became a commercial crop only in 1823. Currently, the plants being cultivated don’t produce seeds, so they are propagated by cuttings or by dividing the roots. The latter method has only been used since 1860, when a harsh frost killed many lavender plants. Since then, the plants have been affected by a fungus, which has significantly increased the price of the oil.

The flowers are collected in the beginning of August, and taken direct to the still. The yield of oil depends in great measure upon the weather. After a wet and dull June and July the yield is sometimes only half as much as when the weather has been bright and sunshiny. From 12 to 30 ℔ of oil per acre is the average amount obtained. The oil contained in the stem has a more rank odour and is less volatile than that of the flowers; consequently the portion that distils over after the first hour and a half is collected separately.

The flowers are picked at the start of August and taken straight to the still. The amount of oil produced largely depends on the weather. Following a rainy and cloudy June and July, the yield can sometimes be only half of what it is during bright and sunny weather. The average yield is between 12 to 30 pounds of oil per acre. The oil found in the stem has a stronger smell and is less volatile than that from the flowers; therefore, the portion that distills after the first hour and a half is collected separately.

Lavender (Lavandula vera).

1. Flower, side view.

Flower, side angle.

2. Flower, front view.

Flower, facing forward.

3. Calyx opened and spread flat.

3. Calyx opened up and flattened out.

4. Corolla opened and spread flat.

4. The corolla opened and flattened out.

5. Pistil.

Pistil.

The finest oil is obtained by the distillation of the flowers, without the stalks, but the labour spent upon this adds about 10s. per ℔ to the expense of the oil, and the same end is practically attained by fractional distillation. The oil mellows by keeping three years, after which it deteriorates unless mixed with alcohol; it is also improved by redistillation. Oil of lavender is distilled from the wild plants in Piedmont and the South of France, especially in the villages about Mont Ventoux near Avignon, and in those some leagues west of Montpellier. The best French oil realizes scarcely one-sixth of the price of the English oil. Cheaper varieties are made by distilling the entire plant.

The best oil is made by distilling the flowers without the stems, but this process adds about £10 per pound to the cost of the oil, and you can achieve a similar result using fractional distillation. The oil improves if it’s kept for three years, after which it starts to go bad unless mixed with alcohol; it also gets better with redistillation. Lavender oil is distilled from wild plants in Piedmont and the South of France, especially in villages around Mont Ventoux near Avignon and those a few leagues west of Montpellier. The best French oil sells for barely one-sixth of the price of the English oil. Cheaper versions are produced by distilling the whole plant.

Oil of lavender is a mobile liquid having a specific gravity from 0.85 to 0.89. Its chief constituents are linalool acetate, which also occurs in oil of bergamot, and linalool, C10H17OH, an alcohol derived by oxidation from myrcene, C10H16, which is one of the terpenes. The dose is ½-3 minims. The British pharmacopeia contains a spiritus lavandulae, dose 5-20 minims: and a compound tincture, dose ½-1 drachm. This is contained in liquor arsenicalis, and its characteristic odour may thus be of great practical importance, medico-legally and otherwise. The pharmacology of oil of lavender is simply that of an exceptionally pleasant and mild volatile oil. It is largely used as a carminative and as a colouring and flavouring agent. Its adulteration with alcohol may be detected by chloride of calcium dissolving in it and forming a separate layer of liquid at the bottom of the vessel. Glycerine acts in the same way. If it contain turpentine it will not dissolve in three volumes of alcohol, in which quantity the pure oil is perfectly soluble.

Oil of lavender is a clear liquid with a specific gravity ranging from 0.85 to 0.89. Its main components are linalool acetate, which is also found in bergamot oil, and linalool, C10H17OH, an alcohol produced by oxidizing myrcene, C10H16, which is one of the terpenes. The dosage is ½-3 minims. The British pharmacopoeia lists a spiritus lavandulae with a dose of 5-20 minims, and a compound tincture with a dose of ½-1 drachm. This is included in liquor arsenicalis, and its distinctive smell can be very significant in terms of medical law and other areas. The pharmacology of oil of lavender is simply that of a very pleasant and mild volatile oil. It’s mostly used as a carminative and as a coloring and flavoring agent. Its adulteration with alcohol can be detected by adding calcium chloride, which will dissolve and create a separate layer at the bottom of the container. Glycerin behaves similarly. If it contains turpentine, it will not dissolve in three volumes of alcohol, while the pure oil is completely soluble in that amount.

Lavender flowers were formerly considered good for “all disorders of the head and nerves”; a spirit prepared with them was known under the name of palsy drops.

Lavender flowers used to be thought to be good for “all issues related to the head and nerves”; a spirit made with them was referred to as palsy drops.

Lavender water consists of a solution of the volatile oil in spirit 293 of wine with the addition of the essences of musk, rose, bergamot and ambergris, but is very rarely prepared by distillation of the flowers with spirit.

Lavender water is a mixture of the essential oil dissolved in wine spirit, along with added essences of musk, rose, bergamot, and ambergris. However, it is very rarely made by distilling the flowers with the spirit. 293

In the climate of New York lavender is scarcely hardy, but in the vicinity of Philadelphia considerable quantities are grown for the market. In American gardens sweet basil (Ocimum basilicum) is frequently called lavender.

In the climate of New York, lavender is hardly resilient, but around Philadelphia, a significant amount is grown for the market. In American gardens, sweet basil (Ocimum basilicum) is often referred to as lavender.

Lavandula Spica, a species which differs from L. vera chiefly in its smaller size, more crowded leaves and linear bracts, is also used for the distillation of an essential oil, which is known in England as oil of spike and in France under the name of essence d’aspic. It is used in painting on porcelain and in veterinary medicine. The oil as met with in commerce is less fragrant than that of L. vera—probably because the whole plant is distilled, for the flowers of the two species are scarcely distinguishable in fragrance. L. Spica does not extend so far north, nor ascend the mountains beyond 2000 ft. It cannot be cultivated in Britain except in sheltered situations. A nearly allied species, L. lanata, a native of Spain, with broader leaves, is also very fragrant, but does not appear to be distilled for oil.

Lavandula Spica, a species that differs from L. vera mainly in its smaller size, more densely packed leaves, and linear bracts, is also used for extracting an essential oil, which is known in England as spike oil and in France as essence d’aspic. It's utilized in porcelain painting and veterinary medicine. The oil available in the market is less fragrant than that of L. vera—likely because the entire plant is distilled, as the flowers of both species have nearly indistinguishable fragrances. L. Spica does not grow as far north and doesn't rise above 2000 ft in the mountains. It can only be cultivated in Britain in protected areas. A closely related species, L. lanata, native to Spain and with broader leaves, is also quite fragrant, but it doesn’t seem to be distilled for oil.

Lavandula Stoechas, a species extending from the Canaries to Asia Minor, is distinguished from the above plants by its blackish purple flowers, and shortly stalked spikes crowned by conspicuous purplish sterile bracts. The flowers were official in the London pharmacopoeia as late as 1746. They are still used by the Arabs as an expectorant and antispasmodic. The Stoechades (now called the isles of Hyères near Toulon) owed their name to the abundance of the plant growing there.

Lavandula Stoechas, a species that stretches from the Canaries to Asia Minor, is recognized from the other plants by its dark purple flowers and short-stemmed spikes topped with noticeable purplish sterile bracts. The flowers were officially listed in the London pharmacopoeia as late as 1746. They are still used by Arabs as an expectorant and antispasmodic. The Stoechades (now known as the islands of Hyères near Toulon) got their name from the abundance of this plant growing there.

Other species of lavender are known, some of which extend as far east as to India. A few which differ from the above in having divided leaves, as L. dentata, L. abrotanoides, L. multifolia, L. pinnata and L. viridis, have been cultivated in greenhouses, &c., in England.

Other species of lavender are known, some of which reach as far east as India. A few of these, which are different from those mentioned above due to their divided leaves, such as L. dentata, L. abrotanoides, L. multifolia, L. pinnata, and L. viridis, have been grown in greenhouses, etc., in England.

Sea lavender is a name applied in England to several species of Statice, a genus of littoral plants belonging to the order Plumba gineae. Lavender cotton is a species of the genus Santolina, small, yellow-flowered, evergreen undershrubs of the Composite order.

Sea lavender is a term used in England for several species of Statice, a group of coastal plants from the order Plumbagineae. Lavender cotton is a species of the genus Santolina, which consists of small, yellow-flowered, evergreen shrubs from the Composite order.

LAVERDY, CLÉMENT CHARLES FRANÇOIS DE (1723-1793), French statesman, was a member of the parlement of Paris when the case against the Jesuits came before that body in August 1761. He demanded the suppression of the order and thus acquired popularity. Louis XV. named him controller-general of the finances in December 1763, but the burden was great and Laverdy knew nothing of finance. Three months after his nomination he forbade anything of any kind whatever to be printed concerning his administration, thus refusing advice as well as censure. He used all sorts of expedients, sometimes dishonest, to replenish the treasury, and was even accused of having himself profited from the commerce in wheat. A court intrigue led to his sudden dismissal on the 1st of October 1768. Henceforward he lived in retirement until, during the Revolution, he was involved in the charges against the financiers of the old régime. The Revolutionary tribunal condemned him to death, and he was guillotined on the 24th of November 1793.

LAVERDY, CLÉMENT CHARLES FRANÇOIS DE (1723-1793), a French politician, was part of the Parlement of Paris when the case against the Jesuits was presented in August 1761. He called for the order's dissolution, which made him popular. Louis XV appointed him controller-general of finances in December 1763, but the job was overwhelming, and Laverdy had no knowledge of finance. Three months after taking office, he banned any kind of publication regarding his administration, rejecting both advice and criticism. He resorted to various tactics, some questionable, to refill the treasury and was even accused of benefiting from wheat trading. A political scandal led to his abrupt dismissal on October 1, 1768. From then on, he lived in seclusion until, during the Revolution, he was implicated in accusations against the financiers of the former regime. The Revolutionary tribunal sentenced him to death, and he was guillotined on November 24, 1793.

See A. Jobez, La France sous Louis XV (1869).

See A. Jobez, La France sous Louis XV (1869).

LAVERNA, an old Italian divinity, originally one of the spirits of the underworld. A cup found in an Etruscan tomb bears the inscription “Lavernai Pocolom,” and in a fragment of Septimius Serenus Laverna is expressly mentioned in connexion with the di inferi. By an easy transition, she came to be regarded as the protectress of thieves, whose operations were associated with darkness. She had an altar on the Aventine hill, near the gate called after her Lavernalis, and a grove on the Via Salaria. Her aid was invoked by thieves to enable them to carry out their plans successfully without forfeiting their reputation for piety and honesty (Horace, Ep. i. 16, 60). Many explanations have been given of the name: (1) from latere (Schol. on Horace, who gives laternio as another form of lavernio or robber); (2) from lavare (Acron on Horace, according to whom thieves were called lavatores, perhaps referring to bath thieves); (3) from levare (cf. shop-lifters). Modern etymologists connect it with lu-crum, and explain it as meaning the goddess of gain.

LAVERNA, is an ancient Italian goddess, originally one of the spirits of the underworld. A cup discovered in an Etruscan tomb has the inscription “Lavernai Pocolom,” and a fragment from Septimius Serenus explicitly mentions Laverna in connection with the di inferi. Through a natural shift, she became seen as the protector of thieves, whose activities were linked to darkness. She had an altar on the Aventine hill, near the gate named after her, Lavernalis, and a grove on the Via Salaria. Thieves called upon her aid to help them carry out their plans successfully without losing their reputation for piety and honesty (Horace, Ep. i. 16, 60). Various explanations have been proposed for her name: (1) from latere (Schol. on Horace, who provides laternio as another form of lavernio or robber); (2) from lavare (Acron on Horace, who states that thieves were referred to as lavatores, possibly relating to bath thieves); (3) from levare (compare shoplifters). Modern etymologists link it to lu-crum, interpreting it as the goddess of gain.

LAVERY, JOHN (1857-  ), British painter, was born in Belfast, and received his art training in Glasgow, London and Paris. He was elected associate of the Royal Scottish Academy in 1892 and academician in 1896, having won a considerable reputation as a painter of portraits and figure subjects, and as a facile and vigorous executant. He became also vice-president of the International Society of sculptors, painters and gravers. Many of his paintings have been acquired for public collections, and he is represented in the National Galleries at Brussels, Berlin and Edinburgh, in the Carnegie Institute at Pittsburg, the Philadelphia Gallery, the New South Wales Gallery, the Modern Gallery, Venice, the Pinakothek, Munich, the Glasgow Corporation Gallery, and the Luxembourg.

Lavery, John (1857-  ), British painter, was born in Belfast and received his art training in Glasgow, London, and Paris. He was elected as an associate of the Royal Scottish Academy in 1892 and became an academician in 1896, having built a strong reputation as a painter of portraits and figure subjects, as well as being a skilled and energetic artist. He also served as vice-president of the International Society of Sculptors, Painters, and Gravers. Many of his paintings have been acquired for public collections, and he is represented in the National Galleries of Brussels, Berlin, and Edinburgh, the Carnegie Institute in Pittsburgh, the Philadelphia Gallery, the New South Wales Gallery, the Modern Gallery in Venice, the Pinakothek in Munich, the Glasgow Corporation Gallery, and the Luxembourg.

LAVIGERIE, CHARLES MARTIAL ALLEMAND (1825-1892), French divine, cardinal archbishop of Carthage and Algiers and primate of Africa, was born at Bayonne on the 31st of October 1825, and was educated at St Sulpice, Paris. He was ordained priest in 1849, and was professor of ecclesiastical history at the Sorbonne from 1854 to 1856. In 1856 he accepted the direction of the schools of the East, and was thus for the first time brought into contact with the Mahommedan world. “C’est là,” he wrote, “que j’ai connu enfin ma vocation.” Activity in missionary work, especially in alleviating the distresses of the victims of the Druses, soon brought him prominently into notice; he was made a chevalier of the Legion of Honour, and in October 1861, shortly after his return to Europe, was appointed French auditor at Rome. Two years later he was raised to the see of Nancy, where he remained for four years, during which the diocese became one of the best administered in France. While bishop of Nancy he met Marshal MacMahon, then governor-general of Algeria, who in 1866 offered him the see of Algiers, just raised to an archbishopric. Lavigerie landed in Africa on the 11th of May 1868, when the great famine was already making itself felt, and he began in November to collect the orphans into villages. This action, however, did not meet with the approval of MacMahon, who feared that the Arabs would resent it as an infraction of the religious peace, and thought that the Mahommedan church, being a state institution in Algeria, ought to be protected from proselytism; so it was intimated to the prelate that his sole duty was to minister to the colonists. Lavigerie, however, continued his self-imposed task, refused the archbishopric of Lyons, which was offered to him by the emperor, and won his point. Contact with the natives during the famine caused Lavigerie to entertain exaggerated hopes for their general conversion, and his enthusiasm was such that he offered to resign his archbishopric in order to devote himself entirely to the missions. Pius IX. refused this, but granted him a coadjutor, and placed the whole of equatorial Africa under his charge. In 1870 Lavigerie warmly supported papal infallibility. In 1871 he was twice a candidate for the National Assembly, but was defeated. In 1874 he founded the Sahara and Sudan mission, and sent missionaries to Tunis, Tripoli, East Africa and the Congo. The order of African missionaries thus founded, for which Lavigerie himself drew up the rule, has since become famous as the Pères Blancs. From 1881 to 1884 his activity in Tunisia so raised the prestige of France that it drew from Gambetta the celebrated declaration, L’Anticléricalisme n’est pas un article d’exportation, and led to the exemption of Algeria from the application of the decrees concerning the religious orders. On the 27th of March 1882 the dignity of cardinal was conferred upon Lavigerie, but the great object of his ambition was to restore the see of St Cyprian; and in that also he was successful, for by a bull of 10th November 1884 the metropolitan see of Carthage was re-erected, and Lavigerie received the pallium on the 25th of January 1885. The later years of his life were spent in ardent anti-slavery propaganda, and his eloquence moved large audiences in London, as well as in Paris, Brussels and other parts of the continent. He hoped, by organizing a fraternity of armed laymen as pioneers, to restore fertility to the Sahara; but this community did not succeed, and was dissolved before his death. In 1890 Lavigerie appeared in the new character of a politician, and arranged with Pope Leo XIII. to make an attempt to reconcile the church with the republic. He invited the officers of the Mediterranean squadron to lunch at Algiers, and, practically renouncing his monarchical sympathies, to which he clung as long as the comte de Chambord was alive, expressed his support of the republic. 294 and emphasized it by having the Marseillaise played by a band of his Pères Blancs. The further steps in this evolution emanated from the pope, and Lavigerie, whose health now began to fail, receded comparatively into the background. He died at Algiers on the 26th of November 1892.

LAVIGERIE, CHARLES MARTIAL ALLEMAND (1825-1892), French theologian, cardinal archbishop of Carthage and Algiers, and primate of Africa, was born in Bayonne on October 31, 1825, and educated at St Sulpice, Paris. He was ordained as a priest in 1849 and was a professor of ecclesiastical history at the Sorbonne from 1854 to 1856. In 1856, he took over the leadership of the schools in the East, which brought him into contact with the Muslim world for the first time. “It was there,” he wrote, “that I finally discovered my calling.” His work in missionary activities, particularly in helping the victims of the Druses, quickly gained him recognition; he was made a knight of the Legion of Honour, and in October 1861, shortly after returning to Europe, he was appointed French auditor in Rome. Two years later, he was appointed as the bishop of Nancy, where he served for four years, during which time the diocese became one of the best-run in France. While bishop of Nancy, he met Marshal MacMahon, who was then the governor-general of Algeria, and in 1866 offered him the see of Algiers, which had just been elevated to an archbishopric. Lavigerie arrived in Africa on May 11, 1868, when the great famine was already affecting the region, and he began collecting orphans into villages starting in November. However, this action did not sit well with MacMahon, who worried that the Arabs would see it as a violation of the religious peace and believed that the Muslim church, as a state institution in Algeria, should be protected from proselytism; thus, he indicated to Lavigerie that his primary duty was to serve the colonists. Nevertheless, Lavigerie continued his self-imposed mission, declined the archbishopric of Lyons offered by the emperor, and achieved his goals. His interactions with the local people during the famine led Lavigerie to hold unrealistic hopes for their widespread conversion, and he was so enthusiastic that he offered to resign his archbishopric to focus entirely on missionary work. Pius IX. declined this offer but assigned him a coadjutor and placed all of equatorial Africa under his jurisdiction. In 1870, Lavigerie passionately supported papal infallibility. In 1871, he ran for the National Assembly twice but was not elected. In 1874, he established the Sahara and Sudan mission and sent missionaries to Tunisia, Tripoli, East Africa, and the Congo. The order of African missionaries he founded is now known as the Pères Blancs. From 1881 to 1884, his efforts in Tunisia greatly enhanced France's prestige, prompting Gambetta's famous declaration, L’Anticléricalisme n’est pas un article d’exportation, and led to Algeria being exempted from the decrees regarding religious orders. On March 27, 1882, Lavigerie was made a cardinal, but his main ambition was to restore the see of St Cyprian, which he accomplished with a bull on November 10, 1884, re-establishing the metropolitan see of Carthage, and he received the pallium on January 25, 1885. In his later years, he passionately campaigned against slavery, and his powerful speeches resonated with large crowds in London, Paris, Brussels, and other parts of Europe. He hoped to restore fertility to the Sahara by creating a fraternity of armed laymen as pioneers, but this initiative failed and was disbanded before his death. In 1890, Lavigerie emerged as a politician and coordinated with Pope Leo XIII. to try to reconcile the church with the republic. He hosted Mediterranean squadron officers for lunch in Algiers and, effectively giving up his royalist leanings that he held onto while the comte de Chambord was alive, publicly declared his support for the republic, emphasizing it by having the Marseillaise played by a band of his Pères Blancs. The subsequent steps in this transformation came from the pope, and Lavigerie, whose health began to decline, stepped back relatively. He died in Algiers on November 26, 1892. 294

(G. F. B.)

LA VILLEMARQUÉ, THÉODORE CLAUDE HENRI, Vicomte Hersart de (1815-1895), French philologist and man of letters, was born at Keransker, near Quimperlé, on the 6th of July 1815. He was descended from an old Breton family, which counted among its members a Hersart who had followed Saint Louis to the Crusade, and another who was a companion in arms of Du Guesclin. La Villemarqué devoted himself to the elucidation of the monuments of Breton literature. Introduced in 1851 by Jacob Grimm as correspondent to the Academy of Berlin, he became in 1858 a member of the Academy of Inscriptions. His works include: Contes populaires des anciens Bretons (1842), to which was prefixed an essay on the origin of the romances of the Round Table; Essai sur l’histoire de la langue bretonne (1837); Poèmes des bardes bretons du sixième siècle (1850); La Légende celtique en Irelande, en Cambrie et en Bretagne (1859). The popular Breton songs published by him in 1839 as Barzaz Breiz were considerably retouched. La Villemarqué’s work has been superseded by the work of later scholars, but he has the merit of having done much to arouse popular interest in his subject. He died at Keransker on the 8th of December 1895.

LA VILLEMARQUÉ, THÉODORE CLAUDE HENRI, Vicomte Hersart de (1815-1895), French philologist and writer, was born in Keransker, near Quimperlé, on July 6, 1815. He came from an old Breton family, which included a Hersart who joined Saint Louis in the Crusades and another who was a comrade of Du Guesclin. La Villemarqué dedicated himself to clarifying the treasures of Breton literature. In 1851, Jacob Grimm introduced him as a correspondent to the Academy of Berlin, and in 1858 he became a member of the Academy of Inscriptions. His works include: Contes populaires des anciens Bretons (1842), which features an essay on the origins of the Round Table romances; Essai sur l’histoire de la langue bretonne (1837); Poèmes des bardes bretons du sixième siècle (1850); La Légende celtique en Irelande, en Cambrie et en Bretagne (1859). The popular Breton songs he published in 1839 as Barzaz Breiz were significantly edited. Although La Villemarqué's work has been succeeded by later scholars, he played an important role in sparking public interest in the topic. He passed away in Keransker on December 8, 1895.

On the subject of the doubtful authenticity of Barzaz Breiz, see Luzel’s Preface to his Chansons populaires de la Basse-Bretagne, and, for a list of works on the subject, the Revue Celtique (vol. v.).

On the topic of the questionable authenticity of Barzaz Breiz, refer to Luzel’s Preface to his Chansons populaires de la Basse-Bretagne, and for a list of works on the subject, see the Revue Celtique (vol. v.).

LAVINIUM, an ancient town of Latium, on the so-called Via Lavinatis (see Laurentina, Via), 19 m. S. of Rome, the modern Pratica, situated 300 ft. above sea-level and 2½ m. N.E. from the sea-coast. Its foundation is attributed to Aeneas (whereas Laurentum was the primitive city of King Latinus), who named it after his wife Lavinia. It is rarely mentioned in Roman history and often confused with Lanuvium or Lanivium in the text both of authors and of inscriptions. The custom by which the consuls and praetors or dictators sacrificed on the Alban Mount and at Lavinium to the Penates and to Vesta, before they entered upon office or departed for their province, seems to have been one of great antiquity. There is no trace of its having continued into imperial times, but the cults of Lavinium were kept up, largely by the imperial appointment of honorary non-resident citizens to hold the priesthoods. The citizens of Lavinium were known under the empire as Laurentes Lavinates, and the place itself at a late period as Laurolavinium. It was deserted or forgotten not long after the time of Theodosius.

LAVINIUM, an ancient town in Latium, located on the Via Lavinatis (see Laurentina, Via), 19 miles south of Rome, is now the modern Practice, situated 300 feet above sea level and 2½ miles northeast of the coastline. Its foundation is credited to Aeneas (while Laurentum was the original city of King Latinus), who named it after his wife Lavinia. It’s rarely mentioned in Roman history and often mistaken for Lanuvium or Lanivium in the writings of both authors and inscriptions. The tradition where consuls and praetors or dictators sacrificed on the Alban Mount and at Lavinium to the Penates and Vesta before taking office or departing for their provinces seems to be very old. There’s no evidence that this continued into imperial times, but the religious practices of Lavinium were maintained, mainly through the imperial appointment of honorary non-resident citizens to the priesthoods. Citizens of Lavinium were known during the empire as Laurentes Lavinates, and the town itself was referred to later as Laurolavinium. It was abandoned or forgotten shortly after Theodosius' time.

Lavinium was preceded by a more ancient town, Laurentum, the city of Latinus (Verg. Aen. viii.); of this the site is uncertain, but it is probably to be sought at the modern Tor Paterno, close to the sea-coast and 5 m. N. by W. of Lavinium. Here the name of Laurentum is preserved by the modern name Pantan di Lauro. Even in ancient times it was famous for its groves of bay-trees (laurus) from which its name was perhaps derived, and which in imperial times gave the villas of its territory a name for salubrity, so that both Vitellius and Commodus resorted there. The exact date of the abandonment of the town itself and the incorporation of its territory with that of Lavinium is uncertain, but it may be placed in the latter part of the republic. Under the empire a portion of it must have been imperial domain and forest. We hear of an imperial, procurator in charge of the elephants at Laurentum; and the imperial villa may perhaps be identified with the extensive ruins at Tor Paterno itself. The remains of numerous other villas lie along the ancient coast-line (which was half a mile inland of the modern, being now marked by a row of sand-hills, and was followed by the Via Severiana), both north-west and south-east of Tor Paterno: they extended as a fact in an almost unbroken line along the low sandy coast—now entirely deserted and largely occupied by the low scrub which serves as cover for the wild boars of the king of Italy’s preserves—from the mouth of the Tiber to Antium, and thence again to Astura; but there are no traces of any buildings previous to the imperial period. In one of these villas, excavated by the king of Italy in 1906, was found a fine replica of the famous discobolus of Myron. The plan of the building is interesting, as it diverges entirely from the normal type and adapts itself to the site. Some way to the N.W. was situated the village of Vicus Augustanus Laurentium, taking its name probably from Augustus himself, and probably identical with the village mentioned by Pliny the younger as separated by only one villa from his own. This village was brought to light by excavation in 1874, and its forum and curia are still visible. The remains of the villa of Pliny, too, were excavated in 1713 and in 1802-1819, and it is noteworthy that the place bears the name Villa di Pino (sic) on the staff map; how old the name is, is uncertain. It is impossible without further excavation to reconcile the remains—mainly of substructions—with the elaborate description of his villa given by Pliny (cf. H. Winnefeld in Jahrbuch des Instituts, 1891, 200 seq.).

Lavinium was preceded by an older town, Laurentum, the city of Latinus (Verg. Aen. viii.); its exact location is uncertain, but it’s likely near the modern Tor Paterno, close to the coast and 5 miles N.W. of Lavinium. The name Laurentum is still seen in the modern name Pantan di Lauro. Even in ancient times, it was well-known for its bay laurel groves (laurus), which might be the origin of its name, and in imperial times, the villas in the area became known for their healthy environment, which attracted both Vitellius and Commodus. The exact time when the town was abandoned and its territory was merged with Lavinium is unclear, but it likely happened in the latter part of the Republic. During the Empire, part of it must have been owned by the emperor and used as a forest. There was an imperial procurator overseeing the elephants at Laurentum; the imperial villa may have been located where the extensive ruins at Tor Paterno are today. There are ruins of many other villas along the ancient coastline (which was about half a mile inland from the current coastline, now marked by a line of sand dunes and traced by the Via Severiana), both to the northwest and southeast of Tor Paterno: they stretched in an almost continuous line along the now desolate low sandy coast, which is largely covered by low shrubs that provide shelter for wild boars in the king of Italy’s hunting grounds—from the mouth of the Tiber to Antium, and again to Astura; however, there are no signs of any buildings prior to the imperial era. In one of these villas, excavated by the king of Italy in 1906, a superb replica of the famous discobolus of Myron was found. The design of the building is notable, as it differs completely from the usual style and is adapted to the site. Located further northwest was the village of Vicus Augustanus Laurentium, likely named after Augustus himself, and possibly the same village mentioned by Pliny the Younger, which was only one villa away from his own. This village was uncovered during excavations in 1874, and its forum and curia are still visible. The remains of Pliny's villa were excavated in 1713 and between 1802-1819, and it’s interesting that the area is labeled Villa di Pino (sic) on the staff map; its age is uncertain. Without further digging, it’s impossible to align the remains—mostly of foundations—with the detailed description of his villa provided by Pliny (cf. H. Winnefeld in Jahrbuch des Instituts, 1891, 200 seq.).

The site of the ancient Lavinium, no less than 300 ft. above sea-level and 2½ m. inland, is far healthier than the low-lying Laurentum, where, except in the immediate vicinity of the coast, malaria must have been a dreadful scourge. It possesses considerable natural strength, and consists of a small hill, the original acropolis, occupied by the modern castle and the village surrounding it, and a larger one, now given over to cultivation, where the city stood. On the former there are now no traces of antiquity, but on the latter are scanty remains of the city walls, in small blocks of the grey-green tufa (cappellaccio) which is used in the earliest buildings of Rome, and traces of the streets. The necropolis, too, has been discovered, but not systematically excavated; but objects of the first Iron age, including a sword of Aegean type (thus confirming the tradition), have been found; also remains of a building with Doric columns of an archaistic type, remains of later buildings in brick, and inscriptions, some of them of considerable interest.

The site of the ancient Lavinium, situated about 300 ft. above sea level and 2½ m. inland, is much healthier than the low-lying Laurentum, where malaria must have been a terrible problem, except near the coast. It has significant natural strength, consisting of a small hill, the original acropolis, which is now occupied by a modern castle and the surrounding village, and a larger hill, which has now been turned into farmland, where the city used to be. There are no remnants of ancient times on the former hill, but on the latter, there are sparse remains of the city walls made from small blocks of grey-green tufa (cappellaccio) that were used in the earliest buildings of Rome, along with traces of the streets. The necropolis has also been found, but it hasn't been excavated systematically; however, objects from the early Iron Age, including a sword of Aegean type (which supports the tradition), have been discovered, as well as remains of a building with archaistic Doric columns, ruins of later brick buildings, and some inscriptions, many of which are quite interesting.

See R. Lanciani in Monumenti dei Lincei, xiii. (1903), 133 seq.; xvi. (1906), 241 seq.

See R. Lanciani in Monumenti dei Lincei, xiii. (1903), 133 seq.; xvi. (1906), 241 seq.

(T. As.)

LAVISSE, ERNEST (1842-  ), French historian, was born at Nouvion-en-Thiérache, Aisne, on the 17th of December 1842. In 1865 he obtained a fellowship in history, and in 1875 became a doctor of letters; he was appointed maître de conférence (1876) at the école normale supérieure, succeeding Fustel de Coulanges, and then professor of modern history at the Sorbonne (1888), in the place of Henri Wallon. He was an eloquent professor and very fond of young people, and played an important part in the revival of higher studies in France after 1871. His knowledge of pedagogy was displayed in his public lectures and his addresses, in his private lessons, where he taught a small number of pupils the historical method, and in his books, where he wrote ad probandum at least as much as ad narrandum: class-books, collections of articles, intermingled with personal reminiscences (Questions d’enseignement national, 1885; Études et étudiants, 1890; À propos de nos écoles, 1895), rough historical sketches (Vue générale de l’histoire politique de l’Europe, 1890), &c. Even his works of learning, written without a trace of pedantry, are remarkable for their lucidity and vividness.

LAVISSE, ERNEST (1842-  ), a French historian, was born in Nouvion-en-Thiérache, Aisne, on December 17, 1842. In 1865, he earned a fellowship in history, and in 1875, he became a doctor of letters. He was appointed maître de conférence (1876) at the école normale supérieure, succeeding Fustel de Coulanges, and later became a professor of modern history at the Sorbonne (1888), taking over from Henri Wallon. He was a passionate professor who enjoyed working with young people and played a key role in the revival of higher education in France after 1871. His expertise in pedagogy was evident in his public lectures and speeches, in private lessons where he taught a small group of students the historical method, and in his writings, where he wrote ad probandum just as much as ad narrandum: textbooks, collections of articles mixed with personal anecdotes (Questions d’enseignement national, 1885; Études et étudiants, 1890; À propos de nos écoles, 1895), rough historical overviews (Vue générale de l’histoire politique de l’Europe, 1890), etc. Even his scholarly works, written without any hint of pedantry, stand out for their clarity and liveliness.

After the Franco-Prussian War Lavisse studied the development of Prussia and wrote Étude sur l’une des origines de la monarchie prussienne, ou la Marche de Brandebourg sous la dynastie ascanienne, which was his thesis for his doctor’s degree in 1875, and Études sur l’histoire de la Prusse (1879). In connexion with his study of the Holy Roman Empire, and the cause of its decline, he wrote a number of articles which were published in the Revue des Deux Mondes; and he wrote Trois empereurs d’Allemagne (1888), La Jeunesse du grand Frédéric (1891) and Frédéric II. avant son avènement (1893) when studying the modern German empire and the grounds for its strength. With his friend Alfred Rambaud he conceived the plan of L’Histoire générale du IVe siècle jusqu’à nos jours, to which, however, he contributed nothing. He edited the Histoire de France depuis les origines jusqu’à la Révolution (1901-  ), in which he carefully revised the work of his numerous assistants, reserving the greatest part of the reign of Louis XIV. for himself. This 295 section occupies the whole of volume vii. It is a remarkable piece of work, and the sketch of absolute government in France during this period has never before been traced with an equal amount of insight and brilliance. Lavisse was admitted to the Académie Française on the death of Admiral Jurien de la Gravière in 1892, and after the death of James Darmesteter became editor of the Revue de Paris. He is, however, chiefly a master of pedagogy. When the école normale was joined to the university of Paris, Lavisse was appointed director of the new organization, which he had helped more than any one to bring about.

After the Franco-Prussian War, Lavisse studied the development of Prussia and wrote Étude sur l’une des origines de la monarchie prussienne, ou la Marche de Brandebourg sous la dynastie ascanienne, which was his thesis for his doctorate in 1875, and Études sur l’histoire de la Prusse (1879). In connection with his study of the Holy Roman Empire and its decline, he wrote several articles that were published in the Revue des Deux Mondes; he also wrote Trois empereurs d’Allemagne (1888), La Jeunesse du grand Frédéric (1891), and Frédéric II. avant son avènement (1893) while examining the modern German empire and the reasons for its strength. Along with his friend Alfred Rambaud, he came up with the idea for L’Histoire générale du IVe siècle jusqu’à nos jours, to which he, however, contributed nothing. He edited the Histoire de France depuis les origines jusqu’à la Révolution (1901-  ), in which he meticulously revised the work of his many assistants, devoting most of the section on Louis XIV's reign to himself. This section fills the entire volume VII. It is an impressive piece of work, and the analysis of absolute government in France during this time has never been captured with such insight and brilliance. Lavisse was elected to the Académie Française after the death of Admiral Jurien de la Gravière in 1892, and after the death of James Darmesteter, he became the editor of the Revue de Paris. However, he is primarily known as a leader in pedagogy. When the école normale was merged with the University of Paris, Lavisse was appointed director of the new organization, which he had been instrumental in creating.

LAVOISIER, ANTOINE LAURENT (1743-1794), French chemist, was born in Paris on the 26th of August 1743. His father, an avocat au parlement, gave him an excellent education at the collège Mazarin, and encouraged his taste for natural science; and he studied mathematics and astronomy with N. L. de Lacaille, chemistry with the elder Rouelle and botany with Bernard de Jussieu. In 1766 he received a gold medal from the Academy of Sciences for an essay on the best means of lighting a large town; and among his early work were papers on the analysis of gypsum, on thunder, on the aurora and on congelation, and a refutation of the prevalent belief that water by repeated distillation is converted into earth. He also assisted J. E. Guettard (1715-1786) in preparing his mineralogical atlas of France. In 1768, recognized as a man who had both the ability and the means for a scientific career, he was nominated adjoint chimiste to the Academy, and in that capacity made numerous reports on the most diverse subjects, from the theory of colours to water-supply and from invalid chairs to mesmerism and the divining rod. The same year he obtained the position of adjoint to Baudon, one of the farmers-general of the revenue, subsequently becoming a full titular member of the body. This was the first of a series of posts in which his administrative abilities found full scope. Appointed régisseur des poudres in 1775, he not only abolished the vexatious search for saltpetre in the cellars of private houses, but increased the production of the salt and improved the manufacture of gunpowder. In 1785 he was nominated to the committee on agriculture, and as its secretary drew up reports and instructions on the cultivation of various crops, and promulgated schemes for the establishment of experimental agricultural stations, the distribution of agricultural implements and the adjustment of rights of pasturage. Seven years before he had started a model farm at Fréchine, where he demonstrated the advantages of scientific methods of cultivation and of the introduction of good breeds of cattle and sheep. Chosen a member of the provincial assembly of Orleans in 1787, he busied himself with plans for the improvement of the social and economic conditions of the community by means of savings banks, insurance societies, canals, workhouses, &c.; and he showed the sincerity of his philanthropical work by advancing money out of his own pocket, without interest, to the towns of Blois and Romorantin, for the purchase of barley during the famine of 1788. Attached in this same year to the caisse d’escompte, he presented the report of its operations to the national assembly in 1789, and as commissary of the treasury in 1791 he established a system of accounts of unexampled punctuality. He was also asked by the national assembly to draw up a new scheme of taxation in connexion with which he produced a report De la richesse territoriale de la France, and he was further associated with committees on hygiene, coinage, the casting of cannon, &c., and was secretary and treasurer of the commission appointed in 1790 to secure uniformity of weights and measures.

Lavoisier, Antoine Laurent (1743-1794), French chemist, was born in Paris on August 26, 1743. His father, a lawyer, provided him with an excellent education at the Collège Mazarin and encouraged his interest in natural science. He studied mathematics and astronomy with N. L. de Lacaille, chemistry with the elder Rouelle, and botany with Bernard de Jussieu. In 1766, he received a gold medal from the Academy of Sciences for an essay on the best way to light a large city. Among his early works were papers on the analysis of gypsum, thunder, the aurora, congelation, and a rebuttal of the common belief that water turns into earth after repeated distillation. He also assisted J. E. Guettard (1715-1786) in creating his mineralogical atlas of France. In 1768, recognized as someone capable of and suitable for a scientific career, he was appointed assistant chemist to the Academy and, in that role, produced numerous reports on diverse topics, from color theory to water supply, from invalid chairs to mesmerism and the divining rod. That same year, he was appointed assistant to Baudon, one of the tax collectors, and later became a full member of the body. This was the beginning of a series of positions where his administrative skills were fully utilized. Appointed gunpowder supervisor in 1775, he not only ended the annoying search for saltpeter in the cellars of private homes but also increased the production of the salt and improved gunpowder manufacturing. In 1785, he was appointed to the agriculture committee, and as secretary, he prepared reports and guidelines on various crops and promoted plans for establishing experimental agricultural stations, distributing farming tools, and adjusting grazing rights. Seven years earlier, he had started a model farm at Fréchine, where he showcased the benefits of scientific farming methods and introduced better breeds of cattle and sheep. Elected to the provincial assembly of Orleans in 1787, he worked on improving the social and economic conditions of the community through savings banks, insurance societies, canals, workhouses, etc. He demonstrated his genuine commitment to philanthropy by lending money interest-free from his own funds to the towns of Blois and Romorantin for barley purchases during the 1788 famine. In the same year, attached to the discount bank, he presented a report on its activities to the national assembly in 1789, and as treasury commissioner in 1791, he established an unprecedentedly punctual accounting system. He was also requested by the national assembly to draft a new tax system, resulting in his report De la richesse territoriale de la France, and he was involved with committees on hygiene, currency, cannon casting, etc., serving as secretary and treasurer of the commission appointed in 1790 to ensure uniformity in weights and measures.

In 1791, when Lavoisier was in the middle of all this official activity, the suppression of the farmers-general marked the beginning of troubles which brought about his death. His membership of that body was alone sufficient to make him an object of suspicion; his administration at the régie des poudres was attacked; and Marat accused him in the Ami du Peuple of putting Paris in prison and of stopping the circulation of air in the city by the mur d’octroi erected at his suggestion in 1787. The Academy, of which as treasurer at the time he was a conspicuous member, was regarded by the convention with no friendly eyes as being tainted with “incivism,” and in the spring of 1792 A. F. Fourcroy endeavoured to persuade it to purge itself of suspected members. The attempt was unsuccessful, but in August of the same year Lavoisier had to leave his house and laboratory at the Arsenal, and in November the Academy was forbidden until further orders to fill up the vacancies in its numbers. Next year, on the 1st of August, the convention passed a decree for the uniformity of weights and measures, and requested the Academy to take measures for carrying it out, but a week later Fourcroy persuaded the same convention to suppress the Academy together with other literary societies patentées et dotées by the nation. In November it ordered the arrest of the ex-farmers-general, and on the advice of the committee of public instruction, of which Guyton de Morveau and Fourcroy were members, the names of Lavoisier and others were struck off from the commission of weights and measures. The fate of the ex-farmers-general was sealed on the 2nd of May 1794, when, on the proposal of Antoine Dupin, one of their former officials, the convention sent them for trial by the Revolutionary tribunal. Within a week Lavoisier and 27 others were condemned to death. A petition in his favour addressed to Coffinhal, the president of the tribunal, is said to have been met with the reply La République n’a pas besoin de savants, and on the 8th of the month Lavoisier and his companions were guillotined at the Place de la Révolution. He died fourth, and was preceded by his colleague Jacques Paulze, whose daughter he had married in 1771. “Il ne leur a fallu,” Lagrange remarked, “qu’un moment pour faire tomber cette tête, et cent années peut-être ne suffiront pas pour en reproduire une semblable.”

In 1791, while Lavoisier was heavily involved in official activities, the disbandment of the farmers-general signaled the start of troubles that led to his death. His association with that group alone was enough to make him a target of suspicion; his management at the régie des poudres was criticized; and Marat accused him in the Ami du Peuple of imprisoning Paris and blocking the air circulation in the city with the mur d’octroi that he suggested in 1787. The Academy, where he was a prominent member and treasurer at the time, was viewed unfavorably by the convention as being tainted with "incivism," and in the spring of 1792, A. F. Fourcroy tried to persuade it to cleanse itself of suspected members. The attempt failed, but by August of that year, Lavoisier had to leave his home and lab at the Arsenal, and in November the Academy was ordered to stop filling its vacancies until further notice. The following year, on August 1st, the convention enacted a law for standard weights and measures and asked the Academy to implement it, but a week later, Fourcroy convinced the same convention to disband the Academy along with other government-supported literary societies. In November, it ordered the arrest of the former farmers-general, and on the advice of the committee of public instruction, which included Guyton de Morveau and Fourcroy, Lavoisier’s name and those of others were removed from the commission on weights and measures. The fate of the ex-farmers-general was sealed on May 2, 1794, when, based on a proposal by Antoine Dupin, a former official, the convention sent them for trial by the Revolutionary tribunal. Within a week, Lavoisier and 27 others were sentenced to death. A petition in his favor addressed to Coffinhal, the tribunal's president, reportedly received the response, La République n’a pas besoin de savants, and on the 8th of the month, Lavoisier and his companions were executed by guillotine at the Place de la Révolution. He was the fourth to die, preceded by his colleague Jacques Paulze, whose daughter he had married in 1771. “Il ne leur a fallu,” remarked Lagrange, “qu’un moment pour faire tomber cette tête, et cent années peut-être ne suffiront pas pour en reproduire une semblable.”

Lavoisier’s name is indissolubly associated with the overthrow of the phlogistic doctrine that had dominated the development of chemistry for over a century, and with the establishment of the foundations upon which the modern science reposes. “He discovered,” says Justus von Liebig (Letters on Chemistry, No. 3), “no new body, no new property, no natural phenomenon previously unknown; but all the facts established by him were the necessary consequences of the labours of those who preceded him. His merit, his immortal glory, consists in this—that he infused into the body of the science a new spirit; but all the members of that body were already in existence, and rightly joined together.” Realizing that the total weight of all the products of a chemical reaction must be exactly equal to the total weight of the reacting substances, he made the balance the ultima ratio of the laboratory, and he was able to draw correct inferences from his weighings because, unlike many of the phlogistonists, he looked upon heat as imponderable. It was by weighing that in 1770 he proved that water is not converted into earth by distillation, for he showed that the total weight of a sealed glass vessel and the water it contained remained constant, however long the water was boiled, but that the glass vessel lost weight to an extent equal to the weight of earth produced, his inference being that the earth came from the glass, not from the water. On the 1st of November 1772 he deposited with the Academy a sealed note which stated that sulphur and phosphorus when burnt increased in weight because they absorbed “air,” while the metallic lead formed from litharge by reduction with charcoal weighed less than the original litharge because it had lost “air.” The exact nature of the airs concerned in the processes he did not explain until after the preparation of “dephlogisticated air” (oxygen) by Priestley in 1774. Then, perceiving that in combustion and the calcination of metals only a portion of a given volume of common air was used up, he concluded that Priestley’s new air, air éminemment pur, was what was absorbed by burning phosphorus, &c., “non-vital air,” azote, or nitrogen remaining behind. The gas given off in the reduction of metallic calces by charcoal he at first supposed to be merely that contained in the calx, but he soon came to understand that it was a product formed by the union of the charcoal with the “dephlogisticated air” in the calx. In a memoir presented to the Academy in 1777, but not published till 1782, 296 he assigned to dephlogisticated air the name oxygen, or “acid-producer,” on the supposition that all acids were formed by its union with a simple, usually non-metallic, body; and having verified this notion for phosphorus, sulphur, charcoal, &c., and even extended it to the vegetable acids, he naturally asked himself what was formed by the combustion of “inflammable air” (hydrogen). This problem he had attacked in 1774, and in subsequent years he made various attempts to discover the acid which, under the influence of his oxygen theory, he expected would be formed. It was not till the 25th of June 1783 that in conjunction with Laplace he announced to the Academy that water was the product formed by the combination of hydrogen and oxygen, but by that time he had been anticipated by Cavendish, to whose prior work, however, as to that of several other investigators in other matters, it is to be regretted that he did not render due acknowledgment. But a knowledge of the composition of water enabled him to storm the last defences of the phlogistonists. Hydrogen they held to be the phlogiston of metals, and they supported this view by pointing out that it was liberated when metals were dissolved in acids. Considerations of weight had long prevented Lavoisier from accepting this doctrine, but he was now able to explain the process fully, showing that the hydrogen evolved did not come from the metal itself, but was one product of the decomposition of the water of the dilute acid, the other product, oxygen, combining with the metal to form an oxide which in turn united with the acid. A little later this same knowledge led him to the beginnings of quantitative organic analysis. Knowing that the water produced by the combustion of alcohol was not pre-existent in that substance but was formed by the combination of its hydrogen with the oxygen of the air, he burnt alcohol and other combustible organic substances, such as wax and oil, in a known volume of oxygen, and, from the weight of the water and carbon dioxide produced and his knowledge of their composition, was able to calculate the amounts of carbon, hydrogen and oxygen present in the substance.

Lavoisier's name is closely tied to the dismissal of the phlogiston theory that had dominated chemistry for over a century, and to the establishment of the foundations on which modern science stands. “He discovered,” says Justus von Liebig (Letters on Chemistry, No. 3), “no new substance, no new property, no natural phenomenon that was previously unknown; but all the facts he established were the necessary outcomes of the work done by those before him. His merit, his lasting glory, lies in the fact that he brought a new spirit to the science; however, all the components of that science were already in existence and correctly assembled.” By understanding that the total weight of all products from a chemical reaction must equal the total weight of the reacting substances, he made the balance the ultima ratio of the lab, and he drew correct conclusions from his measurements because, unlike many phlogistonists, he recognized heat as weightless. It was through weighing that in 1770 he proved that water does not turn into earth through distillation. He demonstrated that the total weight of a sealed glass container and the water inside remained constant no matter how long the water was boiled, but the glass container lost weight equal to the weight of the earth produced, leading him to infer that the earth came from the glass, not the water. On November 1, 1772, he submitted a sealed note to the Academy stating that when sulphur and phosphorus are burned, they increase in weight because they absorb “air,” while metallic lead made from litharge by reduction with charcoal weighed less than the original litharge because it had lost “air.” He did not identify the exact nature of the airs involved in these processes until after Priestley prepared “dephlogisticated air” (oxygen) in 1774. Then, noting that in combustion and the calcination of metals, only part of a given volume of common air was consumed, he concluded that Priestley’s new air, air éminemment pur, was what was absorbed by burning phosphorus, etc., while “non-vital air,” azote, or nitrogen, remained. Initially, he believed that the gas released during the reduction of metallic calces by charcoal was merely what was contained in the calx, but soon he understood that it was a product formed by the combination of the charcoal with the “dephlogisticated air” in the calx. In a memoir presented to the Academy in 1777, but not published until 1782, 296 he named dephlogisticated air “oxygen,” or “acid-producer,” based on the assumption that all acids were created by its combination with a simple, usually non-metallic, substance; and after confirming this theory for phosphorus, sulphur, charcoal, etc., and even extending it to vegetable acids, he naturally wondered what was produced by the combustion of “inflammable air” (hydrogen). He tackled this question in 1774 and in the following years made various attempts to find the acid he expected would be formed under the influence of his oxygen theory. It wasn't until June 25, 1783, that he, along with Laplace, announced to the Academy that water was the product formed by the combination of hydrogen and oxygen, though by then he had been preempted by Cavendish, whose earlier work, along with that of several other researchers, he regrettably did not acknowledge. However, his understanding of water's composition allowed him to challenge the last strongholds of the phlogistonists. They believed that hydrogen was the phlogiston of metals, citing that it was released when metals were dissolved in acids. Concerns over weight had long prevented Lavoisier from agreeing with this idea, but now he could explain the process in detail, showing that the hydrogen released did not come from the metal itself, but was a product of the decomposition of the water in the dilute acid, with oxygen combining with the metal to form an oxide that then reacted with the acid. Shortly after, this knowledge led him to the beginnings of quantitative organic analysis. Understanding that the water produced from burning alcohol was not pre-existing in that substance but formed from the combination of its hydrogen with the oxygen in the air, he burned alcohol and other flammable organic substances like wax and oil in a known volume of oxygen. From the weight of the water and carbon dioxide produced, along with his understanding of their composition, he was able to calculate the amounts of carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen present in the substance.

Up to about this time Lavoisier’s work, mainly quantitative in character, had appealed most strongly to physicists, but it now began to win conviction from chemists also. C. L. Berthollet, L. B. Guyton de Morveau and A. F. Fourcroy, his collaborators in the reformed system of chemical terminology set forth in 1787 in the Méthode de nomenclature chimique, were among the earliest French converts, and they were followed by M. H. Klaproth and the German Academy, and by most English chemists except Cavendish, who rather suspended his judgment, and Priestley, who stubbornly clung to the opposite view. Indeed, though the partisans of phlogiston did not surrender without a struggle, the history of science scarcely presents a second instance of a change so fundamental accomplished with such ease. The spread of Lavoisier’s doctrines was greatly facilitated by the defined and logical form in which he presented them in his Traité élémentaire de chimie (présenté dans un ordre nouveau et d’après les découvertes modernes) (1789). The list of simple substances contained in the first volume of this work includes light and caloric with oxygen, azote and hydrogen. Under the head of “oxidable or acidifiable” substances, the combination of which with oxygen yielded acids, were placed sulphur, phosphorus, carbon, and the muriatic, fluoric and boracic radicals. The metals, which by combination with oxygen became oxides, were antimony, silver, arsenic, bismuth, cobalt, copper, tin, iron, manganese, mercury, molybdenum, nickel, gold, platinum, lead, tungsten and zinc; and the “simple earthy salifiable substances” were lime, baryta, magnesia, alumina and silica. The simple nature of the alkalies Lavoisier considered so doubtful that he did not class them as elements, which he conceived as substances which could not be further decomposed by any known process of analysis—les molécules simples et indivisibles qui composent les corps. The union of any two of the elements gave rise to binary compounds, such as oxides, acids, sulphides, &c. A substance containing three elements was a binary compound of the second order; thus salts, the most important compounds of this class, were formed by the union of acids and oxides, iron sulphate, for instance, being a compound of iron oxide with sulphuric acid.

Up until around this time, Lavoisier’s work, which was mainly quantitative, had strongly attracted physicists, but it started to convince chemists as well. C. L. Berthollet, L. B. Guyton de Morveau, and A. F. Fourcroy, his partners in the revamped system of chemical terminology introduced in 1787 in the Méthode de names chimique, were among the earliest French supporters. They were soon followed by M. H. Klaproth and the German Academy, as well as most English chemists except for Cavendish, who hesitated to take a side, and Priestley, who stubbornly held onto the opposing view. Indeed, while the supporters of phlogiston did not give in without a fight, the history of science hardly shows another instance of such a fundamental change occurring with such ease. The spread of Lavoisier’s ideas was greatly aided by the clear and logical way he presented them in his Traité élémentaire de chimie (présenté dans un ordre nouveau et d’après les découvertes modernes) (1789). The list of simple substances in the first volume of this work includes light and caloric along with oxygen, nitrogen, and hydrogen. Under the category of “oxidable or acidifiable” substances, those which combined with oxygen to produce acids, were sulphur, phosphorus, carbon, and the muriatic, fluoric, and boracic activists. The metals that formed oxides when combined with oxygen included antimony, silver, arsenic, bismuth, cobalt, copper, tin, iron, manganese, mercury, molybdenum, nickel, gold, platinum, lead, tungsten, and zinc; and the “simple earthy salifiable substances” were lime, baryta, magnesia, alumina, and silica. Lavoisier found the simple nature of alkalis so questionable that he didn’t classify them as elements, which he viewed as substances that couldn’t be further broken down by any known analysis process—les molécules simples et indivisibles qui composent les corps. The combination of any two elements created binary compounds, like oxides, acids, sulphides, etc. A substance consisting of three elements was considered a binary compound of the second order; thus, salts, the most important compounds in this category, were formed from the union of acids and oxides, with iron sulphate, for example, being a compound of iron oxide and sulphuric acid.

In addition to his purely chemical work, Lavoisier, mostly in conjunction with Laplace, devoted considerable attention to physical problems, especially those connected with heat. The two carried out some of the earliest thermochemical investigations, devised apparatus for measuring linear and cubical expansions, and employed a modification of Joseph Black’s ice calorimeter in a series of determinations of specific heats. Regarding heat (matière de feu or fluide igné) as a peculiar kind of imponderable matter, Lavoisier held that the three states of aggregation—solid, liquid and gas—were modes of matter, each depending on the amount of matière de feu with which the ponderable substances concerned were interpenetrated and combined; and this view enabled him correctly to anticipate that gases would be reduced to liquids and solids by the influence of cold and pressure. He also worked at fermentation, respiration and animal heat, looking upon the processes concerned as essentially chemical in nature. A paper discovered many years after his death showed that he had anticipated later thinkers in explaining the cyclical process of animal and vegetable life, for he pointed out that plants derive their food from the air, from water, and in general from the mineral kingdom, and animals in turn feed on plants or on other animals fed by plants, while the materials thus taken up by plants and animals are restored to the mineral kingdom by the breaking-down processes of fermentation, putrefaction and combustion.

In addition to his purely chemical work, Lavoisier, mostly in collaboration with Laplace, focused a lot on physical problems, especially those related to heat. The two conducted some of the earliest thermochemical studies, created equipment for measuring linear and cubic expansions, and used a modified version of Joseph Black’s ice calorimeter to determine specific heats. Considering heat (matière de feu or fluide igné) as a special type of weightless matter, Lavoisier believed that the three states of matter—solid, liquid, and gas—were forms of matter, each dependent on the amount of matière de feu mixed with and combined into the substances involved. This perspective allowed him to correctly predict that gases could turn into liquids and solids under cold and pressure. He also studied fermentation, respiration, and animal heat, viewing these processes as fundamentally chemical. A paper discovered many years after his death revealed that he had anticipated later thinkers by explaining the cyclical process of animal and plant life. He noted that plants obtain their nutrients from the air, water, and generally the mineral kingdom, while animals consume plants or other animals that are fed by plants, and the materials taken up by plants and animals are returned to the mineral kingdom through the breakdown processes of fermentation, decay, and combustion.

A complete edition of the writings of Lavoisier, Œuvres de Lavoisier, publiées par les soins du ministre de l’instruction publique, was issued at Paris in six volumes from 1864-1893. This publication comprises his Opuscules physiques et chimiques (1774), many memoirs from the Academy volumes, and numerous letters, notes and reports relating to the various matters on which he was engaged. At the time of his death he was preparing an edition of his collected works, and the portions ready for the press were published in two volumes as Mémoires de chimie in 1805 by his widow (in that year married to Count Rumford), who had drawn and engraved the plates in his Traité élémentaire de chimie (1789).

A complete edition of the writings of Lavoisier, Œuvres de Lavoisier, publiées par les soins du ministre de l’instruction publique, was published in Paris in six volumes from 1864-1893. This collection includes his Opuscules physiques et chimiques (1774), many memoirs from the Academy volumes, and numerous letters, notes, and reports about the various topics he was involved in. At the time of his death, he was preparing an edition of his collected works, and the portions that were ready for publication were released in two volumes as Mémoires de chimie in 1805 by his widow (who married Count Rumford that year), who had created and engraved the plates for his Traité élémentaire de chimie (1789).

Sec E. Grimaux, Lavoisier 1743-1794, d’après sa correspondance, ses manuscripts, &c. (1888), which gives a list of his works; P. E. M. Berthelot, La Révolution chimique: Lavoisier (1890), which contains an analysis of and extracts from his laboratory notebooks.

Sec E. Grimaux, Lavoisier 1743-1794, from his correspondence, his manuscripts, &c. (1888), which provides a list of his works; P. E. M. Berthelot, The Chemical Revolution: Lavoisier (1890), which includes an analysis of and excerpts from his laboratory notebooks.

LA VOISIN. Catherine Monvoisin, known as “La Voisin” (d. 1680), French sorceress, whose maiden name was Catherine Deshayes, was one of the chief personages in the famous affaire des poisons, which disgraced the reign of Louis XIV. Her husband, Monvoisin, was an unsuccessful jeweller, and she practised chiromancy and face-reading to retrieve their fortunes. She gradually added the practice of witchcraft, in which she had the help of a renegade priest, Étienne Guibourg, whose part was the celebration of the “black mass,” an abominable parody in which the host was compounded of the blood of a little child mixed with horrible ingredients. She practised medicine, especially midwifery, procured abortion and provided love powders and poisons. Her chief accomplice was one of her lovers, the magician Lesage, whose real name was Adam Cœuret. The great ladies of Paris flocked to La Voisin, who accumulated enormous wealth. Among her clients were Olympe Mancini, comtesse de Soissons, who sought the death of the king’s mistress, Louise de la Vallière; Mme de Montespan, Mme de Gramont (la belle Hamilton) and others. The bones of toads, the teeth of moles, cantharides, iron filings, human blood and human dust were among the ingredients of the love powders concocted by La Voisin. Her knowledge of poisons was not apparently so thorough as that of less well-known sorcerers, or it would be difficult to account for La Vallière’s immunity. The art of poisoning had become a regular science. The death of Henrietta, duchess of Orleans, was attributed, falsely it is true, to poison, and the crimes of Marie Madeleine de Brinvilliers (executed in 1676) and her accomplices were still fresh in the public mind. In April 1679 a commission appointed to inquire into the subject and to prosecute the offenders met for the first time. Its proceedings, including some suppressed in the official records, are preserved in the notes of one of the official rapporteurs, Gabriel Nicolas de la Reynie. The revelation of the treacherous intention 297 of Mme de Montespan to poison Louis XIV. and of other crimes, planned by personages who could not be attacked without scandal which touched the throne, caused Louis XIV. to close the chambre ardente, as the court was called, on the 1st of October 1680. It was reopened on the 19th of May 1681 and sat until the 21st of July 1682. Many of the culprits escaped through private influence. Among these were Marie Anne Mancini, duchesse de Bouillon, who had sought to get rid of her husband in order to marry the duke of Vendôme, though Louis XIV. banished her to Nérac. Mme de Montespan was not openly disgraced, because the preservation of Louis’s own dignity was essential, and some hundred prisoners, among them the infamous Guibourg and Lesage, escaped the scaffold through the suppression of evidence insisted on by Louis XIV. and Louvois. Some of these were imprisoned in various fortresses, with instructions from Louvois to the respective commandants to flog them if they sought to impart what they knew. Some innocent persons were imprisoned for life because they had knowledge of the facts. La Voisin herself was executed at an early stage of the proceedings, on the 20th of February 1680, after a perfunctory application of torture. The authorities had every reason to avoid further revelations. Thirty-five other prisoners were executed; five were sent to the galleys and twenty-three were banished. Their crimes had furnished one of the most extraordinary trials known to history.

LA VOISIN. Catherine Monvoisin, known as “La Voisin” (d. 1680), was a French sorceress, originally named Catherine Deshayes. She was a key figure in the infamous affaire des poisons, which scandalized the reign of Louis XIV. Her husband, Monvoisin, was a failed jeweler, and she practiced palmistry and face-reading to improve their financial situation. Over time, she began to practice witchcraft, aided by a renegade priest named Étienne Guibourg, who performed the “black mass,” a horrific mockery that included the host made from a child's blood mixed with disturbing ingredients. She also practiced medicine, particularly as a midwife, facilitated abortions, and offered love potions and poisons. One of her main accomplices was her lover, the magician Lesage, whose real name was Adam Cœuret. Wealthy women in Paris flocked to La Voisin, leading her to accumulate a vast fortune. Among her clients were Olympe Mancini, comtesse de Soissons, who wanted to see the king’s mistress, Louise de la Vallière, dead; Mme de Montespan, Mme de Gramont (la belle Hamilton), and several others. La Voisin's love potions included ingredients such as toad bones, mole teeth, cantharides, iron filings, human blood, and human dust. However, her understanding of poisons didn’t seem as advanced as that of less famous sorcerers, which would explain La Vallière's survival. Poisoning had turned into a careful science. The death of Henrietta, duchess of Orleans, was wrongly attributed to poison, and the recent crimes of Marie Madeleine de Brinvilliers (executed in 1676) and her accomplices were still fresh in public memory. In April 1679, a commission was formed to investigate and prosecute the offenders, meeting for the first time during that month. Its proceedings, including some details hidden from official records, are documented in the notes of Gabriel Nicolas de la Reynie, one of the official rapporteurs. The uncovering of Mme de Montespan's plot to poison Louis XIV. and other crimes planned by influential figures who couldn't be attacked without tainting the monarchy led Louis XIV. to shut down the chambre ardente, as the court was called, on October 1, 1680. It reopened on May 19, 1681, and continued until July 21, 1682. Many perpetrators avoided punishment due to private influence. Among these was Marie Anne Mancini, duchesse de Bouillon, who wanted to rid herself of her husband to marry the duke of Vendôme, although Louis XIV. exiled her to Nérac. Mme de Montespan was not publicly disgraced, as protecting Louis's reputation was crucial, and around a hundred prisoners, including the notorious Guibourg and Lesage, escaped execution thanks to the suppression of evidence ordered by Louis XIV. and Louvois. Some were imprisoned in various fortresses, with orders from Louvois for the guards to whip them if they tried to reveal what they knew. Some innocent people were sentenced to life in prison for simply knowing the facts. La Voisin herself was executed early in the proceedings, on February 20, 1680, following a cursory application of torture. The authorities had every motive to prevent further disclosures. Thirty-five other prisoners were executed; five were sent to the galleys, and twenty-three were exiled. Their crimes created one of the most extraordinary trials in history.

See F. Ravaisson, Archives de la Bastille, vols. iv.-vii. (1870-1874); the notes of La Reynie, preserved in the Bibliothèque Nationale; F. Funck-Brentano, Le Drame des poisons (1899); A. Masson, La Sorcellerie et la science des poisons au XVIIe siècle (1904). Sardou made the affair a background for his Affaire des poisons (1907). There is a portrait of La Voisin by Antoine Coypel, which has been often reproduced.

See F. Ravaisson, Archives de la Bastille, vols. iv.-vii. (1870-1874); the notes of La Reynie, preserved in the Bibliothèque Nationale; F. Funck-Brentano, Le Drame des poisons (1899); A. Masson, La Sorcellerie et la science des poisons au XVIIe siècle (1904). Sardou used the case as a backdrop for his Affaire des poisons (1907). There’s a portrait of La Voisin by Antoine Coypel that has been reproduced many times.

LAW, JOHN (1671-1729), Scots economist, best known as the originator of the “Mississippi scheme,” was born at Edinburgh in April 1671. His father, a goldsmith and banker, bought shortly before his death, which took place in his son’s youth, the lands of Lauriston near Edinburgh. John lived at home till he was twenty, and then went to London. He had already studied mathematics, and the theory of commerce and political economy, with much interest; but he was known rather as fop than scholar. In London he gambled, drank and flirted till in April 1694 a love intrigue resulted in a duel with Beau Wilson in Bloomsbury Square. Law killed his antagonist, and was condemned to death. His life was spared, but he was detained in prison. He found means to escape to Holland, then the greatest commercial country in Europe. Here he observed with close attention the practical working of banking and financial business, and conceived the first ideas of his celebrated “system.” After a few years spent in foreign travel, he returned to Scotland, then exhausted and enraged by the failure of the Darien expedition (1695-1701). He propounded plans for the relief of his country in a work1 entitled Money and Trade Considered, with a Proposal for supplying the Nation with Money (1705). This attracted some notice, but had no practical effect, and Law again betook himself to travel. He visited Brussels, Paris, Vienna, Genoa, Rome, making large sums by gambling and speculation, and spending them lavishly. He was in Paris in 1708, and made some proposals to the government as to their financial difficulties, but Louis XIV. declined to treat with a “Huguenot,” and d’Argenson, chief of the police, had Law expelled as a suspicious character. He had, however, become intimately acquainted with the duke of Orleans, and when in 1715 that prince became regent, Law at once returned to Paris.

LAW, JOHN (1671-1729), Scottish economist, is best known as the creator of the “Mississippi scheme.” He was born in Edinburgh in April 1671. His father, a goldsmith and banker, purchased the lands of Lauriston near Edinburgh shortly before his death, which occurred during John’s youth. John lived at home until he turned twenty, then moved to London. He had already developed a keen interest in mathematics, commerce, and political economy but was seen more as a dandy than a scholar. In London, he spent his time gambling, drinking, and flirting until April 1694, when a romantic affair led to a duel with Beau Wilson in Bloomsbury Square. Law killed Wilson and was sentenced to death. His sentence was commuted, but he was imprisoned. He managed to escape to Holland, then the leading commercial nation in Europe. There, he closely observed the operations of banking and finance, which inspired the initial ideas for his famous “system.” After a few years of traveling abroad, he returned to Scotland, which was then reeling from the failed Darien expedition (1695-1701). He proposed plans to help his country in a work1 titled Money and Trade Considered, with a Proposal for supplying the Nation with Money (1705). This garnered some attention but had no real impact, so Law took to traveling again. He visited Brussels, Paris, Vienna, Genoa, and Rome, making and spending large sums through gambling and speculation. He was in Paris in 1708 and made several suggestions to the government regarding their financial troubles, but Louis XIV refused to engage with a “Huguenot,” and d’Argenson, the chief of police, had Law expelled as a suspicious figure. However, he had developed a close relationship with the Duke of Orleans, and when that prince became regent in 1715, Law immediately returned to Paris.

The extravagant expenditure of the late monarch had plunged the kingdom into apparently inextricable financial confusion. The debt was 3000 million livres, the estimated annual expenditure, exclusive of interest payments, 148 million livres, and the income about the same. The advisability of declaring a national bankruptcy was seriously discussed, and though this plan was rejected, measures hardly less violent were carried. By a visa, or examination of the state liabilities by a committee with full powers of quashing claims, the debt was reduced nearly a half, the coin in circulation was ordered to be called in and reissued at the rate of 120 for 100—a measure by which foreign coiners profited greatly, and a chamber of justice was established to punish speculators, to whom the difficulties of the state were ascribed. These measures had so little success that the billets d’état which were issued as part security for the new debt at once sank 75% below their nominal value. At this crisis Law unfolded a vast scheme to the perplexed regent. A royal bank was to manage the trade and currency of the kingdom, to collect the taxes, and to free the country from debt. The council of finance, then under the duc de Noailles, opposed the plan, but the regent allowed Law to take some tentative steps. By an edict of 2nd May 1716, a private institution called La Banque générale, and managed by Law, was founded. The capital was 6 million livres, divided into 1200 shares of 5000 livres, payable in four instalments, one-fourth in cash, three-fourths in billets d’état. It was to perform the ordinary functions of a bank, and had power to issue notes payable at sight in the weight and value of the money mentioned at day of issue. The bank was a great and immediate success. By providing for the absorption of part of the state paper it raised the credit of the government. The notes were a most desirable medium of exchange, for they had the element of fixity of value, which, owing to the arbitrary mint decrees of the government, was wanting in the coin of the realm. They proved the most convenient instruments of remittance between the capital and the provinces, and they thus developed the industries of the latter. The rate of interest, previously enormous and uncertain, fell first to 6 and then to 4%; and when another decree (10th April 1717) ordered collectors of taxes to receive notes as payments, and to change them for coin at request, the bank so rose in favour that it soon had a note-issue of 60 million livres. Law now gained the full confidence of the regent, and was allowed to proceed with the development of the “system.”

The extravagant spending of the late king had plunged the kingdom into seemingly insurmountable financial chaos. The debt was 3 billion livres, the estimated annual expenditure, excluding interest payments, was 148 million livres, and the income was about the same. The idea of declaring national bankruptcy was seriously considered, and though this plan was rejected, equally drastic measures were taken. Through a visa, or examination of the state’s liabilities by a committee with full powers to dismiss claims, the debt was reduced by nearly half, the currency in circulation was ordered to be withdrawn and reissued at a rate of 120 for 100—a measure that greatly benefited foreign coiners, and a court was established to punish speculators blamed for the state's troubles. These measures were so ineffective that the billets d’état issued as partial security for the new debt immediately dropped to 75% below their nominal value. At this critical moment, Law presented a huge plan to the confused regent. A royal bank would manage the trade and currency of the kingdom, collect taxes, and eliminate the country's debt. The finance council, then led by the duc de Noailles, opposed the plan, but the regent allowed Law to take some initial steps. On May 2, 1716, a private institution called La Banque générale, managed by Law, was established. The capital was 6 million livres, divided into 1,200 shares of 5,000 livres, payable in four installments, one-fourth in cash, three-fourths in billets d’état. It was set to perform the usual functions of a bank and had the power to issue notes payable on demand based on the weight and value of the currency at the time of issuance. The bank was a tremendous and immediate success. By facilitating the absorption of some state paper, it boosted the government’s credit. The notes became a highly desirable medium of exchange because they offered stability in value, which was lacking in the coins due to the government's arbitrary minting policies. They also became the most convenient tools for transferring money between the capital and the provinces, thereby fostering the development of industries in those areas. The interest rate, which had previously been exorbitantly high and variable, fell first to 6% and then to 4%; and when another decree (April 10, 1717) mandated that tax collectors accept notes as payment and exchange them for coins upon request, the bank’s popularity soared, quickly leading to a note issue of 60 million livres. Law gained the full trust of the regent and was authorized to continue developing the "system."

The trade of the region about the Mississippi had been granted to a speculator named Crozat. He found the undertaking too large, and was glad to give it up. By a decree of August 1717 Law was allowed to establish the Compagnie de la Louisiane ou d’Occident, and to endow it with privileges practically amounting to sovereignty over the most fertile region of North America. The capital was 100 million livres divided into 200,000 shares of 500 livres. The payments were to be one-fourth in coin and three-fourths in billets d’état. On these last the government was to pay 3 million livres interest yearly to the company. As the state paper was depreciated the shares fell much below par. The rapid rise of Law had made him many enemies, and they took advantage of this to attack the system. D’Argenson, now head of the council of finance, with the brothers Paris of Grenoble, famous tax farmers of the day, formed what was called the “anti-system.” The farming of the taxes was let to them, under an assumed name, for 48½ million livres yearly. A company was formed, the exact counterpart of the Mississippi company. The capital was the same, divided in the same manner, but the payments were to be entirely in money. The returns from the public revenue were sure; those from the Mississippi scheme were not. Hence the shares of the latter were for some time out of favour. Law proceeded unmoved with the development of his plans. On the 4th of December 1718 the bank became a government institution under the name of La Banque royale. Law was director, and the king guaranteed the notes. The shareholders were repaid in coin, and, to widen the influence 298 of the new institution, the transport of money between towns where it had branches was forbidden. The paper-issue now reached 110 millions. Law had such confidence in the success of his plans that he agreed to take over shares in the Mississippi company at par at a near date. The shares began rapidly to rise. The next move was to unite the companies Des Indes Orientales and De Chine, founded in 1664 and 1713 respectively, but now dwindled away to a shadow, to his company. The united association, La Compagnie des Indes, had a practical monopoly of the foreign trade of France. These proceedings necessitated the creation of new capital to the nominal amount of 25 million livres. The payment was spread over 20 months. Every holder of four original shares (mères) could purchase one of the new shares (filles) at a premium of 50 livres. All these 500-livre shares rapidly rose to 750, or 50% above par. Law now turned his attention to obtaining additional powers within France itself. On the 25th of July 1719 an edict was issued granting the company for nine years the management of the mint and the coin-issue. For this privilege the company paid 5 million livres, and the money was raised by a new issue of shares of the nominal value of 500 livres, but with a premium of other 500. The list was only open for twenty days, and it was necessary to present four mères and one fille in order to obtain one of the new shares (petites filles). At the same time two dividends per annum of 6% each were promised. Again there was an attempt to ruin the bank by the commonplace expedient of making a run on it for coin; but the conspirators had to meet absolute power managed with fearlessness and skill. An edict appeared reducing, at a given date, the value of money, and those who had withdrawn coin from the bank hastened again to exchange it for the more stable notes. Public confidence in Law was increased, and he was enabled rapidly to proceed with the completion of the system. A decree of 27th August 1719 deprived the rival company of the farming of the revenue, and gave it to the Compagnie des Indes for nine years in return for an annual payment of 52 million livres. Thus at one blow the “anti-system” was crushed. One thing yet remained; Law proposed to take over the national debt, and manage it on terms advantageous to the state. The mode of transfer was this. The debt was over 1500 million livres. Notes were to be issued to that amount, and with these the state creditors must be paid in a certain order. Shares were to be issued at intervals corresponding to the payments, and it was expected that the notes would be used in buying them. The government was to pay 3% for the loan. It had formerly been bound to pay 80 millions, it would now pay under 50, a clear gain of over 30. As the shares of the company were almost the only medium for investment, the transfer would be surely effected. The creditors would now look to the government payments and the commercial gains of the company for their annual returns. Indeed the creditors were often not able to procure the shares, for each succeeding issue was immediately seized upon, though the 500-livre share was now issued at a premium of 4500 livres. After the third issue, on the 2nd of October, the shares immediately resold at 8000 livres in the Rue Quincampoix, then used as a bourse. They went on rapidly rising as new privileges were still granted to the company. Law had now more than regal power. The exiled Stuarts paid him court; the proudest aristocracy in Europe humbled themselves before him; and his liberality made him the idol of the populace. After, as a necessary preliminary, becoming a Catholic, he was made controller-general of the finances in place of d’Argenson. Finally, in February 1720, the bank was in name as well as in reality united to the company.

The trade around the Mississippi was given to a speculator named Crozat. He found the task too vast and was glad to let it go. By a decree from August 1717, Law was allowed to set up the Compagnie de la Louisiane ou d’Occident and to grant it privileges that were almost equal to sovereignty over the most fertile region in North America. The capital was 100 million livres split into 200,000 shares of 500 livres each. The payments were to be one-fourth in cash and three-fourths in billets d’état. The government promised to pay the company 3 million livres in yearly interest on the state paper. As the state paper lost value, the shares fell significantly below par. Law's rapid rise to power made him many enemies, who took this chance to attack his system. D’Argenson, now the head of the finance council, along with the Paris brothers of Grenoble, notable tax farmers, formed what was known as the “anti-system.” They were granted the farming of taxes under a false name for 48½ million livres each year. A company was created, mirroring the Mississippi company. The capital was the same, divided in the same way, but all payments were to be in cash. The returns from public revenue were assured; those from the Mississippi scheme were not. Consequently, the shares of the latter were out of favor for a while. Law continued to develop his plans unfazed. On December 4, 1718, the bank became a government institution called La Banque royale. Law was the director, and the king guaranteed the notes. Shareholders were paid in cash, and to extend the influence of this new institution, moving money between towns with branches was prohibited. The paper issue then reached 110 million. Law had such faith in his plans that he agreed to acquire shares in the Mississippi company at par value in the near future. The shares began to rise quickly. The next step was to merge the companies Des Indes Orientales and De Chine, created in 1664 and 1713 respectively, but now only shadows of their former selves, with his company. The combined association, La Compagnie des Indes, held a practical monopoly over France's foreign trade. These actions required creating new capital of 25 million livres. The payment was spread over 20 months. Every holder of four original shares (mères) could buy one new share (filles) at a premium of 50 livres. All these 500-livre shares quickly rose to 750, or 50% above par. Law then focused on gaining more powers within France. On July 25, 1719, an edict was issued giving the company control over the mint and coin-issue for nine years. For this privilege, the company paid 5 million livres, raised through a new issue of shares valued at 500 livres, but with an additional 500 premium. The offer was available for only twenty days, and it was necessary to present four mères and one fille to obtain one of the new shares (petites filles). At the same time, two dividends per year of 6% each were promised. There was another attempt to sabotage the bank through the common method of a run for cash, but the conspirators faced absolute power managed with courage and skill. An edict was issued reducing the value of money at a certain date, prompting those who withdrew cash from the bank to rush back to exchange it for the more stable notes. Public trust in Law increased, enabling him to quickly advance the completion of the system. A decree on August 27, 1719, took tax farming away from the rival company and granted it to the Compagnie des Indes for nine years in exchange for an annual payment of 52 million livres. This effectively crushed the “anti-system.” One more task remained; Law proposed to take over the national debt and manage it on favorable terms for the state. The transfer would involve issuing notes totaling over 1500 million livres, which would be used to pay state creditors in a specific order. Shares would be issued at intervals that matched the payments, and it was anticipated that the notes would be used to buy them. The government was to pay 3% for the loan, down from the previous obligation of 80 million, reducing it to under 50, a clear advantage of over 30. Since shares in the company were almost the only investment option, the transfer was likely to occur smoothly. Creditors would look to government payments and the company’s commercial earnings for their annual returns. In fact, creditors often couldn't secure shares since each new issue was quickly taken, though the 500-livre share was now being issued at a premium of 4500 livres. After the third issue on October 2, the shares quickly sold for 8000 livres in Rue Quincampoix, which was then a stock exchange. They continued to rise rapidly as new privileges were granted to the company. Law had then amassed power beyond that of kings. The exiled Stuarts sought his favor; Europe's proudest aristocracy humbled itself before him; and his generosity made him a hero among the people. After becoming a Catholic as a necessary step, he was appointed controller-general of finances, replacing d’Argenson. Finally, in February 1720, the bank was officially united with the company.

The system was now complete; but it had already begun to decay. In December 1719 it was at its height. The shares had then amounted to 20,000 livres, forty times their nominal price. A sort of madness possessed the nation. Men sold their all and hastened to Paris to speculate. The population of the capital was increased by an enormous influx of provincials and foreigners. Trade received a vast though unnatural impulse. Everybody seemed to be getting richer, no one poorer. Those who could still reflect saw that this prosperity was not real. The whole issue of shares at the extreme market-price valued 12,000 million livres. It would require 600 million annual revenue to give a 5% dividend on this. Now, the whole income of the company as yet was hardly sufficient to pay 5% on the original capital of 1677 million livres. The receipts from the taxes, &c., could be precisely calculated, and it would be many years before the commercial undertakings of the company—with which only some trifling beginning had been made—would yield any considerable return. People began to sell their shares, and to buy coin, houses, land—anything that had a stable element of value in it. There was a rapid fall in the shares, a rapid rise in all kinds of property, and consequently a rapid depreciation of the paper money. Law met these new tendencies by a succession of the most violent edicts. The notes were to bear a premium over specie. Coin was only to be used in small payments, and only a small amount was to be kept in the possession of private parties. The use of diamonds, the fabrication of gold and silver plate, was forbidden. A dividend of 40% on the original capital was promised. By several ingenious but fallaciously reasoned pamphlets Law endeavoured to restore public confidence. The shares still fell. At last, on the 5th of March 1720, an edict appeared fixing their price at 9000 livres, and ordering the bank to buy and sell them at that price. The fall now was transferred to the notes, of which there were soon over 2500 million livres in circulation. A large proportion of the coined money was removed from the kingdom. Prices rose enormously. There was everywhere distress and complete financial confusion. Law became an object of popular hatred. He lost his court influence, and was obliged to consent to a decree (21st May 1720) by which the notes and consequently the shares were reduced to half their nominal value. This created such a commotion that its promoters were forced to recall it, but the mischief was done. What confidence could there be in the depreciated paper after such a measure? Law was removed from his office, and his enemies proceeded to demolish the “system.” A vast number of shares had been deposited in the bank. These were destroyed. The notes were reconverted into government debt, but there was first a visa which reduced that debt to the same size as before it was taken over by the company. The rate of interest was lowered, and the government now only pledged itself to pay 37 instead of 80 millions annually. Finally the bank was abolished, and the company reduced to a mere trading association. By November the “system” had disappeared. With these last measures Law, it may well be believed, had nothing to do. He left France secretly in December 1720, resumed his wandering life, and died at Venice, poor and forgotten, on the 21st of March 1729.

The system was now complete, but it had already started to fall apart. In December 1719, it reached its peak. The shares were valued at 20,000 livres, forty times their nominal price. A kind of madness took over the nation. People sold everything they had and rushed to Paris to invest. The capital's population swelled with a massive influx of locals and foreigners. Trade saw a huge but unnatural boost. Everyone seemed to be getting richer, and no one was losing money. Those who could still think rationally realized this prosperity wasn't real. The entire share issue, at the inflated market price, was valued at 12,000 million livres. To provide a 5% dividend on this, an annual revenue of 600 million would be needed. However, the company’s total income was barely enough to pay 5% on the original capital of 1,677 million livres. The revenue from taxes, etc., could be accurately calculated, and it would take many years before the company's commercial ventures—of which only minor initial steps had been taken—would yield significant returns. People started selling their shares and buying coins, houses, land—anything with stable value. The shares plummeted, property values skyrocketed, and consequently, paper money depreciated rapidly. Law responded to these trends with a series of severe decrees. The notes were mandated to hold a premium over coins. Coins could only be used for small transactions, and individuals were only allowed to keep a limited amount. The use of diamonds and the creation of gold and silver items were banned. A 40% dividend on the original capital was promised. Through several clever but misleading pamphlets, Law tried to restore public confidence. Still, the shares continued to drop. Finally, on March 5, 1720, a decree was issued that fixed their price at 9,000 livres and ordered the bank to buy and sell them at that price. The decline then shifted to the notes, with over 2,500 million livres soon in circulation. A significant portion of the coinage was taken out of the kingdom. Prices soared. Everywhere, there was distress and total financial chaos. Law became the target of public anger. He lost influence at court and had to agree to a decree (May 21, 1720) that cut the notes and, consequently, the shares to half their nominal value. This caused such an uproar that those who pushed for it had to retract it, but the damage was done. What confidence could remain in the devalued paper after such a decision? Law was removed from office, and his enemies set out to dismantle the “system.” A vast number of shares had been deposited at the bank, and these were destroyed. The notes were converted back into government debt, but there was first a visa that reduced that debt back to what it was before being taken over by the company. The interest rate was lowered, and the government now only committed to pay 37 instead of 80 million annually. Ultimately, the bank was dissolved, and the company became just a trading association. By November, the “system” had vanished. It can be believed that Law had no part in these final measures. He quietly left France in December 1720, returned to his wandering life, and died poor and forgotten in Venice on March 21, 1729.

Of Law’s writings the most important for the comprehension of the “system” is his Money and Trade Considered. In this work he says that national power and wealth consist in numbers of people, and magazines of home and foreign goods. These depend on trade, and that on money, of which a greater quantity employs more people; but credit, if the credit have a circulation, has all the beneficial effects of money. To create and increase instruments of credit is the function of a bank. Let such be created then, and let its notes be only given in return for land sold or pledged. Such a currency would supply the nation with abundance of money; and it would have many advantages, which Law points out in detail, over silver. The bank or commission was to be a government institution, and its profits were to be spent in encouraging the export and manufacture of the nation. A very evident error lies at the root of the “system.” Money is not the result but the cause of wealth, he thought. To increase it then must be beneficial, and the best way is by a properly secured paper currency. This is the motive force; but it is to be applied in a particular way. Law had a profound belief in the omnipotence of government. He saw the evils of minor monopolies, and of private farming of taxes. He proposed to centre foreign trade and internal finance in one huge monopoly managed by the state for the people, and carrying on business through a plentiful supply of paper money. He did not see that trade and commerce are best left to private enterprise, and that such a scheme would simply result in the profits of speculators and favourites. The “system” was never so far developed as to exhibit its inherent faults. The madness of speculators ruined the plan when only its foundations were laid. One part indeed might have been saved. The bank was not necessarily bound to the company, and had its note-issue been retrenched it might have become a permanent 299 institution. As Thiers points out, the edict of the 5th of March 1720, which made the shares convertible into notes, ruined the bank without saving the company. The shares had risen to an unnatural height, and they should have been allowed to fall to their natural level. Perhaps Law felt this to be impossible. He had friends at court whose interests were involved in the shares, and he had enemies eager for his overthrow. It was necessary to succeed completely or not at all; so Law, a gambler to the core, risked and lost everything. Notwithstanding the faults of the “system,” its author was a financial genius of the first order. He had the errors of his time; but he propounded many truths as to the nature of currency and banking then unknown to his contemporaries. The marvellous skill which he displayed in adapting the theory of the “system” to the actual condition of things in France, and in carrying out the various financial transactions rendered necessary by its development, is absolutely without parallel. His profound self-confidence and belief in the truth of his own theories were the reasons alike of his success and his ruin. He never hesitated to employ the whole force of a despotic government for the definite ends which he saw before him. He left France poorer than he entered it, yet he was not perceptibly changed by his sudden transitions of fortune. Montesquieu visited him at Venice after his fall, and has left a description of him touched with a certain pathos. Law, he tells us, was still the same in character, perpetually planning and scheming, and, though in poverty, revolving vast projects to restore himself to power, and France to commercial prosperity.

Of Law's writings, the most important for understanding the "system" is his Money and Trade Considered. In this work, he argues that a nation's power and wealth come from the number of people and the stock of domestic and foreign goods. These depend on trade, which relies on money; a larger supply of money employs more people. However, credit, if it circulates, has all the positive effects of money. Creating and increasing credit instruments is the role of a bank. Therefore, such a bank should be established, and its notes should only be issued in exchange for land sold or pledged. This type of currency would provide the nation with plenty of money and offer several advantages, which Law details, over silver. The bank or commission was intended to be a government entity, and its profits should be used to promote national exports and manufacturing. A significant error underpins the "system." Law believed that money is not a result but a cause of wealth. Thus, increasing money supply should be beneficial, and the best way to do this is through a securely backed paper currency. This is the driving force, but it needs to be applied correctly. Law had a strong belief in the government’s power. He recognized the problems caused by smaller monopolies and private tax farming. He suggested consolidating foreign trade and domestic finance into one large state-managed monopoly that would serve the public using an abundant supply of paper money. He failed to see that trade and commerce are best left to private enterprises, and that this plan would only benefit speculators and favorites. The "system" was never fully developed enough to show its inherent flaws. Speculator madness destroyed the plan when it was only in its early stages. One aspect could have survived. The bank was not necessarily tied to the company, and if its note issuance had been curtailed, it might have become a lasting institution. As Thiers points out, the decree of March 5, 1720, which made shares convertible into notes, destroyed the bank without saving the company. The shares had risen to an unsustainable level and should have been allowed to drop to their natural value. Perhaps Law thought this was impossible. He had friends at court whose interests were tied to the shares, and he had enemies eager to see him fail. It was necessary to either succeed entirely or fail completely; so Law, a true gambler, risked and lost everything. Despite the flaws of the "system," its author was a remarkable financial genius. He had the typical mistakes of his time, but he presented many truths about currency and banking that were unknown to his contemporaries. His extraordinary skill in adapting the theory of the "system" to the real conditions in France and executing the various financial operations needed for its development is unmatched. His profound self-confidence and faith in his own theories were the reasons for both his success and his downfall. He never hesitated to use the full power of a despotic government to achieve the goals he envisioned. He left France poorer than when he arrived, yet he did not noticeably change despite his drastic changes in fortune. Montesquieu visited him in Venice after his fall and left a description of him imbued with a certain sadness. Law, he tells us, remained the same in character, constantly planning and scheming. Although he was poor, he continued to devise grand plans to regain his power and restore France's commercial prosperity.

The fullest account of the Mississippi scheme is that of Thiers, Law et son système des finances (1826, American trans. 1859). See also Heymann, Law und sein System (1853); Pierre Bonnassieux, Les Grandes Compagnies de commerce (1892); S. Alexi, John Law und sein System (1885); E. Levasseur, Récherches historiques sur le système de Law (1854); and Jobez, Une Préface au socialisme, ou le système de Law et la chasse aux capitalistes (1848). Full biographical details are given in Wood’s Life of Law (Edinburgh, 1824). All Law’s later writings are to be found in Daire, Collection des principaux économistes, vol. i. (1843). Other works on Law are: A. W. Wiston-Glynn, John Law of Lauriston (1908); P. A. Cachut, The Financier Law, his Scheme and Times (1856); A. Macf. Davis, An Historical Study of Law’s System (Boston, 1887); A. Beljame, La Pronunciation du nom de Jean Law le financier (1891). See also E. A. Benians in Camb. Mod. Hist. vi. 6 (1909). For minor notices see Poole’s Index to Periodicals. There is a portrait of Law by A. S. Belle in the National Portrait Gallery, London.

The most comprehensive account of the Mississippi scheme is by Thiers, Law et son système des finances (1826, American translation 1859). Also, check out Heymann, Law und sein System (1853); Pierre Bonnassieux, Les Grandes Compagnies de commerce (1892); S. Alexi, John Law und sein System (1885); E. Levasseur, Récherches historiques sur le système de Law (1854); and Jobez, Une Préface au socialisme, ou le système de Law et la chasse aux capitalistes (1848). Full biographical details can be found in Wood’s Life of Law (Edinburgh, 1824). All of Law’s later writings are available in Daire, Collection des principaux économistes, vol. i. (1843). Other works on Law include: A. W. Wiston-Glynn, John Law of Lauriston (1908); P. A. Cachut, The Financier Law, his Scheme and Times (1856); A. Macf. Davis, An Historical Study of Law’s System (Boston, 1887); A. Beljame, La Pronunciation du nom de Jean Law le financier (1891). Also, see E. A. Benians in Camb. Mod. Hist. vi. 6 (1909). For brief references, check Poole’s Index to Periodicals. There is a portrait of Law by A. S. Belle in the National Portrait Gallery, London.

(F. Wa.)

1 A work entitled Proposals and Reasons for constituting a Council of Trade in Scotland was published anonymously at Edinburgh in 1701. It was republished at Glasgow in 1751 with Law’s name attached; but several references in the state papers of the time mention William Paterson (1658-1719), founder of the Bank of England, as the author of the plan therein propounded. Even if Law had nothing to do with the composition of the work, he must have read it and been influenced by it. This may explain how it contains the germs of many of the developments of the “system.” Certainly the suggestion of a central board, to manage great commercial undertakings, to furnish occupation for the poor, to encourage mining, fishing and manufactures, and to bring about a reduction in the rate of interest, was largely realized in the Mississippi scheme. See Bannister’s Life of William Paterson (ed. 1858), and Writings of William Paterson (2nd ed., 3 vols., 1859).

1 A work titled Proposals and Reasons for Constituting a Council of Trade in Scotland was published anonymously in Edinburgh in 1701. It was republished in Glasgow in 1751 with Law's name added, but several references in the state papers from that time mention William Paterson (1658-1719), the founder of the Bank of England, as the author of the plan presented. Even if Law wasn't involved in writing the work, he must have read it and been influenced by it. This may explain how it includes the seeds of many developments in the “system.” The suggestion of a central board to manage large commercial projects, create jobs for the poor, promote mining, fishing, and manufacturing, and reduce interest rates was largely realized in the Mississippi scheme. See Bannister’s Life of William Paterson (ed. 1858), and Writings of William Paterson (2nd ed., 3 vols., 1859).

LAW, WILLIAM (1686-1761), English divine, was born at King’s Cliffe, Northamptonshire. In 1705 he entered as a sizar at Emmanuel College, Cambridge; in 1711 he was elected fellow of his college and was ordained. He resided at Cambridge, teaching and taking occasional duty until the accession of George I., when his conscience forbade him to take the oaths of allegiance to the new government and of abjuration of the Stuarts. His Jacobitism had already been betrayed in a tripos speech which brought him into trouble; and he was now deprived of his fellowship and became a non-juror. For the next few years he is said to have been a curate in London. By 1727 he was domiciled with Edward Gibbon (1666-1736) at Putney as tutor to his son Edward, father of the historian, who says that Law became “the much honoured friend and spiritual director of the whole family.” In the same year he accompanied his pupil to Cambridge, and resided with him as governor, in term time, for the next four years. His pupil then went abroad, but Law was left at Putney, where he remained in Gibbon’s house for more than ten years, acting as a religious guide not only to the family but to a number of earnest-minded folk who came to consult him. The most eminent of these were the two brothers John and Charles Wesley, John Byrom the poet, George Cheyne the physician and Archibald Hutcheson, M.P. for Hastings. The household was dispersed in 1737. Law was parted from his friends, and in 1740 retired to King’s Cliffe, where he had inherited from his father a house and a small property. There he was presently joined by two ladies: Mrs Hutcheson, the rich widow of his old friend, who recommended her on his death-bed to place herself under Law’s spiritual guidance, and Miss Hester Gibbon, sister to his late pupil. This curious trio lived for twenty-one years a life wholly given to devotion, study and charity, until the death of Law on the 9th of April 1761.

LAW, WILLIAM (1686-1761), an English clergyman, was born in King’s Cliffe, Northamptonshire. He started his studies as a sizar at Emmanuel College, Cambridge, in 1705; by 1711, he was elected a fellow and ordained. He lived in Cambridge, teaching and occasionally performing church duties until George I came to the throne, at which point his conscience prevented him from taking the oaths of allegiance to the new government and renouncing the Stuarts. His support for the Jacobite cause had already been revealed in a tripos speech that got him into trouble, resulting in the loss of his fellowship, and he became a non-juror. For several years, he reportedly worked as a curate in London. By 1727, he settled with Edward Gibbon (1666-1736) in Putney, serving as a tutor to Gibbon’s son Edward, who would become the historian. Edward noted that Law became “the much honored friend and spiritual advisor of the whole family.” That same year, he accompanied his student to Cambridge and stayed with him as a governor during term time for the next four years. When his pupil went abroad, Law remained in Putney, staying in the Gibbon household for more than a decade, acting as a spiritual guide not just for the family but for many earnest individuals seeking his counsel. Among the notable figures who sought his advice were the brothers John and Charles Wesley, poet John Byrom, physician George Cheyne, and Archibald Hutcheson, M.P. for Hastings. The household disbanded in 1737. Law was separated from his friends and in 1740 retreated to King’s Cliffe, where he inherited a house and a small estate from his father. There, he was soon joined by two women: Mrs. Hutcheson, the wealthy widow of a close friend, who had been advised on her deathbed to seek Law’s spiritual guidance, and Miss Hester Gibbon, sister of his former pupil. This unusual trio lived together for twenty-one years, dedicated entirely to devotion, study, and charity, until Law’s death on April 9, 1761.

Law was a busy writer under three heads:—

Law was a busy writer in three areas:—

1. Controversy.—In this field he had no contemporary peer save perhaps Richard Bentley. The first of his controversial works was Three Letters to the Bishop of Bangor (1717), which were considered by friend and foe alike as one of the most powerful contributions to the Bangorian controversy on the high church side. Thomas Sherlock declared that “Mr Law was a writer so considerable that he knew but one good reason why his lordship did not answer him.” Law’s next controversial work was Remarks on Mandeville’s Fable of the Bees (1723), in which he vindicates morality on the highest grounds; for pure style, caustic wit and lucid argument this work is remarkable; it was enthusiastically praised by John Sterling, and republished by F. D. Maurice. Law’s Case of Reason (1732), in answer to Tindal’s Christianity as old as the Creation is to a great extent an anticipation of Bishop Butler’s famous argument in the Analogy. In this work Law shows himself at least the equal of the ablest champion of Deism. His Letters to a Lady inclined to enter the Church of Rome are excellent specimens of the attitude of a high Anglican towards Romanism. His controversial writings have not received due recognition, partly because they were opposed to the drift of his times, partly because of his success in other fields.

1. Controversy.—In this area, he had no equal in his time except maybe Richard Bentley. His first significant controversial work was Three Letters to the Bishop of Bangor (1717), which both supporters and critics considered one of the most impactful contributions to the Bangorian debate from the high church perspective. Thomas Sherlock stated that “Mr. Law was such an important writer that he could only think of one good reason why his lordship didn’t respond to him.” Law’s next controversial work was Remarks on Mandeville’s Fable of the Bees (1723), in which he defends morality on the highest standards; this work is notable for its pure style, sharp wit, and clear arguments. John Sterling praised it enthusiastically, and F. D. Maurice republished it. Law’s Case of Reason (1732), in response to Tindal’s Christianity as old as the Creation, largely anticipates Bishop Butler’s famous argument in the Analogy. In this work, Law proves himself at least as capable as the best defenders of Deism. His Letters to a Lady inclined to enter the Church of Rome are excellent examples of a high Anglican’s perspective on Roman Catholicism. His controversial writings have not received enough recognition, partly because they opposed the trends of his time and partly due to his success in other areas.

2. Practical Divinity.—The Serious Call to a Devout and Holy Life (1728), together with its predecessor, A Treatise of Christian Perfection (1726), deeply influenced the chief actors in the great Evangelical revival. The Wesleys, George Whitefield, Henry Venn, Thomas Scott and Thomas Adam all express their deep obligation to the author. The Serious Call affected others quite as deeply. Samuel Johnson, Gibbon, Lord Lyttelton and Bishop Horne all spoke enthusiastically of its merits; and it is still the only work by which its author is popularly known. It has high merits of style, being lucid and pointed to a degree. In a tract entitled The Absolute Unlawfulness of Stage Entertainments (1726) Law was tempted by the corruptions of the stage of the period to use unreasonable language, and incurred some effective criticism from John Dennis in The Stage Defended.

2. Practical Divinity.—The Serious Call to a Devout and Holy Life (1728), along with its earlier work, A Treatise of Christian Perfection (1726), had a strong impact on the key figures in the major Evangelical revival. The Wesleys, George Whitefield, Henry Venn, Thomas Scott, and Thomas Adam all expressed their gratitude to the author. The Serious Call also profoundly influenced others. Samuel Johnson, Gibbon, Lord Lyttelton, and Bishop Horne all praised its value; it remains the only work by which the author is widely recognized. It is notably well-written, clear, and concise. In a pamphlet titled The Absolute Unlawfulness of Stage Entertainments (1726), Law was tempted by the era's stage corruption to use extreme language, which led to significant criticism from John Dennis in The Stage Defended.

3. Mysticism.—Though the least popular, by far the most interesting, original and suggestive of all Law’s works are those which he wrote in his later years, after he had become an enthusiastic admirer (not a disciple) of Jacob Boehme, the Teutonic theosophist. From his earliest years he had been deeply impressed with the piety, beauty and thoughtfulness of the writings of the Christian mystics, but it was not till after his accidental meeting with the works of Boehme, about 1734, that pronounced mysticism appeared in his works. Law’s mystic tendencies divorced him from the practical-minded Wesley, but in spite of occasional wild fancies the books are worth reading. They are A Demonstration of the Gross and Fundamental Errors of a late Book called a “Plain Account, &c., of the Lord’s Supper” (1737); The Grounds and Reasons of the Christian Regeneration (1739); An Appeal to all that Doubt and Disbelieve the Truths of Revelation (1740); An Earnest and Serious Answer to Dr Trapp’s Sermon on being Righteous Overmuch (1740); The Spirit of Prayer (1749, 1752); The Way to Divine Knowledge (1752); The Spirit of Love (1752, 1754); A Short but Sufficient Confutation of Dr Warburton’s Projected Defence (as he calls it) of Christianity in his “Divine Legation of Moses” (1757); A Series of Letters (1760); a Dialogue between a Methodist and a Churchman (1760); and An Humble, Earnest and Affectionate Address to the Clergy (1761).

3. Mysticism.—Although the least popular, the most interesting, original, and thought-provoking of all Law’s works are those written in his later years after he became an enthusiastic admirer (not a follower) of Jacob Boehme, the German theosophist. From a young age, he was deeply influenced by the piety, beauty, and depth of the writings of Christian mystics, but it wasn't until his chance encounter with Boehme's works around 1734 that clear mysticism emerged in his writings. Law’s mystical inclinations set him apart from the practical-minded Wesley, but despite some occasional wild ideas, his books are worth reading. They include A Demonstration of the Gross and Fundamental Errors of a late Book called a “Plain Account, &c., of the Lord’s Supper” (1737); The Grounds and Reasons of the Christian Regeneration (1739); An Appeal to all that Doubt and Disbelieve the Truths of Revelation (1740); An Earnest and Serious Answer to Dr Trapp’s Sermon on being Righteous Overmuch (1740); The Spirit of Prayer (1749, 1752); The Way to Divine Knowledge (1752); The Spirit of Love (1752, 1754); A Short but Sufficient Confutation of Dr Warburton’s Projected Defence (as he calls it) of Christianity in his “Divine Legation of Moses” (1757); A Series of Letters (1760); a Dialogue between a Methodist and a Churchman (1760); and An Humble, Earnest and Affectionate Address to the Clergy (1761).

Richard Tighe wrote a short account of Law’s life in 1813. See also Christopher Walton, Notes and Materials for a Complete Biography of W. Law (1848); Sir Leslie Stephen, English Thought in the 18th century, and in the Dict. Nat. Biog. (xxxii. 236); W. H. Lecky, History of England in the 18th Century; C. J. Abbey, The English Church in the 18th Century; and J. H. Overton, William Law, Nonjuror and Mystic (1881).

Richard Tighe wrote a brief account of Law's life in 1813. See also Christopher Walton, Notes and Materials for a Complete Biography of W. Law (1848); Sir Leslie Stephen, English Thought in the 18th Century, and in the Dict. Nat. Biog. (xxxii. 236); W. H. Lecky, History of England in the 18th Century; C. J. Abbey, The English Church in the 18th Century; and J. H. Overton, William Law, Nonjuror and Mystic (1881).

LAW (O. Eng. lagu, M. Eng. lawe; from an old Teutonic root lag, “lie,” what lies fixed or evenly; cf. Lat. lex, Fr. loi), a word used in English in two main senses—(1) as a rule prescribed by authority for human action, and (2) in scientific and philosophic phraseology, as a uniform order of sequence (e.g. “laws” of motion). In the first sense the word is used either in the abstract, for jurisprudence generally or for a state of things in which the laws of a country are duly observed (“law and order”), or in the concrete for some particular rule or body of rules. It is usual to distinguish further between “law” and “equity” (q.v.). The scientific and philosophic usage has grown out of an early conception of jurisprudence, and is really metaphorical, derived from the phrase “natural law” or “law of nature,” which presumed that commands were laid on matter by God (see T. E. Holland, Elements of Jurisprudence, ch. ii.). The adjective “legal” is only used in the first sense, never in the second. In the case of the “moral law” (see Ethics) the term is employed somewhat ambiguously because of its connexion with both meanings. There is also an Old English use of the word “law” in a more or less sporting sense (“to give law” or “allow so much law”), meaning a start or fair allowance in time or distance. Presumably this originated simply in the liberty-loving Briton’s respect for proper legal procedure; instead of the brute exercise of tyrannous force he demanded “law,” or a fair opportunity 300 and trial. But it may simply be an extension of the meaning of “right,” or of the sense of “leave” which is found in early uses of the French loi.

LAW (O. Eng. lagu, M. Eng. lawe; from an old Teutonic root lag, “lie,” meaning something that is fixed or stable; cf. Lat. lex, Fr. loi), is a term used in English in two main ways—(1) as a rule set by authority for human actions, and (2) in scientific and philosophical terms, as a consistent order of events (e.g. “laws” of motion). In the first sense, the word can refer to the general concept of jurisprudence or to a situation where a country's laws are properly followed (“law and order”), or it can refer to a specific rule or set of rules. It's common to further differentiate between “law” and “equity” (q.v.). The scientific and philosophical usage evolved from an early understanding of jurisprudence and is actually metaphorical, stemming from the idea of “natural law” or “law of nature,” which assumed that God imposed commands on matter (see T. E. Holland, Elements of Jurisprudence, ch. ii.). The adjective “legal” is only used in the first sense, never in the second. When talking about the “moral law” (see Ethics), the term is somewhat ambiguous because it connects with both meanings. There is also an Old English use of the word “law” in a somewhat sporting context (“to give law” or “allow so much law”), meaning a head start or a fair allowance in time or distance. This likely came from the liberty-loving Briton’s respect for proper legal procedures; instead of just using tyrannical force, they demanded “law,” or a fair chance 300 and trial. However, it might just be an extension of the meaning of “right,” or the sense of “leave” found in early uses of the French loi.

In this work the laws or uniformities of the physical universe are dealt with in the articles on the various sciences. The general principles of law in the legal sense are discussed under Jurisprudence. What may be described as “national systems” of law are dealt with historically and generally under English Law, American Law, Roman Law, Greek Law, Mahommedan Law, Indian Law, &c. Certain broad divisions of law are treated under Constitution and Constitutional Law, Canon Law, Civil Law, Common Law, Criminal Law, Ecclesiastical Law, Equity, International Law, Military Law, &c. And the particular laws of different countries on special subjects are stated under the headings for those subjects (Bankruptcy, &c.). For courts (q.v.) of law, and procedure, see Jurisprudence, Appeal, Trial, King’s Bench, &c.

In this work, the laws or patterns of the physical universe are explored in the articles about different sciences. The general principles of law in a legal context are discussed under Jurisprudence. What can be described as “national systems” of law are examined historically and generally under English Law, American Law, Roman Law, Greek Law, Mahommedan Law, Indian Law, etc. Certain broad categories of law are addressed under Constitution and Constitutional Law, Canon Law, Civil Law, Common Law, Criminal Law, Ecclesiastical Law, Equity, International Law, Military Law, etc. The specific laws of various countries on certain topics are listed under the relevant headings (Bankruptcy, etc.). For courts (q.v.) of law and procedures, see Jurisprudence, Appeal, Trial, King’s Bench, etc.

Authorities.—The various legal articles have bibliographies attached, but it may be convenient here to mention such general works on law, apart from the science of jurisprudence, as (for English law) Lord Halsbury’s Laws of England (vol. i., 1907), The Encyclopaedia of the Laws of England, ed. Wood Renton (1907), Stephen’s Commentaries on the Laws of England (1908), Brett’s Commentaries on the present Laws of England (1896), Broom’s Commentaries on the Common Law (1896) and Brodie-Innes’s Comparative Principles of the Laws of England and Scotland (vol. i., 1903); and, for America, Bouvier’s Law Dictionary, and Kent’s Commentaries on American Law.

Authorities.—The different legal articles have bibliographies included, but it might be helpful to highlight some general works on law, aside from the science of jurisprudence, such as (for English law) Lord Halsbury’s Laws of England (vol. i., 1907), The Encyclopaedia of the Laws of England, ed. Wood Renton (1907), Stephen’s Commentaries on the Laws of England (1908), Brett’s Commentaries on the present Laws of England (1896), Broom’s Commentaries on the Common Law (1896), and Brodie-Innes’s Comparative Principles of the Laws of England and Scotland (vol. i., 1903); and for America, Bouvier’s Law Dictionary and Kent’s Commentaries on American Law.

LAWES, HENRY (1595-1662), English musician, was born at Dinton in Wiltshire in December 1595, and received his musical education from John Cooper, better known under his Italian pseudonym Giovanni Coperario (d. 1627), a famous composer of the day. In 1626 he was received as one of the gentlemen of the chapel royal, which place he held till the Commonwealth put a stop to church music. But even during that songless time Lawes continued his work as a composer, and the famous collection of his vocal pieces, Ayres and Dialogues for One, Two and Three Voyces, was published in 1653, being followed by two other books under the same title in 1655 and 1658 respectively. When in 1660 the king returned, Lawes once more entered the royal chapel, and composed an anthem for the coronation of Charles II. He died on the 21st of October 1662, and was buried in Westminster Abbey. Lawes’s name has become known beyond musical circles by his friendship with Milton, whose Comus he supplied with incidental music for the performance of the masque in 1634. The poet in return immortalized his friend in the famous sonnet in which Milton, with a musical perception not common amongst poets, exactly indicates the great merit of Lawes. His careful attention to the words of the poet, the manner in which his music seems to grow from those words, the perfect coincidence of the musical with the metrical accent, all put Lawes’s songs on a level with those of Schumann or Liszt or any modern composer. At the same time he is by no means wanting in genuine melodic invention, and his concerted music shows the learned contrapuntist.

LAWES, HENRY (1595-1662), an English musician, was born in Dinton, Wiltshire, in December 1595. He learned music from John Cooper, better known by his Italian name Giovanni Coperario (d. 1627), who was a well-known composer of the time. In 1626, he became one of the gentlemen of the chapel royal, a position he held until the Commonwealth halted church music. However, even during that silent period, Lawes continued to compose, and his well-known collection of vocal pieces, Ayres and Dialogues for One, Two and Three Voices, was published in 1653, followed by two other volumes with the same title in 1655 and 1658. When the king returned in 1660, Lawes rejoined the royal chapel and composed an anthem for the coronation of Charles II. He died on October 21, 1662, and was buried in Westminster Abbey. Lawes’s name became known beyond music circles due to his friendship with Milton, for whom he provided incidental music for the performance of the masque Comus in 1634. In return, the poet immortalized him in a famous sonnet, where Milton, with a rare musical insight for a poet, highlighted Lawes’s significant talents. His careful attention to the poet's words, the way his music seems to emerge from those words, and the perfect match of musical and metrical accents place Lawes’s songs alongside those of Schumann, Liszt, or any contemporary composer. At the same time, he is also rich in genuine melodic creativity, and his ensemble music demonstrates his skill as a learned contrapuntist.

LAWES, SIR JOHN BENNET, Bart. (1814-1900), English agriculturist, was born at Rothamsted on the 28th of December 1814. Even before leaving Oxford, where he matriculated in 1832, he had begun to interest himself in growing various medicinal plants on the Rothamsted estates, which he inherited on his father’s death in 1822. About 1837 he began to experiment on the effects of various manures on plants growing in pots, and a year or two later the experiments were extended to crops in the field. One immediate consequence was that in 1842 he patented a manure formed by treating phosphates with sulphuric acid, and thus initiated the artificial manure industry. In the succeeding year he enlisted the services of Sir J. H. Gilbert, with whom he carried on for more than half a century those experiments in raising crops and feeding animals which have rendered Rothamsted famous in the eyes of scientific agriculturists all over the world (see Agriculture). In 1854 he was elected a Fellow of the Royal Society, which in 1867 bestowed a Royal medal on Lawes and Gilbert jointly, and in 1882 he was created a baronet. In the year before his death, which happened on the 31st of August 1900, he took measures to ensure the continued existence of the Rothamsted experimental farm by setting aside £100,000 for that purpose and constituting the Lawes Agricultural Trust, composed of four members from the Royal Society, two from the Royal Agricultural Society, one each from the Chemical and Linnaean Societies, and the owner of Rothamsted mansion-house for the time being.

LAWES, SIR JOHN BENNET, Bart. (1814-1900), English agriculturist, was born at Rothamsted on December 28, 1814. Even before he left Oxford, where he enrolled in 1832, he started to take an interest in growing various medicinal plants on the Rothamsted estates, which he inherited after his father's death in 1822. Around 1837, he began experimenting with the effects of different fertilizers on plants grown in pots, and a year or two later, the experiments were expanded to field crops. One immediate result was that in 1842 he patented a fertilizer made by treating phosphates with sulfuric acid, thus starting the artificial fertilizer industry. The following year, he enlisted Sir J. H. Gilbert's help, and together they conducted experiments on crop cultivation and animal feeding for over fifty years, which made Rothamsted famous among scientific agriculturists worldwide (see Agriculture). In 1854, he was elected a Fellow of the Royal Society, which awarded Lawes and Gilbert a joint Royal medal in 1867, and in 1882 he was made a baronet. In the year before his death on August 31, 1900, he took steps to ensure the Rothamsted experimental farm would continue by setting aside £100,000 for that purpose and creating the Lawes Agricultural Trust, composed of four members from the Royal Society, two from the Royal Agricultural Society, one each from the Chemical and Linnaean Societies, and the current owner of Rothamsted mansion-house.

LAW MERCHANT or Lex mercatoria, originally a body of rules and principles relating to merchants and mercantile transactions, laid down by merchants themselves for the purpose of regulating their dealings. It was composed of such usages and customs as were common to merchants and traders in all parts of Europe, varied slightly in different localities by special peculiarities. The law merchant owed its origin to the fact that the civil law was not sufficiently responsive to the growing demands of commerce, as well as to the fact that trade in pre-medieval times was practically in the hands of those who might be termed cosmopolitan merchants, who wanted a prompt and effective jurisdiction. It was administered for the most part in special courts, such as those of the gilds in Italy, or the fair courts of Germany and France, or as in England, in courts of the staple or piepowder (see also Sea Laws). The history of the law merchant in England is divided into three stages: the first prior to the time of Coke, when it was a special kind of law—as distinct from the common law—administered in special courts for a special class of the community (i.e. the mercantile); the second stage was one of transition, the law merchant being administered in the common law courts, but as a body of customs, to be proved as a fact in each individual case of doubt; the third stage, which has continued to the present day, dates from the presidency over the king’s bench of Lord Mansfield (q.v.), under whom it was moulded into the mercantile law of to-day. To the law merchant modern English law owes the fundamental principles in the law of partnership, negotiable instruments and trade marks.

LAW MERCHANT or Commercial law was originally a set of rules and principles created by merchants to govern their transactions. It consisted of customs and practices that were common among merchants and traders throughout Europe, with slight variations based on local specifics. The law merchant originated because civil law was not adequately addressing the increasing needs of commerce, and trade in pre-medieval times was primarily managed by what could be considered cosmopolitan merchants who required efficient and quick resolution of disputes. It was mostly enforced in specialized courts, like those of the guilds in Italy, or the fair courts of Germany and France, or, in England, in the courts of the staple or piepowder (see also Sea Laws). The history of the law merchant in England is divided into three phases: the first, before Coke's time, when it was a distinct type of law separate from common law, enforced in special courts for a specific segment of the community (i.e., the mercantile); the second phase was transitional, with the law merchant being administered in common law courts but regarded as a collection of customs that needed to be proved in each specific case of doubt; the third phase, which continues today, began under Lord Mansfield's leadership in the king’s bench, during which it evolved into the modern mercantile law. Modern English law derives its foundational principles regarding partnership law, negotiable instruments, and trademarks from the law merchant.

See G. Malynes, Consuetudo vel lex mercatoria (London, 1622); W. Mitchell, The Early History of the Law Merchant (Cambridge, 1904); J. W. Smith, Mercantile Law (ed. Hart and Simey, 1905).

See G. Malynes, Consuetudo vel lex mercatoria (London, 1622); W. Mitchell, The Early History of the Law Merchant (Cambridge, 1904); J. W. Smith, Mercantile Law (ed. Hart and Simey, 1905).

LAWN, a very thin fabric made from level linen or cotton yarns. It is used for light dresses and trimmings, also for handkerchiefs. The terms lawn and cambric (q.v.) are often intended to indicate the same fabric. The word “lawn” was formerly derived from the French name for the fabric linon, from lin, flax, linen, but Skeat (Etym. Dict., 1898, Addenda) and A. Thomas (Romania, xxix. 182, 1900) have shown that the real source of the word is to be found in the name of the French town Laon. Skeat quotes from Palsgrave, Les claircissement de la langue Françoÿse (1530), showing that the early name of the fabric was Laune lynen. An early form of the word was “laund,” probably due to an adaptation to “laund,” lawn, glade or clearing in a forest, now used of a closely-mown expanse of grass in a garden, park, &c. (see Grass and Horticulture). This word comes from O. Fr. launde, mod. lande, wild, heathy or sandy ground, covered with scrub or brushwood, a word of Celtic origin; cf. Irish and Breton lann, heathy ground, also enclosure, land; Welsh llan, enclosure. It is cognate with “land,” common to Teutonic languages. In the original sense of clearing in a forest, glade, Lat. saltus, “lawn,” still survives in the New Forest, where it is used of the feeding-places of cattle.

LAWN a very lightweight fabric made from smooth linen or cotton threads. It's used for light dresses, trims, and handkerchiefs. The terms lawn and cambric (q.v.) are often used to refer to the same fabric. The word "lawn" originally came from the French term for the fabric linon, from lin, meaning flax or linen, but Skeat (Etym. Dict., 1898, Addenda) and A. Thomas (Romania, xxix. 182, 1900) have demonstrated that the true origin of the word is the name of the French town Laon. Skeat cites Palsgrave in Les claircissement de la langue Françoÿse (1530), indicating that the early name for the fabric was Laune lynen. An earlier form of the word was "laund," likely adapted to mean “laund,” lawn, glade, or clearing in a forest, now used to describe a closely-cut area of grass in a garden, park, etc. (see Grass and Horticulture). This word comes from Old French launde, modern lande, wild, heath-covered, or sandy ground, which is covered with scrub or brushwood, a word of Celtic origin; compare Irish and Breton lann, meaning heathy ground, as well as enclosure or land; Welsh llan, meaning enclosure. It is related to "land," which is common in Teutonic languages. In its original meaning of clearing in a forest, glade, Latin saltus, "lawn," still exists in the New Forest, where it describes the grazing areas for cattle.

LAWN-TENNIS, a game played with racquet and ball on a court traversed by a net, but without enclosing walls. It is a modern adaptation of the ancient game of tennis (q.v.), with which it is identical as regards the scoring of the game and “set.” Lawn-tennis is essentially a summer game, played in the open air, either on courts marked with whitewash on close-cut grass like a cricket pitch, or on asphalt, cinders, gravel, wood, earth or other substance which can be so prepared as to afford a firm, level and smooth surface. In winter, however, the game is often played on the floor of gymnasiums, drill sheds or other buildings, when it is called “covered-court lawn-tennis”; 301 but there is no difference in the game itself corresponding to these varieties of court.

LAWN TENNIS, is a game played with a racquet and ball on a court divided by a net, but without surrounding walls. It’s a modern version of the ancient game of tennis (q.v.), and it has the same scoring system and “set.” Lawn-tennis is mainly a summer game played outdoors, either on courts marked with whitewash on well-maintained grass like a cricket pitch, or on surfaces like asphalt, cinders, gravel, wood, earth, or other materials that can be made firm, level, and smooth. In winter, however, the game is often played indoors in gymnasiums, drill sheds, or other buildings, where it’s referred to as “covered-court lawn-tennis”; 301 but there’s no difference in the game itself based on these types of courts.

Fig. 1. Fig. 2.

The lawn-tennis court for the single-handed game, one player against one (“singles”), is shown in fig. 1, and that for the four-handed game (“doubles”) in fig. 2. The net stretched across the middle of the court is attached to the tops of two posts which stand 3 ft. outside the court on each side. The height of the net is 3 ft. 6 in. at the posts and 3 ft. at the centre. The court is bisected longitudinally by the half-court-line, which, however, is marked only between the two service-lines and at the points of junction with the base-lines. The divisions of the court on each side of the half-court-line are called respectively the right-hand and left-hand courts; and the portion of these divisions between the service-lines and the net are the right-hand service-court and left-hand service-court respectively. The balls, which are made of hollow india-rubber, tightly covered with white flannel, are 2½ in. in diameter, and from 178 to 2 oz. in weight. The racquets (fig. 3), for which there are no regulation dimensions, are broader and lighter than those used in tennis.

The lawn tennis court for singles, where one player competes against another, is shown in fig. 1, and the court for doubles is in fig. 2. A net stretches across the middle of the court, attached to the tops of two posts that stand 3 ft. outside each side of the court. The net height is 3 ft. 6 in. at the posts and 3 ft. at the center. The court is divided lengthwise by the half-court line, which is marked only between the two service lines and where it meets the base lines. The areas of the court on each side of the half-court line are called the right-hand and left-hand courts. The sections of these areas between the service lines and the net are known as the right-hand service court and the left-hand service court, respectively. The balls are made of hollow rubber, covered tightly with white flannel, measuring 2½ in. in diameter and weighing between 178 to 2 oz. The racquets (fig. 3) do not have standard dimensions and are broader and lighter than those used in tennis.

Fig. 3.

Before play begins, a racquet is spun as in tennis, and the winner of the spin elects either to take first service or to take choice of courts. If he takes choice of courts, he and his partner (if the game be doubles) take their position on the selected side of the net, one stationing himself in the right-hand court and the other in the left, which positions are retained throughout the set. If the winner of the spin takes choice of courts, his opponent has first service; and vice versa. The players change sides of the net at the end of the first, third and every subsequent alternate game, and at the end of each set; but they may agree not to change during any set except the last. Service is delivered by each player in turn, who retains it for one game irrespective of the winning or losing of points. In doubles the partner of the server in the first game serves in the third, and the partner of the server in the second game serves in the fourth; the same order being preserved till the end of the set; but each pair of partners decide for themselves before their first turn of service which of the two shall serve first. The server delivers the service from the right- and left-hand courts alternately, beginning in each of his service games from the right-hand court, even though odds be given or owed; he must stand behind (i.e. farther from the net than) the base-line, and must serve the ball so that it drops in the opponent’s service-court diagonally opposite to the court served from, or upon one of the lines enclosing that service-court. If in a serve, otherwise good, the ball touches the net, it is a “let” whether the serve be “taken” or not by striker-out; a “let” does not annul a previous “fault.” (For the meaning of “let,” “rest,” “striker-out” and other technical terms used in the game, see Tennis and Racquets.) The serve is a fault (1) if it be not delivered by the server from the proper court, and from behind the base-line; (2) if the ball drops into the net or out-of-court, or into any part of the court other than the proper service-court. The striker-out cannot, as in racquets, “take,” and thereby condone, a fault. When a fault has been served, the server must serve again from the same court, unless it was a fault because served from the wrong court, in which case the server crosses to the proper court before serving again. Two consecutive faults score a point against the side of the server. Lawn-tennis differs from tennis and racquets in that the service may not be taken on the volley by striker-out. After the serve has been returned the play proceeds until the “rest” (or “rally”) ends by one side or the other failing to make a “good return”; a good return in lawn-tennis meaning a stroke by which the ball, having been hit with the racquet before its second bound, is sent over the net, even if it touches the net, so as to fall within the limits of the court on the opposite side. A point is scored by the player, or side, whose opponent fails to return the serve or to make a good return in the rest. A player also loses a point if the ball when in play touches him or his partner, or their clothes; or if he or his racquet touches the net or any of its supports while the ball is in play; or if he leaps over the net to avoid touching it; or if he volley the ball before it has passed the net.

Before the game starts, a racquet is spun like in tennis, and the winner of the spin decides whether to serve first or choose which side of the court to play on. If they choose the court, they and their partner (if playing doubles) will take their positions on that side of the net, with one player on the right and the other on the left, and these positions will remain the same throughout the set. If the winner of the spin chooses the court, their opponent serves first, and vice versa. Players switch sides of the net at the end of the first, third, and every other game thereafter, and at the end of each set; however, they can agree not to switch during any set except the last one. Each player serves in turn and keeps serving for one game, regardless of whether they win or lose points. In doubles, the partner of the server in the first game serves in the third, and the partner of the server in the second game serves in the fourth; this order continues until the end of the set, but each team decides who will serve first before their first turn. The server alternates serving from the right and left courts, starting from the right court in each of their service games, even if odds are given or owed; they must stand behind the base line and serve the ball so it lands in the opponent’s service court diagonally opposite, or on one of the lines that define that service court. If a serve that would otherwise be good hits the net, it is called a “let,” whether the receiver plays it or not; a “let” does not cancel a previous “fault.” (For definitions of “let,” “rest,” “striker-out,” and other technical terms used in the game, see Tennis and Racquets.) A serve is considered a fault if (1) it is not delivered from the right court and position behind the base line; (2) if it hits the net or goes out of bounds, or lands in any part of the court other than the proper service court. The striker-out cannot, like in racquets, "take" and thereby accept a fault. After a fault, the server must serve again from the same court unless the fault was due to serving from the wrong court, in which case they must switch to the correct court before serving again. Two consecutive faults result in a point for the opposing side. Lawn tennis differs from tennis and racquets in that the serve cannot be volleyed by the striker-out. Once the serve is returned, play continues until one side fails to make a “good return”; a good return in lawn tennis means hitting the ball with the racquet before it bounces a second time so that it goes over the net, even if it hits the net, and lands within the court limits on the opposite side. A player scores a point when their opponent fails to return the serve or makes a bad return during the rally. A player also loses a point if the ball strikes them or their partner, or their clothes; if they or their racquet touch the net or its supports while the ball is in play; if they jump over the net to avoid touching it; or if they volley the ball before it has cleared the net.

For him who would excel in lawn-tennis a strong fast service is hardly less necessary than a heavily “cut” service to the tennis player and the racquet player. High overhand service, by which alone any great pace can be obtained, was first perfected by the brothers Renshaw between 1880 and 1890, and is now universal even among players far below the first rank. The service in vogue among the best players in America, and from this circumstance known as the “American service,” has less pace than the English but is “cut” in such a way that it swerves in the air and “drags” off the ground, the advantage being that it gives the server more time to “run in” after his serve, so as to volley his opponent’s return from a position within a yard or two of the net. Both in singles and doubles the best players often make it their aim to get up comparatively near the net as soon as possible, whether they are serving or receiving the serve, the object being to volley the ball whenever possible before it begins to fall. The server’s partner, in doubles, stands about a yard and a half from the net, and rather nearer the side-line than the half-court-line; the receiver of the service, not being allowed to volley the serve, must take his stand according to the nature of the service, which, if very fast, will require him to stand outside the base-line; the receiver’s partner usually stands between the net and the service-line. All four players, if the rest lasts beyond a stroke or two, are generally found nearer to the net than the service-lines; and the game, assuming the players to be of the championship class, consists chiefly of rapid low volleying, varied by attempts on one side or the other to place the ball out of the opponents’ reach by “lobbing” it over their heads into the back part of the court. Good “lobbing” demands great skill, to avoid on the one hand sending the ball out of court beyond the base-line, and on the other allowing it to drop short enough for the adversary to kill it with a “smashing” volley. Of “lobbing” it has been laid down by the brothers Doherty that “the higher it is the better, so long as the length is good”; and as regards returning lobs the same authorities say, “you must get them if you can before they drop, for it is usually fatal to let them drop when playing against a good pair.” The reason for this is that if the lob be allowed to drop before being returned, so much time is given to the striker of it to gain position that he is almost certain to be able to kill the return, unless the lob be returned by an equally good and very high lob, dropping within a foot or so of the base-line in the opposite court, a stroke that requires the utmost accuracy of strength to accomplish safely. The game in the hands of first-class players consists largely in manœuvring for favourable position in the court while driving the opponent into a less favourable position on his side of the net; the player who gains the advantage of position in this way being generally able to finish the rest by a smashing volley impossible to return. Ability to play this “smash” stroke is essential to strong lawn-tennis. “To be good overhead,” say the Dohertys, “is the sign of a first-class player, even if a few have managed to get on without it.” The smash stroke is played very much in the same way as the overhand service, except that it is not from a defined position of known distance from the net; and therefore when making it the player must realize almost instinctively what his precise position is in relation to the net and the side-lines, for it is of the last importance that he should not take his eye off the ball “even for the hundredth part of a second.” By drawing the racquet across the ball at the moment of impact spin may be imparted to it as in tennis, or as “side” is imparted to a billiard ball, and the direction of this spin 302 and the consequent behaviour of the ball after the stroke may be greatly varied by a skilful player. Perhaps the most generally useful form of spin, though by no means the only one commonly used, is that known as “top” or “lift,” a vertical rotatory motion of the ball in the same direction as its flight, which is imparted to it by an upward draw of the racquet at the moment of making the stroke, and the effect of which is to make it drop more suddenly than it would ordinarily do, and in an unexpected curve. A drive made with plenty of “top” can be hit much harder than would otherwise be possible without sending the ball out of court, and it is therefore extensively employed by the best players. While the volleying game is almost universally the practice of first-class players—A. W. Gore, M. J. G. Ritchie and S. H. Smith being almost alone among those of championship rank in modern days to use the volley comparatively little—its difficulty places it beyond the reach of the less skilful. In lawn-tennis as played at the ordinary country house or local club the real “smash” of a Renshaw or a Doherty is seldom to be seen, and the high lob is almost equally rare. Players of moderate calibre are content to take the ball on the bound and to return it with some pace along the side-lines or across the court, with the aim of placing it as artfully as possible beyond the reach of the adversary; and if now and again they venture to imitate a stroke employed with killing effect at Wimbledon, they think themselves fortunate if they occasionally succeed in making it without disaster to themselves.

For anyone looking to excel in lawn tennis, a strong, fast serve is almost as essential as a heavily “cut” serve for tennis and racquet players. The high overhand serve, which is the only way to achieve significant pace, was first perfected by the Renshaw brothers between 1880 and 1890 and is now standard even among less skilled players. The serve popular among the top players in America, known as the “American service,” lacks the pace of the English serve but is “cut” so that it swerves in the air and “drags” when it hits the ground. The benefit of this is that it gives the server more time to “run in” after serving, allowing them to volley their opponent’s return from just a yard or two from the net. In both singles and doubles, the best players often aim to get close to the net as quickly as possible, whether serving or receiving, with the goal of volleying the ball before it begins to drop. In doubles, the server’s partner stands about a yard and a half from the net, closer to the sideline than the half-court line; the receiver of the serve, who can’t volley, must position themselves based on the nature of the serve, which, if very fast, will require them to stand behind the baseline, while the receiver’s partner typically stands between the net and the service line. If the rally lasts beyond a few strokes, all four players are usually found closer to the net than the service lines; and if the players are of championship quality, the game mainly consists of quick, low volleys, with attempts to place the ball out of reach of opponents by “lobbing” it over them into the back part of the court. Good “lobbing” requires skill to avoid hitting the ball out of bounds behind the baseline and to ensure it doesn’t drop short enough for the opponent to smash it with a volley. The Doherty brothers state about lobbing that “the higher it is the better, as long as the length is good,” and regarding returning lobs, they advise, “you must get them if you can before they drop, as it’s usually a mistake to let them drop when playing against a strong pair.” This is because if the lob drops before being returned, it gives the striker time to gain a position, making it very likely they can kill the return unless the lob is countered with an equally good and very high lob that lands within a foot or so of the baseline on the opposite side, a stroke that requires precise strength to execute safely. The game, when played by top players, involves maneuvering for advantageous court positions while driving the opponent into a worse position on their side of the net; the player who achieves a favorable position generally has the upper hand and can finish with a smash volley that is nearly impossible to return. Being able to execute this “smash” stroke is crucial for strong lawn tennis. “To be good overhead,” say the Dohertys, “is a mark of a top player, even if a few have managed without it.” The smash stroke is played similarly to the overhand serve, except it comes from an undefined position relative to the net; therefore, when executing it, the player must instinctively know their exact position concerning the net and sidelines, as it’s vital not to take their eye off the ball “even for the hundredth part of a second.” By angling the racquet across the ball at the point of impact, spin can be added, much like in tennis or the side spin on a billiard ball, and a skilled player can greatly vary the spin’s direction and the ball’s behavior after the stroke. One of the most commonly used spins, though certainly not the only one, is known as “top” or “lift,” which is a vertical spin in the same direction as the ball’s flight, created by an upward movement of the racquet when making the stroke. This effect causes the ball to drop more suddenly than usual and create an unexpected curve. A drive with plenty of “top” can be hit much harder than would otherwise be possible without risking sending the ball out of bounds, making it a favored technique among top players. While volleying is almost universally practiced by elite players—A. W. Gore, M. J. G. Ritchie, and S. H. Smith are notable exceptions among modern championship players for using it relatively little—the difficulty of volleying makes it challenging for less skilled players. In lawn tennis played at a typical country house or local club, the true “smash” of a Renshaw or a Doherty is rarely seen, and high lobs are nearly as uncommon. Moderate players are content to take the ball on the bounce and return it with some power along the sidelines or across the court, aiming to position it cleverly out of reach of their opponent; and if they occasionally attempt to mimic a shot that’s effective at Wimbledon, they consider themselves fortunate if they manage to do it sometimes without disaster.

Before 1890 the method of handicapping at lawn-tennis was the same as in tennis so far as it was applicable to a game played in an open court. In 1890 bisques were abolished, and in 1894 an elaborate system was introduced by which fractional parts of “fifteen” could be conceded by way of handicap, in accordance with tables inserted in the laws of the game. The system is a development of the tennis handicapping by which a finer graduation of odds may be given. “One-sixth of fifteen” is one stroke given in every six games of a set; and similarly two-sixths, three-sixths, four-sixths and five-sixths of fifteen, are respectively two, three, four and five strokes given in every six games of a set; the particular game in the set in which the stroke in each case must be given being specified in the tables.

Before 1890, the way of handicapping in lawn tennis was similar to that in regular tennis when played in an open court. In 1890, bisques were eliminated, and in 1894, a detailed system was introduced allowing fractional parts of “fifteen” to be given as a handicap, based on tables included in the game's rules. This system builds on tennis handicapping, providing a more precise range of odds. "One-sixth of fifteen" means one stroke is given in every six games of a set; likewise, two-sixths, three-sixths, four-sixths, and five-sixths of fifteen correspond to two, three, four, and five strokes given in every six games of a set, with the specific game in the set for each stroke being detailed in the tables.

History.—Lawn-tennis cannot be said to have existed prior to the year 1874. It is, indeed, true that outdoor games based on tennis were from time to time improvised by lovers of that game who found themselves out of reach of a tennis-court. Lord Arthur Hervey, sometime bishop of Bath and Wells, had thus devised a game which he and his friends played on the lawn of his rectory in Suffolk; and even so early as the end of the 18th century “field tennis” was mentioned by the Sporting Magazine as a game that rivalled the popularity of cricket. But, however much or little this game may have resembled lawn-tennis, it had long ceased to exist; and even to be remembered, when in 1874 Major Wingfield took out a patent for a game called Sphairistike, which the specification described as “a new and improved portable court for playing the ancient game of tennis.” The court for this game was wider at the base-lines than at the net, giving the whole court the shape of an hour-glass; one side of the net only was divided into service-courts, service being always delivered from a fixed mark in the centre of the opposite court; and from the net-posts side-nets were fixed which tapered down to the ground at about the middle of the side-lines, thus enclosing nearly half the courts on each side of the net. The possibilities of Sphairistike were quickly perceived; and under the new name of lawn-tennis its popularity grew so quickly that in 1875 a meeting of those interested in the game was held at Lord’s cricket-ground, where a committee of the Marylebone Club (M.C.C.) was appointed to draw up a code of rules. The hour-glass shape of the court was retained by this code (issued in May 1875), and the scoring of the game followed in the main the racquets instead of the tennis model. It was at the suggestion of J. M. Heathcote, the amateur tennis champion, that balls covered with white flannel were substituted for the uncovered balls used at first. In 1875, through the influence of Henry Jones (“Cavendish”), lawn-tennis was included in the programme of the All England Croquet Club, which in 1877 became the All England Croquet and Lawn-Tennis Club, on whose ground at Wimbledon the All England championships have been annually played since that date. In the same year, in anticipation of the first championship meeting, the club appointed a committee consisting of Henry Jones, Julian Marshall and C. G. Heathcote to revise the M.C.C. code of rules; the result of their labours being the introduction of the tennis in place of the racquets scoring, the substitution of a rectangular for the “hour-glass” court, and the enactment of the modern rule as regards the “fault.” The height of the net, which under the M.C.C. rules had been 4 ft. in the centre, was reduced to 3 ft. 3 in.; and regulations as to the size and weight of the ball were also made. Some controversy had already taken place in the columns of the Field as to whether volleying the ball, at all events within a certain distance of the net, should not be prohibited. Spencer Gore, the first to win the championship in 1877, used the volley with great skill and judgment, and in principle anticipated the tactics afterwards brought to perfection by the Renshaws, which aimed at forcing the adversary back to the base-line and killing his return with a volley from a position near the net. P. F. Hadow, champion in 1878, showed how the volley might be defeated by skilful use of the lob; but the question of placing some check on the volley continued to be agitated among lovers of the game. The rapidly growing popularity of lawn-tennis was proved in 1879 by the inauguration at Oxford of the four-handed championship, and at Dublin of the Irish championship, and by the fact that there were forty-five competitors for the All England single championship at Wimbledon, won by J. T. Hartley, a player who chiefly relied on the accuracy of his return without frequent resort to the volley. It was in the autumn of the same year, in a tournament at Cheltenham, that W. Renshaw made his first successful appearance in public. The year 1880 saw the foundation of the Northern Lawn-Tennis Association, whose tournaments have long been regarded as inferior in importance only to the championship meetings at Wimbledon and Dublin, and a revision of the rules which substantially made them what they have ever since remained. This year is also memorable for the first championship doubles won by the twin brothers William and Ernest Renshaw, a success which the former followed up by winning the Irish championship, beating among others H. F. Lawford for the first time.

History.—Lawn tennis didn’t really exist before 1874. It’s true that people who loved tennis sometimes made up variations of the game when they were away from a tennis court. Lord Arthur Hervey, who was once bishop of Bath and Wells, created a game that he and his friends played on the lawn of his rectory in Suffolk; and as early as the late 18th century, “field tennis” was mentioned in the Sporting Magazine as a game that competed with cricket in popularity. However similar this previous game might have been to lawn tennis, it was long forgotten by the time Major Wingfield patented a game called Sphairistike in 1874, which the details described as “a new and improved portable court for playing the ancient game of tennis.” The court for this game was wider at the baselines than at the net, giving it an hourglass shape; one side of the net was divided into service courts, with service always delivered from a fixed mark in the center of the opposite court; side nets were attached to the net posts, tapering down to the ground roughly in the middle of the side lines, thus enclosing almost half of the courts on either side of the net. The potential of Sphairistike was quickly recognized; and under the new name of lawn tennis, its popularity surged so rapidly that in 1875, a meeting of those interested in the game was held at Lord’s cricket ground, where the Marylebone Cricket Club (M.C.C.) appointed a committee to create a set of rules. The hourglass shape of the court was kept by this code (issued in May 1875), and the scoring for the game primarily followed the racquets model rather than the tennis model. It was suggested by J. M. Heathcote, the amateur tennis champion, that balls covered with white flannel replace the uncovered balls that were initially used. In 1875, thanks to Henry Jones (“Cavendish”), lawn tennis was added to the program of the All England Croquet Club, which in 1877 became the All England Croquet and Lawn-Tennis Club, and has been the site of the All England championships held annually since. That same year, in preparation for the first championship meeting, the club formed a committee made up of Henry Jones, Julian Marshall, and C. G. Heathcote to update the M.C.C. rules; their work resulted in adopting tennis scoring instead of the racquets scoring, changing the court from hourglass to rectangular shape, and establishing the modern rule concerning “faults.” The height of the net, which had been 4 ft. in the center under the M.C.C. rules, was lowered to 3 ft. 3 in.; regulations on the size and weight of the ball were also introduced. There had already been some debate in the pages of the Field about whether volleying the ball, especially near the net, should be disallowed. Spencer Gore, who was the first champion in 1877, skillfully utilized the volley and anticipated the tactics that the Renshaws would later perfect, focusing on pushing the opponent back to the baseline and finishing off the point with a volley close to the net. P. F. Hadow, the champion in 1878, demonstrated how to effectively counter the volley with strategic lobs; yet the issue of regulating the volley continued to be debated among game enthusiasts. The rapidly increasing popularity of lawn tennis was evident in 1879 with the start of the four-handed championship at Oxford, the Irish championship in Dublin, and the fact that 45 players competed for the All England singles championship at Wimbledon, which was won by J. T. Hartley, a player who mainly relied on precise returns instead of frequently using volleys. In the fall of that same year, at a tournament in Cheltenham, W. Renshaw made his first successful public appearance. The year 1880 saw the creation of the Northern Lawn-Tennis Association, whose tournaments are now regarded as second in importance only to the championship events at Wimbledon and Dublin, along with a revision of the rules that made them what they have remained ever since. This year is also notable for the first championship doubles win by the twin brothers William and Ernest Renshaw, a success that William followed by winning the Irish championship, defeating H. F. Lawford for the first time among others.

The Renshaws had already developed the volleying game at the net, and had shown what could be done with the “smash” stroke (which became known by their name as the “Renshaw smash”), but their service had not as yet become very severe. In 1881 the distinctive features of their style were more marked, and the brothers first established firmly the supremacy which they maintained almost without interruption for the next eight years. In the doubles they discarded the older tactics of one partner standing back and the other near the net; the two Renshaws stood about the same level, just inside the service-line, and from there volleyed with relentless severity and with an accuracy never before equalled, and seldom if ever since; while their service also acquired an immense increase of pace. Their chief rival, and the leading exponent of the non-volleying game for several years, was H. F. Lawford. After a year or two it became evident that neither the volleying tactics of Renshaw nor the strong back play of Lawford would be adopted to the exclusion of the other, and both players began to combine the two styles. Thus the permanent features of lawn-tennis may be said to have been firmly established by about the year 1885; and the players who have since then come to the front have for the most part followed the principles laid down by the Renshaws and Lawford. One of the greatest performances at lawn-tennis was in the championship competition in 1886 when W. Renshaw beat Lawford a love set in 9½ minutes. The longest rest in first-class lawn-tennis occurred in a match between Lawford and E. Lubbock in 1880, when eighty-one strokes were played. Among players in the first class who were contemporaries of the Renshaws, mention should be made of E. de S. Browne, a powerful imitator of the Renshaw style; C. W. Grinstead, R. T. Richardson, V. Goold (who played under the nom de plume “St Leger”), J. T. Hartley, E. W. Lewis, E. L. Williams, H. Grove and W. J. Hamilton; while among the most prominent lady players of the period were Miss M. Langrishe, Miss Bradley, Miss Maud Watson, Miss L. Dod, Miss Martin and Miss Bingley (afterwards Mrs Hillyard). In 1888 the Lawn-Tennis Association was established; and the All England Mixed Doubles Championship (four-handed matches for ladies and gentlemen in partnership) was added to the existing annual competitions. Since 1881 303 lawn-tennis matches between Oxford and Cambridge universities have been played annually; and almost every county in England, besides Scotland, Wales and districts such as “Midland Counties,” “South of England,” &c., have their own championship meetings. Tournaments are also played in winter at Nice, Monte Carlo and other Mediterranean resorts where most of the competitors are English visitors.

The Renshaws had already developed their volleying game at the net and demonstrated what could be done with the “smash” stroke (which came to be called the “Renshaw smash”), but their serve wasn't very strong yet. By 1881, the unique features of their style were more pronounced, and the brothers established their dominance, which they maintained almost uninterrupted for the next eight years. In doubles, they moved away from the old tactics of having one partner stand back and the other near the net; instead, the two Renshaws positioned themselves at about the same level, just inside the service line, and from there volleyed with intense precision and with an accuracy that was previously unmatched and rarely seen since, while their serve also gained significant speed. Their main rival, and the leading player of the non-volleying game for several years, was H. F. Lawford. After a year or two, it became clear that neither the Renshaw’s volleying tactics nor Lawford’s strong baseline play would be used exclusively, and both players started blending the two styles. Therefore, we can say that the fundamental elements of lawn tennis were firmly established by around 1885, and most players who followed came to adopt the principles set forth by the Renshaws and Lawford. One of the standout moments in lawn tennis occurred during the championship competition in 1886 when W. Renshaw defeated Lawford in a love set in just 9½ minutes. The longest rally in first-class lawn tennis took place in a match between Lawford and E. Lubbock in 1880, which featured eighty-one strokes. Notable first-class players who were contemporaries of the Renshaws include E. de S. Browne, a strong imitator of the Renshaw style; C. W. Grinstead, R. T. Richardson, V. Goold (who played under the alias “St Leger”), J. T. Hartley, E. W. Lewis, E. L. Williams, H. Grove, and W. J. Hamilton; while some of the leading female players of the time were Miss M. Langrishe, Miss Bradley, Miss Maud Watson, Miss L. Dod, Miss Martin, and Miss Bingley (later Mrs. Hillyard). In 1888, the Lawn-Tennis Association was formed, and the All England Mixed Doubles Championship (four-handed matches for ladies and gentlemen in pairs) was added to the existing annual competitions. Since 1881, annual lawn tennis matches between Oxford and Cambridge universities have been held; and almost every county in England, along with Scotland, Wales, and regions like the “Midland Counties” and “South of England,” has their own championship events. Winter tournaments are also held in Nice, Monte Carlo, and other Mediterranean resorts, where most of the competitors are English visitors.

The results of the All England championships have been as follows:—

The results of the All England championships are as follows:—

Year. Gentlemen’s Singles. Year. Gentlemen’s Singles.
1877 S. W. Gore 1894 J. Pim
1878 P. F. Hadow 1895 W. Baddeley
1879 J. T. Hartley 1896 H. S. Mahony
1880 J. T. Hartley 1897 R. F. Doherty
1881 W. Renshaw 1898 R. F. Doherty
1882 W. Renshaw 1899 R. F. Doherty
1883 W. Renshaw 1900 R. F. Doherty
1884 W. Renshaw 1901 A. W. Gore
1885 W. Renshaw 1902 H. L. Doherty
1886 W. Renshaw 1903 H. L. Doherty
1887 H. F. Lawford 1904 H. L. Doherty
1888 E. Renshaw 1905 H. L. Doherty
1889 W. Renshaw 1906 H. L. Doherty
1890 W. J. Hamilton 1907 N. E. Brookes
1891 W. Baddeley 1908 A. W. Gore
1892 W. Baddeley 1909 A. W. Gore
1893 J. Pim 1910 A. F. Wilding
Year. Gentlemen’s Doubles.
1879 L. R. Erskine and H. F. Lawford
1880 W. Renshaw E. Renshaw
1881 W. Renshaw E. Renshaw
1882 J. T. Hartley R. T. Richardson
1883 C. W. Grinstead C. E. Welldon
1884 W. Renshaw E. Renshaw
1885 W. Renshaw E. Renshaw
1886 W. Renshaw E. Renshaw
1887 P. B. Lyon H. W. W. Wilberforce
1888 W. Renshaw E. Renshaw
1889 W. Renshaw E. Renshaw
1890 J. Pim F. O. Stoker
1891 W. Baddeley H. Baddeley
1892 H. S. Barlow E. W. Lewis
1893 J. Pim F. O. Stoker
1894 W. Baddeley H. Baddeley
1895 W. Baddeley H. Baddeley
1896 W. Baddeley H. Baddeley
1897 R. F. Doherty H. L. Doherty
1898 R. F. Doherty H. L. Doherty
1899 R. F. Doherty H. L. Doherty
1900 R. F. Doherty H. L. Doherty
1901 R. F. Doherty H. L. Doherty
1902 S. H. Smith F. L. Riseley
1903 R. F. Doherty H. L. Doherty
1904 R. F. Doherty H. L. Doherty
1905 R. F. Doherty H. L. Doherty
1906 S. H. Smith F. L. Riseley
1907 N. E. Brookes A. F. Wilding
1908 M. J. G. Ritchie A. F. Wilding
1909 A. W. Gore H. Roper Barrett
1910 M. J. G. Ritchie A. F. Wilding
Year. Ladies’ Singles. Year. Ladies’ Singles.
1884 Miss M. Watson 1898 Miss C. Cooper
1885 Miss M. Watson 1899 Mrs Hillyard
1886 Miss Bingley 1900 Mrs Hillyard
1887 Miss Dod 1901 Mrs Sterry (Miss C. Cooper)
1888 Miss Dod 1902 Miss M. E. Robb
1889 Mrs Hillyard (Miss Bingley) 1903 Miss D. K. Douglass
1890 Miss Rice 1904 Miss D. K. Douglass
1891 Miss Dod 1905 Miss M. Sutton
1892 Miss Dod 1906 Miss D. K. Douglass
1893 Miss Dod 1907 Miss M. Sutton
1894 Mrs Hillyard 1908 Mrs Sterry
1895 Miss C. Cooper 1909 Miss D. Boothby
1896 Miss C. Cooper 1910 Mrs Lambert Chambers (Miss Douglass)
1897 Mrs Hillyard    
Year. Ladies’ and Gentlemen’s Doubles.
1888 E. Renshaw and Mrs Hillyard
1889 J. C. Kay Miss Dod
1890 J. Baldwin Miss K. Hill
1891 J. C. Kay Miss Jackson
1892 A. Dod Miss Dod
1893 W. Baddeley Mrs Hillyard.
1894 H. S. Mahony Miss C. Cooper
1895 H. S. Mahony Miss C. Cooper
1896 H. S. Mahony Miss C. Cooper
1897 H. S. Mahony Miss C. Cooper
1898 H. S. Mahony Miss C. Cooper
1899 C. H. L. Cazelet Miss Robb
1900 H. L. Doherty Miss C. Cooper
1901 S. H. Smith Miss Martin
1902 S. H. Smith Miss Martin
1903 F. L. Riseley Miss D. K. Douglass
1904 S. H. Smith Miss E. W. Thompson
1905 S. H. Smith Miss E. W. Thompson
1906 F. L. Riseley Miss D. K. Douglass
1907 N. E. Brookes Mrs Hillyard
1908 A. F. Wilding Mrs Lambert Chambers (Miss D. K. Douglass)
1909 H. Roper Barrett Miss Morton
1910 S. N. Doust Mrs Lambert Chambers

In the United States lawn-tennis was played at Nahant, near Boston, within a year of its invention in England, Dr James Dwight and the brothers F. R. and R. D. Sears being mainly instrumental in making it known to their countrymen. In 1881 at a meeting in New York of representatives of thirty-three clubs the United States National Lawn-Tennis Association was formed; and the adoption of the English rules put an end to the absence of uniformity in the size of the ball and height of the net which had hindered the progress of the game. The association decided to hold matches for championship of the United States at Newport, Rhode Island; and, by a curious coincidence, in the same year in which W. Renshaw first won the English championship, R. D. Sears won the first American championship by playing a volleying game at the net which entirely disconcerted his opponents, and he successfully defended his title for the next six years, winning the doubles throughout the same period in partnership with Dwight. In 1887, Sears being unable to play through ill-health, the championship went to H. W. Slocum. Other prominent players of the period were the brothers C. M. and J. S. Clark, who in 1883 came to England and were decisively beaten at Wimbledon by the two Renshaws. To a later generation belong the strongest single players, M. D. Whitman, Holcombe Ward, W. A. Larned and Karl Behr. Holcombe Ward and Dwight Davis, who have the credit of introducing the peculiar “American twist service,” were an exceedingly strong pair in doubles; but after winning the American doubles championship for three years in succession, they were defeated in 1902 by the English brothers R. F. and H. L. Doherty. The championship singles in 1904 and 1905 was won by H. Ward and B. C. Wright, the latter being one of the finest players America has produced; and these two in partnership won the doubles for three years in succession, until they were displaced by F. B. Alexander and H. H. Hackett, who in their turn held the doubles championship for a like period. In 1909 two young Californians, Long and McLoughlin, unexpectedly came to the front, and, although beaten in the final round for the championship doubles, they represented the United States in the contest for the Davis cup (see below) in Australia in that year; McLoughlin having acquired a service of extraordinary power and a smashing stroke with a reverse spin which was sufficient by itself to place him in the highest rank of lawn-tennis players.

In the United States, lawn tennis was played in Nahant, near Boston, within a year of its invention in England. Dr. James Dwight and the brothers F. R. and R. D. Sears were instrumental in introducing the game to their fellow countrymen. In 1881, representatives from thirty-three clubs met in New York and formed the United States National Lawn-Tennis Association; adopting English rules ended the inconsistencies regarding the size of the ball and the height of the net, which had been holding back the game's progress. The association decided to host championship matches for the United States at Newport, Rhode Island. Interestingly, the same year W. Renshaw won the English championship for the first time, R. D. Sears claimed the first American championship by playing a volleying game at the net that completely threw off his opponents. He successfully defended his title for the next six years and won the doubles title during that time with Dwight. In 1887, when Sears couldn't compete due to health issues, H. W. Slocum took the championship. Other notable players from that era included the brothers C. M. and J. S. Clark, who traveled to England in 1883 and were decisively defeated at Wimbledon by the Renshaw brothers. The later generation boasted top single players like M. D. Whitman, Holcombe Ward, W. A. Larned, and Karl Behr. Holcombe Ward and Dwight Davis, credited with introducing the unique “American twist service,” formed a very strong doubles team; however, after winning the American doubles championship for three consecutive years, they were defeated in 1902 by the English brothers R. F. and H. L. Doherty. The championship singles in 1904 and 1905 were won by H. Ward and B. C. Wright, the latter being one of the best players America has produced. This duo also won the doubles championship for three years straight until they were succeeded by F. B. Alexander and H. H. Hackett, who held the doubles title for a similar duration. In 1909, two young players from California, Long and McLoughlin, unexpectedly emerged, and although they lost in the final round for the doubles championship, they represented the United States in the Davis Cup competition in Australia that year. McLoughlin had developed a powerful serve and a smashing stroke with reverse spin that positioned him among the top lawn-tennis players.

Winners of United States Championships.

Winners of U.S. Championships.

Year. Gentlemen’s Singles. Year. Gentlemen’s Singles.
1881 R. D. Sears 1896 R. D. Wrenn
1882 R. D. Sears 1897 R. D. Wrenn
1883 R. D. Sears 1898 M. D. Whitman
1884 R. D. Sears 1899 M. D. Whitman
1885 R. D. Sears 1900 M. D. Whitman
1886 R. D. Sears 1901 W. A. Larned
1887 R. D. Sears 1902 W. A. Larned
1888 H. W. Slocum 1903 H. L. Doherty
1889 H. W. Slocum 1904 H. Ward
1890 O. S. Campbell 1905 B. C. Wright
1891 O. S. Campbell 1906 W. J. Clothier
1892 O. S. Campbell 1907 W. A. Larned
1893 R. D. Wrenn 1908 W. A. Larned
1894 R. D. Wrenn 1909 W. A. Larned
1895 F. H. Hovey 1910 W. A. Larned

304

304

Year. Gentlemen’s Doubles.
1882 J. Dwight and R. D. Sears
1883 J. Dwight R. D. Sears
1884 J. Dwight R. D. Sears
1885 J. S. Clark R. D. Sears
1886 J. Dwight R. D. Sears
1887 J. Dwight R. D. Sears
1888 V. G. Hall O. S. Campbell
1889 H. W. Slocum H. A. Taylor
1890 V. G. Hall C. Hobart
1891 O. S. Campbell R. P. Huntingdon
1892 O. S. Campbell R. P. Huntingdon
1893 C. Hobart F. H. Hovey
1894 C. Hobart F. H. Hovey
1895 R. D. Wrenn M. G. Chase
1896 C. B. Neel S. R. Neel
1897 L. E. Ware G. P. Sheldon
1898 L. E. Ware G. P. Sheldon
1899 D. F. Davis H. Ward
1900 D. F. Davis H. Ward
1901 D. F. Davis H. Ward
1902 R. F. Doherty H. L. Doherty
1903 R. F. Doherty H. L. Doherty
1904 H. Ward B. C. Wright
1905 H. Ward B. C. Wright
1906 H. Ward B. C. Wright
1907 F. B. Alexander H. H. Hackett
1908 F. B. Alexander H. H. Hackett
1909 F. B. Alexander H. H Hackett
1910 F. B. Alexander H. H. Hackett
Year. Ladies’ Singles. Year. Ladies’ Singles.
1890 Miss E. C. Roosevelt 1901 Miss Elizabeth H. Moore
1891 Miss Mabel E. Cahill 1902 Miss Marion Jones
1892 Miss Mabel E. Cahill 1903 Miss Elizabeth H. Moore
1893 Miss Aline M. Terry 1904 Miss May Sutton
1894 Miss Helen R. Helwig 1905 Miss Elizabeth H. Moore
1895 Miss J. P. Atkinson 1906 Miss Helen H. Homans
1896 Miss Elizabeth H. Moore 1907 Miss Evelyn Sears
1897 Miss J. P. Atkinson 1908 Mrs Barger Wallach
1898 Miss J. P. Atkinson 1909 Miss Hazel Hotchkiss
1899 Miss Marion Jones 1910 Miss Hazel Hotchkiss
1900 Miss Myrtle McAteer    
Year. Ladies’ and Gentlemen’s Doubles.
1894 E. P. Fischer and Miss J. P. Atkinson
1895 E. P. Fischer Miss J. P. Atkinson
1896 E. P. Fischer Miss J. P. Atkinson
1897 D. L. Magruder Miss Laura Henson
1898 E. P. Fischer Miss Carrie Neely
1899 A. L. Hoskins Miss Edith Rastall
1900 Alfred Codman Miss M. Hunnewell
1901 R. D. Little Miss Marion Jones
1902 W. C. Grant Miss E. H. Moore
1903 Harry Allen Miss Chapman
1904 W. C. Grant Miss E. H. Moore
1905 Clarence Hobart Mrs Clarence Hobart
1906 E. B. Dewhurst Miss Coffin
1907 W. F. Johnson Miss Sayres
1908 N. W. Niles Miss E. Rotch
1909 W. F. Johnson Miss H. Hotchkiss
1910 J. R. Carpenter Miss H. Hotchkiss

In 1900 an international challenge cup was presented by the American D. F. Davis, to be competed for in the country of the holders. In the summer of that year a British team, consisting of A. W. Gore, E. D. Black and H. R. Barrett, challenged for the cup but were defeated by the Americans, Whitman, Larned, Davis and Ward. In 1902 a more representative British team, the two Dohertys and Pim, were again defeated by the same representatives of the United States; but in the following year the Dohertys brought the Davis cup to England by beating Larned and the brothers Wrenn at Longwood. In 1904 the cup was played for at Wimbledon, when representatives of Belgium, Austria and France entered, but failed to defeat the Dohertys and F. L. Riseley, who represented Great Britain. In 1905 the entries included France, Austria, Australasia, Belgium and the United States; in 1906 the same countries, except Belgium, competed; but in both years the British players withstood the attack. In 1907, however, when the contest was confined to England, the United States and Australasia, the latter was successful in winning the cup, which was then for the first time taken to the colonies, where it was retained in the following year when the Australians N. E. Brookes and A. F. Wilding defeated the representatives of the United States, who had previously beaten the English challengers in America. In 1909 England was not represented in the competition, and the Australians again retained the cup, beating the Americans McLoughlin and Long both in singles and doubles.

In 1900, an international challenge cup was presented by American D. F. Davis, to be contested in the country of the holders. In the summer of that year, a British team, made up of A. W. Gore, E. D. Black, and H. R. Barrett, challenged for the cup but lost to the Americans, Whitman, Larned, Davis, and Ward. In 1902, a more representative British team, consisting of the two Dohertys and Pim, again faced the same American players and were defeated; but in the following year, the Dohertys brought the Davis Cup to England by beating Larned and the Wrenn brothers at Longwood. In 1904, the cup was contested at Wimbledon, with representatives from Belgium, Austria, and France entering but failing to defeat the Dohertys and F. L. Riseley, who represented Great Britain. In 1905, entries included France, Austria, Australasia, Belgium, and the United States; in 1906 the same countries, except Belgium, competed; but in both years, the British players held strong against the competition. In 1907, however, when the contest was limited to England, the United States, and Australasia, the latter was successful in winning the cup, which was then taken to the colonies for the first time, where it was retained the following year when Australians N. E. Brookes and A. F. Wilding defeated the U.S. representatives, who had previously beaten the English challengers in America. In 1909, England was not represented in the competition, and the Australians again kept the cup, defeating Americans McLoughlin and Long in both singles and doubles.

See “The Badminton Library,” Tennis: Lawn-Tennis: Racquets: Fives, new and revised edition (1903); R. F. and H. L. Doherty, On Lawn-Tennis (1903); E. H. Miles, Lessons in Lawn-Tennis (1899); E. de Nanteuil, La Paume et le lawn-tennis (1898); J. Dwight, “Form in Lawn-Tennis,” in Scribner’s Magazine, vol. vi.; A. Wallis Myers, The Complete Lawn-Tennis Player (1908).

See “The Badminton Library,” Tennis: Lawn-Tennis: Racquets: Fives, new and revised edition (1903); R. F. and H. L. Doherty, On Lawn-Tennis (1903); E. H. Miles, Lessons in Lawn-Tennis (1899); E. de Nanteuil, La Paume et le lawn-tennis (1898); J. Dwight, “Form in Lawn-Tennis,” in Scribner’s Magazine, vol. vi.; A. Wallis Myers, The Complete Lawn-Tennis Player (1908).

(R. J. M.)

LAWRENCE (Laurentius, Lorenzo), ST, Christian martyr, whose name appears in the canon of the mass, and whose festival is on the 10th of August. The basilica reared over his tomb at Rome is still visited by pilgrims. His legend is very popular. Deacon of the pope (St) Sixtus (Xystus) II., he was called upon by the judge to bring forth the treasures of the church which had been committed to his keeping. He thereupon produced the church’s poor people. Seeing his bishop, Sixtus, being led to punishment, he cried: “Father! whither goest thou without thy son? Holy priest! whither goest thou without thy deacon?” Sixtus prophesied that Lawrence would follow him in three days. The prophecy was fulfilled, and Lawrence was sentenced to be burnt alive on a gridiron. In the midst of his torments he addressed the judge ironically with the words: Assum est, versa et manduca (“I am roasted enough on this side; turn me round, and eat”). All these details of the well-known legend are already related by St Ambrose (De Offic. i. 41, ii. 28). The punishment of the gridiron and the speech of the martyr are probably a reminiscence of the Phrygian martyrs, as related by Socrates (iii. 15) and Sozomen (v. 11). But the fact of the martyrdom is unquestionable. The date is usually put at the persecution of Valerian in 258.

LAWRENCE (Lorenzo, Laurentius), ST, Christian martyr, whose name is included in the mass canon, and whose feast day is on August 10th. The basilica built over his tomb in Rome continues to attract pilgrims. His legend is widely known. As the deacon of Pope St. Sixtus II, he was asked by a judge to present the treasures of the church that he was responsible for. He then brought forth the church's poor people. When he saw his bishop, Sixtus, being led away for punishment, he exclaimed: “Father! where are you going without your son? Holy priest! where are you going without your deacon?” Sixtus foretold that Lawrence would join him in three days. This prophecy came true, and Lawrence was sentenced to be burned alive on a gridiron. In the midst of his suffering, he ironically told the judge: Assum est, versa et manduca (“I am roasted enough on this side; turn me over and eat”). All these details of the well-known legend are already mentioned by St. Ambrose (De Offic. i. 41, ii. 28). The punishment on the gridiron and the martyr's words likely reflect the stories of the Phrygian martyrs, as noted by Socrates (iii. 15) and Sozomen (v. 11). However, the martyrdom itself is indisputable. The date is typically associated with the persecution under Valerian in 258.

The cult of St Lawrence has spread throughout Christendom, and there are numerous churches dedicated to him, especially in England, where 228 have been counted. The Escurial was built in honour of St Lawrence by Philip II. of Spain, in memory of the battle of St Quentin, which was won in 1557 on the day of the martyr’s festival. The meteorites which appear annually on or about the 10th of August are popularly known as “the tears of St Lawrence.”

The worship of St. Lawrence has spread across Christianity, and there are many churches dedicated to him, especially in England, where 228 have been recorded. The Escorial was constructed in honor of St. Lawrence by Philip II of Spain, in remembrance of the Battle of St. Quentin, which was won in 1557 on the day of the saint's festival. The meteor showers that occur each year around August 10th are commonly referred to as "the tears of St. Lawrence."

See Acta sanctorum, Augusti ii. 485-532; P. Franchi de’ Cavalieri, S. Lorenzo e il supplicio della graticola (Rome, 1900); Analecta Bollandiana, xix. 452 and 453; Fr. Arnold-Forster, Studies in Church Dedications or England’s Patron Saints, i. 508-515, iii. 18, 389-390 (1899).

See Acta sanctorum, August ii. 485-532; P. Franchi de’ Cavalieri, S. Lorenzo e il supplicio della graticola (Rome, 1900); Analecta Bollandiana, xix. 452 and 453; Fr. Arnold-Forster, Studies in Church Dedications or England’s Patron Saints, i. 508-515, iii. 18, 389-390 (1899).

(H. De.)

LAWRENCE, AMOS (1786-1852), American merchant and philanthropist, was born in Groton, Massachusetts, U.S.A., on the 22nd of April 1786, a descendant of John Lawrence of Wisset, Suffolk, England, who was one of the first settlers of Groton. Leaving Groton academy (founded by his father, Samuel Lawrence, and others) in 1799, he became a clerk in a country store in Groton, whence after his apprenticeship he went, with $20 in his pocket, to Boston and there set up in business for himself in December 1807. In the next year he took into his employ his brother, Abbott (see below), whom he made his partner in 1814, the firm name being at first A. & A. Lawrence, and afterwards A. & A. Lawrence & Co. In 1831 when his health failed, Amos Lawrence retired from active business, and Abbott Lawrence was thereafter the head of the firm. The firm became the greatest American mercantile house of the day, was successful even in the hard times of 1812-1815, afterwards engaged particularly in selling woollen and cotton goods on commission, and did much for the establishment of the cotton textile industry in New England: in 1830 by coming to the aid of the financially distressed mills of Lowell, Massachusetts, where in that year the Suffolk, Tremont and Lawrence companies were established, and where Luther Lawrence, the eldest brother, represented the firm’s interests; and in 1845-1847 by establishing and building up Lawrence, Massachusetts, named in honour of Abbott Lawrence, who was a director of the Essex company, which controlled the water power of Lawrence, and afterwards was president of the Atlantic Cotton Mills and Pacific Mills there. In 1842 Amos Lawrence decided not to allow his property to increase any further, and in the last eleven years of his life he spent in charity at least $525,000, a large sum 305 in those days. He gave to Williams college, to Bowdoin college, to the Bangor theological seminary, to Wabash college, to Kenyon college and to Groton academy, which was re-named Lawrence academy in honour of the family, and especially in recognition of the gifts of William Lawrence, Amos’s brother; to the Boston children’s infirmary, which he established, and ($10,000) to the Bunker Hill monument fund; and, besides, he gave to many good causes on a smaller scale, taking especial delight in giving books, occasionally from a bundle of books in his sleigh or carriage as he drove. He died in Boston on the 31st of December 1852.

LAWRENCE, AMOS (1786-1852), an American merchant and philanthropist, was born in Groton, Massachusetts, U.S.A., on April 22, 1786. He was a descendant of John Lawrence of Wisset, Suffolk, England, who was one of the first settlers of Groton. After leaving Groton Academy (founded by his father, Samuel Lawrence, and others) in 1799, he became a clerk in a local store in Groton. Following his apprenticeship, he moved to Boston with $20 in his pocket and started his own business in December 1807. The following year, he hired his brother, Abbott (see below), and made him his partner in 1814. The company name was initially A. & A. Lawrence and later A. & A. Lawrence & Co. In 1831, after his health declined, Amos Lawrence retired from active business, leaving Abbott Lawrence as the head of the firm. The company became the leading mercantile house in America, thriving even during the tough times of 1812-1815, and it focused particularly on selling woolen and cotton goods on commission. They played a significant role in establishing the cotton textile industry in New England: in 1830, by assisting the financially troubled mills of Lowell, Massachusetts, where the Suffolk, Tremont, and Lawrence companies were created that year, and where Luther Lawrence, the oldest brother, represented the firm's interests. From 1845 to 1847, they developed and grew Lawrence, Massachusetts, named in honor of Abbott Lawrence, who served as a director of the Essex company controlling the water power of Lawrence and later became president of the Atlantic Cotton Mills and Pacific Mills there. In 1842, Amos Lawrence resolved not to let his wealth grow any larger, and in the last eleven years of his life, he donated at least $525,000 to charity, a substantial amount for that time. He contributed to Williams College, Bowdoin College, Bangor Theological Seminary, Wabash College, Kenyon College, and Groton Academy, which was renamed Lawrence Academy in recognition of the family, particularly for the donations made by William Lawrence, Amos’s brother. He also established the Boston Children’s Infirmary and donated $10,000 to the Bunker Hill Monument Fund. Additionally, he supported many good causes on a smaller scale and took particular pleasure in giving away books, occasionally tossing them from a bundle in his sleigh or carriage as he drove. He passed away in Boston on December 31, 1852.

See Extracts from the Diary and Correspondence of the late Amos Lawrence, with a Brief Account of Some Incidents in his Life (Boston, 1856), edited by his son William R. Lawrence.

See Extracts from the Diary and Correspondence of the late Amos Lawrence, with a Brief Account of Some Incidents in his Life (Boston, 1856), edited by his son William R. Lawrence.

His brother, Abbott Lawrence (1792-1855), was born in Groton, Massachusetts, on the 16th of December 1792. Besides being a partner in the firm established by his brother, and long its head, he promoted various New England railways, notably the Boston & Albany. He was a Whig representative in Congress in 1835-1837 and in 1839-1840 (resigning in September 1840 because of ill-health); and in 1842 was one of the commissioners for Massachusetts, who with commissioners from Maine and with Daniel Webster, secretary of state and plenipotentiary of the United States, settled with Lord Ashburton, the British plenipotentiary, the question of the north-eastern boundary. In 1842 he was presiding officer in the Massachusetts Whig convention; he broke with President Tyler, tacitly rebuked Daniel Webster for remaining in Tyler’s cabinet after his colleagues had resigned, and recommended Henry Clay and John Davis as the nominees of the Whig party in 1844—an action that aroused Webster to make his famous Faneuil Hall address. In 1848 Lawrence was a prominent candidate for the Whig nomination for the vice-presidency, but was defeated by Webster’s followers. He refused the portfolios of the navy and of the interior in President Taylor’s cabinet, and in 1849-1852 was United States minister to Great Britain, where he was greatly aided by his wealth and his generous hospitality. He was an ardent protectionist, and represented Massachusetts at the Harrisburg convention in 1827. He died in Boston on the 18th of August 1855, leaving as his greatest memorial the Lawrence scientific school of Harvard university, which he had established by a gift of $50,000 in 1847 and to which he bequeathed another $50,000; in 1907-1908 this school was practically abolished as a distinct department of the university. He made large gifts to the Boston public library, and he left $50,000 for the erection of model lodging-houses, thus carrying on the work of an Association for building model lodging-houses for the poor, organized in Boston in 1857.

His brother, Abbott Lawrence (1792-1855), was born in Groton, Massachusetts, on December 16, 1792. In addition to being a partner in the firm founded by his brother, where he served as the head for a long time, he promoted several New England railroads, most notably the Boston & Albany. He served as a Whig representative in Congress from 1835 to 1837 and again from 1839 to 1840 (resigning in September 1840 due to health issues). In 1842, he was one of the commissioners from Massachusetts who, along with commissioners from Maine and Daniel Webster, the Secretary of State and U.S. plenipotentiary, settled the northeastern boundary issues with Lord Ashburton, the British plenipotentiary. In 1842, he chaired the Massachusetts Whig convention; he had a falling out with President Tyler, subtly criticized Daniel Webster for staying in Tyler’s cabinet after his colleagues had resigned, and endorsed Henry Clay and John Davis as the Whig party candidates for 1844—an act that prompted Webster to give his famous address at Faneuil Hall. In 1848, Lawrence was a leading candidate for the Whig nomination for vice president but was defeated by Webster’s supporters. He turned down offers to be Secretary of the Navy and Secretary of the Interior in President Taylor’s cabinet, and from 1849 to 1852, he served as the United States minister to Great Britain, where his wealth and generous hospitality greatly assisted him. He was a strong advocate for protectionism and represented Massachusetts at the Harrisburg convention in 1827. He died in Boston on August 18, 1855, leaving as his most significant legacy the Lawrence scientific school at Harvard University, which he established with a $50,000 donation in 1847 and bequeathed another $50,000. This school was essentially eliminated as a separate department of the university in 1907-1908. He also made substantial donations to the Boston public library and left $50,000 for the construction of model lodging houses, continuing the work of an Association for building model lodging houses for the poor, which was organized in Boston in 1857.

See Hamilton A. Hill, Memoir of Abbott Lawrence (Boston, 1884). Randolph Anders’ Der Weg zum Glück, oder die Kunst Millionär zu werden (Berlin, 1856) is a pretended translation of moral maxims from a supposititious manuscript bequeathed to Abbott Lawrence by a rich uncle.

See Hamilton A. Hill, Memoir of Abbott Lawrence (Boston, 1884). Randolph Anders’ Der Weg zum Glück, oder die Kunst Millionär zu werden (Berlin, 1856) is a fake translation of moral maxims from a made-up manuscript left to Abbott Lawrence by a wealthy uncle.

LAWRENCE, AMOS ADAMS (1814-1886), American philanthropist, son of Amos Lawrence, was born in Groton, Massachusetts, U.S.A., on the 31st of July 1814. He graduated at Harvard in 1835, went into business in Lowell, and in 1837 established in Boston his own counting-house, which from 1843 to 1858 was the firm of Lawrence & Mason, and which was a selling agent for the Cocheco mills of Dover, New Hampshire, and for other textile factories. Lawrence established a hosiery and knitting mill at Ipswich—the first of importance in the country—and was a director in many large corporations. He was greatly interested in the claims of Eleazer Williams of Green Bay, Wisconsin, and through loans to this “lost dauphin” came into possession of much land in Wisconsin; in 1849 he founded at Appleton, Wisconsin, a school named in his honour Lawrence university (now Lawrence college). He also contributed to funds for the colonization of free negroes in Liberia. In 1854 he became treasurer of the Massachusetts Emigrant Aid Company (reorganized in 1855 as the New England Emigrant Aid Company), which sent 1300 settlers to Kansas, where the city of Lawrence was named in his honour. He contributed personally for the famous Sharp rifles, which, packed as “books” and “primers,” were shipped to Kansas and afterwards came into the hands of John Brown, who had been a protégé of Lawrence. During the contest in Kansas, Lawrence wrote frequently to President Pierce (his mother’s nephew) in behalf of the free-state settlers; and when John Brown was arrested he appealed to the governor of Virginia to secure for him a lawful trial. On Robinson and others in Kansas he repeatedly urged the necessity of offering no armed resistance to the Federal government; and he deplored Brown’s fanaticism. In 1858 and in 1860 he was the Whig candidate for governor of Massachusetts. Till the very outbreak of the Civil War he was a “law and order” man, and he did his best to secure the adoption of the Crittenden compromise; but he took an active part in drilling troops, and in 1862 he raised a battalion of cavalry which became the 2nd Massachusetts Regiment of Cavalry, of which Charles Russell Lowell was colonel. Lawrence was a member of the Protestant Episcopal Church and built (1873-1880) Lawrence hall, Cambridge, for the Episcopal theological school, of which he was treasurer. In 1857-1862 he was treasurer of Harvard college, and in 1879-1885 was an overseer. He died in Nahant, Mass., on the 22nd of August 1886.

LAWRENCE, AMOS ADAMS (1814-1886), American philanthropist, son of Amos Lawrence, was born in Groton, Massachusetts, U.S.A., on July 31, 1814. He graduated from Harvard in 1835, started his career in Lowell, and in 1837 opened his own counting-house in Boston, which operated as Lawrence & Mason from 1843 to 1858 and served as a selling agent for the Cocheco mills in Dover, New Hampshire, and other textile factories. Lawrence set up a hosiery and knitting mill in Ipswich—the first of its kind in the country—and served on the boards of several large corporations. He was very interested in the claims of Eleazer Williams from Green Bay, Wisconsin, and through loans to this “lost dauphin,” he acquired a lot of land in Wisconsin; in 1849 he founded Lawrence university (now Lawrence college) in Appleton, Wisconsin, in his honor. He also supported efforts to colonize free African Americans in Liberia. In 1854, he became treasurer of the Massachusetts Emigrant Aid Company (which was reorganized in 1855 as the New England Emigrant Aid Company), sending 1,300 settlers to Kansas, where the city of Lawrence was named after him. He personally contributed to the purchase of the famous Sharp rifles, which were disguised as “books” and “primers” for shipment to Kansas and later ended up in the hands of John Brown, who had been a protégé of Lawrence. During the conflict in Kansas, Lawrence frequently wrote to President Pierce (his mother’s nephew) on behalf of the free-state settlers; and when John Brown was arrested, he appealed to the governor of Virginia for a fair trial. He urged Robinson and others in Kansas not to offer armed resistance to the Federal government and criticized Brown’s extremism. In 1858 and 1860, he was the Whig candidate for governor of Massachusetts. Until the outbreak of the Civil War, he was committed to “law and order,” advocating for the Crittenden compromise; but he actively participated in military training and, in 1862, raised a cavalry battalion that became the 2nd Massachusetts Regiment of Cavalry, led by Colonel Charles Russell Lowell. Lawrence was a member of the Protestant Episcopal Church and funded the construction of Lawrence Hall in Cambridge (1873-1880) for the Episcopal theological school, where he served as treasurer. He was the treasurer of Harvard College from 1857 to 1862 and served as an overseer from 1879 to 1885. He passed away in Nahant, Massachusetts, on August 22, 1886.

See William Lawrence, Life of Amos A. Lawrence, with Extracts from his Diary and Correspondence (Boston, 1888).

See William Lawrence, Life of Amos A. Lawrence, with Extracts from his Diary and Correspondence (Boston, 1888).

His son, William Lawrence (1850-  ), graduated in 1871 at Harvard, and in 1875 at the Episcopal theological school, where, after being rector of Grace Church, Lawrence, Mass., in 1876-1884, he was professor of homiletics and natural theology in 1884-1893 and dean in 1888-1893. In 1893 he succeeded Phillips Brooks as Protestant Episcopal bishop of Massachusetts. He wrote A Life of Roger Wolcott, Governor of Massachusetts (1902).

His son, Will Lawrence (1850-  ), graduated from Harvard in 1871 and from the Episcopal theological school in 1875. After serving as the rector of Grace Church in Lawrence, Mass., from 1876 to 1884, he became a professor of homiletics and natural theology from 1884 to 1893 and served as dean from 1888 to 1893. In 1893, he took over from Phillips Brooks as the Protestant Episcopal bishop of Massachusetts. He wrote A Life of Roger Wolcott, Governor of Massachusetts (1902).

LAWRENCE, GEORGE ALFRED (1827-1876), English novelist, was born at Braxted, Essex, on the 25th of March 1827, and was educated at Rugby and at Balliol college, Oxford. He was called to the bar at the Inner Temple in 1852, but soon abandoned the law for literature. In 1857 he published, anonymously, his first novel, Guy Livingstone, or Thorough. The book achieved a very large sale, and had nine or ten successors of a similar type, the best perhaps being Sword and Gown (1859). Lawrence may be regarded as the originator in English fiction of the beau sabreur type of hero, great in sport and love and war. He died at Edinburgh on the 23rd of September 1876.

LAWRENCE, GEORGE ALFRED (1827-1876), English novelist, was born in Braxted, Essex, on March 25, 1827, and attended Rugby and Balliol College, Oxford. He was called to the bar at the Inner Temple in 1852 but quickly left law for literature. In 1857, he published his first novel, Guy Livingstone, or Thorough, anonymously. The book was a huge success and led to around nine or ten similar works, with Sword and Gown (1859) being perhaps the best. Lawrence can be seen as the creator of the beau sabreur archetype in English fiction—a hero who excels in sports, love, and battle. He passed away in Edinburgh on September 23, 1876.

LAWRENCE, SIR HENRY MONTGOMERY (1806-1857), British soldier and statesman in India, brother of the 1st Lord Lawrence (q.v.), was born at Matara, Ceylon, on the 28th of June 1806. He inherited his father’s stern devotion to duty and Celtic impulsiveness, tempered by his mother’s gentleness and power of organization. Early in 1823 he joined the Bengal Artillery at the Calcutta suburb of Dum Dum, where also Henry Havelock was stationed about the same time. The two officers pursued a very similar career, and developed the same Puritan character up to the time that both died at Lucknow in 1857. In the first Burmese War Henry Lawrence and his battery formed part of the Chittagong column which General Morrison led over the jungle-covered hills of Arakan, till fever decimated the officers and men, and Lawrence found himself at home again, wasted by a disease which never left him. On his return to India with his younger brother John in 1829 he was appointed revenue surveyor by Lord William Bentinck. At Gorakhpur the wonderful personal influence which radiated from the young officer formed a school of attached friends and subordinates who were always eager to serve under him. After some years spent in camp, during which he had married his cousin Honoria Marshall, and had surveyed every village in four districts, each larger than Yorkshire, he was recalled to a brigade by the outbreak of the first Afghan War towards the close of 1838. As assistant to Sir George Clerk, he now added to his knowledge of the people political experience in the management of the district of Ferozepore; and when disaster came he was sent to Peshawar in order to push up supports for the relief of Sale and the garrison of Jalalabad. The war had been 306 begun under the tripartite treaty signed at Lahore on the 20th of June 1838. But the Sikhs were slow to play their part after the calamities in Afghanistan. No one but Henry Lawrence could manage the disorderly contingent which they reluctantly supplied to Pollock’s avenging army in 1842. He helped to force the Khyber Pass on the 5th of April, playing his guns from the heights, for 8 and 20 m. In recognition of his services Lord Ellenborough appointed him to the charge of the valley of Dehra Dun and its hill stations, Mussoorie and Landour, where he first formed the idea of asylums for the children of European soldiers. After a month’s experience there it was discovered that the appointment, was the legal right of the civil service, and he was transferred, as assistant to the envoy at Lahore, to Umballa, where he reduced to order the lapsed territory of Kaithal. Soon he received the office of resident at the protected court of Nepal, where, assisted by his wife, he began a series of contributions to the Calcutta Review, a selected volume of which forms an Anglo-Indian classic. There, too, he elaborated his plans which resulted in the erection and endowment of the noblest philanthropic establishments in the East—the Lawrence military asylums at Sanawar (on the road to Simla), at Murree in the Punjab, at Mount Abu in Rajputana, and at Lovedale on the Madras Nilgiris. From 1844 to his death he devoted all his income, above a modest pittance for his children, to this and other forms of charity.

LAWRENCE, SIR HENRY MONTGOMERY (1806-1857), British soldier and statesman in India, brother of the 1st Lord Lawrence (q.v.), was born in Matara, Ceylon, on June 28, 1806. He inherited his father's strict sense of duty and Celtic impulsiveness, balanced by his mother's kindness and organizational skills. In early 1823, he joined the Bengal Artillery at Dum Dum, a suburb of Calcutta, where Henry Havelock was also stationed around the same time. The two officers followed similar career paths and developed the same Puritan character until both died in Lucknow in 1857. During the first Burmese War, Henry Lawrence and his battery were part of the Chittagong column led by General Morrison over the jungle-covered hills of Arakan, until fever took a toll on the officers and men, leaving Lawrence ill. When he returned to India with his younger brother John in 1829, he was appointed revenue surveyor by Lord William Bentinck. At Gorakhpur, his remarkable personal influence created a loyal circle of friends and subordinates who were eager to serve under him. After spending several years in camp, during which he married his cousin Honoria Marshall and surveyed every village in four districts, each larger than Yorkshire, he was recalled to a brigade with the outbreak of the first Afghan War toward the end of 1838. As an assistant to Sir George Clerk, he expanded his understanding of the people and gained political experience managing the district of Ferozepore. When disaster struck, he was sent to Peshawar to support the relief of Sale and the garrison of Jalalabad. The war had started under the tripartite treaty signed at Lahore on June 20, 1838. However, the Sikhs were slow to contribute after the setbacks in Afghanistan. Henry Lawrence was the only one who could handle the disorganized contingent they reluctantly provided to Pollock's avenging army in 1842. He played a crucial role in forcing the Khyber Pass on April 5, directing the guns from the heights for 8 and 20 miles. In recognition of his services, Lord Ellenborough appointed him to oversee the valley of Dehra Dun and its hill stations, Mussoorie and Landour, where he first conceived the idea of shelters for the children of European soldiers. After a month there, it was revealed that the appointment was legally meant for the civil service, so he was transferred as an assistant to the envoy at Lahore, moving to Umballa, where he organized the neglected territory of Kaithal. Soon, he became the resident at the protected court of Nepal, where, with the help of his wife, he started contributing to the Calcutta Review, a selected volume of which is regarded as an Anglo-Indian classic. There, he also developed plans that led to the establishment and funding of some of the greatest philanthropic institutions in the East—the Lawrence military asylums at Sanawar (on the way to Simla), at Murree in the Punjab, at Mount Abu in Rajputana, and at Lovedale on the Madras Nilgiris. From 1844 until his death, he dedicated all his income, aside from a modest amount for his children, to this and other charitable efforts.

The Review articles led the new governor-general, Lord Hardinge, to summon Lawrence to his side during the first Sikh War; and not these articles only. He had published the results of his experience of Sikh rule and soldiering in a vivid work, the Adventures of an Officer in the Service of Ranjit Singh (1845), in which he vainly attempted to disguise his own personality and exploits. After the doubtful triumphs of Moodkee and Ferozshah Lawrence was summoned from Nepal to take the place of Major George Broadfoot, who had fallen. Aliwal came; then the guns of Sobraon chased the demoralized Sikhs across the Sutlej. All through the smoke Lawrence was at the side of the governor-general. He gave his voice, not for the rescue of the people from anarchy by annexation, but for the reconstruction of the Sikh government, and was himself appointed resident at Lahore, with power “over every department and to any extent” as president of the council of regency till the maharaja Dhuleep Singh should come of age. Soon disgusted by the “venal and selfish durbar” who formed his Sikh colleagues, he summoned to his side assistants like Nicholson, James Abbott and Edwardes, till they all did too much for the people, as he regretfully confessed. But “my chief confidence was in my brother John, ... who gave me always such help as only a brother could.” Wearied out he went home with Lord Hardinge, and was made K.C.B., when the second Sikh War summoned him back at the end of 1848 to see the whole edifice of Sikh “reconstruction” collapse. It fell to Lord Dalhousie to proclaim the Punjab up to the Khyber British territory on the 29th of March 1849. But still another compromise was tried. As the best man to reconcile the Sikh chiefs to the inevitable, Henry Lawrence was made president of the new board of administration with charge of the political duties, and his brother John was entrusted with the finances. John could not find the revenue necessary for the rapid civilization of the new province so long as Henry would, for political reasons, insist on granting life pensions and alienating large estates to the needy remnants of Ranjit Singh’s court. Lord Dalhousie delicately but firmly removed Sir Henry Lawrence to the charge of the great nobles of Rajputana, and installed John as chief commissioner. If resentment burned in Henry’s heart, it was not against his younger brother, who would fain have retired. To him he said, “If you preserve the peace of the country and make the people high and low happy, I shall have no regrets that I vacated the field for you.”

The Review articles prompted the new governor-general, Lord Hardinge, to call Lawrence to assist him during the first Sikh War; and it wasn’t just these articles. He had published insights from his experiences with Sikh leadership and military service in a compelling work, the Adventures of an Officer in the Service of Ranjit Singh (1845), where he tried to conceal his own identity and accomplishments. After the uncertain victories at Moodkee and Ferozshah, Lawrence was summoned from Nepal to replace Major George Broadfoot, who had died. Then came Aliwal; the artillery at Sobraon chased the demoralized Sikhs across the Sutlej. Throughout the chaos, Lawrence stood beside the governor-general. He advocated not for annexation to save the people from chaos but for the reform of the Sikh government, and was appointed resident at Lahore, with authority “over every department and to any extent” as president of the council of regency until Maharaja Dhuleep Singh reached adulthood. Frustrated by the “venal and selfish durbar” formed by his Sikh colleagues, he brought in assistants like Nicholson, James Abbott, and Edwardes, until they all became too involved in helping the people, as he regrettably admitted. However, “my greatest trust was in my brother John,... who always provided the kind of support that only a brother could.” Exhausted, he returned home with Lord Hardinge and was made K.C.B., only to be called back at the end of 1848 for the second Sikh War, witnessing the complete collapse of the Sikh “reconstruction.” It fell to Lord Dalhousie to declare the Punjab up to the Khyber as British territory on March 29, 1849. Yet another compromise was attempted. To help reconcile the Sikh leaders with the inevitable, Henry Lawrence was appointed president of the new administration board with responsibility for political duties, while his brother John took charge of finances. John struggled to find the necessary revenue for the swift development of the new province as long as Henry insisted on granting life pensions and distributing large estates to the struggling remnants of Ranjit Singh’s court for political reasons. Lord Dalhousie tactfully but decisively moved Sir Henry Lawrence to oversee the prominent nobles of Rajputana and appointed John as chief commissioner. If there was any resentment in Henry’s heart, it wasn't directed at his younger brother, who would have preferred to step back. To him, he said, “If you keep peace in the country and make both the common people and the elite happy, I will have no regrets about stepping aside for you.”

In the comparative rest of Rajputana he once more took up the pen as an army reformer. In March and September 1856 he published two articles, called forth by conversations with Lord Dalhousie at Calcutta, whither he had gone as the hero of a public banquet. The governor-general had vainly warned the home authorities against reducing below 40,000 the British garrison of India even for the Crimean War, and had sought to improve the position of the sepoys. Lawrence pointed out the latent causes of mutiny, and uttered warnings to be too soon justified. In March 1857 he yielded to Lord Canning’s request that he should then take the helm at Lucknow, but it was too late. In ten days his magic rule put down administrative difficulties indeed, as he had done at Lahore. But what could even he effect with only 700 European soldiers, when the epidemic spread after the Meerut outbreak of mutiny on the 10th of May? In one week he had completed those preparations which made the defence of the Lucknow residency for ever memorable. Amid the deepening gloom Lord Canning ever wrote home of him as “a tower of strength,” and he was appointed provisional governor-general. On the 30th of May mutiny burst forth in Oudh, and he was ready. On the 29th of June, pressed by fretful colleagues, and wasted by unceasing toil, he led 336 British soldiers with 11 guns and 220 natives out of Chinhat to reconnoitre the insurgents, when the natives joined the enemy and the residency was besieged. On the 2nd of July, as he lay exhausted by the day’s work and the terrific heat in an exposed room, a shell struck him, and in forty-eight hours he was no more. A baronetcy was conferred on his son. A marble statue was placed in St Paul’s as the national memorial of one who has been declared to be the noblest man that has lived and died for the good of India.

In the quieter times of Rajputana, he picked up the pen again as an army reformer. In March and September 1856, he published two articles prompted by discussions with Lord Dalhousie in Calcutta, where he had gone as the guest of honor at a public banquet. The governor-general had tried unsuccessfully to convince the home authorities not to reduce the British garrison in India below 40,000, even for the Crimean War, and had aimed to improve the conditions for the sepoys. Lawrence highlighted the underlying causes of mutiny and issued warnings that would soon prove accurate. In March 1857, he agreed to Lord Canning's request to take charge in Lucknow, but it was too late. Within ten days, he effectively addressed administrative challenges just as he had at Lahore. However, what could he accomplish with only 700 European soldiers when the unrest escalated after the Meerut mutiny on May 10th? In just one week, he made preparations that ensured the defense of the Lucknow residency would be unforgettable. As the situation worsened, Lord Canning consistently referred to him as “a tower of strength,” and he was appointed provisional governor-general. On May 30th, mutiny erupted in Oudh, and he was ready. On June 29th, pressured by anxious colleagues and drained from constant work, he led 336 British soldiers with 11 guns and 220 native troops out of Chinhat to scout the insurgents, at which point the native forces sided with the enemy, and the residency was under siege. On July 2nd, as he lay worn out from the day's efforts and the intense heat in an open room, a shell struck him, and within forty-eight hours he was gone. A baronetcy was awarded to his son. A marble statue was erected in St. Paul’s as the national memorial for a man celebrated as the noblest individual who has lived and died for the benefit of India.

His biography was begun by Sir Herbert Edwardes, and completed (2 vols. 1872) by Herman Merivale. See also J. J. McLeod Innes, Sir Henry Lawrence (“Rulers of India” series), 1898.

His biography was started by Sir Herbert Edwardes and completed (2 vols. 1872) by Herman Merivale. See also J. J. McLeod Innes, Sir Henry Lawrence (“Rulers of India” series), 1898.

LAWRENCE, JOHN LAIRD MAIR LAWRENCE, 1st Baron (1811-1879), viceroy and governor-general of India, was born at Richmond, Yorkshire, on the 24th of March 1811. His father, Colonel Alexander Lawrence, volunteered for the forlorn hope at Seringapatam in presence of Baird and of Wellington, whose friend he became. His mother, Letitia Knox, was a collateral descendant of John Knox. To this couple were born twelve children, of whom three became famous in India, Sir George St Patrick, Sir Henry (q.v.) and Lord Lawrence. Irish Protestants, the boys were trained at Foyle college, Derry, and at Clifton, and received Indian appointments from their mother’s cousin, John Hudleston, who had been the friend of Schwartz in Tanjore. In 1829, when only seventeen, John Lawrence landed at Calcutta as a civilian; he mastered the Persian language at the college of Fort William, and was sent to Delhi, on his own application, as assistant to the collector. The position was the most dangerous and difficult to which a Bengal civilian could be appointed at that time. The titular court of the pensioner who represented the Great Mogul was the centre of that disaffection and sensuality which found their opportunity in 1857. A Mussulman rabble filled the city. The district around, stretching from the desert of Rajputana to the Jumna, was slowly recovering from the anarchy to which Lord Lake had given the first blow. When not administering justice in the city courts or under the village tree, John Lawrence was scouring the country after the marauding Meos and Mahommedan freebooters. His keen insight and sleepless energy at once detected the murderer of his official superior, William Fraser, in 1835, in the person of Shams-uddin Khan, the nawab of Loharu, whose father had been raised to the principality by Lake, and the assassin was executed. The first twenty years, from 1829 to 1849, during which John Lawrence acted as the magistrate and land revenue collector of the most turbulent and backward portion of the Indian empire as it then was, formed the period of the reforms of Lord William Bentinck. To what became the lieutenant-governorship of the North-Western (now part of the United) Provinces Lord Wellesley had promised the same permanent settlement of the land-tax which Lord Cornwallis had made with the large landholders or zemindars of Bengal. The court of directors, going to the opposite extreme, had sanctioned leases for only five years, so that agricultural progress was arrested. In 1833 Merttins Bird and James Thomason introduced the system of thirty years’ leases based on a careful 307 survey of every estate by trained civilians, and on the mapping of every village holding by native subordinates. These two revenue officers created a school of enthusiastic economists who rapidly registered and assessed an area as large as that of Great Britain, with a rural population of twenty-three millions. Of that school John Lawrence proved the most ardent and the most renowned. Intermitting his work at Delhi, he became land revenue settlement officer in the district of Etawah, and there began, by buying out or getting rid of the talukdars, to realize the ideal which he did much to create throughout the rest of his career—a country “thickly cultivated by a fat contented yeomanry, each man riding his own horse, sitting under his own fig-tree, and enjoying his rude family comforts.” This and a quiet persistent hostility to the oppression of the people by their chiefs formed the two features of his administrative policy throughout life.

LAWRENCE, JOHN LAIRD MAIR LAWRENCE, 1st Baron (1811-1879), viceroy and governor-general of India, was born in Richmond, Yorkshire, on March 24, 1811. His father, Colonel Alexander Lawrence, volunteered for the forlorn hope at Seringapatam in front of Baird and Wellington, becoming friends with the latter. His mother, Letitia Knox, was a distant descendant of John Knox. They had twelve children, three of whom became well-known in India: Sir George St Patrick, Sir Henry (q.v.), and Lord Lawrence. As Irish Protestants, the boys were educated at Foyle College, Derry, and Clifton, receiving Indian appointments from their mother’s cousin, John Hudleston, who had been a friend of Schwartz in Tanjore. In 1829, at just seventeen, John Lawrence arrived in Calcutta as a civilian; he learned Persian at the College of Fort William and requested a transfer to Delhi as an assistant to the collector. This position was one of the most dangerous and challenging for a Bengal civilian at that time. The titular court of the pensioner representing the Great Mogul was a hub of discontent and excess, which became evident during the events of 1857. A Muslim mob filled the city. The surrounding area, stretching from the Rajputana desert to the Jumna, was slowly recovering from the chaos initiated by Lord Lake. When he wasn't administering justice in the city courts or under a village tree, John Lawrence was tracking down the roaming Meos and Muslim bandits. His sharp insight and relentless energy helped him identify the murderer of his superior, William Fraser, in 1835 as Shams-uddin Khan, the nawab of Loharu, whose father had been elevated to the principality by Lake; the assassin was executed. The first twenty years, from 1829 to 1849, during which John Lawrence served as the magistrate and land revenue collector for one of the most turbulent and underdeveloped regions of India, coincided with the reform period of Lord William Bentinck. For the lieutenant-governorship of the North-Western (now part of the United) Provinces, Lord Wellesley had pledged the same permanent land-tax settlement that Lord Cornwallis established with the large landholders or zamindars of Bengal. However, the court of directors swung to the opposite end, approving leases for only five years, which stalled agricultural development. In 1833, Merttins Bird and James Thomason introduced a system of thirty-year leases, relying on detailed surveys of each estate by trained civilians and the mapping of each village holding by local subordinates. These two revenue officers formed a school of passionate economists who quickly surveyed and registered an area as large as Great Britain, with a rural population of twenty-three million. Among that group, John Lawrence emerged as the most enthusiastic and famous. Taking breaks from his work in Delhi, he became the land revenue settlement officer in the Etawah district, where he began to fulfill his vision by buying out or removing the talukdars, aiming for a country “thickly cultivated by a fat, contented yeomanry, each man riding his own horse, sitting under his own fig tree, and enjoying his simple family comforts.” This philosophy, along with a consistent resistance to the oppression of the people by their chiefs, marked the two fundamental aspects of his administrative approach throughout his life.

It was fortunate for the British power that, when the first Sikh War broke out, John Lawrence was still collector of Delhi. The critical engagements at Ferozeshah, following Moodkee, and hardly redeemed by Aliwal, left the British army somewhat exhausted at the gate of the Punjab, in front of the Sikh entrenchments on the Sutlej. For the first seven weeks of 1846 there poured into camp, day by day, the supplies and munitions of war which this one man raised and pushed forward, with all the influence acquired during fifteen years of an iron yet sympathetic rule in the land between the Jumna and the Sutlej. The crowning victory of Sobraon was the result, and at thirty-five Lawrence became commissioner of the Jullundur Doab, the fertile belt of hill and dale stretching from the Sutlej north to the Indus. The still youthful civilian did for the newly annexed territory what he had long before accomplished in and around Delhi. He restored it to order, without one regular soldier. By the fascination of his personal influence he organized levies of the Sikhs who had just been defeated, led them now against a chief in the upper hills and now to storm the fort of a raja in the lower, till he so welded the people into a loyal mass that he was ready to repeat the service of 1846 when, three years after, the second Sikh War ended in the conversion of the Punjab up to Peshawar into a British province.

It was lucky for the British power that, when the first Sikh War broke out, John Lawrence was still the collector of Delhi. The key battles at Ferozeshah, following Moodkee, and only partially redeemed by Aliwal, left the British army somewhat worn out at the gate of the Punjab, facing the Sikh fortifications on the Sutlej. For the first seven weeks of 1846, supplies and war munitions streamed into the camp daily, all brought in by this one man through the influence he gained over fifteen years of strict yet compassionate rule in the area between the Jumna and the Sutlej. The decisive victory at Sobraon resulted from this effort, and at thirty-five, Lawrence became the commissioner of the Jullundur Doab, the rich area of hills and valleys stretching from the Sutlej north to the Indus. The still young civil servant did for the newly annexed territory what he had accomplished long ago in and around Delhi. He restored order without a single regular soldier. With the power of his personal charm, he organized groups of Sikhs who had just been defeated, guiding them first against a chief in the upper hills and then to attack the fort of a raja in the lowlands, until he united the people into a loyal community and was ready to repeat the efforts of 1846 when, three years later, the second Sikh War concluded with the Punjab up to Peshawar becoming a British province.

Lord Dalhousie had to devise a government for a warlike population now numbering twenty-three millions, and covering an area little less than that of the United Kingdom. The first results were not hopeful; and it was not till John Lawrence became chief commissioner, and stood alone face to face with the chiefs and people and ring fence of still untamed border tribes, that there became possible the most successful experiment in the art of civilizing turbulent millions which history presents. The province was mapped out into districts, now numbering thirty-two, in addition to thirty-six tributary states, small and great. To each the thirty years’ leases of the north-west settlement were applied, after a patient survey and assessment by skilled officials ever in the saddle or the tent. The revenue was raised on principles so fair to the peasantry that Ranjit Singh’s exactions were reduced by a fourth, while agricultural improvements were encouraged. For the first time in its history since the earliest Aryan settlers had been overwhelmed by successive waves of invaders, the soil of the Punjab came to have a marketable value, which every year of British rule has increased. A stalwart police was organized; roads were cut through every district, and canals were constructed. Commerce followed on increasing cultivation and communications, courts brought justice to every man’s door, and crime hid its head. The adventurous and warlike spirits, Sikh and Mahommedan, found a career in the new force of irregulars directed by the chief commissioner himself, while the Afghan, Dost Mahommed, kept within his own fastnesses, and the long extent of frontier at the foot of the passes was patrolled.

Lord Dalhousie had to create a government for a warlike population of twenty-three million people, spanning an area almost the size of the United Kingdom. The initial results were discouraging; it wasn’t until John Lawrence became chief commissioner and faced the chiefs, the people, and the still-untamed border tribes alone that the most successful attempt at civilizing these restless millions became possible. The province was divided into thirty-two districts, plus thirty-six small and large tributary states. Each received the thirty-year leases of the northwest settlement after careful surveys and assessments conducted by skilled officials who were always on the move. The revenue was collected based on principles fair to the farmers, reducing Ranjit Singh’s demands by a quarter, while promoting agricultural improvements. For the first time in its history, since the earliest Aryan settlers were overrun by waves of invaders, the land of the Punjab had real market value, which has increased every year of British rule. A strong police force was established; roads were built in every district, and canals were constructed. Commerce thrived alongside increased farming and better communication, courts delivered justice closer to people, and crime diminished. Adventurous Sikh and Muslim spirits found opportunities in the new irregular force led by the chief commissioner himself, while the Afghan, Dost Mahommed, remained in his own strongholds, and the long stretch of the frontier at the foot of the passes was patrolled.

Seven years of such work prepared the lately hostile and always anarchic Punjab under such a pilot as John Lawrence not only to weather the storm of 1857 but to lead the older provinces into port. On the 12th of May the news of the tragedies at Meerut and Delhi reached him at Rawalpindi. The position was critical in the last degree, for of 50,000 native soldiers 38,000 were Hindustanis of the very class that had mutinied elsewhere, and the British troops were few and scattered. For five days the fate of the Punjab hung upon a thread, for the question was, “Could the 12,000 Punjabis be trusted and the 38,000 Hindustanis be disarmed?” Not an hour was lost in beginning the disarming at Lahore; and, as one by one the Hindustani corps succumbed to the epidemic of mutiny, the sepoys were deported or disappeared, or swelled the military rabble in and around the city of Delhi. The remembrance of the ten years’ war which had closed only in 1849, a bountiful harvest, the old love of battle, the offer of good pay, but, above all, the personality of Lawrence and his officers, raised the Punjabi force into a new army of 59,000 men, and induced the non-combatant classes to subscribe to a 6% loan. Delhi was invested, but for three months the rebel city did not fall. Under John Nicholson, Lawrence sent on still more men to the siege, till every available European and faithful native soldier was there, while a movable column swept the country, and the border was kept by an improvised militia. At length, when even in the Punjab confidence became doubt, and doubt distrust, and that was passing into disaffection, John Lawrence was ready to consider whether we should not give up the Peshawar valley to the Afghans as a last resource, and send its garrison to recruit the force around Delhi. Another week and that alternative must have been faced. But on the 20th of September the city and palace of Delhi were again in British hands, and the chief commissioner and his officers united in ascribing “to the Lord our God all the praise due for nerving the hearts of our statesmen and the arms of our soldiers.” As Sir John Lawrence, Bart., G.C.B., with the thanks of parliament, the gratitude of his country, and a life pension of £2000 a year in addition to his ordinary pension of £1000, the “saviour of India” returned home in 1859. After guarding the interests of India and its people as a member of the secretary of state’s council, he was sent out again in 1864 as viceroy and governor-general on the death of Lord Elgin. If no great crisis enabled Lawrence to increase his reputation, his five years’ administration of the whole Indian empire was worthy of the ruler of the Punjab. His foreign policy has become a subject of imperial interest, his name being associated with the “close border” as opposed to the “forward” policy; while his internal administration was remarkable for financial prudence, a jealous regard for the good of the masses of the people and of the British soldiers, and a generous interest in education, especially in its Christian aspects.

Seven years of hard work transformed the previously hostile and always chaotic Punjab under the leadership of John Lawrence, not only enabling it to endure the chaos of 1857 but also to guide the older provinces to safety. On May 12th, news of the tragedies in Meerut and Delhi reached him in Rawalpindi. The situation was extremely critical, as out of 50,000 native soldiers, 38,000 were Hindustanis from the same group that had mutinied in other areas, and the British troops were few and spread out. For five days, the fate of Punjab was precarious, as the key question was, “Could the 12,000 Punjabis be trusted, and could the 38,000 Hindustanis be disarmed?” Not a moment was wasted in starting the disarmament process in Lahore; and as the Hindustani regiments fell victim to the wave of mutiny, the sepoys were deported, vanished, or joined the military chaos in and around Delhi. The memory of the ten-year war that had ended only in 1849, plentiful crops, a natural inclination for battle, the promise of good pay, and, most importantly, the character of Lawrence and his officers, transformed the Punjabi force into a new army of 59,000 men and encouraged the non-combatant classes to invest in a 6% loan. Delhi was besieged, but the rebel city did not capitulate for three months. Under John Nicholson, Lawrence sent even more troops to the siege until every available European and loyal native soldier was present, while a mobile unit patrolled the region, keeping the border secure with a makeshift militia. Finally, when confidence in Punjab turned to doubt, then to distrust, and began to shift into disaffection, John Lawrence considered whether it might be necessary to abandon the Peshawar valley to the Afghans as a last resort and send its garrison to reinforce the forces around Delhi. Another week and this option would have had to be confronted. But on September 20th, the city and palace of Delhi were back in British control, and the chief commissioner and his officers collectively attributed “to the Lord our God all the praise due for strengthening the hearts of our statesmen and the arms of our soldiers.” Sir John Lawrence, Bart., G.C.B., returned home in 1859 with the thanks of Parliament, the gratitude of his country, and a life pension of £2,000 a year in addition to his regular pension of £1,000, hailed as the “savior of India.” After representing the interests of India and its people as a member of the Secretary of State's Council, he was sent back out in 1864 as viceroy and governor-general following the death of Lord Elgin. Although no significant crisis arose to elevate Lawrence's reputation further, his five-year administration of the entire Indian empire was fitting for the ruler of Punjab. His foreign policy has become a point of imperial interest, with his name linked to the “close border” strategy as opposed to the “forward” policy; meanwhile, his domestic administration was notable for its financial prudence, a strong commitment to the welfare of both the general population and British soldiers, and a keen interest in education, particularly its Christian aspects.

When in 1854 Dost Mahommed, weakened by the antagonism of his brothers in Kandahar, and by the interference of Persia, sent his son to Peshawar to make a treaty, Sir John Lawrence was opposed to any entangling relation with the Afghans after the experience of 1838-1842, but he obeyed Lord Dalhousie so far as to sign a treaty of perpetual peace and friendship. His ruling idea, the fruit of long and sad experience, was that de facto powers only should be recognized beyond the frontier. When in 1863 Dost Mahommed’s death let loose the factions of Afghanistan he acted on this policy to such an extent that he recognized both the sons, Afzul Khan and Shere Ali, at different times, and the latter fully only when he had made himself master of all his father’s kingdom. The steady advance of Russia from the north, notwithstanding the Gortchakov circular of 1864, led to severe criticism of this cautious “buffer” policy which he justified under the term of “masterly inactivity.” But he was ready to receive Shere Ali in conference, and to aid him in consolidating his power after it had been established and maintained for a time, when his term of office came to an end and it fell to Lord Mayo, his successor, to hold the Umballa conference in 1869. When, nine years after, the second Afghan War was precipitated, the retired viceroy gave the last days of his life to an unsparing exposure, in the House of Lords and in the press, of a policy which he had striven to prevent in its inception, and which he did not cease to denounce in its course and consequences.

When, in 1854, Dost Mahommed, weakened by conflicts with his brothers in Kandahar and interference from Persia, sent his son to Peshawar to negotiate a treaty, Sir John Lawrence opposed forming any complicated relationship with the Afghans following the experience of 1838-1842. However, he complied with Lord Dalhousie enough to sign a treaty of perpetual peace and friendship. His main principle, shaped by lengthy and painful experience, was that only de facto powers should be recognized beyond the frontier. After Dost Mahommed’s death in 1863 unleashed various factions in Afghanistan, he adhered to this policy so much that he recognized both sons, Afzul Khan and Shere Ali, at different times, fully acknowledging the latter only after he successfully took control of all his father’s kingdom. The steady advance of Russia from the north, despite the Gortchakov circular of 1864, led to significant criticism of this cautious “buffer” policy, which he defended as “masterly inactivity.” But he was open to meeting with Shere Ali and helped him consolidate his power after it had been established and maintained for some time. When Lawrence's term ended, it fell to Lord Mayo, his successor, to hold the Umballa conference in 1869. Nine years later, when the second Afghan War began, the retired viceroy dedicated his final days to fiercely criticizing a policy he had tried to prevent from the start and which he continued to denounce throughout its development and outcomes.

On his final return to England early in 1869, after forty years’ 308 service in and for India, “the great proconsul of our English Christian empire” was created Baron Lawrence of the Punjab, and of Grately, Hants. He assumed the same arms and crest as those of his brother Henry, with a Pathan and a Sikh trooper as supporters, and took as his motto “Be ready,” his brother’s being “Never give in.” For ten years he gave himself to the work of the London school board, of which he was the first chairman, and of the Church missionary society. Towards the end his eyesight failed, and on the 27th of June 1879 he died at the age of sixty-eight. He was buried in the nave of Westminster Abbey, beside Clyde, Outram and Livingstone. He had married the daughter of the Rev. Richard Hamilton, Harriette-Katherine, who survived him, and he was succeeded as 2nd baron by his eldest son, John Hamilton Lawrence (b. 1846).

On his final return to England early in 1869, after forty years of service in and for India, “the great proconsul of our English Christian empire” was created Baron Lawrence of the Punjab, and of Grately, Hants. He took on the same arms and crest as those of his brother Henry, with a Pathan and a Sikh trooper as supporters, and adopted the motto “Be ready,” while his brother's was “Never give in.” For ten years, he dedicated himself to the work of the London school board, where he was the first chairman, as well as the Church missionary society. Towards the end of his life, his eyesight began to fail, and on June 27, 1879, he passed away at the age of sixty-eight. He was buried in the nave of Westminster Abbey, next to Clyde, Outram, and Livingstone. He had married Harriette-Katherine, the daughter of the Rev. Richard Hamilton, who survived him, and he was succeeded as the 2nd baron by his eldest son, John Hamilton Lawrence (b. 1846).

See Bosworth Smith, Life of Lord Lawrence (1885); Sir Charles Aitchison, Lord Lawrence (“Rulers of India” series, 1892); L. J. Trotter, Lord Lawrence (1880); and F. M. Holmes, Four Heroes of India.

See Bosworth Smith, Life of Lord Lawrence (1885); Sir Charles Aitchison, Lord Lawrence (“Rulers of India” series, 1892); L. J. Trotter, Lord Lawrence (1880); and F. M. Holmes, Four Heroes of India.

LAWRENCE, STRINGER (1697-1775), English soldier, was born at Hereford on the 6th of March 1697. He seems to have entered the army in 1727 and served in Gibraltar and Flanders, subsequently taking part in the battle of Culloden. In 1748, with the rank of major and the reputation of an experienced soldier, he went out to India to command the East India Company’s troops. Dupleix’s schemes for the French conquest of southern India were on the point of taking effect, and not long after his arrival at Fort St David, Stringer Lawrence was actively engaged. He successfully foiled an attempted French surprise at Cuddalore, but subsequently was captured by a French cavalry patrol at Ariancopang near Pondicherry and kept prisoner till the peace of Aix-la-Chapelle. In 1749 he was in command at the capture of Devicota. On this occasion Clive served under him and a life-long friendship began. On one occasion, when Clive had become famous, he honoured the creator of the Indian army by refusing to accept a sword of honour unless one was voted to Lawrence also. In 1750 Lawrence returned to England, but in 1752 he was back in India. Here he found Clive in command of a force intended for the relief of Trichinopoly. As senior officer Lawrence took over the command, but was careful to allow Clive every credit for his share in the subsequent operations, which included the relief of Trichinopoly and the surrender of the entire French besieging force. In 1752 with an inferior force he defeated the French at Bahur (Behoor) and in 1753 again relieved Trichinopoly. For the next seventeen months he fought a series of actions in defence of this place, finally arranging a three months’ armistice, which was afterwards converted into a conditional treaty. He had commanded in chief up to the arrival of the first detachment of regular forces of the crown. In 1757 he served in the operations against Wandiwash, and in 1758-1759 was in command of Fort St George during the siege by the French under Lally. In 1759 failing health compelled him to return to England. He resumed his command in 1761 as major-general and commander-in-chief. Clive supplemented his old friend’s inconsiderable income by settling on him an annuity of £500 a year. In 1765 he presided over the board charged with arranging the reorganization of the Madras army, and he finally retired the following year. He died in London on the 10th of January 1775. The East India Company erected a monument to his memory in Westminster Abbey.

LAWRENCE, STRINGER (1697-1775), an English soldier, was born in Hereford on March 6, 1697. He seems to have joined the army in 1727 and served in Gibraltar and Flanders, then took part in the Battle of Culloden. In 1748, as a major with a reputation as an experienced soldier, he went to India to command the East India Company's troops. Dupleix’s plans for the French conquest of southern India were about to unfold, and shortly after arriving at Fort St David, Stringer Lawrence became actively involved. He successfully thwarted a French surprise at Cuddalore but was later captured by a French cavalry patrol at Ariancopang near Pondicherry and held prisoner until the peace of Aix-la-Chapelle. In 1749, he commanded the capture of Devicota, where Clive served under him, sparking a life-long friendship. When Clive became famous, he honored the founder of the Indian army by refusing a sword of honor unless one was also given to Lawrence. In 1750, Lawrence returned to England but was back in India by 1752. There, he found Clive leading a force meant to relieve Trichinopoly. As the senior officer, Lawrence took command, ensuring Clive received credit for the ensuing operations, which included the relief of Trichinopoly and the surrender of the entire French besieging force. In 1752, with a smaller force, he defeated the French at Bahur (Behoor) and again relieved Trichinopoly in 1753. For the next seventeen months, he fought several battles defending this area, ultimately arranging a three-month armistice that was later turned into a conditional treaty. He led the forces until the arrival of the first detachment of regular crown forces. In 1757, he participated in operations against Wandiwash, and from 1758 to 1759, he commanded Fort St George during the siege by the French under Lally. In 1759, failing health forced him to return to England. He resumed his command in 1761 as major-general and commander-in-chief. Clive supported his old friend’s modest income by granting him an annuity of £500 per year. In 1765, he chaired the board responsible for reorganizing the Madras army, retiring the following year. He passed away in London on January 10, 1775. The East India Company erected a monument in his memory at Westminster Abbey.

See Biddulph, Stringer Lawrence (1901).

See Biddulph, Stringer Lawrence (1901).

LAWRENCE, SIR THOMAS (1769-1830), English painter, was born at Bristol on the 4th of May 1769. His father was an innkeeper, first at Bristol and afterwards at Devizes, and at the age of six Thomas was already shown off to the guests of the Black Boar as an infant prodigy who could sketch their likenesses and declaim speeches from Milton. In 1779 the elder Lawrence had to leave Devizes, having failed in business, and the precocious talent of the son, who had gained a sort of reputation along the Bath road, became the support of the family. His debut as a crayon portrait painter was made at Oxford, where he was well patronized, and in 1782 the family settled in Bath, where the young artist soon found himself fully employed in taking crayon likenesses of the fashionables of the place at a guinea or a guinea and a half a head. In 1784 he gained the prize and silver-gilt palette of the Society of Arts for a crayon drawing after Raphael’s “Transfiguration,” and presently beginning to paint in oil. Throwing aside the idea of going on the stage which he had for a short time entertained, he came to London in 1787, was kindly received by Reynolds, and entered as a student at the Royal Academy. He began to exhibit almost immediately, and his reputation increased so rapidly that he became an associate of the Academy in 1791. The death of Sir Joshua in 1792 opened the way to further successes. He was at once appointed painter to the Dilettanti society, and principal painter to the king in room of Reynolds. In 1794 he was a Royal Academician, and he became the fashionable portrait painter of the age, having as his sitters all the rank, fashion and talent of England, and ultimately most of the crowned heads of Europe. In 1815 he was knighted; in 1818 he went to Aix-la-Chapelle to paint the sovereigns and diplomatists gathered there, and visited Vienna and Rome, everywhere receiving flattering marks of distinction from princes, due as much to his courtly manners as to his merits as an artist. After eighteen months he returned to England, and on the very day of his arrival was chosen president of the Academy in room of West, who had died a few days before. This office he held from 1820 to his death on the 7th of January 1830. He was never married.

LAWRENCE, SIR THOMAS (1769-1830), English painter, was born in Bristol on May 4, 1769. His father was an innkeeper, first in Bristol and later in Devizes. By the age of six, Thomas was showcased to guests at the Black Boar as a child prodigy who could sketch their likenesses and recite speeches from Milton. In 1779, his father had to leave Devizes after failing in business, and Thomas’s early talent, which had earned him some recognition along the Bath road, became the family's support. He made his debut as a crayon portrait painter in Oxford, where he found good patronage, and in 1782, the family moved to Bath. There, the young artist quickly got busy creating crayon portraits of the local fashionable society for a guinea or a guinea and a half each. In 1784, he won a prize and a silver-gilt palette from the Society of Arts for a crayon drawing after Raphael’s “Transfiguration,” and he soon started painting in oil. Deciding against a brief interest in acting, he moved to London in 1787, received warmly by Reynolds, and became a student at the Royal Academy. He began exhibiting right away, and his reputation grew so quickly that he became an associate of the Academy in 1791. Following Sir Joshua's death in 1792, he gained even more opportunities. He was immediately appointed painter to the Dilettanti society and the principal painter to the king, replacing Reynolds. By 1794, he became a Royal Academician and was recognized as the leading portrait painter of the time, capturing the likenesses of all the notable figures in England, as well as many of Europe’s royal heads. In 1815, he was knighted; in 1818, he traveled to Aix-la-Chapelle to paint the gathered sovereigns and diplomats, visiting Vienna and Rome, where he received honors from princes, attributed as much to his graceful demeanor as to his artistic skills. After eighteen months, he returned to England, and on the day he arrived, he was elected president of the Academy, taking over from West, who had passed away a few days earlier. He held this position from 1820 until his death on January 7, 1830. He never married.

Sir Thomas Lawrence had all the qualities of personal manner and artistic style necessary to make a fashionable painter, and among English portrait painters he takes a high place, though not as high as that given to him in his lifetime. His more ambitious works, in the classical style, such as his once celebrated “Satan,” are practically forgotten.

Sir Thomas Lawrence had all the personal charm and artistic style needed to be a trendy painter, and among English portrait painters, he holds a prominent position, though not as elevated as it was during his lifetime. His more ambitious works, in the classical style, like his once-famous “Satan,” are mostly forgotten.

The best display of Lawrence’s work is in the Waterloo Gallery of Windsor, a collection of much historical interest. “Master Lambton,” painted for Lord Durham at the price of 600 guineas, is regarded as one of his best portraits, and a fine head in the National Gallery, London, shows his power to advantage. The Life and Correspondence of Sir T. Lawrence, by D. E. Williams, appeared in 1831.

The best showcase of Lawrence’s work is in the Waterloo Gallery of Windsor, which features a collection of significant historical interest. “Master Lambton,” painted for Lord Durham at the cost of 600 guineas, is considered one of his finest portraits, and a remarkable head in the National Gallery, London, demonstrates his skill impressively. The Life and Correspondence of Sir T. Lawrence, by D. E. Williams, was published in 1831.

LAWRENCE, a city and the county-seat of Douglas county, Kansas, U.S.A., situated on both banks of the Kansas river, about 40 m. W. of Kansas City. Pop. (1890) 9997, (1900) 10,862, of whom 2032 were negroes, (1910 census) 12,374. It is served by the Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe and the Union Pacific railways, both having tributary lines extending N. and S. Lawrence is surrounded by a good farming region, and is itself a thriving educational and commercial centre. Its site slopes up from the plateau that borders the river to the heights above, from which there is a view of rare beauty. Among the city’s principal public buildings are the court house and the Y.M.C.A. building. The university of Kansas, situated on Mount Oread, overlooking the city, was first opened in 1866, and in 1907-1908 had a faculty of 105 and 2063 students, including 702 women (see Kansas). Just S. of the city of Lawrence is Haskell institute (1884), one of the largest Indian schools in the country, maintained for children of the tribal Indians by the national government. In 1907 the school had 813 students, of whom 313 were girls; it has an academic department, a business school and courses in domestic science, in farming, dairying and gardening, and in masonry, carpentry, painting, blacksmithing, waggon-making, shoemaking, steam-fitting, printing and other trades. Among the city’s manufactures are flour and grist mill products, pianos and cement plaster. Lawrence, named in honour of Amos A. Lawrence, was founded by agents of the Massachusetts Emigrant Aid Company in July 1854, and during the Territorial period was the political centre of the free-state cause and the principal point against which the assaults of the pro-slavery party were directed. It was first known as Wakarusa, from the creek by which it lies. A town association was organized in September 1854 before any Territorial government had been established. In the next month some pro-slavery men presented claims to a part of the land, projected a rival town to be called Excelsior on the same site, and threatened violence; but when Lawrence had organized its “regulators” the pro-slavery men retired and later agreed to a compromise by which the town 309 site was limited to 640 acres. In December 1855 occurred the “Wakarusa war.” A free-state man having been murdered for his opinions, a friend who threatened retaliation was arrested by the pro-slavery sheriff, S. J. Jones; he was rescued and taken to Lawrence; the city disclaimed complicity, but Jones persuaded Governor Wilson Shannon that there was rebellion, and Shannon authorized a posse; Missouri responded, and a pro-slavery force marched on Lawrence. The governor found that Lawrence had not resisted and would not resist the service of writs; by a written “agreement” with the free-state leaders he therefore withdrew his sanction from the Missourians and averted battle. The retreating Missourians committed some homicides. It was during this “war” that John Brown first took up arms with the free-state men. Preparations for another attack continued, particularly after Sheriff Jones, while serving writs in Lawrence, was wounded. On the 21st of May 1856, at the head of several hundred Missourians, he occupied the city without resistance, destroyed its printing offices and the free-state headquarters and pillaged private houses. In 1855 and again in 1857 the pro-slavery Territorial legislature passed an Act giving Lawrence a charter, but the people of Lawrence would not recognize that “bogus” government, and on the 13th of July 1857, after an application to the Topeka free-state legislature for a charter had been denied, adopted a city charter of their own. Governor Walker proclaimed this rebellion against the United States, appeared before the town in command of 400 United States dragoons and declared it under martial law; as perfect order prevailed, and there was no overt resistance to Territorial law, the troops were withdrawn after a few weeks by order of President Buchanan, and in February 1858 the legislature passed an Act legalizing the city charter of July 1857. On the 21st of August 1863 William C. Quantrell and some 400 mounted Missouri bushrangers surprised the sleeping town and murdered 150 citizens. The city’s arms were in storage and no resistance was possible. This was the most distressing episode in all the turbulence of territorial days and border warfare in Kansas. A monument erected in 1895 commemorates the dead. After the free-state men gained control of the Territorial legislature in 1857 the legislature regularly adjourned from Lecompton, the legal capital, to Lawrence, which was practically the capital until the choice of Topeka under the Wyandotte constitution. The first railway to reach Lawrence was the Union Pacific in 1864.

LAWRENCE, a city and the county seat of Douglas County, Kansas, U.S.A., located on both sides of the Kansas River, about 40 miles west of Kansas City. Population (1890) was 9,997; (1900) 10,862, including 2,032 African Americans; (1910 census) 12,374. It is served by the Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe and the Union Pacific railroads, both of which have branches running north and south. Lawrence is surrounded by a productive farming area and is itself a bustling educational and commercial hub. The city is built on a slope rising from the plateau next to the river to the heights above, where the view is stunning. Among the city’s main public buildings are the courthouse and the Y.M.C.A. building. The University of Kansas, located on Mount Oread, which overlooks the city, was first established in 1866, and in 1907-1908 had a faculty of 105 and 2,063 students, including 702 women (see Kansas). Just south of Lawrence is the Haskell Institute (1884), one of the largest Indian schools in the country, operated by the national government for the children of tribal Indians. In 1907, the school had 813 students, 313 of whom were girls; it offers an academic program, a business school, and courses in domestic science, farming, dairying, gardening, masonry, carpentry, painting, blacksmithing, wagon-making, shoemaking, steam-fitting, printing, and other trades. Among the city’s products are flour and grain mill products, pianos, and cement plaster. Lawrence, named after Amos A. Lawrence, was founded by agents of the Massachusetts Emigrant Aid Company in July 1854 and during the Territorial period was the political center of the free-state movement and the main target for pro-slavery attacks. It was originally called Wakarusa, after the creek nearby. A town association was established in September 1854, before any Territorial government was formed. The following month, some pro-slavery individuals staked claims to part of the land, planned a rival town to be called Excelsior on the same site, and threatened violence; however, once Lawrence organized its “regulators,” the pro-slavery folks backed down and eventually agreed to a compromise that limited the town site to 640 acres. In December 1855, the “Wakarusa war” occurred. Following the murder of a free-state supporter for his beliefs, a friend who threatened revenge was arrested by the pro-slavery sheriff, S. J. Jones; he was rescued and taken to Lawrence. The city distanced itself from the situation, but Jones convinced Governor Wilson Shannon that there was a rebellion, and Shannon authorized a posse; Missouri responded, and a pro-slavery force marched on Lawrence. The governor found that Lawrence had not resisted and would not resist the service of writs; through a written “agreement” with the free-state leaders, he thus withdrew his approval from the Missourians and avoided conflict. The retreating Missourians committed several murders. It was during this “war” that John Brown first armed himself alongside the free-state supporters. Preparations for another attack continued, especially after Sheriff Jones was injured while delivering writs in Lawrence. On May 21, 1856, leading several hundred Missourians, he seized the city without facing any resistance, destroyed its printing offices and free-state headquarters, and looted private homes. In 1855, and again in 1857, the pro-slavery Territorial legislature passed a law granting Lawrence a charter, but the residents of Lawrence rejected that “bogus” government, and on July 13, 1857, after a request to the Topeka free-state legislature for a charter was denied, they established their own city charter. Governor Walker declared this to be a rebellion against the United States, appeared before the town with 400 U.S. dragoons, and enforced martial law; as order was maintained and there was no overt resistance to Territorial law, the troops were withdrawn a few weeks later by order of President Buchanan, and in February 1858, the legislature passed a law recognizing the city charter from July 1857. On August 21, 1863, William C. Quantrill and about 400 Missouri bushwhackers attacked the sleeping town and killed 150 citizens. The city’s arms were stored away, making any resistance impossible. This was the most devastating event during the turbulent territorial days and border conflicts in Kansas. A monument erected in 1895 honors the victims. After the free-state supporters took control of the Territorial legislature in 1857, the legislature routinely adjourned from Lecompton, the official capital, to Lawrence, which was effectively the capital until Topeka was chosen under the Wyandotte constitution. The first railroad to reach Lawrence was the Union Pacific in 1864.

See F. W. Blackmar, “The Annals of an Historic Town,” in the Annual Report of the American Historical Association for 1893 (Washington, 1894).

See F. W. Blackmar, “The Annals of a Historic Town,” in the Annual Report of the American Historical Association for 1893 (Washington, 1894).

LAWRENCE, a city, and one of the three county-seats (Salem and Newburyport are the others) of Essex county, Massachusetts, U.S.A., on both sides of the Merrimac river, about 30 m. from its mouth and about 26 m. N.N.W. of Boston. Pop. (1890) 44,654, (1900) 62,559, of whom 28,577 were foreign-born (7058 being Irish, 6999 French Canadians, 5131 English, 2465 German, 1683 English Canadian), and (1910 census) 85,892. It is served by the Boston & Maine railroad and by electric railways to Andover, Boston, Lowell, Haverhill and Salem, Massachusetts, and to Nashua and Salem, New Hampshire. The city’s area of 6.54 sq. m. is about equally divided by the Merrimac, which is here crossed by a great stone dam 900 ft. long, and, with a fall of 28 ft., supplies about 12,000 horsepower. Water from the river is carried to factories by a canal on each side of the river and parallel to it; the first canal was built on the north side in 1845-1847 and is 1 m. long; the canal on the south side is about ¾ m. long, and was built several years later. There are large and well-kept public parks, a common (17 acres) with a soldiers’ monument, a free public library, with more than 50,000 volumes in 1907, a city hall, county and municipal court-houses, a county gaol and house of correction, a county industrial school and a state armoury.

LAWRENCE, is a city and one of the three county seats (the others are Salem and Newburyport) of Essex County, Massachusetts, U.S.A. It sits on both sides of the Merrimac River, about 30 miles from its mouth and approximately 26 miles N.N.W. of Boston. The population was 44,654 in 1890, 62,559 in 1900, with 28,577 being foreign-born (7,058 Irish, 6,999 French Canadians, 5,131 English, 2,465 German, and 1,683 English Canadian), and the 1910 census recorded 85,892 residents. The city is served by the Boston & Maine Railroad and electric railways that connect to Andover, Boston, Lowell, Haverhill, and Salem, Massachusetts, as well as Nashua and Salem, New Hampshire. The city's area of 6.54 square miles is roughly split by the Merrimac River, which here features a large stone dam that is 900 feet long and creates a 28-foot drop, generating around 12,000 horsepower. Water from the river is channeled to factories through canals on each side of the river running parallel to it; the first canal on the north side was built between 1845 and 1847 and is 1 mile long, while the south side canal is about ¾ mile long and was constructed several years later. The city boasts spacious, well-maintained public parks, a common area (17 acres) with a soldiers' monument, a free public library with over 50,000 volumes as of 1907, city hall, county and municipal court houses, a county jail and correctional facility, a county industrial school, and a state armory.

The value of the city’s factory product was $48,036,593 in 1905, $41,741,980 in 1900. The manufacture of textiles is the most important industry; in 1905 the city produced worsteds valued at $30,926,964 and cotton goods worth $5,745,611, the worsted product being greater than that of any other American city. The Wood worsted mill here is said to be the largest single mill in the world. The history of Lawrence is largely the history of its textile mills. The town was formed in 1845 from parts of Andover (S. of the Merrimac) and of Methuen (N. of the river), and it was incorporated as a town in 1847, being named in honour of Abbott Lawrence, a director of the Essex company, organized in 1845 (on the same day as the formation of the town) for the control of the water power and for the construction of the great dam across the Merrimac. The Bay State woollen mills, which in 1858 became the Washington mills, and the Atlantic cotton mills were both chartered in 1846. The Pacific mills (1853) introduced from England in 1854 Lister combs for worsted manufacture; and the Washington mills soon afterward began to make worsted dress goods. Worsted cloths for men’s wear seem to have been made first about 1870 at nearly the same time in the Washington mills here, in the Hockanum mills of Rockville, Connecticut, and in Wanskuck mills, Providence, Rhode Island. The Pemberton mills, built in 1853, collapsed and afterwards took fire on the 10th of January 1860; 90 were killed and hundreds severely injured. Lawrence was chartered as a city in 1853, and annexed a small part of Methuen in 1854 and parts of Andover and North Andover in 1879.

The value of the city's factory output was $48,036,593 in 1905 and $41,741,980 in 1900. The textile industry is the most significant, with the city producing worsteds valued at $30,926,964 and cotton goods worth $5,745,611 in 1905, making it the largest producer of worsted products in any American city. The Wood worsted mill here is considered the largest single mill in the world. The history of Lawrence is primarily the story of its textile mills. The town was established in 1845 from parts of Andover (south of the Merrimac) and Methuen (north of the river), and it was incorporated as a town in 1847, named after Abbott Lawrence, a director of the Essex Company, created in 1845 (on the same day the town was formed) for managing water power and building the large dam across the Merrimac. The Bay State Woolen Mills, which became the Washington Mills in 1858, and the Atlantic Cotton Mills were both chartered in 1846. The Pacific Mills (1853) introduced Lister combs for worsted manufacturing from England in 1854, and shortly afterwards, the Washington Mills began producing worsted dress goods. Worsteds for men’s clothing seem to have first been produced around 1870 around the same time in the Washington Mills here, the Hockanum Mills in Rockville, Connecticut, and the Wanskuck Mills in Providence, Rhode Island. The Pemberton Mills, built in 1853, collapsed and then caught fire on January 10, 1860; 90 people were killed, and hundreds were severely injured. Lawrence was chartered as a city in 1853, annexing a small part of Methuen in 1854 and portions of Andover and North Andover in 1879.

See H. A. Wadsworth, History of Lawrence, Massachusetts (Lawrence, 1880).

See H. A. Wadsworth, History of Lawrence, Massachusetts (Lawrence, 1880).

LAWRENCEBURG, a city and the county-seat of Dearborn county, Indiana, U.S.A., on the Ohio river, in the S.E. part of the state, 22 m. (by rail) W. of Cincinnati. Pop. (1890) 4284, (1900) 4326 (413 foreign-born); (1910) 3930. Lawrenceburg is served by the Baltimore & Ohio South-Western and the Cleveland, Cincinnati, Chicago & St Louis railways, by the Cincinnati, Lawrenceburg & Aurora electric street railroad, and by river packets to Louisville and Cincinnati. The city lies along the river and on higher land rising 100 ft. above river-level. It formerly had an important river trade with New Orleans, beginning about 1820 and growing in volume after the city became the terminus of the Whitewater canal, begun in 1836. The place was laid out in 1802. In 1846 an “old” and a “new” settlement were united, and Lawrenceburg was chartered as a city. Lawrenceburg was the birthplace of James B. Eads, the famous engineer, and of John Coit Spooner (b. 1843), a prominent Republican member of the United States Senate from Wisconsin in 1885-1891 and in 1897-1907; and the Presbyterian Church of Lawrenceburg was the first charge (1837-1839) of Henry Ward Beecher.

LAWRENCEBURG, is a city and the county seat of Dearborn County, Indiana, U.S.A., located on the Ohio River in the southeastern part of the state, 22 miles (by rail) west of Cincinnati. The population was 4,284 in 1890, 4,326 in 1900 (413 foreign-born), and 3,930 in 1910. Lawrenceburg is served by the Baltimore & Ohio South-Western and the Cleveland, Cincinnati, Chicago & St. Louis railways, as well as the Cincinnati, Lawrenceburg & Aurora electric street railroad, and by river packets to Louisville and Cincinnati. The city is situated along the river and on elevated land that rises 100 feet above river level. It used to have a significant river trade with New Orleans, starting around 1820 and increasing in volume after the city became the end point of the Whitewater Canal, which began in 1836. The area was laid out in 1802. In 1846, an “old” and a “new” settlement were merged, and Lawrenceburg was incorporated as a city. Lawrenceburg was the birthplace of James B. Eads, the well-known engineer, and of John Coit Spooner (born 1843), a notable Republican member of the United States Senate from Wisconsin who served from 1885-1891 and again from 1897-1907; and the Presbyterian Church of Lawrenceburg was the first charge (1837-1839) of Henry Ward Beecher.

LAWSON, CECIL GORDON (1851-1882), English landscape painter, was the youngest son of William Lawson of Edinburgh, esteemed as a portrait painter. His mother also was known for her flower pieces. He was born near Shrewsbury on the 3rd of December 1851. Two of his brothers (one of them, Malcolm, a clever musician and song-writer) were trained as artists, and Cecil was from childhood devoted to art with the intensity of a serious nature. Soon after his birth the Lawsons moved to London. Lawson’s first works were studies of fruit, flowers, &c., in the manner of W. Hunt; followed by riverside Chelsea subjects. His first exhibit at the Royal Academy (1870) was “Cheyne Walk,” and in 1871 he sent two other Chelsea subjects. These gained full recognition from fellow-artists, if not from the public. Among his friends were now numbered Fred Walker, G. J. Pinwell and their associates. Following them, he made a certain number of drawings for wood-engraving. Lawson’s Chelsea pictures had been painted in somewhat low and sombre tones; in the “Hymn to Spring” of 1872 (rejected by the Academy) he turned to a more joyous play of colour, helped by work in more romantic scenes in North Wales and Ireland. Early in 1874 he made a short tour in Holland, Belgium and Paris; and in the summer he painted his large “Hop Gardens of England.” This was much praised at the Academy of 1876. But Lawson’s triumph was with the great luxuriant canvas “The Minister’s Garden,” exhibited in 1878 at the Grosvenor Gallery, and now in the Manchester Art Gallery. This was followed by several works conceived 310 in a new and tragic mood. His health began to fail, but he worked on. He married in 1879 the daughter of Birnie Philip, and settled at Haslemere. His later subjects are from this neighbourhood (the most famous being “The August Moon,” now in the National Gallery of British Art) or from Yorkshire. Towards the end of 1881 he went to the Riviera, returned in the spring, and died at Haslemere on the 10th of June 1882. Lawson may be said to have restored to English landscape the tradition of Gainsborough, Crome and Constable, infused with an imaginative intensity of his own. Among English landscape painters of the latter part of the 19th century his is in many respects the most interesting name.

LAWSON, CECIL GORDON (1851-1882), an English landscape painter, was the youngest son of William Lawson from Edinburgh, who was well-regarded as a portrait painter. His mother was also known for her floral artwork. He was born near Shrewsbury on December 3, 1851. Two of his brothers, including Malcolm, who was a talented musician and songwriter, trained as artists, and Cecil was passionate about art from a young age. Shortly after his birth, the Lawsons moved to London. Lawson’s early works included studies of fruit and flowers, in the style of W. Hunt, followed by scenes from riverside Chelsea. His first exhibit at the Royal Academy in 1870 was titled “Cheyne Walk,” and in 1871, he displayed two additional Chelsea scenes. These works earned him recognition among fellow artists, if not from the public. Among his friends were Fred Walker, G. J. Pinwell, and their associates. Following that, he created several drawings for wood engraving. Lawson’s Chelsea paintings were created in somewhat muted and dark colors; however, with the piece “Hymn to Spring” in 1872 (which was rejected by the Academy), he shifted to a brighter use of color, inspired by his work in more romantic locations in North Wales and Ireland. In early 1874, he took a short trip through Holland, Belgium, and Paris; during the summer, he painted his large work “Hop Gardens of England,” which received high praise at the 1876 Academy. Yet, Lawson's significant achievement came with the beautifully lush canvas “The Minister’s Garden,” which was exhibited in 1878 at the Grosvenor Gallery and is now held in the Manchester Art Gallery. This was soon followed by several paintings that reflected a new and darker mood. Despite his declining health, he continued to work. He married in 1879 the daughter of Birnie Philip and settled in Haslemere. His later subjects were inspired by this area (with the most notable being “The August Moon,” now in the National Gallery of British Art) or from Yorkshire. Toward the end of 1881, he traveled to the Riviera but returned in the spring and passed away in Haslemere on June 10, 1882. Lawson is considered to have revived the tradition of English landscape painting, reminiscent of Gainsborough, Crome, and Constable, infused with his own imaginative intensity. Among English landscape painters from the latter part of the 19th century, his name stands out as one of the most fascinating.

See E. W. Gosse, Cecil Lawson, a Memoir (1883); Heseltine Owen, “In Memoriam: Cecil Gordon Lawson,” Magazine of Art (1894).

See E. W. Gosse, Cecil Lawson, a Memoir (1883); Heseltine Owen, “In Memoriam: Cecil Gordon Lawson,” Magazine of Art (1894).

(L. B.)

LAWSON, SIR JOHN (d. 1665), British sailor, was born at Scarborough. Joining the parliamentary navy in 1642, he accompanied Penn to the Mediterranean in 1650, where he served for some time. In 1652 he served under Blake in the Dutch War and was present at the first action in the Downs and the battle of the Kentish Knock. At Portland, early in 1653, he was vice-admiral of the red, and his ship was severely handled. Lawson took part in the battles of June and July in the following summer. In 1654-1655 he commanded in the North Sea and the Channel. Appointed in January 1655-1656 as Blake’s second-in-command, Lawson was a few weeks later summarily dismissed from his command, probably for political reasons. He was a Republican and Anabaptist, and therefore an enemy to Cromwell. It is not improbable that like Penn and others he was detected in correspondence with the exiled Charles II., who certainly hoped for his support. In 1657, along with Harrison and others, he was arrested and, for a short time, imprisoned for conspiring against Cromwell. Afterwards he lived at Scarborough until the fall of Richard Cromwell’s government. During the troubled months which succeeded that event Lawson, flying his flag as admiral of the Channel fleet, played a marked political rôle. His ships escorted Charles to England, and he was soon afterwards knighted. Sent out in 1661 with Montagu, earl of Sandwich, to the Mediterranean, Lawson conducted a series of campaigns against the piratical states of the Algerian coast. Thence summoned to a command in the Dutch War, he was mortally wounded at Lowestoft. He died on the 29th of June 1665.

LAWSON, SIR JOHN (d. 1665), a British sailor, was born in Scarborough. He joined the parliamentary navy in 1642 and sailed with Penn to the Mediterranean in 1650, where he served for a period. In 1652, he fought under Blake during the Dutch War and participated in the initial battle in the Downs and the battle of the Kentish Knock. Early in 1653, at Portland, he was the vice-admiral of the red, and his ship faced significant damage. Lawson took part in the battles of June and July that summer. Between 1654 and 1655, he commanded forces in the North Sea and the Channel. In January 1655-1656, he was appointed as Blake’s second-in-command but was dismissed from his role a few weeks later, likely for political reasons. As a Republican and Anabaptist, he was opposed to Cromwell. It’s quite possible that, like Penn and others, he was caught communicating with the exiled Charles II., who certainly sought his support. In 1657, along with Harrison and others, he was arrested and briefly imprisoned for conspiring against Cromwell. After that, he lived in Scarborough until Richard Cromwell’s government fell. In the turbulent months that followed that event, Lawson, flying his flag as admiral of the Channel fleet, played a significant political role. His ships escorted Charles back to England, and he was knighted shortly after. In 1661, he was sent out with Montagu, the Earl of Sandwich, to the Mediterranean, where Lawson led a series of campaigns against the pirate states along the Algerian coast. He was then called to command in the Dutch War, where he was mortally wounded at Lowestoft. He died on June 29, 1665.

See Charnock, Biographia navalis, i. 20; Campbell, Lives of the Admirals, ii. 251; Penn, Life of Sir William Penn; Pepys, Diary.

See Charnock, Biographia navalis, i. 20; Campbell, Lives of the Admirals, ii. 251; Penn, Life of Sir William Penn; Pepys, Diary.

LAWSON, SIR WILFRID, Bart. (1829-1906), English politician and temperance leader, son of the 1st baronet (d. 1867), was born on the 4th of September 1829. He was always an enthusiast in the cause of total abstinence, and in parliament, to which he was first elected in 1859 for Carlisle, he became its leading spokesman. In 1864 he first introduced his Permissive Bill, giving to a two-thirds majority in any district a veto upon the granting of licences for the sale of intoxicating liquors; and though this principle failed to be embodied in any act, he had the satisfaction of seeing a resolution on its lines accepted by a majority in the House of Commons in 1880, 1881 and 1883. He lost his seat for Carlisle in 1865, but in 1868 was again returned as a supporter of Mr Gladstone, and was member till 1885; though defeated for the new Cockermouth division of Cumberland in 1885, he won that seat in 1886, and he held it till the election of 1900, when his violent opposition to the Boer War caused his defeat, but in 1903 he was returned for the Camborne division of Cornwall and at the general election of 1906 was once more elected for his old constituency in Cumberland. During all these years he was the champion of the United Kingdom Alliance (founded 1853), of which he became president. An extreme Radical, he also supported disestablishment, abolition of the House of Lords, and disarmament. Though violent in the expression of his opinions, Sir Wilfrid Lawson remained very popular for his own sake both in and out of the House of Commons; he became well known for his humorous vein, his faculty for composing topical doggerel being often exercised on questions of the day. He died on the 1st of July 1906.

LAWSON, SIR WILFRID, Bart. (1829-1906), English politician and temperance leader, son of the 1st baronet (d. 1867), was born on September 4, 1829. He was always passionate about total abstinence, and in parliament, where he was first elected in 1859 for Carlisle, he became its leading advocate. In 1864, he introduced his Permissive Bill, which allowed a two-thirds majority in any district to veto the granting of licenses for selling alcoholic drinks. Even though this idea didn’t become law, he was pleased to see a resolution based on it accepted by a majority in the House of Commons in 1880, 1881, and 1883. He lost his seat for Carlisle in 1865, but in 1868, he was re-elected as a supporter of Mr. Gladston and served until 1885; although defeated in the new Cockermouth division of Cumberland in 1885, he won that seat in 1886 and held it until the 1900 election, when his strong opposition to the Boer War led to his defeat. However, in 1903, he was elected for the Camborne division of Cornwall, and in the general election of 1906, he was once again elected for his old constituency in Cumberland. Throughout these years, he was a champion of the United Kingdom Alliance (founded in 1853), of which he became president. An extreme Radical, he also supported disestablishment, the abolition of the House of Lords, and disarmament. Despite being outspoken in his views, Sir Wilfrid Lawson was quite popular, both inside and outside the House of Commons; he became well-known for his sense of humor, often using his talent for writing topical doggerel on current issues. He passed away on July 1, 1906.

LAY, a word of several meanings. Apart from obsolete and dialectical usages, such as the East Anglian word meaning “pond,” possibly cognate with Lat. lacus, pool or lake, or its use in weaving for the batten of a loom, where it is a variant form of “lath,” the chief uses are as follows: (1) A song or, more accurately, a short poem, lyrical or narrative, which could be sung or accompanied by music; such were the romances sung by minstrels. Such an expression as the “Lay of the Nibelungen” is due to mistaken association of the word with Ger. Lied, song, which appears in Anglo-Saxon as léoð. “Lay” comes from O. Fr. lai, of which the derivation is doubtful. The New English Dictionary rejects Celtic origins sometimes put forward, such as Ir. laoidh, Welsh llais, and takes O. Mid. and High Ger. leich as the probable source. (2) “Non-clerical” or “unlearned.” In this sense “lay” comes directly from Fr. lai (laïque, the learned form nearer to the Latin, is now used) from Lat. laicus, Gr. λαϊκός, of or belonging to the people (λαός, Attic λεώς). The word is now specially applied to persons who are not in orders, and more widely to those who do not belong to other learned professions, particularly the law and medicine. The New English Dictionary quotes two examples from versions of the Bible. In the Douai version of 1 Sam. xxi. 4, Ahimelech tells David that he has “no lay bread at hand but only holy bread”; here the Authorized Version has “common bread,” the Vulgate laicos panes. In Coverdale’s version of Acts iv. 13, the high priest and his kindred marvel at Peter and John as being “unlearned and lay people”; the Authorized Version has “unlearned and ignorant men.” In a cathedral of the Church of England “lay clerks” and “lay vicars” sing such portions of the service as may be performed by laymen and clergy in minor orders. “Lay readers” are persons who are granted a commission by the bishop to perform certain religious duties in a particular parish. The commission remains in force until it is revoked by the bishop or his successors, or till there is a new incumbent in the parish, when it has to be renewed. In a religious order a “lay brother” is freed from duties at religious services performed by the other members, and from their studies, but is bound by vows of obedience and chastity and serves the order by manual labour. For “lay impropriator” see Appropriation, and for “lay rector” see Rector and Tithes; see further Laymen, House of. (3) “Lay” as a verb means “to make to lie down,” “to place upon the ground,” &c. The past tense is “laid”; it is vulgarly confused with the verb “to lie,” of which the past is “lay.” The common root of both “lie” and “lay” is represented by O. Teut. leg; cf. Dutch leggen, Ger. legen, and Eng. “ledge.”1 (4) “Lay-figure” is the name commonly given to articulated figures of human beings or animals, made of wood, papier-maché or other materials; draped and posed, such figures serve as models for artists (see Models, Artists). The word has no connexion with “to lay,” to place in position, but is an adaptation of the word “layman,” commonly used with this meaning in the 18th century. This was adapted from Dutch leeman (the older form is ledenman) and meant an “articulated or jointed man” from led, now lid, a joint; cf. Ger. Gliedermann.

LAY, a word with multiple meanings. Aside from outdated and regional uses, like the East Anglian term meaning “pond,” which might be related to Latin lacus, meaning pool or lake, or its application in weaving for the batten of a loom, where it’s a variation of “lath,” the main uses are as follows: (1) A song or, more precisely, a short poem, either lyrical or narrative, that could be sung or set to music; these included the ballads performed by minstrels. The phrase “Lay of the Nibelungen” comes from a mistaken connection of the word with German Lied, meaning song, which appears in Anglo-Saxon as léoð. “Lay” originates from Old French lai, with unclear derivation. The New English Dictionary dismisses Celtic roots sometimes suggested, like Irish laoidh, Welsh llais, and considers Old Middle and High German leich as the likely source. (2) “Non-clerical” or “unlearned.” In this context, “lay” comes directly from French lai (laïque, the more formal term closer to Latin, is now used) from Latin laicus, Greek popular, meaning of or belonging to the people (people, Attic λεώς). The term now specifically describes individuals who are not ordained, and more broadly applies to those outside other learned fields, particularly law and medicine. The New English Dictionary cites two examples from Bible translations. In the Douai version of 1 Sam. xxi. 4, Ahimelech tells David he has “no lay bread at hand but only holy bread”; here, the Authorized Version uses “common bread,” while the Vulgate has laicos panes. In Coverdale’s version of Acts iv. 13, the high priest and his kin are astonished at Peter and John, noting they are “unlearned and lay people”; the Authorized Version states “unlearned and ignorant men.” In an English cathedral, “lay clerks” and “lay vicars” perform the parts of the service allowed to laypeople and clergy in lower orders. “Lay readers” are individuals given a commission by the bishop to carry out certain religious tasks in a specific parish. This commission remains active until revoked by the bishop or his successors, or until a new incumbent takes over, at which point it needs to be renewed. Within a religious order, a “lay brother” is exempt from religious services conducted by other members and from their studies, yet is bound by vows of obedience and chastity, serving the order through manual labor. For “lay impropriator” see Appropriation, and for “lay rector” see Rector and Tithes; see further Laymen, House of. (3) “Lay” as a verb means “to lay down,” “to put on the ground,” etc. The past tense is “laid”; it is often confused with the verb “to lie,” whose past is “lay.” The shared root of “lie” and “lay” comes from Old Teutonic leg; see Dutch leggen, German legen, and English “ledge.”1 (4) “Lay-figure” is the term commonly used for articulated figures of humans or animals made from wood, papier-mâché, or other materials; dressed and posed, these figures serve as models for artists (see Models, Artists). The word is not related to “to lay,” meaning to place, but is derived from the word “layman,” which was often used this way in the 18th century. This was adapted from Dutch leeman (the older form is ledenman) and originally meant an “articulated or jointed man” from led, now lid, meaning a joint; see German Gliedermann.


1 The verb “to lie,” to speak falsely, to tell a falsehood, is in O. Eng. léogan; it appears in most Teutonic languages, e.g. Dutch lugen, Ger. lügen.

1 The verb “to lie,” which means to speak falsely or tell a lie, comes from Old English léogan; it shows up in most Germanic languages, such as Dutch lugen and German lügen.

LAYA, JEAN LOUIS (1761-1833), French dramatist, was born in Paris on the 4th of December 1761 and died in August 1833. He wrote his first comedy in collaboration with Gabriel M. J. B. Legouvé in 1785, but the piece, though accepted by the Comédie Française, was never represented. In 1789 he produced a plea for religious toleration in the form of a five-act tragedy in verse, Jean Calas; the injustice of the disgrace cast on a family by the crime of one of its members formed the theme of Les Dangers de l’opinion (1790); but it is by his Ami des lois (1793) that Laya is remembered. This energetic protest against mob-rule, with its scarcely veiled characterizations of Robespierre as Nomophage and of Marat as Duricrâne, was an act of the highest courage, for the play was produced at the Théâtre Français (temporarily Théâtre de la Nation) only 311 nineteen days before the execution of Louis XVI. Ten days after its first production the piece was prohibited by the commune, but the public demanded its representation; the mayor of Paris was compelled to appeal to the convention, and the piece was played while some 30,000 Parisians guarded the hall. Laya went into hiding, and several persons convicted of having a copy of the obnoxious play in their possession were guillotined. At the end of the Terror Laya returned to Paris. In 1813 he replaced Delille in the Paris chair of literary history and French poetry; he was admitted to the Academy in 1817. Laya produced in 1797 Les Deux Stuarts, and in 1799 Falkland, the title-rôle of which provided Talma with one of his finest opportunities. Laya’s works, which chiefly owe their interest to the circumstances attending their production, were collected in 1836-1837.

LAYA, JEAN LOUIS (1761-1833), was a French playwright born in Paris on December 4, 1761, and he died in August 1833. He co-wrote his first comedy with Gabriel M. J. B. Legouvé in 1785, but although it was accepted by the Comédie Française, it was never performed. In 1789, he wrote a five-act tragic play in verse titled Jean Calas, advocating for religious tolerance; the theme of Les Dangers de l’opinion (1790) revolved around the unfair stigma faced by a family because of one member's actions. However, Laya is best remembered for Ami des lois (1793), a bold statement against mob rule that subtly depicted Robespierre as Nomophage and Marat as Duricrâne. This work demonstrated remarkable bravery, as it premiered at the Théâtre Français (temporarily Théâtre de la Nation) just nineteen days before the execution of Louis XVI. The play was banned ten days after its debut by the commune, but there was significant public demand for it; the mayor of Paris had to reach out to the convention, leading to a performance with around 30,000 Parisians protecting the venue. Following this, Laya went into hiding, and several individuals found with copies of the controversial play were guillotined. After the Terror, Laya returned to Paris. In 1813, he took over Delille's position in the Paris chair of literary history and French poetry, and he was admitted to the Academy in 1817. Laya also produced Les Deux Stuarts in 1797 and Falkland in 1799, with the title role offering Talma one of his best opportunities. Laya’s works, which are mainly notable due to the context of their performance, were compiled in 1836-1837.

See Notice biographique sur J. L. Laya (1833); Ch. Nodier, Discours de réception, 26th December (1833); Welschinger, Théâtre de la révolution (1880).

See Notice biographique sur J. L. Laya (1833); Ch. Nodier, Discours de réception, 26th December (1833); Welschinger, Théâtre de la révolution (1880).

LAYAMON, early English poet, was the author of a chronicle of Britain entitled Brut, a paraphrase of the Brut d’Angleterre by Wace, a native of Jersey, who is also known as the author of the Roman de Rou. The excellent edition of Layamon by Sir F. Madden (Society of Antiquaries, London, 1847) should be consulted. All that is known concerning Layamon is derived from two extant MSS., which present texts that often vary considerably, and it is necessary to understand their comparative value before any conclusions can be drawn. The older text (here called the A-text) lies very near the original text, which is unfortunately lost, though it now and then omits lines which are absolutely necessary to the sense. The later text (here called the B-text) represents a later recension of the original version by another writer who frequently omits couplets, and alters the language by the substitution of better-known words for such as seemed to be obsolescent; e.g. harme (harm) in place of balewe (bale), and dead in place of feie (fated to die, or dead). Hence little reliance can be placed on the B-text, its chief merit being that it sometimes preserves couplets which seem to have been accidentally omitted in A; besides which, it affords a valuable commentary on the original version.

LAYAMON, was an early English poet and the author of a chronicle of Britain called Brut, which is a paraphrase of the Brut d’Angleterre by Wace, a writer from Jersey, who is also known for the Roman de Rou. The excellent edition of Layamon by Sir F. Madden (Society of Antiquaries, London, 1847) should be referenced. Everything we know about Layamon comes from two surviving manuscripts, which often present texts that vary significantly, so it's important to understand their relative value before drawing any conclusions. The older text (referred to here as the A-text) is quite close to the original text, which, unfortunately, is lost, although it sometimes omits lines that are essential for understanding. The later text (referred to here as the B-text) is a later version of the original by another writer who often leaves out couplets and changes the language by replacing less common words with more familiar ones; for example, harme (harm) instead of balewe (bale), and dead instead of feie (fated to die or dead). Therefore, little trust can be placed in the B-text, with its main advantage being that it sometimes includes couplets that seem to have been accidentally left out of the A-text; in addition, it provides a valuable commentary on the original version.

We learn from the brief prologue that Layamon was a priest among the people, and was the son of Leovenath (a late spelling of A.-S. Leofnoth); also, that he lived at Ernley, at a noble church on Severn bank, close by Radstone. This is certainly Areley Regis, or Areley Kings, close by Redstone rock and ferry, 1 m. to the S. of Stourport in Worcestershire. The B-text turns Layamon into the later form Laweman, i.e. Law-man, correctly answering to Chaucer’s “Man of Lawe,” though here apparently used as a mere name. It also turns Leovenath into Leuca, i.e. Leofeca, a diminutive of Leofa, which is itself a pet-name for Leofnoth; so that there is no real contradiction. But it absurdly substitutes “with the good knight,” which is practically meaningless, for “at a noble church.”

We find out in the short prologue that Layamon was a priest among the people and the son of Leovenath (a later spelling of A.-S. Leofnoth). He lived in Ernley, near a noble church by the Severn River, not far from Radstone. This is definitely Areley Regis, or Areley Kings, located near Redstone rock and ferry, 1 mile south of Stourport in Worcestershire. The B-text changes Layamon to the later form Laweman, meaning Law-man, which corresponds to Chaucer’s “Man of Lawe,” although here it seems to be used just as a name. It also changes Leovenath to Leuca, meaning Leofeca, a diminutive of Leofa, which is a nickname for Leofnoth; so there's no real contradiction. However, it absurdly replaces “at a noble church” with “with the good knight,” which is pretty much meaningless.

We know no more about Layamon except that he was a great lover of books; and that he procured three books in particular which he prized above others, “turning over the leaves, and beholding them lovingly.” These were: the English book that St Beda made; another in Latin that St Albin and St Austin made; whilst the third was made by a French clerk named Wace, who (in 1155) gave a copy to the noble Eleanor, who was queen of the high king Henry (i.e. Henry II.).

We don't know much about Layamon except that he was a passionate book lover. He specifically treasured three books more than others, "turning the pages and looking at them fondly." These were: the English book created by St. Bede; another in Latin made by St. Alban and St. Augustine; and the third was created by a French clerk named Wace, who (in 1155) gave a copy to the noble Eleanor, the queen of the high king Henry (i.e. Henry II.).

The first of these really means the Anglo-Saxon translation of Beda’s Ecclesiastical History, which begins with the words: “Ic Beda, Cristes theow,” i.e. “I, Beda, Christ’s servant.” The second is a strange description of the original of the translation, i.e. Albinus Beda’s own Latin book, the second paragraph of which begins with the words: “Auctor ante omnes atque adiutor opusculi huius Albinus Abba reverentissimus vir per omnia doctissimus extitit”; which Layamon evidently misunderstood. As to the share of St Augustine in this work, see Book I., chapters 23-34, and Book II., chapters 1 and 2, which are practically all concerned with him and occupy more than a tenth of the whole work. The third book was Wace’s poem, Brut d’Angleterre. But we find that although Layamon had ready access to all three of these works, he soon settled down to the translation of the third, without troubling much about the others. His chief obligation to Beda is for the well-known story about Pope Gregory and the English captives at Rome; see Layamon, vol. iii. 180.

The first of these refers to the Anglo-Saxon translation of Bede’s Ecclesiastical History, which starts with the words: “Ic Beda, Cristes theow,” i.e. “I, Bede, Christ’s servant.” The second is a puzzling description of the original of the translation, i.e. Albinus Bede’s own Latin book, the second paragraph of which begins with: “Auctor ante omnes atque adiutor opusculi huius Albinus Abba reverentissimus vir per omnia doctissimus extitit”; which Layamon clearly misunderstood. Regarding St Augustine’s contributions to this work, see Book I., chapters 23-34, and Book II., chapters 1 and 2, which mainly focus on him and make up more than a tenth of the entire work. The third book was Wace’s poem, Brut d’Angleterre. However, we see that although Layamon had easy access to all three of these works, he quickly directed his efforts toward translating the third, without giving much thought to the others. His main reliance on Bede is for the well-known story about Pope Gregory and the English captives in Rome; see Layamon, vol. iii. 180.

It is impossible to enter here upon a discussion of the numerous points of interest which a proper examination of this vast and important work would present to any careful inquirer. Only a few bare results can be here enumerated. The A-text may be dated about 1205, and the B-text (practically by another writer) about 1275. Both texts, the former especially, are remarkably free from admixture with words of French origin; the lists that have been given hitherto are inexact, but it may be said that the number of French words in the A-text can hardly exceed 100, or in the B-text 160. Layamon’s work is largely original; Wace’s Brut contains 15,300 lines, and Layamon’s 32,240 lines of a similar length; and many of Layamon’s additions to Wace are notable, such as his story “regarding the fairy elves at Arthur’s birth, and his transportation by them after death in a boat to Avalon, the abode of Argante, their queen”; see Sir F. Madden’s pref. p. xv. Wace’s Brut is almost wholly a translation of the Latin chronicle concerning the early history of Britain by Geoffrey of Monmouth, who said that he obtained his materials from a manuscript written in Welsh. The name Brut is the French form of Brutus, who was the fabulous grandson of Ascanius, and great-grandson of Aeneas of Troy, the hero of Virgil’s Aeneid. After many adventures, this Brutus arrived in England, founded Troynovant or New Troy (better known as London), and was the progenitor of a long line of British kings, among whom were Locrine, Bladud, Leir, Gorboduc, Ferrex and Porrex, Lud, Cymbeline, Constantine, Vortigern, Uther and Arthur; and from this mythical Brutus the name Brut was transferred so as to denote the entire chronicle of this British history. Layamon gives the whole story, from the time of Brutus to that of Cadwalader, who may be identified with the Caedwalla of the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle, baptized by Pope Sergius in the year 688. Both texts of Layamon are in a south-western dialect; the A-text in particular shows the Wessex dialect of earlier times (commonly called Anglo-Saxon) in a much later form, and we can hardly doubt that the author, as he intimates, could read the old version of Beda intelligently. The remarks upon the B-text in Sir F. Madden’s preface are not to the point; the peculiar spellings to which he refers (such as same for shame) are by no means due to any confusion with the Northumbrian dialect, but rather to the usual vagaries of a scribe who knew French better than English, and had some difficulty in acquiring the English pronunciation and in representing it accurately. At the same time, he was not strong in English grammar, and was apt to confuse the plural form with the singular in the tenses of verbs; and this is the simple explanation of most of the examples of so-called “nunnation” in this poem (such as the use of wolden for wolde), which only existed in writing and must not be seriously considered as representing real spoken sounds. The full proof of this would occupy too much space; but it should be noticed that, in many instances, “this pleonastic n has been struck out or erased by a second hand.” In other instances it has escaped notice, and that is all that need be said. The peculiar metre of the poem has been sufficiently treated by J. Schipper. An abstract of the poem has been given by Henry Morley; and good general criticisms of it by B. ten Brink and others.

It’s impossible to dive into all the interesting aspects that a proper look at this vast and significant work would reveal to a careful reader. Only a few basic results can be listed here. The A-text is thought to date back to around 1205, while the B-text (essentially by a different author) is around 1275. Both texts, particularly the former, are remarkably free from French-derived words; previous counts have been inaccurate, but it can be said that the A-text contains fewer than 100 French words, and the B-text about 160. Layamon’s work is largely original; Wace’s Brut has 15,300 lines, while Layamon’s has 32,240 lines of a similar length, and many of Layamon’s additions to Wace are significant, such as his tale of “the fairy elves at Arthur’s birth, and how they transported him after death in a boat to Avalon, the home of their queen Argante”; see Sir F. Madden’s pref. p. xv. Wace’s Brut is mostly a translation of the Latin chronicle of early British history by Geoffrey of Monmouth, who claimed he got his information from a manuscript written in Welsh. The name Brut is the French version of Brutus, the legendary grandson of Ascanius and great-grandson of Aeneas from Troy, the hero of Virgil’s Aeneid. After many adventures, Brutus arrived in England, founded Troynovant or New Troy (now known as London), and became the ancestor of a long line of British kings, including Locrine, Bladud, Leir, Gorboduc, Ferrex and Porrex, Lud, Cymbeline, Constantine, Vortigern, Uther, and Arthur; thus, the name Brut was adopted to refer to the entire chronicle of British history. Layamon tells the whole story, from Brutus to Cadwalader, who can be identified with Caedwalla from the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle, baptized by Pope Sergius in 688. Both of Layamon's texts are in a southwestern dialect; the A-text in particular shows a much later form of the earlier Wessex dialect (often called Anglo-Saxon), and we can hardly doubt that the author, as he suggests, could read the old version of Bede fluently. Sir F. Madden’s points about the B-text are not relevant; the peculiar spellings he mentions (like same for shame) aren’t caused by confusion with the Northumbrian dialect but rather by the usual quirks of a scribe who knew French better than English and struggled with English pronunciation and accurate representation. At the same time, he wasn’t very strong in English grammar and tended to mix up singular and plural forms in verb tenses; this explains most examples of so-called “nunnation” in this poem (such as the use of wolden instead of wolde), which only existed in writing and should not be taken to represent real spoken sounds. Fully proving this would take too much space, but it’s worth noting that in many cases, “this pleonastic n has been struck out or erased by a second hand.” In other instances, it went unnoticed, and that’s all that needs to be said. The unique meter of the poem has been sufficiently covered by J. Schipper. An overview of the poem has been provided by Henry Morley, along with good general critiques by B. ten Brink and others.

See Layamon’s Brut, or a Chronicle of Britain; a Poetical Semi-Saxon Paraphrase of the Brut of Wace; ... by Sir F. Madden (1847); B. ten Brink, Early English Literature, trans. by H. M. Kennedy (in Bonn’s Standard Library, 1885); H. Morley, English Writers, vol. iii. (1888); J. Schipper, Englische Metrik, i. (Bonn, 1882), E. Guest, A History of English Rhythms (new ed. by W. W. Skeat, 1882), Article “Layamon,” in the Dict. Nat. Biog.; Six Old English Chronicles, including Gildas, Nennius and Geoffrey of Monmouth (in Bohn’s Antiquarian Library); Le Roux de Lincy, Le Roman de Brut, par Wace, avec un commentaire et des notes (Rouen, 1836-1838), E. Mätzner, Altenglische Sprachproben (Berlin, 1867).

See Layamon’s Brut, or a Chronicle of Britain; a Poetical Semi-Saxon Paraphrase of the Brut of Wace; ... by Sir F. Madden (1847); B. ten Brink, Early English Literature, translated by H. M. Kennedy (in Bonn’s Standard Library, 1885); H. Morley, English Writers, vol. iii. (1888); J. Schipper, Englische Metrik, i. (Bonn, 1882), E. Guest, A History of English Rhythms (new ed. by W. W. Skeat, 1882), Article “Layamon,” in the Dict. Nat. Biog.; Six Old English Chronicles, including Gildas, Nennius, and Geoffrey of Monmouth (in Bohn’s Antiquarian Library); Le Roux de Lincy, Le Roman de Brut, par Wace, avec un commentaire et des notes (Rouen, 1836-1838), E. Mätzner, Altenglische Sprachproben (Berlin, 1867).

(W. W. S.)

312

312

LAYARD, SIR AUSTEN HENRY (1817-1894), British author and diplomatist, the excavator of Nineveh, was born in Paris on the 5th of March 1817. The Layards were of Huguenot descent. His father, Henry P. J. Layard, of the Ceylon Civil Service, was the son of Charles Peter Layard, dean of Bristol, and grandson of Daniel Peter Layard, the physician. Through his mother, a daughter of Nathaniel Austen, banker, of Ramsgate, he inherited Spanish blood. This strain of cosmopolitanism must have been greatly strengthened by the circumstances of his education. Much of his boyhood was spent in Italy, where he received part of his schooling, and acquired a taste for the fine arts and a love of travel; but he was at school also in England, France and Switzerland. After spending nearly six years in the office of his uncle, Benjamin Austen, a solicitor, he was tempted to leave England for Ceylon by the prospect of obtaining an appointment in the civil service, and he started in 1839 with the intention of making an overland journey across Asia. After wandering for many months, chiefly in Persia, and having abandoned his intention of proceeding to Ceylon, he returned in 1842 to Constantinople, where he made the acquaintance of Sir Stratford Canning, the British ambassador, who employed him in various unofficial diplomatic missions in European Turkey. In 1845, encouraged and assisted by Canning, Layard left Constantinople to make those explorations among the ruins of Assyria with which his name is chiefly associated. This expedition was in fulfilment of a design which he had formed, when, during his former travels in the East, his curiosity had been greatly excited by the ruins of Nimrud on the Tigris, and by the great mound of Kuyunjik, near Mosul, already partly excavated by Botta. Layard remained in the neighbourhood of Mosul, carrying on excavations at Kuyunjik and Nimrud, and investigating the condition of various tribes, until 1847; and, returning to England in 1848, published Nineveh and its Remains: with an Account of a Visit to the Chaldaean Christians of Kurdistan, and the Yezidis, or Devil-worshippers; and an Inquiry into the Manners and Arts of the Ancient Assyrians (2 vols., 1848-1849). To illustrate the antiquities described in this work he published a large folio volume of Illustrations of the Monuments of Nineveh (1849). After spending a few months in England, and receiving the degree of D.C.L. from the university of Oxford, Layard returned to Constantinople as attaché to the British embassy, and, in August 1849, started on a second expedition, in the course of which he extended his investigations to the ruins of Babylon and the mounds of southern Mesopotamia. His record of this expedition, Discoveries in the Ruins of Nineveh and Babylon, which was illustrated by another folio volume, called A Second Series of the Monuments of Nineveh, was published in 1853. During these expeditions, often in circumstances of great difficulty, Layard despatched to England the splendid specimens which now form the greater part of the collection of Assyrian antiquities in the British Museum. Apart from the archaeological value of his work in identifying Kuyunjik as the site of Nineveh, and in providing a great mass of materials for scholars to work upon, these two books of Layard’s are among the best-written books of travel in the language.

LAYARD, SIR AUSTEN HENRY (1817-1894), British author and diplomat, known for excavating Nineveh, was born in Paris on March 5, 1817. The Layards were of Huguenot descent. His father, Henry P. J. Layard, was part of the Ceylon Civil Service, the son of Charles Peter Layard, dean of Bristol, and grandson of Daniel Peter Layard, a physician. Through his mother, a daughter of Nathaniel Austen, a banker from Ramsgate, he had Spanish ancestry. This mix of cultures must have been greatly influenced by his diverse education. He spent much of his childhood in Italy, where he received part of his schooling, developed a taste for the fine arts, and fostered a love for travel. However, he also attended school in England, France, and Switzerland. After nearly six years working in his uncle Benjamin Austen's law office, he was lured to Ceylon by the opportunity to join the civil service and left in 1839, intending to travel overland across Asia. After months of wandering, mainly in Persia, and having given up on going to Ceylon, he returned to Constantinople in 1842, where he met Sir Stratford Canning, the British ambassador, who enlisted him for various unofficial diplomatic assignments in European Turkey. In 1845, with Canning's encouragement and assistance, Layard left Constantinople to explore the ruins of Assyria, which he is most famously known for. This expedition fulfilled a plan he had formed during his earlier travels in the East when he became fascinated by the ruins of Nimrud on the Tigris and the large mound of Kuyunjik near Mosul, which was already partially excavated by Botta. Layard stayed in the Mosul area, conducting excavations at Kuyunjik and Nimrud, and studying the local tribes until 1847. When he returned to England in 1848, he published Nineveh and its Remains: with an Account of a Visit to the Chaldaean Christians of Kurdistan, and the Yezidis, or Devil-worshippers; and an Inquiry into the Manners and Arts of the Ancient Assyrians (2 vols., 1848-1849). To showcase the antiquities described in this work, he released a large folio volume titled Illustrations of the Monuments of Nineveh (1849). After a few months in England and receiving a D.C.L. degree from Oxford, Layard returned to Constantinople as an attaché to the British embassy, and in August 1849, embarked on a second expedition, which included investigations into the ruins of Babylon and the mounds of southern Mesopotamia. His account of this journey, Discoveries in the Ruins of Nineveh and Babylon, illustrated by another folio volume named A Second Series of the Monuments of Nineveh, was published in 1853. Throughout these expeditions, often under challenging conditions, Layard sent back to England magnificent artifacts, forming a significant portion of the Assyrian antiquities collection at the British Museum. Besides the archaeological significance of his work in identifying Kuyunjik as the location of Nineveh and providing valuable resources for scholars, these two books by Layard are considered some of the best-written travel narratives in the language.

Layard now turned to politics. Elected as a Liberal member for Aylesbury in 1852, he was for a few weeks under-secretary for foreign affairs, but afterwards freely criticized the government, especially in connexion with army administration. He was present in the Crimea during the war, and was a member of the committee appointed to inquire into the conduct of the expedition. In 1855 he refused from Lord Palmerston an office not connected with foreign affairs, was elected lord rector of Aberdeen university, and on 15th June moved a resolution in the House of Commons (defeated by a large majority) declaring that in public appointments merit had been sacrificed to private influence and an adherence to routine. After being defeated at Aylesbury in 1857, he visited India to investigate the causes of the Mutiny. He unsuccessfully contested York in 1859, but was elected for Southwark in 1860, and from 1861 to 1866 was under-secretary for foreign affairs in the successive administrations of Lord Palmerston and Lord John Russell. In 1866 he was appointed a trustee of the British Museum, and in 1868 chief commissioner of works in W. E. Gladstone’s government and a member of the Privy Council. He retired from parliament in 1869, on being sent as envoy extraordinary to Madrid. In 1877 he was appointed by Lord Beaconsfield ambassador at Constantinople, where he remained until Gladstone’s return to power in 1880, when he finally retired from public life. In 1878, on the occasion of the Berlin conference, he received the grand cross of the Bath. Layard’s political life was somewhat stormy. His manner was brusque, and his advocacy of the causes which he had at heart, though always perfectly sincere, was vehement to the point sometimes of recklessness. Layard retired to Venice, where he devoted much of his time to collecting pictures of the Venetian school, and to writing on Italian art. On this subject he was a disciple of his friend G. Morelli, whose views he embodied in his revision of F. Kugler’s Handbook of Painting, Italian Schools (1887). He wrote also an introduction to Miss Ffoulkes’s translation of Morelli’s Italian Painters (1892-1893), and edited that part of Murray’s Handbook of Rome (1894) which deals with pictures. In 1887 he published, from notes taken at the time, a record of his first journey to the East, entitled Early Adventures in Persia, Susiana and Babylonia. An abbreviation of this work, which as a book of travel is even more delightful than its predecessors, was published in 1894, shortly after the author’s death, with a brief introductory notice by Lord Aberdare. Layard also from time to time contributed papers to various learned societies, including the Huguenot Society, of which he was first president. He died in London on the 5th of July 1894.

Layard shifted his focus to politics. He was elected as a Liberal member for Aylesbury in 1852 and briefly served as under-secretary for foreign affairs. However, he later openly criticized the government, particularly regarding army management. He was in Crimea during the war and was part of the committee looking into the expedition's conduct. In 1855, he turned down an office unrelated to foreign affairs from Lord Palmerston, was elected lord rector of Aberdeen university, and on June 15, he moved a resolution in the House of Commons (which was defeated by a large majority) stating that merit in public appointments had been overshadowed by personal connections and routine practices. After losing the Aylesbury seat in 1857, he traveled to India to explore the reasons behind the Mutiny. He ran unsuccessfully for York in 1859 but was elected for Southwark in 1860, serving as under-secretary for foreign affairs from 1861 to 1866 in the successive administrations of Lord Palmerston and Lord John Russell. In 1866, he became a trustee of the British Museum, and in 1868, he was made chief commissioner of works in W.E. Gladstone’s government and joined the Privy Council. He left Parliament in 1869 to become envoy extraordinary to Madrid. In 1877, Lord Beaconsfield appointed him ambassador to Constantinople, where he stayed until Gladstone returned to power in 1880, at which point he retired from public life. He received the grand cross of the Bath during the Berlin conference in 1878. Layard’s political career was quite tumultuous. He had a blunt manner, and while his advocacy for his causes was always sincere, it often came off as overly intense. Layard then moved to Venice, spending a lot of time collecting paintings from the Venetian school and writing about Italian art. He was influenced by his friend G. Morelli, incorporating Morelli’s ideas into his revision of F. Kugler’s Handbook of Painting, Italian Schools (1887). He also wrote an introduction for Miss Ffoulkes's translation of Morelli’s Italian Painters (1892-1893) and edited the section of Murray’s Handbook of Rome (1894) that discussed paintings. In 1887, he published a record of his first journey to the East, based on notes he took at the time, titled Early Adventures in Persia, Susiana and Babylonia. A condensed version of this travel book, which is even more enjoyable than its predecessors, was published in 1894 shortly after he passed away, with a brief introduction by Lord Aberdare. Layard also occasionally contributed papers to various scholarly societies, including the Huguenot Society, where he served as the first president. He died in London on July 5, 1894.

(A. Gl.)

LAYMEN, HOUSES OF, deliberative assemblies of the laity of the Church of England, one for the province of Canterbury, and the other for the province of York. That of Canterbury was formed in 1886, and that of York shortly afterwards. They are merely consultative bodies, and the primary intention of their foundation was to associate the laity in the deliberations of convocation. They have no legal status. The members are elected by the various diocesan conferences, which are in turn elected by the laity of their respective parishes or rural deaneries. Ten members are appointed for the diocese of London, six for each of the dioceses of Winchester, Rochester, Lichfield and Worcester; and four for each of the remaining dioceses. The president of each house has the discretionary power of appointing additional laymen, not exceeding ten in number.

LAYMEN, HOUSES OF, deliberative assemblies of the laity of the Church of England, one for the province of Canterbury and the other for the province of York. Canterbury’s assembly was established in 1886, with York’s assembly created shortly after. They are simply advisory groups, primarily aimed at involving laity in the discussions of convocation. They have no legal authority. Members are elected by various diocesan conferences, which are themselves elected by the laypeople of their respective parishes or rural deaneries. Ten members are appointed for the diocese of London, six for each of the dioceses of Winchester, Rochester, Lichfield, and Worcester; and four for each of the other dioceses. The president of each house has the discretion to appoint up to ten additional lay members.

LAYNEZ (or Lainez), DIEGO (1512-1565), the second general of the Society of Jesus, was born in Castile, and after studying at Alcala joined Ignatius of Loyola in Paris, being one of the six who with Loyola in August 1534 took the vow of missionary work in Palestine in the Montmartre church. This plan fell through, and Laynez became professor of scholastic theology at Sapienza. After the order had been definitely established (1540) Laynez was sent to Germany. He was one of the pope’s theologians at the council of Trent (q.v.), where he played a weighty and decisive part. When Loyola died in 1556 Laynez acted as vicar of the society, and two years later became general. Before his death at Rome, on the 19th of January 1565, he had immensely strengthened the despotic constitution of the order and developed its educational activities (see Jesuits).

LAYNEZ (or Lainez), DIEGO (1512-1565), the second leader of the Society of Jesus, was born in Castile. After studying at Alcala, he joined Ignatius of Loyola in Paris, being one of the six who, along with Loyola, vowed to undertake missionary work in Palestine at the Montmartre church in August 1534. This plan didn't work out, and Laynez became a professor of scholastic theology at Sapienza. After the order was officially established in 1540, Laynez was sent to Germany. He was one of the pope's theologians at the council of Trent (q.v.), where he played an important and decisive role. When Loyola passed away in 1556, Laynez served as the vicar of the society, and two years later, he became the leader. Before he died in Rome on January 19, 1565, he significantly strengthened the authoritarian structure of the order and expanded its educational efforts (see Jesuits).

His Disputationes Tridentinae were published in 2 volumes in 1886. Lives by Michel d’Esne (Douai, 1597) and Pet. Ribadeneira (Madrid, 1592; Lat. trans. by A. Schott, Antwerp, 1598). See also H. Müller, Les Origines de la Compagnie de Jésus: Ignace et Lainez (1898).

His Disputationes Tridentinae were published in two volumes in 1886. Lives by Michel d’Esne (Douai, 1597) and Pet. Ribadeneira (Madrid, 1592; Latin translation by A. Schott, Antwerp, 1598). See also H. Müller, Les Origines de la Compagnie de Jésus: Ignace et Lainez (1898).

LAZAR, one afflicted with the disease of leprosy (q.v.). The term is an adaptation in medieval Latin of the name of Lazarus (q.v.), in Luke xvi. 20, who was supposed to be a leper. The word was not confined to persons suffering from leprosy; thus Caxton (The Life of Charles the Great, 37), “there atte laste were guarysshed and heled viij lazars of the palesey.”

LAZAR, someone affected by leprosy (q.v.). The term is adapted from the name Lazarus (q.v.), mentioned in Luke 16:20, who was believed to be a leper. The word wasn't only used for people with leprosy; for instance, Caxton (The Life of Charles the Great, 37) states, “in the end, eight lepers from the hospital were cured and healed.”

Lazaretto or Lazar-House is a hospital for the reception of poor persons suffering from the plague, leprosy or other infectious or contagious diseases. A peculiar use of “lazaretto” is found in the application of the term, now obsolete, to a place in the after-part of a merchant vessel for the storage of provisions, &c. 313 Lazzarone, a name now often applied generally to beggars, is an Italian term, particularly used of the poorest class of Neapolitans, who, without any fixed abode, live by odd jobs and fishing, but chiefly by begging.

Quarantine station or Lazarus House is a hospital for the care of poor people suffering from the plague, leprosy, or other infectious diseases. An unusual use of “lazaretto” is the now obsolete reference to a space in the back of a merchant ship for storing supplies, etc. 313 Lazzarone, a term now commonly used to refer to beggars in general, originates from Italian and specifically describes the poorest class of Neapolitans, who live without a permanent home, getting by on odd jobs, fishing, and primarily begging.

LAZARITES (Lazarists or Lazarians), the popular names of the “Congregation of Priests of the Mission” in the Roman Catholic Church. It had its origin in the successful mission to the common people conducted by St Vincent de Paul (q.v.) and five other priests on the estates of the Gondi family. More immediately it dates from 1624, when the little community acquired a permanent settlement in the collège des Bons Enfans in Paris. Archiepiscopal recognition was obtained in 1626; by a papal bull of the 12th of January 1632, the society was constituted a congregation, with St Vincent de Paul at its head. About the same time the canons regular of St Victor handed over to the congregation the priory of St Lazarus (formerly a lazar-house) in Paris, whence the name of Lazarites or Lazarists. Within a few years they had acquired another house in Paris and set up other establishments throughout France; missions were also sent to Italy (1638), Tunis (1643), Algiers and Ireland (1646), Madagascar (1648) and Poland (1651). A fresh bull of Alexander VII. in April 1655 further confirmed the society; this was followed by a brief in September of the same year, regulating its constitution. The rules then adopted, which were framed on the model of those of the Jesuits, were published at Paris in 1668 under the title Regulae seu constitutiones communes congregationis missionis. The special objects contemplated were the religious instruction of the lower classes, the training of the clergy and foreign missions. During the French Revolution the congregation was suppressed and St Lazare plundered by the mob; it was restored by Napoleon in 1804 at the desire of Pius VII., abolished by him in 1809 in consequence of a quarrel with the pope, and again restored in 1816. The Lazarites were expelled from Italy in 1871 and from Germany in 1873. The Lazarite province of Poland was singularly prosperous; at the date of its suppression in 1796 it possessed thirty-five establishments. The order was permitted to return in 1816, but is now extinct there. In Madagascar it had a mission from 1648 till 1674. In 1783 Lazarites were appointed to take the place of the Jesuits in the Levantine and Chinese missions; they still have some footing in China, and in 1874 their establishments throughout the Turkish empire numbered sixteen. In addition, they established branches in Persia, Abyssinia, Mexico, the South American republics, Portugal, Spain and Russia, some of which have been suppressed. In the same year they had fourteen establishments in the United States of America. The total number of Lazarites throughout the world is computed at about 3000. Amongst distinguished members of the congregation may be mentioned: P. Collet (1693-1770), writer on theology and ethics; J. de la Grive (1689-1757), geographer; E. Boré (d. 1878), orientalist; P. Bertholon (1689-1757), physician; and Armand David, Chinese missionary and traveller.

LAZARITES (Lazarists or Lazarians), the common names for the “Congregation of Priests of the Mission” in the Roman Catholic Church. It originated from the successful mission to the general public led by St. Vincent de Paul (q.v.) and five other priests on the estates of the Gondi family. More specifically, it dates back to 1624, when the small community established a permanent settlement at the collège des Bons Enfants in Paris. Archiepiscopal recognition was granted in 1626; by a papal bull on January 12, 1632, the society was officially recognized as a congregation, with St. Vincent de Paul as its leader. Around the same time, the canons regular of St. Victor transferred the priory of St. Lazarus (previously a lazar-house) in Paris to the congregation, giving rise to the name Lazarites or Lazarists. Within a few years, they had acquired another house in Paris and established other institutions throughout France; missions were also launched in Italy (1638), Tunisia (1643), Algiers and Ireland (1646), Madagascar (1648), and Poland (1651). A new bull from Alexander VII in April 1655 further confirmed the society; this was followed by a brief in September of the same year that regulated its constitution. The rules adopted then, modeled after those of the Jesuits, were published in Paris in 1668 under the title Regulae seu constitutiones communes congregationis missionis. The main goals were to provide religious education for the lower classes, train clergy, and support foreign missions. During the French Revolution, the congregation was suppressed, and St. Lazare was looted by the mob; it was restored by Napoleon in 1804 at the request of Pius VII, abolished by him in 1809 due to a disagreement with the pope, and restored again in 1816. The Lazarites were expelled from Italy in 1871 and from Germany in 1873. The Lazarite province of Poland was particularly successful; at the time of its suppression in 1796, it had thirty-five establishments. The order was allowed to return in 1816, but is now no longer present there. In Madagascar, it had a mission from 1648 until 1674. In 1783, Lazarites were assigned to replace the Jesuits in the Levant and Chinese missions; they still maintain a presence in China, and in 1874, their institutions throughout the Turkish empire numbered sixteen. Additionally, they set up branches in Persia, Abyssinia, Mexico, the South American republics, Portugal, Spain, and Russia, some of which have been suppressed. In the same year, they had fourteen establishments in the United States. The total number of Lazarites worldwide is estimated to be around 3,000. Among the notable members of the congregation are: P. Collet (1693-1770), a writer on theology and ethics; J. de la Grive (1689-1757), a geographer; E. Boré (d. 1878), an orientalist; P. Bertholon (1689-1757), a physician; and Armand David, a Chinese missionary and traveler.

See Regulae seu constitutiones communes congregationis missionis (Paris, 1668); Mémoires de la congrégation de la mission (1863); Congrégation de la mission. Répertoire historique (1900); Notices bibliographiques sur les écrivains de la congrégation de la mission (Angoulême, 1878); P. Hélyot, Dict. des ordres religieux, viii. 64-77; M. Heimbrecher, Die Orden und Kongregationen der katholischen Kirche, ii. (1897); C. Stork in Wetzer and Welte’s Kirchenlexikon (Catholic), vii.; E. Bougaud, History of St Vincent de Paul (1908).

See Regulae seu constitutiones communes congregationis missionis (Paris, 1668); Mémoires de la congrégation de la mission (1863); Congrégation de la mission. Répertoire historique (1900); Notices bibliographiques sur les écrivains de la congrégation de la mission (Angoulême, 1878); P. Hélyot, Dict. des ordres religieux, viii. 64-77; M. Heimbrecher, Die Orden und Kongregationen der katholischen Kirche, ii. (1897); C. Stork in Wetzer and Welte’s Kirchenlexikon (Catholic), vii.; E. Bougaud, History of St Vincent de Paul (1908).

LAZARUS (a contracted form of the Heb. name Eleazar, “God has helped,” Gr. Λάζαρος), a name which occurs in the New Testament in two connexions.

LAZARUS (a shortened version of the Hebrew name Eleazar, meaning "God has helped," in Greek Lazarus), is a name that appears in the New Testament in two contexts.

1. Lazarus of Bethany, brother of Martha and Mary. The story that he died and after four days was raised from the dead is told by John (xi., xii.) only, and is not mentioned by the Synoptists. By many this is regarded as the greatest of Christ’s miracles. It produced a great effect upon many Jews; the Acta Pilati says that Pilate trembled when he heard of it, and, according to Bayle’s Dictionary, Spinoza declared that if he were persuaded of its truth he would become a Christian. The story has been attacked more vigorously than any other portion of the Fourth Gospel, mainly on two grounds, (i.) the fact that, in spite of its striking character, it is omitted by the Synoptists, and (ii.) its unique significance. The personality of Lazarus in John’s account, his relation to Martha and Mary, and the possibility that John reconstructed the story by the aid of inferences from the story of the supper in Luke x. 40, and that of the anointing of Christ in Bethany given by Mark and Matthew, are among the chief problems. The controversy has given rise to a great mass of literature, discussions of which will be found in the lives of Christ, the biblical encyclopaedias and the commentaries on St John.

1. Lazarus from Bethany, brother of Martha and Mary. The story of his death and how he was brought back to life after four days is recounted only by John (xi., xii.) and is not mentioned by the other Gospels. Many consider this to be the greatest of Christ’s miracles. It had a huge impact on many Jews; the Acta Pilati claims that Pilate was shaken when he heard about it, and according to Bayle’s Dictionary, Spinoza said that if he were convinced of its truth, he would become a Christian. This account has faced more criticism than any other part of the Fourth Gospel, mainly for two reasons: (i.) despite its dramatic nature, it is not included by the other Gospels, and (ii.) its unique importance. The portrayal of Lazarus in John’s narrative, his relationship with Martha and Mary, and the possibility that John may have crafted the story based on inferences from the supper story in Luke x. 40 and the anointing of Christ in Bethany as given by Mark and Matthew, are some of the main issues. This debate has led to a wealth of literature, with discussions available in the lives of Christ, biblical encyclopedias, and commentaries on St. John.

2. Lazarus is also the name given by Luke (xvi. 20) to the beggar in the parable known as that of “Lazarus and Dives,”1 illustrating the misuse of wealth. There is little doubt that the name is introduced simply as part of the parable, and not with any idea of identifying the beggar with Lazarus of Bethany. It is curious, not only that Luke’s story does not appear in the other gospels, but also that in no other of Christ’s parables is a name given to the central character. Hence it was in early times thought that the story was historical, not allegorical (see Lazar).

2. Lazarus is the name given by Luke (xvi. 20) to the beggar in the parable known as “Lazarus and Dives,” 1 illustrating the misuse of wealth. There's little doubt that the name is included simply as part of the parable and not meant to connect the beggar with Lazarus of Bethany. It's interesting that Luke’s story doesn’t appear in the other gospels and that no other of Christ’s parables gives a name to the main character. Because of this, early on it was thought that the story was historical, not allegorical (see Lazar).


1 The English Bible does not use Lat. Dives (rich) as a proper name, saying merely “a certain rich man.” The idea that Dives was a proper name arose from the Vulgate quidam dives, whence it became a conventional name for a rich man.

1 The English Bible doesn't use the Latin Dives (rich) as a proper name, but just refers to “a certain rich man.” The notion that Dives was a proper name came from the Vulgate quidam dives, which is how it turned into a common term for a wealthy person.

LAZARUS, EMMA (1849-1887), American Jewish poetess, was born in New York. When the Civil War broke out she was soon inspired to lyric expression. Her first book (1867) included poems and translations which she wrote between the ages of fourteen and seventeen. As yet her models were classic and romantic. At the age of twenty-one she published Admetus and other Poems (1871). Admetus is inscribed to Emerson, who greatly influenced her, and with whom she maintained a regular correspondence for several years. She led a retired life, and had a modest conception of her own powers. Much of her next work appeared in Lippincott’s Magazine, but in 1874 she published a prose romance (Alide) based on Goethe’s autobiography, and received a generous letter of admiration from Turgeniev. Two years later she visited Concord and made the acquaintance of the Emerson circle, and while there read the proof-sheets of her tragedy The Spagnoletto. In 1881 she published her excellent translations of Heine’s poems. Meanwhile events were occurring which appealed to her Jewish sympathies and gave a new turn to her feeling. The Russian massacres of 1880-1881 were a trumpet-call to her. So far her Judaism had been latent. She belonged to the oldest Jewish congregation of New York, but she had not for some years taken a personal part in the observances of the synagogue. But from this time she took up the cause of her race, and “her verse rang out as it had never rung before, a clarion note, calling a people to heroic action and unity; to the consciousness and fulfilment of a grand destiny.” Her poems, “The Crowing of the Red Cock” and “The Banner of the Jew” (1882) stirred the Jewish consciousness and helped to produce the new Zionism (q.v.). She now wrote another drama, the Dance to Death, the scene of which is laid in Nordhausen in the 14th century; it is based on the accusation brought against the Jews of poisoning the wells and thus causing the Black Death. The Dance to Death was included (with some translations of medieval Hebrew poems) in Songs of a Semite (1882), which she dedicated to George Eliot. In 1885 she visited Europe. She devoted much of the short remainder of her life to the cause of Jewish nationalism. In 1887 appeared By the waters of Babylon, which consists of a series of “prose poems,” full of prophetic fire. She died in New York on the 19th of November 1887. A sonnet by Emma Lazarus is engraved on a memorial tablet on the colossal Bartholdi statue of Liberty, New York.

LAZARUS, EMMA (1849-1887), American Jewish poet, was born in New York. When the Civil War began, she quickly felt inspired to express herself through poetry. Her first book (1867) included poems and translations she wrote between the ages of fourteen and seventeen. At that time, her influences were classic and romantic. At twenty-one, she published Admetus and other Poems (1871), which was dedicated to Emerson, who greatly influenced her and corresponded with her regularly for several years. She lived a quiet life and had a modest view of her own abilities. Much of her subsequent work appeared in Lippincott’s Magazine, but in 1874 she published a prose romance (Alide) based on Goethe’s autobiography, and received a heartfelt letter of admiration from Turgenev. Two years later, she visited Concord and met the Emerson circle, where she read the proofs of her tragedy The Spagnoletto. In 1881, she published her impressive translations of Heine’s poems. During this time, significant events were happening that resonated with her Jewish identity and shifted her perspective. The Russian massacres of 1880-1881 called to her. Until then, her Jewishness had been somewhat dormant. She was part of the oldest Jewish congregation in New York, but she hadn’t taken an active role in synagogue activities for several years. However, from that point on, she embraced the cause of her people, and “her verse rang out as it had never rung before, a clarion call, urging a people to heroic action and unity; to the awareness and fulfillment of a grand destiny.” Her poems, “The Crowing of the Red Cock” and “The Banner of the Jew” (1882), awakened Jewish consciousness and contributed to the emergence of new Zionism (q.v.). She then wrote another play, Dance to Death, set in Nordhausen in the 14th century; it was based on the accusation against the Jews of poisoning wells and causing the Black Death. The Dance to Death was included (along with some translations of medieval Hebrew poems) in Songs of a Semite (1882), which she dedicated to George Eliot. In 1885, she traveled to Europe. She dedicated much of the brief remainder of her life to the cause of Jewish nationalism. In 1887, By the waters of Babylon was published, which contains a series of “prose poems” full of prophetic passion. She died in New York on November 19, 1887. A sonnet by Emma Lazarus is engraved on a memorial tablet on the colossal Bartholdi statue of Liberty, New York.

See article in the Century Magazine, New Series, xiv. 875 (portrait p. 803), afterwards prefixed as a Memoir to the collected edition of The poems of Emma Lazarus (2 vols., 1889).

See article in the Century Magazine, New Series, xiv. 875 (portrait p. 803), afterwards prefixed as a Memoir to the collected edition of The poems of Emma Lazarus (2 vols., 1889).

(I. A.)

LAZARUS, HENRY (1815-1895), British clarinettist, was born in London on the 1st of January 1815, and was a pupil of Blizard, bandmaster of the Royal Military Asylum, Chelsea, and subsequently of Charles Godfrey, senior, bandmaster of the Coldstream Guards. He made his first appearance as a soloist at a concert of Mme Dulcken’s, in April 1838, and in that year 314 he was appointed as second clarinet to the Sacred Harmonic Society. From Willman’s death in 1840 Lazarus was principal clarinet at the opera, and all the chief festivals and orchestral concerts. His beautiful tone, excellent phrasing and accurate execution were greatly admired. He was professor of the clarinet at the Royal Academy of Music from 1854 until within a short time of his death, and was appointed to teach his instrument at the Military School of Music, Kneller Hall, in 1858. His last public appearance was at a concert for his benefit in St James’s Hall, in June 1892, and he died on the 6th of March 1895.

LAZARUS, HENRY (1815-1895), British clarinetist, was born in London on January 1, 1815. He studied under Blizard, the bandmaster of the Royal Military Asylum in Chelsea, and later with Charles Godfrey, senior, the bandmaster of the Coldstream Guards. He made his debut as a soloist at a concert by Mme Dulcken in April 1838, and that same year 314 he became the second clarinet for the Sacred Harmonic Society. After Willman passed away in 1840, Lazarus served as the principal clarinet at the opera and at all major festivals and orchestral concerts. His beautiful tone, excellent phrasing, and precise execution were widely admired. He was a professor of clarinet at the Royal Academy of Music from 1854 until shortly before his death and was appointed to teach his instrument at the Military School of Music, Kneller Hall, in 1858. His last public performance was at a concert held for his benefit at St James’s Hall in June 1892, and he passed away on March 6, 1895.

LAZARUS, MORITZ (1824-1903), German philosopher, was born on the 15th of September 1824 at Filehne, Posen. The son of a rabbinical scholar, he was educated in Hebrew literature and history, and subsequently in law and philosophy at the university of Berlin. From 1860 to 1866 he was professor in the university of Berne, and subsequently returned to Berlin as professor of philosophy in the kriegsakademie (1868) and later in the university of Berlin (1873). On the occasion of his seventieth birthday he was honoured with the title of Geheimrath. The fundamental principle of his philosophy was that truth must be sought not in metaphysical or a priori abstractions but in psychological investigation, and further that this investigation cannot confine itself successfully to the individual consciousness, but must be devoted primarily to society as a whole. The psychologist must study mankind from the historical or comparative standpoint, analysing the elements which constitute the fabric of society, with its customs, its conventions and the main tendencies of its evolution. This Völkerpsychologie (folk- or comparative psychology) is one of the chief developments of the Herbartian theory of philosophy; it is a protest not only against the so-called scientific standpoint of natural philosophers, but also against the individualism of the positivists. In support of his theory he founded, in combination with H. Steinthal, the Zeitschrift für Völkerpsychologie und Sprachwissenschaft (1859). His own contributions to this periodical were numerous and important. His chief work was Das Leben der Seele (Berlin, 1855-1857; 3rd edition, 1883). Other philosophical works were:—Ueber den Ursprung der Sitten (1860 and 1867), Ueber die Ideen in der Geschichte (1865 and 1872); Zur Lehre von den Sinnestäuschungen (1867); Ideale Fragen (1875 and 1885), Erziehung und Geschichte (1881); Unser Standpunkt (1881); Ueber die Reize des Spiels (1883). Apart from the great interest of his philosophical work, Lazarus was pre-eminent among the Jews of the so-called Semitic domination in Germany. Like Heine, Auerbach and Steinthal, he rose superior to the narrower ideals of the German Jews, and took a leading place in German literature and thought. He protested against the violent anti-Semitism of the time, and, in spite of the moderate tone of his publications, drew upon himself unqualified censure. He wrote in this connexion a number of articles collected in 1887 under the title Treu und Frei. Reden und Vorträge über Juden und Judenthum. In 1869 and 1871 he was president of the first and second Jewish Synods at Leipzig and Augsburg.

LAZARUS, MORITZ (1824-1903), German philosopher, was born on September 15, 1824, in Filehne, Posen. The son of a rabbinical scholar, he was educated in Hebrew literature and history, and later studied law and philosophy at the University of Berlin. From 1860 to 1866, he was a professor at the University of Berne, after which he returned to Berlin as a professor of philosophy at the Kriegsakademie (1868) and later at the University of Berlin (1873). On his seventieth birthday, he was honored with the title of Geheimrath. The fundamental principle of his philosophy was that truth should be sought not in metaphysical or abstract concepts but through psychological investigation, which must not limit itself to individual consciousness but should focus primarily on society as a whole. The psychologist must study humanity from a historical or comparative perspective, analyzing the elements that make up the fabric of society, including its customs, conventions, and major trends in its evolution. This Völkerpsychologie (folk or comparative psychology) is a key development of the Herbartian theory of philosophy; it serves as a critique of both the so-called scientific perspective of natural philosophers and the individualism of the positivists. To support his theory, he co-founded, with H. Steinthal, the Zeitschrift für Völkerpsychologie und Sprachwissenschaft (1859). His contributions to this journal were numerous and significant. His main work was Das Leben der Seele (Berlin, 1855-1857; 3rd edition, 1883). Other philosophical works include: Ueber den Ursprung der Sitten (1860 and 1867), Ueber die Ideen in der Geschichte (1865 and 1872); Zur Lehre von den Sinnestäuschungen (1867); Ideale Fragen (1875 and 1885), Erziehung und Geschichte (1881); Unser Standpunkt (1881); Ueber die Reize des Spiels (1883). Besides the significant interest of his philosophical work, Lazarus stood out among the Jews of the so-called Semitic dominance in Germany. Like Heine, Auerbach, and Steinthal, he transcended the narrower ideals of German Jews and took a prominent place in German literature and thought. He protested against the extreme anti-Semitism of the time and, despite the moderate tone of his publications, faced harsh criticism. In this connection, he wrote several articles collected in 1887 under the title Treu und Frei. Reden und Vorträge über Juden und Judenthum. In 1869 and 1871, he served as president of the first and second Jewish Synods in Leipzig and Augsburg.

See R. Flint, The Philosophy of History in Europe; M. Brasch, Gesammelte Essays und Characterköpfe zur neuen Philos. und Literatur; E. Berliner, Lazarus und die öffentliche Meinung; M. Brasch, “Der Begründer de Völkerpsychologie,” in Nord et Sud, (September 1894).

See R. Flint, The Philosophy of History in Europe; M. Brasch, Collected Essays and Character Sketches on New Philosophy and Literature; E. Berliner, Lazarus and Public Opinion; M. Brasch, “The Founder of Folk Psychology,” in North and South, (September 1894).

LAZARUS, ST, ORDER OF, a religious and military order founded in Jerusalem about the middle of the 12th century. Its primary object was the tending of the sick, especially lepers, of whom Lazarus (see Lazar) was regarded as the patron. From the 13th century, the order made its way into various countries of Europe—Sicily, Lower Italy and Germany (Thuringia); but its chief centre of activity was France, where Louis IX. (1253) gave the members the lands of Boigny near Orleans and a building at the gates of Paris, which they turned into a lazar-house for the use of the lepers of the city. A papal confirmation was obtained from Alexander IV. in 1255. The knights were one hundred in number, and possessed the right of marrying and receiving pensions charged on ecclesiastical benefices. An eight-pointed cross was the insignia of both the French and Italian orders. The gradual disappearance of leprosy combined with other causes to secularize the order more and more. In Savoy in 1572 it was merged by Gregory XIII. (at the instance of Emanuel Philibert, duke of Savoy) in the order of St Maurice (see Knighthood and Chivalry: Orders of Knighthood, Italy). The chief task of this branch was the defence of the Catholic faith, especially against the Protestantism of Geneva. It continued to exist till the second half of the 19th century. In 1608 it was in France united by Henry IV. with the order of Notre-Dame du Mont-Carmel. It was treated with especial favour by Louis XIV., and the most brilliant period of its existence was from 1673 to 1691, under the marquis de Louvois. From that time it began to decay. It was abolished at the Revolution, reintroduced during the Restoration, and formally abolished by a state decree of 1830.

LAZARUS, ST, ORDER OF, a religious and military order founded in Jerusalem around the mid-12th century. Its main purpose was to care for the sick, especially lepers, for whom Lazarus (see Lazar) was considered the patron. From the 13th century onward, the order spread to various countries in Europe—Sicily, Lower Italy, and Germany (Thuringia); however, its primary center of activity was France, where Louis IX. (1253) granted the members the lands of Boigny near Orleans and a building at the gates of Paris, which they converted into a lazar-house for the lepers of the city. A papal confirmation was received from Alexander IV. in 1255. The knights numbered one hundred and had the right to marry and receive pensions charged on ecclesiastical benefices. An eight-pointed cross was the insignia of both the French and Italian orders. The gradual decline of leprosy, along with other factors, led to the increasing secularization of the order. In Savoy in 1572, it was merged by Gregory XIII. (at the request of Emanuel Philibert, duke of Savoy) into the order of St Maurice (see Knighthood and Chivalry: Orders of Knighthood, Italy). The main task of this branch was to defend the Catholic faith, especially against the Protestantism of Geneva. It continued to exist until the second half of the 19th century. In 1608, it was united in France by Henry IV. with the order of Notre-Dame du Mont-Carmel. It was particularly favored by Louis XIV., and its most brilliant period was from 1673 to 1691, under the marquis de Louvois. After that, it began to decline. It was abolished during the Revolution, reinstated during the Restoration, and formally abolished by a state decree in 1830.

See L. Mainbourg, Hist. des croisades (1682; Eng. trans. by Nalson, 1686); P. Hélyot, Hist. des ordres monastiques (1714), pp. 257, 386; J. G. Uhlhorn, Die christliche Liebesthätigkeit im Mittelalter (Stuttgart, 1884); articles in Herzog-Hauck’s Realencyklopädie für protestantische Theologie, xi. (1902) and Wetzer and Welte’s (Catholic) Kirchenlexikon, vii. (1891).

See L. Mainbourg, Hist. des croisades (1682; Eng. trans. by Nalson, 1686); P. Hélyot, Hist. des ordres monastiques (1714), pp. 257, 386; J. G. Uhlhorn, Die christliche Liebesthätigkeit im Mittelalter (Stuttgart, 1884); articles in Herzog-Hauck’s Realencyklopädie für protestantische Theologie, xi. (1902) and Wetzer and Welte’s (Catholic) Kirchenlexikon, vii. (1891).

LEA, HENRY CHARLES (1825-1909), American historian, was born at Philadelphia on the 19th of September 1825. His father was a publisher, whom in 1843 he joined in business, and he retained his connexion with the firm till 1880. Weak health, however, caused him from early days to devote himself to research, mainly on church history in the later middle ages, and his literary reputation rests on the important books he produced on this subject. These are: Superstition and Force (Philadelphia, 1866, new ed. 1892); Historical Sketch of Sacerdotal Celibacy (Philadelphia, 1867); History of the Inquisition of the Middle Ages (New York, 1888); Chapters from the religious history of Spain connected with the Inquisition (Philadelphia, 1890); History of auricular Confession and Indulgences in the Latin Church (3 vols., London, 1896); The Moriscos of Spain (Philadelphia, 1901), and History of the Inquisition of Spain (4 vols., New York and London, 1906-1907). He also edited a Formulary of the Papal Penitentiary in the 13th century (Philadelphia, 1892), and in 1908 was published his Inquisition in the Spanish Dependencies. As an authority on the Inquisition he stood in the highest rank of modern historians, and distinctions were conferred on him by the universities of Harvard, Princeton, Pennsylvania, Giessen and Moscow. He died at Philadelphia on the 24th of October 1909.

LEA, HENRY CHARLES (1825-1909), was an American historian born in Philadelphia on September 19, 1825. His father was a publisher, and in 1843, Lea joined him in the business, staying with the firm until 1880. However, due to his poor health from a young age, he focused on research, primarily in church history during the later Middle Ages, and his literary reputation is based on the significant books he wrote on this topic. These include: Superstition and Force (Philadelphia, 1866, new ed. 1892); Historical Sketch of Sacerdotal Celibacy (Philadelphia, 1867); History of the Inquisition of the Middle Ages (New York, 1888); Chapters from the Religious History of Spain Connected with the Inquisition (Philadelphia, 1890); History of Auricular Confession and Indulgences in the Latin Church (3 vols., London, 1896); The Moriscos of Spain (Philadelphia, 1901), and History of the Inquisition of Spain (4 vols., New York and London, 1906-1907). He also edited a Formulary of the Papal Penitentiary in the 13th Century (Philadelphia, 1892), and in 1908, he published Inquisition in the Spanish Dependencies. As an expert on the Inquisition, he was regarded as one of the leading historians of his time, earning honors from the universities of Harvard, Princeton, Pennsylvania, Giessen, and Moscow. He passed away in Philadelphia on October 24, 1909.

LEAD (pronounced leed), a city of Lawrence county, South Dakota, U.S.A., situated in the Black Hills, at an altitude of about 5300 ft., 3 m. S.W. of Deadwood. Pop. (1890) 2581, (1900) 6210, of whom 2145 were foreign-born, (1905) 8217, (1910) 8392. In 1905 it was second in population among the cities of the state. It is served by the Chicago, Burlington & Quincy, the Chicago & North-Western, and the Chicago, Milwaukee & St Paul railways. Lead has a hospital, the Hearst Free Library and the Hearst Free Kindergarten, and is the see of a Roman Catholic bishopric. It is the centre of the mining interests of the Black Hills, and the Homestake Gold Mine here contains perhaps the largest and most easily worked mass of low-grade ore and one of the largest mining plants (1000 stamps) in the world; it has also three cyanide mills. From 1878 to 1906 the value of the gold taken from this mine amounted to about $58,000,000, and the net value of the product of 1906 alone was approximately $5,313,516. For two months in the spring of 1907 the mine was rendered idle by a fire (March 25), which was so severe that it was necessary to flood the entire mine. Mining tools and gold jewelry are manufactured. The first settlement was made here by mining prospectors in July 1876. Lead was chartered as a city in 1890 and became a city of the first class in 1904.

LEAD (pronounced leed) is a city in Lawrence County, South Dakota, U.S.A., located in the Black Hills at an elevation of about 5,300 ft, 3 miles southwest of Deadwood. In 1890, the population was 2,581; in 1900, it grew to 6,210, with 2,145 being foreign-born; in 1905, it reached 8,217; and by 1910, it was 8,392. By 1905, it was the second most populated city in the state. It is served by the Chicago, Burlington & Quincy, the Chicago & North-Western, and the Chicago, Milwaukee & St. Paul railways. Lead has a hospital, the Hearst Free Library, and the Hearst Free Kindergarten, and it is the seat of a Roman Catholic bishopric. It is the center of the mining industry in the Black Hills, and the Homestake Gold Mine here has perhaps the largest and most easily extracted mass of low-grade ore, along with one of the largest mining plants (1,000 stamps) in the world, and also features three cyanide mills. From 1878 to 1906, the gold extracted from this mine was valued at about $58,000,000, with the net value of the 1906 output alone being approximately $5,313,516. For two months in the spring of 1907, the mine was shut down due to a fire (on March 25), which was so severe that flooding the entire mine became necessary. Mining tools and gold jewelry are produced here. The first settlement was established by mining prospectors in July 1876. Lead was chartered as a city in 1890 and became a first-class city in 1904.

LEAD, a metallic chemical element; its symbol is Pb (from the Lat. plumbum), and atomic weight 207.10 (O = 16). This metal was known to the ancients, and is mentioned in the Old Testament. The Romans used it largely, as it is still used, for the making of water pipes, and soldered these with an alloy of lead and tin. Pliny treats of these two metals as plumbum nigrum and plumbum album respectively, which seems to show 315 that at his time they were looked upon as being only two varieties of the same species. In regard to the ancients’ knowledge of lead compounds, we may state that the substance described by Dioscorides as μολυβδαίνα was undoubtedly litharge, that Pliny uses the word minium in its present sense of red lead, and that white lead was well known to Geber in the 8th century. The alchemists designated it by the sign of Saturn .

LEAD, is a metallic chemical element with the symbol Pb (from the Latin plumbum) and an atomic weight of 207.10 (O = 16). This metal was known to ancient civilizations and is mentioned in the Old Testament. The Romans widely used it, as we still do, for making water pipes, and they soldered these with an alloy of lead and tin. Pliny referred to these two metals as plumbum nigrum and plumbum album, respectively, suggesting that at his time they were considered just two varieties of the same material. Regarding the ancients’ knowledge of lead compounds, we can note that the substance Dioscorides described as μολυβδαίνα was surely litharge, that Pliny used the term minium in its current meaning of red lead, and that Geber was already familiar with white lead in the 8th century. The alchemists represented it with the sign of Saturn .

Occurrence.—Metallic lead occurs in nature but very rarely and then only in minute amount. The chief lead ores are galena and cerussite; of minor importance are anglesite, pyromorphite and mimetesite (qq.v.). Galena (q.v.), the principal lead ore, has a world-wide distribution, and is always contaminated with silver sulphide, the proportion of noble metal varying from about 0.01 or less to 0.3%, and in rare cases coming up to ½ or 1%. Fine-grained galena is usually richer in silver than the coarse-grained. Galena occurs in veins in the Cambrian clay-slate, accompanied by copper and iron pyrites, zinc-blende, quartz, calc-spar, iron-spar, &c.; also in beds or nests within sandstones and rudimentary limestones, and in a great many other geological formations. It is pretty widely diffused throughout the earth’s crust. The principal English lead mines are in Derbyshire; but there are also mines at Allandale and other parts of western Northumberland, at Alston Moor and other parts of Cumberland, in the western parts of Durham, in Swaledale and Arkendale and other parts of Yorkshire, in Salop, in Cornwall, in the Mendip Hills in Somersetshire, and in the Isle of Man. The Welsh mines are chiefly in Flint, Cardigan and Montgomery shires; the Scottish in Dumfries, Lanark and Argyll; and the Irish in Wicklow, Waterford and Down. Of continental mines we may mention those in Saxony and in the Harz, Germany; those of Carinthia, Austria; and especially those of the southern provinces of Spain. It is widely distributed in the United States, and occurs in Mexico and Brazil; it is found in Tunisia and Algeria, in the Altai Mountains and India, and in New South Wales, Queensland, and in Tasmania.

Occurrence.—Metallic lead is found in nature, but very rarely and only in small amounts. The main lead ores are galena and cerussite, while anglesite, pyromorphite, and mimetesite are of lesser importance (qq.v.). Galena (q.v.), the primary lead ore, is distributed worldwide and is always mixed with silver sulfide, with the amount of noble metal varying from around 0.01% or less to 0.3%, and in rare cases reaching up to ½ or 1%. Fine-grained galena usually contains more silver than coarse-grained galena. Galena is found in veins within Cambrian clay-slate, often alongside copper and iron pyrites, zinc-blende, quartz, calc-spar, iron-spar, and others; it also appears in beds or nests within sandstones and primitive limestones, as well as numerous other geological formations. It is fairly widespread across the earth’s crust. The main English lead mines are located in Derbyshire, but there are also mines in Allandale and other areas of western Northumberland, in Alston Moor and various regions of Cumberland, in western Durham, in Swaledale and Arkendale, and other parts of Yorkshire, in Salop, Cornwall, the Mendip Hills in Somersetshire, and the Isle of Man. The Welsh mines are primarily in Flint, Cardigan, and Montgomery shires; the Scottish mines are in Dumfries, Lanark, and Argyll; and the Irish mines are in Wicklow, Waterford, and Down. Notable continental mines include those in Saxony and the Harz, Germany; in Carinthia, Austria; and particularly in the southern provinces of Spain. It is widely spread in the United States, and can be found in Mexico and Brazil; it also occurs in Tunisia and Algeria, the Altai Mountains and India, and in New South Wales, Queensland, and Tasmania.

The native carbonate or cerussite (q.v.) occasionally occurs in the pure form, but more frequently in a state of intimate intermixture with clay (“lead earth,” Bleierde), limestone, iron oxides, &c. (as in the ores of Nevada and Colorado), and some times also with coal (“black lead ore”). All native carbonate of lead seems to be derived from what was originally galena, which is always present in it as an admixture. This ore, metallurgically, was not reckoned of much value, until immense quantities of it were discovered in Nevada and in Colorado (U.S.). The Nevada mines are mostly grouped around the city of Eureka, where the ore occurs in “pockets” disseminated at random through limestone. The crude ore contains about 30% lead and 0.2 to 0.3% silver. The Colorado lead district is in the Rocky Mountains, a few miles from the source of the Arkansas river. It forms gigantic deposits of almost constant thickness, embedded between a floor of limestone and a roof of porphyry. Stephens’s discovery of the ore in 1877 was the making of the city of Leadville, which, in 1878, within a year of its foundation, had over 10,000 inhabitants. The Leadville ore contains from 24 to 42% lead and 0.1 to 2% silver. In Nevada and Colorado the ore is worked chiefly for the sake of the silver. Deposits are also worked at Broken Hill, New South Wales.

The native carbonate or cerussite (q.v.) sometimes occurs in its pure form, but more often it is found mixed intimately with clay (“lead earth,” Bleierde), limestone, iron oxides, etc. (like in the ores of Nevada and Colorado), and sometimes also with coal (“black lead ore”). All native carbonate of lead seems to come from what was originally galena, which is always present as a mixture. This ore was not considered very valuable until large quantities were discovered in Nevada and Colorado (U.S.). The Nevada mines are mainly located around the city of Eureka, where the ore exists in “pockets” randomly dispersed throughout the limestone. The raw ore contains about 30% lead and 0.2 to 0.3% silver. The Colorado lead district is in the Rocky Mountains, a few miles from the source of the Arkansas River. It forms huge deposits of almost uniform thickness, situated between a limestone floor and a porphyry roof. Stephens’s discovery of the ore in 1877 led to the establishment of the city of Leadville, which, by 1878, just one year after its founding, had over 10,000 residents. The Leadville ore contains between 24 to 42% lead and 0.1 to 2% silver. In Nevada and Colorado, the ore is primarily mined for the silver content. Deposits are also mined at Broken Hill, New South Wales.

Anglesite, or lead sulphate, PbSO4, is poor in silver, and is only exceptionally mined by itself; it occurs in quantity in France, Spain, Sardinia and Australia. Of other lead minerals we may mention the basic sulphate lanarkite, PbO·PbSO4; leadhillite, PbSO4·3PbCO3; the basic chlorides matlockite, PbO·PbCl2, and mendipite, PbCl2·2PbO; the chloro-phosphate pyromorphite, PbCl2·3Pb3(PO4)2, the chloro-arsenate mimetesite, PbCl2·3Pb3(AsO4)2; the molybdate wulfenite, PbMoO4; the chromate crocoite or crocoisite, PbCrO4; the tungstate stolzite, PbWO4.

Anglesite, or lead sulfate, PbSO4, has low silver content and is rarely mined on its own; it’s found in abundance in France, Spain, Sardinia, and Australia. Other lead minerals include the basic sulfate lanarkite, PbO·PbSO4; leadhillite, PbSO4·3PbCO3; the basic chlorides matlockite, PbO·PbCl2, and mendipite, PbCl2·2PbO; the chloro-phosphate pyromorphite, PbCl2·3Pb3(PO4)2; the chloro-arsenate mimetesite, PbCl2·3Pb3(AsO4)2; the molybdate wulfenite, PbMoO4; the chromate crocoite or crocoisite, PbCrO4; and the tungstate stolzite, PbWO4.

Production.—At the beginning of the 19th century the bulk of the world’s supply of lead was obtained from England and Spain, the former contributing about 17,000 tons and the latter 10,000 tons annually. Germany, Austria, Hungary, France, Russia and the United States began to rank as producers during the second and third decades; Belgium entered in about 1840; Italy in the ’sixties; Mexico, Canada, Japan and Greece in the ’eighties; while Australia assumed importance in 1888 with a production of about 18,000 tons, although it had contributed small and varying amounts for many preceding decades. In 1850 England headed the list of producers with about 66,000 tons; this amount had declined in 1872 to 61,000 tons. Since this date, it has, on the whole, diminished, although large outputs occurred in isolated years, for instance, a production of 40,000 tons in 1893 was followed by 60,000 tons in 1896 and 40,000 in 1897. The output in 1900 was 35,000 tons, and in 1905, 25,000 tons. Spain ranked second in 1850 with about 47,000 tons; this was increased in 1863, 1876 and in 1888 to 84,000, 127,000 and 187,000 tons respectively; but the maximum outputs mentioned were preceded and succeeded by periods of depression. In 1900 the production was 176,000 tons, and in 1905, 179,000 tons. The United States, which ranked third with a production of 20,000 tons in 1850, maintained this annual yield, until 1870, when it began to increase; the United States now ranks as the chief producer; in 1900 the output was 253,000 tons, and in 1905, 319,744 tons. Germany has likewise made headway; an output of 12,000 tons in 1850 being increased to 120,000 tons in 1900 and to 152,590 in 1905. This country now ranks third, having passed England in 1873. Mexico increased its production from 18,000 tons in 1883 to 83,000 tons in 1900 and about 88,000 tons in 1905. The Australian production of 18,000 tons in 1888 was increased to 58,000 tons in 1891, a value maintained until 1893, when a depression set in, only 21,000 tons being produced in 1897; prosperity then returned, and in 1898 the yield was 68,000 tons, and in 1905, 120,000 tons. Canada became important in 1895 with a production of 10,000 tons; this increased to 28,654 tons in 1900; and in 1905 the yield was 25,391 tons. Italy has been a fairly steady producer; the output in 1896 was 20,000 tons, and in 1905, 25,000 tons.

Production.—At the start of the 19th century, most of the world's lead supply came from England and Spain, with England producing about 17,000 tons and Spain 10,000 tons each year. During the second and third decades, Germany, Austria, Hungary, France, Russia, and the United States began to emerge as producers; Belgium joined around 1840; Italy in the 1860s; and Mexico, Canada, Japan, and Greece in the 1880s. Australia became significant in 1888 with a production of about 18,000 tons, though it had contributed small and varying amounts in the decades before. In 1850, England topped the list of producers with around 66,000 tons; this dropped to 61,000 tons in 1872. Since then, it has generally decreased, although there were some years of high output, such as 40,000 tons in 1893, 60,000 tons in 1896, and 40,000 tons in 1897. The production in 1900 was 35,000 tons, and in 1905, it was 25,000 tons. Spain was second in 1850 with about 47,000 tons; this increased to 84,000, 127,000, and 187,000 tons in 1863, 1876, and 1888, respectively, but these peak outputs were followed by times of decline. In 1900, production was 176,000 tons, and in 1905, it was 179,000 tons. The United States, which ranked third with 20,000 tons in 1850, maintained this output until 1870 when it began to rise; the United States is now the leading producer, with an output of 253,000 tons in 1900 and 319,744 tons in 1905. Germany also made progress, increasing its output from 12,000 tons in 1850 to 120,000 tons in 1900 and 152,590 tons in 1905. This country now ranks third, having surpassed England in 1873. Mexico ramped up its production from 18,000 tons in 1883 to 83,000 tons in 1900 and about 88,000 tons in 1905. The Australian production of 18,000 tons in 1888 grew to 58,000 tons in 1891, which was maintained until 1893 when a downturn occurred, resulting in only 21,000 tons in 1897. Prosperity returned, and in 1898, the yield was 68,000 tons, increasing to 120,000 tons in 1905. Canada became noteworthy in 1895 with a production of 10,000 tons; this rose to 28,654 tons in 1900, with a yield of 25,391 tons in 1905. Italy has remained a fairly consistent producer, with an output of 20,000 tons in 1896 and 25,000 tons in 1905.

Metallurgy.

Metalworking.

The extraction of the metal from pure (or nearly pure) galena is the simplest of all metallurgical operations. The ore is roasted (i.e. heated in the presence of atmospheric oxygen) until all the sulphur is burned away and the lead left. This simple statement, however, correctly formulates only the final result. The first effect of the roasting is the elimination of sulphur as sulphur-dioxide, with formation of oxide and sulphate of lead. In practice this oxidation process is continued until the whole of the oxygen is as nearly as possible equal in weight to the sulphur present as sulphide or as sulphate, i.e. in the ratio S : O2. The heat is then raised in (relative) absence of air, when the two elements named unite into sulphur-dioxide, while a regulus of molten lead remains. Lead ores are smelted in the reverberatory furnace, the ore-hearth, and the blast-furnace. The use of the first two is restricted, as they are suited only for galena ores or mixtures of galena and carbonate, which contain not less than 58% lead and not more than 4% silica; further, ores to be treated in the ore-hearth should run low in or be free from silver, as the loss in the fumes is excessive. In the blast-furnace all lead ores are successfully smelted. Blast-furnace treatment has therefore become more general than any other.

The process of extracting metal from pure (or nearly pure) galena is the easiest of all metallurgical operations. The ore is roasted (i.e. heated with atmospheric oxygen) until all the sulfur is burned off, leaving behind the lead. However, this simple statement only captures the final outcome. The first effect of roasting is the removal of sulfur as sulfur dioxide, along with the formation of lead oxide and sulfate. In practice, this oxidation process continues until the amount of oxygen is nearly equal in weight to the sulfur present as sulfide or sulfate, i.e. in the ratio S : O2. The heat is then increased in (relative) absence of air, causing the two named elements to combine into sulfur dioxide, while molten lead remains. Lead ores are smelted in the reverberatory furnace, the ore-hearth, and the blast furnace. The first two methods are limited, as they are only suitable for galena ores or mixtures of galena and carbonate, which must contain at least 58% lead and no more than 4% silica; additionally, ores treated in the ore-hearth should be low in or free from silver, as excessive loss occurs in the fumes. All lead ores can be successfully smelted in the blast furnace. Consequently, blast furnace treatment has become more common than any other method.

Three types of reverberatory practice are in vogue—the English, Carinthian and Silesian. In Wales and the south of England the process is conducted in a reverberatory furnace, the sole of which is paved with slags from previous operations, and has a depression in the middle where the metal formed collects to be let off by a tap-hole. The dressed ore is introduced through a “hopper” at the top, and exposed to a moderate oxidizing flame until a certain proportion of ore is oxidized, openings at the side enabling the workmen to stir up the ore so as to constantly renew the surface exposed to the air. At this stage as a rule some rich slags of a former operation are added and a quantity of quicklime is incorporated, the chief object of which is to diminish the fluidity of the mass in the next stage, which consists in this, that, with closed air-holes, the heat is raised so as to cause the oxide and sulphate on the one hand and the sulphide on the other to reduce each other to metal. The lead produced runs into the hollow and is tapped off. The roasting process is then resumed, to be followed by another reduction, and so on.

Three types of reverberatory practices are currently popular—the English, Carinthian, and Silesian. In Wales and the south of England, the process takes place in a reverberatory furnace, whose base is lined with slags from earlier operations, and features a depression in the middle where the molten metal gathers to be drained through a tap-hole. The prepared ore is fed in through a “hopper” at the top and exposed to a moderate oxidizing flame until a specific amount of the ore is oxidized, with openings on the sides allowing workers to stir the ore to constantly refresh the surface exposed to the air. At this point, it's common to add some rich slags from a previous operation along with a quantity of quicklime, mainly to reduce the fluidity of the mixture in the next stage. This next stage involves raising the heat with closed air-holes to allow the oxide and sulfate to reduce each other to metal, while the sulfide does the same. The lead produced flows into the hollow and is drawn off. The roasting process then continues, followed by another reduction, and this cycle repeats.

A similar process is used in Carinthia; only the furnaces are smaller and of a somewhat different form. They are long and narrow; the sole is plane, but slopes from the fire-bridge towards the flue, so that the metal runs to the latter end to collect in pots placed outside the furnace. In Carinthia the oxidizing process from the first is pushed on so far that metallic lead begins to show, and the oxygen introduced predominates over the sulphur left. The mass is then stirred to liberate the lead, which is removed as Rührblei. Charcoal is now added, and the heat urged on to obtain Pressblei, an inferior metal formed partly by the action of the charcoal on the oxide of lead. The fuel used is fir-wood.

A similar process is used in Carinthia, but the furnaces are smaller and have a slightly different shape. They are long and narrow; the base is flat but slopes from the fire-bridge toward the flue, so the metal runs to the end and collects in pots placed outside the furnace. In Carinthia, the oxidizing process from the start is pushed so far that metallic lead begins to appear, and the introduced oxygen outweighs the remaining sulfur. The mass is then stirred to release the lead, which is taken out as Rührblei. Charcoal is then added, and the heat is increased to produce Pressblei, an inferior metal formed partly by the reaction of the charcoal with lead oxide. The fuel used is fir wood.

316

316

The Silesian furnace has an oblong hearth sloping from the fire-bridge to the flue-bridge. This causes the lead to collect at the coolest part of the hearth, whence it is tapped, &c., as in the English furnace. While by the English and Carinthian processes as much lead as possible is extracted in the furnace, with the Silesian method a very low temperature is used, thus taking out about one-half of the lead and leaving very rich slags (50% lead) to be smelted in the blast-furnace, the ultimate result being a very much higher yield than by either of the other processes. The loss in lead by the combined reverberatory and blast-furnace treatment is only 3.2%.

The Silesian furnace has a long hearth that slopes from the fire-bridge to the flue-bridge. This design allows the lead to gather at the coolest part of the hearth, from which it is tapped, just like in the English furnace. While the English and Carinthian processes aim to extract as much lead as possible in the furnace, the Silesian method operates at a much lower temperature, extracting about half of the lead and leaving very rich slags (50% lead) to be processed in the blast furnace. This ultimately results in a significantly higher yield compared to the other methods. The loss of lead through the combined reverberatory and blast-furnace treatment is only 3.2%.

In Cumberland, Northumberland, Durham and latterly the United States, the reverberatory furnace is used only for roasting the ore, and the oxidized ore is then reduced by fusion in a low, square blast-furnace (a “Scottish hearth furnace”) lined with cast iron, as is also the inclined sole-plate which is made to project beyond the furnace, the outside portion (the “work-stone”) being provided with grooves guiding any molten metal that may be placed on the “stone” into a cast iron pot; the “tuyère” for the introduction of the wind was, in the earlier types, about half way down the furnace.

In Cumberland, Northumberland, Durham, and more recently the United States, the reverberatory furnace is only used for roasting the ore. The oxidized ore is then melted down in a low, square blast furnace (a “Scottish hearth furnace”) lined with cast iron, as is the inclined sole-plate, which extends beyond the furnace. The outer part (the “work-stone”) has grooves that direct any molten metal placed on the “stone” into a cast iron pot. The “tuyère” for introducing air was, in earlier designs, located about halfway down the furnace.

As a preliminary to the melting process, the “browse” left in the preceding operation (half-fused and imperfectly reduced ore) is introduced with some peat and coal, and heated with the help of the blast. It is then raked out on the work-stone and divided into a very poor “grey” slag which is put aside, and a richer portion, which goes back into the furnace. Some of the roasted ore is strewed upon it, and, after a quarter of an hour’s working, the whole is taken out on the work-stone, where the lead produced runs off. The “browse,” after removal of the “grey” slag, is reintroduced, ore added, and, after a quarter of an hour’s heating, the mass again placed on the work-stone, &c.

As a first step in the melting process, the "browse" left from the previous operation (partially melted and imperfectly processed ore) is mixed with some peat and coal, and heated using the blast. It is then raked out onto the work-stone and separated into a very poor "grey" slag, which is set aside, and a richer portion, which goes back into the furnace. Some of the roasted ore is spread over it, and after about fifteen minutes of working, everything is taken out onto the work-stone, where the produced lead runs off. The "browse," after the "grey" slag is removed, is put back in, ore is added, and after another fifteen minutes of heating, the mass is once again placed on the work-stone, etc.

In the more recent form of the hearth process the blocks of cast iron forming the sides and back of the Scottish furnace are now generally replaced in the United States by water-cooled shells (water-jackets) of cast iron. In this way continuous working has been rendered possible, whereas formerly operations had to be stopped every twelve or fifteen hours to allow the over-heated blocks and furnace to cool down. A later improvement (which somewhat changes the mode of working) is that by Moffett. While he also prevents interruption of the operation by means of water-jackets, he uses hot-blast, and produces, besides metallic lead, large volumes of lead fumes which are drawn off by fans through long cooling tubes, and then forced through suspended bags which filter off the dust, called “blue powder.” Thus, a mixture of lead sulphate (45%) and oxide (44%) with some sulphide (8%), zinc and carbonaceous matter, is agglomerated by a heap-roast and then smelted in a slag-eye furnace with grey slag from the ore-hearth. The furnace has, in addition to the usual tuyères near the bottom, a second set near the throat in order to effect a complete oxidation of all combustible matter. Much fume is thus produced. This is drawn off, cooled and filtered, and forms a white paint of good body, consisting of about 65% lead sulphate, 26% lead oxide, 6% zinc oxide and 3% other substances. Thus in the Moffett method it is immaterial whether metal or fume is produced, as in either case it is saved and the price is about the same.

In the latest version of the hearth process, the blocks of cast iron that used to make up the sides and back of the Scottish furnace are now commonly replaced in the United States with water-cooled shells (water jackets) made of cast iron. This change allows for continuous operation, whereas before, work had to stop every twelve to fifteen hours to let the overheated blocks and furnace cool down. A later improvement by Moffett alters the working method slightly. While he also prevents interruptions using water jackets, he employs hot blast and produces not just metallic lead but also large amounts of lead fumes, which are extracted by fans through long cooling tubes and then forced through suspended bags that filter out the dust, known as “blue powder.” This results in a mixture of lead sulfate (45%) and oxide (44%) with some sulfide (8%), zinc, and carbonaceous material, which is agglomerated through a heap roast and then smelted in a slag-eye furnace with gray slag from the ore hearth. The furnace has, in addition to the usual tuyères near the bottom, a second set near the throat to ensure complete oxidation of all combustible materials. This process produces a lot of fumes, which are drawn off, cooled, and filtered, resulting in a white paint with a strong body, comprising about 65% lead sulfate, 26% lead oxide, 6% zinc oxide, and 3% other substances. Thus, in the Moffett method, it doesn't matter whether metal or fume is produced, as both are collected and have a similar market price.

In smelting at once in the same blast-furnace ores of different character, the old use of separate processes of precipitation, roasting and reduction, and general reduction prevailing in the Harz Mountains, Freiberg and other places, to suit local conditions, has been abandoned. Ores are smelted raw if the fall of matte (metallic sulphide) does not exceed 5%; otherwise they are subjected to a preliminary oxidizing roast to expel the sulphur, unless they run too high in silver, say 100 oz. to the ton, when they are smelted raw. The leading reverberatory furnace for roasting lead-bearing sulphide ores has a level hearth 14-16 ft. wide and 60-80 ft. long. It puts through 9-12 tons of ore in twenty-four hours, reducing the percentage of sulphur to 2-4%, and requires four to six men and about 2 tons of coal. In many instances it has been replaced by mechanical furnaces, which are now common in roasting sulphide copper ores (see Sulphuric Acid). A modern blast-furnace is oblong in horizontal section and about 24 ft. high from furnace floor to feed floor. The shaft, resting upon arches supported by four cast iron columns about 9 ft. high, is usually of brick, red brick on the outside, fire-brick on the inside; sometimes it is made of wrought iron water-jackets. The smelting zone always has a bosh and a contracted tuyère section. It is enclosed by water-jackets, which are usually cast iron, sometimes mild steel. The hearth always has an Arents siphon tap. This is an inclined channel running through the side-wall, beginning near the bottom of the crucible and ending at the top of the hearth, where it is enlarged into a basin. The crucible and the channel form the two limbs of an inverted siphon. While the furnace is running the crucible and channel remain filled with lead; all the lead reduced to the metallic state in smelting collects in the crucible, and rising in the channel, overflows into the basin, whence it is removed. The slag and matte formed float upon the lead in the crucible and are tapped, usually together, at intervals into slag-pots, where the heavy matter settles on the bottom and the light slag on the top. When cold they are readily separated by a blow from a hammer. The following table gives the dimensions of some well-known American lead-furnaces.

In modern smelting, combining ores of different types in the same blast furnace has replaced the old practices of separate processes like precipitation, roasting, and general reduction that were common in the Harz Mountains, Freiberg, and other areas. Ores are smelted raw if the matte (metallic sulfide) content is no more than 5%; if it exceeds that, they undergo a preliminary oxidizing roast to remove the sulfur, unless the silver content is very high, around 100 oz. per ton, in which case they are smelted raw. The standard reverberatory furnace for roasting lead-bearing sulfide ores measures 14-16 ft. wide and 60-80 ft. long. It processes 9-12 tons of ore in twenty-four hours, reducing the sulfur percentage to 2-4%, and needs four to six workers and about 2 tons of coal. Often, it’s been replaced by mechanical furnaces, which are now common for roasting sulfide copper ores (see Sulphuric Acid). A modern blast furnace is rectangular in horizontal layout and about 24 ft. high from the furnace floor to the feed floor. The shaft, supported by arches held up by four cast iron columns about 9 ft. high, is typically made of brick—red brick on the outside and fire-brick on the inside; sometimes it's constructed from wrought iron water-jackets. The smelting zone always features a bosh and a narrowed tuyère section. It is surrounded by water-jackets, which are usually made of cast iron, but sometimes mild steel is used. The hearth always includes an Arents siphon tap, which is an inclined channel running through the side wall, starting near the bottom of the crucible and extending to the top of the hearth, where it widens into a basin. The crucible and the channel act as two parts of an inverted siphon. While the furnace operates, the crucible and channel stay filled with lead; all the lead that is reduced to its metallic form during smelting collects in the crucible and rises in the channel, overflowing into the basin for removal. The slag and matte produced float on top of the lead in the crucible and are usually tapped together into slag pots at intervals, where the heavier material settles at the bottom and the lighter slag floats on top. Once cooled, they can be easily separated with a hammer. The following table lists the dimensions of some notable American lead furnaces.

Lead Blast-Furnace.

Lead Smelter.

Locality. Year. Tuyère
Section.
Height, Tuyère
to Throat.
    In. Ft.
Leadville, Colorado 1880 33 × 84  14
Denver, Colorado 1880 36 × 100 17
Durango, Colorado 1882 36 × 96  12.6
Denver, Colorado 1892 42 × 100 16
Leadville, Colorado 1892 42 × 120 18
Salt Lake City, Utah 1895 45 × 140 20

A furnace, 42 by 120 in. at the tuyères, with a working height of 17-20 ft., will put through in twenty-four hours, with twelve men, 12% coke and 2 ℔ blast-pressure, 85-100 tons average charge, i.e. one that is a medium coarse, contains 12-15% lead, not over 5% zinc, and makes under 5% matte. In making up a charge, the ores and fluxes, whose chemical compositions have been determined, are mixed so as to form out of the components not to be reduced to the metallic or sulphide state, typical slags (silicates of ferrous and calcium oxides, incidentally of aluminium oxide, which have been found to do successful work). Such slags contain SiO2 = 30-33%, Fe(Mn)O = 27-50%, Ca(Mg, Ba)O = 12-28%, and retain less than 1% lead and 1 oz. silver to the ton. The leading products of the blast-furnace are argentiferous lead (base bullion), matte, slag and flue-dust (fine particles of charge and volatilized metal carried out of the furnace by the ascending gas current). The base bullion (assaying 300 ± oz. per ton) is desilverized (see below); the matte (Pb = 8-12%, Cu = 3-4%, Ag = 13-15 of the assay-value of the base bullion, rest Fe and S) is roasted and resmelted, when part of the argentiferous lead is recovered as base bullion, while the rest remains with the copper, which becomes concentrated in a copper-matte (60% copper) to be worked up by separate processes. The slag is a waste product, and the flue-dust, collected by special devices in dust-chambers, is briquetted by machinery, with lime as a bond, and then resmelted with the ore-charge. The yield in lead is over 90%, in silver over 97% and in gold 100%. The cost of smelting a ton of ore in Colorado in a single furnace, 42 by 120 in. at the tuyères, is about $3.

A furnace that measures 42 by 120 inches at the tuyères, with a working height of 17-20 feet, can process 85-100 tons on average in a 24-hour period with a crew of twelve men, using 12% coke and a blast pressure of 2 pounds. This charge typically consists of medium-coarse materials, containing 12-15% lead, no more than 5% zinc, and producing less than 5% matte. When preparing a charge, the ores and fluxes, which have already been analyzed for their chemical compositions, are combined to create slags that do not undergo reduction to metallic or sulfide forms. These slags are silicates made of ferrous and calcium oxides, and sometimes aluminum oxide, which have proven to be effective. The slag composition includes SiO₂ = 30-33%, Fe(Mn)O = 27-50%, Ca(Mg, Ba)O = 12-28%, and contains less than 1% lead and 1 ounce of silver per ton. The main outputs from the blast furnace are argentiferous lead (base bullion), matte, slag, and flue-dust (fine particles from the charge and evaporated metal carried out of the furnace by the rising gas). The base bullion, which assays around 300 ounces per ton, is then desilverized (see below); the matte (containing Pb = 8-12%, Cu = 3-4%, Ag = 1/3-1/5 of the base bullion's assay value, with the remainder being iron and sulfur) is roasted and resmelted, during which some argentiferous lead is recovered as base bullion while the rest is combined with copper, leading to a copper-matte (60% copper) that will be processed separately. The slag is a waste product, and the flue-dust is collected by special equipment in dust chambers, compressed into briquettes using lime as a binder, and then resmelted with the ore charge. The lead yield is over 90%, silver is over 97%, and gold is at 100%. The cost of smelting one ton of ore in Colorado in a single furnace of 42 by 120 inches at the tuyères is approximately $3.

The lead produced in the reverberatory furnace and the ore-hearth is of a higher grade than that produced in the blast-furnace, as the ores treated are purer and richer, and the reducing action is less powerful. The following analysis of blast-furnace Refining. lead of Freiberg, Saxony, is from an exceptionally impure lead: Pb = 95.088, Ag = 0.470, Bi = 0.019, Cu = 0.225, As = 1.826, Sb = 0.958, Sn = 1.354, Fe = 0.007, Zn = 0.002, S = 0.051. Of the impurities, most of the copper, nickel and copper, considerable arsenic, some antimony and small amounts of silver are removed by liquation. The lead is melted down slowly, when the impurities separate in the form of a scum (dross), which is easily removed. The purification by liquation is assisted by poling the lead when it is below redness. A stick of green wood is forced into it, and the vapours and gases set free expose new surfaces to the air, which at this temperature has only a mildly oxidizing effect. The pole, the use of which is awkward, has been replaced by dry stream, which has a similar effect. To remove tin, arsenic and antimony, the lead has to be brought up to a bright-red heat, when the air has a strongly oxidizing effect. Tin is removed mainly as a powdery mixture of stannate of lead and lead oxide, arsenic and antimony as a slagged mixture of arsenate and antimonate of lead and lead oxide. They are readily withdrawn from the surface of the lead, and are worked up into antimony (arsenic)—tin-lead and antimony-lead alloys. Liquation, if not followed by poling, is carried on as a rule in a reverberatory furnace with an oblong, slightly trough-shaped inclined hearth; if the lead is to be poled it is usually melted down in a cast-iron kettle. If the lead is to be liquated and then brought to a bright-red heat, both operations are carried on in the same reverberatory furnace. This has an oblong, dish-shaped hearth of acid or basic fire-brick built into a wrought-iron pan, which rests on transverse rails supported by longitudinal walls. The lead is melted down at a low temperature and drossed. The temperature is then raised, and the scum which forms on the surface is withdrawn until pure litharge forms, which only takes place after all the tin, arsenic and antimony have been eliminated.

The lead produced in the reverberatory furnace and the ore-hearth is of a higher quality than that made in the blast furnace, as the ores processed are purer and richer, and the reducing action is less intense. The following analysis of blast-furnace Refining. lead from Freiberg, Saxony, is from an unusually impure batch: Pb = 95.088, Ag = 0.470, Bi = 0.019, Cu = 0.225, As = 1.826, Sb = 0.958, Sn = 1.354, Fe = 0.007, Zn = 0.002, S = 0.051. Among the impurities, most of the copper, nickel, and a significant amount of arsenic, some antimony, and trace amounts of silver are removed through liquation. The lead is melted slowly, allowing the impurities to separate into a scum (dross) that is easy to remove. The purification by liquation is enhanced by poling the lead when it is below red heat. A stick of green wood is pushed into the melt, and the vapors and gases released expose new surfaces to the air, which at this temperature has a mildly oxidizing effect. The pole, which is awkward to use, has been replaced by dry steam, which has a similar result. To eliminate tin, arsenic, and antimony, the lead must be brought to a bright-red heat, where the air has a strong oxidizing effect. Tin is mostly removed as a powdery mixture of stannate of lead and lead oxide, while arsenic and antimony are removed as a slagged mixture of arsenate and antimonate of lead and lead oxide. These can be easily taken from the surface of the lead and are processed into antimony (arsenic)-tin-lead and antimony-lead alloys. Liquation, unless followed by poling, is generally conducted in a reverberatory furnace with an elongated, slightly trough-shaped inclined hearth; if the lead is to be poled, it is typically melted in a cast-iron kettle. If the lead is to be liquated and then heated to bright red, both processes occur in the same reverberatory furnace. This furnace has an elongated, dish-shaped hearth made of acid or basic fire-brick built into a wrought-iron pan, which rests on transverse rails supported by longitudinal walls. The lead is melted at a low temperature and drossed. The temperature is then increased, and the scum that forms on the surface is removed until pure litharge is produced, which only happens after all the tin, arsenic, and antimony have been eliminated.

Silver is extracted from lead by means of the process of cupellation. Formerly all argentiferous lead had to be cupelled, and the resulting litharge then reduced to metallic lead. In 1833 Pattinson invented his process by means of which practically all the Desilverizing. silver is concentrated in 13% of the original lead to be cupelled, while the rest becomes market lead. In 1842 Karsten discovered that lead could be desilverized by means of zinc. His invention, however, only took practical form in 1850-1852 through the researches of Parkes, who showed how the zinc-silver-lead alloy formed could be worked and the desilverized lead freed from the zinc it had taken up. In the Parkes process only 5% of the original lead need be cupelled. Thus, while cupellation still furnishes the only means for the final separation of lead and silver, it has become an auxiliary process to the two methods of concentration given. Of these the Pattinson process has become subordinate to the Parkes 317 process, as it is more expensive and leaves more silver and impurities in the market lead. It holds its own, however, when base bullion contains bismuth in appreciable amounts, as in the Pattinson process bismuth follows the lead to be cupelled, while in the Parkes process it remains with the desilverized lead which goes to market, and lead of commerce should contain little bismuth. At Freiberg, Saxony, the two processes have been combined. The base bullion is imperfectly Pattinsonized, giving lead rich in silver and bismuth, which is cupelled, and lead low in silver, and especially so in bismuth, which is further desilverized by the Parkes process.

Silver is extracted from lead through the process of cupellation. In the past, all silver-bearing lead had to be cupelled, and the resulting litharge was then reduced to metallic lead. In 1833, Pattinson invented a method that concentrates nearly all the silver in 13% of the original lead for cupellation, while the remainder is processed into market lead. In 1842, Karsten discovered that lead could be desilverized using zinc. However, his invention only became practical between 1850 and 1852 through Parkes' research, which demonstrated how to handle the zinc-silver-lead alloy formed and how to remove the zinc from the desilverized lead. In the Parkes process, only 5% of the original lead needs to be cupelled. Therefore, while cupellation is still the only method for the final separation of lead and silver, it has become a secondary process alongside the two concentration methods mentioned. Among these, the Pattinson process is now less common than the Parkes process because it is more expensive and leaves more silver and impurities in the market lead. However, it remains effective when the base bullion contains noticeable amounts of bismuth, as in the Pattinson process, bismuth is removed with the lead to be cupelled, whereas in the Parkes process, it stays with the desilverized lead that goes to market, and commercial lead should have minimal bismuth. In Freiberg, Saxony, the two processes have been combined, where the base bullion is partially Pattinsonized, resulting in lead that is rich in silver and bismuth, which is then cupelled, and lead low in silver and significantly lower in bismuth is further desilverized using the Parkes process.

The effect of the two processes on the purity of the market lead is clearly shown by the two following analyses by Hampe, which represent lead from Lautenthal in the Harz Mountains, where the Parkes process replaced that of Pattinson, the ores and smelting process remaining practically the same:—

The impact of the two methods on the purity of market lead is clearly demonstrated by the following two analyses by Hampe, which showcase lead from Lautenthal in the Harz Mountains, where the Parkes process took the place of Pattinson's, while the ores and smelting process remained virtually unchanged:—

Process. Pb. Cu. Sb. As. Bi. Ag. Fe. Zn. Ni.
Pattinson 99.966200 0.015000 1.010000 none 0.000600 0.002200 0.004000 0.001000 1.001000
Parkes 99.983139 0.001413 0.005698 none 0.005487 0.000460 0.002289 0.000834 0.000680

The reverberatory furnace commonly used for cupelling goes by the name of the English cupelling furnace. It is oblong, and has a fixed roof and a movable iron hearth (test). Formerly the test was lined with bone-ash; at present the hearth Cupelling. material is a mixture of crushed limestone and clay (3:1) or Portland cement, either alone or mixed with crushed fire-brick; in a few instances the lining has been made of burnt magnesite. In the beginning of the operation enough argentiferous lead is charged to fill the cavity of the test. After it has been melted down and brought to a red heat, the blast, admitted at the back, oxidizes the lead and drives the litharge formed towards the front, where it is run off. At the same time small bars of argentiferous lead, inserted at the back, are slowly pushed forward, so that in melting down they may replace the oxidized lead. Thus the level of the lead is kept approximately constant, and the silver becomes concentrated in the lead. In large works the silver-lead alloy is removed when it contains 60-80% silver, and the cupellation of the rich bullion from several concentration furnaces is finished in a second furnace. At the same time the silver is brought to the required degree of fineness, usually by the use of nitre. In small works the cupellation is finished in one furnace, and the resulting low-grade silver fined in a plumbago crucible, either by overheating in the presence of air, or by the addition of silver sulphate to the melted silver, when air or sulphur trioxide and oxygen oxidize the impurities. The lead charged contains about 1.5% lead if it comes from a Pattinson plant, from 5-10% if from a Parkes plant. In a test 7 ft. by 4 ft. 10 in. and 4 in. deep, about 6 tons of lead are cupelled in twenty-four hours. A furnace is served by three men, working in eight-hour shifts, and requires about 2 tons of coal, which corresponds to about 110 gallons reduced oil, air being used as atomizer. The loss in lead is about 5%. The latest cupelling furnaces have the general form of a reverberatory copper-smelting furnace. The working door through which the litharge is run off lies under the flue which carries off the products of combustion and the lead fumes, the lead is charged and the blast is admitted near the fire-bridge.

The reverberatory furnace commonly used for cupelling is known as the English cupelling furnace. It's oblong and features a fixed roof and a movable iron hearth (test). In the past, the hearth was lined with bone ash; today, the lining material is a mix of crushed limestone and clay (3:1) or Portland cement, either on its own or mixed with crushed fire brick; in some cases, the lining has been made from burnt magnesite. At the start of the process, enough argentiferous lead is loaded into the cavity of the test to fill it. Once it melts down and reaches a red heat, a blast of air is introduced at the back to oxidize the lead, pushing the litharge formed toward the front where it is drained off. Simultaneously, small bars of argentiferous lead are inserted at the back and slowly pushed forward, ensuring that they replace the oxidized lead as it melts. This keeps the lead level relatively constant while concentrating the silver in the lead. In large operations, the silver-lead alloy is removed when it contains 60-80% silver, with the cupellation of the rich bullion from multiple concentration furnaces completed in a second furnace. During this process, the silver is refined to the desired purity, typically using nitre. In smaller operations, the cupellation is finished in one furnace, and the resulting low-grade silver is refined in a plumbago crucible, either by overheating in the presence of air or by adding silver sulfate to the melted silver, allowing air or sulfur trioxide and oxygen to oxidize the impurities. The lead used contains about 1.5% lead if sourced from a Pattinson plant, and 5-10% if from a Parkes plant. In a test measuring 7 ft. by 4 ft. 10 in. and 4 in. deep, around 6 tons of lead are cupelled in twenty-four hours. A furnace is operated by three men working in eight-hour shifts and requires about 2 tons of coal, which is equivalent to about 110 gallons of reduced oil, with air being used as an atomizer. The lead loss is roughly 5%. The latest cupelling furnaces resemble a reverberatory copper smelting furnace. The working door through which the litharge is drained is positioned under the flue that exhausts the combustion products and lead fumes, while lead is charged and the blast is introduced near the fire-bridge.

In the Pattinson process the argentiferous lead is melted down in the central cast iron kettle of a series 8-15, placed one next to the other, each having a capacity of 9-15 tons and a separate fire-place. The crystals of impoverished lead which fall Pattinson process. to the bottom, upon coaling the charge, are taken out with a skimmer and discharged into the neighbouring kettle (say to the right) until about two-thirds of the original charge has been removed; then the liquid enriched lead is ladled into the kettle on the opposite side. To the kettle, two-thirds full of crystals of lead, is now added lead of the same tenor in silver, the whole is liquefied, and the cooling, crystallizing, skimming and ladling are repeated. The same is done with the kettle one-third filled with liquid lead, and so on until the first kettle contains market lead, the last cupelling lead. The intervening kettles contain leads with silver contents ranging from above market to below cupelling lead. The original Pattinson process has been in many cases replaced by the Luce-Rozan process (1870), which does away with arduous labour and attains a more satisfactory crystallization. The plant consists of two tilting oval metal pans (capacity 7 tons), one cylindrical crystallizing pot (capacity 22 tons), with two discharging spouts and one steam inlet opening, two lead moulds (capacity 3½ tons), and a steam crane. Pans and pot are heated from separate fire-places. Supposing the pot to be filled with melted lead to be treated, the fire is withdrawn beneath and steam introduced. This cools and stirs the lead when crystals begin to form. As soon as two-thirds of the lead has separated in the form of crystals, the steam is shut off and the liquid lead drained off through the two spouts into the moulds. The fire underneath the pot is again started, the crystals are liquefied, and one of the two pans, filled with melted lead, is tilted by means of the crane and its contents poured into the pot. In the meantime the lead in the moulds, which has solidified, is removed with the crane and stacked to one side, until its turn comes to be raised and charged into one of the pans. The crystallization proper lasts one hour, the working of a charge four hours, six charges being run in twenty-four hours.

In the Pattinson process, argentiferous lead is melted in the main cast iron kettle of a series of 8-15 kettles, placed next to each other, each with a capacity of 9-15 tons and a separate fireplace. The crystals of poor-quality lead that settle at the bottom when the charge is loaded are removed with a skimmer and transferred to the neighboring kettle (for example, to the right) until about two-thirds of the original charge is removed; then the liquid enriched lead is ladled into the kettle on the opposite side. To the kettle that is two-thirds full of lead crystals, lead with the same silver content is added, the mixture is melted down, and the processes of cooling, crystallizing, skimming, and ladling are repeated. The same process is applied to the kettle that is one-third filled with liquid lead, and this continues until the first kettle contains market lead, and the last one has cupelling lead. The kettles in between have lead with silver contents ranging from above market to below cupelling lead. The original Pattinson process has often been replaced by the Luce-Rozan process (1870), which eliminates labor-intensive steps and achieves better crystallization. The setup consists of two tilting oval metal pans (each with a capacity of 7 tons), one cylindrical crystallizing pot (capacity 22 tons) with two discharge spouts and one steam inlet, two lead molds (capacity 3.5 tons), and a steam crane. The pans and pot are heated by separate fireplaces. When the pot is filled with melted lead for treatment, the fire is turned off, and steam is introduced. This cools and stirs the lead as crystals start to form. Once two-thirds of the lead has crystallized, the steam is turned off, and the liquid lead is drained through the two spouts into the molds. The fire under the pot is restarted, the crystals are melted again, and one of the two pans, filled with melted lead, is tilted by the crane to pour its contents into the pot. Meanwhile, the solidified lead in the molds is removed with the crane and set aside until it’s time to be transferred to one of the pans. The crystallization process itself lasts for one hour, and each charge takes four hours to work through, with six charges being processed in a 24-hour period.

It is absolutely necessary for the success of the Parkes process that the zinc and lead should contain only a small amount of impurity. The spelter used must therefore be of a good grade, and the lead is usually first refined in a reverberatory Parkes process. furnace (the softening furnace). The capacity of the furnace must be 10% greater than that of the kettle into which the softened lead is tapped, as the dross and skimmings formed amount to about 10% of the weight of the lead charged. The kettle is spherical, and is suspended over a fire-place by a broad rim resting on a wall; it is usually of cast iron. Most kettles at present hold 30 tons of lead; some, however, have double that capacity. When zinc is placed on the lead (heated to above the melting-point of zinc), liquefied and brought into intimate contact with the lead by stirring, gold, copper, silver and lead will combine with the zinc in the order given. By beginning with a small amount of zinc, all the gold and copper and some silver and lead will be alloyed with the zinc to a so-called gold—or copper—crust, and the residual lead saturated with zinc. By removing from the surface of the lead this first crust and working it up separately (liquating, retorting and cupelling), doré silver is obtained. By the second addition of zinc most of the silver will be collected in a saturated zinc-silver-lead crust, which, when worked up, gives fine silver. A third addition becomes necessary to remove the rest of the silver, when the lead will assay only 0.1 oz. silver per ton. As this complete desilverization is only possible by the use of an excess of zinc, the unsaturated zinc-silver-lead alloy is put aside to form part of the second zincking of the next following charge. In skimming the crust from the surface of the lead some unalloyed lead is also drawn off, and has to be separated by an additional operation (liquation), as, running lower in silver than the crust, it would otherwise reduce its silver content and increase the amount of lead to be cupelled. A zincking takes 5-6 hours; 1.5-2.5% zinc is required for desilverizing. The liquated zinc-silver-lead crust contains 5-10% silver, 30-40% zinc and 65-50% lead. Before it can be cupelled it has to be freed from most of the zinc, which is accomplished by distilling in a retort made of a mixture similar to that of the plumbago crucible. The retort is pear-shaped, and holds 1000-1500 lb of charge, consisting of liquated crust mixed with 1-3% of charcoal. The condenser commonly used is an old retort. The distillation of 1000 ℔ charge lasts 5-6 hours, requires 500-600 ℔ coke or 30± gallons reduced oil, and yields about 10% metallic zinc and 1% blue powder—a mixture of finely-divided metallic zinc and zinc oxide. About 60% of the zinc used in desilverizing is recovered in a form to be used again. One man serves 2-4 retorts. The desilverized lead, which retains 0.6-0.7% zinc, has to be refined before it is suited for industrial use. The operation is carried on in a reverberatory furnace or in a kettle. In the reverberatory furnace, similar to the one used in softening, the lead is brought to a bright-red heat and air allowed to have free access. The zinc and some lead are oxidized; part of the zinc passes off with the fumes, part is dissolved by the litharge, forming a melted mixture which is skimmed off and reduced in a blast-furnace or a reverberatory smelting furnace. In the kettle covered with a hood the zinc is oxidized by means of dry steam, and incidentally some lead by the air which cannot be completely excluded. A yellowish powdery mixture of zinc and lead oxides collects on the lead; it is skimmed off and sold as paint. From the reverberatory furnace or the kettle the refined lead is siphoned off into a storage (market) kettle after it has cooled somewhat, and from this it is siphoned off into moulds placed in a semi-circle on the floor. In the process the yield in metal, based upon the charge in the kettle, is lead 99%, silver 100+%, gold 98-100%. The plus-silver is due to the fact that in assaying the base bullion by cupellation, the silver lost by volatilization and cupel-absorption is neglected. In the United States the cost of desilverizing a ton base bullion is about $6.

It’s absolutely crucial for the success of the Parkes process that the zinc and lead have only a small amount of impurities. The zinc used must therefore be of good quality, and the lead is usually first refined in a reverberatory Parkes method. furnace (the softening furnace). The furnace needs to have a capacity that’s 10% greater than the kettle into which the softened lead is poured, as the dross and skimmings produced account for about 10% of the weight of the lead added. The kettle is spherical, suspended over a fire by a broad rim resting on a wall; it's typically made of cast iron. Most kettles today hold 30 tons of lead, though some can hold twice that. When zinc is added to the lead (heated beyond the melting point of zinc), it melts and mixes with the lead when stirred, with gold, copper, silver, and lead combining with the zinc in that order. By starting with a small amount of zinc, all the gold and copper and some silver and lead will alloy with the zinc, forming a so-called gold—or copper—crust, while the remaining lead becomes saturated with zinc. By removing this initial crust from the surface of the lead and processing it separately (liquating, retorting, and cupelling), doré silver is obtained. With the second addition of zinc, most of the silver will collect in a saturated zinc-silver-lead crust, which, when processed, yields fine silver. A third addition is necessary to extract the remaining silver, at which point the lead will assay at only 0.1 oz. of silver per ton. As this complete desilverization only occurs with excess zinc, the unsaturated zinc-silver-lead alloy is stored to contribute to the second treatment of the next load. When skimming the crust from the lead's surface, some unalloyed lead is also removed and must be separated through another process (liquation), as it contains less silver than the crust and would otherwise lower its silver content while increasing the amount of lead to be cupelled. A zincking takes 5-6 hours, requiring 1.5-2.5% zinc for desilverizing. The liquated zinc-silver-lead crust contains 5-10% silver, 30-40% zinc, and 50-65% lead. Before it can be cupelled, it has to be stripped of most of the zinc, which is done by distilling in a retort made from a mixture similar to that of a plumbago crucible. The retort is pear-shaped and holds 1000-1500 lb of charge, which consists of the liquated crust mixed with 1-3% charcoal. An old retort is typically used as the condenser. The distillation of a 1000 lb charge lasts 5-6 hours, requires 500-600 lb of coke or about 30 gallons of reduced oil, and yields roughly 10% metallic zinc and 1% blue powder—a mix of finely divided metallic zinc and zinc oxide. About 60% of the zinc used in desilverizing is recovered for reuse. One person operates 2-4 retorts. The desilverized lead, which retains 0.6-0.7% zinc, needs refining before it can be used industrially. This operation occurs in a reverberatory furnace or a kettle. In the reverberatory furnace, similar to the one used for softening, the lead is heated to a bright red and air is allowed in. Some zinc and lead are oxidized; part of the zinc escapes with the fumes, while some dissolves in the litharge, forming a melted mixture that is skimmed off and reduced in a blast furnace or reverberatory smelting furnace. In the kettle, which is covered with a hood, the zinc is oxidized using dry steam, and some lead is also oxidized due to air that cannot be completely excluded. A yellowish powdery mixture of zinc and lead oxides forms on top of the lead; it’s skimmed off and sold as paint. The refined lead is siphoned off into a storage kettle after cooling slightly, and then into molds arranged in a semi-circle on the floor. In the process, the yield of metal based on the charge in the kettle is lead 99%, silver 100+%, and gold 98-100%. The extra silver is because the loss of silver through volatilization and cupel absorption is ignored when assaying the base bullion by cupellation. In the United States, the cost of desilverizing a ton of base bullion is about $6.

Properties of Lead.—Pure lead is a feebly lustrous bluish-white metal, endowed with a characteristically high degree of softness and plasticity, and almost entirely devoid of elasticity. Its breaking strain is very small: a wire 110th in. thick is ruptured by a charge of about 30 ℔. The specific gravity is 11.352 for ingot, and from 11.354 to 11.365 for sheet lead (water of 4°C. = 1). The expansion of unit-length from 0°C. to to 100°C. is .002948 (Fizeau). The conductivity for heat (Wiedemann and Franz) or electricity is 8.5, that of silver being taken as 100. It melts at 327.7°C. (H. L. Callendar); at a bright-red heat it perceptibly vapourizes, and boils at a temperature between 1450° and 1600°. The specific heat is .0314 (Regnault). Lead exposed to ordinary air is rapidly tarnished, but the thin dark film formed is very slow in increasing. When kept fused in the presence of air lead readily takes up oxygen, with the formation 318 at first of a dark-coloured scum, and then of monoxide PbO, the rate of oxidation increasing with the temperature.

Properties of Lead.—Pure lead is a slightly shiny bluish-white metal that’s notably soft and malleable, and it has almost no elasticity. Its breaking point is quite low: a wire 110th inch thick breaks with a load of about 30 pounds. The specific gravity is 11.352 for ingots, and ranges from 11.354 to 11.365 for sheet lead (with water at 4°C. = 1). The expansion over a unit length from 0°C to 100°C is .002948 (Fizeau). Its thermal and electrical conductivity is rated at 8.5, with silver being the benchmark at 100. It melts at 327.7°C. (H. L. Callendar); at a bright-red heat, it begins to evaporate, and it boils at a temperature between 1450° and 1600°. The specific heat is .0314 (Regnault). When exposed to regular air, lead tarnishes quickly, but the thin dark film that forms grows very slowly. When kept molten in the presence of air, lead readily absorbs oxygen, initially creating a dark scum and then forming lead monoxide (PbO), with the rate of oxidation increasing with temperature. 318

Water when absolutely pure has no action on lead, but in the presence of air the lead is quickly attacked, with formation of the hydrate, Pb(OH)2, which is appreciably soluble in water forming an alkaline liquid. When carbonic acid is present the dissolved oxide is soon precipitated as basic carbonate, so that the corrosion of the lead becomes continuous. Since all soluble lead compounds are strong cumulative poisons, danger is involved in using lead cisterns or pipes in the distribution of pure waters. The word “pure” is emphasized because experience shows that the presence in a water of even small proportions of calcium bicarbonate or sulphate prevents its action on lead. All impurities do not act in a similar way. Ammonium nitrate and nitrite, for instance, intensify the action of a water on lead. Even pure waters, however, such as that of Loch Katrine (which forms the Glasgow supply), act so slowly, at least on such lead pipes as have already been in use for some time, that there is no danger in using short lead service pipes even for them, if the taps are being constantly used. Lead cisterns must be unhesitatingly condemned.

Water that is completely pure doesn’t react with lead, but when air is present, lead is quickly corroded, forming the hydrate Pb(OH)2, which dissolves in water to create an alkaline solution. If carbonic acid is present, the dissolved oxide is rapidly turned into basic carbonate, leading to ongoing corrosion of the lead. Since all soluble lead compounds are highly toxic and can accumulate in the body, using lead cisterns or pipes to distribute pure water poses a significant risk. The term "pure" is stressed here because experience shows that even small amounts of calcium bicarbonate or sulfate in water prevent it from reacting with lead. Not all impurities behave the same way. For example, ammonium nitrate and nitrite increase the corrosive effect of water on lead. However, even pure waters like Loch Katrine (which supplies Glasgow) react so slowly, especially with lead pipes that have been used for a while, that short lead service pipes are generally safe as long as the taps are frequently used. Lead cisterns, however, should definitely be avoided.

The presence of carbonic acid in a water does not affect its action on lead. Aqueous non-oxidizing acids generally have little or no action on lead in the absence of air. Dilute sulphuric acid (say an acid of 20% H2SO4 or less) has no action on lead even when air is present, nor on boiling. Strong acid does act, the more so the greater its concentration and the higher its temperature. Pure lead is far more readily corroded than a metal contaminated with 1% or even less of antimony or copper. Boiling concentrated sulphuric acid converts lead into sulphate, with evolution of sulphur dioxide. Dilute nitric acid readily dissolves the metal, with formation of nitrate Pb(NO3)2.

The presence of carbonic acid in water does not affect how it interacts with lead. Aqueous non-oxidizing acids generally have little or no effect on lead when there's no air present. Dilute sulfuric acid (about 20% H2SO4 or less) has no effect on lead, even in the presence of air, or when boiled. Stronger acids do interact with lead, especially as their concentration and temperature increase. Pure lead is much more easily corroded than lead that contains even 1% or less of antimony or copper. Boiling concentrated sulfuric acid transforms lead into sulfate, releasing sulfur dioxide. Dilute nitric acid easily dissolves the metal, forming nitrate Pb(NO3)2.

Lead Alloys.—Lead, unites readily with almost all other metals; hence, and on account of its being used for the extraction of (for instance) silver, its alchemistic name of saturnus. Of the alloys the following may be named:—

Lead Alloys.—Lead easily combines with almost all other metals; therefore, and because it is used to extract (for example) silver, its alchemical name is saturnus. The following alloys can be mentioned:—

With Antimony.—Lead contaminated with small proportions of antimony is more highly proof against sulphuric acid than the pure metal. An alloy of 83 parts of lead and 17 of antimony is used as type metal; other proportions are used, however, and other metals added besides antimony (e.g. tin, bismuth) to give the alloy certain properties.

With Antimony.—Lead that has small amounts of antimony mixed in is more resistant to sulfuric acid than pure lead. An alloy made up of 83 parts lead and 17 parts antimony is used as type metal; however, different ratios and other metals like tin and bismuth are also added to give the alloy specific qualities.

Arsenic renders lead harder. An alloy made by addition of about 156th of arsenic has been used for making shot.

Arsenic makes lead harder. An alloy created by adding about 156th of arsenic has been used for making shot.

Bismuth and Antimony.—An alloy consisting of 9 parts of lead, 2 of antimony and 2 of bismuth is used for stereotype plates.

Bismuth and Antimony.—An alloy made up of 9 parts lead, 2 parts antimony, and 2 parts bismuth is used for stereotype plates.

Bismuth and Tin.—These triple alloys are noted for their low fusing points. An alloy of 5 of lead, 8 of bismuth and 3 of tin fuses at 94.4°C, i.e. below the boiling-point of water (Rose’s metal). An alloy of 15 parts of bismuth, 8 of lead, 4 of tin and 3 of cadmium (Wood’s alloy) melts below 70°C.

Bismuth and Tin.—These triple alloys are known for their low melting points. An alloy made of 5 parts lead, 8 parts bismuth, and 3 parts tin melts at 94.4°C, i.e. below the boiling point of water (Rose’s metal). An alloy consisting of 15 parts bismuth, 8 parts lead, 4 parts tin, and 3 parts cadmium (Wood’s alloy) melts below 70°C.

Tin unites with lead in any proportion with slight expansion, the alloy fusing at a lower temperature than either component. It is used largely for soldering.

Tin combines with lead in any amount with a little bit of expansion, and the alloy melts at a lower temperature than either of its components. It's commonly used for soldering.

“Pewter” (q.v.) may be said to be substantially an alloy of the same two metals, but small quantities of copper, antimony and zinc are frequently added.

“Pewter” (q.v.) can be described as primarily an alloy of the same two metals, but small amounts of copper, antimony, and zinc are often added.

Compounds of Lead.

Lead Compounds.

Lead generally functions as a divalent element of distinctly metallic character, yielding a definite series of salts derived from the oxide PbO. At the same time, however, it forms a number of compounds in which it is most decidedly tetravalent; and thus it shows relations to carbon, silicon, germanium and tin.

Lead generally acts as a divalent element with a clear metallic nature, producing a specific series of salts from the oxide PbO. However, it also creates several compounds in which it is definitely tetravalent; thus, it has connections to carbon, silicon, germanium, and tin.

Oxides.—Lead combines with oxygen to form five oxides, viz. Pb2O, PbO, PbO2, Pb2O3 and Pb3O4. The suboxide, Pb2O, is the first product of the oxidation of lead, and is also obtained as a black powder by heating lead oxalate to 300° out of contact with air. It ignites when heated in air with the formation of the monoxide; dilute acids convert it into metallic lead and lead monoxide, the latter dissolving in the acid. The monoxide, PbO, occurs in nature as the mineral lead ochre. This oxide is produced by heating lead in contact with air and removing the film of oxide as formed. It is manufactured in two forms, known as “massicot” and “litharge.” The former is produced at temperatures below, the latter at temperatures above the fusing-point of the oxide. The liquid litharge when allowed to cool solidifies into a hard stone-like mass, which, however, when left to itself, soon crumbles up into a heap of resplendent dark yellow scales known as “flake litharge.” “Buff” or “levigated litharge” is prepared by grinding the larger pieces under water. Litharge is much used for the preparation of lead salts, for the manufacture of oil varnishes, of certain cements, and of lead plaster, and for other purposes. Massicot is the raw material for the manufacture of “red lead” or “minium.”

Oxides.—Lead combines with oxygen to create five oxides: Pb2O, PbO, PbO2, Pb2O3, and Pb3O4. The suboxide, Pb2O, is the initial product of lead oxidation and can also be obtained as a black powder by heating lead oxalate to 300° in the absence of air. It ignites when heated in air, forming the monoxide; dilute acids convert it into metallic lead and lead monoxide, the latter dissolving in the acid. The monoxide, PbO, is found in nature as the mineral lead ochre. This oxide is produced by heating lead in contact with air and removing the oxide layer as it forms. It is manufactured in two forms, called “massicot” and “litharge.” Massicot is produced at temperatures below the fusing point of the oxide, while litharge is produced at temperatures above this point. When allowed to cool, liquid litharge solidifies into a hard, stone-like mass, which eventually crumbles into shining dark yellow scales known as “flake litharge.” “Buff” or “levigated litharge” is created by grinding the larger pieces under water. Litharge is widely used to prepare lead salts, in the making of oil varnishes, certain cements, lead plaster, and for other applications. Massicot serves as the raw material for producing “red lead” or “minium.”

Lead monoxide is dimorphous, occurring as cubical dodecahedra and as rhombic octahedra. Its specific gravity is about 9; it is sparingly soluble in water, but readily dissolves in acids and molten alkalis. A yellow and red modification have been described (Zeit. anorg. Chem., 1906, 50, p. 265). The corresponding hydrate, Pb(OH)2, is obtained as a white crystalline precipitate by adding ammonia to a solution of lead nitrate or acetate. It dissolves in an excess of alkali to form plumbites of the general formula Pb(OM)2. It absorbs carbon dioxide from the air when moist. A hydrated oxide, 2PbO·H2O, is obtained when a solution of the monoxide in potash is treated with carbon dioxide.

Lead monoxide has two forms, appearing as cubical dodecahedra and rhombic octahedra. Its specific gravity is around 9; it dissolves slightly in water but easily in acids and molten alkalis. There are yellow and red variations reported (Zeit. anorg. Chem., 1906, 50, p. 265). The related hydrate, Pb(OH)2, is formed as a white crystalline precipitate by adding ammonia to a solution of lead nitrate or acetate. It dissolves in excess alkali to create plumbites with the general formula Pb(OM)2. When it's moist, it absorbs carbon dioxide from the air. A hydrated oxide, 2PbO·H2O, is produced when a solution of the monoxide in potash is treated with carbon dioxide.

Lead dioxide, PbO2, also known as “puce oxide,” occurs in nature as the mineral plattnerite, and may be most conveniently prepared by heating mixed solutions of lead acetate and bleaching powder until the original precipitate blackens. The solution is filtered, the precipitate well washed, and, generally, is put up in the form of a paste in well-closed vessels. It is also obtained by passing chlorine into a suspension of lead oxide or carbonate, or of magnesia and lead sulphate, in water; or by treating the sesquioxide or red oxide with nitric acid. The formation of lead dioxide by the electrolysis of a lead solution, the anode being a lead plate coated with lead oxide or sulphate and the cathode a lead plate, is the fundamental principle of the storage cell (see Accumulator). Heating or exposure to sunlight reduces it to the red oxide; it fires when ground with sulphur, and oxidizes ammonia to nitric acid, with the simultaneous formation of ammonium nitrate. It oxidizes a manganese salt (free from chlorine) in the presence of nitric acid to a permanganate; this is a very delicate test for manganese. It forms crystallizable salts with potassium and calcium hydrates, and functions as a weak acid forming salts named plumbates. The Kassner process for the manufacture of oxygen depends upon the formation of calcium plumbate, Ca2PbO4, by heating a mixture of lime and litharge in a current of air, decomposing this substance into calcium carbonate and lead dioxide by heating in a current of carbon dioxide, and then decomposing these compounds with the evolution of carbon dioxide and oxygen by raising the temperature. Plumbic acid, PbO(OH)2, is obtained as a bluish-black, lustrous body of electrolysing an alkaline solution of lead sodium tartrate.

Lead dioxide, PbO2, also called "puce oxide," is found in nature as the mineral plattnerite. It can be most easily prepared by heating mixed solutions of lead acetate and bleaching powder until the original precipitate turns black. The solution is filtered, the precipitate is thoroughly washed, and is usually stored as a paste in tightly sealed containers. It can also be produced by passing chlorine through a suspension of lead oxide or carbonate, or a mixture of magnesia and lead sulfate, in water; or by treating the sesquioxide or red oxide with nitric acid. The generation of lead dioxide through the electrolysis of a lead solution, with the anode being a lead plate coated with lead oxide or sulfate and the cathode a lead plate, is the key principle behind a storage cell (see Accumulator). Heating it or exposing it to sunlight reduces it to red oxide; it ignites when mixed with sulfur and oxidizes ammonia to nitric acid while simultaneously forming ammonium nitrate. It oxidizes a chlorine-free manganese salt in the presence of nitric acid to permanganate, which is a very sensitive test for manganese. It forms crystallizable salts with potassium and calcium hydroxides and acts as a weak acid, creating salts known as plumbates. The Kassner process for producing oxygen relies on forming calcium plumbate, Ca2PbO4, by heating a mix of lime and litharge in a stream of air, breaking down this compound into calcium carbonate and lead dioxide by heating it in carbon dioxide, and then breaking down these compounds while releasing carbon dioxide and oxygen through increased temperatures. Plumbic acid, PbO(OH)2, is produced as a bluish-black, shiny solid by electrolyzing an alkaline solution of lead sodium tartrate.

Tetravalent Lead.—If a suspension of lead dichloride in hydrochloric acid be treated with chlorine gas, a solution of lead tetrachloride is obtained; by adding ammonium chloride ammonium plumbichloride, (NH4)2PbCl6, is precipitated, which on treatment with strong sulphuric acid yields lead tetrachloride, PbCl4, as a translucent, yellow, highly refractive liquid. It freezes at -15° to a yellowish crystalline mass; on heating it loses chlorine and forms lead dichloride. With water it forms a hydrate, and ultimately decomposes into lead dioxide and hydrochloric acid. It combines with alkaline chlorides—potassium, rubidium and caesium—to form crystalline plumbichlorides; it also forms a crystalline compound with quinoline. By dissolving red lead, Pb3O4, in glacial acetic acid and crystallizing the filtrate, colourless monoclinic prisms of lead tetracetate, Pb(C2H3O2)4, are obtained. This salt gives the corresponding chloride and fluoride with hydrochloric and hydrofluoric acids, and the phosphate, Pb(HPO4)2, with phosphoric acid.

Tetravalent Lead.—When you mix a suspension of lead dichloride in hydrochloric acid with chlorine gas, you get a solution of lead tetrachloride. Adding ammonium chloride results in a precipitate of ammonium plumbichloride, (NH4)2PbCl6. When this is treated with strong sulfuric acid, it produces lead tetrachloride, PbCl4, which is a translucent, yellow, highly refractive liquid. It freezes at -15° into a yellowish crystalline mass; when heated, it loses chlorine and turns into lead dichloride. When combined with water, it forms a hydrate and eventually breaks down into lead dioxide and hydrochloric acid. It can also combine with alkaline chlorides—potassium, rubidium, and cesium—to create crystalline plumbichlorides; it also forms a crystalline compound with quinoline. Dissolving red lead, Pb3O4, in glacial acetic acid and crystallizing the filtrate yields colorless monoclinic prisms of lead tetracetate, Pb(C2H3O2)4. This salt reacts with hydrochloric and hydrofluoric acids to form the corresponding chloride and fluoride, and with phosphoric acid to produce the phosphate, Pb(HPO4)2.

These salts are like those of tin; and the resemblance to this metal is clearly enhanced by the study of the alkyl compounds. Here compounds of divalent lead have not yet been obtained; by acting with zinc ethide on lead chloride, lead tetraethide, Pb(C2H3)4, is obtained, with the separation of metallic lead.

These salts are similar to those of tin, and the similarity to this metal is clearly highlighted by examining the alkyl compounds. So far, compounds with divalent lead have not been obtained; by reacting zinc ethide with lead chloride, lead tetraethide, Pb(C2H3)4, is produced, along with the separation of metallic lead.

Lead sesquioxide, Pb2O3, is obtained as a reddish-yellow amorphous powder by carefully adding sodium hypochlorite to a cold potash solution of lead oxide, or by adding very dilute ammonia to a solution of red lead in acetic acid. It is decomposed by acids into a mixture of lead monoxide and dioxide, and may thus be regarded as lead metaplumbate, PbPbO3. Red lead or triplumbic tetroxide, Pb3O4, is a scarlet crystalline powder of specific gravity 8.6-9.1, obtained by roasting very finely divided pure massicot or lead carbonate; the brightness of the colour depends in a great measure on the roasting. Pliny mentions it under the name of minium, but it was confused with cinnabar and the red arsenic sulphide; Dioscorides mentions its preparation from white lead or lead carbonate. On heating it assumes a finer colour, but then turns violet and finally black; regaining, however, its original colour on cooling. On ignition, it loses oxygen and forms litharge. Commercial red lead is frequently contaminated with this oxide, which may, however, be removed by repeated digestion with lead acetate. Its common adulterants are iron oxides, powdered barytes and brick dust. Acids decompose it into lead dioxide and monoxide, and the latter may or may not dissolve to form a salt; red lead may, therefore, be regarded as lead orthoplumbate, Pb2PbO4. It is chiefly used as a pigment and in the manufacture of flint glass.

Lead sesquioxide, Pb2O3, is obtained as a reddish-yellow amorphous powder by carefully adding sodium hypochlorite to a cold potash solution of lead oxide, or by adding very dilute ammonia to a solution of red lead in acetic acid. It breaks down in acids into a mix of lead monoxide and dioxide and can be considered lead metaplumbate, PbPbO3. Red lead or triplumbic tetroxide, Pb3O4, is a scarlet crystalline powder with a specific gravity of 8.6-9.1, made by roasting very finely divided pure massicot or lead carbonate; the brightness of the color largely depends on the roasting process. Pliny refers to it as minium, but it was often confused with cinnabar and red arsenic sulfide; Dioscorides mentions making it from white lead or lead carbonate. When heated, it takes on a finer color but then turns violet and eventually black; however, it regains its original color upon cooling. When ignited, it loses oxygen and forms litharge. Commercial red lead is often contaminated with this oxide, which can be removed by repeated digestion with lead acetate. Common impurities include iron oxides, powdered barytes, and brick dust. Acids break it down into lead dioxide and monoxide, and the latter may or may not dissolve to form a salt; red lead can therefore be seen as lead orthoplumbate, Pb2PbO4. It is mainly used as a pigment and in the manufacturing of flint glass.

Lead chloride, PbCl2, occurs in nature as the mineral cotunnite, which crystallizes in the rhombic system, and is found in the neighbourhood of volcanic craters. It is artificially obtained by adding hydrochloric acid to a solution of lead salt, as a white precipitate, 319 little soluble in cold water, less so in dilute hydrochloric acid, more so in the strong acid, and readily soluble in hot water, from which on cooling, the excess of dissolved salt separates out in silky rhombic needles. It melts at 485° and solidifies on cooling to a translucent, horn-like mass; an early name for it was plumbum corneum, horn lead. A basic chloride, Pb(OH)Cl, was introduced in 1849 by Pattinson as a substitute for white lead. Powdered galena is dissolved in hot hydrochloric acid, the solution allowed to cool and the deposit of impure lead chloride washed with cold water to remove iron and copper. The residue is then dissolved in hot water, filtered, and the clear solution is mixed with very thin milk of lime so adjusted that it takes out one-half of the chlorine of the PbCl2. The oxychloride comes down as an amorphous white precipitate. Another oxychloride, PbCl2·7PbO, known as “Cassel yellow,” was prepared by Vauquelin by fusing pure oxide, PbO, with one-tenth of its weight of sal ammoniac. “Turner’s yellow” or “patent yellow” is another artificially prepared oxychloride, used as a pigment. Mendipite and matlockite are mineral oxychlorides.

Lead chloride, PbCl2, is found in nature as the mineral cotunnite, which crystallizes in the rhombic system and is located near volcanic craters. It can be made artificially by adding hydrochloric acid to a lead salt solution, resulting in a white precipitate that is slightly soluble in cold water, even less soluble in dilute hydrochloric acid, more soluble in strong acid, and easily soluble in hot water. When it cools, the excess dissolved salt crystallizes out in silky rhombic needles. It melts at 485° and solidifies upon cooling into a translucent, horn-like mass; it was previously known as plumbum corneum, or horn lead. In 1849, Pattinson introduced a basic chloride, Pb(OH)Cl, as an alternative to white lead. Powdered galena is dissolved in hot hydrochloric acid, allowed to cool, and then the resulting impure lead chloride is washed with cold water to remove iron and copper. The residue is then dissolved in hot water, filtered, and mixed with a very thin milk of lime so that it removes half of the chlorine from the PbCl2. The oxychloride precipitates as an amorphous white solid. Another oxychloride, PbCl2·7PbO, known as “Cassel yellow,” was created by Vauquelin by fusing pure oxide, PbO, with one-tenth of its weight in sal ammoniac. “Turner’s yellow” or “patent yellow” is another artificially made oxychloride used as a pigment. Mendipite and matlockite are examples of mineral oxychlorides.

Lead, fluoride, PbF2, is a white powder obtained by precipitating a lead salt with a soluble fluoride; it is sparingly soluble in water but readily dissolves in hydrochloric and nitric acids. A chloro-fluoride, PbClF, is obtained by adding sodium fluoride to a solution of lead chloride. Lead bromide, PbBr2, a white solid, and lead iodide, PbI2, a yellow solid, are prepared by precipitating a lead salt with a soluble bromide or iodide; they resemble the chloride in solubility.

Lead fluoride, PbF2, is a white powder created by mixing a lead salt with a soluble fluoride; it has low solubility in water but dissolves easily in hydrochloric and nitric acids. A chloro-fluoride, PbClF, is produced by adding sodium fluoride to a lead chloride solution. Lead bromide, PbBr2, which is a white solid, and lead iodide, PbI2, a yellow solid, are made by mixing a lead salt with a soluble bromide or iodide; they have similar solubility to the chloride.

Lead carbonate, PbCO3, occurs in nature as the mineral cerussite (q.v.). It is produced by the addition of a solution of lead salt to an excess of ammonium carbonate, as an almost insoluble white precipitate. Of greater practical importance is a basic carbonate, substantially 2PbCO3·Pb(OH)2, largely used as a white pigment under the name of “white lead.” This pigment is of great antiquity; Theophrastus called it ψιμύθιον, and prepared it by acting on lead with vinegar, and Pliny, who called it cerussa, obtained it by dissolving lead in vinegar and evaporating to dryness. It thus appears that white lead and sugar of lead were undifferentiated. Geber gave the preparation in a correct form, and T. O. Bergman proved its composition. This pigment is manufactured by several methods. In the old Dutch method, pieces of sheet lead are suspended in stoneware pots so as to occupy the upper two-thirds of the vessels. A little vinegar is poured into each pot; they are then covered with plates of sheet lead, buried in horse-dung or spent tanner’s bark, and left to themselves for a considerable time. By the action of the acetic acid and atmospheric oxygen, the lead is converted superficially into a basic acetate, which is at once decomposed by the carbon dioxide, with formation of white lead and acetic acid, which latter then acts de novo. After a month or so the plates are converted to a more or less considerable depth into crusts of white lead. These are knocked off, ground up with water, freed from metal-particles by elutriation, and the paste of white lead is allowed to set and dry in small conical forms. The German method differs from the Dutch inasmuch as the lead is suspended in a large chamber heated by ordinary means, and there exposed to the simultaneous action of vapour of aqueous acetic acid and of carbon dioxide. Another process depends upon the formation of lead chloride by grinding together litharge with salt and water, and then treating the alkaline fluid with carbon dioxide until it is neutral. White lead is an earthy, amorphous powder. The inferior varieties of commercial “white lead” are produced by mixing the genuine article with more or less of finely powdered heavy spar or occasionally zinc-white (ZnO). Venetian white, Hamburg white and Dutch white are mixtures of one part of white lead with one, two and three parts of barium sulphate respectively.

Lead carbonate, PbCO3, is found in nature as the mineral cerussite (q.v.). It is created by adding a lead salt solution to excess ammonium carbonate, resulting in an almost insoluble white precipitate. More importantly, a basic carbonate, about 2PbCO3·Pb(OH)2, is widely used as a white pigment known as “white lead.” This pigment has been around for a long time; Theophrastus referred to it as ψιμύθιον and made it by reacting lead with vinegar, while Pliny, who called it cerussa, obtained it by dissolving lead in vinegar and then evaporating it to dryness. It seems that white lead and sugar of lead were not distinguished. Geber correctly described its preparation, and T. O. Bergman confirmed its composition. This pigment is produced through several methods. In the old Dutch method, pieces of sheet lead are hung in stoneware pots to fill the upper two-thirds of the containers. A small amount of vinegar is added to each pot; they are then covered with lead plates, buried in horse dung or used tanner’s bark, and left undisturbed for a long period. Through the action of acetic acid and atmospheric oxygen, the lead is superficially transformed into a basic acetate, which is then quickly broken down by carbon dioxide, creating white lead and acetic acid, which then acts de novo. After about a month, the plates turn into crusts of white lead to a significant depth. These crusts are knocked off, ground with water, and separated from metal particles by elutriation, after which the white lead paste is allowed to set and dry in small conical shapes. The German method is different from the Dutch in that lead is suspended in a large chamber heated in a standard way, where it is simultaneously exposed to vapor from aqueous acetic acid and carbon dioxide. Another technique involves creating lead chloride by grinding litharge with salt and water, then treating the alkaline solution with carbon dioxide until it’s neutral. White lead is a powder that is earthy and amorphous. The lower-quality commercial “white lead” varieties are made by mixing the authentic product with varying amounts of finely powdered heavy spar or sometimes zinc-white (ZnO). Venetian white, Hamburg white, and Dutch white are blends of one part white lead with one, two, and three parts of barium sulfate, respectively.

Lead sulphide, PbS, occurs in nature as the mineral galena (q.v.), and constitutes the most valuable ore of lead. It may be artificially prepared by leading sulphur vapour over lead, by fusing litharge with sulphur, or, as a black precipitate, by passing sulphuretted hydrogen into a solution of a lead salt. It dissolves in strong nitric acid with the formation of the nitrate and sulphate, and also in hot concentrated hydrochloric acid.

Lead sulfide, PbS, is found in nature as the mineral galena (q.v.), and is the most valuable ore of lead. It can be artificially created by passing sulfur vapor over lead, by melting litharge with sulfur, or as a black precipitate by introducing hydrogen sulfide into a solution of a lead salt. It dissolves in strong nitric acid, resulting in the formation of nitrate and sulfate, and also in hot concentrated hydrochloric acid.

Lead sulphate, PbSO4, occurs in nature as the mineral anglesite (q.v.), and may be prepared by the addition of sulphuric acid to solutions of lead salts, as a white precipitate almost insoluble in water (1 in 21,739), less soluble still in dilute sulphuric acid (1 in 36,504) and insoluble in alcohol. Ammonium sulphide blackens it, and it is coluble in solution of ammonium acetate, which distinguishes it from barium sulphate. Strong sulphuric acid dissolves it, forming an acid salt, Pb(HSO4)2, which is hydrolysed by adding water, the normal sulphate being precipitated; hence the milkiness exhibited by samples of oil of vitriol on dilution.

Lead sulfate, PbSO4, is found in nature as the mineral anglesite (see above), and can be created by mixing sulfuric acid with lead salt solutions, resulting in a white precipitate that is almost insoluble in water (1 in 21,739), even less soluble in dilute sulfuric acid (1 in 36,504), and insoluble in alcohol. Ammonium sulfide turns it black, and it dissolves in ammonium acetate solution, which helps differentiate it from barium sulfate. Concentrated sulfuric acid dissolves it, producing an acid salt, Pb(HSO4)2, which hydrolyzes when water is added, leading to the precipitation of the normal sulfate; this is why samples of sulfuric acid turn cloudy when diluted.

Lead nitrate, Pb(NO3)2, is obtained by dissolving the metal or oxide in aqueous nitric acid; it forms white crystals, difficultly soluble in cold water, readily in hot water and almost insoluble in strong nitric acid. It was mentioned by Libavius, who named it calx plumb dulcis. It is decomposed by heat into oxide, nitrogen peroxide and oxygen; and is used for the manufacture of fusees and other deflagrating compounds, and also for preparing mordants in the dyeing and calico-printing industries. Basic nitrates, e.g. Pb(NO3)OH, Pb3O(OH)2(NO3)2, Pb3O2(OH)NO3, &c., have been described.

Lead nitrate, Pb(NO3)2, is obtained by dissolving the metal or oxide in aqueous nitric acid. It forms white crystals that are hard to dissolve in cold water but dissolvable in hot water and almost insoluble in strong nitric acid. It was mentioned by Libavius, who called it calx plumb dulcis. When heated, it breaks down into oxide, nitrogen peroxide, and oxygen. It is used to make fusees and other explosive compounds and for preparing mordants in dyeing and calico-printing. Basic nitrates, like Pb(NO3)OH, Pb3O(OH)2(NO3)2, and Pb3O2(OH)NO3, etc., have been described.

Lead Phosphates.—The normal ortho-phosphate, Pb3(PO4)2, is a white precipitate obtained by adding sodium phosphate to lead acetate; the acid phosphate, PbHPO4, is produced by precipitating a boiling solution of lead nitrate with phosphoric acid; the pyrophosphate and meta-phosphate are similar white precipitates.

Lead Phosphates.—The standard ortho-phosphate, Pb3(PO4)2, is a white solid that forms when sodium phosphate is added to lead acetate. The acid phosphate, PbHPO4, is created by adding phosphoric acid to a boiling solution of lead nitrate. The pyrophosphate and meta-phosphate also appear as similar white solids.

Lead Borates.—By fusing litharge with boron trioxide, glasses of a composition varying with the proportions of the mixture are obtained; some of these are used in the manufacture of glass. The borate, Pb2B6O11·4H2O, is obtained as a white precipitate by adding borax to a lead salt; this on heating with strong ammonia gives PbB2O4·H2·O, which, in turn, when boiled with a solution of boric acid, gives PbB4O7·4H2O.

Lead Borates.—By melting litharge with boron trioxide, different types of glass are produced depending on the mix ratios; some of these are used to make glass. The borate, Pb2B6O11·4H2O, appears as a white precipitate when borax is added to a lead salt; when this is heated with strong ammonia, it produces PbB2O4·H2·O, which then, when boiled with a solution of boric acid, yields PbB4O7·4H2O.

Lead silicates are obtained as glasses by fusing litharge with silica; they play a considerable part in the manufacture of the lead glasses (see Glass).

Lead silicates are made into glass by fusing litharge with silica; they are important in the production of lead glasses (see Glass).

Lead chromate, PbCrO4, is prepared industrially as a yellow pigment, chrome yellow, by precipitating sugar of lead solution with potassium bichromate. The beautiful yellow precipitate is little soluble in dilute nitric acid, but soluble in caustic potash. The vermilion-like pigment which occurs in commerce as “chrome-red” is a basic chromate, Pb2CrO5, prepared by treating recently precipitated normal chromate with a properly adjusted proportion of caustic soda, or by boiling it with normal (yellow) potassium chromate.

Lead chromate, PbCrO4, is made industrially as a yellow pigment called chrome yellow by mixing a lead solution with potassium bichromate. The vibrant yellow precipitate is mostly insoluble in dilute nitric acid but dissolves in caustic potash. The vermilion-like pigment sold commercially as “chrome-red” is a basic chromate, Pb2CrO5, created by treating recently precipitated normal chromate with the right amount of caustic soda or by boiling it with normal (yellow) potassium chromate.

Lead acetate, Pb(C2H3O2)2·3H2O (called “sugar” of lead, on account of its sweetish taste), is manufactured by dissolving massicot in aqueous acetic acid. It forms colourless transparent crystals, soluble in one and a half parts of cold water and in eight parts of alcohol, which on exposure to ordinary air become opaque through absorption of carbonic acid, which forms a crust of basic carbonate. An aqueous solution readily dissolves lead oxide, with formation of a strongly alkaline solution containing basic acetates (Acetum Plumbi or Saturni). When carbon dioxide is passed into this solution the whole of the added oxide, and even part of the oxide of the normal salt, is precipitated as a basic carbonate chemically similar, but not quite equivalent as a pigment, to white lead.

Lead acetate, Pb(C2H3O2)2·3H2O (known as “sugar of lead” because of its slightly sweet taste), is produced by dissolving massicot in water mixed with acetic acid. It forms colorless, transparent crystals that are soluble in one and a half parts of cold water and in eight parts of alcohol. When exposed to regular air, it becomes opaque due to the absorption of carbonic acid, forming a crust of basic carbonate. An aqueous solution easily dissolves lead oxide, creating a strongly alkaline solution that contains basic acetates (Acetum Plumbi or Saturni). When carbon dioxide is bubbled into this solution, all the added oxide, and even some of the oxide from the normal salt, precipitates as a basic carbonate that is chemically similar, but not identical, in pigment to white lead.

Analysis.—When mixed with sodium carbonate and heated on charcoal in the reducing flame lead salts yield malleable globules of metal and a yellow oxide-ring. Solutions of lead salts (colourless in the absence of coloured acids) are characterized by their behaviour to hydrochloric acid, sulphuric acid and potassium chromate. But the most delicate precipitant for lead is sulphuretted hydrogen, which produces a black precipitate of lead sulphide, insoluble in cold dilute nitric acid, less so in cold hydrochloric, and easily decomposed by hot hydrochloric acid with formation of the characteristic chloride. The atomic weight, determined by G. P. Baxter and J. H. Wilson (J. Amer. Chem. Soc., 1908, 30, p. 187) by analysing the chloride, is 270.190 (O = 16).

Analysis.—When mixed with sodium carbonate and heated on charcoal in a reducing flame, lead salts produce malleable metal droplets and a yellow oxide ring. Solutions of lead salts (colorless without colored acids) are distinct in their reactions to hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, and potassium chromate. However, the most sensitive test for lead is hydrogen sulfide, which creates a black precipitate of lead sulfide that is insoluble in cold dilute nitric acid, less so in cold hydrochloric acid, and easily broken down by hot hydrochloric acid, resulting in the characteristic chloride. The atomic weight, determined by G. P. Baxter and J. H. Wilson (J. Amer. Chem. Soc., 1908, 30, p. 187) through chloride analysis, is 270.190 (O = 16).

Pharmacology and Therapeutics.

Drugs and Treatment.

The metal itself is not used in medicine. The chief pharmacopoeial salts are: (1) Plumbi oxidum (lead oxide), litharge. It is not used internally, but from it is made Emplastrum Plumbi (diachylon plaster), which is an oleate of lead and is contained in emplastrum hydrargeri, emplastrum plumbi iodidi, emplastrum resinae, emplastrum saponis. (2) Plumbi Acetas (sugar of lead), dose 1 to 5 grains. From this salt are made the following preparations: (a) Pilula Plumbi cum Opio, the strength of the opium in it being 1 in 8, dose 2 to 4 grains; (b) Suppositoria Plumbi composita, containing lead acetate, opium and oil of theobroma, there being one grain of opium in each suppository; (c) Unguentum Plumbi Acetatis; (d) Liquor Plumbi Subacetatis Fortior, Goulard’s extract, strength 24% of the subacetate; this again has a sub-preparation, the Liquor Plumbi Subacetatis Dilutis, called Goulard’s water or Goulard’s lotion, containing 1 part in 80 of the strong extract; (e) Glycerinum Plumbi Subacetatis, from which is made the Unguentum Glycerini Plumbi Subacetatis. (3) Plumbi Carbonas, white lead, a mixture of the carbonate and the hydrate, a heavy white powder insoluble in water; it is not used internally, but from it is made Unguentum Plumbi Carbonatis, strength 1 in 10 parts of paraffin ointment. (4) Plumbi Iodidium, a heavy bright yellow powder not used internally. From it are made (a) Emplastrum Plumbi Iodidi, and (b) Unguentum Plumbi Iodidi. The strength of each is 1 in 10.

The metal itself is not used in medicine. The main pharmacopoeial salts are: (1) Plumbi oxidum (lead oxide), also known as litharge. It’s not taken internally, but it’s used to make Emplastrum Plumbi (diachylon plaster), an oleate of lead, which is found in emplastrum hydrargeri, emplastrum plumbi iodidi, emplastrum resinae, and emplastrum saponis. (2) Plumbi Acetas (sugar of lead), with a dosage of 1 to 5 grains. This salt is used to prepare the following: (a) Pilula Plumbi cum Opio, which contains opium at a strength of 1 in 8, with a dosage of 2 to 4 grains; (b) Suppositoria Plumbi composita, made with lead acetate, opium, and oil of theobroma, each suppository containing one grain of opium; (c) Unguentum Plumbi Acetatis; (d) Liquor Plumbi Subacetatis Fortior, known as Goulard’s extract, at a strength of 24% subacetate; this has a sub-preparation called Liquor Plumbi Subacetatis Dilutis, known as Goulard’s water or lotion, which contains 1 part in 80 of the strong extract; (e) Glycerinum Plumbi Subacetatis, used to make Unguentum Glycerini Plumbi Subacetatis. (3) Plumbi Carbonas, or white lead, a mixture of carbonate and hydrate, a heavy white powder that is insoluble in water; it’s not taken internally, but is used to create Unguentum Plumbi Carbonatis, with a strength of 1 in 10 parts of paraffin ointment. (4) Plumbi Iodidium, a heavy bright yellow powder not used internally. This is used to make (a) Emplastrum Plumbi Iodidi, and (b) Unguentum Plumbi Iodidi. The strength of each is 1 in 10.

Applied externally lead salts have practically no action upon the unbroken skin, but applied to sores, ulcers or any exposed mucous membranes they coagulate the albumen in the tissues themselves and contract the small vessels. They are very astringent, haemostatic and sedative; the strong solution of the 320 subacetate is powerfully caustic and is rarely used undiluted. Lead salts are applied as lotions in conditions where a sedative astringent effect is desired, as in weeping eczema; in many varieties of chronic ulceration; and as an injection for various inflammatory discharges from the vagina, ear and urethra, the Liquor Plumbi Subacetatis Dilutum being the one employed. The sedative effect of lead lotion in pruritus is well known. Internally lead has an astringent action on the mucous membranes, causing a sensation of dryness; the dilute solution of the subacetate forms an effective gargle in tonsillitis. The chief use of the preparations of lead, however, is as an astringent in acute diarrhoea, particularly if ulceration be present, when it is usefully given in combination with opium in the form of the Pilula Plumbi cum Opio. It is useful in haemorrhage from a gastric ulcer or in haemorrhage from the intestine. Lead salts usually produce constipation, and lead is an active ecbolic. Lead is said to enter the blood as an albuminate in which form it is deposited in the tissues. As a rule the soluble salts if taken in sufficient quantities produce acute poisoning, and the insoluble salts chronic plumbism. The symptoms of acute poisoning are pain and diarrhoea, owing to the setting up of an active gastro-enteritis, the foeces being black (due to the formation of a sulphide of lead), thirst, cramps in the legs and muscular twitchings, with torpor, collapse, convulsions and coma. The treatment is the prompt use of emetics, or the stomach should be washed out, and large doses of sodium or magnesium sulphate given in order to form an insoluble sulphate. Stimulants, warmth and opium may be required. For an account of chronic plumbism see Lead Poisoning.

Applied externally, lead salts have almost no effect on intact skin, but when applied to wounds, ulcers, or any exposed mucous membranes, they coagulate the albumin in the tissues and constrict small blood vessels. They are very astringent, hemostatic, and sedative; the strong solution of the subacetate is highly caustic and is rarely used without dilution. Lead salts are used as lotions in situations where a sedative astringent effect is needed, such as in weeping eczema; in various types of chronic ulcers; and as an injection for different inflammatory discharges from the vagina, ear, and urethra, with the Liquor Plumbi Subacetatis Dilutum being the one used. The sedative effect of lead lotion on itching is well known. Internally, lead has an astringent effect on the mucous membranes, leading to a sensation of dryness; the dilute solution of the subacetate works well as a gargle for tonsillitis. The main use of lead preparations, however, is as an astringent in acute diarrhea, especially if there is ulceration present, where it is effectively combined with opium in the form of Pilula Plumbi cum Opio. It's useful in cases of bleeding from a gastric ulcer or intestinal bleeding. Lead salts often cause constipation, and lead is an effective ecbolic. Lead is believed to enter the bloodstream as an albuminate, which is then deposited in the tissues. Generally, soluble salts can cause acute poisoning if taken in large amounts, while insoluble salts lead to chronic plumbism. Symptoms of acute poisoning include pain and diarrhea due to active gastroenteritis, with black stools (from the formation of lead sulfide), thirst, leg cramps, muscle twitches, along with lethargy, collapse, convulsions, and coma. Treatment involves promptly using emetics, or washing out the stomach, and administering large doses of sodium or magnesium sulfate to form an insoluble sulfate. Stimulants, warmth, and opium may also be needed. For details on chronic plumbism, see Lead Poisoning.

Authorities.—For the history of lead see W. H. Pulsifer, Notes for a History of Lead (1888); B. Neumann, Die Metalle (1904); A. Rossing, Geschichte der Metalle (1901). For the chemistry see H. Roscoe and C. Schorlemmer, Treatise on Inorganic Chemistry, vol. ii. (1897); H. Moissan, Traité de chimie minerale; O. Dammer, Handbuch der anorganischen Chemie. For the metallurgy see J. Percy, The Metallurgy of Lead (London, 1870); H. F. Collins, The Metallurgy of Lead and Silver (London, 1899), part i. “Lead”; H. O. Hofmann, The Metallurgy of Lead (6th ed., New York, 1901); W. R. Ingalls, Lead Smelting and Refining (1906); A. G. Betts, Lead Refining by Electrolysis (1908); M. Eissler, The Metallurgy of Argentiferous Silver. The Mineral Industry, begun in 1892, annually records the progress made in lead smelting.

Authorities.—For the history of lead, see W. H. Pulsifer, Notes for a History of Lead (1888); B. Neumann, Die Metalle (1904); A. Rossing, Geschichte der Metalle (1901). For the chemistry, see H. Roscoe and C. Schorlemmer, Treatise on Inorganic Chemistry, vol. ii. (1897); H. Moissan, Traité de chimie minerale; O. Dammer, Handbuch der anorganischen Chemie. For the metallurgy, see J. Percy, The Metallurgy of Lead (London, 1870); H. F. Collins, The Metallurgy of Lead and Silver (London, 1899), part i. “Lead”; H. O. Hofmann, The Metallurgy of Lead (6th ed., New York, 1901); W. R. Ingalls, Lead Smelting and Refining (1906); A. G. Betts, Lead Refining by Electrolysis (1908); M. Eissler, The Metallurgy of Argentiferous Silver. The Mineral Industry, started in 1892, annually reports on the advancements in lead smelting.

LEADER, BENJAMIN WILLIAMS (1831-  ), English painter, the son of E. Leader Williams, an engineer, received his art education first at the Worcester School of Design and later in the schools of the Royal Academy. He began to exhibit at the Academy in 1854, was elected A.R.A. in 1883 and R.A. in 1898, and became exceedingly popular as a painter of landscape. His subjects are attractive and skilfully composed. He was awarded a gold medal at the Paris Exhibition in 1889, and was made a knight of the Legion of Honour. One of his pictures, “The Valley of the Llugwy,” is in the National Gallery of British Art.

LEADER, BENJAMIN WILLIAMS (1831-  ), English painter, the son of E. Leader Williams, an engineer, began his art education at the Worcester School of Design and later at the Royal Academy schools. He started exhibiting at the Academy in 1854, was elected A.R.A. in 1883 and R.A. in 1898, and became extremely popular as a landscape painter. His subjects are appealing and expertly arranged. He won a gold medal at the Paris Exhibition in 1889 and was made a knight of the Legion of Honour. One of his paintings, “The Valley of the Llugwy,” is in the National Gallery of British Art.

See The Life and Work of B. W. Leader, R.A., by Lewis Lusk, Art Journal Office (1901).

See The Life and Work of B. W. Leader, R.A., by Lewis Lusk, Art Journal Office (1901).

LEADHILLITE, a rare mineral consisting of basic lead sulphato-carbonate, Pb4SO4(CO3)2(OH)2. Crystals have usually the form of six-sided plates (fig. 1) or sometimes of acute rhombohedra (fig. 2); they have a perfect basal cleavage (parallel to P in fig. 1) on which the lustre is strongly pearly; they are usually white and translucent. The hardness is 2.5 and the sp. gr. 6.26-6.44. The crystallographic and optical characters point to the existence of three distinct kinds of leadhillite, which are, however, identical in external appearance and may even occur intergrown together in the same crystal: (a) monoclinic with an optic axial angle of 20°; (b) rhombohedral (fig. 2) and optically uniaxial; (c) orthorhombic (fig. 1) with an optic axial angle of 72¾°. The first of these is the more common kind, and the second has long been known under the name susannite. The fact that the published analyses of leadhillite vary somewhat from the formula given above suggests that these three kinds may also be chemically distinct.

LEADHILLITE, is a rare mineral made up of basic lead sulphato-carbonate, Pb4SO4(CO3)2(OH)2. The crystals typically form as six-sided plates (fig. 1) or sometimes as sharp rhombohedra (fig. 2); they exhibit perfect basal cleavage (parallel to P in fig. 1) where the surface has a strong pearly luster. They are usually white and translucent. The hardness is 2.5 and the specific gravity ranges from 6.26 to 6.44. The crystallographic and optical properties indicate that there are three distinct types of leadhillite, which are, however, identical in appearance and can even intergrow within the same crystal: (a) monoclinic with an optic axial angle of 20°; (b) rhombohedral (fig. 2) and optically uniaxial; (c) orthorhombic (fig. 1) with an optic axial angle of 72¾°. The first type is the most common, while the second has long been recognized by the name susannite. The fact that published analyses of leadhillite vary slightly from the formula provided above suggests that these three types may also be chemically distinct.

Fig. 1. Fig. 2.

Leadhillite is a mineral of secondary origin, occurring with cerussite, anglesite, &c., in the oxidized portions of lead-bearing lodes; it has also been found in weathered lead slags left by the Romans. It has been found most abundantly in the Susanna mine at Leadhills in Scotland (hence the names leadhillite and susannite). Good crystals have also been found at Red Gill in Cumberland and at Granby in Missouri. Crystals from Sardinia have been called maxite.

Leadhillite is a secondary mineral that occurs alongside cerussite, anglesite, and others in the oxidized areas of lead-bearing veins. It has also been discovered in weathered lead slags leftover from Roman times. The most abundant deposits have been found in the Susanna mine at Leadhills in Scotland, which is why it’s named leadhillite and susannite. High-quality crystals have also been located at Red Gill in Cumberland and Granby in Missouri. Crystals from Sardinia are referred to as maxite.

(L. J. S.)

LEADHILLS, a village of Lanarkshire, Scotland, 5¾ m. W.S.W. of Elvanfoot station on the Caledonian Railway Company’s main line from Glasgow to the south. Pop. (1901) 835. It is the highest village in Scotland, lying 1301 ft. above sea-level, near the source of Glengonner Water, an affluent of the Clyde. It is served by a light railway. Lead and silver have been mined here and at Wanlockhead, 1½ m. S.W., for many centuries—according to some authorities even in Roman days. Gold was discovered in the reign of James IV., but though it is said then to have provided employment for 300 persons, its mining has long ceased to be profitable. The village is neat and well built, and contains a masonic hall and library, the latter founded by the miners about the middle of the 18th century. Allan Ramsay, the poet, and William Symington (1763-1831), one of the earliest adaptors of the steam engine to the purposes of navigation, were born at Leadhills.

LEADHILLS, is a village in Lanarkshire, Scotland, located 5¾ miles southwest of Elvanfoot station on the Caledonian Railway’s main line from Glasgow to the south. The population was 835 in 1901. It is the highest village in Scotland, sitting at 1301 feet above sea level, near the source of Glengonner Water, a tributary of the Clyde. The village has a light railway service. Lead and silver have been mined here and in Wanlockhead, 1½ miles southwest, for many centuries—some say even since Roman times. Gold was discovered during the reign of James IV, and while it reportedly employed 300 people then, gold mining has long since ceased to be profitable. The village is tidy and well-constructed, featuring a masonic hall and a library, the latter established by the miners around the middle of the 18th century. Allan Ramsay, the poet, and William Symington (1763-1831), one of the earliest innovators in adapting the steam engine for navigation, were both born in Leadhills.

LEAD POISONING, or Plumbism, a “disease of occupations,” which is itself the cause of organic disease, particularly of the nervous and urinary systems. The workpeople affected are principally those engaged in potteries where lead-glaze is used; but other industries in which health is similarly affected are file-making, house-painting and glazing, glass-making, copper-working, coach-making, plumbing and gasfitting, printing, cutlery, and generally those occupations in which lead is concerned.

Lead poisoning, or Lead poisoning, is known as a "disease of occupations," which leads to organic diseases, especially affecting the nervous and urinary systems. The workers impacted are mainly those involved in potteries where lead-glaze is used; however, other industries that similarly affect health include file-making, house painting and glazing, glass-making, copper-working, coach-making, plumbing and gas fitting, printing, cutlery, and generally any jobs that involve lead.

The symptoms of chronic lead poisoning vary within very wide limits, from colic and constipation up to total blindness, paralysis, convulsions and death. They are thus described by Dr J. T. Arlidge (Diseases of Occupations):—

The symptoms of chronic lead poisoning can vary greatly, ranging from colic and constipation to total blindness, paralysis, convulsions, and even death. Dr. J. T. Arlidge describes them as follows in his book (Diseases of Occupations):—

The poison finds its way gradually into the whole mass of the circulating blood, and exerts its effects mainly on the nervous system, paralysing nerve-force and with it muscular power. Its victims become of a sallow-waxy hue; the functions of the stomach and bowels are deranged, appetite fails and painful colic with constipation supervenes. The loss of power is generally shown first in the fingers, hands and wrists, and the condition known as “wrist-drop” soon follows, rendering the victim useless for work. The palsy will extend to the shoulders, and after no long time to the legs also. Other organs frequently involved are the kidneys, the tissue of which becomes permanently damaged; whilst the sight is weakened or even lost.

The poison slowly spreads throughout the entire bloodstream and mainly affects the nervous system, paralyzing nerve signals and consequently muscle strength. Its victims take on a pale, waxy appearance; the stomach and intestines stop functioning properly, leading to a loss of appetite and painful cramps with constipation. The loss of strength usually first appears in the fingers, hands, and wrists, and the condition known as “wrist-drop” quickly follows, making the person unable to work. The paralysis can move up to the shoulders, and eventually to the legs as well. Other organs commonly affected include the kidneys, which can suffer permanent damage; meanwhile, vision may become impaired or even lost.

Dr M‘Aldowie, senior physician to the North Staffordshire Infirmary, has stated that “in the pottery trade lead is very slow in producing serious effects compared with certain other industries.” In his experience the average period of working in lead before serious lesions manifest themselves is 18 years for females and 22½ years for males. But some individuals fall victims to the worst forms of plumbism after a few months’ or even weeks’ exposure to the danger. Young persons are more readily affected than those of mature age, and women more than men. In addition, there seems to be an element of personal susceptibility, the nature of which is not understood. Some persons “work in the lead” for twenty, forty or fifty years without the slightest ill effects; others have attacks whenever they are brought into contact with it. Possibly the difference is due to the general state of health; robust persons resist the poison successfully, those with impoverished blood and feeble constitution are mastered by it. Lead enters the body chiefly through the nose and mouth, being inspired in the form of dust or swallowed with food eaten with unwashed hands. It is very apt to get under the nails, and is possibly absorbed in this way through the skin. Personal care and cleanliness are therefore of the greatest importance. A factory surgeon of great experience in the English Potteries 321 has stated that seventeen out of twenty cases of lead-poisoning in the china and earthenware industry are due to carelessness (The Times, 8th October 1898).

Dr. M‘Aldowie, a senior physician at the North Staffordshire Infirmary, has said that "in the pottery trade, lead takes a long time to cause serious effects compared to some other industries." Based on his experience, the average time working with lead before serious health issues show up is 18 years for women and 22½ years for men. However, some individuals can suffer from severe lead poisoning after just a few months or even weeks of exposure. Younger people are affected more easily than older individuals, and women experience it more than men. Additionally, there seems to be a factor of personal susceptibility that isn't well understood. Some people can "work with lead" for twenty, forty, or fifty years without any negative effects, while others have reactions whenever they come into contact with it. This difference may be related to their overall health; healthy individuals resist the poison better, while those with poor health or weak constitutions are more vulnerable to it. Lead mainly enters the body through the nose and mouth, which can happen through inhaling dust or swallowing it with food when hands haven't been washed. It can also get under the nails and may be absorbed through the skin. Thus, personal hygiene and cleanliness are extremely important. A factory doctor with extensive experience in the English Potteries has reported that seventeen out of twenty cases of lead poisoning in the china and earthenware industry result from carelessness (The Times, 8th October 1898).

The Home Office in England has from time to time made special rules for workshops and workpeople, with the object of minimizing or preventing the occurrence of lead-poisoning; and in 1895 notification of cases was made compulsory. The health of workpeople in the Potteries was the subject of a special inquiry by a scientific committee in 1893. The committee stated that “the general truth that the potteries occupation is one fraught with injury to health and life is beyond dispute,” and that “the ill effects of the trade are referable to two chief causes—namely, dust and the poison of lead.” Of these the inhalation of clay and flint dust was the more important. It led to bronchitis, pulmonary tuberculosis and pneumonia, which were the most prevalent disorders among potters, and responsible for 70% of the mortality. That from lead the committee did not attempt to estimate, but they found that plumbism was less prevalent than in past times, and expressed the opinion “that a large part of the mortality from lead poisoning is avoidable; although it must always be borne in mind that no arrangements or rules, with regard to the work itself, can entirely obviate the effects of the poison to which workers are exposed, because so much depends upon the individual and the observance of personal care and cleanliness.” They recommended the adoption of certain special rules in the workshops, with the objects of protecting young persons from the lead, of minimizing the evils of dust, and of promoting cleanliness, particularly in regard to meals. Some of these recommendations were adopted and applied with good results. With regard to the suggestion that “only leadless glazes should be used on earthenware,” they did not “see any immediate prospect of such glazes becoming universally applicable to pottery manufacture,” and therefore turned their attention to the question of “fritting” the lead.

The Home Office in England has occasionally implemented special regulations for workshops and workers to reduce or prevent lead poisoning; in 1895, reporting cases became mandatory. The health of workers in the Potteries was specifically investigated by a scientific committee in 1893. The committee confirmed that “the general truth that the potteries occupation is one fraught with injury to health and life is beyond dispute,” stating that “the ill effects of the trade are referable to two chief causes—namely, dust and the poison of lead.” Among these, inhaling clay and flint dust was the more significant issue. It resulted in bronchitis, pulmonary tuberculosis, and pneumonia, which were the most common illnesses among potters and accounted for 70% of deaths. The committee did not try to quantify the impact of lead exposure but noted that lead poisoning was less common than in earlier times. They believed that “a large part of the mortality from lead poisoning is avoidable; although it must always be borne in mind that no arrangements or rules, regarding the work itself, can entirely eliminate the effects of the poison to which workers are exposed, because so much depends upon the individual and the observance of personal care and cleanliness.” They recommended adopting certain special rules in the workshops to protect young individuals from lead, reduce dust-related issues, and encourage cleanliness, especially concerning meals. Some of these recommendations were implemented successfully. Regarding the suggestion that “only leadless glazes should be used on earthenware,” they did not “see any immediate prospect of such glazes becoming universally applicable to pottery manufacture,” and thus shifted their focus to the issue of “fritting” the lead.

It may be explained that lead is used in china and earthenware to give the external glaze which renders the naturally porous ware watertight. Both “white” and “red” lead are used. The lead is added to other ingredients, which have been “fritted” or fused together and then ground very fine in water, making a thick creamy liquid into which the articles are dipped. After dipping the glaze dries quickly, and on being “fired” in the kiln it becomes fused by the heat into the familiar glassy surface. In the manufacture of ware with enamelled colours, glaze is mixed with the pigment to form a flux, and such colours are used either moist or in the form of a dry powder. “Fritting” the lead means mixing it with the other ingredients of the glaze beforehand and fusing them all together under great heat into a kind of rough glass, which is then ground to make the glaze. Treated in this way the lead combines with the other ingredients and becomes less soluble, and therefore less dangerous, than when added afterwards in the raw state. The committee (1893) thought it “reasonable to suppose that the fritting of lead might ultimately be found universally practicable,” but declared that though fritting “no doubt diminishes the danger of lead-poisoning,” they “could not regard all fritts as equally innocuous.”

Lead is used in china and earthenware to create the outer glaze that makes the naturally porous material watertight. Both “white” and “red” lead are utilized. The lead is combined with other ingredients that have been “fritted” or fused together and then ground very finely in water, creating a thick, creamy liquid into which the items are dipped. After dipping, the glaze dries quickly, and when “fired” in the kiln, it fuses into a familiar glassy surface due to the heat. In making ware with enamel colors, the glaze is mixed with the pigment to form a flux, and these colors can be used either wet or in dry powder form. “Fritting” the lead means mixing it with the other glaze ingredients beforehand and fusing everything together at high temperatures into a sort of rough glass, which is then ground to create the glaze. By treating the lead this way, it combines with the other ingredients and becomes less soluble, thus less hazardous than if added later in its raw state. The committee (1893) believed it was “reasonable to suppose that the fritting of lead might ultimately be found universally practicable,” but stated that while fritting “no doubt diminishes the danger of lead-poisoning,” they “could not regard all fritts as equally innocuous.”

In the annual report of the chief inspector of factories for 1897, it was stated that there had been “material improvement in dust conditions” in the potting industry, but “of lead-poisoning unfortunately the same could not be said, the number of grave cases reported, and particularly cases of blindness, having ominously increased of late.” This appears to have been largely due to the erroneous inclusion among potting processes of “litho-transfer making,” a colour industry in which girls are employed. New special rules were imposed in 1899 prohibiting the employment of persons under fifteen in the dangerous processes, ordering a monthly examination of all women and young persons working in lead by the certifying surgeon, with power to suspend those showing symptoms of poisoning, and providing for the more effectual removal of dust and the better enforcement of cleanliness. At the same time a scientific inquiry was ordered into the practicability of dispensing with lead in glazes or of substituting fritted compounds for the raw carbonate. The scientific experts reported in 1899, recommending that the use of raw lead should be absolutely prohibited, and expressing the opinion that the greater amount of earthenware could be successfully glazed without any lead. These views were in advance of the opinions held by practical potters, and met with a good deal of opposition. By certain manufacturers considerable progress had been made in diminishing the use of raw lead and towards the discovery of satisfactory leadless glazes; but it is a long step from individual experiments to the wholesale compulsory revolution of the processes of manufacture in so large and varied an industry, and in the face of foreign competitors hampered by no such regulations. The materials used by each manufacturer have been arrived at by a long process of experience, and they are such as to suit the particular goods he supplies for his particular market. It is therefore difficult to apply a uniform rule without jeopardizing the prosperity of the industry, which supports a population of 250,000 in the Potteries alone. However, the bulk of the manufacturers agreed to give up the use of raw lead, and to fritt all their glazes in future, time being allowed to effect the change of process; but they declined to be bound to any particular composition of glaze for the reasons indicated.

In the annual report of the chief inspector of factories for 1897, it was noted that there had been “significant improvement in dust conditions” in the potting industry, but “regrettably, the same cannot be said about lead poisoning, as the number of serious cases reported, particularly cases of blindness, has alarmingly increased recently.” This seems to have been largely due to the incorrect inclusion among potting processes of “litho-transfer making,” a color industry that employs girls. New special rules were put in place in 1899 prohibiting the employment of individuals under fifteen in dangerous processes, mandating a monthly examination of all women and young people working with lead by a certifying surgeon, who had the authority to suspend those showing symptoms of poisoning, and providing for more effective dust removal and cleaner working conditions. At the same time, a scientific investigation was initiated to explore the feasibility of eliminating lead in glazes or substituting fritted compounds for raw carbonate. The scientific experts reported in 1899, recommending that the use of raw lead should be completely banned and expressing the opinion that more earthenware could be successfully glazed without any lead. These recommendations were ahead of the views held by practical potters and faced considerable opposition. Some manufacturers had made significant progress in reducing the use of raw lead and in discovering effective lead-free glazes; however, transitioning from individual experiments to a widespread mandatory change in manufacturing processes in such a large and diverse industry was a big challenge, especially against foreign competitors who were not restricted by similar regulations. The materials each manufacturer used were arrived at through extensive experience and were tailored to the specific goods provided for their particular market. Therefore, it was difficult to implement a uniform rule without jeopardizing the industry’s prosperity, which supports a population of 250,000 in the Potteries alone. Nevertheless, most manufacturers agreed to stop using raw lead and to frit all their glazes in the future, allowing time to make the process change; however, they refused to commit to any specific glaze composition for the reasons mentioned.

In 1901 the Home Office brought forward a new set of special rules. Most of these were framed to strengthen the provisions for securing cleanliness, removing dust, &c., and were accepted with a few modifications. But the question of making even more stringent regulations, even to the extent of making the use of lead-glaze illegal altogether, was still agitated; and in 1906 the Home Office again appointed an expert committee to reinvestigate the subject. They reported in 1910, and made various recommendations in detail for strengthening the existing regulations; but while encouraging the use of leadless glaze in certain sorts of common ceramic ware, they pointed out that, without the use of lead, certain other sorts could either not be made at all or only at a cost or sacrifice of quality which would entail the loss of important markets.

In 1901, the Home Office introduced a new set of special rules. Most of these aimed to enhance cleanliness standards, remove dust, etc., and were approved with some tweaks. However, the idea of implementing even stricter regulations, including potentially banning lead glaze completely, was still being debated. In 1906, the Home Office appointed an expert committee to look into the issue again. They reported in 1910, making several detailed recommendations to strengthen the existing regulations. While they promoted the use of lead-free glaze for certain common types of ceramics, they noted that without lead, some other types could either not be produced at all or would come at such a cost or compromise in quality that it would lead to the loss of significant markets.

In 1908 Dr Collis made an inquiry into the increase of plumbism in connexion with the smelting of metals, and he considered the increase in the cases of poisoning reported to be due to the third schedule of the Workmen’s Compensation Act, (1) by causing the prevalence of pre-existing plumbism to come to light, (2) by the tendency this fostered to replace men suspected of lead impregnation by new hands amongst whom the incidence is necessarily greater.

In 1908, Dr. Collis investigated the rise of lead poisoning related to metal smelting. He believed that the increase in reported poisoning cases was due to the third schedule of the Workmen’s Compensation Act: (1) it brought to light existing cases of lead poisoning, and (2) it encouraged replacing workers suspected of lead exposure with new hires, which naturally had a higher incidence of the issue.

LEADVILLE, a city and the county seat of Lake county, Colorado, U.S.A., one of the highest (mean elevation c. 10,150 ft.) and most celebrated mining “camps” of the world. Pop. (1900) 12,455, of whom 3802 were foreign-born; (1910 census) 7508. It is served by the Denver & Rio Grande, the Colorado & Southern and the Colorado Midland railways. It lies amid towering mountains on a terrace of the western flank of the Mosquito Range at the head of the valley of the Arkansas river, where the river cuts the valley between the Mosquito and the Sawatch (Saguache) ranges. Among the peaks in the immediate environs are Mt. Massive (14,424 ft., the highest in the state) and Elbert Peak (14,421 ft.). There is a United States fish hatchery at the foot of Mt. Massive. In the spring of 1860 placer gold was discovered in California Gulch, and by July 1860 Oro City had probably 10,000 inhabitants. In five years the total yield was more than $5,000,000; then it diminished, and Oro City shrank to a few hundred inhabitants. This settlement was within the present limits of Leadville. In 1876 the output of the mines was about $20,000. During sixteen years “heavy sands” and great boulders that obstructed the placer fields had been moved thoughtlessly to one side. These boulders were from enormous lead carbonate deposits extremely rich in silver. The discovery of these deposits was made on the hills at the edge of Leadville. The first building was erected in June 1877; in December there were several hundred miners, in January the town was organized and named; at the end of 1879 there were, it is said, 35,000 inhabitants. Leadville was already a chartered city, with the usual organization and all public facilities. In 1880 it was reached by the Denver & Rio Grande railway. In early years Leadville was one of the most turbulent, picturesque and in all ways extraordinary, of the mining camps of the West. The value of the output from 1879 to 1889 totalled $147,834,186, including one-fifth of the silver production and a third of the lead consumption of the country. The decline in the price of silver, culminating with the closing of the India mints 322 and the repeal of the Sherman Law in 1893, threatened Leadville’s future. But the source of the gold of the old placers was found in 1892. From that year to 1899 the gold product rose from $262,692 to $2,183,332. From 1879 to 1900 the camp yielded $250,000,000 (as compared with $48,000,000 of gold and silver in five years from the Comstock, Nevada, lode; and $60,000,000 and 225,000 tons of lead, in fourteen years, from the Eureka, Nevada, mines). Before 1898 the production of zinc was unimportant, but in 1906 it was more valuable than that of silver and gold combined. This increased output is a result of the establishment of concentrating mills, in which the zinc content is raised from 18 or 20% in the raw ores to 25 or 45% in the concentrates. In 1904, per ton of Lake county ore, zinc was valued at $6.93, silver at $4.16, lead at $3.85, gold at $1.77 and copper at $.66. The copper mined at Leadville amounted to about one-third the total mined in the state in 1906. Iron and manganese have been produced here, and in 1906 Leadville was the only place in the United States known to have produced bismuth. There were two famous labour strikes in the “diggings” in 1879 and 1896. The latter attracted national attention; it lasted from the 19th of June 1896 to the 9th of March 1897, when the miners, being practically starved out, declared the strike off. There had been a riot on the 21st of September 1896 and militia guarded the mines for months afterwards. In January 1897 the mines on Carbonate Hill were flooded after the removal of their pumps. This strike closed many mines, which were not opened for several years. Leadville stocks are never on the exchange, and “flotation” and “promotion” have been almost unknown.

LEADVILLE, is a city and the county seat of Lake County, Colorado, U.S.A. It is one of the highest (average elevation around 10,150 ft.) and most renowned mining “camps” in the world. The population was 12,455 in 1900, with 3,802 foreign-born residents; according to the 1910 census, it was 7,508. The city is served by the Denver & Rio Grande, Colorado & Southern, and Colorado Midland railroads. It is situated amid towering mountains on a terrace on the western side of the Mosquito Range, at the top of the Arkansas River valley, where the river cuts through between the Mosquito and Sawatch (Saguache) ranges. Nearby peaks include Mt. Massive (14,424 ft., the highest in the state) and Elbert Peak (14,421 ft.). There is a U.S. fish hatchery at the base of Mt. Massive. In the spring of 1860, placer gold was found in California Gulch, and by July 1860, Oro City likely had a population of around 10,000. Within five years, the total gold yield exceeded $5,000,000; but it later declined, and Oro City’s population dropped to just a few hundred. This area is now part of Leadville. By 1876, the mines produced about $20,000. Over 16 years, “heavy sands” and large boulders obstructing the placer fields were carelessly pushed aside. These boulders came from massive lead carbonate deposits that were very rich in silver. The discovery of these deposits occurred on the hills bordering Leadville. The first building was put up in June 1877; by December, several hundred miners were there, and in January, the town was organized and named. By the end of 1879, it reportedly had 35,000 residents. Leadville was already a chartered city with the usual organization and all public services. In 1880, it was connected by the Denver & Rio Grande railway. In its early years, Leadville was one of the most tumultuous, colorful, and remarkable mining camps in the West. The total value of the output from 1879 to 1889 was $147,834,186, which included one-fifth of the nation's silver production and one-third of its lead consumption. The drop in silver prices, exacerbated by the shutdown of the Indian mints and the repeal of the Sherman Law in 1893, threatened Leadville’s future. However, the source of the old placer gold was discovered in 1892. From that year to 1899, gold production increased from $262,692 to $2,183,332. From 1879 to 1900, the camp produced $250,000,000 (compared to $48,000,000 in gold and silver in five years from the Comstock, Nevada, lode, and $60,000,000 and 225,000 tons of lead in fourteen years from the Eureka, Nevada, mines). Before 1898, zinc production was minimal, but by 1906, it became more valuable than both silver and gold combined. This boost in output was due to the establishment of concentrating mills, which increased the zinc content from 18 or 20% in raw ores to 25 or 45% in concentrates. In 1904, the value per ton of Lake County ore was $6.93 for zinc, $4.16 for silver, $3.85 for lead, $1.77 for gold, and $0.66 for copper. The copper mined in Leadville accounted for about one-third of the total mined in the state in 1906. Iron and manganese have also been produced here, and in 1906, Leadville was the only place in the U.S. known to have produced bismuth. There were two notable labor strikes at the mines in 1879 and 1896. The latter gained national attention; it lasted from June 19, 1896 to March 9, 1897, when miners, almost starving, ended the strike. A riot occurred on September 21, 1896, and troops were sent to guard the mines for months afterward. In January 1897, mines on Carbonate Hill were flooded after their pumps were removed. This strike shut down many mines, which remained closed for several years. Leadville stocks are never traded on the exchange, and “flotation” and “promotion” have been almost unheard of. 322

The ores of the Leadville District occur in a blue limestone formation overlaid by porphyry, and are in the form of heavy sulphides, containing copper, gold, silver, lead and zinc; oxides containing iron, manganese and small amounts of silver and lead; and siliceous ores, containing much silver and a little lead and gold. The best grade of ores usually consists of a mixture of sulphides, with some native gold. Nowhere have more wonderful advances in mining been apparent—in the size and character of furnaces and pumps; the development of local smelter supplies; the fall in the cost of coal, of explosives and other mine supplies; the development of railways and diminution of freight expenses; and the general improvement of economic and scientific methods—than at Leadville since 1880. The increase of output more than doubled from 1890 to 1900, and many ores once far too low in grade for working now yield sure profits. The Leadville smelters in 1900 had a capacity of 35,000 tons monthly; about as much more local ore being treated at Denver, Pueblo and other places.

The ores in the Leadville District are found in a blue limestone formation topped by porphyry. They come in the form of dense sulfides that contain copper, gold, silver, lead, and zinc; oxides that include iron, manganese, and small amounts of silver and lead; and siliceous ores that have a lot of silver and a bit of lead and gold. The highest quality ores typically consist of a mix of sulfides with some native gold. Since 1880, there have been amazing advancements in mining at Leadville—seen in the size and type of furnaces and pumps, the growth of local smelter supplies, the drop in costs for coal, explosives, and other mining supplies, the expansion of railways, and lower freight expenses, along with an overall enhancement of economic and scientific methods. The output more than doubled from 1890 to 1900, and many ores that were once too low grade to work are now profitable. By 1900, the Leadville smelters had the capacity to process 35,000 tons per month, with about the same amount of local ore treated in Denver, Pueblo, and other locations.

See S. F. Emmons, Geology and Mining Industry of Leadville, Colorado, monograph United States Geological Survey, vol. 12 (1886), and with J. D. Irving, The Downtown District of Leadville, Colorado, Bulletin 320, United States Geological Survey (1907), particularly for the discussion of the origin of the ores of the region.

See S. F. Emmons, Geology and Mining Industry of Leadville, Colorado, monograph United States Geological Survey, vol. 12 (1886), and with J. D. Irving, The Downtown District of Leadville, Colorado, Bulletin 320, United States Geological Survey (1907), especially for the discussion on the origin of the ores in the area.

LEAF (O. Eng. léaf, cf. Dutch loof, Ger. Laub, Swed. löf, &c.; possibly to be referred to the root seen in Gr. λέπειν, to peel, strip), the name given in popular language to all the green expanded organs borne upon an axis, and so applied to similar objects, such as a thin sheet of metal, a hinged flap of a table, the page of a book, &c. Investigation has shown that many other parts of a plant which externally appear very different from ordinary leaves are, in their essential particulars, very similar to them, and are in fact their morphological equivalents. Such are the scales of a bulb, and the various parts of the flower, and assuming that the structure ordinarily termed a leaf is the typical form, these other structures were designated changed or metamorphosed leaves, a somewhat misleading interpretation. All structures morphologically equivalent with the leaf are now included under the general term phyllome (leaf-structure).

LEAF (O. Eng. léaf, see Dutch loof, Ger. Laub, Swed. löf, etc.; possibly traced to the root found in Gr. λέπειν, meaning to peel or strip), is the term commonly used to describe all the green, flat parts attached to a stem, and it is also applied to similar items, like a thin piece of metal, a flap on a table, or a page in a book, etc. Studies have revealed that many other parts of a plant that look different from typical leaves are actually quite similar to them in essential features, and are, in fact, their morphological equivalents. Examples include the scales of a bulb and various flower parts. Assuming the commonly recognized structure called a leaf is the standard form, these other structures have been labeled as modified or transformed leaves, which can be a bit misleading. All structures that are morphologically equivalent to the leaf are now grouped under the general term phyllome (leaf-structure).

From Strasburger’s Lehrbuch der Botanik by permission of Gustav Fischer.
Fig. 1.—Apex of a shoot showing origin of leaves: f, leaf rudiment; g, rudiment of an axillary bud.
Fig. 2.—Section of a Melon leaf, perpendicular to the surface.

es, Upper epidermis.

Upper epidermis.

ei, Lower epidermis.

Lower epidermis.

p, Hairs.

Hairs.

st, Stomata.

st, Stomata.

ps, Upper (palisade) layers of parenchymatous cells.

ps, Upper (palisade) layers of parenchyma cells.

pi, Lower (spongy) layers of parenchymatous cells.

pi, Lower (soft) layers of parenchyma cells.

m, Air-spaces connected with stomata.

Air spaces connected with stomata.

l, Air-spaces between the loose cells in the spongy parenchyma.

l, Air spaces between the loose cells in the spongy tissue.

fv, Bundles of fibro-vascular tissue.

fv, Bundles of vascular tissue.

Leaves are produced as lateral outgrowths of the stem in definite succession below the apex. This character, common to all leaves, distinguishes them from other organs. In the higher plants we can easily recognize the distinction between stem and leaf. Amongst the lower plants, however, it is found that a demarcation into stem and leaf is impossible, but that there is a structure which partakes of the characters of both—such is a thallus. The leaves always arise from the outer portion of the primary meristem of the plant, and the tissues of the leaf are continuous with those of the stem. Every leaf originates as a simple cellular papilla (fig. 1), which consists of a development from the cortical layers covered by epidermis; and as growth proceeds, the fibro-vascular bundles of the stem are continued outwards, and finally expand and terminate in the leaf. The increase in length of the leaf by growth at the apex is usually of a limited nature. In some ferns, however, there seems to be a provision for indefinite terminal growth, while in others this growth is periodically interrupted. It not unfrequently happens, especially amongst Monocotyledons, that after growth at the apex has ceased, it is continued at the base of the leaf, and in this way the length may be much increased. Amongst Dicotyledons this is very rare. In all cases the dimensions of the leaf are enlarged by interstitial growth of its parts.

Leaves grow as side outgrowths from the stem in a specific order below the tip. This feature, found in all leaves, sets them apart from other parts of the plant. In higher plants, it’s easy to tell the difference between the stem and the leaf. However, in lower plants, it’s hard to separate them into stem and leaf; instead, there's a structure that has characteristics of both—this is called a thallus. Leaves always develop from the outer part of the plant's primary meristem, and the tissues in the leaf connect with those in the stem. Each leaf begins as a simple cellular bump (fig. 1), which arises from the outer layers covered by epidermis. As it grows, the fibro-vascular bundles from the stem extend outward and eventually spread out to form the leaf. The length of the leaf increases through growth at the tip, but this is usually limited. In some ferns, there seems to be a way for the tip to keep growing indefinitely, while in others this growth stops periodically. It often happens, especially in Monocotyledons, that when growth at the tip ends, it continues at the base of the leaf, allowing the leaf to become much longer. This is quite rare in Dicotyledons. In all cases, the size of the leaf increases through the growth of its parts.

The simplest leaf is found in some mosses, where it consists of a single layer of cells. The typical Structure of leaves. foliage leaf consists of several layers, and amongst vascular plants is distinguishable into an outer layer (epidermis) and a central tissue (parenchyma) with fibro-vascular bundles distributed through it.

The simplest leaf is found in some mosses, where it consists of a single layer of cells. The typical Leaf structure. foliage leaf is made up of several layers and in vascular plants, it can be identified as having an outer layer (epidermis) and a central tissue (parenchyma) with fibro-vascular bundles spread throughout.

The epidermis (fig. 2, es, ei), composed of cells more or less compressed, has usually a different structure and aspect on the two surfaces of the leaf. The cells of the epidermis are very closely united laterally and contain no green colouring matter (chlorophyll) except in the pair of cells—guard-cells—which bound the stomata. The outer wall, especially of the upper epidermis, has a tough outer layer or cuticle which renders it impervious to water. The epidermis is continuous except where stomata or spaces bounded by specialized cells communicate with intercellular spaces in the interior of the leaf. It is chiefly on the epidermis of the lower surface (fig. 2, ei) that stomata, st, are produced, and it is there also that hairs, p, usually occur. The lower epidermis is often of a dull or pale-green colour, soft and easily detached. The upper epidermis is frequently smooth and shining, and sometimes becomes very hard and dense. Many tropical plants present on the upper surface of their leaves several layers of compressed cells beneath the epidermis which serve for storage of water and are known as aqueous tissue. In leaves which float upon the surface of the water, as those of the water-lily, the upper epidermis alone possesses stomata.

The epidermis (fig. 2, es, ei), made up of cells that are tightly packed, usually has a different structure and appearance on the two sides of the leaf. The epidermal cells are closely connected laterally and don’t contain any green pigment (chlorophyll) except in the pair of cells—guard cells—that surround the stomata. The outer wall, particularly on the upper epidermis, has a tough outer layer or cuticle that makes it waterproof. The epidermis is continuous except where stomata or spaces surrounded by specialized cells connect to intercellular spaces inside the leaf. Stomata, st, are mainly found on the epidermis of the lower surface (fig. 2, ei), and that’s also where hairs, p, usually appear. The lower epidermis often has a dull or pale-green color, is soft, and can be easily removed. The upper epidermis is often smooth and shiny, and sometimes it becomes very hard and dense. Many tropical plants have several layers of compressed cells for water storage just beneath the epidermis on the upper surface of their leaves, which are called aqueous tissue. In floating leaves, like those of the water lily, only the upper epidermis has stomata.

The parenchyma of the leaf is the cellular tissue enclosed within the epidermis and surrounding the vessels (fig. 2, ps, pi). It is known as mesophyll, and is formed of two distinct series of cells, each containing the green chlorophyll-granules, but differing in form and arrangement. Below the epidermis of the upper side of the leaf there are one or two layers of cells, elongated at right angles to the leaf surface (fig. 2, ps), and applied so closely to each other as to leave 323 only small intercellular spaces, except where stomata happen to be present (fig. 2, m); they form the palisade tissue. On the other side of the leaf the cells are irregular, often branched, and are arranged more or less horizontally (fig. 2, pi), leaving air-spaces between them, l, which communicate with stomata; on this account the tissue has received the name of spongy. In leaves having a very firm texture, as those of Coniferae and Cycadaceae, the cells of the parenchyma immediately beneath the epidermis are very much thickened and elongated in a direction parallel to the surface of the leaf, so as to be fibre-like. These constitute a hypodermal layer, beneath which the chlorophyll cells of the parenchyma are densely packed together, and are elongated in a direction vertical to the surface of the leaf, forming the palisade tissue. The form and arrangement of the cells, however, depend much on the nature of the plant, and its exposure to light and air. Sometimes the arrangement of the cells on both sides of the leaf is similar, as occurs in leaves which have their edges presented to the sky. In very succulent plants the cells form a compact mass, and those in the centre are often colourless. In some cases the cellular tissue is deficient at certain points, giving rise to distinct holes in the leaf, as in Monstera Adansonii. The fibro-vascular system in the leaf constitutes the venation. The fibro-vascular bundles from the stem bend out into the leaf, and are there arranged in a definite manner. In skeleton leaves, or leaves in which the parenchyma is removed, this arrangement is well seen. In some leaves, as in the barberry, the veins are hardened, producing spines without any parenchyma. The hardening of the extremities of the fibro-vascular tissue is the cause of the spiny margin of many leaves, such as the holly, of the sharp-pointed leaves of madder, and of mucronate leaves, or those having a blunt end with a hard projection in the centre.

The parenchyma of the leaf is the cell tissue located between the epidermis and surrounding the vessels (fig. 2, ps, pi). It's called mesophyll and consists of two distinct types of cells, each containing green chlorophyll granules but varying in shape and arrangement. Just below the epidermis on the upper side of the leaf, there are one or two layers of cells that are elongated at right angles to the leaf surface (fig. 2, ps), closely packed together with only small intercellular spaces, unless stomata are present (fig. 2, m); these make up the palisade tissue. On the opposite side of the leaf, the cells are irregular, often branched, and arranged more or less horizontally (fig. 2, pi), creating air spaces between them, l, that connect to stomata, which is why this tissue is called spongy. In leaves with a very firm texture, like those of Coniferae and Cycadaceae, the cells of the parenchyma just beneath the epidermis are thickened and elongated parallel to the surface of the leaf, making them fiber-like. These form a hypodermal layer, beneath which the chlorophyll cells of the parenchyma are densely packed together and elongated vertically to the surface, creating the palisade tissue. The shape and arrangement of the cells, however, largely depend on the type of plant and its exposure to light and air. Sometimes, the cell arrangement on both sides of the leaf is similar, as seen in leaves that have their edges facing the sky. In very succulent plants, the cells form a compact mass, and those in the center are often colorless. In some cases, the cellular tissue is absent at certain points, leading to distinct holes in the leaf, as seen in Monstera Adansonii. The fibro-vascular system in the leaf makes up the venation. The fibro-vascular bundles from the stem extend into the leaf and are arranged in a specific pattern. This arrangement is clearly visible in skeleton leaves, or leaves from which the parenchyma has been removed. In some leaves, like those of the barberry, the veins are hardened, forming spines without any parenchyma. The hardening of the ends of the fibro-vascular tissue causes the spiny edges of many leaves, such as holly, the sharp-pointed leaves of madder, and mucronate leaves, which have a blunt end with a hard projection in the center.

The form and arrangement of the parts of a typical foliage leaf are intimately associated with the part played by the leaf in the life of the plant. The flat surface is spread to allow the maximum amount of sunlight to fall upon it, as it is by the absorption of energy from the sun’s rays by means of the chlorophyll contained in the cells of the leaf that the building up of plant food is rendered possible; this process is known as photo-synthesis; the first stage is the combination of carbon dioxide, absorbed from the air taken in through the stomata into the living cells of the leaf, with water which is brought into the leaf by the wood-vessels. The wood-vessels form part of the fibro-vascular bundles or veins of the leaf and are continuous throughout the leaf-stalk and stem with the root by which water is absorbed from the soil. The palisade layers of the mesophyll contain the larger number of chlorophyll grains (or corpuscles) while the absorption of carbon dioxide is carried on chiefly through the lower epidermis which is generally much richer in stomata. The water taken up by the root from the soil contains nitrogenous and mineral salts which combine with the first product of photo-synthesis—a carbohydrate—to form more complicated nitrogen-containing food substances of a proteid nature; these are then distributed by other elements of the vascular bundles (the phloem) through the leaf to the stem and so throughout the plant to wherever growth or development is going on. A large proportion of the water which ascends to the leaf acts merely as a carrier for the other raw food materials and is got rid of from the leaf in the form of water vapour through the stomata—this process is known as transpiration. Hence the extended surface of the leaf exposing a large area to light and air is eminently adapted for the carrying out of the process of photo-synthesis and transpiration. The arrangement of the leaves on the stem and branches (see Phyllotaxy, below) is such as to prevent the upper leaves shading the lower, and the shape of the leaf serves towards the same end—the disposition of leaves on a branch or stem is often seen to form a “mosaic,” each leaf fitting into the space between neighbouring leaves and the branch on which they are borne without overlapping.

The shape and structure of a typical foliage leaf are closely linked to its role in the plant's life. The flat surface is spread out to capture the maximum amount of sunlight because it’s through absorbing energy from the sun’s rays, using the chlorophyll in the leaf cells, that plants can create their food; this process is called photosynthesis. The first step involves the combination of carbon dioxide, taken in through the stomata from the air, with water that travels into the leaf via the wood vessels. The wood vessels are part of the fiber-vascular bundles or veins of the leaf and connect through the leaf stalk and stem to the roots, which absorb water from the soil. The palisade layers of the mesophyll contain most of the chlorophyll grains, while the lower epidermis, which usually has more stomata, mainly handles the absorption of carbon dioxide. The water taken up by the roots contains nitrogen and mineral salts, which combine with the initial product of photosynthesis—a carbohydrate—to create more complex nitrogen-containing food substances that are protein-based. These are then distributed by other parts of the vascular bundles (the phloem) through the leaf to the stem and throughout the plant wherever growth or development occurs. A large portion of the water that goes up to the leaf acts mainly as a transporter for the other raw food materials and is released from the leaf as water vapor through the stomata—this process is known as transpiration. Thus, the broad surface of the leaf, which exposes a large area to light and air, is well-suited for carrying out photosynthesis and transpiration. The way leaves are arranged on the stem and branches (see Phyllotaxy, below) is designed to prevent the upper leaves from shading the lower ones, and the leaf shape contributes to this as well—the arrangement of leaves on a branch or stem often creates a “mosaic,” where each leaf fits into the space between neighboring leaves and the branch it grows on without overlapping.

Submerged leaves, or leaves which are developed under water, differ in structure from aerial leaves. They have usually no fibro-vascular system, but consist of a congeries of cells, which sometimes become elongated and compressed so as to resemble veins. They have a layer of compact cells on their surface, but no true epidermis, and no stomata. Their internal structure consists of cells, disposed irregularly, and sometimes leaving spaces which are filled with air for the purpose of floating the leaf. When exposed to the air these leaves easily part with their moisture, and become shrivelled and dry. In some cases there is only a network of filament-like cells, the spaces between which are not filled with parenchyma, giving a skeleton appearance to the leaf, as in Ouvirandra fenestralis (Lattice plant).

Submerged leaves, or leaves that grow underwater, are different in structure from aerial leaves. They usually lack a vascular system and are made up of a mass of cells, which can sometimes become elongated and flattened to look like veins. They have a layer of compact cells on the surface, but no true epidermis and no stomata. Their internal structure has cells arranged irregularly, often leaving spaces filled with air to help the leaf float. When exposed to air, these leaves quickly lose moisture and become shriveled and dry. In some cases, there's only a network of thread-like cells, with spaces between them not filled with parenchyma, giving the leaf a skeletal appearance, like in Ouvirandra fenestralis (Lattice plant).

A leaf, whether aerial or submerged, generally consists of a flat expanded portion, called the blade, or lamina, of a narrower portion called the petiole or stalk, and sometimes of a portion at the base of the petiole, which forms a sheath or vagina (fig. 5, s), or is developed in the form of outgrowths, called stipules (fig. 24, s). All these portions are not always present. The sheathing or stipulary portion is frequently wanting. When a leaf has a distinct stalk it is petiolate; when it has none, it is sessile, and if in this case it embraces the stem it is said to be amplexicaul. The part of the leaf next the petiole or the axis is the base, while the opposite extremity is the apex. The leaf is usually flattened and expanded horizontally, i.e. at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the shoot, so that the upper face is directed towards the heavens, and the lower towards the earth. In some cases leaves, as in Iris, or leaf-like petioles, as in Australian acacias and eucalypti, have their plane of expansion parallel to the axis of the shoot, there is then no distinction into an upper and a lower face, but the two sides are developed alike; or the leaf may have a cylindrical or polyhedral form, as in mesembryanthemum. The upper angle formed between the leaf and the stem is called its axil; it is there that leaf-buds are normally developed. The leaf is sometimes articulated with the stem, and when it falls off a scar remains; at other times it is continuous with it, and then decays, while still attached to the axis. In their early state all leaves are continuous with the stem, and it is only in their after growth that articulations are formed. When leaves fall off annually they are called deciduous; when they remain for two or more years they are persistent, and the plant is evergreen. The laminar portion of a leaf is occasionally articulated with the petiole, as in the orange, and a joint at times exists between the vaginal or stipulary portion and the petiole.

A leaf, whether it's above ground or underwater, typically has a flat part called the blade or lamina, a narrower section known as the petiole or stalk, and sometimes a base part of the petiole that forms a sheath or vagina (fig. 5, s), or develops as outgrowths called stipules (fig. 24, s). Not all of these parts are always present; the sheathing or stipule portion is often missing. If a leaf has a distinct stalk, it’s referred to as petiolate; if it doesn’t have a stalk, it’s sessile, and if it wraps around the stem in this case, it’s called amplexicaul. The part of the leaf next to the petiole or the stem is the base, while the opposite end is the apex. Leaves are usually flat and spread out horizontally, meaning they're at right angles to the shoot's length, so the upper side faces up to the sky, and the lower side faces down to the ground. In some cases, like in Iris or leaf-like petioles found in Australian acacias and eucalypts, the plane of expansion is parallel to the stem's axis, which means there’s no clear distinction between the upper and lower sides; both sides develop similarly. A leaf can also be cylindrical or polyhedral, like in mesembryanthemum. The angle between the leaf and the stem is called the axil; this is where leaf buds typically grow. Sometimes, leaves are attached to the stem by a joint, and when they fall off, a scar is left behind; at other times, they are continuous with the stem and decay while still attached. Initially, all leaves are connected to the stem, and it’s only later that joints form. Leaves that fall off each year are called deciduous; those that stay for two or more years are persistent, and the plant is then evergreen. The laminar part of a leaf can sometimes be articulated with the petiole, as seen in oranges, and there may be a joint between the sheathing or stipulary part and the petiole.

Fig. 3.—Leaf of Elm (Ulmus). Reticulated venation; primary veins going to the margin, which is serrated. Leaf unequal at the base. Fig. 4.—Multicostate leaf of Castor-oil plant (Ricinus communis). It is palmately-cleft, and exhibits seven lobes at the margin. The petiole is inserted a little above the base, and hence the leaf is called peltate or shield-like.

The arrangement of the fibro-vascular system in the lamina constitutes the venation or nervation. In an ordinary leaf, as that of the elm, there is observed a large central vein running from the base to the apex of the leaf, this is the midrib Venation. (fig. 3); it gives off veins laterally (primary veins). A leaf with only a single midrib is said to be unicostate and the venation is described as pinnate or feather-veined. In some cases, as sycamore or castor oil (fig. 4), in place of there being only a single midrib there are several large veins (ribs) of nearly equal size, which diverge from the point where the blade joins the petiole or stem, giving off lateral veins. The leaf in this case is multicostate and the venation palmate. The primary veins give off secondary veins, and these in their turn give off tertiary veins, and so on until a complete network of vessels is produced, and those veins usually project on the under surface of the leaf. To a distribution of veins such as this the name of reticulated or netted venation has been applied. In the leaves of some plants there exists a midrib with large veins running nearly parallel to it from the base to the apex of the lamina, as in grasses (fig. 5); or with veins diverging from the base of the lamina in more or less 324 parallel lines, as in fan palms (fig. 6), or with veins coming off from it throughout its whole course, and running parallel to each other in a straight or curved direction towards the margin of the leaf, as in plantain and banana. In these cases the veins are often united by cross veinlets, which do not, however, form an angular network. Such leaves are said to be parallel-veined. The leaves of Monocotyledons have generally this kind of venation, while reticulated venation most usually occurs amongst Dicotyledons. Some plants, which in most points of their structure are monocotyledonous, yet have reticulated venation; as in Smilax and Dioscorea. In vascular acotyledonous plants there is frequently a tendency to fork exhibited by the fibro-vascular bundles in the leaf; and when this is the case we have fork-veined leaves. This is well seen in many ferns. The distribution of the system of vessels in the leaf is usually easily traced, but in the case of succulent plants, as Hoya, agave, stonecrop and mesembryanthemum, the veins are obscure. The function of the veins which consist of vessels and fibres is to form a rigid framework for the leaf and to conduct liquids.

The arrangement of the fibro-vascular system in the lamina makes up the venation or nervation. In a typical leaf, like that of the elm, there is a large central vein running from the base to the tip of the leaf; this is the midrib Vein structure. (fig. 3); it branches off into lateral veins (primary veins). A leaf with just a single midrib is called unicostate and its venation is described as pinnate or feather-veined. In some cases, like in sycamore or castor oil (fig. 4), instead of having only one midrib, there are several large veins (ribs) of almost equal size that spread out from where the blade connects to the petiole or stem, also giving off lateral veins. In this case, the leaf is multicostate and the venation is palmate. The primary veins branch into secondary veins, which in turn give off tertiary veins, and this process continues until a complete network of vessels is formed, with those veins usually protruding on the underside of the leaf. This kind of vein distribution is known as reticulated or netted venation. In the leaves of some plants, there is a midrib with large veins running almost parallel to it from the base to the tip of the lamina, as seen in grasses (fig. 5); or with veins spreading from the base of the lamina in fairly parallel lines, as in fan palms (fig. 6); or with veins branching off from it along its entire length, running parallel to each other in a straight or curved manner toward the leaf's edge, as in plantain and banana. In these instances, the veins are often connected by cross veinlets that do not create an angular network. Such leaves are referred to as parallel-veined. Leaves of Monocotyledons typically have this kind of venation, while reticulated venation is more common in Dicotyledons. Some plants that are mostly monocotyledonous still exhibit reticulated venation, such as Smilax and Dioscorea. In vascular acotyledonous plants, there is often a tendency for the fibro-vascular bundles in the leaf to fork; when this happens, we refer to them as fork-veined leaves. This is clearly seen in many ferns. The arrangement of the vessel system in the leaf is usually easy to trace, but in succulent plants like Hoya, agave, stonecrop, and mesembryanthemum, the veins are less distinct. The purpose of the veins, which consist of vessels and fibers, is to create a sturdy framework for the leaf and to transport liquids.

Fig. 5.—Stem of a Grass (Poa) with leaf. The sheaths ending in a process l, called a ligule; the blade of the leaf, f. Fig. 6.—Leaf of a Fan Palm (Chamaerops), showing the veins running from the base to the margin, and not forming an angular network.

In all plants, except Thallophytes, leaves are present at some period of their existence. In Cuscuta (Dodder) (q.v.), however, we have an exception. The forms assumed by leaves vary much, not only in different plants, but in the same plant. It is only amongst the lower classes of plants—Mosses, Characeae, &c.—that all the leaves on a plant are similar. As we pass up the scale of plant life we find them becoming more and more variable. The structures in ordinary language designated as leaves are considered so par excellence, and they are frequently spoken of as foliage leaves. In relation to their production on the stem we may observe that when they are small they are always produced in great number, and as they increase in size their number diminishes correspondingly. The cellular process from the axis which develops into a leaf is simple and undivided; it rarely remains so, but in progress of growth becomes segmented in various ways, either longitudinally or laterally, or in both ways. By longitudinal segmentation we have a leaf formed consisting of sheath, stalk and blade; or one or other of these may be absent, and thus stalked, sessile, sheathing, &c., leaves are produced. Lateral segmentation affects the lamina, producing indentations, lobings or fissuring of its margins. In this way two marked forms of leaf are produced—(1) Simple form, in which the segmentation, however deeply it extends into the lamina, does not separate portions of the lamina which become articulated with the midrib or petiole; and (2) Compound form, where portions of the lamina are separated as detached leaflets, which become articulated with the midrib or petiole. In both simple and compound leaves, according to the amount of segmentation and the mode of development of the parenchyma and direction of the fibro-vascular bundles, many forms are produced.

In all plants, except for Thallophytes, leaves are present at some point in their life cycle. However, in Cuscuta (Dodder) (q.v.), this is not the case. The shapes that leaves take can vary greatly, not just between different plants, but also within the same plant. It's mainly among the lower classes of plants—like Mosses and Characeae—that all the leaves on a plant are similar. As we move up the plant hierarchy, we notice that leaves become increasingly variable. The structures commonly known as leaves are considered the most typical, and they are often referred to as foliage leaves. Regarding their development on the stem, we can see that smaller leaves are often produced in large quantities, while as they grow larger, their numbers decrease correspondingly. The cellular process from the stem that develops into a leaf is simple and undivided; it usually doesn't stay that way but, as it grows, it becomes segmented in various ways, either lengthwise or sideways, or both. Through longitudinal segmentation, a leaf forms that consists of a sheath, stalk, and blade; one or more of these parts may be missing, resulting in stalked, sessile, sheathing, etc., leaves. Lateral segmentation affects the blade, creating indentations, lobes, or splits along its edges. This leads to two distinct types of leaves: (1) Simple form, where the segmentation, no matter how deep it goes into the blade, does not separate parts of the blade that connect to the midrib or petiole; and (2) Compound form, where parts of the blade are separated as individual leaflets that connect to the midrib or petiole. In both simple and compound leaves, the degree of segmentation and the way the parenchyma develops, along with the arrangement of the fibro-vascular bundles, give rise to numerous forms.

Simple Leaves.—When the parenchyma is developed symmetrically on each side of the midrib or stalk, the leaf is equal; if otherwise, the leaf is unequal or oblique (fig. 3). If the margins are even and present no divisions, the leaf is entire (fig. 7); Simple leaves. if there are slight projections which are more or less pointed, the leaf is dentate or toothed; when the projections lie regularly over each other, like the teeth of a saw, the leaf is serrate (fig. 3); when they are rounded the leaf is crenate. If the divisions extend more deeply into the lamina than the margin, the leaf receives different names according to the nature of the segments; thus, when the divisions extend about half-way down (fig. 8), it is cleft; when the divisions extend nearly to the base or to the midrib the leaf is partite.

Simple Leaves.—When the parenchyma develops symmetrically on both sides of the midrib or stalk, the leaf is equal; if not, it's unequal or oblique (fig. 3). If the edges are smooth and have no divisions, the leaf is entire (fig. 7); Simple leaves. if there are slight projections that are more or less pointed, the leaf is dentate or toothed; when the projections are arranged regularly like the teeth of a saw, the leaf is serrate (fig. 3); when they are rounded, the leaf is crenate. If the divisions cut deeper into the lamina than the margin, the leaf gets different names based on the shape of the segments; thus, when the divisions go about halfway down (fig. 8), it is cleft; when the divisions extend nearly to the base or to the midrib, the leaf is partite.

If these divisions take place in a simple feather-veined leaf it becomes either pinnatifid (fig. 9), when the segments extend to about the middle, or pinnatipartite, when the divisions extend nearly to the midrib. These primary divisions may be again subdivided in a similar manner, and thus a feather-veined leaf will become bipinnatifid or bipinnatipartite; still further subdivisions give origin to tripinnatifid and laciniated leaves. The same kinds of divisions taking place in a simple leaf with palmate or radiating venation, give origin to lobed, cleft and partite forms. The name palmate or palmatifid (fig. 4) is the general term applied to leaves with radiating venation, in which there are several lobes united by a broad expansion of parenchyma, like the palm of the hand, as in the sycamore, castor-oil plant, &c. The divisions of leaves with radiating venation may extend to near the base of the leaf, and the names bipartite, tripartite, quinquepartite, &c., are given according as the partitions are two, three, five or more. The term dissected is applied to leaves with radiating venation, having numerous narrow divisions, as in Geranium dissectum.

If these divisions happen in a simple feather-veined leaf, it becomes either pinnatifid (fig. 9), when the segments reach about the middle, or pinnatipartite, when the divisions almost reach the midrib. These primary divisions can be subdivided again in a similar way, resulting in a feather-veined leaf becoming bipinnatifid or bipinnatipartite; further subdivisions lead to tripinnatifid and laciniated leaves. The same types of divisions in a simple leaf with palmate or radiating venation produce lobed, cleft, and partite forms. The term palmate or palmatifid (fig. 4) is used for leaves with radiating venation, which have several lobes connected by a broad section of parenchyma, resembling the palm of a hand, as seen in the sycamore, castor-oil plant, etc. The divisions of leaves with radiating venation may extend close to the base of the leaf, and terms like bipartite, tripartite, quinquepartite, etc., are used depending on whether the divisions are two, three, five, or more. The term dissected refers to leaves with radiating venation that have many narrow divisions, as seen in Geranium dissectum.

Fig. 7. Fig. 8. Fig. 9.

Fig. 7.—Ovate acute leaf of Coriara myrtifolia. Besides the midrib there are two intra-marginal ribs which converge to the apex. The leaf is therefore tricostate.

Fig. 7.—Ovate acute leaf of Coriara myrtifolia. In addition to the midrib, there are two intra-marginal ribs that converge at the tip. The leaf is thus tricostate.

Fig. 8.—Runcinate leaf of Dandelion. It is a pinnatifid leaf, with the divisions pointing towards the petiole and a large triangular apex.

Fig. 8.—Curved leaf of Dandelion. It has a feather-like leaf shape, with the sections angled towards the stem and a large triangular tip.

Fig. 9.—Pinnatifid leaf of Valeriana dioica.

Fig. 9.—Pinnatifid leaf of Valeriana dioica.

Fig. 10.—Five-partite leaf of Aconite. Fig. 11.—Pedate leaf of Stinking Hellebore (Helleborus foetidus). The venation is radiating. It is a palmately-partite leaf, in which the lateral lobes are deeply divided. When the leaf hangs down it resembles the foot of a bird, and hence the name.

When in a radiating leaf there are three primary partitions, and the two lateral lobes are again cleft, as in hellebore (fig. 11), the leaf is called pedate or pedatifid, from a fancied resemblance to the claw of a bird. In all the instances already alluded to the leaves have been considered as flat expansions, in which the ribs or veins spread out on the same plane with the stalk. In some cases, however, the veins spread at right angles to the stalk, forming a peltate leaf as in Indian cress (fig. 12).

When a radiating leaf has three main sections, and the two side lobes are also split, like in hellebore (fig. 11), the leaf is called pedate or pedatifid, due to its similarity to a bird's claw. In all the cases previously mentioned, the leaves have been viewed as flat structures, where the ribs or veins extend in the same plane as the stem. However, in some situations, the veins extend at right angles to the stem, forming a peltate leaf, as seen in Indian cress (fig. 12).

The form of the leaf shows a very great variety ranging from the narrow linear form with parallel sides, as in grasses or the needle-like leaves of pines and firs to more or less rounded or orbicular—descriptions of these will be found in works on descriptive botany—a few 325 examples are illustrated here (figs. 7, 13, 14, 15). The apex also varies considerably, being rounded, or obtuse, sharp or acute (fig. 7), notched (fig. 15), &c. Similarly the shape of the base may vary, when rounded lobes are formed, as in dog-violet, the leaf is cordate or heart-shaped; or kidney-shaped or reniform (fig. 16), when the apex is rounded as in ground ivy. When the lobes are prolonged downwards and are acute, the leaf is sagittate (fig. 17); when they proceed at right angles, as in Rumex Acetosella, the leaf is hastate or halbert-shaped. When a simple leaf is divided at the base into two leaf-like appendages, it is called auriculate. When the development of parenchyma is such that it more than fills up the spaces between the veins, the margins become wavy, crisp or undulated, as in Rumex crispus and Rheum undulatum. By cultivation the cellular tissue is often much increased, giving rise to the curled leaves of greens, savoys, cresses, lettuce, &c.

The shape of the leaf displays a wide variety, ranging from narrow linear forms with parallel sides, like those in grasses or the needle-like leaves of pines and firs, to more rounded or orbicular shapes—descriptions of these can be found in texts on descriptive botany. A few examples are illustrated here (figs. 7, 13, 14, 15). The tip also varies quite a bit, being rounded or obtuse, sharp or acute (fig. 7), notched (fig. 15), etc. Similarly, the base shape can differ; when rounded lobes are present, as in dog-violet, the leaf is cordate or heart-shaped, or kidney-shaped or reniform (fig. 16) when the tip is rounded, like in ground ivy. When the lobes extend downward and are sharp, the leaf is sagittate (fig. 17); when they extend at right angles, as in Rumex Acetosella, the leaf is hastate or halberd-shaped. When a simple leaf splits at the base into two leaf-like extensions, it’s called auriculate. When the parenchyma develops to fill more than the spaces between the veins, the edges become wavy, crisp, or undulated, as seen in Rumex crispus and Rheum undulatum. Through cultivation, the cellular tissue often increases significantly, leading to the curled leaves of greens, savoys, cresses, lettuce, etc.

Fig. 12.—Peltate leaves of Indian Cress (Tropaeolum majus). Fig. 13.—Lanceolate leaf of a species of Senna.

Compound leaves are those in which the divisions extend to the midrib or petiole, and the separated portions become each articulated with it, and receive the name of leaflets. The midrib, or petiole, has thus the appearance of a branch with separate leaves attached to it, but it is considered properly as one Compound leaves. leaf, because in its earliest state it arises from the axis as a single piece, and its subsequent divisions in the form of leaflets are all in one plane. The leaflets are either sessile (fig. 18) or have stalks, called petiolules (fig. 19). Compound leaves are pinnate (fig. 19) or palmate (fig. 18) according to the arrangement of leaflets. When a pinnate leaf ends in a pair of pinnae it is equally or abruptly pinnate (paripinnate); when there is a single terminal leaflet (fig. 19), the leaf is unequally pinnate (imparipinnate); when the leaflets or pinnae are placed alternately on either side of the midrib, and not directly opposite to each other, the leaf is alternately pinnate; and when the pinnae are of different sizes, the leaf is interruptedly pinnate. When the division is carried into the second degree, and the pinnae of a compound leaf are themselves pinnately compound, a bipinnate leaf is formed.

Compound leaves are those where the divisions extend to the midrib or petiole, and the separated parts become articulated with it, each called leaflets. The midrib or petiole looks like a branch with separate leaves attached, but it is considered one Compound leaves. leaf because it starts as a single piece from the axis, and its later divisions into leaflets all lie in one plane. The leaflets can either be sessile (fig. 18) or have stalks called petiolules (fig. 19). Compound leaves can be either pinnate (fig. 19) or palmate (fig. 18), depending on how the leaflets are arranged. When a pinnate leaf ends with a pair of pinnae, it is termed equally or abruptly pinnate (paripinnate); if there's a single terminal leaflet (fig. 19), the leaf is unequally pinnate (imparipinnate); if the leaflets or pinnae alternate on either side of the midrib without being directly opposite, it's alternately pinnate; and when the pinnae vary in size, the leaf is interruptedly pinnate. If the division extends further, resulting in pinnae that are also pinnately compound, a bipinnate leaf is created.

Fig. 14. Fig. 15. Fig. 16. Fig. 17.

Fig. 14.—Oblong leaf of a species of Senna.

Fig. 14.—Long, narrow leaf of a type of Senna.

Fig. 15.—Emarginate leaf of a species of Senna. The leaf in its contour is somewhat obovate, or inversely egg-shaped, and its base is oblique.

Fig. 15.—Notched leaf of a type of Senna. The leaf has an overall shape that is somewhat oval, or egg-shaped but turned the other way, and its base is slanted.

Fig. 16.—Reniform leaf of Nepeta Glechoma, margin crenate.

Fig. 16.—Kidney-shaped leaf of Nepeta Glechoma, with a scalloped edge.

Fig. 17.—Sagittate leaf of Convolvulus.

Fig. 17.—Arrow-shaped leaf of Convolvulus.

Fig. 18.—Palmately compound leaf of the Horse-chestnut (Aesculus Hippocastanum). Fig. 19.—Imparipinnate (unequal pinnate) leaf of Robinia. There are nine pairs of shortly-stalked leaflets (foliola, pinnae), and an odd one at the extremity. At the base of the leaf the spiny stipules are seen.

The petiole or leaf-stalk is the part which unites the limb or blade of the leaf to the stem. It is absent in sessile leaves, and this is also frequently the case when a sheath is present, as in grasses (fig. 5). It consists of the fibro-vascular bundles with a Petiole. varying amount of cellular tissue. When the vascular bundles reach the base of the lamina they separate and spread out in various ways, as already described under venation. The lower part of the petiole is often swollen (fig. 20, p), forming the pulvinus, formed of cellular tissue, the cells of which exhibit the phenomenon of irritability. In Mimosa pudica (fig. 20) a sensitiveness is located in the pulvinus which upon irritation induces a depression of the whole bipinnate leaf, a similar property exists in the pulvini at the base of the leaflets which fold upwards. The petiole varies in length, being usually shorter than the lamina, but sometimes much longer. In some palms it is 15 or 20 ft. long, and is so firm as to be used for poles or walking-sticks. In general, the petiole is more or less rounded in its form, the upper surface being flattened or grooved. Sometimes it is compressed laterally, as in the aspen, and to this peculiarity the trembling of the leaves of this tree is due. In aquatic plants the leaf-stalk is sometimes distended with air, as in Pontederia and Trapa, so as to float the leaf. At other times it is winged, and is either leafy, as in the orange (fig. 21, p), lemon and Dionaea, or pitcher-like, as in Sarracenia (fig. 22). In some Australian acacias, and in some species of Oxalis and Bupleurum, the petiole is flattened in a vertical direction, the vascular bundles separating immediately after quitting the stem and running nearly parallel from base to apex. This kind of petiole (fig. 23, p) has been called a phyllode. In these plants the laminae or blades of the leaves are pinnate or bipinnate, and are produced at the extremities of the phyllodes in a horizontal direction; but in many instances they are not developed, and the phyllode serves the purpose of a leaf. These phyllodes, by their vertical position and their peculiar form, give a remarkable aspect to vegetation. On the same acacia there occur leaves with the petiole and lamina perfect; others having the petiole slightly expanded or winged, and the lamina imperfectly developed; and others in which there is no lamina, and the petiole becomes large and broad. Some petioles are long, slender and sensitive to contact, and function as tendrils by means of which the plant climbs; as in the nasturtiums (Tropaeolum), clematis and others; and in compound leaves the midrib and some of the leaflets may similarly be transformed into tendrils, as in the pea and vetch.

The petiole or leaf stalk is the part that connects the leaf's blade to the stem. It's missing in sessile leaves, which often happens when there's a sheath present, like in grasses (fig. 5). It consists of fibrovascular bundles along with varying amounts of cellular tissue. When the vascular bundles reach the base of the lamina, they separate and spread out in different ways, as previously described under venation. The lower part of the petiole is often swollen (fig. 20, p), forming the pulvinus, made of cellular tissue, where the cells show irritability. In Mimosa pudica (fig. 20), sensitivity is found in the pulvinus, which, when irritated, causes the whole bipinnate leaf to droop; a similar feature exists in the pulvini at the base of the leaflets that fold upward. The petiole varies in length, generally shorter than the lamina but sometimes much longer. In some palms, it can be 15 or 20 feet long and is strong enough to be used as poles or walking sticks. Overall, the petiole is usually rounded, with the upper surface either flat or grooved. It can sometimes be compressed laterally, as seen in aspen, which causes the leaves of this tree to tremble. In aquatic plants, the leaf stalk can be filled with air, as in Pontederia and Trapa, enabling the leaf to float. At other times, it can be winged and either leafy, as in orange (fig. 21, p), lemon, and Dionaea, or pitcher-like, as in Sarracenia (fig. 22). In some Australian acacias, and in certain species of Oxalis and Bupleurum, the petiole is flattened vertically, with the vascular bundles separating right after leaving the stem and running nearly parallel from base to tip. This type of petiole (fig. 23, p) is referred to as a phyllode. In these plants, the laminae or blades of the leaves are pinnate or bipinnate and grow horizontally at the ends of the phyllodes; however, in many cases, they don’t fully develop, and the phyllode takes on the role of a leaf. These phyllodes, due to their vertical orientation and unique shape, give a striking appearance to the vegetation. On the same acacia, there are leaves with a complete petiole and lamina, others with a slightly expanded or winged petiole and an underdeveloped lamina, and others where there’s no lamina, leading the petiole to become large and broad. Some petioles are long, slender, and sensitive to touch, functioning as tendrils for climbing, as seen in nasturtiums (Tropaeolum), clematis, and others; in compound leaves, the midrib and some leaflets can also turn into tendrils, as in peas and vetch.

Fig. 20.—Branch and leaves of the Sensitive plant (Mimosa pudica), showing the petiole in its erect state, a, and in its depressed state, b; also the leaflets closed, c, and the leaflets expanded, d. Irritability resides in the pulvinus, p.

The leaf base is often developed as a sheath (vagina), which embraces the whole or part of the circumference of the stem (fig. 5). This sheath is comparatively rare in dicotyledons, but is seen in umbelliferous plants. It is much more common amongst monocotyledons. In sedges the Leaf base. sheath forms a complete investment of the stem, whilst in grasses it is split on one side. In the latter plants there is also a membranous outgrowth, the ligule, at right angles to the median plane of the leaf from the point where the sheath passes into the lamina, there being no petiole (fig. 5, l).

The leaf base is often developed as a sheath (vagina), which wraps around all or part of the stem's circumference (fig. 5). This sheath is relatively rare in dicotyledons but is found in umbelliferous plants. It's much more common in monocotyledons. In sedges, the Leaf base. sheath completely surrounds the stem, while in grasses, it's split on one side. In these plants, there is also a membranous growth called the ligule, which extends at a right angle to the leaf’s central plane from where the sheath meets the lamina, with no petiole present (fig. 5, l).

Fig. 21.—Leaf of Orange (Citrus Aurantium), showing a winged leafy petiole p, which is articulated to the lamina l. Fig. 22.—Pitcher (ascidium) of a species of Side-saddle plant (Sarracenia purpurea). The pitcher is formed from the petiole, which is prolonged.

In leaves in which no sheath is produced we not infrequently find small foliar organs, stipules, at the base of the petiole (fig. 24, s). The stipules are generally two in number, and they are important as supplying characters in certain natural orders. Thus they occur 326 in the pea and bean family, in rosaceous plants and the family Rubiaceae. They are not common in dicotyledons with opposite leaves. Plants having stipules are called stipulate; those having none are exstipulate. Stipules may be large or small, entire or divided, deciduous or persistent. They are not usually of the same form as the ordinary foliage leaves of the plant, from which they are distinguished by their lateral position at the base of the petiole. In the pansy (fig. 24) the true leaves are stalked and crenate, while the stipules s are large, sessile and pinnatifid. In Lathyrus Aphaca and some other plants the true pinnate leaves are abortive, the petiole forms a tendril, and the stipules alone are developed, performing the office of leaves. When stipulate leaves are opposite to each other, at the same height on the stem, it occasionally happens that the stipules on the two sides unite wholly or partially, so as to form an interpetiolary or interfoliar stipule, as in members of the family Rubiaceae. In the case of alternate leaves, the stipules at the base of each leaf are sometimes united to the petiole and to each other, so as to form an adnate, adherent or petiolary stipule, as in the rose, or an axillary stipule, as in Houttuynia cordata. In other instances the stipules unite together on the side of the stem opposite the leaf forming an ocrea, as in the dock family (fig. 25).

In leaves that don’t have a sheath, we often find small leaf-like structures called stipules at the base of the petiole (fig. 24, s). There are usually two stipules, and they are significant for identifying certain plant families. They can be found in the pea and bean family, in plants from the rose family, and in the Rubiaceae family. Stipules are rare in dicotyledons with opposite leaves. Plants that have stipules are referred to as stipulate, while those without are called exstipulate. Stipules can vary in size, whether they are whole or divided, and they can be either shed or remain attached. They usually don’t match the shape of the plant's ordinary leaves and are located on the sides at the base of the petiole. In the pansy (fig. 24), the true leaves have stalks and are scalloped, while the stipules s are large, sit directly on the stem, and are divided. In Lathyrus Aphaca and some other plants, the true pinnate leaves are absent, the petiole turns into a tendril, and only the stipules develop, taking on the role of leaves. When stipulate leaves grow opposite each other at the same height on the stem, the stipules on both sides sometimes join completely or partially, forming an interpetiolary or interfoliar stipule, as seen in members of the Rubiaceae family. For alternate leaves, the stipules at the base of each leaf may sometimes fuse to the petiole and to each other, creating an adnate, adherent, or petiolary stipule, as in the rose, or an axillary stipule, as in Houttuynia cordata. In other cases, the stipules may join together on the side of the stem opposite the leaf, forming an ocrea, as seen in the dock family (fig. 25).

Fig. 23—Leaf of an Acacia (Acacia heterophylla), showing a flattened leaf-like petiole p, called a phyllode, with straight venation, and a bipinnate lamina.

In the development of the leaf the stipules frequently play a most important part. They begin to be formed after the origin of the leaves, but grow much more rapidly than the leaves, and in this way they arch over the young leaves and form protective chambers wherein the parts of the leaf may develop. In the figs, magnolia and pondweeds they are very large and completely envelop the young leaf-bud. The stipules are sometimes so minute as to be scarcely distinguishable without the aid of a lens, and so fugacious as to be visible only in the very young state of the leaf. They may assume a hard and spiny character, as in Robinia Pseudacacia (fig. 19), or may be cirrose, as in Smilax, where each stipule is represented by a tendril. At the base of the leaflets of a compound leaf, small stipules (stipels) are occasionally produced.

In the development of the leaf, stipules often play a crucial role. They start forming after the leaves do but grow much faster than the leaves, arching over them and creating protective spaces for the leaf parts to develop. In plants like figs, magnolia, and pondweeds, stipules are quite large and fully cover the young leaf bud. Sometimes, they are so tiny they can barely be seen without a lens, and are so fleeting that they're only visible when the leaf is very young. They can become hard and spiky, like in Robinia Pseudacacia (fig. 19), or climber-like, as in Smilax, where each stipule is transformed into a tendril. Additionally, at the base of the leaflets of a compound leaf, small stipules (stipels) may occasionally appear.

Fig. 24.—Leaf of Pansy. s, Stipules. Fig. 25.—Leaf of Polygonum, with part of stem. o, Ocrea.

Variations in the structure and forms of leaves and leafstalks are produced by the increased development of cellular tissue, by the abortion or degeneration of parts, by the multiplication or repetition of parts and by adhesion. When cellular tissue is developed to a great extent, leaves become succulent and occasionally Modifications. assume a crisp or curled appearance. Such changes take place naturally, but they are often increased by the art of the gardener, and the object of many horticultural operations is to increase the bulk and succulence of leaves. It is in this way that cabbages and savoys are rendered more delicate and nutritious. By a deficiency in development of parenchyma and an increase in the mechanical tissue, leaves are liable to become hardened and spinescent. The leaves of barberry and of some species of Astragalus, and the stipules of the false acacia (Robinia) are spiny. To the same cause is due the spiny margin of the holly-leaf. When two lobes at the base of a leaf are prolonged beyond the stem and unite (fig. 26), the leaf is perfoliate, the stem appearing to pass through it, as in Bupleurum perfoliatum and Chlora perfoliata; when two leaves unite by their bases they become connate (fig. 27), as in Lonicera Caprifolium; and when leaves adhere to the stem, forming a sort of winged or leafy appendage, they are decurrent, as in thistles. The formation of peltate leaves has been traced to the union of the lobes of a cleft leaf. In the leaf of the Victoria regia the transformation may be traced during germination. The first leaves produced by the young plant are linear, the second are sagittate and hastate, the third are rounded-cordate and the next are orbicular. The cleft indicating the union of the lobes remains in the large leaves. The parts of the leaf are frequently transformed into tendrils, with the view of enabling the plants to twine round others for support. In Leguminous plants (the pea tribe) the pinnae are frequently modified to form tendrils, as in Lathyrus Aphaca, in which the stipules perform the function of true leaves. In Flagellaria indica, Gloriosa superba and others, the midrib of the leaf ends in a tendril. In Smilax there are two stipulary tendrils.

Variations in the structure and shapes of leaves and leaf stalks come from enhanced development of cellular tissue, the loss or degeneration of parts, the multiplication or repetition of parts, and their adhesion. When cellular tissue develops significantly, leaves can become juicy and sometimes take on a crisp or curled look. These changes happen naturally but are often boosted by gardening techniques, with many horticultural practices aiming to enhance the size and juiciness of leaves. This is how cabbages and savoys are made more tender and nutritious. When there’s insufficient development of parenchyma and an increase in mechanical tissue, leaves can harden and develop spines. The leaves of barberry and certain species of Astragalus, along with the stipules of the false acacia (Robinia), are spiny. The spiny edges of holly leaves are due to the same cause. When two lobes at the base of a leaf extend beyond the stem and fuse (fig. 26), the leaf is called perfoliate, making it look like the stem goes through it, as seen in Bupleurum perfoliatum and Chlora perfoliata; when two leaves join at their bases, they become connate (fig. 27), as in Lonicera Caprifolium; and when leaves stick to the stem, forming a type of winged or leafy appendage, they are decurrent, as seen in thistles. Peltate leaves are thought to form from the fusion of lobes of a split leaf. In the leaf of Victoria regia, the transformation can be seen during germination. The first leaves from the young plant are linear, the second are arrow-shaped and hastate, the third are rounded-heart-shaped, and the next are circular. The seam from where the lobes fused stays evident in the larger leaves. The parts of the leaf often change into tendrils to help plants climb and support themselves around other plants. In leguminous plants (like peas), the pinnae often modify into tendrils, as in Lathyrus Aphaca, where the stipules function as true leaves. In Flagellaria indica, Gloriosa superba, and others, the midrib of the leaf ends in a tendril. In Smilax, there are two stipulary tendrils.

Fig. 26.—Perfoliate leaf of a species of Hare’s-ear (Bupleurum rotundifolium). The two lobes at the base of the leaf are united, so that the stalk appears to come through the leaf. Fig. 27.—Connate leaves of a species of Honeysuckle (Lonicera Caprifolium). Two leaves are united by their bases.
Fig. 28.—Pitcher of a species of pitcher-plant (Nepenthes distillatoria).

The vascular bundles and cellular tissue are sometimes developed in such a way as to form a circle, with a hollow in the centre, and thus give rise to what are called fistular or hollow leaves, as in the onion, and to ascidia or pitchers. Pitchers are formed either by petioles or by laminae, and they are composed of one or more leaves. In Sarracenia (fig. 22) and Heliamphora the pitcher is composed of the petiole of the leaf. In the pitcher plant, Nepenthes, the pitcher is a modification of the lamina, the petiole often plays the part of a tendril, while the leaf base is flat and leaf-like (fig. 28).

The vascular bundles and cell tissue sometimes develop in a way that forms a circle with a hollow center, leading to what are known as fistular or hollow leaves, like in onions, and to ascidia or pitchers. Pitchers can form from either petioles or laminae, and they consist of one or more leaves. In Sarracenia (fig. 22) and Heliamphora, the pitcher is made from the petiole of the leaf. In the pitcher plant Nepenthes, the pitcher is a modified lamina, while the petiole often acts like a tendril, and the leaf base is flat and resembles a leaf (fig. 28).

In Utricularia bladder-like sacs are formed by a modification of leaflets on the submerged leaves.

In Utricularia, bladder-like sacs are created by a change in the leaflets on the underwater leaves.

In some cases the leaves are reduced to mere scalescataphyllary leaves; they are produced abundantly upon underground shoots. In parasites (Lathraea, Orobanche) and in plants growing on decaying vegetable matter (saprophytes), in which no chlorophyll is formed, these scales are the only leaves produced. In Pinus the only leaves produced on the main stem and the lateral shoots are scales, the acicular leaves of the tree growing from axillary shoots. In Cycas whorls of scales alternate with large pinnate leaves. In many plants, as already noticed, phyllodia or stipules perform the function of leaves. The production of leaf-buds from 327 leaves sometimes occurs as in Bryophyllum, and many plants of the order Gesneraceae. The leaf of Venus’s fly-trap (Dionaea muscipula) when cut off and placed in damp moss, with a pan of water underneath and a bell-glass for a cover, has produced buds from which young plants were obtained. Some species of saxifrage and of ferns also produce buds on their leaves and fronds. In Nymphaea micrantha buds appear at the upper part of the petiole.

In some cases, the leaves are reduced to simple scalescataphyllary leaves; they grow plentifully on underground shoots. In parasites (Lathraea, Orobanche) and in plants that thrive on decaying plant matter (saprophytes), where no chlorophyll is produced, these scales are the only leaves formed. In Pinus, the only leaves on the main stem and the side shoots are scales, while the needle-like leaves of the tree grow from the axillary shoots. In Cycas, whorls of scales alternate with large feather-like leaves. In many plants, as mentioned earlier, phyllodia or stipules act like leaves. Leaf-buds can sometimes form from leaves, as seen in Bryophyllum and many members of the Gesneraceae family. The leaf of Venus’s flytrap (Dionaea muscipula), when cut and placed in damp moss with a pan of water underneath and a bell jar to cover it, can produce buds that grow into young plants. Some species of saxifrage and ferns also produce buds on their leaves and fronds. In Nymphaea micrantha, buds appear at the top of the petiole.

Leaves occupy various positions on the stem and branches, Phyllotaxis. and have received different names according to their situation. Thus leaves arising from the crown of the root, as in the primrose, are called radical; those on the stem are cauline; on flower-stalks, floral leaves (see Flower). The first leaves developed are known as seed leaves or cotyledons. The arrangement of the leaves on the axis and its appendages is called phyllotaxis.

Leaves are found in different places on the stem and branches, Phyllotaxis. and they have different names based on where they grow. For example, leaves that come from the crown of the root, like in the primrose, are called radical; those on the stem are termed cauline; and leaves on flower stalks are known as floral leaves (see Flower). The first leaves that develop are referred to as seed leaves or cotyledons. The way the leaves are arranged on the stem and its attachments is known as phyllotaxis.

Fig. 29.—A stem with opposite leaves. The pairs are placed at right angles alternately, or in what is called a decussate manner. In the lowest pair one leaf is in front and the other at the back; in the second pair the leaves are placed laterally, and so on. Fig. 30.—A stem with alternate leaves, arranged in a pentastichous or quincuncial manner. The sixth leaf is directly above the first, and commences the second cycle. The fraction of the circumference of the stem expressing the divergence of the leaves is two-fifths.

In their arrangement leaves follow a definite order. The points on the stem at which leaves appear are called nodes; the part of the stem between the nodes is the internode. When two leaves are produced at the same node, one on each side of the stem or axis, and at the same level, they are opposite (fig. 29); when more than two are produced they are verticillate, and the circle of leaves is then called a verticil or whorl. When leaves are opposite, each successive pair may be placed at right angles to the pair immediately preceding. They are then said to decussate, following thus a law of alternation (fig. 29). The same occurs in the verticillate arrangement, the leaves of each whorl rarely being superposed on those of the whorl next it, but usually alternating so that each leaf in a whorl occupies the space between two leaves of the whorl next to it. There are considerable irregularities, however, in this respect, and the number of leaves in different whorls is not always uniform, as may be seen in Lysimachia vulgaris. When a single leaf is produced at a node, and the nodes are separated so that each leaf is placed at a different height on the stem, the leaves are alternate (fig. 30). A plane passing through the point of insertion of the leaf in the node, dividing the leaf into similar halves, is the median plane of the leaf; and when the leaves are arranged alternately on an axis so that their median planes coincide they form a straight row or orthostichy. On every axis there are usually two or more orthostichies. In fig. 31, leaf 1 arises from a node n; leaf 2 is separated from it by an internode m, and is placed to the right or left; while leaf 3 is situated directly above leaf 1. In this case, then, there are two orthostichies, and the arrangement is said to be distichous. When the fourth leaf is directly above the first, the arrangement is tristichous. The same arrangement continues throughout the branch, so that in the latter case the 7th leaf is above the 4th, the 10th above the 7th; also the 5th above the 2nd, the 6th above the 3rd and so on. The size of the angle between the median planes of two consecutive leaves in an alternate arrangement is their divergence; and it is expressed in fractions of the circumference of the axis which is supposed to be a circle. In a regularly-formed straight branch covered with leaves, if a thread is passed from one to the other, turning always in the same direction, a spiral is described, and a certain number of leaves and of complete turns occur before reaching the leaf directly above that from which the enumeration commenced. If this arrangement is expressed by a fraction, the numerator of which indicates the number of turns, and the denominator the number of internodes in the spiral cycle, the fraction will be found to represent the angle of divergence of the consecutive leaves on the axis. Thus, in fig. 32, a, b, the cycle consists of five leaves, the 6th leaf being placed vertically over the 1st, the 7th over the 2nd and so on; while the number of turns between the 1st and 6th leaf is two; hence this arrangement is indicated by the fraction 25. In other words, the distance or divergence between the first and second leaf, expressed in parts of a circle, is 25 of a circle or 360° × 25 = 144°. In fig. 31, a, b, the spiral is ½, i.e. one turn and two leaves; the third leaf being placed vertically over the first, and the divergence between the first and second leaf being one-half the circumference of a circle, 360° × ½ = 180°. Again, in a tristichous arrangement the number is 13, or one turn and three leaves, the angular divergence being 120°.

In their arrangement, leaves follow a specific order. The points on the stem where leaves appear are called nodes; the part of the stem between the nodes is the internode. When two leaves grow at the same node, one on each side of the stem, and at the same level, they are opposite (fig. 29); when more than two are produced, they are verticillate, and the circle of leaves is called a verticil or whorl. When leaves are opposite, each successive pair may be positioned at right angles to the pair directly before it. They are then said to decussate, following a rule of alternation (fig. 29). The same happens in the verticillate arrangement; the leaves of each whorl rarely sit directly on top of the leaves of the adjacent whorl, but usually alternate, so that each leaf in a whorl fits between two leaves of the whorl next to it. However, there are significant irregularities in this regard, and the number of leaves in different whorls is not always the same, as seen in Lysimachia vulgaris. When a single leaf grows at a node, and the nodes are spaced apart so that each leaf is at a different height on the stem, the leaves are alternate (fig. 30). A plane passing through the point where the leaf attaches to the node, dividing the leaf into two similar halves, is the median plane of the leaf; and when the leaves are positioned alternately on an axis so that their median planes align, they form a straight line or orthostichy. Typically, there are two or more orthostichies on each axis. In fig. 31, leaf 1 comes from a node n; leaf 2 is separated from it by an internode m, and is located to the right or left; while leaf 3 is positioned directly above leaf 1. In this case, there are two orthostichies, and the arrangement is called distichous. When the fourth leaf is directly above the first, the arrangement is tristichous. This pattern continues throughout the branch, so that in the latter case, the 7th leaf is above the 4th, the 10th above the 7th; also the 5th above the 2nd, the 6th above the 3rd, and so on. The size of the angle between the median planes of two consecutive leaves in an alternate arrangement is their divergence; it's expressed in fractions of the circumference of the axis, which is assumed to be a circle. In a uniformly formed straight branch covered in leaves, if a thread is drawn from one leaf to the next while consistently turning in the same direction, a spiral is formed, and a certain number of leaves and full turns occur before reaching the leaf directly above the starting point. If this arrangement is shown as a fraction, where the numerator represents the number of turns and the denominator represents the number of internodes in the spiral cycle, that fraction will indicate the angle of divergence of the consecutive leaves on the axis. Thus, in fig. 32, a, b, the cycle consists of five leaves, with the 6th leaf positioned directly above the 1st, the 7th above the 2nd, and so on; while the number of turns between the 1st and the 6th leaf is two; therefore, this arrangement is represented by the fraction 25. In other words, the distance or divergence between the first and second leaf, expressed in parts of a circle, is 25 of a circle or 360° × 25 = 144°. In fig. 31, a, b, the spiral is ½, i.e. one turn and two leaves; the third leaf being placed directly above the first, and the divergence between the first and second leaf being half the circumference of a circle, so 360° × ½ = 180°. Again, in a tristichous arrangement, the number is 13, or one turn and three leaves, with the angular divergence being 120°.

Fig. 31.—Portion of a branch of a Lime tree, with four leaves arranged in a distichous manner, or in two rows. a, The branch with the leaves numbered in their order, n being the node and m the internode; b is a magnified representation of the branch, showing the points of insertion of the leaves and their spiral arrangement, which is expressed by the fraction ½, or one turn of the spiral for two internodes. Fig. 32.—Part of a branch of a Cherry with six leaves, the sixth being placed vertically over the first, after two turns of the spiral. This is expressed by two-fifths. a, The branch, with the leaves numbered in order; b, a magnified representation of the branch, showing the points of insertion of the leaves and their spiral arrangement.

By this means we have a convenient mode of expressing on paper the exact position of the leaves upon an axis. And in many cases such a mode of expression is of excellent service in enabling us readily to understand the relations of the leaves. The divergences may also be represented diagrammatically on a horizontal projection of the vertical axis, as in fig. 33. Here the outermost circle represents a section of that portion of the axis bearing the lowest leaf, the innermost represents the highest. The broad dark lines represent the leaves, and they are numbered according to their age and position. It will be seen at once that the leaves are arranged in orthostichies marked I.-V., and that these divide the circumference into five equal portions. But the divergence between leaf 1 and leaf 2 is equal to 25ths of the circumference, and the same is the case between 2 and 3, 3 and 4, &c. The divergence, then, is 25, and from this we learn that, starting from any leaf on the axis, we must pass twice round the stem in a spiral through five leaves before reaching one directly over that with which we started. The line which, winding round an axis either to the right or to the left, passes through the points of insertion of all the leaves on the axis is termed the genetic or generating spiral; and that margin of each leaf which is towards the direction from which the spiral proceeds is the kathodic side, the other margin facing the point whither the spiral passes being the anodic side.

By this method, we have a convenient way to express on paper the exact position of the leaves on an axis. In many cases, this way of expression helps us easily understand the relationships between the leaves. The divergences can also be shown diagrammatically on a horizontal projection of the vertical axis, as in fig. 33. Here, the outermost circle represents a section of the axis that holds the lowest leaf, while the innermost represents the highest. The thick dark lines represent the leaves, and they are numbered according to their age and position. You can see right away that the leaves are arranged in orthostichies marked I.-V., dividing the circumference into five equal sections. However, the divergence between leaf 1 and leaf 2 is equal to 25ths of the circumference, and the same is true for 2 and 3, 3 and 4, and so on. Therefore, the divergence is 25, which tells us that starting from any leaf on the axis, we must spiral twice around the stem through five leaves before reaching one directly above the one we started with. The line that winds around the axis, either to the right or to the left, passing through the insertion points of all the leaves on the axis is called the genetic or generating spiral; and the margin of each leaf that faces the direction from which the spiral moves is the kathodic side, while the other margin, which faces the direction the spiral leads to, is the anodic side.

In cases where the internodes are very short and the leaves are closely applied to each other, as in the house-leek, it is difficult to trace the generating spiral. Thus, in fig. 34 there are thirteen leaves which are numbered in their order, and five turns of the spiral marked by circles in the centre (513 indicating the arrangement); but this could not be detected at once. So also in fir cones (fig. 35), which are composed of scales or modified leaves, the generating spiral cannot be determined easily. But in such cases a series of secondary spirals or parastichies are seen running parallel with each other both right and left, which to a certain extent conceal the genetic spiral.

In situations where the spaces between the stems are very short and the leaves are tightly packed together, like in the house-leek, it’s hard to identify the generating spiral. For example, in fig. 34, there are thirteen leaves numbered in their sequence, and five turns of the spiral indicated by circles in the center (513 showing the arrangement); however, this isn’t immediately obvious. Similarly, in fir cones (fig. 35), which are made up of scales or modified leaves, the generating spiral is not easily recognizable. Yet, in such instances, a series of secondary spirals or parastichies can be seen running parallel to each other on both sides, which somewhat obscures the genetic spiral.

Fig. 33.—Diagram of a phyllotaxis represented by the fraction 25.

The spiral is not always constant throughout the whole length of an axis. The angle of divergence may alter either abruptly or gradually, and the phyllotaxis thus becomes very complicated. This change may be brought about by arrest of development, by increased development of parts or by a torsion of the axis. The former are exemplified in many Crassulaceae and aloes. The latter is seen well in the screw-pine (Pandanus). In the bud of the screw-pine the leaves are arranged in three orthostichies with the phyllotaxis 13, but by torsion the developed leaves become arranged in three strong spiral rows running round the stem. These causes of change in phyllotaxis are also well exemplified in the alteration of an opposite or verticillate arrangement to an alternate, and vice versa; thus the effect of interruption of growth, in causing alternate leaves to become opposite and verticillate, can be distinctly shown in Rhododendron ponticum. The primitive or generating spiral may 328 pass either from right to left or from left to right. It sometimes follows a different direction in the branches from that pursued in the stem. When it follows the same course in the stem and branches, they are homodromous; when the direction differs, they are heterodromous. In different species of the same genus the phyllotaxis frequently varies.

The spiral isn't always consistent along the entire length of an axis. The angle of divergence can change either suddenly or gradually, making the phyllotaxis quite complex. This change can occur due to halted development, increased growth of parts, or a twisting of the axis. The first case can be seen in many Crassulaceae and aloes. The latter is clearly illustrated in the screw-pine (Pandanus). In the bud of the screw-pine, the leaves are arranged in three orthostichies with a phyllotaxis of 13, but due to twisting, the developed leaves end up forming three strong spiral rows around the stem. These reasons for changes in phyllotaxis are also clearly shown in the shift from an opposite or verticillate arrangement to an alternate one, and vice versa; for instance, the effect of growth interruption causing alternate leaves to turn opposite and verticillate can be distinctly observed in Rhododendron ponticum. The primary or generating spiral may 328 go either from right to left or from left to right. It can sometimes take a different direction in the branches compared to the stem. When it follows the same direction in both the stem and branches, they are homodromous; when they differ, they are heterodromous. In various species of the same genus, the phyllotaxis often changes.

All modifications of leaves follow the same laws of arrangement as true leaves—a fact which is of importance in a morphological point of view. In dicotyledonous plants the first leaves produced (the cotyledons) are opposite. This arrangement often continues during the life of the plant, but at other times it changes, passing into distichous and spiral forms. Some tribes of plants are distinguished by their opposite or verticillate, others by their alternate, leaves. Labiate plants have decussate leaves, while Boraginaceae have alternate leaves, and Tiliaceae usually have distichous leaves; Rubiaceae have opposite leaves. Such arrangements as 25, 38, 513 and 821 are common in Dicotyledons. The first of these, called a quincunx, is met with in the apple, pear and cherry (fig. 32); the second, in the bay, holly, Plantago media; the third, in the cones of Picea alba (fig. 35); and the fourth in those of the silver fir. In monocotyledonous plants there is only one seed-leaf or cotyledon, and hence the arrangement is at first alternate; and it generally continues so more or less, rarely being verticillate. Such arrangements as 12, 13 and 23 are common in Monocotyledons, as in grasses, sedges and lilies. It has been found in general that, while the number 5 occurs in the phyllotaxis of Dicotyledons, 3 is common in that of Monocotyledons.

All leaf modifications follow the same arrangement rules as true leaves, which is significant from a morphological perspective. In dicot plants, the first leaves to emerge (the cotyledons) are opposite each other. This arrangement often persists throughout the plant's life but can change to two-ranked and spiral forms at times. Some plant families are characterized by their opposite or whorled leaves, while others have alternate leaves. Labiate plants typically have decussate leaves, whereas Boraginaceae have alternate leaves, and Tiliaceae usually show distichous leaves; Rubiaceae are known for their opposite leaves. Arrangements like 25, 38, 513, and 821 are common in dicotyledons. The first arrangement, known as a quincunx, is found in apple, pear, and cherry (fig. 32); the second is present in bay, holly, and Plantago media; the third occurs in the cones of Picea alba (fig. 35); and the fourth is seen in those of the silver fir. In monocot plants, there is only one seed leaf or cotyledon, resulting in an initially alternate arrangement, which generally remains so, with verticillate arrangements being rare. Common arrangements in monocots include 12, 13, and 23, as seen in grasses, sedges, and lilies. Generally, while the number 5 is prevalent in the phyllotaxis of dicotyledons, the number 3 is common in those of monocotyledons.

Fig. 34.—Cycle of thirteen leaves placed closely together so as to form a rosette, as in Sempervivum. A is the very short axis to which the leaves are attached. The leaves are numbered in their order, from below upwards. The circles in the centre indicate the five turns of the spiral, and show the insertion of each of the leaves. The divergence is expressed by the fraction 513ths. Fig. 35.—Cone of Picea alba with the scales or modified leaves numbered in the order of their arrangement on the axis of the cone. The lines indicate a rectilinear series of scales and two lateral secondary spirals, one turning from left to right, the other from right to left.

In the axil of previously formed leaves leaf-buds arise. These leaf-buds contain the rudiments of a shoot, and consist of leaves covering a growing point. The buds of trees of temperate climates, which lie dormant during the winter, are protected by scale leaves. These scales or protective appendages of the bud consist either of the altered laminae or of the enlarged petiolary sheath, or of stipules, as in the fig and magnolia, or of one or two of these parts combined. These are often of a coarse nature, serving a temporary purpose, and then falling off when the leaf is expanded. They are frequently covered with a resinous matter, as in balsam-poplar and horse-chestnut, or by a thick downy covering as in the willow. In plants of warm climates the buds have often no protective appendages, and are then said to be naked.

In the axil of previously formed leaves, leaf buds develop. These leaf buds contain the beginnings of a shoot, and are made up of leaves covering a growing point. The buds of trees in temperate climates, which remain dormant during the winter, are protected by scale leaves. These scales or protective parts of the bud are either altered laminae, enlarged petiolary sheaths, stipules (like those in the fig and magnolia), or a combination of one or two of these parts. They are often coarse and serve a temporary purpose, dropping off once the leaf has opened. They are frequently coated with a resinous substance, like in balsam poplar and horse chestnut, or covered in a thick downy layer like in willow. In plants from warmer climates, the buds often lack protective parts and are referred to as naked.

Fig. 36. Fig. 37. Fig. 38.
Fig. 39. Fig. 40. Fig. 41.

Fig. 36.—Circinate vernation.

Fig. 36.—Circular leaf unfolding.

Fig. 37.—Transverse section of a conduplicate leaf.

Fig. 37.—Cross section of a folded leaf.

Fig. 38.—Transverse section of a plicate or plaited leaf.

Fig. 38.—Cross section of a folded or pleated leaf.

Fig. 39.—Transverse section of a convolute leaf.

Fig. 39.—Cross-section of a rolled leaf.

Fig. 40.—Transverse section of an involute leaf.

Fig. 40.—Cross-section of an involute leaf.

Fig. 41.—Transverse section of a revolute leaf.

Fig. 41.—Cross section of a rolled leaf.

Fig. 42. Fig. 43. Fig. 44. Fig. 45.

Fig. 42.—Transverse section of a bud, in which the leaves are arranged in an accumbent manner.

Fig. 42.—Cross-section of a bud, where the leaves are arranged in an overlapping way.

Fig. 43.—Transverse section of a bud, in which the leaves are arranged in an equitant manner.

Fig. 43.—Cross section of a bud, where the leaves are organized in an equitant way.

Fig. 44.—Transverse section of a bud, showing two leaves folded in an obvolute manner. Each is conduplicate, and one embraces the edge of the other.

Fig. 44.—Cross section of a bud, displaying two leaves folded over each other. Each leaf is bent in half, with one leaf wrapping around the edge of the other.

Fig. 45.—Transverse section of a bud, showing two leaves arranged in a supervolute manner.

Fig. 45.—Cross-section of a bud, showing two leaves arranged in a supervolute way.

The arrangement of the leaves in the bud is termed vernation or prefoliation. In considering vernation we must take into account both the manner in which each individual leaf is folded and also the arrangement of the leaves in relation to each other. These vary in different plants, but in each species they follow a regular law. The leaves in the bud are either placed simply in apposition, as in the mistletoe, or they are folded or rolled up longitudinally or laterally, giving rise to different kinds of vernation, as delineated in figs. 36 to 45, where the folded or curved lines represent the leaves, the thickened part being the midrib. The leaf taken individually is either folded longitudinally from apex to base, as in the tulip-tree, and called reclinate or replicate; or rolled up in a circular manner from apex to base, as in ferns (fig. 36), and called circinate; or folded laterally, conduplicate (fig. 37), as in oak; or it has several folds like a fan, plicate or plaited (fig. 38), as in vine and sycamore, and in leaves with radiating vernation, where the ribs mark the foldings; or it is rolled upon itself, convolute (fig. 39), as in banana and apricot; or its edges are rolled inwards, involute (fig. 40), as in violet; or outwards, revolute (fig. 41), as in rosemary. The different divisions of a cut leaf may be folded or rolled up separately, as in ferns, while the entire leaf may have either the same or a different kind of vernation. The leaves have a definite relation to each other in the bud, being either opposite, alternate or verticillate; and thus different kinds of vernation are produced. Sometimes they are nearly in a circle at the same level, remaining flat or only slightly convex externally, and placed so as to touch each other by their edges, thus giving rise to valvate vernation. At other times they are at different levels, and are applied over each other, so as to be imbricated, as in lilac, and in the outer scales of sycamore; and occasionally the margin of one leaf overlaps that of another, while it in its turn is overlapped by a third, so as to be twisted, spiral or contortive. When leaves are applied to each other face to face, without being folded or rolled together, they are appressed. When the leaves are more completely folded they either touch at their extremities and are accumbent or opposite (fig. 42), or are folded inwards by their margin and become induplicate; or a conduplicate leaf covers another similarly folded, which in turn covers a third, and thus the vernation is equitant (fig. 43), as in privet; or conduplicate leaves are placed so that the half of the one covers the half of another, and thus they become half-equitant or obvolute (fig. 44), as in sage. When in the case of convolute leaves one leaf is rolled up within the other, it is supervolute (fig. 45). The scales of a bud sometimes exhibit one kind of vernation and the leaves another. The same modes of arrangement occur in the flower-buds.

The way leaves are arranged in a bud is called vernation or prefoliation. When looking at vernation, we need to consider how each leaf is folded and how the leaves are arranged in relation to one another. These patterns vary among different plants, but within each species, they follow a specific rule. In a bud, leaves can be simply placed next to each other, like in mistletoe, or they can be folded or rolled up either lengthwise or sideways, leading to different types of vernation, as shown in figs. 36 to 45, where the folded or curved lines represent the leaves, with the thickened part being the midrib. Each leaf can be folded lengthwise from tip to base, like in the tulip-tree, and is referred to as reclinate or replicate; or rolled up circularly from tip to base, like in ferns (fig. 36), and is called circinate; or folded sideways, conduplicate (fig. 37), like in oak; or have several folds like a fan, plicate or plaited (fig. 38), like in vine and sycamore, with leaves showing radiating vernation where the ribs indicate the folds; or it can be rolled upon itself, convolute (fig. 39), as seen in banana and apricot; or its edges can roll inward, involute (fig. 40), like in violet; or outward, revolute (fig. 41), like in rosemary. The different sections of a divided leaf may be folded or rolled up separately, as in ferns, although the entire leaf can show the same or a different type of vernation. The leaves in a bud have a specific arrangement in relation to each other, being either opposite, alternate, or whorled; this leads to various kinds of vernation. Sometimes they are nearly in a circle at the same level, lying flat or only slightly rounded on the outside, touching at the edges, creating what is called valvate vernation. Other times, they are at different levels, overlapping one another, making them imbricated, as seen in lilac and the outer scales of sycamore; occasionally, one leaf's edge overlaps another's, while it is also overlapped by a third, resulting in a twisted, spiral, or contortive arrangement. When leaves are placed face-to-face without folding or rolling, they are appressed. When leaves are more completely folded, they either touch at their ends and are accumbent or opposite (fig. 42), or are folded inward at their edges, becoming induplicate; or one conduplicate leaf covers another similarly folded leaf, which in turn covers a third, creating equitant vernation (fig. 43), as in privet; or conduplicate leaves can be positioned such that half of one covers half of another, leading to half-equitant or obvolute (fig. 44), as in sage. In the case of convolute leaves, if one leaf is rolled inside another, it is referred to as supervolute (fig. 45). The scales of a bud can sometimes show one type of vernation while the leaves display another. The same arrangements can be found in flower buds.

Leaves, after performing their functions for a certain time, wither and die. In doing so they frequently change colour, and hence arise the beautiful and varied tints of the autumnal foliage. This change 329 of colour is chiefly occasioned by the diminished circulation in the leaves, and the higher degree of oxidation to which their chlorophyll has been submitted.

Leaves, after serving their purpose for a while, wither and die. As they do, they often change color, creating the beautiful and varied shades of autumn leaves. This change in color is mainly caused by reduced circulation in the leaves and the increased oxidation of their chlorophyll. 329

Leaves which are articulated with the stem, as in the walnut and horse-chestnut, fall and leave a scar, while those which are continuous with it remain attached for some time after they have lost their vitality. Most of the trees of Great Britain have deciduous leaves, their duration not extending over more than a few months, while in trees of warm climates the leaves often remain for two or more years. In tropical countries, however, many trees lose their leaves in the dry season. The period of defoliation varies in different countries according to the nature of their climate. Trees which are called evergreen, as pines and evergreen-oak, are always deprived of a certain number of leaves at intervals, sufficient being left, however, to preserve their green appearance. The cause of the fall of the leaf in cold climates seems to be deficiency of light and heat in winter, which causes a cessation in the functions of the cells of the leaf. The fall is directly caused by the formation of a layer of tissue across the base of the leaf-stalk; the cells of this layer separate from one another and the leaf remains attached only by the fibres of the veins until it becomes finally detached by the wind or frost. Before its fall the leaf has become dry owing to loss of water and the removal of the protoplasm and food substances to the stem for use next season; the red and yellow colouring matters are products of decomposition of the chlorophyll. Inorganic and other waste matters are stored in the leaf-tissue and thus got rid of by the plant. The leaf scar is protected by a corky change (suberization) in the walls of the exposed cells.

Leaves that are connected to the stem, like those of walnut and horse-chestnut trees, fall off and leave a scar, while those that are continuous with the stem stay attached for a while even after they've died. Most trees in Great Britain have deciduous leaves that last only a few months, whereas trees in warmer climates often keep their leaves for two years or more. However, in tropical regions, many trees shed their leaves during the dry season. The timing of leaf drop varies by country depending on the climate. Trees known as evergreens, like pines and evergreen oaks, lose some leaves periodically, but enough remain to keep them looking green. The reason leaves fall in cold climates appears to be the lack of light and warmth in winter, which stops the cells in the leaves from functioning. The actual leaf drop is triggered by the formation of a tissue layer at the base of the leaf stalk; the cells in this layer separate from each other, causing the leaf to stay connected only by the fibers of the veins until it finally detaches due to wind or frost. Before falling, a leaf dries out because it loses water and the protoplasm and nutrients are transported back to the stem for use next season; the red and yellow pigments are the result of chlorophyll breakdown. Inorganic and other waste materials are stored in the leaf tissue, allowing the plant to rid itself of them. The leaf scar is protected by a corky transformation (suberization) in the walls of the exposed cells.

(A. B. R.)

LEAF-INSECT, the name given to orthopterous insects of the family Phasmidae, referred to the single genus Phyllium and characterized by the presence of lateral laminae upon the legs and abdomen, which, in association with an abundance of green colouring-matter, impart a broad and leaf-like appearance to the whole insect. In the female this deceptive resemblance is enhanced by the large size and foliaceous form of the front wings which, when at rest edge to edge on the abdomen, forcibly suggest in their neuration the midrib and costae of an ordinary leaf. In this sex the posterior wings are reduced and functionless so far as flight is concerned; in the male they are ample, membranous and functional, while the anterior wings are small and not leaf-like. The freshly hatched young are reddish in colour; but turn green after feeding for a short time upon leaves. Before death a specimen has been observed to pass through the various hues of a decaying leaf, and the spectrum of the green colouring matter does not differ from that of the chlorophyll of living leaves. Since leaf-insects are purely vegetable feeders and not predaceous like mantids, it is probable that their resemblance to leaves is solely for purposes of concealment from enemies. Their egg capsules are similarly protected by their likeness to various seeds. Leaf-insects range from India to the Seychelles on the one side, and to the Fiji Islands on the other.

LEAF INSECT, is the name given to orthopteran insects in the family Phasmidae, specifically the genus Phyllium. They are characterized by having lateral flaps on their legs and abdomen, which, combined with their green coloration, gives them a broad, leaf-like appearance. In females, this camouflage is further enhanced by the large size and leaf-like shape of the front wings, which, when resting edge to edge on the abdomen, resemble the veins of a typical leaf. In females, the hind wings are reduced and not used for flying; in males, they are large, membranous, and functional, while the front wings are small and not leaf-like. Newly hatched young are reddish but turn green after eating leaves for a short while. Before they die, a specimen has been seen changing through the colors of a decaying leaf, and their green coloring is similar to the chlorophyll found in living leaves. Since leaf-insects only eat plants and are not predatory like mantids, it’s likely that their leaf-like appearance is mainly for hiding from predators. Their egg cases are also camouflaged to look like various seeds. Leaf-insects can be found from India to the Seychelles on one side, and to the Fiji Islands on the other.

(R. I. P.)

LEAGUE. 1. (Through Fr. ligue, Ital. liga, from Lat. ligare, to bind), an agreement entered into by two or more parties for mutual protection or joint attack, or for the furtherance of some common object, also the body thus joined or “leagued” together. The name has been given to numerous confederations, such as the Achaean League (q.v.), the confederation of the ancient cities of Achaia, and especially to the various holy leagues (ligues saintes), of which the better known are those formed by Pope Julius II. against Venice in 1508, often known as the League of Cambrai, and against France in 1511. “The League,” in French history, is that of the Catholics headed by the Guises to preserve the Catholic religion against the Huguenots and prevent the accession of Henry of Navarre to the throne (see France: History). “The Solemn League and Covenant” was the agreement for the establishment of Presbyterianism in both countries entered into by England and Scotland in 1643 (see Covenanters). Of commercial leagues the most famous is that of the Hanse towns, known as the Hanseatic League (q.v.). The word has been adopted by political associations, such as the Anti-Corn Law League, the Irish Land League, the Primrose League and the United Irish League, and by numerous social organizations. “League” has also been applied to a special form of competition in athletics, especially in Association football. In this system clubs “league” together in a competition, each playing every other member of the association twice, and the order of merit is decided by the points gained during the season, a win counting two and a draw one.

LEAGUE. 1. (From Fr. ligue, Ital. liga, from Lat. ligare, to bind), an agreement made by two or more parties for mutual protection or joint action, or to promote a common goal, also referring to the group that is “leagued” together. The term has been used for various confederations, such as the Achaean League (q.v.), which was a union of ancient cities in Achaia, and notably for various holy leagues (ligues saintes), the most notable being those formed by Pope Julius II against Venice in 1508, often referred to as the League of Cambrai, and against France in 1511. “The League,” in French history, refers to the Catholics led by the Guises aiming to protect the Catholic faith against the Huguenots and to stop Henry of Navarre from ascending to the throne (see France: History). “The Solemn League and Covenant” was the agreement for establishing Presbyterianism in both countries entered into by England and Scotland in 1643 (see Covenanters). Among commercial leagues, the most renowned is that of the Hanse towns, known as the Hanseatic League (q.v.). The word has also been used for political groups, such as the Anti-Corn Law League, the Irish Land League, the Primrose League, and the United Irish League, as well as many social organizations. “League” has also been used to describe a specific format of competition in athletics, especially in Association football. In this format, clubs “league” together in a competition, with each team playing every other team in the association twice, and the ranking is determined by the points accumulated during the season, with a win earning two points and a draw one.

2. (From the late Lat. leuga, or leuca, said to be a Gallic word; the mod. Fr. lieue comes from the O. Fr. liue; the Gaelic leac, meaning a flat stone posted as a mark of distance on a road, has been suggested as the origin), a measure of distance, probably never in regular use in England, and now only in poetical or rhetorical language. It was the Celtic as opposed to the Teutonic unit, and was used in France, Spain, Portugal and Italy. In all the countries it varies with different localities, and the ancient distance has never been fixed. The kilometric league of France is fixed at four kilometres. The nautical league is equal to three nautical miles.

2. (From the late Latin leuga, or leuca, which is thought to be a Gallic word; the modern French lieue comes from Old French liue; the Gaelic leac, meaning a flat stone used as a marker of distance on a road, has been suggested as the origin), a measure of distance that was probably never regularly used in England and is now only found in poetic or rhetorical language. It represented the Celtic unit as opposed to the Teutonic unit and was used in France, Spain, Portugal, and Italy. In all these countries, it varies by location, and the ancient distance has never been precisely defined. The French league is set at four kilometers. The nautical league is equal to three nautical miles.

LEAKE, WILLIAM MARTIN (1777-1860), British antiquarian and topographer, was born in London on the 14th of January 1777. After completing his education at the Royal Military Academy, Woolwich, and spending four years in the West Indies as lieutenant of marine artillery, he was sent by the government to Constantinople to instruct the Turks in this branch of the service. A journey through Asia Minor in 1800 to join the British fleet at Cyprus inspired him with an interest in antiquarian topography. In 1801, after travelling across the desert with the Turkish army to Egypt, he was, on the expulsion of the French, employed in surveying the valley of the Nile as far as the cataracts; but having sailed with the ship engaged to convey the Elgin marbles from Athens to England, he lost all his maps and observations when the vessel foundered off Cerigo. Shortly after his arrival in England he was sent out to survey the coast of Albania and the Morea, with the view of assisting the Turks against attacks of the French from Italy, and of this he took advantage to form a valuable collection of coins and inscriptions and to explore ancient sites. In 1807, war having broken out between Turkey and England, he was made prisoner at Salonica; but, obtaining his release the same year, he was sent on a diplomatic mission to Ali Pasha of Iannina, whose confidence he completely won, and with whom he remained for more than a year as British representative. In 1810 he was granted a yearly sum of £600 for his services in Turkey. In 1815 he retired from the army, in which he held the rank of colonel, devoting the remainder of his life to topographical and antiquarian studies, the results of which were given to the world in the following volumes: Topography of Athens (1821); Journal of a Tour in Asia Minor (1824); Travels in the Morea (1830), and a supplement, Peloponnesiaca (1846); Travels in Northern Greece (1835); and Numismata Hellenica (1854), followed by a supplement in 1859. A characteristic of the researches of Leake was their comprehensive minuteness, which was greatly aided by his mastery of technical details. His Topography of Athens, the first attempt at a scientific treatment of the subject, is still authoritative in regard to many important points (see Athens). He died at Brighton on the 6th of January 1860. The marbles collected by him in Greece were presented to the British Museum; his bronzes, vases, gems and coins were purchased by the university of Cambridge after his death, and are now in the Fitzwilliam Museum. He was elected F.R.S. and F.R.G.S., received the honorary D.C.L. at Oxford (1816), and was a member of the Berlin Academy of Sciences and correspondent of the Institute of France.

LEAKE, WILLIAM MARTIN (1777-1860), British antiquarian and topographer, was born in London on January 14, 1777. After finishing his education at the Royal Military Academy, Woolwich, and spending four years in the West Indies as a lieutenant of marine artillery, he was sent by the government to Constantinople to teach the Turks in this area of the military. A trip through Asia Minor in 1800 to meet the British fleet at Cyprus sparked his interest in antiquarian topography. In 1801, after traveling across the desert with the Turkish army to Egypt, he was, following the expulsion of the French, tasked with surveying the Nile Valley up to the cataracts. However, after sailing on the ship meant to transport the Elgin marbles from Athens to England, he lost all his maps and observations when the ship sank off Cerigo. Shortly after he returned to England, he was sent to survey the coast of Albania and the Morea, aiming to help the Turks against French attacks from Italy. He used this opportunity to build a valuable collection of coins and inscriptions and to explore ancient sites. In 1807, following the start of the war between Turkey and England, he was captured in Salonica; however, after being released the same year, he was sent on a diplomatic mission to Ali Pasha of Iannina, whom he completely won over, spending more than a year with him as the British representative. In 1810, he was granted an annual stipend of £600 for his services in Turkey. In 1815, he retired from the army, holding the rank of colonel, and devoted the rest of his life to topographical and antiquarian studies, the results of which were published in the following volumes: Topography of Athens (1821); Journal of a Tour in Asia Minor (1824); Travels in the Morea (1830), and a supplement, Peloponnesiaca (1846); Travels in Northern Greece (1835); and Numismata Hellenica (1854), followed by a supplement in 1859. A key feature of Leake's research was its thorough attention to detail, greatly aided by his expertise in technical aspects. His Topography of Athens, the first scientific attempt at the subject, remains authoritative on many important points (see Athens). He passed away in Brighton on January 6, 1860. The marbles he collected in Greece were given to the British Museum; his bronzes, vases, gems, and coins were purchased by the University of Cambridge after his death and are now housed in the Fitzwilliam Museum. He was elected F.R.S. and F.R.G.S., awarded an honorary D.C.L. at Oxford (1816), and was a member of the Berlin Academy of Sciences as well as a correspondent of the Institute of France.

See Memoir by J. H. Marsden (1864); the Architect for the 7th of October 1876; E. Curtius in the Preussische Jahrbücher (Sept., 1876); J. E. Sandys, Hist. of Classical Scholarship, iii. (1908), p. 442.

See Memoir by J. H. Marsden (1864); the Architect for October 7, 1876; E. Curtius in the Preussische Jahrbücher (September, 1876); J. E. Sandys, Hist. of Classical Scholarship, iii. (1908), p. 442.

LEAMINGTON, a municipal borough and health resort of Warwickshire, England, on the river Leam near its junction with the Avon, 98 m. N.W. from London, served by the Great Western and London & North Western railways. Pop. (1901) 26,888. The parliamentary boroughs of Leamington and Warwick were joined into one constituency in 1885, returning one member. The centres of the towns are 2 m. apart, Warwick lying to the west, but they are united by the intermediate parish of New Milverton. There are three saline springs, and the principal pump-rooms, baths and pleasant gardens lie on the right bank of the river. The chief public 330 buildings are the town hall (1884), containing a free library and school of art; and the Theatre Royal and assembly room. The parish church of All Saints is modernized, and the other churches are entirely modern. The S. Warwickshire hospital and Midland Counties Home for incurables are here. Leamington High School is an important school for girls. There is a municipal technical school. Industries include iron foundries and brickworks. The town lies in a well-wooded and picturesque country, within a few miles of such interesting towns as Warwick, Kenilworth, Coventry and Stratford-on-Avon. It is a favourite hunting centre, and, as a health resort, attracts not only visitors but residents. The town is governed by a mayor, 8 aldermen, and 24 councillors. Area, 2817 acres.

LEAMINGTON, is a municipal borough and health resort in Warwickshire, England, situated on the river Leam near its confluence with the Avon, 98 miles northwest of London, served by the Great Western and London & North Western railways. Population (1901) was 26,888. The parliamentary boroughs of Leamington and Warwick merged into one constituency in 1885, electing one member. The centers of the towns are 2 miles apart, with Warwick to the west, but they are connected by the parish of New Milverton. There are three saline springs, and the main pump-rooms, baths, and attractive gardens are located on the right bank of the river. The key public buildings include the town hall (1884), which houses a free library and school of art, as well as the Theatre Royal and assembly room. The parish church of All Saints has been modernized, and the other churches are all contemporary. The South Warwickshire hospital and the Midland Counties Home for the incurable are located here. Leamington High School is a notable school for girls, and there is a municipal technical school. Industries in the area include iron foundries and brickworks. The town is set in a well-wooded and scenic landscape, within a few miles of other interesting towns like Warwick, Kenilworth, Coventry, and Stratford-on-Avon. It is a popular hunting center and, as a health resort, attracts both visitors and residents. The town is managed by a mayor, 8 aldermen, and 24 councillors. Area: 2,817 acres.

Leamington was a village of no importance until about 1786, when baths were first erected, though the springs were noticed by Camden, writing about 1586. The population in 1811 was only 543, The town was incorporated in 1875. The name in former use was Leamington Priors, in distinction from Leamington Hastings, a village on the upper Leam. By royal licence granted in 1838 it was called Royal Leamington Spa.

Leamington was a village of little significance until around 1786, when baths were first built, although the springs were noted by Camden around 1586. The population in 1811 was just 543. The town was officially incorporated in 1875. Previously, it was known as Leamington Priors to distinguish it from Leamington Hastings, a village on the upper Leam. In 1838, it was granted royal permission to be called Royal Leamington Spa.

LÉANDRE, CHARLES LUCIEN (1862-  ), French caricaturist and painter, was born at Champsecret (Orne), and studied painting under Bin and Cabanel. From 1887 he figured among the exhibitors of the Salon, where he showed numerous portraits and genre pictures, but his popular fame is due to his comic drawings and caricatures. The series of the “Gotha des souverains,” published in Le Rire, placed him in the front rank of modern caricaturists. Besides his contributions to Le Rire, Le Figaro and other comic journals, he published a series of albums: Nocturnes, Le Musée des souverains, and Paris et la province. Léandre produced admirable work in lithography, and designed many memorable posters, such as the “Yvette Guilbert.” “Les nouveaux mariés,” “Joseph Prudhomme,” “Les Lutteurs,” and “La Femme au chien.” He was created a knight of the Legion of Honour.

LÉANDRE, CHARLES LUCIEN (1862-  ), a French caricaturist and painter, was born in Champsecret (Orne) and studied painting under Bin and Cabanel. Starting in 1887, he participated in the Salon exhibitions, where he showcased numerous portraits and genre paintings, but he gained widespread recognition for his comic drawings and caricatures. His series “Gotha des souverains,” published in Le Rire, established him among the top modern caricaturists. In addition to his contributions to Le Rire, Le Figaro, and other comic magazines, he published several albums: Nocturnes, Le Musée des souverains, and Paris et la province. Léandre excelled in lithography and created many iconic posters, including “Yvette Guilbert,” “Les nouveaux mariés,” “Joseph Prudhomme,” “Les Lutteurs,” and “La Femme au chien.” He was awarded the title of knight of the Legion of Honour.

LEAP-YEAR (more properly known as bissextile), the name given to the year containing 366 days. The astronomers of Julius Caesar, 46 B.C., settled the solar year at 365 days 6 hours. These hours were set aside and at the end of four years made a day which was added to the fourth year. The English name for the bissextile year is an allusion to the result of the interposition of the extra day; for after the 29th of February a date “leaps over” the day of the week on which it would fall in ordinary years. Thus a birthday on the 10th of June, a Monday, will in the next year, if a leap-year, be on the 10th of June, a Wednesday. Of the origin of the custom for women to woo, not be wooed, during leap-year no satisfactory explanation has ever been offered. In 1288 a law was enacted in Scotland that “it is statut and ordaint that during the rein of hir maist blissit Megeste, for ilk yeare knowne as lepe yeare, ilk mayden ladye of bothe highe and lowe estait shall hae liberte to bespeke ye man she likes, albeit he refuses to taik hir to be his lawful wyfe, he shall be mulcted in ye sum ane pundis or less, as his estait may be; except and awis gif he can make it appeare that he is betrothit ane ither woman he then shall be free.” A few years later a like law was passed in France, and in the 15th century the custom was legalized in Genoa and Florence.

LEAP YEAR (more accurately called bissextile), is the term for a year that has 366 days. The astronomers during Julius Caesar's time, in 46 BCE, determined the solar year to be 365 days and 6 hours long. These extra hours accumulated, and after four years, they added a day to the fourth year. The English term for the bissextile year refers to the effect of this extra day; after February 29, dates “leap over” the day of the week they would normally fall on in regular years. For example, a birthday on June 10 that falls on a Monday will be on a Wednesday in the next leap year. There has never been a satisfactory explanation for the tradition that allows women to propose to men during leap years instead of the other way around. In 1288, a law was enacted in Scotland stating that “it is statut and ordaint that during the rein of hir maist blissit Megeste, for ilk yeare knowne as lepe yeare, ilk mayden ladye of bothe highe and lowe estait shall hae liberte to bespeke ye man she likes, albeit he refuses to taik hir to be his lawful wyfe, he shall be mulcted in ye sum ane pundis or less, as his estait may be; except and awis gif he can make it appeare that he is betrothit ane ither woman he then shall be free.” A few years later, a similar law was passed in France, and by the 15th century, the custom was legalized in Genoa and Florence.

LEAR, EDWARD (1812-1888), English artist and humorist, was born in London on the 12th of May 1812. His earliest drawings were ornithological. When he was twenty years old he published a brilliantly coloured selection of the rarer Psittacidae. Its power attracted the attention of the 13th earl of Derby, who employed Lear to draw his Knowsley menagerie. He became a permanent favourite with the Stanley family; and Edward, 15th earl, was the child for whose amusement the first Book of Nonsense was composed. From birds Lear turned to landscape, his earlier efforts in which recall the manner of J. D. Harding; but he quickly acquired a more individual style. About 1837 he set up a studio at Rome, where he lived for ten years, with summer tours in Italy and Sicily, and occasional visits to England. During this period he began to publish his Illustrated Journals of a Landscape Painter: charmingly written reminiscences of wandering, which ultimately embraced Calabria, the Abruzzi, Albania, Corsica, &c. From 1848-1849 he explored Greece, Constantinople, the Ionian Islands, Lower Egypt, the wildest recesses of Albania, and the desert of Sinai. He returned to London, but the climate did not suit him. In 1854-1855 he wintered on the Nile, and migrated successively to Corfu, Malta and Rome, finally building himself a villa at San Remo. From Corfu Lear visited Mount Athos, Syria, Palestine, and Petra; and when over sixty, by the assistance of Lord Northbrock, then Govenor-General, he saw the cities and scenery of greatest interest within a large area of India. From first to last he was, in whatever circumstances of difficulty or ill-health, an indomitable traveller. Before visiting new lands he studied their geography and literature, and then went straight for the mark; and wherever he went he drew most indefatigably and most accurately. His sketches are not only the basis of more finished works, but an exhaustive record in themselves. Some defect of technique or eyesight occasionally left his larger oil painting, though nobly conceived, crude or deficient in harmony; but his smaller pictures and more elaborate sketches abound in beauty, delicacy, and truth. Lear modestly called himself a topographical artist; but he included in the term the perfect rendering of all characteristic graces of form, colour, and atmosphere. The last task he set himself was to prepare for popular circulation a set of some 200 drawings, illustrating from his travels the scenic touches of Tennyson’s poetry; but he did not live to complete the scheme, dying at San Remo on the 30th of January 1888. Until sobered by age, his conversation was brimful of humorous fun. The paradoxical originality and ostentatiously uneducated draughtsmanship of his numerous nonsense books won him a more universal fame than his serious work. He had a true artist’s sympathy with art under all forms, and might have become a skilled musician had he not been a painter. Swainson, the naturalist, praised young Lear’s great red and yellow macaw as “equalling any figure ever painted by Audubon in grace of design, perspective, and anatomical accuracy.” Murchison, examining his sketches, complimented them as rigorously embodying geological truth. Tennyson’s lines “To E.L. on his Travels in Greece,” mark the poet’s genuine admiration of a cognate spirit in classical art. Ruskin placed the Book of Nonsense first in the list of a hundred delectable volumes of contemporary literature, a judgment endorsed by English-speaking children all over the world.

LEAR, EDWARD (1812-1888), English artist and humorist, was born in London on May 12, 1812. His earliest drawings focused on birds. At the age of twenty, he published a vividly colored selection of rarer parrots. Its success caught the attention of the 13th Earl of Derby, who hired Lear to draw for his Knowsley menagerie. He quickly became a favorite of the Stanley family, and Edward, the 15th Earl, was the child for whom the first Book of Nonsense was created. After starting with birds, Lear moved on to landscape painting, initially reflecting the style of J. D. Harding, but soon developed a more unique style. Around 1837, he set up a studio in Rome, where he lived for ten years, taking summer trips to Italy and Sicily, along with occasional visits to England. During this time, he began publishing his Illustrated Journals of a Landscape Painter: beautifully written reflections of his travels that eventually included Calabria, the Abruzzi, Albania, Corsica, and more. From 1848 to 1849, he explored Greece, Constantinople, the Ionian Islands, Lower Egypt, the deepest parts of Albania, and the Sinai desert. He returned to London, but the climate didn’t suit him. In 1854-1855, he spent the winter on the Nile, then moved on to Corfu, Malta, and Rome, ultimately building a villa in San Remo. From Corfu, Lear visited Mount Athos, Syria, Palestine, and Petra; and when he was over sixty, with the help of Lord Northbrock, then Governor-General, he explored the cities and landscapes of great interest across a large part of India. Throughout his life, regardless of hardships or health issues, he was an unstoppable traveler. Before visiting new places, he studied their geography and literature, then went straight to the main sights; and wherever he traveled, he drew tirelessly and accurately. His sketches not only served as the foundation for more polished works, but also documented his experiences exhaustively. Some limitations in technique or eyesight occasionally left his larger oil paintings, despite grand ideas, feeling crude or lacking harmony; however, his smaller pieces and more detailed sketches were filled with beauty, delicacy, and truth. Lear modestly referred to himself as a topographical artist; but this included capturing all the unique qualities of form, color, and atmosphere. His final project was to create a collection of around 200 drawings illustrating the scenic elements of Tennyson’s poetry for popular distribution; unfortunately, he didn’t live to finish it, passing away in San Remo on January 30, 1888. Until age mellowed him, his conversations were rich with humor. The unconventional originality and deliberately unrefined style of his many nonsense books earned him broader fame than his serious works. He had a true artist’s appreciation for all forms of art and might have become an accomplished musician had he not pursued painting. The naturalist Swainson praised Lear’s brilliant red and yellow macaw as “rivaling any figure painted by Audubon in design, perspective, and anatomical accuracy.” Murchison, reviewing his sketches, complimented them for accurately representing geological truth. Tennyson’s lines “To E.L. on his Travels in Greece” express the poet’s sincere admiration for a kindred spirit in classical art. Ruskin placed the Book of Nonsense at the top of his list of a hundred delightful contemporary literature volumes, a judgment supported by English-speaking children worldwide.

See Letters of Edward Lear to Chichester Fortescue, Lord Carlingford, and Frances, Countess Waldegrave (1907), edited by Lady Strachey, with an introduction by Henry Strachey.

See Letters of Edward Lear to Chichester Fortescue, Lord Carlingford, and Frances, Countess Waldegrave (1907), edited by Lady Strachey, with an introduction by Henry Strachey.

(F. L.*)

LEASE (derived through the Fr. from the Lat. laxare, to loosen), a certain form of tenure, or the contract embodying it, of land, houses, &c.; see Landlord and Tenant.

LEASE (originating from the French from the Latin laxare, meaning to loosen), a specific type of tenancy or the contract that represents it, for land, buildings, etc.; see Landlord and Tenant.

LEATHER (a word which appears in all Teutonic languages; cf. Ger. Leder, Dutch leer or leder, Swed. läder, and in such Celtic forms as Welsh llader), an imputrescible substance prepared from the hides or skins of living creatures, both cold and warm blooded, by chemical and mechanical treatment. Skins in the raw and natural moist state are readily putrescible, and are easily disintegrated by bacterial or chemical action, and if dried in this condition become harsh, horny and intractable. The art of the leather manufacturer is principally directed to overcoming the tendency to putrefaction, securing suppleness in the material, rendering it impervious to and unalterable by water, and increasing the strength of the skin and its power to resist wear and tear.

LEATHER (a term used in all Teutonic languages; cf. Ger. Leder, Dutch leer or leder, Swed. läder, and in various Celtic forms like Welsh llader), is a durable material made from the hides or skins of living animals, both cold-blooded and warm-blooded, through chemical and mechanical processes. Raw and naturally moist skins are prone to rotting and can easily break down due to bacterial or chemical action. If dried in this state, they become stiff, rough, and difficult to work with. The craft of leather-making mainly focuses on preventing decay, ensuring the material remains flexible, making it waterproof and stable, and enhancing the strength of the skin to withstand wear and tear.

Leather is made by three processes or with three classes of substances. Thus we have (1) tanned leather, in which the hides and skins are combined with tannin or tannic acid; (2) tawed leather, in which the skins are prepared with mineral salts; (3) chamoised (shamoyed) leather, in which the skins are rendered imputrescible by treatment with oils and fats, the decomposition products of which are the actual tanning agents.

Leather is made through three processes or with three types of substances. We have (1) tanned leather, where hides and skins are treated with tannin or tannic acid; (2) tawed leather, where the skins are processed with mineral salts; and (3) chamoised (shamoyed) leather, where the skins are made resistant to decay by using oils and fats, which actually serve as the tanning agents.

Sources and Qualities of Hides and Skins.—The hides used in heavy leather manufacture may be divided into three classes: (1) ox and heifer, (2) cow, (3) bull. Oxen and heifer hides produce the best results, forming a Heavy leathers. tough, tight, solid leather. Cow hides are thin, the hide itself 331 being fibrous, but still compact, and by reason of its spread or area is used chiefly for dressing purposes in the bag and portmanteau manufacture and work of a similar description. Bull hides are fibrous; they are largely used for heel lifts, and for cheap belting, the thicker hides being used in the iron and steel industry.

Sources and Qualities of Hides and Skins.—The hides used in heavy leather production can be classified into three categories: (1) ox and heifer, (2) cow, (3) bull. Ox and heifer hides yield the best outcomes, creating tough, tight, solid leather. Cow hides are thinner, with a fibrous yet compact structure, and due to their size, they are primarily used for making bags and similar products. Bull hides are fibrous as well; they are commonly used for heel lifts and inexpensive belting, with the thicker hides utilized in the iron and steel industries.

A second classification now presents itself, viz. the British home supply, continental (Europe), British colonial, South American, East Indian, Chinese, &c.

A second classification now appears, namely the British home supply, continental (Europe), British colonial, South American, East Indian, Chinese, etc.

In the British home supply there are three chief breeds: (1) Shorthorns (Scotch breed), (2) Herefords (Midland breed), (3) Lowland, or Dutch class. From a tanner’s standpoint, the shorthorns are the best hides procurable. The cattle are exposed to a variable climate in the mountainous districts of Scotland, and nature, adapting herself to circumstances, provides them with a thicker and more compact hide; they are well grown, have short necks and small heads. The Hereford class are probably the best English hide; they likewise have small heads and horns, and produce good solid sole leather. The Lowland hides come chiefly from Suffolk, Kent and Surrey; the animals have long legs, long necks and big heads. The hides are usually thin and spready. The hides of the animals killed for the Christmas season are poor. The animals being stall-fed for the beef, the hides become distended, thin and surcharged with fat, which renders them unsuitable for first-class work.

In the British home supply, there are three main breeds: (1) Shorthorns (Scotch breed), (2) Herefords (Midland breed), (3) Lowland, or Dutch class. From a tanner’s perspective, the shorthorns provide the best hides available. These cattle thrive in the changing climate of Scotland's mountainous regions, and nature adjusts by giving them thicker and denser hides; they are well-developed, with short necks and small heads. The Hereford breed likely offers the best English hide; they also have small heads and horns and produce good quality solid sole leather. The Lowland hides primarily come from Suffolk, Kent, and Surrey; the animals have long legs, long necks, and large heads. Their hides are usually thin and spread out. The hides of animals slaughtered for the Christmas season are of poor quality. Since these animals are stall-fed for beef, their hides become stretched, thin, and filled with fat, making them unsuitable for top-notch work.

The continental supply may be divided into two classes: (1) Hides from hilly regions, (2) hides from lowlands. All animals subject to strong winds and a wide range of temperatures have a very strong hide, and for this reason those bred in hilly and mountainous districts are best. The hides coming under heading No. 1 are of this class, and include those from the Swiss and Italian Alps, Bavarian Highlands and Pyrenees, also Florence, Oporto and Lisbon hides. They are magnificent hides, thick, tightly-built, and of smooth grain. The butt is long and the legs short. A serious defect in some of these hides is a thick place on the neck caused by the yoke; this part of the hide is absolute waste. Another defect, specially noticeable in Lisbon and Oporto hides, is goad marks on the rump, barbed wire scratches and warbles, caused by the gadfly. Those hides coming under heading No. 2 are Dutch, Rhine valley, Danish, Swedish, Norwegian, Hungarian, &c. The first three hides are very similar; they are spready, poorly grown, and are best used for bag and portmanteau work. Hungarian oxen are immense animals, and supply a very heavy bend. Swedish and Norwegian hides are evenly grown and of good texture; they are well flayed, and used a great deal for manufacturing picker bands, which require an even leather.

The continental supply can be categorized into two types: (1) Hides from hilly regions, and (2) hides from lowlands. Animals that experience strong winds and extreme temperature changes have very tough hides, which is why those raised in hilly and mountainous areas are preferred. The hides in category No. 1 come from this type and include those from the Swiss and Italian Alps, Bavarian Highlands, and Pyrenees, as well as hides from Florence, Oporto, and Lisbon. They are excellent hides—thick, well-structured, and with a smooth grain. The rear is long, and the legs are short. A major flaw in some of these hides is a thickened area on the neck caused by the yoke; this part of the hide is completely unusable. Another noticeable defect, particularly in hides from Lisbon and Oporto, includes goad marks on the rump, scratches from barbed wire, and warbles caused by the gadfly. Hides in category No. 2 come from Dutch, Rhine Valley, Danish, Swedish, Norwegian, Hungarian, etc. The first three hides are quite similar; they are thin, poorly developed, and best suited for making bags and suitcases. Hungarian oxen are massive animals and provide a very thick bend. Swedish and Norwegian hides are evenly developed and of good quality; they are well processed and widely used for making picker bands, which need consistent leather.

New Zealand, Australian and Queensland hides resemble good English. A small quantity of Canadian steers are imported; these are generally branded.

New Zealand, Australian, and Queensland hides look like quality English ones. A little number of Canadian steers are brought in; these are usually branded.

Chinese hides are exported dry, and they have generally suffered more or less from peptonization in the storing and drying; this cannot be detected until they are in the pits, when they fall to pieces.

Chinese hides are exported dry, and they have typically experienced varying degrees of peptonization during storage and drying; this damage isn't noticeable until they're in the pits, at which point they break apart.

Anglos are imported as live-stock, and are killed within forty-eight hours. They come to Hull, Birkenhead, Avonmouth and Deptford from various American ports, and usually give a flatter result than English, the general quality depending largely on whether the ship has had a good voyage or not.

Anglos are brought in as livestock and are slaughtered within forty-eight hours. They arrive at Hull, Birkenhead, Avonmouth, and Deptford from various American ports, and typically yield a lower quality than English ones, with the overall quality mostly depending on whether the ship had a good voyage.

Among South American hides, Liebig’s slaughter supply the best; they are thoroughly clean and carefully trimmed and flayed. They come to London, Antwerp and Havre, and except for being branded are of first-class quality. Second to the Liebig slaughter come the Uruguay hides.

Among South American hides, Liebig’s slaughter provides the best; they are completely clean and carefully trimmed and tanned. They are shipped to London, Antwerp, and Havre, and aside from being branded, they are of top quality. Following the Liebig slaughter, the next best are the Uruguay hides.

East Indian hides are known as kips, and are supposed to be, and should be, the hides of yearling cattle. They are now dressed to a large extent in imitation of box calf, being much cheaper. They come from a small breed of ox, and have an extremely tight grain; the leather is not so soft as calf.

East Indian hides are called kips and are supposed to be, and should be, the hides of yearling cattle. They are now largely processed to imitate box calf leather, which is much cheaper. They come from a small breed of oxen and have a very tight grain; the leather isn’t as soft as calf leather.

Calf-skins are largely supplied by the continent. They are soft and pliant, and have a characteristically fine grain, are tight in texture and quite apart from any other kind of skin.

Calf-skins mostly come from the continent. They're soft and flexible, featuring a distinctly fine grain, a tight texture, and are different from any other type of skin.

The most valuable part of a sheepskin is the wool, and the value of the pelt is inversely as the value of the wool. Pure Leicester and Norfolk wools are very valuable, and next is the North and South Downs, but the skins, i.e. the Light leathers. pelts, of these animals are extremely poor. Devon and Cheviot cross-bred sheep supply a fair pelt, and sometimes these sheep are so many times crossed that it is quite impossible to tell what the skin is. Welsh skins also supply a good tough pelt, though small. Indian and Persian sheepskins are very goaty, the herds being allowed to roam about together so much. The sheepskin is the most porous and open-textured skin in existence, as also the most greasy one; it is flabby and soft, with a tight, compact grain, but an extremely loose flesh. Stillborn lambs and lambs not over a month old are worth much more than when they have lived for three months; they are used for the manufacture of best kid gloves, and must be milk skins. Once the lambs have taken to grass the skins supply a harsher leather.

The most valuable part of a sheepskin is the wool, and the value of the pelt decreases as the value of the wool increases. Pure Leicester and Norfolk wools are highly prized, followed by North and South Downs, but the skins, i.e. the Lightweight leather. pelts of these sheep are of very low quality. Devon and Cheviot crossbred sheep provide a decent pelt, and sometimes these sheep are crossed so many times that it's nearly impossible to identify the skin. Welsh skins also produce a good, tough pelt, although they are small. Indian and Persian sheepskins tend to be very coarse, as the herds are often allowed to graze together. The sheepskin is the most porous and open-textured skin available, as well as the greasiest; it's soft and flabby, with a tight, compact grain but very loose flesh. Stillborn lambs and lambs younger than a month are worth significantly more than those that are three months old; they are used to make high-quality kid gloves and must be milk skins. Once the lambs start eating grass, the skins yield a tougher leather.

The best goat-skins come from the Saxon and Bavarian Highlands, Swiss Alps, Pyrenees, Turkey, Bosnia, Southern Hungary and the Urals. The goats being exposed to all winds yield fine skins. A good number come from Argentina and from Abyssinia, the Cape and other parts of Africa. Of all light leathers the goat has the toughest and tightest grain; it is, therefore, especially liked for fancy work. The grain is rather too bold for glacé work, for which the sheep is largely used.

The best goat skins come from the Saxon and Bavarian Highlands, Swiss Alps, Pyrenees, Turkey, Bosnia, Southern Hungary, and the Urals. Goats that are exposed to all kinds of weather produce high-quality skins. Many also come from Argentina, Abyssinia, the Cape, and other parts of Africa. Among all light leathers, goat leather has the toughest and tightest grain, making it particularly popular for detailed work. However, the grain is a bit too pronounced for shiny work, which is mostly done with sheep leather.

The seal-skin, used largely for levant work, is the skin of the yellow-hair seal, found in the Northern seas, the Baltic, Norway and Sweden, &c. The skin has a large, bold, brilliant grain, and being a large skin is much used for upholstery and coach work, like the Cape goat. It is quite distinct from the fur seal.

The seal skin, primarily used for upholstery work, comes from the yellow-hair seal, found in the northern seas, the Baltic, Norway, Sweden, etc. The skin has a large, bold, and vibrant grain, and since it’s a sizable skin, it’s commonly used for upholstery and carriage work, similar to the Cape goat. It’s important to note that it’s quite different from the fur seal.

Porpoise hide is really the hide of the white whale; it is dressed for shooting, fishing and hunting boots. Horse hide is dressed for light split and upper work; being so much stall-fed it supplies only a thin, spready leather. The skins of other Equidae, such as the ass, zebra, quagga, &c. are also dressed to some small extent, but are not important sources.

Porpoise hide is actually the skin of the white whale; it’s processed for shooting, fishing, and hunting boots. Horse hide is processed for light splits and upper work; since it comes from stall-fed animals, it provides only a thin, flexible leather. The skins of other equines, like the donkey, zebra, quagga, etc., are also processed to a small degree, but they aren't major sources.

Structure of Skin.—Upon superficial inspection, the hides and skins of all mammalia appear to be unlike each other in general structure, yet, upon closer examination, it is found that the anatomical structure of most skins is so similar that for all practical purposes we may assume that there is no distinction (see Skin and Exo-skeleton). But from the practical point of view, as opposed to the anatomical, there are great and very important differences, such as those of texture, thickness, area, &c.; and these differences cause a great divergence in the methods of tanning used, almost necessitating a distinct tannage for nearly every class of hide or skin.

Structure of Skin.—At first glance, the hides and skins of all mammals seem very different from each other, but when you take a closer look, you'll find that the anatomical structure of most skins is so similar that, for practical purposes, we can say there’s no real distinction (see Skin and Exo-skeleton). However, from a practical standpoint, which is different from the anatomical one, there are significant and crucial differences, such as texture, thickness, area, etc.; and these differences lead to a wide variety of tanning methods being used, almost requiring a unique tanning process for nearly every type of hide or skin.

The skins of the lower animals, such as alligators, lizards, fish and snakes, differ to a large extent from those of the mammalia, chiefly in the epidermis, which is much more horny in structure and forms scales.

The skins of lower animals like alligators, lizards, fish, and snakes are quite different from those of mammals, mainly in the epidermis, which is much more tough and forms scales.

The skin is divided into two distinct layers: (1) the epidermis or epithelium, i.e. the cuticle, (2) the corium derma, or cutis, i.e. the true skin. These two layers are not only different in structure, but are also of entirely distinct origin. The epidermis again divides itself into two parts, viz. the “horny layer” or surface skin, and the rete Malpighi, named after the Italian anatomist who first drew attention to its existence. The rete Malpighi is composed of living, soft, nucleated cells, which multiply by division, and, as they increase, are gradually pushed to the surface of the skin, becoming flatter and drier as they near it, until they reach the surface as dried scales. The epidermis is thus of cellular structure, and more or less horny or waterproof. It must consequently be removed together with the hair, wool or bristles before tannage begins, but as it is very thin compared with the corium, this matters little.

The skin has two main layers: (1) the epidermis or epithelium, which is the outer layer, and (2) the corium dermis, or cutis, which is the true skin. These layers have different structures and completely different origins. The epidermis is further divided into two parts: the "horny layer" or surface skin, and the rete Malpighi, named after the Italian anatomist who first highlighted it. The rete Malpighi consists of living, soft, nucleated cells that multiply through division. As they grow, they are pushed toward the skin's surface, becoming flatter and drier until they reach the surface as dried scales. The epidermis has a cellular structure and is somewhat horny or waterproof. Therefore, it must be removed along with the hair, wool, or bristles before tanning begins, but this isn't a significant issue since it's much thinner than the corium.

The hair itself does not enter the corium, but is embedded in a sheath of epidermic structure, which is part of and continuous with the epidermis. It is of cellular structure, and the fibrous part is composed of long needle-shaped cells which contain the pigment with which the hair is coloured. Upon removal of the hair some of these cells remain behind and colour the skin, and this colour does not disappear until these cells are removed by scudding. Each hair is supplied with at least two fat or sebaceous glands, which discharge into the orifice of the hair sheath; these glands impart to the hair that natural glossy appearance which is characteristic of good health. The hair bulb (b, fig. 1) consists of living nucleated cells, which multiply rapidly, and, like the rete Malpighi, cause an upward pressure, getting harder at the same time, thereby lengthening the hair.

The hair itself doesn't penetrate the corium but is housed in a sheath made of epidermal tissue, which is a part of and continuous with the epidermis. It has a cellular structure, and the fibrous part is made up of long, needle-shaped cells that contain the pigment giving the hair its color. When the hair is removed, some of these cells stay behind and color the skin, and this color doesn't fade until those cells are removed by exfoliation. Each hair is connected to at least two sebaceous glands that open into the hair sheath; these glands give the hair its natural shine, which is a sign of good health. The hair bulb (b, fig. 1) consists of living nucleated cells that reproduce quickly, and, similar to the rete Malpighi, create upward pressure, becoming denser over time, which helps lengthen the hair.

332

332

The hair papilla (a, fig. 1) consists of a globule of the corium or true skin embedded in the hair bulb, which by means of blood-vessels feeds and nourishes the hair. Connected with the lower part of each hair is an oblique muscle known as the arrector or erector pili, seen at k, fig. 1; this is an involuntary muscle, and is contracted by sudden cold, heat or shock, with an accompanying tightening of the skin, producing the phenomenon commonly known as “goose flesh.” This is the outcome of the contracted muscle pulling on the base of the hair, thereby giving it a tendency to approach the vertical, and producing the simultaneous effect of making the “hair stand on end.”

The hair papilla (a, fig. 1) is a small mass of tissue from the true skin that sits in the hair bulb, and it supplies blood to nourish the hair. At the bottom of each hair is an angled muscle called the arrector or erector pili, shown at k, fig. 1; this is an involuntary muscle that tightens when exposed to sudden cold, heat, or shock, causing the skin to tighten and creating what we commonly refer to as “goosebumps.” This happens because the contracted muscle pulls on the base of the hair, making it stand more upright and resulting in the effect of the hair standing on end.

The sudoriferous or sweat glands (R, fig. 1) consist of long spiral-like capillaries, formed from the fibres of the connective tissue of the corium. These glands discharge sometimes directly through the epidermis, but more often into the orifice of the hair-sheath.

The sweat glands (R, fig. 1) are made up of long spiral-shaped capillaries that come from the connective tissue fibers in the dermis. These glands sometimes release sweat directly through the epidermis, but more often they discharge it into the opening of the hair follicle.

The epidermis is separated from the corium by a very important and very fine membrane, termed the “hyaline” or “glassy layer,” which constitutes the actual grain surface of a hide or skin. This layer is chemically different from the corium, as if it is torn or scratched during the process of tanning the colour of the underlying parts is much lighter than that of the grain surface.

The epidermis is separated from the dermis by a very important and very thin membrane, called the “hyaline” or “glassy layer,” which makes up the actual grain surface of a hide or skin. This layer is chemically different from the dermis; if it is torn or scratched during tanning, the color of the underlying areas is much lighter than that of the grain surface.

Fig. 1.

a, Hair papilla.

a, Hair follicle.

b, Hair bulb.

Hair follicle.

c, Hair sheath showing epidermic structure.

c, Hair sheath displaying skin layer structure.

d, Dermic coat of hair sheath.

d, Dermal layer of hair sheath.

e, Outer root sheath.

e, outer root sheath.

f, Inner root sheath.

Inner root sheath.

g, Hair cuticle.

Hair cuticle.

h, Hair.

h, Hair.

J, Sebaceous glands.

J, Sebaceous glands.

k, Erector pili.

Erector pili.

m, Sweat ducts.

m, Sweat glands.

n and p, Epidermis.

n and p, Skin.

n, Rete Malpighi.

n, Malpighi Network.

p, Horny layer.

Horny layer.

R, Sweat or sudoriferous gland.

R, Sweat gland.

S, Opening at sweat duct.

S, Opening at sweat gland.

The corium, unlike the epidermis, is of fibrous, not cellular structure; moreover, the fibres do not multiply among themselves, but are gradually developed as needed from the interfibrillar substance, a semi-soluble gelatinous modification of the true fibre. This interfibrillar substance consequently has no structure, and is prepared at any time on coming into contact with tannin to form amorphous leather, which fills what would in the absence of this substance be interfibrillar spaces. The more of this matter there is present the more completely will the spaces be filled, and the more waterproof will be the leather. An old bull, as is well known, supplies a very poor, soft and spongy leather, simply because the hide lacks interfibrillar substance, which has been sapped up by the body. The fibres are, therefore, separated by interfibrillar spaces, which on contact with water absorb it with avidity by capillary attraction. But a heifer hide or young calf supplies the most tight and waterproof leather known, because the animals are young, and having plenty of nourishment do not require to draw upon and sap the interfibrillar substance with which the skin is full to overflowing.

The corium, unlike the epidermis, is made of fibers rather than cells; in addition, the fibers don’t multiply, but develop gradually as needed from the interfibrillar substance, which is a semi-soluble, gelatin-like form of the true fiber. This interfibrillar substance has no structure and can be generated at any time when it comes into contact with tannin to form amorphous leather, filling what would otherwise be empty interfibrillar spaces. The more of this substance present, the more completely the spaces are filled, resulting in leather that is more waterproof. An old bull, as is well known, produces a very poor, soft, and spongy leather because its hide lacks this interfibrillar substance, which has been depleted by the body. Therefore, the fibers are separated by interfibrillar spaces, which eagerly absorb water upon contact through capillary attraction. However, a heifer hide or young calf provides the most tight and waterproof leather available, as these young animals are well-nourished and do not need to deplete the interfibrillar substance that their skin is rich in.

The corium obtains its food from the body by means of lymph ducts, with which it is well supplied. It is also provided with nodules of lymph to nourish the hair, and nodules of grease, which increase in number as they near the flesh side, until the net skin, panniculus adiposus, or that which separates the corium from meat proper, is quite full with them.

The corium gets its nutrients from the body through lymph ducts, which are plentiful. It also has lymph nodules to nourish the hair, and grease nodules that increase in number as they get closer to the flesh side, until the net skin, panniculus adiposus, or the layer that separates the corium from the actual meat, is completely filled with them.

The corium is coarse in the centre of the skin where the fibres, which are of the kind known as white connective tissue, and which exist in bundles bound together with yellow elastic fibres, are loosely woven, but towards the flesh side they become more compact, and as the hyaline layer is neared the bundles of fibres get finer and finer, and are much more tightly interwoven, until finally, next the grain itself, the fibres no longer exist in bundles, but as individual fibrils lying parallel with the grain. This layer is known as the pars papillaris. The bundles of fibre interweave one another in every conceivable direction. The fibrils are extremely minute, and are cemented together with a medium rather more soluble than themselves.

The corium is rough in the center of the skin where the fibers, known as white connective tissue, are loosely woven in bundles held together with yellow elastic fibers. Towards the inner side, they become denser, and as you approach the hyaline layer, the bundles of fibers get finer and more tightly interwoven, until finally, next to the grain itself, the fibers exist as individual fibrils lying parallel to the grain. This layer is referred to as the pars papillaris. The bundles of fibers weave together in every possible direction. The fibrils are very small and are held together with a substance that is somewhat more soluble than they are.

There are only two exceptions to this general structure which need be taken into account. Sheep-skin is especially loosely woven in the centre, so much so that any carelessness in the wet work or sweating process enables one to split the skin in two by tearing. This loosely-woven part is full of fatty nodules, and the skin is generally split at this part, the flesh going for chamois leather and the grain for skivers. The other notable exception is the horse hide, which has a third skin over the loins just above the kidneys, known as the crup; it is very greasy and tight in structure, and is used for making a very waterproof leather for seamen’s and fishermen’s boots. Pig-skin, perhaps, is rather peculiar, in the fact that the bristles penetrate almost right through the skin.

There are only two exceptions to this general structure that should be considered. Sheep skin is particularly loosely woven in the center, to the point where any carelessness during the wet work or sweating process can cause the skin to tear apart easily. This loosely woven area is packed with fatty nodules, and the skin is typically split here, with the flesh being used for chamois leather and the grain for skivers. The other notable exception is horse hide, which has an additional layer over the loins just above the kidneys, known as the crup; it is very greasy and tightly structured, making it suitable for creating highly waterproof leather for seamen’s and fishermen’s boots. Pig skin is somewhat unique in that the bristles almost penetrate completely through the skin.

Tanning Materials.—Tannin or tannic acid is abundantly formed in a very large number of plants, and secreted in such diverse organs and members as the bark, wood, roots, leaves, seed-pods, fruit, &c. The number of tannins which exists has not been determined, nor has the constitution of those which do exist been satisfactorily settled. As used in the tanyard tannin is present both in the free state and combined with colouring matter and accompanied by decomposition products, such as gallic acid or phlobaphenes (anhydrides of the tannins), respectively depending upon the series to which the tannin belongs. In whatever other points they differ, they all have the common property of being powerfully astringent, of forming insoluble compounds with gelatine or gelatinous tissue, of being soluble in water to a greater or lesser extent, and of forming blacks (greenish or bluish) with iron. Pyrogallol tannins give a blue-black coloration or precipitate with ferric salts, and catechol tannins a green-black; and whereas bromine water gives a precipitate with catechol tannins, it does not with pyrogallol tannins. There are two distinctive classes of tannins, viz. catechol and pyrogallol tannins. The materials belonging to the former series are generally much darker in colour than those classified with the latter, and moreover they yield reds, phlobaphenes or tannin anhydrides, which deposit on or in the leather. Pyrogallol tannins include some of the lightest coloured and best materials known, and, speaking generally, the leather produced by them is not so harsh or hard as that produced with catechol tannins. They decompose, yielding ellagic acid (known technically as “bloom”) and gallic acid; the former has waterproofing qualities, because it fills the leather, at the same time giving weight.

Tanning Materials.—Tannin or tannic acid is found in many plants and is secreted in various parts like bark, wood, roots, leaves, seed pods, and fruit. The exact number of tannins is still unknown, and their chemical structures haven’t been clearly defined. In the tannery, tannin exists in both its free form and bonded with coloring agents, along with byproducts like gallic acid or phlobaphenes (which are anhydrides of tannins), depending on the tannin type. Regardless of their differences, all tannins share the ability to be strongly astringent, to form insoluble compounds with gelatin or gelatinous materials, to dissolve in water to varying degrees, and to create black colors (greenish or bluish) with iron. Pyrogallol tannins produce a blue-black color or precipitate with ferric salts, while catechol tannins produce a green-black; and bromine water will precipitate with catechol tannins but not with pyrogallol tannins. There are two main classes of tannins: catechol and pyrogallol tannins. The catechol tannins are usually much darker than the pyrogallol tannins and can create red hues, phlobaphenes, or tannin anhydrides that settle on or within the leather. Pyrogallol tannins tend to be some of the lightest and highest-quality materials available, and generally, the leather they produce is softer and less stiff than that made from catechol tannins. They decompose to produce ellagic acid (technically known as “bloom”) and gallic acid; the former helps make the leather waterproof by filling it, while also adding weight.

It has been stated, and perhaps with some truth, that leather cannot be successfully made with catechol tannins alone; pyrogallol tannins, however, yield an excellent leather; but the finest results are obtained by blending the two.

It has been said, and maybe it’s true, that leather can't be effectively made with just catechol tannins; however, pyrogallol tannins produce great leather. The best results come from mixing the two.

The classification of the chief tanning materials is as follows:—

The main types of tanning materials are classified as follows:—

Pyrogallols. Catechols.
Myrobalans (Terminalia Chebula). Gambier (Uncaria Gambir).
Chestnut wood (Castanea vesca). Hemlock (Abies canadensis).
Divi-divi (Caesalpinia Coriaria). Quebracho (Quebracho Colorado).
Algarobilla (Caesalpinia brevifolia). Mangrove or Cutch (Rhizophora Mangle).
Sumach (Rhus Coriaria). Mimosa or Golden Wattle (Acacia Pycnantha).
Oakwood (Quercus family). Larch (Larix Europaea).
Chestnut oak (Quercus Prinus). Canaigre (Rumer Hymenosepalum).
Galls (Quercus Infectoria). Birch (Betula alba).
Willow (Salix arenaria). Cutch Catechu (Acacia Catechu).

Subsidiary.

Subsidiary.

Oakbark (Quercus Robur).

Oak bark (Quercus robur).

Valonia (Quercus Aegilops).

Valonia (Quercus Aegilops).

Myrobalans are the fruit of an Indian tree. There are several different qualities, the order of which is as follows, the best being placed first: Bhimley, Jubbalpore, Rajpore, Fair Coast Madras and Vingorlas. They are a very light-coloured material, containing from 27 % to 38 % of tannin; they deposit much “bloom,” ferment fairly rapidly, supplying acidity, and yield a mellow leather.

Myrobalans are the fruit of an Indian tree. There are several different qualities, ranked from best to worst as follows: Bhimley, Jubbalpore, Rajpore, Fair Coast Madras, and Vingorlas. They are a very light-colored material, containing between 27% and 38% tannin; they produce a lot of “bloom,” ferment quite quickly, provide acidity, and result in a soft leather.

Chestnut comes on the market in the form of crude and decolorized liquid extracts, containing about 27 % to 31 % of tannin, and yields a good leather of a light-brown colour.

Chestnut is available in the form of crude and decolorized liquid extracts, containing about 27% to 31% tannin, and produces a nice light-brown leather.

Oakwood reaches the market in the same form; it is a very similar material, but only contains 24 % to 27 % of tannin, and yields a slightly heavier and darker leather.

Oakwood comes to the market in the same way; it's a very similar material, but only has 24% to 27% tannin, resulting in a slightly heavier and darker leather.

Divi-divi is the dried seed pods of an Indian tree containing 40 % to 45 % of tannin, and yielding a white leather; it might be valuable but for the tendency to dangerous fermentation and development of a dark-red colouring matter.

Divi-divi is the dried seed pods from an Indian tree that contain 40% to 45% tannin and produce a white leather. It could be valuable if not for its tendency to ferment dangerously and develop a dark red coloring.

Algarobilla consists of the seeds of an Indian tree, containing about 45 % of tannin, and in general properties is similar to divi-divi, but does not discolour so much upon fermentation.

Algarobilla is made up of the seeds from an Indian tree, which contain around 45% tannin. In general, its properties are similar to divi-divi, but it doesn't discolor as much during fermentation.

Sumach is perhaps the best and most useful material known. It is the ground leaves of a Sicilian plant, containing about 28 % of tannin, and yielding a nearly white and very beautiful leather. It is used alone for tanning the best moroccos and finer leather, and being so valuable is much adulterated, the chief adulterant being Pistacia lentiscus (Stinko or Lentisco), an inferior and light-coloured catechol tannin. Other but inferior sumachs are also used. There is Venetian sumach (Rhus cotinus) and Spanish sumach (Colpoon compressa); these are used to some extent in the countries bordering on the Mediterranean. R. Glabra and R. Copallina are also used in considerable quantities in America, where they are cultivated.

Sumac is probably the best and most useful material known. It comes from the ground leaves of a Sicilian plant, containing about 28% tannin, and produces a nearly white and very beautiful leather. It's used on its own for tanning the finest morocco and other high-quality leather. Because of its value, it’s commonly adulterated, with the main adulterant being Pistacia lentiscus (Stinko or Lentisco), which is an inferior and lighter-colored catechol tannin. Other lower-quality sumacs are also used, including Venetian sumac (Rhus cotinus) and Spanish sumac (Colpoon compressa), which are utilized in varying degrees in the Mediterranean countries. R. Glabra and R. Copallina are also significantly used in America, where they are cultivated.

Galls are abnormal growths found upon oaks, and caused by the gall wasp laying eggs in the plant. They are best harvested just before the insect escapes. They contain from 50 % to 60 % of tannin, and are generally used for the commercial supply of tannic acid, and not for tanning purposes.

Galls are abnormal growths found on oaks, caused by the gall wasp laying eggs in the plant. They are best collected just before the insect breaks free. They contain between 50% and 60% tannin and are mainly used for the commercial supply of tannic acid, rather than for tanning purposes.

Gambier, terra japonica or catechu, is the product of a shrub cultivated in Singapore and the Malay Archipelago. It is made by boiling the shrub and allowing the extract to solidify. It is a 333 peculiar material, and may be completely washed out of a leather tanned with it. It mellows exceedingly, and keeps the leather fibre open; it may be said that it only goes in the leather to prepare and make easy the way for other tannins. Block gambier contains from 35 % to 40 % and cube gambier from 50 % to 65 % of tannin.

Gambier, also known as terra japonica or catechu, is derived from a shrub grown in Singapore and the Malay Archipelago. It's produced by boiling the shrub and letting the extract harden. It is a 333 unique material and can be completely washed out of leather that has been tanned with it. It softens the leather significantly and keeps the fiber open; essentially, it only penetrates the leather to prepare and facilitate the absorption of other tannins. Block gambier contains between 35% and 40% tannin, while cube gambier has between 50% and 65% tannin.

Hemlock generally reaches the market as extract, prepared from the bark of the American tree. It contains about 22 % of tannin, has a pine-like odour, but yields a rather dark-coloured red leather.

Hemlock typically comes to market as an extract made from the bark of the American tree. It contains around 22% tannin, has a piney smell, but produces a fairly dark red leather.

Quebracho is imported mainly as solid extract, containing 63 % to 70 % of tannin; it is a harsh, light-red tannage, but darkens rapidly on exposure to light. It is used for freshening up very mellow liquors, but is rather wasteful, as it deposits an enormous amount of its tannin as phlobaphenes.

Quebracho is primarily imported as a solid extract, containing 63% to 70% tannin. It has a strong, light-red color that quickly darkens when exposed to light. It's used to enhance very smooth liquors, but it's somewhat inefficient since it leaves behind a large amount of its tannin as phlobaphenes.

Mangrove or cutch is a solid extract prepared from the mangrove tree found in the swamps of Borneo and the Straits Settlements; it contains upwards of 60 % of a red tannin.

Mangrove or cutch is a solid extract made from the mangrove tree found in the swamps of Borneo and the Straits Settlements; it contains more than 60% of a red tannin.

Mimosa is the bark of the Australian golden wattle (Acacia pycnantha), and contains from 36 % to 50 % of tannin. It is a rather harsh tannage, yielding a flesh-coloured leather, and is useful for sharpening liquors. This bark is now successfully cultivated in Natal. The tannin content of this Natal bark is somewhat inferior, but the colour is superior to the Australian product.

Mimosa is the bark of the Australian golden wattle (Acacia pycnantha) and contains between 36% and 50% tannin. It produces a fairly rough tannage, resulting in light-colored leather, and is effective for enhancing liquors. This bark is now successfully grown in Natal. The tannin content of this Natal bark is somewhat lower, but the color is better than that of the Australian version.

Larch bark contains 9 % to 10 % of light-coloured tannin, and is used especially for tanning Scotch basils.

Larch bark has 9% to 10% light-colored tannin and is particularly used for tanning Scotch basils.

Canaigre is the air-dried tuberous roots of a Mexican plant, containing 25 % to 30 % of tannin and about 8 % of starch. It yields an orange-coloured leather of considerable weight and firmness. Its cultivation did not pay well enough, so that it is little used.

Canaigre is the air-dried tuberous roots of a Mexican plant, containing 25% to 30% tannin and about 8% starch. It produces a heavy and firm orange-colored leather. Its cultivation hasn’t been profitable enough, so it’s not widely used.

Cutch, catechu or “dark catechu,” is obtained from the wood of Indian acacias, and is not to be confounded with mangrove cutch. It contains 60 % of tanning matter and a large proportion of catechin similar to that contained in gambier, but much redder. It is used for dyeing browns and blacks with chrome and iron mordants.

Cutch, catechu, or “dark catechu,” comes from the wood of Indian acacias and shouldn’t be mistaken for mangrove cutch. It contains 60% tanning agents and a significant amount of catechin, similar to what’s in gambier, but much redder. It’s used to dye browns and blacks with chrome and iron mordants.

The willow and the white birch barks contain, respectively, 12 % to 14 % and 2 % to 5 % of tannin. In combination they are used to produce the famous Russia leather, whose insect-resisting odour is due to the birch bark. In America this leather is imitated with the American black birch bark (Betula lenta), and also with the oil obtained from its dry distillation.

The barks of willow and white birch contain about 12% to 14% and 2% to 5% tannin, respectively. When combined, they are used to make the well-known Russian leather, which has a distinctive insect-repelling smell thanks to the birch bark. In America, this leather is replicated using the bark of the American black birch (Betula lenta) and the oil produced from its dry distillation.

In the list of materials two have been placed in a subsidiary class because they are a mixture of catechol and pyrogallol tannin. Oak bark produces the best leather known, proving that a blend of the two classes of tannins gives the best results. It is the bark of the coppice oak, and contains 12 % to 14 % of a reddish-yellow tannage. Valonia is the acorn cup of the Turkish and Greek oak. The Smyrna or Turkish valonia is best, and contains 32 % to 36 % of an almost white tannin. Greek valonia is greyer in colour, and contains 26 % to 30 % of tannin. It yields a tough, firm leather of great weight, due to the rapid deposition of a large amount of bloom.

In the list of materials, two have been placed in a subsidiary class because they are a mix of catechol and pyrogallol tannin. Oak bark produces the best leather available, showing that a combination of the two types of tannins yields the best results. It's the bark of the coppice oak and contains 12% to 14% of a reddish-yellow tannin. Valonia is the acorn cup of the Turkish and Greek oak. The Smyrna or Turkish valonia is the best and has 32% to 36% of an almost white tannin. Greek valonia is greyer in color and contains 26% to 30% of tannin. It produces tough, firm leather that is very heavy, due to the quick deposition of a large amount of bloom.

Grinding and Leaching1 Tanning Materials.—At first sight it would not seem possible that science could direct such a clumsy process as the grinding of tanning materials, and yet even here, the “scientific smashing” of tanning materials may mean the difference between profit and loss to the tanner. In most materials the tannin exists imprisoned in cells, and is also to some extent free, but with this latter condition the science of grinding has nothing to do. If tanning materials are simply broken by a series of clean cuts, only those cells directly on the surfaces of the cuts will be ready to yield their tannin; therefore, if materials are ground by cutting, a proportion of the total tannin is thrown away. Hence it is necessary to bruise, break and otherwise sever the walls of all the cells containing the tannin; so that the machine wanted is one which crushes, twists and cuts the material at the same time, turning it out of uniform size and with little dust.

Grinding and Leaching1 Tanning Materials.—At first glance, it might seem unlikely that science could improve such a rough process as grinding tanning materials. However, even in this case, the “scientific smashing” of tanning materials can be the difference between making a profit or incurring a loss for the tanner. In most materials, tannin is trapped in cells and is also somewhat free, but the science of grinding doesn't apply to this latter condition. If tanning materials are simply broken with a series of clean cuts, only the cells directly on the surface of those cuts will release their tannin; therefore, if materials are ground by cutting, a portion of the total tannin is wasted. Thus, it’s essential to bruise, break, and otherwise damage the walls of all the cells containing tannin, meaning the required machine should crush, twist, and cut the material simultaneously, producing inconsistent sizes with minimal dust.

The apparatus in most common use is built on the same principle as the coffee mill, which consists of a series of segmental cutters; as the bark works down into the smaller cutters of the mill it is twisted and cut in every direction. This is a very good form of mill, but it requires a considerable amount of power and works slowly. The teeth require constant renewal, and should, therefore, be replaceable in rows, not, as in some forms, cast on the bell. The disintegrator is another form of mill, which produces its effect by violent concussion, obtained by the revolution in opposite directions of from four to six large metal arms fitted with projecting spikes inside a drum, the faces of which are also fitted with protruding pieces of metal. The arms make from 2000 to 4000 revolutions per minute. The chief objection to this apparatus is that it forms much dust, which is caught in silken bags fitted to gratings in the drum. The myrobalans crusher, a very useful machine for such materials as myrobalans and valonia, consists of a pair of toothed rollers above and a pair of fluted rollers beneath. The material is dropped upon the toothed rollers first, where it is broken and crushed; then the crushing is finished and any sharp corners rounded off in the fluted rollers.

The most commonly used machine operates on the same principle as a coffee grinder, featuring a series of segmented blades. As the bark is processed, it moves down into the smaller blades of the grinder, getting twisted and cut in every direction. This type of grinder is effective, but it requires a lot of power and operates slowly. The blades need to be replaced regularly and should be designed for easy replacement in rows, rather than being cast as a single piece like in some models. Another type of grinder is the disintegrator, which achieves its effects through intense impact, created by the opposite rotation of four to six large metal arms equipped with protruding spikes inside a drum. The drum also has additional metal protrusions. These arms can spin at speeds of 2000 to 4000 revolutions per minute. The main drawback of this machine is that it generates a lot of dust, which is collected in silk bags attached to grates in the drum. The myrobalans crusher is a very useful device for processing materials like myrobalans and valonia. It features a pair of toothed rollers on top and a pair of fluted rollers below. The material first falls onto the toothed rollers, where it is broken down and crushed; then the crushing process is completed and any sharp edges are smoothed out in the fluted rollers.

It must not be thought that now the material is ground it is necessarily ready for leaching. This may or may not be so, depending upon whether the tanner is making light or heavy leathers. If light leathers are being considered, it is ready for immediate leaching, i.e. to be infused with water in preparation of a liquor. If heavy leathers are in process of manufacture, he would be a very wasteful tanner who would extract his material raw. It must be borne in mind that when an infusion is made with fresh tanning material, the liquor begins to deposit decomposition products after standing a day or two, and the object of the heavy-leather tanner is to get this material deposited in the leather, to fill the pores, produce weight and make a firm, tough product. With this end in view he dusts his hides with this fresh material in the layers, i.e. he spreads a layer between each hide as it is laid down, so that the strong liquors penetrate and deposit in the hides. When most of this power to deposit has been usefully utilized in the layers, then the material (which is now, perhaps, half spent) is leached. The light-leather maker does not want a hard, firm leather, but a soft and pliable product; hence he leaches his material fresh, and does not trouble as to whether the tannin deposits in the pits or not.

It shouldn't be assumed that just because the material is ground, it's automatically ready for leaching. Whether it is or not depends on whether the tanner is working with light or heavy leathers. If he’s making light leathers, it's ready for immediate leaching, meaning it can be soaked in water to create a tanning solution. However, if he’s producing heavy leathers, it would be very wasteful for him to use the raw material. It's important to remember that when you make an infusion with fresh tanning material, the solution starts to produce decomposition products after a day or two. The goal of the heavy-leather tanner is to get these materials absorbed into the leather to fill the pores, add weight, and create a strong, durable product. To achieve this, he sprinkles fresh material between the layers of hides as he stacks them, allowing the strong solutions to soak in and settle into the hides. Once most of the useful depositing power has been utilized in these layers, the material (which is now maybe half used) is leached. On the other hand, the light-leather maker isn’t looking for a hard, firm leather; he wants a soft and flexible product, so he leaches his material fresh and doesn’t worry about whether the tannin settles in the pits.

Whether fresh or partially spent material is leached, the process is carried out in the same way. There are several methods in vogue; the best method only will be described, viz. the “press leach” system.

Whether using fresh or partially used material, the process is carried out the same way. There are several methods currently in use; only the best method will be described, namely the “press leach” system.

The leaching is carried out in a series of six square pits, each holding about 3 to 4 tons of material. The method depends upon the fact that when a weak liquor is forced over a stronger one they do not mix, by reason of the higher specific gravity of the stronger one; the weaker liquor, therefore, by its weight forces the stronger liquor downwards, and as the pit in which it is contained is fitted with a false bottom and side duct running over into the next pit, the stronger liquor is forced upwards through this duct on to the next stronger pit. There the process is repeated, until finally the weak liquor or water, as the case may be, is run off the last vat as a very strong infusion. As a concrete example let us take the six pits shown in the figure.

The leaching process takes place in a series of six square pits, each containing about 3 to 4 tons of material. This method relies on the fact that when a weaker liquid is poured over a stronger one, they don't mix due to the higher specific gravity of the stronger liquid. Consequently, the weight of the weaker liquid pushes the stronger liquid downwards. The pit has a false bottom and a side duct that leads into the next pit, allowing the stronger liquid to move upwards through this duct into the next stronger pit. The process continues in this manner, until the weaker liquid, or water, is drained from the last vat as a very strong infusion. As a concrete example, let’s take the six pits illustrated in the figure.

No. 6 is the last vat, and the liquor, which is very strong, is about to be run off. No. 1 is spent material, over which all six liquors have passed, the present liquor having been pumped on as fresh water. The liquor from No. 6 is run off into the pump well, and liquor No. 1 is pumped over No. 2, thus forcing all liquors one forward and leaving pit No. 1 empty; this pit is now cast and filled with clean fishings and perhaps a little new material, clean water is then pumped on No. 2, which is now the weakest pit, and all liquors are thus forced forward one pit more, making No. 1 the strongest pit. After infusing for some time this is run off to the pump well, and the process repeated. It may be noted that the hotter the water is pumped on the weakest pit, the better will the material be spent, and the nearer the water is to boiling-point the better; in fact, a well-managed tanyard should have the spent tan down to between 1% and 2% of tannin, although this material is frequently thrown away containing up to 10% and sometimes even more. There is a great saving of time and labour in this method, since the liquors are self-adjusting.

No. 6 is the last vat, and the liquor, which is very strong, is about to be drained. No. 1 has used material that all six liquors have passed through, with the current liquor being pumped on like fresh water. The liquor from No. 6 is drained into the pump well, and liquor No. 1 is pumped over to No. 2, pushing all liquors forward one step and leaving pit No. 1 empty. This pit is now cast and filled with clean fishing materials and maybe a little new material; clean water is then pumped on No. 2, which is now the weakest pit, further pushing all liquors forward one more pit, making No. 1 the strongest pit. After soaking for a while, this is drained to the pump well, and the process is repeated. It’s worth mentioning that the hotter the water is pumped onto the weakest pit, the better the material will be processed, and the closer the water is to boiling point, the better. In fact, a well-run tanyard should keep the spent tan down to between 1% and 2% tannin, although this material is often discarded containing up to 10% and sometimes even more. This method saves a lot of time and labor since the liquors adjust themselves.

Testing Tan Liquors.—The methods by which the tanning value of any substance may be determined are many, but few are at once capable of simple application and minute accuracy. An old method of ascertaining the strength of a tan liquor is by means of a hydrometer standardized against water, and called a barkometer. It consists of a long graduated stem fixed to a hollow bulb, the opposite end of which is weighted. It is placed in the liquor, the weighted end sinks to a certain depth, and the reading is taken on the stem at that point which touches “water mark.” The graduations are such that if the specific gravity is multiplied by 1000 and then 1000 is subtracted from the result, the barkometer strength of the liquor is obtained. Thus 1029 specific gravity equals 29° barkometer. This method affords no indication of the amount of tannin present, but is useful to the man who knows his liquors by frequent analysis.

Testing Tan Liquors.—There are many methods to determine the tanning value of any substance, but few are easy to use and highly accurate. One traditional way to measure the strength of a tan liquor is with a hydrometer calibrated against water, known as a barkometer. It consists of a long graduated stem attached to a hollow bulb, with the opposite end weighted. When it's placed in the liquor, the weighted end sinks to a specific depth, and the reading is taken on the stem at the point that touches the “water mark.” The graduations are set up so that if you multiply the specific gravity by 1000 and then subtract 1000 from that result, you get the barkometer strength of the liquor. So, a specific gravity of 1029 equals 29° on the barkometer. This method doesn’t indicate the amount of tannin present, but it’s useful for someone who is familiar with their liquors through regular analysis.

A factor which governs the quality of the leather quite as much as the tannin itself is the acidity of the liquors. It is known that gallic and tannic acids form insoluble calcium salts, and all the other acids present as acetic, propionic, butyric, lactic, formic, &c., form comparatively soluble salts, so that an easy method of determining this important factor is as follows:—

A factor that influences the quality of the leather just as much as the tannin itself is the acidity of the solutions. It's known that gallic and tannic acids create insoluble calcium salts, while other acids like acetic, propionic, butyric, lactic, formic, etc., create relatively soluble salts. Therefore, a straightforward way to determine this important factor is as follows:—

Take a quantity, say 100 c.c., of tan liquor, filter till clear through paper, then pipette 10 c.c. into a small beaker (about 1½ in. diameter), place it on some printed paper and note how clear the print appears through the liquor; now gradually add from a burette a clear solution of saturated lime water until the liquor becomes just cloudy, that is until it just loses its brilliancy. Now read off the number of cubic centimetres required in the graduated stem of the burette, and either read as degrees (counting each c.c. as one degree), to which practice at once gives a useful signification, or calculate out in terms of acetic acid per 100 c.c. of liquor, reckoning saturated lime water as 120 normal.

Take 100 c.c. of tan liquor, filter it until it’s clear through paper, then use a pipette to transfer 10 c.c. into a small beaker (about 1½ inches in diameter). Place the beaker on some printed paper and observe how clear the print looks through the liquor. Now, gradually add a clear saturated lime water solution from a burette until the liquor becomes slightly cloudy, meaning it just loses its brilliance. Next, note the number of cubic centimeters needed from the graduated stem of the burette, and either record it in degrees (counting each c.c. as one degree, which quickly gains practical meaning) or calculate it in terms of acetic acid per 100 c.c. of liquor, considering saturated lime water as 120 normal.

The methods which deal with the actual testing for tannin itself 334 depend mostly upon one or other of two processes; either the precipitation of the tannin by means of gelatin, or its absorption by means of prepared hide. Sir Humphry Davy was the first to propose a method for analysing tanning materials, and he precipitated the tannin by means of gelatin in the presence of alum, then dried and weighed the precipitate, after washing free from excess of reagents. This method was improved by Stoddart, but cannot lay claim to much accuracy. Warington and Müller again modified the method, but their procedure being tedious and difficult to work could not be regarded as a great advance. Wagner then proposed precipitation by means of the alkaloids, with special regard to cinchonine sulphate in the presence of rosaniline acetate as indicator, but this method also proved useless. After this many metallic precipitants were tried, used gravimetrically and volumetrically, but without success. The weighing of precipitated tannates will never succeed, because the tannins are such a diverse class of substances that each tannin precipitates different quantities of the precipitants, and some materials contain two or three different tannins. Then there are also the difficulties of incomplete precipitation and the precipitation of colouring matter, &c. Among this class of methods may be mentioned Garland’s, in which tartar emetic and sal ammoniac were employed. It was improved by Richards and Palmer.

The methods for actually testing for tannin itself 334 mostly rely on one of two processes: either precipitating the tannin using gelatin or absorbing it with prepared hide. Sir Humphry Davy was the first to suggest a method for analyzing tanning materials; he precipitated the tannin with gelatin in the presence of alum, then dried and weighed the precipitate after washing away excess reagents. This method was enhanced by Stoddart but lacks a lot of accuracy. Warington and Müller modified the method further, but their approach was tedious and difficult to implement, so it couldn't be considered a significant improvement. Wagner then proposed precipitation using alkaloids, specifically using cinchonine sulfate with rosaniline acetate as an indicator, but this method also proved ineffective. After that, various metallic precipitants were tested, both gravimetrically and volumetrically, but without success. Weighing precipitated tannates will never work because tannins are such a varied class of substances that each tannin precipitates different amounts of the precipitants, and some materials contain two or three different tannins. Additionally, there are challenges with incomplete precipitation and the precipitation of coloring materials, etc. Among these methods, Garland’s approach used tartar emetic and sal ammoniac. It was later improved by Richards and Palmer.

Another class of methods depends upon the destruction of the tannin by some oxidizing agent, and the estimation of the amount required. Terreil rendered the tannin alkaline, and after agitating it with a known quantity of air, estimated the volume of oxygen absorbed. The method was slow and subject to many sources of error. Commaille oxidized with a known quantity of iodic acid and estimated the excess of iodate. This process also was troublesome, besides oxidizing the gallic acid (as do all the oxidation processes), and entailing a separate estimation of them after the removal of the tannin. Ferdinand Jean (1877) titrated alkaline tannin solution with standard iodine, but the mixture was so dark that the end reaction with starch could not be seen; in addition the gallic acid had again to be estimated. Monier proposed permanganate as an oxidizing agent, and Lowenthal made a very valuable improvement by adding indigo solution to the tannin solution, which controlled the oxidation and acted as indicator. This method also required double titration because of the gallic acid present, the tanning matters being removed from solution by means of gelatin and acidified salt.

Another class of methods relies on breaking down the tannin using an oxidizing agent and measuring how much is needed. Terreil made the tannin alkaline, then mixed it with a known amount of air and measured the volume of oxygen absorbed. This method was slow and had many chances for error. Commaille oxidized with a known amount of iodic acid and measured the excess iodate. This process was also complicated, as it oxidized the gallic acid (like all oxidation processes do) and required a separate measurement after removing the tannin. Ferdinand Jean (1877) titrated alkaline tannin solution with standard iodine, but the mixture was so dark that the end reaction with starch couldn't be seen; plus, the gallic acid had to be measured again. Monier suggested using permanganate as an oxidizing agent, and Lowenthal made a significant improvement by adding indigo solution to the tannin solution, which controlled the oxidation and acted as an indicator. This method also needed double titration because of the gallic acid present, with the tanning substances being removed from the solution using gelatin and acidified salt.

The indirect gravimetric hide-powder method first took form about 1886. It was published in Der Gerber by Simand and Weiss, other workers being Eitner and Meerkatz. Hammer, Muntz and Ramspacher did some earlier work on similar lines, depending upon the specific gravity of solutions. Professor H. R. Procter perfected this method by packing a bell, similar in shape to a bottomless bottle of about 2 oz. (liq.) capacity, with the hide-powder, and siphoning the tan liquor up through the powder and over into a receiver. This deprives the tan liquor of tannin, and a portion of this non-tannin solution is evaporated to dryness and weighed till constant; similarly a portion of the original solution containing non-tannins and tannins is evaporated and weighed till constant; then the weight of the non-tannins subtracted from the weight of the non-tannins and tannins gives the weight of tannin, which is calculated to percentage on original solutions. This method was adopted as official by the International Association of Leather Trades Chemists until September 1906, when its faults were vividly brought before them by Gordon Parker of London and Bennett of Leeds, working in collaboration, although other but not so complete work had been previously done to the same end. The main faults of the method were that the hide-powder absorbed non-tannins, and therefore registered them as tannins, and the hide-powder was partially soluble. This difficulty has now been overcome to a large extent in the present official method of the I.A.L.T.C.

The indirect gravimetric hide-powder method first emerged around 1886. It was published in Der Gerber by Simand and Weiss, with contributions from Eitner and Meerkatz. Hammer, Muntz, and Ramspacher did some initial work on similar approaches, focusing on the specific gravity of solutions. Professor H. R. Procter improved this method by using a container shaped like a bottomless bottle with a capacity of about 2 oz. (liq.), filling it with hide-powder, and siphoning the tan liquor through the powder into a receiver. This process removes tannins from the tan liquor, and a portion of the resulting non-tannin solution is evaporated to dryness and weighed until constant; similarly, a portion of the original solution containing both non-tannins and tannins is evaporated and weighed until constant. The weight of the non-tannins is then subtracted from the total weight of the non-tannins and tannins to determine the weight of the tannins, which is then expressed as a percentage of the original solutions. This method was officially adopted by the International Association of Leather Trades Chemists until September 1906, when its limitations were clearly presented by Gordon Parker of London and Bennett of Leeds, who were working together, although other less complete work had been done earlier. The main issues with the method were that the hide-powder absorbed non-tannins, misclassifying them as tannins, and the hide-powder's partial solubility. These challenges have now been largely addressed in the current official method of the I.A.L.T.C.

Meanwhile, Parker and Munro Payne proposed a new method of analysis, the essence of which is as follows:—A definite excess of lime solution is added to a definite quantity of tannin solution and the excess of lime estimated; the tan solution is now deprived of tannin by means of a soluble modification of gelatin, called “collin,” and the process is repeated. Thus we get two sets of figures, viz. total absorption and acid absorption (i.e. acids other than tan); the latter subtracted from the former gives tannin absorption, and this is calculated out in percentage of original liquor. The method failed theoretically, because a definite molecular weight had to be assumed for tannins which are all different. There are also several other objections, but though, like the hide-powder method, it is quite empirical, it gives exceedingly useful results if the rules for working are strictly adhered to.

Meanwhile, Parker and Munro Payne suggested a new analysis method, which is essentially this: a specific amount of lime solution is mixed with a specific amount of tannin solution, and the excess lime is measured; the tannin solution is then treated with a soluble form of gelatin known as “collin” to remove the tannin, and the process is repeated. This gives us two sets of data: total absorption and acid absorption (i.e., acids other than tannins); subtracting the latter from the former yields tannin absorption, which is then calculated as a percentage of the original liquid. The method theoretically failed because it requires assuming a specific molecular weight for tannins, which are all different. There are also several other criticisms, but even though it is quite empirical like the hide-powder method, it produces very useful results if the working rules are closely followed.

The present official method of the I.A.L.T.C. is a modification of the American official method, which is in turn a modification of a method proposed by W. Eitner, of the Vienna Leather Research Station. The hide-powder is very slightly chrome-tanned with a basic solution of chromium chloride, 2 grammes of the latter being used per 100 grammes of hide-powder, and is then washed free from soluble salts and squeezed to contain 70% of moisture, and is ready for use. This preliminary chroming does away with the difficulty of the powder being soluble, by rendering it quite insoluble; it also lessens the tendency to absorb non-tannins. Such a quantity of this wet powder as contains 6.5 grammes of dry hide is now taken, and water is added until this quantity contains exactly 20 grammes of moisture, i.e. 26.5 grammes in all; it is then agitated for 15 minutes with 100 c.c. of the prepared tannin solution, which is made up to contain tannin within certain definite limits, in a mechanical rotator, and filtered. Of this non-tannin solution 50 c.c. is then evaporated to dryness. The same thing is done with 50 c.c. of original solution containing non-tannins and tannins, and both residues are weighed. The tannin is thus determined by difference. The method does all that science can do at present. The rules for carrying out the analysis are necessarily very strict. The object in view is that all chemists should get exactly concordant results, and in this the I.A.L.T.C. has succeeded.

The current official method of the I.A.L.T.C. is an adaptation of the American official method, which itself is based on a technique suggested by W. Eitner from the Vienna Leather Research Station. The hide powder is lightly chrome-tanned with a basic solution of chromium chloride, using 2 grams of the latter for every 100 grams of hide powder. It is then washed to remove soluble salts and squeezed to retain 70% moisture, making it ready for use. This initial chroming eliminates the problem of the powder being soluble by making it completely insoluble and reduces its tendency to absorb non-tannins. A portion of this wet powder containing 6.5 grams of dry hide is now taken, and water is added until the total moisture reaches exactly 20 grams, meaning a total of 26.5 grams. It is then mixed for 15 minutes with 100 c.c. of the prepared tannin solution, which is created to have tannin within specific limits, using a mechanical rotator, and subsequently filtered. Of this non-tannin solution, 50 c.c. is evaporated to dryness. The same process is repeated with 50 c.c. of the original solution containing both non-tannins and tannins, and the residues are weighed. The amount of tannin is determined by the difference. The method achieves everything that current science can offer. The protocols for conducting the analysis are necessarily very stringent. The goal is to ensure that all chemists achieve exactly consistent results, and the I.A.L.T.C. has accomplished this.

The work done by Wood, Trotman, Procter, Parker and others on the alkaloidal precipitation of tannin deserves mention.

The work by Wood, Trotman, Procter, Parker, and others on the alkaloidal precipitation of tannin is worth noting.

Heavy Leathers.—The hides of oxen are received in the tanyard in four different conditions: (1) market or slaughter hides, which, coming direct from the local abattoirs, are soft, moist and covered with dirt and blood; (2) wet salted hides; (3) dry salted hides; (4) sun-dried or “flint” hides—the last three forms being the condition in which the imports of foreign hides are made. The first operation in the tannery is to clean the hides and bring them back as nearly as possible to the flaccid condition in which they left the animal’s back. The blood and other matter on market hides must be removed as quickly as possible, the blood being of itself a cause of dark stains and bad grain, and with the other refuse a source of putrefaction. When the hides are sound they are given perhaps two changes of water.

Heavy Leathers.—The hides from oxen come into the tannery in four different states: (1) market or slaughter hides, which arrive directly from local slaughterhouses, and are soft, damp, and covered with dirt and blood; (2) wet salted hides; (3) dry salted hides; (4) sun-dried or “flint” hides—the last three types reflect the condition of imported foreign hides. The first step in the tanning process is to clean the hides and restore them as closely as possible to the soft state they were in before being taken from the animal. The blood and other substances on market hides need to be removed quickly, as blood can cause dark stains and poor quality, while the other waste can lead to decay. Once the hides are in good condition, they usually undergo two rinses with water.

Salted hides need a longer soaking than market hides, as it is not only essential to remove the salt from the hide, but also necessary to plump and soften the fibre which has been partially dehydrated and contracted by the salt. It must also be borne in mind that a 10 % solution of salt dissolves hide substance, thereby causing an undesirable loss of weight, and a weak solution prevents plumping, especially when taken into the limes, and may also cause “buckling,” which cannot easily be removed in after processes. Dried and dry salted hides require a much longer soaking than any other variety. Dried hides are always uncertain, as they may have putrefied before drying, and also may have been dried at too high a temperature; in the former case they fall to pieces in the limes, and in the latter case it is practically impossible to soak them back, unless putrefactive processes are used, and such are always dangerous and difficult to work because of the Rivers Pollution Acts. Prolonged soaking in cold water dissolves a serious amount of hide substance. Soaking in brine may be advantageous, as it prevents putrefaction to some extent. Caustic soda, sodium sulphide and sulphurous acid may also be advantageously employed on account of their softening and antiseptic action. In treating salted goods, the first wash water should always be rapidly changed, because, as mentioned, strong salt solutions dissolve hide; four changes of water should always be given to these goods.

Salted hides need a longer soak than market hides, as it's essential to remove the salt from the hide and necessary to plump and soften the fiber, which has been partially dehydrated and shrunk by the salt. It's also important to note that a 10% solution of salt dissolves hide material, leading to an unwanted loss of weight, while a weak solution prevents plumping, especially when used in the limes, and may cause "buckling," which is hard to fix later in the process. Dried and dry salted hides require a much longer soak than any other type. Dried hides are always unpredictable since they might have decomposed before drying or been dried at too high a temperature; in the first case, they fall apart in the limes, and in the second case, it’s nearly impossible to rehydrate them without using decomposition methods, which are always risky and challenging due to the Rivers Pollution Acts. Prolonged soaking in cold water dissolves a significant amount of hide material. Soaking in brine might be beneficial, as it helps prevent decomposition to some degree. Caustic soda, sodium sulfide, and sulfurous acid can also be used effectively because of their softening and antiseptic properties. When treating salted goods, the first wash water should always be changed quickly because, as mentioned, strong salt solutions dissolve hide; these goods should always undergo four changes of water.

Fig. 2.—Double-acting Stocks.

There are other and mechanical means of softening obstinate material, viz. by stocking. The American hide mill, or double-acting stocks, shown diagrammatically in fig. 2, is a popular piece of apparatus, but the goods should never be subjected to violent mechanical treatment until soft enough to stand it, else severe grain cracking may result. Perhaps the use of sodium sulphide or caustic soda in conjunction with the American wash wheel is the safest method.

There are other mechanical ways of softening stubborn materials, such as using stocks. The American hide mill, or double-acting stocks, shown diagrammatically in fig. 2, is a popular piece of equipment, but the goods should never be subjected to harsh mechanical treatment until they are soft enough to handle it; otherwise, serious grain cracking may occur. Using sodium sulfide or caustic soda along with the American wash wheel is probably the safest method.

Whatever means are used the ultimate object is first to swell and open up the fibres as much as possible, and secondly to remove putrefactive refuse and dirt, which if left in is fixed by the lime in the process of depilation, and causes a dirty buff.

Whatever methods are used, the main goal is first to expand and loosen the fibers as much as possible, and second to remove decaying waste and dirt, which, if left behind, gets trapped by the lime during the hair removal process and results in a dirty tan.

After being thus brought as nearly as possible into a uniform condition, all hides are treated alike. The first operation to which they are subjected is depilation, which removes not only the hair but also the scarf skin or epidermis. When the goods are sent to the limes for depilation they are, first of all, placed in an old lime, highly charged with organic matter and bacteria. It is the common belief that the lime causes the hair to loosen and fall out, but this is not so; in fact, pure lime has the opposite 335 effect of tightening the hair. The real cause of the loosening of the hair is that the bacteria in the old lime creep down the hair, enter the rete Malpighi and hair sheath, and attack and decompose the soft cellular structure of the sheath and bulb, also altering the composition of the rete Malpighi by means of which the scarf skin adheres to the true skin. These products of the bacterial action are soluble in lime, and immediately dissolve, leaving the scarf skin and hair unbound and in a condition to leave the skin upon scraping. In this first “green” lime the action is mainly this destructive one, but the goods have yet to be made ready to receive the tan liquor, which they must enter in a plump, open and porous condition. Consequently, the “green” lime is followed with two more, the second being less charged with bacteria, and the third being, if not actually a new one, a very near approach to it; in these two limes the bundles of fibre are gradually softened, split up and distended, causing the hide to swell, the interfibrillar substance is rendered soluble and the whole generally made suitable for transference to the tan liquors. The hide itself is only very slightly soluble; if care is taken, the grease is transformed into an insoluble calcium soap, and the hair is hardly acted upon at all.

After being brought as close as possible to a uniform state, all hides are treated the same way. The first step in this process is depilation, which removes not just the hair but also the outer layer of skin. When the hides are sent to the lime for depilation, they are first placed in an old lime that is heavily loaded with organic matter and bacteria. Many believe that lime loosens and removes the hair, but that's not accurate; in fact, pure lime actually tightens the hair. The real reason the hair loosens is that the bacteria in the old lime work their way down the hair, entering the rete Malpighi and hair sheath, where they attack and break down the soft cellular structure of the sheath and bulb. They also change the composition of the rete Malpighi that helps the outer layer stick to the inner skin. The byproducts of this bacterial action dissolve in the lime, freeing the outer skin and hair so they can be scraped off. In this initial "green" lime, the main action is destructive, but the hides still need to be prepared to take on the tanning solution, which requires them to be plump, open, and porous. Thus, after the “green” lime, there are two more baths: the second has fewer bacteria, and the third is either a new batch or very close to it. In these two treatments, the fiber bundles are gradually softened, split apart, and expanded, causing the hide to swell, while the spaces between fibers become soluble, making the whole structure ready for the tanning solutions. The hide itself is only minimally soluble; if done carefully, the grease turns into an insoluble calcium soap, and the hair is barely affected.

The time the goods are in the limes and the method of making new limes depends upon the quality of the leather to be turned out. The harder and tougher the leather required the shorter and fresher the liming. For instance, for sole leather where a hard result is required, the time in the limes would be from 8 to 10 days, and a perfectly fresh top lime would be used, with the addition of sodium sulphide to hasten the process. Every tanner uses a different quantity of lime and sulphide, but a good average quantity is 7 ℔ lime per hide and 10-15 ℔ sodium sulphide per pit of 100 hides. The lime is slaked with water and the sulphide mixed in during the slaking; if it is added to the pit when the slaking is finished the greater part of its effect is lost, as it does not then enter into the same chemical combinations with the lime, forming polysulphides, as when it is added during the process of slaking.

The amount of time the goods spend in the lime and the process of creating new lime depend on the quality of the leather being produced. The tougher and firmer the leather needed, the shorter and more efficient the liming process should be. For example, when making sole leather that requires a hard finish, the time in the lime would be around 8 to 10 days, and a completely fresh top lime should be used, along with sodium sulfide to speed up the process. Each tanner uses a different amount of lime and sulfide, but a good average is 7 pounds of lime per hide and 10-15 pounds of sodium sulfide per pit containing 100 hides. The lime is mixed with water, and the sulfide is added during this mixing; if it’s added after the mixing is complete, much of its effectiveness is lost, as it won't react with the lime in the same way to form polysulfides.

For softer and more pliable leathers, such as are required for harness and belting, a “lower” or mellower liming is given, and the time in the limes is increased from 9 to 12 days. Some of the old mellow liquor is added to the fresh lime in the making, so as just to take off the sharpness. It would be made up as for sole leather, but with less sulphide or none at all, and then a dozen buckets of an old lime would be added. For lighter leathers from 3 to 6 weeks’ liming is given, and a fresh lime is never used.

For softer and more flexible leathers, like those needed for harnesses and belts, a “lower” or gentler liming process is used, and the time spent in the limes is extended from 9 to 12 days. Some of the old mellow liquor is mixed in with the fresh lime during processing to soften the sharpness. It would be prepared like sole leather, but with less or no sulphide at all, and then a dozen buckets of old lime would be added. For lighter leathers, the liming process lasts from 3 to 6 weeks, and fresh lime is never used.

“Sweating” as a method of depilation is obsolete in England so far as heavy leathers are concerned. It consists of hanging the goods in a moist warm room until incipient putrefaction sets in. This first attacks the more mucous portions, as the rete Malpighi, hair bulb and sheath, and so allows the hair to be removed as before. The method pulls down the hide, and the putrefaction may go too far, with disastrous results, but there is much to recommend it for sheepskins where the wool is the main consideration, the main point being that while lime entirely destroys wool, this process leaves it intact, only loosening the roots. It is consequently still much used.

“Sweating” as a hair removal method is outdated in England when it comes to heavy leathers. It involves hanging the materials in a warm, moist room until early decay starts. This initially affects the more mucous parts, like the rete Malpighi, hair bulb, and sheath, making it easier to remove the hair as before. The method tightens the hide, and the decay can go too far, which can have serious consequences, but it has many advantages for sheepskins where the wool is the priority. The key point is that while lime completely damages wool, this process keeps it intact, only loosening the roots. Therefore, it’s still widely used.

Another method of fellmongering (dewooling) sheepskins is to paint the flesh side with a cream of lime made with a 10% solution of sodium sulphide and lay the goods in pile flesh to flesh, taking care that none of the solution comes in contact with the wool, which is ready for pulling in from 4 to 8 hours. Although this process may be used for any kind of skin, it is practically only used for sheep, as if any other skin is depilated in this manner all plumping effect is lost. Since this must be obtained in some way, it is an economy of time and material to place the goods in lime in the first instance.

Another way to remove wool from sheepskins is to apply a mixture of lime made with a 10% sodium sulfide solution to the flesh side and stack the skins flesh to flesh, making sure that none of the solution touches the wool. This can be done for 4 to 8 hours before the wool is ready to be pulled off. While this method can technically be used for any type of skin, it's mainly used for sheep because using it on other skins results in losing all the plumping effect. Since getting that effect is necessary, putting the skins in lime from the start saves time and materials.

Sometimes, in the commoner classes of sole leather, the hair is removed by painting the hair side with cream of lime and sulphide, or the same effect is produced by drawing the hides through a strong solution of sulphide; this completely destroys the hair, actually taking it into solution. But the hair roots remain embedded in the skin, and for this reason such leather always shows a dirty buff.

Sometimes, in the lower classes of leather, the hair is removed by applying a mixture of lime and sulfur on the hair side, or the same result can be achieved by soaking the hides in a strong sulfur solution; this fully dissolves the hair. However, the hair roots stay embedded in the skin, and for this reason, this type of leather always appears to have a dirty finish.

Arsenic sulphide (realgar) is slaked with the lime for the production of the finer light leathers, such as glace kid and glove kid. This method produces a very smooth grain (the tendency of sodium sulphide being to make the grain harsh and bold), and is therefore very suitable for the purpose, but it is very expensive.

Arsenic sulfide (realgar) is mixed with lime to create high-quality light leathers, like glace kid and glove kid. This technique results in a very smooth grain (because sodium sulfide tends to make the grain rough and pronounced), making it ideal for this application, but it is quite costly.

Sufficient proof of the fact that it is not the lime which causes skins to unhair is found in the process of chemical liming patented by Payne and Pullman. In this process the goods are first treated with caustic soda and then with calcium chloride; in this manner lime is formed in the skin by the reaction of the two salts, but still the hair remains as tight as ever. If this process is to be used for unhairing and liming effect, the goods must be first subjected to a putrid soak to loosen the hair, and afterwards limed. Experiments made by the present writer also prove this theory. A piece of calf skin was subjected to sterilized lime for several months, at the end of which time the hair was as tight as ever; then bacterial influence was introduced, and the skin unhaired in as many days.

Sufficient evidence that it isn't lime that causes the hair to come off is seen in the chemical liming process patented by Payne and Pullman. In this method, the materials are first treated with caustic soda and then with calcium chloride; this reaction creates lime in the skin, but the hair remains as secure as it was. If this method is meant to be used for hair removal and liming, the materials must first go through a putrid soak to loosen the hair before being limed. Experiments conducted by the writer also support this theory. A piece of calf skin was exposed to sterilized lime for several months, and by the end of that time, the hair was still firmly in place; then, when bacterial influence was added, the skin lost its hair in just a few days.

Fig. 3.—Tanner’s Beam.
Fig. 4.—Tanner’s Knives and Pin.

After liming it is necessary to unhair the goods. This is done by stretching a hide over a tanner’s beam (fig. 3), when with an unhairing knife (a, fig. 4) the beamsman partially scrapes and partially shaves off the hair and epidermis. Another workman, a “flesher,” removes the flesh or “net skin” (panniculus adiposus), a fatty matter from the flesh side of the skin, with the fleshing knife (two-edged), seen in b, fig. 4. For these operations several machines have been adapted, working mostly with revolving spiral blades or vibrating cutters, under which the hides pass in a fully extended state. Among these may be mentioned the Leidgen unhairer, which works on a rubber bed, which “gives” with the irregularities of the hide, and the Wilson flesher, consisting of a series of knives attached to a revolving belt, and which also “give” in contact with irregularities.

After liming, it's important to remove the hair from the hides. This is done by stretching the hide over a tanner’s beam (fig. 3), where the worker uses an unhairing knife (a, fig. 4) to scrape and shave off the hair and outer skin. Another worker, called a “flesher,” removes the flesh or “net skin” (panniculus adiposus), which is a fatty layer on the flesh side of the skin, using a fleshing knife (two-edged), as shown in b, fig. 4. Several machines have been created for these tasks, mostly using rotating spiral blades or vibrating cutters that the hides pass through while fully extended. Notable examples include the Leidgen unhairer, which operates on a rubber bed that adjusts to the irregularities of the hide, and the Wilson flesher, which consists of a series of knives mounted on a revolving belt that also adapts to irregularities.

At this stage the hide is divided into several parts, the process being known as “rounding.” The object of the division is this: certain parts of the hide termed the “offal” are of less value than the “butt,” which consists of the prime part. The grain of the butt is fine and close in texture, whereas the offal grain is loose, coarse and open, and if the offal is placed in the same superior liquors as the butt, being open and porous, it will absorb the best of the tannin first; consequently the offal goes to a set of inferior liquors, often consisting of those through which the butts have passed. The hides are “rounded” with a sharp curved butcher’s knife; the divisions are seen in fig. 5. The bellies, cheeks and shoulders constitute the offal, and are tanned separately although the shoulder is not often detached from the butt until the end of the “suspenders,” being of slightly better quality than the bellies. The butt is divided into two “bends.” This separation is not made until the tanning of the butt is finished, when it is cut in two, and the components sold as “bends,” although as often as not the butt is not divided. In America the hides are only split down the ridge of the back, from head to tail, and tanned as hides. Dressing hides are more frequently rounded after tanning, the mode depending on the purpose for which the leather is required.

At this stage, the hide is divided into several parts, a process known as “rounding.” The purpose of this division is that certain parts of the hide, called the “offal,” are less valuable than the “butt,” which is the prime portion. The grain of the butt is fine and closely textured, while the offal grain is loose, coarse, and open. If the offal is placed in the same high-quality liquors as the butt, its porous nature will cause it to absorb the tannin first. As a result, the offal is treated with a set of inferior liquors, often those that the butts have already been through. The hides are “rounded” using a sharp curved butcher’s knife; the divisions are shown in fig. 5. The bellies, cheeks, and shoulders make up the offal and are tanned separately, although the shoulder is usually not removed from the butt until the end of the “suspenders,” as it is of slightly better quality than the bellies. The butt is divided into two “bends.” This separation occurs only after the tanning of the butt is complete, when it is cut in two, and the pieces are sold as “bends,” though often the butt remains undivided. In America, the hides are split down the ridge of the back, from head to tail, and tanned as whole hides. Dressing hides are more frequently rounded after tanning, depending on the intended use of the leather.

Fig. 5.

The next step is to remove as much “scud” and lime as possible, the degree of removal of the latter depending upon the kind of leather to be turned out. “Scudding” consists of working the already unhaired hide over the beam with an unhairing knife with increased pressure, squeezing out the dirt, which is composed of pigment cells, semi-soluble compounds of lime, and hide, hair sacks and soluble hide substance, &c. This exudes as a dirty, milky, viscid liquid, and mechanically brings the 336 lime out with it, but involves a great and undesirable loss of hide substance, heavy leather being sold by weight. This difficulty is now got over by giving the goods an acid bath first, to delime the surface; the acid fixes this soluble hide substance (which is only soluble in alkalies) and hardens it, thus preventing its loss, and the goods may then be scudded clean with safety. The surface of all heavy leathers must be delimed to obtain a good coloured leather, the demand of the present day boot manufacturer; it is also necessary to carry this further with milder leathers than sole, such as harness and belly, &c., as excess of lime causes the leather to crack when finished. Perhaps the best material for this purpose is boracic acid, using about 10 ℔ per 100 butts, and suspending the goods. This acid yields a characteristic fine grain, and because of its limited solubility cannot be used in excess. Other acids are also used, such as acetic, lactic, formic, hydrochloric, with varying success. Where the water used is very soft, it is only necessary to wash in water for a few hours, when the butts are ready for tanning, but if the water is hard, the lime is fixed in the hide by the bicarbonates it contains, in the form of carbonate, and the result is somewhat disastrous.

The next step is to remove as much “scud” and lime as possible, with the amount of lime removal depending on the type of leather being produced. “Scudding” involves working the already unhaired hide over the beam with an unhairing knife, applying more pressure to squeeze out the dirt, which includes pigment cells, semi-soluble lime compounds, hair sacks, and soluble hide substances. This process produces a dirty, milky, thick liquid and mechanically extracts the lime, but it also leads to a significant and undesirable loss of hide substance, with heavy leather sold by weight. This issue is now addressed by first giving the goods an acid bath to remove the lime from the surface; the acid fixes the soluble hide substance (which only dissolves in alkaline solutions) and hardens it, preventing loss, allowing the goods to be scudded clean safely. The surface of all heavy leathers must be delimed to achieve a good color, which is what today’s boot manufacturers demand. It is also necessary to go further with softer leathers than sole, such as harness and belly, as excess lime can cause the leather to crack when finished. Perhaps the best material for this purpose is boracic acid, using about 10 lbs per 100 butts and suspending the goods. This acid creates a fine grain and, because of its limited solubility, shouldn't be used excessively. Other acids used include acetic, lactic, formic, and hydrochloric, each with varying success. If the water used is very soft, it only takes a few hours of washing for the butts to be ready for tanning; however, if the water is hard, the lime gets fixed in the hide by the bicarbonates it contains, resulting in a somewhat disastrous outcome.

After deliming, the butts are scudded, rinsed through water or weak acid, and go off to the tan pits for tanning proper. Any lime which remains is sufficiently removed by the acidity of the early tan liquors.

After deliming, the hides are scraped, rinsed with water or a weak acid, and sent off to the tanning pits for proper tanning. Any lime that remains is effectively removed by the acidity of the initial tanning solutions.

The actual tanning now begins, and the operations involved may be divided into a series of three: (1) colouring, (2) handling, (3) laying away.

The actual tanning starts now, and the process can be broken down into three main operations: (1) coloring, (2) handling, (3) storing away.

The colouring pits or “suspenders,” perhaps a series of eight pits, consist of liquors ranging from 16° to 40° barkometer, which were once the strongest liquors in the yard, but have gradually worked down, having had some hundreds of hides through them; they now contain very little tannin, and consist mainly of developed acids which neutralize the lime, plump the hide, colour it off, and generally prepare it to receive stronger liquors. The goods are suspended in these pits on poles, which are lifted up and down several times a day to ensure the goods taking an even colour; they are moved one pit forward each day into slightly stronger liquors, and take about from 7 to 18 days to get through the suspender stage.

The coloring pits or “suspenders,” likely a series of eight pits, hold liquids ranging from 16° to 40° barkometer. These used to be the strongest liquids in the yard, but over time they have weakened after processing hundreds of hides. They now contain very little tannin and mainly consist of developed acids that neutralize the lime, plump the hide, color it, and generally prepare it to absorb stronger liquids. The goods are hung in these pits on poles, which are moved up and down several times a day to ensure an even color. Each day, they are moved one pit forward into slightly stronger liquids, taking about 7 to 18 days to complete the suspender stage.

The reason why the goods are suspended at this stage instead of being laid flat is that if the latter course were adopted, the hides would sink and touch one another, and the touch-marks, not being accessible to the tan liquor, would not colour, and uneven colouring would thus result; in addition the weight of the top hides would flatten the lower ones and prevent their plumping, and this condition would be exceedingly difficult to remedy in the after liquors. Another question which might occur to the non-technical reader is, why should not the process be hastened by placing the goods in strong liquors? The reason is simple. Strong tanning solutions have the effect of “drawing the grain” of pelt, i.e. contracting the fibres, and causing the leather to assume a very wrinkled appearance which cannot afterwards be remedied; at the same time “case tanning” results, i.e. the outside only gets tanned, leaving the centre still raw hide, and once the outside is case-hardened it is impossible for the liquor to penetrate and finish the tanning. This condition being almost irremediable, the leather would thus be rendered useless.

The reason the goods are suspended at this stage instead of lying flat is that if they were laid flat, the hides would touch each other, and the contact marks wouldn’t be exposed to the tanning solution, leading to uneven coloring. Additionally, the weight of the top hides would compress the lower ones and prevent them from plumping, which would be very hard to fix later with the tanning solution. Another question that might come to a non-expert's mind is why the process can’t be sped up by using stronger solutions. The answer is straightforward. Strong tanning solutions tend to “draw the grain” of the pelt, meaning they tighten the fibers and make the leather look very wrinkled, which can’t be fixed later. At the same time, this leads to “case tanning,” where only the outer layer gets tanned, leaving the center raw, and once the outside is hardened, the solution can’t penetrate to finish the tanning. This situation is nearly impossible to correct, rendering the leather useless.

Fig. 6.—Tanner’s Hook (without handle).

After the “suspenders” the goods are transferred to a series of “handlers” or “floaters,” consisting of, perhaps, a dozen pits containing liquors ranging from 30° to 55° barkometer. These liquors contain an appreciable quantity of both tannin and acid, once formed the “lay-aways,” and are destined to constitute the “suspenders.” In these pits the goods, having been evenly coloured off, are laid flat, handled every day in the “hinder” (weaker) liquors and shifted forward, perhaps every two days, at the tanner’s convenience. The “handling” consists of lifting the butts out of the pit by means of a tanner’s hook (fig. 6), piling them on the side of the pit to drain, and returning them to the pit, the top butt in the one handler being returned as the bottom in the next. This operation is continued throughout the process, only, as the hides advance, the necessity for frequent handling decreases. The top two handler pits are sometimes converted into “dusters,” i.e. when the hides have advanced to these pits, as each butt is lowered, a small quantity of tanning material is sprinkled on it.

After the "suspenders," the goods are moved to a series of "handlers" or "floaters," which include about a dozen pits filled with liquors ranging from 30° to 55° on the barkometer. These liquors contain a significant amount of both tannin and acid, once formed into the "lay-aways," and are meant to become the "suspenders." In these pits, the goods, having been evenly colored, are laid flat, handled daily in the "hinder" (weaker) liquors, and shifted forward, typically every two days, at the tanner's convenience. The "handling" involves lifting the butts out of the pit using a tanner's hook (fig. 6), stacking them on the side of the pit to drain, and placing them back into the pit, with the top butt in one handler becoming the bottom butt in the next. This process continues throughout, but as the hides progress, the need for frequent handling decreases. The top two handler pits are sometimes turned into "dusters," meaning that when the hides have moved to these pits, a small amount of tanning material is sprinkled on each butt as it is lowered.

Some tanners, now that the hides are set flat, put them in suspension again before laying away; the method has its advantages, but is not general. The goods are generally laid away immediately. The layer liquors consist of leached liquors from the fishings, strengthened with either chestnut or oakwood extract, or a mixture of the two. The first layer is made up to, say, 60° barkometer in this way, and as the hides are laid down they are sprinkled with fresh tanning material, and remain undisturbed for about one week. The second layer is a 70° barkometer liquor, the hides are again sprinkled and allowed to lie for perhaps two weeks. The third may be 80° barkometer and the fourth 90°, the goods being “dusted” as before, and lying undisturbed for perhaps three or four weeks respectively. Some tanners give more layers, and some give less, some more or less time, or greater or lesser strengths of liquor, but this tannage is a typical modern one.

Some tanners, now that the hides are spread out flat, put them in suspension again before storing; this method has its benefits, but it’s not widely used. Usually, the goods are stored right away. The first layer of liquids includes leached liquids from the fishings, strengthened with either chestnut or oakwood extract, or a mix of both. The initial layer is made up to about 60° on the barkometer, and as the hides are laid down, they are sprinkled with fresh tanning material and left undisturbed for about a week. The second layer is a 70° barkometer liquor; the hides are sprinkled again and allowed to sit for around two weeks. The third layer may be 80° on the barkometer, and the fourth is 90°, with the goods being “dusted” as before, lying undisturbed for about three to four weeks each. Some tanners use more layers, while others use fewer; some tanners apply more or less time, or stronger or weaker liquids, but this tanning process is a typical modern method.

As regards “dusting” material, for mellow leather, mellow materials are required, such as myrobalans being the mellowest and mimosa bark the most astringent of those used in this connexion. For harder leather, as sole leather, a much smaller quantity of myrobalans is used, if any at all, a fair quantity of mimosa bark as a medium, and much valonia, which deposits a large amount of bloom, and is of great astringency. About 3 to 4 cwt. of a judicious mixture is used for each pit, the mellower material predominating in the earlier liquors and the most astringent in the later liquors.

As for “dusting” materials, for soft leather, you need softer materials, with myrobalans being the softest and mimosa bark being the most astringent used for this purpose. For tougher leather, like sole leather, a much smaller amount of myrobalans is used, if any, a decent amount of mimosa bark as a middle option, and a lot of valonia, which leaves a significant amount of bloom and is very astringent. About 3 to 4 cwt. of a carefully chosen mix is used for each pit, with the softer materials being more prevalent in the earlier liquids and the more astringent ones in the later liquids.

The tanning is now finished, and the goods are handled out of the pits, brushed free from dusting material, washed up in weak liquor, piled and allowed to drip for 2 or 3 days so that the tan may become set.

The tanning is now complete, and the items are taken out of the pits, brushed to remove any dust, washed in a mild solution, stacked, and left to drip for 2 or 3 days so that the tan can set properly.

Finishing.—From this stage the treatment of sole leather differs from that of harness, belting and mellower leathers. As regards the first, it will be found on looking at the dripping pile of leather that each butt is covered with a fawn-coloured deposit, known technically as “bloom”; this disguises the under colour of the leather, just like a coat of paint. The theory of the formation of this bloom is this. Strong solutions of tannin, such as are formed between the hides from dusting materials, are not able to exist for long without decomposition, and consequently the tannin begins to condense, and forms other acids and insoluble anhydrides; this insoluble matter separates in and on the leather, giving weight, firmness, and rendering the leather waterproof. It is known technically as bloom and chemically as ellagic acid.

Finishing.—At this stage, the treatment of sole leather is different from that of harness, belting, and softer leathers. If you look at the dripping stack of leather, you'll see that each piece is covered with a fawn-colored deposit known as "bloom"; this masks the underlying color of the leather, much like a coat of paint. The idea behind the formation of this bloom is as follows. Strong solutions of tannin, which form between the hides from dusting materials, can't last long without breaking down. As a result, the tannin starts to condense, creating other acids and insoluble anhydrides; this insoluble material separates in and on the leather, adding weight, firmness, and making the leather waterproof. It's technically referred to as bloom and chemically known as ellagic acid.

After dripping, the goods are scoured free from surface bloom in a Wilson scouring machine, and are then ready for bleaching. There are several methods by which this is effected, or, more correctly several materials or mixtures are used, the method of application being the same, viz. the goods are “vatted” (steeped) for some hours in the bleaching mixture at a temperature of 110° F. The mixture may consist of either sumach and a light-coloured chestnut extract made to 110° barkometer, and 110° F., or some bleaching extract made for the purpose, consisting of bisulphited liquid quebracho, which bleaches by reason of the free sulphurous acid it 337 contains. The former method is best (though more expensive), as it removes less weight, and the light shade of colour is more permanent than that obtained by using bisulphited extracts.

After dripping, the goods are cleaned of surface bloom in a Wilson scouring machine and are then ready for bleaching. There are several methods to achieve this, or more accurately, several materials or mixtures are used, with the method of application being the same, which is that the goods are "vatted" (steeped) for a few hours in the bleaching mixture at a temperature of 110° F. The mixture can consist of either sumach and a light-colored chestnut extract brought to 110° barkometer and 110° F., or some bleaching extract made for this purpose, which is made up of bisulphited liquid quebracho, known to bleach due to the free sulphurous acid it contains. The first method is preferred (though more expensive), as it removes less weight, and the light shade of color is more permanent than that achieved with bisulphited extracts. 337

After the first vatting the goods are laid up in pile to drip; meanwhile the liquor is again heated, and they are then returned for another twenty-four hours, again removed and allowed to drip for 2 to 3 days, after which they are oiled with cod oil on the grain and hung up in the sheds to dry in the dark. When they have dried to an india-rubber-like condition, they are piled and allowed to heat slightly until a greyish “bloom” rises to the surface, they are then set out and stretched in a Wilson scouring machine; using brass slickers instead of the stone ones used for scouring, “pinned” over by hand (with the three-edged instrument seen in c, fig. 4, and known as a “pin”) to remove any bloom not removed by the machine, oiled and dried. When of a damp even colour they are “rolled on” between two heavy rollers like a wringing machine, the pressure being applied from above, hung up in the dark sheds again until the uneven colour so produced has dried in, and then “rolled off” through the same machine, the pressure being applied from below. They are now dried right out, brushed on the grain to produce a slight gloss, and are finished.

After the first vatting, the goods are stacked in a pile to drain; meanwhile, the liquid is heated again, and then the goods are returned for another twenty-four hours. They are removed again and allowed to drain for 2 to 3 days, after which they are treated with cod oil on the surface and hung in the sheds to dry out of the light. Once they've dried to a rubbery texture, they are stacked and allowed to heat up slightly until a grayish “bloom” appears on the surface. Then, they are laid out and stretched in a Wilson scouring machine, using brass slickers instead of the stone ones previously employed for scouring. This is finished by hand with a three-edged tool known as a “pin” (as seen in c, fig. 4) to remove any bloom that the machine didn't take off, followed by oiling and drying. When they have an even, damp color, they are "rolled on" between two heavy rollers like those in a wringer, with pressure applied from above, and then hung in the dark sheds again until the uneven color that results has set in. Finally, they are "rolled off" through the same machine with pressure from below. Now they are completely dry, brushed on the surface to create a slight shine, and are finished.

As regards the finishing of harness leather, &c., the goods, after thorough dripping for a day or two, are brushed, lightly scoured, washed up in hot sumach and extract to improve the colour, and are again laid up in pile for two days; they are then given a good coat of cod oil, sent to the sheds, and dried right out. Only sufficient scouring is given to clean the goods, the object of the tanner being to leave as much weight in as possible, although all this superfluous tan has to be washed out by the currier before he can proceed.

As for finishing harness leather and related items, the goods are soaked for a day or two, then brushed, lightly scrubbed, and washed in hot sumac and extract to enhance the color. After that, they are piled up for two days. Next, a good coat of cod oil is applied, and then they are sent to the sheds to dry completely. Only enough scrubbing is done to clean the goods, as the tanner's goal is to retain as much weight as possible, even though all that excess tan has to be washed out by the currier before he can continue.

Currying.—When the goods are dried from the sheds they are purchased by the currier. If, as is often the case, the tanner is his own currier, he does not tan the goods so heavily, or trouble about adding superfluous weight, but otherwise the after processes, the art of the currier, are the same.

Currying.—When the goods are dried from the sheds, they are bought by the currier. If, as is often the case, the tanner is also the currier, he doesn’t tan the goods as heavily or worry about adding unnecessary weight, but otherwise, the subsequent processes, the art of the currier, are the same.

Currying consists of working oil and grease into the leather to render it pliable and increase its strength. It was once thought that this was a mere physical effect produced by the oil, but such is not the case. Currying with animal oils is a second tannage in itself; the oils oxidize in the fibres and produce aldehydes, which are well-known tanning agents; and this double tannage renders the leather very strong. Then there is the lubricating effect, a very important physical action so far as the strength of the leather is concerned. Mineral oils are much used, but they do not oxidize to aldehydes, or, for the matter of that, to anything else, as they are not subject to decomposition. They, therefore, produce no second tannage, and their action is merely the physical one of lubrication, and this is only more or less temporary, as, except in the case of the heavier greases, they slowly evaporate. Where animal fats and oils are used, the longer the goods are left in contact with the grease the better and stronger will be the leather.

Currying involves working oil and grease into the leather to make it flexible and enhance its strength. It was previously believed that this was just a physical effect caused by the oil, but that's not true. Currying with animal oils acts as a second tanning process; the oils oxidize in the fibers and create aldehydes, which are well-known tanning agents, and this double tanning makes the leather very strong. Additionally, there’s the lubricating effect, which is crucial for the leather's strength. Mineral oils are commonly used, but they don't oxidize into aldehydes or anything else since they don’t decompose. Therefore, they don’t provide a second tanning effect, and their role is simply lubrication, which is only somewhat temporary, as they gradually evaporate, except for heavier greases. With animal fats and oils, the longer the leather is in contact with the grease, the better and stronger it becomes.

In the “Einbrennen” process (German for “burning in”), the hides are thoroughly scoured, and when dry are dipped into hot grease, which is then allowed to cool; when it is nearly set the goods are removed and set out. This process is not much used in Great Britain.

In the “Einbrennen” process (German for “burning in”), the hides are thoroughly cleaned, and when dry, they are dipped into hot grease, which is then allowed to cool; when it’s almost set, the goods are taken out and set aside. This process isn't widely used in Great Britain.

In hand-stuffing belting butts the goods are first thoroughly soaked in water to which has been added some soda, and then scoured and stretched by machine. They are then lightly shaved, to take off the loose flesh and thin the neck. The whole of the mechanically deposited tannin is removed by scouring, to make room for the grease, and they are then put into a sumach vat of 40° barkometer to brighten the colour, horsed up to drip, and set out. If any loading, to produce fictitious weight, is to be done, it is done now, by brushing the solution of either epsom salts, barium chloride or glucose, or a mixture, into the flesh, and laying away in pile for some days to allow of absorption, when, perhaps, another coat is given. Whether this is done or not, the goods are hung up until “tempered” (denoting a certain degree of dryness), and then treated with dubbin. This is manufactured by melting down tallow in a steam-jacketed pan, and adding cod oil, the mixture being stirred continually; when quite clear, it is cooled as rapidly as possible by running cold water through the steam pan, the stirring being continued until it has set. The tempered leather having been set out on a glass table, to which the flesh side adheres, is given a thin coat of the dubbin on the grain, turned, set out on the flesh, and given a thick coat of dubbin. Then it is hung up in a wind shed, and as the moisture dries out the grease goes in. After two or three days the goods are “set out in grease” with a brass slicker, given a coat of dubbin on the grain slightly thicker than the first coat, then flesh dubbined, a slightly thinner coat being applied than at first, and stoved at 70° F. The grease which is slicked off when “setting out in grease” is collected and sold. After hanging in the warm stove for 2 or 3 days the butts are laid away in grease for a month; they are then slicked out tight, flesh and grain, and buck tallowed. Hard tallow is first rubbed on the grain, when a slight polish is induced by rubbing with the smoothed rounded edge of a thick slab of glass; they are then hung up in the stove or stretched in frames to dry. A great deal of stuffing is now carried out by drumming the goods in hot hard fats in previously heated drums; and in modern times the tedious process of laying away in grease for a month is either left undone altogether or very considerably shortened.

In hand-stuffing belting butts, the materials are first soaked in water mixed with some soda, then scoured and stretched by machine. They are lightly shaved to remove loose flesh and thin the neck. All the mechanically added tannin is scrubbed off to make space for the grease, and then they’re placed in a sumach vat at 40° barkometer to enhance the color. After dripping, they’re laid out. If any weight is to be added artificially, this happens now by brushing a solution of either Epsom salts, barium chloride, glucose, or a mix into the flesh and stacking them for a few days to absorb it, possibly getting another coat. Regardless of this, the goods are hung up until “tempered” (indicating a certain level of dryness), then treated with dubbin. This is made by melting down tallow in a steam-jacketed pan and adding cod oil, stirring continuously; once clear, it cools quickly with cold water running through the steam pan while stirring until it sets. The tempered leather is laid on a glass table, attaching to the flesh side, and gets a thin layer of dubbin on the grain, is flipped, laid on the flesh side, and receives a thick layer of dubbin. It’s then hung in a windy spot, allowing the moisture to evaporate and the grease to absorb. After two or three days, the goods are “set out in grease” using a brass slicker, with a slightly thicker layer of dubbin applied to the grain, then flesh dubbined with a somewhat thinner coat than the initial, and heated at 70° F. The grease slicked off during “setting out in grease” is collected and sold. After hanging in the warm stove for 2 or 3 days, the butts are placed in grease for a month; then they are slicked out tightly, both flesh and grain, and treated with buck tallow. Hard tallow is first rubbed onto the grain, producing a slight polish by rubbing with the smooth, rounded edge of a thick slab of glass; then, they are hung in the stove or stretched in frames to dry. A considerable amount of stuffing is now done by drumming the goods in hot hard fats in preheated drums, and in modern times, the tedious month-long process of laying away in grease is often skipped or significantly shortened.

In the tanning and dressing of the commoner varieties of kips and dried hides, the materials used are of a poorer quality, and the time taken for all processes is cut down, so that whereas the time taken to dress the better class of leather is from 7 to 10 months, and in a few cases more, these cheaper goods are turned out in from 3½ to 5 months.

In the tanning and dressing of regular kips and dried hides, the materials used are of lower quality, and the time spent on all processes is shortened. While it typically takes between 7 to 10 months, and sometimes even longer, to dress higher-quality leather, these cheaper products are completed in just 3½ to 5 months.

A considerable quantity of the leather which reaches England, such as East India tanned kips, Australian sides, &c., is bought up and retanned, being sold then as a much better-class leather. The first operation with such goods is to “strip” them of any grease they may contain, and part of their original tannage. This is effectually carried out by first soaking them thoroughly, laying them up to drip, and drumming for half an hour in a weak solution of soda; they are then washed by drumming in plenty of water, the water is run off and replaced by very weak sulphuric acid to neutralize any remaining soda; this is in turn run off and replaced by weak tan liquor, and the goods are so tanned by drumming for some days in a liquor of gradually increasing strength. The liquor is made up as cheaply as possible with plenty of solid quebracho and other cheap extract, which is dried in with, perhaps, glucose, epsom salts, &c. to produce weight. Sometimes a better tannage is given to goods of fair quality, in which they are, perhaps, started in the drum and finished in layers, slightly better materials being used all through, and a longer time taken to complete the tannage.

A large amount of the leather that comes to England, like East India tanned kips, Australian sides, etc., is purchased and re-tanned, then sold as a much higher-quality leather. The first step with these materials is to “strip” them of any grease they may hold and part of their original tanning. This is done effectively by soaking them thoroughly, letting them drip, and then drumming for half an hour in a weak solution of soda; they are then washed by drumming in plenty of water, after which the water is drained and replaced with very weak sulfuric acid to neutralize any leftover soda; this is then drained off and swapped for weak tan liquor, and the goods are tanned by drumming in this solution for several days with gradually increasing strength. The liquor is made as cheaply as possible, using plenty of solid quebracho and other inexpensive extracts, which are dried in with, perhaps, glucose, Epsom salts, etc., to add weight. Sometimes, a better tanning process is applied to goods of decent quality, where they are perhaps initiated in the drum and finished in layers, using slightly better materials overall and taking a longer time to complete the tanning.

The tannage of dressing hides for bag and portmanteau work is rather different from the other varieties described, in that the goods, after having had a rather longer liming, are “bated” or “puered.”

The tanning of hides for bags and luggage is quite different from the other types mentioned, as the materials, after undergoing a longer liming process, are “bated” or “puered.”

Bating consists of placing the goods in a wheel or paddle with hen or pigeon excrement, and paddling for from a few hours to 2 or 3 days. In puering, dog manure is used, and this being rather more active, the process does not take so long. This bating or puering is carried out in warm liquors, and the actions involved are several. From a practical point of view the action is the removal of the lime and the solution of the hair sacs and a certain amount of interfibrillar substance. In this way the goods are pulled down to a soft flaccid condition, which allows of the removal of short hair, hair sacs and other filth by scudding with an unhairing knife upon the beam. The lime is partially taken into solution and partially removed mechanically during the scudding. A large quantity of hide substance, semi-soluble and soluble, is lost by being pressed out, but this matters little, as for dressing work, area, and not weight, is the main consideration. Theoretically the action is due to bacteria and bacterial products (organized ferments and enzymes), unorganized ferments or vegetable ferments like the yeast ferment, such as pancreadine, pepsin, &c. and chemicals, such as ammonium and calcium salts and phosphates, all of which are present in the manure. The evolved gases also play their part in the action.

Bating involves putting the goods in a wheel or paddle with hen or pigeon manure, and paddling for a few hours to 2 or 3 days. In puering, dog waste is used, which is more effective, so the process takes less time. Both bating and puering are done in warm liquids, and there are several actions involved. Practically, this process removes lime and breaks down the hair follicles and some of the interfibrillar material. This way, the goods become soft and flexible, making it easier to remove short hair, hair follicles, and other dirt by scraping with an unhairing knife on the beam. Some lime dissolves, while some is removed mechanically during scraping. A significant amount of hide material, both semi-soluble and soluble, gets lost as it is pressed out, but this is not a big deal because for dressing work, the area matters more than the weight. Theoretically, the action is caused by bacteria and their products (like organized ferments and enzymes), unorganized ferments or plant ferments such as yeast (like pancreatine and pepsin), and chemicals like ammonium and calcium salts and phosphates, all found in the manure. The gases produced also contribute to the process.

There are several bates upon the market as substitutes for dung bate. A most popular one was the American “Tiffany” bate, made by keeping a weak glue solution warm for some hours and then introducing a piece of blue cheese to start fermentation; when fermenting, glucose was added, and the bate was then ready for work. This and all other bates have been more or less supplanted by “erodin,” discovered after years of research by Mr Wood (Nottingham) and Drs Popp and Becker (Vienna). This is an artificial bate, containing the main constituents of the dung bate. It is supplied 338 in the form of a bag of nutrient material for bacteria to thrive on and a bottle of bacterial culture. The nutrient material is dissolved in water and the bacterial culture added, and after allowing the mixture to get working it is ready for use. Many tons of this bate are now being used per annum. Its advantages are: (1) that it is clean, (2) that it is under perfect control, and (3) that stains and bate burns, which so often accompany the dung bate, are absolutely absent. Bate burns are caused by not filtering the dung bate through coarse sacking before use. The accumulation of useless solid matter settles on the skins if they are not kept well in motion, causing excessive action in these places.

There are several baits on the market that serve as substitutes for dung bait. One of the most popular was the American “Tiffany” bait, which was prepared by keeping a weak glue solution warm for several hours and then adding a piece of blue cheese to start fermentation. When it began to ferment, glucose was added, and then the bait was ready to use. This and other baits have mostly been replaced by “erodin,” which was discovered after years of research by Mr. Wood (Nottingham) and Drs. Popp and Becker (Vienna). This is an artificial bait that contains the main components of dung bait. It comes in the form of a bag of nutrient material for bacteria to thrive on, along with a bottle of bacterial culture. The nutrient material is dissolved in water, the bacterial culture is added, and after letting the mixture activate, it is ready for use. Many tons of this bait are now being used each year. Its advantages are: (1) it is clean, (2) it is completely controlled, and (3) it does not cause stains or bait burns, which are often associated with dung bait. Bait burns occur when dung bait is not filtered through coarse sacking before use. The buildup of unnecessary solid matter settles on the skins if they are not kept in motion, leading to excessive action in those areas.

After pulling down the goods to a soft, silky condition by bating or puering, it is necessary, after scudding, to plump them up again and bring them into a clean and fit condition for receiving the tan. This is done by “drenching” in a bran drench. A quantity of bran is scalded and allowed to ferment. When the fermentation has reached the proper stage the goods are placed, together with the bran liquor, in a suitable pit or vat, and are allowed to remain until they have risen three times; this rising to the surface is caused by the gaseous products of the fermentation being caught by the skin. The plumping action of the bran is due to the acids produced during fermentation and also in part to the gases, and the cleansing action is due to the mechanical action of the particles of bran rubbing against the grain of the skins. After drenching, the goods are washed free from bran, and are ready for the tanning process.

After softening the materials to a smooth, silky texture through soaking or purifying, it’s important to fluff them up again and get them into a clean state for tanning. This is done by “drenching” in a bran solution. A batch of bran is boiled and left to ferment. Once fermentation reaches the right stage, the goods are placed in a suitable pit or vat along with the bran liquid and left until they rise three times; this rising happens because the gases from fermentation get trapped in the skin. The plumping effect of the bran comes from the acids produced during fermentation and partly from the gases, while the cleaning effect is due to the bran particles mechanically rubbing against the skins. After drenching, the materials are rinsed free of bran and are ready for the tanning process.

Drenching, now that all kinds of acids are available, is not so much used for heavy hides as for light skins, it being found much more convenient and cheaper to use acids. In fact, bating and puering are being gradually replaced by acid baths in the case of heavy leathers, the process being carried out as deliming for sole leather, only much more thoroughly in the case of dressing leather.

Drenching, now that various types of acids are available, is used less for heavy hides and more for lighter skins, as it’s found to be much more convenient and cost-effective to use acids. In fact, bating and puering are gradually being replaced by acid baths for heavy leathers, with the process being done similarly to deliming for sole leather, but much more thoroughly for dressing leather.

The tanning of dressing hides, which are not rounded into butts and offal, is briefly as follows. They first enter a series of colouring pits or suspenders, and then a series of handlers, by which time they should be plump and coloured through; in this condition they are split either by means of a union or band-knife splitting machine (fig. 7).

The process of tanning hides, which aren't shaped into butts and offal, goes like this. They first go into a series of coloring pits or hangers, and then through a series of handlers. By the time they finish this stage, they should be plump and fully colored. At this point, they are split using either a union or band-knife splitting machine (fig. 7).

Fig. 7.—Band Knife Splitting Machine.

This latter is the most popular machine, and consists essentially of an endless band knife a, which revolves at considerable speed with its cutting edges close to the sides of a pair of rollers through which the leather is fed and pressed against the knife. The lower of these rollers is made of short segments or rings, each separately capable of yielding so as to accommodate itself to the unequal thicknesses of various parts of a hide. The thickness of the leather to be cut is gauged to the utmost minuteness by means of the hand screws b b which raise or lower the upper roller. The knife edge of the cutter is kept keen by rubbing against revolving emery wheels c as it passes round. So delicately can this machine effect its work that slices of leather uniform throughout and as thin as paper can be easily prepared by it, and by its aid it is quite common to split hides into as many as three useful splits.

This is the most popular machine and basically consists of a continuous band knife a that spins rapidly, with its cutting edges positioned close to a pair of rollers through which the leather is fed and pressed against the knife. The lower roller is made of short segments or rings that can individually yield to fit the varying thicknesses of different parts of a hide. The thickness of the leather being cut is measured very precisely using the hand screws b b that raise or lower the upper roller. The knife edge of the cutter stays sharp by rubbing against rotating emery wheels c as it moves around. This machine can work so delicately that it can easily produce slices of leather that are uniform throughout and as thin as paper, and it's quite common to split hides into as many as three useful pieces with its help.

The dressing hides are usually split in two. Here we will leave the split (flesh) for a time and continue with the treatment of the grain. After splitting, they enter another series of handlers, are then piled up for a day or two, and thrown into a large drum with sumach mixed to a paste with hot water and a light-coloured extract. They are drummed in this for one hour to brighten and mellow the grain, washed up in tepid liquor, piled for two days, and drummed with cod oil or some other suitable oil or mixture; they are now piled for a day or two to absorb, dried out, flattened on the grain, and flesh folded.

The hides for dressing are typically split in two. For now, we'll set aside the split (flesh) and focus on processing the grain. After splitting, they go through another series of handlers, are stacked up for a day or two, and placed into a large drum with sumach that has been mixed into a paste with hot water and a light-colored extract. They are drummed in this mixture for an hour to enhance and soften the grain, rinsed in lukewarm liquid, stacked for two days, and then drummed with cod oil or another suitable oil or mixture; they are then stacked again for a day or two to soak up the oil, dried out, flattened on the grain side, and the flesh side is folded.

The splits are rinsed up in old sumach liquor and drummed with cheap extracts and adulterants, such as size, glucose, barium chloride, epsom salts, &c. after which they are piled up to drain, dried to a “sammied” condition, rolled to make firm, and dried right out.

The splits are soaked in old sumac liquid and mixed with cheap additives and fillers, like size, glucose, barium chloride, Epsom salts, etc. After that, they are stacked to drain, dried to a “sammied” state, rolled to make them firm, and thoroughly dried.

In the dressing hide tannage very mellow materials are used. Gambier and myrobalans form the main body of the tannage, together with a little quebracho extract, mimosa bark, sumach and extracts.

In the leather treatment process, very soft materials are used for tanning. Gambier and myrobalans are the primary components of the tanning mixture, along with a small amount of quebracho extract, mimosa bark, sumac, and other extracts.

Upper Leather.—Under the head of upper leather are included the thin, soft and pliable leathers, which find their principal, but by no means exclusive, application in making the uppers of boots and shoes, which may be taken as a type of a class of leathers. They are made from such skins as East Indian kips, light cow and horse hides, thin split hides, such as those described under dressing leather, but split rather thinner, and calf. The preparatory dressing of such skins and the tanning operations do not differ essentially from those already described. In proportion to the thinness of the skin treated, the processes are more rapidly finished and less complex, the tannage is a little lighter, heavy materials such as valonia being used sparsely if at all. Generally speaking, the goods have a longer and mellower liming and bating, the lime being more thoroughly removed than for the leathers previously described, to produce greater pliability, and everything must tend in this direction. The heavier hides and kips are split as described under dressing leather, and then tanned right out.

Upper Leather.—Upper leather includes the thin, soft, and flexible leathers that are mainly used, but not exclusively, for making the tops of boots and shoes, which represent a type of this class of leathers. These leathers come from skins like East Indian kips, lightweight cow and horse hides, thin split hides, as detailed under dressing leather but split even thinner, and calf. The initial dressing of these skins and the tanning process are not significantly different from what has been described earlier. As the skin becomes thinner, the processes are completed more quickly and are simpler; the tanning is somewhat lighter, with heavy materials like valonia used sparingly, if at all. Generally, these goods undergo a longer and gentler liming and bating process, with lime being removed more thoroughly than for the previously mentioned leathers to enhance pliability, all efforts directed toward this goal. The thicker hides and kips are split as outlined under dressing leather and then tanned fully.

Currying of the Lighter Leathers.—The duty of the currier is not solely directed towards heavier leathers; he is also entrusted with the dressing and fitting of the lighter leathers for the shoemaker, coachbuilder, saddler, &c. He has to pare the leather down and reduce inequalities in thickness, to impregnate it with fatty matter in order to render it soft and pliable, and to give it such a surface dressing, colour and finish as will please the eye and suit the purposes of its consumers. The fact that machinery is used by some curriers for nearly every mechanical operation, while others adhere to the manual system, renders it almost impossible to give in brief an outline of operations which will be consistent with any considerable number of curriers.

Currying of the Lighter Leathers.—The job of the currier isn't just focused on heavier leathers; they are also responsible for preparing and fitting lighter leathers for shoemakers, coachbuilders, saddlers, etc. They need to trim the leather to reduce thickness variations, infuse it with fatty substances to make it soft and flexible, and provide a surface treatment, color, and finish that are visually appealing and suitable for the consumers' needs. The fact that some curriers use machinery for almost every mechanical task while others stick to traditional hand methods makes it nearly impossible to provide a brief overview of procedures that would apply to a significant number of curriers.

Fig 8.—Currying Knife.

The following may be taken as a typical modern dressing of waxed calf or waxed kips. The goods are first of all soaked down and brought to a “sammied” condition for shaving. In the better-class leathers hand-shaving is still adhered to, as it is maintained that the drag of the shaving machine on the leather causes the “nap” finish to be coarser. Hand-shaving is carried out on a beam or strong frame of wood, supporting a stout plank faced with lignum vitae, and set vertically, or nearly so. The knife (fig. 8) is a double-edged rectangular blade about 12 in. by 5 in., girded on either side along its whole length and down the centre with two bars 3 in. wide, leaving each blade protruding 1 in. beyond them; it has a straight handle at one end and a cross handle at the other in the plane of the blade. The edges of this knife are first made very keen, and are then turned over so as to form a wire edge, by means of the thicker of the two straight steel tools shown in fig. 9. The wire edge is preserved by drawing the thinner of the two steel tools along the interior angle of the wire edge and then along the outside of the turnover edge. The skin being thrown flesh uppermost over the vertical beam, the shaver presses his body against it, and leaning over the top holds the knife by its two handles almost at right angles to the leather, and proceeds to shave it by a scraping stroke downwards which the wire edge, being set at right angles to the knife and almost parallel with the skin, turns into a cut. The skin is shifted so as to bring all parts under the action of the knife, the shaver frequently passing a fold between his finger to test the progress of his work. After shaving, the goods are thoroughly soaked, allowed to drip, and are ready for “scouring.” This operation has for its object the removal of bloom (ellagic acid) and any other superfluous adherent matter. The scouring solution consists of a weak solution of soft soap and borax. This is first well brushed into the flesh of the leather, which is then “sleeked” (slicked) out with a steel slicker shown at S fig. 9. The upper part 339 of the “slicker” is wooden, and into it a steel, stone, brass or vulcanite blade is forced and fastened. The wooden part is grasped in both hands, and the blade is half rubbed and half scraped over the surface of the leather in successive strokes, the angle of the slicker being a continuation of the angle which the thrust out arms of the worker form with the body, perhaps 30° to 45°, with the leather, depending upon the pressure to be applied. The soap and borax solution is continually dashed on the leather to supply a body for the removal of the bloom with the steel slicker. The hide is now turned, and the grain is scoured with a stone slicker and brush, with soap and borax solution, it is then rinsed up, and sent to dry; when sammied, it is “set” i.e. the grain is laid smooth with a brass or steel slicker and dried right out. It is now ready for “stuffing,” which is invariably done in the drum with a mixture of stearine and “sod” oil, to which is sometimes added cod oil and wool fat; it is then set out on the grain and “canked” on the flesh, the grain side is glassed, and the leather dried right out. The goods are now “rounded,” i.e. the lighter coloured parts of the grain are damped with a mixture of dubbin and water to bring them to even colour, and are then laid in pile for a few days to mellow, when they are ready for whitening. The goods are damped down and got to the right temper with a weak soap and water solution, and are then “whitened,” an operation similar to shaving, carried out with a turned edge slicker. By this means a fine flesh surface is obtained upon which to finish by waxing; after this they are “boarded” with an arm board (R, fig. 9) to bring up the grain, or give a granular appearance to the leather and make it supple, when they may be turned flesh inwards and bruised, a similar operation to graining, essentially to soften and make them pliant. At this stage the goods are known as “finished russet,” and are stored until ready for waxing.

The following can be seen as a typical modern treatment of waxed calf or waxed kips. The materials are first soaked and brought to a “sammied” state for shaving. In higher-quality leathers, hand-shaving is still preferred because it's believed that the shaving machine creates a coarser “nap” finish on the leather. Hand-shaving is done on a sturdy wooden beam or frame, supporting a thick plank faced with lignum vitae, positioned vertically, or nearly so. The knife (fig. 8) is a double-edged rectangular blade about 12 inches by 5 inches, reinforced on both sides along its entire length and down the center with two 3-inch wide bars, allowing each blade to extend 1 inch beyond them; it has a straight handle at one end and a cross handle at the other along the plane of the blade. The edges of this knife are sharpened, then turned over to create a wire edge, using the thicker of the two straight steel tools shown in fig. 9. The wire edge is maintained by dragging the thinner of the two steel tools along the inner angle of the wire edge and then along the outside of the turned edge. The skin is laid flesh side up over the vertical beam, the shaver presses their body against it, leaning over the top while holding the knife by its two handles almost at a right angle to the leather, and proceeds to shave it by making a downward scraping stroke that the wire edge, positioned at right angles to the knife and nearly parallel to the skin, turns into a cut. The skin is shifted to bring all parts under the knife's action, with the shaver frequently passing a fold between their fingers to check the progress. After shaving, the materials are soaked thoroughly, left to drip, and are prepared for “scouring.” This step aims to remove bloom (ellagic acid) and any other unnecessary residue. The scouring solution is a weak mix of soft soap and borax. This is thoroughly brushed into the flesh of the leather, which is then “sleeked” with a steel slicker shown at S fig. 9. The upper part of the “slicker” is wooden, into which a blade made of steel, stone, brass, or vulcanite is inserted and secured. The wooden portion is held with both hands, and the blade is rubbed and scraped over the leather's surface in successive strokes, with the angle of the slicker matching the angle between the arms of the worker and their body, perhaps 30° to 45°, depending on the pressure applied. The soap and borax solution is continually splashed onto the leather to help remove the bloom with the steel slicker. The hide is then turned, and the grain is scoured with a stone slicker and brush, using the soap and borax solution; it is then rinsed and left to dry. Once it is in a “sammied” condition, it is “set,” meaning the grain is smoothed out with a brass or steel slicker and dried completely. It is now ready for “stuffing,” usually done in a drum with a mix of stearine and “sod” oil, sometimes including cod oil and wool fat; it is then applied to the grain side and “canked” on the flesh side, with the grain side being glassed, and the leather dried thoroughly. The goods are now “rounded,” which means the lighter-colored areas of the grain are damped with a mixture of dubbin and water to achieve an even color, and then they are stacked for a few days to mellow, after which they are ready for whitening. The items are dampened and brought to the right temperature with a weak soap and water solution before being “whitened,” a step similar to shaving, done with a turned edge slicker. This process creates a fine flesh surface ideal for finishing with wax; afterward, they are “boarded” with an arm board (R, fig. 9) to enhance the grain or give the leather a granular look and make it supple, at which point they may be turned flesh side in and bruised, similar to graining, to soften them and make them flexible. At this stage, the goods are referred to as “finished russet,” and are stored until they are ready for waxing.

Fig 9.—Currying Apparatus. C, pommel; R, raising board; S, slicker.

For waxing, the first operation is to black the goods. In England this is generally done by hand, but machinery is much more used in the United States. The process consists of well brushing into the flesh side of the skins a black preparation made in one of two ways. The older recipe is a mixture of lampblack, oil and perhaps a little tallow; the newer recipe consists of soap, lampblack, logwood extract and water. Either of these is brushed well into the flesh side, which is then glassed up by means of a thick slab of glass, the smooth rounded edges being used with a slicking motion, and the goods are hung up to dry. When dry they are oiled with cod oil, and are ready for sizing. Goods blacked with soap blacking are sized once, those prepared with oil blacking are sized twice. The size used for soap black skins may consist of a mixture of beeswax, pitch, linseed oil, tallow, soap, glue and logwood extract. For oil blacked skins the “bottom sizing” may be glue, soap, logwood extract and water, after the application of which the goods are dried and the “top sizing” applied; this consists of glue, cod oil, beeswax, tallow, venice turps, black dye and water. The sizings having been applied with a sponge or soft brush, thoroughly rubbed in with a glass slicker, crush marks are removed by padding with a soft leather pad, and the goods, after being dried out, are ready for the market.

For waxing, the first step is to black the goods. In England, this is usually done by hand, but machines are more commonly used in the United States. The process involves brushing a black preparation into the flesh side of the skins, made in one of two ways. The older recipe is a mix of lampblack, oil, and maybe a little tallow; the newer recipe includes soap, lampblack, logwood extract, and water. Either one is brushed well into the flesh side, which is then smoothed out using a thick slab of glass, with the smooth rounded edges applied in a slicking motion, and the goods are hung up to dry. Once dry, they are oiled with cod oil and are ready for sizing. Goods treated with soap blacking are sized once, while those prepared with oil blacking are sized twice. The sizing for soap black skins may consist of a mix of beeswax, pitch, linseed oil, tallow, soap, glue, and logwood extract. For oil blacked skins, the "bottom sizing" can be glue, soap, logwood extract, and water, which is applied before the goods are dried and the "top sizing" is applied; this consists of glue, cod oil, beeswax, tallow, Venice turps, black dye, and water. After the sizings are applied with a sponge or soft brush and thoroughly rubbed in with a glass slicker, crush marks are removed by padding with a soft leather pad, and once dried out, the goods are ready for the market.

In the dressing of waxed grain leathers, such as French calf, satin leather, &c., the preparatory processes are much the same as for waxed leathers described above as far as stuffing, after which the grain is prepared to take the colour by light hand scouring with weak soap and borax solution. The dye is now applied, and so that it may take well on the grain of the greasy leather, a quantity of either soap, turkey red oil or methylated spirit is added to the solution. Acid colours are preferably used, and three coats are given to the dry leather, which is then grained with an arm board, and finished by the application of hard buck tallow to the grain and brushing. The dye or stain may consist of aniline colours for coloured leathers, or, in the case of blacks, consecutive applications of logwood and iron solutions are given.

In the treatment of waxed grain leathers, like French calf and satin leather, the initial steps are similar to those for waxed leathers mentioned earlier, particularly in the stuffing process. After that, the grain is prepared to absorb the color by gently scouring it with a weak soap and borax solution. Next, the dye is applied, and to ensure it adheres well to the grain of the oily leather, a bit of soap, turkey red oil, or methylated spirit is added to the mixture. Acid dyes are recommended, and three coats are applied to the dry leather. Then, the leather is grained using an arm board and finished with hard buck tallow applied to the grain, followed by brushing. The dye or stain can consist of aniline dyes for colored leathers, or, for black leathers, multiple applications of logwood and iron solutions are used.

Finishing dressing Hides for Bag and Portmanteau Work.—The hides as received from the tanner are soaked down, piled to sammy, and shaved, generally by machine, after which they are scoured, as under waxed leather, sumached and hung up to dry; when just damp they are set out with a brass slicker and dried right out. The grain is now filled by applying a solution of either Irish moss, linseed mucilage or any other mucilaginous filling material, and the flesh is sized with a mixture of mucilage and French chalk, after which the goods are brush-stained with an aniline dye, to which has been added linseed mucilage to give it body; two coats are applied to the sammied leather. When the goods have sammied, after the last coat of stain, they are “printed” with a brass roller in a “jigger,” or by means of a machine embosser. This process consists of imprinting the grain by pressure from a brass roller, on which the pattern is deeply etched. After printing, the flesh side is sponged with a weak milk solution, lightly glassed and dried, when the grain is sponged with weak linseed mucilage, almost dried, and brushed by machine. The hides are now finished, by the application either of pure buck tallow or of a mixture of carnauba wax and soap; this is rubbed up into a slight gloss with a flannel.

Finishing dressing Hides for Bag and Portmanteau Work.—The hides received from the tanner are soaked, stacked to sammy, and shaved, usually by machine. After that, they are cleaned like waxed leather, sumached, and hung up to dry. When they are just damp, they are flattened with a brass slicker and fully dried. The grain is then filled by applying a solution of Irish moss, linseed mucilage, or any other thick filling material. The flesh side is treated with a mix of mucilage and French chalk, after which the goods are brush-stained with an aniline dye mixed with linseed mucilage to add body; two coats are applied to the sammied leather. Once the goods have been sammied after the last coat of stain, they are “printed” with a brass roller in a “jigger” or with a machine embosser. This process involves pressing the grain using a brass roller that has a deeply etched pattern. After printing, the flesh side is sponged with a weak milk solution, lightly polished, and dried. Then, the grain is sponged with weak linseed mucilage, almost dried, and brushed by machine. The hides are finished by applying either pure buck tallow or a mixture of carnauba wax and soap, which is then rubbed to a slight gloss with a flannel.

Light Leathers.—So far only the heavier leathers have been dealt with; we will now proceed to discuss lighter calf, goat, sheep, seal, &c.

Light Leathers.—So far, we've only talked about the heavier leathers; now we will move on to discuss lighter calf, goat, sheep, seal, etc.

In tanning light leathers everything must tend towards suppleness and pliability in the finished leather, in contrast to the firmness and solidity required in heavy leathers. Consequently, the liming is longer and mellower; puering, bating or some bacterial substitute always follows; the tannage is much shorter; and mellow materials are used. A deposition of bloom in the goods is not often required, so that very soon after they are struck through they are removed as tanned. The materials largely used are sumach, oak bark, gambier, myrobalans, mimosa bark, willow, birch and larch barks.

In tanning light leathers, everything should focus on making the finished leather flexible and soft, in contrast to the firmness and durability needed for heavy leathers. As a result, the liming process is longer and gentler; after that, methods like puering, bating, or some bacterial alternative are always used; the tanning process is much shorter; and softer materials are employed. A bloom deposit in the products is rarely necessary, so they are usually taken out right after tanning. The main materials used include sumach, oak bark, gambier, myrobalans, mimosa bark, as well as willow, birch, and larch barks.

As with heavy leathers, so also with light leathers, there are various ways of tanning; and quality has much to do with the elaboration or modification of the methods employed. The tanning of all leathers will be dealt with first, dyeing and finishing operations being treated later.

As with heavy leathers, there are also various methods for tanning light leathers, and the quality greatly depends on how these methods are developed or adjusted. The tanning process for all types of leather will be discussed first, while dyeing and finishing processes will be covered later.

The vegetable-tanned leather de luxe is a bottle-tanned skin. It is superior to every other class of vegetable-tanned leather in every way, but owing to competition not a great deal is now produced, as it is perhaps the most expensive leather ever put on the market. The method of preparation is as follows.

The vegetable-tanned leather de luxe is a bottle-tanned skin. It is better than any other type of vegetable-tanned leather in every way, but due to competition, not much is produced now, as it might be the most expensive leather ever sold. The preparation process is as follows.

Fig. 10.—Dash Wheel.

The skins are usually hard and dry when received, so they are at once soaked down, and when sufficiently soft are either milled in the stocks, drummed in a lattice drum (American dash wheel, fig. 10), or “broken down” over the beam by working on the flesh with a blunt unhairing knife. They are next mellow limed (about 3 weeks), sulphide being used if convenient, unhaired and fleshed as described under heavy leathers, and are then ready for puering. This process is carried through at about 80° F., when the goods are worked on the beam, rinsed, drenched in a bran drench, scudded, and are ready for tanning. The skins are now folded down the centre of the back from neck to butt (tail end), flesh outwards, and the edges are tightly stitched all round to form bags, leaving an aperture at one of the shanks for filling; they are now turned grain outwards and filled with strong sumach liquor and some quantity of solid sumach to fill up the interstices and prevent leakage, after which the open shank is tied up, and they are thrown into warm sumach liquor, where they float about like so many pigs, being continually pushed under the surface with a dole. When struck through they are piled on a shelf above the vat, and by their own weight the liquor is forced through the skins. The tannage takes about 24 hours, and when finished the stitching is ripped up, the skins are slicked out, “strained” on frames and dried. “Straining” consists of nailing the skins out on boards in a stretched condition, or the stretching in frames by means of strings laced in the edge of the frame and attached to the edge of the skin.

The skins usually arrive hard and dry, so they are soaked immediately. Once they’re soft enough, they are either milled in the stocks, drummed in a lattice drum (American dash wheel, fig. 10), or “broken down” over the beam by working on the flesh with a blunt unhairing knife. Next, they are mellow limed (about 3 weeks), using sulphide if it’s convenient, unhaired and fleshed as described under heavy leathers, and then they are ready for puering. This process is done at around 80° F., where the goods are worked on the beam, rinsed, drenched in a bran drench, scudded, and prepared for tanning. The skins are now folded down the center of the back from neck to tail, flesh side out, and the edges are tightly stitched all around to form bags, leaving an opening at one of the shanks for filling; they are then turned grain side out and filled with a strong sumach liquor and some solid sumach to fill in the gaps and prevent leakage. After that, the open shank is tied up, and they are thrown into warm sumach liquor, where they float around like pigs, being continuously pushed under the surface with a stick. When they are thoroughly soaked, they are stacked on a shelf above the vat, and their own weight forces the liquor through the skins. Tanning takes about 24 hours, and when it’s done, the stitching is ripped out, the skins are slicked out, “strained” on frames, and dried. “Straining” means nailing the skins out on boards in a stretched position, or stretching them in frames using strings laced through the edges of the frame and attached to the edges of the skin.

The commoner sumach-tanned skins (but still of very good quality) are tanned in paddle wheels, a series of three being most 340 conveniently used in the same manner as the three-pit system of liming, each wheel having three packs of skins through it before being thrown away. This paddling tends to make a bolder grain, as the skins are kept in continual motion, and work over one another. Some manufacturers finish the tannage with a mixture of sumach and oak bark; this treatment yields a less porous product. Others, when the skins are strained and in a semi-dry condition, apply neatsfoot or other oil, or a mixture of glycerine and oil, to the grain to lubricate it and make it more supple; the glycerine mixture is generally used for “chrome” leather, and will be discussed later under that head.

The typical sumach-tanned hides (which are still of very good quality) are processed in paddle wheels, with a set of three being most conveniently used like the three-pit liming system, where each wheel has three batches of hides processed through it before being discarded. This paddling helps create a more pronounced grain since the hides are kept in constant motion and move over each other. Some manufacturers finish the tanning process with a mix of sumach and oak bark; this combination results in a less porous product. Others, when the hides are strained and still semi-dry, apply neatsfoot oil or a blend of glycerin and oil to the grain to soften it and make it more flexible; the glycerin mixture is typically used for "chrome" leather, which will be addressed later in that section.

The skins tanned as above are largely dressed as morocco. Originally “morocco” was produced by the Moors in southern Spain and Morocco, whence the industry spread to the Levant, Turkey and the Mediterranean coast of Africa generally, where the leather was made from a species of sumach. Peculiarly enough, the dyeing was carried out before the tanning, with Roman alum as “mordant” and kermes, which with the alum produced a fine red colour. Such leather was peculiarly clear in colour, elastic and soft, yet firm and fine in grain and texture, and has long been much prized for bindings, being the material in which most of the artistic work of the 16th-century binders was executed. Now, in addition to the genuine morocco made from goat skins, we have imitation or French moroccos, for which split calf and especially sheep skins are employed, and as the appearance of morocco is the result of the style of graining and finish, which can now be imitated by printing or embossing machines, morocco can be made from all varieties of thin leather.

The skins tanned as mentioned above are mainly finished as morocco. Originally, “morocco” was made by the Moors in southern Spain and Morocco, from where the industry spread to the Levant, Turkey, and the Mediterranean coast of Africa, where the leather was produced from a type of sumach. Interestingly, the dyeing was done before tanning, using Roman alum as a “mordant” and kermes, which combined with the alum created a rich red color. This leather was particularly clear in color, elastic and soft, yet firm and fine in grain and texture, and has been highly valued for bindings, as it was the material used for most of the artistic work by 16th-century binders. Now, besides the genuine morocco made from goat skins, we also have imitation or French moroccos, which use split calf and especially sheep skins. Since the look of morocco comes from the style of graining and finishing, which can now be replicated with printing or embossing machines, morocco can be produced from all kinds of thin leather.

Great quantities of “Persian” (East India tanned) sheep and goat are now dressed as moroccos and for innumerable other purposes, the method being as follows: The goods are tanned with turwar bark and cassia bark, besides being impregnated with sesame oil, even to the extent of 30%. The first operation is to “strip” them of the oil and original tannage as far as possible, by drumming in a solution of soda; the soap thus formed is got rid of by thoroughly washing the goods, when they are “soured” in a weak bath of sulphuric acid to brighten the colour and remove iron stains, after which they are washed up and re-tanned by drumming in warm sumach, allowing about 4 oz. per skin. They are then slicked out, dried and are ready for dyeing.

Large amounts of “Persian” (East India tanned) sheep and goat skins are now processed as moroccos and for countless other uses, with the process being as follows: The skins are tanned using turwar bark and cassia bark, and also infused with sesame oil, sometimes up to 30%. The first step is to “strip” them of the oil and original tanning as much as possible by drumming them in a solution of soda; the soap formed is removed by thoroughly washing the skins, after which they are “soured” in a weak solution of sulfuric acid to enhance the color and eliminate iron stains. Then, they are washed again and re-tanned by drumming in warm sumach, using about 4 oz. per skin. Finally, they are slicked out, dried, and ready for dyeing.

The tanning of sheep and lamb skins differs very essentially from the tanning of goat and other leathers, mainly in the preparatory processes. As the wool is completely destroyed by lime, other methods have to be resorted to. The process usually practised is known as “sweating”; this consists of hanging the moist skins up in a warm, badly-ventilated chamber and allowing incipient putrefaction to set in. The chamber is always kept warm and saturated with moisture, either by means of a steam jet or water sprinklers. During the process large quantities of ammoniacal vapours are given off, and after two or three days the skins become slimy to the touch, and the wool slips easily; at this stage the goods are removed, for if the putrefaction goes too far the grain of the skin is irretrievably ruined. The wool is now “pulled” by pullers, who throw it into bins arranged to receive the different qualities; for one pelt may have three different grades of wool on it.

The tanning of sheep and lamb skins is quite different from the tanning of goat and other leathers, primarily because of the preparatory processes involved. Since lime completely destroys the wool, alternative methods must be used. The commonly used process is called "sweating"; this involves hanging the damp skins in a warm, poorly ventilated room and allowing early stages of decay to begin. The room is kept warm and humid, either by using steam jets or water sprinklers. During this process, large amounts of ammonia vapors are released, and after two or three days, the skins become slimy to the touch, and the wool easily comes off; at this stage, the materials are taken down because if the decay goes too far, the texture of the skin will be permanently damaged. The wool is then "pulled" by workers, who sort it into bins designated for different quality levels, as one skin might have three different grades of wool on it.

Other methods of dewooling are to paint the flesh with a solution of sodium sulphide, or cream of lime made with a solution of sodium sulphide; in either case the goods are piled flesh to flesh for an hour or so, and care is taken that the dewooling agent does not touch the wool. The pelt is then pulled and rapidly swilled in a stream of running water. The goods are now, in some yards, lightly limed to plump them superficially, by paddling in a milk of lime, and at this stage, or when the goods have been “struck through” with tan liquor, they are “degreased” either by hydraulic pressure or by benzene degreasing. This is to expel the oleaginous or fatty matter with which sheep skins are richly impregnated; the average yield is about 4 oz. per skin. The tannage is carried out in much the same way as for goat skins, the goods being started in old acid bark liquors; the general tannage consists of sumach and bark.

Other ways to remove wool are to coat the skin with a solution of sodium sulfide or a lime cream made with sodium sulfide; in either case, the skins are stacked flesh to flesh for about an hour, making sure that the wool isn't in contact with the dewooling agent. The pelt is then pulled and quickly rinsed in running water. In some places, the skins are lightly limed to puff them up superficially by mixing them in a lime solution, and at this point, or when the skins have been completely infused with the tanning solution, they are "degreased" either by hydraulic pressure or with benzene. This process removes the oily or fatty substances that sheep skins are heavily saturated with; the average yield is about 4 ounces per skin. The tanning process is similar to that of goat skins, starting with old acidic bark solutions; the main tanning agents are sumac and bark.

Basils are sheep skins tanned in various ways. English basils are tanned with oak bark, although, as in all other leathers, inferior tannages are now common; Scotch basils are tanned with larch bark, Australian and New Zealand basils with mimosa bark and Turkish basils with galls. The last are the commonest kind of skins imported into Great Britain, and are usually only semi-tanned. Roans are sumach-tanned sheep skins.

Basils are sheep skins that are tanned in different ways. English basils are tanned using oak bark, although, as with all other leathers, lower-quality tanning methods are now common; Scotch basils are tanned with larch bark, and Australian and New Zealand basils are tanned with mimosa bark, while Turkish basils are tanned with galls. The latter are the most commonly imported skins into Great Britain and are usually only partially tanned. Roans are sheep skins tanned with sumach.

Skivers are the grain splits of sheep skins, the fleshes of which are finished for chamois leather. The goods are split in the limed state, just as the grains are ready for tanning, and are subsequently treated much as sumach-tanned goat skins, or in any other convenient way; the fleshes, on the other hand, go back into the limes, as it is necessary to get a large quantity of lime into leather which is to be finished as chamois.

Skivers are the grain splits of sheep skins, which are processed for chamois leather. The materials are split while they are limed, just as the grains are ready for tanning, and are then treated similarly to sumach-tanned goat skins, or in any other suitable method; the fleshes, however, go back into the limes, as it's important to infuse a significant amount of lime into leather that's going to be finished as chamois.

Russia Leather was originally a speciality of Russia, where it was made from the hides of young cattle, and dressed either a brownish red or black colour for upper leather, bookbinding, dressing-cases, purses, &c. It is now made throughout Europe and America, the best qualities being obtained from Austria. The empyreumatic odour of the old genuine “Russia” leather was derived from a long-continued contact with willow and the bark of the white birch, which contains the odorous betulin oil. Horse hides, calf, goat, sheep skins and even splits are now dressed as “Russia leather,” but most of these are of a decidedly inferior quality, and as they are merely treated with birch bark oil to give them something of the odour by which Russia leather is ordinarily recognized, they scarcely deserve the name under which they pass. The present-day genuine Russia leather is tanned like other light leathers, but properly in willow bark, although poplar and spruce fir barks are used. After tanning and setting out the goods are treated with the empyreumatic oil obtained by the dry distillation of birch bark. The red colour commonly seen in Russia leather is now produced by aniline colours, but was originally gained by the application of an infusion of Brazil wood, which was rubbed over the grain with a brush or sponge. Some time ago Russia leather got into disrepute because of its rapid decay; this was owing to its being dyed with a very acid solution of tin salts and cochineal, the acid completely destroying the leather in a year or two. The black leather is obtained by staining with logwood infusion and iron acetate. The leather, if genuine quality, is very watertight and strong, and owing to its impregnation with the empyreumatic oil, it wards off the attacks of insects.

Russia Leather was originally a specialty of Russia, made from the hides of young cattle, and finished in either a brownish-red or black color for use in upper leather, bookbinding, dressing cases, purses, etc. It is now produced throughout Europe and America, with the best quality coming from Austria. The distinctive smell of the old authentic “Russia” leather came from prolonged contact with willow and the bark of the white birch, which contains the aromatic betulin oil. Nowadays, horse hides, calf skins, goat skins, sheep skins, and even splits are labeled as “Russia leather,” but most of these are of noticeably inferior quality. They are simply treated with birch bark oil to mimic the fragrance typically associated with Russia leather, so they hardly deserve the name they carry. Today's genuine Russia leather is tanned like other light leathers, but correctly using willow bark, although poplar and spruce fir barks are also utilized. After tanning, the goods are treated with the empyreumatic oil obtained from the dry distillation of birch bark. The red color commonly seen in Russia leather is now produced with aniline dyes, but it was originally achieved with an infusion of Brazil wood, which was applied to the grain with a brush or sponge. Not long ago, Russia leather fell out of favor because it deteriorated quickly; this was due to it being dyed with a highly acidic solution of tin salts and cochineal, which would completely break down the leather in a year or two. The black leather is achieved by staining with logwood infusion and iron acetate. If of genuine quality, the leather is highly waterproof and strong, and because it is infused with the empyreumatic oil, it repels insect damage.

Seal Leathers, &c.—The tannage of seal skins is now an important department of the leather industry of the United Kingdom. The skins form one of the items of the whaling industry which principally centres in Dundee, and at that port, as well as at Hull and Peterhead, they are received in large quantities from the Arctic regions. This skin is that of the white hair seal, and must not be confused with the expensive seal fur obtained from Russian and Japanese waters. These white hair seal skins are light but exceedingly close in texture, yielding a very strong tough leather of large area and fine bold grain, known as Levant morocco. The area of the skins renders them suitable for upholstery work, and the flesh splits are dressed in considerable quantity for “japanned” (“patent”) leather and “bolsters,” which are used to grain other skins on, the raised buff affording a grip on the skin being grained and thus preventing slipping. When the skins arrive in the tanyard (generally lightly salted) they are drummed in old drench liquors until soft, dipped into warm water and “blubbered” with a sharp knife; they are then alternately dipped in warm water and drummed several times to remove fat, after which they are heavily limed, as they are still very greasy, and after unhairing and fleshing they are heavily puered for the same reason. The tannage takes about a month, and is much the same as for other leathers, the skins being split when “struck through.”

Seal Leathers, &c.—The tanning of seal skins is now a significant part of the leather industry in the United Kingdom. These skins are one of the products of the whaling industry, mainly centered in Dundee, where they, along with large quantities from the Arctic regions, are also received at Hull and Peterhead. The skins come from the white hair seal and should not be mistaken for the expensive seal fur sourced from Russian and Japanese waters. These white hair seal skins are lightweight yet extremely dense, producing a very strong and tough leather known as Levant morocco, which has a large surface area and a bold grain. Their size makes them suitable for upholstery work, and the flesh splits are processed in significant quantities for “japanned” (“patent”) leather and “bolsters,” which help provide traction when graining other skins, preventing slipping. When the skins arrive at the tannery (usually lightly salted), they are placed in old soaking liquors until soft, dipped in warm water, and “blubbered” with a sharp knife. They are then alternately dipped in warm water and drum-treated several times to remove fat, after which they are heavily limed due to being very greasy, and following unhairing and fleshing, they are extensively puered for the same reason. The tanning process takes about a month and is quite similar to that of other leathers, with the skins being split when “struck through.”

Alligator leather is now produced to some extent both in the United States and India. The belly and flanks alone are useful. There are no special tanneries or processes for dressing the skins. Layers are not given. The leather is used mostly for small fancy goods, and is much imitated on sheepskin by embossing.

Alligator leather is now produced to some extent in both the United States and India. The belly and flanks are the only useful parts. There are no specialized tanneries or processes for treating the skins. Layers are not applied. The leather is primarily used for small luxury goods, and its look is often imitated on sheepskin by embossing.

Snake and frog skins are also dressed to some extent, the latter having formed a considerable item in the exports of Japan; they are dressed mostly for cigar cases and pocket books. The general procedure is first to lime the goods and then to remove any scales (in the case of snake skins) by scraping with an unhairing knife on a small beam, after which the skins are bated and tanned in sumach by paddling.

Snake and frog skins are also processed to some extent, with the latter making up a significant portion of Japan's exports; they are mainly used for cigar cases and wallets. The typical process begins with liming the skins, followed by scraping off any scales (in the case of snake skins) using a unhairing knife on a small beam. After this, the skins are bated and tanned in sumach by paddling.

A considerable amount of leather is now produced in Australia from the skins of kangaroo, wallaby and other marsupials. These skins are both tanned and “tawed,” the principal tanning agents being mimosa bark, mallet bark and sugar bush, which abound in Australia. The leather produced is of excellent quality, strong and pliable, and rivals in texture and appearance the kid of Europe; but the circumstance that the animals exist only in the wild state renders them a limited and insecure source of leather.

A significant amount of leather is now made in Australia from the skins of kangaroos, wallabies, and other marsupials. These skins are both tanned and “tawed,” with the main tanning agents being mimosa bark, mallet bark, and sugar bush, which are plentiful in Australia. The leather produced is of excellent quality, strong and flexible, and rivals the texture and appearance of European kid leather; however, the fact that these animals exist only in the wild makes them a limited and unreliable source of leather.

341

341

Japan and Enamel Leathers.—Japanning is usually done on flesh splits, whereas enamelling is done on the grain, and if splits are used they are printed and boarded. The leather should be mellow, soft, free from grease, with a firm grain and no inclination to stretch. It is first shaved very smooth, thoroughly scoured with a stone, sumached, washed, slicked out tight and dried; when “sammied,” the grain is buffed to remove scratches and oiled, the goods are then whitened or fluffed, and if too hard, bruised by boarding; enamel goods are now grained. The skins are now tightly nailed on boards and any holes patched up with brown paper, so that the japan shall not touch the flesh when the first thick coat of japan or the “daub” is put on. This is applied so thickly that it cannot soak in, with fine-toothed slicker, and then placed in a hot stove for twenty-four hours until quite dry; the coating is then pumiced smooth and the second thinner coat, termed “blanback,” is applied. This is dried and pumiced, and a fine coating of japan or copal varnish is finally given. This is dried and cooled, and if the goods are for enamel they are boarded.

Japan and Enamel Leathers.—Japanning is typically done on flesh splits, while enameling is done on the grain. If splits are used, they are printed and boarded. The leather should be soft, free from grease, have a firm grain, and not be prone to stretching. It is first shaved very smooth, thoroughly cleaned with a stone, treated with sumac, washed, tightly slicked out, and dried. When “sammied,” the grain is buffed to remove scratches and oiled; then, the goods are whitened or fluffed, and if they are too hard, they are bruised by boarding. Enamel goods are now grained. The skins are tightly nailed to boards, and any holes are patched with brown paper to ensure the japan doesn’t touch the flesh when the first thick coat of japan, known as the “daub,” is applied. This layer is put on thickly so it doesn’t soak in, using a fine-toothed slicker, and then placed in a hot stove for twenty-four hours until completely dry. The coating is then pumiced smooth, and a thinner second coat, called “blanback,” is applied. This is dried and pumiced, and finally, a fine coating of japan or copal varnish is added. This is then dried and cooled, and if the goods are for enamel, they are boarded.

English japans sometimes contain light petroleum, but no turps. The secret of successful japanning lies in the age of the oil used; the older the linseed oil is, the better the result. To prepare the ground coat, boil 10 gallons linseed oil for one hour with 2 ℔ litharge at 600° F. to jellify the oil, and then add 2 ℔ prussian blue and boil the whole for half an hour longer. Before application the mixture is thinned with 10 gallons light petroleum. For the second coat, boil 10 gallons linseed oil for 2 hours with 2 ℔ prussian blue and 2 ℔ lampblack; when of a thin jelly consistency thin with 5 gallons of benzine or light petroleum. For the finishing coat, boil 5 gallons of linseed oil for 1 hour, then add 1 ℔ prussian blue, and boil for another hour; thin with 10 gallons petroleum and apply with a brush in a warm room. After drying, the goods are mellowed by exposure to the sun for at least three days.

English japans sometimes contain light petroleum, but no turpentine. The key to successful japanning is the age of the oil used; the older the linseed oil, the better the result. To prepare the ground coat, boil 10 gallons of linseed oil for one hour with 2 pounds of litharge at 600° F to jellify the oil, then add 2 pounds of Prussian blue and continue boiling the mixture for another half hour. Before applying, thin the mixture with 10 gallons of light petroleum. For the second coat, boil 10 gallons of linseed oil for 2 hours with 2 pounds of Prussian blue and 2 pounds of lampblack; when it reaches a thin jelly consistency, thin with 5 gallons of benzine or light petroleum. For the finishing coat, boil 5 gallons of linseed oil for 1 hour, then add 1 pound of Prussian blue and boil for another hour; thin with 10 gallons of petroleum and apply with a brush in a warm room. After drying, the items are softened by exposure to the sun for at least three days.

Tawing.—Wool rugs are, after the preliminary processes, sometimes tanned in oak bark liquors by paddling, but are generally “tawed,” that is, dressed with alum and salt, and are therefore more suitably dealt with under that head. Tawing implies that the conversion of skins into leather is carried out by means of a mixture of which the more important constituents are mineral salts, such as alum, chrome and iron, which may or may not be supplemented with fatty and albuminous matter, both animal and vegetable.

Tawing.—Wool rugs are sometimes tanned in oak bark solutions after the initial processes by paddling, but they are usually “tawed,” meaning they are treated with alum and salt, which is why they are better discussed under that category. Tawing means that the process of turning skins into leather is done using a mix that primarily consists of mineral salts, like alum, chrome, and iron, which can be combined with either fatty or protein-based substances from animals or plants.

As an example of alum tawing, calf kid may be taken as characteristic of the process; glove kid is also treated on similar lines. The goods are prepared for tawing in a manner similar to the preparation of tanned leathers, arsenical limes being used to ensure a fine grain. After being well drenched and washed the goods are ready for the tawing process. On the continent of Europe it is usual for the goods to be thrown into a tub with the tawing paste and trodden with the bare feet, although this old-fashioned method is gradually being driven out, and the drum or tumbler is being used.

As an example of alum tawing, calf kid is a typical representation of the process; glove kid is treated similarly. The materials are prepared for tawing in a way that’s similar to how tanned leathers are prepared, using arsenical limes to achieve a fine texture. After being thoroughly soaked and washed, the materials are ready for the tawing process. In Europe, it’s common for the materials to be placed in a tub with tawing paste and stomped on with bare feet, although this traditional method is slowly being replaced by the use of a drum or tumbler.

The tawing paste consists of a mixture of alum, salt, flour, egg yolk and water; the quantities of each constituent diverge widely, every dresser having his own recipe. The following has been used, but cannot well be classed as typical: For 100 ℔ skin take 9 ℔ alum, 5 ℔ salt, dissolve in water, and mix to a thin paste with from 5 to 13 ℔ flour, using 4 to 6 egg yolks for every pound of flour used. Olive oil is also mixed in sometimes. The skins are drummed or trodden, at intervals, in the warm paste for some hours, removed, allowed to drain, and dried rapidly, damped down or “sammied” and “staked” by drawing them to and fro over a blunt knife fixed in the top of a post, and known as a knee stake; this process softens them very considerably. After staking, the goods are wet back and shaved smooth, either with a moon knife, i.e. a circular concave convex knife, the centre of which has been cut out, a piece of wood bridging the cavity forming the grip, or with an ordinary currier’s shaving knife; the skins are now ready for dyeing and finishing.

The tawing paste is made from a mix of alum, salt, flour, egg yolk, and water; the amounts of each ingredient can vary greatly, with each tanner having their own recipe. The following is one method that's been used, but it's not exactly typical: For every 100 pounds of skin, use 9 pounds of alum and 5 pounds of salt, dissolve them in water, and mix to a thin paste with 5 to 13 pounds of flour, adding 4 to 6 egg yolks for every pound of flour used. Sometimes, olive oil is added as well. The skins are worked in the warm paste for several hours, then taken out, allowed to drain, and quickly dried. They’re dampened or “sammied” and “staked” by being pulled back and forth over a blunt knife set at the top of a post, known as a knee stake; this softens them significantly. After staking, the materials are re-wetted and shaved smooth, either with a moon knife, which is a circular knife with a concave surface, where the middle has been removed to form a grip, or with a regular shaving knife used by curriers; the skins are now ready for dyeing and finishing.

Wool Rug Dressing.—Wool rugs are first thoroughly soaked, well washed and clean-fleshed, scoured well by rubbing into the wool a solution of soft soap and soda, and then leathered by rubbing into the flesh of the wet skins a mixture consisting of three parts of alum and two parts of salt until they are practically dry; they are now piled up over-night, and the mixture is again applied. After the second or third application the goods should be quite leathered. Other methods consist of stretching the skins in frames and painting the flesh with a solution of alum and salt, or, better, with a solution of basic alum and salt, the alum being made basic by the gradual addition of soda until a permanent precipitate is produced.

Wool Rug Dressing.—Wool rugs are first thoroughly soaked, well washed, and clean, then scrubbed using a solution of soft soap and soda. They are then treated by rubbing a mixture of three parts alum and two parts salt into the wet skin until it's almost dry. After this, they are stacked overnight, and the mixture is applied again. After the second or third application, the rugs should be completely leathered. Other methods include stretching the skins in frames and coating the flesh with a solution of alum and salt, or preferably with a solution of basic alum and salt. The alum becomes basic by gradually adding soda until a permanent precipitate forms.

The goods are now bleached, for even the most vigorous scouring will not remove the yellow tint of the wool, especially at the tips. There are several methods of bleaching, viz. by hydrogen peroxide, following up with a weak vitriol bath; by potassium permanganate, following up with a bath of sulphurous acid; or by fumigating in an air-tight chamber with burning sulphur. The last-named method is the more general; the wet skins are hung in the chamber, an iron pot containing burning sulphur is introduced, and the exposure is continued for several hours.

The goods are now bleached, as even the deepest scrubbing can't get rid of the yellow tint in the wool, especially at the tips. There are several bleaching methods: using hydrogen peroxide followed by a weak acid bath; using potassium permanganate followed by a bath of sulfurous acid; or fumigating in a sealed chamber with burning sulfur. The last method is the most common; the wet skins are hung in the chamber, an iron pot with burning sulfur is placed inside, and the exposure lasts for several hours.

If the goods are to be finished white, they are now given a vitriol sour, scoured, washed, retanned, dried, and when dry softened by working with a moon knife. If they are to be dyed, they must be prepared for the dye solution by “chloring,” which consists of immersion in a cold solution of bleaching powder for some hours, and then souring in vitriol.

If the goods are going to be finished in white, they are now treated with vitriol, scrubbed, washed, retanned, dried, and once dry, softened by working with a moon knife. If they are going to be dyed, they must be prepped for the dye solution by “chlorinating,” which involves soaking in a cold solution of bleaching powder for several hours, and then treating with vitriol.

The next step is dyeing. If basic dyes are to be used, it is necessary to neutralize the acidity of the skins by careful addition of soda, and to prevent the tips from being dyed a darker colour than the roots. Glauber salts and acetic acid are added to the dye-bath. The tendency of basic colours to rub off may be overcome by passing the goods through a solution of tannin in the form of cutch, sumach, quebracho, &c.; in fact, some of the darker-coloured materials may be used as a ground colour, thus economizing dyestuff and serving two purposes. If acid colours are used, it is necessary to add sulphuric acid to the dye bath, and in either case colours which will strike below 50° C. must be used, as at that temperature alum leather perishes.

The next step is dyeing. If you're using basic dyes, you need to neutralize the acidity of the skins by carefully adding soda, and make sure the tips don't get dyed a darker color than the roots. Glauber salts and acetic acid are added to the dye bath. The tendency for basic colors to rub off can be addressed by soaking the materials in a solution of tannin, like cutch, sumach, quebracho, etc. In fact, some of the darker-colored materials can be used as a base color, helping to save dye and serve dual purposes. If you're using acid colors, you need to add sulfuric acid to the dye bath, and in either case, choose colors that will fix below 50° C, as alum leather deteriorates at that temperature.

After being dyed, the goods are washed up, drained, and if necessary retanned, the glossing finish is then produced by passing them through a weak emulsion or “fat liquor” of oil, soap and water, after which they are dried, softened by working with a moon knife and beating, when they are combed out, and are ready for the market.

After dyeing, the products are washed, drained, and re-tanned if needed. A glossy finish is achieved by running them through a weak mixture, or “fat liquor,” made of oil, soap, and water. Then, they are dried and softened by being worked with a moon knife and beaten. After that, they are combed out and prepared for sale.

Blacks are dyed by immersing the goods alternately in solutions of logwood and iron, or a one-solution method is used, consisting of a mixture of these two, with, in either case, varying additions of lactic acid and sumach, copper salts, potassium bichromate, &c.; the time of immersion varies from hours to days. After striking, the goods are exposed to the air for some hours in order to oxidize to a good black; they are then well scoured, washed, drained, retanned, dried, softened and combed.

Blacks are achieved by soaking the materials alternately in solutions of logwood and iron, or through a single-solution method that combines both, along with different amounts of lactic acid, sumach, copper salts, potassium bichromate, etc. The soaking time ranges from a few hours to several days. After the dyeing process, the materials are left in the air for a few hours to oxidize into a deep black; they are then thoroughly cleaned, washed, drained, retanned, dried, softened, and combed.

Chrome Tanning.—The first chrome tanning process was described by Professor Knapp in 1858 in a paper on “Die Natur und Wesen der Gerberie,” but was first brought into commercial prominence by Dr Heinzerling about 1878, and was worked in a most persevering way by the Eglinton Chemical Company, who owned the English patents, though all their efforts failed to produce any lasting effects. Now chrome tanning is almost the most important method of light leather dressing, and has also taken a prominent place in the heavy department, more especially in curried leathers and cases where greater tensile strength is needed. The leather produced is much stronger than any other leather, and will also stand boiling water, whereas vegetable-tanned leather is completely destroyed at 70° C. and alum leather at 50° C.

Chrome Tanning.—The first chrome tanning process was described by Professor Knapp in 1858 in a paper titled “The Nature and Essence of Tanning,” but it was Dr. Heinzerling who really brought it into commercial prominence around 1878. The Eglinton Chemical Company worked diligently on it, holding the English patents, but their efforts failed to achieve lasting results. Today, chrome tanning is one of the most important methods for treating light leather and has also gained a significant role in heavier leather, especially in applications that require greater tensile strength, like currying. The leather produced is much stronger than any other type and can even withstand boiling water, while vegetable-tanned leather is completely ruined at 70° C, and alum leather at 50° C.

The theory of chrome tanning is not perfectly understood, but in general terms it consists of a partial chemical combination between the hide fibre and the chrome salts, and a partial mechanical deposition of chromium oxide in and on the fibre. The wet work, or preparation for tanning, may be taken as much the same as for any other leather.

The process of chrome tanning isn't fully understood, but basically, it involves a partial chemical reaction between the hide fibers and chrome salts, along with a partial mechanical deposition of chromium oxide onto the fibers. The wet work, or preparation for tanning, is similar to that of any other type of leather.

There are two distinct methods of chrome tanning, and several different methods of making the solutions. The “two bath process” consists of treating the skins with a bichromate in which the chromium is in the acidic state, and afterwards reducing it to the basic state by some reducing agent. The exact process is as follows: To prevent wrinkled or “drawn” grain the goods are first paddled for half an hour in a solution of vitriol and salt, when they are piled or “horsed” up over night, and then, without washing, placed in a solution consisting of 7 ℔ of potassium bichromate, 3½ ℔ of hydrochloric acid to each 100 ℔ of pelts, with sufficient water to conveniently paddle in; it is recommended that 5% of salt be added to this mixture. The goods are run in this for about 3 hours, or until struck through, when they are horsed up for some hours, care being taken to cover them up, and are then ready for the reducing bath. This consists of a 14% solution of plain “hypo,” or hyposulphite of soda, to which, during the process of reduction, frequent additions of hydrochloric acid are made to free the sulphurous and thiosulphuric acids, which are the active reducing agents. After about 3 hours’ immersion, during which time the goods will have changed in colour from bright yellow to bright green, one or two skins are cut in the thickest part, and if the green has struck right through, the pack is removed as tanned, washed up, and allowed to drain.

There are two distinct methods of chrome tanning, along with several different techniques for making the solutions. The “two bath process” involves treating the skins with bichromate in its acidic state, and then reducing it to the basic state using a reducing agent. Here’s how it works: To prevent wrinkling or “drawn” grain, the goods are first paddled for half an hour in a solution of vitriol and salt. After that, they're stacked or “horsed” up overnight, and then, without washing, placed in a solution made of 7 lbs of potassium bichromate and 3½ lbs of hydrochloric acid for every 100 lbs of pelts, with enough water to paddle comfortably. It's suggested to add 5% salt to this mix. The goods should stay in this solution for about 3 hours or until evenly penetrated. Afterward, they are horsed up for several hours while ensuring they’re covered, and they’re then ready for the reducing bath. This bath consists of a 14% solution of plain “hypo,” or hyposulphite of soda, to which frequent additions of hydrochloric acid are added during the reduction process to release the sulphurous and thiosulphuric acids, which act as the reducing agents. After about 3 hours of immersion, the goods will change color from bright yellow to bright green. At this point, one or two skins are cut in the thickest part, and if the green has penetrated properly, the pack is removed as tanned, washed, and allowed to drain.

342

342

The “single-bath process” consists of paddling, drumming, or otherwise introducing into the skins a solution of a chrome salt, usually chrome alum, which is already in the basic condition, and therefore does not require reducing. The basic solutions are made as follows: For 100 ℔ of pelts 9 ℔ of chrome alum are dissolved in 9 gallons of water, and 2½ ℔ of washing soda already dissolved in 1 gallon of water are gradually added, with constant stirring. One-third of the solution is added to 80 gallons of water, to which is added 7 ℔ of salt, and the skins are introduced; the other two-thirds are introduced at intervals in two successive portions. Another liquor, used in the same way, is made by dissolving 3 ℔ of potassium bichromate in hot water, adding ½ gallon strong hydrochloric acid and then, gradually, about 1½ ℔ of glucose or grape sugar; this reduces the acidic chrome salt, vigorous effervescence ensuing. The whole is made up to 2 gallons and 5% to 15% of salt is added. In yet another method a chrome alum solution is rendered basic by boiling with “hypo,” and after the reaction has ceased the solution is allowed to settle and the clear portion used.

The “single-bath process” involves paddling, drumming, or otherwise mixing a solution of chrome salt, typically chrome alum, directly into the skins, which is already in the basic condition and doesn’t need reducing. The basic solutions are prepared as follows: For 100 pounds of pelts, dissolve 9 pounds of chrome alum in 9 gallons of water, then gradually add 2½ pounds of washing soda, which is already dissolved in 1 gallon of water, while stirring constantly. One-third of this solution is added to 80 gallons of water, along with 7 pounds of salt, before introducing the skins; the remaining two-thirds are added in two successive portions at intervals. Another solution, used similarly, is made by dissolving 3 pounds of potassium bichromate in hot water, adding ½ gallon of strong hydrochloric acid, and then gradually incorporating about 1½ pounds of glucose or grape sugar, which reduces the acidic chrome salt, causing vigorous effervescence. This mixture is brought up to 2 gallons, and 5% to 15% of salt is added. In yet another method, a chrome alum solution is made basic by boiling it with “hypo,” and once the reaction is complete, the solution is allowed to settle, and the clear liquid is used.

After tanning, which takes from 8 hours to as many, and even more, days, depending upon the method used and the class of skin being dressed, the skins tanned by both methods are treated in a similar manner, and are neutralized by drumming in borax solution, when they are washed free from borax by drumming in warm water, and are ready for dyeing, a process which will be dealt with further on. The goods are sometimes tanned by suspension, but this method is generally reserved for the tanning of the heavier leathers, which are treated in much the same way, the several processes taking longer.

After tanning, which can take anywhere from 8 hours to several days, depending on the method used and the type of skin being treated, the skins tanned by both methods are processed in a similar way. They are neutralized by being tumbled in a borax solution, then rinsed free of borax by tumbling in warm water, making them ready for dyeing, which will be discussed later. Sometimes, the goods are tanned by suspension, but this method is usually reserved for tanning heavier leathers, which are treated in a similar manner, although the various processes take longer.

Iron Tannage.—Before leaving mineral tanning, mention may be made of iron tannage, although this has gained no prominent position in commerce. Ferric salts possess powerful tanning properties, and were thoroughly investigated by Professor Knapp, who took out several patents, but the tendency to produce a brittle leather has never been entirely overcome, although it has been greatly modified by the incorporation of organic matter, such as blood, rosin, paraffin, urine, &c. Knapp’s basic tanning liquor is made as follows: A strong solution of ferrous sulphate is boiled and then oxidized to the ferric state by the careful addition of nitric acid. Next, to destroy excess of nitric acid, ferrous sulphate is added until effervescence ceases and the resulting clear orange-coloured solution is concentrated to a varnish-like consistency. It does not crystallize or decompose on concentration. The hides or skins are prepared for tanning in the usual way, and then handled or otherwise worked in solutions of the above iron salt, the solutions, which are at first weak, being gradually strengthened.

Iron Tannage.—Before moving on from mineral tanning, it’s worth mentioning iron tannage, even though it hasn't really made a significant impact in the market. Ferric salts have strong tanning properties and were thoroughly researched by Professor Knapp, who obtained several patents. However, the issue of producing brittle leather hasn't been completely solved, though it has improved a lot with the addition of organic materials like blood, rosin, paraffin, urine, etc. Knapp’s basic tanning solution is made this way: A strong solution of ferrous sulfate is boiled and then oxidized to the ferric state by carefully adding nitric acid. After that, to neutralize the excess nitric acid, ferrous sulfate is added until bubbling stops, resulting in a clear orange solution that is concentrated to a varnish-like thickness. It doesn’t crystallize or break down when concentrated. The hides or skins are prepared for tanning as usual, then treated or worked in solutions made from this iron salt, starting with weak solutions that are gradually strengthened.

The tannage occupies from 2 to 8 days, and the goods are then stuffed in a ventilated drum with greases or soap. If the latter is used, an insoluble iron soap is precipitated on the fibres of the leather, which may then be finally impregnated with stearin and paraffin, and finished in the usual manner as described under Curried Leathers. A very fair leather may also be manufactured by using iron alum and salt in the same manner as described under ordinary alum and salt.

The tanning process takes 2 to 8 days, after which the materials are placed in a ventilated drum with greases or soap. If soap is used, an insoluble iron soap forms on the leather fibers, which can then be treated with stearin and paraffin, and finished like the usual methods outlined under Curried Leathers. Good quality leather can also be produced by using iron alum and salt similarly to the process described for ordinary alum and salt.

Combination Tannages.—Leathers tanned by mixtures or separate baths of both mineral and vegetable tanning agents have now taken an important position in commerce. Such leathers are the Swedish and Danish glove leathers, the United States “dongola leather,” and French glazed kid. The usefulness of such a combination will be evident, for while vegetable tanning produces fullness, plumpness and resistance to water, the mineral dressing produces a softness unnatural to vegetable tannages without the use of large quantities of oils and fats. It may also be noted that once a leather has been thoroughly tanned with either mineral or vegetable materials, although it will absorb large quantities of the material which has not been first used, it will retain in the main the characteristics of the tannage first applied. The principle had long been used in the manufacture of such tough and flexible leathers as “green leather,” “combing leather” and “picker bands,” but was first applied to the manufacture of imitation glazed kid by Kent in America, who, about 1878, discovered the principle of “fatliquoring,” and named his product “dongola leather.” The discovery of this process revolutionized the manufacture of combination leathers.

Combination Tannages.—Leathers tanned using a mix or separate baths of both mineral and vegetable tanning agents have become significant in commerce. Examples include Swedish and Danish glove leathers, the United States "dongola leather," and French glazed kid. The benefits of this combination are clear: vegetable tanning provides fullness, plumpness, and water resistance, while mineral tanning offers a softness that's hard to achieve with vegetable tanning alone, without using large amounts of oils and fats. It’s worth noting that once a leather is thoroughly tanned with either mineral or vegetable materials, it will absorb a lot of the new material added later but will generally keep the main characteristics of the first tanning method used. This principle had been used for manufacturing tough and flexible leathers like "green leather," "combing leather," and "picker bands," but it was first applied to create imitation glazed kid by Kent in America, who, around 1878, discovered the technique of "fatliquoring" and labeled his product "dongola leather." This discovery transformed the production of combination leathers.

The Swedish and Danish glove leathers were first given a dressing of alum and salt, with or without the addition of flour and egg, and were then finished and coloured with vegetable materials, generally with willow bark, although, in cases of scarcity, sumach, oak bark, madder and larch were resorted to. The “green leathers” manufactured in England generally receive about a week’s tannage in gambier liquors, and are finished off in hot alum and salt liquors, after which they are dried, have the crystallized salts slicked off, are damped back, and heavily stuffed with moellon, degras or sod oil. Kent, in the manufacture of his dongola leather, used mixed liquors of gambier alum and salt, and when tanned, washed the goods in warm water to remove excess of tanning agent, piled up to samm, and fatliquored. In making alum combinations it must be borne in mind that alum leather will not glaze, and if a glazed finish is required, a fairly heavy vegetable tannage should be first applied. For dull finishes the mineral tannage may advantageously precede the vegetable.

The Swedish and Danish glove leathers were initially treated with a mix of alum and salt, sometimes including flour and egg, and then finished and dyed using natural materials, primarily willow bark. However, if those were hard to find, they would use sumach, oak bark, madder, and larch instead. The “green leathers” produced in England typically undergo about a week of tanning in gambier solutions, and are then finished with hot alum and salt solutions. After this, they are dried, the crystallized salts are brushed off, dampened, and heavily oiled with moellon, degras, or sod oil. In making his dongola leather, Kent used a blend of gambier, alum, and salt liquors, and once tanned, he washed the leather in warm water to remove any extra tanning agents, then piled it up to sam, and added fatliquor. When creating alum combinations, it's important to remember that alum leather won't have a glossy finish, so if a glossy look is needed, a heavier plant tannage should be applied first. For matte finishes, it can be beneficial to do the mineral tanning before the vegetable tanning.

Very excellent chrome combination leather is also manufactured by the application of the above principles, gambier always being in great favour as the vegetable agent. The use of other materials deprives the leather of its stretch, although they may be advantageously used where the latter property is objectionable.

Very high-quality chrome combination leather is also made using the principles mentioned above, with gambier always being a preferred natural agent. Using other materials can reduce the leather's stretch, although they can be beneficial in situations where that property is undesirable.

Oil Tanning.—Under the head of oil tanning is included “buff leather,” “buck leather,” “piano leather,” “chamois leather,” and to a greater or lesser extent, “Preller’s crown or helvetia leather.” The process of oil tanning dates back to antiquity, and was known as “shamoying,” now spelt “chamoising.” Chamoising yields an exceedingly tough, strong and durable leather, and forms an important branch of the leather industry. The theory of the process is the same as the theory of currying, which is nothing more or less than chamoising, viz. the lubrication of the fibres by the oil itself and the aldehyde tanning which takes place, due to the oxidation and decomposition of the esters of the fatty acids contained in the oil. The fact that an aldehyde tannage takes place seems to have been first discovered by Payne and Pullman, who took out a patent in 1898, covering formaldehyde and other aldehydes used in alkaline solutions. Their product, “Kaspine” leather, found considerable application in the way of military accoutrements. Chamois, buff, buck and piano leathers are all manufactured by the same process slightly modified to suit the class of hide used, the last three being heavy leathers, the first light.

Oil Tanning.—Under the category of oil tanning are included “buff leather,” “buck leather,” “piano leather,” “chamois leather,” and to a greater or lesser extent, “Preller’s crown or helvetia leather.” The oil tanning process goes back to ancient times and was known as “shamoying,” now spelled “chamoising.” Chamoising produces exceptionally tough, strong, and durable leather, making it a significant part of the leather industry. The theory behind the process is similar to that of currying, which is essentially chamoising—namely, the lubrication of the fibers by the oil itself and the aldehyde tanning that occurs due to the oxidation and breakdown of the esters of the fatty acids in the oil. It seems that the fact that an aldehyde tanning occurs was first identified by Payne and Pullman, who patented it in 1898, covering formaldehyde and other aldehydes used in alkaline solutions. Their product, “Kaspine” leather, found considerable use in military gear. Chamois, buff, buck, and piano leathers are all produced using the same process, slightly adjusted to fit the type of hide used, with the last three being heavier leathers and the first being lighter.

As regards the process used for chamois leather, the reader will remember, from the account of the vegetable tannage of sheep skins, that after splitting from the limes, the fleshes were thrown back into the pits for another three weeks’ liming (six weeks in all) preparatory to being dressed as chamois leather. It is necessary to lime the goods for oil dressing very thoroughly, and if the grain has not been removed by splitting, as in the case of sheep skins, it is “frized” off with a sharp knife over the beam. The goods are now rinsed, scudded and drenched, dried out until stiff, and stocked in the faller stocks with plenty of cod oil for 2 to 3 hours until they show signs of heating, when they are hung up in a cool shed. This process is repeated several times during a period of from 4 to 6 days, the heat driving the water out of the skins and the oil replacing it. At the end of this time the goods, which will have changed to a brown colour, are hung up and allowed to become as dry as possible, when they are hung in a warm stove for some hours, after which they are piled to heat off, thrown into tepid water and put through a wringing machine. The grease which is recovered from the wringing machine is known commercially as “degras” or “moellon,” and fetches a good price, as it is unrivalled for fatliquoring and related processes, such as stuffing, producing a very soft product. They next receive a warm soda lye bath, and are again wrung; this removes more grease, which forms soap with the lye, and is recovered by treatment with vitriol, which decomposes the soap. The grease which floats on top of the liquor is sold under the name of “sod oil.” This also is a valuable material for fatliquoring, &c., but not so good as degras.

As for the process used for chamois leather, the reader will recall, from the description of the vegetable tanning of sheep skins, that after splitting from the limes, the fleshes are thrown back into the pits for another three weeks of liming (making it six weeks total) in preparation for dressing as chamois leather. It's essential to thoroughly lime the goods for oil dressing, and if the grain hasn't been removed by splitting, as is the case with sheep skins, it is “frized” off with a sharp knife over the beam. The goods are then rinsed, scudded, drenched, dried until stiff, and stored in the faller stocks with plenty of cod oil for 2 to 3 hours until they show signs of heating, after which they are hung up in a cool shed. This process is repeated several times over a period of 4 to 6 days, with the heat driving the water out of the skins and the oil taking its place. By the end of this period, the goods will change to a brown color, are hung up to dry as much as possible, then placed in a warm stove for a few hours, after which they are piled to heat off, thrown into tepid water and processed through a wringing machine. The grease recovered from the wringing machine is commercially known as “degras” or “moellon,” and sells for a good price, as it is unmatched for fatliquoring and related processes, producing a very soft product. They then undergo a warm soda lye bath and are wrung again; this removes more grease, which forms soap with the lye, and is recovered through treatment with vitriol, which breaks down the soap. The grease that floats on top of the liquid is sold as “sod oil.” This is also a valuable material for fatliquoring, etc., but not as good as degras.

After being wrung out, the goods are bleached by one of the processes mentioned in the section on wool rug dressing, the permanganate method being in general use in England. In countries where a fine climate prevails the soap bleach or “sun bleach” is adopted; this consists of dipping the goods in soap solution and exposing them to the sun’s rays, the process being repeated three or more times as necessary.

After being squeezed out, the goods are bleached using one of the methods mentioned in the section on wool rug dressing, with the permanganate method being commonly used in England. In countries with a good climate, the soap bleach or “sun bleach” is used; this involves dipping the goods in a soap solution and then exposing them to the sun, repeating the process three or more times as needed.

The next step is fatliquoring to induce softness, after which they are dried out slowly, staked or “perched” with a moon knife, fluffed on a revolving wheel covered with fine emery to produce the fine “nap” or surface, brushed over with french chalk, fuller’s earth or china clay, and finally finished on a very fine emery wheel.

The next step is fatliquoring to make the leather soft, after which it is dried slowly, staked or “perched” with a moon knife, fluffed on a revolving wheel covered with fine emery to create a nice “nap” or surface, brushed with French chalk, fuller’s earth, or china clay, and finally finished on a very fine emery wheel.

Preller’s Helvetia or Crown Leather.—This process of leather manufacture was discovered in 1850 by Theodor Klemm, a cabinetmaker of Württemberg, who being then in poor circumstances, sold his patent to an Englishman named Preller, who manufactured it in Southwark, and adopted a crown as his trade mark. Hence the name “crown” leather. The manufacture then spread through Switzerland and Germany, the product being used in the main for picker straps, belting and purposes where waterproof goods were required, such as hose pipes and military water bags. No taste is imparted to the water by this leather.

Preller’s Helvetia or Crown Leather.—This leather manufacturing process was discovered in 1850 by Theodor Klemm, a cabinetmaker from Württemberg. Since he was struggling financially at the time, he sold his patent to an Englishman named Preller, who produced it in Southwark and used a crown as his trademark. That's how it got the name “crown” leather. The production then spread throughout Switzerland and Germany, primarily being used for picker straps, belting, and in applications where waterproof materials were needed, like hose pipes and military water bags. This leather doesn't alter the taste of the water.

343

343

The process of manufacture is as follows: The hides are unhaired by short liming, painting with lime and sulphide, or sweating, and cleansed by scudding and washing, after which they are coloured in bark liquors, washed up through clean water, and hung up to dry partially. When in a sammied condition the goods are placed on a table and a thick layer of the tanning paste spread on the flesh side. The tanning paste varies with each manufacturer, but the following is the mixture originally used by Preller: 100 parts flour, 100 parts soft fat or horse tallow, 35 parts butter, 88 parts ox brains, 50 parts milk, 15 parts salt or saltpetre.

The manufacturing process goes like this: The hides are stripped of hair using short liming, treated with lime and sulfide, or sweated out, and then cleaned through scudding and washing. After that, they're colored using bark liquors, rinsed in clean water, and hung up to partially dry. Once they're in a damp state, the goods are laid out on a table, and a thick layer of tanning paste is applied to the flesh side. The tanning paste differs with each manufacturer, but here’s the mixture originally used by Preller: 100 parts flour, 100 parts soft fat or horse tallow, 35 parts butter, 88 parts ox brains, 50 parts milk, and 15 parts salt or saltpeter.

The hides are now rolled in bundles, placed in a warm drum and worked for 8 to 10 hours, after which they are removed and hung up until half dry, when the process is repeated. Thus they are tumbled 3 to 4 times, set out flesh and grain, rinsed through tepid water, set out, sammied, and curried by coating with glycerin, oil, tallow and degras. The table grease is now slicked off, and the goods are set out in grease, grained and dried.

The hides are now rolled into bundles, placed in a warm drum, and worked for 8 to 10 hours. After that, they are taken out and hung up until they're half dry, and then the process is repeated. This way, they go through this tumbling process 3 to 4 times, with the flesh and grain exposed, rinsed in lukewarm water, laid out, smeared, and treated by applying glycerin, oil, tallow, and degras. The excess grease is now wiped off, and the goods are laid out in grease, grained, and dried.

Transparent Leather.—Transparent leather is a rather horny product, somewhat like raw hide, and has been used for stitching belts and picker bands. The goods to be dressed are limed, unhaired, very thoroughly delimed with acids, washed in water, scudded and clean-fleshed right to the veins; they are now stretched in frames, clean-fleshed with a moon knife, and brushed with warm water, when several coats of glycerin, to which has been added some antiseptic such as salicylic or picric acid, are applied; the goods are then dried out, and another coat is applied, and when semi-dry they are drummed in a mixture of glycerin, boracic acid, alum and salt, with the addition of a little bichromate of potash to stain them a yellow colour. After drumming for 2 to 3 hours they are removed, washed up, lightly set out, and stretched in frames to dry, when they are ready for cutting into convenient lengths for use.

Transparent Leather.—Transparent leather is a pretty durable product, similar to rawhide, and has been used for stitching belts and picker bands. The materials to be processed are limed, unhashed, thoroughly delimed with acids, washed, cleaned, and fleshed out all the way to the veins; they are then stretched in frames, cleaned with a moon knife, and brushed with warm water. Several coats of glycerin, mixed with an antiseptic like salicylic or picric acid, are applied; then the goods are dried out and another coat is added. When semi-dry, they are tossed in a mixture of glycerin, boracic acid, alum, and salt, with a bit of bichromate of potash to give them a yellow tint. After being mixed for 2 to 3 hours, they are removed, washed, lightly laid out, and stretched in frames to dry, at which point they are ready to be cut into convenient lengths for use.

Parchment.—A certain class of sheep skin known as Hampshires is generally used in the manufacture of this speciality. The skins as received are first very carefully washed to remove all dirt, dewooled, limed for 3 to 4 weeks, they are then cleanly fleshed, unhaired, rinsed up in water, and thickly split, the poorer hides being utilized for chamois; they are now re-split at the fatty strata so that all fat may be easily removed, and while the grains are dressed as skivers, the fleshes are tied in frames, watered with hot water, scraped and coated on both sides with a cream consisting of whiting, soda and water, after which they are dried out in a hot stove. In the drying the whiting mixture absorbs the grease from the skins; in fact, this method of degreasing is often employed in the manufacture of wool rugs. When dry, both sides of the skins are flooded to remove the whiting, and are then well rubbed over with a flat piece of pumice-stone, swilled, dried, re-pumiced, again swilled, and when sammied are rolled off with a wooden roller and dried out.

Parchment.—A specific type of sheep skin known as Hampshires is typically used to make this specialty. The skins are first thoroughly washed to remove all dirt, dewooled, limed for 3 to 4 weeks, then they are carefully fleshed, unhaired, rinsed in water, and thickly split, with the poorer hides being used for chamois; they are then re-split at the fatty layers to make fat removal easier. While the grain side is dressed like skivers, the flesh side is secured in frames, soaked with hot water, scraped, and coated on both sides with a cream made of whiting, soda, and water, after which they are dried in a hot stove. During drying, the whiting mixture absorbs the grease from the skins; in fact, this degreasing method is often used in making wool rugs. Once dry, both sides of the skins are soaked again to remove the whiting, then they are rubbed with a flat piece of pumice stone, rinsed, dried, pumiced again, rinsed once more, and when damp, rolled with a wooden roller and dried out.

Tar and Peat Tanning.—Tar tanning was discovered by a French chemist named Philippi, who started with the idea that, if coal was a decomposition product of forests, it must still necessarily possess the tanning properties originally present in the trees. However far-fetched such an argument may seem, Philippi succeeded in producing a leather from wood and coal tar at a fairly cheap rate, the product being of excellent texture and strength, but rather below the average in the finish, which was inclined to be patchy, showing oily spots. His method consisted of impregnating the goods with refined tar and some organic acid, but the product does not seem to have taken any hold upon the market, and is not much heard of now.

Tar and Peat Tanning.—Tar tanning was discovered by a French chemist named Philippi, who started with the idea that since coal is a byproduct of forests, it must still have the tanning properties originally found in the trees. While this idea might sound strange, Philippi managed to create leather from wood and coal tar at a relatively low cost. The resulting product had excellent texture and strength, but the finish was below average, often showing patchy areas with oily spots. His method involved soaking the materials in refined tar and some organic acid, but the product didn’t gain much popularity in the market and isn’t commonly mentioned today.

Peat tanning was discovered by Payne, an English chemist, who was also the co-discoverer of the Payne-Pullman formaldehyde tanning process. His peat or humic acid tannage was patented by him about 1905, and is now worked on a commercial scale. The humic acid is first extracted from the peat by means of alkalis, and the hides are treated with this solution, the humic acid being afterwards precipitated in the hides by treatment with some stronger organic or mineral acid.

Peat tanning was discovered by Payne, an English chemist who also co-discovered the Payne-Pullman formaldehyde tanning process. He patented his method of tanning with peat or humic acid around 1905, and it is now used commercially. The humic acid is first extracted from the peat using alkalis, and the hides are treated with this solution. The humic acid is then precipitated in the hides by using a stronger organic or mineral acid.

Dyeing, Staining and Finishing.—These operations are practised almost exclusively on the lighter leathers. Heavy leathers, except coloured and black harness and split hides for bag work, are not often dyed, and their finishing is generally considered to be part of the tannage. In light leathers a great business is done in buying up “crust” stock, i.e. rough tanned stock, and then dyeing and finishing to suit the needs and demands of the various markets. The carrying out of these operations is a distinct and separate business from tanning, although where possible the two businesses are carried on in the same works.

Dyeing, Staining, and Finishing.—These processes are mostly done on lighter leathers. Heavy leathers, except for colored and black harness and split hides used for bags, are rarely dyed, and their finishing is typically viewed as part of the tanning process. For lighter leathers, there's a significant market for purchasing “crust” stock, i.e. rough tanned stock, which is then dyed and finished to meet the needs and preferences of different markets. Performing these processes is a distinct and separate business from tanning, although when possible, both businesses are operated within the same facility.

Whatever the goods are and whatever their ultimate finish, the first operation, upon receipt by the dyer of the crust stock, is sorting, an operation requiring much skill. The sorter must be familiar with the why and wherefore of all subsequent processes through which the leather must go, so as to judge of the suitability of the various qualities of leather for these processes, and to know where any flaws that may exist will be sufficiently suppressed or hidden to produce a saleable product, or will be rendered entirely unnoticeable. The points to be considered in the sorting are coarseness or fineness of texture, boldness or fineness of grain, colour, flaws including stains and scratches, substance, &c. Light-coloured and flawless goods are parcelled out for fine and delicate shades, those of darker hue and few flaws are parcelled out for the darker shades, such as maroons, greens (sage and olive), dark blues, &c., and those which are so badly stained as to be unsuitable for colours go for blacks. After sorting, the goods are soaked back to a limp condition by immersion in warm water, and are then horsed up to drip, having been given, perhaps, a preliminary slicking out.

Whatever the products are and however they will be finished, the first step when the dyer receives the rough leather is sorting, a task that requires a lot of skill. The sorter needs to understand all the reasons and processes that the leather will go through, so they can evaluate which qualities of leather are suitable for those processes and know where any flaws might be minimized or concealed enough to create a sellable product or made completely unnoticeable. The factors to consider in sorting include the coarseness or fineness of the texture, boldness or delicacy of the grain, color, flaws like stains and scratches, thickness, etc. Light-colored and flawless leather is set aside for fine and delicate shades, while darker leather with few flaws is designated for darker shades like maroon, sage green, olive, dark blue, etc. Those with significant stains that aren’t suitable for color are sorted for black. After sorting, the leather is soaked back to a flexible state by being immersed in warm water, then hung up to drip, possibly after a preliminary slicking out.

Up to this point all goods are treated alike, but the subsequent processes now diverge according to the class of leather being treated and the finish required.

Up to this point, all goods are treated the same, but the next steps differ based on the type of leather being processed and the finish needed.

Persian goods for glacés, moroccos, &c., require special preparation for dyeing, being first re-tanned. As received, they are sorted and soaked as above, piled to samm, and shaved. Shaving consists of rendering the flesh side of the skins smooth by shaving off irregularities, the skin, which is supported on a rubber roller actuated by a foot lever, being pressed against a series of spiral blades set on a steel roller, which is caused to revolve rapidly. When shaved, the goods are stripped, washed up, soured, sweetened and re-tanned in sumach, washed up, and slicked out, and are then ready for dyeing.

Persian goods for glazes, moroccos, etc., need special preparation for dyeing, starting with a re-tanning process. Once received, they are sorted and soaked as mentioned before, stacked for drying, and shaved. Shaving involves making the flesh side of the skins smooth by removing any irregularities. The skin is placed on a rubber roller controlled by a foot lever and pressed against a series of spiral blades mounted on a fast-spinning steel roller. After shaving, the goods are stripped, washed, soured, sweetened, and re-tanned with sumach, then washed again and smoothed out, making them ready for dyeing.

There are three distinct methods of dyeing, with several minor modifications. Tray dyeing consists of immersing the goods, from 2 to 4 dozen at a time, in two separate piles, in the dye solution at 60° C, contained in a flat wooden tray about 5 ft. × 4 ft. × 1 ft., and keeping them constantly moving by continually turning them from one pile to the other. The disadvantages of this method are that the bath rapidly cools, thus dyeing rapidly at the beginning and slowly at the termination of the operation; hence a large excess of dye is wasted, much labour is required, and the shades obtained are not so level as those obtained by the other methods. But the goods are under observation the whole time, a very distinct advantage when matching shades, and a white flesh may be preserved. The paddle method of dyeing consists of paddling the goods in a large volume of liquor contained in a semi-circular wooden paddle for from half to three-quarters of an hour. The disadvantages are that the liquor cools fairly rapidly, more dye is wasted than in the tray method, and a white flesh cannot be preserved. But larger packs can be dyed at the one operation, the goods are under observation the whole time, and little labour is required.

There are three main methods of dyeing, with some minor variations. Tray dyeing involves immersing goods, typically 2 to 4 dozen at a time, in two separate piles in a dye solution at 60° C, held in a flat wooden tray measuring about 5 ft. × 4 ft. × 1 ft. The goods are constantly moved by alternating between the two piles. The downsides of this method include the bath cooling quickly, resulting in rapid dyeing at the start and slower at the end; thus, a lot of dye is wasted, it requires considerable labor, and the shades achieved aren’t as consistent as those from other methods. However, the goods can be monitored the entire time, which is a clear advantage when matching shades, and a white flesh can be maintained. The paddle method of dyeing involves using a large semi-circular wooden paddle to agitate the goods in a significant volume of dye for about half to three-quarters of an hour. The drawbacks here are the quick cooling of the dye, more dye being wasted compared to the tray method, and the inability to maintain a white flesh. On the plus side, larger batches can be dyed at once, the goods can be observed throughout, and it requires less labor.

The drum method of dyeing is perhaps best, a drum somewhat similar to that used by curriers being preferable. The goods are placed on the shelves inside the dry drum, the lid of which is then fastened on, and the machinery is started; when the drum is revolving at full speed, which should be about 12 to 15 revolutions per minute, the dye solution is added through the hollow axle, and the dyeing continued for half an hour, when, without stopping the drum, if desired, the goods may be fatliquored by running in the fatliquor through the hollow axle. The disadvantages are that the flesh is dyed and the goods cannot be seen. The advantages are that little labour is required, a large pack of skins may be treated, level shades are produced, heat is retained, almost complete exhaustion of the dye-bath is effected, and subsequent processes, such as fatliquoring, may be carried out without stopping the drum.

The drum dyeing method is probably the best option, with a drum similar to what curriers use being ideal. The materials are placed on shelves inside the dry drum, the lid is secured, and the machinery is turned on. When the drum is spinning at full speed, which should be around 12 to 15 revolutions per minute, the dye solution is added through the hollow axle, and the dyeing continues for half an hour. If desired, without stopping the drum, the goods can be fatliquored by adding fatliquor through the hollow axle. The downsides are that the flesh gets dyed and the materials can't be seen. The upsides are that it requires little labor, a large batch of skins can be treated at once, it produces even shades, retains heat, nearly exhausts the dye bath, and allows for subsequent processes like fatliquoring to be done without stopping the drum.

Of the great number of coal-tar dyes on the market comparatively few can be used in leather manufacture. The four chief classes are: (1) acid dyes; (2) basic or tannin dyes; (3) direct or cotton dyes; (4) mordant (alizarine) dyes.

Of the many coal-tar dyes available today, only a small number can be used in leather production. The four main types are: (1) acid dyes; (2) basic or tannin dyes; (3) direct or cotton dyes; (4) mordant (alizarine) dyes.

Acid dyes are not so termed because they have acid characteristics; the name simply denotes that for the development of the full shade of colour it is necessary to add acid to the dye-bath. These dyes are generally sodium salts of sulphonic acids, and need the addition of an acid to free the dye, which is the sulphonic acid. Although theoretically any acid (stronger than the sulphonic acid present) will do for this purpose, it is found in practice that only sulphuric and formic acids may be employed, because others, such as acetic, lactic, &c., do not develop the full shade of colour. Acid sodium sulphate may also be successfully used.

Acid dyes aren't called that because they have acidic properties; the name simply means that to achieve the full shade of color, you need to add acid to the dye bath. These dyes are usually sodium salts of sulfonic acids and require an acid to activate the dye, which is the sulfonic acid itself. While any stronger acid than the sulfonic acid could theoretically work, in practice, only sulfuric and formic acids are effective because others, like acetic and lactic acids, don't produce the full color. Acid sodium sulfate can also be used successfully.

344

344

Acid colours produce a full level shade without bronzing, and do not accentuate any defects in the leather, such as bad grain, &c. They are also moderately fast to light and rubbing. They are generally applied to leather at a temperature between 50° and 60° C., with an equal weight of sulphuric acid. The quantity of dye used varies, but generally, for goat, persians, &c., from 25 to 30 oz. are used per ten dozen skins, and for calf half as much again, dissolved in such an amount of water as is most convenient according to the method being used. If sodium bisulphate is substituted for sulphuric acid twice as much must be used, and if formic acid three times as much (by weight).

Acid colors create a rich shade without bronzing and don’t highlight any imperfections in the leather, like poor grain, etc. They are also reasonably resistant to light and rubbing. Typically, they’re applied to leather at a temperature between 50° and 60° C., using an equal weight of sulfuric acid. The amount of dye varies, but usually, for goat and Persian hides, about 25 to 30 ounces are used per ten dozen skins, and for calf, about half again as much, dissolved in the amount of water that works best for the method being used. If sodium bisulfate is used instead of sulfuric acid, twice as much is required, and if formic acid is used, three times as much (by weight).

Basic dyes are salts of organic colour bases with hydrochloric or some other suitable acid. Basic colours precipitate the tannins, and thus, because of their affinity for them, dye very rapidly, tending to produce uneven shades, especially if the tannin on the skin is unevenly distributed. They are much more intense in colour than the acid dyes, have a strong tendency to bronze, and accentuate weak and defective grain. They are also precipitated by hard waters, so that the hardness should be first neutralized by the addition of acetic acid, else the precipitated colour lake may produce streakily dyed leather. To prevent rapid dyeing, acetic acid or sodium bisulphate should always be added in small quantity to the dye-bath, preferably the latter, as it prevents bronzing. The most important point about the application of basic dyes to leather is the previous fixation of the tannin on the surface of the leather to prevent its bleeding into the dye-bath and precipitating the dye. All soluble salts of the heavy metals will fix the tannin, but few are applicable, as they form colour lakes, which are generally undesirable. Antimony and titanium salts are generally used, the forms being tartar emetic (antimony potassium tartrate), antimonine (antimony lactate), potassium titanium oxalate, and titanium lactate. The titanium salts are economically used when dyeing browns, as they produce a yellowish-brown shade; it is therefore not necessary to use so much dye. About 2 oz. of tartar emetic and 8 oz. of salt is a convenient quantity for 1 dozen goat skins. The bath is used at 30° to 40° C., and the goods are immersed for about 15 minutes, having been thoroughly washed before being dyed. Iron salts are sometimes used by leather-stainers for saddening (dulling) the shade of colour produced, iron tannate, a black salt, being formed. It is often found economical to “bottom” goods with acid, direct, or other colours, and then finish with basic colours; this procedure forms a colour lake, and colour lakes are always faster to light and rubbing than the colours themselves.

Basic dyes are salts made from organic color bases combined with hydrochloric acid or another suitable acid. Basic colors react with tannins, which makes them dye very quickly; however, this can lead to uneven shades, especially if the tannin distribution on the skin is inconsistent. They are much more vibrant than acid dyes, tend to create a bronzed effect, and highlight weak or flawed grains. Hard water can also cause these dyes to precipitate, so it’s essential to neutralize the water's hardness by adding acetic acid first; otherwise, the precipitated color lake might result in streaky dyed leather. To slow down the dyeing process, a small amount of acetic acid or sodium bisulphate should be added to the dye-bath—preferably sodium bisulphate, as it helps prevent bronzing. The key aspect of applying basic dyes to leather is ensuring that the tannin is fixed on the leather's surface to stop it from bleeding into the dye-bath and causing the dye to precipitate. All soluble heavy metal salts can fix the tannin, but few are suitable because they form color lakes, which are generally not desirable. Antimony and titanium salts are commonly used; these include tartar emetic (antimony potassium tartrate), antimonine (antimony lactate), potassium titanium oxalate, and titanium lactate. Titanium salts are cost-effective when dyeing browns, as they create a yellowish-brown shade, reducing the amount of dye needed. For one dozen goat skins, about 2 oz. of tartar emetic and 8 oz. of salt is a convenient amount. The bath operates at a temperature of 30° to 40° C., and the goods are immersed for about 15 minutes after being thoroughly washed. Leather workers sometimes use iron salts to dull the shade of the color produced, resulting in iron tannate, which is a black salt. It is often economical to first dye the goods with acid, direct, or other colors, and then finish with basic colors; this approach creates a color lake, which tends to be more resistant to light and rubbing than the colors themselves.

Direct cotton dyes produce shades of great delicacy, and are used for the dyeing of pale and “art” shades. They are applied in neutral or very slightly acid baths, formic and acetic acids being most suitable with the addition of a quantity of sodium chloride or sulphate. After dyeing, the goods are well washed to free from excess of salt. The eosine colours, including erythrosine, phloxine, rose Bengal, &c., are applied in a similar manner, and are specially used for the beautiful fluorescent pink shades they produce; acid and basic colours and mineral acids precipitate them.

Direct cotton dyes create very delicate shades and are used for dyeing light and artistic colors. They are applied in neutral or slightly acidic baths, with formic and acetic acids being the most suitable, along with some sodium chloride or sulfate. After dyeing, the items are thoroughly washed to remove any excess salt. The eosine colors, including erythrosine, phloxine, and rose Bengal, are applied in a similar way and are especially used for the stunning fluorescent pink shades they produce; acidic and basic colors and mineral acids can cause them to precipitate.

The mordant colours, which include the alizarine and anthracene colours, are extremely fast to light, and require a mordant to develop the colour. They are specially applicable to chamois leather, although a few may be used for chrome and alum leathers, and one or two are successfully applied to vegetable-tanned leather without a mordant.

The bright colors, which include alizarin and anthracene shades, are very lightfast and need a mordant to bring out the color. They're particularly suited for chamois leather, though a few can be used on chrome and alum leathers, and one or two can be effectively applied to vegetable-tanned leather without a mordant.

Sulphur or sulphide colours, the first of which to appear were the famous Vidal colours, are applied in sodium sulphide solution, and are most successfully used on chrome leather, as they produce a colour lake with chrome salts, the resulting colour being very fast to light and rubbing. A very serious disadvantage in connexion with them is that they must necessarily be applied in alkaline solution, and the alkali has a disintegrating effect upon the fibre of the leather, which cannot be satisfactorily overcome, although formaldehyde and glycerin mixtures have been patented for the purpose.

Sulfur or sulfide colors, the first of which were the well-known Vidal colors, are applied in a sodium sulfide solution and work best on chrome leather, as they create a color lake with chrome salts. The resulting color is very resistant to light and rubbing. However, a significant drawback is that they must be applied in an alkaline solution, and the alkali breaks down the leather fibers, which cannot be effectively remedied, even though mixtures of formaldehyde and glycerin have been patented for this purpose.

The Janus colours are perhaps worth mentioning as possessing both acid and basic characteristics; they precipitate tannin, and are best regarded as basic dyes from a leather-dyer’s standpoint.

The Janus colors are worth mentioning for having both acid and basic qualities; they precipitate tannin and are best seen as basic dyes from a leather-dyer’s perspective.

The goods after dyeing are washed up, slicked out on an inclined glass table, nailed on boards, or hung up by the hind shanks to dry out.

The dyed goods are washed, laid out on an angled glass table, nailed to boards, or hung by the hind legs to dry.

Coal-tar dyes are not much used for the production of blacks, as they do not give such a satisfactory result as logwood with an iron mordant. In the dyeing of blacks the preliminary operation of souring is always omitted and that of sumaching sometimes, but if much tan has been removed it will be found necessary to use sumach, although cutch may be advantageously and cheaply substituted. After shaving, the goods, if to be dressed for “blue backs” (blue-coloured flesh), are dyed as already described, with methyl violet or some other suitable dye; they are then folded down the back and drawn through a hot solution of logwood and fustic extracts, and then rapidly through a weak, cold iron sulphate and copper acetate solution. Immediately afterwards they are rinsed up and either drummed in a little neatsfoot oil or oiled over with a pad, flesh and grain, and dried. When dry the goods are damped back and staked, dried out and re-staked.

Coal-tar dyes aren't commonly used for producing blacks, as they don't provide results as satisfactory as logwood with an iron mordant. In black dyeing, the initial process of souring is always skipped, and the use of sumach is sometimes omitted. However, if a lot of tan has been removed, it becomes necessary to use sumach, although cutch can be used instead for a more cost-effective solution. After shaving, if the goods are intended for “blue backs” (blue-colored flesh), they're dyed as described earlier with methyl violet or another suitable dye. Then, they're folded down the back and passed through a hot solution of logwood and fustic extracts, followed quickly by a weak, cold solution of iron sulfate and copper acetate. Right after that, they are rinsed and either drummed in a bit of neatsfoot oil or oiled with a pad, flesh and grain, then dried. Once dry, the goods are dampened back, staked, dried out, and re-staked.

After dry-staking, the goods are “seasoned,” i.e. some suitable mixture is applied to the grain to enable it to take the glaze. The following is typical: 3 quarts logwood liquor, ½ pint bullock’s blood, ½ pint milk, ½ gill ammonia, ½ gill orchil and 3 quarts water. This season is brushed well into the grain, and the goods are dried in a warm stove and glazed by machine. The skins are glazed under considerable pressure, a polished glass slab or roller being forced over the surface of the leather in a series of rapid strokes, after which the goods are re-seasoned, re-staked, fluffed, re-glazed, oiled over with a pad, dipped in linseed oil and dried. They are now ready for market. If the goods are to be finished dull they are seasoned with linseed mucilage, casein or milk (many other materials are also used), and rolled, glassed with a polished slab by hand, or ironed with a warm iron.

After dry-staking, the goods are “seasoned,” i.e. a suitable mixture is applied to the grain to help it take the glaze. A typical mix includes: 3 quarts of logwood liquor, ½ pint of bullock’s blood, ½ pint of milk, ½ gill of ammonia, ½ gill of orchil, and 3 quarts of water. This mixture is brushed well into the grain, and the goods are dried in a warm stove and glazed by machine. The skins are glazed under significant pressure, using a polished glass slab or roller that is pressed over the surface of the leather in quick strokes. After this, the goods are re-seasoned, re-staked, fluffed, re-glazed, oiled with a pad, dipped in linseed oil, and dried. They are now ready for market. If the goods are meant to be finished with a dull look, they are seasoned with linseed mucilage, casein, or milk (many other materials can also be used), then rolled, glassed with a polished slab by hand, or ironed with a warm iron.

Coloured glacés are finished in a similar manner to black glacés, dye (instead of logwood and iron) being added to the season, which usually consists of a simple mixture of dye, albumen and milk.

Coloured glacés are completed in a similar way to black glacés, with dye (instead of logwood and iron) added to the mixture, which typically includes a simple blend of dye, albumen, and milk.

Moroccos and grain leathers are boarded on the flesh side before and after glazing, often being “tooth rolled” between the several operations. Tooth rolling consists of forcing, under pressure, a toothed roller over the grain; this cuts into the leather and helps to produce many grains, which could not be produced naturally by boarding, besides fixing them.

Moroccos and grain leathers are processed on the flesh side before and after glazing, often getting “tooth rolled” between the different steps. Tooth rolling involves pressing a toothed roller over the grain; this cuts into the leather and helps create many grains that wouldn't be produced naturally by boarding, while also securing them.

Many artificial grains and patterns are also given to leather by printing and embossing, these processes being carried out by passing the leather between two rollers, the top one upon which the pattern is engraved being generally steam heated. This impresses the pattern upon the grain of the leather.

Many artificial grains and patterns are also added to leather through printing and embossing. These processes involve passing the leather between two rollers, with the top roller, which has the pattern engraved on it, typically being steam heated. This presses the pattern into the grain of the leather.

The above methods will give a very general idea of the processes in vogue for the dressing of goods for fancy work. The dressing of chrome leathers for uppers is different in important particulars.

The methods mentioned above provide a broad overview of the processes currently used for preparing materials for decorative work. The preparation of chrome leathers for uppers has notable differences in key aspects.

Chrome Box and Willow Calf.—Willow calf is coloured calf, box calf is dressed black and grained with a “box” grain. A large quantity of kips is now dressed as box calf; these goods are the hides of yearling Indian cattle, and are dressed in an exactly similar manner as calf. After tanning and boraxing to neutralize the acidity of the chrome liquor, the goods are washed up, sammied, shaved, and are ready for mordanting previous to dyeing. Very few dyes will dye chrome leather direct, i.e. without mordanting. Sulphide colours are not yet in great demand, nor are the alizarines used as much as they might be. The ordinary acid and basic dyes are more generally employed, and the goods consequently require to be first mordanted. The mordanting is carried out by drumming the goods in a solution containing tannin, and, except for pale shades, some dyewood extract is used; for reds peachwood extract, for browns fustic or gambier, and for dark browns a little logwood is added. For all pale shades sumach is exclusively used. After drumming in the warm tannin infusion for half an hour, if the goods are to be dyed with basic colours the tannin is first fixed by drumming in tartar emetic and salt, or titanium, as previously described; the dyeing is also carried out as described for persians, except that a slightly higher temperature may be maintained. If the goods are to be dyed black they are passed through logwood and iron solutions.

Chrome Box and Willow Calf.—Willow calf is colored calf, while box calf is dressed black and has a “box” grain. A large amount of kips is now treated as box calf; these materials come from yearling Indian cattle and are processed in a way that's very similar to calf. After tanning and using borax to neutralize the acidity of the chrome liquor, the materials are cleaned, smoothed, shaved, and are ready for mordanting before dyeing. Very few dyes can directly color chrome leather, i.e. without mordanting. Sulfide colors aren't in high demand yet, and alizarines aren't being used as much as they could be. The usual acid and basic dyes are used more often, so the materials need to be mordanted first. The mordanting is done by tumbling the materials in a solution containing tannin, and, except for pale shades, some dye wood extract is used; for reds, peach wood extract is used; for browns, fustic or gambier, and for dark browns, a little logwood is added. For all pale shades, sumac is used exclusively. After tumbling in the warm tannin infusion for half an hour, if the materials are going to be dyed with basic colors, the tannin is fixed by tumbling in tartar emetic and salt, or titanium, as described earlier; dyeing is also done as described for persians, except that a slightly higher temperature can be maintained. If the materials are to be dyed black, they are soaked in logwood and iron solutions.

After dyeing and washing up, &c., the goods are fatliquored by placing them in a previously heated drum and drumming them with a mixture known as a “fatliquor,” of which the following recipe is typical: Dissolve 3 ℔ of soft soap by boiling with 3 gallons of water, then add 9 ℔ of neatsfoot oil and boil for some minutes; now place the mixture in an emulsifier and emulsify until cooled to 35° C., then add the yolks of 5 fresh eggs and emulsify for a further half hour. The fatliquor is added to the drum at 55° C., and the goods are drummed for half an hour, when all the fatliquor should be absorbed; they are then slicked out and dried. After drying, they are damped back, staked, dried, re-staked and seasoned with materials similar to those used for persians; when dry they are glazed, boarded on the flesh (“grained”) from neck to butt and belly to belly to give them the box grain, fluffed, reseasoned, reglazed and regrained.

After dyeing and washing, the goods are treated with fatliquor by placing them in a pre-heated drum and mixing them with a blend called "fatliquor." A standard recipe includes dissolving 3 pounds of soft soap by boiling it with 3 gallons of water, then adding 9 pounds of neatsfoot oil and boiling for several minutes. Next, the mixture is placed in an emulsifier and emulsified until it cools to 35° C. Then, add the yolks of 5 fresh eggs and emulsify for another half hour. The fatliquor is added to the drum at 55° C., and the goods are mixed for half an hour until all the fatliquor is absorbed. After that, they are slicked out and dried. Once dried, they are dampened again, staked, dried, restaked, and seasoned with materials similar to those used for persians. When dry, they are glazed, boarded on the flesh side (“grained”) from neck to butt and belly to belly to create the box grain, fluffed, reseasoned, reglazed, and regrained.

Finishing of Bag Hides.—The goods are first soaked back, piled to samm, split or shaved, scoured by machine, finished off by hand, washed up and retanned by drumming in warm sumach and extract, after which they are washed up, struck out, hung up to samm, and “set.” “Setting” consists of laying the grain flat and smooth by striking out with a steel or sharp brass slicker. They are then dried out, topped with linseed mucilage, and again dried. 345 This brushing over with linseed mucilage prevents the dye from sinking too far into the leather; gelatine, Irish moss, starch and gums are also used for the same purpose. These materials are also added to the staining solution to thicken it and further prevent its sinking in.

Finishing of Bag Hides.—The goods are first soaked back, piled to samm, split or shaved, scoured by machine, finished off by hand, washed, and then retanned by drumming in warm sumach and extract. After that, they are washed again, struck out, hung to samm, and “set.” “Setting” involves laying the grain flat and smooth by striking out with a steel or sharp brass slicker. They are then dried out, coated with linseed mucilage, and dried again. 345 This brushing with linseed mucilage prevents the dye from penetrating too deeply into the leather; gelatin, Irish moss, starch, and gums are also used for the same purpose. These materials are also added to the staining solution to thicken it and further prevent it from sinking in.

When dry, the goods are stained by applying a ½% (usually) solution of a suitable basic dye, thickened with linseed, with a brush. Two men are usually employed on this work; one starts at the right-hand flank and the other at the left-hand shank, and they work towards each other, staining in sections; much skill is needed to obviate markings where the sections overlap. The goods may advantageously be bottomed with an acid dye or a dye-wood extract, and then finished with basic dyes. Whichever method is used, two to three coats are given, drying between each. After the last coat of stain, and while the goods are still in a sammied condition, a mixture of linseed mucilage and French chalk is applied to the flesh and glassed off wet, to give it a white appearance, and then the goods are printed with any of the usual bag grains by machine or hand, and dried out. For a bright finish the season may consist of a solution of 15 parts carnauba wax, 10 parts curd soap and 100 parts water boiled together; this is sponged into the grain, dried and the hides are finished by either glassing or brushing. For a duller finish the grain is simply rubbed over with buck tallow and brushed. Hide bellies for small work are treated in much the same manner.

When dry, the goods are dyed by applying a ½% (usually) solution of a suitable basic dye, thickened with linseed, using a brush. Two people usually work on this task; one starts at the right side and the other at the left side, and they work toward each other, staining in sections. A lot of skill is required to avoid marks where the sections overlap. The goods can benefit from being dyed with an acid dye or a dye-wood extract first, then finished with basic dyes. Regardless of the method used, two to three coats are applied, with drying in between each one. After the last coat of stain, while the goods are still somewhat wet, a mixture of linseed mucilage and French chalk is applied to the surface and smoothed out wet to create a white appearance, and then the goods are printed with any usual bag patterns by machine or by hand, and dried. For a bright finish, the season might consist of a solution of 15 parts carnauba wax, 10 parts curd soap, and 100 parts water boiled together; this is sponged into the grain, dried, and the hides are finished by either polishing or brushing. For a duller finish, the grain is simply rubbed with buck tallow and brushed. Hide bellies for smaller work are treated in a similar way.

Glove Leathers.—As these goods were tanned in alum, salt, flour and egg, any undue immersion in water removes the tannage; for this reason they are generally stained like bag hides, one man only being employed on the same skin. The skins are first thoroughly soaked in warm water and then drummed for some minutes in a fresh supply, when they are re-egged to replace that which has been lost. This is best done by drumming them for about 1½ hours in 40 to 50 egg yolks and 5 ℔ of salt for every hundred skins; they are then allowed to be in pile for 24 hours, and are set out on the table ready for mordanting. The mordants universally used are ammonia or alkaline soft soap; 1 in 1000 of the former or a 1% solution of the latter. When the goods have partially dried in, bottoming follows, and usually the natural wood dyestuffs are used for this operation, such as fustic, Brazil wood, peachwood, logwood and turmeric. After application of these colours the goods are sammied and topped with a 1% solution of an acid dye, to which has been added 20% of methylated spirit to prevent frothing with the egg yolk; they are then dried out slowly, staked, pulled in shape, fluffed and brushed by machine. The season, which is sponged on, may consist of 1 part dye, 1 part albumen, 2 parts dextrine and ¼ part glycerine, made up to 100 parts with water; when it has been applied, the goods are sammied, brushed and ironed with a warm flat iron such as is used in laundry work.

Glove Leathers.—Since these goods were tanned with alum, salt, flour, and egg, excessive exposure to water can wash out the tanning. Because of this, they are usually stained like bag hides, with only one person working on the same skin. The skins are first soaked thoroughly in warm water and then drummed for several minutes in fresh water, after which they are re-coated with egg to replace what's been lost. This is best achieved by drumming them for about 1½ hours with 40 to 50 egg yolks and 5 pounds of salt for every hundred skins. They are then piled up for 24 hours before being laid out on the table for mordanting. The mordants commonly used are ammonia or alkaline soft soap; a solution of 1 in 1000 for ammonia or a 1% solution of soft soap. Once the goods have dried partially, the bottoming process takes place, typically using natural wood dyes like fustic, Brazil wood, peachwood, logwood, and turmeric. After applying these colors, the goods are "sammied" and topped with a 1% solution of an acid dye, to which 20% methylated spirit is added to prevent frothing with the egg yolk. They are then slowly dried, staked, shaped, fluffed, and brushed by machine. The finishing solution, applied with a sponge, may consist of 1 part dye, 1 part albumen, 2 parts dextrin, and ¼ part glycerin, made up to 100 parts with water. After application, the goods are "sammied," brushed, and ironed with a warm flat iron, like those used in laundry.

Bookbinding Leathers.—A committee of the Society of Arts (London) has investigated the question of leather for bookbinding, attention having been drawn to this subject by the rotten and decayed condition often observed in bindings less than fifty years old. This committee engaged in research work extending over several years, and the report in which its results were given was edited for the Society of Arts and the Leathersellers’ Company (which also did much important work in connexion with it) by Lord Cobham, chairman of the committee, and Sir Henry Trueman Wood, secretary of the society. The essence of the report, so far as leather manufacture is concerned, is as follows: The goods should be soaked and limed in fresh liquors, and bating and puering should be avoided, weak organic acids or erodine being used; they should also be tanned with pyrogallol tanning materials, and preferably with sumach. In shaving, they should only be necked and backed, i.e. only irregularities should be removed, as further shaving has a considerable weakening effect on the fibre. The striking out should not be heavy enough to lay the fibre. In dyeing, acid dyes and a few direct colours only are permissible, and in connexion with the former the use of sulphuric acid is strongly condemned, as it absolutely disintegrates the fibre; the use of formic, acetic and lactic acids is permitted. The use of salts of mineral acids is to be avoided, and in finishing, tight setting out and damp glazing is not to be recommended; oil may be advantageously used.

Bookbinding Leathers.—A committee of the Society of Arts (London) has looked into the issue of leather for bookbinding after noticing the frequent deterioration in bindings less than fifty years old. This committee conducted research over several years, and the report summarizing their findings was put together for the Society of Arts and the Leathersellers’ Company (which also contributed significantly) by Lord Cobham, the committee chairman, and Sir Henry Trueman Wood, the society's secretary. The main points of the report regarding leather production are as follows: The materials should be soaked and limed in fresh solutions, and bating and puering should be avoided, using weak organic acids or erodine instead; they should be tanned with pyrogallol tanning agents, preferably with sumach. During shaving, only the neck and backing should be trimmed, meaning only irregularities should be removed, as excessive shaving significantly weakens the fiber. The shaving should not be intense enough to flatten the fiber. For dyeing, only acid dyes and a few direct colors are acceptable; the use of sulfuric acid is strongly discouraged as it completely destroys the fiber; however, formic, acetic, and lactic acids are allowed. Salts of mineral acids should be avoided, and in finishing, tight setting out and damp glazing are not recommended; oil can be used beneficially.

Bibliography.—H. G. Bennett, The Manufacture of Leather (1909); S. R. Trotman, Leather Trades Chemistry (1908); M. C. Lamb, Leather Dressing (1907); A. Watt, Leather Manufacture (1906); H. R. Procter, Principles of Leather Manufacture (1903), and Leather Industries Laboratory Book (1908); L. A. Flemming, Practical Tanning (1910); A. M. Villon, Practical Treatise on the Leather Industry (1901); C. T. Davis, Manufacture of Leather (1897). German works include J. Borgman, Die Rotlederfabrikation (Berlin, 1904-1905), and Feinlederfabrikation (1901); J. Jettmar, Handbuch der Chromgerbung (Leipzig, 1900); J. von Schroeder, Gerbereichemie (Berlin, 1898).

References.—H. G. Bennett, The Manufacture of Leather (1909); S. R. Trotman, Leather Trades Chemistry (1908); M. C. Lamb, Leather Dressing (1907); A. Watt, Leather Manufacture (1906); H. R. Procter, Principles of Leather Manufacture (1903), and Leather Industries Laboratory Book (1908); L. A. Flemming, Practical Tanning (1910); A. M. Villon, Practical Treatise on the Leather Industry (1901); C. T. Davis, Manufacture of Leather (1897). German works include J. Borgman, Die Rotlederfabrikation (Berlin, 1904-1905), and Feinlederfabrikation (1901); J. Jettmar, Handbuch der Chromgerbung (Leipzig, 1900); J. von Schroeder, Gerbereichemie (Berlin, 1898).

(J. G. P.*)

1 See Lye.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See Lye.

LEATHER, ARTIFICIAL. Under the name of artificial leather, or of American leather cloth, large quantities of a material having, more or less, a leather-like surface are used, principally for upholstery purposes, such as the covering of chairs, lining the tops of writing desks and tables, &c. There is considerable diversity in the preparation of such materials. A common variety consists of a web of calico coated with boiled linseed oil mixed with dryers and lampblack or other pigment. Several coats of this mixture are uniformly spread, smoothed and compressed on the cotton surface by passing it between metal rollers, and when the surface is required to possess a glossy enamel-like appearance, it receives a finishing coat of copal varnish. A grained morocco surface is given to the material by passing it between suitably embossed rollers. Preparations of this kind have a close affinity to cloth waterproofed with indiarubber, and to such manufactures as ordinary waxcloth. An artificial leather which has been patented and proposed for use as soles for boots, &c., is composed of powdered scraps and cuttings of leather mixed with solution of guttapercha dried and compressed. In place of the guttapercha solution, oxidized linseed oil or dissolved resin may be used as the binding medium for the leather powder.

FAKE LEATHER. Artificial leather, also known as American leather cloth, is a material that has a leather-like surface and is primarily used for upholstery, like covering chairs and lining the tops of desks and tables, etc. There are various methods for creating these materials. A common type involves a base of calico coated with boiled linseed oil mixed with drying agents and pigments like lampblack. Several layers of this mixture are applied uniformly, smoothed out, and compressed onto the cotton surface by passing it through metal rollers. If a glossy, enamel-like finish is desired, a coat of copal varnish is added. The material can also have a grained morocco texture by being passed through specially designed embossed rollers. These kinds of preparations are closely related to waterproof cloth treated with indiarubber and standard waxcloth. A patented form of artificial leather proposed for use in boot soles and similar items is made from powdered scraps and cuttings of leather mixed with a solution of guttapercha, which is then dried and compressed. Instead of guttapercha, oxidized linseed oil or dissolved resin may also be used as the binding agent for the leather powder.

LEATHERHEAD, an urban district in the Epsom parliamentary division of Surrey, England, 18 m. S.S.W. of London, on the London, Brighton & South Coast and the London & South-Western railways. Pop. (1901) 4694. It lies at the foot of the North Downs in the pleasant valley of the river Mole. The church of St Mary and St Nicholas dates from the 14th century. St John’s Foundation School, opened in London in 1852, is devoted to the education of sons of poor clergymen. Leatherhead has brick-making and brewing industries, and the district is largely residential.

LEATHERHEAD, is an urban district in the Epsom parliamentary division of Surrey, England, located 18 miles S.S.W. of London, on the London, Brighton & South Coast and the London & South-Western railways. Population (1901) was 4,694. It sits at the foot of the North Downs in the beautiful valley of the river Mole. The church of St Mary and St Nicholas dates back to the 14th century. St John’s Foundation School, which opened in London in 1852, is dedicated to educating the sons of underprivileged clergymen. Leatherhead has industries in brick-making and brewing, and the area is primarily residential.

LEATHES, STANLEY (1830-1900), English divine and Orientalist, was born at Ellesborough, Bucks, on the 21st of March 1830, and was educated at Jesus College, Cambridge, where he graduated B.A. in 1852, M.A. 1853. In 1853 he was the first Tyrwhitt’s Hebrew scholar. He was ordained priest in 1857, and after serving several curacies was appointed professor of Hebrew at King’s College, London, in 1863. In 1868-1870 he was Boyle lecturer (The Witness of the Old Testament to Christ), in 1873 Hulsean lecturer (The Gospel its Own Witness), in 1874 Bampton Lecturer (The Religion of the Christ) and from 1876 to 1880 Warburtonian lecturer. He was a member of the Old Testament revision committee from 1870 to 1885. In 1876 he was elected prebendary of St Paul’s Cathedral, and he was rector of Cliffe-at-Hoo near Gravesend (1880-1889) and of Much Hadham, Hertfordshire (1889-1900). The university of Edinburgh gave him the honorary degree of D.D. in 1878, and his own college made him an honorary fellow in 1885. Besides the lectures noted he published Studies in Genesis (1880), The Foundations of Morality (1882) and some volumes of sermons. He died in May 1900.

LEATHES, STANLEY (1830-1900), English theologian and Orientalist, was born in Ellesborough, Buckinghamshire, on March 21, 1830. He studied at Jesus College, Cambridge, where he earned his B.A. in 1852 and M.A. in 1853. In 1853, he became the first Tyrwhitt Hebrew scholar. He was ordained as a priest in 1857 and, after serving in several curacies, was appointed professor of Hebrew at King’s College, London, in 1863. From 1868 to 1870, he served as the Boyle lecturer (The Witness of the Old Testament to Christ), in 1873 as the Hulsean lecturer (The Gospel Its Own Witness), in 1874 as the Bampton Lecturer (The Religion of the Christ), and from 1876 to 1880 as the Warburtonian lecturer. He was a member of the Old Testament revision committee from 1870 to 1885. In 1876, he was elected prebendary of St Paul’s Cathedral, and he served as rector of Cliffe-at-Hoo near Gravesend (1880-1889) and of Much Hadham, Hertfordshire (1889-1900). The University of Edinburgh awarded him an honorary D.D. in 1878, and his college made him an honorary fellow in 1885. In addition to the lectures mentioned, he published Studies in Genesis (1880), The Foundations of Morality (1882), and several volumes of sermons. He passed away in May 1900.

His son, Stanley Mordaunt Leathes (b. 1861), became a fellow of Trinity, Cambridge, and lecturer on history, and was one of the editors of the Cambridge Modern History; he was secretary to the Civil Service Commission from 1903 to 1907, when he was appointed a Civil Service Commissioner.

His son, Stanley Mordaunt Leathes (b. 1861), became a fellow at Trinity College, Cambridge, and a history lecturer. He was also one of the editors of the Cambridge Modern History; from 1903 to 1907, he served as the secretary of the Civil Service Commission, before being appointed as a Civil Service Commissioner.

LEAVEN (in Mid. Eng. levain, adapted from Fr. levain, in same sense, from Lat. levamen, which is only found in the sense of alleviation, comfort, levare, to lift up), a substance which produces fermentation, particularly in the making of bread, properly a portion of already fermented dough added to other dough for this purpose (see Bread). The word is used figuratively of any element, influence or agency which effects a subtle or secret change. These figurative usages are mainly due to the comparison of the kingdom of Heaven to leaven in Matt. xiii. 33, and to the warning against the leaven of the Pharisees in Matt. xvi. 6. In the first example the word is used of a good influence, but the more usual significance is that of an evil agency. There was among the Hebrews an association of the idea of fermentation and corruption, which may have been one source of the prohibition of the use of leavened bread in sacrificial offerings. For the usage of unleavened bread at the feasts of the Passover and of Massôth, and the connexion of the two, see Passover.

LEAVEN (in Middle English levain, borrowed from French levain, in the same sense, from Latin levamen, which is found only in the sense of relief or comfort, levare, to lift up), is a substance that causes fermentation, especially in bread-making. It specifically refers to a portion of already fermented dough that is added to other dough for this purpose (see Bread). The term is also used figuratively to describe any element, influence, or agency that brings about a subtle or secret change. These figurative meanings mainly arise from the comparison of the kingdom of Heaven to leaven in Matt. xiii. 33, and the warning against the leaven of the Pharisees in Matt. xvi. 6. In the first example, the word indicates a positive influence, but it more commonly suggests an evil agency. Among the Hebrews, there was a connection between fermentation and corruption, which may have contributed to the prohibition of using leavened bread in sacrificial offerings. For the use of unleavened bread during the feasts of Passover and Massôth, and the link between the two, see Passover.

LEAVENWORTH, a city and the county-seat of Leavenworth county, Kansas, U.S.A., on the W. bank of the Missouri river. 346 Pop. (1900) 20,738, of whom 3402 were foreign-born and 2925 were negroes; (1910 census) 19,363. It is one of the most important railway centres west of the Missouri river, being served by the Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fé, the Chicago, Burlington & Quincy, the Chicago, Rock Island & Pacific, the Chicago Great Western, the Missouri Pacific, the Union Pacific and the Leavenworth & Topeka railways. The city is laid out regularly in the bottom-lands of the river, and its streets are named after Indian tribes. Rolling hills surround it on three sides. The city has many handsome public buildings, and contains the Cathedral of the Immaculate Conception, Leavenworth being the see of a Roman Catholic bishop. The public institutions include the Kansas State Protective Home (1889) for negroes, an Old Ladies’ Rest (1892), St Vincent’s Orphans’ Asylum (1886, open to all sects) and a Guardian Angels’ Home (1889), for negroes—all private charities aided by the state; also St John’s Hospital (1879), Cushing Hospital (1893) and Leavenworth Hospital (1900), which are training schools for nurses. There is also a branch of the National Home for Disabled Volunteer Soldiers. In the suburbs there are state and United States penitentiaries. Leavenworth is a trading centre and has various manufactures, the most important being foundry and machine shop and flouring and grist-mill products, and furniture. The city’s factory products increased in value from $3,251,460 in 1900 to $4,151,767 in 1905, or 27.7%. There are valuable coal mines in Leavenworth and the immediate vicinity. About 3 m. N. of the city, on a reservation of about 6000 acres, is Fort Leavenworth, an important United States military post, associated with which are a National Cemetery and Service Schools of the U.S. Army (founded in 1881 as the U.S. Infantry and Cavalry School and in 1901 developed into a General Service and Staff College). In 1907 there were three general divisions of these schools: the Army School of the Line, for officers (not below the grade of captain) of the regular army and for militia officers recommended by the governors of their respective states or territories, offering courses in military art, engineering, law and languages; the Army Signal School, also open to regular and militia officers, and having departments of field signalling, signal engineering, topography and languages; and the Army Staff College, in which the students are the highest graduates from the Army School of the Line, and the courses of instruction are included in the departments of military art, engineering, law, languages and care of troops. The course is one year in each school. At Fort Leavenworth there is a colossal bronze statue of General U. S. Grant erected in 1889. A military prison was established at Fort Leavenworth in 1875; it was used as a civil prison from 1895 to 1906, when it was re-established as a military prison. Its inmates were formerly taught various trades, but owing to the opposition of labour organizations this system was discontinued, and the prisoners are now employed in work on the military reservation.

LEAVENWORTH, is a city and the county seat of Leavenworth County, Kansas, U.S.A., located on the west bank of the Missouri River. 346 The population in 1900 was 20,738, including 3,402 foreign-born individuals and 2,925 African Americans; according to the 1910 census, it was 19,363. It is one of the key railway hubs west of the Missouri River, served by the Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fé, the Chicago, Burlington & Quincy, the Chicago, Rock Island & Pacific, the Chicago Great Western, the Missouri Pacific, the Union Pacific, and the Leavenworth & Topeka railways. The city is consistently laid out in the river's bottomlands, with streets named after Native American tribes. It is surrounded by rolling hills on three sides. The city features many impressive public buildings and houses the Cathedral of the Immaculate Conception, as Leavenworth is the seat of a Roman Catholic bishop. Public institutions include the Kansas State Protective Home (1889) for African Americans, an Old Ladies’ Rest (1892), St. Vincent’s Orphans’ Asylum (1886, open to all denominations), and a Guardian Angels’ Home (1889) for African Americans—all private charities funded by the state; there are also St. John’s Hospital (1879), Cushing Hospital (1893), and Leavenworth Hospital (1900), which serve as training schools for nurses. Additionally, there is a branch of the National Home for Disabled Volunteer Soldiers. In the suburbs, there are state and federal penitentiaries. Leavenworth serves as a trading center and has various manufacturing industries, with the most significant being foundries, machine shops, flour mills, and furniture making. The city's factory output rose in value from $3,251,460 in 1900 to $4,151,767 in 1905, an increase of 27.7%. There are valuable coal mines in Leavenworth and the surrounding area. About 3 miles north of the city, on a 6,000-acre reservation, is Fort Leavenworth, an important U.S. military post that includes a National Cemetery and U.S. Army Service Schools (established in 1881 as the U.S. Infantry and Cavalry School and expanded into a General Service and Staff College in 1901). By 1907, there were three main divisions within these schools: the Army School of the Line, intended for regular army officers (no lower than captain) and militia officers recommended by governors of their respective states or territories, offering courses in military art, engineering, law, and languages; the Army Signal School, open to both regular and militia officers, with departments for field signaling, signal engineering, topography, and languages; and the Army Staff College, for the top graduates from the Army School of the Line, covering military art, engineering, law, languages, and troop care, with a one-year course in each school. At Fort Leavenworth, there is a large bronze statue of General U.S. Grant, erected in 1889. A military prison was established at Fort Leavenworth in 1875, used as a civilian prison from 1895 to 1906, after which it was re-established as a military prison. Its inmates were previously taught various trades, but due to opposition from labor organizations, this system was stopped, and prisoners are now employed in work on the military reservation.

The fort, from which the city took its name, was built in 1827, in the Indian country, by Colonel Henry Leavenworth (1783-1834) of the 3rd Infantry, for the protection of traders plying between the Missouri river and Santa Fé. The town site was claimed by Missourians from Weston in June 1854, Leavenworth thus being the oldest permanent settlement in Kansas; and during the contest in Kansas between the anti-slavery and pro-slavery settlers, it was known as a pro-slavery town. It was first incorporated by the Territorial legislature in 1855; a new charter was obtained in 1881; and in 1908 the city adopted the commission plan of government. On the 3rd of April 1858 a free-state convention adopted the Leavenworth Constitution here; this constitution, which was as radically anti-slavery as the Lecompton Constitution was pro-slavery, was nominally approved by popular vote in May 1858, and was later submitted to Congress, but never came into effect. During the Civil War Leavenworth enjoyed great prosperity, at the expense of more inland towns, partly owing to the proximity of the fort, which gave it immunity from border raids from Missouri and was an important depôt of supplies and a place for mustering troops into and out of the service. Leavenworth was, in Territorial days and until after 1880, the largest and most thriving commercial city of the state, and rivalled Kansas City, Missouri, which, however, finally got the better of it in the struggle for railway facilities.

The fort, from which the city got its name, was built in 1827, in Indian territory, by Colonel Henry Leavenworth (1783-1834) of the 3rd Infantry, to protect traders traveling between the Missouri River and Santa Claus Fé. Missourians from Weston claimed the town site in June 1854, making Leavenworth the oldest permanent settlement in Kansas; during the conflict in Kansas between anti-slavery and pro-slavery settlers, it was known as a pro-slavery town. It was first incorporated by the Territorial legislature in 1855; a new charter was obtained in 1881; and in 1908 the city adopted the commission form of government. On April 3, 1858, a free-state convention adopted the Leavenworth Constitution here; this constitution, which was as strongly anti-slavery as the Lecompton Constitution was pro-slavery, was nominally approved by popular vote in May 1858 and was later submitted to Congress but never went into effect. During the Civil War, Leavenworth thrived greatly, benefiting at the expense of more inland towns, partly due to the fort's proximity, which protected it from border raids from Missouri and made it an important depot for supplies and a place for mustering troops in and out of service. Leavenworth was, during its Territorial days and until after 1880, the largest and most prosperous commercial city in the state, rivaling Kansas City, Missouri, which eventually outpaced it in the battle for railway access.

LEBANON (from Semitic laban, “to be white,” or “whitish,” probably referring not to snow, but to the bare white walls of chalk or limestone which form the characteristic feature of the whole range), in its widest sense is the central mountain mass of Syria, extending for about 100 m. from N.N.E. to S.S.W. It is bounded W. by the sea, N. by the plain Jun Akkar, beyond which rise the mountains of the Ansarieh, and E. by the inland plateau of Syria, mainly steppe-land. To the south Lebanon ends about the point where the river Litany bends westward, and at Banias. A valley narrowing towards its southern end, and now called the Buka’a, divides the mountainous mass into two great parts. That lying to the west is still called Jebel Libnan; the greater part of the eastern mass now bears the name of the Eastern Mountain (Jebel el-Sharḳi). In Greek the western range was called Libanos, the eastern Antilibanos. The southern extension of the latter, Mount Hermon (q.v.), may in many respects be treated as a separate mountain.

LEBANON (from Semitic laban, “to be white,” or “whitish,” probably referring not to snow, but to the bare white walls of chalk or limestone that are the defining feature of the entire range), in its broadest sense is the central mountain mass of Syria, stretching for about 100 miles from N.N.E. to S.S.W. It is bordered to the west by the sea, to the north by the Jun Akkar plain, beyond which rise the mountains of the Ansarieh, and to the east by the inland plateau of Syria, mostly steppe-land. To the south, Lebanon ends roughly where the Litany River bends westward and at Banias. A valley that narrows towards its southern end, now called the Buka’a, separates the mountainous mass into two major parts. The western part is still known as Jebel Libnan; the larger part of the eastern mass is now called the Eastern Mountain (Jebel el-Sharḳi). In Greek, the western range was referred to as Libanos, and the eastern as Antilibanos. The southern extension of the latter, Mount Hermon (q.v.), can in many ways be considered a separate mountain.

Lebanon and Anti-Lebanon have many features in common; in both the southern portion is less arid and barren than the northern, the western valleys better wooded and more fertile than the eastern. In general the main elevations of the two ranges form pairs lying opposite one another; the forms of both ranges are monotonous, but the colouring is splendid, especially when viewed from a distance; when seen close at hand only a few valleys with perennial streams offer pictures of landscape beauty, their rich green contrasting pleasantly with the bare brown and yellow mountain sides. The finest scenery is found in N. Lebanon, in the Maronite districts of Kesrawan and Bsherreh, where the gorges are veritable canyons, and the villages are often very picturesquely situated. The south of the chain is more open and undulating. Anti-Lebanon is the barest and most inhospitable part of the system.

Lebanon and Anti-Lebanon share many similarities; in both, the southern areas are less dry and barren than the northern ones, and the western valleys are better forested and more fertile than the eastern ones. Generally, the main peaks of the two ranges correspond with each other; both ranges have a monotonous shape, but their colors are stunning, especially when viewed from afar. Up close, only a few valleys with year-round streams provide beautiful landscapes, with their lush green contrasting nicely against the bare brown and yellow mountain slopes. The most impressive scenery is found in Northern Lebanon, particularly in the Maronite regions of Kesrawan and Bsherreh, where the gorges resemble deep canyons, and the villages are often beautifully located. The southern part of the range is more open and rolling. Anti-Lebanon is the most barren and least welcoming part of the system.

The district west of Lebanon, averaging about 20 m. in breadth, slopes in an intricate series of plateaus and terraces to the Mediterranean. The coast is for the most part abrupt and rocky, often leaving room for only a narrow path along the shore, and when viewed from the sea it does not suggest the extent of country lying between its cliffs and the lofty summits behind. Most of the mountain spurs run from east to west, but in northern Lebanon the prevailing direction of the valleys is north-westerly, and in the south some ridges run parallel with the principal chain. The valleys have for the most part been deeply excavated by mountain streams; the apparently inaccessible heights are crowned by numerous villages, castles or cloisters embosomed among trees. The chief perennial streams, beginning from the north, are the Nahr Akkar, N. Arka, N. el-Barid, N. Kadisha, “the holy river” (the valley of which begins in the immediate neighbourhood of the highest summits, and rapidly descends in a series of great bends till the river reaches the sea at Tripoli), Wadi el-Joz (falling into the sea at Batrun), Wadi Fidar, Nahr Ibrahim (the ancient Adonis, having its source in a recess of the great mountain amphitheatre where the famous sanctuary Apheca, the modern Afka, lay), Nahr el-Kelb (the ancient Lycus), Nahr Beirut (the ancient Magoras, entering the sea at Beirut), Nahr Damur (ancient Tamyras), Nahr el-’Auwali (the ancient Bostrenus, which in the upper part of its course is joined by the Nahr el-Baruk). The ‘Auwali and the Nahr el-Zaherani, the only other considerable streams before we reach the Litany, flow north-east to south-west, in consequence of the interposition of a ridge subordinate and parallel to the central chain. On the north, where the mountain bears the special name of Jebel Akkar, the main ridge of Lebanon rises gradually from the plain. A number of valleys run to the north and north-east, among them that of the Nahr el-Kebir, the Eleutherus of the ancients, which rises in the Jebel el-Abiad on the eastern slope of Lebanon, and afterwards, skirting the district, flows westward to the sea. South of Jebel el-Abiaḍ, beneath the main ridge, which as a rule falls away suddenly towards the east, occur several small elevated terraces having a southward slope; among these are the Wadi en-Nusur (“vale of eagles”), and the basin of the lake Yammuna, with its intermittent spring Neb’a el-Arba’in. Of the streams which descend into the Buka’a, the Berdani rises in Jebel Sunnin, and enters the plain by a deep and picturesque mountain cleft at Zaḥleh.

The area west of Lebanon, averaging about 20 miles wide, slopes down in a complex arrangement of plateaus and terraces towards the Mediterranean. The coastline is mostly steep and rocky, often allowing only a narrow path along the shore, and when seen from the sea, it doesn't reveal the vast land that lies between its cliffs and the high peaks behind. Most of the mountain spurs run east to west, but in northern Lebanon, the valleys generally trend northwest, while to the south, some ridges run parallel to the main chain. The valleys have mostly been sharply carved by mountain streams; the seemingly unreachable heights are topped by several villages, castles, or monasteries nestled among trees. The main year-round streams, starting from the north, include the Nahr Akkar, N. Arka, N. el-Barid, N. Kadisha – known as "the holy river" (the valley of which begins near the highest peaks and quickly descends in a series of sharp bends until it reaches the sea at Tripoli), Wadi el-Joz (flowing into the sea at Batrun), Wadi Fidar, Nahr Ibrahim (the ancient Adonis, rising in a cove of the grand mountain amphitheater where the famous sanctuary Apheca, now Afka, was located), Nahr el-Kelb (the ancient Lycus), Nahr Beirut (the ancient Magoras, entering the sea at Beirut), Nahr Damur (ancient Tamyras), Nahr el-’Auwali (the ancient Bostrenus, which is joined in its upper reaches by the Nahr el-Baruk). The ‘Auwali and the Nahr el-Zaherani, the only other significant streams before reaching the Litany, flow northeast to southwest due to a lower ridge parallel to the central chain. To the north, where the mountain is specifically called Jebel Akkar, the main ridge of Lebanon rises gently from the plain. Several valleys run north and northeast, including the Nahr el-Kebir, known in ancient times as the Eleutherus, which rises in Jebel el-Abiad on the eastern slope of Lebanon and then winds westward to the sea. South of Jebel el-Abiaḍ, beneath the main ridge that usually drops sharply eastward, are several small elevated terraces sloping south; among them are the Wadi en-Nusur (“vale of eagles”) and the basin of Lake Yammuna, which has an intermittent spring called Neb’a el-Arba’in. Of the streams flowing into the Buka'a, the Berdani rises in Jebel Sunnin and enters the plain through a deep and scenic mountain gap at Zaḥleh.

The most elevated summits occur in the north, but even these are of very gentle gradient. The “Cedar block” consists of a double line of four and three summits respectively, ranged from north to south, with a deviation of about 35°. Those to the east are ‘Uyun Urghush, Makmal, Muskiyya (or Naba’ esh-Shemaila) and Ras Zahr el-Kazib; fronting the sea are Kam Sauda or Timarun, Fumm el-Mizab and Zahr el-Kandil. The height of Zahr el-Kazib, by barometric measurement, is 10,018 ft.; that of the others does not reach 10,000 ft. South from them is the pass (8351 ft.) which leads from Baalbek to Tripoli; the great mountain amphitheatre on the west side of its summit is remarkable. Farther south is a second group of lofty summits—the snow-capped Sunnin, visible 347 from Beirut; its height is 8482 ft. Between this group and the more southerly Jebel Keniseh (about 6700 ft.) lies the pass (4700 ft.) traversed by the French post road between Beirut and Damascus. Among the bare summits still farther south are the long ridge of Jebel el-Baruk (about 7000 ft.), the Jebel Niha, with the Tau’amat Niha (about 6100 ft.), near which is a pass to Sidon, and the Jebel Rihan (about 5400 ft.).

The highest peaks are in the north, but they have a very gentle slope. The "Cedar block" is made up of two lines of four and three peaks, respectively, arranged from north to south, with a shift of about 35°. To the east, you find Uyun Urghush, Makmal, Muskiyya (or Naba’ esh-Shemaila), and Ras Zahr el-Kazib; facing the sea are Kam Sauda or Timarun, Fumm el-Mizab, and Zahr el-Kandil. The elevation of Zahr el-Kazib, based on barometric measurements, is 10,018 ft.; the others fall short of 10,000 ft. To the south, there's a pass (8,351 ft.) that connects Baalbek to Tripoli; the large mountain amphitheater on the west side of its peak is notable. Further south is a second group of tall peaks—the snow-capped Sunnin, which can be seen from Beirut; it stands at 8,482 ft. Between this group and the more southern Jebel Keniseh (around 6,700 ft.) is the pass (4,700 ft.) that the French post road uses between Beirut and Damascus. Among the bare peaks even further south are the long ridge of Jebel el-Baruk (about 7,000 ft.), Jebel Niha, along with Tau’amat Niha (about 6,100 ft.), near which there is a pass to Sidon, and Jebel Rihan (about 5,400 ft.).

The Buka’a, the broad valley which separates Lebanon from Anti-Lebanon, is watered by two rivers having their watershed near Baalbek, at an elevation of about 3600 ft., and separated only by a short mile at their sources. That flowing northwards, El-’Asi, is the ancient Orontes (q.v.); the other is the Litany. In the lower part of its course the latter has scooped out a deep and narrow rocky bed; at Burghuz it is spanned by a great natural bridge. Not far from the point where it suddenly trends to the west lie, immediately above the romantic valley, at an elevation of 1500 ft., the imposing ruins of the old castle Kal’at esh-Shakif, near one of the passes to Sidon. In its lower part the Litany bears the name of Nahr el-Kasimiya. Neither the Orontes nor the Litany has any important affluent.

The Buka’a, the wide valley that separates Lebanon from Anti-Lebanon, is fed by two rivers that have their source near Baalbek, at an elevation of about 3600 ft., and are only about a mile apart at their origins. The river that flows northward, El-’Asi, is the ancient Orontes (q.v.); the other is the Litany. In its lower course, the Litany has carved out a deep and narrow rocky bed; at Burghuz, it is crossed by a large natural bridge. Not far from where it suddenly bends westward, perched above the scenic valley at an elevation of 1500 ft., are the impressive ruins of the old castle Kal’at esh-Shakif, near one of the routes to Sidon. In its lower section, the Litany is called Nahr el-Kasimiya. Neither the Orontes nor the Litany has any significant tributaries.

The Buka’a used to be known as Coelesyria (Strabo. xvi. 2, 21); but that word as employed by the ancients had a much more extensive application. At present its full name is Buka’a el-’Aziz (the dear Buka’a), and its northern portion is known as Sahlet Ba’albek (the plain of Baalbek). The valley is from 4 to 6 m. broad, with an undulating surface.

The Buka’a was once called Coelesyria (Strabo. xvi. 2, 21); however, the term as used by ancient people had a much broader meaning. Today, it is officially named Buka’a el-’Aziz (the dear Buka’a), and its northern part is referred to as Sahlet Ba’albek (the plain of Baalbek). The valley is about 4 to 6 meters wide, with a rolling landscape.

The Anti-Lebanon chain has been less fully explored than that of Lebanon. Apart from its southern offshoots it is 67 m. long, while its width varies from 16 to 13½ m. It rises from the plain of Hasya-Homs, and in its northern portion is very arid. The range has not so many offshoots as occur on the west side of Lebanon; under its precipitous slopes stretch table-lands and broad plateaus, which, especially on the east side looking towards the steppe, steadily increase in width. Along the western side of northern Anti-Lebanon stretches the Khasha’a, a rough red region lined with juniper trees, a succession of the hardest limestone crests and ridges, bristling with bare rock and crag that shelter tufts of vegetation, and are divided by a succession of grassy ravines. On the eastern side the parallel valley of ‘Asal el-Ward deserves special mention; the descent towards the plain eastwards, as seen for example at Ma’lula, is singular—first a spacious amphitheatre and then two deep very narrow gorges. Few perennial streams take their rise in Anti-Lebanon; one of the finest and best watered valleys is that of Helbun, the ancient Chalybon, the Helbon of Ezek. xxvii. 18. The highest points of the range, reckoning from the north, are Halimat el-Kabu (8257 ft.), which has a splendid view; the Fatli block, including Tal’at Musa (8721 ft.) and the adjoining Jebel Nebi Baruh (7900 ft.); and a third group near Bludan, in which the most prominent names are Shakif, Akhyar and Abu‘l-Hin (8330 ft.); Of the valleys descending westward the first to claim mention is the Wadi Yafufa; a little farther south, lying north and south, is the rich upland valley of Zebedani, where the Barada has its highest sources. Pursuing an easterly course, this stream receives the waters of the romantic ‘Ain Fije (which doubles its volume), and bursts out by a rocky gateway upon the plain of Damascus, in the irrigation of which it is the chief agent. It is the Abana of 2 Kings v. 12; the portion of Anti-Lebanon traversed by it was also called by the same name (Canticles iv. 8). From the point where the southerly continuation of Anti-Lebanon begins to take a more westerly direction, a low ridge shoots out towards the south-west, trending farther and farther away from the eastern chain and narrowing the Buka’a; upon the eastern side of this ridge lies the elevated valley or hilly stretch known as Wadi et-Teim. In the north, beside ‘Ain Faluj, it is connected by a low watershed with the Buka’a; from the gorge of the Litany it is separated by the ridge of Jebel eḍ-Ḍahr. At its southern end it contracts and merges into the plain of Baṇias, thus enclosing Mount Hermon on its north-west and west sides; eastward from the Hasbany branch of the Jordan lies the meadow-land Merj ‘Iyun, the ancient Ijon (1 Kings xv. 20).

The Anti-Lebanon range is less explored than the Lebanon range. Aside from its southern extensions, it measures 67 km long, and its width ranges from 16 to 13.5 km. It rises from the Hasya-Homs plain, and the northern part is very dry. This range doesn't have as many offshoots as the west side of Lebanon; beneath its steep slopes are flatlands and wide plateaus, which, especially on the east side towards the steppe, progressively widen. On the western side of northern Anti-Lebanon lies the Khasha’a, a rugged red area lined with juniper trees, a series of hard limestone peaks and ridges, scattered with bare rock and cliffs that support patches of vegetation and are separated by grassy valleys. The parallel valley of ‘Asal el-Ward on the eastern side is noteworthy; the descent towards the plain to the east, like the view from Ma’lula, is unique—first a large amphitheater and then two deep, very narrow gorges. Few permanent streams originate in Anti-Lebanon; one of the most beautiful and well-watered valleys is Helbun, the ancient Chalybon and Helbon mentioned in Ezekiel 27:18. The highest points of the range, moving from north to south, are Halimat el-Kabu (2,507 m), which offers an amazing view; the Fatli block, which includes Tal’at Musa (2,652 m) and the nearby Jebel Nebi Baruh (2,408 m); and a third group near Bludan, with notable peaks like Shakif, Akhyar, and Abu‘l-Hin (2,536 m). Among the valleys that descend to the west, the first to be mentioned is the Wadi Yafufa; a bit further south lies the lush upland valley of Zebedani, where the Barada has its highest springs. As it flows eastward, this river collects water from the picturesque ‘Ain Fije (which nearly doubles its flow) and bursts out through a rocky opening onto the Damascus plain, where it plays a critical role in irrigation. It is the Abana mentioned in 2 Kings 5:12; the part of Anti-Lebanon it flows through was also known by this name (Song of Solomon 4:8). From the point where the southern extension of Anti-Lebanon starts turning more west, a low ridge extends southwest, moving further away from the eastern chain and narrowing the Buka'a; on this ridge's eastern side is the elevated valley or hilly area called Wadi et-Teim. To the north, near ‘Ain Faluj, it connects to the Buka'a through a low watershed; it is separated from the Litany gorge by the Jebel eḍ-Ḍahr ridge. At its southern end, it narrows and merges into the Baṇias plain, thus enclosing Mount Hermon to the northwest and west; east of the Hasbany branch of the Jordan is the meadowland Merj ‘Iyun, the ancient Ijon (1 Kings 15:20).

Vegetation.—The western slope of Lebanon has the common characteristics of the flora of the Mediterranean coast, but the Anti-Lebanon belongs to the poorer region of the steppes, and the Mediterranean species are met with only sporadically along the water-courses. Forest and pasture land do not properly exist: the place of the first is for the most part taken by a low brushwood; grass is not plentiful, and the higher ridges maintain alpine plants only so long as patches of snow continue to lie. The rock walls harbour some rock plants, but many absolutely barren wildernesses of stone occur. (1) On the western slope, to a height of 1600 ft., is the coast region, similar to that of Syria in general and of the south of Asia Minor. Characteristic trees are the locust tree and the stone pine; in Melia Azedarach and Ficus Sycomorus (Beirut) is an admixture of foreign and partially subtropical elements. The great mass of the vegetation, however is of the low-growing type (maquis or garrigue of the western Mediterranean), with small and stiff leaves, and frequently thorny and aromatic, as for example the ilex (Quercus coccifera), Smilax, Cistus, Lentiscus, Calycotome, &c. (2) Next comes, from 1600 to 6500 ft., the mountain region, which may also be called the forest region, still exhibiting sparse woods and isolated trees wherever shelter, moisture and the inhabitants have permitted their growth. From 1600 to 3200 ft. is a zone of dwarf hard-leaved oaks, amongst which occur the Oriental forms Fontanesia phillyraeoides, Acer syriacum and the beautiful red-stemmed Arbutus Andrachne. Higher up, between 3700 and 4200 ft., a tall pine, Pinus Brutia, is characteristic. Between 4200 and 6200 ft. is the region of the two most interesting forest trees of Lebanon, the cypress and the cedar. The former still grows thickly, especially in the valley of the Kadisha; the horizontal is the prevailing variety. In the upper Kadisha valley there is a cedar grove of about three hundred trees, amongst which five are of gigantic size. (See also Cedar.) The cypress and cedar zone exhibits a variety of other leaf-bearing and coniferous trees; of the first may be mentioned several oaks—Quercus subalpina (Kotschy), Q. Cerris and the hop-hornbeam (Ostrya); of the second class the rare Cilician silver fir (Abies cilicica) may be noticed. Next come the junipers, sometimes attaining the size of trees (Juniperus excelsa, J. rufescens and, with fruit as large as plums, J. drupacea). But the chief ornament of Lebanon is the Rhododendron ponticum, with its brilliant purple flower clusters; a peculiar evergreen, Vinca libanotica, also adds beauty to this zone. (3) Into the alpine region (6200 to 10,400 ft.) penetrate a few very stunted oaks (Quercus subalpina), the junipers already mentioned and a barberry (Berberis cretica), which sometimes spreads into close thickets. Then follow the low, dense, prone, pillow-like dwarf bushes, thorny and grey, common to the Oriental highlands—Astragalus and the peculiar Acantholimon. They are found to within 300 ft. of the highest summits.

Vegetation.—The western slope of Lebanon features typical Mediterranean coastal flora, while the Anti-Lebanon belongs to a less rich steppe region, where Mediterranean species appear only occasionally along watercourses. Forests and pasture land are mostly absent; instead, low brushwood takes the place of forests, and grass is scarce. The higher ridges support alpine plants only as long as snow patches remain. The rocky walls host some rock plants, but there are many completely barren stone wastelands. (1) On the western slope, up to 1600 ft. in elevation, is the coastal region, which resembles that of Syria and southern Asia Minor. Notable trees include the locust tree and stone pine, with some foreign and partly subtropical species like Melia Azedarach and Ficus Sycomorus (Beirut). However, the majority of the vegetation is low-growing (maquis or garrigue of the western Mediterranean), characterized by small, tough leaves that are often thorny and fragrant, including species like the ilex (Quercus coccifera), Smilax, Cistus, Lentiscus, Calycotome, etc. (2) From 1600 to 6500 ft. is the mountain region, also known as the forest region, which shows sparse woods and isolated trees wherever shelter, moisture, and human activity permit. Between 1600 and 3200 ft. exists a zone of dwarf hard-leaved oaks, alongside Oriental varieties like Fontanesia phillyraeoides, Acer syriacum, and the striking red-stemmed Arbutus Andrachne. Higher up, between 3700 and 4200 ft., the tall pine species Pinus Brutia becomes predominant. Between 4200 and 6200 ft. lies the area of Lebanon's most remarkable forest trees, the cypress and cedar. The cypress still grows abundantly, especially in the Kadisha valley, with the horizontal variety being the most common. In the upper Kadisha valley, there's a grove of about three hundred cedar trees, five of which are giants. (See also Cedar.) The cypress and cedar zone contains a variety of other deciduous and coniferous trees; among the deciduous are several oaks—Quercus subalpina (Kotschy), Q. Cerris, and the hop-hornbeam (Ostrya); from the conifers, the rare Cilician silver fir (Abies cilicica) is notable. Following these are junipers, which can grow to tree size (Juniperus excelsa, J. rufescens, and the plum-sized juniper, J. drupacea). Yet, the true highlight of Lebanon is the Rhododendron ponticum, known for its vibrant purple flower clusters; a unique evergreen, Vinca libanotica, also enhances this area. (3) In the alpine region (6200 to 10,400 ft.), a few very stunted oaks (Quercus subalpina), the previously mentioned junipers, and a barberry (Berberis cretica) can be found, often forming dense thickets. Following these are low, dense, sprawling, pillow-like dwarf bushes that are grey and thorny, typical of the Oriental highlands—like Astragalus and the unique Acantholimon. They can be found up to 300 ft. from the highest peaks.

Upon the exposed mountain slopes a species of rhubarb (Rheum Ribes) is noticeable, and also a vetch (Vicia canescens) excellent for sheep. The spring vegetation, which lasts until July, appears to be rich, especially as regards showy plants, such as Corydalis, Gagea, Colchicum, Puschkinia, Geranium, Ornithogalum, &c. The flora of the highest ridges, along the edges of the snow patches, exhibits no forms related to the northern alpine flora, but suggestions of it are found in a Draba, an Androsace, an Alsine and a violet, occurring, however, only in local species. Upon the highest summits are found Saponaria Pumilio (resembling our Silene acaulis) and varieties of Galium, Euphorbia, Astragalus, Veronica, Jurinea, Festuca, Scrophularia, Geranium, Asphodeline, Allium, Asperula; and, on the margins of the snow fields, a Taraxacum and Ranunculus demissus. The alpine flora of Lebanon thus connects itself directly with the Oriental flora of lower altitudes, and is unrelated to the glacial flora of Europe and northern Asia.

On the exposed mountain slopes, you can see a type of rhubarb (Rheum Ribes) and a vetch (Vicia canescens) that’s great for sheep. The spring vegetation lasts until July and is quite rich, especially with flashy plants like Corydalis, Gagea, Colchicum, Puschkinia, Geranium, Ornithogalum, and others. The flora on the highest ridges, near the edges of the snow patches, shows no forms similar to the northern alpine flora, but there are hints of it in a Draba, an Androsace, an Alsine, and a violet, found only in local species. At the highest summits, you'll find Saponaria Pumilio (which looks like our Silene acaulis) and various types of Galium, Euphorbia, Astragalus, Veronica, Jurinea, Festuca, Scrophularia, Geranium, Asphodeline, Allium, and Asperula; and on the edges of the snowfields, a Taraxacum and Ranunculus demissus. The alpine flora of Lebanon is thus directly linked to the Oriental flora of lower altitudes and is not related to the glacial flora of Europe and northern Asia.

Zoology.—There is nothing of special interest about the fauna of Lebanon. Bears are no longer numerous; the panther and the ounce are met with; the wild hog, hyaena, wolf and fox are by no means rare; jackals and gazelles are very common. The polecat and hedgehog also occur. As a rule there are not many birds, but the eagle and the vulture may occasionally be seen; of eatable kinds partridges and wild pigeons are the most abundant.

Zoology.—There's nothing particularly interesting about the wildlife in Lebanon. Bears are no longer common; you can find panthers and leopards. Wild boars, hyenas, wolves, and foxes aren't rare at all; jackals and gazelles are quite common. Polecats and hedgehogs are also present. Generally, there aren't many birds, but you might occasionally spot eagles and vultures; among those that are good to eat, partridges and wild pigeons are the most plentiful.

Population.—In the following sections the Lebanon proper will alone be considered, without reference to Anti-Lebanon, because the peculiar political status of the former range since 1864 has effectually differentiated it; whereas the Anti-Lebanon still forms an integral part of the Ottoman province of Syria (q.v.), and neither its population nor its history is readily distinguishable from those of the surrounding districts.

Population.—In the following sections, we will only focus on Lebanon itself, without mentioning Anti-Lebanon, because the unique political situation of the former range since 1864 has set it apart. In contrast, Anti-Lebanon remains an integral part of the Ottoman province of Syria (q.v.), and its population and history are not easily distinguishable from those of the surrounding areas.

The total population in the Lebanon proper is about 400,000, and is increasing faster than the development of the province will admit. There is consequently much emigration, the Christian surplus going mainly to Egypt, and to America, the Druses to the latter country and to the Hauran. The emigrants to America, however, usually return after making money, build new houses and settle down. The singularly complex population is composed of Christians, Maronites, and Orthodox Eastern and Uniate; of Moslems, both Sunni and Shiah (Metawali); and of Druses.

The total population in Lebanon is around 400,000 and is growing faster than the province can keep up with. As a result, many people are leaving, with most Christian emigrants heading to Egypt and America, while the Druses go mainly to America and the Hauran. However, those who immigrate to America often come back after making some money, build new homes, and settle down. The population is uniquely diverse, made up of Christians, including Maronites and Orthodox Eastern and Uniate; Muslims, both Sunni and Shiah (Metawali); and Druses.

(a) Maronites (q.v.) form about three-fifths of the whole and have the north of the Mountain almost to themselves, while even in the south, the old Druse stronghold, they are now numerous. Feudalism is practically extinct among them and with the decline of the Druses, and the great stake they have acquired in agriculture, they have laid aside much of their warlike habit together with their arms. Even their instinct of nationality is being sensibly impaired by their gradual assimilation to the Papal Church, whose agents exercise from Beirut an increasing influence on their ecclesiastical elections and church government. They are strong also in the Buka’a, and have colonies in most of the Syrian cities.

(a) Maronites (q.v.) make up about three-fifths of the population and have most of the northern Mountain to themselves, while they are also quite numerous in the south, which used to be the old Druse stronghold. Feudalism has almost vanished among them, and with the decline of the Druses and their significant investment in agriculture, they have given up much of their warlike behavior along with their weapons. Their sense of national identity is also noticeably fading due to their gradual integration into the Papal Church, whose representatives are increasingly influencing their church elections and governance from Beirut. They're also strong in the Buka’a and have communities in most Syrian cities.

(b) Orthodox Eastern form a little more than one-eighth of the whole, and are strongest in S. Lebanon (Metn and Kurah districts). Syrians by race and Arab-speaking, they are descendants of those “Melkites” who took the side of the Byzantine church in the time of Justinian II. against the Moslems and eventually the Maronites. They are among the most progressive of the Lebanon elements.

(b) Orthodox Eastern make up just over one-eighth of the total population and are primarily located in Southern Lebanon (Metn and Kurah districts). They are of Syrian descent and speak Arabic, tracing their roots back to the “Melkites” who supported the Byzantine Church during the time of Justinian II against the Muslims and later the Maronites. They are known to be among the most progressive groups in Lebanon.

(c) Greek Uniate are less numerous, forming little more than 348 one-twelfth, but are equally progressive. Their headquarters is Zahleh; but they are found also in strength in Metn and Jezzin, where they help to counterbalance Druses. They sympathize with the Maronites against the Orthodox Eastern, and, like both, are of Syrian race, and Arab speech.

(c) Greek Uniate are fewer in number, making up just over 348 one-twelfth, but they are just as progressive. Their main base is in Zahleh; however, they are also significantly present in Metn and Jezzin, where they help to balance out the Druses. They align with the Maronites against the Orthodox Eastern, and like both groups, they are of Syrian descent and speak Arabic.

(d) Sunnite Moslems are a weak element, strongest in Shuf and Kurah, and composed largely of Druse renegades and “Druse” families, which, like the Shehab, were of Arab extraction and never conformed to the creed of Hamza.

(d) Sunnite Muslims are a weak group, mostly found in Shuf and Kurah, and mainly made up of Druse defectors and “Druse” families, which, like the Shehab, were of Arab origin and never followed the belief of Hamza.

(e) Shiite Moslems outnumber the Sunni, and make about one twenty-fifth of the whole. They are called Metawali and are strongest in North Lebanon (Kesrawan and Batrun), but found also in the south, in Buka’a and in the coast-towns from Beirut to Acre. They are said to be descendants of Persian tribes; but the fact is very doubtful, and they may be at least as aboriginal as the Maronites, and a remnant of an old Incarnationist population which did not accept Christianity, and kept its heretical Islam free from those influences which modified Druse creed. They own a chief sheikh, resident at Jeba’a, and have the reputation, like most heretical communities in the Sunni part of the Moslem world, of being exceedingly fanatical and inhospitable. It is undoubtedly the case that they are suspicious of strangers and defiant of interference. Another small body of Shiites, the Ismailites (Assassins (q.v.) of the crusading chronicles), also said to be of Persian origin, live about Kadmus at the extreme N. of Lebanon, but outside the limits of the privileged province. They are about 9000 strong.

(e) Shiite Muslims outnumber the Sunnis, making up about one twenty-fifth of the entire population. They are known as Metawali and are most concentrated in North Lebanon (Kesrawan and Batrun), but can also be found in the south, in Buka’a and along the coastal towns from Beirut to Acre. They are thought to be descendants of Persian tribes; however, this is questionable, and they might be just as native as the Maronites, representing a remnant of an ancient group that didn’t accept Christianity and maintained a version of Islam that was free from the influences that altered the Druse beliefs. They are led by a chief sheikh based in Jeba’a and, like many heretical communities in the Sunni-dominated Muslim world, they have a reputation for being extremely fanatical and unwelcoming. It is clear that they are wary of outsiders and resistant to outside interference. Another small group of Shiites, the Ismailites (Assassins (q.v.) from the crusading chronicles), also believed to be of Persian origin, live near Kadmus in the far north of Lebanon, though outside the privileged province. Their population is around 9,000.

(f) Druses (q.v.), now barely an eighth of the whole and confined to Shuf and Metn in S. Lebanon, are tending to emigrate or conform to Sunni Islam. Since the establishment of the privileged province they have lost the Ottoman support which used to compensate for their numerical inferiority as compared with the Christians; and they are fast losing also their old habits and distinctiveness. No longer armed or wearing their former singular dress, the remnant of them in Lebanon seems likely ere long to be assimilated to the “Osmanli” Moslems. Their feud with the Maronites, whose accentuation in the middle of the 19th century was largely due to the tergiversations of the ruling Shehab family, now reduced to low estate, is dying away, but they retain something of their old clan feeling and feudal organization, especially in Shuf.

(f) Druses (q.v.), now barely one-eighth of the population and mostly located in Shuf and Metn in southern Lebanon, are either migrating or converting to Sunni Islam. Since the establishment of the privileged province, they have lost the Ottoman support that used to offset their smaller numbers compared to the Christians, and they are quickly losing their traditional customs and uniqueness. No longer armed or wearing their distinctive traditional attire, the remaining Druses in Lebanon are likely to be assimilated into the “Osmanli” Muslims soon. Their longstanding conflict with the Maronites, which intensified in the mid-19th century due to the shifting loyalties of the ruling Shehab family, now diminished in power, is fading, but they still hold onto some of their old clan connections and feudal structure, particularly in Shuf.

The mixed population, as a whole, displays the usual characteristics of mountaineers, fine physique and vigorous independent spirit; but its ancient truculence has given way before strong government action since the middle 19th century, and the great increase of agricultural pursuits, to which the purely pastoral are now quite secondary. The culture of the mulberry and silk, of tobacco, of the olive and vine, of many kinds of fruits and cereals, has expanded enormously, and the Lebanon is now probably the most productive region in Asiatic Turkey in proportion to its area. It exports largely through Beirut and Saida, using both the French railway which crosses S. Lebanon on its way to Damascus, and the excellent roads and mule-paths made since 1883. Lebanon has thick deposits of lignite coal, but of inferior quality owing to the presence of iron pyrites. The abundant iron is little worked. Manufactures are of small account, the raw material going mostly to the coast; but olive-oil is made, together with various wines, of which the most famous is the vino d’oro, a sweet liqueur-like beverage. This wine is not exported in any quantity, as it will not bear a voyage well and is not made to keep. Bee-keeping is general, and there is an export of eggs to Egypt.

The mixed population, as a whole, shows the typical traits of mountaineers, with strong physiques and a lively independent spirit; however, their ancient aggression has diminished due to strong government actions since the mid-19th century, alongside the significant growth of agricultural activities, which have become more important than the previously dominant pastoral practices. The cultivation of mulberries and silk, tobacco, olives, and grapes, as well as various fruits and grains, has greatly expanded, making Lebanon probably the most productive area in Asiatic Turkey relative to its size. It has a large export market through Beirut and Saida, utilizing both the French railway that runs through Southern Lebanon on its way to Damascus and the excellent roads and mule paths created since 1883. Lebanon has significant deposits of lignite coal, but its quality is poor due to the presence of iron pyrites. The abundant iron is minimally exploited. Manufacturing is minor, with most raw materials moving to the coast; however, olive oil is produced, along with various wines, the most renowned being the vino d’oro, a sweet, liqueur-like drink. This wine isn't exported in large volumes, as it doesn't travel well and isn't designed for long-term storage. Beekeeping is common, and there is an export of eggs to Egypt.

History.—The inhabitants of Lebanon have at no time played a conspicuous part in history. There are remains of prehistoric occupation, but we do not even know what races dwelt there in the historical period of antiquity. Probably they belonged chiefly to the Aramaean group of nationalities; the Bible mentions Hivites (Judges iii. 3) and Giblites (Joshua xiii. 5). Lebanon was included within the ideal boundaries of the land of Israel, and the whole region was well known to the Hebrews, by whose poets its many excellences are often praised. How far the Phoenicians had any effective control over it is unknown; the absence of their monuments does not argue much real jurisdiction. Nor apparently did the Greek Seleucid kingdom have much to do with the Mountain. In the Roman period the district of Phoenice extended to Lebanon. In the 2nd century, with the inland districts, it constituted a subdivision of the province of Syria, having Emesa (Homs) for its capital. From the time of Diocletian there was a Phoenice ad Libanum, with Emesa as capital, as well as a Phoenice Maritima of which Tyre was the chief city. Remains of the Roman period occur throughout Lebanon. By the 6th century it was evidently virtually independent again; its Christianization had begun with the immigration of Monothelite sectaries, flying from persecution in the Antioch district and Orontes valley. At all times Lebanon has been a place of refuge for unpopular creeds. Large part of the mountaineers took up Monothelism and initiated the national distinction of the Maronites, which begins to emerge in the history of the 7th century. The sectaries, after helping Justinian II. against the caliph Abdalmalik, turned on the emperor and his Orthodox allies, and were named Mardaites (rebels). Islam now began to penetrate S. Lebanon, chiefly by the immigration of various more or less heretical elements, Kurd, Turkoman, Persian and especially Arab, the latter largely after the break-up of the kingdom of Hira; and early in the 11th century these coalesced into a nationality (see Druses) under the congenial influence of the Incarnationist creed brought from Cairo by Ismael Darazi and other emissaries of the caliph Hakim and his vizier Hamza. The subsequent history of Lebanon to the middle of the 19th century will be found under Druses and Maronites, and it need only be stated here that Latin influence began to be felt in N. Lebanon during the Frank period of Antioch and Palestine, the Maronites being inclined to take the part of the crusading princes against the Druses and Moslems; but they were still regarded as heretic Monothelites by Abulfaragius (Bar-Hebraeus) at the end of the 13th century; nor is their effectual reconciliation to Rome much older than 1736, the date of the mission sent by the pope Clement XII., which fixed the actual status of their church. An informal French protection had, however, been exercised over them for some time previously, and with it began the feud of Maronites and Druses, the latter incited and spasmodically supported by Ottoman pashas. The feudal organization of both, the one under the house of Khazin, the other under those of Maan and Shehab successively, was in full force during the 17th and 18th centuries; and it was the break-up of this in the first part of the 19th century which produced the anarchy that culminated after 1840 in the civil war. The Druses renounced their Shehab amirs when Beshir al-Kassim openly joined the Maronites in 1841, and the Maronites definitely revolted from the Khazin in 1858. The events of 1860 led to the formation of the privileged Lebanon province, finally constituted in 1864. It should be added, however, that among the Druses of Shuf, feudalism has tended to re-establish itself, and the power is now divided between the Jumblat and Yezbeki families, a leading member of one of which is almost always Ottoman kaimakam of the Druses, and locally called amir.

History.—The people of Lebanon have never played a significant role in history. There are signs of prehistoric habitation, but we don’t know which cultures lived there during ancient times. They probably mostly belonged to the Aramaean group; the Bible mentions the Hivites (Judges iii. 3) and Giblites (Joshua xiii. 5). Lebanon was part of the ideal boundaries of the land of Israel, and the entire region was well-known to the Hebrews, who often praised its many qualities in their poetry. It's uncertain how much the Phoenicians actually controlled the area; the lack of their monuments doesn’t suggest much real authority. The Greek Seleucid kingdom also seemingly had little influence over the mountains. During the Roman period, the district of Phoenice included Lebanon. In the 2nd century, along with the inland areas, it became a part of the province of Syria, having Emesa (Homs) as its capital. From the time of Diocletian, there was a Phoenice ad Libanum with Emesa as its capital, as well as a Phoenice Maritima with Tyre as its main city. Roman remains can be found throughout Lebanon. By the 6th century, it was clearly almost independent again; its Christianization began with the arrival of Monothelite sectarians escaping persecution in the Antioch region and Orontes valley. Lebanon has always been a refuge for marginalized beliefs. Many of the mountain people adopted Monothelism, leading to the distinct identity of the Maronites, which began to appear in the history of the 7th century. These sectarians, after assisting Justinian II against the caliph Abdalmalik, turned against the emperor and his Orthodox allies, earning the name Mardaites (rebels). Islam started to spread in southern Lebanon, mainly through the immigration of various somewhat heretical groups, including Kurds, Turkomans, Persians, and especially Arabs, the latter largely after the fall of the kingdom of Hira; and by the early 11th century, these groups merged into a nationality (see Druses) under the favorable influence of the Incarnationist faith brought from Cairo by Ismael Darazi and other emissaries of the caliph Hakim and his vizier Hamza. The history of Lebanon up to the mid-19th century can be found under Druses and Maronites. It’s worth mentioning that Latin influence began to be felt in northern Lebanon during the Crusader period in Antioch and Palestine, with the Maronites often siding with the crusading leaders against the Druses and Muslims; however, they were still seen as heretical Monothelites by Abulfaragius (Bar-Hebraeus) at the end of the 13th century, and their official reconciliation with Rome is not much older than 1736, the year of the mission sent by Pope Clement XII, which established the current status of their church. An informal French protection had been exercised over them for some time before this, which sparked the conflict between Maronites and Druses, the latter being encouraged and intermittently supported by Ottoman pashas. The feudal systems of both groups, one led by the Khazin family and the other by the Maan and Shehab families in succession, were fully in place during the 17th and 18th centuries; the collapse of this system in the early 19th century led to the chaos that culminated in the civil war after 1840. The Druses rejected their Shehab amirs when Beshir al-Kassim openly sided with the Maronites in 1841, and the Maronites officially revolted against the Khazin in 1858. The events of 1860 resulted in the creation of the privileged Lebanon province, which was finally established in 1864. It should also be noted that among the Druses of Shuf, feudalism has tended to re-establish itself, and power is now shared between the Jumblat and Yezbeki families, with a notable member of one of these families usually serving as the Ottoman kaimakam of the Druses, locally referred to as amir.

The Lebanon has now been constituted a sanjak or mutessariflik, dependent directly on the Porte, which acts in this case in consultation with the six great powers. This province extends about 93 m. from N. to S. (from the boundary of the sanjak of Tripoli to that of the caza of Saida), and has a mean breadth of about 28 m. from one foot of the chain to the other, beginning at the edge of the littoral plain behind Beirut and ending at the W. edge of the Buka’a; but the boundaries are ill-defined, especially on the E. where the original line drawn along the crest of the ridge has not been adhered to, and the mountaineers have encroached on the Buka’a. The Lebanon is under a military governor (mushir) who must be a Christian in the service of the sultan, approved by the powers, and has, so far, been chosen from the Roman Catholics owing to the great preponderance of Latin Christians in the province. He resides at Deir al-Kamar, an old seat of the Druse amirs. At first appointed for three years, then for ten, his term has been fixed since 1892 at five years, the longer term having aroused the fear of the Porte, lest a personal domination should become established. Under the governor are seven kaimakams, all Christians except a Druse in Shuf, and forty-seven mudirs, who all depend on the kaimakams except one in the home district of Deir al-Kamar. A central mejliss or Council of twelve members is composed of four Maronites, three Druses, one Turk, two Greeks (Orthodox), one Greek Uniate and one Metawali. This was the original proportion, and it has not been altered in spite of the decline of the Druses and increase of the Maronites. The members are elected by the seven cazas. In each mudirieh there is also a local mejliss. The old feudal and mukataji (see Druses) jurisdictions are abolished, i.e. they often persist under Ottoman forms, and three courts of First Instance, under the mejliss, and superior to the petty courts of the mudirs and the village sheikhs, administer justice. Judges are appointed by the governor, but sheikhs by the villages. Commercial cases, and litigation in which strangers are concerned, are carried to Beirut. The police is recruited locally, and no regular troops appear in the 349 province except on special requisition. The taxes are collected directly, and must meet the needs of the province, before any sum is remitted to the Imperial Treasury. The latter has to make deficits good. Ecclesiastical jurisdiction is exercised only over the clergy, and all rights of asylum are abolished.

Lebanon is now established as a sanjak or mutessariflik, directly dependent on the Porte, which consults with the six major powers. This province stretches about 93 miles from north to south (from the border of the sanjak of Tripoli to that of the caza of Saida) and has an average width of about 28 miles from one side of the mountain range to the other, starting at the edge of the coastal plain behind Beirut and ending at the western edge of the Buka’a. However, the boundaries are poorly defined, especially on the eastern side, where the original line along the ridge has not been followed, and the mountain dwellers have encroached on the Buka’a. Lebanon is governed by a military governor (mushir) who must be a Christian in the service of the sultan, with approval from the powers, and has, so far, been chosen from the Roman Catholics due to the significant presence of Latin Christians in the province. He resides in Deir al-Kamar, an old stronghold of the Druse amirs. Initially appointed for three years, then for ten years, his term was set at five years in 1892, as longer terms raised concerns for the Porte about potential personal rule. Under the governor are seven kaimakams, all Christians except for a Druse in Shuf, and forty-seven mudirs, who all report to the kaimakams except for one in the home district of Deir al-Kamar. A central mejliss or Council of twelve members consists of four Maronites, three Druses, one Turk, two Greeks (Orthodox), one Greek Uniate, and one Metawali. This original composition has not changed despite the decline of the Druses and the growth of the Maronites. The members are elected by the seven cazas. Each mudirieh also has a local mejliss. The old feudal and mukataji jurisdictions are abolished, although they often continue under Ottoman forms, and three courts of First Instance, under the mejliss and higher than the petty courts of the mudirs and the village sheikhs, administer justice. Judges are appointed by the governor, but sheikhs are chosen by the villages. Commercial disputes and cases involving outsiders are taken to Beirut. The police force is locally recruited, and no regular troops are present in the 349 province unless specifically requested. Taxes are collected directly and must cover the needs of the province before any funds are sent to the Imperial Treasury, which must cover any shortfalls. Ecclesiastical jurisdiction is limited to the clergy, and all rights of asylum have been abolished.

This constitution has worked well on the whole, the only serious hitches having been due to the tendency of governors-general and kaimakams to attempt to supersede the mejliss by autocratic action, and to impair the freedom of elections. The attention of the porte was called to these tendencies in 1892 and again in 1902, on the appointments of new governors. Since the last date there has been no complaint. Nothing now remains of the former French predominance in the Lebanon, except a certain influence exerted by the fact that the railway is French, and by the precedence in ecclesiastical functions still accorded by the Maronites to official representatives of France. In the Lebanon, as in N. Albania, the traditional claim of France to protect Roman Catholics in the Ottoman Empire has been greatly impaired by the non-religious character of the Republic. Like Italy, she is now regarded by Eastern Catholics with distrust as an enemy of the Holy Father.

This constitution has generally worked well, with the only major issues arising from the tendency of governors-general and kaimakams to try to override the mejliss through autocratic actions and to undermine the freedom of elections. The porte was alerted to these tendencies in 1892 and again in 1902 during the appointments of new governors. Since then, there have been no complaints. There is nothing left of the former French dominance in Lebanon except for some influence because the railway is French and the Maronites still give priority in ecclesiastical matters to official representatives from France. In Lebanon, as in Northern Albania, France's traditional claim to protect Roman Catholics in the Ottoman Empire has been significantly weakened by the non-religious nature of the Republic. Like Italy, France is now viewed with suspicion by Eastern Catholics as an adversary of the Holy Father.

See Druses. Also V. Cuinet, Syrie, Liban et Palestine (1896); N. Verney and G. Dambmann, Puissances étrangères en Syrie, &c. (1900); G. Young, Corps de droit ottoman, vol. i. (1905); G. E. Post, Flora of Syria, &c. (1896); M. von Oppenheim, Vom Mittelmeer, &c. (1899).

See Druses. Also V. Cuinet, Syria, Lebanon, and Palestine (1896); N. Verney and G. Dambmann, Foreign Powers in Syria, etc. (1900); G. Young, Ottoman Law Code, vol. i. (1905); G. E. Post, Flora of Syria, etc. (1896); M. von Oppenheim, From the Mediterranean, etc. (1899).

(A. So.; D. G. H.)

LEBANON, a city of Saint Clair county, Illinois, U.S.A., on Silver Creek, about 24 m. E. of Saint Louis, Missouri. Pop. (1910) 1907. It is served by the Baltimore & Ohio South-Western railroad and by the East Saint Louis & Suburban Electric line. It is situated on a high tableland. Lebanon is the seat of McKendree College, founded by Methodists in 1828 and one of the oldest colleges in the Mississippi valley. It was called Lebanon Seminary until 1830, when the present name was adopted in honour of William McKendree (1757-1835), known as the “Father of Western Methodism,” a great preacher, and a bishop of the Methodist Church in 1808-1835, who had endowed the college with 480 acres of land. In 1835 the college was chartered as the “McKendreean College,” but in 1839 the present name was again adopted. There are coal mines and excellent farming lands in the vicinity of Lebanon. Among the city’s manufactures are flour, planing-mill products, malt liquors, soda and farming implements. The municipality owns and operates its electric-lighting plant. Lebanon was chartered as a city in 1874.

LEBANON, is a city in Saint Clair County, Illinois, U.S.A., located on Silver Creek, about 24 miles east of Saint Louis, Missouri. The population in 1910 was 1,907. It’s served by the Baltimore & Ohio South-Western railroad and the East Saint Louis & Suburban Electric line. The city is situated on a high plateau. Lebanon is home to McKendree College, which was founded by Methodists in 1828 and is one of the oldest colleges in the Mississippi Valley. It was originally called Lebanon Seminary until 1830, when it was renamed in honor of William McKendree (1757-1835), known as the “Father of Western Methodism,” a prominent preacher and bishop of the Methodist Church from 1808 to 1835, who gave the college 480 acres of land. In 1835, the college was chartered as “McKendreean College,” but in 1839 it reverted to the current name. There are coal mines and prime farmland around Lebanon. The city’s industries include flour, planing-mill products, malt liquors, soda, and farming implements. The municipality owns and operates its own electric lighting facility. Lebanon was chartered as a city in 1874.

LEBANON, a city and the county-seat of Lebanon county, Pennsylvania, U.S.A., in the fertile Lebanon Valley, about 25 m. E. by N. of Harrisburg. Pop. (1900) 17,628, of whom 618 were foreign-born, (1910 census) 19,240. It is served by the Philadelphia & Reading, the Cornwall and the Cornwall & Lebanon railways. About 5 m. S. of the city are the Cornwall (magnetite) iron mines, from which about 18,000,000 tons of iron ore were taken between 1740 and 1902, and 804,848 tons in 1906. The ore yields about 46% of iron, and contains about 2.5% of sulphur, the roasting of the ores being necessary—ore-roasting kilns are more extensively used here than in any other place in the country. The area of ore exposed is about 4000 ft. long and 400 to 800 ft. wide, and includes three hills; it has been one of the most productive magnetite deposits in the world. Limestone, brownstone and brick-clay also abound in the vicinity; and besides mines and quarries, the city has extensive manufactories of iron, steel, chains, and nuts and bolts. In 1905 its factory products were valued at $6,978,458. The municipality owns and operates its water-works.

LEBANON, is a city and the county seat of Lebanon County, Pennsylvania, U.S.A., located in the fertile Lebanon Valley, about 25 miles east-northeast of Harrisburg. Population (1900) was 17,628, with 618 of them being foreign-born; (1910 census) it rose to 19,240. It is served by the Philadelphia & Reading, Cornwall, and Cornwall & Lebanon railways. About 5 miles south of the city are the Cornwall (magnetite) iron mines, which produced around 18,000,000 tons of iron ore between 1740 and 1902, including 804,848 tons in 1906. The ore yields about 46% iron and contains approximately 2.5% sulfur, requiring roasting—ore-roasting kilns are more common here than in any other place in the country. The exposed ore area is about 4,000 feet long and between 400 to 800 feet wide, encompassing three hills; it has been one of the most productive magnetite deposits in the world. Limestone, brownstone, and brick clay are also abundant nearby, and in addition to mines and quarries, the city has large factories producing iron, steel, chains, nuts, and bolts. In 1905, the value of its factory products was $6,978,458. The municipality owns and operates its own water supply.

The first settlement in the locality was made about 1730, and twenty years later a town was laid out by one of the landowners, George Steitz, and named Steitztown in his honour. About 1760 the town became known as Lebanon, and under this name it was incorporated as a borough in 1821 and chartered as a city in 1885.

The first settlement in the area was established around 1730, and twenty years later, one of the landowners, George Steitz, laid out a town named Steitztown in his honor. By around 1760, the town was referred to as Lebanon, and under this name, it was incorporated as a borough in 1821 and chartered as a city in 1885.

LE BARGY, CHARLES GUSTAVE AUGUSTE (1858-  ), French actor, was born at La Chapelle (Seine). His talent both as a comedian and a serious actor was soon made evident, and he became a member of the Comédie Française, his chief successes being in such plays as Le Duel, L’Énigme, Le Marquis de Priola, L’Autre Danger and Le Dédale. His wife, Simone le Bargy née Benda, an accomplished actress, made her début at the Gymnase in 1902, and in later years had a great success in La Rafale and other plays. In 1910 he had differences with the authorities of the Comédie Française and ceased to be a sociétaire.

LE BARGY, CHARLES GUSTAVE AUGUSTE (1858-  ), French actor, was born in La Chapelle (Seine). His skills as both a comedian and a serious actor became clear early on, and he joined the Comédie Française, achieving notable success in plays like Le Duel, L’Énigme, Le Marquis de Priola, L’Autre Danger and Le Dédale. His wife, Simone le Bargy née Benda, a talented actress, made her debut at the Gymnase in 1902, and later found great success in La Rafale and other plays. In 1910, he had disagreements with the Comédie Française management and stopped being a sociétaire.

LE BEAU, CHARLES (1701-1778), French historical writer, was born at Paris on the 15th of October 1701, and was educated at the Collège de Sainte-Barbe and the Collège du Plessis; at the latter he remained as a teacher until he obtained the chair of rhetoric in the Collège des Grassins. In 1748 he was admitted a member of the Academy of Inscriptions, and in 1752 he was nominated professor of eloquence in the Collège de France. From 1755 he held the office of perpetual secretary to the Academy of Inscriptions, in which capacity he edited fifteen volumes (from the 25th to the 39th inclusive) of the Histoire of that institution. He died at Paris on the 13th of March 1778.

LE BEAU, CHARLES (1701-1778), French historical writer, was born in Paris on October 15, 1701, and was educated at the Collège de Sainte-Barbe and the Collège du Plessis; at the latter, he remained as a teacher until he secured the position of rhetoric chair at the Collège des Grassins. In 1748, he became a member of the Academy of Inscriptions, and in 1752, he was appointed professor of eloquence at the Collège de France. From 1755, he served as the perpetual secretary of the Academy of Inscriptions, where he edited fifteen volumes (from the 25th to the 39th inclusive) of the Histoire of that institution. He passed away in Paris on March 13, 1778.

The only work with which the name of Le Beau continues to be associated is his Histoire du Bas-Empire, en commençant à Constantin le Grand, in 22 vols. 12mo (Paris, 1756-1779), being a continuation of C. Rollin’s Histoire Romaine and J. B. L. Crevier’s Histoire des empereurs. Its usefulness arises entirely from the fact of its being a faithful résumé of the Byzantine historians, for Le Beau had no originality or artistic power of his own. Five volumes were added by H. P. Ameilhon (1781-1811), which brought the work down to the fall of Constantinople. A later edition, under the care of M. de Saint-Martin and afterwards of Brosset, has had the benefit of careful revision throughout, and has received considerable additions from Oriental sources.

The only work still linked to Le Beau's name is his Histoire du Bas-Empire, en commençant à Constantin le Grand, in 22 volumes, 12mo (Paris, 1756-1779), which is a continuation of C. Rollin’s Histoire Romaine and J. B. L. Crevier’s Histoire des empereurs. Its value comes mainly from being a reliable summary of the Byzantine historians, as Le Beau lacked originality or artistic talent. Five volumes were added by H. P. Ameilhon (1781-1811), extending the work to cover the fall of Constantinople. A later edition, overseen by M. de Saint-Martin and later by Brosset, has undergone careful revision and includes significant additions from Oriental sources.

See his “Éloge” in vol. xlii. of the Histoire de l’Académie des Inscriptions (1786), pp. 190-207.

See his “Éloge” in vol. xlii. of the Histoire de l’Académie des Inscriptions (1786), pp. 190-207.

LEBEAU, JOSEPH (1794-1865), Belgian statesman, was born at Huy on the 3rd of January 1794. He received his early education from an uncle who was parish priest of Hannut, and became a clerk. By dint of economy he raised money to study law at Liége, and was called to the bar in 1819. At Liége he formed a fast friendship with Charles Rogier and Paul Devaux, in conjunction with whom he founded at Liége in 1824 the Mathieu Laensbergh, afterwards Le politique, a journal which helped to unite the Catholic party with the Liberals in their opposition to the ministry, without manifesting any open disaffection to the Dutch government. Lebeau had not contemplated the separation of Holland and Belgium, but his hand was forced by the revolution. He was sent by his native district to the National Congress, and became minister of foreign affairs in March 1831 during the interim regency of Surlet de Chokier. By proposing the election of Leopold of Saxe-Coburg as king of the Belgians he secured a benevolent attitude on the part of Great Britain, but the restoration to Holland of part of the duchies of Limburg and Luxemburg provoked a heated opposition to the treaty of London, and Lebeau was accused of treachery to Belgian interests. He resigned the direction of foreign affairs on the accession of King Leopold, but in the next year became minister of justice. He was elected deputy for Brussels in 1833, and retained his seat until 1848. Differences with the king led to his retirement in 1834. He was subsequently governor of the province of Namur (1838), ambassador to the Frankfort diet (1839), and in 1840 he formed a short-lived Liberal ministry. From this time he held no office of state, though he continued his energetic support of liberal and anti-clerical measures. He died at Huy on the 19th of March 1865.

LEBEAU, JOSEPH (1794-1865), Belgian statesman, was born in Huy on January 3, 1794. He was educated by an uncle who was the parish priest in Hannut and later became a clerk. Through careful savings, he managed to fund his studies in law at Liège and was admitted to the bar in 1819. At Liège, he formed a close friendship with Charles Rogier and Paul Devaux, and together they founded a journal in 1824 called Mathieu Laensbergh, later known as Le politique, which helped to unite the Catholic party with the Liberals in their opposition to the government, without openly showing any disloyalty to the Dutch administration. Lebeau did not plan for the separation of Holland and Belgium, but his hand was forced by the revolution. He was selected by his local district to join the National Congress and became the minister of foreign affairs in March 1831 during the interim leadership of Surlet de Chokier. By proposing Leopold of Saxe-Coburg as king of the Belgians, he gained a positive response from Great Britain. However, the decision to restore parts of the duchies of Limburg and Luxemburg to Holland led to significant opposition against the London treaty, and Lebeau was accused of betraying Belgian interests. He stepped down from his role in foreign affairs when King Leopold took the throne but became the minister of justice the following year. He was elected as a deputy for Brussels in 1833 and held the position until 1848. Conflicts with the king prompted his retirement in 1834. Afterwards, he served as governor of the province of Namur (1838), ambassador to the Frankfort diet (1839), and in 1840 he created a brief Liberal ministry. After this point, he held no governmental office, but he continued to actively support liberal and anti-clerical initiatives. He passed away in Huy on March 19, 1865.

Lebeau published La Belgique depuis 1847 (Brussels, 4 vols., 1852), Lettres aux électeurs belges (8 vols., Brussels, 1853-1856). His Souvenirs personnels et correspondance diplomatique 1824-1841 (Brussels, 1883) were edited by A. Fréson. See an article by A. Fréson in the Biographie nationale de Belgique; and T. Juste, Joseph Lebeau (Brussels, 1865).

Lebeau published La Belgique depuis 1847 (Brussels, 4 vols., 1852), Lettres aux électeurs belges (8 vols., Brussels, 1853-1856). His Souvenirs personnels et correspondance diplomatique 1824-1841 (Brussels, 1883) were edited by A. Fréson. See an article by A. Fréson in the Biographie nationale de Belgique; and T. Juste, Joseph Lebeau (Brussels, 1865).

LEBEL, JEAN (d. 1370), Belgian chronicler, was born near the end of the 13th century. His father, Gilles le Beal des Changes, was an alderman of Liége. Jean entered the church and became a canon of the cathedral church, but he and his brother Henri followed Jean de Beaumont to England in 1327, and took part in the border warfare against the Scots. His will is dated 1369, and his epitaph gives the date of his death as 1370. Nothing more is known of his life, but Jacques de Hemricourt, author of the Miroir des nobles de Hesbaye, has left a eulogy of his character, and a description of the magnificence of his attire, his retinue and his hospitality. Hemricourt asserts that he was eighty years old or more when he died. For a long time Jean Lebel (or le Bel) was only known as a chronicler through a reference by Froissart, who quotes him in the prologue of his first book as one of his authorities. A fragment of his work, 350 in the MS. of Jean d’Outremeuse’s Mireur des istores, was discovered in 1847; and the whole of his chronicle, preserved in the library of Châlons-sur-Marne, was edited in 1863 by L. Polain. Jean Lebel gives as his reason for writing a desire to replace a certain misleading rhymed chronicle of the wars of Edward III. by a true relation of his enterprises down to the beginning of the Hundred Years’ War. In the matter of style Lebel has been placed by some critics on the level of Froissart. His chief merit is his refusal to narrate events unless either he himself or his informant had witnessed them. This scrupulousness in the acceptance of evidence must be set against his limitations. He takes on the whole a similar point of view to Froissart’s; he has no concern with national movements or politics; and, writing for the public of chivalry, he preserves no general notion of a campaign, which resolves itself in his narrative into a series of exploits on the part of his heroes. Froissart was considerably indebted to him, and seems to have borrowed from him some of his best-known episodes, such as the death of Robert the Bruce, Edward III. and the countess of Salisbury, and the devotion of the burghers of Calais. The songs and virelais, in the art of writing which he was, according to Hemricourt, an expert, have not come to light.

LEBEL, JEAN (d. 1370), Belgian chronicler, was born near the end of the 13th century. His father, Gilles le Beal des Changes, served as an alderman of Liège. Jean joined the church and became a canon of the cathedral, but he and his brother Henri followed Jean de Beaumont to England in 1327 and participated in the border conflicts against the Scots. His will is dated 1369, and his epitaph states he died in 1370. There’s not much more known about his life, but Jacques de Hemricourt, author of the Miroir des nobles de Hesbaye, praised his character and described the grandeur of his clothing, his entourage, and his hospitality. Hemricourt claims he was over eighty years old when he passed away. For a long time, Jean Lebel (or le Bel) was mainly recognized as a chronicler through a mention by Froissart, who references him in the prologue to his first book as one of his sources. A fragment of his work, 350 in the MS. of Jean d'Outremeuse's Mireur des istores, was found in 1847; and the complete chronicle, kept in the library of Châlons-sur-Marne, was published in 1863 by L. Polain. Jean Lebel states that he wrote to replace a misleading rhymed chronicle of the wars of Edward III with an accurate account of his military campaigns leading up to the Hundred Years' War. In terms of style, some critics consider Lebel to be on par with Froissart. His main strength is his commitment to recounting events only if he or his sources were present. This meticulousness in verifying evidence is balanced by his limitations. Overall, he shares a similar outlook to Froissart; he isn’t interested in national movements or politics, and, writing for a chivalric audience, he doesn’t present a general view of a campaign, which instead becomes a sequence of individual feats by his heroes. Froissart relied heavily on him and appears to have borrowed some of his most famous stories, like the death of Robert the Bruce, Edward III and the countess of Salisbury, and the loyalty of the burghers of Calais. The songs and virelais, in which he was, according to Hemricourt, an expert, have yet to be discovered.

See L. Polain, Les Vraies Chroniques de messire Jehan le Bel (1863); Kervyn de Lettenhove, Bulletin de la société d’émulation de Bruges, series ii. vols. vii. and ix.; and H. Pirenne in Biographie nationale de Belgique.

See L. Polain, The True Chronicles of Sir Jehan le Bel (1863); Kervyn de Lettenhove, Bulletin of the Emulation Society of Bruges, series ii. vols. vii. and ix.; and H. Pirenne in National Biography of Belgium.

LEBER, JEAN MICHEL CONSTANT (1780-1859), French historian and bibliophile, was born at Orléans on the 8th of May 1780. His first work was a poem on Joan of Arc (1804); but he wrote at the same time a Grammaire général synthétique, which attracted the attention of J. M. de Gérando, then secretary-general to the ministry of the interior. The latter found him a minor post in his department, which left him leisure for his historical work. He even took him to Italy when Napoleon was trying to organize, after French models, the Roman states which he had taken from the pope in 1809. Leber however did not stay there long, for he considered the attacks on the temporal property of the Holy See to be sacrilegious. On his return to Paris he resumed his administrative work, literary recreations and historical researches. While spending a part of his time writing vaudevilles and comic operas, he began to collect old essays and rare pamphlets by old French historians. His office was preserved to him by the Restoration, and Leber put his literary gifts at the service of the government. When the question of the coronation of Louis XVIII. arose, he wrote, as an answer to Volney, a minute treatise on the Cérémonies du sacre, which was published at the time of the coronation of Charles X. Towards the end of Villèle’s ministry, when there was a movement of public opinion in favour of extending municipal liberties, he undertook the defence of the threatened system of centralization, and composed, in answer to Raynouard, an Histoire critique du pouvoir municipal depuis l’origine de la monarchie jusqu’à nos jours (1828). He also wrote a treatise entitled De l’état réel de la presse et des pamphlets depuis François Ier jusqu’à Louis XIV., in which he refuted an empty paradox of Charles Nodier, who had tried to prove that the press had never been, and could never be, so free as under the Grand Monarch. A few years later, Leber retired (1839), and sold to the library of Rouen the rich collection of books which he had amassed during thirty years of research. The catalogue he made himself (4 vols., 1839 to 1852). In 1840 he read at the Académie des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres two dissertations, an “Essai sur l’appréciation de la fortune privée au moyen âge,” followed by an “Examen critique des tables de prix du marc d’argent depuis l’époque de Saint Louis”; these essays were included by the Academy in its Recueil de mémoires présentés par divers savants (vol. i., 1844), and were also revised and published by Leber (1847). They form his most considerable work, and assure him a position of eminence in the economic history of France. He also rendered good service to historians by the publication of his Collection des meilleures dissertations, notices et traités relatifs à l’histoire de France (20 vols., 1826-1840); in the absence of an index, since Leber did not give one, an analytical table of contents is to be found in Alfred Franklin’s Sources de l’histoire de France (1876, pp. 342 sqq.). In consequence of the revolution of 1848, Leber decided to leave Paris. He retired to his native town, and spent his last years in collecting old engravings. He died at Orléans on the 22nd of December 1859.

LEBER, JEAN MICHEL CONSTANT (1780-1859), French historian and book lover, was born in Orléans on May 8, 1780. His first work was a poem about Joan of Arc (1804); at the same time, he wrote a Grammaire général synthétique, which caught the attention of J. M. de Gérando, who was then the secretary-general of the ministry of the interior. Gérando helped him secure a minor position in his department, which allowed him time for his historical work. He even took him to Italy when Napoleon was trying to reorganize the Roman states after taking them from the pope in 1809. However, Leber didn't stay long because he considered the attacks on the Holy See's property to be sacrilegious. Upon returning to Paris, he resumed his administrative work, literary pursuits, and historical research. While spending part of his time writing vaudevilles and comic operas, he began collecting old essays and rare pamphlets by early French historians. His position was maintained by the Restoration, and Leber used his literary talents to support the government. When the question of Louis XVIII's coronation came up, he wrote, in response to Volney, a detailed treatise on the Cérémonies du sacre, which was published during Charles X's coronation. Towards the end of Villèle’s ministry, when there was a public movement for expanding municipal liberties, he defended the threatened system of centralization and wrote, in response to Raynouard, an Histoire critique du pouvoir municipal depuis l’origine de la monarchie jusqu’à nos jours (1828). He also wrote a treatise titled De l’état réel de la presse et des pamphlets depuis François Ier jusqu’à Louis XIV, which refuted a baseless claim made by Charles Nodier, who attempted to argue that the press had never been, and could never be, as free as during the Grand Monarch's reign. A few years later, Leber retired (1839) and sold his extensive book collection to the library of Rouen, which he had built over thirty years of research. He personally created the catalog (4 volumes, 1839 to 1852). In 1840, he presented two dissertations at the Académie des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres: “Essai sur l’appréciation de la fortune privée au moyen âge,” followed by “Examen critique des tables de prix du marc d’argent depuis l’époque de Saint Louis”; these essays were included by the Academy in its Recueil de mémoires présentés par divers savants (vol. i., 1844) and were later revised and published by Leber (1847). They represent his most significant work and secure his position in the economic history of France. He also contributed to historians by publishing his Collection des meilleures dissertations, notices et traités relatifs à l’histoire de France (20 volumes, 1826-1840); since there is no index provided by Leber, an analytical table of contents can be found in Alfred Franklin’s Sources de l’histoire de France (1876, pp. 342 sqq.). After the revolution of 1848, Leber chose to leave Paris. He returned to his hometown and spent his final years collecting old engravings. He passed away in Orléans on December 22, 1859.

In 1832 he had been elected as a member of the Société des Antiquaires de France, and in the Bulletin of this society (vol. i., 1860) is to be found the most correct and detailed account of his life’s works.

In 1832, he was elected as a member of the Société des Antiquaires de France, and in the Bulletin of this society (vol. i., 1860) is the most accurate and detailed account of his life's work.

LEBEUF, JEAN (1687-1760), French historian, was born on the 7th of March 1687 at Auxerre, where his father, a councillor in the parlement, was receveur des consignations. He began his studies in his native town, and continued them in Paris at the Collège Ste Barbe. He soon became known as one of the most cultivated minds of his time. He made himself master of practically every branch of medieval learning, and had a thorough knowledge of the sources and the bibliography of his subject. His learning was not drawn from books only; he was also an archaeologist, and frequently went on expeditions in France, always on foot, in the course of which he examined the monuments of architecture and sculpture, as well as the libraries, and collected a number of notes and sketches. He was in correspondence with all the most learned men of the day. His correspondence with Président Bouhier was published in 1885 by Ernest Petit; his other letters have been edited by the Société des sciences historiques et naturelles de l’Yonne (2 vols., 1866-1867). He also wrote numerous articles, and, after his election as a member of the Académie des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres (1740), a number of Mémoires which appeared in the Recueil of this society. He died at Paris on the 10th of April 1760. His most important researches had Paris as their subject.

LEBEUF, JEAN (1687-1760), a French historian, was born on March 7, 1687, in Auxerre, where his father was a councillor in the parlement and served as receveur des consignations. He started his studies in his hometown and continued in Paris at the Collège Ste Barbe. He quickly became recognized as one of the most educated minds of his era. He mastered nearly every field of medieval learning and had an in-depth understanding of the sources and bibliography related to his studies. His knowledge was not just from books; he was also an archaeologist who often went on foot on expeditions throughout France, examining architectural and sculptural monuments, as well as libraries, and gathering numerous notes and sketches. He maintained correspondence with many of the most knowledgeable people of his time. His letters to Président Bouhier were published in 1885 by Ernest Petit, and his other correspondence has been compiled by the Société des sciences historiques et naturelles de l’Yonne (2 vols., 1866-1867). He also wrote many articles, and after being elected to the Académie des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres (1740), he contributed several Mémoires that appeared in the Recueil of this society. He passed away in Paris on April 10, 1760. His most significant research focused on Paris.

He published first a collection of Dissertations sur l’histoire civile et ecclésiastique de Paris (3 vols., 1739-1743), then an Histoire de la ville et de tout le diocèse de Paris (15 vols., 1745-1760), which is a mine of information, mostly taken from the original sources. In view of the advance made by scholarship in the 19th century, it was found necessary to publish a second edition. The work of reprinting it was undertaken by H. Cocheris, but was interrupted (1863) before the completion of vol. iv. Adrien Augier resumed the work, giving Lebeuf’s text, though correcting the numerous typographical errors of the original edition (5 vols., 1883), and added a sixth volume containing an analytical table of contents. Finally, Fernand Bournon completed the work by a volume of Rectifications et additions (1890), worthy to appear side by side with the original work.

He first published a collection of Dissertations sur l’histoire civile et ecclésiastique de Paris (3 vols., 1739-1743), followed by an Histoire de la ville et de tout le diocèse de Paris (15 vols., 1745-1760), which is a treasure trove of information, primarily drawn from original sources. Given the progress made in scholarship during the 19th century, a second edition was deemed necessary. H. Cocheris began the reprint, but the project was halted (1863) before he finished volume IV. Adrien Augier took over, providing Lebeuf’s text while correcting the numerous typographical mistakes in the original edition (5 vols., 1883), and he included a sixth volume with an analytical table of contents. Finally, Fernand Bournon completed the project with a volume of Rectifications et additions (1890), which deserves to be published alongside the original work.

The bibliography of Lebeuf’s writings is, partly, in various numbers of the Bibliothèque des écrivains de Bourgogne (1716-1741). His biography is given by Lebeau in the Histoire de l’Académie royale des Inscriptions (xxix., 372, published 1764), and by H. Cocheris, in the preface to his edition.

The bibliography of Lebeuf’s writings can be found in various issues of the Bibliothèque des écrivains de Bourgogne (1716-1741). His biography is provided by Lebeau in the Histoire de l’Académie royale des Inscriptions (xxix., 372, published 1764), and by H. Cocheris in the preface to his edition.

LE BLANC, NICOLAS (1742-1806), French chemist, was born at Issoudun, Indre, in 1742. He made medicine his profession and in 1780 became surgeon to the duke of Orleans, but he also paid much attention to chemistry. About 1787 he was attracted to the urgent problem of manufacturing carbonate of soda from ordinary sea-salt. The suggestion made in 1789 by Jean Claude de la Métherie (1743-1817), the editor of the Journal de physique, that this might be done by calcining with charcoal the sulphate of soda formed from salt by the action of oil of vitriol, did not succeed in practice because the product was almost entirely sulphide of soda, but it gave Le Blanc, as he himself acknowledged, a basis upon which to work. He soon made the crucial discovery—which proved the foundation of the huge industry of artificial alkali manufacture—that the desired end was to be attained by adding a proportion of chalk to the mixture of charcoal and sulphate of soda. Having had the soundness of this method tested by Jean Darcet (1725-1801), the professor of chemistry at the Collège de France, the duke of Orleans in June 1791 agreed to furnish a sum of 200,000 francs for the purpose of exploiting it. In the following September Le Blanc was granted a patent for fifteen years, and shortly afterwards a factory was started at Saint-Denis, near Paris. But it had not long been in operation when the Revolution led to the confiscation of the duke’s property, including the factory, and about the same time the Committee of Public Safety called upon all citizens who possessed soda-factories to disclose their situation and capacity and the nature of the methods employed. Le Blanc 351 had no choice but to reveal the secrets of his process, and he had the misfortune to see his factory dismantled and his stocks of raw and finished materials sold. By way of compensation for the loss of his rights, the works were handed back to him in 1800, but all his efforts to obtain money enough to restore them and resume manufacturing on a profitable scale were vain, and, worn out with disappointment, he died by his own hand at Saint-Denis on the 16th of January 1806.

LE BLANC, NICOLAS (1742-1806), a French chemist, was born in Issoudun, Indre, in 1742. He pursued a career in medicine and became the surgeon to the Duke of Orleans in 1780, but he also focused a lot on chemistry. Around 1787, he became interested in the urgent issue of producing carbonate of soda from regular sea salt. In 1789, Jean Claude de la Métherie (1743-1817), the editor of the Journal de physique, suggested that this could be achieved by heating the sulfate of soda created from salt using sulfuric acid together with charcoal. This approach didn't work in practice because it mainly produced sulfide of soda, but it provided Le Blanc, as he acknowledged, with a foundation to build upon. He soon made a critical discovery—which laid the groundwork for the expansive artificial alkali industry—that mixing a certain amount of chalk with the charcoal and sulfate of soda would achieve the desired result. After having the effectiveness of this method validated by Jean Darcet (1725-1801), the chemistry professor at the Collège de France, the Duke of Orleans agreed in June 1791 to fund it with 200,000 francs. In September, Le Blanc received a patent for fifteen years, and shortly after, a factory was established in Saint-Denis, near Paris. Unfortunately, it hadn't been operating long before the Revolution resulted in the confiscation of the duke’s assets, including the factory. Around the same time, the Committee of Public Safety required all citizens with soda factories to report on their status, capacity, and methods used. Le Blanc had no choice but to disclose the details of his process, and sadly, he witnessed his factory dismantled and his stock of raw and finished materials sold off. He was compensated for the loss of his rights when the works were returned to him in 1800, but all his attempts to raise enough funds to rebuild and return to profitable manufacturing failed. Exhausted by disappointment, he took his own life in Saint-Denis on January 16, 1806.

Four years after his death, Michel Jean Jacques Dizê (1764-1852), who had been préparateur to Darcet at the time he examined the process and who was subsequently associated with Le Blanc in its exploitation, published in the Journal de physique a paper claiming that it was he himself who had first suggested the addition of chalk; but a committee of the French Academy, which reported fully on the question in 1856, came to the conclusion that the merit was entirely Le Blanc’s (Com. rend., 1856, p. 553).

Four years after his death, Michel Jean Jacques Dizê (1764-1852), who had been a préparateur for Darcet when he examined the process and later worked with Le Blanc on its development, published a paper in the Journal de physique claiming that he was the one who first suggested adding chalk. However, a committee from the French Academy that thoroughly investigated the matter in 1856 concluded that the credit belonged entirely to Le Blanc (Com. rend., 1856, p. 553).

LE BLANC, a town of central France, capital of an arrondissement, in the department of Indre, 44 m. W.S.W, of Châteauroux on the Orléans railway between Argenton and Poitiers. Pop. (1906) 4719. The Creuse divides it into a lower and an upper town. The church of St Génitour dates from the 12th, 13th and 15th centuries, and there is an old castle restored in modern times. It is the seat of a subprefect, and has a tribunal of first instance and a communal college. Wool-spinning, and the manufacture of linen goods and edge-tools are among the industries. There is trade in horses and in the agricultural and other products of the surrounding region.

LE BLANC, is a town in central France, the capital of an arrondissement in the Indre department, located 44 miles west-southwest of Châteauroux on the Orléans railway between Argenton and Poitiers. The population in 1906 was 4,719. The Creuse River separates it into a lower town and an upper town. The church of St Génitour dates back to the 12th, 13th, and 15th centuries, and there is a historic castle that has been restored in modern times. It serves as the seat of a subprefect and has a first-instance tribunal and a communal college. Industries include wool spinning and the production of linen goods and edge-tools. There is also trade in horses and various agricultural products from the surrounding area.

Le Blanc, which is identified with the Roman Oblincum, was in the middle ages a lordship belonging to the house of Naillac and a frontier fortress of the province of Berry.

Le Blanc, known as the Roman Oblincum, was in the Middle Ages a lordship owned by the house of Naillac and a border fortress of the province of Berry.

LEBŒUF, EDMOND (1809-1888), marshal of France, was born at Paris on the 5th of November 1809, passed through the École Polytechnique and the school of Metz, and distinguished himself as an artillery officer in Algerian warfare, becoming colonel in 1852. He commanded the artillery of the 1st French corps at the siege of Sebastopol, and was promoted in 1854 to the rank of general of brigade, and in 1857 to that of general of division. In the Italian War of 1859 he commanded the artillery, and by his action at Solferino materially assisted in achieving the victory. In September 1866, having in the meantime become aide-de-camp to Napoleon III., he was despatched to Venetia to hand over that province to Victor Emmanuel. In 1869, on the death of Marshal Niel, General Lebœuf became minister of war, and earned public approbation by his vigorous reorganization of the War Office and the civil departments of the service. In the spring of 1870 he received the marshal’s baton. On the declaration of war with Germany Marshal Lebœuf delivered himself in the Corps Législatif of the historic saying, “So ready are we, that if the war lasts two years, not a gaiter button would be found wanting.” It may be that he intended this to mean that, given time, the reorganization of the War Office would be perfected through experience, but the result inevitably caused it to be regarded as a mere boast, though it is now known that the administrative confusion on the frontier in July 1870 was far less serious than was supposed at the time. Lebœuf took part in the Lorraine campaign, at first as chief of staff (major-general) of the Army of the Rhine, and afterwards, when Bazaine became commander-in-chief, as chief of the III. corps, which he led in the battles around Metz. He distinguished himself, whenever engaged, by personal bravery and good leadership. Shut up with Bazaine in Metz, on its fall he was confined as a prisoner in Germany. On the conclusion of peace he returned to France and gave evidence before the commission of inquiry into the surrender of that stronghold, when he strongly denounced Bazaine. After this he retired into private life to the Château du Moncel near Argentan, where he died on the 7th of June 1888.

LEBŒUF, EDMOND (1809-1888), a French marshal, was born in Paris on November 5, 1809. He attended the École Polytechnique and the school of Metz, and he gained recognition as an artillery officer during the Algerian campaign, becoming a colonel in 1852. He led the artillery for the 1st French corps during the siege of Sebastopol, and in 1854 he was promoted to brigadier general, followed by a promotion to division general in 1857. During the Italian War of 1859, he commanded the artillery and played a significant role in securing victory at Solferino. In September 1866, after becoming an aide-de-camp to Napoleon III, he was sent to Venetia to hand over the province to Victor Emmanuel. In 1869, following the death of Marshal Niel, General Lebœuf became the minister of war and received public praise for his vigorous reorganization of the War Office and its civil departments. In the spring of 1870, he was awarded the title of marshal. When war was declared with Germany, Marshal Lebœuf famously stated in the Corps Législatif, “We are so prepared that if the war lasts two years, not a single gaiter button will be missing.” While he likely meant that the War Office's reorganization would be perfected through experience, his words were often seen as mere bravado. However, it is now recognized that the administrative issues at the front in July 1870 were not as serious as believed at the time. Lebœuf was involved in the Lorraine campaign, initially serving as the chief of staff (major-general) of the Army of the Rhine, and later, when Bazaine became the commander-in-chief, as the chief of the III corps, which he led in the battles around Metz. He consistently demonstrated personal bravery and effective leadership. After being trapped with Bazaine in Metz, he was captured as a prisoner in Germany when the city fell. After peace was established, he returned to France and provided testimony before the inquiry commission regarding the surrender of Metz, where he strongly criticized Bazaine. Subsequently, he retired to private life at Château du Moncel near Argentan, where he passed away on June 7, 1888.

LE BON, JOSEPH (1765-1795), French politician, was born at Arras on the 29th of September 1765. He became a priest in the order of the Oratory, and professor of rhetoric at Beaune. He adopted revolutionary ideas, and became a curé of the Constitutional Church in the department of Pas-de-Calais, where he was later elected as a député suppléant to the Convention. He became maire of Arras and administrateur of Pas-de-Calais, and on the 2nd of July 1793 took his seat in the Convention. He was sent as a representative on missions into the departments of the Somme and Pas-de-Calais, where he showed great severity in dealing with offences against revolutionaries (8th Brumaire, year II. to 22nd Messidor, year II.; i.e. 29th October 1793 to 10th July 1794). In consequence, during the reaction which followed the 9th Thermidor (27th July 1794) he was arrested on the 22nd Messidor, year III. (10th July 1795). He was tried before the criminal tribunal of the Somme, condemned to death for abuse of his power during his mission, and executed at Amiens on the 24th Vendémiaire in the year IV. (10th October 1795). Whatever Le Bon’s offences, his condemnation was to a great extent due to the violent attacks of one of his political enemies, Armand Guffroy; and it is only just to remember that it was owing to his courage that Cambrai was saved from falling into the hands of the Austrians.

LE BON, JOSEPH (1765-1795), a French politician, was born in Arras on September 29, 1765. He became a priest in the Oratory and a rhetoric professor in Beaune. He embraced revolutionary ideas and became a curé of the Constitutional Church in the Pas-de-Calais department, where he was later elected as a député suppléant to the Convention. He served as maire of Arras and administrateur of Pas-de-Calais, and on July 2, 1793, he took his seat in the Convention. He was sent as a representative on missions to the Somme and Pas-de-Calais, where he showed great severity in handling offenses against revolutionaries (8th Brumaire, year II. to 22nd Messidor, year II.; i.e. October 29, 1793, to July 10, 1794). As a result, during the reaction that followed 9th Thermidor (July 27, 1794), he was arrested on 22nd Messidor, year III. (July 10, 1795). He was tried before the Somme criminal tribunal, condemned to death for abusing his power during his mission, and executed in Amiens on 24th Vendémiaire in the year IV. (October 10, 1795). Regardless of Le Bon’s offenses, his condemnation was largely due to the vicious attacks from one of his political rivals, Armand Guffroy; it's important to remember that his courage was key in saving Cambrai from falling into Austrian hands.

His son, Émile le Bon, published a Histoire de Joseph le Bon et des tribunaux révolutionnaires d’Arras et de Cambrai (2nd ed., 2 vols., Arras, 1864).

His son, Émile le Bon, published a History of Joseph le Bon and the Revolutionary Courts of Arras and Cambrai (2nd ed., 2 vols., Arras, 1864).

LEBRIJA, or Lebrixa, a town of southern Spain, in the province of Seville, near the left bank of the Guadalquivir, and on the eastern edge of the marshes known as Las Marismas. Pop. (1900) 10,997. Lebrija is 44 m. S. by W. of Seville, on the Seville-Cadiz railway. Its chief buildings are a ruined Moorish castle and the parish church, an imposing structure in a variety of styles—Moorish, Gothic, Romanesque—dating from the 14th century to the 16th, and containing some early specimens of the carving of Alonso Cano (1601-1667). There are manufactures of bricks, tiles and earthenware, for which clay is found in the neighbourhood; and some trade in grain, wine and oil.

LEBRIJA, or Lebrixa, is a town in southern Spain, located in the province of Seville, near the left bank of the Guadalquivir River, on the eastern edge of the marshes known as Las Marismas. Population (1900) was 10,997. Lebrija is 44 miles south-west of Seville, along the Seville-Cadiz railway. Its main buildings include a ruined Moorish castle and the parish church, an impressive structure that showcases a mix of styles—Moorish, Gothic, Romanesque—dating from the 14th to the 16th century, featuring some early examples of carving by Alonso Cano (1601-1667). The town has brick, tile, and pottery manufacturing, thanks to nearby clay deposits, along with some trade in grain, wine, and oil.

Lebrija is the Nabrissa or Nebrissa, surnamed Veneria, of the Romans; by Silius Italicus (iii. 393), who connects it with the worship of Dionysus, the name is derived from the Greek νεβρίς (a “fawn-skin,” associated with Dionysiac ritual). Nebrishah was a strong and populous place during the period of Moorish domination (from 711); it was taken by St Ferdinand in 1249, but again lost, and became finally subject to the Castilian crown only under Alphonso the Wise in 1264. It was the birthplace of Elio Antonio de Lebrija or Nebrija (1444-1522), better known as Nebrissensis, one of the most important leaders in the revival of learning in Spain, the tutor of Queen Isabella, and a collaborator with Cardinal Jimenes in the preparation of the Complutensian Polyglot (see Alcala de Henares).

Lebrija is the Nabrissa or Nebrissa, known as Veneria by the Romans; as noted by Silius Italicus (iii. 393), who links it to the worship of Dionysus, the name comes from the Greek νεβρίς (a “fawn-skin,” tied to Dionysian rituals). Nebrishah was a strong and populated area during the Moorish rule (from 711); it was captured by St. Ferdinand in 1249, but was lost again, only finally coming under the control of the Castilian crown during Alphonso the Wise's reign in 1264. It was the birthplace of Elio Antonio de Lebrija or Nebrija (1444-1522), better known as Nebrissensis, one of the key figures in the revival of learning in Spain, the tutor of Queen Isabella, and a collaborator with Cardinal Jimenes on the production of the Complutensian Polyglot (see Alcala de Henares).

LE BRUN, CHARLES (1619-1690), French painter, was born at Paris on the 24th of February 1619, and attracted the notice of Chancellor Séguier, who placed him at the age of eleven in the studio of Vouet. At fifteen he received commissions from Cardinal Richelieu, in the execution of which he displayed an ability which obtained the generous commendations of Poussin, in whose company Le Brun started for Rome in 1642. In Rome he remained four years in the receipt of a pension due to the liberality of the chancellor. On his return to Paris Le Brun found numerous patrons, of whom Superintendent Fouquet was the most important. Employed at Vaux le Vicomte, Le Brun ingratiated himself with Mazarin, then secretly pitting Colbert against Fouquet. Colbert also promptly recognized Le Brun’s powers of organization, and attached him to his interests. Together they founded the Academy of Painting and Sculpture (1648), and the Academy of France at Rome (1666), and gave a new development to the industrial arts. In 1660 they established the Gobelins, which at first was a great school for the manufacture, not of tapestries only, but of every class of furniture required in the royal palaces. Commanding the industrial arts through the Gobelins—of which he was director—and the whole artist world through the Academy—in which he successively held every post—Le Brun imprinted his own character on all that was produced in France during his lifetime, and gave a direction to the national tendencies which endured after his death. The nature of his emphatic and pompous talent was in harmony with the taste of the king, who, full of admiration at the decorations designed by Le Brun for his triumphal entry into Paris (1660), commissioned him to execute 352 a series of subjects from the history of Alexander. The first of these, “Alexander and the Family of Darius,” so delighted Louis XIV. that he at once ennobled Le Brun (December, 1662), who was also created first painter to his majesty with a pension of 12,000 livres, the same amount as he had yearly received in the service of the magnificent Fouquet. From this date all that was done in the royal palaces was directed by Le Brun. The works of the gallery of Apollo in the Louvre were interrupted in 1677 when he accompanied the king to Flanders (on his return from Lille he painted several compositions in the Château of St Germains), and finally—for they remained unfinished at his death—by the vast labours of Versailles, where he reserved for himself the Halls of War and Peace, the Ambassadors’ Staircase, and the Great Gallery, other artists being forced to accept the position of his assistants. At the death of Colbert, Louvois, who succeeded him in the department of public works, showed no favour to Le Brun, and in spite of the king’s continued support he felt a bitter change in his position. This contributed to the illness which on the 22nd of February 1690 ended in his death in the Gobelins. Besides his gigantic labours at Versailles and the Louvre, the number of his works for religious corporations and private patrons is enormous. He modelled and engraved with much facility, and, in spite of the heaviness and poverty of drawing and colour, his extraordinary activity and the vigour of his conceptions justify his claim to fame. Nearly all his compositions have been reproduced by celebrated engravers.

LE BRUN, CHARLES (1619-1690), French painter, was born in Paris on February 24, 1619, and caught the attention of Chancellor Séguier, who placed him at the age of eleven in Vouet's studio. By fifteen, he was receiving commissions from Cardinal Richelieu, showcasing a talent that earned him generous praise from Poussin. Le Brun traveled to Rome in 1642 with Poussin, where he stayed for four years on a pension provided by the chancellor's generosity. Upon returning to Paris, Le Brun found many patrons, with Superintendent Fouquet being the most significant. While working at Vaux le Vicomte, he endeared himself to Mazarin, secretly setting Colbert against Fouquet. Colbert soon recognized Le Brun's organizational skills and brought him into his circle. Together, they founded the Academy of Painting and Sculpture in 1648 and the Academy of France in Rome in 1666, promoting the industrial arts. In 1660, they established the Gobelins, which initially served as a major school for producing not just tapestries, but also various types of furniture needed for royal palaces. By controlling the industrial arts through the Gobelins—of which he was the director—and the artistic community through the Academy, where he held multiple positions, Le Brun left his mark on everything produced in France during his lifetime, shaping national trends that persisted after his death. His grand and ostentatious style resonated with the king's taste, and after admiring the decorations Le Brun designed for his triumphant entry into Paris in 1660, Louis XIV commissioned him to create a series of works depicting the history of Alexander. The first piece, “Alexander and the Family of Darius,” so impressed Louis XIV that he ennobled Le Brun in December 1662, appointing him as the king's first painter with a pension of 12,000 livres, the same amount he had earned serving the illustrious Fouquet. From that point on, everything done in the royal palaces fell under Le Brun's direction. Work on the gallery of Apollo in the Louvre was interrupted in 1677 when he accompanied the king to Flanders, and upon returning from Lille, he painted several works in the Château of St Germains. Ultimately, his extensive efforts at Versailles remained unfinished at his death, where he took on the Halls of War and Peace, the Ambassadors’ Staircase, and the Great Gallery, leaving other artists to act as his assistants. After Colbert's death, Louvois, who took over public works, showed no favor to Le Brun, leading to a significant decline in his position despite the king's ongoing support. This shift contributed to the illness that resulted in his death on February 22, 1690, at the Gobelins. Besides his monumental works at Versailles and the Louvre, he produced an enormous number of pieces for religious organizations and private patrons. He was skilled at modeling and engraving, and despite some heaviness and lack of finesse in his drawing and color, his remarkable output and the strength of his ideas validate his reputation. Almost all of his compositions have been reproduced by renowned engravers.

LEBRUN, CHARLES FRANÇOIS, duc de Plaisance (1739-1824), French statesman, was born at St-Sauveur-Lendelin (Manche) on the 19th of March 1739, and in 1762 made his first appearance as a lawyer at Paris. He filled the posts successively of censeur royale (1766) and of inspector general of the domains of the crown (1768); he was also one of the chief advisers of the chancellor Maupeou, took part in his struggle against the parlements, and shared in his downfall in 1774. He then devoted himself to literature, translating Tasso’s Gerusalemme liberata (1774), and the Iliad (1776). At the outset of the Revolution he foresaw its importance, and in the Voix du citoyen, which he published in 1789, predicted the course which events would take. In the Constituent Assembly, where he sat as deputy for Dourdan, he professed liberal views, and was the proposer of various financial laws. He then became president of the directory of Seine-et-Oise, and in 1795 was elected as a deputy to the Council of Ancients. After the coup d’état of the 18th Brumaire in the year VIII. (9th November 1799), Lebrun was made third consul. In this capacity he took an active part in the reorganization of finance and of the administration of the departments of France. In 1804 he was appointed arch-treasurer of the empire, and in 1805-1806 as governor-general of Liguria effected its annexation to France. He opposed Napoleon’s restoration of the noblesse, and in 1808 only reluctantly accepted the title of duc de Plaisance (Piacenza). He was next employed in organizing the departments which were formed in Holland, of which he was governor-general from 1811 to 1813. Although to a certain extent opposed to the despotism of the emperor, he was not in favour of his deposition, though he accepted the fait accompli of the Restoration in April 1814. Louis XVIII. made him a peer of France; but during the Hundred Days he accepted from Napoleon the post of Grand Master of the university. On the return of the Bourbons in 1815 he was consequently suspended from the House of Peers, but was recalled in 1819. He died at St Mesmes (Seine-et-Oise) on the 16th of June 1824. He had been made a member of the Académie des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres in 1803.

LEBRUN, CHARLES FRANÇOIS, duke of Plaisance (1739-1824), French politician, was born in St-Sauveur-Lendelin (Manche) on March 19, 1739, and made his debut as a lawyer in Paris in 1762. He served in various roles, including royal censor (1766) and inspector general of the crown’s domains (1768); he was also a key advisor to Chancellor Maupeou, participating in his conflict against the parliaments, and shared in his fall from power in 1774. He then turned to literature, translating Tasso’s Gerusalemme liberata (1774) and the Iliad (1776). At the start of the Revolution, he recognized its significance, and in the Voix du citoyen, published in 1789, he anticipated the path events would follow. As a deputy for Dourdan in the Constituent Assembly, he held liberal views and proposed several financial laws. He later became president of the Seine-et-Oise directory, and in 1795 was elected as a deputy to the Council of Ancients. After the coup d’état of 18 Brumaire in Year VIII (November 9, 1799), Lebrun was appointed third consul. In this role, he was actively involved in the reorganization of finance and the administration of France's departments. In 1804, he became arch-treasurer of the empire, and from 1805 to 1806, as governor-general of Liguria, he oversaw its annexation to France. He opposed Napoleon’s restoration of the nobility, and in 1808, he reluctantly accepted the title of duke of Plaisance (Piacenza). He was later tasked with organizing the departments formed in Holland, serving as governor-general from 1811 to 1813. While somewhat resistant to the emperor's despotism, he did not support his removal, although he accepted the fait accompli of the Restoration in April 1814. Louis XVIII made him a peer of France; however, during the Hundred Days, he accepted the role of Grand Master of the University from Napoleon. Upon the Bourbons’ return in 1815, he was suspended from the House of Peers but was reinstated in 1819. He passed away in St Mesmes (Seine-et-Oise) on June 16, 1824. He became a member of the Académie des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres in 1803.

See M. de Caumont la Force, L’Architrésorier Lebrun (Paris, 1907); M. Marie du Mesnil, Mémoire sur le prince Le Brun, duc de Plaisance (Paris, 1828); Opinions, rapports et choix d’écrits politiques de C. F. Lebrun (1829), edited, with a biographical notice, by his son Anne-Charles Lebrun.

See M. de Caumont la Force, L’Architrésorier Lebrun (Paris, 1907); M. Marie du Mesnil, Mémoire sur le prince Le Brun, duc de Plaisance (Paris, 1828); Opinions, rapports et choix d’écrits politiques de C. F. Lebrun (1829), edited, with a biographical notice, by his son Anne-Charles Lebrun.

LEBRUN, PIERRE ANTOINE (1785-1873), French poet, was born in Paris on the 29th of November 1785. An Ode à la grande armée, mistaken at the time for the work of Écouchard Lebrun, attracted Napoleon’s attention, and secured for the author a pension of 1200 francs. Lebrun’s plays, once famous, are now forgotten. They are: Ulysse (1814), Marie Stuart (1820), which obtained a great success, and Le Cid d’Andalousie (1825). Lebrun visited Greece in 1820, and on his return to Paris he published in 1822 an ode on the death of Napoleon which cost him his pension. In 1825 he was the guest of Sir Walter Scott at Abbotsford. The coronation of Charles X. in that year inspired the verses entitled La Vallée de Champrosay, which have, perhaps, done more to secure his fame than his more ambitious attempts. In 1828 appeared his most important poem, La Grèce, and in the same year he was elected to the Academy. The revolution of 1830 opened up for him a public career; in 1831 he was made director of the Imprimerie Royale, and subsequently filled with distinction other public offices, becoming senator in 1853. He died on the 27th of May 1873.

LEBRUN, PIERRE ANTOINE (1785-1873), French poet, was born in Paris on November 29, 1785. An Ode à la grande armée, which was mistakenly attributed to Écouchard Lebrun at the time, caught Napoleon’s eye and earned the author a pension of 1200 francs. Lebrun’s plays, once well-known, are now forgotten. They include: Ulysse (1814), Marie Stuart (1820), which achieved great success, and Le Cid d’Andalousie (1825). Lebrun traveled to Greece in 1820, and after returning to Paris, he published an ode about Napoleon’s death in 1822, which resulted in the loss of his pension. In 1825, he was a guest of Sir Walter Scott at Abbotsford. The coronation of Charles X. that year inspired the poem La Vallée de Champrosay, which might have done more for his reputation than his more ambitious works. His most significant poem, La Grèce, was published in 1828, the same year he was elected to the Academy. The revolution of 1830 paved the way for his public career; in 1831, he became the director of the Imprimerie Royale and later held other distinguished public positions, becoming a senator in 1853. He passed away on May 27, 1873.

See Sainte-Beuve, Portraits contemporains, vol. ii.

See Sainte-Beuve, Contemporary Portraits, vol. ii.

LEBRUN, PONCE DENIS ÉCOUCHARD (1729-1807), French lyric poet, was born in Paris on the 11th of August 1729, in the house of the prince de Conti, to whom his father was valet. Young Lebrun had among his schoolfellows a son of Louis Racine whose disciple he became. In 1755 he published an Ode sur les désastres de Lisbon. In 1759 he married Marie Anne de Surcourt, addressed in his Élégies as Fanny. To the early years of his marriage belongs his poem Nature. His wife suffered much from his violent temper, and when in 1774 she brought an action against him to obtain a separation, she was supported by Lebrun’s own mother and sister. He had been secrétaire des commandements to the prince de Conti, and on his patron’s death was deprived of his occupation. He suffered a further misfortune in the loss of his capital by the bankruptcy of the prince de Guémené. To this period belongs a long poem, the Veillées des Muses, which remained unfinished, and his ode to Buffon, which ranks among his best works. Dependent on government pensions he changed his politics with the times. Calonne he compared to the great Sully, and Louis XVI. to Henry IV., but the Terror nevertheless found in him its official poet. He occupied rooms in the Louvre, and fulfilled his obligations by shameless attacks on the unfortunate king and queen. His excellent ode on the Vengeur and the Ode nationale contre Angleterre on the occasion of the projected invasion of England are in honour of the power of Napoleon. This “versatility” has so much injured Lebrun’s reputation that it is difficult to appreciate his real merit. He had a genius for epigram, and the quatrains and dizaines directed against his many enemies have a verve generally lacking in his odes. The one directed against La Harpe is called by Sainte-Beuve the “queen of epigrams.” La Harpe has said that the poet, called by his friends, perhaps with a spice of irony, Lebrun-Pindare, had written many fine strophes but not one good ode. The critic exposed mercilessly the obscurities and unlucky images which occur even in the ode to Buffon, and advised the author to imitate the simplicity and energy that adorned Buffon’s prose. Lebrun died in Paris on the 31st of August 1807.

LEBRUN, PONCE DENIS ÉCOUCHARD (1729-1807), a French lyric poet, was born in Paris on August 11, 1729, in the house of the Prince de Conti, where his father worked as a valet. Young Lebrun had a schoolmate who was the son of Louis Racine, and he became his disciple. In 1755, he published an Ode sur les désastres de Lisbon. In 1759, he married Marie Anne de Surcourt, whom he referred to as Fanny in his Élégies. The early years of their marriage saw the creation of his poem Nature. His wife endured a lot due to his violent temper, and in 1774, when she sought separation, she had the support of Lebrun’s own mother and sister. He had served as secrétaire des commandements to the Prince de Conti, but lost his job upon the prince’s death. He faced another setback when he lost his savings due to the bankruptcy of the Prince de Guémené. During this time, he wrote a long poem, Veillées des Muses, which remained unfinished, as well as an ode to Buffon, considered one of his best works. Relying on government pensions, he shifted his political views as the situation changed. He compared Calonne to the great Sully and Louis XVI. to Henry IV., yet during the Terror, he became its official poet. He lived in rooms at the Louvre and earned his keep by making shameless attacks on the unfortunate king and queen. His outstanding ode on the Vengeur and the Ode nationale contre Angleterre, written in light of the planned invasion of England, celebrated Napoleon's power. This “versatility” has tarnished Lebrun’s reputation, making it hard to recognize his true merit. He had a talent for epigram, and the quatrains and dizaines aimed at his many foes are full of energy, which is often lacking in his odes. The one aimed at La Harpe is called by Sainte-Beuve the “queen of epigrams.” La Harpe noted that his friends playfully dubbed him Lebrun-Pindare, stating he had penned many fine strophes but not a single good ode. The critic harshly pointed out the obscurities and unfortunate images present even in the ode to Buffon, advising the author to emulate the clarity and vigor that characterized Buffon’s prose. Lebrun died in Paris on August 31, 1807.

His works were published by his friend P. L. Ginguené in 1811. The best of them are included in Prosper Poitevin’s “Petits poètes français,” which forms part of the “Panthéon littéraire.”

His works were published by his friend P. L. Ginguené in 1811. The best of them are included in Prosper Poitevin’s “Petits poètes français,” which is part of the “Panthéon littéraire.”

LE CARON, HENRI (whose real name was Thomas Miller Beach) (1841-1894), British secret service agent, was born at Colchester, on the 26th of September 1841. He was of an adventurous character, and when nineteen years old went to Paris, where he found employment in business connected with America. Infected with the excitement of the American Civil War, he crossed the Atlantic in 1861 and enlisted in the Northern army, taking the name of Henri Le Caron. In 1864 he married a young lady who had helped him to escape from some Confederate marauders; and by the end of the war he rose to be major. In 1865, through a companion in arms named O’Neill, he was brought into contact with Fenianism, and having learnt of the Fenian plot against Canada, he mentioned the designs when writing home to his father. Mr Beach told his local M.P., who in turn told the Home Secretary, and the latter asked Mr Beach to arrange for further information. Le Caron, inspired (as all the evidence shows) by genuinely patriotic feeling, from that 353 time till 1889 acted for the British government as a paid military spy. He was a proficient in medicine, among other qualifications for this post, and he remained for years on intimate terms with the most extreme men in the Fenian organization under all its forms. His services enabled the British government to take measures which led to the fiasco of the Canadian invasion of 1870 and Riel’s surrender in 1871, and he supplied full details concerning the various Irish-American associations, in which he himself was a prominent member. He was in the secrets of the “new departure” in 1879-1881, and in the latter year had an interview with Parnell at the House of Commons, when the Irish leader spoke sympathetically of an armed revolution in Ireland. For twenty-five years he lived at Detroit and other places in America, paying occasional visits to Europe, and all the time carrying his life in his hand. The Parnell Commission of 1889 put an end to this. Le Caron was subpoenaed by The Times, and in the witness-box the whole story came out, all the efforts of Sir Charles Russell in cross-examination failing to shake his testimony, or to impair the impression of iron tenacity and absolute truthfulness which his bearing conveyed. His career, however, for good or evil, was at an end. He published the story of his life, Twenty-five Years in the Secret Service, and it had an immense circulation. But he had to be constantly guarded, his acquaintances were hampered from seeing him, and he was the victim of a painful disease, of which he died on the 1st of April 1894. The report of the Parnell Commission is his monument.

LE CARON, HENRI (his real name was Thomas Miller Beach) (1841-1894), was a British secret service agent born in Colchester on September 26, 1841. He had an adventurous spirit, and at nineteen, he moved to Paris, where he found a job related to America. Caught up in the excitement of the American Civil War, he crossed the Atlantic in 1861 and joined the Northern army, adopting the name Henri Le Caron. In 1864, he married a young woman who had helped him escape from Confederate raiders, and by the end of the war, he had risen to the rank of major. In 1865, through a fellow soldier named O’Neill, he learned about Fenianism. After hearing about a Fenian plot against Canada, he mentioned it in a letter to his father. Mr. Beach informed his local Member of Parliament, who then alerted the Home Secretary, leading to Mr. Beach being asked to gather more information. Le Caron, motivated (as all evidence suggests) by true patriotic feelings, worked as a paid military spy for the British government until 1889. He was skilled in medicine, among other qualifications, and spent years closely connected with the most extreme members of the Fenian organization in all its forms. His efforts helped the British government implement measures that resulted in the failed Canadian invasion of 1870 and Riel’s surrender in 1871, and he provided comprehensive information about various Irish-American groups, where he was a prominent member. He knew the ins and outs of the “new departure” between 1879-1881, and in 1881, he met with Parnell in the House of Commons, where the Irish leader discussed the possibility of an armed revolution in Ireland. For twenty-five years, he lived in Detroit and other places in America, making occasional trips to Europe while constantly living on edge. The Parnell Commission of 1889 brought this to an end. Le Caron was subpoenaed by The Times, and during his testimony, the full story emerged, with Sir Charles Russell's cross-examination failing to undermine his credibility or the impression of unwavering determination and complete honesty he exhibited. His career, for better or worse, was over. He published his life story, Twenty-five Years in the Secret Service, which became extremely popular. However, he had to remain under constant protection, his friends struggled to see him, and he suffered from a painful illness, which led to his death on April 1, 1894. The report of the Parnell Commission stands as his legacy.

LE CATEAU, or Cateau-Cambrésis, a town of northern France, in the department of Nord, on the Selle, 15 m. E.S.E. of Cambrai by road. Pop. (1906) 10,400. A church of the early 17th century and a town-hall in the Renaissance style are its chief buildings. Its institutions include a board of trade-arbitration and a communal college, and its most important industries are wool-spinning and weaving. Formed by the union of the two villages of Péronne and Vendelgies, under the protection of a castle built by the bishop of Cambrai, Le Cateau became the seat of an abbey in the 11th century. In the 15th it was frequently taken and retaken, and in 1556 it was burned by the French, who in 1559 signed a celebrated treaty with Spain in the town. It was finally ceded to France by the peace of Nijmwegen in 1678.

LE CATEAU, or Cateau-Cambrésis, a town in northern France, located in the Nord department, on the Selle River, 15 miles east-southeast of Cambrai by road. Population (1906) was 10,400. A church from the early 17th century and a Renaissance-style town hall are its main landmarks. The town's institutions include a trade-arbitration board and a community college, with its key industries being wool spinning and weaving. Created from the merging of the two villages of Péronne and Vendelgies, under the protection of a castle built by the bishop of Cambrai, Le Cateau became home to an abbey in the 11th century. In the 15th century, it was often captured and recaptured, and in 1556 it was burned by the French, who signed a famous treaty with Spain in the town in 1559. It was finally ceded to France by the Treaty of Nijmegen in 1678.

LECCE (anc. Lupiae), a town and archiepiscopal see of Apulia, Italy, capital of the province of Lecce, 24 m. S.E. of Brindisi by rail. Pop. (1906) 35,179. The town is remarkable for the number of buildings of the 17th century, in the rococo style, which it contains; among these are the cathedral of S. Oronzo, and the churches of S. Chiara, S. Croce, S. Domenico, &c., the Seminario, and the Prefettura (the latter contains a museum, with a collection of Greek vases, &c.). Buildings of an earlier period are not numerous, but the fine portal of the Romanesque church of SS. Nicola e Cataldo, built by Tancred in 1180, may be noted. Another old church is S. Maria di Cerrate, near the town. Lecce contains a large government tobacco factory, and is the centre of a fertile agricultural district. To the E. 7½ m. is the small harbour of S. Cataldo, reached by electric tramway. Lecce is quite close to the site of the ancient Lupiae, equidistant (25 m.) from Brundusium and Hydruntum, remains of which are mentioned as existing up to the 15th century. A colony was founded there in Roman times, and Hadrian made a harbour—no doubt at S. Cataldo. Hardly a mile west was Rudiae, the birthplace of the poet Ennius, spoken of by Silius Italicus as worthy of mention for that reason alone. Its site was marked by the now deserted village of Rugge. The name Lycea, or Lycia, begins to appear in the 6th century. The city was for some time held by counts of Norman blood, among whom the most noteworthy is Bohemond, son of Robert Guiscard. It afterwards passed to the Orsini. The rank of provincial capital was bestowed by Ferdinand of Aragon in acknowledgment of the fidelity of Lecce to his cause.

LECCE (formerly Lupiae), a town and archiepiscopal see in Apulia, Italy, is the capital of the province of Lecce, located 24 miles southeast of Brindisi by train. Population (1906) was 35,179. The town is notable for its many 17th-century buildings in the rococo style, including the cathedral of S. Oronzo and the churches of S. Chiara, S. Croce, S. Domenico, etc., as well as the Seminario and the Prefettura, which houses a museum with a collection of Greek vases, among other items. There aren’t many older buildings, but the impressive portal of the Romanesque church of SS. Nicola e Cataldo, built by Tancred in 1180, stands out. Another historic church is S. Maria di Cerrate, located near the town. Lecce has a large government tobacco factory and serves as the hub of a productive agricultural region. To the east, 7½ miles away, is the small harbor of S. Cataldo, accessible by electric tramway. Lecce is quite close to the site of ancient Lupiae, which is situated equidistant (25 miles) from Brundusium and Hydruntum, remnants of which were mentioned as existing up to the 15th century. A colony was founded there during Roman times, and Hadrian built a harbor—likely at S. Cataldo. Just under a mile to the west was Rudiae, the birthplace of poet Ennius, noted by Silius Italicus for that reason alone. Its location is now marked by the abandoned village of Rugge. The name Lycea, or Lycia, starts appearing in the 6th century. The city was held for some time by Norman counts, with Bohemond, the son of Robert Guiscard, being the most prominent. It later came under the control of the Orsini family. The title of provincial capital was granted by Ferdinand of Aragon in recognition of Lecce's loyalty to his cause.

(T. As.)

See M. S. Briggs, In the Heel of Italy (1910).

See M. S. Briggs, In the Heel of Italy (1910).

LECCO, a town of Lombardy, in the province of Como, 32 m. by rail N. by E. of Milan, and reached by steamer from Como, 673 ft. above sea-level. Pop. (1901) 10,352. It is situated near the southern extremity of the eastern branch of the Lake of Como, which is frequently distinguished as the Lake of Lecco. At Lecco begins the line (run by electricity) to Colico, whence there are branches to Chiavenna and Sondrio; and another line runs to Bergamo. To the south the Adda is crossed by a fine bridge originally constructed in 1335, and rebuilt in 1609 by Fuentes. Lecco, in spite of its antiquity, presents a modern appearance, almost the only old building being its castle, of which a part remains. Its schools are particularly good. Besides iron-works, there are copper-works, brass-foundries, olive-oil mills and a manufacture of wax candles; and silk-spinning, cotton-spinning and wood-carving. In the neighbourhood is the villa of Caleotto, the residence of Alessandro Manzoni, who in his Promessi Sposi, has left a full description of the district. A statue has been erected to him.

LECCO, is a town in Lombardy, in the province of Como, 32 miles northeast of Milan, and can be reached by steamer from Como, situated 673 feet above sea level. Population (1901) was 10,352. It lies near the southern end of the eastern branch of Lake Como, which is often referred to as the Lake of Lecco. The electric line to Colico starts here, with branches to Chiavenna and Sondrio; another line goes to Bergamo. To the south, the Adda River is crossed by a beautiful bridge originally built in 1335 and rebuilt in 1609 by Fuentes. Despite its history, Lecco has a modern look, with the castle being the only old building that remains. Its schools are particularly high quality. In addition to ironworks, there are copper works, brass foundries, olive oil mills, and a production of wax candles, along with silk spinning, cotton spinning, and wood carving. Nearby is the villa of Caleotto, the home of Alessandro Manzoni, who provided a detailed description of the area in his Promessi Sposi. A statue has been erected in his honor.

In the 11th century Lecco, previously the seat of a marquisate, was presented to the bishops of Como by Otto II.; but in the 12th century it passed to the archbishops of Milan, and in 1127 it assisted the Milanese in the destruction of Como. During the 13th century it was struggling for its existence with the metropolitan city; and its fate seemed to be sealed when the Visconti drove its inhabitants across the lake to Valmadrera, and forbade them to raise their town from its ashes. But in a few years the people returned; Azzone Visconti made Lecco a strong fortress, and in 1335 united it with the Milanese territory by a bridge across the Adda. During the 15th and 16th centuries the citadel of Lecco was an object of endless contention. In 1647 the town with its territory was made a countship. Morone, Charles V.’s Italian chancellor, was born in Lecco.

In the 11th century, Lecco, which was once the center of a marquisate, was given to the bishops of Como by Otto II. In the 12th century, it came under the control of the archbishops of Milan, and in 1127, it helped the Milanese destroy Como. During the 13th century, it was fighting for survival against the metropolitan city; its fate seemed sealed when the Visconti forced its residents across the lake to Valmadrera and prohibited them from rebuilding their town. However, a few years later, the people returned; Azzone Visconti turned Lecco into a strong fortress and, in 1335, connected it to the Milanese territory with a bridge over the Adda. In the 15th and 16th centuries, the citadel of Lecco was a source of constant conflict. In 1647, the town and its surrounding area were made a countship. Morone, Charles V’s Italian chancellor, was born in Lecco.

See A. L. Apostolo, Lecco ed il suo territorio (Lecco, 1855).

See A. L. Apostolo, Lecco and Its Territory (Lecco, 1855).

LECH (Licus), a river of Germany in the kingdom of Bavaria, 177 m. long, with a drainage basin of 2550 sq. m. It rises in the Vorarlberg Alps, at an altitude of 6120 ft. It winds out of the gloomy limestone mountains, flows in a north-north-easterly direction, and enters the plains at Füssen (2580 ft.), where it forms rapids and a fall, then pursues a northerly course past Augsburg, where it receives the Wertach, and joins the Danube from the right just below Donauwörth (1330 ft.). It is not navigable, owing to its torrential character and the gravel beds which choke its channel. More than once great historic events have been decided upon its banks. On the Lechfeld, a stony waste some miles long, between the Lech and the Wertach, the emperor Otto I. defeated the Hungarians in August 955. Tilly, in attempting to defend the passage of the stream at Rain against the forces of Gustavus Adolphus, was fatally wounded, on the 5th of April 1632. The river was formerly the boundary between Bavaria and Swabia.

LECH (Licus), a river in Germany located in the kingdom of Bavaria, is 177 m long, with a drainage basin of 2550 sq. m. It rises in the Vorarlberg Alps at an altitude of 6120 ft. The river winds out of the rugged limestone mountains, flows in a north-north-easterly direction, and enters the plains at Füssen (2580 ft.), where it creates rapids and a waterfall, then continues north past Augsburg, where it receives the Wertach and joins the Danube from the right just below Donauwörth (1330 ft.). It is not navigable due to its swift flow and the gravel beds that obstruct its channel. Several significant historical events have taken place along its banks. On the Lechfeld, a rocky stretch a few miles long between the Lech and the Wertach, Emperor Otto I defeated the Hungarians in August 955. Tilly was fatally wounded while trying to defend the crossing at Rain against Gustavus Adolphus' forces on April 5, 1632. The river used to mark the boundary between Bavaria and Swabia.

LE CHAMBON, or Le Chambon-Feugerolles, a town of east-central France in the department of Loire, 7½ m. S.W. of St Étienne by rail, on the Ondaine, a tributary of the Loire. Pop. (1906) town, 7525; commune, 12,011. Coal is mined in the neighbourhood, and there are forges, steel works, manufactures of tools and other iron goods, and silk mills. The feudal castle of Feugerolles on a hill to the south-east dates in part from the 11th century.

LE CHAMBON, or Le Chambon-Feugerolles, a town in east-central France located in the Loire department, is 7½ miles southwest of St Étienne by train, along the Ondaine River, a tributary of the Loire. Population (1906): town, 7,525; commune, 12,011. Coal is mined in the area, and there are forges, steel mills, tool manufacturing, other iron goods production, and silk mills. The feudal castle of Feugerolles, situated on a hill to the southeast, partially dates back to the 11th century.

Between Le Chambon and St Étienne is La Ricamarie (pop. of town 5289) also of importance for its coal-mines. Many of the galleries of a number of these mines are on fire, probably from spontaneous combustion. According to popular tradition these fires date from the time of the Saracens; more authentically from the 15th century.

Between Le Chambon and St Étienne is La Ricamarie (population of 5,289), which is also significant for its coal mines. Many of the tunnels in several of these mines are on fire, likely due to spontaneous combustion. According to local lore, these fires have been burning since the time of the Saracens; more accurately, they began in the 15th century.

LE CHAPELIER, ISAAC RENÉ GUY (1754-1794), French politician, was born at Rennes on the 12th of June 1754, his father being bâtonnier of the corporation of lawyers in that town. He entered his father’s profession, and had some success as an orator. In 1789 he was elected as a deputy to the States General by the Tiers-État of the sénéchaussée of Rennes. He adopted advanced opinions, and was one of the founders of the Breton Club (see Jacobin Club); his influence in the Constituent Assembly was considerable, and on the 3rd of August 1789 he was elected its president. Thus he presided over the Assembly 354 during the important period following the 4th of August; he took an active part in the debates, and was a leading member of the committee which drew up the new constitution; he further presented a report on the liberty of theatres and on literary copyright. He was also conspicuous as opposing Robespierre when he proposed that members of the Constituent Assembly should not be eligible for election to the proposed new Assembly. After the flight of the king to Varennes (20th of June 1792), his opinions became more moderate, and on the 29th of September he brought forward a motion to restrict the action of the clubs. This, together with a visit which he paid to England in 1792 made him suspect, and he was denounced on his return for conspiring with foreign nations. He went into hiding, but was discovered in consequence of a pamphlet which he published to defend himself, arrested and condemned to death by the Revolutionary Tribunal. He was executed at Paris on the 22nd of April 1794.

LE CHAPELIER, ISAAC RENÉ GUY (1754-1794), a French politician, was born in Rennes on June 12, 1754, with his father serving as the bâtonnier of the local lawyers' association. He followed in his father's footsteps and found some success as a speaker. In 1789, he was elected as a deputy to the States General by the Third Estate of the sénéchaussée of Rennes. He embraced progressive views and was one of the founders of the Breton Club (see Jacobin Club); his influence in the Constituent Assembly was significant, and on August 3, 1789, he was elected its president. Thus, he led the Assembly 354 during the crucial time following August 4; he actively participated in discussions and was a key member of the committee that created the new constitution. He also presented a report on the freedom of theaters and on literary copyright. He notably opposed Robespierre when he suggested that members of the Constituent Assembly should be ineligible for election to the proposed new Assembly. Following the king's flight to Varennes on June 20, 1792, his views became more moderate, and on September 29, he proposed a motion to limit the influence of political clubs. This, along with a trip he took to England in 1792, made him suspicious in the eyes of others, and upon his return, he was accused of conspiring with foreign nations. He went into hiding but was found due to a pamphlet he published in his defense, arrested, and sentenced to death by the Revolutionary Tribunal. He was executed in Paris on April 22, 1794.

See A. Aulard, Les Orateurs de la constituante (2nd ed., Paris, 1905); R. Kerviler, Récherches et notices sur les députés de la Bretagne aux états généraux (2 vols., Rennes, 1888-1889); P. J. Levot, Biographie bretonne (2 vols., 1853-1857).

See A. Aulard, Les Orateurs de la constituante (2nd ed., Paris, 1905); R. Kerviler, Récherches et notices sur les députés de la Bretagne aux états généraux (2 vols., Rennes, 1888-1889); P. J. Levot, Biographie bretonne (2 vols., 1853-1857).

LECHLER, GOTTHARD VICTOR (1811-1888), German Lutheran theologian, was born on the 18th of April 1811 at Kloster Reichenbach in Württemberg. He studied at Tübingen under F. C. Baur, and became in 1858 pastor of the church of St Thomas, professor Ordinarius of historical theology and superintendent of the Lutheran church of Leipzig. He died on the 26th of December 1888. A disciple of Neander, he belonged to the extreme right of the school of mediating theologians. He is important as the historian of early Christianity and of the pre-Reformation period. Although F. C. Baur was his teacher, he did not attach himself to the Tübingen school; in reply to the contention that there are traces of a sharp conflict between two parties, Paulinists and Petrinists, he says that “we find variety coupled with agreement, and unity with difference, between Paul and the earlier apostles; we recognize the one spirit in the many gifts.” His Das apostolische und das nachapostolische Zeitalter (1851), which developed out of a prize essay (1849), passed through three editions in Germany (3rd ed., 1885), and was translated into English (2 vols., 1886). The work which in his own opinion was his greatest, Johann von Wiclif und die Vorgeschichte der Reformation (2 vols., 1873), appeared in English with the title John Wiclif and his English Precursors (1878, new ed., 1884). An earlier work, Geschichte des engl. Deïsmus (1841), is still regarded as a valuable contribution to the study of religious thought in England.

LECHLER, GOTTHARD VICTOR (1811-1888), a German Lutheran theologian, was born on April 18, 1811, in Kloster Reichenbach, Württemberg. He studied at Tübingen under F. C. Baur and became the pastor of St. Thomas Church in 1858, served as a full professor of historical theology, and was the superintendent of the Lutheran Church in Leipzig. He passed away on December 26, 1888. A follower of Neander, he was part of the far-right group within the mediating theologians. He is significant as a historian of early Christianity and the pre-Reformation era. Although F. C. Baur was his teacher, he did not align with the Tübingen school; in response to the idea that there were significant conflicts between the Paulinists and Petrinists, he stated, “we find variety coupled with agreement, and unity with difference, between Paul and the earlier apostles; we recognize the one spirit in the many gifts.” His book Das apostolische und das nachapostolische Zeitalter (1851), which originated from a prize essay (1849), went through three editions in Germany (3rd ed., 1885) and was translated into English (2 vols., 1886). The work that he considered his greatest, Johann von Wiclif und die Vorgeschichte der Reformation (2 vols., 1873), was published in English as John Wiclif and his English Precursors (1878, new ed., 1884). An earlier work, Geschichte des engl. Deïsmus (1841), is still seen as an important contribution to the study of religious thought in England.

Lechler’s other works include Geschichte der Presbyterial- und Synodal-verfassung (1854), Urkundenfunde zur Geschichte des christl. Altertums (1886), and biographies of Thomas Bradwardine (1862) and Robert Grosseteste (1867). He wrote part of the commentary on the Acts of the Apostles in J. P. Lange’s Bibelwerk. From 1882 he edited with F. W. Dibelius the Beiträge zur sächsischen Kirchengeschichte. Johannes Hus (1890) was published after his death.

Lechler’s other works include History of the Presbyterian and Synodal Constitution (1854), Document Finds in the History of Early Christianity (1886), and biographies of Thomas Bradwardine (1862) and Robert Grosseteste (1867). He contributed to the commentary on the Acts of the Apostles in J. P. Lange’s Bible Work. From 1882, he co-edited the Contributions to Saxon Church History with F. W. Dibelius. John Huss (1890) was published posthumously.

LECKY, WILLIAM EDWARD HARTPOLE (1838-1903), Irish historian and publicist, was born at Newtown Park, near Dublin, on the 26th of March 1838, being the eldest son of John Hartpole Lecky, whose family had for many generations been landowners in Ireland. He was educated at Kingstown, Armagh, and Cheltenham College, and at Trinity College, Dublin, where he graduated B.A. in 1859 and M.A. in 1863, and where, with a view to becoming a clergyman in the Irish Protestant Church, he went through a course of divinity. In 1860 he published anonymously a small book entitled The Religious Tendencies of the Age, but on leaving college he abandoned his first intention and turned to historical work. In 1861 he published Leaders of Public Opinion in Ireland, a brief sketch of the lives and work of Swift, Flood, Grattan and O’Connell, which gave decided promise of his later admirable work in the same field. This book, originally published anonymously, was republished in 1871; and the essay on Swift, rewritten and amplified, appeared again in 1897 as an introduction to a new edition of Swift’s works. Two learned surveys of certain aspects of history followed: A History of the Rise and Influence of Rationalism in Europe (2 vols., 1865), and A History of European Morals from Augustus to Charlemagne (2 vols., 1869). Some criticism was aroused by these books, especially by the last named, with its opening dissertation on “the natural history of morals,” but both have been generally accepted as acute and suggestive commentaries upon a wide range of facts. Lecky then devoted himself to the chief work of his life, A History of England during the Eighteenth Century, vols. i. and ii. of which appeared in 1878, and vols. vii. and viii. (completing the work) in 1890. His object was “to disengage from the great mass of facts those which relate to the permanent forces of the nation, or which indicate some of the more enduring features of national life,” and in the carrying out of this task Lecky displays many of the qualities of a great historian. The work is distinguished by the lucidity of its style, but the fulness and extent of the authorities referred to, and, above all, by the judicial impartiality maintained by the author throughout. These qualities are perhaps most conspicuous and most valuable in the chapters which deal with the history of Ireland, and in the cabinet edition of 1892, in 12 vols. (frequently reprinted) this part of the work is separated from the rest, and occupies five volumes under the title of A History of Ireland in the Eighteenth Century. A volume of Poems, published in 1891, was characterized by a certain frigidity and by occasional lapses into commonplace, objections which may also be fairly urged against much of Lecky’s prose-writing. In 1896 he published two volumes entitled Democracy and Liberty, in which he considered, with special reference to Great Britain, France and America, some of the tendencies of modern democracies. The somewhat gloomy conclusions at which he arrived provoked much criticism both in Great Britain and America, which was renewed when he published in a new edition (1899) an elaborate and very depreciatory estimate of Gladstone, then recently dead. This work, though essentially different from the author’s purely historical writings, has many of their merits, though it was inevitable that other minds should take a different view of the evidence. In The Map of Life (1900) he discussed in a popular style some of the ethical problems which arise in everyday life. In 1903 he published a revised and greatly enlarged edition of Leaders of Public Opinion in Ireland, in two volumes, from which the essay on Swift was omitted and that on O’Connell was expanded into a complete biography of the great advocate of repeal of the Union. Though always a keen sympathizer with the Irish people in their misfortunes and aspirations, and though he had criticized severely the methods by which the Act of Union was passed, Lecky, who grew up as a moderate Liberal, was from the first strenuously opposed to Gladstone’s policy of Home Rule, and in 1895 he was returned to parliament as Unionist member for Dublin University. In 1897 he was made a privy councillor, and among the coronation honours in 1902 he was nominated an original member of the new Order of Merit. His university honours included the degree of LL.D. from Dublin, St Andrews and Glasgow, the degree of D.C.L. from Oxford and the degree of Litt.D. from Cambridge. In 1894 he was elected corresponding member of the Institute of France. He contributed occasionally to periodical literature, and two of his addresses, The Political Value of History (1892) and The Empire, its Value and its Growth (1893), were published. He died in London on the 22nd of October 1903. He married in 1871 Elizabeth, baroness de Dedem, daughter of baron de Dedem, a general in the Dutch service, but had no children. Mrs Lecky contributed to various reviews a number of articles, chiefly on historical and political subjects. A volume of Lecky’s Historical and Political Essays was published posthumously (London, 1908).

LECKY, WILLIAM EDWARD HARTPOLE (1838-1903), Irish historian and publicist, was born at Newtown Park, near Dublin, on March 26, 1838. He was the oldest son of John Hartpole Lecky, whose family had been landowners in Ireland for many generations. He was educated at Kingstown, Armagh, and Cheltenham College, and at Trinity College, Dublin, where he graduated B.A. in 1859 and M.A. in 1863. He also completed a theology course intending to become a clergyman in the Irish Protestant Church. In 1860, he published a small book anonymously titled The Religious Tendencies of the Age, but after leaving college, he abandoned this plan and focused on historical work. In 1861, he published Leaders of Public Opinion in Ireland, a brief overview of the lives and work of Swift, Flood, Grattan, and O’Connell, which indicated his future excellence in the same field. This book, initially published anonymously, was republished in 1871. The essay on Swift was rewritten and expanded, reappearing in 1897 as an introduction to a new edition of Swift’s works. Two scholarly surveys followed: A History of the Rise and Influence of Rationalism in Europe (2 vols., 1865) and A History of European Morals from Augustus to Charlemagne (2 vols., 1869). These books sparked some criticism, especially the latter due to its opening dissertation on “the natural history of morals,” but both have generally been seen as insightful commentaries on a wide range of facts. Lecky then dedicated himself to the major work of his life, A History of England during the Eighteenth Century, volumes I and II of which were published in 1878, and volumes VII and VIII (completing the work) in 1890. His goal was “to extract from the vast amount of information those facts related to the enduring forces of the nation or that indicate some of the more lasting features of national life,” and in this endeavor, Lecky shows many qualities of a great historian. The work is notable for its clear writing style, the thoroughness and breadth of the sources cited, and above all, the impartiality maintained by the author throughout. These qualities are especially evident in the chapters dealing with Irish history, and in the cabinet edition of 1892, consisting of 12 volumes (often reprinted), this section is separated from the rest and takes up five volumes under the title A History of Ireland in the Eighteenth Century. A volume of Poems, published in 1891, exhibited a certain coldness and occasional triteness, critiques that can also rightly be applied to much of Lecky’s prose. In 1896, he published two volumes titled Democracy and Liberty, in which he examined, with special focus on Great Britain, France, and America, some trends in modern democracies. His somewhat bleak conclusions sparked significant criticism in both Great Britain and America, which intensified when he released a new edition (1899) featuring a detailed and highly critical evaluation of Gladstone, who had recently passed away. Although this work diverged from his purely historical writings, it retained many of their merits, even though it was likely that others would interpret the evidence differently. In The Map of Life (1900), he explored some everyday ethical dilemmas in a more accessible manner. In 1903, he published a revised and significantly expanded edition of Leaders of Public Opinion in Ireland, in two volumes, removing the essay on Swift while expanding the one on O’Connell into a full biography of the prominent advocate for the repeal of the Union. While always a strong supporter of the Irish people's hardships and aspirations, and despite having harshly criticized the methods used to pass the Act of Union, Lecky, who was raised as a moderate Liberal, was decidedly opposed to Gladstone’s Home Rule policy. In 1895, he was elected to parliament as the Unionist representative for Dublin University. In 1897, he was appointed a privy councillor, and among the coronation honors in 1902, he was named an original member of the new Order of Merit. His academic honors included the degree of LL.D. from Dublin, St Andrews, and Glasgow, the degree of D.C.L. from Oxford, and the degree of Litt.D. from Cambridge. In 1894, he was elected a corresponding member of the Institute of France. He occasionally contributed to periodicals, and two of his addresses, The Political Value of History (1892) and The Empire, its Value and its Growth (1893), were published. He died in London on October 22, 1903. He married Elizabeth, baroness de Dedem, in 1871; she was the daughter of baron de Dedem, a general in the Dutch service, but they had no children. Mrs. Lecky wrote several articles for various reviews, mainly on historical and political topics. A volume of Lecky’s Historical and Political Essays was published posthumously (London, 1908).

LE CLERC [Clericus], JEAN (1657-1736), French Protestant theologian, was born on the 19th of March 1657 at Geneva, where his father, Stephen Le Clerc, was professor of Greek. The family originally belonged to the neighbourhood of Beauvais in France, and several of its members acquired some name in literature. Jean Le Clerc applied himself to the study of philosophy under J. R. Chouet (1642-1731) the Cartesian, and attended the theological lectures of P. Mestrezat, Franz Turretin and Louis Tronchin (1629-1705). In 1678-1679 he spent some 355 time at Grenoble as tutor in a private family; on his return to Geneva he passed his examinations and received ordination. Soon afterwards he went to Saumur, where in 1679 were published Liberii de Sancto Amore Epistolae Theologicae (Irenopoli: Typis Philalethianis), usually attributed to him; they deal with the doctrine of the Trinity, the hypostatic union of the two natures in Jesus Christ, original sin, and the like, in a manner sufficiently far removed from that of the conventional orthodoxy of the period. In 1682 he went to London, where he remained six months, preaching on alternate Sundays in the Walloon church and in the Savoy chapel. Passing to Amsterdam he was introduced to John Locke and to Philip v. Limborch, professor at the Remonstrant college; the acquaintance with Limborch soon ripened into a close friendship, which strengthened his preference for the Remonstrant theology, already favourably known to him by the writings of his grand-uncle, Stephan Curcellaeus (d. 1645) and by those of Simon Episcopius. A last attempt to live at Geneva, made at the request of relatives there, satisfied him that the theological atmosphere was uncongenial, and in 1684 he finally settled at Amsterdam, first as a moderately successful preacher, until ecclesiastical jealousy shut him out from that career, and afterwards as professor of philosophy, belles-lettres and Hebrew in the Remonstrant seminary. This appointment, which he owed to Limborch, he held from 1684, and in 1712 on the death of his friend he was called to occupy the chair of church history also. His suspected Socinianism was the cause, it is said, of his exclusion from the chair of dogmatic theology. Apart from his literary labours, Le Clerc’s life at Amsterdam was uneventful. In 1691 he married a daughter of Gregorio Leti. From 1728 onward he was subject to repeated strokes of paralysis, and he died on the 8th of January 1736.

LE CLERC [Cleric], JEANS (1657-1736), was a French Protestant theologian born on March 19, 1657, in Geneva, where his father, Stephen Le Clerc, was a professor of Greek. The family originally came from the Beauvais area in France, and several members gained recognition in literature. Jean Le Clerc studied philosophy under J. R. Chouet (1642-1731), a Cartesian thinker, and attended theological lectures by P. Mestrezat, Franz Turretin, and Louis Tronchin (1629-1705). In 1678-1679, he worked as a tutor for a private family in Grenoble; upon returning to Geneva, he passed his examinations and was ordained. Soon after, he moved to Saumur, where in 1679 he published Liberii de Sancto Amore Epistolae Theologicae (Irenopoli: Typis Philalethianis), which is commonly attributed to him. These writings address the doctrine of the Trinity, the hypostatic union of the two natures in Jesus Christ, original sin, and other topics in a way that deviates from the conventional orthodoxy of the time. In 1682, he went to London and spent six months preaching on alternate Sundays in the Walloon church and in the Savoy chapel. He then traveled to Amsterdam, where he met John Locke and Philip v. Limborch, a professor at the Remonstrant college. His friendship with Limborch deepened and solidified his preference for Remonstrant theology, which he was already familiar with through his grand-uncle, Stephan Curcellaeus (d. 1645), and Simon Episcopius' works. A final attempt to live in Geneva, prompted by relatives, convinced him that the theological environment there was not right for him, leading to his permanent move to Amsterdam in 1684. Initially, he was a moderately successful preacher until ecclesiastical jealousy prevented him from continuing in that role. He then became a professor of philosophy, belles-lettres, and Hebrew at the Remonstrant seminary, a position he secured thanks to Limborch. In 1712, following his friend's death, he was also appointed to the chair of church history. His suspected Socinianism reportedly led to his exclusion from the chair of dogmatic theology. Aside from his literary work, Le Clerc’s life in Amsterdam was fairly quiet. In 1691, he married the daughter of Gregorio Leti. From 1728 onward, he suffered repeated strokes of paralysis, and he passed away on January 8, 1736.

A full catalogue of the publications of Le Clerc will be found, with biographical material, in E. and E. Haag’s France Protestante (where seventy-three works are enumerated), or in J. G. de Chauffepié’s Dictionnaire. Only the most important of these can be mentioned here. In 1685 he published Sentimens de quelques théologiens de Hollande sur l’histoire critique du Vieux Testament composée par le P. Richard Simon, in which, while pointing out what he believed to be the faults of that author, he undertook to make some positive contributions towards a right understanding of the Bible. Among these last may be noted his argument against the Mosaic authorship of the Pentateuch, his views as to the manner in which the five books were composed, his opinions (singularly free for the time in which he lived) on the subject of inspiration in general, and particularly as to the inspiration of Job, Proverbs, Ecclesiastes, Canticles. Richard Simon’s Réponse (1686) elicited from Le Clerc a Défense des sentimens in the same year, which was followed by a new Réponse (1687). In 1692 appeared his Logica sive Ars Ratiocinandi, and also Ontologia et Pneumatologia; these, with the Physica (1695), are incorporated with the Opera Philosophica, which have passed through several editions. In 1693 his series of Biblical commentaries began with that on Genesis; the series was not completed until 1731. The portion relating to the New Testament books included the paraphrase and notes of Henry Hammond (1605-1660). Le Clerc’s commentary had a great influence in breaking up traditional prejudices and showing the necessity for a more scientific inquiry into the origin and meaning of the biblical books. It was on all sides hotly attacked. His Ars Critica appeared in 1696, and, in continuation, Epistolae Criticae et Ecclesiasticae in 1700. Le Clerc’s new edition of the Apostolic Fathers of Johann Cotelerius (1627-1686), published in 1698, marked an advance in the critical study of these documents. But the greatest literary influence of Le Clerc was probably that which he exercised over his contemporaries by means of the serials, or, if one may so call them, reviews, of which he was editor. These were the Bibliothèque universelle et historiqnijkue (Amsterdam, 25 vols. 12 mo., 1686-1693), begun with J. C. de la Croze; the Bibliothèque choisie (Amsterdam, 28 vols., 1703-1713); and the Bibliothèque ancienne et moderne, (29 vols., 1714-1726).

A complete list of Le Clerc's publications, along with biographical information, can be found in E. and E. Haag's France Protestante (which enumerates seventy-three works) or in J. G. de Chauffepié's Dictionnaire. Here, we can only mention the most significant ones. In 1685, he published Sentimens de quelques théologiens de Hollande sur l’histoire critique du Vieux Testament composée par le P. Richard Simon, where he pointed out what he believed were the faults of that author while also contributing positively to a better understanding of the Bible. Notable among these contributions are his argument against the Mosaic authorship of the Pentateuch, his views on how the five books were composed, and his opinions (remarkably progressive for his time) on inspiration in general, particularly regarding the inspiration of Job, Proverbs, Ecclesiastes, and Canticles. Richard Simon's Réponse (1686) prompted Le Clerc to write a Défense des sentimens the same year, which was followed by a new Réponse (1687). In 1692, he published Logica sive Ars Ratiocinandi and Ontologia et Pneumatologia; these, along with Physica (1695), were included in the Opera Philosophica, which have been published in several editions. His series of Biblical commentaries started in 1693 with the one on Genesis and wasn't completed until 1731. The portion related to the New Testament included the paraphrase and notes of Henry Hammond (1605-1660). Le Clerc's commentary significantly influenced the dismantling of traditional prejudices and emphasized the need for a more scientific approach to understanding the origins and meanings of the biblical texts. It faced strong criticism from various sides. His Ars Critica was published in 1696, followed by Epistolae Criticae et Ecclesiasticae in 1700. Le Clerc's new edition of the Apostolic Fathers by Johann Cotelerius (1627-1686), published in 1698, marked a significant advancement in the critical study of these documents. However, Le Clerc's most considerable literary influence likely came from the serials, or reviews, he edited. These included the Bibliothèque universelle et historique (Amsterdam, 25 vols. 12 mo., 1686-1693), started with J. C. de la Croze; the Bibliothèque choisie (Amsterdam, 28 vols., 1703-1713); and the Bibliothèque ancienne et moderne (29 vols., 1714-1726).

See Le Clerc’s Parrhasiana ou pensées sur des matières de critique, d’histoire, de morale, et de politique: avec la défense de divers ouvrages de M. L. C. par Théodore Parrhase (Amsterdam, 1699); and Vita et opera ad annum MDCCXI., amici ejus opusculum, philosophicis Clerici operibus subjiciendum, also attributed to himself. The supplement to Hammond’s notes was translated into English in 1699, Parrhasiana, or Thoughts on Several Subjects, in 1700, the Harmony of the Gospels in 1701, and Twelve Dissertations out of M. Le Clerc’s Genesis in 1696.

See Le Clerc’s Parrhasiana or Thoughts on Matters of Critique, History, Morality, and Politics: with the Defense of Various Works by M. L. C. by Théodore Parrhase (Amsterdam, 1699); and Life and Works up to the Year 1711, a small work by his friend, to be subjected to the philosophical works of Cleric, also attributed to him. The supplement to Hammond’s notes was translated into English in 1699, Parrhasiana, or Thoughts on Several Subjects, in 1700, the Harmony of the Gospels in 1701, and Twelve Dissertations from M. Le Clerc’s Genesis in 1696.

LECOCQ, ALEXANDRE CHARLES (1832-  ), French musical composer, was born in Paris, on the 3rd of June 1832. He was admitted into the Conservatoire in 1849, being already an accomplished pianist. He studied under Bazin, Halévy and Benoist, winning the first prize for harmony in 1850, and the second prize for fugue in 1852. He first gained notice by dividing with Bizet the first prize for an operetta in a competition instituted by Offenbach. His operetta, Le Docteur miracle, was performed at the Bouffes Parisiens in 1857. After that he wrote constantly for theatres, but produced nothing worthy of mention until Fleur de thé (1868), which ran for more than a hundred nights. Les Cent vierges (1872) was favourably received also, but all his previous successes were cast into the shade by La Fille de Madame Angot (Paris, 1873; London, 1873), which was performed for 400 nights consecutively, and has since gained and retained enormous popularity. After 1873 Lecocq produced a large number of comic operas, though he never equalled his early triumph in La Fille de Madame Angot. Among the best of his pieces are Giroflé-Girofla (Paris and London, 1874); Les Prés Saint-Gervais (Paris and London, 1874); La Petite Mariée (Paris, 1875; London, 1876, revived as The Scarlet Feather, 1897); Le Petit Duc (Paris, 1878; London, as The Little Duke, 1878); La Petite Mademoiselle (Paris, 1879; London, 1880); Le Jour et la Nuit (Paris, 1881; London, as Manola, 1882); Le Cœur et la main (Paris, 1882; London, as Incognita, 1893); La Princesse des Canaries (Paris, 1883; London, as Pepita, 1888). In 1899 a ballet by Lecocq, entitled Le Cygne, was staged at the Opéra Comique, Paris; and in 1903 Yetta was produced at Brussels.

LECOCQ, ALEXANDRE CHARLES (1832-  ), French composer, was born in Paris on June 3, 1832. He joined the Conservatoire in 1849, already an accomplished pianist. He studied under Bazin, Halévy, and Benoist, winning the first prize for harmony in 1850 and the second prize for fugue in 1852. He first gained attention by sharing the first prize for an operetta in a competition started by Offenbach. His operetta, Le Docteur miracle, was performed at the Bouffes Parisiens in 1857. After that, he consistently wrote for theaters but didn't produce anything noteworthy until Fleur de thé (1868), which ran for over a hundred nights. Les Cent vierges (1872) was also well-received, but all his previous successes were overshadowed by La Fille de Madame Angot (Paris, 1873; London, 1873), which was performed for 400 consecutive nights and has since gained and maintained immense popularity. After 1873, Lecocq created a large number of comic operas, though he never matched his early success with La Fille de Madame Angot. Some of his best works include Giroflé-Girofla (Paris and London, 1874); Les Prés Saint-Gervais (Paris and London, 1874); La Petite Mariée (Paris, 1875; London, 1876, revived as The Scarlet Feather, 1897); Le Petit Duc (Paris, 1878; London, as The Little Duke, 1878); La Petite Mademoiselle (Paris, 1879; London, 1880); Le Jour et la Nuit (Paris, 1881; London, as Manola, 1882); Le Cœur et la main (Paris, 1882; London, as Incognita, 1893); La Princesse des Canaries (Paris, 1883; London, as Pepita, 1888). In 1899, a ballet by Lecocq titled Le Cygne was staged at the Opéra Comique in Paris, and in 1903, Yetta was produced in Brussels.

LECOINTE-PUYRAVEAU, MICHEL MATHIEU (1764-1827), French politician, was born at Saint-Maixent (Deux-Sèvres) on the 13th of December 1764. Deputy for his department to the Legislative Assembly in 1792, and to the Convention in the same year, he voted for “the death of the tyrant.” His association with the Girondins nearly involved him in their fall, in spite of his vigorous republicanism. He took part in the revolution of Thermidor, but protested against the establishment of the Directory, and continually pressed for severer measures against the émigrés, and even their relations who had remained in France. He was secretary and then president of the Council of Five Hundred, and under the Consulate a member of the Tribunate. He took no part in public affairs under the Empire, but was lieutenant-general of police for south-east France during the Hundred Days. After Waterloo he took ship from Toulon, but the ship was driven back by a storm and he narrowly escaped massacre at Marseilles. After six weeks’ imprisonment in the Château d’If he returned to Paris, escaping, after the proscription of the regicides, to Brussels, where he died on the 15th of January 1827.

LECOINTE-PUYRAVEAU, MICHEL MATHIEU (1764-1827), French politician, was born in Saint-Maixent (Deux-Sèvres) on December 13, 1764. He was a deputy for his department in the Legislative Assembly in 1792 and also served in the Convention that same year, casting his vote for “the death of the tyrant.” His ties to the Girondins almost led to his downfall, despite his strong commitment to republicanism. He participated in the Thermidor revolution but opposed the creation of the Directory, consistently advocating for harsher actions against the émigrés and their relatives who stayed in France. He served as secretary and then president of the Council of Five Hundred and, during the Consulate, was a member of the Tribunate. He did not engage in public affairs during the Empire but was lieutenant-general of police for south-east France during the Hundred Days. After the Battle of Waterloo, he boarded a ship in Toulon, but it was forced back by a storm, and he narrowly avoided being killed in Marseilles. Following six weeks of imprisonment in the Château d’If, he returned to Paris, and after the proscription of the regicides, he fled to Brussels, where he died on January 15, 1827.

LE CONTE, JOSEPH (1823-1901), American geologist, of Huguenot descent, was born in Liberty county, Georgia, on the 26th of February 1823. He was educated at Franklin College, Georgia, where he graduated (1841); he afterwards studied medicine and received his degree at the New York College of Physicians and Surgeons in 1845. After practising for three or four years at Macon, Georgia, he entered Harvard, and studied natural history under L. Agassiz. An excursion made with Professors J. Hall and Agassiz to the Helderberg mountains of New York developed a keen interest in geology. After graduating at Harvard, Le Conte in 1851 accompanied Agassiz on an expedition to study the Florida reefs. On his return he became professor of natural science in Oglethorpe University, Georgia; and from 1852 to 1856 professor of natural history and geology in Franklin College. From 1857 to 1869 he was professor of chemistry and geology in South Carolina College, and he was then appointed professor of geology and natural history in the university of California, a post which he held until his death. He published a series of papers on monocular and binocular vision, and also on psychology. His chief contributions, however, related to geology, and in all he wrote he was lucid and philosophical. He described the fissure-eruptions in western America, discoursed on earth-crust movements and their causes and on the great features of the earth’s surface. As separate works he published Elements of Geology (1878, 5th ed. 1889); Religion and Science (1874); and Evolution: its History, its 356 Evidences, and its Relation to Religious Thought (1888). He was president of the American Association for the Advancement of Science in 1892, and of the Geological Society of America in 1896. He died in the Yosemite Valley, California, on the 6th of June 1901.

LE CONTE, JOSEPH (1823-1901), an American geologist of Huguenot descent, was born in Liberty County, Georgia, on February 26, 1823. He attended Franklin College in Georgia, where he graduated in 1841; he then studied medicine and earned his degree from the New York College of Physicians and Surgeons in 1845. After practicing for three to four years in Macon, Georgia, he enrolled at Harvard to study natural history under L. Agassiz. An excursion with Professors J. Hall and Agassiz to the Helderberg Mountains in New York sparked his strong interest in geology. After graduating from Harvard, Le Conte joined Agassiz on an expedition to study the Florida reefs in 1851. Upon returning, he became a professor of natural science at Oglethorpe University in Georgia, and from 1852 to 1856, he was a professor of natural history and geology at Franklin College. From 1857 to 1869, he served as a professor of chemistry and geology at South Carolina College, after which he was appointed professor of geology and natural history at the University of California, a position he held until his death. He published a series of papers on monocular and binocular vision, as well as topics in psychology. His main contributions were in geology, and his writing was clear and insightful. He described fissure eruptions in western America, discussed earth-crust movements and their causes, and analyzed the major features of the earth’s surface. His published works include Elements of Geology (1878, 5th ed. 1889); Religion and Science (1874); and Evolution: its History, its 356 Evidences, and its Relation to Religious Thought (1888). He served as president of the American Association for the Advancement of Science in 1892 and of the Geological Society of America in 1896. He passed away in Yosemite Valley, California, on June 6, 1901.

See Obituary by J. J. Stevenson, Annals of New York Acad. of Sciences, vol. xiv. (1902), p. 150.

See Obituary by J. J. Stevenson, Annals of New York Acad. of Sciences, vol. xiv. (1902), p. 150.

LECONTE DE LISLE, CHARLES MARIE RENÉ (1818-1894), French poet, was born in the island of Réunion on the 22nd of October 1818. His father, an army surgeon, who brought him up with great severity, sent him to travel in the East Indies with a view to preparing him for a commercial life. After this voyage he went to Rennes to complete his education, studying especially Greek, Italian and history. He returned once or twice to Réunion, but in 1846 settled definitely in Paris. His first volume, La Vénus de Milo, attracted to him a number of friends many of whom were passionately devoted to classical literature. In 1873 he was made assistant librarian at the Luxembourg; in 1886 he was elected to the Academy in succession to Victor Hugo. His Poèmes antiques appeared in 1852; Poèmes et poésies in 1854; Le Chemin de la croix in 1859; the Poèmes barbares, in their first form, in 1862; Les Erinnyes, a tragedy after the Greek model, in 1872; for which occasional music was provided by Jules Massenet; the Poèmes tragiques in 1884; L’Apollonide, another classical tragedy, in 1888; and two posthumous volumes, Derniers poèmes in 1899, and Premières poésies et lettres intimes in 1902. In addition to his original work in verse, he published a series of admirable prose translations of Theocritus, Homer, Hesiod, Aeschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, Horace. He died at Voisins, near Louveciennes (Seine-et-Oise), on the 18th of July 1894.

LECONTE DE LISLE, CHARLES MARIE RENÉ (1818-1894), French poet, was born on the island of Réunion on October 22, 1818. His father, an army surgeon who raised him harshly, sent him to travel in the East Indies to prepare him for a business career. After this trip, he went to Rennes to finish his education, focusing especially on Greek, Italian, and history. He returned to Réunion a couple of times but permanently settled in Paris in 1846. His first book, La Vénus de Milo, drew a number of friends to him, many of whom were deeply passionate about classical literature. In 1873, he was appointed assistant librarian at the Luxembourg; in 1886, he was elected to the Academy, succeeding Victor Hugo. His Poèmes antiques was published in 1852; Poèmes et poésies in 1854; Le Chemin de la croix in 1859; the initial version of Poèmes barbares in 1862; Les Erinnyes, a tragedy based on the Greek model, in 1872, which had occasional music by Jules Massenet; the Poèmes tragiques in 1884; L’Apollonide, another classical tragedy, in 1888; and two posthumous volumes, Derniers poèmes in 1899, and Premières poésies et lettres intimes in 1902. In addition to his original verse, he published a series of excellent prose translations of Theocritus, Homer, Hesiod, Aeschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, and Horace. He died in Voisins, near Louveciennes (Seine-et-Oise), on July 18, 1894.

In Leconte de Lisle the Parnassian movement seems to crystallize. His verse is clear, sonorous, dignified, deliberate in movement, classically correct in rhythm, full of exotic local colour, of savage names, of realistic rhetoric. It has its own kind of romance, in its “legend of the ages,” so different from Hugo’s, so much fuller of scholarship and the historic sense, yet with far less of human pity. Coldness cultivated as a kind of artistic distinction seems to turn all his poetry to marble, in spite of the fire at its heart. Most of Leconte de Lisle’s poems are little chill epics, in which legend is fossilized. They have the lofty monotony of a single conception of life and of the universe. He sees the world as what Byron called it, “a glorious blunder,” and desires only to stand a little apart from the throng, meditating scornfully. Hope, with him, becomes no more than this desperate certainty:—

In Leconte de Lisle, the Parnassian movement seems to come together. His poetry is clear, resonant, dignified, and methodical in its rhythm, with a classic correctness that's rich in exotic local detail, wild names, and realistic imagery. It offers its own kind of romance, with its “legend of the ages,” which is so different from Hugo’s—much more scholarly and historically aware, yet lacking in human compassion. The coldness he embraces as an artistic choice makes all his poetry feel like marble, despite the passion at its core. Most of Leconte de Lisle’s poems are like little chilly epics, where legends are frozen in time. They reflect a grand monotony of a singular view on life and the universe. He perceives the world as what Byron referred to as “a glorious blunder,” and wishes only to remain slightly apart from the crowd, looking on with disdain. For him, hope becomes nothing more than this desperate certainty:—

“Tu te tairas, ô voix sinistre des vivants!”

“Be quiet, oh sinister voice of the living!”

His only prayer is to Death, “divine Death,” that it may gather its children to its breast:—

His only prayer is to Death, “divine Death,” that it may gather its children to its embrace:—

“Affranchis-nous du temps, du nombre et de l’espace,

“Free us from time, number, and space,

Et rends-nous le repos que la vie a troublé!”

Et rends-nous le repos que la vie a troublé!”

The interval which is his he accepts with something of the defiance of his own Cain, refusing to fill it with the triviality of happiness, waiting even upon beauty with a certain inflexible austerity. He listens and watches, throughout the world, for echoes and glimpses of great tragic passions, languid with fire in the East, a tumultuous conflagration in the middle ages, a sombre darkness in the heroic ages of the North. The burning emptiness of the desert attracts him, the inexplicable melancholy of the dogs that bark at the moon; he would interpret the jaguar’s dreams, the sleep of the condor. He sees nature with the same wrathful impatience as man, praising it for its destructive energies, its haste to crush out human life before the stars fall into chaos, and the world with them, as one of the least of stars. He sings the “Dies Irae” exultingly; only seeming to desire an end of God as well as of man, universal nothingness. He conceives that he does well to be angry, and this anger is indeed the personal note of his pessimism; but it leaves him somewhat apart from the philosophical poets, too fierce for wisdom and not rapturous enough for poetry.

The time he has, he takes on with a bit of defiance, like his own version of Cain, refusing to fill it with the triviality of happiness and waiting for beauty with a rigid seriousness. He listens and keeps watch across the world for echoes and glimpses of intense tragic passions—languid with fire in the East, a roaring blaze in the Middle Ages, and a dark gloom during the heroic ages of the North. The empty vastness of the desert draws him in, the inexplicable sadness of the dogs howling at the moon captivates him; he wants to interpret the jaguar's dreams and the sleep of the condor. He views nature with the same furious impatience as humanity, admiring its destructive powers, its rush to wipe out human life before the stars collapse into chaos, and the universe along with them, as just one of the smallest stars. He sings the "Dies Irae" with enthusiasm; it seems he wants an end to God just as much as to mankind, a universal nothingness. He believes it’s right to feel angry, and this anger truly defines his pessimism; but it keeps him somewhat distant from the philosophical poets, too intense for wisdom and not ecstatic enough for poetry.

(A. Sy.)

See J. Dornis, Leconte de Lisle intime (1895); F. Calmette, Un Demi siècle littéraire, Leconte de Lisle et ses amis (1902); Paul Bourget, Nouveaux essais de psychologie contemporaine (1885); F. Brunetière, L’Évolution de la poésie lyrique en France au XIXe siècle (1894); Maurice Spronck, Les Artistes littéraires (1889); J. Lemaître, Les Contemporains (2nd series, 1886); F. Brunetière, Nouveaux essais sur la litt. contemp. (1895).

See J. Dornis, Leconte de Lisle intime (1895); F. Calmette, Un Demi siècle littéraire, Leconte de Lisle et ses amis (1902); Paul Bourget, Nouveaux essais de psychologie contemporaine (1885); F. Brunetière, L’Évolution de la poésie lyrique en France au XIXe siècle (1894); Maurice Spronck, Les Artistes littéraires (1889); J. Lemaître, Les Contemporains (2nd series, 1886); F. Brunetière, Nouveaux essais sur la litt. contemp. (1895).

LE COQ, ROBERT (d. 1373), French bishop, was born at Montdidier, although he belonged to a bourgeois family of Orléans, where he first attended school before coming to Paris. In Paris he became advocate to the parlement (1347); then King John appointed him master of requests, and in 1351, a year during which he received many other honours, he became bishop of Laon. At the opening of 1354 he was sent with the cardinal of Boulogne, Pierre I., duke of Bourbon, and Jean VI., count of Vendome, to Mantes to treat with Charles the Bad, king of Navarre, who had caused the constable, Charles of Spain, to be assassinated, and from this time dates his connexion with this king. At the meeting of the estates which opened in Paris in October 1356 Le Coq played a leading rôle and was one of the most outspoken of the orators, especially when petitions were presented to the dauphin Charles, denouncing the bad government of the realm and demanding the banishment of the royal councillors. Soon, however, the credit of the estates having gone down, he withdrew to his diocese, but at the request of the bourgeois of Paris he speedily returned. The king of Navarre had succeeded in escaping from prison and had entered Paris, where his party was in the ascendant; and Robert le Coq became the most powerful person in his council. No one dared to contradict him, and he brought into it whom he pleased. He did not scruple to reveal to the king of Navarre secret deliberations, but his fortune soon turned. He ran great danger at the estates of Compiègne in May 1358, where his dismissal was demanded, and he had to flee to St Denis, where Charles the Bad and Étienne Marcel came to find him. After the death of Marcel, he tried, unsuccessfully, to deliver Laon, his episcopal town, to the king of Navarre, and he was excluded from the amnesty promised in the treaty of Calais (1360) by King John to the partisans of Charles the Bad. His temporalities had been seized, and he was obliged to flee from France. In 1363, thanks to the support of the king of Navarre, he was given the bishopric of Calahorra in the kingdom of Aragon, which he administered until his death in 1373.

LE COQ, ROBERT (d. 1373), a French bishop, was born in Montdidier but came from a middle-class family in Orléans, where he first went to school before moving to Paris. In Paris, he became an advocate to the parliament in 1347; then King John appointed him as master of requests, and in 1351, during a year when he received many other honors, he became the bishop of Laon. At the start of 1354, he was sent with Cardinal of Boulogne, Pierre I., Duke of Bourbon, and Jean VI., Count of Vendome, to Mantes to negotiate with Charles the Bad, King of Navarre, who had orchestrated the assassination of Constable Charles of Spain. This marked the beginning of his association with the king. During the meeting of the estates that began in Paris in October 1356, Le Coq played a major role and was one of the most vocal orators, especially when petitions were presented to Dauphin Charles, denouncing the mismanagement of the kingdom and calling for the banishment of the royal advisors. However, as the support for the estates dwindled, he returned to his diocese, but at the request of the bourgeoisie of Paris, he quickly came back. The King of Navarre had managed to escape from prison and entered Paris, where his faction was gaining power; Robert Le Coq became the most influential person in his council. No one dared to oppose him, and he appointed whoever he wanted. He wasn't shy about sharing secret discussions with the King of Navarre, but his luck soon changed. He faced significant danger at the estates of Compiègne in May 1358, where his removal was demanded, and he had to flee to St Denis, where Charles the Bad and Étienne Marcel sought him out. After Marcel's death, he attempted, unsuccessfully, to hand over Laon, his bishopric, to the King of Navarre, and he was excluded from the amnesty that King John promised to the supporters of Charles the Bad in the Treaty of Calais (1360). His properties were confiscated, and he was forced to flee France. In 1363, with the help of the King of Navarre, he was appointed bishop of Calahorra in the Kingdom of Aragon, where he served until his death in 1373.

See L. C. Douët d’Arcq, “Acte d’accusation contre Robert le Coq, évêque de Laon” in Bibliothèque de l’Ecole des Chartes, 1st series, t. ii., pp. 350-387; and R. Delachenal, “La Bibliothèque d’un avocat du XIVe siècle, inventaire estimatif des livres de Robert le Coq,” in Nouvelle revue historique de droit français et étranger (1887), pp. 524-537.

See L. C. Douët d’Arcq, “Indictment Against Robert le Coq, Bishop of Laon” in Library of the School of Charters, 1st series, vol. ii., pp. 350-387; and R. Delachenal, “The Library of a 14th Century Lawyer: Estimated Inventory of the Books of Robert le Coq,” in New Historical Review of French and Foreign Law (1887), pp. 524-537.

LECOUVREUR, ADRIENNE (1692-1730), French actress, was born on the 5th of April 1692, at Damery, Marne, the daughter of a hatter, Robert Couvreur. She had an unhappy childhood in Paris. She showed a natural talent for declamation and was instructed by La Grand, sociétaire of the Comédie Française, and with his help she obtained a provincial engagement. It was not until 1717, after a long apprenticeship, that she made her Paris début as Electre, in Crébillon’s tragedy of that name, and Angélique in Molière’s George Dandin. Her success was so great that she was immediately received into the Comédie Française, and for thirteen years she was the queen of tragedy there, attaining a popularity never before accorded an actress. She is said to have played no fewer than 1184 times in a hundred rôles, of which she created twenty-two. She owed her success largely to her courage in abandoning the stilted style of elocution of her predecessors for a naturalness of delivery and a touching simplicity of pathos that delighted and moved her public. In Baron, who returned to the stage at the age of sixty-seven, she had an able and powerful coadjutor in changing the stage traditions of generations. The jealousy she aroused was partly due to her social successes, which were many, in spite of the notorious freedom of her manner of life. She was on visiting and dining terms with half the court, and her salon was frequented by Voltaire and all the other notables and men of letters. She was the mistress of Maurice de Saxe from 1721, and sold her plate and jewels to supply him with funds for his ill-starred adventures as duke of Courland. By him she had a daughter, her third, who was grandmother of 357 the father of George Sand. Adrienne Lecouvreur died on the 20th of March 1730. She was denied the last rites of the Church, and her remains were refused burial in consecrated ground. Voltaire, in a fine poem on her death, expressed his indignation at the barbarous treatment accorded to the woman whose “friend, admirer, lover” he was.

LECOUVREUR, ADRIENNE (1692-1730), French actress, was born on April 5, 1692, in Damery, Marne, the daughter of a hat maker, Robert Couvreur. She had a tough childhood in Paris. She displayed a natural talent for speaking and was trained by La Grand, a member of the Comédie Française, who helped her secure a job in a provincial theater. It wasn't until 1717, after a long period of learning, that she made her Paris debut as Electre in Crébillon’s tragedy of the same name, and as Angélique in Molière’s George Dandin. Her success was so remarkable that she was immediately welcomed into the Comédie Française, and for thirteen years, she ruled as the queen of tragedy there, gaining a level of fame never before given to an actress. She reportedly performed no fewer than 1,184 times in one hundred roles, creating twenty-two of them. Her success was largely because she bravely moved away from the stiff elocution style of her predecessors, opting for a more natural delivery and a heartfelt simplicity that resonated with her audience. She had a strong ally in Baron, who returned to the stage at sixty-seven, as they both worked to change the longstanding stage traditions. The jealousy she sparked was partly due to her numerous social successes, despite her notoriously free lifestyle. She was on friendly visiting and dining terms with half the court, and her salon was popular among Voltaire and other prominent figures and intellectuals. She was the lover of Maurice de Saxe from 1721 and sold her silverware and jewelry to fund his ill-fated ventures as the Duke of Courland. Together, they had a daughter, her third, who became the grandmother of the father of George Sand. Adrienne Lecouvreur passed away on March 20, 1730. She was denied the last rites of the Church, and her body was not allowed to be buried in consecrated ground. Voltaire, in a poignant poem about her death, voiced his outrage at the cruel treatment given to the woman who was his “friend, admirer, lover.”

Her life formed the subject of the well-known tragedy (1849), by Eugène Scribe and Ernest Legouvé.

Her life was the focus of the famous play (1849) by Eugène Scribe and Ernest Legouvé.

LE CREUSOT, a town of east-central France in the department of Saône-et-Loire, 55 m. S.W. of Dijon on the Paris-Lyon railway. Pop. (1906), town, 22,535; commune, 33,437. Situated at the foot of lofty hills in a district rich in coal and iron, it has the most extensive iron works in France. The coal bed of Le Creusot was discovered in the 13th century; but it was not till 1774 that the first workshops were founded there. The royal crystal works were transferred from Sèvres to Le Creusot in 1787, but this industry came to an end in 1831. Meanwhile two or three enterprises for the manufacture of metal had ended in failure, and it was only in 1836 that the foundation of iron works by Adolphe and Eugène Schneider definitely inaugurated the industrial prosperity of the place. The works supplied large quantities of war material to the French armies during the Crimean and Franco-German wars. Since that time they have continuously enlarged the scope of their operations, which now embrace the manufacture of steel, armour-plate, guns, ordnance-stores, locomotives, electrical machinery and engineering material of every description. A network of railways about 37 m. in length connects the various branches of the works with each other and with the neighbouring Canal du Centre. Special attention is paid to the welfare of the workers who, not including the miners, number about 12,000, and good schools have been established. In 1897 the ordnance-manufacture of the Société des Forges et Chantiers de la Méditerranée at Havre was acquired by the Company, which also has important branches at Chalon-sur-Saône, where ship-building and bridge-construction is carried on, and at Cette (Hérault).

LE CREUSOT, is a town in east-central France within the Saône-et-Loire department, located 55 miles southwest of Dijon on the Paris-Lyon railway. As of 1906, its population was 22,535 in the town and 33,437 in the commune. Nestled at the base of tall hills in a region rich in coal and iron, Le Creusot is home to the largest ironworks in France. The coal deposits were found in the 13th century, but the first workshops opened there in 1774. The royal crystal works moved from Sèvres to Le Creusot in 1787, but this industry ceased in 1831. Meanwhile, a few attempts to manufacture metal failed, and it wasn't until 1836 that Adolphe and Eugène Schneider established ironworks, marking the beginning of the town's industrial success. The works produced large amounts of military supplies for the French armies during the Crimean and Franco-German wars. Since then, they have continuously expanded, now including the production of steel, armor plate, guns, ordnance stores, locomotives, electrical machinery, and all kinds of engineering materials. A railway network about 37 miles long connects the various branches of the works to each other and to the nearby Canal du Centre. The well-being of the workers, numbering around 12,000 excluding miners, is given special attention, and good schools have been set up. In 1897, the ordnance manufacturing operation of the Société des Forges et Chantiers de la Méditerranée in Havre was acquired by the company, which also has significant branches in Chalon-sur-Saône, where shipbuilding and bridge construction take place, and in Cette (Hérault).

LECTERN (through O. Fr. leitrun, from Late Lat. lectrum, or lectrinum, legere, to read; the French equivalent is lutrin; Ital. leggio; Ger. Lesepult), in the furniture of certain Christian churches, a reading-desk, used more especially for the reading of the lessons and in the Anglican Church practically confined to that purpose. In the early Christian Church this was done from the ambo (q.v.), but in the 15th century, when the books were often of great size, it became necessary to provide a lectern to hold them. These were either in wood or metal, and many fine examples still exist; one at Detling in wood, in which there are shelves on all four sides to hold books, is perhaps the most elaborate. Brass lecterns, as in the colleges of Oxford and Cambridge, are common; in the usual type the book is supported on the outspread wings of an eagle or pelican, which is raised on a moulded stem, carried on three projecting ledges or feet with lions on them. In the example in Norwich cathedral, the pelican supporting the book stands on a rock enclosed with a rich cresting of Gothic tabernacle work; the central stem or pillar, on which this rests, is supported by miniature projecting buttresses, standing on a moulded base with lions on it.

LECTERN (from Old French leitrun, derived from Late Latin lectrum or lectrinum, from legere, meaning to read; the French equivalent is lutrin; Italian leggio; German Lesepult), in the furniture of certain Christian churches, refers to a reading desk, especially used for reading lessons and mainly found in the Anglican Church for that purpose. In the early Christian Church, readings were done from the ambo (q.v.), but by the 15th century, as books had grown quite large, it became necessary to create a lectern to support them. These lecterns were typically made of wood or metal, and many beautiful examples remain today; one at Detling made of wood, which features shelves on all four sides for holding books, is arguably the most elaborate. Brass lecterns, like those in the colleges of Oxford and Cambridge, are common; the typical design features a book supported on the outspread wings of an eagle or pelican, which stands on a molded post, resting on three projecting ledges or feet that have lions on them. In the example found in Norwich Cathedral, the pelican supporting the book stands on a rock surrounded by intricate Gothic tabernacle work; the central post or pillar that holds this is supported by tiny projecting buttresses, standing on a molded base with lions on it.

LECTION, LECTIONARY. The custom of reading the books of Moses in the synagogues on the Sabbath day was a very ancient one in the Jewish Church. The addition of lections (i.e. readings) from the prophetic books had been made afterwards and was in existence in our Lord’s time, as may be gathered from such passages as St Luke iv. 16-20, xvi. 29. This element in synagogue worship was taken over with others into the Christian divine service, additions being made to it from the writings of the apostles and evangelists. We find traces of such additions within the New Testament itself in such directions as are contained in Col. iv. 16; 1 Thess. v. 27.

LECTION, LECTIONARY. The tradition of reading the books of Moses in synagogues on the Sabbath has been around for a very long time in the Jewish Church. Later on, lections (i.e., readings) from the prophetic books were added, and this practice was already in place during our Lord’s time, as indicated by passages like St. Luke iv. 16-20 and xvi. 29. This aspect of synagogue worship was incorporated into Christian services, with further additions from the writings of the apostles and evangelists. We can see evidence of such additions within the New Testament in verses like Col. iv. 16 and 1 Thess. v. 27.

From the 2nd century onwards references multiply, though the earlier references do not prove the existence of a fixed lectionary or order of lessons, but rather point the other way. Justin Martyr, describing divine worship in the middle of the 2nd century says: “On the day called Sunday all who live in cities or in the country gather together to one place, and the memoirs of the Apostles, or the writings of the Prophets are read as long as time permits” (Apol. i. cap. 67). Tertullian about half a century later makes frequent reference to the reading of Holy Scripture in public worship (Apol. 39; De praescript. 36; De amina, 9).

From the 2nd century onward, references become more common, although earlier references do not confirm the existence of a fixed lectionary or set order of lessons; in fact, they suggest the opposite. Justin Martyr, describing worship in the middle of the 2nd century, states: “On the day called Sunday, everyone who lives in cities or in the countryside gathers in one place, and the memoirs of the Apostles or the writings of the Prophets are read for as long as time allows” (Apol. i. cap. 67). About fifty years later, Tertullian frequently mentions the reading of Holy Scripture in public worship (Apol. 39; De praescript. 36; De amina, 9).

In the canons of Hippolytus in the first half of the 3rd century we find this direction: “Let presbyters, subdeacons and readers, and all the people assemble daily in the church at time of cock-crow, and betake themselves to prayers, to psalms and to the reading of the Scriptures, according to the command of the Apostles, until I come attend to reading” (canon xxi.).

In the canons of Hippolytus from the early 3rd century, we find this instruction: “Let presbyters, subdeacons, readers, and all the people gather daily in the church at dawn, and engage in prayers, psalms, and reading the Scriptures, as instructed by the Apostles, until I arrive to oversee the reading” (canon xxi.).

But there are traces of fixed lessons coming into existence in the course of this century; Origen refers to the book of Job being read in Holy Week (Commentaries on Job, lib. i.). Allusions of a similar kind in the 4th century are frequent. John Cassian (c. 380) tells us that throughout Egypt the Psalms were divided into groups of twelve, and that after each group there followed two lessons, one from the Old, one from the New Testament (De caenob. inst. ii. 4), implying but not absolutely stating that there was a fixed order of such lessons just as there was of the Psalms. St Basil the Great mentions fixed lessons on certain occasions taken from Isaiah, Proverbs, St Matthew and Acts (Hom. xiii. De bapt.). From Chrysostom (Hom. lxiii in Act. &c.), and Augustine (Tract. vi. in Joann. &c.) we learn that Genesis was read in Lent, Job and Jonah in Passion Week, the Acts of the Apostles in Eastertide, lessons on the Passion on Good Friday and on the Resurrection on Easter Day. In the Apostolical Constitutions (ii. 57) the following service is described and enjoined. First come two lessons from the Old Testament by a reader, the whole of the Old Testament being made use of except the books of the Apocrypha. The Psalms of David are then to be sung. Next the Acts of the Apostles and the Epistles of Paul are to be read, and finally the four Gospels by a deacon or a priest. Whether the selections were ad libitum or according to a fixed table of lessons we are not informed. Nothing in the shape of a lectionary is extant older than the 8th century, though there is evidence that Claudianus Mamercus made one for the church at Vienne in 450, and that Musaeus made one for the church at Marseilles c. 458. The Liber comitis formerly attributed to St Jerome must be three, or nearly three, centuries later than that saint, and the Luxeuil lectionary, or Lectionarium Gallicanum, which Mabillon attributed to the 7th, cannot be earlier than the 8th century; yet the oldest MSS. of the Gospels have marginal marks, and sometimes actual interpolations, which can only be accounted for as indicating the beginnings and endings of liturgical lessons. The third council of Carthage in 397 forbade anything but Holy Scripture to be read in church; this rule has been adhered to so far as the liturgical epistle and gospel, and occasional additional lessons in the Roman missal are concerned, but in the divine office, on feasts when nine lessons are read at matins, only the first three lessons are taken from Holy Scripture, the next three being taken from the sermons of ecclesiastical writers, and the last three from expositions of the day’s gospel; but sometimes the lives or Passions of the saints, or of some particular saints, were substituted for any or all of these breviary lessons.

But there are signs that fixed lessons began to emerge in this century; Origen mentions the book of Job being read during Holy Week (Commentaries on Job, lib. i.). Similar references from the 4th century are common. John Cassian (c. 380) tells us that in Egypt, the Psalms were divided into groups of twelve, and after each group, there were two lessons—one from the Old Testament and one from the New Testament (De caenob. inst. ii. 4). This suggests, but does not definitively state, that there was a set order of lessons similar to that of the Psalms. St. Basil the Great notes fixed lessons on certain occasions taken from Isaiah, Proverbs, St. Matthew, and Acts (Hom. xiii. De bapt.). From Chrysostom (Hom. lxiii in Act. &c.) and Augustine (Tract. vi. in Joann. &c.), we learn that Genesis was read during Lent, Job and Jonah during Passion Week, the Acts of the Apostles during Eastertide, lessons on the Passion on Good Friday, and on the Resurrection on Easter Sunday. In the Apostolical Constitutions (ii. 57), a specific service is described and mandated. First, two lessons from the Old Testament should be read, using the whole Old Testament except for the Apocrypha. Then, the Psalms of David are to be sung. Next, the Acts of the Apostles and the letters of Paul should be read, and finally, the four Gospels by a deacon or priest. It’s unclear whether these selections were chosen freely or followed a fixed list. No lectionary older than the 8th century has survived, though there is evidence that Claudianus Mamercus created one for the church in Vienne in 450, and that Musaeus made one for the church in Marseilles c. 458. The Liber comitis, once attributed to St. Jerome, must be from three or nearly three centuries later, and the Luxeuil lectionary, or Lectionarium Gallicanum, which Mabillon dated to the 7th century, cannot be earlier than the 8th century; however, the oldest manuscripts of the Gospels have marginal marks and sometimes actual additions that can only indicate the beginnings and endings of liturgical lessons. The third council of Carthage in 397 prohibited anything but Holy Scripture from being read in church; this rule has been followed regarding the liturgical epistle and gospel, and occasional extra lessons in the Roman missal, but in the divine office on feasts when nine lessons are read at matins, only the first three lessons come from Holy Scripture, while the next three are from the sermons of church writers, and the last three are from explanations of the day’s gospel. Sometimes, the lives or Passions of saints, or certain saints, were used instead of any or all of these breviary lessons.

(F. E. W.)

LECTISTERNIUM (from Lat. lectum sternere, “to spread a couch”; στρωμναί in Dion. Halic. xii. 9), in ancient Rome, a propitiatory ceremony, consisting of a meal offered to gods and goddesses, represented by their busts or statues, or by portable figures of wood, with heads of bronze, wax or marble, and covered with drapery. Another suggestion is that the symbols of the gods consisted of bundles of sacred herbs, tied together in the form of a head, covered by a waxen mask so as to resemble a kind of bust (cf. the straw puppets called Argei). These symbols were laid upon a couch (lectus), the left arm resting on a cushion (pulvinus, whence the couch itself was often called pulvinar) in the attitude of reclining. In front of the couch, which was placed in the open street, a meal was set out on a table. It is definitely stated by Livy (v. 13) that the ceremony took place “for the first time” in Rome in the year 358 399 B.C., after the Sibylline books had been consulted by their keepers and interpreters (duumviri sacris faciendis), on the occasion of a pestilence. Three couches were prepared for three pairs of gods—Apollo and Latona, Hercules and Diana, Mercury and Neptune. The feast, which on that occasion lasted for eight (or seven) days, was also celebrated by private individuals; the citizens kept open house, quarrels were forgotten, debtors and prisoners were released, and everything done to banish sorrow. Similar honours were paid to other divinities in subsequent times—Fortuna, Saturnus, Juno Regina of the Aventine, the three Capitoline deities (Jupiter, Juno, Minerva), and in 217, after the defeat of lake Trasimenus, a lectisternium was held for three days to six pairs of gods, corresponding to the twelve great gods of Olympus—Jupiter, Juno, Neptune, Minerva, Mars, Venus, Apollo, Diana, Vulcan, Vesta, Mercury, Ceres. In 205, alarmed by unfavourable prodigies, the Romans were ordered to fetch the Great Mother of the gods from Pessinus in Phrygia; in the following year the image was brought to Rome, and a lectisternium held. In later times, the lectisternium became of constant (even daily) occurrence, and was celebrated in the different temples. Such celebrations must be distinguished from those which were ordered, like the earlier lectisternia, by the Sibylline books in special emergencies. Although undoubtedly offerings of food were made to the gods in very early Roman times on such occasions as the ceremony of confarreatio, and the epulum Jovis (often confounded with the lectisternium), it is generally agreed that the lectisternia were of Greek origin. In favour of this may be mentioned: the similarity of the Greek Θεοξένια, in which, however, the gods played the part of hosts; the gods associated with it were either previously unknown to Roman religion, though often concealed under Roman names, or were provided with a new cult (thus Hercules was not worshipped as at the Ara Maxima, where, according to Servius on Aeneid, viii. 176 and Cornelius Balbus, ap. Macrobius, Sat. iii. 6, a lectisternium was forbidden); the Sibylline books, which decided whether a lectisternium was to be held or not, were of Greek origin; the custom of reclining at meals was Greek. Some, however, assign an Etruscan origin to the ceremony, the Sibylline books themselves being looked upon as old Italian “black books.” A probable explanation of the confusion between the lectisternia and genuine old Italian ceremonies is that, as the lectisternia became an almost everyday occurrence in Rome, people forgot their foreign origin and the circumstances in which they were first introduced, and then the word pulvinar with its associations was transferred to times in which it had no existence. In imperial times, according to Tacitus (Annals, xv. 44), chairs were substituted for couches in the case of goddesses, and the lectisternium in their case became a sellisternium (the reading, however, is not certain). This was in accordance with Roman custom, since in the earliest times all the members of a family sat at meals, and in later times at least the women and children. This is a point of distinction between the original practice at the lectisternium and the epulum Jovis, the goddesses at the latter being provided with chairs, whereas in the lectisternium they reclined. In Christian times the word was used for a feast in memory of the dead (Sidonius Apollinaris, Epistulae, iv. 15).

LECTISTERNIUM (from Lat. lectum sternere, “to spread a couch”; στρωμναί in Dion. Halic. xii. 9), in ancient Rome, was a ritual ceremony where a meal was offered to gods and goddesses represented by their busts or statues, or by portable figures made of wood with heads of bronze, wax, or marble, all covered with drapery. Another theory suggests that the symbols of the gods were bundles of sacred herbs tied together in the shape of a head, covered with a wax mask to resemble a bust (cf. the straw puppets called Argei). These symbols were placed on a couch (lectus), with the left arm resting on a cushion (pulvinus, which is why the couch itself was often called pulvinar) in a reclining position. In front of the couch, positioned in the open street, a meal was set on a table. Livy (v. 13) clearly states that the ceremony took place “for the first time” in Rome in the year 358 399 BCE, after the Sibylline books had been consulted by their keepers and interpreters (duumviri sacris faciendis) due to a plague. Three couches were set up for three pairs of gods—Apollo and Latona, Hercules and Diana, Mercury and Neptune. The feast on that occasion lasted for eight (or seven) days and was also celebrated by private individuals; citizens hosted open houses, old grievances were put aside, debtors and prisoners were freed, and everything was done to eliminate sorrow. Similar honors were later paid to other deities such as Fortuna, Saturnus, and Juno Regina of the Aventine, the three Capitoline gods (Jupiter, Juno, Minerva), and in 217, after the defeat at Lake Trasimene, a lectisternium was held for three days for six pairs of gods, corresponding to the twelve great gods of Olympus—Jupiter, Juno, Neptune, Minerva, Mars, Venus, Apollo, Diana, Vulcan, Vesta, Mercury, Ceres. In 205, troubled by unfavorable portents, the Romans were instructed to bring the Great Mother of the gods from Pessinus in Phrygia; the following year, the image was brought to Rome, and a lectisternium was held. In later years, the lectisternium became a regular (even daily) occurrence, celebrated in various temples. Such celebrations should be distinguished from those ordered, like the earlier lectisternia, by the Sibylline books in special emergencies. Although it’s clear that food offerings were made to the gods in very early Roman times during ceremonies like confarreatio and epulum Jovis (often confused with the lectisternium), it is generally accepted that the lectisternia originated from Greek traditions. Supporting this argument is the similarity to the Greek Theoxenia, where the gods acted as hosts; the gods involved were often previously unknown to Roman religion, even though sometimes disguised under Roman names, or they received a new form of worship (for example, Hercules was not honored like at the Ara Maxima, where, as noted by Servius on Aeneid, viii. 176 and Cornelius Balbus, ap. Macrobius, Sat. iii. 6, a lectisternium was forbidden); the Sibylline books, which determined whether a lectisternium should happen, were of Greek origin; and the practice of reclining during meals was Greek as well. Some contend that the ceremony has an Etruscan origin, with the Sibylline books considered old Italian “black books.” A probable reason for the confusion between the lectisternia and genuine old Italian ceremonies is that as lectisternia became commonplace in Rome, people forgot their foreign origins and the circumstances surrounding their initial introduction, leading to the term pulvinar being associated with times it initially did not represent. In imperial times, as noted by Tacitus (Annals, xv. 44), chairs were replaced with couches for goddesses, changing the lectisternium for them into a sellisternium (although this reading is uncertain). This aligned with Roman customs, as in earlier times, all family members sat together during meals, and later at least the women and children did. This distinction separates the original practice at the lectisternium from the epulum Jovis, where the goddesses were given chairs, while in the lectisternium they reclined. In Christian times, the term was used for a feast commemorating the dead (Sidonius Apollinaris, Epistulae, iv. 15).

See article by A. Bouché-Leclercq in Daremberg and Saglio, Dictionnaire des antiquités; Marquardt, Römische Staatsverwaltung, iii. 45, 187 (1885); G. Wissowa, Religion und Kultus der Römer, p. 355 seq.; monograph by Wackermann (Hanau, 1888); C. Pascal, Studii di antichità e mitologia (1896).

See the article by A. Bouché-Leclercq in Daremberg and Saglio, Dictionnaire des antiquités; Marquardt, Römische Staatsverwaltung, iii. 45, 187 (1885); G. Wissowa, Religion und Kultus der Römer, p. 355 seq.; monograph by Wackermann (Hanau, 1888); C. Pascal, Studii di antichità e mitologia (1896).

LECTOR, or Reader, a minor office-bearer in the Christian Church. From an early period men have been set apart, under the title of anagnostae, lectores, or readers, for the purpose of reading Holy Scripture in church. We do not know what the custom of the Church was in the first two centuries, the earliest reference to readers, as an order, occurring in the writings of Tertullian (De praescript. haeret. cap. 41); there are frequent allusions to them in the writings of St Cyprian and afterwards. Cornelius, bishop of Rome in A.D. 251-252, in a well-known letter mentions readers among the various church orders then existing at Rome. In the Apostolic Church Order (canon 19), mention is made of the qualifications and duties of a reader, but no reference is made to their method of ordination. In the Apostolic Didascalia there is recognition of three minor orders of men, subdeacons, readers and singers, in addition to two orders of women, deaconesses and widows. A century later, in the Apostolic Constitutions, we find not only a recognition of readers, but also a form of admission provided for them, consisting of the imposition of hands and prayer (lib. viii. cap. 22). In Africa the imposition of hands was not in use, but a Bible was handed to the newly appointed reader with words of commission to read it, followed by a prayer and a benediction (Fourth Council of Carthage, can. 8). This is the ritual of the Roman Church of to-day. With regard to age, the novels of Justinian (No. 123) forbade any one to be admitted to the office of reader under the age of eighteen.

LECTOR, or Reader, a minor official in the Christian Church. From early on, individuals have been designated, under the title of anagnostae, lectores, or readers, to read Holy Scripture in church. We don't know what the Church's practice was in the first two centuries; the earliest mention of readers as an order appears in the writings of Tertullian (De praescript. haeret. cap. 41); there are frequent references to them in the writings of St. Cyprian and later. Cornelius, bishop of Rome from CE 251-252, in a well-known letter, includes readers among the various church orders that existed in Rome at that time. In the Apostolic Church Order (canon 19), the qualifications and duties of a reader are mentioned, but there is no reference to how they were ordained. The Apostolic Didascalia acknowledges three minor orders of men: subdeacons, readers, and singers, alongside two orders of women: deaconesses and widows. A century later, in the Apostolic Constitutions, we see not only a recognition of readers but also a formal admission process for them, which included the laying on of hands and prayer (lib. viii. cap. 22). In Africa, the laying on of hands was not practiced; instead, a Bible was given to the newly appointed reader with words of commissioning to read it, followed by a prayer and a blessing (Fourth Council of Carthage, can. 8). This is the ritual used by the Roman Church today. Regarding age, the novels of Justinian (No. 123) prohibited anyone under the age of eighteen from being admitted to the office of reader.

(F. E. W.)

LECTOURE, a town of south-western France, capital of an arrondissement in the department of Gers, 21 m. N. of Auch on the Southern railway between that city and Agen. Pop. (1906), town, 2426; commune, 4310. It stands on the right bank of the Gers, overlooking the river from the summit of a steep plateau. The church of St Gervais and St Protais was once a cathedral. The massive tower which flanks it on the north belongs to the 15th century; the rest of the church dates from the 13th, 15th, 16th and 17th centuries. The hôtel de ville, the sous-préfecture and the museum occupy the palace of the former bishops, which was once the property of Marshal Jean Lannes, a native of the town. A recess in the wall of an old house contains the Fontaine de Houndélie, a spring sheltered by a double archway of the 13th century. At the bottom of the hill a church of the 16th century marks the site of the monastery of St Gény. Lectoure has a tribunal of first instance and a communal college. Its industries include distilling, the manufacture of wooden shoes and biscuits, and market gardening; it has trade in grain, cattle, wine and brandy.

LECTOURE, is a town in southwestern France, serving as the capital of an arrondissement in the Gers department, located 21 miles north of Auch on the Southern railway line between that city and Agen. As of 1906, the town's population was 2,426, and the commune had 4,310 residents. It sits on the right bank of the Gers River, perched on a steep plateau. The church of St Gervais and St Protais was formerly a cathedral. The large tower on its north side is from the 15th century, while the rest of the church was built in the 13th, 15th, 16th, and 17th centuries. The town hall, the sub-prefecture, and the museum are housed in the former bishop's palace, which once belonged to Marshal Jean Lannes, a local native. A nook in the wall of an old building features the Fontaine de Houndélie, a spring protected by a double archway from the 13th century. At the bottom of the hill, a 16th-century church marks the location of the monastery of St Gény. Lectoure has a first-instance court and a communal college. Its industries include distilling, making wooden shoes and biscuits, and market gardening, and it trades in grain, cattle, wine, and brandy.

Lectoure, capital of the Iberian tribe of the Lactorates and for a short time of Novempopulania, became the seat of a bishopric in the 4th century. In the 11th century the counts of Lomagne made it their capital, and on the union of Lomagne with Armagnac, in 1325, it became the capital of the counts of Armagnac. In 1473 Cardinal Jean de Jouffroy besieged the town on behalf of Louis XI. and after its fall put the whole population to the sword. In 1562 it again suffered severely at the hands of the Catholics under Blaise de Montluc.

Lectoure, the capital of the Iberian tribe of the Lactorates and briefly of Novempopulania, became the seat of a bishopric in the 4th century. In the 11th century, the counts of Lomagne made it their capital, and when Lomagne united with Armagnac in 1325, it became the capital of the counts of Armagnac. In 1473, Cardinal Jean de Jouffroy besieged the town for Louis XI, and after its fall, he executed the entire population. In 1562, it suffered greatly again at the hands of the Catholics led by Blaise de Montluc.

LEDA, in Greek mythology, daughter of Thestius, king of Aetolia, and Eurythemis (her parentage is variously given). She was the wife of Tyndareus and mother of Castor and Pollux, Clytaemnestra and Helen (see Castor and Pollux). In another account Nemesis was the mother of Helen (q.v.) whom Leda adopted as her daughter. This led to the identification of Leda and Nemesis. In the usual later form of the story, Leda herself, having been visited by Zeus in the form of a swan, produced two eggs, from one of which came Helen, from the other Castor and Pollux.

LEDA, in Greek mythology, is the daughter of Thestius, king of Aetolia, and Eurythemis (her parentage is sometimes mentioned differently). She was married to Tyndareus and is the mother of Castor and Pollux, Clytaemnestra, and Helen (see Castor and Pollux). In another version, Nemesis is considered the mother of Helen (q.v.), whom Leda took in as her daughter. This created a link between Leda and Nemesis. In the more common later version of the story, Leda was visited by Zeus, who appeared as a swan, and she laid two eggs, from one of which came Helen and from the other came Castor and Pollux.

See Apollodorus iii. 10; Hyginus, Fab. 77; Homer, Iliad, iii. 426, Od. xi. 298; Euripides, Helena, 17; Isocrates, Helena, 59; Ovid, Heroides, xvii. 55; Horace, Ars poetica, 147; Stasinus in Athenaeus viii. 334 c.; for the representations of Leda and the swan in art, J. A. Overbeck, Kunstmythologie, i., and Atlas to the same; also article in Roscher’s Lexikon der Mythologie.

See Apollodorus iii. 10; Hyginus, Fab. 77; Homer, Iliad, iii. 426, Od. xi. 298; Euripides, Helena, 17; Isocrates, Helena, 59; Ovid, Heroides, xvii. 55; Horace, Ars poetica, 147; Stasinus in Athenaeus viii. 334 c.; for the representations of Leda and the swan in art, J. A. Overbeck, Kunstmythologie, i., and Atlas to the same; also article in Roscher’s Lexikon der Mythologie.

LE DAIM (or Le Dain), OLIVIER (d. 1484), favourite of Louis XI. of France, was born of humble parentage at Thielt near Courtrai in Flanders. Seeking his fortune at Paris, he became court barber and valet to Louis XI., and so ingratiated himself with the king that in 1474 he was ennobled under the title Le Daim and in 1477 made comte de Meulant. In the latter year he was sent to Burgundy to influence the young heiress of Charles the Bold, but he was ridiculed and compelled to leave Ghent. He thereupon seized and held Tournai for the French. Le Daim had considerable talent for intrigue, and, according to his enemies, could always be depended upon to execute the baser designs of the king. He amassed a large fortune, largely by oppression and violence, and was named gentleman-in-waiting, captain of Loches, and governor of Saint-Quentin. He remained in favour until the death of Louis XI., when the rebellious lords were able to avenge the slights and insults they had suffered at 359 the hands of the royal barber. He was arrested on charges, the nature of which is uncertain, tried before the parlement of Paris, and on the 21st of May 1484 hanged at Montfaucon without the knowledge of Charles VIII., who might have heeded his father’s request and spared the favourite. Le Daim’s property was given to the duke of Orleans.

LE DAIM (or Le Dain), OLIVER (d. 1484), was a favorite of Louis XI of France. He came from a humble background in Thielt near Courtrai in Flanders. In search of success, he moved to Paris and became the king's barber and servant, quickly winning Louis XI's favor. In 1474, he was given the noble title Le Daim and in 1477, he became the Count of Meulant. That same year, he was sent to Burgundy to sway the young heiress of Charles the Bold, but he faced ridicule and had to leave Ghent. He then captured and held Tournai for the French. Le Daim had a knack for schemes, and his opponents claimed he could always be counted on to carry out the king's more unscrupulous orders. He accumulated a significant fortune, primarily through oppression and violence, and held titles such as gentleman-in-waiting, captain of Loches, and governor of Saint-Quentin. He remained in favor until Louis XI's death, after which the rebellious nobles sought revenge for the slights and insults they had endured from the royal barber. He was arrested on unclear charges, tried before the Parlement of Paris, and on May 21, 1484, hanged at Montfaucon without Charles VIII's knowledge, who might have heeded his father's plea to spare the favorite. Le Daim’s property was handed over to the Duke of Orleans.

See the memoirs of the time, especially those of Ph. de Commines (ed. Mandrot, 1901-1903, Eng. trans. in Bohn Library); Robt. Gaguin, Compendium de origine et gestis Francorum (Paris, 1586)—it was Gaguin who made the celebrated epigram concerning Le Daim: “Eras judex, lector, et exitium”; De Reiffenberg, Olivier le Dain (Brussels, 1829); Delanone, Le Barbier de Louis XI. (Paris, 1832): G. Picot, “Procès d’Olivier le Dain,” in the Comptes rendus de l’Académie des sciences morales et politiques, viii. (1877), 485-537. The memoirs of the time are uniformly hostile to Le Daim.

See the memoirs of the time, especially those by Ph. de Commines (ed. Mandrot, 1901-1903, Eng. trans. in Bohn Library); Robt. Gaguin, Compendium de origine et gestis Francorum (Paris, 1586)—it was Gaguin who made the famous epigram about Le Daim: “Eras judex, lector, et exitium”; De Reiffenberg, Olivier le Dain (Brussels, 1829); Delanone, Le Barbier de Louis XI. (Paris, 1832): G. Picot, “Procès d’Olivier le Dain,” in the Comptes rendus de l’Académie des sciences morales et politiques, viii. (1877), 485-537. The memoirs from that time are consistently critical of Le Daim.

LEDBURY, a market town in the Ross parliamentary division of Herefordshire, England, 14½ m. E. of Hereford by the Great Western railway, pleasantly situated on the south-western slope of the Malvern Hills. Pop. of urban district (1901) 3259. Cider and agricultural produce are the chief articles of trade, and there are limestone quarries in the neighbouring hills. The town contains many picturesque examples of timbered houses, characteristic of the district, the principal being the Market House (1633) elevated on massive pillars of oak. The fine church of St Michael exhibits all the Gothic styles, the most noteworthy features being the Norman chancel and west door, and the remarkable series of ornate Decorated windows on the north side. Among several charities is the hospital of St Catherine, founded by Foliot, bishop of Hereford, in 1232. Hope End, 2 m. N.E. of Ledbury, was the residence of Elizabeth Barrett Browning during her early life. A clock-tower in the town commemorates her.

LEDBURY, is a market town in the Ross parliamentary division of Herefordshire, England, 14½ miles east of Hereford by the Great Western railway, pleasantly located on the southwestern slope of the Malvern Hills. The population of the urban district in 1901 was 3,259. Cider and agricultural products are the main trades, and there are limestone quarries in the nearby hills. The town features many picturesque timber-framed houses typical of the area, with the most prominent being the Market House (1633), which stands on massive oak pillars. The beautiful church of St. Michael showcases all Gothic styles, with the most notable features being the Norman chancel and west door, along with an impressive series of ornate Decorated windows on the north side. Among several charities is the hospital of St. Catherine, founded by Foliot, bishop of Hereford, in 1232. Hope End, 2 miles northeast of Ledbury, was the childhood home of Elizabeth Barrett Browning. A clock tower in the town commemorates her.

Wall Hills Camp, supposed to be of British origin, is the earliest evidence of a settlement near Ledbury (Liedeburge, Lidebury). The manor was given to the see of Hereford in the 11th century; but in 1561-1562 became crown property. As early as 1170-1171 an episcopal castle existed in Ledbury. The town was not incorporated, but was early called a borough; and in 1295 and 1304-1305 returned two members to parliament. A fair on the day of the decollation of John the Baptist was granted to the bishop in 1249. Of fairs which survived in 1792 those of the days of St Philip and St James and St Barnabas were granted in 1584-1585; those held on the Monday before Easter and St Thomas’s day were reputed ancient, but not those of the 12th of May, the 22nd of June, the 2nd of October and the 21st of December. Existing fairs are on the second Tuesday in every month and in October. A weekly market, granted to the bishop by Stephen, John and Henry III., was obsolete in 1584-1585, when the present market of Tuesday was authorized. The wool trade was considerable in the 14th century; later Ledbury was inhabited by glovers and clothiers. The town was deeply involved in the operations of the Civil Wars, being occupied both by the royalist leader Prince Rupert and by the Parliamentarian Colonel Birch.

Wall Hills Camp, thought to be of British origin, is the earliest evidence of a settlement near Ledbury (Liedeburge, Lidebury). The manor was given to the see of Hereford in the 11th century, but in 1561-1562 it became crown property. As early as 1170-1171, an episcopal castle existed in Ledbury. The town was not incorporated, but it was early referred to as a borough; and in 1295 and 1304-1305, it returned two members to parliament. A fair on the day of the beheading of John the Baptist was granted to the bishop in 1249. Of the fairs that survived in 1792, those on the days of St Philip, St James, and St Barnabas were granted in 1584-1585; those held on the Monday before Easter and St Thomas’s day were considered ancient, but not those on the 12th of May, the 22nd of June, the 2nd of October, and the 21st of December. Current fairs take place on the second Tuesday of every month and in October. A weekly market, granted to the bishop by Stephen, John, and Henry III, was obsolete in 1584-1585, when the present market on Tuesday was authorized. The wool trade was significant in the 14th century; later, Ledbury was home to glovers and clothiers. The town was heavily involved in the Civil Wars, being occupied by both the royalist leader Prince Rupert and the Parliamentarian Colonel Birch.

LEDGER (from the English dialect forms liggen or leggen, to lie or lay; in sense adapted from the Dutch substantive legger), properly a book remaining regularly in one place, and so used of the copies of the Scriptures and service books kept in a church. The New English Dictionary quotes from Charles Wriothesley’s Chronicle, 1538 (ed. Camden Soc., 1875, by W. D. Hamilton), “the curates should provide a booke of the bible in Englishe, of the largest volume, to be a lidger in the same church for the parishioners to read on.” It is an application of this original meaning that is found in the commercial usage of the term for the principal book of account in a business house (see Book-Keeping). Apart from these applications to various forms of books, the word is used of the horizontal timbers in a scaffold (q.v.) lying parallel to the face of a building, which support the “put logs”; of a flat stone to cover a grave; and of a stationary form of tackle and bait in angling. In the form “lieger” the term was formerly frequently applied to a “resident,” as distinguished from an “extraordinary” ambassador.

LEDGER (from the English dialect forms liggen or leggen, to lie or lay; adapted from the Dutch noun legger), is primarily a book that stays in one place, typically used for the copies of the Scriptures and service books kept in a church. The New English Dictionary cites Charles Wriothesley’s Chronicle, 1538 (ed. Camden Soc., 1875, by W. D. Hamilton), stating, “the curates should provide a book of the Bible in English, of the largest volume, to be a lidger in the same church for the parishioners to read on.” This original meaning has evolved into its commercial use for the main book of accounts in a business (see Book-Keeping). Besides these applications to different types of books, the term also refers to the horizontal beams in a scaffold (q.v.) that run parallel to a building's face, supporting the “put logs”; a flat stone used to cover a grave; and a stationary type of tackle and bait in fishing. In the form “lieger,” the term was often used to describe a “resident,” as opposed to an “extraordinary” ambassador.

LEDOCHOWSKI, MIECISLAUS JOHANN, Count (1822-1902), Polish cardinal, was born on the 29th of October 1822 in Gorki (Russian Poland), and received his early education at the gymnasium and seminary of Warsaw. After finishing his studies at the Jesuit Accademia dei Nobili Ecclesiastici in Rome, which strongly influenced his religious development and his attitude towards church affairs, he was ordained in 1845. From 1856 to 1858 he represented the Roman See in Columbia, but on the outbreak of the Columbian revolution had to return to Rome. In 1861 Pope Pius IX. made him his nuncio at Brussels, and in 1865 he was made archbishop of Gnesen-Posen. His preconization followed on the 8th of January 1866. This date marks the beginning of the second period in Ledochowski’s life; for during the Prussian and German Kulturkampf he was one of the most declared enemies of the state. It was only during the earliest years of his appointment as archbishop that he entertained a different view, invoking, for instance, an intervention of Prussia in favour of the Roman Church, when it was oppressed by the house of Savoy. On the 12th of December 1870 he presented an effective memorandum on the subject at the headquarters at Versailles. In 1872 the archbishop protested against the demand of the government that religious teaching should be given only in the German language, and in 1873 he addressed a circular letter on this subject to the clergy of his diocese. The government thereupon demanded a statement from the teachers of religion as to whether they intended to obey it or the archbishop, and on their declaring for the archbishop, dismissed them. The count himself was called upon at the end of 1873 to lay aside his office. On his refusing to do so, he was arrested between 3 and 4 o’clock in the morning on the 3rd of February 1874 by Staňdi the director of police, and taken to the military prison of Ostrowo. The pope made him a cardinal on the 13th of March, but it was not till the 3rd of February 1876 that he was released from prison. Having been expelled from the eastern provinces of Prussia, he betook himself to Cracow, where his presence was made the pretext for anti-Prussian demonstrations. Upon this he was also expelled from Austria, and went to Rome, whence, in spite of his removal from office, which was decreed on the 15th of April 1874, he continued to direct the affairs of his diocese, for which he was on several occasions from 1877 to 1879 condemned in absentia by the Prussian government for “usurpation of episcopal rights.” It was not till 1885 that Ledochowski resolved to resign his archbishopric, in which he was succeeded by Dinder at the end of the year. Ledochowski’s return in 1884 was forbidden by the Prussian government (although the Kulturkampf had now abated), on account of his having stirred up anew the Polish nationalist agitation. He passed the closing years of his life in Rome. In 1892 he became prefect of the Congregation of the Propaganda, and he died in Rome on the 22nd of July 1902.

LEDOCHOWSKI, MIECISLAUS JOHANN, Count (1822-1902), Polish cardinal, was born on October 29, 1822, in Gorki (Russian Poland) and received his early education at the gymnasium and seminary in Warsaw. After completing his studies at the Jesuit Accademia dei Nobili Ecclesiastici in Rome, which significantly shaped his religious beliefs and approach to church matters, he was ordained in 1845. From 1856 to 1858, he represented the Roman See in Colombia, but following the start of the Colombian revolution, he had to return to Rome. In 1861, Pope Pius IX appointed him nuncio in Brussels, and in 1865 he became the archbishop of Gnesen-Posen. His confirmation came on January 8, 1866. This date marks the beginning of the second chapter of Ledochowski’s life; during the Prussian and German Kulturkampf, he became one of the most vocal opponents of the state. Only in the early years of his archbishopric did he hold a different perspective, for example, calling for Prussia to intervene on behalf of the Roman Church when it faced oppression from the house of Savoy. On December 12, 1870, he presented a compelling memorandum on this issue at the headquarters in Versailles. In 1872, the archbishop protested against the government's demand that religious instruction be conducted only in German, and in 1873 he sent a circular letter on this topic to the clergy in his diocese. The government then required religious teachers to declare their allegiance either to the government or to the archbishop, and upon their siding with the archbishop, they were dismissed. The count himself was asked at the end of 1873 to resign from his position. When he refused, he was arrested by Staňdi, the police director, between 3 and 4 a.m. on February 3, 1874, and taken to the military prison in Ostrowo. The pope made him a cardinal on March 13, but he was not released from prison until February 3, 1876. After being expelled from the eastern provinces of Prussia, he went to Cracow, where his presence sparked anti-Prussian protests. As a result, he was expelled from Austria and moved to Rome, where, despite his removal from office, decreed on April 15, 1874, he continued to manage the affairs of his diocese. From 1877 to 1879, he was repeatedly condemned in absentia by the Prussian government for "usurping episcopal rights." It wasn't until 1885 that Ledochowski decided to resign from his archbishopric, being succeeded by Dinder at the end of that year. Ledochowski’s return in 1884 was banned by the Prussian government (even though the Kulturkampf had lessened) due to his rekindling Polish nationalist sentiments. He spent his final years in Rome. In 1892, he became the prefect of the Congregation of the Propaganda, and he passed away in Rome on July 22, 1902.

See Ograbiszewski, Deutschlands Episkopat in Lebensbildern (1876 and following years); Holtzmann-Zöppfel, Lexikon für Theologie und Kirchenwesen (2nd ed., 1888); Vapereau, Dictionnaire universel des contemporains (6th ed., 1893); Brück, Geschichte der katholischen Kirche in Deutschland im neunzehnten Jahrhundert vol. 4 (1901 and 1908); Lauchert, Biographisches Jahrbuch, vol. 7 (1905).

See Ograbiszewski, Deutschlands Episkopat in Lebensbildern (1876 and later); Holtzmann-Zöppfel, Lexikon für Theologie und Kirchenwesen (2nd ed., 1888); Vapereau, Dictionnaire universel des contemporains (6th ed., 1893); Brück, Geschichte der katholischen Kirche in Deutschland im neunzehnten Jahrhundert vol. 4 (1901 and 1908); Lauchert, Biographisches Jahrbuch, vol. 7 (1905).

(J. Hn.)

LEDRU-ROLLIN, ALEXANDRE AUGUSTE (1807-1874), French politician, was the grandson of Nicolas Philippe Ledru, the celebrated quack doctor known as “Comus” under Louis XIV., and was born in a house that was once Scarron’s, at Fontenay-aux-Roses (Seine), on the 2nd of February 1807. He had just begun to practise at the Parisian bar before the revolution of July, and was retained for the Republican defence in most of the great political trials of the next ten years. In 1838 he bought for 330,000 francs Desiré Dalloz’s place in the Court of Cassation. He was elected deputy for Le Mans in 1841 with hardly a dissentient voice; but for the violence of his electoral speeches he was tried at Angers and sentenced to four months’ imprisonment and a fine, against which he appealed successfully on a technical point. He made a rich and romantic marriage in 1843, and in 1846 disposed of his charge at the Court of Cassation to give his time entirely to politics. He was now the recognized leader of the working-men of France. He had more authority in the country than in the Chamber, where the violence of his oratory diminished its effect. He asserted that the fortifications of Paris were directed against liberty, not against foreign invasion, and he stigmatized the law of regency (1842) as an audacious usurpation. Neither from official Liberalism nor from the press did he receive support; even the Republican National was 360 opposed to him because of his championship of labour. He therefore founded La Réforme in which to advance his propaganda. Between Ledru-Rollin and Odilon Barrot with the other chiefs of the “dynastic Left” there were acute differences, hardly dissimulated even during the temporary alliance which produced the campaign of the banquets. It was the speeches of Ledru-Rollin and Louis Blanc at working-men’s banquets in Lille, Dijon and Châlons that really heralded the revolution. Ledru-Rollin prevented the appointment of the duchess of Orleans as regent in 1848. He and Lamartine held the tribune in the Chamber of Deputies until the Parisian populace stopped serious discussion by invading the Chamber. He was minister of the interior in the provisional government, and was also a member of the executive committee1 appointed by the Constituent Assembly, from which Louis Blanc and the extremists were excluded. At the crisis of the 15th of May he definitely sided with Lamartine and the party of order against the proletariat. Henceforward his position was a difficult one. He never regained his influence with the working classes, who considered they had been betrayed; but to his short ministry belongs the credit of the establishment of a working system of universal suffrage. At the presidential election in December he was put forward as the Socialist candidate, but secured only 370,000 votes. His opposition to the policy of President Louis Napoleon, especially his Roman policy, led to his moving the impeachment of the president and his ministers. The motion was defeated, and next day (June 13, 1849) he headed what he called a peaceful demonstration, and his enemies armed insurrection. He himself escaped to London where he joined the executive of the revolutionary committee of Europe, with Kossuth and Mazzini among his colleagues. He was accused of complicity in an obscure attempt (1857) against the life of Napoleon III., and condemned in his absence to deportation. Émile Ollivier removed the exceptions from the general amnesty in 1870, and Ledru-Rollin returned to France after twenty years of exile. Though elected in 1871 in three departments he refused to sit in the National Assembly, and took no serious part in politics until 1874 when he was returned to the Assembly as member for Vaucluse. He died on the 31st of December of that year.

LEDRU-ROLLIN, ALEXANDRE AUGUSTE (1807-1874), French politician, was the grandson of Nicolas Philippe Ledru, the famous quack doctor known as “Comus” during Louis XIV's reign. He was born on February 2, 1807, in a house that was once Scarron’s, in Fontenay-aux-Roses (Seine). He had just started practicing law in Paris before the July Revolution and was involved in defending Republicans in many significant political trials over the next decade. In 1838, he purchased Desiré Dalloz’s position in the Court of Cassation for 330,000 francs. He was elected as a deputy for Le Mans in 1841 with almost no opposition, but he was tried in Angers for the intensity of his electoral speeches and sentenced to four months in prison along with a fine; he successfully appealed based on a technicality. He made a wealthy and romantic marriage in 1843, and by 1846, he gave up his position at the Court of Cassation to focus entirely on politics. At this point, he became the recognized leader of France's working men. He held more influence in the country than in the Chamber, where the intensity of his speeches lessened their impact. He argued that Paris's fortifications were aimed at suppressing liberty rather than foreign attacks and denounced the law of regency (1842) as a blatant usurpation. He received no support from official Liberalism or the press; even the Republican National opposed him because of his advocacy for labor. Consequently, he founded La Réforme to push his agenda. Ledru-Rollin had profound disagreements with Odilon Barrot and other leaders of the “dynastic Left,” which were hardly hidden even during the brief alliance that led to the banquet campaign. It was Ledru-Rollin's and Louis Blanc's speeches at working men’s banquets in Lille, Dijon, and Châlons that genuinely signaled the approaching revolution. Ledru-Rollin blocked the appointment of the duchess of Orleans as regent in 1848. He and Lamartine held the floor in the Chamber of Deputies until the people of Paris disrupted serious discussions by storming the Chamber. He served as the minister of the interior in the provisional government and was also a member of the executive committee1 appointed by the Constituent Assembly, which excluded Louis Blanc and the extremists. During the crisis on May 15, he firmly aligned with Lamartine and the conservative party against the proletariat. From then on, his position became challenging. He never regained the trust of the working class, who felt betrayed; however, his brief ministry was credited with establishing a functioning system of universal suffrage. In December, during the presidential election, he was nominated as the Socialist candidate but only received 370,000 votes. His opposition to President Louis Napoleon's policies, particularly regarding Rome, led him to propose impeaching the president and his ministers. This motion was defeated, and the following day (June 13, 1849), he led what he called a peaceful demonstration, but his opponents organized an armed uprising. He fled to London, where he joined the European revolutionary committee alongside Kossuth and Mazzini. He was accused of being involved in a vague assassination attempt (1857) against Napoleon III and was sentenced to deportation in absentia. Émile Ollivier lifted the exceptions from the general amnesty in 1870, allowing Ledru-Rollin to return to France after twenty years in exile. Although elected in 1871 in three departments, he declined to sit in the National Assembly and stayed out of serious politics until 1874, when he was elected to the Assembly for Vaucluse. He died on December 31 of that year.

Under Louis Philippe he made large contributions to French jurisprudence, editing the Journal du palais, 1791-1837 (27 vols., 1837), and 1837-1847 (17 vols.), with a commentary Répertoire général de la jurisprudence française (8 vols., 1843-1848), the introduction to which was written by himself. His later writings were political in character. See Ledru-Rollin, ses discours et ses écrits politiques (2 vols., Paris, 1879), edited by his widow.

Under Louis Philippe, he made significant contributions to French law, editing the Journal du palais, 1791-1837 (27 vols., 1837) and 1837-1847 (17 vols.), along with a commentary titled Répertoire général de la jurisprudence française (8 vols., 1843-1848), which he authored the introduction for. His later writings took on a political tone. See Ledru-Rollin, ses discours et ses écrits politiques (2 vols., Paris, 1879), edited by his widow.


1 Arago, Garnier-Pagès, Marie, Lamartine, and Ledru-Rollin.

1 Arago, Garnier-Pagès, Marie, Lamartine, and Ledru-Rollin.

LEDYARD, JOHN (1751-1789), American traveller, was born in Groton, Connecticut, U.S.A. After vainly trying law and theology, Ledyard adopted a seaman’s life, and, coming to London, was engaged as corporal of marines by Captain Cook for his third voyage (1776). On his return (1778) Ledyard had to give up to the Admiralty his copious journals, but afterwards published, from memory, a meagre narrative of his experiences—herein giving the only account of Cook’s death by an eye-witness (Hartford, U.S.A., 1783). He continued in the British service till 1782, when he escaped, off Long Island. In 1784 he revisited Europe, to organize an expedition to the American North-West. Having failed in his attempts, he decided to reach his goal by travelling across Europe and Asia. Baffled in his hopes of crossing the Baltic on the ice (Stockholm to Abo), he walked right round from Stockholm to St Petersburg, where he arrived barefoot and penniless (March 1787). Here he made friends with Pallas and others, and accompanied Dr Brown, a Scotch physician in the Russian service, to Siberia. Ledyard left Dr Brown at Barnaul, went on to Tomsk and Irkutsk, visited Lake Baikal, and descended the Lena to Yakutsk (18th of September 1787). With Captain Joseph Billings, whom he had known on Cook’s “Resolution,” he returned to Irkutsk, where he was arrested, deported to the Polish frontier, and banished from Russia for ever. Reaching London, he was engaged by Sir Joseph Banks and the African Association to explore overland routes from Alexandria to the Niger, but in Cairo he succumbed to a dose of vitriol (17th of January 1789). Though a born explorer, little resulted from his immense but ill-directed activities.

LEDYARD, JOHN (1751-1789), American traveler, was born in Groton, Connecticut, U.S.A. After unsuccessfully trying law and theology, Ledyard chose a life at sea and moved to London, where he was hired as a corporal of marines by Captain Cook for his third voyage (1776). Upon returning (1778), Ledyard had to turn over his extensive journals to the Admiralty, but later published a brief account of his experiences from memory—this was the only eyewitness account of Cook's death (Hartford, U.S.A., 1783). He continued in British service until 1782, when he escaped off Long Island. In 1784, he went back to Europe to organize an expedition to the American Northwest. After failing in those attempts, he decided to reach that goal by traveling across Europe and Asia. After being thwarted in his attempt to cross the Baltic on the ice (from Stockholm to Abo), he walked all the way from Stockholm to St Petersburg, arriving barefoot and broke (March 1787). There, he made friends with Pallas and others and accompanied Dr. Brown, a Scottish physician in the Russian service, to Siberia. Ledyard parted ways with Dr. Brown at Barnaul, moved on to Tomsk and Irkutsk, visited Lake Baikal, and traveled down the Lena River to Yakutsk (September 18, 1787). With Captain Joseph Billings, whom he had met on Cook’s “Resolution,” he went back to Irkutsk, where he was arrested, deported to the Polish border, and banished from Russia for good. After reaching London, he was hired by Sir Joseph Banks and the African Association to explore overland routes from Alexandria to the Niger, but he died in Cairo from a dose of vitriol (January 17, 1789). Although he was a natural explorer, his vast but misguided efforts led to little.

See Memoirs of the Life and Travels of John Ledyard, by Jared Sparks (1828).

See Memoirs of the Life and Travels of John Ledyard, by Jared Sparks (1828).

LEE, ANN (1736-1784), English religious visionary, was born in Manchester, where she was first a factory hand and afterwards a cook. She is remembered by her connexion with the sect known as Shakers (q.v.). She died at Watervliet, near Albany, New York.

LEE, ANN (1736-1784), an English religious visionary, was born in Manchester, where she initially worked in a factory and later as a cook. She is known for her association with the group called the Shakers (q.v.). She passed away in Watervliet, near Albany, New York.

LEE, ARTHUR (1740-1792), American diplomatist, brother of Richard Henry Lee, was born at Stratford, Westmoreland county, Virginia, on the 20th of December 1740. He was educated at Eton, studied medicine at Edinburgh, practised as a physician in Williamsburg, Virginia, read law at the Temple, London, in 1766-1770, and practised law in London in 1770-1776. He was an intimate of John Wilkes, whom he aided in one of his London campaigns. In 1770-1775 he served as London agent for Massachusetts, second to Benjamin Franklin, whom he succeeded in 1775. At that time he had shown great ability as a pamphleteer, having published in London The Monitor (1768), seven essays previously printed in Virginia; The Political Detection: or the Treachery and Tyranny of Administration, both at Home and Abroad (1770), signed “Junius Americanus”; and An Appeal to the Justice and Interests of the People of Great Britain in the Present Disputes with America (1774), signed “An Old Member of Parliament.” In December 1775 the Committee of Secret Correspondence of Congress chose him its European agent principally for the purpose of ascertaining the views of France, Spain, and other European countries regarding the war between the colonies and Great Britain. In October 1776 he was appointed, upon the refusal of Jefferson, on the commission with Franklin and Silas Deane to negotiate a treaty of alliance, amity and commerce with France, and also to negotiate with other European governments. His letters to Congress, in which he expressed his suspicion of Deane’s business integrity and criticized his accounts, resulted in Deane’s recall; and other letters impaired the confidence of Congress in Franklin, of whom he was especially jealous. Early in 1777 he went to Spain as American commissioner, but received no official recognition, was not permitted to proceed farther than Burgos, and accomplished nothing; until the appointment of Jay, however, he continued to act as commissioner to Spain, held various conferences with the Spanish minister in Paris, and in January 1778 secured a promise of a loan of 3,000,000 livres, only a small part of which (some 170,000 livres) was paid. In June 1777 he went to Berlin, where, as in Spain, he was not officially recognized. Although he had little to do with the negotiations, he signed with Franklin and Deane in February 1778 the treaties between the United States and France. Having become unpopular at the courts of France and Spain, Lee was recalled in 1779, and returned to the United States in September 1780. He was a member of the Virginia House of Delegates in 1781 and a delegate to the Continental Congress in 1782-1785. With Oliver Wolcott and Richard Butler he negotiated a treaty with the Six Nations, signed at Fort Stanwix on the 22nd of October 1784, and with George Clark and Richard Butler a treaty with the Wyandot, Delaware, Chippewa and Ottawa Indians, signed at Ft. McIntosh on the 21st of January 1785. He was a member of the treasury board in 1784-1789. He strongly opposed the constitution, and after its adoption retired to his estate at Urbana, Virginia, where he died on the 12th of December 1792.

LEE, ARTHUR (1740-1792), American diplomat and brother of Richard Henry Lee, was born at Stratford, Westmoreland County, Virginia, on December 20, 1740. He was educated at Eton, studied medicine in Edinburgh, practiced as a physician in Williamsburg, Virginia, and studied law at the Temple in London from 1766 to 1770, then practiced law in London from 1770 to 1776. He was a close friend of John Wilkes, assisting him in one of his campaigns in London. From 1770 to 1775, he served as the London agent for Massachusetts, second to Benjamin Franklin, whom he succeeded in 1775. During this time, he demonstrated strong skills as a pamphleteer, publishing in London The Monitor (1768), which included seven essays previously printed in Virginia; The Political Detection: or the Treachery and Tyranny of Administration, both at Home and Abroad (1770), signed “Junius Americanus”; and An Appeal to the Justice and Interests of the People of Great Britain in the Present Disputes with America (1774), signed “An Old Member of Parliament.” In December 1775, the Committee of Secret Correspondence of Congress chose him as its European agent mainly to gauge the views of France, Spain, and other countries regarding the war between the colonies and Great Britain. In October 1776, after Jefferson declined, he was appointed with Franklin and Silas Deane to negotiate a treaty of alliance, friendship, and commerce with France, as well as conduct negotiations with other European governments. His letters to Congress expressing doubts about Deane’s integrity and criticizing his accounts led to Deane’s recall; other letters undermined Congress's confidence in Franklin, whom he was particularly envious of. Early in 1777, he went to Spain as American commissioner but received no official recognition, was not allowed to go beyond Burgos, and accomplished little; however, until Jay was appointed, he continued to act as commissioner to Spain, holding various meetings with the Spanish minister in Paris, and in January 1778, secured a loan promise of 3,000,000 livres, of which only a small portion (about 170,000 livres) was paid. In June 1777, he traveled to Berlin, where he again received no official recognition. Although he had a minor role in the negotiations, he signed the treaties between the United States and France with Franklin and Deane in February 1778. Having become unpopular at the courts of France and Spain, he was recalled in 1779 and returned to the United States in September 1780. He served as a member of the Virginia House of Delegates in 1781 and as a delegate to the Continental Congress from 1782 to 1785. Alongside Oliver Wolcott and Richard Butler, he negotiated a treaty with the Six Nations, signed at Fort Stanwix on October 22, 1784, and with George Clark and Richard Butler, a treaty with the Wyandot, Delaware, Chippewa, and Ottawa Indians, signed at Ft. McIntosh on January 21, 1785. He was a member of the treasury board from 1784 to 1789. He strongly opposed the Constitution and, after its adoption, retired to his estate at Urbana, Virginia, where he died on December 12, 1792.

See R. H. Lee, Life of Arthur Lee (2 vols., Boston, 1829), and C. H. Lee, A Vindication of Arthur Lee (Richmond, Virginia, 1894), both partisan. Much of Lee’s correspondence is to be found in Wharton’s Revolutionary Diplomatic Correspondence (Washington, 1889). Eight volumes of Lee’s MSS. in the Harvard University Library are described and listed in Library of Harvard University, Bibliographical Contributions, No. 8 (Cambridge, 1882).

See R. H. Lee, Life of Arthur Lee (2 vols., Boston, 1829), and C. H. Lee, A Vindication of Arthur Lee (Richmond, Virginia, 1894), both biased. A lot of Lee’s correspondence can be found in Wharton’s Revolutionary Diplomatic Correspondence (Washington, 1889). Eight volumes of Lee’s manuscripts in the Harvard University Library are described and listed in Library of Harvard University, Bibliographical Contributions, No. 8 (Cambridge, 1882).

LEE, FITZHUGH (1835-1905), American cavalry general, was born at Clermont, in Fairfax county, Virginia, on the 19th of November 1835. He was the grandson of “Light Horse Harry” Lee, and the nephew of Robert E. Lee. His father, Sydney Smith Lee, was a fleet captain under Commodore Perry in Japanese waters and rose to the rank of commodore; his 361 mother was a daughter of George Mason. Graduating from West Point in 1856, he was appointed to the 2nd Cavalry, which was commanded by Colonel Albert Sidney Johnston, and in which his uncle, Robert E. Lee, was lieutenant-colonel. As a cavalry subaltern he distinguished himself by his gallant conduct in actions with the Comanches in Texas, and was severely wounded in 1859. In May 1860 he was appointed instructor of cavalry at West Point, but resigned on the secession of Virginia. Lee was at once employed in the organization of the forces of the South, and served at first as a staff officer to General R. S. Ewell, and afterwards, from September 1861, as lieutenant-colonel, and from April 1862 as colonel of the First Virginia Cavalry in the Army of Northern Virginia. He became brigadier-general on General J. E. B. Stuart’s recommendation on the 25th of July 1862, and served under that general throughout the Virginian campaigns of 1862 and 1863, becoming major-general on the 3rd of September 1863. He conducted the cavalry action of Beverly Ford (17th March 1863) with skill and success. In the Wilderness and Petersburg campaigns he was constantly employed as a divisional commander under Stuart, and, after Stuart’s death, under General Wade Hampton. He took part in Early’s campaign against Sheridan in the Shenandoah Valley, and at Winchester (19th Sept. 1864) three horses were shot under him and he was severely wounded. On General Hampton’s being sent to assist General Joseph E. Johnston in North Carolina, the command of the whole of General Lee’s cavalry devolved upon Fitzhugh Lee early in 1865, but the surrender of Appomattox followed quickly upon the opening of the campaign. Fitzhugh Lee himself led the last charge of the Confederates on the 9th of April that year at Farmville.

LEE, FITZHUGH (1835-1905), American cavalry general, was born at Clermont in Fairfax County, Virginia, on November 19, 1835. He was the grandson of “Light Horse Harry” Lee and the nephew of Robert E. Lee. His father, Sydney Smith Lee, served as a fleet captain under Commodore Perry in Japan and rose to the rank of commodore; his mother was a daughter of George Mason. Graduating from West Point in 1856, he was assigned to the 2nd Cavalry, commanded by Colonel Albert Sidney Johnston, where his uncle, Robert E. Lee, was lieutenant colonel. As a junior cavalry officer, he made a name for himself through his brave actions against the Comanches in Texas and was seriously injured in 1859. In May 1860, he was appointed as a cavalry instructor at West Point but resigned after Virginia seceded. Lee was quickly involved in organizing the forces of the South, initially serving as a staff officer to General R. S. Ewell and later, starting in September 1861, as lieutenant colonel and, starting in April 1862, as colonel of the First Virginia Cavalry in the Army of Northern Virginia. He became a brigadier general on the recommendation of General J. E. B. Stuart on July 25, 1862, and served under Stuart throughout the Virginia campaigns of 1862 and 1863, becoming a major general on September 3, 1863. He skillfully led the cavalry action at Beverly Ford on March 17, 1863. During the Wilderness and Petersburg campaigns, he was consistently engaged as a divisional commander under Stuart and, after Stuart's death, under General Wade Hampton. He participated in Early's campaign against Sheridan in the Shenandoah Valley, and at Winchester on September 19, 1864, three horses were shot under him, and he was severely wounded. When General Hampton was sent to assist General Joseph E. Johnston in North Carolina, Fitzhugh Lee took command of all of General Lee's cavalry early in 1865, but the surrender at Appomattox came soon after the campaign began. Fitzhugh Lee himself led the last charge of the Confederates on April 9 of that year at Farmville.

After the war he devoted himself to farming in Stafford county, Virginia, and was conspicuous in his efforts to reconcile the Southern people to the issue of the war, which he regarded as a final settlement of the questions at issue. In 1875 he attended the Bunker Hill centenary at Boston, Mass., and delivered a remarkable address. In 1885 he was a member of the board of visitors of West Point, and from 1886 to 1890 was governor of Virginia. In April 1896 he was appointed by President Cleveland consul-general at Havana, with duties of a diplomatic and military character added to the usual consular business. In this post (in which he was retained by President McKinley) he was from the first called upon to deal with a situation of great difficulty, which culminated with the destruction of the “Maine” (see Spanish-American War). Upon the declaration of war between Spain and the United States he re-entered the army. He was one of the three ex-Confederate general officers who were made major-generals of United States Volunteers. Fitzhugh Lee commanded the VII. army corps, but took no part in the actual operations in Cuba. He was military governor of Havana and Pinar del Rio in 1899, subsequently commanded the department of the Missouri, and retired as a brigadier-general U.S. Army in 1901. He died in Washington on the 28th of April 1905. He wrote Robert E. Lee (1894) in the “Great Commanders” series, and Cuba’s Struggle Against Spain (1899).

After the war, he focused on farming in Stafford County, Virginia, and was notable for his efforts to help the Southern people come to terms with the outcome of the war, which he saw as a final resolution of the issues at stake. In 1875, he attended the Bunker Hill centenary in Boston, Massachusetts, where he delivered an impressive speech. In 1885, he served on the board of visitors at West Point, and from 1886 to 1890, he was the governor of Virginia. In April 1896, President Cleveland appointed him consul-general in Havana, with additional responsibilities of a diplomatic and military nature alongside the usual consular duties. He held this position (which President McKinley continued) and was immediately faced with a challenging situation that escalated with the sinking of the “Maine” (see Spanish-American War). When war was declared between Spain and the United States, he rejoined the army. He was one of three former Confederate general officers promoted to major generals of United States Volunteers. Fitzhugh Lee led the VII army corps but did not participate in the actual operations in Cuba. He was the military governor of Havana and Pinar del Rio in 1899, later commanded the Department of the Missouri, and retired as a brigadier general in the U.S. Army in 1901. He passed away in Washington on April 28, 1905. He authored Robert E. Lee (1894) in the “Great Commanders” series and Cuba’s Struggle Against Spain (1899).

LEE, GEORGE ALEXANDER (1802-1851), English musician, was born in London, the son of Henry Lee, a pugilist and innkeeper. He became “tiger” to Lord Barrymore, and his singing led to his being educated for the musical profession. After appearing as a tenor at the theatres in Dublin and London, he joined in producing opera at the Tottenham Street theatre in 1829, and afterwards was connected with musical productions at Drury Lane and Covent Garden. He married Mrs Waylett, a popular singer. Lee composed music for a number of plays, and also many songs, including the popular “Come where the Aspens quiver,” and for a short time had a music-selling business in the Quadrant. He died on the 8th of October 1851.

LEE, GEORGE ALEXANDER (1802-1851), English musician, was born in London, the son of Henry Lee, a boxer and innkeeper. He became the “tiger” for Lord Barrymore, and his singing talent led him to pursue a career in music. After performing as a tenor at theaters in Dublin and London, he helped produce opera at the Tottenham Street theater in 1829, and later worked on musical productions at Drury Lane and Covent Garden. He married Mrs. Waylett, a popular singer. Lee composed music for several plays and many songs, including the well-known “Come where the Aspens quiver,” and for a short time ran a music-selling business in the Quadrant. He passed away on October 8, 1851.

LEE, HENRY (1756-1818), American general, called “Light Horse Harry,” was born near Dumfries, Virginia, on the 29th of January 1756. His father was first cousin to Richard Henry Lee. With a view to a legal career he graduated (1773) at Princeton, but soon afterwards, on the outbreak of the War of Independence, he became an officer in the patriot forces. He served with great distinction under Washington, and in 1778 was promoted major and given the command of a small irregular corps, with which he won a great reputation as a leader of light troops. His services on the outpost line of the army earned for him the soubriquet of “Light Horse Harry.” His greatest exploit was the brilliant surprise of Paulus Hook, N.J., on the 19th of August 1779; for this feat he received a gold medal, a reward given to no other officer below general’s rank in the whole war. He was promoted lieutenant-colonel 1780, and sent with a picked corps of dragoons to the southern theatre of war. Here he rendered invaluable services in victory and defeat, notably at Guilford Court House, Camden and Eutaw Springs. He was present at Cornwallis’s surrender at Yorktown, and afterwards left the army owing to ill-health. From 1786 to 1788 he was a delegate to the Confederation Congress, and in the last-named year in the Virginia convention he favoured the adoption of the Federal constitution. From 1789 to 1791 he served in the General Assembly, and from 1791 to 1794 was governor of Virginia. In 1794 Washington sent him to help in the suppression of the “Whisky Insurrection” in western Pennsylvania. A new county of Virginia was named after him during his governorship. He was a major-general in 1798-1800. From 1799 to 1801 he served in Congress. He delivered the address on the death of Washington which contained the famous phrase, “first in war, first in peace, and first in the hearts of his countrymen.” Soon after the War of 1812 broke out, Lee, while helping to resist the attack of a mob on his friend, A. C. Hanson, editor of the Baltimore Federal Republican, which had opposed the war, received grave injuries, from which he never recovered. He died at the house of General Nathanael Greene on Cumberland Island, Georgia, on the 25th of March 1818.

LEE, HENRY (1756-1818), an American general known as “Light Horse Harry,” was born near Dumfries, Virginia, on January 29, 1756. His father was a first cousin of Richard Henry Lee. Aiming for a legal career, he graduated from Princeton in 1773, but soon after the War of Independence began, he became an officer in the patriot forces. He served with great distinction under Washington and was promoted to major in 1778, taking command of a small irregular unit with which he gained a strong reputation as a leader of light troops. His work on the army’s outpost line earned him the nickname “Light Horse Harry.” His most notable achievement was the daring surprise attack at Paulus Hook, N.J., on August 19, 1779; for this success, he received a gold medal, an honor not awarded to any officer below the rank of general throughout the entire war. In 1780, he was promoted to lieutenant-colonel and sent with an elite group of dragoons to the southern theater of war. There, he made invaluable contributions in both victory and defeat, especially at Guilford Court House, Camden, and Eutaw Springs. He was present at Cornwallis's surrender at Yorktown but later left the army due to health issues. From 1786 to 1788, he served as a delegate to the Confederation Congress, and during the Virginia convention in the latter year, he supported the adoption of the Federal constitution. From 1789 to 1791, he was part of the General Assembly, and from 1791 to 1794, he served as the governor of Virginia. In 1794, Washington sent him to assist in quelling the “Whisky Insurrection” in western Pennsylvania. A new Virginia county was named after him during his time as governor. He was promoted to major-general between 1798-1800. From 1799 to 1801, he served in Congress. He delivered the eulogy for Washington, which included the famous line, “first in war, first in peace, and first in the hearts of his countrymen.” Shortly after the War of 1812 began, Lee sustained severe injuries while trying to protect his friend, A. C. Hanson, the editor of the Baltimore Federal Republican, who had opposed the war. He never recovered from these injuries and died at General Nathanael Greene's residence on Cumberland Island, Georgia, on March 25, 1818.

Lee wrote valuable Memoirs of the War in the Southern Department (1812; 3rd ed., with memoir by Robert E. Lee, 1869).

Lee wrote valuable Memoirs of the War in the Southern Department (1812; 3rd ed., with memoir by Robert E. Lee, 1869).

LEE, JAMES PRINCE (1804-1869), English divine, was born in London on the 28th of July 1804, and was educated at St Paul’s school and at Trinity College, Cambridge, where he displayed exceptional ability as a classical scholar. After taking orders in 1830 he served under Thomas Arnold at Rugby school, and in 1838 was appointed head-master of King Edward’s school, Birmingham, where he had among his pupils E. W. Benson, J. B. Lightfoot and B. F. Westcott. In 1848 Lord John Russell nominated him as first bishop of the newly-constituted see of Manchester. His pedagogic manner bore somewhat irksomely on his clergy. He is best remembered for his splendid work in church extension; during his twenty-one years’ tenure of the see he consecrated 130 churches. He took a foremost part in founding the Manchester free library, and bequeathed his own valuable collection of books to Owens College. He died on the 24th of December 1869.

LEE, JAMES PRINCE (1804-1869), an English clergyman, was born in London on July 28, 1804. He was educated at St Paul’s School and Trinity College, Cambridge, where he showed remarkable talent as a classical scholar. After becoming ordained in 1830, he worked under Thomas Arnold at Rugby School, and in 1838, he was named headmaster of King Edward’s School in Birmingham, where his students included E. W. Benson, J. B. Lightfoot, and B. F. Westcott. In 1848, Lord John Russell appointed him as the first bishop of the newly established see of Manchester. His teaching style was somewhat irritating to his clergy. He is best remembered for his outstanding contributions to church expansion; during his twenty-one years as bishop, he consecrated 130 churches. He played a key role in founding the Manchester Free Library and left his valuable book collection to Owens College. He passed away on December 24, 1869.

A memorial sermon was preached by Archbishop E. W. Benson, and was published with biographical details by J. F. Wickenden and others.

A memorial sermon was delivered by Archbishop E. W. Benson and published with biographical details by J. F. Wickenden and others.

LEE, NATHANIEL (c. 1653-1692), English dramatist, son of Dr Richard Lee, a Presbyterian divine, was born probably in 1653. His father was rector of Hatfield, and held many preferments under the Commonwealth. He was chaplain to General Monk, afterwards duke of Albemarle, and after the Restoration he conformed to the Church of England, abjuring his former opinions, especially his approval of Charles I.’s execution. Nathaniel Lee was educated at Westminster school, and at Trinity College, Cambridge, taking his B.A. degree in 1668. Coming to London under the patronage, it is said, of the duke of Buckingham, he tried to earn his living as an actor, but though he was an admirable reader, his acute stage fright made acting impossible. His earliest play, Nero, Emperor of Rome, was acted in 1675 at Drury Lane. Two tragedies written in rhymed heroic couplets, in imitation of Dryden, followed in 1676—Sophonisba, or Hannibal’s Overthrow and Gloriana, or the Court of Augustus Caesar. Both are extravagant in design and treatment. Lee made his reputation in 1677 with a blank verse tragedy, The Rival Queens, or the Death of Alexander the Great. The play, which treats of the jealousy of Alexander’s first wife, Roxana, for his second wife, Statira, was, in spite of much 362 bombast, a favourite on the English stage down to the days of Edmund Kean. Mithridates, King of Pontus (acted 1678), Theodosius, or the Force of Love (acted 1680), Caesar Borgia (acted 1680)—an imitation of the worst blood and thunder Elizabethan tragedies—Lucius Junius Brutus, Father of His Country (acted 1681), and Constantine the Great (acted 1684) followed. The Princess of Cleve (1681) is a gross adaptation of Madame de La Fayette’s exquisite novel of that name. The Massacre of Paris (published 1690) was written about this time. Lee had given offence at court by his Lucius Junius Brutus, which had been suppressed after its third representation for some lines on Tarquin’s character that were taken to be a reflection on Charles II. He therefore joined with Dryden, who had already admitted him as a collaborator in an adaptation of Oedipus, in The Duke of Guise (1683), a play which directly advocated the Tory point of view. In it part of the Massacre of Paris was incorporated. Lee was now thirty years of age, and had already achieved a considerable reputation. But he had lived in the dissipated society of the earl of Rochester and his associates, and imitated their excesses. As he grew more disreputable, his patrons neglected him, and in 1684 his mind was completely unhinged. He spent five years in Bethlehem Hospital, and recovered his health. He died in a drunken fit in 1692, and was buried in St Clement Danes, Strand, on the 6th of May.

LEE, NATHANIEL (c. 1653-1692), English playwright, son of Dr. Richard Lee, a Presbyterian minister, was likely born in 1653. His father was the rector of Hatfield and held several positions during the Commonwealth. He served as chaplain to General Monk, who later became the Duke of Albemarle, and after the Restoration, he conformed to the Church of England, renouncing his previous beliefs, especially his support of the execution of Charles I. Nathaniel Lee was educated at Westminster School and Trinity College, Cambridge, where he earned his B.A. in 1668. Moving to London, reportedly under the patronage of the Duke of Buckingham, he attempted to make a living as an actor, but despite being an excellent reader, his severe stage fright made acting impossible. His first play, Nero, Emperor of Rome, was performed in 1675 at Drury Lane. Two tragedies written in rhymed heroic couplets, inspired by Dryden, followed in 1676—Sophonisba, or Hannibal’s Overthrow and Gloriana, or the Court of Augustus Caesar. Both are extravagant in design and style. Lee gained recognition in 1677 with a blank verse tragedy, The Rival Queens, or the Death of Alexander the Great. The play discusses the jealousy of Alexander’s first wife, Roxana, towards his second wife, Statira, and despite its excessive language, it remained popular on the English stage well into the time of Edmund Kean. Mithridates, King of Pontus (performed 1678), Theodosius, or the Force of Love (performed 1680), Caesar Borgia (performed 1680)—a poor imitator of the violent Elizabethan tragedies—Lucius Junius Brutus, Father of His Country (performed 1681), and Constantine the Great (performed 1684) followed. The Princess of Cleve (1681) is a crude adaptation of Madame de La Fayette’s beautiful novel of the same name. The Massacre of Paris (published 1690) was written around this time. Lee had angered the court with his Lucius Junius Brutus, which was banned after its third performance for lines about Tarquin that were viewed as criticism of Charles II. He then collaborated with Dryden, who had previously brought him on to help adapt Oedipus, on The Duke of Guise (1683), a play that explicitly promoted the Tory perspective. Parts of The Massacre of Paris were included in it. By this time, Lee was thirty years old and had already built a solid reputation. However, he had immersed himself in the debauched lifestyle of the Earl of Rochester and his circle, mimicking their extravagant behaviors. As his reputation declined, his supporters abandoned him, and in 1684, his mental state completely deteriorated. He spent five years in Bethlehem Hospital, where he regained his health. He died in a drunken episode in 1692 and was buried in St Clement Danes, Strand, on May 6.

Lee’s Dramatic Works were published in 1784. In spite of their extravagance, they contain many passages of great beauty.

Lee’s Dramatic Works were published in 1784. Despite their extravagance, they include many passages of significant beauty.

LEE, RICHARD HENRY (1732-1794), American statesman and orator, was born at Stratford, in Westmoreland county, Virginia, on the 20th of January 1732, and was one of six distinguished sons of Thomas Lee (d. 1750), a descendant of an old Cavalier family, the first representative of which in America was Richard Lee, who was a member of the privy council, and early in the reign of Charles I. emigrated to Virginia. Richard Henry Lee received an academic education in England, then spent a little time in travel, returned to Virginia in 1752, having come into possession of a fine property left him by his father, and for several years applied himself to varied studies. When twenty-five he was appointed justice of the peace of Westmoreland county, and in the same year was chosen a member of the Virginia House of Burgesses, in which he served from 1758 to 1775. He kept a diffident silence during two sessions, his first speech being in strong opposition to slavery, which he proposed to discourage and eventually to abolish, by imposing a heavy tax on all further importations. He early allied himself with the Patriot or Whig element in Virginia, and in the years immediately preceding the War of Independence was conspicuous as an opponent of the arbitrary measures of the British ministry. In 1768, in a letter to John Dickinson of Pennsylvania, he suggested a private correspondence among the friends of liberty in the different colonies, and in 1773 he became a member of the Virginia Committee of Correspondence.

LEE, RICHARD HENRY (1732-1794), American statesman and speaker, was born in Stratford, Westmoreland County, Virginia, on January 20, 1732. He was one of six notable sons of Thomas Lee (d. 1750), who came from an old Cavalier family; the first member of this family in America was Richard Lee, who served on the privy council and emigrated to Virginia early in the reign of Charles I. Richard Henry Lee received his education in England, traveled for a while, and returned to Virginia in 1752 after inheriting valuable property from his father. He engaged in various studies for several years. At the age of twenty-five, he was appointed as a justice of the peace for Westmoreland County and was elected to the Virginia House of Burgesses, serving from 1758 to 1775. He remained quietly reserved during his first two sessions, making his first speech strongly opposing slavery, which he sought to discourage and eventually abolish by imposing a significant tax on all further imports. He aligned himself with the Patriot or Whig faction in Virginia and became well-known as an opponent of the British government's oppressive measures in the years leading up to the War of Independence. In 1768, he suggested creating private correspondence among liberty advocates in different colonies in a letter to John Dickinson of Pennsylvania, and in 1773, he joined the Virginia Committee of Correspondence.

Lee was one of the delegates from Virginia to the first Continental Congress at Philadelphia in 1774, and prepared the address to the people of British America, and the second address to the people of Great Britain, which are among the most effective papers of the time. In accordance with instructions given by the Virginia House of Burgesses, Lee introduced in Congress, on the 7th of June 1776, the following famous resolutions: (1) “that these united colonies are, and of right ought to be, free and independent states, that they are absolved from all allegiance to the British crown, and that all political connexion between them and the state of Great Britain is, and ought to be, totally dissolved”; (2) “that it is expedient to take the most effectual measures for forming foreign alliances”; and (3) “that a plan of confederation be prepared and transmitted to the respective colonies for their consideration and approbation.” After debating the first of these resolutions for three days, Congress resolved that the further consideration of it should be postponed until the 1st of July, but that a committee should be appointed to prepare a declaration of independence. The illness of Lee’s wife prevented him from being a member of that committee, but his first resolution was adopted on the 2nd of July, and the Declaration of Independence, prepared principally by Thomas Jefferson, was adopted two days later. Lee was in Congress from 1774 to 1780, and was especially prominent in connexion with foreign affairs. He was a member of the Virginia House of Delegates in 1777, 1780-1784 and 1786-1787; was in Congress again from 1784 to 1787, being president in 1784-1786; and was one of the first United States senators chosen from Virginia after the adoption of the Federal constitution. Though strongly opposed to the adoption of that constitution, owing to what he regarded as its dangerous infringements upon the independent power of the states, he accepted the place of senator in hope of bringing about amendments, and proposed the Tenth Amendment in substantially the form in which it was adopted. He became a warm supporter of Washington’s administration, and his prejudices against the constitution were largely removed by its working in practice. He retired from public life in 1792, and died at Chantilly, in Westmoreland county, on the 19th of June 1794.

Lee was one of the delegates from Virginia to the first Continental Congress in Philadelphia in 1774, and he prepared the address to the people of British America, as well as the second address to the people of Great Britain, which are among the most impactful documents of the time. Following instructions from the Virginia House of Burgesses, Lee introduced the following famous resolutions in Congress on June 7, 1776: (1) “that these united colonies are, and of right ought to be, free and independent states, that they are absolved from all allegiance to the British crown, and that all political connection between them and the state of Great Britain is, and ought to be, totally dissolved”; (2) “that it is necessary to take the most effective measures to form foreign alliances”; and (3) “that a plan of confederation be prepared and sent to the respective colonies for their consideration and approval.” After debating the first resolution for three days, Congress decided to postpone further discussion until July 1, but appointed a committee to prepare a declaration of independence. Lee’s wife was ill, which prevented him from being part of that committee, but his first resolution was adopted on July 2, and the Declaration of Independence, mainly authored by Thomas Jefferson, was adopted two days later. Lee served in Congress from 1774 to 1780 and was especially prominent in connection with foreign affairs. He was a member of the Virginia House of Delegates in 1777, 1780-1784, and 1786-1787; he returned to Congress from 1784 to 1787, serving as president from 1784-1786; and he was one of the first United States senators elected from Virginia after the Federal Constitution was adopted. Even though he strongly opposed the adoption of that constitution, due to what he saw as its dangerous encroachments on the independent power of the states, he accepted the Senate position in hopes of achieving amendments and proposed the Tenth Amendment in nearly the form it was ultimately adopted. He became a strong supporter of Washington’s administration, and his initial reservations about the constitution lessened considerably due to its practical implementation. He stepped back from public life in 1792 and passed away in Chantilly, Westmoreland County, on June 19, 1794.

See the Life (Philadelphia, 1825), by his grandson, R. H. Lee; and Letters (New York, 1910), edited by J. C. Ballagh.

See the Life (Philadelphia, 1825), by his grandson, R. H. Lee; and Letters (New York, 1910), edited by J. C. Ballagh.

His brother, William Lee (1739-1795), was a diplomatist during the War of Independence. He accompanied his brother, Arthur Lee (q.v.), to England in 1766 to engage in mercantile pursuits, joined the Wilkes faction, and in 1775 was elected an alderman of London, then a life-position. In April 1777, however, he received notice of his appointment by the Committee of Secret Correspondence in America to act with Thomas Morris as commercial agent at Nantes. He went to Paris and became involved in his brother’s opposition to Franklin and Deane. In May 1777 Congress chose William Lee commissioner to the courts of Vienna and Berlin, but he gained recognition at neither. In September 1778, however, while at Aix-la-Chapelle, he negotiated a plan of a treaty with Jan de Neufville, who represented Van Berckel, pensionary of Amsterdam. It was a copy of this proposed treaty which, on falling into the hands of the British on the capture of Henry Laurens, the duly appointed minister to the Netherlands, led to Great Britain’s declaration of war against the Netherlands in December 1780. Lee was recalled from his mission to Vienna and Berlin in June 1779, without being required to return to America. He resigned his post as an alderman of London in January 1780, and returned to Virginia about 1784.

His brother, William Lee (1739-1795), was a diplomat during the War of Independence. He traveled with his brother, Arthur Lee (q.v.), to England in 1766 to get into business, joined the Wilkes faction, and in 1775 was elected an alderman of London, a position for life. However, in April 1777, he received notice of his appointment by the Committee of Secret Correspondence in America to work with Thomas Morris as a commercial agent in Nantes. He went to Paris and got involved in his brother’s opposition to Franklin and Deane. In May 1777, Congress selected William Lee as commissioner to the courts of Vienna and Berlin, but he wasn't recognized by either. In September 1778, while in Aix-la-Chapelle, he negotiated a draft of a treaty with Jan de Neufville, who represented Van Berckel, the pensionary of Amsterdam. A copy of this proposed treaty, which fell into British hands after the capture of Henry Laurens, the appointed minister to the Netherlands, resulted in Great Britain declaring war against the Netherlands in December 1780. Lee was recalled from his mission to Vienna and Berlin in June 1779, without needing to return to America. He resigned his position as an alderman of London in January 1780 and returned to Virginia around 1784.

See Letters of William Lee, edited by W. C. Ford (Brooklyn, 1891).

See Letters of William Lee, edited by W. C. Ford (Brooklyn, 1891).

Another brother, Francis Lightfoot Lee (1734-1797), was a member of the Virginia House of Burgesses in 1770-1775. In 1775-1779 he was a delegate to the Continental Congress, and as such signed the Declaration of Independence. He served on the committee which drafted the Articles of Confederation, and contended that there should be no treaty of peace with Great Britain which did not grant to the United States both the right to the Newfoundland fisheries and the free navigation of the Mississippi. After retiring from Congress he served in 1780-1782 in the Virginia Senate.

Another brother, Francis Lightfoot Lee (1734-1797), was a member of the Virginia House of Burgesses from 1770 to 1775. From 1775 to 1779, he was a delegate to the Continental Congress and signed the Declaration of Independence. He was part of the committee that drafted the Articles of Confederation and argued that there should be no peace treaty with Great Britain that didn't give the United States both the right to the Newfoundland fisheries and the freedom to navigate the Mississippi. After leaving Congress, he served in the Virginia Senate from 1780 to 1782.

LEE, ROBERT EDWARD (1807-1870), American soldier, general in the Confederate States army, was the youngest son of major-general Henry Lee, called “Light Horse Harry.” He was born at Stratford, Westmoreland county, Virginia, on the 19th of January 1807, and entered West Point in 1825. Graduating four years later second in his class, he was given a commission in the U.S. Engineer Corps. In 1831 he married Mary, daughter of G. W. P. Custis, the adopted son of Washington and the grandson of Mrs Washington. In 1836 he became first lieutenant, and in 1838 captain. In this rank he took part in the Mexican War, repeatedly winning distinction for conduct and bravery. He received the brevets of major for Cerro Gordo, lieut.-colonel for Contreras-Churubusco and colonel for Chapultepec. After the war he was employed in engineer work at Washington and Baltimore, during which time, as before the war, he resided on the great Arlington estate, near Washington, which had come to him through his wife. In 1852 he was appointed superintendent of West Point, and during his three years here he carried out many important changes in the academy. Under him 363 as cadets were his son G. W. Custis Lee, his nephew, Fitzhugh Lee and J. E. B. Stuart, all of whom became general officers in the Civil War. In 1855 he was appointed as lieut.-colonel to the 2nd Cavalry, commanded by Colonel Sidney Johnston, with whom he served against the Indians of the Texas border. In 1859, while at Arlington on leave, he was summoned to command the United States troops sent to deal with the John Brown raid on Harper’s Ferry. In March 1861 he was made colonel of the 1st U.S. Cavalry; but his career in the old army ended with the secession of Virginia in the following month. Lee was strongly averse to secession, but felt obliged to conform to the action of his own state. The Federal authorities offered Lee the command of the field army about to invade the South, which he refused. Resigning his commission, he made his way to Richmond and was at once made a major-general in the Virginian forces. A few weeks later he became a brigadier-general (then the highest rank) in the Confederate service.

LEE, ROBERT EDWARD (1807-1870), American soldier, general in the Confederate States Army, was the youngest son of Major General Henry Lee, known as “Light Horse Harry.” He was born at Stratford, Westmoreland County, Virginia, on January 19, 1807, and entered West Point in 1825. Graduating four years later as second in his class, he was commissioned in the U.S. Engineer Corps. In 1831, he married Mary, the daughter of G. W. P. Custis, who was the adopted son of Washington and the grandson of Mrs. Washington. In 1836, he became first lieutenant, and in 1838, captain. In this rank, he participated in the Mexican War, consistently earning recognition for his conduct and bravery. He received the brevets of major for Cerro Gordo, lieutenant colonel for Contreras-Churubusco, and colonel for Chapultepec. After the war, he worked in engineering projects in Washington and Baltimore, during which time, like before the war, he lived on the large Arlington estate near Washington, which he inherited through his wife. In 1852, he was appointed superintendent of West Point, and during his three years there, he implemented many significant changes at the academy. Among his cadets were his son G. W. Custis Lee, his nephew Fitzhugh Lee, and J. E. B. Stuart, all of whom rose to the rank of general officers in the Civil War. In 1855, he was appointed as lieutenant colonel to the 2nd Cavalry, commanded by Colonel Sidney Johnston, with whom he served against the Indians on the Texas border. In 1859, while at Arlington on leave, he was called to command the U.S. troops sent to address the John Brown raid at Harper’s Ferry. In March 1861, he was made colonel of the 1st U.S. Cavalry; however, his career in the old army ended with Virginia's secession the following month. Lee was strongly opposed to secession but felt compelled to follow the actions of his home state. The Federal authorities offered Lee the command of the field army preparing to invade the South, which he declined. He resigned his commission and traveled to Richmond, where he was immediately appointed a major general in the Virginian forces. A few weeks later, he became a brigadier general (the highest rank at the time) in the Confederate service.

The military operations with which the great Civil War opened in 1861 were directed by President Davis and General Lee. Lee was personally in charge of the unsuccessful West Virginian operations in the autumn, and, having been made a full general on the 31st of August, during the winter he devoted his experience as an engineer to the fortification and general defence of the Atlantic coast. Thence, when the well-drilled Army of the Potomac was about to descend upon Richmond, he was hurriedly recalled to Richmond. General Johnston was wounded at the battle of Fair Oaks (Seven Pines) on the 31st of May 1862, and General Robert E. Lee was assigned to the command of the famous Army of Northern Virginia which for the next three years “carried the rebellion on its bayonets.” Little can be said of Lee’s career as a commander-in-chief that is not an integral part of the history of the Civil War. His first success was the “Seven Days’ Battle” (q.v.) in which he stopped McClellan’s advance; this was quickly followed up by the crushing defeat of the Federal army under Pope, the invasion of Maryland and the sanguinary and indecisive battle of the Antietam (q.v.). The year ended with another great victory at Fredericksburg (q.v.). Chancellorsville (see Wilderness), won against odds of two to one, and the great three days’ battle of Gettysburg (q.v.), where for the first time fortune turned decisively against the Confederates, were the chief events of 1863. In the autumn Lee fought a war of manœuvre against General Meade. The tremendous struggle of 1864 between Lee and Grant included the battles of the Wilderness (q.v.), Spottsylvania, North Anna, Cold Harbor and the long siege of Petersburg (q.v.), in which, almost invariably, Lee was locally successful. But the steady pressure of his unrelenting opponent slowly wore down his strength. At last with not more than one man to oppose to Grant’s three he was compelled to break out of his Petersburg lines (April 1865). A series of heavy combats revealed his purpose, and Grant pursued the dwindling remnants of Lee’s army to the westward. Headed off by the Federal cavalry, and pressed closely in rear by Grant’s main body, General Lee had no alternative but to surrender. At Appomattox Court House, on the 9th of April, the career of the Army of Northern Virginia came to an end. Lee’s farewell order was issued on the following day, and within a few weeks the Confederacy was at an end. For a few months Lee lived quietly in Powhatan county, making his formal submission to the Federal authorities and urging on his own people acceptance of the new conditions. In August he was offered, and accepted, the presidency of Washington College, Lexington (now Washington and Lee University), a post which he occupied until his death on the 12th of October 1870. He was buried in the college grounds.

The military operations that kicked off the great Civil War in 1861 were led by President Davis and General Lee. Lee was personally in charge of the unsuccessful West Virginia operations in the fall, and after being promoted to full general on August 31, he spent the winter using his engineering skills to strengthen and defend the Atlantic coast. When the well-trained Army of the Potomac was set to advance on Richmond, he was quickly called back to the city. General Johnston was wounded at the Battle of Fair Oaks (Seven Pines) on May 31, 1862, and General Robert E. Lee took command of the famous Army of Northern Virginia, which for the next three years "carried the rebellion on its bayonets." There's hardly anything that can be said about Lee's career as a commander-in-chief that isn't integral to the history of the Civil War. His first major success was the "Seven Days’ Battle" (q.v.) where he halted McClellan’s advance; this was soon followed by the crushing defeat of the Federal army under Pope, the invasion of Maryland, and the bloody and inconclusive Battle of Antietam (q.v.). The year wrapped up with another significant victory at Fredericksburg (q.v.). Chancellorsville (see Wilderness), won against odds of two to one, and the monumental three-day Battle of Gettysburg (q.v.), where for the first time luck turned against the Confederates, were the major events of 1863. In the fall, Lee engaged in a war of maneuver against General Meade. The intense struggle of 1864 between Lee and Grant included the battles of the Wilderness (q.v.), Spottsylvania, North Anna, Cold Harbor, and the lengthy siege of Petersburg (q.v.), where Lee was usually successful on a local level. However, the constant pressure from his relentless opponent gradually drained his resources. Eventually, with about one soldier against Grant’s three, he had no choice but to break out of his Petersburg lines in April 1865. A series of intense battles exposed his intentions, and Grant pursued the dwindling remnants of Lee’s army westward. Blocked by Federal cavalry and closely chased by Grant’s main force, General Lee had no option but to surrender. At Appomattox Court House, on April 9, the career of the Army of Northern Virginia came to an end. Lee’s farewell order was issued the next day, and within a few weeks, the Confederacy was dissolved. For a few months, Lee lived quietly in Powhatan County, formally submitting to Federal authorities and urging his own people to accept the new circumstances. In August, he was offered and accepted the presidency of Washington College, Lexington (now Washington and Lee University), a position he held until his death on October 12, 1870. He was buried on the college grounds.

For the events of Lee’s military career briefly indicated in this notice the reader is referred to the articles American Civil War, &c. By his achievements he won a high place amongst the great generals of history. Though hampered by lack of materials and by political necessities, his strategy was daring always, and he never hesitated to take the gravest risks. On the field of battle he was as energetic in attack as he was constant in defence, and his personal influence over the men whom he led was extraordinary. No student of the American Civil War can fail to notice how the influence of Lee dominated the course of the struggle, and his surpassing ability was never more conspicuously shown than in the last hopeless stages of the contest. The personal history of Lee is lost in the history of the great crisis of America’s national life; friends and foes alike acknowledged the purity of his motives, the virtues of his private life, his earnest Christianity and the unrepining loyalty with which he accepted the ruin of his party.

For a brief overview of Lee’s military career mentioned in this notice, readers can refer to the articles American Civil War, etc. His accomplishments earned him a prominent spot among the great generals in history. Despite facing shortages of resources and political challenges, his tactics were always bold, and he never shied away from taking significant risks. On the battlefield, he was as vigorous in offensive maneuvers as he was steady in defense, and he had an extraordinary personal influence over the troops he led. Anyone studying the American Civil War will notice how Lee’s influence shaped the course of the conflict, and his exceptional skills were never more clearly demonstrated than during the final, desperate phases of the battle. Lee's personal story is intertwined with the history of this pivotal moment in America’s national life; both friends and adversaries recognized the integrity of his intentions, the virtues of his private life, his sincere Christian faith, and the unwavering loyalty with which he accepted the downfall of his cause.

See A. L. Long, Memoirs of Robert E. Lee (New York, 1886); Fitzhugh Lee, General Lee (New York, 1894, “Great Commanders” series); R. A. Brock, General Robert E. Lee (Washington, 1904); R. E. Lee, Recollections and Letters of General R. E. Lee (London, 1904); H. A. White, Lee (“Heroes of the Nations”) (1897); P. A. Bruce, Robert E. Lee (1907); T. N. Page, Lee (1909); W. H. Taylor, Four Years with General Lee; J. W. Jones, Personal Reminiscences of Robert E. Lee (1874).

See A. L. Long, Memoirs of Robert E. Lee (New York, 1886); Fitzhugh Lee, General Lee (New York, 1894, “Great Commanders” series); R. A. Brock, General Robert E. Lee (Washington, 1904); R. E. Lee, Recollections and Letters of General R. E. Lee (London, 1904); H. A. White, Lee (“Heroes of the Nations”) (1897); P. A. Bruce, Robert E. Lee (1907); T. N. Page, Lee (1909); W. H. Taylor, Four Years with General Lee; J. W. Jones, Personal Reminiscences of Robert E. Lee (1874).

LEE (or Legh) ROWLAND (d. 1543), English bishop, belonged to a Northumberland family and was educated at Cambridge. Having entered the Church he obtained several livings owing to the favour of Cardinal Wolsey; after Wolsey’s fall he rose high in the esteem of Henry VIII. and of Thomas Cromwell, serving both king and minister in the business of suppressing the monasteries, and he is said to have celebrated Henry’s secret marriage with Anne Boleyn in January 1533. Whether this be so or not, Lee took part in preparing for the divorce proceedings against Catherine of Aragon, and in January 1534 he was elected bishop of Coventry and Lichfield, or Chester as the see was often called, taking at his consecration the new oath to the king as head of the English Church and not seeking confirmation from the pope. As bishop he remained in Henry’s personal service, endeavouring to establish the legality of his marriage with Anne, until May 1534, when he was appointed lord president of the council in the marches of Wales. At this time the Welsh marches were in a very disorderly condition. Lee acted in a stern and energetic fashion, holding courts, sentencing many offenders to death and overcoming the hostility of the English border lords. After some years of hard and successful work in this capacity, “the last survivor of the old martial prelates, fitter for harness than for bishops’ robes, for a court of justice than a court of theology,” died at Shrewsbury in June 1543. Many letters from Lee to Cromwell are preserved in the Record Office, London; these throw much light on the bishop’s career and on the lawless condition of the Welsh marches in his time.

LEE (or Legh) ROWLAND (d. 1543), an English bishop, came from a family in Northumberland and studied at Cambridge. After joining the Church, he secured several positions because of Cardinal Wolsey's support; however, after Wolsey's downfall, he gained favor with Henry VIII and Thomas Cromwell, assisting both in the efforts to dissolve the monasteries. He is said to have officiated Henry’s secret marriage to Anne Boleyn in January 1533. Regardless of that claim, Lee was involved in preparing for the divorce proceedings against Catherine of Aragon, and in January 1534, he became the bishop of Coventry and Lichfield, or Chester as it was often referred to, taking the new oath to the king as the head of the English Church without seeking confirmation from the pope. As bishop, he continued to serve Henry personally, working to legitimize his marriage to Anne until May 1534, when he was appointed lord president of the council in the marches of Wales. At that time, the Welsh marches were quite chaotic. Lee acted decisively and vigorously, holding courts, sentencing many offenders to death, and overcoming the resistance of the English border lords. After several years of challenging yet effective work in this role, “the last survivor of the old martial prelates, more suited for armor than bishops’ robes, more appropriate for a court of justice than a court of theology,” passed away in Shrewsbury in June 1543. Many letters from Lee to Cromwell are kept in the Record Office, London; these provide significant insight into the bishop’s career and the lawless state of the Welsh marches during his time.

One of his contemporaries was Edward Lee (c. 1482-1544) archbishop of York, famous for his attack on Erasmus, who replied to him in his Epistolae aliquot eruditorum virorum. Like Rowland, Edward was useful to Henry VIII. in the matter of the divorce of Catherine of Aragon, and was sent by the king on embassies to the emperor Charles V. and to Pope Clement VII. In 1531 he became archbishop of York, but he came under suspicion as one who disliked the king’s new position as head of the English Church. At Pontefract in 1536, during the Pilgrimage of Grace, the archbishop was compelled to join the rebels, but he did not sympathize with the rising and in 1539 he spoke in parliament in favour of the six articles of religion. Lee, who was the last archbishop of York to coin money, died on the 13th of September 1544.

One of his contemporaries was Edward Lee (c. 1482-1544), the Archbishop of York, known for his criticism of Erasmus, who responded to him in his Epistolae aliquot eruditorum virorum. Like Rowland, Edward was helpful to Henry VIII regarding the divorce from Catherine of Aragon, and the king sent him on missions to Emperor Charles V and Pope Clement VII. In 1531, he became Archbishop of York, but he was suspected of opposing the king’s new role as the head of the English Church. At Pontefract in 1536, during the Pilgrimage of Grace, the archbishop was forced to join the rebels, but he didn’t support the uprising, and in 1539, he spoke in parliament in favor of the six articles of religion. Lee, who was the last Archbishop of York to mint his own coins, died on September 13, 1544.

LEE, SIDNEY (1859-  ), English man of letters, was born in London on the 5th of December 1859. He was educated at the City of London school, and at Balliol College, Oxford, where he graduated in modern history in 1882. In the next year he became assistant-editor of the Dictionary of National Biography. In 1890 he was made joint-editor, and on the retirement of Sir Leslie Stephen in 1891 succeeded him as editor. He was himself a voluminous contributor to the work, writing some 800 articles, mainly on Elizabethan authors or statesmen. While he was still at Balliol he wrote two articles on Shakespearian questions, which were printed in the Gentleman’s Magazine, and in 1884 he published a book on Stratford-on-Avon. His article on Shakespeare in the fifty-first volume (1897) of the Dictionary of National Biography formed the basis of his Life of William Shakespeare (1898), which reached its fifth edition in 1905. Mr Lee edited in 1902 the Oxford facsimile edition of the first folio of Shakespeare’s Comedies, Histories and Tragedies, followed in 1902 and 1904 by supplementary volumes giving details of extant copies, and in 1906 by a complete edition of 364 Shakespeare’s Works. Besides editions of English classics his works include a Life of Queen Victoria (1902), Great Englishmen of the Sixteenth Century (1904), based on his Lowell Institute lectures at Boston, Mass., in 1903, and Shakespeare and the Modern Stage (1906).

LEE, SIDNEY (1859-  ), English author, was born in London on December 5, 1859. He was educated at the City of London School and at Balliol College, Oxford, where he graduated with a degree in modern history in 1882. The following year, he became the assistant editor of the Dictionary of National Biography. In 1890, he was promoted to joint editor, and after Sir Leslie Stephen retired in 1891, Lee took over as editor. He was a prolific contributor to this work, writing around 800 articles, mainly on Elizabethan authors or statesmen. While still at Balliol, he wrote two articles on Shakespearean topics, published in the Gentleman’s Magazine, and in 1884 he published a book about Stratford-on-Avon. His article on Shakespeare in the fifty-first volume (1897) of the Dictionary of National Biography served as the foundation for his Life of William Shakespeare (1898), which reached its fifth edition in 1905. In 1902, Mr. Lee edited the Oxford facsimile edition of the first folio of Shakespeare’s Comedies, Histories and Tragedies, followed by supplementary volumes in 1902 and 1904 detailing existing copies, and in 1906, he produced a complete edition of 364 Shakespeare’s Works. In addition to editions of English classics, his works include a Life of Queen Victoria (1902), Great Englishmen of the Sixteenth Century (1904), based on his Lowell Institute lectures in Boston, Mass., in 1903, and Shakespeare and the Modern Stage (1906).

LEE, SOPHIA (1750-1824), English novelist and dramatist, daughter of John Lee (d. 1781), actor and theatrical manager, was born in London. Her first piece, The Chapter of Accidents, a one-act-opera based on Diderot’s Père de famille, was produced by George Colman at the Haymarket Theatre on the 5th of August 1780. The proceeds were spent in establishing a school at Bath, where Miss Lee made a home for her sisters. Her subsequent productions included The Recess, or a Tale of other Times (1785), a historical romance; and Almeyda, Queen of Grenada (1796), a tragedy in blank verse; she also contributed to her sister’s Canterbury Tales (1797). She died at her house near Clifton on the 13th of March 1824.

LEE, SOPHIA (1750-1824), English novelist and playwright, daughter of John Lee (d. 1781), actor and theater manager, was born in London. Her first work, The Chapter of Accidents, a one-act opera based on Diderot’s Père de famille, was produced by George Colman at the Haymarket Theatre on August 5, 1780. The proceeds went towards establishing a school in Bath, where Miss Lee provided a home for her sisters. Her later works included The Recess, or a Tale of other Times (1785), a historical romance; and Almeyda, Queen of Grenada (1796), a tragedy in blank verse; she also contributed to her sister’s Canterbury Tales (1797). She passed away at her home near Clifton on March 13, 1824.

Her sister, Harriet Lee (1757-1851), published in 1786 a novel written in letters, The Errors of Innocence. Clara Lennox followed in 1797. Her chief work is the Canterbury Tales (1797-1805), a series of twelve stories which became very popular. Lord Byron dramatized one of the tales, “Kruitzner,” as Werner, or the Inheritance. She died at Clifton on the 1st of August 1851.

Her sister, Harriet Lee (1757-1851), published a novel written in letters, The Errors of Innocence, in 1786. Clara Lennox followed in 1797. Her main work is the Canterbury Tales (1797-1805), a series of twelve stories that became very popular. Lord Byron adapted one of the tales, “Kruitzner,” into Werner, or the Inheritance. She passed away in Clifton on August 1, 1851.

LEE, STEPHEN DILL (1833-1908), Confederate general in the American Civil War, came of a family distinguished in the history of South Carolina, and was born at Charleston, S.C., on the 22nd of September 1833. Graduating from West Point in 1854, he served for seven years in the United States army and resigned in 1861 on the secession of South Carolina. He was aide de camp to General Beauregard in the attack on Fort Sumter, and captain commanding a light battery in General Johnston’s army later in the year 1861. Thereafter, by successive steps, each gained by distinguished conduct on the field of battle, he rose to the rank of brigadier-general in November 1862, being ordered to take command of defences at Vicksburg. He served at this place with great credit until its surrender to General Grant in July 1863, and on becoming a prisoner of war, he was immediately exchanged and promoted major-general. His regimental service had been chiefly with artillery, but he had generally worked with and at times commanded cavalry, and he was now assigned to command the troops of that arm in the south-western theatre of war. After harassing, as far as his limited numbers permitted, the advance of Sherman’s column on Meridian, he took General Polk’s place as commander of the department of Mississippi. In June 1864, on Hood’s promotion to command the Army of Tennessee, S. D. Lee was made a lieutenant-general and assigned to command Hood’s old corps in that army. He fought at Atlanta and Jonesboro and in the skirmishing and manœuvring along middle Tennessee which ended in the great crisis of Nashville and the “March to the Sea.” Lee’s corps accompanied Hood in the bold advance to Nashville, and fought in the battles of Franklin and Nashville, after which, in the rout of the Confederate army Lee kept his troops closed up and well in hand, and for three consecutive days formed the fighting rearguard of the otherwise disintegrated army. Lee was himself wounded, but did not give up the command until an organized rearguard took over the post of danger. On recovery he joined General J. E. Johnston in North Carolina, and he surrendered with Johnston in April 1865. After the war he settled in Mississippi, which was his wife’s state and during the greater part of the war his own territorial command, and devoted himself to planting. He was president of the Agricultural and Mechanical College of Mississippi from 1880 to 1899, took some part in state politics and was an active member—at the time of his death commander-in-chief—of the “United Confederate Veterans” society. He died at Vicksburg on the 28th of May 1908.

LEE, STEPHEN DILL (1833-1908) was a Confederate general during the American Civil War, born into a prominent family in South Carolina in Charleston, S.C., on September 22, 1833. He graduated from West Point in 1854 and served in the United States Army for seven years before resigning in 1861 when South Carolina seceded. He was an aide to General Beauregard during the attack on Fort Sumter and later commanded a light battery in General Johnston’s army in 1861. After demonstrating distinguished conduct in battle, he rose to brigadier-general by November 1862 and was put in charge of defenses at Vicksburg. He served there with great acclaim until it surrendered to General Grant in July 1863. Upon becoming a prisoner of war, he was quickly exchanged and promoted to major-general. Although primarily serving with artillery, he often worked with and sometimes commanded cavalry, and was assigned to lead those troops in the southwestern theater of war. After inflicting as much disruption as he could on Sherman’s advance toward Meridian, he replaced General Polk as commander of the department of Mississippi. In June 1864, when Hood took command of the Army of Tennessee, S. D. Lee was promoted to lieutenant-general and given command of Hood’s old corps. He participated in battles at Atlanta and Jonesboro and in the movements in middle Tennessee that culminated in the critical battle of Nashville and the “March to the Sea.” Lee’s corps accompanied Hood in the risky advance to Nashville, engaging in the battles of Franklin and Nashville. After the Confederate army was routed, Lee maintained his troops in good order and served as the fighting rearguard for three consecutive days amidst a disorganized army. Although he was wounded, he didn’t relinquish command until an organized rearguard took over the critical position. Once he recovered, he joined General J. E. Johnston in North Carolina and surrendered with Johnston in April 1865. Following the war, he settled in Mississippi, his wife’s home state and his own area of command during much of the war, and focused on farming. He was president of the Agricultural and Mechanical College of Mississippi from 1880 to 1899, participated in state politics, and was an active member of the “United Confederate Veterans” society, serving as commander-in-chief at the time of his death. He passed away in Vicksburg on May 28, 1908.

LEE, a township of Berkshire county, in western Massachusetts, U.S.A. Pop. (1900) 3596; (1905) 3972; (1910) 4106. The township is traversed by the New York, New Haven & Hartford railway, covers an area of 22½ sq. m., and includes the village of Lee, 10 m. S. of Pittsfield, East Lee, adjoining it on the S.E., and South Lee, about 3 m. to the S.W. Lee and South Lee are on, and East Lee is near, the Housatonic river. The eastern part of the township is generally hilly, reaching a maximum altitude of about 2200 ft., and there are two considerable bodies of water—Laurel Lake in the N.W. (partly in Lenox) and Goose Pond, in the S.E. (partly in Tyringham). The region is healthy as well as beautiful, and is much frequented as a summer resort. Memorial Hall was built in memory of the soldiers from Lee who died during the Civil War. The chief manufactures are paper and wire, and from the quarries near the village of Lee is obtained an excellent quality of marble; these quarries furnished the marble for the extension of the Capitol at Washington, for St Patrick’s cathedral in New York City and for the Lee High School and the Lee Public Library (1908). Lime is quarried in the township. Lee was formerly a paper-manufacturing place of great importance. The first paper mill in the township was built in South Lee in 1806, and for a time more paper was made in Lee than in any other place in the United States; the Housatonic Mill in Lee was probably the first (1867) in the United States to manufacture paper from wood pulp.

LEE, is a town in Berkshire County, western Massachusetts, U.S.A. Population: (1900) 3,596; (1905) 3,972; (1910) 4,106. The town is crossed by the New York, New Haven & Hartford railway, covers an area of 22.5 sq. miles, and includes the village of Lee, located 10 miles south of Pittsfield, as well as East Lee, which borders it to the southeast, and South Lee, about 3 miles southwest. Lee and South Lee are situated on the Housatonic River, with East Lee nearby. The eastern part of the township is mostly hilly, reaching a height of about 2,200 feet, and features two significant bodies of water—Laurel Lake in the northwest (partly in Lenox) and Goose Pond in the southeast (partly in Tyringham). The area is both healthy and attractive, making it a popular summer destination. Memorial Hall was constructed to honor the soldiers from Lee who died during the Civil War. The main industries here are paper and wire production, and the quarries near the village of Lee produce high-quality marble; this marble was used for the expansion of the Capitol in Washington, St. Patrick’s Cathedral in New York City, and the Lee High School and the Lee Public Library (1908). Lime is also mined in the township. Lee was once a major center for paper manufacturing. The first paper mill in the township was established in South Lee in 1806, and for a time, more paper was produced in Lee than anywhere else in the United States; the Housatonic Mill in Lee was likely the first in the nation (established in 1867) to make paper from wood pulp.

The first settlement within the present township of Lee was made in 1760. The township was formed from parts of Great Barrington and Washington, was incorporated in 1777 and was named in honour of General Charles Lee (1731-1782). In the autumn of 1786 there was an encounter near the village of East Lee between about 250 adherents of Daniel Shays (many of them from Lee township) and a body of state troops under General John Paterson, wherein the Shays contingent paraded a bogus cannon (made of a yarn beam) with such effect that the state troops fled.

The first settlement in what is now Lee happened in 1760. The township was created from sections of Great Barrington and Washington, was incorporated in 1777, and was named after General Charles Lee (1731-1782). In the fall of 1786, there was a confrontation near the village of East Lee between around 250 supporters of Daniel Shays (many of them from Lee) and a group of state troops led by General John Paterson. The Shays' group displayed a fake cannon (made from a yarn beam) so convincingly that the state troops ran away.

See Amory Gale, History of the Town of Lee (Lee, 1854), and Lee, The Centennial Celebration and Centennial History of the Town of Lee (Springfield, Mass., 1878), compiled by Charles M. Hyde and Alexander Hyde.

See Amory Gale, History of the Town of Lee (Lee, 1854), and Lee, The Centennial Celebration and Centennial History of the Town of Lee (Springfield, Mass., 1878), compiled by Charles M. Hyde and Alexander Hyde.

LEE. (1) (In O. Eng. hléo; cf. the pronunciation lew-ward of “leeward”; the word appears in several Teutonic languages; cf. Dutch lij, Dan. lae), properly a shelter or protection, chiefly used as a nautical term for that side of a ship, land, &c., which is farthest from the wind, hence a “lee shore,” land under the lee of a ship, i.e. one on which the wind blows directly and which is unsheltered. A ship is said to make “leeway” when she drifts laterally away from her course. (2) A word now always used in the plural “lees,” meaning dregs, sediment, particularly of wine. It comes through the O. Fr. lie from a Gaulish Lat. lia, and is probably of Celtic origin.

LEE. (1) (In Old English hléo; compare the pronunciation lew-ward of “leeward”; the word appears in several Germanic languages; compare Dutch lij, Danish lae), originally a shelter or protection, mainly used as a nautical term for the side of a ship, land, etc., that is farthest from the wind, hence a “lee shore,” land that is sheltered from the wind by the ship, i.e. one that is exposed directly to the wind and is unprotected. A ship is said to make “leeway” when it drifts sideways away from its course. (2) A word now always used in the plural “lees,” referring to dregs, sediment, especially of wine. It comes through Old French lie from a Gaulish Latin lia, and is likely of Celtic origin.

LEECH, JOHN (1817-1864), English caricaturist, was born in London on the 29th of August 1817. His father, a native of Ireland, was the landlord of the London Coffee House on Ludgate Hill, “a man,” on the testimony of those who knew him, “of fine culture, a profound Shakespearian, and a thorough gentleman.” His mother was descended from the family of the famous Richard Bentley. It was from his father that Leech inherited his skill with the pencil, which he began to use at a very early age. When he was only three, he was discovered by Flaxman, who had called on his parents, seated on his mother’s knee, drawing with much gravity. The sculptor pronounced his sketch to be wonderful, adding, “Do not let him be cramped with lessons in drawing; let his genius follow its own bent; he will astonish the world”—an advice which was strictly followed. A mail-coach, done when he was six years old, is already full of surprising vigour and variety in its galloping horses. Leech was educated at Charterhouse, where Thackeray, his lifelong friend, was his schoolfellow, and at sixteen he began to study for the medical profession at St Bartholomew’s Hospital, where he won praise for the accuracy and beauty of his anatomical drawings. He was then placed under a Mr Whittle, an eccentric practitioner, the original of “Rawkins” in Albert Smith’s Adventures of Mr Ledbury, and afterwards under Dr John Cockle; but gradually the true bent of the youth’s mind asserted itself, and he drifted into the artistic profession. He was eighteen when his first designs were published, a quarto of four pages, entitled Etchings and Sketchings by A. Pen, Esq., comic character 365 studies from the London streets. Then he drew some political lithographs, did rough sketches for Bell’s Life, produced an exceedingly popular parody on Mulready’s postal envelope, and, on the death of Seymour, applied unsuccessfully to illustrate the Pickwick Papers. In 1840 Leech began his contributions to the magazines with a series of etchings in Bentley’s Miscellany, where Cruikshank had published his splendid plates to Jack Sheppard and Oliver Twist, and was illustrating Guy Fawkes in sadly feebler fashion. In company with the elder master Leech designed for the Ingoldsby Legends and Stanley Thorn, and till 1847 produced many independent series of etchings. These cannot be ranked with his best work; their technique is exceedingly imperfect; they are rudely bitten, with the light and shade out of relation; and we never feel that they express the artist’s individuality, the Richard Savage plates, for instance, being strongly reminiscent of Cruikshank, and “The Dance at Stamford Hall” of Hablot Browne. In 1845 Leech illustrated St Giles and St James in Douglas Jerrold’s newly started Shilling Magazine, with plates more vigorous and accomplished than those in Bentley, but it is in subjects of a somewhat later date, and especially in those lightly etched and meant to be printed with colour, that we see the artist’s best powers with the needle and the acid. Among such of his designs are four charming plates to Dickens’s Christmas Carol (1844), the broadly humorous etchings in the Comic History of England (1847-1848), and the still finer illustrations to the Comic History of Rome (1852)—which last, particularly in its minor woodcuts, shows some exquisitely graceful touches, as witness the fair faces that rise from the surging water in “Cloelia and her Companions Escaping from the Etruscan Camp.” Among the other etchings which deserve very special reference are those in Young Master Troublesome or Master Jacky’s Holidays, and the frontispiece to Hints on Life, or How to Rise in Society (1845)—a series of minute subjects linked gracefully together by coils of smoke, illustrating the various ranks and conditions of men, one of them—the doctor by his patient’s bedside—almost equalling in vivacity and precision the best of Cruikshank’s similar scenes. Then in the ’fifties we have the numerous etchings of sporting scenes, contributed, together with woodcuts, to the Handley Cross novels.

LEECH, JOHN (1817-1864), English caricature artist, was born in London on August 29, 1817. His father, who was from Ireland, ran the London Coffee House on Ludgate Hill. According to those who knew him, he was “well-educated, a deep Shakespearean, and a true gentleman.” His mother was related to the famous Richard Bentley. Leech inherited his artistic talent from his father and started drawing at a very young age. At just three years old, he was found by Flaxman, who had visited his parents, sitting on his mother’s lap with great seriousness while drawing. The sculptor praised his sketch, saying, “Don’t restrict him with lessons; let his creativity flow naturally; he will amaze the world”—a piece of advice that was closely followed. A mail coach he created at six already displayed remarkable energy and variety in its galloping horses. Leech was educated at Charterhouse, where he was schoolmates with Thackeray, a friend for life. At sixteen, he began studying medicine at St Bartholomew’s Hospital, where he received acclaim for the precision and beauty of his anatomical drawings. He was later apprenticed to Mr. Whittle, an eccentric practitioner who inspired the character “Rawkins” in Albert Smith’s Adventures of Mr Ledbury, and then to Dr. John Cockle. However, his true passion for art gradually took over, leading him into the artistic field. At eighteen, he published his first designs, a four-page quarto titled Etchings and Sketchings by A. Pen, Esq., featuring comic character studies from the streets of London. He then created some political lithographs, made rough sketches for Bell’s Life, produced a very popular parody on Mulready’s postal envelope, and, following Seymour's death, unsuccessfully tried to illustrate the Pickwick Papers. In 1840, Leech began contributing to magazines with a series of etchings in Bentley’s Miscellany, where Cruikshank had published his stunning plates for Jack Sheppard and Oliver Twist, and was also illustrating Guy Fawkes in a rather weaker style. Working alongside the elder master, Leech designed pieces for the Ingoldsby Legends and Stanley Thorn, and until 1847 produced many independent series of etchings. These works can’t be considered among his best; their technique is quite rough, with poorly balanced light and shade, and they don’t convey the artist’s individuality; for example, the Richard Savage plates strongly resemble Cruikshank's style, and “The Dance at Stamford Hall” reminds one of Hablot Browne’s work. In 1845, Leech illustrated St Giles and St James for Douglas Jerrold’s newly launched Shilling Magazine, producing plates that were more dynamic and polished than those in Bentley. However, it’s in his later works, especially those lightly etched and intended for color printing, that we see his finest abilities with the needle and acid. Notable among these are four delightful plates for Dickens’s Christmas Carol (1844), the broadly humorous etchings in the Comic History of England (1847-1848), and the even better illustrations for the Comic History of Rome (1852)—the latter, particularly in its smaller woodcuts, showcases exquisitely graceful details, such as the charming faces that emerge from the churning water in “Cloelia and her Companions Escaping from the Etruscan Camp.” Other noteworthy etchings include those in Young Master Troublesome or Master Jacky’s Holidays, and the frontispiece for Hints on Life, or How to Rise in Society (1845)—a series of tiny subjects beautifully connected by swirling smoke, illustrating various social ranks and conditions of men, one of which—the doctor at his patient’s bedside—almost rivals the liveliness and precision of Cruikshank’s similar scenes. Then in the 1850s, we see numerous etchings of sporting scenes, along with woodcuts, contributed to the Handley Cross novels.

Turning to Leech’s lithographic work, we have, in 1841, the Portraits of the Children of the Mobility, an important series dealing with the humorous and pathetic aspects of London street Arabs, which were afterwards so often and so effectively to employ the artist’s pencil. Amid all the squalor which they depict, they are full of individual beauties in the delicate or touching expression of a face, in the graceful turn of a limb. The book is scarce in its original form, but in 1875 two reproductions of the outline sketches for the designs were published—a lithographic issue of the whole series, and a finer photographic transcript of six of the subjects, which is more valuable than even the finished illustrations of 1841, in which the added light and shade is frequently spotty and ineffective, and the lining itself has not the freedom which we find in some of Leech’s other lithographs, notably in the Fly Leaves, published at the Punch office, and in the inimitable subject of the nuptial couch of the Caudles, which also appeared, in woodcut form, as a political cartoon, with Mrs Caudle, personated by Brougham, disturbing by untimely loquacity the slumbers of the lord chancellor, whose haggard cheek rests on the woolsack for pillow.

Turning to Leech’s lithographic work, we have, in 1841, the Portraits of the Children of the Mobility, an important series exploring the humorous and tragic sides of London street kids, which later often and effectively used the artist’s pencil. Despite all the squalor they show, they are filled with unique beauties in the delicate or moving expressions on their faces and the graceful curves of their limbs. The book is rare in its original form, but in 1875, two reproductions of the outline sketches for the designs were published—a lithographic edition of the entire series, and a finer photographic version of six of the subjects, which is more valuable than even the finished illustrations from 1841, where the added light and shade are often patchy and ineffective, and the lining itself lacks the freedom found in some of Leech’s other lithographs, particularly in the Fly Leaves, published at the Punch office, and in the unforgettable scene of the nuptial couch of the Caudles, which also appeared, in woodcut form, as a political cartoon, with Mrs. Caudle, portrayed by Brougham, disturbing the lord chancellor’s sleep with her endless chatter, while his weary cheek rests on the woolsack as a pillow.

But it was in work for the wood-engravers that Leech was most prolific and individual. Among the earlier of such designs are the illustrations to the Comic English and Latin Grammars (1840), to Written Caricatures (1841), to Hood’s Comic Annual, (1842), and to Albert Smith’s Wassail Bowl (1843), subjects mainly of a small vignette size, transcribed with the best skill of such woodcutters as Orrin Smith, and not, like the larger and later Punch illustrations, cut at speed by several engravers working at once on the subdivided block. It was in 1841 that Leech’s connexion with Punch began, a connexion which subsisted till his death on the 29th of October 1864, and resulted in the production of the best-known and most admirable of his designs. His first contribution appeared in the issue of the 7th of August, a full-page illustration—entitled “Foreign Affairs”—of character studies from the neighbourhood of Leicester Square. His cartoons deal at first mainly with social subjects, and are rough and imperfect in execution, but gradually their method gains in power and their subjects become more distinctly political, and by 1849 the artist is strong enough to produce the splendidly humorous national personification which appears in “Disraeli Measuring the British Lion.” About 1845 we have the first of that long series of half-page and quarter-page pictures of life and manners, executed with a hand as gentle as it was skilful, containing, as Ruskin has said, “admittedly the finest definition and natural history of the classes of our society, the kindest and subtlest analysis of its foibles, the tenderest flattery of its pretty and well-bred ways,” which has yet appeared. In addition to his work for the weekly issue of Punch, Leech contributed largely to the Punch almanacks and pocket-books, to Once a Week from 1859 till 1862, to the Illustrated London News, where some of his largest and best sporting scenes appeared, and to innumerable novels and miscellaneous volumes besides, of which it is only necessary to specify A Little Tour in Ireland (1859), which is noticeable as showing the artist’s treatment of pure landscape, though it also contains some of his daintiest figure-pieces, like that of the wind-blown girl, standing on the summit of a pedestal, with the swifts darting around her and the breadth of sea beyond.

But it was through his work for wood engravers that Leech was most productive and unique. Some of his earlier designs include the illustrations for the Comic English and Latin Grammars (1840), Written Caricatures (1841), Hood’s Comic Annual (1842), and Albert Smith’s Wassail Bowl (1843). These were mainly small vignette-sized subjects, crafted with great skill by woodcutters like Orrin Smith, unlike the larger and later Punch illustrations, which were quickly produced by several engravers working simultaneously on divided blocks. Leech started his connection with Punch in 1841, a relationship that lasted until his death on October 29, 1864, resulting in some of his most famous and remarkable designs. His first contribution appeared in the August 7 issue, featuring a full-page illustration titled “Foreign Affairs,” showcasing character studies from the Leicester Square area. Initially, his cartoons focused mostly on social themes and were roughly executed, but over time, his style evolved, becoming more powerful and increasingly political. By 1849, he was skilled enough to create the wonderfully humorous national personification seen in “Disraeli Measuring the British Lion.” Around 1845, he began a long series of half-page and quarter-page illustrations depicting life and manners, drawn with a gentle yet skilled hand. As Ruskin noted, these works provided “arguably the finest definition and natural history of the classes of our society, the kindest and subtlest analysis of its foibles, the tenderest flattery of its pretty and well-bred ways.” In addition to his work for Punch, Leech contributed extensively to the Punch almanacs and pocket books, to Once a Week from 1859 to 1862, and to the Illustrated London News, where some of his largest and best sporting scenes appeared, along with numerous novels and miscellaneous volumes. Among these, A Little Tour in Ireland (1859) stands out for showcasing his approach to pure landscape, while also featuring some of his most delightful figure pieces, like that of a wind-blown girl standing atop a pedestal, surrounded by swifts and the expanse of sea beyond.

In 1862 Leech appealed to the public with a very successful exhibition of some of the most remarkable of his Punch drawings. These were enlarged by a mechanical process, and coloured in oils by the artist himself, with the assistance and under the direction of his friend J. E. Millais.

In 1862, Leech reached out to the public with a highly successful exhibition of some of his most notable Punch drawings. These were enlarged using a mechanical process and painted in oil by the artist himself, with help and guidance from his friend J. E. Millais.

Leech was a singularly rapid and indefatigable worker. Dean Hole tells us, when he was his guest, “I have known him send off from my house three finished drawings on the wood, designed, traced, and rectified, without much effort as it seemed, between breakfast and dinner.” The best technical qualities of Leech’s art, his unerring precision, his unfailing vivacity in the use of the line, are seen most clearly in the first sketches for his woodcuts, and in the more finished drawings made on tracing-paper from these first outlines, before the chiaroscuro was added and the designs were transcribed by the engraver. Turning to the mental qualities of his art, it would be a mistaken criticism which ranked him as a comic draughtsman. Like Hogarth he was a true humorist, a student of human life, though he observed humanity mainly in its whimsical aspects,

Leech was an incredibly fast and tireless worker. Dean Hole tells us that when he was his guest, “I’ve seen him send off three finished drawings on wood from my house, designed, traced, and refined, with seemingly little effort, between breakfast and dinner.” The best technical qualities of Leech’s art, his impeccable precision and lively use of line, are most evident in the initial sketches for his woodcuts and in the more polished drawings made on tracing paper from those first outlines, before the shading was added and the designs were passed on to the engraver. As for the mental qualities of his art, it would be a mistake to label him simply a comic artist. Like Hogarth, he was a true humorist and a keen observer of human life, although he mostly looked at humanity in its quirky aspects.

“Hitting all he saw with shafts

“Hitting everything he saw with arrows

With gentle satire, kin to charity,

With gentle humor, similar to kindness,

That harmed not.”

That didn't harm.”

The earnestness and gravity of moral purpose which is so constant a note in the work of Hogarth is indeed far less characteristic of Leech, but there are touches of pathos and of tragedy in such of the Punch designs as the “Poor Man’s Friend” (1845), and “General Février turned Traitor” (1855), and in “The Queen of the Arena” in the first volume of Once a Week, which are sufficient to prove that more solemn powers, for which his daily work afforded no scope, lay dormant in their artist. The purity and manliness of Leech’s own character are impressed on his art. We find in it little of the exaggeration and grotesqueness, and none of the fierce political enthusiasm, of which the designs of Gillray are so full. Compared with that of his great contemporary George Cruikshank, his work is restricted both in compass of subject and in artistic dexterity.

The seriousness and weight of moral intent that is a constant feature in Hogarth’s work is certainly less typical of Leech. However, there are moments of deep emotion and tragedy in some of his designs for Punch, like “Poor Man’s Friend” (1845), “General Février turned Traitor” (1855), and “The Queen of the Arena” from the first volume of Once a Week, that show there were deeper, more serious abilities within him that his everyday work didn’t allow to shine through. Leech’s pure and manly character is reflected in his art. His work features little of the exaggeration and absurdity, and none of the intense political fervor found in Gillray’s designs. When compared to his notable contemporary George Cruikshank, Leech’s work is narrower in both the range of subjects and artistic skill.

Biographies of Leech have been written by John Brown (1882), and Frith (1891); see also “John Leech’s Pictures of Life and Character,” by Thackeray, Quarterly Review (December 1854); letter by John Ruskin, Arrows of the Chace, vol. i. p. 161; “Un Humoriste Anglais,” by Ernest Chesneau, Gazette des Beaux Arts (1875).

Biographies of Leech have been written by John Brown (1882) and Frith (1891); also check out “John Leech’s Pictures of Life and Character,” by Thackeray, Quarterly Review (December 1854); a letter by John Ruskin, Arrows of the Chace, vol. i. p. 161; and “Un Humoriste Anglais,” by Ernest Chesneau, Gazette des Beaux Arts (1875).

(J. M. G.)

LEECH, the common name of members of the Hirudinea, a division of Chaetopod worms. It is doubtful whether the medicinal leech, Hirudo medicinalis, which is rarer in England than on the continent of Europe, or the horse leech, Aulastoma gulo, often confused with it, has the best right to the original possession of this name. But at present the word “leech” is applied to every member of the group Hirudinea, for the general structure and classification of which see Chaetopoda. There are many genera and species of leeches, the exact definitions of which are still in need of a more complete survey. They occur in all parts of the world and are mostly aquatic, though sometimes terrestrial, in habit. The aquatic forms frequent streams, ponds and marshes, and the sea. The members of this group are always 366 carnivorous or parasitic, and prey upon both vertebrates and invertebrates. In relation to their parasitic habit one or two suckers are always developed, the one at the anterior and the other at the posterior end of the body. In one subdivision of the leeches, the Gnathobdellidae, the mouth has three chitinous jaws which produce a triangular bite, though the action has been described as like that of a circular saw. Leeches without biting jaws possess a protrusible proboscis, and generally engulf their prey, as does the horse leech when it attacks earthworms. But some of them are also ectoparasites. The leech has been used in medicine from remote antiquity as a moderate blood-letter; and it is still so used, though more rarely than formerly. As unlicensed blood-letters, certain land-leeches are among the most unpleasant of parasites that can be encountered in a tropical jungle. A species of Haemadipsa of Ceylon attaches itself to the passer-by and draws blood with so little irritation that the sufferer is said to be aware of its presence only by the trickling from the wounds produced. Small leeches taken into the mouth with drinking-water may give rise to serious symptoms by attaching themselves to the fauces and neighbouring parts and thence sucking blood. The effects of these parasites have been mistaken for those of disease. All leeches are very extensile and can contract the body to a plump, pear-shaped form, or extend it to a long and worm-like shape. They frequently progress after the fashion of a “looper” caterpillar, attaching themselves alternately by the anterior and the posterior sucker. Others swim with eel-like curves through the water, while one land-leech, at any rate, moves in a gliding way like a land Planarian, and leaves, also like the Planarian, a slimy trail behind it. Leeches are usually olive green to brown in colour, darker patches and spots being scattered over a paler ground. The marine parasitic leech Pontobdella is of a bright green, as is also the land-leech Trocheta.

LEECH, the common name for members of the Hirudinea, a group of segmented worms. It’s uncertain whether the medicinal leech, Hirudo medicinalis, which is less common in England than in continental Europe, or the horse leech, Aulastoma gulo, often mistaken for it, truly deserves the original name. However, currently, “leech” refers to all members of the Hirudinea group, for details on their structure and classification, see Chaetopoda. There are many genera and species of leeches, but their precise definitions still need a thorough review. They can be found all over the world and are mostly aquatic, though some live on land. The aquatic types inhabit streams, ponds, marshes, and the ocean. Members of this group are always carnivorous or parasitic, feeding on both vertebrates and invertebrates. Due to their parasitic nature, they typically have one or two suckers, one at the front and another at the back of their body. In one subgroup of leeches, the Gnathobdellidae, the mouth has three chitinous jaws that create a triangular bite, which has been compared to a circular saw. Leeches without biting jaws have a retractable proboscis and usually swallow their prey whole, similar to how the horse leech attacks earthworms. Some are also external parasites. Leeches have been used in medicine since ancient times as a mild bloodletting method, and they’re still used today, although less often than in the past. Certain land-leeches act as unpleasant parasites found in tropical jungles, like a species of Haemadipsa in Ceylon, which attaches to passersby and feeds on blood so gently that the victim only notices it by the trickling from the wounds. Small leeches taken in with drinking water can cause serious issues by attaching themselves to the throat and surrounding areas, sucking blood and their effects can be confused with disease symptoms. All leeches can stretch out their bodies into a plump, pear shape or elongate into a worm-like form. They often move like a “looper” caterpillar, alternating between their front and back suckers to attach themselves. Others swim with eel-like movements through the water, while at least one land leech glides similarly to a land Planarian, leaving a slimy trail behind like the Planarian does. Leeches are typically olive green to brown, with darker patches and spots on a lighter background. The marine parasitic leech Pontobdella is bright green, as is the land leech Trocheta.

The term “leech,” as an old English synonym for physician, is from a Teutonic root meaning “heal,” and is etymologically distinct from the name (O. Eng. lyce) of the Hirudo, though the use of the one by the other has helped to assimilate the two words.

The term “leech,” an old English synonym for doctor, comes from a Teutonic root meaning “heal,” and is etymologically different from the name (O. Eng. lyce) of the Hirudo, although the use of one in place of the other has helped to merge the two words.

(F. E. B.)

LEEDS, THOMAS OSBORNE, 1st Duke of (1631-1712), English statesman, commonly known also by his earlier title of Earl of Danby, son of Sir Edward Osborne, Bart., of Kiveton, Yorkshire, was born in 1631. He was great-grandson of Sir Edward Osborne (d. 1591), lord mayor of London, who, according to the accepted account, while apprentice to Sir William Hewett, cloth worker and lord mayor in 1559, made the fortunes of the family by leaping from London Bridge into the river and rescuing Anne (d. 1585), the daughter of his employer, whom he afterwards married.1 Thomas Osborne, the future lord treasurer, succeeded to the baronetcy and estates in Yorkshire on his father’s death in 1647, and after unsuccessfully courting his cousin Dorothy Osborne, married Lady Bridget Bertie, daughter of the earl of Lindsey. He was introduced to public life and to court by his neighbour in Yorkshire, George, 2nd duke of Buckingham, was elected M.P. for York in 1665, and gained the “first step in his future rise” by joining Buckingham in his attack on Clarendon in 1667. In 1668 he was appointed joint treasurer of the navy with Sir Thomas Lyttelton, and subsequently sole treasurer. He succeeded Sir William Coventry as commissioner for the state treasury in 1669, and in 1673 was appointed a commissioner for the admiralty. He was created Viscount Osborne in the Scottish peerage on the 2nd of February 1673, and a privy councillor on the 3rd of May. On the 19th of June, on the resignation of Lord Clifford, he was appointed lord treasurer and made Baron Osborne of Kiveton and Viscount Latimer in the peerage of England, while on the 27th of June 1674 he was created earl of Danby, when he surrendered his Scottish peerage of Osborne to his second son Peregrine Osborne. He was appointed the same year lord-lieutenant of the West Riding of Yorkshire, and in 1677 received the Garter.

LEEDS, THOMAS OSBORNE, 1st Duke of (1631-1712), English statesman, also known by his earlier title of Duke of Danby, was the son of Sir Edward Osborne, Bart., of Kiveton, Yorkshire, born in 1631. He was the great-grandson of Sir Edward Osborne (d. 1591), who was lord mayor of London. According to popular belief, while he was an apprentice to Sir William Hewett, a cloth worker and lord mayor in 1559, the family's fortune was made when he jumped off London Bridge into the river to rescue Anne (d. 1585), the daughter of his employer, whom he later married.1 Thomas Osborne, who would become the lord treasurer, inherited the baronetcy and the Yorkshire estates after his father's death in 1647. After unsuccessfully pursuing his cousin Dorothy Osborne, he married Lady Bridget Bertie, the daughter of the Earl of Lindsey. He was introduced to public life and the court by his neighbor in Yorkshire, George, 2nd duke of Buckingham, was elected M.P. for York in 1665, and took a significant step in his career by joining Buckingham in an attack on Clarendon in 1667. In 1668, he became joint treasurer of the navy alongside Sir Thomas Lyttelton, and later became the sole treasurer. He took over from Sir William Coventry as commissioner for the state treasury in 1669, and in 1673 was appointed a commissioner for the admiralty. He was made Viscount Osborne in the Scottish peerage on February 2, 1673, and became a privy councillor on May 3. On June 19, after Lord Clifford resigned, he was appointed lord treasurer and became Baron Osborne of Kiveton and Viscount Latimer in the peerage of England. On June 27, 1674, he was created Earl of Danby, surrendering his Scottish peerage of Osborne to his second son Peregrine Osborne. That same year, he was appointed lord-lieutenant of the West Riding of Yorkshire, and in 1677 he received the Garter.

Danby was a statesman of very different calibre from the leaders of the Cabal ministry, Buckingham and Arlington. His principal aim was no doubt the maintenance and increase of his own influence and party, but his ambition corresponded with definite political views. A member of the old cavalier party, a confidential friend and correspondent of the despotic Lauderdale, he desired to strengthen the executive and the royal authority. At the same time he was a keen partisan of the established church, an enemy of both Roman Catholics and dissenters, and an opponent of all toleration. In 1673 he opposed the Indulgence, supported the Test Act, and spoke against the proposal for giving relief to the dissenters. In June 1675 he signed the paper of advice drawn up by the bishops for the king, urging the rigid enforcement of the laws against the Roman Catholics, their complete banishment from the court, and the suppression of conventicles,2 and a bill introduced by him imposing special taxes on recusants and subjecting Roman Catholic priests to imprisonment for life was only thrown out as too lenient because it secured offenders from the charge of treason. The same year he introduced a Test Oath by which all holding office or seats in either House of Parliament were to declare resistance to the royal power a crime, and promise to abstain from all attempts to alter the government of either church or state; but this extreme measure of retrograde toryism was successfully opposed by wiser statesmen. The king himself as a Roman Catholic secretly opposed and also doubted the wisdom and practicability of this “thorough” policy of repression. Danby therefore ordered a return from every diocese of the numbers of dissenters, both Romanist and Protestant, in order by a proof of their insignificance to remove the royal scruples.3 In December 1676 he issued a proclamation for the suppression of coffee-houses because of the “defamation of His Majesty’s Government” which took place in them, but this was soon withdrawn. In 1677, to secure Protestantism in case of a Roman Catholic succession, he introduced a bill by which ecclesiastical patronage and the care of the royal children were entrusted to the bishops; but this measure, like the other, was thrown out.

Danby was a statesman with a very different style compared to the leaders of the Cabal ministry, Buckingham and Arlington. His main goal was undoubtedly to maintain and grow his own influence and party, but his ambitions aligned with specific political ideas. As a member of the old cavalier party and a close friend and correspondent of the authoritarian Lauderdale, he aimed to strengthen the executive branch and the royal authority. At the same time, he was a strong supporter of the established church, opposed both Roman Catholics and dissenters, and fought against any form of toleration. In 1673, he opposed the Indulgence, backed the Test Act, and spoke out against proposals to provide relief to dissenters. In June 1675, he signed a paper of advice prepared by bishops for the king, urging strict enforcement of the laws against Roman Catholics, their complete removal from the court, and the suppression of conventicles. A bill he introduced that would have imposed special taxes on recusants and subjected Roman Catholic priests to life imprisonment was only rejected for being too lenient since it protected offenders from treason charges. That same year, he proposed a Test Oath requiring anyone holding office or seats in either House of Parliament to declare that resisting royal power was a crime and promise not to attempt any changes to the government of either church or state. However, this extreme measure of regressive Toryism was successfully opposed by more astute statesmen. The king himself, being a Roman Catholic, secretly opposed this method and doubted the wisdom and viability of such a strict policy of repression. Therefore, Danby ordered a report from every diocese on the number of dissenters, both Romanist and Protestant, to demonstrate their insignificance and address the king's concerns. In December 1676, he issued a proclamation to suppress coffeehouses due to the “defamation of His Majesty’s Government” happening within them, but this was quickly retracted. In 1677, to secure Protestantism in the event of a Roman Catholic succession, he introduced a bill that assigned ecclesiastical patronage and the care of royal children to the bishops; however, this measure, like the previous one, was also rejected.

In foreign affairs Danby showed a stronger grasp of essentials. He desired to increase English trade, credit and power abroad. He was a determined enemy both to Roman influence and to French ascendancy. He terminated the war with Holland in 1674, and from that time maintained a friendly correspondence with William; while in 1677, after two years of tedious negotiations, he overcame all obstacles, and in spite of James’s opposition, and without the knowledge of Louis XIV., effected the marriage between William and Mary that was the germ of the Revolution and the Act of Settlement. This national policy, however, could only be pursued, and the minister could only maintain himself in power, by acquiescence in the king’s personal relations with the king of France settled by the disgraceful Treaty of Dover in 1670, which included Charles’s acceptance of a pension, and bound him to a policy exactly opposite to Danby’s, one furthering French and Roman ascendancy. Though not a number of the Cabal ministry, and in spite of his own denial, Danby must, it would seem, have known of these relations after becoming lord treasurer. In any case, in 1676, together with Lauderdale alone, he consented to a treaty between Charles and Louis according to which the foreign policy of both kings was to be conducted in union, and Charles received an annual subsidy of £100,000. In 1678 Charles, taking advantage of the growing hostility to France in the nation and parliament, raised his price, and Danby by his directions demanded through Ralph Montagu (afterwards duke of Montagu) six million livres a year (£300,000) for three years. Simultaneously Danby guided through parliament a bill for raising money for a war against France; a league was concluded with Holland, and troops were actually sent there. That Danby, in spite of these compromising transactions, remained in intention faithful to the national interests, appears clearly from the hostility with which he was still regarded by France. In 1676 he is described 367 by Ruvigny to Louis XIV. as intensely antagonistic to France and French interests, and as doing his utmost to prevent the treaty of that year.4 In 1678, on the rupture of relations between Charles and Louis, a splendid opportunity was afforded Louis of paying off old scores by disclosing Danby’s participation in the king’s demands for French gold.

In foreign affairs, Danby demonstrated a stronger understanding of the key issues. He aimed to boost English trade, credit, and power internationally. He was a steadfast opponent of both Roman influence and French dominance. He ended the war with Holland in 1674 and maintained friendly communication with William from that point on. In 1677, after two years of tedious negotiations, he overcame all obstacles and, despite James’s opposition and without Louis XIV.'s knowledge, arranged the marriage between William and Mary, which was the foundation of the Revolution and the Act of Settlement. However, this national policy could only be pursued, and the minister could only stay in power, by going along with the king’s personal ties to the king of France, established by the disgraceful Treaty of Dover in 1670. This treaty included Charles’s acceptance of a pension and committed him to a policy that was completely contrary to Danby’s, one that promoted French and Roman authority. Although he was not part of the Cabal ministry and despite his own denial, it seems Danby must have been aware of these relations after he became lord treasurer. In any case, in 1676, along with Lauderdale, he agreed to a treaty between Charles and Louis that dictated both kings' foreign policies would be coordinated, and Charles received an annual subsidy of £100,000. In 1678, capitalizing on the growing hostility toward France among the nation and parliament, Charles increased his demands, and Danby, under his direction, requested through Ralph Montagu (later Duke of Montagu) six million livres a year (£300,000) for three years. At the same time, Danby navigated a bill through parliament to raise money for a war against France; a league was formed with Holland, and troops were actually dispatched there. That Danby, despite these compromising dealings, intended to stay loyal to national interests is evident from the hostility he still faced from France. In 1676, Ruvigny described him to Louis XIV. as intensely opposed to France and French interests, doing everything he could to obstruct the treaty of that year. In 1678, when relations between Charles and Louis broke down, Louis seized a splendid opportunity to settle old scores by revealing Danby’s involvement in the king’s demands for French funds.

Every circumstance now conspired to effect his fall. Although both abroad and at home his policy had generally embodied the wishes of the ascendant party in the state, Danby had never obtained the confidence of the nation. His character inspired no respect, and he could not reckon during the whole of his long career on the support of a single individual. Charles is said to have told him when he made him treasurer that he had only two friends in the world, himself and his own merit.5 He was described to Pepys on his acquiring office as “one of a broken sort of people that have not much to lose and therefore will venture all,” and as “a beggar having £1100 or £1200 a year, but owes above £10,000.” His office brought him in £20,000 a year,6 and he was known to be making large profits by the sale of offices; he maintained his power by corruption and by jealously excluding from office men of high standing and ability. Burnet described him as “the most hated minister that had ever been about the king.” Worse men had been less detested, but Danby had none of the amiable virtues which often counteract the odium incurred by serious faults. Evelyn, who knew him intimately from his youth, describes him as “a man of excellent natural parts but nothing of generous or grateful.” Shaftesbury, doubtless no friendly witness, speaks of him as an inveterate liar, “proud, ambitious, revengeful, false, prodigal and covetous to the highest degree,”7 and Burnet supports his unfavourable judgment to a great extent. His corruption, his mean submission to a tyrant wife, his greed, his pale face and lean person, which had succeeded to the handsome features and comeliness of earlier days,8 were the subject of ridicule, from the witty sneers of Halifax to the coarse jests of the anonymous writers of innumerable lampoons. By his championship of the national policy he had raised up formidable foes abroad without securing a single friend or supporter at home,9 and his fidelity to the national interests was now, through a very mean and ignoble act of personal spite, to be the occasion of his downfall.

Every circumstance now worked against him. Even though his policies generally reflected the desires of the dominant political party, Danby never gained the trust of the public. His character earned no respect, and throughout his long career, he couldn't count on the support of a single person. Charles reportedly told him when he appointed him treasurer that he only had two friends in the world: himself and his own abilities. He was described to Pepys upon taking office as “one of those broken people who don't have much to lose and therefore will risk everything,” and as “a beggar making £1100 or £1200 a year but owing over £10,000.” His position brought in £20,000 a year, and he was known to be profiting significantly from the sale of offices; he maintained his power through corruption and by excluding capable men from significant roles. Burnet referred to him as “the most hated minister that had ever been around the king.” Others who were worse had been less reviled, but Danby lacked the admirable qualities that often mitigate the resentment caused by serious faults. Evelyn, who knew him well from his youth, described him as “a man of excellent natural intelligence but lacking anything generous or grateful.” Shaftesbury, likely not a friendly observer, called him an inveterate liar, “proud, ambitious, vengeful, deceitful, wasteful, and extremely greedy,” and Burnet largely agreed with this negative assessment. His corruption, his submissive attitude toward a tyrannical wife, his greed, and his pale face and thin frame—which had replaced the handsome features of his younger days—were the subjects of mockery, ranging from the clever jabs of Halifax to the crude jokes of countless anonymous satirists. By supporting the national policy, he had created powerful enemies abroad without gaining a single friend or ally at home, and his loyalty to national interests was now, due to a petty and ignoble act of personal spite, the cause of his downfall.

Danby in appointing a new secretary of state had preferred Sir W. Temple, a strong adherent of the anti-French policy, to Montagu. The latter, after a quarrel with the duchess of Cleveland, was dismissed from the king’s employment. He immediately went over to the opposition, and in concert with Louis XIV. and Barillon, the French ambassador, by whom he was supplied with a large sum of money, arranged a plan for effecting Danby’s ruin. He obtained a seat in parliament; and in spite of Danby’s endeavour to seize his papers by an order in council, on the 20th of December 1678 caused two of the incriminating letters written by Danby to him to be read aloud to the House of Commons by the Speaker. The House immediately resolved on Danby’s impeachment. At the foot of each of the letters appeared the king’s postscripts, “I approve of this letter. C.R.,” in his own handwriting; but they were not read by the Speaker, and were entirely neglected in the proceedings against the minister, thus emphasizing the constitutional principle that obedience to the orders of the sovereign can be no bar to an impeachment. He was charged with having encroached to himself royal powers by treating matters of peace and war without the knowledge of the council, with having promoted the raising of a standing army on pretence of a war with France, with having obstructed the assembling of parliament, with corruption and embezzlement in the treasury. Danby, while communicating the “Popish Plot” to the parliament, had from the first expressed his disbelief in the so-called revelations of Titus Oates, and his backwardness in the matter now furnished an additional charge of having “traitorously concealed the plot.” He was voted guilty by the Commons; but while the Lords were disputing whether the accused peer should have bail, and whether the charges amounted to more than a misdemeanour, parliament was prorogued on the 30th of December and dissolved three weeks later. In March 1679 a new parliament hostile to Danby was returned, and he was forced to resign the treasurership; but he received a pardon from the king under the Great Seal, and a warrant for a marquessate.10 His proposed advancement in rank was severely reflected upon in the Lords, Halifax declaring it in the king’s presence the recompense of treason, “not to be borne”; and in the Commons his retirement from office by no means appeased his antagonists. The proceedings against him were revived, a committee of privileges deciding on the 19th of March 1679 that the dissolution of parliament was no abatement of an impeachment. A motion was passed for his committal by the Lords, who, as in Clarendon’s case, voted his banishment. This was, however, rejected by the Commons, who now passed an act of attainder. Danby had removed to the country, but returned on the 21st of April to avoid the threatened passing by the Lords of the attainder, and was sent to the Tower. In his written defence he now pleaded the king’s pardon, but on the 5th of May 1679 it was pronounced illegal by the Commons. This declaration was again repeated by the Commons in 1689 on the occasion of another attack made upon Danby in that year, and was finally embodied in the Act of Settlement in 1701.

Danby, in appointing a new Secretary of State, chose Sir W. Temple, a strong supporter of anti-French policy, over Montagu. Montagu, after an argument with the Duchess of Cleveland, was dismissed from the king’s service. He quickly switched to the opposition and, with the help of Louis XIV and Barillon, the French ambassador, who provided him with a large sum of money, devised a plan to ruin Danby. He secured a seat in parliament, and despite Danby’s attempt to confiscate his papers via an order in council, on December 20, 1678, he had the Speaker read aloud two incriminating letters written by Danby to him in the House of Commons. The House promptly decided to impeach Danby. Each letter included the king’s handwritten postscript, “I approve of this letter. C.R.,” but the Speaker did not read them, and they were completely ignored during the proceedings against the minister, highlighting the constitutional principle that obedience to the sovereign's orders cannot protect one from impeachment. He was accused of usurping royal powers by handling matters of peace and war without the council’s knowledge, promoting the creation of a standing army under the pretense of a war with France, obstructing the assembly of parliament, and committing corruption and embezzlement in the treasury. While informing parliament about the “Popish Plot,” Danby had always expressed doubt about the claims made by Titus Oates, and his reluctance to act provided an additional charge of “traitorously concealing the plot.” The Commons found him guilty; however, while the Lords were debating whether the accused peer should be granted bail and whether the charges constituted more than a misdemeanor, parliament was prorogued on December 30 and dissolved three weeks later. In March 1679, a new parliament that opposed Danby was elected, and he was forced to resign as Treasurer; however, he received a pardon from the king under the Great Seal and a warrant for a marquessate.10 His promotion was heavily criticized in the Lords, with Halifax stating in the king’s presence that it was a reward for treason, “not to be tolerated”; and in the Commons, his resignation did not satisfy his opponents. The proceedings against him were reopened, with a privileges committee ruling on March 19, 1679, that the dissolution of parliament did not nullify an impeachment. The Lords passed a motion for his commitment and, similar to Clarendon’s case, voted for his banishment. However, this was rejected by the Commons, who instead passed an act of attainder. Danby had retreated to the countryside but returned on April 21 to prevent the Lords from passing the attainder, resulting in his being sent to the Tower. In his written defense, he cited the king’s pardon, but on May 5, 1679, the Commons declared it illegal. This declaration was reiterated by the Commons in 1689 during another attack against Danby that year and was ultimately incorporated into the Act of Settlement in 1701.

The Commons now demanded judgment against the prisoner from the Lords. Further proceedings, however, were stopped by the dissolution of parliament again in July; but for nearly five years Danby remained a prisoner in the Tower. A number of pamphlets asserting the complicity of the fallen minister in the Popish Plot, and even accusing him of the murder of Sir Edmund Berry Godfrey, were published in 1679 and 1680; they were answered by Danby’s secretary, Edward Christian, in Reflections; and in May 1681 Danby was actually indicted by the Grand Jury of Middlesex for Godfrey’s murder on the accusation of Edward FitzHarris. His petition to the king for a trial by his peers on this indictment was refused, and an attempt to prosecute the publishers of the false evidence in the king’s bench was unsuccessful. For some time all appeals to the king, to parliament, and to the courts of justice were unavailing; but on the 12th of February 1684 his application to Chief Justice Jeffreys was at last successful, and he was set at liberty on finding bail to the amount of £40,000, to appear in the House of Lords in the following session. He visited the king at court the same day; but took no part in public affairs for the rest of the reign.

The Commons now demanded a verdict against the prisoner from the Lords. However, further proceedings were halted by the dissolution of parliament again in July; but for almost five years, Danby stayed a prisoner in the Tower. Several pamphlets claiming the fallen minister was involved in the Popish Plot and even accusing him of the murder of Sir Edmund Berry Godfrey were published in 1679 and 1680; these were countered by Danby’s secretary, Edward Christian, in Reflections; and in May 1681, Danby was actually indicted by the Grand Jury of Middlesex for Godfrey’s murder based on the accusation from Edward FitzHarris. His request to the king for a trial by his peers on this indictment was denied, and an attempt to take legal action against the publishers of the false evidence in the king’s bench was unsuccessful. For a while, all appeals to the king, to parliament, and to the courts of justice were futile; but on February 12, 1684, his plea to Chief Justice Jeffreys was finally successful, and he was released after posting bail of £40,000, agreeing to appear in the House of Lords in the next session. He visited the king at court that same day but took no further part in public affairs for the rest of the reign.

After James’s accession Danby was discharged from his bail by the Lords on the 19th of May 1685, and the order declaring a dissolution of parliament to be no abatement of an impeachment was reversed. He again took his seat in the Lords as a leader of the moderate Tory party. Though a strong Tory and supporter of the hereditary principle, James’s attacks on Protestantism soon drove him into opposition. He was visited by Dykvelt, William of Orange’s agent; and in June 1687 he wrote to William assuring him of his support. On the 30th of June 1688 he was one of the seven leaders of the Revolution who signed the invitation to William. In November he occupied York in the prince’s interest, returning to London to meet William on the 26th of December. He appears to have thought that William would not claim the crown,11 and at first supported the theory that the throne having been vacated by James’s flight the succession fell as of right to Mary; but as this met with little support, and was rejected both by William and by Mary herself, he voted against the regency and joined with 368 Halifax and the Commons in declaring the prince and princess joint sovereigns.

After James became king, Danby was released from his bail by the Lords on May 19, 1685, and the order stating that dissolving parliament did not affect impeachment was overturned. He resumed his seat in the Lords as a leader of the moderate Tory party. Even though he was a strong Tory and supported the hereditary principle, James’s attacks on Protestantism quickly pushed him into opposition. He was visited by Dykvelt, William of Orange’s agent, and in June 1687, he wrote to William assuring him of his support. On June 30, 1688, he was one of the seven leaders of the Revolution who signed the invitation to William. In November, he seized York in the prince’s interest and returned to London to meet William on December 26. He seemed to believe that William would not claim the crown, and initially supported the idea that since James had fled, the succession rightfully passed to Mary. However, as this idea received little support and was rejected by both William and Mary herself, he voted against the regency and joined Halifax and the Commons in declaring the prince and princess joint sovereigns.

Danby had rendered extremely important services to William’s cause. On the 20th of April 1689 he was created marquess of Carmarthen and was made lord-lieutenant of the three ridings of Yorkshire. He was, however, still greatly disliked by the Whigs, and William, instead of reinstating him in the lord treasurership, only appointed him president of the council in February 1689. He did not conceal his vexation and disappointment, which were increased by the appointment of Halifax to the office of lord privy seal. The antagonism between the “black” and the “white marquess” (the latter being the nickname given to Carmarthen in allusion to his sickly appearance), which had been forgotten in their common hatred to the French policy and to Rome, revived in all its bitterness. He retired to the country and was seldom present at the council. In June and July new motions were made in parliament for his removal; but notwithstanding his great unpopularity, on the retirement of Halifax in 1690 he again acquired the chief power in the state, which he retained till 1695 by bribery in parliament and by the support of the king and queen. In 1690, during William’s absence in Ireland, he was appointed Mary’s chief adviser. In 1691, desiring to compromise Halifax, he discredited himself by the patronage of an informer named Fuller, soon proved an impostor. He was absent in 1692 when the Place Bill was thrown out. In 1693 he presided in great state as lord high steward at the trial of Lord Mohun; and on the 4th of May 1694 he was created duke of Leeds.12 The same year he supported the Triennial Bill, but opposed the new treason bill as weakening the hands of the executive. Meanwhile fresh attacks had been made upon him. He was accused unjustly of Jacobitism. In April 1695 he was impeached once more by the Commons for having received a bribe of 5000 guineas to procure the new charter for the East India Company. In his defence, whilst denying that he had received the money and appealing to his past services, he did not attempt to conceal the fact that according to his experience bribery was an acknowledged and universal custom in public business, and that he himself had been instrumental in obtaining money for others. Meanwhile his servant, who was said to have been the intermediary between the duke and the Company in the transaction, fled the country; and no evidence being obtainable to convict, the proceedings fell to the ground. In May 1695 he had been ordered to discontinue his attendance at the council. He returned in October, but was not included among the lords justices appointed regents during William’s absence in this year. In November he was created D.C.L. by the university of Oxford; in December he became a commissioner of trade, and in December 1696 governor of the Royal Fishery Company. He opposed the prosecution of Sir John Fenwick, but supported the action taken by members of both Houses in defence of William’s rights in the same year. On the 23rd of April 1698 he entertained the tsar, Peter the Great, at Wimbledon. He had for some time lost the real direction of affairs, and in May 1699 he was compelled to retire from office and from the lord-lieutenancy of Yorkshire.

Danby had provided extremely important support for William’s cause. On April 20, 1689, he was made marquess of Carmarthen and appointed lord-lieutenant of the three ridings of Yorkshire. However, he was still very unpopular with the Whigs, and instead of restoring him to the lord treasurership, William only made him president of the council in February 1689. He didn't hide his frustration and disappointment, which grew worse with Halifax's appointment as lord privy seal. The rivalry between the "black" and the "white marquess" (the latter being a nickname for Carmarthen due to his sickly appearance), which had been forgotten in their shared hatred for French policies and Rome, resurfaced with full bitterness. He retreated to the countryside and rarely attended council meetings. In June and July, new motions were put forward in parliament for his removal; yet despite his immense unpopularity, he regained the chief power in the state after Halifax stepped down in 1690, a position he maintained until 1695 through bribery in parliament and the backing of the king and queen. In 1690, while William was in Ireland, he became Mary's chief advisor. In 1691, in an attempt to compromise Halifax, he disgraced himself by backing an informer named Fuller, who soon turned out to be a fraud. He was absent in 1692 when the Place Bill was rejected. In 1693, he presided grandly as lord high steward at Lord Mohun's trial; and on May 4, 1694, he was made duke of Leeds. In that same year, he supported the Triennial Bill but opposed the new treason bill, claiming it weakened the executive branch. Meanwhile, fresh accusations were made against him, including an unjust charge of Jacobitism. In April 1695, he was impeached again by the Commons for allegedly accepting a bribe of 5,000 guineas to obtain a new charter for the East India Company. In his defense, while denying that he had received the money and referencing his past services, he admitted that bribery was a common and accepted practice in public business, and that he had previously helped others secure funds. At the same time, his servant, said to have acted as the intermediary between the duke and the Company in this matter, fled the country; and with no evidence to convict him, the case collapsed. In May 1695, he was ordered to stop attending council meetings. He returned in October but was not included among the lords justices appointed as regents during William’s absence that year. In November, he was awarded an honorary doctorate (D.C.L.) by the University of Oxford; in December, he became a commissioner of trade, and in December 1696, he was named governor of the Royal Fishery Company. He opposed the prosecution of Sir John Fenwick but supported actions by members of both Houses to defend William’s rights that same year. On April 23, 1698, he hosted Tsar Peter the Great at Wimbledon. For some time, he had lost control over the affairs of state, and in May 1699, he was forced to step down from office and the position of lord-lieutenant of Yorkshire.

In Queen Anne’s reign, in his old age, he is described as “a gentleman of admirable natural parts, great knowledge and experience in the affairs of his own country, but of no reputation with any party. He hath not been regarded, although he took his place at the council board.”13 The veteran statesman, however, by no means acquiesced in his enforced retirement, and continued to take an active part in politics. As a zealous churchman and Protestant he still possessed a following. In 1705 he supported a motion that the church was in danger, and in 1710 in Sacheverell’s case spoke in defence of hereditary right.14 In November of this year he obtained a renewal of his pension of £3500 a year from the post office which he was holding in 1694,15 and in 1711 at the age of eighty was a competitor for the office of lord privy seal.16 His long and eventful career, however, terminated soon afterwards by his death on the 26th of July 1712.

In Queen Anne’s reign, in his old age, he is described as “a gentleman of admirable natural talent, great knowledge, and experience in the affairs of his own country, but with no reputation among any party. He wasn’t taken seriously, even though he sat at the council board.”13 The veteran statesman, however, did not accept his forced retirement and continued to be involved in politics. As a passionate churchman and Protestant, he still had followers. In 1705 he supported a motion claiming the church was in danger, and in 1710, during Sacheverell’s case, he spoke in defense of hereditary rights.14 In November of that year, he secured a renewal of his pension of £3,500 a year from the post office, which he had been holding since 1694,15 and in 1711, at the age of eighty, he was a contender for the position of lord privy seal.16 His long and eventful career, however, came to an end shortly after with his death on July 26, 1712.

In 1710 the duke had published Copies and Extracts of some letters written to and from the Earl of Danby ... in the years 1676, 1677 and 1678, in defence of his conduct, and this was accompanied by Memoirs relating to the Impeachment of Thomas, Earl of Danby. The original letters, however, of Danby to Montagu have now been published (by the Historical MSS. Commission from the MSS. of J. Eliot Hodgkin), and are seen to have been considerably garbled by Danby for the purposes of publication, several passages being obliterated and others altered by his own hand.

In 1710, the duke published Copies and Extracts of some letters written to and from the Earl of Danby ... in the years 1676, 1677 and 1678 to defend his actions. This was accompanied by Memoirs relating to the Impeachment of Thomas, Earl of Danby. However, the original letters from Danby to Montagu have now been published (by the Historical MSS. Commission from the MSS. of J. Eliot Hodgkin) and they clearly show that Danby significantly altered them for publication, with several passages removed and others changed by his own hand.

See the lives, by Sidney Lee in the Dict. Nat. Biography (1895); by T. P. Courtenay in Lardner’s Encyclopaedia, “Eminent British Statesmen,” vol. v. (1850); in Lodge’s Portraits, vii.; and Lives and Characters of ... Illustrious Persons, by J. le Neve (1714). Further material for his biography exists in Add. MSS., 26040-95 (56 vols., containing his papers); in the Duke of Leeds MSS. at Hornby Castle, calendered in Hist. MSS. Comm. 11th Rep. pt. vii. pp. 1-43; MSS. of Earl of Lindsay and J. Eliot Hodgkin; and Calendars of State Papers Dom. See also Add. MSS. 1894-1899, Index and Calendar; Hist. MSS. Comm. 11th Rep. pt. ii., House of Lords MSS.; Gen. Cat. British Museum for various pamphlets.

See the biographies by Sidney Lee in the Dict. Nat. Biography (1895); by T. P. Courtenay in Lardner’s Encyclopaedia, “Eminent British Statesmen,” vol. v. (1850); in Lodge’s Portraits, vii.; and Lives and Characters of ... Illustrious Persons, by J. le Neve (1714). Additional materials for his biography can be found in Add. MSS., 26040-95 (56 vols., containing his papers); in the Duke of Leeds MSS. at Hornby Castle, listed in Hist. MSS. Comm. 11th Rep. pt. vii. pp. 1-43; MSS. of Earl of Lindsay and J. Eliot Hodgkin; and Calendars of State Papers Dom. Also see Add. MSS. 1894-1899, Index and Calendar; Hist. MSS. Comm. 11th Rep. pt. ii., House of Lords MSS.; Gen. Cat. British Museum for various pamphlets.

(P. C. Y.)

Later Dukes of Leeds.

Future Dukes of Leeds.

The duke’s only surviving son, Peregrine (1659-1729), who became 2nd duke of Leeds on his father’s death, had been a member of the House of Lords as Baron Osborne since 1690, but he is better known as a naval officer; in this service he attained the rank of a vice-admiral. He died on the 25th of June 1729, when his son Peregrine Hyde (1691-1731) became 3rd duke. The 4th duke was the latter’s son Thomas (1713-1789), who was succeeded by his son Francis.

The duke’s only surviving son, Peregrine (1659-1729), who became the 2nd duke of Leeds after his father died, had been a member of the House of Lords as Baron Osborne since 1690, but he is more well-known as a naval officer; he reached the rank of vice-admiral in this service. He passed away on June 25, 1729, when his son Peregrine Hyde (1691-1731) became the 3rd duke. The 4th duke was his son Thomas (1713-1789), who was succeeded by his son Francis.

Francis Osborne, 5th duke of Leeds (1751-1799), was born on the 29th of January 1751 and was educated at Westminster school and at Christ Church, Oxford. He was a member of parliament in 1774 and 1775; in 1776 he became a peer as Baron Osborne, and in 1777 lord chamberlain of the queen’s household. In the House of Lords he was prominent as a determined foe of the prime minister, Lord North, who, after he had resigned his position as chamberlain, deprived him of the office of lord-lieutenant of the East Riding of Yorkshire in 1780. He regained this, however, two years later. Early in 1783 the marquess of Carmarthen, as he was called, was selected as ambassador to France, but he did not take up this appointment, becoming instead secretary for foreign affairs under William Pitt in December of the same year. As secretary he was little more than a cipher, and he left office in April 1791. Subsequently he took some slight part in politics, and he died in London on the 31st of January 1799. His Political Memoranda were edited by Oscar Browning for the Camden Society in 1884, and there are eight volumes of his official correspondence in the British Museum. His first wife was Amelia (1754-1784), daughter of Robert Darcy, 4th earl of Holdernesse, who became Baroness Conyers in her own right in 1778. Their elder son, George William Frederick (1775-1838), succeeded his father as duke of Leeds and his mother as Baron Conyers. These titles were, however, separated when his son, Francis Godolphin Darcy, the 7th Duke (1798-1859), died without sons in May 1859. The barony passed to his nephew, Sackville George Lane-Fox (1827-1888), falling into abeyance on his death in August 1888, and the dukedom passed to his cousin, George Godolphin Osborne (1802-1872), a son of Francis Godolphin Osborne (1777-1850), who was created Baron Godolphin in 1832. In 1895 George’s grandson George Godolphin Osborne (b. 1862) became 10th duke of Leeds. The name of Godolphin, which is borne by many of the Osbornes, was introduced into the family through the marriage of the 4th duke with Mary (d. 1764), daughter and co-heiress of Francis Godolphin, 2nd earl of Godolphin, and grand-daughter of the great duke of Marlborough.

Francis Osborne, 5th Duke of Leeds (1751-1799), was born on January 29, 1751. He was educated at Westminster School and Christ Church, Oxford. He served as a Member of Parliament in 1774 and 1775; in 1776, he became a peer as Baron Osborne and in 1777, Lord Chamberlain of the Queen’s household. In the House of Lords, he was well-known as a strong opponent of Prime Minister Lord North, who, after resigning as Chamberlain, removed him from the office of Lord-Lieutenant of the East Riding of Yorkshire in 1780. However, he regained this position two years later. Early in 1783, the Marquess of Carmarthen, as he was known, was chosen as ambassador to France, but he didn’t take on that role, instead becoming Secretary for Foreign Affairs under William Pitt in December of the same year. As Secretary, he was mostly inactive and left office in April 1791. He later participated somewhat in politics and passed away in London on January 31, 1799. His Political Memoranda were edited by Oscar Browning for the Camden Society in 1884, and there are eight volumes of his official correspondence in the British Museum. His first wife was Amelia (1754-1784), daughter of Robert Darcy, 4th Earl of Holdernesse, who became Baroness Conyers in her own right in 1778. Their elder son, George William Frederick (1775-1838), succeeded his father as Duke of Leeds and his mother as Baron Conyers. However, these titles were separated when his son, Francis Godolphin Darcy, the 7th Duke (1798-1859), died without sons in May 1859. The barony passed to his nephew, Sackville George Lane-Fox (1827-1888), which fell into abeyance upon his death in August 1888, and the dukedom went to his cousin, George Godolphin Osborne (1802-1872), son of Francis Godolphin Osborne (1777-1850), who was made Baron Godolphin in 1832. In 1895, George’s grandson George Godolphin Osborne (b. 1862) became the 10th Duke of Leeds. The name Godolphin, carried by many of the Osbornes, was introduced into the family through the marriage of the 4th Duke to Mary (d. 1764), daughter and co-heiress of Francis Godolphin, 2nd Earl of Godolphin, and granddaughter of the great Duke of Marlborough.


1 Chronicles of London Bridge, by R. Thomson (1827), 313, quoting Stow.

1 Chronicles of London Bridge, by R. Thomson (1827), 313, quoting Stow.

2 Cal. of St Pap. Dom. (1673-1675), p. 449.

2 Cal. of St Pap. Dom. (1673-1675), p. 449.

3 Letter of Morley, Bishop of Winchester, to Danby (June 10, 1676). (Hist. MSS. Com. xi. Rep. pt. vii. 14.)

3 Letter from Morley, Bishop of Winchester, to Danby (June 10, 1676). (Hist. MSS. Com. xi. Rep. pt. vii. 14.)

4 Memoirs of Great Britain and Ireland, by Sir J. Dalrymple (1773), i. app. 104.

4 Memoirs of Great Britain and Ireland, by Sir J. Dalrymple (1773), i. app. 104.

5 Letters to Sir Joseph Williamson (Camden Soc., 1874), i. 64.

5 Letters to Sir Joseph Williamson (Camden Soc., 1874), i. 64.

6 Halifax note-book in Devonshire House collection, quoted in Foxcroft’s Life of Halifax, ii. 63, note.

6 Halifax notebook in Devonshire House collection, quoted in Foxcroft’s Life of Halifax, ii. 63, note.

7 Life of Shaftesbury, by W. D. Christie (1871), ii. 312.

7 Life of Shaftesbury, by W. D. Christie (1871), ii. 312.

8 Macky’s Memoirs, 46; Pepys’s Diary, viii. 143.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Macky’s Memoirs, 46; Pepys’s Diary, vol. viii, 143.

9 See the description of his position at this time by Sir W. Temple in Lives of Illustrious Persons (1714), 40.

9 Check out Sir W. Temple's description of his position during this time in Lives of Illustrious Persons (1714), 40.

10 Add. MSS. 28094, f. 47.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Add. MSS. 28094, f. 47.

11 Boyer’s Annals (1722), 433.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Boyer’s Annals (1722), 433.

12 The title was taken, not from Leeds in Yorkshire, but from Leeds in Kent, 4½ m. from Maidstone, which in the 17th century was a more important place than its Yorkshire namesake.

12 The title was taken, not from Leeds in Yorkshire, but from Leeds in Kent, 4½ miles from Maidstone, which in the 17th century was a more significant place than its Yorkshire counterpart.

13 Memoirs of Sir John Macky (Roxburghe Club, 1895), 46.

13 Memoirs of Sir John Macky (Roxburghe Club, 1895), 46.

14 Boyer’s Annals, 219, 433.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Boyer’s Annals, 219, 433.

15 Harleian MSS. 2264, No. 239.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Harleian MSS. 2264, No. 239.

16 Boyer’s Annals, 515.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Boyer’s Annals, 515.

LEEDS, a city and municipal county and parliamentary borough in the West Riding of Yorkshire, England, 185 m. 369 N.N.W. from London. Pop. (1891) 367,505; (1901) 428,968. It is served by the Great Northern railway (Central station), the Midland (Wellington station), North-Eastern and London & North-Western (New station), and Great Central and Lancashire & Yorkshire railways (Central station). It lies nearly in the centre of the Riding, in the valley of the river Aire.

LEEDS, is a city, municipal county, and parliamentary borough located in West Yorkshire, England, 185 miles northwest of London. Population: (1891) 367,505; (1901) 428,968. It is served by the Great Northern railway (Central station), the Midland railway (Wellington station), North-Eastern, London & North-Western (New station), and Great Central and Lancashire & Yorkshire railways (Central station). It is situated almost at the center of the Riding, in the valley of the River Aire.

The plan of the city is in no way regular, and the numerous handsome public buildings are distributed among several streets, principally on the north side of the narrow river. The town hall is a fine building in Grecian style, well placed in a square between Park Lane and Great George Street. It is of oblong shape, with a handsome façade over which rises a domed clock-tower. The principal apartment is the Victoria Hall, a richly ornamented chamber measuring 161 ft. in length, 72 in breadth and 75 in height. It was opened in 1858 by Queen Victoria. Immediately adjacent to it are the municipal offices (1884) in Italian style. The Royal Exchange (1872) in Boar Lane is an excellent Perpendicular building. In ecclesiastical architecture Leeds is not rich. The church of St John, however, is an interesting example of the junction of Gothic traditions with Renaissance tendencies in architecture. It dates from 1634 and contains some fine contemporary woodwork. St Peter’s parish church occupies an ancient site, and preserves a very early cross from the former building. The church was rebuilt in 1840 at the instance of the vicar, Dr Walter Farquhar Hook (1798-1875), afterwards dean of Chichester, whose work here in a poor and ill-educated parish brought him fame. The church of All Souls (1880) commemorates him. It may be noted that the vicarage of Leeds has in modern times commonly formed a step to the episcopal bench. There are numerous other modern churches and chapels, of which the Unitarian chapel in Park Row is noteworthy. Leeds is the seat of a Roman Catholic bishop, with a pro-cathedral dedicated to St Anne. There is a large free library in the municipal offices, and numerous branch libraries are maintained. The Leeds old library is a private institution founded in 1768 by Dr Priestley, who was then minister of the Unitarian chapel. It occupies a building in Commercial Street. The Philosophical and Literary Society, established in 1820, possesses a handsome building in Park Row, known as the Philosophical Hall, containing a laboratory, scientific library, lecture room, and museum, with excellent natural history, geological and archaeological collections. The City Art Gallery was completed in 1888, and contains a fine permanent collection, while exhibitions are also held. The University, incorporated in 1904, grew out of Yorkshire College, established in 1875 for the purpose of supplying instruction in the arts and sciences which are applicable to the manufactures, engineering, mining and agriculture of the county. In 1887 it became one of the constituent colleges of Victoria University, Manchester, and so remained until its separate incorporation. The existing building was completed in 1885, and contains a hall of residence, a central hall and library, and complete equipments in all departments of instruction. New departments have been opened in extension of the original scheme, such as the medical department (1894). A day training college is a branch of the institution. The Mechanics’ Institute (1865) occupies a handsome Italian building in Cookridge Street near the town hall. It comprises a lecture room, library, reading and class rooms; and day and evening classes and an art school are maintained. The grammar school, occupying a Gothic building (1858) at Woodhouse Moor, dates its foundation from 1552. It is largely endowed, and possesses exhibitions tenable at Oxford, Cambridge and Durham universities. There is a large training college for the Wesleyan Methodist ministry in the suburb of Headingley. The Yorkshire Ladies’ Council of Education has as its object the promotion of female education, and the instruction of girls and women of the artisan class in domestic economy, &c. The general infirmary in Great George Street is a Gothic building of brick with stone dressings with a highly ornamental exterior by Sir Gilbert Scott, of whose work this is by no means the only good example in Leeds. The city possesses further notable buildings in its market-halls, theatres, clubs, &c.

The layout of the city is quite irregular, and many impressive public buildings are spread across several streets, mainly on the north side of the narrow river. The town hall is an elegant building in the Grecian style, ideally situated in a square between Park Lane and Great George Street. It has an oblong shape, with a striking façade topped by a domed clock tower. The main room is the Victoria Hall, a beautifully decorated space measuring 161 ft. long, 72 ft. wide, and 75 ft. high. It was inaugurated in 1858 by Queen Victoria. Next to it are the municipal offices (1884) designed in the Italian style. The Royal Exchange (1872) on Boar Lane is an excellent example of Perpendicular architecture. When it comes to church architecture, Leeds isn’t particularly rich, but the church of St. John is an intriguing example of the blend of Gothic and Renaissance styles. It was built in 1634 and features some fine contemporary woodwork. St. Peter’s parish church stands on a historic site and retains a very early cross from the previous structure. The church was rebuilt in 1840 at the request of the vicar, Dr. Walter Farquhar Hook (1798–1875), who later became dean of Chichester and gained recognition for his efforts in a poor and under-educated parish. The church of All Souls (1880) was established in his memory. It's worth mentioning that the vicarage of Leeds has recently become a stepping stone to the episcopate. There are many other modern churches and chapels, with the Unitarian chapel in Park Row being particularly noteworthy. Leeds is also the home of a Roman Catholic bishop, along with a pro-cathedral dedicated to St. Anne. A large free library is located in the municipal offices, and there are many branch libraries throughout the city. The old library of Leeds is a private institution founded in 1768 by Dr. Priestley, who was then the minister of the Unitarian chapel; it is situated in a building on Commercial Street. The Philosophical and Literary Society, established in 1820, has a beautiful building in Park Row known as Philosophical Hall, which includes a laboratory, scientific library, lecture room, and museum, boasting impressive collections of natural history, geology, and archaeology. The City Art Gallery, completed in 1888, features a fine permanent collection and hosts various exhibitions. The University, established in 1904, evolved from Yorkshire College, which was founded in 1875 to provide education in the arts and sciences relevant to the manufacturing, engineering, mining, and agriculture sectors of the county. In 1887, it became part of Victoria University, Manchester, until it achieved its own status. The current building was finished in 1885 and includes student accommodations, a central hall, and extensive facilities for all areas of instruction. New departments have been added since the original establishment, including a medical department (1894). A day training college is also part of the institution. The Mechanics’ Institute (1865) is housed in a beautiful Italian-style building on Cookridge Street near the town hall, featuring a lecture room, library, reading, and classrooms, along with day and evening classes and an art school. The grammar school, located in a Gothic-style building (1858) at Woodhouse Moor, traces its origins back to 1552. It has substantial financial support and offers scholarships for study at Oxford, Cambridge, and Durham universities. There is also a significant training college for the Wesleyan Methodist ministry in the suburb of Headingley. The Yorkshire Ladies’ Council of Education focuses on advancing female education, particularly targeting girls and women from artisan backgrounds in domestic skills, etc. The general infirmary on Great George Street is a Gothic brick building with stone accents, featuring a richly decorative exterior designed by Sir Gilbert Scott, who has several notable works in Leeds. The city is also home to several remarkable buildings, including market halls, theaters, clubs, and more.

Among open spaces devoted by the corporation to public use that of Woodhouse Moor is the principal one within the city, but 3 m. N.E. of the centre is Roundhay Park, a tract of 700 acres, beautifully laid out and containing a picturesque lake. In 1889 there came into the possession of the corporation the ground, lying 3 m. up the river from the centre of the city, containing the celebrated ruins of Kirkstall Abbey. The remains of this great foundation, of the middle of the 12th century, are extensive, and so far typical of the usual arrangement of Cistercian houses as to be described under the heading Abbey. The ruins are carefully preserved, and form a remarkable contrast with the surrounding industrial district. Apart from Kirkstall there are few antiquarian remains in the locality. In Guildford Street, near the town hall, is the Red Hall, where Charles I. lay during his enforced journey under the charge of the army in 1647.

Among the open spaces that the city has designated for public use, Woodhouse Moor is the main one within the city limits. However, 3 miles northeast of the center is Roundhay Park, a beautifully designed area spanning 700 acres, featuring a picturesque lake. In 1889, the city acquired land located 3 miles up the river from the city center, which includes the famous ruins of Kirkstall Abbey. The remnants of this significant structure, dating back to the mid-12th century, are extensive and representative of the typical layout of Cistercian monasteries, which is why they are categorized as an Abbey. The ruins are well-preserved and stand in stark contrast to the surrounding industrial area. Besides Kirkstall, there are few historical remains in the area. In Guildford Street, close to the town hall, is the Red Hall, where Charles I stayed during his forced journey under military escort in 1647.

For manufacturing and commercial purposes the situation of Leeds is highly advantageous. It occupies a central position in the railway system of England. It has communication with Liverpool by the Leeds and Liverpool Canal, and with Goole and the Humber by the Aire and Calder Navigation. It is moreover the centre of an important coal and iron district. Though regarded as the capital of the great manufacturing district of the West Riding, Leeds is not in its centre but on its border. Eastward and northward the country is agricultural, but westward and southward lies a mass of manufacturing towns. The characteristic industry is the woollen manufacture. The industry is carried on in a great number of neighbouring townships, but the cloth is commonly finished or dressed in the city itself, this procedure differing from that of the wool manufacturers in Gloucestershire and the west of England, who carry out the entire process in one factory. Formerly much of the business between manufacturer and merchant was transacted in the cloth halls, which formed a kind of market, but merchants now order goods directly from the manufacturers. Artificial silk is important among the textile products. Subsidiary to these leading industries is the production of machine-made clothing, hats and caps. The leather trade of Leeds is the largest in England, though no sole leather is tanned. The supply comes chiefly from British India. Boots and shoes are extensively manufactured. The iron trade in its different branches rivals the woollen trade in wealth, including the casting of metal, and the manufacture of steam engines, steam wagons, steam ploughs, machinery, tools, nails, &c. Leeds was formerly famed for the production of artistic pottery, and specimens of old Leeds ware are highly prized. The industry lapsed about the end of the 18th century, but has been revived in modern times. Minor and less specialized industries are numerous.

For manufacturing and commercial purposes, Leeds has a very favorable location. It is centrally positioned in England's railway system. It connects to Liverpool via the Leeds and Liverpool Canal, and to Goole and the Humber through the Aire and Calder Navigation. Additionally, it is the hub of a significant coal and iron region. Although considered the capital of the major manufacturing area of the West Riding, Leeds is actually on its border rather than in the center. To the east and north, the area is primarily agricultural, whereas to the west and south, there’s a cluster of manufacturing towns. The main industry here is wool production. This business takes place in many nearby townships, but the cloth is usually finished or dressed in the city itself, which is different from the wool manufacturers in Gloucestershire and western England, who complete the whole process in one factory. In the past, much of the trade between manufacturers and merchants occurred in the cloth halls, which acted as a sort of marketplace, but now merchants order goods directly from manufacturers. Artificial silk is also a significant part of the textile products. Supporting these main industries are the production of machine-made clothing, hats, and caps. Leeds has the largest leather trade in England, although no sole leather is tanned there; most of the supply comes from British India. Boots and shoes are produced extensively. The iron industry, in its various forms, competes with the wool trade in terms of wealth, encompassing the casting of metal, and the manufacturing of steam engines, steam wagons, steam plows, machinery, tools, nails, etc. Leeds was once renowned for producing artistic pottery, and examples of old Leeds ware are highly valued. This industry declined around the end of the 18th century but has seen a resurgence in modern times. There are many smaller and less specialized industries as well.

The parliamentary borough is divided into five divisions (North, Central, South, East and West), each returning one member. The county borough was created in 1888. Leeds was raised to the rank of a city in 1893. The municipal borough is under a lord mayor (the title was conferred in 1897 on the occasion of Queen Victoria’s Diamond Jubilee), 16 aldermen and 48 councillors. Area, 21,572 acres.

The parliamentary borough is split into five divisions (North, Central, South, East, and West), each electing one member. The county borough was established in 1888. Leeds became a city in 1893. The municipal borough has a lord mayor (the title was granted in 1897 during Queen Victoria’s Diamond Jubilee), along with 16 aldermen and 48 councillors. Area: 21,572 acres.

Leeds (Loidis, Ledes) is mentioned by Bede as the district where the Northumbrian kings had a royal vill in 627, and where Oswy, king of Northumbria, defeated Penda, king of the Mercians, in 665. Before the Norman Conquest seven thanes held it of Edward the Confessor as seven manors, but William the Conqueror granted the whole to Ilbert de Lacy, and at the time of the Domesday Survey it was held of him by Ralph Paganel, who is said to have raised Leeds castle, possibly on the site of an earlier fortification. In 1207 Maurice Paganel constituted the inhabitants of Leeds free burgesses, granting them the same liberties as Robert de Lacy had granted to Pontefract, including the right of selling burgher land to whom they pleased except to religious houses, and freedom from toll. He also appointed as the chief officer of the town a reeve who was to be chosen by the lord of the manor, the burgesses being “more eligible if only they would pay as much as others for the office.” The town was incorporated by Charles I. in 1626 under the title of an alderman, 7 principal burgesses and 24 assistants. A second charter granted by Charles II. in 1661 appointed a mayor, 12 aldermen and 24 assistants, and is still the governing charter of the borough. The woollen manufacture is said to have been introduced into Leeds in the 14th century, and owing to the facilities for trade afforded by its position on the river Aire soon became an important 370 industry. Camden, writing about 1590, says, “Leeds is rendered wealthy by its woollen manufactures,” and the incorporation charter of 1626 recites that “the inhabitants have for a long time exercised the art of making cloth.” The cloth was then, as it is now, made in the neighbouring villages and only finished and sold in the town. A successful attempt was made in the beginning of the 19th century by Mr William Hirst to introduce goods of a superior quality which were made and finished in his own factory. Other manufacturers followed his example, but their factories are now only used for the finishing process. The worsted trade which was formerly carried on to some extent has now almost disappeared. The spinning of flax by machinery was introduced early in the 19th century by Mr John Marshall, a Holbeck manufacturer, who was one of the first to apply Sir Richard Arkwright’s water frame, invented for cotton manufacture, to the spinning of linen yarn. The burgesses were represented in parliament by one member during the Commonwealth, but not again until by the Reform Act of 1832 they were allowed to return two members. In 1867 they were granted an additional member.

Leeds (Loidis, Ledes) is mentioned by Bede as the area where the Northumbrian kings had a royal estate in 627, and where Oswy, king of Northumbria, defeated Penda, king of the Mercians, in 665. Before the Norman Conquest, seven thanes held it from Edward the Confessor as seven manors, but William the Conqueror gave the entire area to Ilbert de Lacy, and at the time of the Domesday Survey, it was held by Ralph Paganel, who is believed to have built Leeds castle, possibly on the site of an earlier fortification. In 1207, Maurice Paganel made the residents of Leeds free burgesses, granting them the same rights that Robert de Lacy had given to Pontefract, including the ability to sell burgher land to anyone they chose except for religious institutions, and exemption from tolls. He also appointed a reeve as the main official of the town, who was to be chosen by the lord of the manor, with the burgesses being “more eligible if only they would pay as much as others for the office.” The town was incorporated by Charles I in 1626 under the title of an alderman, 7 principal burgesses, and 24 assistants. A second charter granted by Charles II in 1661 established a mayor, 12 aldermen, and 24 assistants, and is still the governing charter of the borough. The woolen industry is said to have been introduced to Leeds in the 14th century, and due to its location by the river Aire, it quickly became a significant industry. Camden, writing around 1590, states, “Leeds is made wealthy by its woolen manufacturing,” and the incorporation charter of 1626 notes that “the inhabitants have for a long time practiced the art of making cloth.” The cloth was then, as it is now, made in the nearby villages and only finished and sold in the town. A successful effort was made in the early 19th century by Mr. William Hirst to produce higher-quality goods that were made and finished in his own factory. Other manufacturers followed his lead, but their factories are now mainly used for the finishing process. The worsted trade, which was once significant, has now nearly vanished. The spinning of flax with machinery was introduced early in the 19th century by Mr. John Marshall, a Holbeck manufacturer, who was one of the first to use Sir Richard Arkwright’s water frame, originally created for cotton production, for spinning linen yarn. The burgesses were represented in parliament by one member during the Commonwealth, but not again until the Reform Act of 1832 allowed them to return two members. In 1867, they were granted an additional member.

See James Wardell, The Municipal History of the Borough of Leeds (1846); J. D. Whitaker, Loidis and Elmete: or an Attempt to illustrate the Districts described in these words by Bede (1816); D. H. Atkinson, Ralph Thoresby, the Topographer; his Town (Leeds) and Times (1885-1887).

See James Wardell, The Municipal History of the Borough of Leeds (1846); J. D. Whitaker, Loidis and Elmete: or an Attempt to illustrate the Districts described in these words by Bede (1816); D. H. Atkinson, Ralph Thoresby, the Topographer; his Town (Leeds) and Times (1885-1887).

LEEK, a market town in the Leek parliamentary division of Staffordshire, England, 157 m. N.W. from London, on the Churnet Valley branch of the North Staffordshire railway. Pop. of urban district (1901) 15,484. The town lies high in a picturesque situation near the head of the river Churnet. The church of St Edward the Confessor is mainly Decorated, and stands in a churchyard commanding a beautiful view from an elevation of some 640 ft. There is here a curious pillar of Danish work ornately carved. An institute contains a free library, lecture hall, art gallery and school of art. A grammar school was established in 1723. In the vicinity are ruins of the Cistercian abbey De la Croix, or Dieulacresse, erected in 1214 by Ralph de Blundevill, earl of Chester. The slight remains are principally embodied in a farm-house. The silk manufacture includes sewing silk, braids, silk buttons, &c. Cloud Hill, rising to 1190 ft. W. of the town, causes a curious phenomenon in the height of summer, the sun sinking behind one flank to reappear beyond the other, and thus appearing to set twice.

LEEK, is a market town located in the Leek parliamentary division of Staffordshire, England, 157 miles northwest of London, on the Churnet Valley branch of the North Staffordshire railway. The population of the urban district (1901) was 15,484. The town is situated at a high point in a picturesque area near the source of the River Churnet. The church of St. Edward the Confessor features a mainly Decorated style and stands in a churchyard that offers a beautiful view from an elevation of about 640 feet. There is a unique Danish-crafted pillar that is ornately carved. An institute here includes a free library, a lecture hall, an art gallery, and a school of art. A grammar school was established in 1723. Nearby are the ruins of the Cistercian abbey De la Croix, or Dieulacresse, which was built in 1214 by Ralph de Blundevill, Earl of Chester. The remaining structures are mainly part of a farm-house. The local silk industry produces sewing silk, braids, silk buttons, etc. Cloud Hill, which rises to 1190 feet west of the town, creates an interesting phenomenon in the height of summer, where the sun sets behind one side only to reappear on the other, giving the illusion of setting twice.

Leek (Lee, Leike, Leeke) formed part of the great estates of Ælfgar, earl of Mercia; it escheated to William the Conqueror who held it at the time of the Domesday Survey. Later it passed to the earls Palatine of Chester, remaining in their hands until Ralph de Blundevill, earl of Chester, gave it to the abbey of Dieulacresse, which continued to hold it until its dissolution. The same earl in a charter which he gave to the town (temp. John) calls it a borough and grants to his free burgesses various privileges, including freedom from toll throughout Cheshire. These privileges were confirmed by Richard, abbot of Dieulacresse, but the town received no royal charter and failed to establish its burghal position. The Wednesday market which is still held dates from a grant of John to the earl of Chester: in the 17th century it was very considerable. A fair, also granted by John, beginning on the third day before the Translation of Edward the Confessor is still held. The silk manufacture which can be traced to the latter part of the 17th century is thought to have been aided by the settlement in Leek of some Huguenots after the revocation of the Edict of Nantes. In the 17th and 18th centuries the town was famous for its ale. Prince Charles Edward passed through Leek on his march to Derby (1745) and again on his return journey to Scotland. A story in connexion with the Civil Wars is told to explain the expression “Now thus” occurring on the tombstone of a citizen, who by this meaningless answer to all questions sought escape on the plea of insanity.

Leek (Lee, Leike, Leeke) was part of the vast estates belonging to Ælfgar, the Earl of Mercia; it reverted to William the Conqueror, who held it during the Domesday Survey. Later, it was passed to the Earls Palatine of Chester, who kept it until Ralph de Blundevill, the Earl of Chester, gifted it to the Abbey of Dieulacresse, which held it until its dissolution. The same Earl, in a charter given to the town (during the time of John), referred to it as a borough and granted his free burgesses various privileges, including exemption from tolls throughout Cheshire. These privileges were confirmed by Richard, the Abbot of Dieulacresse, but the town never received a royal charter and failed to establish its borough status. The Wednesday market that still takes place dates back to a grant from John to the Earl of Chester; in the 17th century, it was very significant. A fair, also granted by John, starts on the third day before the Translation of Edward the Confessor and is still held today. The silk industry, which can be traced back to the late 17th century, is believed to have been boosted by the arrival of some Huguenots in Leek after the revocation of the Edict of Nantes. In the 17th and 18th centuries, the town was known for its ale. Prince Charles Edward passed through Leek during his march to Derby (1745) and again on his way back to Scotland. A story related to the Civil Wars explains the phrase “Now thus” found on a tombstone of a local who used this meaningless response to all questions as a way to feign insanity.

LEEK, the Allium Porrum of botanists, a plant now considered as a mere variety of Allium Ampeloprasum, wild leek, produced by cultivation. The plant is probably of Eastern origin, since it was commonly cultivated in Egypt in the time of the Pharaohs, and is so to the present day; while as regards its first appearance in England both Tusser and Gerard—two of the earliest writers on this class of subjects, the former of whom flourished in the early part and the latter in the later part of the 16th century—speak of it as being then commonly cultivated and used.1 The Romans, it would appear, made great use of the leek for savouring their dishes, as seems proved by the number of recipes for its use referred to by Celsius. Hence it is more than probable that it was brought to England by the Romans. Italy was celebrated for leeks in the time of Pliny (H.N. xix. c. 6), according to whom they were brought into great esteem through the emperor Nero, derisively surnamed “Porrophagus,” who used to eat them for several days in every month to clear his voice. The leek is very generally cultivated in Great Britain as an esculent, but more especially in Scotland and in Wales, being esteemed as an excellent and wholesome vegetable, with properties very similar to those of the onion, but of a milder character. In America it is not much cultivated except by market gardeners in the neighbourhood of large cities. The whole plant, with the exception of the fibrous roots, is used in soups and stews. The sheathing stalks of the leaves lap over each other, and form a thickish stem-like base, which is blanched, and is the part chiefly preferred. These blanched stems are much employed in French cookery. They form an important ingredient in Scotch winter broth, and particularly in the national dish cock-a-leekie, and are also largely used boiled, and served with toasted bread and white sauce, as in the case of asparagus. Leeks are sown in the spring, earlier or later according to the soil and the season, and are planted out for the summer, being dropped into holes made with a stout dibble and left unfilled in order to allow the stems space to swell. When they are thus planted deeply the holes gradually fill up, and the base of the stem becomes blanched and prepared for use, a process aided by drawing up the earth round about the stems as they elongate. The leek is one of the most useful vegetables the cottager can grow, as it will supply him with a large amount of produce during the winter and spring. It is extremely hardy, and presents no difficulty in its cultivation, the chief point, as with all succulent esculents, being that it should be grown quickly upon well-enriched soil. The plant is of biennial duration, flowering the second year, and perishing after perfecting its seeds. The leek is the national symbol or badge of the Welsh, who wear it in their hats on St David’s Day. The origin of this custom has received various explanations, all of which are more or less speculative.

LEEK the Allium Porrum of botanists, is a plant now seen as just a variety of Allium Ampeloprasum, wild leek, that’s grown through cultivation. This plant likely comes from the East, as it was widely cultivated in Egypt during the time of the Pharaohs and continues to be used today. Regarding its introduction to England, both Tusser and Gerard—among the earliest authors on this topic, the former active in the early part and the latter in the later part of the 16th century—note that it was commonly cultivated and utilized at that time.1 The Romans apparently made extensive use of leeks for flavoring their dishes, as indicated by the numerous recipes mentioned by Celsius. Therefore, it’s very likely that it was brought to England by the Romans. Italy was known for its leeks during Pliny's time (H.N. xix. c. 6), as he noted that they gained great popularity through Emperor Nero, humorously nicknamed “Porrophagus” for eating them several days each month to clear his voice. Leeks are widely cultivated in Great Britain as food, especially in Scotland and Wales, where they are regarded as a delicious and healthy vegetable, possessing similar qualities to onions but with a milder flavor. In America, they aren't widely grown aside from market gardeners near large cities. The entire plant, except for the fibrous roots, is used in soups and stews. The overlapping sheathing leaves create a thick stem-like base, which is blanched and is the most sought-after part. These blanched stems are commonly used in French cooking. They are a key ingredient in Scotch winter broth and especially in the traditional dish cock-a-leekie, and are also often boiled and served with toasted bread and white sauce, similar to asparagus. Leeks are sown in spring, either early or late depending on the soil and season, and are planted out for the summer by placing them in holes made with a sturdy dibble, leaving the holes unfilled to let the stems expand. When planted this deeply, the holes will gradually fill in, and the stem base becomes blanched and ready for use, a process that is helped by mounding soil around the stems as they grow. The leek is one of the most valuable vegetables a home gardener can grow, as it provides a significant yield during winter and spring. It is very hardy and easy to cultivate, with the main focus, as with all juicy vegetables, being to grow it quickly in well-fertilized soil. The plant lasts for two years, flowering the second year and dying after producing its seeds. The leek is a national symbol of Wales, worn in hats on St David’s Day. Various explanations exist for the origin of this tradition, all of which are somewhat speculative.


1 Tusser, in his verse for the month of March, writes:—

1 Tusser, in his poem for the month of March, says:—

“Now leckes are in season, for pottage ful good,

“Now leeks are in season, perfect for good soup,

And spareth the milck cow, and purgeth the blood,

And spare the milk cow, and cleanse the blood,

These hauving with peason, for pottage in Lent,

These are having peas for soup during Lent,

Thou spareth both otemel and bread to be spent.”

You save both oatmeal and bread to be used.

LEER, a town and river port in the Prussian province of Hanover, lying in a fertile plain on the right bank of the Leda near its confluence with the Ems, and at the junction of railways to Bremen, Emden and Münster. Pop. (1905) 12,347. The streets are broad, well paved, and adorned with many elegant buildings, among which are Roman Catholic, Lutheran and Calvinist churches, and a new town hall with a tower 165 ft. high. Among its educational establishments are a classical school and a school of navigation. Linen and woollen fabrics, hosiery, paper, cigars, soap, vinegar and earthenware are manufactured, and there are iron-foundries, distilleries, tanneries and shipbuilding yards. Many markets for horses and cattle are held. The transit trade from the regions traversed by the Westphalian and Oldenburg railways is considerable. The principal exports are cattle, horses, cheese, butter, honey, wax, flour, paper, hardware and Westphalian coal. Leer is one of the principal ports for steamboat communication with the North Sea watering-places of Borkum and Norderney. Leer is a very old place, although it only obtained municipal privileges in 1823. Near the town is the Plitenberg, formerly a heathen place of sacrifice.

LEER, is a town and river port in the Prussian province of Hanover, situated in a fertile plain on the right bank of the Leda near where it meets the Ems, and at the intersection of railways to Bremen, Emden, and Münster. Population (1905) was 12,347. The streets are wide, well-paved, and decorated with many elegant buildings, including Roman Catholic, Lutheran, and Calvinist churches, along with a new town hall featuring a tower that stands 165 ft. tall. Educational institutions here include a classical school and a school of navigation. The town produces linen and woolen fabrics, hosiery, paper, cigars, soap, vinegar, and earthenware, and it has iron foundries, distilleries, tanneries, and shipbuilding yards. Numerous markets for horses and cattle take place. The transit trade from the regions served by the Westphalian and Oldenburg railways is significant. The main exports consist of cattle, horses, cheese, butter, honey, wax, flour, paper, hardware, and Westphalian coal. Leer is a major port for steamboat routes to the North Sea resorts of Borkum and Norderney. While Leer is an ancient location, it only gained municipal rights in 1823. Close to the town is Plitenberg, which was once a pagan sacrificial site.

LEEUWARDEN, the capital of the province of Friesland, Holland, on the canal between Harlingen and Groningen, 33 m. by rail W. of Groningen. Pop (1901) 32,203. It is one of the most prosperous towns in the country. To the name of the Frisian Hague, it is entitled as well by similarity of history as by similarity of appearance. As the Hague grew up round the court of the counts of Holland, so Leeuwarden round the 371 court of the Frisian stadtholders; and, like the Hague, it is an exceptionally clean and attractive town, with parks, pleasure grounds, and drives. The old gates have been somewhat ruthlessly cleared away, and the site of the town walls on the north and west competes with the park called the Prince’s Garden as a public pleasure ground. The Prince’s Garden was originally laid out by William Frederick of Nassau in 1648, and was presented to the town by King William I. in 1819. The royal palace, which was the seat of the Frisian court from 1603 to 1747, is now the residence of the royal commissioner for Friesland. It was restored in 1816 and contains a portrait gallery of the Frisian stadtholders. The fine mansion called the Kanselary was begun in 1502 as a residence for the chancellor of George of Saxony (1539), governor of Friesland, but was only completed in 1571 and served as a court house until 1811. It was restored at the end of the 19th century to contain the important provincial library and national archives. Other noteworthy buildings are the picturesque weigh-house (1595), the town hall (1715), the provincial courts (1850), and the great church of St Jacob, once the church of the Jacobins, and the largest monastic church in the Netherlands. The splendid tombs of the Frisian stadtholders buried here (Louis of Nassau, Anne of Orange, and others) were destroyed in the revolution 1795. The unfinished tower of Oldehove dates from 1529-1532. The museum of the Frisian Society is of modern foundation and contains a collection of provincial antiquities, including two rooms from Hindeloopen, an ancient village of Friesland, some 16th- and 17th-century portraits, some Frisian works in silver of the 17th and 18th centuries, and a collection of porcelain and faience.

LEEUWARDEN, is the capital of Friesland, Holland, located on the canal between Harlingen and Groningen, 33 miles west of Groningen by rail. The population in 1901 was 32,203. It is one of the most successful towns in the country. It’s often called the Frisian Hague due to its similar history and appearance. Just like The Hague developed around the court of the counts of Holland, Leeuwarden grew around the 371 court of the Frisian stadtholders; similarly, it’s a notably clean and charming town with parks, recreational areas, and scenic drives. The old gates have been somewhat carelessly removed, and the area where the town walls once stood to the north and west now rivals the park called the Prince’s Garden as a public space. The Prince’s Garden was originally designed by William Frederick of Nassau in 1648 and was gifted to the town by King William I in 1819. The royal palace, which served as the Frisian court from 1603 to 1747, now houses the royal commissioner for Friesland. It was renovated in 1816 and features a portrait gallery of the Frisian stadtholders. The impressive building known as the Kanselary was started in 1502 as a home for the chancellor of George of Saxony (1539), governor of Friesland, but wasn’t finished until 1571 and functioned as a courthouse until 1811. It was restored at the end of the 19th century to house the important provincial library and national archives. Other significant buildings include the charming weigh-house (1595), the town hall (1715), the provincial courts (1850), and the great church of St. Jacob, once used by the Jacobins and the largest monastic church in the Netherlands. The magnificent tombs of the Frisian stadtholders buried here (Louis of Nassau, Anne of Orange, and others) were destroyed during the revolution of 1795. The unfinished tower of Oldehove dates back to 1529-1532. The museum of the Frisian Society, which is more modern, showcases a collection of provincial artifacts, including two rooms from Hindeloopen, an ancient village in Friesland, 16th- and 17th-century portraits, some Frisian silver works from the 17th and 18th centuries, and a collection of porcelain and faience.

Leeuwarden is the centre of a flourishing trade, being easily accessible from all parts of the province by road, rail and canal. The chief business is in stock of every kind, dairy and agricultural produce and fresh-water fish, a large quantity of which is exported to France. The industries include boat-building and timber yards, iron-foundries, copper and lead works, furniture, organ, tobacco and other factories, and the manufacture of gold and silver wares. The town is first mentioned in documents of the 13th century.

Leeuwarden is the hub of a thriving trade, easily reachable from all areas of the province by road, rail, and canal. The main businesses involve all kinds of stock, dairy products, agricultural goods, and freshwater fish, a significant amount of which is exported to France. Industries here include boat-building and timber yards, iron foundries, copper and lead factories, furniture-making, organ and tobacco production, and the manufacturing of gold and silver items. The town is first referenced in documents from the 13th century.

LEEUWENHOEK, or Leuwenhoek, ANTHONY VAN (1632-1723), Dutch microscopist, was born at Delft on the 24th of October 1632. For a short time he was in a merchant’s office in Amsterdam, but early devoted himself to the manufacture of microscopes and to the study of the minute structure of organized bodies by their aid. He appears soon to have found that single lenses of very short focus were preferable to the compound microscopes then in use; and it is clear from the discoveries he made with these that they must have been of very excellent quality. His discoveries were for the most part made public in the Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society, to the notice of which body he was introduced by R. de Graaf in 1673, and of which he was elected a fellow in 1680. He was chosen a corresponding member of the Paris Academy of Sciences in 1697. He died at his native place on the 26th of August 1723. Though his researches were not conducted on any definite scientific plan, his powers of careful observation enabled him to make many interesting discoveries in the minute anatomy of man, the higher animals and insects. He confirmed and extended M. Malpighi’s demonstration of the blood capillaries in 1668, and six years later he gave the first accurate description of the red blood corpuscles, which he found to be circular in man but oval in frogs and fishes. In 1677 he described and illustrated the spermatozoa in dogs and other animals, though in this discovery Stephen Hamm had anticipated him by a few months; and he investigated the structure of the teeth, crystalline lens, muscle, &c. In 1680 he noticed that yeast consists of minute globular particles, and he described the different structure of the stem in monocotyledonous and dicotyledonous plants.

LEEUWENHOEK, or Leuvenhoek, ANTHONY VANN (1632-1723), Dutch microscopist, was born in Delft on October 24, 1632. He briefly worked in a merchant’s office in Amsterdam but soon dedicated himself to making microscopes and studying the tiny structures of living organisms using them. He quickly discovered that single-lens microscopes with a very short focus were better than the compound microscopes of his time, and his findings indicate that his lenses were of exceptional quality. Most of his discoveries were published in the Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society, which he was introduced to by R. de Graaf in 1673, and he became a fellow in 1680. In 1697, he was selected as a corresponding member of the Paris Academy of Sciences. He died in his hometown on August 26, 1723. Although his research wasn’t organized according to any specific scientific framework, his keen observational skills allowed him to make many fascinating discoveries in the detailed anatomy of humans, higher animals, and insects. He confirmed and expanded on M. Malpighi’s findings on blood capillaries in 1668, and six years later, he provided the first accurate description of red blood cells, which he noted were circular in humans but oval in frogs and fish. In 1677, he described and illustrated sperm cells in dogs and other animals, although Stephen Hamm had discovered them a few months prior. He also studied the structure of teeth, the crystalline lens, muscles, etc. In 1680, he observed that yeast is made up of tiny globular particles and described the differing structures of stems in monocot and dicot plants.

His researches in the life-history of various of the lower forms of animal life were in opposition to the doctrine that they could be “produced spontaneously, or bred from corruption.” Thus he showed that the weevils of granaries, in his time commonly supposed to be bred from wheat, as well as in it, are grubs hatched from eggs deposited by winged insects. His chapter on the flea, in which he not only describes its structure, but traces out the whole history of its metamorphoses from its first emergence from the egg, is full of interest—not so much for the exactness of his observations, as for its incidental revelation of the extraordinary ignorance then prevalent in regard to the origin and propagation of “this minute and despised creature,” which some asserted to be produced from sand, others from dust, others from the dung of pigeons, and others from urine, but which he showed to be “endowed with as great perfection in its kind as any large animal,” and proved to breed in the regular way of winged insects. He even noted the fact that the pupa of the flea is sometimes attacked and fed upon by a mite—an observation which suggested the well known lines of Swift. His attention having been drawn to the blighting of the young shoots of fruit-trees, which was commonly attributed to the ants found upon them, he was the first to find the Aphides that really do the mischief; and, upon searching into the history of their generation, he observed the young within the bodies of their parents. He carefully studied also the history of the ant and was the first to show that what had been commonly reputed to be “ants’ eggs” are really their pupae, containing the perfect insect nearly ready for emersion, whilst the true eggs are far smaller, and give origin to “maggots” or larvae. Of the sea-mussel, again, and other shell-fish, he argued (in reply to a then recent defence of Aristotle’s doctrine by F. Buonanni, a learned Jesuit of Rome) that they are not generated out of the mud or sand found on the seashore or the beds of rivers at low water, but from spawn, by the regular course of generation; and he maintained the same to be true of the fresh-water mussel (Unio), whose ova he examined so carefully that he saw in them the rotation of the embryo, a phenomenon supposed to have been first discovered long afterwards. In the same spirit he investigated the generation of eels, which were at that time supposed, not only by the ignorant vulgar, but by “respectable and learned men,” to be produced from dew without the ordinary process of generation. Not only was he the first discoverer of the rotifers, but he showed “how wonderfully nature has provided for the preservation of their species,” by their tolerance of the drying-up of the water they inhabit, and the resistance afforded to the evaporation of the fluids of their bodies by the impermeability of the casing in which they then become enclosed. “We can now easily conceive,” he says, “that in all rain-water which is collected from gutters in cisterns, and in all waters exposed to the air, animalcules may be found; for they may be carried thither by the particles of dust blown about by the winds.”

His research into the life cycle of various lower forms of animal life challenged the belief that they could be "spontaneously generated or born from decay." He demonstrated that the weevils found in granaries, which were commonly thought to originate from wheat, actually come from eggs laid by winged insects. His chapter on fleas not only describes their structure but also details the entire process of their transformation from the moment they hatch from eggs, making it fascinating—not primarily for the precision of his observations but for its revealing insight into the widespread ignorance at the time regarding the origin and reproduction of "this tiny and despised creature." Some people claimed it came from sand, others from dust, pigeon droppings, or urine. He explained that fleas are "as perfectly made in their kind as any large animal" and showed that they reproduce like winged insects. He even noted that flea pupae are sometimes attacked and fed on by mites—an observation that led to the well-known lines of Swift. When he noticed the damage to young fruit trees, which people often blamed on the ants crawling on them, he was the first to identify the real culprits: aphids. Upon studying their reproduction, he found the young developing within their parents. He also delved into the life of ants, being the first to clarify that what was commonly thought to be "ants' eggs" are actually their pupae, which contain nearly fully formed insects, while true eggs are much smaller and develop into "maggots" or larvae. Regarding the sea mussel and other shellfish, he argued (in response to a recent defense of Aristotle’s views by F. Buonanni, a learned Jesuit from Rome) that these creatures do not arise from mud or sand found on the shore or riverbeds at low tide but from spawn, through the usual reproductive process. He affirmed the same for the freshwater mussel (Unio), observing its eggs so meticulously that he saw the embryo rotating, a phenomenon believed to have been discovered much later. In the same investigative spirit, he examined how eels were thought—by both the uneducated and "respected and learned men"—to come from dew without normal reproduction. Not only was he the first to discover rotifers, but he also highlighted "how wonderfully nature has ensured the survival of their species" by their ability to endure the drying out of their aquatic habitat and the protection against the evaporation of their bodily fluids provided by the impenetrable casing they form when enclosing themselves. "We can now easily imagine," he states, "that animalcules may be found in all rainwater collected from gutters in cisterns, and in all waters exposed to the air, as they can be carried there by dust particles blown about by the wind."

Leeuwenhoek’s contributions to the Philosophical Transactions amounted to one hundred and twelve; he also published twenty-six papers in the Memoirs of the Paris Academy of Sciences. Two collections of his works appeared during his life, one in Dutch (Leiden and Delft, 1685-1718), and the other in Latin (Opera omnia s. Arcana naturae ope exactissimorum microscopiorum selecta, Leiden, 1715-1722); and a selection from them was translated by S. Hoole and published in English (London, 1781-1798).

Leeuwenhoek's contributions to the Philosophical Transactions totaled one hundred and twelve; he also published twenty-six papers in the Memoirs of the Paris Academy of Sciences. Two collections of his works were published during his lifetime, one in Dutch (Leiden and Delft, 1685-1718) and the other in Latin (Opera omnia s. Arcana naturae ope exactissimorum microscopiorum selecta, Leiden, 1715-1722); a selection from these was translated by S. Hoole and published in English (London, 1781-1798).

LEEWARD ISLANDS, a group in the West Indies. They derive their name from being less exposed to the prevailing N.E. trade wind than the adjacent Windward Islands. They are the most northerly of the Lesser Antilles, and form a curved chain stretching S.W. from Puerto Rico to meet St Lucia, the most northerly of the Windward Islands. They consist of the Virgin Islands, with St Kitts, Antigua, Montserrat, Guadeloupe, Dominica, Martinique and their various dependencies. The Virgin Islands are owned by Great Britain and Denmark, Holland having St Eustatius, with Saba, and part of St Martin. France possesses Guadeloupe, Martinique, St Bartholomew and the remainder of St Martin. The rest of the islands are British, and (with the exception of Sombrero, a small island used only as a lighthouse-station) form, under one governor, a colony divided into five presidencies, namely: Antigua (with Barbuda and Redonda), St Kitts (with Nevis and Anguilla), Dominica, Montserrat and the Virgin Islands. Total pop. (1901) 127,536. There is one federal executive council nominated by the crown, and one federal legislative council—ten nominated and ten elected members. Of the latter, four are chosen by the unofficial members of the local legislative council of Antigua, two by those of Dominica, and four by the non-official members of the local legislative council of St Kitts-Nevis. The federal legislative council meets once annually, usually at St John, Antigua.

LEEWARD ISLANDS, is a group in the West Indies. They get their name because they are less exposed to the prevailing northeast trade winds compared to the nearby Windward Islands. They are the northernmost of the Lesser Antilles and form a curved chain stretching southwest from Puerto Rico to St. Lucia, the northernmost of the Windward Islands. The group includes the Virgin Islands, along with St. Kitts, Antigua, Montserrat, Guadeloupe, Dominica, Martinique, and their various dependencies. The Virgin Islands are owned by Great Britain and Denmark, while the Netherlands has St. Eustatius, with Saba and part of St. Martin. France owns Guadeloupe, Martinique, St. Bartholomew, and the rest of St. Martin. The remaining islands are British, and except for Sombrero, which is a small island used only as a lighthouse station, they form a colony under one governor divided into five presidencies: Antigua (including Barbuda and Redonda), St. Kitts (including Nevis and Anguilla), Dominica, Montserrat, and the Virgin Islands. The total population in 1901 was 127,536. There is one federal executive council nominated by the crown and one federal legislative council consisting of ten nominated and ten elected members. Of the elected members, four are chosen by the unofficial members of the local legislative council of Antigua, two by those of Dominica, and four by the non-official members of the local legislative council of St. Kitts-Nevis. The federal legislative council meets annually, usually in St. John, Antigua.

LE FANU, JOSEPH SHERIDAN (1814-1873), Irish journalist and author, was born of an old Huguenot family at Dublin on the 28th of August 1814. He entered Trinity College, Dublin, in 1833. At an early age he had given proof of literary talent, and in 1837 he joined the staff of the Dublin University Magazine, of which he became later editor and proprietor. In 1837 he produced the Irish ballad Phaudhrig Croohore, which was 372 shortly afterwards followed by a second, Shamus O’Brien, successfully recited in the United States by Samuel Lover. In 1839 he became proprietor of the Warder, a Dublin newspaper, and, after purchasing the Evening Packet and a large interest in the Dublin Evening Mail, he combined the three papers under the title the Evening Mail, a weekly reprint from which was issued as the Warder. After the death of his wife in 1858 he lived in retirement, and his best work was produced at this period of his life. He wrote some clever novels, of a sensational order, in which his vigorous imagination and his Irish love of the supernatural have full play. He died in Dublin on the 7th of February 1873. His best-known novels are The House by the Churchyard (1863) and Uncle Silas, a Tale of Bartram Haugh (1864). The Purcell Papers, Irish stories dating from his college days, were edited with a memoir of the author by A. P. Graves in 1880.

LE FANU, JOSEPH SHERIDAN (1814-1873), Irish journalist and author, was born into an old Huguenot family in Dublin on August 28, 1814. He began attending Trinity College, Dublin, in 1833. From a young age, he showed literary talent, and in 1837 he joined the staff of the Dublin University Magazine, where he later became the editor and owner. In 1837, he wrote the Irish ballad Phaudhrig Croohore, which was soon followed by another ballad, Shamus O’Brien, successfully performed in the United States by Samuel Lover. In 1839, he became the owner of the Warder, a Dublin newspaper, and after buying the Evening Packet and a significant stake in the Dublin Evening Mail, he combined the three publications under the name Evening Mail, from which a weekly reprint was issued as the Warder. After his wife passed away in 1858, he lived in seclusion, producing his best work during this time. He wrote several clever novels of a sensational nature, showcasing his vivid imagination and his Irish affinity for the supernatural. He died in Dublin on February 7, 1873. His most famous novels include The House by the Churchyard (1863) and Uncle Silas, a Tale of Bartram Haugh (1864). The Purcell Papers, a collection of Irish stories from his college days, were edited with a memoir of the author by A. P. Graves in 1880.

LEFEBVRE, PIERRE FRANÇOIS JOSEPH, duke of Danzig (1755-1820), marshal of France, was born at Rouffach in Alsace on the 20th of October 1755. At the outbreak of the Revolution he was a sergeant in the Gardes françaises, and with many of his comrades of this regiment took the popular side. He distinguished himself by bravery and humanity in many of the street fights in Paris, and becoming an officer and again distinguishing himself—this time against foreign invaders—he was made a general of division in 1794. He took part in the Revolutionary Wars from Fleurus to Stokach, always resolute, strictly obedient and calm. At Stokach (1799) he received a severe wound and had to return to France, where he assisted Napoleon during the coup d’état of 18 Brumaire. He was one of the first generals of division to be made marshal at the beginning of the First Empire. He commanded the guard infantry at Jena, conducted the siege of Danzig 1806-1807 (from which town he received his title in 1808), commanded a corps in the emperor’s campaign of 1808-1809 in Spain, and in 1809 was given the difficult task of commanding the Bavarian contingent, which he led in the containing engagements of Abensberg and Rohr and at the battle of Eckmühl. He commanded the Imperial Guard in Russia, 1812, fought through the last campaign of the Empire, and won fresh glory at Montmirail, Areis-sur-Aube and Champaubert. He was made a peer of France by Louis XVIII. but joined Napoleon during the Hundred Days, and was only amnestied and permitted to resume his seat in the upper chamber in 1819. He died at Paris on the 14th of September 1820. Marshal Lefebvre was a simple soldier, whose qualifications for high rank, great as they were, came from experience and not from native genius. He was incapable of exercising a supreme command, even of leading an important detachment, but he was absolutely trustworthy as a subordinate, as brave as he was experienced, and intensely loyal to his chief. He maintained to the end of his life a rustic simplicity of speech and demeanour. Of his wife (formerly a blanchisseuse to the Gardes Françaises) many stories have been told, but in so far as they are to her discredit they seem to be false, she being, like the marshal, a plain “child of the people.”

LEFEBVRE, PIERRE FRANÇOIS JOSEPH, duke of Danzig (1755-1820), marshal of France, was born in Rouffach, Alsace on October 20, 1755. When the Revolution started, he was a sergeant in the Gardes françaises, and along with many of his fellow soldiers, he supported the revolution. He made a name for himself through his bravery and compassion during various street battles in Paris, and after becoming an officer and proving himself again—this time against foreign enemies—he was promoted to general of division in 1794. He participated in the Revolutionary Wars from Fleurus to Stokach, always showing determination, strict obedience, and composure. At Stokach (1799), he sustained a serious injury and had to return to France, where he assisted Napoleon during the coup d'état of 18 Brumaire. He was one of the first generals of division to be made marshal at the start of the First Empire. He led the guard infantry at Jena, managed the siege of Danzig from 1806-1807 (the town from which he received his title in 1808), commanded a corps during the emperor’s campaign in Spain from 1808-1809, and in 1809 was given the challenging task of leading the Bavarian contingent, which he directed in the engagements at Abensberg and Rohr, as well as at the battle of Eckmühl. He commanded the Imperial Guard in Russia in 1812, fought during the last campaign of the Empire, and earned further glory at Montmirail, Areis-sur-Aube, and Champaubert. He was made a peer of France by Louis XVIII, but rejoined Napoleon during the Hundred Days, and was only granted amnesty and allowed to re-enter the upper chamber in 1819. He passed away in Paris on September 14, 1820. Marshal Lefebvre was a straightforward soldier whose qualifications for high rank—though considerable—stemmed from experience rather than natural talent. He was not suited for supreme command or to lead significant detachments, but he was completely reliable as a subordinate, as brave as he was experienced, and deeply loyal to his leader. He maintained a rustic simplicity in his speech and behavior throughout his life. Many stories have been told about his wife (who was formerly a washerwoman for the Gardes Françaises), but those that reflect poorly on her seem to be untrue, as she, like the marshal, was an ordinary “child of the people.”


Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!